ere,
fat
ee
;
(arGe
wes
Ae pet a og eS
Eben
i |
ages
oe
>
Ws
ys
ry.
. at
‘eat
Ves as
weta tate
ae
Pine
Ld ae
Cee, wi ic 4
vite
Roswell P. Flower Library
THIS BOOK IS THE GIFT OF
&/
CORNELL UNIVERSITY \“%, roe
ty
THE ELL
. fPlexre. Augustine. Fish, 0S¢.,0V.M..
id [eeeemeel Prohe been | oh. Phapaiolony, me en
L pacsleaMieeeanenee So senstonsd....of of. the. Fe ttltig en
WY. State Vetaninany. Coble ge nnn]
: = SE Rest
eres
af PT
Cornell University
The original of this book is in
the Cornell University Library.
There are no known copyright restrictions in
the United States on the use of the text.
http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924000936496
FRONTISPIECE.
HEAD OF A TYPICAL ROOKERY BULL.
Drawn from nature hy Bristow Adams,
ELE
FUR SEALS AND FUR-SEAL ISLANDS
OF THE
NORTH PACIFIC OCEAN.
BY
DAVID STARR JORDAN,
President of Leland Stanford Jr. University,
COMMISSIONER IN CHARGE OF FUR-SEAL INVESTIGATIONS OF 1896-97.
WITH THE FOLLOWING OFFICIAL ASSOCIATES:
LEONHARD STEJNEGER and FREDERIC A. LUCAS,
Of the U. S. National Museum.
JEFFERSON F. MOSER,
Lieutenant-Commander, U.S. N.,
In Command of the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer Albatross.
CHARLES H. TOWNSEND,
Of the U. S. Fish Commission.
GEORGE A. CLARK,
Secretary and Stenographer.
JOSEPH MURRAY,
Special Agent.
WITH SPECIAL PAPERS BY OTHER CONTRIBUTORS.
PART 3.
WASHINGTON:
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE.
1899.
Y
Neson
CONTRIBUTORS OF PAPERS ON SPECIAL SUBJECTS.
WILLIAM H. ASHMEAD,
NATHAN BANKS,
oO. FULLER COOK,
DANIEL W. COQUILLET,
WILLIAM H. DALL,
WILLIAM R. DUDLEY,
HARRISON G. DYAR,
ELMER EF. FARMER,
PIERRE A. FISH,
CHARLES H. GILBERT,
ALBERT HASSALL,
MARTIN LINNELL,
JAMES M. MACOUN,
SH
26/
WS8
VY, 3
JENNIE C. MILLER,
WALTER MILLER,
WILLIAM PALMER,
MARY J. RATHBUN,
WILLIAM E. RITTER,
JOSEPH N. ROSE,
EUGENE A. SCHWARZ,
Ww. A. SETCHELL,
ROBERT E. SNODGRASS,
WILLIAM A. SNOW,
CHARLES W. STILES,
WILBUR W. THOBURN,
FREDERICK Ww. TRUE.
PART III.
SPECIAL PAPERS
RELATING TO
THE FUR SEAL AND TO THE NATURAL HISTORY
OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
STANFORD UNIVERSITY,
California, August 30, 1898.
The present volume consists of a series of papers by different authors relating
to the natural history and resources of the fur seal islands in Bering Sea. It has
been compiled under the editorial supervision of Mr. Frederic A. Lucas.
DAVID STARR JORDAN,
Commissioner in Charge of Fur Seal Investigations.
Hon. Lyman J. GAGE,
Secretary of the Treasury, Washington, D. C.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
The groups of pinnipeds ..-.....--. 22.22.2222. oe cece cee cee cece e ceee cece eee
The species of the genus Callorhinus .-....--..--.. 0.200. .02202 cee cee cee e ccccee
Variations in size and color of the Pribilof fur seal ...................--.---.-.
II.—THE ANATOMY OF THE PRIBILOF FUR SEAL........0. 2022-22000 cece ceeeee ceceeeceeeee
DORON! 5.6 oot Jo eels eicceek alow Macie wteleM er eee cle cae sae ubudeie ene ancitacaaasec
Muscles, blood vessels, and viscera... ... 222.2222 ..0020 cece ee cece cece eee eee cecece
BDBUNL 5 cyaisimnaaistaicis cela win ie accra tee yal ake colar edie a saa Smads So ne Socks aeanieneamauadeck ouse
TII.—BREEDING HABITS OF THE PRIBILOF FUR SEAL ....-.......-------2 sence --- ---- eee
IV.—FoopD OF THE NORTHERN FUR SEALS ...... 200-0220 2e cece eee eee cece eee ee eee cee cee
V.—MENTAL TRAITS OF THE PRIBILOF FUR SEAL....22 2.2022 e cece cece cee cece ce ecce eee cee
VI.—CAUSES OF MORTALITY AMONG THE PRIBILOF FUR SEALS ......--...-.-2.--2----- eee
VU.—INTERNAL PARASITES OF THE PRIBILOF FUR SEAL....--2..2-0-2-0¢000- -cee eee cece cee
VIII.—EaRLY HISTORY OF THE NORTHERN FUR SEALS.... 0.222. 0-2 cee econ eceece cece cece
Steller’s:G6i: DEGAS 68 a. see pee wieseese sacks wecatdanics a2<dyocceesawebiwamnacacccc cee
The manatee: (Rytina)) «eee yncesaes an estaccis ee tdeedecweeccenles mee nemed ewow cece
Dh6 668 WaT se:5 son ties ds astalcedacd drag eanden Saws sed Bu reise, ciciseacn nace seins
"THO BOA: IO Misscc. oe Soo seh e stoma clea wane aera Staines ix oa tivte See Sele eisawd nce Loneaae ome
PAG S60 OfLER so cou weak cise aie Hoce codahaen cass ab se se eeemeinee Sek emcee nencatccmace
Veniaminof’s account of the sea bear ._... 22.02. ee ee eee ce ee cee vee eee
TX!.—PRLAGIC ABADING anise, soce sie ieee bee aveieactlgeuiees wae seelewtineia cee Gane none cenewe
Vessels, boats, and methods. ........--.- 20-22 202 cee cee cee eee eee eee ences
Vessels lOSt2s2cccasiscine seam ee tiie Se vederqeu's sebaadepadbatenseccsicckesciec ncmcee
Hunting grounds: .. 22. see cc eceeegewe sees seccen tee eeReeeE ss Roce hse sesame ede
Inspection of seal skins—excess of females.......-.- 2-22.22. 00220202 eeee eee cee eee
Weather conditions on the sealing PTOUN DS oie oso secre eaaseme mds tsdecie ew xaos
Wastefulness of indiscriminate sealing....-.-... 22-22. .-0-2- cee eee eee eee eee ee
Log records of sealing vessels -....... 2202.2... 0000 2200 eee eee eee eee eee ees
The fur seals of Guadalupe, the Galapagos and Lobos Islands .................--..
X.—EXPEDITION TO GUADALUPE... 2.0022 0200 cc 00 cece cece ee cece cece cee ceeeeeeceeeecc cues
XI.—OBSERVATIONS DURING A CRUISE OF THE Dora SIRFWARD IN 1895.........2.-.-2-..-
XII.—FUR SEAL HUNTING IN THE SOUTHERN HEMISPHERE .........-..-.---220 2-2-2220 eee
XIII.—THE ROOKERY MAPS 0 ~~8,PRIBILOV ISLANDS........---. 22-02 cee eee eee eee ee ee ee
XIV.—PRACTICAL FXPERIMENTS IN BRANDING AND HERDING FUR SEALS........-....-------
Electrical experiments in branding ..-.... 2.20.2 02220 cence eee eee eee eens
Experiments in branding and herding in 1897...... 222222. 2 22-2 cece ee cee eee eee eee
Branding on St. George....-.. 2-2-2 1seee acemens neeccsdiee ee stems sweeevecaeeweecae
XV.—THE BLUE FOX OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS...--.. 2-2-0. .- 0 eee cece cee eens cece cee eee
XVI.—MAMMALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS....-..---2- 022020 seen ee eee ee ene cece eens
VIII TABLE OF CONTENTS.
XVII.—THE AVIFAUNA OF THE PRIBILOF IsLANDS—
Check list of the species. ......-- ------ 22. - 22 ec eee cee nee cee cee cow eee cee Reon
The topography of the islands ornithologically considered ......_..........-..-.--
Species added to the North American fauna from the group..........-......-.2.---
Geographical distribution of Pribilof birds .........--0.--202. 220 ce eee cece eens
Migration of the Pribilof birds ..........--.- 22. ee eee eee eee eee ee eee eens
Annotated list of species -... 22... 222. 22 ee ne ee cee cee cee eee eee eee nee
-XVIII.—THE FISHES OF BERING SEA ..22-2. 02-22 cece eee cece ee eee eee ee ene cee eee teens
List of tishes obtained in.the waters of Arctic Alaska -....-..-.--.---------- +--+
XIX.—A CONTRIBUTION TO THE KNOWLEDGE OF THE TUNICATES OF THE PRIBILOY ISLANDS.
XX.—TuHE MOLLUSK FAUNA OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS .... 2-22-0020 ee eee eee eee e ee eee
PO PAtIC Hye: 222 nin anedeed she eehnds aoeas hae caoecasd Sekedeueme heme tas Memmenwersshns
Wie ens: 2 2s 22st cect aay ene anata d So Sede ence Gece seme Lumrsne ems eabice bone’
Geographical distribution of phenogams and vascular cryptogams ....-.....-------
ANIEBOUI TIES 5.258 cio yaar aie osha a eaten one emiacmin se euae See Rear soared ein Sac ceeuee
XXIV.—ALG OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS ...-. 22.2222 c2 eee cee ee cece cee cen cone eee eee cee
LIST OF PLATES ANT) MAPS.
Frontispiece. Head of a typical rookery bull.
Drawn from nature by Bristow Adams.
I.—Progressive stages in the dentition of the young and female fur seal.
Drawn by Dr. J. C. McConnell.
II.—Progressive stages in the dentition of the male fur seal.
Drawn by Dr. J. C. McConnell.
IlI.—Liver of young fur seal.
Drawn by Chloe Leslie Starks.
IV.—Uterus of fur seal.
Drawn by R. E. Snodgrass.
V.—Brain of fur seal.
From photographs by Pierre A. Fish.
VI.—Brain of hair seal, Phoca vitulina.
From photographs and drawings by Pierre A. Fish.
VII.—Brains of seals and bears.
From photographs by Pierre A. Fish.
VIII.—Cranial capacity of the fur seal, young, female and adult male.
From photographs of casts of the cranial cavities.
IX.—A typical harem on Gorbatch Rookery, known as harem 25.
From a photograph by H. D. Chichester. This photograph was taken to show that
the painting of numbers on the rocks had no influence on the seals.
X.—Massed harems on eastern end of Tolstoi Rookery.
From a photograph by H. D. Chichester.
XI.—Uterus and ovaries of fur seal.
XII.—The northern squid, Gonatus amenus.
Drawn by Anna L. Brown.
XIII.—The Alaskan pollock, Theragra chalcogramma.
Drawn by A. H. Baldwin.
XIV.—The silver salmon, Oncorhynchus kisutch.
. Drawn by E. L. Todd.
XV.—Northern lamprey, Hntosphenus tridentatus.
Drawn by A. H. Baldwin.
XVI.—Dead pups on Tolstoi in 1892. Showing the former ravages of Uncinaria.
. From a photograph taken by the British commissioners.
XVII.—Dead pups on Tolstoi in 1896.
From a photograph by C. H. Townsend.
XVIII.—Starved pup, and pup dead from Uncinaria.
From a photograph by C. H. Townsend.
XIX.—A windrow of pups on Tolstoi.
These pups were washed from the lower portion of Tolstoi by the gale of August 17,
1896, and had been long dead.
From a photograph by J. M. Macoun.
XX.—Part of skeleton of young male fur seal killed on Zoltoi, probably injured by bite of a
killer, Orea orca.
XXI.—The killer, Orca orca.
From a figure by Liitken.
Ix
LIST OF PLATES AND MAPS.
XXII.—Part of sealing fleet in Victoria harbor, October, 1894.
From a photograph by C. H. Townsend.
XXII.— Officers and Indian hunters of the Canadian schooner Favorite, 1894.
From a photograph by Miller and Townsend.
XXIV.—Sealing canoes at Neah Bay, Northwest coast.
From a photograph by Miller and Townsend.
XXV.—Sealing canoe.
From a photograph by Miller and 'lownsend.
XXVI.—Ontfit of sealing canoe, showing double-pointed spear pole, detachable spear points,
killing club, paddle, and bailer.
From a photograph by N. B. Miller.
XXVII.—Hoisting aboard canoes.
From a photograph by A. B. Alexander.
XXVIII.—American schooner Columbia, with canoes in tow. Bering Sea, 1893.
From a photograph by N. B. Miller.
XXIX.—a Canoe leaving schooner.
> Canoe returning.
ce Canoe under sail.
_ From photographs by C. H. Townsend.
XXX.—Part of the sealing fleet at Unalaska, July, 1896.
From a photograph by C. H. Townsend.
XXXI.—Landing at Village Cove, St. Paul, looking toward the entrance to the Salt Lagoon.
Warehouse on the point; bidarkas or skin lighters in the foreground; the end of
Lagoon Rookery on the left.
From a photograph by C. H. Townsend.
XXXII. —The village of St. Paul, Pribilof Islands, looking toward Zoltoi Sands.
From a photograph by C. H. Townsend.
XXXITI.—Deserted village at the southeast end of Guadalupe Island. In the background caves
formerly occupied by fur seals.
From a photograph by C. H. Townsend.
XXXIV.—The California sea elephant, Macrorhinus angustirostris, showing the usual position of
the proboscis and the manner of arching the body in progression.
Drawn by A. H. Baldwin from sketches and measurements by C. H. Townsend.
XXXV.—Rookery of the southern fur seal, Arctocephalus australis,on Lobos Island, mouth of
the La Plata River. .
From a photograph purchased in Montevideo.
XXX VI.—Branding seals on Lukanin Rookery.
From a photograph by Dr. Otto Voss.
XXXVIa.—A branded seal skin.
This skin was taken from a female seal killed in the harbor at Akun, Aleutian
Islands, in November, 1896, and turned over to the Commission by Mr. A. Gray, of
Unalaska. In the process of tanning a portion of the skin burned by the iron has
fallen ont, showing the effectiveness of branding as a means of depreciating the
value of pelagic skins.
XXXVII.—Herded seals in the Salt Lagoon.
Drawn from nature by Bristow Adams.
XXX VIII.—Views on Walrus Island.
From photographs by William Palmer.
XXXIX.—Eggs of the Pacific murre, Uria lomvia arra, showing variation in markings.
XL.—Stages in the development of feathers.
XLI.—Stages in the development of feathers.
XLIT.—Argyrosomus alascanus, (type) Point Hope, Alaska.
Drawn by Anna L. Brown.
XLIII.—Salmo mykiss, Kalakhtyrka River, Kamchatka.
Drawn by Anna L. Brown.
XLIV.—Salvelinus malma, Unalaska.
Drawn by Anna L. Brown.
LIST OF PLATES AND MAPS.
XLV.—Salvelinus kundscha, Tareinsky Bay, Kamchatka.
Drawn by Anna L. Brown. ~
XLVI.— Osmerus alabatrossis, (type) Shelikof Straits, near Karluk.
Drawn by Chloe Lesley Starks.
XLVII.—Therodbromus callorhini (type). x 34.
Drawn by F. A. Lucas from specimens found in stomach of fur seal.
XLVIII.—Sebastodes aleutianus (type). Off Karluk, Kadiak Island.
Drawn by Anna L. Brown.
XLIX.—Sebastodes caurinus. Sitka, Alaska.
Drawn by Anna L. Brown.
L.—Hexagrammos octogrammus. Unalaska.
Drawn. by Chloe Lesley Starks.
LI.—Hexagrammos lagocephalus. Robben Island.
Drawn by Chloe Lesley Starks.
LI.—Hexagrammos lagocephalus. Petropaulski, Kamchatka.
Drawn by A. H. Baldwin.
LII.—Arechistes plumarius (type). Ushishir Island, Kuril group.
Drawn by Anna L. Brown.
LIV.—Stelgistrum steinegeri (type). Albatross Station 3645, off Robben Island.
Drawn by Chloe Lesley Starks. :
LV.—Enophrys claviger. Off Robben Island.
Drawn by Anna L. Brown.
LVI.—Ceratocottus dicerans. Herendeen Bay, Alaska.
Drawn by Anna L. Brown.
LVII.—Ceratocottus lucasi (type). Near St. Paul Island.
Drawn by Anna L. Brown.
LVIII.—Gymnocanthus pistilliger. Petropaulski Harbor, Kamchatka.
Drawn by Chloe Lesley Starks.
LIX.—Gymnocanthus galeatus (very young). Salt Lagoon, St. Paul Island.
Drawn by Chloe Lesley Starks.
LX.—Argyrocottus zanderi. Shana Bay, Iturup Island, Kurils.
Drawn by Chloe Lesley Starks.
LXI.—Myoxocephalus nivosus. Iturup Island, Kurils.
Drawn by Chloe Lesley Starks.
LXII.— Myoxocephalus nivosus. Iturup Island, Kurils.
Drawn by Chloe Lesley Starks.
LXIII.—Myoxocephalus polyacanthocephalus. Unalaska.
Drawn by Anna L. Brown.
LXIVa.—Myoxocephalus stelleri. Petropaulski, Kamchatka.
Drawn by A. H. Baldwin.
LXIVb.—Myoxocughalus mednius. Copper Island.
Drawn by A. H. Baldwin.
LXV.—Myoxocephalus niger. St. Paul Island.
Drawn by Chloe Lesley Starks.
LXVI.—Myoxocephalus verrucosus. Albatross Station 3232, Bering Sea.
Drawn by Chloe Lesley Starks.
LXVIla.—Myoxocephalus axillaris. Herendeen Bay, Alaska.
Drawn by Anna L. Brown.
LXVIIb.—Porocottus quadratus. Bering Island.
Drawn by A. H. Baldwin.
LXVIL.—Oncocottus hexacornis. Herschel Island, Arctic.
Drawn by Anna L. Brown.
LXIX.—Nautiscus pribilovius (type). Off Zapadni Mys, St. Paul.
Drawn by Anna L. Brown.
LXX.—Brachyopsis rostratus. Yeso, Japan.
Drawn by A. H. Baldwin.
XI
XII LIST OF PLATES AND MAPS.
LXXI.—Podothecus hamlini (type). Albatross Station 3653, Kuril Islands.
Drawn by Anna L. Brown.
LXXII.— Podothecus thompsoni (type). Station 3653, Kuril Islands.
Drawn by Anna L. Brown.
LXXIII.—Liparis cyclostigma (from a photograph of the type). Albatross Station 3252, off Unalaska.
Drawn by Anna L. Brown.
LXXIV.—Liparis herschelinus (type). Herschel Island, Arctic.
Drawn by Anna L. Brown.
LXXV.—Crystallichthys mirabilis (type). Off Povorotnaya, Kamchatka.
Drawn by W. 8S. Atkinson.
LXXVI.—Crystallichthys mirabilis (young). Off Zapadni Mys, St. Paul Island.
' Drawn by Anna L. Brown.
LXXVII.—Prognurus cypselurus (type). Off Bogoslof Island.
Drawn by Anna L. Brown.
LXXVITI.—Bathymaster signatus. Sitka, Alaska.
Drawn by Anna L. Brown.
LXXIX.—Opisthocentrus ocellatus. Petropaulski Harbor, Kamchatka.
Drawn by Chloe Lesley Starks.
LXXX a.—Pholis pictus. Shana Bay, Iturup Island, Kurils.
Drawn by Chloe Lesley Starks.
b.—Enedrias nebulosus. Hakodate, Japan.
Drawn by Anna L. Brown.
LXXXI.—Lumpenus medius. Off Avatcha Bay, Kamchatka.
Drawn by Anna L, Brown.
LXXXII.—Macrourus acrolepsis. Off Bogoslof Island.
Drawn by Anna L. Brown.
LXXXIII.—Bogoslovius clarki (type). Bogoslof Island.
Drawn by Chloe Lesley Starks.
LXXXIV.—Hippoglossoides hamiltoni (type). Albatross Station 3641, Avatcha Bay, Kamchatka.
Drawn by Chloe Lesley Starks.
LXXXV.—Verasper moseri (type). Shana Bay, Iturup Island, Kurils.
Drawn by Chloe Lesley Starks.
LXXXVJ.—Development of Synoicum irregulare.
Drawn by W. E. Ritter.
LXXXVII.—An Upland Meadow of St. Paul.
From # photograph by J. M. Macoun.
LXXXVIII.—Papaver macounit Greene.
Drawn by Theo. Holm.
LXXXIX.—Fruiting Specimen of Nesodraba grandis (Langsd.) Greene.
Drawn by Theo. Holm.
XC.—Cardamine umbellata Greene.
Drawn by Theo. Holm.
XCI.—Chrysosplenium beringianum Rose.
Drawn by F. A. Walpole.
XCII.—Primula eximia Greene.
Drawn by Theo. Holm.
XCIII.—Primula macounii Greene.
Drawn by Theo. Holm.
XCIV.—Polygonum macounit Small.
Drawn by Theo. Holm.
XCV.—Laminaria longipes.
Clump of plants and cross section through a blade.
Map showing the distribution and migrations of the Northern fur seals. To face page 234,
Map of Guadalupe Island, showing explorations of C. H. Townsend To face page 274.
Map of Guadalupe Island, showing explorations of W. W. Thoburn. To face page 284.
Map showing summer and winter limit of pack ice. To face page 554.
I.—THE PRIBILOF FUR SEAL.
THE MAIN DIVISIONS OF THE PINNIPEDIA.
By FREDeERIC A. Lucas.
The lines of descent of the Pinnipedia are very imperfectly known, and little can
be said save that both eared and earless seals have descended from the Creodonta, the
earless seals having become most highly specialized, while the eared seals are more
generalized and are structurally nearer the bears. From their distribution it would
seem that the eared seals, and especially the fur seals, originated in the southern
hemisphere and differentiated as they worked north. Furthermore, that this
northward movement was along the west coast of America, being favored by the cold
current setting northward along the coast of South America.
The northern seals have become generically distinct from their southern relatives,
while the Asiatic and North American animals are more or less differentiated from one
another, their differences being accorded specific value by Dr. Jordan.
In his Families of Mammals, Dr. Gill, although strongly tempted to do otherwise,
grouped the eared and earless seals‘ together in the superfamily Phocoidea, the
walruses being set apart as a second superfamily Rosmaroidea.
Dr. Allen! made a different disposition of the pinnipeds, making the groups
Gressigrada and Reptigrada, the former containing the Odobaenide and Otariide, the
latter comprising the Phocida.
It has seemed to us better to follow Dr. Gill’s unpublished ideas and to combine
the eared seals and walruses in the superfamily Otarioidea, the earless seals forming _
a second superfamily Phocoidea.
With better material at hand than was in Dr. Allen’s possession, it is possible to
extend his diagnosis somewhat, and the following characteristics of the two super-
families are herewith submitted.
-OTARIOIDEA,
Neck long, hind feet capable of being turned forward and used in terrestrial
locomotion. Grinders with ‘single roots and simple, flattened or pointed crowns.
Skull with mastoid large and salient, and large tentorium; an alisphenoid canal.
Posterior ends of nasals abutting upon (Odobenide) or separated by frontals (Otariide).
Anterior feet without claws, and with a broad cartilaginous border extending beyond
the digits. Hind feet with phalanges terminating in long cartilaginous flaps, and
with claws on three innermost digits only. Astragalus much shorter than calcaneum. |
1 History of North American Pinnipeds, pp. 3, 4.
5974—PT 3——1
1
2 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Cuboid articulating with calcaneum only. First metatarsal articulating only with
entocuneiform. A trochanter minor present on femur. Auditorial bulla small and
irregular in form,
PHOCOIDEA.
Neck short. Hind feet incapable of being turned forward. Grinders with complex
roots and multicuspidate crowns. Mastoid swollen, but not salient. Tentorium
moderate or small. No alisphenoid- canal. Auditorial bulle usually very large,
pyriform in shape. Posterior end of nasals wedged in between frontals. Anterior
digits all bearing claws, and claws present (usually) on all digits of hind feet. No
cartilaginous flaps to any of the digits. Astragalus equaling calcaneum in length.
Cuboid articulating with both calcaneum and astragalus (save in Monachus and
Macrorhinus). First: metatarsal articulating with entocuneiform and with second
metatarsal as well. Femur with no trochanter minor.
THE SPECIES OF CALLORHINUS OR NORTHERN FUR SEAL.
By Davip STARR JORDAN and GEORGE A. CLARK.-
The fur-seal herds resorting to the islands of Bering Sea and the Sea of Okhotsk
belong to the genus Callorhinus; while those resorting to the islands of the Tropics
and the antarctic regions belong to a different group, called Arctocephalus.
The fur seal of the North was first made known by Steller, who, in 1741, inspected
the South or Poludionnoye rookery of Bering Island, and wrote an account of his
observations. On Steller’s description of the ‘Sea Bear” of Bering Island Linnaeus
based his classification of Phoca ursina, or “‘bear-like” seal. From the Linnzwan
name the fur seal of the North came to be called Callorhinus ursinus, aud the type of
the species is, of course, the Commander Islands herd.
The fact that the members of the Pribilof herd differ from those of the Com.
manders in color, in form, and in character of the fur has long been recognized.
These differences, though slight, are permanent and constant. No intermediate forms
are known, and, as the life courses of the herds are wholly distinct, apparently no
intermediate forms can exist. We may therefore hold the Pribilof herd to be a
species of fur seal distinct from that of the Commander Islands. This species may
be called Callorhinus alascanus Jordan and Clark. :
The species alascanus may be known by the stouter, broader head, by the thicker
neck, by the prevalence of warm brown shades in the coloration of the female and
the young males, by the more silvery color of the gray pups, which lack the distinct
whitish patches on the rumps seen in ursinus, and, in general, by the lack of sharp
contrasts between the coloration of the sides and belly. The fur in alascanus is also
of superior quality, and exhibits sufficient difference to make it possible for dealers
to distinguish by this means alone whether the skins come from the Commander or
Pribilof herds. In the Pribilof seals the claws on the fore flippers are undeveloped,
being represented by a pit in the skins.
The true Callorhinus ursinus has the head and neck slenderer; the females and
young males are sooty, rather than brown, the light and dark shades being for the
most part equally without ochraceous tints; the belly is usually rather sharply paler
e
CALLORHINUS CURILENSIS. 3:
than the back; the gray pup is more brownish and less gray than in the Pribilof
animal, having a pale patch on each side of the rump. The fore feet have two or.
three rudimentary claws.
The seals of Robben Island and the Kurils differ from both of the foregoing in
the whitish color of the under fur. This is rusty. brown in ursinus and alascanus,
The head is said to be broader again than in ursinus, and photographs show a dusky
coloration similar to this species. ‘The fur of the Robben Island herd is different from
either of the others. It was looked upon at first as distinctly inferior in quality, '
though a change in process in the removal of the water hair, which is accomplished
with much greater difficulty, has removed the discrepancy-in value of the fur. The-
fact remains, however, that these skins must be treated by a separate process.
The data regarding this third form of the Northern fur seal is inadequate to defi-
‘nitely characterize it, but such information as is at hand points to the probability of-
its being also a new species. It may be provisionally regarded as such under the name
of Callorhinus curilensis Jordan and Clark, taking the seals of Robben Island as
typical.
The following i isa table showing caeeete measurements of typical examples:
of C. ursinus and C. alascanus : ve
.
Comparative measurements (in. millimeters) of typical specimens of fur seals from the Commander and
-Pribilof herds.:
Adult male. Adult female. Bachelor.
Com- spate | Com- . we Com- | pi:
mander. | Pibilof. | sander. | Pribilof. | ander. | Pribilof.
Total length -...-.....2---2-22--2006 1, 930 1, 887 1, 283 1, 262 1, 285 1,224
Nose to end of outstr: 2, 450 2, 397 1, 650 1, 645 1, 655 1, $11
Nose to armpit 980 1, 058 685 701 660. 14
Nose to eye . 98 115 67 89 80 76
Nose to ear. $ 213 216 168 181 1 158 166
Distance between eyes....... sicete ti 104 127 70 89 vas 83
Distance between ears .....-. sie maar eae 173 306 138 204 138 217
Length of ear. 52 64 45 64 47 51
, Length of tail 50 $1 53 37 47 57
Longest mustache bristle .. Bae < 3 113 491 125 |- 102 105 |. 102
Length of forelimb...........-- peceadaseeeceztesceeise 540 548 | 345° 402 |- 395 |- 333
Width of forefoot. -- yee sautbuene veeeeiseeeees 223 216.) =, «123. 127, 125 139 |
Length of hind foot............ idee wen eaemicmsaeeer 597 548° 415; ~~ = 408 420 * 827
Width at tarsus...... : 135 166 95. 102 |. 85 102.
Width at end of toes... A 285 191 170 “115 “117 102
Average length of toefl 23 344 162 25) 161 255
a” between tips of ou 1, 740 1,798 1, 205 1,198 1, 085 1, 237
ify
Of neck beliind ears .......----.-------- Peraiercieiaiaie'e x) apele’s 598 637 405 446 405 522
. Over shoulders...0 22.222. 0 cscenn cee nace ee enn n en eenaeeeces 1, 205 1, 415 750. 829 820 619
Behind forelimbs oe aie 1, 155 1, 530 780 739 740 791
Botota WGN 6 seas cscnsascameeae er eradanw en enavaine cone 480 867 280 510 ‘295 459
1 The measurements of Commander Islands seals were taken by Dr. Stejneger on North sehen of Bering Island in
August, 1883 ; those for the Pribilof seals were taken by Mr. Clark on St. Paul Island in October, 1896.
The body measurement of these animals can not be relied upon to show permanent
conditions, as they necessarily vary according to the physical condition of the animals.
Thus, the measurements of the bull taken on August 20 probably represents the
animal after its long fast during the breeding season. The measurements of the Pribilof
bull taken in October represented an animal which had been feeding and was well
supplied with blubber. Similar differences might easily arise in connection with the
other measurements of the body.
4 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
But with the head it should be different. If we take out the measurements whieh
have to do with this feature we find that there is a marked difference correspon‘diag
to the general impression made by comparative observations on the two herds. These
measurements reduced to percentage of the total length are as follows, the results
being all the more striking because in each case the Pribilof animal shows a smaller
total length :
Measuremenis (in millimeters), showing differences in the head of typical Commander and Pribilof seals, taken
from the table just given.
Adult male. Adult female. Bacheuor.
Com- aye Com- whe Com- +1
mander: Pribilof. aander: Pribilof. mander: Pribilof.
Total length PPPPrTe Te VIeTTTerer err rrerererrrererr Tree rer tries | 1,930 1, 887 1, 283 1, 262 1, 285 1, 224
Distance between eyes. .-..-..--- 22-022 - ee ee nee een eee eee rene 104 127 70 89 71 83
Per cent of total length. ane 5.3 6.7 5.4 5.5 6.7
Distance between ears. . 176 306 138 204 138 217
Per cent in total length... eS 9.1 16,2 10.7 16.1 10.7 7
Distance nose to eye .....- “8 98 115 67 89 80
Per cent in total length. et 5 6 5.2 7 6.2 6.2
Distance nose to ear ...... wise iia 213 216 168 181 158 166
Per cent i in total length... 11 11.4 13.1 14.3 12.3 13.5
VARIATIONS IN SIZE AND COLOR OF THE PRIBILOF FUR SEAL.
By FREDERIC A. Lucas.
While the Pribilof fur seal varies in size, color, and proportions to such an
extent that were but a few individuals known, they might be held as belonging to
two distinct species; part of this, particularly the variation in color, is due to age.
The young pups are black above, with a few gray hairs on the head and neck; the
side of the neck is slightly tinged with gray and the greater part of the under surface
is dusky brownish-gray. There is a spot of yellowish-brown at the axilla and the
region around the mouth is of the same color.
Between the middle of September and the middle of October the majority of
pups have shed their black coats and assumed the silvery gray and white of the
“gray-pup” stage. Up to the age of two years the young of both sexes are of a
beautiful steel gray above, with the throat and belly white, the central portion of the
latter being suffused with chestnut. On the breast, at the base of each flipper is a
convex patch of gray which nearly meets its fellow of the opposite side, thus reducing
the white at this place to a narrow isthmus, connecting the throat with the under parts.
There is a dark spot at the anterior edge of the flipper and a light spot on the axil,
this being retained for some time in the female. The white throat is very conspicuous
even at a distance, and indicates that the animals have not reached a killable age.
The coloration deepens with age, the gray encroaching upon the white of the
throat and the chestnut deepening in intensity on the under side until it becomes rich
and dark, while the patches below the flippers unite to form a band across the chest,
the dark spots on the anterior edge of the flippers becoming a dull chestnut.
Still later the chestnut under side gives place to gray with a slight chestnut’
tinge, the old females being dark gray above and lighter gray below; this last with a
tinge of chestnut. There is a light patch on the center of the throat and a dark band
running across the breast from flipper to flipper.
COLOR VARIATIONS IN THE FUR SEAL. 5
The throat of the male becomes gray at an earlier age—4 or 5 years—than does
that of the female, and at the same time the belly becomes ashy, the junction of the
back pelage with that of the under side being marked by a lighter chestnut-tinged
line.
At the age of 6 or 7 years the males are an almost uniform dark gray, with the
hairs of the top of the head and neck considerably longer than that of the rest of the
body.
There seems to be some variation in the color of the older rookery bulls—those
7 years old and upward—some animals being of a rich seal brown, washed with yel-
lowish-white on the neck and shoulders; others with a distinct reddish or yellowish
cast. .
Close examination, however, shows that even the darkest animals are more or
less grizzled, and the reddish coloration is undoubtedly largely due to the length of
time that the animal has been on land and undergone the bleaching effect of light and
partial drying.
This change of color—dué to exposure, and in a measure to dirt—is most notice-
able among the females, those which have been longest out of water having a brown,
sunburned appearance. The amount of dirt naturally varies according to the rookery,
and is in some cases very noticeable when a female plunges into the wash of the surf,
leaving a trail of muddy water behind. Still this explanation is not wholly satis.
factory, and there is a certain amount of color variation which seems to be individual
and not to be accounted for on the score of age.
The gray bulls seen here and there on the breeding grounds are either compara-
tively young animals which have been able to take and hold a place on the rookery,
or cases where the assumption of the dark color of the adult has been delayed, or for
some cause failed to take place. It is probable that the lightest colored males are
those in this last condition, in which age manifests itself by a general ene in
the color of the coat.
As among birds, some seals undergo their color changes much more rapidly than
others, and this results in occasionally finding a young female with the colors of old
age, or old females with the light gray and white of the fresh 2-year-olds; these
- females are very noticeable among the other darker-colored females. As is only
natural where individuals are so numerous, cases of albinism are occasionally noted,
some being quite complete and others only partial. One or two pups have been taken
of a yellowish color, with pink eyes and pale flippers, but no adult albino has been
noted, the nearest approach to it being a cow of a yellowish cast seen on Lukanin,
and another mottled with yellowish seen on Tolstoi.
The accompanying tables of measurements and weights may be considered as
representing good average specimens of their respective classes. The weights of the
two fetal specimens of April 22 were taken from nearly dry alcoholics, which were by
no means so heavy as the fresh specimens would have been, so that 34 and 43 pounds
would be well within the mark. The fetus at term is one of several obtained from
dead cows on St. Paul aud is a good average example, for while now and then a pup
is seen noticeably below the others in size, none was measured less than 22 inches
long. The measurements and weights of newly born pups given by Elliott are
worthless. Save for his brown color, the young fetal seal is much like the adult,
being well formed and well proportioned, the head not having the disproportionate
6 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
size usually seen in mammals.. Young pups measured between August 8 and Avgust
20 were from 25 to 28 inches long, the males being as a rule the larger. It will be
noticed that some of the measurements, as well as the weight of the gray pup, exceed -
those of the yearling, and it has already been pointed out by Elliott that the young
gain little or nothing in weight between the time they leave in the fall: and return in
the following summer.
Except in length the 4-year-old female may be considered as a good average
example of a full-sized cow; the majority of females obtained from the sealers were
slightly under 4 feet in length, two or three specimens which seemed to be far above
the average proving, when measured, to be only 4 feet 1 inch long from tip of nose to
root of tail. The very largest female taken was 51 inches long, 33 inches around the
shoulders, and weighed 73 pounds, so that 80 pounds may be looked upon as an
exceptional weight for a cow.
The males from 1 to 5 years old are good examples of their respective ages, the
measurements of the 3-year-old specimen coinciding with those of a similar animal
selected by Mr. Redpath as a typical specimen for the United States National
Museum.
The 7 or 6 year-old male is a good exainple of the males just below the grade of
. rookery bulls, being full grown, in some particulars, but lacking just a little of the
muscular development necessary to enable him to enter the rookery and hold his own
against the older animals. It will be noticed that in girth the younger male exceeds
the others, but this is due to the fact that the old bulls having passed two months in
fasting and fighting had, in consequence, lost much of their fat and some of their
flesh. The fore flipper of this young bull was exceptionally short, the flippers of that
‘ class measuring ordinarily 20 to 21 inches in length. As a rule, the size of the fore
flipper is a fairly good indication of the age of the animal since it increases in length
‘ with age in a fairly regular manner, the flippers of the males also exceeding those of
the females in size.
The larger of the two bulls was one selected for the United States National
Museum, on account of its size, being the largest of forty killed, and 80 to 82 inches
may be held as representing the extreme length attained by the bulls, the average
being 72, As these bulls had recently come.off the rookeries, they were lean, and their -
girth was by no means what it would have been at the time of their arrival in May or
June. Their measurements indicate to some extent the variations in size and propor-
tions found among seals since the older bull was the shorter of the two, although in
other ways nearly as bulky as the younger animal, while the flipper of the shorter
specimen was an inch and a half longer than that of the other. It was not possible
to weigh the large bulls, but in their lean condition they certainly did not weigh over
250 pounds, and it is doubtful if, even at his best, the bull weighs more than 400
pounds.
Dr. Stejneger has spoken of the difficulty of drawing any line between the seals
of various ages, stating that no one on the killing grounds of the Commander Islands
‘ was able to point out the differences between them. While this difficulty does exist,
yet there are, aside from mere size, distinction between the teeth, length of flippers,
color of mustache bristles, and length of wig of the seals of various ages which are very
* perceptible to any one who has noted them long and carefully. Personally, I am
unable to differentiate the seals to any great extent, although the difficulty was less
t
MEASUREMENTS AND WEIGHTS OF SEALS. 7
on the second visit to the Pribilof than it was on the first, and I am under obligations
to Mr. J. C. Redpath for calling my attention to various distinguishing features. The
opinion of the natives is of little value, and with them the question undeniably
resolves itself into a mental sorting of the killable seals into various classes. That
definite age characters do exist is fairly well shown by the agreement in measurements
between seals selected at different times by Mr. Redpath and myself as 3 and 4 year
olds, the selection in my own case being based on the condition of the canines,
whiskers, and wig. Of course, there is an overlapping of seals from the fact that the
small 4-year-olds, for example, will be of the same size as the large 3-year-olds, but °
here the condition of the teeth, flippers, and whiskers will usually show clearly which .
are the older.
Table giving measurements and weights of seals of various ages.
Fetus. Gisy Yearling. Two fou
pup, ears, ears,
April 22.| April 22. eon male.a | Male. | Female. fori domale:
- Length, tip of nose to root of tail. inches. . 16 17 24 344 38 364) 38 494
Girth around smallest part of neck,
WNCheG 2 o2ce.cc neces odavses oseeces ies. $ 10" eas eetees 19 17 174 1k
Girth around shoulders . AS. lacacmenses 28 234) 28 324
Girth back of flippers -. 143 224 25 | 23 24 29
ici around mabe na@omeccemae bist d 2 13 [..-....-2e 184 154 18 20
ength of fore flipper, .
Ese hae 6 9 a 133 114) 13 153
Weight... . pounds... 3y5 49) lly 331) a7 | 32 55 3
Two Three |pour years,| Five years,| Seven |Over seven| Over eight
bh chaste male. _} .male.6 — |years, male.|years, male.|years, male.
rae sh, tip of nose forot of tal ‘ jnolien ais 42 49 | ° 53 59 72 799 68
id est part of uec :
ee eae fan cee wanes . ence coed 203 203 25 27 28 33 32
Girth around shoulders. . -inches.. 32 364) 38 41 58 48 47
. Girth back of flippers..-. ---do.... 29 BL | oaia siciain sienjsis|[sese cia encase 50 50 47
. Girth aregne nee sie aie aeisints Sarees a 204 21 238) 24 34 32 36
-Length of fore flipper, ti: arm pit, .
e tehee ce a eee, 16 18)| Sco teye day el Seeeeeceer te 18 204 24
Weight. scicccecssreceosvcssaises pounds. . 66 BG |svevexvawsns|sv-aasewaewe BER |susnnw chases |beversaeueae
aMeasured by Mr. G. A. Clark. bMeasured by Mr. J. C. Redpath.
II—THE ANATOMY OF THE FUR, SEAL.
THE DENTITION OF THE FUR SEAL.
- By FREDERIC A. Lucas.
The dentition of the adult fur seal is i., 3, ¢., +, pm., 4, m., 2, the conical premolars
and molars all having simple roots, a well-developed cingulum on the inner side, and
a small accessory cusp on the anterior face.
In a fetus.taken April 22 the milk dentition is complete, ceneintins of i., 3, ¢., 4,
m., . ‘The incisors are very minute, particularly the inner upper incisor, and there is
no trace of a third lower incisor, although proper microscopic examination of a younger
fetus might reveal it. So far as has come under my observation (five specimens at
full term), the milk incisors are shed before birth, and this is doubtless often or usually
the case with the milk molars and lower milk canines. In a full-grown fetus the lower
canines were simply hanging to the gum, as were also the minute second and third
lower milk molars; but in other fetal specimens and in some recently born animals
the lower milk canines and lower and upper third (last) milk molars were still in place,
as shown in Pl. I, fig.1. These last are situated directly over the fourth premolars,
so that in Callorhinus the third milk molars have vertical successors. The first and
second milk molars of the fetus are sometimes mere spicules loosely attached to the
gum. In other instances they are well formed though small teeth lying external to the
second and third premolars. The order of appearance of the permanent upper teeth
is as follows: incisors 1, 2, 3, premolar 1, premolar 2 and molar 1 (although sometimes
the molar is slightly in palvante of the proiolar’, premolar 3, premolar 4, molar 2.
In the lower jaw the incisors appear first and the premolars and molars i in regular
order from before backwards, the first and second premolars appearing almost
simultaneously and slightly before the corresponding upper premolars. The canines
appear at about the same time as the second true molar, but not until premolars 1
and 2 are well through. There is, however, considerable irregularity i in the develop-
ment of the teeth, for in some individuals the last milk molar and lower milk. canines
are retained for a ‘fortnight or more after birth.
The teeth mature more rapidly in the female than in the male, for while the entire
tooth row, including the canines, are fully developed in the 2-year-old female, the
canines do not attain their maximum size in the males until the age of 4 or 5 years,
at which time, or possibly a little Jater, the true molars have already begun to show
some slight signs of absorption. There is also a decided increase in the length of the
tooth row of the males between the ages of 1 and 6 of from five-sixteenths to five-
eighths of an inch, with the natural result that in old animals the teeth are farther
apart than in the young. (Compare figs. 1, 2,3.) The changes in the jaw itself are
much more marked than in the teeth, for this continues to increase in size and weight
after the fifth year, this change being one of the important factors in the fighting
abilities of: the adult males.
9
10 THE FUK SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
The condition of the last, or true molars is of value, particularly in the female, in
determining the age of a given animal, for while it can not be said how many years a
particular seal may have lived, yet itis possible to tell from the appearance of the
molars whether the animal is adult, middle-aged, orold. (Seethe various figures on PI. 1.)
As Dr. Allen has already sighed; ‘irregularities in dentition are not infrequent in
the fur seal through the failure of one or more of the grinders to develop. A good
instance of this is shown in the skulls of two pups, a. male and female, which were
Jaws of male fur-seals, three, four, and over seven years of age, three-fourths natural size.
collected on the same day and in the same locality, and, curiously enough, possessed a
similarly abnormal dentition through the absence of the last molar in each side of
each jaw.
Believers in the coalescence theory of the development of teeth may find a crumb
of comfort in the fact that in both cases the last tooth in the row was slightly wider
than usual, and a little more deeply grooved vertically. On the other hand, Mr.
Andrew Halkett” has noted a case in which three upper molars were present.
‘History of North American Pinnipeds, p, 329, 2 MSS. report.
ANATOMY OF THE FUR SEAL. 11
The teeth are colored as they protrude from the gum, the brown color appearing
first at the tip and working downward.
PLATE I. All figures natural size.
Fig. 1. Recently born male with milk canines and fourth milk molar in place.
2. Male with upper milk canines still in place.
3. Male with last upper true molar not yet through the gum.
4, Male with all teeth in place and all save last upper molar well developed.
‘5. Dentition of 2-year-old female, showing the teeth at their maximum.
6. Dentition of middle-aged female, 4 or 5 years old, in which the absorption of the last molars
has begun.
7. Dentition of old female with absorption of molars advanced.
8. Dentition of oldest female obtained, showing the true molars of both jaws worn away and.
absorbed and all teeth diminished in size.
PLATE II. All figures natural size.
Fig. 1. Dentition of yearling male.
2. Dentition of 4-year-old male.
3. Dentition of adult male, 7 or 8 years old, showing characteristic wearing of anterior face of
upper canine. .
NOTES ON THE ANATOMY OF THE FUR SEAL.
By Rosert E. SNODGRASS.
THE ALIMENTARY CANAL AND LIVER.
The pyloric end of the stomach is bent upon the anterior surface of the cardiac. In
a bull the length from the cardiac end to the extreme right portion is about 18 inches,
Fig. 1.—Stomach of seal pup, one-half natural size.
and from here to the pyloris 8 inches. The small intestine is extremely slender. Ina
bull it measures in length a little over 100 feet; in a cow, between 50 and 60 feet. The
large intestine is likewise narrow and is about 7 feet long in a bull and 2 feet in a cow.
In a pup 22 inches long the small intestine is about 28 feet and the large 10 inches.
Hence the intestine increases in length proportionately as the animal matures. The
cecum is short and blunt. From the pyloris the small intestine goes backward and
12 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
makes a curve to the right, then turns dorsally and backward to the posterior end of
the right kidney. From here it again goes forward and is disposed. in innumerable
coils, ending in the large intestine just back of the pyloris. The large intestine runs
first backward to the posterior end of the right kidney, makes a bend to the left and
forward, then turns back, doubles upon itself ventrally, turns inward and posteriorly
to the middle line of the body, and finally goes straight to the anus.
The stomach is large, elongate, and capable of great distension. It lies on the
left side, and the pyloric end is bent upon the anterior surface of the cardiac. In an
adult male the length from the cardiac end to the extreme right portion is about 18
inches, and from here to the pyloric 8 inches, the large part with more or less longi- ©
tudinal, deep rugs. The small reflexed, pyloric portion is slightly striated, and in
this lodge the fish bones, etc., which are subsequently regurgitated.
The liver consists of two left lobes and three right lobes. The gall-bladder is
pear-shaped and situated between the anterior and middle right hepatic lobes. The
cystic duct is long and, near the posterior lobe of the liver, is joined by a hepatic duct
formed by the union of three smaller ducts from different parts of the liver. The
common duct formed by the cystic and hepatic ducts enters the duodenum about 2
inches below the pyloric.
The heart.—The anterior end of the heart lies between the third and fourth ribs.
The ventricular part is somewhat ovate, the longest transverse diameter being in front
of the middle, and the posterior part tapering and bluntly terminated. The auricular
lobes are rather small. In an adult bull the ventricular septum is very thick, and is
convex to the right. Its long axis is almost antero-posterior, but it joins the outer
wall to the right of the apex of the heart, so that the right ventricle is smaller than
the left by more than the thickness of the septtim. A line joining any two extreme
left points in the right ventricle does not pass through the left ventricle, so that,
although the right ventricle is crescent-shaped in transverse section, it does not at all
surround the left ventricle.
In the posterior half of the left ventricle are two large longitudinal masses of
muscle. One projects into the cavity from the left ventral aspect of the interior wall
as a mass flattened perpendicularly to the part of the ventricular wall from which it
arises; the other projects from the left dorsal aspect of the same as a mass flattened
in a line parallel to the part of the wall from which it arises. About two-thirds of its
length forward from its posterior end the dorsal mass becomes decreased to half its
diameter by av abrupt contraction. The transverse surface thus formed is ventral to
the remaining longitudinal part and gives origin to two sets of chord, one ventral
the other dorsal. The former consists of two large tendons, the latter of two large
and two small, the small ones between the others. The remainder of this papillary
muscle runs forward and bifureates into a right and a left mass, both of which become
lost in the wall of the ventricle back of the right valve. From near their anterior
ends small fibers arise that are inserted upon the valve near its base. The ventral
papillary muscle runs forward entire farther than the other, becomes suddenly con-
tracted, leaving a transverse surface on the dorsal side, from which arise two sets of
chord of twoeach. The remainder runs forward, indistinctly bifurcates, and becomes
lost in the walls of the ventricle after giving off a few fibers to the base of the left
valve., The left mitral valve is much the smaller of the two.
THE HEART. 13
In the right ventricle the papillary muscles are very different from those in the
left. There are three principal muscles. Two arise in the posterior end of the ven-
tricle, one running forward along the septum and the other along the outer ventral
THE CIRCULATORY ORGANS.
Fic. 2. Heart of seal pup, natural size.
ca. Carotid artery.
vert. Vertebral artery. |
th. Thyroid axis.
ma. Internal mammary artery.
sc. Subclavian artery. 1
dB. Ductus Botalli.
wall. The inner one bifurcates a short distance from its origin, and each arm extends
forward a little more than half this length, when it terminates, giving off three chordz.
14 THE FUR SEALS.OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
\
The right muscle runs forward about twice the distance of the inner, and divides into
an outer and an inner branch. The latter becomes lost upon the ventral wall of the
ventricle, while the other bears six chord tendine. The third papillary muscle is
very short. It projects forward and to the right, into the cavity of the ventricle, from
the septum near its ventral border, just back of the right auriculo-ventricular valve.
The pulmonary vessels.—The ductus Botalli persists throughout life as a hollow
vessel, closed at each end by a membrane. It
is proportionately larger in a pup than in an
old animal, but even in the latter it is well —
Va developed.
There are four pulmonary veins. On the left
side one large one comes from the anterior lobe
of the corresponding lung and enters the left
auricle at its anterior left aspect. From the
posterior lobe on the same side three veins,
decreasing in size from before backward, con-
verge toward the posterior outer aspect of the
left auricle and unite near it, forming a single
‘trunk less than half an inch long. Ov the
right side a very large trunk comes from the
most posterior lobe of the right lung and is
joined by a smaller vein from the middle lobe.
The common trunk thus formed is very short,
resembling the one ou the left. These two
empty very close together into the posterior
part of the left auricle. The anterior vein on
the right side is formed by the union of numer-
ous branches from the anterior and middle
lobes of the lung, of which branches the most
posterior is the largest, and goes backward
and inward dorsad to the right auricle ‘and
base of anterior vena cava, to the anterior
right aspect of the left auricle.
The systemic arteries.—The aortic arch gives
off two main trunks, the brachiocephalic and
left subclavian. The brachiocephalic is very
short and gives off close together, first the left
common carotid and then the right common
Fie. 3. “ba Abdominal aorta : carotid. The remaiuder of the trunk continues
ex, il. External iliac. ‘ rh a ;
eo ree Hite: outward and forward as the right subclavian.
al. Allantoic vessels. Where the latter leaves the thoracic cavity it
ep. Epigastric artery, = : SG aces
gives off three principal trunks, the internal
mammary, the vertebral, and the thyroid axis.
The internal mammary runs inward and backward along the dorsal side of the
costal cartilages just external to the sternum.
The vertebral artery ‘arises from the subclavian a little internal to the origin of
the internal mammary. It runs forward and inward, entering the canal of the verte-
CIRCULATORY ORGANS. 15
bral foramina at the sixth vertebra. It passes through the transverse foramen in the
atlas, turns dorsally and runs along the groove between the transverse process and
the anterior expansion bearing the facet for articulation with the condyloid process,
and then goes through the foramen in the dorsal part of this to enter the cranial
cavity by the foramen magnum. After leaving the transverse foramen of the atlas it
gives off a branch backward to the muscles
of the back of the head and to the dee},
muscles of the dorsolateral aspect of the |
neck. The two arteries run forward along \
the ventrolateral aspects of the medulla ob- Lf |
longata, but toward its anterior end they y
converge and unite. The single median
trunk thus formed just back of the pons
Varolii gives off a branch on each side to
the cerebellum. The remainder goes for-
ward to the infundibulum, where it breaks
up into a number of branches, one on each
side to the anterior surface of the cerebellum
and the others to the thalamencephalon and
prosencephalon.
The thyroid axis is distributed to the
muscles of the neck and shoulder. Its first
branch is one given off outward, and curves
over the anterior aspect of the shoulder, and
then goes, posteriorly to the muscles on the
dorsal aspect of the same. In front of this
a second branch is given off inwardly. This
goes forward a short distance and then di-
vides into two vessels, both of which curve
over the anterior aspect of the shoulder to
_ the superior muscles of the same. The main
trunk turns dorsad and then backward, soon
to divide into numerous small vessels to the
deep muscles of the neck and shoulder.
Each common carotid at the base of the
skull divides into an external and an internal
carotid, the latter entering the cranium by
the carotid canal.
The abdominal aorta gives off a coeliac
Fic, 4,—Right anterior venous system.
axis, upper and lower mesenteric, renal and rin. right mnominate.
. - Pa A int.j. internal jugular.
genital vessels, and then divides into an ex- ex. j. eee:
. oye ° vert, vertebral vein
ternal and internal iliac artery on each side. : az. azygos vein.
In some cases the proximal ends of the in- apie Paternal eaeimisey vel,
ternal iliacs form a short, common trunk. The external iliac gives off in the abdominal
cavity an epigastric artery, which runs forward on the ventral wall of the abdomen,
being distributed to the same, and then leaves the abdominal cavity and becomes the
femoral. The internal iliac runs backward laterally into the pelvic cavity. It gives
16 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
ofi an allantoic vessel a short distance back of its origin, which runs ventrally and
forward along the side of the urinary bladder to the anterior end of the same, where
the right and left vessels fuse with the urachis. They are hollow trunks in the adult
and contain blood. Back of the head of the ilium the internal iliac artery gives off a
smal sciatic branch. Other branches are given off to the pelvic organs.
The systemic veins.—The vena cava anterior is formed by the union of the right
/
Fia. 5.—Veins of fore limb of pup, one-half natural size.
and left innominate trunks. These run ‘transversely across the anterior part of the
thoracic cavity, and hence with the vena cava anterior they make a T-shaped vessel.
A short distance infront of the auricle the vena cava receives the azygos vein, which
is joined near its termination by two smaller veins from the neighboring muscles. |
Just a little back of its anterior end it receives ventrally the internal mammary vein
This is formed by the union of four vessels, two large inner ones and two smaller
n
SYSTEMIC VEINS. 17
outer ones, These run forward along the costal cartilages with the internal mammary
artery between the two of each lateral pair. The common trunk formed by the union
is very short.
Each innominate divides into three trunks, the
vertebral, common jugular, and subclavian. The
vertebral goes to the head through the vertebral
canal. The common jugular is very short and is
formed by the union of an external and internal
‘jugular. The external lies laterally along the
neck. It is formed at the base of the skull by the
union of veins from the exterior of the head and
lower jaw. A short distance back of its anterior
end it is joined by a vein running forward from
the dorsal aspect of the shoulder and neck.
About half way down two smaller ones unite
with it that come from the dorsal surface of the
neck. Near its lower end, finally, a large branch
curves over the anterior aspect of the shoulder
from the dorsal surface of the same and unites
with it just in front of the shoulder. The mus-
cles of the neck and shoulder are hence abun-
dantly supplied with both arteries and veins; the
veins of this region emptying into the external
jugular corresponding in size and numbers with
the branches of the thyroid axis. The internal
jugular is formed at the base of the skull by the
union of numerous branches from the exterior
and interior of the head. The most important
of these are: Two veins curving around the pos-
terior ends of.the lower jaw from the muscles
laterad of this and from the posterior lateral 4 v
aspect of the head; a vein from the interior of
\
N
y
the cranium which leaves the same by a small
foramen in the anterior part of the ear capsule f
and which then goes backward and downward
along the lesser cornu of the hyoid and receives
a branch from the tongue; a vein from the base 1,
\
of the head and the soft palate, and the main
trunk from the jugular foramen in the skull.
The internal jugular is much larger than the ex-
ternal. It receives no important additions along _Fis. 6.—Posterior venous system of left side.
v.¢.p, Vena cava posterior.
the neck. ¢,il. common iliac vein.
1 i ini ‘ ex. il. external iliac vein.
The subclavian vein is formed by the union of $4; Qrrern ay ise vein
i i 2m. femoral vein. :
numerous veins from the fore limb. . i aes vein trom plantar surface of hind flipper.
The inferior vena cava is formed at a variable *: *- median candal and sacral vein.
point either between or back of the kidneys by the union of the converging common
iliac veins. Each of these is formed farther back by the union of the external and
5974—pPT 3——2
18 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
internal iliac veins. The former is composed of the femoral vein from the hind limb,
where it is formed by the union pf numerous trunks, of which the long saphenous is
the largest, and of another vein beginning on the plantar surface of the hind flipper
and then running forward superficially along the inside of the tibia and across the
upper end of the thigh into the abdominal cavity. Where the latter vein pierces the
peritoneum it receives the two epigastric veins of the same side. These lie one on
each side of the epigastric artery. The external iliac receives a vein from the
dorsal wall of the abdominal cavity. The internal iliac is formed at the posterior
end of the pelvic cavity by the union of veins in that region. It increases as it
passes forward along the dorsal wall of the pelvis by receiving veins along its course.
In the posterior part of the abdominal cavity the two internal iliacs are united by a
transverse commissure, into which a small median caudal and sacral. vein empties.
Beyond this the internal iliac veins diverge and each unites with the corresponding -
external iliac. The external and internal iliac veins are connected also by a com-
missure, joining the latter just back of that between it and its fellow and the former
a short distance back of its anterior end. A lateral vein from the pelvic organs
empties into this commissure near its inner end.
The veins of the reproductive glands join the vena cava just back of the renal
veins.
The portal vein.—The portal vein remains throughout life connected with the
umbilicus by a hollow vitelline vein, and with the vena cava inferior just where this
vessel pierces the diaphragm by a likewise hollow ductus venosus. Both of these unite
with the portal vein between its two branches, going to the anterior right and left
lobes of the liver. ; ,
THE REPRODUCTIVE ORGANS.
The male organs.—The testis is elongatedly oval, with the dorsal border a little
concave. The epididymis begins at the anterior end, goes backward along the concave
side, enlarging at the same time, and then at the posterior end of the testis turns
forward on the inner side of the first part. It then again decreases in size and
becomes the but slightly convoluted vas deferens.
The scrotum is very long, but is entirely shut off from the abdominal cavity. By
means of the extremely elongated cremaster muscles, however, each pouch can be
drawn up far under the skin and fat of the pelvic region of the body close to the
ventral pelvic muscles. Each cremaster arises from the ventral surface of the
vertebra, just back of the posterior border of the kidneys, and is inserted along
the entire length of the corresponding scrotal sac.
The upper part of the urethra is enlarged and its walls are greatly thickened and
glandular. The vasa deferentia unite into a common tube a short distance back of
the neck of the bladder, which immediately enters the glandular part of the urethra
and open within on a flabby papilla.
The spermatic veins join the vena cava just back of the renal vessels. Each
is formed by numerous veins near the surface of the testis, which converge and unite
at its anterior end. Except near the vena cava the spermatic veins are very much
convoluted, and each is surrounded by an inner layer of spongy tissue and by an
outer membranous sheath.
The penis is composed of two large corpora cavernosa having their distal halves
ossified, and of a membranous corpus spongiosum and glans. The penis of a bull is from
FEMALE ORGANS. 19
10 to 11 inches long. The corpora cavernosa are united, the lines of their union being
represented by a dense vertical plate. Between the two ventrally is a groove, the
sulcus urethralis, the oor of which is formed by the membranous corpus spongiosum.
The distal half of the penis is composed mostly of a bone, club-shaped proximally aud
expanded vertically at its distal end. Transverse sections of the penis show that this
bone consists of the united and ossified terminal halves of the corpora cavernosa.
The posterior end of the corpus spongiosum forms no differentiated glans, but covers
the end of the bone simply as a thin membrane. The urethra enters the penis at about
its middle, and opens to the exterior below the distal end. The penis is ordinarily
bent into a V-shaped position, the angle being at the anterior end of the bone. The
proximal unossified half projects backward and the distal half forward below the other.
The female organs.—Each ovary is shaped somewhat like a spherical wedge with
the edge lying longitudinally and turned dorsally. It is also slightly notched so that
the ovary is kidney-shaped in dorso-ventral profile. It is connected with the liga-
mentum latum at the notch and near it on the inner surface with the anterior inner
aspect of the horn of the uterus ;
on the same side, the exterior of
the latter being directly continu-
ous with the ligamentum latum
in front. Each ovary is inclosed
in a recurved fold of the suspend-
ing ligament forming a pouch
almost closed, a small opening
being left on the inner side near
the dorsal edge. The vagina is
wide and expands anteriorly.‘
Below the widened part it re-
ceives the urethra on its ventral
surface. The uterus is double;
the two horns diverge in front,
but their approximated posterior
ends are coalesced for some distance. The distal end of each horn is rounded and
lies close to the ovary of the same side. The very much convoluted Fallopian tube
enters very near the extremity on the anterior dorsal aspect. It runs forward to
the anterior end of the ovary, going ventral to it, and-then runs backward again on
the inner side to near the posterior end. Here it opens on the inside of the ovarian
sac by a slightly enlarged mouth with plicated edges. The ovaries are supplied with
blood by vessels from the inferior vena cava and the abdominal aorta. The vagina
and uterus receive their blood from branches of the pelvic vessels.
About 2 inches forward from the posterior opening of the vagina its inner walls
present a large backward-projecting fold. The free margin of this fold is very
irregular and above and below it is extended in two wide conical flaps. The free end
of the lower one is slit transversely and this fissure forms the vaginal opening of the
urethra. This fold separates a lower vestibular region of the vagina from the vagina
proper. The clitoris lies along the floor of the former. About half way forward to
the point of divergence of the uterine horns is a second internal fold in the walls of
the vagina. The dorsal part of this fold forms a thick pad-like thickening on the
Fie. 7.—Testis and spermatic vein of young male, natural size.
NY
20 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
vaginal well. The free border is ‘elsewhere produced into papilla. The lumen above
this fold is much smaller than below and is soon divided by a vertical partition. This
marks the beginning of the horns of the uterus, and the free lower end of the septum
Fig. 8.—Urogenital organs of female, reduced.
ao. Dorsal aorta.
v.c.p. Posterior vena cava.
al.v. Allantoic veins. _
ur. Urachis, the ovarian capsule of the ligamentum latum is round.
ap 2 eae attaching ovary to ligamentum latumn.
i. Kidney. :
ov. Ovary.
fal. Fallopian tube.
is terminated by a small papilla-like valve that may close either opening. In the
nongravid uterus the lumina in the fused parts are considerably narrower than in the
divergent parts of the horns.
BRAIN OF FUR SEAL. 21
The mammary glands are two in number. Each is loug and triangular, reaching’
from the fore limb to the posterior end of the body. The two are divergent in front,
but posteriorly are closely approximated but not united. Each is provided with two
very small abdominal teats. In a very old cow the mammary glands become absorbed
and mostly replaced by fat.
THE URINARY ORGANS.
The kidneys are oval, with the inner border slightly concave, and are a little
flattened dorso-ventrally. In a bull they are about 4.75 inches long. The hilus is
small. The pelvis of-each divides ultimately into a large number of small tubules,
ending each in a calyx. The papille opening into these calices have no regular
arrangement, since they are turned in all directions either toward or away from the
hilus. The urinary bladder is small, about 2.5 inches in a bull, and is pear-shaped.
The wrachis is large and remains so throughout life.
THE BRAIN OF THE FUR SEAL, CALLORHINUS URSINUS;
WITH A COMPARATIVE DESCRIPTION OF THOSE OF ZALOPHUS CALIFORNIANUS, PHOCA
VITULINA, URSUS AMERICANUS, AND MONACHUS TROPICALIS.
By Pierre A. Fisu, D. Se., D. V.&.,
New York State Veterinary College, Ithaca, N. Y.
INTRODUCTION.
The specimen was from a young male pup 25 inches in length, weighing about 12
pounds. The brain was still incased in the dura, and on the basal surface portions of
the cranial bones were left adherent to this membrane. An occasional cut through
the dura caused a protrusion or hernia of the cerebral substance.
The weight of the brain in the fresh condition, as reported by Mr. Lucas, was 10
ounces and 240 grains. This included the dura with the attached cranial fragments.
The specimen was preserved in a “rather strong solution of formalin,” and, except
for some swelling of the tissue and softening of the interior, was in a very good condi-
tion. The bloating was indicated by the increased weight, which, immediately after
the receipt of the specimen, December 12, was found to be 13 ounces, a gain of about
3 ounces; the closure of the fissures and the cerebral hernias. The weight without
dura and attached fragments of cranial bones after preservation from September 1 to
December 12 was 93 ounces and: 80 grains (avoirdupois). The lateral girth was 26
centimeters. The longitudinal girth with the oblongata cut off at an even level with
the caudal surface of the cerebellum was 24 centimeters, being slightly less than the
former. This may, perhaps, be accounted for to some extent by the tape resting
slightly in the intercerebral cleft, and to the bloating, as this would affect the lateral
rather than the longitudinal circumference.
The brain, as indicated by the girth measurements, was of a subglobular form,
slightly tapering at the ends, and its outer substance, though firm, was not unyielding.
Twenty-four hours’ immersion in 95 per cent alcohol served to contract the nervous
tissue sufficiently to open the fissures, and yet to retain enough flexibility of their
22 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
walls to permit of an easy examination of their depths. In order to obtain the desired
results, after photographing the dorsal and ventral surfaces of the entire brain it was.
cut across and the crura cerebri or mesencephalon and the cerebellum and oblon-
gata separated. The cerebrum was then divided by a section along the median line,
separating it as nearly as possible into two equal halves.
REMOVAL OF DURA.
t
The falx showed an interesting development; its frontal portion, especially in the
region of the olfactory bulbs, being of considerable depth, then becoming very shallow
along the middle of the length of the cerebrum and becoming very deep again in the
intercerebral cleft in the caudal region of the cerebrum. A distinct longitudinal
venous sinus as in the human brain is not present; but in place of it is a vein of
some size lying to the right of the intercerebral cleft and receiving the contents of
the dorsal cerebral veins. In connection with the weak development of the falx
along the middle of its length, there was noticed an interdigitation of the gyres of
the mesal surface of the hemicerebrums in this region. This intimate overlapping
of the gyres on the mesal surfaces of the two hemicerebrums is possibly correlated
with the deficiency of growth of the falx here, and may serve in a measure to
increase the firmness of the union of this region and prevent any undue strain upon
the callosum, which lies some little distance from the dorsal surface of the cerebrum.
This interdigitation of the mesal gyres is also present in the sheep, where the
falx is also deficiently developed. If the hemicerebrums be divided with a sharp
knife without first separating the pial adhesion of the gyres, the gyres will be cut.
An artifact of this nature has, indeed, been mistaken by one writer, in an article on
Phoca, for the cut surface of a bundle of fibers dorsal to and larger than the callosum,
and designated by him as the commissura suprema.
The tentorium in Callorhinus is very strongly developed, apparently extending the
whole depth of the transverse archlike cleft between the cerebrum and cerebellum.
The tough, fibrous tissue of the tentorium is, moreover, very noticeably reenforced by
the presence of osseous tissue. Where the falx joins the tentorium there is an exten-
sion of this osseous tissue in a vertical direction into the falx—a circumstance which
certainly is not common in the majority of other animals, but has been noted by
Turner in Macrorhinus.
TERMINOLOGY.
With the existing uncertainty relating to the homology of the fissures of the brains
of the carnivora and that of the human species, much confusion has resulted in the
present nomenclatare. Some have made a direct homology, others have proposed a
fissural type solely and only for the lower forms, while still others have blended the two,
and some have utilized a system of names devised by themselves. On the lateral
surface of the various fissured brain types there is at least one fissure—the Sylvian—
which is quite constantly present and on the mesal surface the hippocampal fissure.
In the matter of nomenclature no attempt has been made to follow the Jaw of
priority; but those fissural names, whether of old or recent date, which seemed most
appropriate concerning position and relation have been adopted, and, with perhaps
but one or'two exceptions, no new names have been introduced. It has been the
purpose to use an intrinsic terminology and to substitute for the sometimes indefinite
BRAIN OF FUR SEAL. 23
terms, “anterior,” “posterior,” “superior,” and “inferior,” terms of more universal
applicability—“ cephalic,” “caudal,” “dorsal,” and “ventral.” For “cephalic” and
“caudal” Professor Wilder has recently suggested “praeal” and “postal” as equiva-
lents; and for “cephalad” and “caudad,” “praead,” and “postad.” ‘
Where certain of the fissures or gyres have been submerged for a portion or the
whole of their course, they have been designated as such, or the equivalent terms,
“subfissure” or “subgyre,” proposed by Wilder, have been used.
In the study of the fissures mere surface appearances are not accepted as final.
A fissural entity is not always easy to define. The best apparent guide is the relative
depth throughout: the course of the fissure. We may commonly assume that the
greatest depth is at about the middle of its length, and that it becomes gradually
shallow toward each end until it reaches the surface. Such a simple condition,
however, does not usually exist. One fissure may join the end of another, giving
the appearance at the surface of a long, continuous fissure. By separating its walls
or “sounding” its depth the true state of affairs is easily perceived. The presence
of a shallow, whether it be near or at a distance from the end of a fissure, would
séem-to indicate that at some time during development this shallow has been or will
be represented at the surface and serve to separate two independent fissures.
CALLORHINUS URSINUS.
Cranial nerves.—The cranial nerve roots of Callorhinus are well developed and need
no special comment. In the case of the optic nerves we do not find the X-shaped
chiasma, as in Phoca, but the nerves run parallel to each other for a short distance
from the chiasma before diverging toward the eyes.
The third pair or oculomotor nerves have a straight lateral direction from their
apparent origins, but at. the lateral border ef the hypophysis they bend abruptly upon
themselves and proceed cephalad, formiug a very distinct right angle.
The olfactory lobes are fairly well developed.
Fissures.—No special mention will be made of the gyres (convolutions). These
are naturally formed.from the involutions of the fissures, and it is believed that a
careful description of these furrows will by implication include that of the gyres
sufficiently for our present purpose.
The olfactory fissure is completely hidden by the olfactory crus and bulb; when
these are removed a shallow fissure is apparent, which becomes deeper toward the
base of the lobe.
Forming the lateral boundary of the olfactory lobe is the rhinal fissure, which
passes in a caudo-lateral direction to the Sylvian. An apparent continuation of the
rhinal from the Sylvian is known as the postrhinal fissure. It extends in a meso-
caudal direction for a centimeter and a half, stopping just short of the cleft between
the cerebrum and cerebellum. A careful examination of the postrhinal shows that it
has no connection whatever with the rhinal, but is continuous, superficially at least,
with the subfissure (postica) lying in the caudal wall of the Sylvian. This condition
also obtains in the adult specimen examined.
LATERAL ASPECT.
The Sylvian is a convenient fissure to begin with. There is usually some evidence
of it if the brain is at all fissured, and, in the lower animals at least, it forms a center
around which the other fissures are more or less regularly arranged. In Callorhinus
24. THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
the Sylvian extends in a dorso-caudal direction, inclining somewhat toward the verti-
cal. Apparently it terminates in a fork, but when the walls of the fissure are divari-
cated it is seen that the cephalic or anterior branch is really another fissure, which,
after its superficial union with the Sylvian, becomes a submerged fissure lying just
beneath the surface in its cephalic wall and running parallel with it to the base of the
brain, but not actually connecting either with the Sylvian or with the rhinal, The
Sylvian, on account of the subfissural complication, appears to be a larger fissure than
it really is.
In a former paper! attention was called to the fact that this vertical fissure (super-
ficial vertical branch of the Sylvian) had been mistaken for the true Sylvian. Both
fissures are well marked and can not be ignored; but it isan unusual circumstance for
the Sylvian to assume a strictly vertical position in the adult, and there would, more-
over, remain a fissure in the usual situation of the Sylvian unaccounted for. In my
former paper I designated this vertical fissure as the anterior of the Felida, and found
at a later date, while consulting Krueg’s article,’ that he questioningly represents a
similar fissure by the same name in Phoca vitulina. Callorhinus, while showing this
fissure similarly situated, instead of elucidating the complications seems rather to.add
to them and ‘to suggest a probable doubt as to the correctness of the homology with the
anterior fissure. Indeed, the conditions are strongly suggestive of its being nothing
more than the frontal portion of the supersylvian fissure. An examination of the
brains of certain bears tends to illuminate this view. In the family Ursidq, as in the
Canide, the supersylvian forms a complete arch, the caudal portion being known as
the posterior supersylvian (Krueg), or postsylvian (Owen). The frontal portion of
this arch varies in its distance from the Sylvian. Occasionally the frontal and caudal
portions are about equally distant, but when there is any difference in this distance
it appears that the frontal portion approaches more closely to the Sylvian than does
the caudal. In Ursus arctos, or the brown bear, Krueg figures the frontal portion
of the supersylvian as approximating very. closely to the Sylvian. The condition in
Callorhinus might be considered as a stage just beyond this. In the brown bear the
frontal portion of the supersylvian is still visible upon the lateral surface close to
the Sylvian. In the case of the seal it has passed over the brink, so to speak, and
is no longer visible its entire length on the lateral surface. The following diagrams
will illustrate the conditions more clearly:
Bear. 5
Seal. e
A diagrammatic representation of the relation of the Sylvian and supersylvian fissures in the bear and seal, as if seen in
section. Prss., presupersylvian; Syl., Sylvian fissure.
At the bottom of the Sylvian fissure lies the insula, presenting but a slight degree
of development. There is a suggestion of a circuminsular fissure, but in other respects
11896, P. A. Fish: A note on the Cerebral Fissuration of the Seal (Phoca vitulina), Jour. Comp.
‘Neurol., VI, 15-19.
21880, J. Krueg: Ueber die Furchen auf der Grosshirnrinde der zonoplacentalen Siiugethiere.
Zeit. f. wiss. Zoologie, XX XIII, 595-672, 5 plates.
BRAIN OF FUR SEAL. 25
the surface is entirely smooth. In the caudal wall of the Sylvian is a well-marked
subfissure. It separates a portion of the concealed cortex, forming a subgyre, which
from its size and position might be easily mistaken for the insula. The appearances
would suggest that the subfissure is the postica and the subgyre a remnant of the
Sylvian gyre.
The supersylvian fissure shows some variation on the two sides. It presents the
usual arrangement on the right hemicerebrum, forming, superficially at least, a com-
plete arch around the-Sylvian. The presence of a shallow and a slight bifurcation
near the level of the free end of the Sylvian indicates the separation of a postsuper-
sylvian fissure—postsylvian of other writers. (PI.I., fig.4.) The supersyivian curves
around the free end of the Sylvian at rather a sliarp angle and soon apparently enters
the Sylvian, but in reality is submerged in its cephalic wall. A very short cephalic .
branch is given off toward the ansate fissure before the supersylvian enters the
Sylvian. On the left hemicerebrum there are three distinct portions; the postsuper-
sylvian has a slightly more oblique dorso-caudal course, the supersylvian proper is
quite branching and more inclined to a vertical than horizontal course. One of its
branches appears to enter the Sylvian from behind, but a shallow shuts off any deep
connection. The frontal portion appears as a surface fissure for only one-third of its
course, then, as on the other side, it becomes submerged in the Sylvian. As this
portion bears much the same relation to the supersylvian as the postsupérsylvian
whether they be disconnected or not, the frontal portion will be designated as the
presupersylvian fissure. In a second specimen of the brain of an adult Callorhinus,
kindly loaned me by Mr. True, the executive curator of the United States National
Museum, both hemicerebrums showed a distinct separation of the postsupersylvian,
more pronounced than on the right hemicerebrum of the pup; but there was no sepa-
ration nor distinct appearance of a shallow indicatin gan independent presupersylvian
as in the left hemicerebrum of the pup. In the adult, as in the pup, each supersylyian
gave off a short cephalic branch before entering the Sylvian.
The lateral fissure, on account of the breadth of the brain, does not show in its
entirety upon the lateral aspect. It is 12 centimeters long, by far the longest fissure,
and is seen for a short portion of its course upon the ventral aspect, extending, on the
left hemicerebrum, to within 5 millimeters of the ventral portion of the postsuper-
sylvian. It lies in this region just in advance of the margin of the cleft between the
cerebrum and cerebellum. It then arches caudo-dorsally approximately parallel with
the hemicerebral margin, but receding from it until it fully reaches the dorsal surface,
then approaching to within 8 or 9 millimeters of the intercerebral cleft, it continues
its arched course in a cephalo-ventral direction, approaching to within 5 millimeters of
the presupersylvian fissure at about the level where the latter becomes submerged into
the sylvian.
The lateral is a deep fissure, and no distinct evidence of shallows could be detected
along its course, although in certain places the presence of submerged buttresses
interfered to some extent with the soundings, the average depth being from 10 to 13
millimeters. The cephalic extremity of the fissure terminates in a fork, more marked
upon the left hemicerebrum than on the right. Does this widely forked terminus
represent the ansate fissure? It has the same appearance and relation to the lateral
as seen in the cat, and, provisionally, it is here so designated.
26 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
The gyre, bounded by the lateral and supersylvian fissures and their parts, is
indented by numerous branches originating from the above-named fissures. There
are also occasionally independent minor fissures present in this gyre.
The ectolateral fissure—The ectolateral ou the right hemicerebrum is a distinct
fissure. It is present on the ventral surface near the termination of the postrhinal.
It then proceeds dorso-caudally, parallel with the postsupersylvian and for about the
same distance. On the left side it is a shorter fissure and superficially is continuous
with the dorsal portion of the postsupersylvian, but a shallow separates a deeper
connection. In the adult Callorhinus the fissure is as on the right hemicerebrum of
the pup.
The coronal fissure is about 3 centimeters in length-and extends, except for a
. Slight caudal convexity, in an almost vertical (dorso-caudal) direction. Its greatest
depth is 8 millimeters. On the left hemicerebrum it gives off a slight spur, pointing
toward the Sylvian. In Callorhinus it represents, perhaps, the least complicated
fissure in the brain.
The cruciate fissure is not at all represented upon the mesal surface of the brain.
It is seen best from a dorsal view. It arises at the margin of the intercerebral cleft.
It arches in an obliquely cephalo-lateral direction. From the cephalic extremity of
the cruciate, at a depth of 15 millimeters, there passes off another fissure, which
Krueg has represented as the precruciate in certain carnivora, nearly to the mesal
margin, just dorsal to. the olfactory bulb. The depth of these fissures at their
junction is from 12 to 15 millimeters. Between these fissures and the intercerebral
cleft there is a triangular-shaped area, to which Mivart has applied the name of
“arsine lozenge” (Turner), thought by Mivart to be of considerable significance.
Just caudal to the cruciate fissure is a small fissure corresponding to the posteruciate
of Krueg. On the left hemicerebrum it is triradiate; on the right it is straight.
The superorbital fissure has no connection with the rhinal. Its length is 25
millimeters and its depth 8 to 10 millimeters. It has a slight lateral convexity, but
has no branches.
The medilateral fissure.—The name of this fissure is particularly appropriate in
Callorhinus. Not only is it on the mesal side of the lateral, but for a portion of its
course is actually on the mesal aspect of the brain. It curves around-the caudal
margin of the hemicerebrum just on the verge of the margin. Between the lateral
and medilateral fissures there is a gyre averaging about 15 millimeters in width, in
which there are two or three secondary fissures, which would seem to indicate an
attempt at the division of this gyre into two.
\ MESAL ASPECT.
The callosal fissure presents no marked peculiarity except upon the left hemi-
cerebrum, where, instead of continuing around the genu of the callosum, it proceeds
toward the dorsal margin, or is continuous, with a fissure coming from this margin.
On neither hemicerebrum is there any appearance of a fissure immediately surround-
ing the genu. The hippocampal fissure occupies its usual position, arching from the
splenium around the optic thalamus to the lip of the pyriform or temporal lobe.
The splenial fissure.—On the right hemicerebrum this fissure, if prolonged upon
the dorsal aspect, would be continuous with the cruciate. It is separated by a gyre
4 millimeters in width. ‘he fissure passes ventro-caudally and a little beyond the
.
~
BRAIN OF HAIR SEAL. 27
splenium on the ventral aspect, and it apparently terminates in a wide fork or else
enters a fissure passing at right angles to its own course. Sounding the fissure at
this point gives some indication of a shallow separating the dorsal branch of the
fork. Following the appearances designated by Krueg in his diagrams of the condi-
tions found in some of the carnivora, the splenial proper includes the ventral branch
of the fork, while the dorsal branch may represent what he calls the postsplenial.
On the left hemicerebrum the splenial fissure penetrates the hemicerebral margin and
appears for a short distance on the dorsal surface. A smaller but well-defined fissure
lies in front of the splenial. On the left side it cuts the dorsal margin. For the
present we may designate it as the presplenial fissure. It corresponds very well with
the fissure which Kiikenthal has called fissura sublimica anterior.
The marginal or supersplenial just passes the meso-ventral margin of the hemi-
cerebrum about 10 millimeters caudad of the splenial. It extends approximately
parallel with it to the dorsal margin, which it cuts, and on the right hemicerebrum
extends on the dorsal surface for about 15 millimeters. On the left hemicerebrum
the fissure branches just at the margin. The main portion, however, continues
latero-cephalad for about 20 millimeters. In the gyre between the splenial and
marginal fissures a well-represented secondary fissure is seen.
A well-defined but unnamed fissure lies on the meso-ventral surface. It arises at
the caudal margin aid proceeds in an angular course toward the ventral end of the
splenial; it then swerves latero-cephalad and terminates not far from the postrhinal.
Its position corresponds approximately to the collateral fissure in the human brain.
This tentorial surface of the cerebrum has numerous secondary fissures and
branchings, some of which seem large enough to merit special mention. One such
inconstant fissure, lying parallel with the postsplenial, suggests a similarity to the
occipital. It cuts the hemicerebral margin slightly, and the relation of the lateral
fissure at this point suggests in a way the paroccipital of man. This occurs on the
left hemicerebrum. On the right the postsplenial has much the same appearance.
At the cephalic end of the mesal surface beyond the genu of the callosum there
are two pretty well marked fissures. The one nearest the callosum’ corresponds to
the genualis of Krueg; part of falcial, Owen; or falcial, Wilder. On each
hemicerebrum this fissure cuts the dorsal margin slightly. The other and more
slightly developed fissure lies nearer to the olfactory bulb. It does not reach the
dorsal margin, but extends farther in the ventral direction. This fissure corresponds
to the rostralis of Krueg; part of falcial, Owen; or subfalcial, Wilder.
PHOCA VITULINA.
The frontal portion of the cerebrum is more foreshortened than in Callorhinus,
and there is therefore a slightly different arrangement of corresponding fissures
in that region. One of the most striking differences is the olfactory portion of the
brain. In Callorhinus it is the larger, the olfactory bulb is of considerable size, the
crus is correspondingly wide and lies flush with the mesal surface. In Phoca the bulb
is relatively smaller and the crus has atrophied to scarcely more than a pedicle; it lies
deeply imbedded in the olfactory fissure; it is removed 6 to 8 millimeters from the
mesal surface by a portion of the cortex which projects fully 5 millimeters beyond
the crus.
The precribrum (anterior perforated space) is well developed and shows with
greater distinctness than in Callorhinus.
a
28 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
The rhinal fissure is apparently continuous with the Sylvian, but upon raising the
overlapping portion of the frontal lobe it is seen to maintain its continuity and to
appear again caudal to the Sylvian as a true postrhinal, differentiating a larger:
pyriform lobe than in the case of Callorhinus. There is no connection between the
postrhinal and the subfissure in the caudal wall of the Sylvian as in Callorhinus.
\
LATERAL ASPECT.
The Sylvian fissure pursues a much more obliquely dorso-caudal course than in
Callorhinus and presents the same amount of complexity with relation to the surround-
ing fissures. In its caudal wall lies a subfissure (postica?) and the intervening Sylvian
gyre. Both are relatively better developed than in Callorhinus. The supersylvian
has much the same relation to the Sylvian as in Callorhinus. It is not distinctly sep-
arated from the postsupersylvian, although the interlocking of some of the subgyral
buttresses suggests the possibility of an attempt at separation. On each hemicerebrum
there is a continuation of the postsupersylvian dorso-caudad beyond the supersylvian.
The frontal end of the supersylvian apparently forks, one branch bending toward
the Sylvian, the other continuing cephalad. The ventral branch has a superficial
union with the vertical fissure which has been mistaken for the Sylvian. In my former
paper! I designated this fissure as the anterior. Krueg also had taken the same view.
Fia. 3.
Fic. 3. A cross section of a fissure showing the obliquity of its walls.
Fig. 4. A diagram to show the difference in the course of a fissure at its surface and depth. The heavy lines repre-
sent the fissural walls at the surface. The dotted lines and arrow represent the buttress (b) bounded by the deep course
of the fissure. :
From the conditions already described in Callorhinus, it seems to me that this fissure
is, after all, a disconnected portion of the supersylvian and that presupersylvian would
in some ways be a suitable name for it. It is submerged in the cephalic wall of the
Sylvian for the ventral third of its course. In Callorhinus the ventral two-thirds of
the corresponding fissure becomes submerged. ,
The lateral fissure, as in the case of Callorhinus, is the longest fissure in the brain.
In Phoea, however, it is confined entirely to the dorsal aspect of the cerebrum, and at
its caudal end it appears to terminate in a widely diverging fork or perhaps a small
transverse fissure, possibly corresponding to the lunate (Wilder) of the cat. Its course
is approximately parallel with the intercerebral cleft and is somewhat tortuous. At
its cephalic end it appears to communicate with the cephalic branch of the supersy]-
vian. This appearance will be discussed more fully under the description of the
ansate fissure.
The ectolateral fissure occupies a relatively higher or more dorsal and caudal
position than in Callorhinus. It is of a more secondary character and courses approxi-
mately parallel with the postsupersylvian.
1 Loe cit.
e
BRAIN OF HAIR SEAL. 29
The cruciate, unlike that of Callorhinus, is represented upon both the mesal and
dorsal aspects. On the left hemicerebrum a shallow is present in the dorsal portion
not far from the margin. No distinct “ursine lozenge” is present here as in Callor-
hinus. The foreshortened condition of this region may have something to do with its
absence.
A well-defined postcruciate fissure is present on the left side. It presents a zygal
(Wilder) or quadriradiate form. A slight secondary fissure near the olfactory bulb may
represent a rudimentary precruciate fissure.
The superorbital fissure shows a better development than in Callorhinus and,
similarly, has no connection with the rhinal. But the opposite end, dissimilarly,
extends farther and is overlapped by the olfactory bulb.
The medilateral is not present in Phoca as a distinct fissure. Its location is
occupied by a series of short, disconnected fissures.
The coronal fissure is a relatively longer fissure than in Callorhinus, but is not so
entirely disconnected from adjacent fissures. Its dorsal end lies caudal to the cruci-
ate. On the left hemicerebrum it is separated by a shallow from an apparant con-
nection with a continuation of the cephalic branch of the supersylvian. On the right
hemicerebrum the shallow is suggested by the interlocking at this point of two sub-
merged buttresses.
The ansate fissure, while. not distinctly represented as an independent fissure,
would, it seems to me, be indicated by the fissure extending from the coronal to the
cephalic branch of the supersylvian, where, on each hemicerebrum, the interlocking
of submerged buttresses. would again suggest a shallow shutting it off from the branch
of the supersylvian, and then continuing to the lateral fissure, where a slight spur
pointing toward the intercerebral might indicate its separation from the lateral.
Owen in his figure of the hemicerebrum of Phoca represents a corresponding fissure as
the coronal.
MESAL ASPECT.
There is a slight appearance of the callosal fissure in the splenial half of the cal-
losum, but none at all for the remaining half.
The hippocampal fissure is well developed and needs no special comment.
The splenial fissure is well developed and in general is as described for Callorhinus,
except that its position is farther removed from the frontal portion of the cerebrum
and that its cephalic end cuts the margin and is shown upon the dorsal surface. The
postsplenial has about the same relations as in Callorhinus.
The sublimica fissura of Kiikenthal' is poorly represented in my specimen of
Phoca, and is somewhat confused with smaller branches and secondary fissures. It
lies between the splenial and the callosum. Kiikenthal finds this fissure also present
in Phoca grenlandica, Phoca barbata, Macrorhinus leoninus, and Otaria jubata. In
Callorhinus there was no appearance of this fissure whatever. The fissura sublimica
‘anterior of the same author is more clearly represented. In my former paper, on
account of its position dorsal to the callosum, I designated it questioningly as the
supercallosal. On the left hemicerebrum it is well developed and connects with the
cruciate. On the right side, however, the fissure is independent and much smaller.
In addition to this fissure, on each hemicerebrum, there is another dorsal to it and in
front of the splenial. In Callorhinus I have called it the presplenial.
1 Untersuchungen an Walthieren, 1889.
*
30 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
The marginal or supersplenial is well shown in Phoca as in Callorhinus, but lies
nearer to the dorso-caudal margin, approximately parallel with the splenial. In the
intervening gyre there are a few secondary fissures.
On the meso-ventral surface a fissure corresponding to the collateral is also
present, but, unlike Callorhinus, it has connection with ‘the postrhinal. Between the
collateral and the postsplenial there is another well-marked but unnamed fissure which
is parallel to the former. It corresponds, perhaps, to the fissure in Callorhinus which
I have spoken of tentatively in connection with the occipital.
The genualis and rostralis are represented, but the latter differs from that in
Callorhinus in being much less developed and occupying a more ventral position at a
more or less acute angle to the genualis.
URSUS AMERICANUS.
This brain, while fairly well preserved, had been considerably mutilated in removal,
so that for purposes of illustration and reference, a specimen from Ursus thibetianus,
kindly loaned by Prof. B. G. Wilder, was utilized; so that while the figures of the
lateral and mesal aspects are from the latter specimen, the description is based almost
entirely upon the former. The general arrangement of the fissures is similar, and the
minor details need not cause misapprehension. The fissural plan of the brain is much
like that of the canine, minus the first cireumsylvian arch.
The olfactory bulbs and crura are far superior in size to those of either of the
seals. The olfactory fissure is likewise well marked.
The rhinal fissure ‘passes into the Sylvian and continues, after forming an angle
delimiting a well-developed pyriform lobe, as the postrhinal, and ending freely.
The subfissure (postica?) in the caudal wall of the Sylvian extends to and on one
side actually appeared to communicate with the postrhinal.
LATERAL ASPECT.
The Sylvian is directed in the usual dorso-caudal direction at the bottom of which
is a small and simple area representing the insula. There is no appearance of a
transinsular fissure, although the presence of a subgyre and. subfissure (postica?) in
the caudal wall of the Sylvian might superficially indicate it.
The supersylvian fissure forms a complete arch around the Sylvian. Theyre is no
indication of a separation of a post supersylvian except near the free end of the Syl-
vian, where a branch from the supersylvian extends into the adjacent gyre.
The lateral fissure forms a curve approximately parallel with the supersylvian.
As compared with Phoca and Callorhinus it is much shorter. If the conception of
the ectolateral is correct, the latter is continuous caudally with the lateral, a slight
spur indicating the place of probable separation. The ectolateral extends parallel
with the postsupersylvian, but its ventral end does not reach so far in Ursus ameri-
canus, while in the Thibet bear the reverse is the case.
The ansate fissure is a cephalo-ventral continuation of the lateral, a small spur
of the latter indicating a point of separation. The ansate describes a curve, the con-
vexity pointing toward the Sylvian.
The coronal Jissure continues from the ansate and ends freely near the superor-
bital. The convexity of its curve like that of the ansate points toward the Sylvian.
The point of its separation from the ansate is indicated by a spur more marked than
that between the ansate and the lateral.
e
BRAIN OF CALIFORNIA SEA LION. 31
The superorbital, unlike Phoca and Callorhinus, has a very distinct connection with
the rhinal fissure at about half of the distance from the Sylvian fissure to the olfac-
tory bulb. It curves cephalo-dorsad with its convexity pointing cephalad.
The cruciate fissure is more highly developed than in either of the seals. It
appears slightly upon the mesal aspect and on the dorsal surface extends obliquely
cephalo-laterad. Around its free end the coronal fissure demarcates a well-formed
sigmoid gyre. The appearances found in Phoca approximate the conditions regarding
the gyre more than in Callorhinus.
Between the cruciate and ansate lies the posteruciate fissure. On the left hemi-
cerebrum it is well marked; on the right it is smaller and superficially connected with
a minor fissure. ,
On the right hemicerebrum a branch is given off from the cruciate extending
cephalo-mesad. Itis the precruciate fissure. On the left hemicerebrum it is an inde-
_pendent fissure. In neither case does it reach tle mesal surface. The precruciate
with the cruciate forms a well-defined triangular’ area—the “ ursine lozenge” of Mivart.
On the dorsal surface between the lateral fissure and the intercerebral cleft it is well
marked, but is not as deep as the other fissures. It is the confinis. On the right
hemicerebrum a short fissure connects it with the lateral.
The medilateral fissure arises at the caudal end of the cerebrum near the mesal
margin, in much the same position as in Callorhinus, and continues down the ventral
aspect close to the caudal margin.
MESAL ASPECT.
The splenial fissure does not reach the dorsal margin as in the case of Phoca and
as on one side in Callorhinus. Its cephalic end is also nearer the caudal end of the
cerebrum than in either of the other two forms. In this respect the fissure occupies
an intermediate position in Phoca. It arches around the splenium of the callosum and
courses along the tentorial surface of the cerebrum as far as the caudo-lateral margin,
ending eight millimeters from the free end of the postsupersylvian. Two or three
short branches are given off along its course. Beyond. the presence of a slight spur,
there is no evidence of a postsplenial fissure, nor of ‘a supersplenial or marginal, as in
the case of the seals. A well-developed presplenial or fissura sublimica anterior ot
Kiikenthal is present, resembling that of Phoca more than Callorhinus. No distinct
fissura sublimica was present, except in the case of the Thibet bear, where a small
minor fissure held the proper position.
The genual and rostral fissures were present, and occupied the same general
relations to the cephalic end of the callosum as in Callorhinus. The callosal and
hippocampal fissures have the same general relations as in other forms.
ZALOPHUS CALIFORNIANUS.
Through the kind permission of Professor Wilder I was permitted to remove the
brain from this young sea lion. Its mother came originally from the Pacific coast, and
the present specimen was found dead in the cage with her while in transit to the East,
and was presumably not far from “‘term.” It measured 43 centimeters long, and has
been in the Cornell Museum of Vertebrate Zoology for some years.
The brain was in a fairly good state of preservation, and was photographed soon
after its removal. It was too delicate to permit of much manipulation, and some of
32 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
the fissures were not sounded as thoroughly as in the other specimens. The cerebrum
of this specimen does not show the same degree of complexity relative to the fissura-
tion as indicated by Murie! in Otaria jubata. A direct comparison of the fissures,
however, is not, easy, as the latter author attempts to homologise them with those of.
the human cerebrum.
The olfactory apparatus is well developed. Notas largely as in the bear, however,
but greater than in either of the seals. The rhinal fissure, as in the other forms, is
well marked, and passes caudad into the mouth of the Sylvian fissure. The post-
rhinal is formed from the subfissure (postica?) and has no connection whatever with
either the rhinal or Sylvian. 2
LATERAL ASPECT.
The Sylvian is prominent and occupies its usual position. In its caudal wall is a
subfissure (postica?) and subgyre, which, as in Callorhinus, is continuous on the
ventral aspect with the pyriform or temporal lobe.
The supersylvian, with its cephalic and caudal portions, the pre- and postsuper-
sylvian, is more nearly in accord with the conditions found in the bear than in either
of the seals. It represents an intermediate condition between the two. The presuper-
sylvian lies very close to the Sylvian, but does not actually enter it, as in the seals.
Its average distance from it is about 4 millimeters, while the distance from the Sylvian
to the postsupersylvian is four times as great, or 16 millimeters. There is no sign of
disconnection between either the supersylvian and the postsupersylvian, or the super-
sylvian and the presupersylvian. The supersylvian forks or sends out a branch
cephalad connecting with the ansate fissure exactly as in Phoca.
The lateral fissure is, relatively to the length of the cerebrum, shorter than in any
of the other forms. Its cephalic end and its relation to the ansate is again exactly the
same asin Phoca. On the left hemicerebrum the lateral is disconnected at a little more
than half of its length by a narrow isthmus.
The coronal fissure corresponds with that of Phoca, connecting, superficially at
least, with the ansate, and thus, indirectly, with the cephalic branch of the supersylvian
and the lateral.
The ansate fissure, as has already been intimated, like that of Phoca, is irregular
in its form and connects with the fissures above mentioned.
The ectolateral fissure is quite well down toward the ventral portion of the cere-
brum and, as in Cailorhinus, appears upon the ventral aspect.
The medilateral Jissure is scarcely perceptible on the lateral aspect; it lies exactly
along the caudal margin of the hemicerebrum, as in Callorhinus, and is better seen in
a mesal view.
The cruciate accords, in position and relation, more closely with the conditions
found in the bear and Callorhinus; but while it reaches to the mesal surface of the
hemicerebrum it does not cut it as far as in the bear and Phoca.
The precruciate and the postcruciate fissures are likewise present and have exactly
the same relations as in the bear and Callorhinus.
MESAL ASPECT.
& z
The callosal fissure is well developed. On the right hemicerebrum it does net
continue around the genu, as in the left.
11874, Transactions of the Zoological Society of London,
BRAIN OF CALLORHINUS. 33
The splenial fissure does not extend as far cephalad as in Callorhinus, nor as far
dorsad asin Phoca. Itis situated more closely to the splenial half of the callosum than
in either of the preceding or in the bear, A branch is given off in the region of the
splenium proper which seems comparable to the postsplenial in the seals. A slight
spur in this region in the bear may indicate an analogy.
The presplenial is not represented as a distinct fissure on the left hemicerebrum,
the only possible suggestion of it being a forking at the cephalic end of the splenial.
On the right hemicerebrum a small but distinct fissure lying cephalad of the splenial
nay represent the presplenial. .
The marginal fissure is well represented, and on both hemicerebrums cuts the dorsal
surface, as in Callorhinus. In Phoca, although relatively long, it does not reach the
dorsal margin at all. In the bear the marginal fissure is not represented.
The genual and rostral tissures are but slightly developed in this specimen and
bear the same relations as in other forms.
The cruciate fissure shows slightly on the mesal aspect, and in its relations to the
other parts resembles that of the bear more than any of the others.
FISSURAL INTERPRETATIONS OF OTHER WRITERS.
The Syivian fissure, in Phoca, at least, has been located as a vertical fissure (pre-
supersylvian) which has, for a portion, enlece of its length, been submerged in the
cephalic wall of the true Sylvian. Numerous writers have also described this condi-
tion as the anterior and posterior branches of the Sylvian. The two fissures morpho-
logically are entirely distinct. In Hyrax Krueg does not represent any indication of
a Sylvian fissure whatever.
The supersylvian is very commonly called the suprasylvian. Leuret and Gratiolet
have confused this fissure with the lateral in Phoca.
Following Krueg, the fissure which is designated as the postsupersylvian is
commonly known as the postsylvian of Owen. What I have designated as the pre-
supersylvian, and which is only exceptionally independent, is usually described as
the anterior or frontal portion of the supersylvian.
A fissure corresponding to the coronal is represented by Krueg as the presylvian
in Phoca. Kiikenthal makes a similar representation. Turner, in Macrorhinus,
represents a corresponding fissure as the presylvian and a branch connecting with it
as the coronal. In Odobenus (walrus) lie figures as the presylvian an apparent
coutinuation of the lateral, and represents as the coronal an apparent continuation of
a third arched.fissure, designated by him as the medilateral.
The superorbital fissure in carnivora generally i is designated as the presylvian by
many writers.
The cruciate fissure is shown by Krueg, in Phoca, as existing only on the mesal
aspect, occupying the position of the presplenial, or anterior sublimica of Kiikenthal.
Leuret and Gratiolet represent the fissure as seen on the ‘ventral aspect at the
cephalic end. Other writers place it as usually seen in carnivora at the cephalic end
of the dorsal aspect, where it may or may not reach the mesal surface.
THE LATERAL VENTRICLE (PARACOELE).
Our removing the dorsal portion of the hemicerebrum just dorsal to the callosum
the lateral ventricle is revealed. In the bear the cavity bends cephalo-ventrad to
5974—PT 3——3
fd
34 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
form the precornu and caudo-latero-ventrad to form the medicornu. The striatum is
a well-defined body forming a portion of the floor of the ventricle in the cephalic
region. Parallel with the oblique margin of the striatum is the fimbrial margin of
the hippocamp. Between these two margins—the rima (great transverse fissure), the
choroid (para) plexus—a continuation of the velum enters the floor of the cavity.
The hippocamp pursues its usual curved direction in the medicornu.
In Phoca the lateral ventricle is relatively very much larger than in the bear, and
the parts present quite different relations to each other. The striatum is the same
as in the bear; along its margin is a well-developed plexus, but between this and the
fimbrial edge of the hippocamp there is an area equally as large as the striatum; this is
the optic thalamus, but that portion of it represented in the floor of the cavity presents
the same general appearauce as to its surface (endymal) as do the other parts. The
supposed delicate endymal membrane extending from the plexus to the fimbria has been
designated as the paratela by Wilder. The hippocamp, then, is removed some little
distance from the striatum and arches around the surface of the thalamus in a ventral
direction. Candal to the hippocamp, the cavity is about as largely represented, and in
size forms a disproportiouately large postcornu. Along the mesal wall just caudal to
the hippocamp is an ental ridge correlated with an ectal depression—the splenial
fissure. This is comparable to the calcar or hippocampus minor of the anthropoid and
human brains. It is larger in proportion than in either of the above. The splenial
in this case, for a part of its course, at least, is therefore a total (Wilder) or complete
(Cunningham) fissure, since the whole thickness of the parietes is involved, the ental
elevation being correlated with the fissural depression. In this specimen of Phoca,
then, we have two total fissures—the hippocampal (always) and a portion of the
splenial. :
The conditions just described might naturally suggest a homology with the ape
and human calear, and that the splenial fissure, in this seal possessing a postcornnu,
might be homologized with the occipital or calcarine fissure in man. A question might
properly arise here as to which fissure it might be homologized with. In the human
fcetus the occipital is a total fissure, but loses its totality (ental elevation) in the adult.
Its position might favor its homology with the splenial, for if the latter were rotated
farther caudad it would come to occupy approximately the same position as the
occipital. To homologize with the calcarine we would have to imagine a still farther
rotation of the splenial. The calcarine is a total fissure throughout life, and is the
correlative of the calear. Some doubt may, therefore, be expressed, assuming the
homology to be reasonable, whether this hippocampus minor represents the occipital
eminence—a foetal condition in the human brain—or the calcar, a structure persistent
in the adult.
The relative disproportion in the growth of the caudal or occipital portion of the
cerebrum may have some bearing in accounting for the presence of the postcornu.
Tiedemann, in his figure of the lateral ventricle of Phoca, gives no indication whatever
of a postcornu.
In Callorhinus the conditions resemble more closely those in the bear ; therima is
narrow and the thalamus does not appear at all in the floor of the ventricle. A
slight caudal spur of the cavity at the medicornu represents the postcornu. The
splenial fissure, so to speak, just escapes the cavity, lying immediately caudal to it.
BRAIN OF MONACHUS. 35
In the walrus, Turner! represents a dissection of this cavity, but shows no indi-
cation of a postcornu; but in the text he states: “ Where the cavity of the ventricle
curved downward and outward into the horn, an indication of a recess was seen in its
.posterior horn, but it did not amount to a cornu, and there was no elevation which
could be called a hippocampus minor. ”
Murie,’ on the form and structure of the manatee, figures a well-developed
postcornu. He states that “there is an undoubted posterior cornu, a fully developed
hippocampus minor, and an eminence I am inclined to recognize as eminentia collat-
eralis.” The same author, on the anatomy of the sea lion Otaria jubata figures a more
extensive postcornu than is represented in the manatee, and describes it as “ stretching
backward and outward with a very regular sweeping arch, and goes well back into the
occipital lobe, terminating in a shallow, tapering extremity. The eminentia collat-
eralis is not distinctly defined, but what appears to represent the outwardly bulging
hippocampus minor has a length of 0.7 of an inch, and at widest is 0.3 to 0.4 broad.”
Wilder, in the Anatomical Technology, in indicating the lines of inquiry likely to
be most productive of results in the homology of the-human and feline fissures, states
that “between the ordinary carnivora and the monkeys are two groups whose brains
should be studied with especial care; the seals have a rudimentary postcornu and
occipital lobe, and these parts are said to be developed in the Lemurs, which have
affinities with both the carnivora and the primates.”
In none of the accounts have I seen any direct mention of the correlation of the
splenial fissure with the calear in these aquatic forms. This fact, even if it be of no
direct use for homology, is at least interesting.
MONACHUS TROPICALIS.
In August, 1897, I was fortunate to obtain, through the courtesy of Dr. A. H.
Hassall, Washington, D. C., two brains from male.and female specimens of the West
Indian seal (Monachus tropicalis). ‘They arrived at an exceedingly opportune time fur
comparison with the other brains dealt with in this article. A study of their form
and fissural relations throws much light on some of the points which seemed quite
aberrant in Phoca when compared with Callorhinus alone.
The general form of the brain would suggest a position intermediate between the
fur seal and Phoca, particularly in the frontal region which is somewhat foreshortened
and broader than in Callorhinus. The caudal portion of the cerebrum is much
elongated, noticed particularly upon the mesal aspect when measured from the
splenium of the callosum, as if, perhaps, to compensate for the foreshortened frontal
region. The cerebrum also shows a slightly greater overlapping of the cerebellum.
The olfactory bulb and crus resemble the corresponding parts in Phoca, but show a
slightly greater development. Renae
Postica.—In all four hemicerebrums, this fissure sends a branch to the surface,
thus appearing superficially as a branch of the Sylvian. The postica is less
easily distinguished in Monachus than in any of the other forms, as it is submerged
practically to the bottom of the Sylvian fissure. In Callorhinus there is a branch
1888, ! Turner, report on the seals collected during the voyage of H. M. S. Challenger in the years
1873-1876.
2Loe. cit.
36 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
corresponding to that of Monachus, but it does not extend deeply enough to connect
with the postica.
The postrhinal appears as the merest trace of a fissure, and has a very superficial
connection with the postica.
The Sylvian fissure. It isin the Sylvian region that we get numerous clews to
the intermediate position of Monachus. In the brain of the female, the Sylvian has
practically the same direction as in Callorhinus. In the male, the true Sylvian really
branches cephalad, although there is a superficial extension in the usual dorso-caudal
direction. Apparently some unusual conditions exist here, which may perhaps be
accounted for by the nearly complete disappearance of the postica.
The presupersylvian resembles the corresponding fissure in Phoca regarding its
extreme vertical position and apparent union with the Sylvian for. only the ventral
third of its course. It differs from Phoca in not being disconnected from the
supersylvian.
The supersylvian fissure resembles that of Phoca in extending a branch of good
size to connect with the ansate.
Postsupersylvian.—In the two hemicerebrums of the male there was a connection
between the supersylvian and the postsupersylvian, much as in Phoca. In the
hemicerebrums of the female there was an entire disconnection of these fissures.
The cruciate fissure more than in any of the others resembled that of the Phoca.
It forms a good intermediate stage between Callorhinus and Phoca. As with Phoca
the fissure is represented on the mesal surface as much, if not more than, upon the
dorsal. In the left hemicerebrums of both brains the cruciate is apparently continuous
with the splenial. Upon the right hemicerebrums there is no such connection.
Precruciate.—In all four hemicerebrums the precruciate extends over upon the
mesal surface for some little distance. It is more largely represented upon the dorsal
surface, and its lateral end makes a very decided curve toward the coronal fissure.
There is almost a superficial connection between the cruciate and precruciate. The
conditions in Phoca indicate that such a connection has occurred even to the extent
of their almost complete mergence into each other.
“ Ursine lozenge.” —This area is, with the exception of Phoca, where it is undistin-
guishable, smaller than in any of the other forms. It is nothing more than a narrow
gyre, situated at a slightly lower level than the adjacent gyres, suggesting a probable
preparation of its loss of identity in Phoca.
Postcruciate-—In Monachus this fissure was the least satisfactorily represented
than in any of the other forms. In the two hemicerebrums it does not seem to be
represented at all, unless we interpret a slight branch from the cruciate as represent-
ing it. In the right hemicerebrums the fissure is distinctiy present, but is very small.
The Splenial accords more closely with Phoca in its position, reaching the mid-
dorsal region instead of extending farther cephalad, as in Callorhinus. It sends off a
branch corresponding to the postsplenial as in the other brains.
The Presplenial is well represented in the two right hemicerebrums, but in the
two left it appears to connect the true splenial with the cruciate. The interlocking of
submerged buttresses at the proper points indicates a superficial connection merely,
The Marginal fissure is more poorly developed than in any of the other forms,
except the bear. A series of short or interrupted fissures take its place.
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. 37
A well-marked Collateral fissure is present and resembles the corresponding
fissure in Callorhinus very closely.
Postcornu.—Perhaps the most important point in connecting Monachus with
Phoca is a very well developed postcornu. Callorhinus shows the merest trace of one
and in the bears it is absent. In Monachus it does not go so far as in Phoca, a greater
portion of the caudal wall being solid. The floor of the postcornu in Monachus is
quite distinctly-convex. This convexity of the internal surface is found to be cor-
related with an external depression, the lower or ventral portion of the splenial fissure.
At the more vertical portion of the fissure, namely, opposite the caudal end of the
callosum, the splenial fissure loses its totality and becomes an ordinary fissure for the
remainder of its upward course. The postcornu stops at the level of the depth of the
splenial fissure in the callosal region. We have not, therefore, as in Phoca, a well-
developed calcar (Hippocampus minor). The internal convex surface already spoken
of in connection with the ventral portion of the splenial fissure offers a suggestion as
to the inception of the calcar which finds its fulfillment in Phoca.
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS.
The average canine brain, as a matter of convenience, may be accepted as a simple
type of a carnivore brain. The fissures are-clearly demarcated, and there is an absence
of much branching or secondary fissuration.
Around the Sylvian there are three arched fissures separating thecortical substance
into four distinct folds or gyres. In the brain of cats, and occasionally in dogs, we
find that the arched fissure nearest the Sylvian is not a complete one; that only the
pillars are represented, the keystone being absent.
In Hyena and Proteles the frontal portion of this arch is wanting (Krueg), but the
caudal portion, fissura postica, is well represented.
In certain others of the carnivora no trace of the first arch or Sylvian gyre, with
its limiting fissure (anterior-postica), is at all present. The first arch with its fissure
has disappearéd, apparently swallowed up by the Sylvian. There are represented,
then, on the lateral aspect only two arched fissures, the supersylvian and lateral and
the three gyres which they separate. In those forms in which ouly the two arched
fissures are present, if the distance from the frontal portion of the supersylvian to the
Sylvian be compared with the distance trom the latter to the postsupersylvian, it will
generally be found to be less in the former, and this becomes much more emphasized
in the case of some of the bears, where the frontal portion of an undoubted super-
sylvian almost enters the Sylvian fissure.
In his description of the brain of the polar bear, Ursus maritimus, Turner! says:
On opening up the Sylvian fissure I found to my surprise that a definite arched convolution was
completely concealed within it. It was separated from the convolution which bounded the Sylvian
fissure by a deep fissure, which wasalso concealed. Its anterior limb, not quite so bulky as the posterior,
was continued into the supraorbital area immediately external to the rhinal fissure and to the outer
root of the olfactory peduncle. Its posterior limb reached the postrhinal fissure and the lobus hippo-
campi. I could not but think that we had here, more completely than either in the walrus or seals, a
sinking into the Sylvian fissure of the convolution which ought to have bounded it, so that both the
Sylvian convolution, properly so called, and the suprasylvian fissure were concealed within it. If
this be a proper explanation of the arrangement, then the three convolutions on the cranial aspect
would be sagittal, mediolateral, and suprasylvian, while the two complete curved fissures between
them would be the mediolateral and lateral.
1Loc. cit.
38 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
The question arises if the fissure concealed in the Sylvian may not be the equivalent
of the anterior-postica of Krueg, and the two remaining visible on the cranial surface
the supersylvian and lateral.
The mediolateral of other authors does not attain the size nor continued length in
the frontal direction as ascribed to the mediolateral by Turner.
In a specimen of Ursus americanus, I had the good fortune to discover a stage one
step beyond that described by Professor Turner. On opening the Sylvian fissure I
found in its caudal wall a completely submerged fissure, with a remnant of the Syl-
vian gyre, which might possibly be mistaken for the insula. A true insula, although
small, is present. This submerged fissure I take to be the disappearing vestige of the
ectosylvian (Owen) or anterior-postica (Krueg).
_ It would seem, then, that the condition thus described in the polar bear and
American bear would represent the method of disappearance, rather than the appear-
ance, of the first cireumsylvian arch, and prepare us for the conditions that we find in
the sea lion (Zalophus) and the seals (Phoca and Callorhinus).
In the sea lion the conditions regarding the frontal portion of the Sylvian gyre
are intermediate between the bears and seals. The presupersylvian fissure approaches
very closely to the Sylvian fissure, and the intervening portion of the Sylvian gyre,
besides being narrower than in the bears, has also sunk slightly lower than the adja-
cent surfaces, as if prophesying the conditions found in the seals.
In the seals there appears to be some evidence, if the interpretation as to the
frontal portion of the supersylvian fissure be correct, that after breaking up into
branches, with, perhaps, some disconnection of its parts, it shows a tendency to follow
the example of the anterior-postica fissure, because in Phoca, at least, the supersyl-
vian bifurcates a little beyond the free end of the Sylvian, one branch forming a well-
defined arch around it, the other branch passing on in thé frontal region. The
branch, however, which forms the arch is not a long one, but it extends to and super-
ficially connects with a vertical fissure which, for half its distance, is submerged in
the frontal wall of the Sylvian, and crops out again on the ventral aspect of the brain.
This condition holds for both hemicerebrums of Phoca. Callorhinus throws a little
light on this matter. In the right hemicerebrum the supersylvian is clearly continu-
ous with the vertical fissure submerged in the frontal wall of the Sylvian, but gives off
a very short frontal branch. Superficially it is continuous with the postsupersylvian,
but a shallow at this point indicates a partial separation. The direct continuity in the
depth of the supersylvian with the vertical fissure would seem to point to the fact that
the latter, after all, was nothing more than the frontal portion of the supersylvian,
namely, the presupersylvian.
In the left hemicerebrum the parts are a little more complicated. The postsuper-
sylvian is entirely separated, the supersylvian is entirely distinct from the frontal
portion, and is quite irregular and branching in its course, but mainly vertical in its
direction.
Thus, taking the canine brain as exemplifying a simple fissural pattern, and pass-
ing through the Felidw and Ursidw and sea lion to the seals, where the fissures are
more numerous and complicated by the presence of branches of considerable size, and
more or less disconnection of some of the principal fissures, we may arrive at conte
understanding of the relationship and changes effected in passing from simple to
complex conditions.
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. 39
In the general form of the brains that of the sea lion seemed to bear a closer
resemblance to that of the bear than either Callorhinus or Phoca—the latter the least
of all. The elongated and narrowed frontal portion of the brain as seen in the bear
is represented in Phoca by a foreshortened and broadened region, less marked in
Callorhinus and still less in Zalophus.
The development of the olfactory lobes is also interesting. They attain their
highest growth in the bear, next in Zalophus, then Callorhinus and least, in Phoca.
The triangular area on each hemicerebrum located between the cruciate and pre-
cruciate fissures and the intercerebral cleft, designated by Mivart as the ursine
lozenge and believed by him to be of considerable importauce in indicating a phylo-
genetic relationship between the Pinnipedia and the ursine group of carnivora, was
developed equally well in Zalophus and Callorhinus. In Phoca it was not observable,
although Turner states that in this form it is present but rudimentary and concealed
in the mesal fissure of the cerebrum.
The length of the lateral fissure in Callorhinus is somewhat unexpected, and in
relation resembles the continuous lateral and ectolateral of the bear. In the sea lion
and Phoca the lateral is a relatively short fissure. In all but the bear there is an
independent ectolateral fissure, but it is not so satisfactorily developed in Phoca.
The postrhinal fissure shows an interesting variation in the different forms. In
Callorhinus.and Zalophus it has no connection with the rhinal or Sylvian, but is a
direct continuation of the subfissure—postica. In Ursus the subfissure may occasion-
ally reach to it, but as a rule it is distinct and the postrhinal continues as an elonga-
tion of the rhinal. In Phoca the separation of the subfissure and the postrhinal is
still more marked, so that the rhinal and postrhinal are practically different parts of
one and the same fissure, differentiated from each other by the presence of the
Sylvian.
The presupersylvian fissure is directly continuous with the supersylvian in Ursus;
it is likewise continuous in Zalophus and in Callorhinus except upon the left hemicere-
brum of the pup. In Phoca the two fissures are distinctly separated.
The postsupersylvian is continuous with the supersylvian in Ursus and Zalophus,
but separated in Callorhinus. They are apparently continuous in Phoca, but a dorso-
caudal branch and the presence of submerged buttresses at this point of junction
would indicate that there was some attempt at separation.
In the bear there is no elongation of the paracoele to form a postcornu; in the
sea lion Murie finds a distinct postcornu present; in Callorhinus it is quite rudimen-
tary; in Phoca Tiedemann represents the paracoele with no appearance whatever of
a postcornu. My own specimen, which, so far as I know, is normal, shows a post-
cornu relatively as large or larger than in the primate brain, with a distinct calcar or
hippocampus minor in which a portion of the splenial appears as a total fissure.
With the exception of the bear, concerning which I have no data, and the addi-
tional brain from an adult Callorhinus and Monachus, all of my material was from
specimens not more than one year of age. It is believed, judging from a comparison
of the brain of the young with that of the adult Callorhinus as to bulk and complexity
of fissuration, that comparatively little or no change occurs, especially in the latter
respect.
Mr. Lucas, who has had casts of the cranial cavities prepared from the male and
female fur seals, finds but slight difference in the size of the cavities (see his figures
40
THE FUR SEALS OF
THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
of casts), notwithstanding the fact that the bulk of the body of the male is about four
times as great as that of the female.
Of the representatives of the four groups examined, the brain of Callorhinus
shows a greater number of minor fissures and a more intricate arrangement and
branching of the larger fissures. ,
With regard to the ground plan of the fundamental fissures, and allowing for
the difference in the shape of the brains, that of the eared seals—Callorhinus and
Zalophus—-approximate in general more closely to that of the ursine carnivora than
does Phoca.
The latter, or earless seal, in some respects appears aberrant.
The
arrangement of the cruciate and postrhinal fissures would seem to link it with the
canine and feline carnivora, while the peculiar development of the occipital region
and the large development of the postcornu with its calear point toward primate
conditions.
affinities with both the carnivora and the primates.
Asa inatter of convenience, a table of the more interesting regious in the repre-
sentatives of the different groups examined is herewith appended:
The group of lemurs is also said to possess a postcornu and to have
Region. Ursus. Zalophus. Callorhinus. Monachus. Phoca.
Is Sabdsenne pos- | Present...-..-..-. Present......----- Prosettsess sees axe Not very distinct...) Present.
ica,
2. Postrhinal ..... Continuation of | Continuation of | Continuation of | A mere trace, very | Continuation of rhi-
3. Presuper-
sylvian.
. Postsuper-
sylvian.
. Precruciate ....
. Cruciate
oo
. Postcruciate ...
. Minor fissures. -
. ‘ Ursine Loz-
enge.”
. Postcornu..-...-
Calcar
. Medilateral fis-
sure.
wow
. Marginal tis-
sure.
. Collateral fis-
sure.
. Insula
rhinal, excep-
tionally of pos-
tica.
Continuous with
supersylvian,
Mostly dorsal..-..
Dorsal, just cut-
ting mesal mar-
postica.
Continuous with
supersylvian.
Continuous
Present...........
Not many . as
Present..........-
.| Numerous . .
postica,
On left hemicere-
brum of pup,
disconnected,
but usually cen-
tinuous.
Disconnected
Present...........
Present.........-.
-| Indistinct
superficial con-
* nection with pos-
tica.
Connected with su-
persylvian.
}
In four hemicere-
brums; two
showed a connec-
tion and the other
two a disconnec-
tion.
Mesal and dorsal ...
Dorsal and mesal ...
Rudimentary
-| Quite numerous ....
Small
Large
Present...-....-..--
--| A. series of short
interrupted fis-
sures,
Present.............
nal.
Disconnected.
Continuous, but
with indications
of shallows.
Not clearly shown.
Dorsal and mesal.
Present.
Quite numerous.
bsent.
Very large.
Very distinct.
A series of small
disconnected _ fis-
sures,
Present.
Present, but con-
nects with post-
rhinal.
) Slight.
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. Al
Reference letters.
ans .....ansate. per .....postcruciate.
b ......- buttress. pl......-plexus.
cal.....- callosum. pre ...-.precornu.
calc.....calear. prer ....precruciate.
ef.......confinis, prh.....postrhinal.
el.......callosal fissure. prsp ...-presplenial.
col...... collateral. prss ...-presupersylvian.
cor .....coronal. psp....- postsplenial.
cr ......cruciate. pss -..--postsupersylvian.
el.......ectolateral. Tececaas rostral.
f........fimbria. Th esses rhinal.
g -.--...genual. 80 252503) superorbital.
hip -..-- hippocampus. SP eeesck splenial.
1......--lateral. BER ess striatum.
marg....imarginal. Syl ....- Sylvian.
mc.....-medicornu. BB eis supersylvian.
in] ......medilateral. . | eee thalamus.
pe ...... postcornu. 2 eee ursine lozenge.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE V.
Fig. 1.. The ventral aspect of the brain of the fur seal, Callorhinus ursinus, showing in addition to the
fissures the cranial nerves and the cerebellum. On each side of the latter is a depression
into which fits the petrosal portion of the temporal bone.
. The dorsal aspect of the brain, showing the cerebellum largely concealed by the cerebrum.
. The left lateral aspect of the cerebrum,
The right lateral aspect of the cerebrum.
. The mesal aspect of the right hemicerebrum.
. The mesal aspéct of the left hemicerebrum.
Oop w bo
EXPLANATION OF PLATE VI.
Fig. 1. The ventral aspect of the brain of the hair seal, Phoca vitulina, slightly modified from Tiede-
mann’s figure.
The dorsal aspect of the cerebrum of Phoca vitulina, after Tiedemann.
. The left lateral aspect of the cerebrum.
. The right lateral aspect of the cerebrum.-
. The mesal aspect of the right hemicerebrum.
. The mesal aspect of the left hemicerebrum.
Oo w& bo,
EXPLANATION OF PLATE VII.
. The left lateral aspect of the cerebrum of the sea lion, Zalophus californianus.
. The right lateral aspect of the cerebrum of Zalophus.
The mesal aspect of the right hemicerebrum.
The mesal aspect of the left hemicerebrum.
. The left lateral aspect of the cerebrum of Ursus thibetianus.
. The mesal aspect of the right hemicerebrum of Ursus.
. Dissection of the left hemicerebrum of Callorhinus, showing the lateral ventricle with a very
rudimentary postcornu.
Dissection of the left hemicerebrum of Phoca vitulina, showing the presence of the calcar and
large postcornu in the lateral ventricle,
Fig.
Nawrewr
foo}
PLaTE I,
DENTITION OF FUR SEAL, NATURAL SIZE.
1-4, pups, 5-8, females,
PLATE II,
DENTITION OF FUR SEAL, NATURAL SIZE
Males.
PcaTe Ill.
LIVER OF SEAL PUP, NATURAL SIZE.
d v., ductus venosus.
itelline vein.
.U., Vi
vt.
PLATE IV.
UTERUS AND VAGINA OPENED FROM THE DORSAL SIDE, NATURAL SIZE.
PLATE V.
5 6
BRAIN OF FUR SEAL, Callorhinus ursinus, REDUCED.
For explanation see page 41.
PLATE VI.
BRAIN OF HAIR SEAL, Phoca vitulina, REDUCED.
For explanation see page 41.
BRAINS OF SEALS AND BEARS, REDUCED.
For explanation see page 41.
CASTS OF CRANIAL CAVITIES OF FUR SEAL, NATURAL SIZE.
1. Young pup. 2. Adult female.. 3. Old male.
II.—THE BREEDING HABITS OF THE PRIBILOF FUR SEAL.
S By FrepEric A. Lucas.
The more evident features in the breeding of the seals have been so often described
that, save for the sake of completeness, it might seem unnecessary to repeat them
here. The truth, however, has of late years been so overlaid and interwoven with
errors and falsehoods that it is practically impossible for one who has not made a
special study of the subject to separate the one from the other. So far back as 1839
Bishop Veniaminof published a very good description of the habits of the seals on
their breeding grounds, and that account, after the elimination of one or two very
excusable errors, is as true to-day as when it was written. In 1882 Elliott well
described the breeding habits of the seals, but about the same time the publication ot
Allen’s work on North American Pinnipeds gave wide circulation to the many errors
contained in the account of Captain Bryant.
Shortly after the ice has left the islands, late in April or early in May, the first
bulls make their appearance, and after loitering about the rookeries haul out and take
their stations for the season. The bulk of the males, however, do not put in an appear-
ance ‘until later, but by the Ist of June the majority have taken positions on the
breeding grounds, although their numbers gradually increase for some time longer
through the entry of bulls which-force their way in and establish harems. The bulls
appear to take up the places occupied the previous year, for in many cases bulls were
seen in 1897 in localities where they had been noted in 1896, though there are, of
course, many exceptions to this rule. There is much less fighting at this time than
we had been led to expect, and the males pass much of their time in sleeping while
awaiting the arrival of the cows. These begin to straggle in early in June, and
although the majority of cows have come on land and brought forth their young by
the 10th of July, yet they continue to arrive up to the middle of August, or even
later, a newly born pup having been seen on August 27, 1896.1
1 The exact dates on which these various occurrences took place in 1896 are as follows:
ieee Sia UI gett ag cok wea anede Sesser paige and anes Sa sepedaienadeersiels Apr. 13
Fitet killable seals arrived soc ees.s-:c sea cesses cadenne seme saeens oe oete tes eeecdaces veseenessers May 11
First cow seen on North rookery, St. George..---. .--- ---. -- ene cee nn nee ee eee eee eee eee ee June 8
First cows, five, seen on reef... 2.22. 22 ween eee nee nen cen ne cee cece eens cee e ee cee June 12
First pups seen, on reef -2.. .s..sedece sieweececcesweuweessessceesiewes Sade Sous sede cers ceeseiecesed June 14
Newly born pup on North rookery, St. George - . cMthd de bone dese ceee eeee settemeteaee acess: AUB
Last newly born pup seen on St. Paul......---.-------- --- 2-2 eee eee eee ee eee ee eee kemeiee Aug. 27
Apparently gravid cow seen on Staraya Artel ......---. 2.22 cone cee cee eee ee ce eens eee eee Aug.17
Last copulation, between young bull and 2-year-old cow, Tolstoi........-.. 22.24 -ee0-++-04--Aug, 27
43
44 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
From July 1 to July 15 or 20 may be called the height of the rookery season, |
when the harems are at their fullest and the bulls are most active in keeping the
cows within bounds. During this time there is little visible change, and even @ count
of the cows may show little or no difference between two days, although a systematic
count made day after day will show fluctuations.! That there is a steady though
imperceptible going and coming of cows is revealed by the fact that a count of the
pups shows them to be twice as numerous as the cows that are on the rookery
grounds at any one time, although for a while the arrivals about balance the
departures, giving the rookeries an appearance of stability that they really do not
possess.
About the 1st of August comes the period of rookery expansion, when the rigid
discipline of the harems is relaxed. The cows, now nearly all impregnated, are allowed
to come and go as they please, and the entire mass of seals draws back from the
water’s edge, making it possible to pass between the seals and the water without
creating much disturbance. This spreading of the rookery limits is apparently due
to the movements of.the young, who work out of the harems and assemble in bands
back of the breeding places, podding, as it is termed. The nursing cows returning
from the sea naturally seek for their pups, and this in turn brings the cows back of
their original positions, the whole body of seals being thus brought from 50 to 200
yards, or even more, inland. A certain amount of this expansion is also due to the
influx of 2-year-old cows which make their appearance in the main after the Ist of
August and are eagerly appropriated by the bulls, particularly by the waiting bulls.
Fighting among the bulls continues throughout the rookery season, not only
between the proprietors of adjacent harems, but more particularly between the bulls
with cows and those without, and among the idle bulls. The fur seal is ever ready to
construe any movement on the part of a neighbor as a threatened attack, and quite
as ready to meet him half way, although there is much threatening that results in
nothing and many brief encounters that end in a vicious bite or two, serious enough,
in fact, but of comparatively little moment to a bull seal. Two. bulls will rush sav-
agely at oné another, and just before meeting throw themselves flat on their breasts
and simply puff two or three times at each other like small locomotives. The most
severe combats take place while the harems are forming, or later on, as just stated,
between the lord of a harem and some idle bull who has made up his mind to dis-
possess his fortunate relative. These fights are sometimes long protracted and the
bulls get badly bitten about the back, shoulders, and fore flippers, the back of the
arm being a favorite place of attack. The several fights which were brought to a
finish were concluded by the bulls coming up to each other, chest to chest, and push-
ing with all their might, the bull which was forced backward yielding and rushing
for the water, to the great disturbance of that section of his rookery.
While, as previously stated, the main features in the life of the fur seals have
been long known, of late years many questions, once looked upon as of purely scientific
interest, have become of great practical importance, rendering a more detailed and
exact knowledge of the life history of the fur seal not only desirable,
but necessary.
1 Judging from Dr. Stejneger’s remarks, the weather seems to have much less j
oo : ‘ ° ess influence ih
on the Pribilofs than it does on the Commander Islands, for no such general depletion of ee ere
takes place on a bright, warm day on the former islands as he notices several times on the Commanders
VIRILITY OF YOUNG BULLS. 45
Among such questions are the ages at which the males and females begin and cease
to breed, the frequency of births, the alleged frequent occurrence of “barren cows,”
the necessary proportion of the two sexes, and their natural proportions at birth.
Much of this information, aud particularly that which depends on thé study of the
reproductive system, could not have been secured in the better days of the Pribilofs
without killing many females and creating great disturbance on the rookeries. The
great destruction of the females at sea and the consequent thinning out of the rook-
eries has rendered it possible to get about the breeding grounds more readily than
formerly, while by obtaining from pelagic sealers the bodies of skinned seals extensive
series of females of all ages were secured for examination.!
Mr. C. H. Townsend, to whom belongs the credit of having inaugurated this
important line of work, with its incontrovertible evidence, collected aud examined
the ovaries of 106 seals in 1895, and during the present season (1896) we procured 75
more, while these were supplemented by others obtained from pups and females of
various ages killed for examination. From this material data were obtained which:
rendered it possible to substitute facts for probabilities and to refute some of the wild
assertions that had found their way into print.
As stated by Elliott, the testes of the young male are inguinal, descending into
the scrotum toward the end of the second or commencement of the third year;* and
Mr. Andrew Halkett has found living spermatozoa in a 3-year-old male. The males
are thus occasionally capable of procreation at the age of 3, but they are rarely able
to enter the rookeries before the age of 6, while the majority of bulls on the breeding
grounds are 7 years old and upward. The failure of the young bulls to enter the
rookeries is not due to any lack of desire, but simply because they have not attained
their full growth and are not large and strong enough to fight their way in; and here
again “natural selection” works to the advantage of the fur-seal race by permitting
only the full-grown, vigorous males to possess harems. Many of the younger bulls
obtain cows and get their first experiences in the art of ruuning a harem after the
rookeries have expanded and the young females have made their appearance, and it
is very amusing to see these youngsters endeavoring to assume the airs and manners
of veterans. At this time, too, the idle bulls, which were unable to obtain cows earlier
_in the season, secure a cow or two, either young or old, and establish small and tem-
porary harems—temporary because there are no young to cause the cow to return after
she has again taken to the water.
1In this connection I would like to express my obligations to Capt. W. H. Roberts, as well as to
the officers of the Rush, for the cordial assistance rendered in securing material and for the interest
taken in the work. It is not a pleasant, and often no easy, task to transfer several boat loads of
greasy, bleeding seal carcasses from the decks of a sealing schooner to the revenue cutter, but the:
work was most cheerfully done, and the material thus secured was invaluable.
2Mr. Townsend made.a commencement of this work in 1892, but it was not prosecuted vigorously
until 1895.
3 A curious feature in the seals is the voluntary or involuntary withdrawal of the testes from the
scrotum. From the study of a few individuals it seemed probable that, as in squirrels and many
other animals, the testes were completely retracted at the end of the season; but more extended
observations by Mr. Clark and myself showed that while this was to some extent true, much depended
on the position of the animal, and also that they seemed to be under the animal’s control. When a
seal lies on his back, the testes are pressed backward and appear; when he rolls over and starts to walk
away, they are wholly or partially withdrawn, thus furnishing a safeguard against injury when the
animal is running about over rocky ground. See also page 18,
46 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
The young females come on the rookeries for the first time after the harems of
adults have broken up, and-there is more or Jess admixture of seals of all ages. They
are'not in the harems in June or early in July, and in 1896 they were first seen on
St. Paul July 27, and on St. George July 28, their appearance on the two islands
being thus. practically simultaneous. As to the age of these cows and the fact that
this was their first appearance on the rookeries there can be no question; the yearlings
and 2-year-olds are readily known by their size, while to settle the point beyond
dispute, two young cows were shot and examined on July 28, both proving to be
2-year-old virgin females. From the last of July until about the end of August these
2-year-old cows were numerous.
The congested condition of the. blood vessels and the presence in both ovaries of
Graafian follicles in various stages of development show that in young females coming
to the rookery for the first time both branches of the uterus are functional, and
impregnation may oc¢ur in either. The young are borne alternately on either side,
and if, for example, the first pup is developed in the right branch of the uterus, the
second will be borne in the left, first one ovary then the other being functional. The
reason for this alternation is that the time between delivery and coming in heat is so
short that there is not sufficient time for that branch of the uterus in which the young
was developed to resume its normal condition, this operation probably requiring six
weeks. All this was very well demonstrated by Mr. Townsend in his report for 1895,
and his statements have been corroborated in every particular. The difference in
size between the ovaries, and particularly between the branches of the uterus, is
usually perceptible, not only to the eye, but to the touch, until late in August or
early in September, although by that time specimens will be met with in which the
impregnated branch has commenced to swell while the other has nearly or quite
resumed its normal size. After the maturing and impregnation of an ovum the other
Graafian follicles appear to be absorbed, since in ovaries examined in September
where the corpus luteum was well advanced the Graafian follicles were small.
There is not the slightest evidence to support the theory advanced by Dr. Slunin
that the seal breeds. biennially, for all evidence tends to show that from the third year
onward throughout life the female brings forth a pup annually.
It is commonly stated that the females come in heat within 48 hours and that the
period of gestation is about 360 days, but more ‘accurate information is needed on
these points, and I am inclined to doubt the correctness of the above statements,
or at least am unwilling to accept them as a general law. From data obtained in
1897, given in full at the end of this chapter, it would seem that from three to six
days elapse between the birth of the pup and the coming in heat of the cow. In
1895, the season being late, Mr. Townsend made the following observations on the
condition of the harems June 25 and 26: “The harems in course of formation along
the beaches were as yet very small, the average number of females in each being
five. About one-fourth of the females were nursing new-born pups, the others being
conspicuously gravid. Some sections of rocky ground were still covered with snow,
and a number of new-born young with the red placente still attached were lying upon
the snow. Occasional females were noticed arriving from the sea, but none were seen
leaving. There were no signs of any then coming into heat.” If the interval between
delivery and coming in heat is so short as generally supposed, it would seem that some
of these females should have evinced some signs of desire. Moreover, if the period of
PERIOD OF GESTATION. AW
gestation were uniformly 360 or even 350 days, since the 2-year-old females do not
make their appearance on the rookeries until the last part of July, it would finally
come to pass that all the young would be born late in July, which is not the case.
The known facts are that the majority of pups are born between July 1 and J uly 15,
but quite a number of births take place after that date, occasional births occurring up
to September 1. A small, black pup was, however, killed on Kitovi, on October 16,
which was in good condition and weighed only 144 pounds. This could, at the most,
have been only a month old, very likely not even that, and must have been born in
September. A large number of these small, late pups were seen on the various rook-
eries in October, so that scattering births certainly occur as late as the first week in
September. On account of these late births, and the date at which the 2-year-old
virgin cows make their appearance on the rookeries, there can be little doubt that the
first period of gestation is shorter than the succeeding ones. Were this not so we
would find a larger percentage of births late in the season, and it would be impossible
to account for the retrogression of births toward the early part of June and July. Mr.
Clark, who has devoted some time to this question, writes as follows:
The height of the season falls about the 10th or 15th of July, and it is reasonable to suppose that
the number of cows then visible and the increased number of births about that, time are due to the
influx of the 3-year-old cows which come to bring forth their first young. These 3-year-old cows were
impregnated about August 1 of the preceding year. If we suppose that the first period of gestation is
350 days, this would bring the time of delivery about July 15. If the interval between delivery and
impregnation is about five days, the period of gestation remaining the same, the second birth would
fall about July 5, the third June 25, the fourth June 15, ‘the fifth June 5, which is impossible, or at
least a sixth would be, for no births are recorded before June 10. :
If, however, we consider the second and succeeding periods of gestation to be about 355 days, the
interval between birth and impregnation remaining the same, the births would fall as follows: Second,
July 10; third, July 5; fourth, July 1; fifth, June 25, etc., the eighth falling on June 10. The cow
would then be 10 years old, probably still in bearing condition; but there is every reason to suppose
that the period of interval between delivery and impregnation is less than five days. This figure, as
well as the one representing the period of gestation, has simply been taken arbitrarily for purposes of
illustration. With shorter intervals, say of three or even two days, the number of births necessary, to
cover the interval in which births can occur would be increased.
This is purely a theoretical discussion of this matter. The dataregarding the period of gestation
and the interval between delivery and impregnation are wanting, and it would require several
seasons of painstaking observations to supply them. But we have definite information regarding the
time at which the virgins are first served. We also know that the great mass of pups are born before
or about the middle of July, and we know tliat pups are born as carly as June 10 to 12. That a
cow which was originally impregnated about August 1 can eventually bring forth a pup in early June
can only be accounted for by supposing a retrogression of the time of birth, for it must be the oldest
cows that bear their pups in early June.
In order to definitely settle the matter careful observations of the younger cows
are needed, although the investigation is fraught with much difficulty.
Mr, Clark, who witnessed the birth of several pups, writes:
In bringing forth her young the cow seems to take no thought as to her place. One pup was
observed to be born on a slanting rock down which it slipped as soon as released. The mother
reached down and lifted it up to her side only to have it slide down again. She repeatedly lifted the
pup back, and finally changed her position. Another cow was seen with her new-born pup on a
narrow shelf which was scarcely large enough for herself, and from which the pair were in constant
danger of falling off. The pup must have been born there, but how is a mystery.
The pup is born with the head first, though one birth was this season witnessed on St. Paul
where the hind flippers came first. Delivery seems easy. The cow shows but little evidence of pain,
though before delivery she shows more or less uneasiness, changing her position frequently, getting
48 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
up and lying down as sheep do. In the case of three births witnessed a copious discharge of water
preceded delivery. The cow shows no disposition to lick or otherwise dry her pup. She fondles and
calls over it, smelling of it, and will lift it out of the way of danger, taking it by the skin of the back
as acat would her kitten. Soon after delivery the mother draws the pup toward her breast as if to
have it suck, and it is not long before the pup is able to do so. In the case of ono birth witnessed the
cow by swinging about immediately separated the pup from the-placenta, which was not delivered
within half an hour after the birth of the pup. ‘That there is difficulty in breaking the umbilical cord
in some cases is evidenced by the fact that one pup was found imprisoned in the rocks attached by an
cousually thick cord to a rotting placenta. The pup, though a week or more old, had not moved
from its place; its flippers were white and it was unable to use them when ‘released. It had prob-
ably not moved from its place since birth. Another pup, strong and healthy, was seen walking about
with the dried placenta attached to it by a very thick cord which greatly impeded its movements.
While the female is sexually mature at the age of 2, the uterus and ovaries do
not attain their full development until some time later, the difference in size between
the ovaries of the 2-year-olds and those of the older females, though slight, being
quite noticeable. There is, however, a considerable amount of individual variation
in the size of these organs not dependent on age, and it sometimes happens that the
ovaries of a breeding female are smaller than those of a 2-year-old. The following
measurements, taken from carefully preserved alcoholic specimens, may be taken as
giving the average size of the ovaries: Two months, 10 by 13 mm.; one year, 15 by 17
mm.; two years, 22 by 25 mm.; adults, 23 by 25 and 25 by 28 mm.
As the development of the fetus is extremely slow while the cow is nursing, the
embryo is consequently so minute during August and September as to escape detec-
tion, unless carefully looked for under favorable circumstances and with the most
approved appliances. The question as to whether or not a female has been impreg-
nated therefore depends on the condition of the ovary, and it might naturally be asked
what reason there is to suppose that a scar on the ovary is not merely due to the
rapture of a Graafian follicle. In answer to this it may be said that of the 146 ovaries
of adult nursing females, examined by Mr. Townsend and myself, all bore a single old
scar on the ovary corresponding to that branch of the uterus in which delivery had
last taken place. In 78 specimens examined by Mr. Townsend in 1895 there was an
unquestionably fresh scar on 68, and on reexamination 7 of the 10 doubtful cases
proved to have been impregnated. The exact condition of the remaining 3 will never
be known, as they were not preserved, but they, too, may have been impregnated.
The 68 specimens collected in 1896, with one exception, bore a recent scar on the ovary
functional for the season, although in these instances the fact was not apparent on a
first examination.’ In specimens obtained early in September, the corpus luteum aud
corresponding branch of the uterus had increased in size, showing clearly that
impregnation had taken place, and since in no case did an ovary bear more than one
sear it is not assuming too much to say that in the fur seal ovulation is practically
synonymous with impregnation. That this should be so is not surprising when it is
considered that a female, after entering a harem, is held there by the bull until he is
satisfied that she may properly be allowed to leave; that back of the harem and along
the water front are idle bulls waiting for stray females, and that finally when the
harem system is relaxed there is an influx of young bulls who before this time could
not enter the rookeries, aud who would be likely to discover if any female were still
unimpregnated. In the possible event of a female escaping impregnation when the
first Graafian follicle reached maturity the next advanced follicle would ripen, and as
In all doubtful cases the specimen was preserved and subsequently examined in company with
Dr. William Gray, of the Army Medical Museum.
SEARCH FOR BARREN COWS. 49
no less than eight to twenty follicles in various stages of development are to be found
in an ovary the chance of a female ultimately leaving the rookery unimpregnated is
very small. It is evident also from the actions of the old bulls, a certain percentage
of whom return in September to their places on the breeding grounds after feeding,
that should any cow fail to be served in June, July, or August she would find service
even in September. Microscopic examinations made by Dr. J. J. Carroll put this
beyond doubt. Sections made from the testes of a bull killed August 26, which had
recently withdrawn from the rookery, contained no spermatozoa, while sections made
from a bull killed October 17, contained spermatozoa in great numbers. In the old
bulls the testes are more or Tess withdrawn from the scrotum at the close of the breed-
ing season, simultaneously with the withdrawal of the bull from the rookery, and his
demeanor is completely changed. From being alert and aggressive he becomes quiet
and timid. Instead of perpetually quarreling with his neighbors, bullying the bache-
lors and savagely resenting the intrusion of man, he lies down to sleep with seals of
all ages, and flees precipitately from the sight or smell of a man.
That such belated service sometimes occurs is borne out by the fact that several
hundred small black pups were noted in October on the rookeries of St. Paul. One
of these, killed on October 18, was found in good condition and with stomach full of
milk. It weighed 145 pounds. An unborn fetus, taken.from a cow on Zapadni Reef
August 14, weighed 11 pounds, and the experimental pup, taken from Tolstoi rookery
on ‘August 1, supposed to be about a month old, weighed 12 pounds. A gray pup,
killed at the same time as the small black one, weighed 29 pounds, and two weeks
before a similar pup had been killed on the same rookery which weighed 332 pounds.
The little pup could not have been much over a month old, and therefore must have
been born in September.
As a result of the examination of 146 ovaries of adult cows it can safely be said
that there is nothing whatever to corroborate Dr. Slunin’s statement that it is possible
to determine from the appearance of the ovaries how many young have been borne by
acow. In no case were two sears present on an ovary, to say nothing of there being
@ greater number, and while in a single instance there seemed to be two scars on one.
ovary a section showed that the appearance was merely superficial and not due to the
rupture of an ovum. The scar of impregnation, corpus luteum, develops very slowly
and slowly disappears, a cross section of the ovary revealing its presence long after
all traces have disappeared from the surface. Dr. Slunin, it is stated, examined the
ovaries in alcohol, and he probably mistook the slight depressions ‘causal by the
shrinkage of the Graafian follicles for scars. A section of the nonfunctional ovary
shows it to be a fipe-grained, homogeneous mass with no developing follicle, while
the ovary which is for the season functional may have as many as eight Graafian
follicles in various stages of development.
_ Careful search was made for “barren cows;” 3 females found with the bachelors
were killed for examination, and. the ovaries of all females taken during 1896, 82 in
number, young and old, were carefully studied, but in évery case save one the females
were found to be fertile, and in the majority of cases pregnant. The single exception
was an adult cow, probably 5 years old, in which the genito-urinary system had
failed to develop, the ovaries and uterus being no larger than in a yearling. The
1This animal was killed on St. Paul while I was absent on St. George, and was examined by Dr.
Otto Voss, the resident physician, and by Dr. Jordan.
5974—Ppr 3 4,
50 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
right ovary contained a single small Graafian follicle, but there was no sign of impreg-
nation or of capacity for impregnation, neither ovary showing any traces of a scar or
of the presence of a corpus luteum. The results of this examination are recorded as
follows in the diary:
On August 1 a barren cow was found in a pod of bachelors on the parade ground on Reef rookery.
From an-examination of the teeth and skull she was found to be an adult cow, probably about 5 years
of age. She was above medium length but slender, and of rather less than medium weight. The
throat was very dark brown in color, rusty below as well as above. She was killed for purposes of
study. On examination the mammez were found to be fairly large and to have undergone pathological
fatty degeneration. The glandular structure was obliterated. The ovaries were found to be small,
about one-fourth the size of those of the virgin 2-year old cows recently examined. The fallopian
tubes and uterus were similarly atrophied. The right ovary contained a small Graafian follicle and
egg. The germinal spot was visible in the egg and not impregnated. ‘There was evident no sign of
impregnation or of capacity for impregnation. No signs of corpus luteum or scars of previous impreg-
nations were visible. The opening of the bladder was so small as to require a probe tofindit. There
was no trace of hyperemia, the tissues being pale and bloodless.
This is the sole recorded instance of a cow positively known to be barren. That
female seals should occasionally be barren is not surprising, but that any number are
habitually so, either from lack of bulls or any other cause, is wholly unsupported by
any evidence and directly opposed to all known facts. That cows not in milk may be
taken at sea or elsewhere is self-evident from the fact that 11,000 dead pups were
found before August 15, but that these cows or any part of them are barren or unim-
pregnated can only be determined by an examination of the ovaries, while, from the
number of recorded observations, the presumption is that although dry they are
pregnant. Therefore statements that have been made to the effect thati the females
taken at sea, when over 2 years of age, were largely barren cows or nonbreeding
females are either deliberate falsehoods or the result of crass ignorance of evident
facts. Not only are these statements wholly unsupported by facts, but a most aston-
ishing feature about them is that they have been made by men who were not only
incapable of telling from examination whether or not a female was barren, but who
actually néver made a single examination to ascertain the truth of their assertions.
When the power of procreation ceases is unknown, but there is every reason to
believe that ordinarily it lasts throughout life. No bulls were seen so old that they
did not possess or strivé to possess harems, while the very oldest female obtained was
nursing and,but for a pelagic sealer, would have borne a pup in 1897. Here we have
only the unsatisfactory corroborative evidence to be derived from domesticated ani-
mals, but we know that many of these breed throughout life, in spite of the fact that
as they live under artificial conditions they attain a much greater age than they would
in a state of nature, where the old and feeble are soon eliminated. So if an animal
breeds during its entire lifetime in a state of domestication, it is pretty safe to affirm
that it would do so in a state of nature, while from the rarity of unpaired males or
females among wild animals during the breeding season it is a pretty safe inference
that they breed throughout life. Many horses breed as long as they live, and while
mares often cease to bear at the age of 22, the celebrated mare Primrose bore her
twentieth foal at the age of 28. The supposition that the female fur seal bears
throughout life receives strong support from the examination of a female sea lion
(Humetopias) killed for the purpose of obtaining, if possible, related evidence on this
point. The animal, as shown by the condition of the skull and the skeleton generally,
was extremely old, and yet, like the fur seal previously mentioned, had borne a pup
AGE ATTAINED BY SEALS. 51
in the spring and was prepared to bear another in the spring of 1897. An old hair
seal, Phoca largha, taken at Marunichen, was also fertile, and it may be said that so
far no female seal so old that she has ceased to breed has been taken.
The age to which fur seals attain is still problematical, and until careful experi-
ments have been made it can only be stated approximately. The females have a
complete dentition at the age of 2, but the canines of the males are not full-grown
until the age of 5. The moustache is black in the young and whitens with time.
Any female with moustache entirely white can safely be placed as older than 4 years,
and any male as older than 5. Beyond that it is difficult to say more than that a seal
is old or very old, so much may be affirmed from the condition of the true molars, but
as to the exact number of years there are no data. Mere size is no criterion, for the
variation in this respect is so great that a small animal may be much older than one
of greater bulk. Neither is the wear of the teeth a sure guide, unless checked by
some other character, for the younger of two animals may have the more abraded
teeth, although from the general appearance of the teeth, and especially the amount of
absorption they have undergone, it is safe to say that the individual is adult, middle-
aged, or old. The various parts of the skeleton must be used with caution, since
some portions seem much older than others, and unless a person has had experience,
he would be sure to think the humeri belonged to a much older animal than the ver-
tebre. Although the larger size and slower maturity of the bulls incline one to the
belief that they reach a greater age than the females, it is fair to say that no skull of
a bull whose teeth would indicate an age so great as that of some females obtained
has come under my notice. But, coupled with this, is the fact that the procuring of
bodies from the pelagic sealers has made it possible to secure a much larger propor-
tion of adult females than of adult males, so that while something like 75 skulls of
females, mostly adult, were available, there were not more than 25 skulls of old males.
There is, however, another possible reason for the lack of very old bulls. As
stated in the chapter on mortality, the death rate among females is probably very
high, but it is also probable that the causes by which the death rate is influenced act
evenly throughout life, and the struggle for existence among females is mainly with
natural conditions. The males not only fight against surrounding conditions, but
with one another, and this last factor must act more and more severely with advancing
age, until the time comes when an old bull is driven out by some younger, stronger rival,
and retires from the rookery grounds only to die. This, of course, is pure theory, but
it accounts for the fact that among the male skulls picked up in various localitigs
there were none that appearred so old as some of the females. This does not
necessarily mean that the males do not attain a greater age than the females, for as
these last, as shown by the dentition and age at which they are sexually mature, reach
maturity sooner than the males, they naturally grow old sooner as well.
The question of the proper proportion of males to females is purely problematical,
and the only data obtainable for comparison are such as can be derived from
domesticated animals, and as these are living under more or less artificial conditions
such data must be used with caution. With sheep 1 ram is deemed sufficient for at
least 50 ewes, and with cattle 1 bull to 20 or 25 cows on a range, or 1 to 50 where they
do not run at large. When running at large a single stallion is sufficient for from 20
to 40 mares, but when under control the number may be much larger, well on toward
a hundred. Among fowls, of what may be called the more natural breeds, having an
52 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
ample range, 1 cock suffices for 30 hens. So that, using domesticated animals as a
basis for comparison, we may say that 1 male to 30 females is well within the safety
limit. But these animals are naturally only polygamous to a comparatively small
extent, and the discrepancy in size between the sexes is slight, while the fur seal is
polygamous to a great degree by nature, the males are at least four times the bulk of
the females, and the necessary proportions of males to females is evidently much
smaller. Elliott figures 18 breeding females in a harem, and says that on the rookery
there are 15 to 20 females to 1 male, a number in practical accord with the average
derived from counting a very large number of harems, and this, with the doubling
now known to be needed, brings the number of cows up to 36 or 40.!_ Moreover, in
1896 the proportion of idle bulls was very great, there being 2,996 waiting bulls and
5,009 bulls with harems, so that in consequence the harems may be considered as
comprising the minimum number of cows. While 18 is an average number of cows
present in a harem at the height of the season, the proportion of cows to a bull varies
immensely, much depending on the location of the bull and his ability to hold his
station against all comers. During the season of 1896 there were many bulls which
were able to secure but a single cow, ahd many others which had only 3 or 4, while
some possessed as many as 50, and one, the greatest polygamist of them all, had no less
than 135 rounded up at one time. This old fellow stood at the head of a broad gully
and at the foot of a slope on North rookery, St. George, and from his position he was
able to intercept all cows which sought to haul out on the hillside above, while from
his strength and prowess he was able to fight off the bulls back of him. The number
of cows was, however, too great for him to control throughout the season, and later
on the waiting bulls in the vicinity and those with smaller harems took possession of
part of the seraglio. A similar immense harem was formed on Gorbatch early in the
season of 1897 by a bull who commanded the passage leading from a section of the
beach to the slope above, and this, too, later on resolved itself into a number of
smaller harems.
The landing of the cows is to a great degree influenced by the character of the
shore, shelving rocks, gullies running conveniently inland, or little openings among
large bowlders, determining the spots where the females will come on shore. Thus, a
readily accessible gully on the eastern end of the amphitheater of Kitovi is the
natural inlet: to that portion of the rookery, and up this come the cows to form the
harems, while on the western side access is over sloping rocks. Once two or three
cows have located themselves, others follow the gregarious instincts of the seals, thus
leading to disproportionately large harems in favored localities.”
Thus the condition of the harems is largely influenced by, if it does not depend
entirely on, the lay of the land. Also, where a rookery can be more or less
indefinitely extended inland, as back of Polovina, or on the hillside at Staraya Artel
and Zapadni, there is room for all idle bulls to accumulate at the rear; where a rookery
is so hemmed in by a cliff as to be invapable of extension backward there are few
1In 1895 Mr. True counted on Kitovi, between July 8 and 10, 2,640 cows in 153 harems, an average
of alittle over 17 to aharem. In 1896 Dr. Stejneger and myself, on July 13, counted on the same
ground 3,152 cows in 182 harems, again a little over 17 to » harem. In 1895 on the southern part of
Tolstoi there were on July 11, 1,624 cows in 107 harems, and in 1896, on July 14, 1,498 cows in
108 harems, or respectively about 15 and 14 to a harem. On the above-mentioned rookeries, and
particularly on Tolstoi, it is possible to count the individuals with great accuracy.
2For note on the landing of cows see Part II, p. 523 and after,
NUMBER OF MALES NEEDED. 53
idle bulls, since all the cows are appropriated by the two or three lines of bulls
between the water and the cliff. The small size of many harems is thus due to their
being located in the inner portion of the rookery, where the bulls are unable to obtain
many cows, or where they obtain them by capture. Where the harems are small the
bulls appear to be less active and quarrelsome than where they are large, as if they
fully understood that it is less trouble to manage a small family than a large one.
This, however, may be a misinterpretation of the facts in the case, for the smallness
of the harem may have been due to the inability of the bull, on account of lack of
fighting qualities, to secure a large number of cows. ©
If 35 cows is the minimum average for a harem, 50 or 60 would be what might be
called a good working proportion, and so long as the harems do not, on the average,
exceed this, there is no reason to suppose that the number of bulls is too smali. The
small proportion of bulls actually necessary for the continuance of the fur-seal herd
is indicated by the conditions on Bering Island, where for many years every male
over a year old which could be secured has been promptly killed. Not only is there a
complete absence of idle bulls, but on the South rookery there are at most only 6 bulls
to 500 to 600 cows, the exact number of the latter being unknown. Notwithstanding
this small number of adult males, there is no evidence that, with the aid of the
younger males, it is not quite sufficient for breeding purposes, since there is no
apparent dearth of pups.
This is not brought forward as an argument in favor of such close killing, which
under ordinary circumstances would be wholly unjustifiable, but to show how few
bulls are actually needed. The justification for this close killing is found in the
existence of pelagic sealing, which spares nothing, and renders it proper and desirable
to secure every available male seal on land, so as to leave as few as possible to be
killed at sea. The difficulty of so exterminating the males that the seal herd would
not recuperate if left to itself is well shown by the history of Robben Island,' which
ever since 1854 has suffered from the most reckless slaughter, every effort having
been made time and again to secure every individual seal on the island. And yet,
again and again, after brief periods of rest, the seals have been found in greater or
less numbers, and even in 1896, after forty years of slaughter, there were about 1,000
seals of all kinds left, and it was possible to secure 260 skins.
Robben Island is also a good illustration of what would happen were it: ‘possible
to put an end to pelagic sealing, for if seals continue to exist in any numbers when
their sole protection is preservation from being killed on land, it is easy to see how
they would increase if not taken at sea.
The size of the harems and the number of surplus bulls is a safe guide to the
condition of the rookeries for breeding purposes, the increase or decrease of the total
number of seals being naturally quite another thing, although the two should be
carefully compared with one another. If the number of surplus bulls is large, and
the size of the harems small, either the rookeries are shrinking or the number of
bulls increasing, and immediate steps should be taken to ascertain which is the
case, in order to decide whether more seals may be advantageously killed, or whether
there is an unsuspected number of deaths among the cows. The total disappearance
of the idle, waiting, or reserve bulls, as they have been variously called, would bea
warning of the most emphatic nature to immediately lessen the number to be killed,
‘See Stejneger, The Russian Fur Seal Islands, pp. 54-58,
54 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
for since the seal herd is for a great portion of the year quite beyond the control
of man it will always be necessary to allow a liberal margin of bulls for breeding
purposes.
As to the proportion of the sexes at birth, the result of several counts, made at
various times and in various localities, shows that the number of males born appears
to be slightly in excess of the number of females. In 1872, during the killing of pups
for food, Mr. Elliott found that 855 out of 1,670 young were males, while other parties
counting at the same time, though possibly with less care, found 3,945 males out of
7,330 pups. ”
In 1896, 750 pups were examined for sex, and 388 proved to be males, a number
in substantial accord with the results obtained by other observers. These results
will show a little more closely if put in tabular form:
; : Excessof
| Total. | Females.| Males. idles:
Counted by Eliott... 1, 670 » 815 855 40
Counted by others -.. a 7, 330 38, 395 3, 945 550
Counted by commission ..........----- 730 362 388 26
| Total ...... pipe ae Menearegaie een sees 9, 750 | 4,572 5, 188 616
The following table shows the age and condition of female seals taken in Bering
Sea during the month of August and the early part of September:
[Examined by C. H. Townsend between August 11 and August 21, 1895.]
VOarlintgs casos Genes coceke ees Sede eae ee cee ee eS
Two's ears Old wxensvesnaieavee Joule eevee eeserecaees ausees SeeeNe eeeeEe cee
Over 2 years—all nursing -
Pregnant 2-year-olds ....-..------ 2-20 ven cen ee eee eee eee eee eee
Unimpregnated 2-year-olds
Pregnant nursing females!......-.-. 222. 0220 ee ee ee eee eee ee ee eee
Unimpregnated nursing females .......--. 2-22. 2-22 eee e cece ee eee eee ee eee 3
Age and condition of female seals examined in 1896.
Examined August 10 and 11:
Two years Old......-.-. 2.2.0. eee ween eee eee eee (edistetennssiaraseaidiarae Beaieene ni 3
Over 2 years old.....----- ------ --- 2-2 ene fee nee cee eee ene eee 43
Nursing, with milk abundant ..-...-.-. 22-22. .2 2-22 eee cee eee eee eee 35
Little Or Wo Milks wasemieresis sisiss sedis de we a aed seistecare bw iaieia.w.unareiciesoeimetems, 8
Pregnant...........---- ert nyt tone tees tees cece nee ce es cee e ee cece eens 45
Examined September 3:
LWO-9 OATS: Ol Uie,c aise si cier x nteicieverree esters metartisiartiaee haps he etaudjeinin seis mea 1
Over:2:years:Old)...2 -..).j20.dusseidiectangecedcces Sis waa aahea ciao eA 25
Nursing, with milk abundant ...-..---.---.--- 202-2 eee eee eee eee secur 15
Notaursin eno imi veers carpets e.g eee cess bcardiciea rs cme b ue sdaannaaenne/aapere 5
Probably not nursing, little milk..-......... 02-200 -022ee eee eee eee 6
Pregnant. -.--. 2. +20 2-2 ne one cece eee ee ee ee eee eee eee seeses 26
1These figures differ slightly from those given in Mr. Townsend’s report for 1895, pp. 42-45,
because reexamination shows that some marked questionable were pregnant.
NOTES ON BREEDING HABITS. 55,
Combining these tables, we have a fotal of 176 female seals taken during 1895
and 1896 between August 10 and September 3, which may be considered as fairly
representing the age and condition of seals taken'at sea. Of these 176, there were 14
yearlings, 16 2-year-olds, and 146 over 2 years old. All over 2 years old had brought
forth young the season they were taken, and 151 of those 2 years old and upward
were pregnant. The total number of seals examined whose condition was at all
uncertain was 11, and 7 of these were 2-year-olds examined before August 22, and
these might have been impregnated later in the season. Moreover, in 9 of the doubtful
cases the ovaries were not preserved, or examination under more favorable circum-
stances might have lessened even this number, for the corpus luteum does not show
so clearly in fresh specimens as in those which have been hardened in alcohol. The
exact condition of some of the specimens taken during 1896 was questionable when
the ovary was fresh, while later examination showed that, with one exception, all the
doubtful cases were pregnant. These tables show very clearly what has been so well
stated by Mr. Townsend—that the majority of females at sea are both nursing and
pregnant, so that the killing of one female is practically the loss of three seals,
and pelagic sealing not only is the burning of the candle at both ends, but in the
middle as well.
On Pl. XI are shown a number of ovaries bisected to show the appearance of the
sear of recent impregnation (corpus luteum) and the vanishing scar (corpus albicans)
of former impregnation. The scar resulting from the simple rupture of a Graafian
follicle soon disappears, but when impregnation has taken place the scar continues
to develop for some time, and does not disappear until some little time after delivery.
Old scars were plainly visible, after immersion in alcohol, on the ovaries of seals
killed in September, although delivery must have taken place a month or six weeks
previously.
NOTES BEARING ON BREEDING HABITS.
The first instance of copulation seen occurred on Tolstoi sand flat June 22. The
harem contained a single cow, with a pup apparently 2 or 3 days old. Nothing is
known about the arrival of the cow or the birth of the pup, but neither was present
on the 16th when Tolstoi was first visited.
The second copulation was witnessed at 3.30, June 23, on Lukanin, in a harem of
five cows. This harem was formed during the night of the 19th, three cows being
present in it at 8.30 on the morning of the 20th. As the harem lay at a distance from
observation points, no record of the birth of pups can be given.
The third copulation occurred on Lukanin in a harem containing nineteen cows.
The harem was formed with one cow on the 18th, first seen at 9 a.m. Her pup was
born between 8 and 9 a. m. the following day. The other cows were added to the
harem on the 20th at 10.30, and a fourth at about the same hour the following day.
Two additional pups were born to the harem at 3 p. m.on the 21st. The time of
copulation was 9 o’elock, June 26.
The fourth copulation was witnessed in the harem which has the cow that has
been present since the 12th without a pup. A second cow joined this harem on the
21st at 10 o’clock, and her pup was born at noon the following day. There are now
five cows in the harem, but three are recent arrivals. The time of copulation was
9.30 o’clock in the evening of the 27th.
56 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
The fifth copulation was observed by Mr. Adams in a harem founded with a single
cow on the 21st. She was-alone until the 23d, and on the 25th had three companions.
No records of births for this harem are available. The time of copulation was at 10.15
a.m. on the 27th.
The sixth instance was observed at 5 p. m. on the 28th by Mr. Adams in a harem
founded with a single cow on the 18th at 9a.m._ Its history, so far as known, is given
under the third instance.
A seventh case of copulation was witnessed by Mr. Adams at 4.30 p. m. of the
29th in the same harem as above noted in the third and sixth instances.
The eighth case of copulation.also occured in this same harem. The time was
9.30 p. m. of the 29th.
The ninth case reported by Mr. Adams occurred at 3.05 p.m. of the 29th in a
harem formed with a single cow on the 21st. The harem was not favorably situated
for observation, and grew rapidly, having’ thirteen cows on the 25th. No records of
births are available.
A tenth case of copulation was observed by Mr. Adams at 5.30 p. m. of the 30th
in the harem noted under the fifth instance.
SUMMARY OF OBSERVATIONS ON ARRIVALS, BIRTHS, ETC.
The first cow seen on St. Paul, Lukanin rookery, at 4 o’clock, June 12; not seen on
the afternoon of the preceding day; has not had a pup to date, June 22.
Two cows first seen on the amphitheater of Kitovi at 4.15 on June 14; of these
one was seen to give birth to a pup at 3.30 on the afternoon of the 15th; the second
cow gave birth to her pup at 3 o’clock on the 17th.
A. cow first seen at 4 o’clock, June 12, on Lukanin rookery, was seen to have a
second cow with her on the 17th, at 8 o’clock; both cows had then pups.
Two cows were first seen on the evening of June 15, at 9 o’clock; one of them had
a pup at 8.30, June 17; it was not present at 5 o’clock on the 16th. The second cow
could not be traced, owing to the fact that other cows were added to the harem before
a second pup was born.
On Lukanin rookery at 8 o’clock on the morning of June 17 a cow with her pup
was seen; the pup was evidently not many hours old; ueither cow nor pup was
present at 5 the preceding evening.
On Gorbatch a cow not present at 5 o’clock on the 16th was seen at 1.45 by
Mr. Adams with her pup.
A cow was first seen at 9 o’clock a. m. of the 18th; she had no pup at 9 p. m. of
the 19th, but at 10.03 of the 20th she had a pup with her.
A cow was seen to Jand at 3.30 on the 18th, and her pup was seen to be born at
3 o’clock on the 20th.
A cow landed at 2 o’clock on the 19th, and her pup was born between 4.30 and
8 o’clock on the 20th.
A cow was first seen at 9 a. m. on the 18th; she was seen with a pup at 9.45 on
the following morning.
A cow was first seen on the 18th at 9 a. m.; she had a pup at the same hour the
following day.
A cow was seen to land at 1.45 on the 17th on Gorbatch rookery; her pup was
born between 11 and 3 o’clock of the 20th.
ARRIVALS AND BIRTHS. 57
Many other cows were noted on landing, but became confused through additions
to the harems before their pups were born. In cases of the cows mentioned the
identification was clear.
A cow landed between 3 and 9 p. m. on the 20th, and her pup was born between
5 and 8.30 the afternoon of ‘the 21st.
A cow arrived at 3.30 the 20th and bore her pup at 11 o’clock on the morning of
the 21st.
A cow arrived on the 19th at 9.30 a.m. and bore her pup at 4.15 of the 22d.
EXPLAN ATION OF PLATE XI.
1. Uterus and ovaries of an old fur seal, ventral aspect. A triangular section has been removed
from the wall of the uterus to show its complete division into two portions. Delivery has taken place
in the left branch (shown on right side), and the scar of recent impregnation is visible in the right
ovary (at left of plate).
2,3. Ovaries of a 2-year-old female, showing corpus luteum in left ovary. Degenerate Graafian
follicles appear in both ovaries.
4,5. Ovaries of old female, showing corpus albicans in left ovary, 4, and corpus luteum and degen-
erate follicles in right ovary, 5.
6,7. Ovaries of an old female, showing corpus luteum in left ovary, 6, and almost absorbed corpus
albicans in right ovary, 7.
8,9. Ovaries of an old female, showing corpus albicans in left ovary, 8, and corpus luteum and
numerous Graafian follicles in right ovary, 9.
All figures of natural size. Nos. 1, 6,and 7, by Dr. J. C. McConnell; 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, and 9, by A. H.
Baldwin, from alcoholic specimens.
*HOLVEYOD NO .,S2 WAYVH,, 'NSYVH WWOldAL Vv
*X| aLW1d
1OLSTOL NO S11N@ 310I GNVY SW3YVH GASSVN
gel
— ‘oh anv4 a
9
SRG
'X aLW1d
PLATE XI.
UTERUS AND OVARIES OF FUR SEAL.
For ex planation see page 57.
IV.—THE FOOD OF THE NORTHERN FUR SEALS.
By FREDERIC A. Lucas.
Our knowledge of the food of the fur seal is based almost entirely upon data
and material collected by Mr. C. H. Townsend, although Mr, A. B. Alexander and
Dr. C. Hart Merriam have made contributions to the subject, and while there have
been some statements as to what the seals ate, and some theorizing as to the amount
of fish destroyed by the seal herd and its effect on the Alaskan fisheries, these
statements and theories have rested on no basis of observed facts. As Mr. Martin N.
Johnson remarked at a hearing before the Committee on Ways and Means, “ You can
only determine what they (the seals) eat by an examination of their stomachs,” and
with the exceptions noted above, comparatively little of this work has been done.
The material collected by Messrs. Townsend and Alexander has been reexamined in
order to ascertain not only the species, but, in the majority of cases, the number of
individuals of each species eaten. One result of this examination has been to show
that the fishes recorded as cod were invariably pollock, the exact determination being
previously impossible owing to the lack of material. In this connection I would like
to express my obligations to Mr. Barton A. Bean for assistance in identifying the
fishes, and to Prof. A. E. Verrill for identifying the cephalopods.
Up to the time that the pups leave the islands they subsist entirely on milk, and
while small quantities of other things are found in their stomachs, these are swallowed
for the same reason which causes the older seals to swallow similar objects, and there
is not the least iota of evidence to indicate that before November pups derive the
slightest sustenance from anything save their mother’s milk.
In view of the size of the pups at this time this may seem surprising, but the
largest gray pups were found starved to death, while the examination of a number
killed for the express purpose of determining whether or not they fed on anything
save milk showed conclusively that they did not. Seaweed, small crustaceans and
tunicates are found in infinitesimal quantities, but these are not taken for food any
more than are the fragments of shells and the pebbles which are so often present,
and no one has ever claimed that bits of succulent lava were eaten for the nourishment
they contained.
During the fall of 1896 a number of pups were killed in order to determine if
possible the time of weaning and to ascertain whether or not the pups fed on anything
save milk. While a few of the stomachs contained crustaceans, in only one case were
59
60 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
they present in sufficient numbers to indicate that they had been taken as food. In
this single instance, a gray pup taken on October 5, the stomach contained remains of
150 amphipods, but as the pup was dying from starvation it is evident that he was
deriving little or no subsistence from this source. The following record by Mr. Clark
shows the number and condition of the pups examined:
August 29: Pup killed on Lukanin; stomach contained only milk.
September 11: Male pup accidentally smothered on Kitovi; stomach empty.
September 22: Two male pups taken on rocks at the warehouse; both stomachs contained milk
only. I
September 26: Two large, well-nourished pups, one male and one female, found freshly dead from
drowning on Lukanin Beach; stomach of female empty; male full of milk only.
September 28: Pup with deformed nose killed at Zapadni; stomach contained milk only.
September 30: Large black pup accidentally killed by falling over a cliff; stomach contained
milk only. '
October 1: Large gray female pup killed on Gorbatch; stomach contained milk and two small
crustaceans.
October 5: Starving gray pup in dying condition on the reef killed; stomach contained a few
crustaceans and several shreds of seaweed.
October 6: Two pups killed on Tolstoi; milk only found in their stomachs.
October 11: Two large gray male pups killed on Gorbatch; stomachs empty.
October 13: Two pups, male and female, killed on Lukanin; stomach of male empty; of female
contained milk only.
Two large gray pups killed on Kitovi; stomach of one full of milk; of the other empty, except for
one small tunicate. ;
October 14: Three pups killed on Kitovi. (1) A starving pup, stomach containing one soft-shelled
crab; (2) a very small pup, stomach full of milk; (3) a large gray pup, stomach empty.
All stomachs examined contained pebbles.
October 20: Gray pup shot in water of Zolotoi, playing with seaweed; stomach full of milk;
excrement in rectum and intestines like that seen on beach.
Not only does the young fur seal feed exclusively on milk, but it feeds on the milk
of one cow, and that cow its mother, for the fur seal never eapwinely nurses any pup
save her own, and although a hungry pup may steal a: few mouthfuls of milk from
a sleeping cow, it will be promptly detected and cast out. While the female seal
apparently cares little for her own offspring, she cares still less for that of another, and
any strange pup is repulsed with a snap that plainly indicates the cow’s feelings.
That the mother unerringly recognizes her own offspring can not for a moment
be doubted by anyone who has watched the behavior of the females on the rookeries,
and while very young pups may respond to the call of a strange cow they respond in
vain. The cow will accept only her own pup, which, as among other animals, is recog-
nized by scent, and will hunt for half an hour and nose over scores of young seals to
find her own. Even after the right pup is found and recognized it is smelt of from
time to time, as if the mother were afraid that she had made some mistake and wished
to be reassured.! |
'The following note will show what chance a pup has of nursing any cow save its mother:
‘Reef, September 1. I see a little starving pup below me. He is moving about, calling out, and
nosing about the breasts of sleeping cows. He has tried three, and been driven off with a growl and
snap from the waking cow. He wanders some distance; comesup toa sleeping cow whose pup is either
nursing or asleep with his nose atthe nipple. The star voling takes hold and evidently nurses for some
seconds; but the cow, as before, wakes and snaps at him with unwonted.vigor. Her own pup has
been alo Evidently she had been misled by the fact of his having recently been sucking. The
starveling gives up and lies down,” (G.A, Clark.)
CHARACTER OF FOOD. 61
It is hardly necessary to write these things for naturalists, but so much nonsense
has been published concerning the food of pups, the possibility of their subsisting
on crustaceans and kelp, and the probability of pups whose mothers were killed at
sea being nursed by other cows that it is desirable to emphasize these points.'
The young seals are apparently weaned in November, at about the time they
depart for the South, and after leaving they are doubtless forced to shift for themselves,
and must learn to capture squid and fish or starve. It is not unlikely that losses at
this period from failure to obtain food add largely to the roll of those who are miss-
ing the ensuing spring.
From the time he is weaned, onward, the food of the fur seal during a great por-
tion of the year and over a large part of its range can only be surmised from observa-
tions of stomachs obtained in Bering Sea and the Gulf of Alaska. These indicate
that the fur seal does not procure its food at any great depth, but that it feeds
mainly on squid and such fishes as swim near the surface. In Bering Sea during
August and September the pollock (Theragra chalcogramma) forms the staple article
of food, a squid (Gonatus amoenus) coming next in importance, while some salmon
and a few species of small fishes are also eaten. One of these last, although devoured
in large numbers, and therefore abundant in many localities, is apparently new and
is described on page 440 under the name of seal fish.
Mr. A. B. Alexander observes that the “material which has been found in the
stomachs of seals taken in different parts of Bering Sea indicates that only a small
percentage is composed of fish which inhabit deep water. It is only reasonable to
suppose that when seals are in shallow water they feed on both bottom ‘fish and those
near the surface.” ?
Surface fishes, and especially squid, seem to be the natural food of the seal. In
the stomachs that have been examined a variety of material was found, such as
pieces of Alaskan pollock, salmon, and other fishes, but it has also been observed
that in localities where squid are plentiful very little other food may be looked for.
IT am informed by hunters that on the coast of Japan and off the Commander Islands
‘squid occur in great abundance, and that it is not an uncommon sight to see a half
dozen or more seals together feeding on the tentacles of an octopus floating on the
surface. Sealers find squid plentiful off the island of Kadiak, and in that locality
they have often been found in Jarge quantities in the stomachs of seals.
Outside of Bering Sea the food changes somewhat. The pollock grows rare to the
southward, while salmon, herring, and rockfish become abundant. Doubtless these
and other available fishes are eaten in numbers. We have no reason to suppose that
the seal prefers the flesh of any one species to another.
Captain Todd says the food of seals taken near the mainland (northwest coast)
consists largely of salmon, and that this is true of the Japan and Copper Island sealing
1In that treasury of misinformation, the Proceedings of the Paris Tribunal, is the following
piece of testimony, introduced to show the probability of cows nursing strange pups, and ‘although
the Paris Tribunal is a thing of the past, this gem deserves to be preserved:
Q. ‘Is it common and easy to make ewes suckle other ewes’ lambs?
“Yes. It can be effected by putting the skin of the ewe’s dead lamb on the lamb she is desired
to adopt, or by holding her and getting the lamb to suck her for a few days.”
Very easy, indeed! The inferential spectacle of seal pups wandering over the rookeries dressed
up in their brothers’ cast-off clothes, or of half a duzen Aleuts holding a cow seal for a day or two
while two or three other natives applied the pup, appeals vividly to the imagination.
*There is, however, no evidence of this except in the rare presence of cottoids noted beyond.
62 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
grounds, and Captain Magneson of the schooner Walter Earle reports that seals taken
on August 25, 1894 (latitude 56° 13’ N., longitude 172° 44’), had been feeding on
salmon.
The statements of sealers must, however, be taken with some allowance, as they
are apt to jump at conclusions instead of reaching them by careful observation; and
the mere fact that seals and salmon were found in the same locality would, to many,
be proof conclusive that the one fed on the other. Dr. Stejneger’s observations, quoted
farther on, are to some extent opposed to those of Captain Todd, and show that in the
immediate vicinity of the Commander Islands the seals have no visible effect on the
fisheries. Mr. Barrett-Hamilton has very kindly allowed me to examine the specimens
of seal food obtained by him on the Asiatic side, and from these it would appear that
the seals feed on pretty much the same species there as they do in the eastern part of
Bering Sea. A specimen from Robben Island contained bones of salmon (Oncorhynchus)
and beaks of the ever-present squid (Gonatus amoenus), one specimen from the
Commander Islands consisted solely of bones of the pollock (Theragra chaleogramma),
one solely of beaks of squid, and a third of squid and pollock. :
From data obtained by Dr. C. Hart Merriam it appears that a large portion of the
food of seals found in the North Pacific, from 60 to 80 miles from shore, between
latitude 56° 45/ and latitude 58° 58’, in April, consists of red rockfish (Sebastodes), and
an almost equally large portion of squid (Gonatus amoenus), salmon and small fishes
being also eaten to some extent.
No codfish (save in a single instance), halibut, or dogfish, is known to have been
found in the stomachs of seals, and these species probably swim at too great depths to
be taken, all facts in the way of stomach contents indicating that the seals invariably
feed near the surface. Cod, halibut, and sculpin are abundant about the Pribilofs, but
with the exceptions noted in the table of food, none of these have been found in the
stomachs of seals, or in the spewings on the rookeries. While bones of cod have been
in several instances recorded as part of the food of seals, reexamination has shown
that in every instance the bones were those of pollock. . Superficially the vertebre of
a large pollock resemble those of a small cod, and this had led observers who had no
material at hand for comparison to set down cod as one of the fishes eaten by seals.
The sculpturing of the vertebra is, however, unlike in the cod and pollock, while other
parts of the skeleton, the otoliths and portions of the gill- covers, are so entirely different
in the two that no confusion is possible. There is no evidence to show that the seal
ever destroys more fishes than he eats, or eats one portion of a fish in preference to
another, reports of hundreds of fishes being seen with the nape or throat bitten out
requiring to be supported by proof to show that the seal was the guilty party. Nor
is there anything to show that one species of fish is preferred to another. All is fish
that comes to the fur seal’s net, and the species which happens to be the most readily
taken is the one which is most abundantly eaten.
Even dead fish may be eaten, for Mr. A. B. Alexander records having seen seals
eating salmon which had been dead for several days, and on one occasion the head of
a Macrurus, a deep-sea fish, dredged by the Albatross, was found later on in the
stomach of a fur seal. Concerning the dead salmon Mr. Alexander writes as follows:
In June, 1894, the Albatross was lying in Dutch Harbor, Unalaska, and for several days I had been
collecting, obtaining among other things a large number of salmon. After the ship’s company had
been supplied there was a considerable number left, which were placed in boxes, to be taken to
FREQUENCY WITH WHICH SEALS FEED. 63
St. George and distributed among the natives. On arriving at St. George the sea was too rough to
make a landing, and we were compelled to remain on board. Several days passed, and, in the mean-
time, the salmon were not improving with age. Tho usual number of seals were playing about the
ship, and Mr. J. Stanley-Brown suggested that we feed them with the salmon. The first salmon had
no sooner struck the water than it was grabbed by aseal and devoured. This, of course, attracted
other seals, and soon quite a number were on the lookout for something to eat. Some six or eight
salmon were thrown overboard, all of which were eaten.
And yet two seals which were taken to Woodward’s Gardens, San Francisco,
refused to eat, and starved.
Neither, so far as is shown by the stomach contents, does the seal feed on crabs
or other crustaceans,’ although these probably form a large portion of the diet of its
cousin, the sea lion Humetopias. But two stomachs of this animal have come under
my notice, and they both contained fragments of the common crab of the Pribilofs
and bones of sculpins, both indicating that the sea lion is a bottom feeder. It was,
however, suspected that crabs must form a large part of the sea lion’s food from the
peculiar chalky nature of the excrement about the hauling grounds of these animals.
The hair seal found about the Pribilofs feeds to a considerable extent on the
Octopus (Octopus punctatus), and to some extent on crabs, but in only one case has
the remains of the octopus been found in a fur seal.
That the fur seal has a good, healthy appetite, and when he does eat amply
makes up for his long fasts, may be inferred from the fact that bones of 5 good-sized
pollock were found in one stomach and remains of 41 small pollock, about 6 inches
long, in another, while a third individual had eaten 139 of the little sealfish. The
Alaskan pollock certainly has a hard life in Bering Sea being preyed upon by the
seal above and the cod below, and if any creature has cause to rejoice over the
destructive work of the pelagic sealer that creature is the pollock.
In regard to squids, one male seal had, as indicated by the beaks, devoured at
least 155, while a female had made way with no less than 210. It must be borne in
mind, however, that this does not mean that all these were eaten at one time, for a
study of the stomach contents shows that food is eaten and the hard parts regurgi-
tated continually and irregularly, for while, as noted above, bones representing five
pollock were taken from one stomach, by no means all the bones were present, and
in other cases the stomach contained bones of several fishes in very different stages
of digestion, indicating plainly that they had been eaten at different times.
The stomach contents of a seal taken on September 3, near latitude 57° 20’ N.,
longitude 172° 45’ W., illustrate this point very well, and also give some hint of the
distance traveled by feeding seals. These contents consisted of some vertebrae of
a salmon, much digested, the beaks of two squids, and the fresher remains of three
small pollock. The salmon had doubtless been taken somewhere in the vicinity of
the Aleutian Islands, the squid between those islands and the locality where the seal
was taken, and the pollock in the immediate vicinity of the spot where the seal was
killed.
In regard to the frequency with which the seals feed, littie can be said, owing
to the impossibility of keeping track of any given seal. It is known that the bulls
come on shore late in May or early in June, and that they remain on the rookeries
. 10f course these may be eaten by fur seals, but there is not the least bit of evidence to show that
such 1s the case, and since no remains are found in the stomachs of bachelors or on the rookeries, there
is, as yet, no reason to say that fur seals eat crabs,
64 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS,
until some time in August, few appearing on the hauling grounds before the 10th,
while they are not numerous until toward the end of the month. They certainly fast
from two to three months, aud then, instead of going to sea to feed, haul out on some
sandy spot and take a nap of a week or ten days. Even at the end of the long fast
the bulls are fatter than one would expect, as was shown by the condition of two
killed on August 26. Some differences of opinion exist concerning the bachelors,
some thinking that they fast during a great part of the summer, others believing that
they eat frequently during their stay at the islands. The truth probably lies some-
where between these two extremes, and my own belief is that'while the bachelors
feed occasionally, they by no means feed so often as the females. The bachelors are
noticeably numerous on the hauling grounds during July and a considerable part of
August, and it is not until after the middle of August that their numbers thin out
decidedly. This would indicate that they are not absent from the islands, but, on
the other hand, we know that seals are coming and going on the hauling grounds,
or it would not be possible to obtain several lots of killable seals from one locality.
That the stomachs of the bachelors examined on the killing grouncs are almost
invariably empty, save for the presence of pebbles or very rarely of traces of fish or
squid, is negative evidence, as it might be construed to mean either that the seals
were not feeding or that they had digested their food before coming on land. What
little evidence there is, however, seems to sustain the latter supposition, although also
indicating that bachelors feed but seldom in July. Of the hundred stomachs opened
by Professor Thompson and myself in the various ‘killing grounds between July 15
and August 7 not one contained a trace of food, and not over four or five contained
any pebbles.
In 1895 Mr. True examined the stomachs of over two hundred bachelors and in
only one specimen found fish bones, these being much decomposed, indicating that
they had been swallowed some time before. Another stomach contained shells and
pebbles, and a third a few pebbles only.
Of 118 specimens examined by Dr. Merriam on August 1 and 3, 1891, 93 were
empty and 20 contained pebbles or beach-worn shells. Four contained beaks of squids,
2 bones of a cod,! and 1 a large Isopod crustacean. Thus only 7 stomachs out of
over 400 contained any trace of food, certainly a very small proportion.
Since we neither know how often a fur seal eats, nor how much he averages for a
meal, all so-called “estimates” of the, amount of fish eaten must be considered as
pure guesswork, the more that we do not have even the unsatisfactory data derived
from seals kept in captivity to aid us in comparison. I am told by Mr. W. A. Conklin
that California sea lions (Zalophus californianus), averaging 150 pounds each, keep fat
and sleek on 74 pounds of fish per diem, although they would, if permitted, eat 10
pounds. These figures, however, throw little light ou the problem, not only because
the sea lions were living in captivity and under artificial conditions, but because we
‘know that fur seals feed intermittently and there is nothing to show whether or not
they eat enough when they teed to make up for their fasts.
Owing to the demands made upon them by the growing pups, the nursing females.
undoubtedly eat at much more frequent intervals than the other categories of seals
being forced to go to sea for food when the males are on or about the islands, and this
is one of the reasons why the majority of seals taken by pelagic sealers are females.
1 I venture to doubt this identification, believing the bones to have been those of 2 pollock.
HARD SUBSTANCES EATEN BY SEALS. 65
The most frequent feeding grounds, as indicated by the logs of pelagic sealers, lie
from 75 to 150 miles to the southward and eastward and to the northward and west-
ward of the Pribilofs, some little distance outside the 100-fathom line, or where the
bottom of the sea dips abruptly downward from 500 to 5,000 feet. Few seals are
taken or recorded in the comparatively shallow waters to the north and east of the
seal islands, and although there are some indications that a portion of the herd fre-
quents this region during the summer, yet the map giving the distribution of the seals
in August and September is practically a map of the feeding grounds.
An examination of the chart will show that there seems to be a direct relation
between the 100-fathom line and the localities where the seals obtain food, but the
conditions affecting the feeding grounds can only be learned from a long and careful
study of the depth and temperature of the water and set of the currents, since these
are the prime factors in determining the presence and distribution of the minute
plants and animals, which may be called food units, and on which all higher animal
life ultimately depends.
As the principal feeding grounds, large as they are, seem to lie within certain
more or less definite boundaries, it follows that in going to feed the traveling seals do
not radiate from the islands like the sticks of a fan, but go and come in parallel lines
or lanes. Still, it should be borne in mind that our knowledge of these points
depends on the catch of sealers on certain known dates, and the movements of the
sealing fleet are largely determined by the catch of a few vessels, since if A and B
know that C is taking seals they and others do not like to leave the vicinity, leaving
a probability for a possibility.
From the condition of the contents of the stomachs it is apparent that everything
is swallowed entire, a pollock 18 inches long being bolted, head and all. This is
evident from the fact that the bones of the head are always present when the quan-
tity of bones is large, but they may be regurgitated, together with the other bones
of the anterior portion of the body, leaving only the tail vertebre.
The indications are that digestion is extremely rapid, since even on the feeding
grounds it is almost impossible to obtain stomach contents sufticiently well preserved
to admit of identification from external characters. Hard parts—such as fish bones,
the beaks and crystalline lenses of the eyes of squids—are regurgitated something
after the manner in which the skin and: bones of mice are ejected by birds of prey.
In this manner the seals also eject the small pebbles and other hard substances, such
as shells and bones, which they swallow for problematical purposes; and it is by this
method that the sea lion must get rid of the stones, sometimes of large size, which it
swallows in considerable quantities. There are plenty of theories as to why these
things are swallowed by seals, the most reasonable of which is that they are to aid
digestion by grinding up such substances as fish bones and the hard parts of. crabs.
But while this seems plausible enough when applied to the sea lion, which eats many
crabs and swallows quantities of. stones, some weighing 2 or 3 pounds, it fails with
the fur seal, as this animal is not known to feed upon crustacea, and the pebbles found
in its stomach are of small size and not mixed with food. The stomachs of nursing
pups are quite as liable to contain pebbles as are those of adult seals, but in this case
they are probably swallowed instinctively. On August 26 a pup was seen meandering
about Lukanin, stopping now and then to pick up a pebble; and on the same date a
pup, full of milk, was killed in the water whose stomach contained 13 large and 26
5947—PT 3——5
66 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
small pebbles, the total weight of which was 62.299 grams (2.2 ounces). M. Grebnitski
has suggested that the pebbles are swallowed in catching cephalopods, but this is
evidently incorrect for several reasons.. The squid preyed upon by the fur seal is a
deep-water species and does not cling to pebbles, being found near the surface; the
pebbles and beaks of squid are not found together, and the pebbles occur in the pups
who are eating nothing but milk. The most honest: thing to say is that we really
don’t know why seals swallow hard substances.
From observations made by Mr. Clark during the season of 1896, he concludes
that seals remain in the water until the food in their stomachs is digested, and that
this accounts not only for the fact that seals taken on land’are invariably empty, but
for the presence of the band of swimming seals in front of every rookery. It would
also explain why females are never seen to come directly in from the sea, but emerge
from the fringe of idle seals along the shore, althongh this seems rather due to indi-
rectness of character, since we never saw a seal going directly out to sea, although
constantly watching for it.
Although excrement is always to be met with on rookeries and hauling grounds,!
it is by no means commensurate with the number of seals, while Mr. Clark in Septem-
ber and October noticed large quantities of fecal matter strewn along the shore in
localities where the pups were sporting in the water.
Bones of fishes or remains of squids are also very seldom found on land on the
Pribilofs, indicating that these, too, are rejected in the water, while they are much more
common on the Commander Islands where the feeding grounds are not so far from the
rookeries as on the American Islands.
Although we know little of the food of the fur seal south of the Aleutian Islands,
something may be inferred from the character of its food in Bering Sea. Since the
seal feeds near the surface, none of the bottom-haunting fishes such as the cod and
halibut, nor their enemies, can be influenced by it, except so far as their food supply
may be affected by the destruction of pollock, and it is highly improbable that the
cod fishery of Bering Sea could have been in any way affected by the fur seal. Sur-
face-swimming species, like the salmon, might possibly be destroyed in appreciable
numbers were the fur seal abundant, but as no previous effect has been reported,
although it is fair to say that no study of the subject was made in the past, the verdict
for the present must be—not proven.
In regard to the bearing of the seals upon fisheries, Dr. Stejneger’s remarks con-
cerning Bering Island are very much to the point. He says:”
Three species of salmon (Oncorhynchus) abound in all the rivera on Bering Island and the fur
seals are not observed to feed upon them at the mouths of these rivers; but the fact that the
largest salmon river of the island, the Saranna River, is situated less than 7 miles from the largest
rookery, without the seals coming over there to feed upon the enormous number of salmon ascending
that river, is proof conclusive. * * * The annual catch in that river alone varies between 20, 000
and 100,000 salmon.
As for the codfish, it is only necessary to state that they are common right off the great North
Rookery of Bering Island. On September 16, 1895, we were anchored in 10 fathoms of water, less than
a mile from Sivutchi Kamen, and within hearing of the roar from the rookery. A single cod line over
the side of the steamer for a couple of hours brought up three-fourths of a barrel of codfish.
' That, as has been stated, anyone ever searched for excrement and did not find it indicates very
poor powers of observation or of veracity.
2The Russian Fur Seal Islands, p. 70.
TABLES SHOWING FOOD OF SEALS. 67
If the seals do not aftect the fisheries of so small a place as Bering Island, it is not
likely that they will do so elsewhere.
Finally, since the seal feeds on squid and fishes which are found near the surface
in comparatively deep water, and invariably seeks its food at some distance from land,
it is evident that a closed zone of 60 miles about the islands can give but a small
measure of protection.
It has been suggested that the migration of the seals from the islands is influenced
by the departure and movements of migratory fishes on which they feed. There are,
however, no migratory fishes in Bering Sea, and it is not likely that the movements
of the seals in the North Pacific is in any important way modified by the movements
of such fishes as the salmon in its movement toward the rivers for purposes of spawn-
ing. These fishes do not go far out in the sea, and, while the seals feed upon them
when they can be had, there is no reason to suppose that the seals go out of their way
to follow such fishes. The general direction and extent of. the fur-seals’ migration are
directed by its homing instinct. The movement of the herd from day to day is prob-
ably in a measure dependent apon the food supply, the seals tarrying to feed where
food is abundant and moving on when it becomes scarce. The departure of the seals
from the islands is not due to the departure of the fishes on which it feeds in summer,
but simply due to the coming on of the severe weather of winter. The fur seals of
the southern islands do not migrate, and the climatic conditions obviate the necessity
of their doing so.
The following species are actually known to be eaten as food by the fur seal:
Squid, Gonatus amanus.
Octopus, Octopus sp.
Pollock, Theragra chaleogramma.
Seal-fish, Therobromus callorhini.
Rockfish, Sebastodes alutus.
Salmon, Oncorhynchus kisutch,
Lamprey, Entosphenus tridentatus.
Cod, Gadus macrocephalus,
Wolf-fish, Anarichas lepturus.
Stickleback,! Gasterosteus cataphractus.
Sculpin.!
Unknown.
The following shows the total amount of food eaten by 36 seals during the month
of April in the Gulf of Alaska:
POU aaa Sd iia cis ccs ie ara wwish evant majaialniala*ciosoaieictbinie lois onidie warcss Seeasloriomuaias 726
Roc Ifishipe pss toh cowie ante Sstetnne rein cornell ee ecenR een smee waeena neces 20
ADM ON spo scpers craratosee tetas locearesa = avers sie yitelesnrarsieeraleiwreishcta otejayelernere sash Io wierdaceniaternarcias 2
POMOC kei sid ats spas iotere arsed anaes cnsyi aye veaieednnys aideatarciateucrenruferarsraeveisjarard eden Siayeae 2
DUG UY sclerotic chdsapiacrererevnrasSces sce ielstaoioreinlere olsiereie tease Rae em mace ecavesantaanr 12
ROU 2-2 pe raiarleeiarcre syaiereial ecreist Mekauiclelstaieineeiswinin see eeeeaaeSoamuasueedeces 762
There ia a slight doubt in regard to these fishes, as they may have been swallowed out of curiosity.
This is the more probable since the sculpins, wuich were identified from odd bones, were small indi-
viduals and not the large species so common in Bering Sea.
{
68 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
The following shows the results of the examination of the stomachs of 273 seals
taken in Bering Sea during the months of August and September, and indicates the
number of seals which had eaten a given species:
POMOC ccconieisinowewy werent basco epevetenateeoe archicie eee AGB [COU daccuaie in dies diewciesitindsisisanemee ie wince 1
Squid. 50201 ewave seeece seeeeeseetewessenes 163 Wolf ASW ccosntnesndnocucsseeece cen asemeeees 1
Seal fish oeceseesan weunex-cmek eee hecezaces 84 | Octopus. .-.. 2-2 -e ween cee eee eee ene eee 1
SALMO s/c. 2.chetd areata aientcerswmennaee ees 18 | Unknown ..... 2.2. 20+ seecee secre cece secces 2
VAM ple yee cys see sea gueine oeeeeeweaesseenere 6 ae
ST see RIALTO 8 5 Tat a a cveennsininmercnnninnnsenbieciness aca
The following is the total amount of food known to have been eaten by 100 seals
during the months of August and September in Bering Sea:
Smiall' seal ish ccs ccrsssccwsewswce eee seeweie es eeeemasec etnies scien scans 568
Squid wxcecdesncmeeeacecnn sees ee eebioeeeereeceumee ein ee deescokeeeseeees 324
Pollock cadecceeands caciee > sees rewew eterna ema dame wie aster aereaimeas eMeiciac 251
Salm Otis ee erent wat ceceeceiuciceentewae wel seammercecmeesecececennae 10
SUDO T rere eg cones Hepersn tne sem cece we see ckaeeea eSources bmerise we see emees 10
FOGG y wesiat ct stesolehciceetatatchiisselapaS oravelneagd Sie wtetcrecidand Steere gncineramebnaval aoe eae ieee 1, 163
The various combinations of species made by the same 100 seals are shown as
follows, which may be called the seals’ bill of fare:
Pollock Only: 2a.) sissenensenee as bevgaaosiastatare 41 | Pollock, squid, and seal fish........--..---.. 11
Bquidionl ye cic. ciceereritineeeueseecusaaiams aero 2 | Pollock, squid, and lamprey ...........----. 4
», SAMON ONY? a ciosawtescrewied sepetsisemececscemcine 1 | Pollock, squid, and salmon ......-.-....--.. 1
Seal fish only ......--..- piste gderata'steens eatin 1 | Pollock, salmon, and seal fish ....-..-.-.---- 1
‘Pollock and squid.........--..-----2-------- 22 | Pollock, squid, and octopus.........-.-.--.- 1
Pollock and salmon .....-.--.----.---.------ 3 | Squid and seal fish -...-........-.--2---.---- 6
Pollock and seal fish ......-.---..----------- 3 | Squid, seal fish, and salmon.......-.......-- 1
PONOCKANGsCO0 . cs ceucteeectcrenanneeereecsere 1 ae
Pollock and wolf fish.........22. 00222000000 1 AIRE ansehen coccinea ea rmmeieaty 108
The following objects, certainly not taken for food, have been found in the
stomachs of seals, young and old:
Ascidians. ; : Dead gastropods, in fragments.
Hermit crab, Eupagurus brandti.' Opercula of Litorina.
Idotea ochotensis. Bones of pup seal.
Anonyx nugaz. Pebbles of lava.
Dead shells of Buccinum., Fragments of kelp.
Dead barnacles, in fragments. Buckshot, a single example.
It is evident that these things are not swallowed haphazard, but are selected
with considerable care from among the articles strewn along the shore, and that a
preference is exhibited for rounded objects. This is shown by the fact that, as a rule,
only articles of one kind are found in one stomach, although seals do not discriminate
between fragments of barnacles and fragments of gastropods. Moreover, pebbles of
serpentine and chalcedony are now and.then found on the hauling grounds under
conditions indicating that they were brought there by seals, while the pup seen
gathering pebbles on Lukanin did so with great care, by no means taking the first
that came to hand. The most striking example of this discriminative selection is,
perhaps, shown by the pup which had swallowed a buckshot, while the chance of
finding such a thing must be, at a gcsss, about one in a million.
1Probably taken with the dead shells of Buccinum.
PLATE XII.
SQUID, Gonatus ameenus.
PLaTE XIII.
S
se
ests
sf
Nesiaseae
se
Ree
ee
THE ALASKAN POLLACK, Theragra chalcogramma.
From a drawing by H. L. Todd.
PLATE XIV.
THE SILVER SALMON, Oncorhynchus kisutch.
From a drawing by H. L. Todd.
PLATE XV,
LAMPREY, Entosphenus tridentatus.
From a drawing by A. H. Baldwin.
V.—MENTAL TRAITS OF THE PRIBILOF FUR SEAL.
By FREDERIC A. Lucas.
Fifteen years ago, when my acquaintance with the fur seal was solely through the
medium of books, I wrote: “Animals which witness the killing of their young with
indifference, do not try to escape from danger themselves, and tranquilly remain in a
locality where hundreds of their kind are daily slaughtered do not seem remarkable
for their intelligence.” To-day, after a careful study of the behavior of the seal in
the field, there seems to be no reason to retract anything of this. The fur seal is a
creature of strong instincts, but little intelligence. The mechanical functions of life
are performed to-perfection, but it is seldom guilty of an act requiring reason.
By intellect or intelligence in this sense is meant the power to choose among
different possible courses of action. The external influences and internal impulses
produce certain impressions on the nervous system of the animal. By the automatic
instinct the response which follows is directly related to the cause, and there is no
choice among responses. So much influence, so much rebound. By the operations of
instinct each individual, in given conditions, will act just as any other individual will.
Intellect, however, implies individuality. One animal will choose to do this, another
that, adapting action to the special needs or circumstances. A fur seal will do what
his ancestors have had to do to perfection. If he is led to do anything else he is dazed
and stupid. For these reasons our experiments in better methods of culling killable
seals by sending the herd through a wooden chute were not successful. The most
experienced bulls would beat their noses against a door closed before them if one
before them had been seen to pass through it. That one door was shut and another
opened is beyond their comprehension.
When not engaged in the performance of the more mechanical functions of life
the conduct of the fur seal is marked by a most exasperating indirectness, aud in
many ways they remind ove of Kipling’s description of the Banda Log, starting to do
one thing and ending by doing another. A seal coming ashore to nurse her pup will
tarry by the wayside to doze and scratch, calling at intervals for the young one, often
taking half an hour to progress a hundred yards or so. This is not because cows
will not allow pups to nurse them when wet, for pups were seen nursing cows just
from the water, but because the fur seal is indirect by nature. Just so in no instance
was a seal observed to go directly out to sea to feed or directly to return. Day after
day seals were seen to enter the water; day after day they were seen to come out of
it; but in each case the individual was lost in or emerged from the mass of seals
Sporting along the margin of the rookery.'
'Mr. Clark, as noted elsewhere, considers this to be due to the fact that seals remain in the water
until food has digested ;. but while this would account for the lingering of returning seals, it would
not account for their delay in going. .
39
70 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
The fact that the fur seal acts by instinct and not by reason makes it possible
‘for man to use the fur-seal herd to his own advantage, and to treat it much
as he would a herd of cattle, with the advantageous exception that he is neither
obliged to feed, water, nor look after its welfare. Its instincts, however, sharpened
by long years of natural selection, and augmented by the cumulative effects of
heredity, in most ways supply the place of reason and are an offset for its natural
stupidity.
Among the strongest of these instincts is the homing instinct, which yearly leads
the seals back to the rookeries and directs them to the feeding grounds, and so strong
has this instinct become by long cultivation that, as with the great auk, nothing short
of extermination will drive the seals from their rookeries.'
The seals return to the rookery grounds of the Pribilof Islands, not because they
have the least idea that they will there find protection, but simply because their
homing instinct leads them to do so. They have returned just as regularly and
persistently to Robben Island and to their Antarctic breeding grounds, where every
seal, big and little, is relentlessly slain. Their “bump of locality” is greater than
their reasoning power. Conversely, the female seals, which are never disturbed, are
just as much afraid of man as are the bachelors, whose ranks are thinned by annual
slaughter. ‘Che experience of a score of years has not taught them that so far as man
is concerned they are quite safe when on shore.
Just so this instinct of locality, coupled with gregariousness, brings the seals
released from a killing back to the hauling grounds, when a more intelligent or
distrustful creature would forsake the place entirely. The same causes, plus the
instinctive desire to get somewhere near the rookeries, bring the bachelors to the
vicinity of the breeding grounds. Time was when the rookeries were so large and
occupied the water front to such an extent that access to the territory at the rear was
restricted and vast numbers of seals were forced to haul elsewhere. The earliest maps
of the islands show that then, as now, breeding and hauling grounds were contiguous,
although then the number of bachelors was so vast that only a small portion of them
could approach the frontier of the breeding grounds, and a very close approach is
prevented by the picket line of waiting bulls.
The gregarious nature of the seals is extremely strong, not only leading them to
herd together, but, like sheep, to follow one another blindly, regardless of where they
may be going, seeking safety or hurrying to the killing gang without the slightest
hesitancy. One morning on Zoltoi bluffs a seal, startled by the approach of a party
on the way to the reef, plunged over the edge of the bluff to the rocks, 15 or 20 feet
‘In many ways the case of the fur seal resembles that of the great auk; both, when discovered,
were animals of limited distribution, contined to small, uninhabited islands, and both evinced the
utmost tenacity in clinging to their breeding grounds. One might suppose from much that has been
written that there was some occult reason why the fur seal was found only on the Pribilof Islands,
out of all those that skirt the Alaskan coast, and that those islets alone had the necessary conditions
of climate to suit the fur seal. As a matter of fact there is nothing mysterious in the maiter, for the
seal, like the great auk, was probably exterminated by prehistoric man in every place that was
accessible.
The fur seal family is one of great adaptability, and its members thrive not only in the cold and
wet of high latitudes, but under the burning sun of the Tropics; climate has little effect, provided the
species can breed in peace. But a creature which comes on shore to breed and passes a quarter to a
third of its life on land is particularly liable to the attacks of man, and uncivilized man is no more
careful to protect breeding animals than his civilized relatives.
EFFECT OF BLOOD ON SEALS. 71
below. The neighboring seals immediately started to follow, and before the natives
could turn them back several had gone headlong after heap leader, heedless of the
fact that the way was open in another direction.
Nothing, perhaps, shows the low grade of the seal’s intellect and the inability to
think for themselves so well as their behavior during the drives and on the killing
grounds, and it was a constant source of wonderment to see 500 or 1,000 seals shuffling
along, guided and controlled by at the most five men.
It is not docility which keeps the long procession together, but gregariousness, and
the fear of being left behind. A single yearling may delay a killing for five minutes,
snapping, snarling, and charging at the skiuners and killers, but on the drive the idea
of escape never occurs to a seal, for all his energies are devoted to keeping up with the
others. On August 26 two old bulls were killed for specimens, and in order to save
the labor of “backing” their skins and skeletons to the village, the entire lot then on
Zoltoi Bluffs were driven by Judge Crowley and the ever-ready Jake, with a little
assistance from myself. There were 50 old bulls, 50 half bulls, and 100 bachelors of
assorted sizes, and it was an astonishing sight to see all these huge brutes fleeing
from three men, when any one bull could have driven the drivers, and would have done
so a month previously. But a month previous the breeding instinct was predominant
to the exclusion of all others, and not only was fear banished, but hunger and fatigue
were unheeded.
The gregarious nature of the seals was curiously illustrated by their disposition
about Hutchinsons Hill, in August, or after the rookeries had expanded and the seals
retired far from the water. While there was ample room for ten times the number
of seals present to sprawl out in comfort, they were gathered into numerous dense
masses with wide stretches of bare ground in which the Burgomaster gulls walked up
and down, picking at the eyes of dead pups.
The smell of blood, particularly of that of their own species, inspires fear or anger
in most animals, since they associate its presence with danger tg themselves or others,
but with the fur seals it seems to do neither, and the animals turned loose from a
killing will trample over the bodies of the slain and pause to rest 50 or 100
yards away, with their flippers wet with the blood of their comrades.’ It frequently
happened while dissecting pups on the rookeries” that the bulls, after all was quiet,
approached very closely, sometimes a little too close for comfort, and on one or two
occasions dissected pup carcasses were thrown at them, both to drive the bulls away
and to see what the effect would be. In no instance did the body of a pup have any
more effect than a pebble or a bit of wood, the bull sniffed at the one just as he did at the
other, but so long as the blood was not his own it was a matter of little consequence.
Even had the blood come from himself it is doubtful if the bull’s behavior would
have been different, for not one of Cooper’s Indians could be more indifferent to pain
than the whole tribe of fur seals—bulls, cows, and pups. The bulls give and receive
the most savage bites without flinching, and cows do not show the least sign of pain
when pulled about and torn by their lords and masters, and on no occasion was any
1It is quite likely that this is due to the incessant fighting among males and mauling of the
females by the bulls, wounds being so numerous and blood so freely spilled that the seals are
accustomed to it.
2It must be borne in mind that this was after the breaking up of the harems, when seals of all
kinds were more or less intermingled, and many bulls were roaming around looking for odd cows.
12 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
animal seen to lick a wound.: In one of the rookery battles a bull seized another by his
neck and held him for at least a full minute, while the bitten bull looked complacently
heavenward without as much as moving, until he suddenly countered on his adversary
and grasped him by the throat. Not only do seals appear to be indifferent to pain,
but, provided an object is motionless, they seeni quite as indifferent to disagreeable
sights and equally unpleasant smells. They walk over and about the dead and
decaying carcasses on the rookeries and lie down to sleep among them without giving
them the least attention, caring so little that a cow was seen dozing peacefully with
her head all but pillowed on the bloated body of a pup.
The stolid behavior of the seals on the killing grounds has been remarked by
Elliott, and pitiful tales of their mad fright, being crazed by the sight of their
slaughtered companions, and frantic efforts to escape are utter rubbish. The behavior
of the first seal turned loose determines the behavior of the rest of the herd. If he
hurries, the others hurry, and each one eggs on the other; if he stops to rest, all
subsequently rejected stop to rest. .
There is no doubt that the seals are frightened when driven up to the clubbers,
but they have just as much fear of the boy who is guarding one side of a group of
1,000 seals as they have of the men who are about to knock them or their companions
ou the head. Their fear is instinctive and irrational, and is not due to any reasoning
process or any dread of what is to come. It is largely caused by the discomfort of
being crowded together. So little true fear do these beasts possess that the seals in
a pod before the killers will snap at each other just the same as if they were being
crowded by their neighbors in the hauling grounds. So far from being crazed with
fright, when turned loose they are as liable as not to stop within 50 yards of the killing
and there rest and scratch for half an hour, complacently watching the others being
clubbed to death. :
The seal is not intelligent enough to be superstitious, as is the case with the dog
and horse; the source of his fear must be real and tangible, and he never imagines an
euemy in stick or stone or other motionless object, unless it stands up above the sky
line and suggests a man. The only possible exception to this is when he is wakened
from a sound sleep, when, like other unreasoning creatures, his first idea is to run.
On such occasions a veritable stampede may occur if a number of seals are together,
for the scuffling of one rouses the other, and each urges his neighbor on to fly. Mr.
Clark noticed a most curious incident on Gorbatch, where a stampede was immi-
nent because a few seals near the water, aroused .by the breaking of an unusually
large wave, started up in alarm and in turn communicated their fright to the
surrounding herd.
If love of offspring be indicative of intelligence the fur seal may be considered
as very low in the intellectual scale, for it),is not probable that among the higher
vertebrates there is another which evinces,;o little affection for its young and is so
heedless of its welfare. During our visit: 40 the rookeries there were naturally many
cases in which mother and pup were startled by our approach, and in every instance
save one the alarm shown by the cow was evidently for herself and not for her offspring,
since she never stopped to defend her young one, but sought safety in flight, leaving
the pup to care for itself as best it might. Similarly when a rookery is stampeded by
the exit of a vanquished bull, or when, later in the season, a band of seals is frightened
HABITS OF SEA LIONS. 13
from any cause it is a case of sauve qui peut, every seal for himself or herself, no
matter what happens to the next one.
The mother takes little or no interest in her offspring, unless it be immediately
after birth, and here my own experience is limited. The cows are said to lift the
newly born pups out of uncomfortable or dangerous places, but the few seen during
the summer of 1896 seemed to evince little regard for the welfare of their offspring,
and if a pup with the placenta still attached became caught in the rocks the mother
simply looked at it and left it to do the best it could.
A curious instance of lack of care and lack of intelligence was noted by Mr.
Clark, who found a pup whose abnormally large umbilical cord had caught among the
rocks and held him fast. It had never occurred to the cow to bite through the cord
and release her offspring, although the size of the pup indicated that it had been there
some time. On the other hand, the condition of the young seal showed that it had
been well fed, for nursing comes by instinct and calls for no display of reason. When
the umbilical cord was severed tae pup staggered away, almost unable to walk
through having had no previous experience in that line.
The cows do pay some attention to their pups while nursing, and will often search
long and carefully for their own, nosing among the pods of sleeping pups; but here
again it must be remembered that the discomfort caused by the distension of the
udder is a stimulating cause, and that the cow’s motive is not entirely unselfish. But,
again, a female will content herself with simple bleating for the pup, and if he does
not come will climb on a stone and go to sleep with the utmost tranquillity. Now and
then, however, one sees a touch of human nature among the seals, as when a cow
deliberately bit two pups for the apparent reason that her own offspring did not
respond promptly to her call, and when a defeated bull consoled himself by biting a
cow. The comfort of the pup is of little moment to the cow; her own comfort is a
much more important matter, and she will lie in the water where the youngster is
submerged by every heavy sea, or on a Stone where the pup can scarcely reach
her, without the least concern. A cow just in from sea came to the head of “the
slide,” followed by,a very hungry pup, and then climbed on a high stone and lay down.
The pup tried in vain to follow, for, standing on his hind flippers, his nose reached
only to the top of the rock, and there he stood bleating for something to eat. The
mother looked over the edge as much as to say, “I’m sorry for you, but really I can.
do nothing,” and then lay down again. She did, alittle later, descend from her perch,
but not finding a place to suit, returned in five minutes, and at the end of half an
hour was dozing comfortably, while the pup still stood on his hind legs expostulating
In vain.
As for the cow taking sufficient interest in her offspring to teach it to'swim, or in
any way to care for itself, this is the sheerert{ nonsense. The seals are firm believers
in the doctrine of laissez faire, enforcing . reir principles with tooth and _ flipper.
livery seal looks after itself, and death prom, #ty overtakes the hindmost.
‘At first glance the sea lion might seem less intelligent. than the fur seal; but in all
mental attributes the latter compares unfavorably with his big relative, wilio is social
and affectionate in its disposition, and wary by nature. The sea lions breed earlier in
the season than the fur seal, so it was not our privilege to witness their behavior at
this time; but in August bulls, cows, and pups haul out together in perfect amity,
74 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
although the young males seem to keep somewhat by themselves, and there appeared
to be none of the snapping at one another which is so characteristic of the fur seals.
The females appear to take an affectionate interest in their offspring, and even
when weaned the pups haul out beside their mothers and accompany them from place
to place, and in one instance a pup was seen resting on the shoulders of a female
while she swam a short distance. When meeting, old and young frequently rub noses,
and occasionally the mother talks to the young by swaying her head up and down
and at the same time slightly from side to side. Just what this signifies it is difficult
for us to understand, but it evidently means something to the pup. When alarmed
the sea lions cluster together, as they also do for purposes of sport, for they are fond
of playing in the water, diving or lying on one side, splashing with the exposed flipper,
much after the manner of a sportive humpback whale. If frightened from a hauling
ground, the sea lions are slow in returning, swimming back and forth, surveying the
ground and sniffing the air for the presence of suspected danger. They also express
their disapproval of intrusions by loud growling, and if one is shot the immediate
members of the herd become much excited and, although keeping at a safe distance,
’ swim about, and by their conduct and roars clearly express their fear and anger. All
in all, though at first sight appearances are against him, the sea lion is intellectually
much above the fur seal.
The great redeeming feature of the fur seal’s character is its playfulness when
young, for few animals seem to enjoy life so well as the rollicking pups and young
bachelors. But here again it is necessary to curb our imagination, and to remember
that while the young seals undoubtedly do derive a certain amount of enjoyment from
their sports, very much of what strikes us as mere play is in reality dawning instinct.
The sporting of seal pups foreshadows the time when their very lives will depend on
the ability to capture food for themselves, and the playful wrestling contests in which
they perpetually engage are mere hints of future fierce battles among bulls. Year-
lings do not round up harems of pups with the reasoning care that a child bestows on
her dolls, but because centuries of heredity have caused this instinct to be developed
long before it serves any practical purpose. And this acting by instinct is the key-
note of the seal’s character; the mind, like the body, has been molded by natural
selection acting on the mass, so that one seal behaves like another and knows just as
much as another, and no more. It is a creature of instincts and not guided to any
great extent by reason. As it has done in the past so it will do in the future. Its
habits, being formed by the slow process of natural selection, can change but slowly,
hence the fur seal is not likely to alter its habits, or to adapt itself to changes in
surrounding conditions. It may be exterminated, but it will not leave its breeding
grounds, and the last seal will come calmly on shore to be knocked in the head.
VI.—THE CAUSES OF MORTALITY AMONG SEALS.
By Freprric A. Lucas.
“
Those who have read the testimony submitted to the Paris tribunal must have
been struck with the great diversity of Statements regarding the death rate among
seals, and particularly among young seals, for it was positively asserted and quite as
positively denied that numbers of seal pups died annually prior to the 1st of August.
In view of these conflicting statements it was obviously of great importance to ascer-
tain not only the number of pups which died before the commencement of pelagic
sealing, but the causes which. led to their death. Every effort was therefore made
to obtain information on these points, and this portion of the report may be said to
represent the results of the observations of all members of the various commissions.
A count was made of the dead pups as early in August as circumstances would admit,
while autopsies, recorded further on, were performed on as many bodies as were
sufficiently well preserved to allow of its being done.
It is not pretended that there may not be many more diseases among seals and
many more causes for their death than are herein set forth, but the intent of this -
chapter is to show what we actually know about these matters. There has been
entirely too much theory and entirely too little observation and record of facts in
treating of the fur seal, and it is mere idle speculation to say from what diseases they
might or might not die. It seems to have been generally considered that the death
rate among pup seals was low, the chief destruction being caused by surf and killer
whales. Photographs taken by Mr. Macoun in 1891 and 1892 (see Pl. XVI), however,
showed that on some portions of Tolstoi and Polovina there were certainly large
numbers of dead pups far above the surf mark which had perished long before the
middle of August and before the effects of pelagic sealing could be felt. It therefore
became an interesting question whether or not there was any reason why the deaths
on these rookeries should be more numerous than elsewhere.
Up to the Ist of August it was not only impossible to enter the breeding grounds,
but impossible to approach them very closely, not so much from the danger of
stampeding the rookeries as from the danger of being stampeded by angry bulls. By
August 8 the rookeries had opened out somewhat, the seals having largely drawn
back from the water, and on that date the dead pups on Kitovi, Lukanin, and the
Reef were counted. It was no easy matter to enter a rookery even on that date, and
it required much skill in dodging active and angry bulls and a cautious collecting of
bodies with long gaffs to make the count complete and to gather any subjects fit for
dissection. While the result of this count was surprising, 1,264 dead pups being
found in 1896 on the three rookeries named, the counts of Polovina, made on August
10, and of Tolstoi, made on August 12, were still more startling, revealing as they did
vis)
76 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
the presence of 635 dead on the one and 1,895 on the other, the level sands of Tolstoi
being so strewn with bodies as to suggest a battle field after some hotly contested
encounter. See Plate XVII.
The first very evident fact regarding these dead seals was that the vast majority
had been a long time dead, some bodies being swollen and distorted, while the flat-
tened, hairless condition of others bore testimony not only to the length of time they
had been dead, but to their ruthless trampling beneath scores of shuffling feet. The
early date at which many had died was apparent from the numerous instances in
which the umbilical cord was still attached to the body, indicating that the little fel-
lows had been killed shortly after birth. The length of time that most had been dead
was also well shown by the small proportion available for dissection, for, although
every effort was made to obtain as large a number as possible, only 103 were obtained
on St. Paul in 1896 between August 6 and August 14, and not one of the 735 pups
found dead on St. George was dissectible.
The next very obvious fact was the large number of bodies lying on level, unob-
structed patches of ground where, earlier in the season, the breeding seals had been
‘densely massed, and where, as on Tolstoi, Zapadni, and Polovina, there had been
much fighting and confusion. Rocky slopes were comparatively free from dead, and
there were fewer still on rookeries composed of water-worn bowlders, as are the Lagoon
and Zapadui Reef.
The direct relations between the character of the ground, the numbers of breed-
ing seals, and: the number of dead pups, and the fact that many of the wore recently
dead were bruised,' seemed to point to the trampling of the larger seals, and especially
of the bulls, as the cause of death. This inference was apparently sustained by the
invariable verification of predictions, based on a careful study of the first rookery vis-
ited, as to the rookeries or parts of rookeries on which dead pups would be found most
numerous, and in the preliminary report of 1896 it was stated that deaths among
young pups were almost solely due to trampling.
However, in dissecting the pup penned up and allowed to starve, a few small
nematodes were found in the small intestine, and as this young seal was nursing, and
in consequence they could not have been obtained from fish, the parasites were pre-
served, and, with other specimens, submitted to Dr. C. W. Stiles for examination.
Dr. Stiles indentified the nematodes as belonging to the genus Uncinaria, and in his
report stated that under proper conditions this worm might play an important role in
the mortality of the pups.”
Being aware of the possible presence of a dangerous parasite, on the visit of the
commission in 1897 a careful search was made for this nematode, with the result
that it was found to be present in great abundance, completely realizing the state-
11t may be said that the number of pups bearing bruises and obviously trampled on was greater
in 1896 than in 1897, for the reason that there were more seals in the former year and they were more
densely massed, so that there was a greater chance for a pup to be stepped on.
2In Professor Thompson’s report on his mission to Bering Sea in 1897, page 8, he says: “ During
last winter Dr. Stiles, a well-known American helminthologist, reasoning from the very high mortality
of the pups on sandy as compared with that on the rocky areas, suggested to the American commis-
sioners that a cause of the mortality might be found in a parasitic worm of the genus Uncinaria
(Dochmius), which passes a portion of its life history in sand. ***” This was written before the
conference of November, 1897, and before hearing the report of the writer on Uncinaria,
and is wholl
erroneous, the facts being as given above. ae
CONDITION, OF UNCINARIATED PUPS. U7
ments made by Dr. Stiles and eliminating trampling as an important source of death
‘ to any but very young pups. The first pup secured for dissection was obtained from
Lukanin rookery on July 24, although noted as dead on July 22. No part of this
rookery was crowded, and the dead seal lay on a sandy spot, strewn with bowlders,
not far from several harems. On dissection the pup proved to be fat and well
nourished, the stomach containing a quantity of milk. There were no bruises and no
signs of disease save a slight discoloration of the median part of the small intestine,
which might well have been caused by decomposition. The intestine was, however,
slightly nodular or swollen in spots throughout this discolored area, and on cutting
open these nodes the mucous membrane was found to be broken down and the swollen
part filled with mucus and blood. Moreover, in each swelling there were many
Uncinaria, the total number in the 3 feet of intestine affected being large, and the
wall of the intestine being marked by numerous cyst-like spots, where the parasites
had been attached. The flesh was pale, and but little blood, and this thin and watery,
present in the heart and large vessels, the indications being clear that death had
resulted from loss of blood and general anemia produced by the attacks of Uncinaria.
From this time onward, owing to the opening out of the rookeries, it became gradu-
ally more and more easy to obtain specimens for examination, and between July 25
and September 4 some 345 pups were dissected, revealing the existence of Uncinaria
in all favorable localities, and showing that this parasite was by far the most impor-
tant factor in the death rate among pups. After my departure on August 20, the work
of dissection was carried on actively by Messrs. R. E. Snodgrass and A. W. Greeley,
of Stanford University, who prosecuted the work up to September 4, the date of their
. departure.
“From our combined observations it would seem that the disease is at its height
from July 15 or 20 to August 20, and that it ceases about the 1st of September.
_ While we failed to recognize Uncinaria as the cause of death in 1896, yet after
August 22 of that year only two pups were found that had not certainly starved to
death. In the light of subsequent work it is evident that one of these was a case of
death resulting from inflammation caused by Uncinaria, and it is probable that the
other was from the same cause. Both were from the worst infected localities on
St. Paul, one being from Polovina, the other from Tolstoi. In 1897 Messrs. Snodgrass
and Greeley found two cases of death from Uncinaria after September 1, but the
summer of 1897 was warmer and drier than that of 1896, and as equally careful search
was made in both years for other sources of death than starvation it is possible that
for climatic reasons the ravages of the parasite were continued to a later date in 1897
than in the previous year.
Since but two pups out of many scores are known to have died from Uncinaria in
1896 after August 22, and but 15 out of 106 actually dissected after August 20 are
known to have died from Uncinaria in 1897, it is assuming too much to say that any
considerable number of pups dying after September 1 have perished from that
cause.!
1Professor Thompson, Report on His Mission to Bering Sea in 1897, p. 8, writes: ‘‘And, further-
more, the existence of this cause of death gives us the right, though in what measure we do not know,
to deduct to a very considerable extent from the number of pups that die in the latter part of the
season when we seek to estimate the loss due to starvation as a result of pelagic slaughter of the
cows. It was shown last-year that one-half the mortality of pups occurred before pelagic sealing
78 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
It must be remembered, too, that the proportion of 15 to 91 is abnormally high from
the fact that in securing specimens for dissection hundreds of obviously starved pups
were passed by and others secured when possible.
Up to the middle of August the number of deaths from Uncinaria exceeds that
from all other known natural causes combined, and while many young seals probably
recover from attacks of the parasite, it would seem that in a large proportion of cases
the disease is sufficiently severe to cause death.
In the absence of the necessary data, we can say nothing as to the proportion of
infected young which recover, and the data could only be obtained by the somewhat
expensive method of killing and examining at least one hundred healthy individuals
from some such locality as Tolstoi sand flat. Such an examination should begin after
August 15 and be continued up to or into September, and the results of the dissections,
compared with the number of pups found dead from Uncinaria, would afford some clue
as to the proportion which are attacked and recover. The best we can do at present
is to glean what we can from the tables of mortality, and here we find that of the 24
which died from violence, sundry or unknown causes, 4 contained Uncinaria, although
1 contained but a single example. Out of 177 starved pups, 14 contained Uncinaria
in numbers too small to be fatal, although these starved pups throw little light on the
problem, since, as pointed out elsewhere, the starving animals are the least liable to be
infected. We can merely say that of 201 pups which died from various causes, but
mainly from starvation, 18 contained small numbers of the parasite. These figures do
not include the deaths on St. George, which is almost free from Uncinaria, and for
that reason was not considered.
While many apparently strong and healthy pups suffer from Uncinaria, those
dangerously attacked may usually be recognized by their sleepy appearance, the eyes
being dull and partly closed; by the unkempt appearance of the coat, and by their lack
’ of vigor. When itis possible to obtain and handle these animals they are found to lack —
the spirit and bad temper of healthy animals, to allow themselves to be handled and
to apparently enjoy being rubbed. One of the effects of the disease seems to be to
make the pups restless and to cause them to wander away from the rookery limits,
sometimes to very considerable distances, and it is probable that young seals observed
in 1896 and recorded as stragglers were afflicted with a fatal attack of Uncinaria.
The blood of animals suffering from Uncinaria is small in quantity, deficient in
red corpuscles, thin and watery, and in extreme cases will not coagulate. The flesh
is anzemic, so much so in typical examples that the cause of death is revealed at the
first stroke of the knife; the lungs are pale, the kidneys particularly so. At the same
time, while the animals are somewhat flabby, they have every appearance of being
well nourished, and unless death has resulted from a combination of Uncinaria and
starvation the bodies are enveloped in a thick coat of blubber, death coming so quickly
that there is not time to get thin. Thus the pups which have died from Uncinaria
could exert its influence, but we do not know at what period, if at any period of ‘infaney, the
parasite ceases to be fatal to the pup. The presumption is certainly strong that to this epidemic
cause is due a very considerable proportion of that moiety of deaths which do not constitute but
only include the loss from pelagic sealing.” The presumption, or, rather, the evidence, is opposed to
this ‘‘presumption,” and even were it true it does not alter the fact that every pup seal whose
mother is killed inevitably starves. The argument is that because there is a high natural death
rate therefore it does no harm to add to it. a
CONDITION OF UNCINARIATED PUPS. vis)
can always be told from those which have died from starvation, and the intermediate
cases when death has resulted from starvation following an attack of the parasite
are also readily recognizable.
The pups which have died from Uncinaria alone are invariably fat, and their flesh
is anemic and yellowish; those which have succumbed to starvation alone show no
trace of fat and their flesh is dark and purplish. Those in which starvation has
followed an attack of the parasite exhibit more or less of an intermediate condition,
more or less fat being present, according to the extent of the infection. Thus if the
infection is extensive the animal will succumb quickly to the added starvation and
some little fat will be present, while if the infection be light subsequent starvation
will act slowly and only traces of fat will be present. Other things being equal, the
condition of the kidneys affords very good evidence of the cause of death, since they
are shrunken and congested in the starved animals; anemic and rather soft in those
which have died from Uncinaria, and in an intermediate state in cases of Uncinaria
combined with starvation.
The original place of the attack is at or near the median portion of the small
intestine, although in one severe case the Uncinaria reached to within 3 feet of the
pylorus. The infection may occupy but 3 or 4 feet of the intestine, while in the
worst case examined all save the uppermost 7 feet were more or less infected with the
parasite, and in the later stages, as noted by Mr. Snodgrass, even the upper part of
the large intestine may be involved, although this happens rarely.
In typical cases the diseased part is marked by slight nodular swellings, in other
cases 1t is more uniformly distended along the bad part, while in other cases the
intestine 1s thick, less elastic than in health, and abnormally pale. In still other
cases, where death is due to inflammation caused by the presence of Uncinaria, and is
not directly due to their attacks, the intestine is slightly inflamed. The majority of
deaths are directly due to loss of blood; next in number are the instances where the
animal has apparently withstood the attack, but the intestine has lost its power to
assimilate food which passes through it undigested. These are the cases where the
intestine is thick and pale and examination reveals the presence of numerous small
cyst-like spots where the parasites were attached. Deaths from inflammation set up
by the Uncinaria are the least numerous of all,
I am indebted to Mr. Snodgrass for the following notes on the condition of intes-
tines of pups infected by Uncinaria, and on the development of the eggs.
The small intestine of a pup that has died of Uncinaria is, when the pup is recently dead, enlarged
and of a whitish color. The walls are swollen and easily torn. Usually about the posterior third
only is affected. At irregular but short intervals, the affected part is distended by oval enlargements.
The walls of these places are usually no more swollen than the walls elsewhere. The enlargement is
due to the collection of a dark, reddish-brown, or a reddish (due to blood) colored mass of mucus
in the intestine. The worms are present only in the distended places, generally numbering from one
to ten or twelve in each, and are very evidently the cause of the collection of mucus and blood. In
pups that have just died, each Uncinaria is attached by one end within a small pit on the wall of the
intestine.
Only the upper end of the large intestine is ever affected, worms having been found only in a very
few cases lower down than about the first 6 or 7 inches, and generally the most of them are crowded
into a much smaller place near the anterior end. In one case a few were found scattered along to
near the posterior end, and several other worms have been found back of the middle. Since the
middle of August cases were very common in which no worms were present in the small intestine,
although all appearances strongly indicated that they had been there, but in which a large number
80 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
were crowded into the upper end of the large intestine. The affected part of the large intestine is
modified in the same way as that of the small, except that the small swellings aro absent, the entire
affected region being greatly enlarged and very tense.
Sometimes the walls of both small and large intestines contain small, whitish, granular bodies
imbedded in them. ‘These are not egg pockets, but diseased places. ~
The two sexes of the Uncinaria are easily distinguished by the difference in size and by the
terminal organs of the male. The male is shorter and slenderer thon the female, being about 9
millimeters long, and has the posterior end provided with two opposing sets of three large, inwardly
curved, claw-like appendages. The female is about 14 millimeters long, and the posterior end of the
body is conical, with a short tubular prolongation.
A large number of females were examined with a microscope during the time from August 20 to
September 4. Only one of them contained no eggs. The others all contained a great number—more
than a hundred.in those counted. When the worms kill a pup, they kill then.selves also. The
females expel some of their eggs into the intestines during the life of the pup, and then pass to the
exterior in the feces. Numerous eggs may be found in the contents of both intestines by use of a
microscope. These are generally in the process of division, consisting of eight or ten cells. Many are
undivided, however. The eggs in the female worms are inthe same condition. In a dead pup the
unlaid eggs greatly exceed in number the laid eggs present in the intestine at the time of death.
Therefore, by the killing of the pup, the worms kill a large proportion of their own eggs, unless the
latter develop in the dead pup. Some eggs were examined from a rotting pup that must have been
dead at least four weeks. A few were apparently decomposing, but the rest were in various stages of
division. Many of the latter were placed in a drop of water on a glass slide and floated in a tight jar
of water to prevent desiccation, in order to learn whether they would develop further or not. A
hurried leaving of the island prevented the results being known.
Theembryos of Uncinaria are undoubtedly taken into the stomachs when nursing,
being brushed up from and with the sand by the fur of the female seals, and then
swallowed by the young. This supposition is corroborated by the fact previously
stated that few starved or starving seals contain any Uncinaria, the worst affected
being the best nourished, many having died immediately after having eaten a hearty
meal.
Out of 29 pups which had died from Uncinaria the stomach was full in 14 cases,
partially ‘full in 9, and empty only in 6, and it has been suggested by Dr. T. M. Wood
that death may follow immediately after a full meal as a result of the effort of the
enfeebled system to digest it.
The Uncinaria are practically confined to those rookeries where there is more or
less sand, and it must be remembered in this connection that many localities where
the ground is so plentifully strewn with rocks as to deserve the term of bowlder areas
contain an abundance of sand among the rocks. This is partially the case on the
Reef, Gorbatch, and Northeast Point, all localities where Uncinaria abound, although
the headquarters of the pest seems to be on the sands of Tolstoi, Zapadni and Polovina
coming next.
It is interesting to note that level, sandy areas thickly crowded with seals, on which
deaths from trampling would be most likely to occur, are also the areas most favorable
to the propagation of Uncinaria and their transmission to the young seals.
The sandy areas are not only favorable for the retention and development of the
embryos of Uncinaria, but favorable to their transmission to the pups, for the reason
that the females in lying on or moving over the sand get more or less of it in their
coats, and a part of this is swallowed by the nursing pups. So much is sometimes swal-
lowed as to give the milk a slightly grayish cast, the milk being so thick that sand
does not settle in it.
FORMER MORTALITY NOT NOTICED. 81
On rocky ground the embryos are readily blown or washed off, while on bowlder
beaches, such as the Lagoon and Zapadni Reef, the embryos are still more readily
washed away, while many fall among the crevices of the rocks at the outset and are
lost. There is thus much less chance of the embryos being present to adhere to the
coats of the female seals, while on rough ground the seals are also unable to pack as
closely together as on flat places. The relation between the character of the ground
aud Uncinaria may be shown by the comparison of one rookery with another or by
' the comparison of the deaths on St. George with those on St. Paul. For example, we
did not find a single case of Uncinaria on Lagoon rookery, which is composed of
rounded bowlders, while on Tolstoi Sand Flat 52 out of 109 pups examined contained
Uncinaria, and there were 44 deaths from that cause alone. On comparing Big
Zapadni with Zapadni Reef we find that on the first-named tract, which comprises
much sand, 16 out of 25 deaths were from Uncinaria and parasites were present in 3
other cases, while on Zapadni Reef, which consists largely of bowlders, but 2 out of 12
deaths were due to Uncinaria, and these 2 occurred at the eastern end, where the
bowlders are interspersed with sand.
Taking the death rate of the two islands as a whole, the number of dead pups
found on St. George in 1896 was only 735, while on St. Paul it reached the astonishing
number of 10,309, this great difference being solely due to the character of the breed-
ing grounds. On St. George the rookeries are located almost exclusively on bowlder
beaches or on solid rock, seldom, in their now depleted condition, comprising any
extent of sand. On St. Paul, on the contrary, a large portion of the seals occupy
ground that is either sandy or consists of sand interspersed with bowlders. This
rocky character of the rookery ground on St. George and its practical freedom from
Uncinaria is probably the reason why this island has afforded a greater number of
skins in proportion to the size of the hauling grounds than has St. Paul.
As the damage done by Uncinaria bears a direct relation to the character of the
ground and the number of seals present, the losses from this cause in past times must
have been enormous, although in most places there is little apparent evidence of past
destruction. Still, when one stands on the slope above the eastern end of Tolstoi and
looks at the sands below they seem gray with the whitening bones of thousands of
pups, thus mapping out territory occupied when the rookeries were in their prime,
part of which bas been vacant for at least eight years.
These seals, dead from Uncinaria, are those seen by the British commissioners in
1891 and 1892, and also by Colonel Murray in the latter year, and they are the dead
seen on Zapadni and Polovina scattered along the edges of the breeding grounds.
That this great mortality has gone on year after year practically unnoticed is not
so remarkable as it might seem. At the time the deaths are most numerous it is quite
out of the question to enter the rookeries, and most of the dead are hidden from view
by the dense masses of breeding seals, while naturally the more abundant the seals,
as in years goue by, the more difficult would it be to examine the breeding grounds.
During the period of rookery expansion, when the rookeries are largely clear, they
are avoided in order not to disturb the seals which have drawn back over the adjacent
territory, and after the breeding season is over no attention seems to have been paid
to the rookery grounds; hence year after year thousands of pups have died aud no
one has been any the wiser. And unless one has actually gone over a rookery foot
by foot and counted every dead seal, he will fail to realize the numbers present.
5947—pPT 3——6
82 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. .
Thus, on the deadly sands of Tolstoi, where during the rookery season of 1896 there
appeared to be not over 120 bodies, a complete count showed 1,193, while on the flat
portion of Polovina, where 584 dead pups were found, Professor Thompson and myself
on July 23 could see only 8.
Then, too, in many places the bodies of the dead rapidly disintegrate and disap-
pear. Gulls begin the scavenger work, flies and foxes continue it, and rain and wind
sweep up what remains; or in the denser portion of the rookery grounds the grind-
ing of hundreds of dippers and the drifting sand soon remove all traces of the dead,
and in a few months a scattered bone or two, which will serve as playthings for next
year’s pups, is all that remains to tell the tale. So quickly do the bodies disappear
when the conditions are favorable that by October 10, 1896, not 10 per cent of the
dead counted during the first half of August could be recognized.
Now and then, however, some traces of the former destruction of pups comes to
light, as in 1896, when a dry October gale swept over St. Paul, removing the sand
in places to a eonsidarable depth, laying bare the bones of numberless pups, long
buried in the sand flat of Tolstoi. Here, where a short time before only a bone or two
was visible, fragments of 336 skulls were counted in a space of 39 by 42 feet, while
the area adjoining the present terminus of the rookery showed even more.’
In one of the gullies at Zapadni there were 27 skulls, or rather fragments repre-
senting that number, in one littlepile, but here they had washed together from various
places above, and the local mortality, although great, was not so bad as it might at
first appear.
As previously noted, the plague of Uncinaria ceases about the end of August,
and its cessation appears to bear a direct relation to the habits of the pups, who by
_ that time pass more or less of their time in the water, where the feeces are for the
most part voided. Theembryos of Uncinaria therefore pass into the water and perish
instead of falling on the ground, where they may readily be taken up by the seals.
The rains of fall and the intense cold of winter must kill any Uncinaria which
may linger in the sand, and we do not yet know how the rookeries become reinfected
in the spring, although it is very probable that the older seals are to some extent
troubled with the parasite, and that it is through their agency that the disease is
started anew. This, however, is merely surmise, for the examination of a number of .
bachelors and old bulls failed to reveal the presence of any Uncinaria. The rapid
digestion of the older seals and, above all, the fact that their food is obtained in the
water and at great distances from land are factors of safety for them.
Next to Uncinaria the most frequent cause of death among young seals is starva-
tion, and while the ratio shown in the number dissected’ may not be found in the total
number of deaths, there is some reason to suspect that such may be the case; and, in
any event, starvation is an important source of loss. If we use the figures obtained
by Mr. Snodgrass from an examination of 75 young seals on St. George, and apply
them to the total number of pups found dead in August, 1896, we would have 617 of
the 735 deaths on St. George due to starvation, a death rate of 30, 8 per 1,000, according
to the estimates of the number of female seals on St. George in 1896. As starvation
is the cause of the vast majority of deaths on St. George, it is fair to assume that this
is not far from the normal ratio. Applying this ratio to the 123,000 females estimated
to have been on St. Paul in 1896 would give 3,800 pups as having died from starvation
1Recorded by Mr, Clark,
DEATHS FROM STARVATION. 83
in 1896, and it is to be noted that this is not far from the number indicated by the
percentage of starved pups among those examined in 1896 and 1897. The percentage
of deaths from starvation was a little higher in 1897 than in 1896, and thisis precisely
what would happen if we are correct in supposing that the starvation is principally,
or at least largely, dué to the rough treatment of cows by the bulls, and their subse-
quent death at sea,
Between July 25 and August 15 the proportion of starved pups to those dead from
other causes is, among those examined, as 5 to’ 8; between August 15 and September
5 it is as 2 to 1, owing to the influence of pelagic sealing. In 1896 no young seals were
found after August 22 which had died from any cause save starvation; in 1897 but 2
were found dead of Uncinaria after September 1, while of 23 young containing Unci-
naria, examined after August 25, 8 had died from starvation following an attack of
the parasite.
It will do no harm to repeat that there is no difficulty in distinguishing between
pups which have died from Uncinaria only and those in which an attack of Uncinaria,
not necessarily fatal in itself, has been followed by starvation. As the seal is weak-
ened by the drain upon its blood produced by the parasite, it naturally follows that
an animal thus afflicted will succumb to starvation in a much shorter time than if in
a perfectly normal condition. It thus happens that those young seals which have
died from the combined effects of Uncinaria and starvation retain more or less fat,
while those that have perished from starvation alone are emaciated to the last degree.
Therefore, although we failed to recognize the ravages of Uncinaria in 1896, yet
in no single instance did we consider as starved a single pup that had died from
Uncinaria, and Professor Thompson’s surmise to that etfect is without any foundation.!
As to the exact causes of this starvation of the young we are somewhat in the
dark, although we get some hints in the observations of Mr. Clark in 1897, which
show that in some cases the seals are stolen from their original harems, and thus
separated from their young, who in many instances are unable or fail to follow their
mothers. Also, a number of females very likely perish at sea from the rough handling
they have received on shore, while others probably stay away so long feeding and
sleeping that the young perish of hunger before they return. This supposition
derives support from the fact that on two occasions lean and apparently famishing
pups were seen to respond eagerly to the calls of cows just in from the sea, showing
from the avidity with which they nursed that they were in a starving condition.
_ A few pups are bound to starve from the deaths of their mothers, which are killed
by rough treatment on the rookery grounds, but this number is comparatively insig-
nificant and, moreover, most of the cows are killed too early in the season for their pups
to be dissectible by August 10, and after all known sources of starvation have been
considered we are bound to say that deaths from this cause before August 1 are more
numerous than, with our present information, we can definitely account for. How-
ever, let the loss from starvation under natural conditions be what it may, this loss is
comparatively small, while the fact remains that every pup whose mother is killed at
sea inevitably starves to death.
Deaths from drowning are not so numerous as might be expected from the habits
of young seals and from what has been written of the “deadly surf nip,” but after
visiting the rookeries during and after several gales it becomes evident that, under
1 Thompson, Report on His Mission to Bering Sea in 1897, p. 8.
84 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
N
ordinary circumstances, comparatively few are lost by drowning. Until the pups
have learned to swim well they are careful not to venture beyond their depth,! and
after they have learned it takes a pretty heavy surf to drown them, even before they
have mastered the art of diving beneath the crest of a wave. A pup will come in on
@ wave and go sprawling up the beach over the shingle and among the rocks in a
perfect smother of foam, and then, instead of thanking Providence for his escape, turn
about and swim out into the sea to repeat the performance.’ Certainly some do drown,
especially when startled into jumping from a cliff into a heavy surf, and the habit of
crawling under the bowlders leads to the destruction of others when the sea comes
up with the tide and catches pups in places whence they are unable to extricate them-
selves; but, after all, the number lost from these causes is small. In this connection it
is worth noting that the percentage of drowned pups was higher in 1896 than in 1897,
and this is in accord with the difference between the weather during the two seasons,
the summer of 1897 having been unusually quiet, so that up to August 15 there was
no surf sufficiently heavy to sweep incautious pups off the rocks. While at St. George,
on August 3 and 4, 1896, we experienced a fresh gale from the southwest, which sent a
heavy surf tumbling directly in on Zapadni. As the bowlder beach at the foot of the
cliffs was fairly swarming with pups just beginning to play in the water, it was a good
opportunity to see what damage, if any, would be-wrought by an ordinary gale. A
visit to the rookery, however, failed to reveal the presence of a single drowned pup,
although the locality where the young seals were massed beneath the bluff was criti-
cally scanned with field glasses and a careful search was made along the beach. The
pups, asin other cases noted, had simply withdrawn from the water’s edge, beyond the
breaker’s reach, and were perfectly safe.
Freshly drowned pups were found on Tolstoi shortly after this gale (August 7),
and later on drowned pups were obtained from Lower Zapadni and Gorbatch, but on
these rookeries the sea struck obliquely, and it would seem that this is more dangerous
than when it sets squarely on shore. Jn the latter case, a pup if swept off by one
wave might be cast back by the next, but when the sea strikes diagonaily it creates a
strong surface current, that would carry an unlucky pup out and down the beach to
some place where the waves come directly in and there the lifeless body would be
cast ashore.
_ Many a pup has been considered as having drowned, when in reality he had been
dead for days, perhaps weeks, before washing off the rookery, to form one of a so-called
«“windrow of drowned pups” at some point farther up the beach. After the gale of
August 3 the sandy beach at Tolstui was strewn with the bodies of long-dead pups,’
while the gale of August 17 cast no less than 30 bodies on Zoltoi sands, nearly a
quarter of a mile north of Gorbatch rookery. A superficial observation of these
bodies might easily have created the belief that they had been drowned, when a
closer scrutiny would have shown that all had long been dead; that many were in an
advanced stage of decomposition, and that some had the umbilical cord still attached.
(See Pl. XTX.)
1 On several occasions in August, while visiting the rookeries when a heavy surf was running and
before tho pups had learned to swim, they were seen to gather in a crowd along the edge of the water,
evidently hestitating between the devils and the deep sea:
2In September and October pups were always to be seen sporting in the surf, even when it was
infinitely heavier than at any time in August.
‘There were 232 of them, not one of which had drowned; those which had perished from this
cause being found among the bowlders of the rookery proper farther to the west,
DEATHS FROM TRAMPLING. 85
The danger of taking anything for granted is well shown by the fact that when
the commission first visited Northeast Point in July the bodies of 10 seal pups and
25 sea-lion pups were found washed up on the beach to the south of Sea Lion Neck.
As it had blown a gale from the northeast ten days before, and the surf had beaten
directly on this part of the island, death from drowning seemed so obvious, that no
autopsies were made, although it was casually noted that the sea-lion pups were lean.
In the light of subsequent observations it is plain that Mr. Redpath was correct
in stating that these animals were dead long before they washed off the ‘ Neck.”
With this unfortunate exception, in no instance was it taken for granted that a pup
was drowned simply because such appeared to be the case.
While the number of dead pups which remains after eliminating those dead from
Uncinaria, the starved and the drowned is comparatively small, yet, in the aggregate,
it must amount to sonte hundreds, and helps to swell the long list of those which die
before they are 6 months old. Various accidents and diseases contribute to the death
roll, and there must be many causes of death besides those noted.
While the trampling of the young seals by the old does not play the important
role ascribed to it in 1896, it nevertheless enters into the causes of death, and probably
did so more extensively in former days when seals were much more numerous and
the rookeries much more crowded. Judging by the number of very young pups with
part of the umbilical cord still attached which die within the harem limits before the
middle of July, there is a considerable percentage of newly or recently born pups
which meet their death by being stepped on. These could scarcely have met their
death from Uncinaria, since the time that they have been nursing seems hardly suffi-
cient for them to have become infected so badly as to cause death.
' That there is a certain amount of loss owing to the pups being trampled under
foot or struck by some bull rushing about the rookeries is undeniable. Six pups were
found in 1896 whose death could be ascribed to no other cause, while as many more
were badly bruised, and in 1897, when a larger number of pups were examined, 10
deaths were due to blows and several more were obviously injured.
It is also possible for a pup to receive fatal injuries without any trace of them
appearing on the body. On August 8, 1896, while counting the dead on the reef, two
pups were seen to be knocked over by a bull and left gasping on the ground. One,a
robust individual, so far recovered from his injuries that he was allowed to take his
chance of total recovery; the end of the other, a sinall animal, paralyzed and dying,
was hastened by a scalpel thrust in the meduila, but a careful examination made of
the body failed to reveal any visible signs of the deadly blow that had been received.
The long, rubbery flipper of the fur seal is, in fact, an improvement on the sand
bag of the footpad, and while the edge of the flipper is capable of delivering as hard
a blow as a cudgel, the flat part may stretch a pup lifeless on the sand, and leave no
trace behind. So small, indeed, may be the external evidence of a heavy blow that
one pup from Gorbatch, which bore so slight a contusion on the neck that the cause
of death was questionable, was found to have the base of the skull fractured. Had
the skull not been saved and cleaned, this individual would have passed into the list
of cause of death not obvious, for the fracture was invisible until the muscles were
removed and the skull completely cleaned by the industrious amphipods.
The possibilities of a blow from the flipper of a bull, were well shown in one instance
where the stroke had been so tremendous, and dealt so squarely on the top of the
.
86 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
head, that the skull was literally split, the frontal’ and parietal bones being driven
apart ‘along the line of suture. Another pup whose skull was fractured may have
been struck by a flipper, but, as it was also bitten, was more probably dashed against
a rock.
To one who has watched the rookeries and seen an excited bull rushing about in
a crowd of females and pups the surprising thing is that deaths from bruises are not
more frequent. During the height of the season the bulls are ever on the alert, keep-
ing a sharp lookout, not only on the idle bulls which lie about the rookeries, but on
their neighbors as well, who, when their harems are small, are quite ready to borrow
a cow or two from a more fortunate companion. Considerable commotion, too, may be
caused by a bull heading off some cow which may evince a desire to go to the water
before the bull thinks she should. The worst disturbance, however; is created and
most damage done when the proprietor of a harem is driven off by some aggressive
rival, for the defeated bull makes for the sea, overturning cows and dashing the pups
right and left in his mad rush for safety. Other cows, taking the alarm, also scurry
for the water in spite of the efforts of their bulls to round them up, and a hundred or
more, leaving their pups behind, will plunge headlong into the sea. On July 16, 1896,
such an incident was twice witnessed at Northeast Point in a comparatively short
space of time, and while the desertion is only temporary, the cows returning to their
respective harems as soon as quiet is restored, yet much damage may be thus caused. |
While deaths from specific diseases are probably comparatively few, yet undoubt-
edly more exist than are herein noted, while more careful work night have transferred
some of the unknown list to other categories. Still it is often difficult, frequently
‘ impossible, to ascertain the cause of an animal’s death even where the preliminary
symptoms are known and the autopsy made under the most favorable circumstances.
In the present instances the specimens were gathered as best they might from half an
hour to two weeks after death had occurred, and the work of dissection was per-
formed in the field, sometimes with a block of lava for a dissecting table, sometimes
on the sand, often with an‘audience of interested bulls who evinced a strong desire to.
take part in the proceedings.
Still, in making the autopsies nothing was taken for granted, not even in cases ot
evidently starved pups, while all bodies found in situations where they might have
been drowned were carefully examined to ascertain whether or not this were
really the case. Care was also taken not to confuse marks made by the pecking of
gulls with contusions, for such injuries about the eyes and frontal region, when
inflicted shortly before or after death, may readily be mistaken for the actual cause of
death. In two instances, where the cause of death was not obvious and time per-
mitted, the brain was examined, but in neither case did it exhibit any congestion or
other lesion to account for death.
Absence of fat, or of subcutaneous fat, may not mean as much as it should to
those unacquainted with seals; in reality, it is practically synonymous with starva-
tion, and if a seal lacks fat beneath the skin it is useless to look for it elsewhere. Fat
is the seal’s heavy undershirt, by which he is proteeted from cold, and when this is
gone the seal is gone, too.
In order, too, that there might be no question as to the evidences of starvation,
an active, healthy female pup found among the bachelors was placed by itself, its
condition at various times noted, and an autopsy made after death. In order to have
RARITY OF PULMONARY COMPLAINTS. 87
the same conditions that are found on the rookeries, the body was allowed to lie out
of doors, exposed to the weather, for two days before it was dissected. The results
of the autopsy agreed exactly with the diagnosis of starvation in man, as well as with
the appearances of the organs in other pups whose death was ascribed to starvation.
When first taken, on August 1, the pup weighed 12 pounds; at the time of death, on
August 15, the weight was reduced to 9 pounds. The appearance of the organs was
as follows: Lungs small, flaccid, deeply congested; comparatively little blood in heart,
and no clot; liver small, thin, and very dark; gall bladder full; much dark bile secre-
tion in “uitestines: forming the ‘tarry feces” so characteristic of starvation; kidneys
small and dark; both branches of uterus congested.
It may be ‘said, too, that a blind pup was killed on Zapadni by choking and
crushing, much as might have occurred had the little one been sat upon by a bull, or
trampled beneath a score of stampeding cows, and that the lungs showed the charac-
teristic congestion found in the lungs of evidently trampled bodies, although, as was
often the case in them, there was little external evidence of what had happened.
As the autopsies were, as stated, made and recorded in the field, it was not prac-
ticable to go into particulars; and where, for example, the lungs were congested, that
fact alone was stated without describing their appearance in detail, although there is
a great difference between the flaccid, purple congestion of a starved lung and the
fuller, redder look of a lung congested from trampling or smothering, still another
variety of congestion resulting from drowning. But while this is not noted in the
autopsies, it was taken into consideration in deciding on the cause of death.
The rarity of pulmonary diseases is shown by the fact that only one seal was thus
affected, this being a case of catarrhal pneumonia,? found on Big Zapadni. That such
should be the case is not, however, to be wondered at, for it would indeed be surpris-
ing to find animals whose lives are passed in the water, or on cold rocks in a raw,
foggy atmosphere, suffering from pulmonary complaints. In this respect, as in all
others, “natural selection” tends to improve the race of fur seals by eliminating the
weak or sickly, for Nature harshly and promptly removes all individuals which lag
behind in the race for life. The old seals, however, are much given to sneezing when
on shore, although the cause of this is unknown.
The most common source of trouble among the little seals, although common only
by comparison, is inflammation of the bowels, seemin gly brought about by constipation,
the large intestine being packed to distention with green fecal matter, with resultant
inflammation. Three instances of this trouble were found on St. Paul, and as many
on St. George, in 1897. Mr. Snodgrass, who made the autopsies on the latter island,
notes that in two instances the umbilical cord and a portion of the placenta were still
attached, the region about the umbilicus being particularly inflamed. As in these
jastances the state of the intestines was similar to those in which the umbilical cord
had disappeared, it seems likely that its presence simply aggravated the disease and
had no part in producing it.
Another case of inflammation of the bowels, noted in 1896, may have been brought
about by a blow or by a fall from the rocks, and the same may be said of the single
case of inflammation of the kidneys, as the region over these organs is particularly
liable to be struck by the flipper of some old seal.
“180 diagnosed by Dr. Wm. Gray, of the Army Medical Museum, who prepared several sections
from one of the lungs.
88 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Falling from cliffs may seem a rather singular source of death to anyone not
familiar with the conditions about the rookeries and with the habits of the pups,
although to one acquainted with them it is not surprising. Young seals are much like
children; they delight in exploring little caves and creeping into out-of-the-way nooks
and crannies, a trait which leads to some of the losses from drowning. They also
scramble along narrow ledges on the bluffs back of the rookery grounds, especially if
there be some miniature cave in which they can curl up and sleep, and in these explo:
rations it occasionally happens that even their clinging, rubbery feet slip and a pup falls
from 10 to 40 feet onto the sharp rocks below. In fact it was the sight of the little seals
thus scrambling about the bluffs of North Rookery, St. George, that first suggested
the thought that some might be killed in this manner, and a little later two bodies were
seen lying among the rocks in places inaccessible from below. The result of such a
fall was shown by the autopsy of the only one thus killed which could be recovered,
the others having fallen among the breeding seals, where their bodies could not be
reached. Even when they do not fall far enough to be killed, pups may fall into crev-
ices among the rocks whence escape is impossible, and in these natural death traps
perish miserably from starvation. Such a trap, consisting of a narrow crevice at the
base of a long, steeply sloping rock, was noted on Kitovi when counting dead pups in
1897. The bodies of several little seals were taken from this one cranny, whose steep
sides prevented escape, while the sloping rock above formed a most admirable chute
down which the pups slid to their death. A still more curious case was that of a young
seal found penned beneath a rock by drifting sand, this having accumulated to such
an extent that escape was impossible, and only room enough was left to enable the pup
to breathe, the aperture being quite too small to allow the body to pass.
The number of pups thus caught among rocks and starved, while not large,
is yet greater than one would have suspected, since 7 pups and 1 cow were rescued
when counting the starved pups, and, of course, any cause of death, however small,
helps swell the total mortality. Now and then rocks fall on the pups instead of pups
falling on the rocks, and at Polovina two young seals were seen lying beneath blocks
of stone which had dropped from the face of the cliff. It is rather surprising that this
does not occur more frequently; but while the rocks are cracked and shattered, rock-
falls rarely occur except in early spring before the seals have arrived. Deaths from
this source are probably more frequent on Copper Island than on the Pribilofs, owing
to the fact that the rookeries in many cases lie at tle base of overhanging cliffs, and,
although accurate observations of the rookeries are difficult from the manner in which
they are guarded, Mr. Barrett-Hamilton noticed in one spot a bull and two cows
crushed beneath fallen rocks.
The following note is taken from Dr. Stejneger’s report on the Russian Seal Islands,
published in 1896. He says, page 45, footnote:
So steep are the rocky walls behind the Copper Island rookeries, and so close do the seals lie to
them, that falling masses of carth and rocks have occasionally caused the death of many'of the animals.
Thus it is recorded (Otchet. Ross Amer. M. Komp. Za., 1849, p. 23) that on the 16th of October, 1849,
during an earthquake, a rocky wall fell down, eying a rookery on Copper Island. Another earth
slide on one of the Glinka rookeries in 1893 similarity resulted in the killing of many seals.
The death of a pup seen on the hillside at Upper Zapadni, jammed beneath a
bowlder, was in all probability due primarily to some rampant bull or fleeing bachelor,
for even on level ground a hurrying seal will overturn a good-sized stone, while on a
PRINCIPAL CAUSES OF DEATH. 89
slope a rock of a hundredweight might easily be set in motion, and roll into a pod of
sleeping pups with fatal effect. A practical example of the ease with which pups may
Ve killed in just this way was seen while making the final count of Tolstoi, when a
bowlder, dislodged by moving seals, rolled into a “‘pod” of pups, killing two of them
and bruising others.
Among the causes of death not given in the table is the biting and mauling of
recently born pups by the cows, and the maltreatment of older ones by salacious bach-
elors. A pup obtained on Copper Island by Mr. Barrett-Hamilton had, according to
the diagnosis of the surgeon of H. B. M.8. Spartan, died from erysipelas induced by a
bite on the head, and on Northeast Point two pups were seen with suppurating wounds
on the back whose ultimate recovery seemed somewhat problematical. Several young
pups were seen bearing fresh and ugly scars of recent bites, and during 4 visit to
Kitovi on July 13 Dr. Stejneger and myself witnessed the following ill treatment of
avery young pup: “A recently born pup was very badly pulled about by the cows.
At one time it was pulled by three cows at once, one having hold of its head, another
of a hind flipper, and the third by the skin of the side. It was pulled back and forth
in this manner for some time, but when last seen was alive.”
There was no apparent reason for this brutal treatment save the vicious nature of
the animals, which snap at one another on small provocation. Later in the season,
when the harems have broken up, bachelors also worry the pups for pure devilment,
just as big boys torment little ones, some of the youngsters being pretty roughly han-
dled, and some found whose death could be ascribed to no other cause. A large male
pup, badly bitten, was seen on tlie reef, the external oblique muscle being cut through
and the skin torn off half the right side of the abdomen, the flap trailing on the ground.
Although alive and active, such a wound must eventually have resulted in death, and
the animal was killed. No case of sunstroke was observed, and none has probably
ever occurred, although seals might be killed by the sun just as they might be killed
by lightning. The symptoms ascribed to “sunstroke,” ‘‘ nervous jerking of the limbs,
followed by convulsions and death,” are the symptoms of the later stages of starva-
tion, and were seen and noted by Dr. Jordan, Mr. Townsend, and Mr. Clark.'
To sum up the evidence accumulated during the summers of 1897 and 1898, it may
be said that under natural conditions the vast majority of deaths among young fur
seals are due to the parasitic worm Uncinaria, whose ravages have probably borne a
direct ratio to the number of seals and condition of the rookeries. Next comes starva-
tion from causes at present not definitely known, and then follow small losses from
various diseases and accidents. A few of the newly born are accidentally trampled
under foot, a few are killed by their vicious relatives, and some perish from other
causes, so that all in all the total number of deaths before the young leave the island
of St. Paulis not far from 10 per cent of the number born, St. George with its free-
dom from Uneinaria faring much better. What follows after the migrating thousands
1Two of these are recorded in the Journal as follows: ‘‘A little pup lies gasping, with spasms
like hiccough for cach breath. She is killed. A small female pup, very lean. The right lung con-
gested, hardly crepitating; left lung normal; other organs likewise. Stomach wholly empty. Lower
part of small intestine full of greenish fecal matter. Absolutely no fat.
“A large female pup, greatly emaciated, was found lying gasping and jerking with spasms.
Another case of sunstroké, so called. It has passed a quantity of dark matter, like coal tar (a sure
sign of starvation), and its lower intestines were full of the same fluid. The organs were in a normal
condition. Nota trace of fat.”
90 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
have left the islands and started on their first trip southward we do not know, but we
do know that a very large proportion of those that set out never return, and the most
probable suggestion is that they perish of starvation from failure to catch the neces-
sary food, being abruptly weaned and forced to shift for themselves before they have
had an opportunity to learn the art of fishing.
Little can be said regarding the deaths among adult seals except those which
occur on the rookery grounds and are the direct outcome of fights among the bulls or
ill treatment of females by the males. As arule these happen early in the season, for not
one of the 129 cows and 28 bulls found on the breeding grounds in 1896 was sufficiently
well preserved to permit of an autopsy. In all probability comparatively few bulls
perish directly on the rookeries, the 25 bodies found being those of such as were killed
- outright or so desperately mauled that retreat was impossible. Butmany a vanquished
bull escapes only to die and many another dies after the season is over, lying down to
sleep his last sleep on the slopes about Middle Hill, where the bones of many an old
veteran lie bleaching on the sands. The shore of English Bay, from Tolstoi to beyond
Middle Hill, is indeed an ancient cemetery, not only for thousands of pups and scores
of bulls, but for many a sea lion and an occasional sea otter! as well. A 5-year old male,
found dead on Zoltoi sands, affords a hint of the manner in which many a rookery dis-
pute must terminate, especially when a young bull ventures, or a bachelor blunders,
inside the line of breeding seals; bitten about the flippers, bruised about the neck,
this ejected youngster had taken to the sea only to exchange one mode of death for
another, escaping from the jaws of an irate bull only to perish by drowning. But if
most of the bulls which are killed during the breeding season die outside the rookeries
the reverse is probably true of the cows, whose deaths either result from the efforts of
the bulls to prevent them from leaving the harems, or from the attempts of the bulls
to appropriate cows belonging to their neighbors. In either case the cows are liable
to undergo rough treatment, and although they receive the most savage bites without
flinching, many undoubtedly die of their wounds. Ordinarily a bull merely expos-
tulates with a cow in very vigorous seal language, but now and then he will Jose his
temper, and with a rapid stroke cut a gash in the female’s neck or shoulder, or make
his teeth meet in her back.’ Or, occasionally a nervous bull will seize some hesitating
cow by the back and with a toss of his head hurl her 10 feet away, usually without
serious injury, but now and then with fatal results. Such a case was seen on the reef
in 1897, where a female lying on her back among the bowlders was found to have her
skull as neatly fractured as if it had been done with a club, a bite in the small of the
back intimating rather plainly that the perpetrator of the deed was an u ely-tempered
bull.
While sucli things may happen at any time, they usually occur in the early part of
the season, and are most frequent where the harems are small and the idle bulls, which
are so fruittul a source of disturbance, most numerous. This in 1896 was the state of
affairs toward the southwestern portion of Northeast Point, where the quarreling and
clamor were incessant. Many of the cows, and some of the pups as well, were badly
scarred, one cow being specially noticeable from the fact that a patch of skin 6 inches
1 Bones of the sea otter are now very seldom found here, as they have mostly been collected. .
«A good example of such an occurrence was witnessed during the first visit to St. George, Zapadni,
when an ill-tempered bull with but one cow cut a gash 6 inches long in her neck with a single quick
snap, while on Lukanin, in 1897, a vicious bull literally tore one of the newly arrived. cows to pieces,
DEATHS FROM ROUGH HANDLING. 91
Square was missing from her back. Such an injury as this last may have been inflicted
in the attempt of some envious bull to appropriate his neighbor’s wives by dashing into
a harem, seizing a cow by the skin of her back and carrying her off bodily, a perform-
ance eminently calculated to create respect for the bull’s strength and agility.
Naturally such a Sabine outrage as this does not go unheeded by the bull whose
cow has been taken, but his pursuit of the offender is hampered by the fact that he
dares not leave his harem too far behind lest in trying to save one wife he lose others.
One enterprising bull was seen to come out of the water, grasp the nearest cow by
the neck, plunge back and swim away with his prize to a spot some 75 yards distant,
captor and captured being under water most of the way. And after all this labor
the cow slipped away three minutes later while the bull was engaged in a discussion
with aneighbor. Occasionally, too, it will happen that when a cow has been seized by
some predatory bull her rightful lord and master will dash to the rescue and grasp
her by the most convenient spot, usually the neck, and endeavor to liberate his
abducted bride by main force. A game of pull devil, pull baker, ensues, and the poor
cow is tugged about until the skin gives way or one of the bulls gets tired and lets go.
Observation of a rookery impresses one with the fact that among fur seals matrimony
is a very serious matter for all parties concerned, and that the bad temper displayed
by the bulls is, to a great extent, excusable.
Rough handling by the males may be set down as the most evident known cause
of death among the females, and the greater the proportion of bulls the greater the
number of deaths, so that in a state of nature the superabundance of bulls must
probably be an important factor, if not.the chief factor, in checking’ the increase of
the fur seals. As the proportion of the sexes at birth is equal, and as at least thirty
males are born where one is needed, there must in olden times have been a prodigious
amount of fighting and a mighty turmoil on the breeding grounds, with a conse-
quent destruction of mothers and pups. There were 42 dead cows on Reef rookery in
1897, and if there was such a visible loss with only a moderate surplus of males what
must have taken place before any males were killed by man? It is evident that if
many cows are killed outright many more must be badly injured and eventually die,
an inference made in discussing the mortality among the pups, where it was suggested
that the loss of these injured females at sea probably accounted for much of the early
starvation of the young.
While rough handling by bulls is thus the most evident factor in the death of
cows, yet the vast majority perish from causes which must, from the nature of things,
remain unknown. Occasionally, however, we find deaths resulting from unsuspected
causes, as when four cows were found to have died during parturition from a wrong
presentation of the fetus; in two cases the shoulder having offered, and in the third
the occiput. In this latter case the head of the fetus was doubled up on the body
and firmly wedged in the pelvis of the mother, which had evidently lived some time
after the death of her offspring. The fourth case was in many ways very remarkable,
‘for while death had occurred in parturition from a breech presentation, the conditions
showed a pretty clear case of superfetation. The placenta was torn away and lay
outside the ruptured uterus, which contained in the left branch a pup of the ordinary
size and also a small, shrivelled-up fetus, about 6 inches long, attached to the caudal
side of the horn near its junction with thé main branch. This had apparently reached
a certain stage of development and then been resorbed, leaving little more than the
92 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
skeleton. Owing to the long time that had elapsed since death it was not possible to
make as critical an examination as might be desired.
Losses from such causes as the above must naturally be few and form but a
trifling factor in the total death rate, still it is interesting to find such cases among
wild animals. z
Killed by a fish bone sounds like the heading of a newspaper item, and yet one cow
seal was found dead from an accident, not in swallowing, but in unswallowing the
remains of a pollock. As noted in the chapter on food bones or other hard substances
swallowed by seals, they are sooner or later regurgitated, bones of good-sized pollock
being thus disposed of, ustially with success. In the present instance the bone had
lodged crosswise in the larynx, perforating both the right and left sides, though finally
working through the left side for more than half its length, making so bad a cut
that death may be said to have resulted from the combined effects of strangulation
and loss of blood. The cow was found washed up on the beach, and an autopsy
revealed no injury save a slight congestion of the lungs and the presence of an
unaccountable quantity of clotted blood in the stomach. While skinning the animal
the bone was found fixed in'the muscles of the neck and subsequent examination
revealed the extent of the damage which had been done.
Not only were few dead adult seals found, but very few that were seriously injured,
this for the reason that in the majority of cases serious injury promptly leads to death
where the struggle for existence is so severe aS among the fur seals. A crippled
bachelor shot on Zoltoi was probably the victim of an encounter with a killer, the
location and extent of his injuries being just such as would have resulted from the
bite of a pursuer, the right hind flipper being bitten, both sides of the pelvis crushed,
two ribs and the processes of several vertebrae broken. (See Pl. XX.) As a direct
result of these injuries, which involved the spinal cord, this young bull was paralyzed
in his hind quarters, dragging them laboriously along the ground, and another large
bachelor, seen on Kitovi, but unfortunately not secured, was very probably hurt in a
similar manner. On October 10 the natives brought.in the remains of a pup said to
have been destroyed by a killer, and on October 13 a female was found whose death
was also ascribed to the same cause, while two pups were seen each minus a flipper.
A cow on Zapadni had lost a hind flipper, possibly from the bite of a killer, and an
old bull was observed on Zapadni for several consecutive years minus the greater
part of the fore flipper, and yet thus handicapped able to maintain his place on the
rookery. A cow with a broken or dislocated right fore leg was noticed on the North
rookery of St. George, and a young male similarly crippled was seen on Zoltoi sands.
As to the number of seals, young or old, which perish when absent from the
islands and the causes of their deaths we know absolutely nothing, but wind and sea,
or anything which leads to interference with the food supply, are probably the fur
seal’s worst natural enemies, while ice lingering about the islands in spring would be
very deadly to the females seeking the shore to bring forth their young. Once, indeed,
the Pribilof herd seems to have been reduced to its lowest ebb from this very cause, |
the scarcity of seals during and for some time after 1836 having been brought about
by the persistence of ice floes about the islands long into June, causing bulls and
cows alike to perish by thousands.
The only two species of sharks which could possibly eat seals are fortunately
rare, even in southern waters, and deaths from this source are probably not worth
THE KILLER. 93
mentioning, even if they occur at all. The killer (Pl. XXI) is charged with the
destruction of many seals, and, as intimated above, many undoubtedly are lost at sea,
but the killer is reticent on the subject, aud, in this instance at least, the sea does not
give up its dead.
The killer, when in the same locality as the seals, may, undeniably, be a famine
enemy, since it is not only extremely voracious but swift enough to catch a seal and
sufficiently powerful to attack and kill a sea lion. Fortunately killers are largely
absent from the vicinity of the islands during the breeding season, the majority of
them leaving in May and returning in September. It must, however, be said that
very little is known as to the destruction caused by the killer. Very few have actually
seen the killer capturing and eating seals, and still fewer have had the good fortune
to perform a post-mortem on one of these cetaceans, so that information on this point
is much to be desired.!
Killers were seen on July 8, when about 40 miles south of St. George, and on
September 9, when between St. George and Unalaska, but the only one seen during
the intervening time was on August 6, when on the Corwin, about 10 miles to the east
of St. Paul. Of course this does not mean that there were no killers about the islands
during this time, but as a careful watch was kept for them it is safe to say that they
were not numerous. After this date they seem to have suddenly become abundant,
tor the presence of killers about St. Paul, in proximity to the seals, is frequently
mentioned in the journal kept by Mr. Clark, and although they were not actually seen
to attack and eat seals, yet it is hardly probable that these carnivorous cetaceans
were prowling about the island solely for amusement,
A most extraordinary concourse of these animals was noted by Captain Garforth,
of H. B. M. 8. Pheasant, who states that on September 13, 1896, killers were so
numerous to the northward of Unimak Pass, hundreds, if not thousands, being
gathered in that vicinity, that it was necessary to stop several times in order to avoid
running into them. As Captain Bryant says that he took, respectively, 18 and 24
seal pups from the stomachs of two killers, the possibilities of this animal as a
destroyer of seals would seem to be considerable, and while little is actually known
concerning losses from this source it seems not unfair to charge a certain proportion
of the unknown death rate to the killer.
That this unknown death rate is normally high is certain, and it is equally certain
that it has never been duly considered, not even approximately, in estimating the
natural increase or decrease of the seals, although all such “estimates” are, at the
best, mere guesses. If the death rate among young pups is now something like 10
per cent it may have ranged as high as 20 per cent in former days of abundance.
And if to this we add a loss of half the pups which leave the islands in the fall we
are probably inside the mark, for, as Dr. White says, “‘ Nature is extravagantly waste-
ful and terribly cruel.” Although the death rate presses so heavily on the pups, it
must be equally, or even more, severe on the breeding females, which, heavy with
young, are less able than the others to procure food, escape from their pnerien, and
withstand the buffetings of winds and waves. We get some idea of this from the
great proportion of female seals which are taken at sea—not alone by the pelagic
‘Personally I am inclined to hold the killer guiltless of very much slaughter of young seals,
believing that starvation, from inability to capture food when they are first turned off by their
mothers, and forced to shift for themselves, is the most important factor in the death rate among pups.
94 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
sealers, but by the Indians of the Northwest coast, whose catch consists mainly of
females and yearlings, and we get a further idea from the comparative scarcity of
3-year-old cows on the rookeries.!
Not only are the females heavily handicapped by the weight of their unborn
offspring, but during three months of the year they are compelled, in order to
withstand the drain of the nursing young, to frequently go to sea in search of food,
while at that very time the great majority of males is on land, or in the immediate
vicinity of the islands, safe from natural enemies.
If the death rate among females was not so high as to have kept the breeding
portion of the herd practically at a standstill year after year, the effects of pelagic
sealing would not have made themselves visible on the rookeries so rapidly as they
did. Evidence of the large number of deaths among females also appears in the
comparatively small area of the rookeries as figured in Elliott’s first report, when they
were nearly or quite at their highest level. The bachelor seals seem to have increased
enormously prior to the occupation of the islands by the United States, but there does
not appear to have been any corresponding increase among the females, great though
their numbers actually were, and the breeding grounds form but a small part of the
entire area occupied by seals. The female portion of the herd, the very one on which
depends not only the increase but the preservation of the seal race, always has been
and always will be the most susceptible to attack, and it is small wonder that its
ranks have been decimated by pelagic sealing.
That the death rate is high is certain; that it is variable is equally sure, for
climatic conditions, with their bearing on the all-important question of food supply,
vary from year to year. No man can safely assert that because seals are abundant
one season they will be equally numerous the next; and for this reason, if for no other,
it would be dangerous to permit the killing of seals at sea even in limited numbers;
while another point to be borne in mind is that while the numbers of the seals have
been greatly lessened, nothing has occurred to lessen the number of their enemies or
to change whatever natural causes may be injurious to them.
If little can be said about the causes of mortality among seals, less can be said
regarding the complaints to which they may be subject, although, from the prompt
manner in which the weak or ailing are weeded out by natural causes, disease seems
to be more rare than it probably is in reality. Cases of some complaint apparently
related to mange are not infrequent, the hair being worn down short, the rough and
thickened epidermis showing through the hair.” The examination of specimens of
the skin dried and preserved in alcohol failed to throw any light on the exact nature
of the disease, which, from the worn condition of the adjacent fur, seems to produce
intense itching. The trouble is usually on some part of the back, but one female was
seen on which the head was affected. It is said that this complaint is of more frequent
occurrence now than formerly, but this may be simply because the seals are more
closely observed than they were.
1 These 3-year-old seals may be distinguished by their rather small size and their gray mustaches;
they. were particularly looked for in 1897 in order that their abundance or scarcity might form the
basis for some estimate as to the. losses among seals up to 3 years, but it can simply be said that the
38-year-old cows form but a small part of the breeding herd, the majority being 4 years old and over.
2 Seals suffering from this trouble were taken by the pelagic sealers off the coast of J apan and
gave rise to the rumor that seals branded on the Pribilofs had been captured in Japanese waters.
DISEASES OF THE EYE, 95
Diseases of the eye, more or less severe, seem to be common, or at any rate not
uncommon, among the seals, ranging in virulence from a mere suppuration of the
eyelids to. complete blindness. Cases of suppurating eyelids or lachrymal glands may
be seen among the pups at almost any time, on almost any rookery, but many of the
pups are totally blind from some disease of the retina, the cornea being transparent,
but the pupil greatly dilated, giving to the eye a peculiar greenish appearance, as in
seals recently killed. One young male was seen on Polovina which seemed to be
suffering from cataract in the left eye, the cornea being transparent, but the pupil
showing aS a white spot, as though the lens were opaque. Most of the cases of
blindness among the bulls are, however, the direct outcome of rookery battle, and
one-eyed bulls are by no means rare, nor do they seem as much handicapped by the
loss as one might expect, since a one-eyed bull on Zapadni gave more trouble than
any six of his fellows with the normal complement of eyes. There are frequent
instances among the pups of blindness in one eye, seemingly from accident, the
cornea being sometimes thick and white, sometimes ulcerated or even perforated.
Similar disease of the eye is produced in man by the irritation of foreign particles,
such as iron filings, sand, etc., and there is no reason why it should not be similarly
brought about among seals, although it is often the direct result of a bite. There is
more or Jess sand on all rookeries, and particularly on the hauling grounds and
localities where the pups pod out, and it would be strange indeed if the seals never
got any in their eyes. ;
The eye of a pup killed on Zapadni in August, showing a fine case of perforation
of the cornea, was preserved. This has been carefully examined by Dr. D. K. Shute,
who has made a special study of diseases of the eye, and he has made the following
report:
The whole cornea is densely opaque, the corneal layers being replaced by fibrous tissue
(leucoma). About the center of the cornea there is distinct evidence that a perforation had taken
place. A well-marked band of cicatricial tissue is shown along the site of the perforated cornea.
The cicatrix contains pigment from the iris. The iris is infiltrated with inflammatory cells (leuco-
cytes) and its pupillary margin is adherent to the cicatrix and the cornea (synechia anterior).
The uveal pigment has been detached at various points of the iris and lies in the vitreous.
The ciliary body was detached and dragged toward the site of the corneal perforation and is
infiltrated with numerous inflammatory cells (cyclitis).
There is a large amount of inflammatory material in the place of the lens and adjacent vitreous
composed of fibers and leucocytes.
The retina was detached and swollen, and the choroid was infiltrated with large numbers of
inflammatory cells.
The perforation through the cornea is about 4 millimeters in diameter.
I am of the opinion that the probable cause of the diseased eye was the presence of foreign bodies
in it, which could easily be brought about by windstorms and the consequent blowing of sand against
the cornea.
Dr. Norgaard has called my attention to the fact that there is also a widespread
disease among domesticated animals, known as infectious opthalmia,' which presents
syinptoms precisely similar to those noticed among the pups, so that it is by no means
improbable that a like disease may account for many of the sore eyes seen. It is of
‘ “Keratitis acuta infectiosa, Mller, Lehrbuch der Augenheilkunde fiir Thierirzte, p. 25; ‘‘Infec-
tious ophthalmia,” W. F. Weese, American Veterinary Review, Jan., 1897, pp. 707-711.
‘
96 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
,
course understood that it does not necessarily follow that the disease among the seals
is caused by the same germ which produces the trouble among domesticated animals,
and even among the latter it is suspected that more than one pus-producing germ is at
work.
The blindness of the bachelors has been ascribed to overdriving, although no
explanation was offered as to why any amouut of driving should cause loss of sight.
Five pups totally blind and two blind in one eye each were noted while counting the
starved pups, as well as one ‘“wall-eyed” cow and one cow and two bulls each with
one white eye.
A feature of considerable interest is the liability of the seals to attacks of what
Dr. T.. M. Wood considers hystero-epilepsy, the first instance of which was noticed by
Colonel Murray and Mr. Macoun on East rookery, St. George. The subject was a cow
recently in from the sea, and apparently dying. The eyes were rolled upward, the
head was bent slightly backward, the body was rigid, and although the animal still
breathed, it seemed at the last gasp. The seal was turned over and examined for
wounds or other injuries, but none were found, and when, half an hour later, the spot
was revisited the animal had disappeared. Several similar attacks, seen when counting
dead pups, were apparently brought on by fright,’ but in the case just noted there
Was no apparent cause, nor was there in the case of a young male noted by Mr.
Barrett-Hamilton. This bachelor was, to all intents and purposes, dead, and was
turned over and pulled about for.some time, although when someone started to pull
out the long bristles from the moustache the seal, to the astonishment of all, roused
up and went away. The attacks noted lasted but a few minutes, although while they
endured the animals were in a perfectly comatose condition.
While, like other wild animals, the fur seal is ordinarily tree from blemishes; one
bachelor was killed which bore a fatty tumor, 2 inches in diameter, on the side, and
an adult female was obtained by Mr. Townsend in which a fibrous tumor was develop-
ing on the left ovary, the one functional for the season in which the animal was killed.
A few more or less complete albinos were seen among the pups, and two instances
of malformation. One of these was a pup with the nose surrounded by a series of
fleshy protuberances, suggesting that of a star-nosed mole, and the other was a pup
in which eyes were totally lacking.’
From the above observations on the mortality and diseases of seals it is apparent
that, while they are subject to a variety of complaints, there is no evidence that any
great number of deaths is caused by specific disease, much less that there is, or has
been, any epidemic among them aside from that caused by Uncinaria. Of course it is
‘possible that such a thing might occur, as the cormorants of the Commander Islands
have twice been decimated by some disease, but it would be from causes which can
not be foreseen; although, as Dr. Stiles points out elsewhere, we have in the numbers
and habits of the fur seal conditions favorable to an epidemic.
The following tables summarize the results of the work of 1896 and 1897, and
show the number and causes of deaths so far as is known.
'See Vol I, Pt. II, pp. 497, 506, 584.
?I have no details concerning this specimen, which was procured by Mr. Barrett-Hamilton, excel
his statement that there were no eyes in the sockets.
TABLES OF MORTALITY. 97
MORTALITY OF ADULT FUR SEALS ON THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS IN 1896.
The following is a record of the adult seals found dead on the islands, made at
the time of the count of dead pups, August 5 to 14:
Rookery. Cows. Bulls. | Bachelors. ©
St. Paul.
Kitovi
Lukanin
Lagoon.
Tolstoi .
Ardiguen
ROBE oasis
North
Little East
East ....-
Zapadni..
Staraya Artel
1 Bulls and bachelors not counted.
Dead pups counted on the Pribilof Islands between August 5 and 14, 1896, by rookeries, .
St. Paul:
Kai fOViiias sects Sale g cieioeee eee gL Lecmncoesassesammseyattecasinee sinned 109
Lagoon . --.. 22.2 eee e cnn cee ee cen eee ree ee ne cen eee ne ene eee 78
TM Bani: ese ek ects e.g veesccusheaeeetencsememamaibetinesssdteeceed edicts 205
, Tol stot cosine cysts ise giclee ugh eaesie ria eerciare RS Miela spars nied wi@lelain Mmmaid Gaeta aieitis Sieinia 1, 895
MAPA co op2.cicishs cn sig ies atc. siciarg ators ctataaicint peas aise te Se Oe Se nideweieisie ee 3, 095
Little Zapadni ........ 2-2. 2-2 eee cree eee cee ce ee nee ree cee renee 134
Zapadni Reef ....-..------------ Rewe edd ari eden a hiuaheasaeeemanisace 104
GOT AGC jc iatete re sects eluges cioe ae eee neaminie edema tiee Wed apateaes Sraeeansiele ieee 712
Aridi pen soca cicrseiedss eipieteasein's'g Bere melas aisle mis Sense cisdee mem aciesiceteecie 2
ROGE saisteueciincivocii cents scene naa we sieea em came aeemamamiacie MeceesEncces 950
Sivuteh Roches oiccise aces ccceaieoern aeccemececdaris melmiamie neues deme baueemini een 50
POLO WANE infuiot=& Clatatav crate sistance jure wae diese imeets deaya wiiciarar een miavard bi areimicisne SRT 635
Little Polovina.... .--- ---- +--+ --- see cece cee cee eee eee cee nee cee eee 47
Vostoclinl iccvceec ce gee boueneecatsacueaeediee ones cdineedeceaseumeaet 1, 808°
MOLjOVE cca sie eesiin ety a weinie damian a sa wea Sa neeie ves Saeedinie aise See leiere ind aE 485
TOtal aeccccabr eanmiceddcetseeeseeneatesereeceeatene cand Seem cee 10, 309
St. George: °
North y oisisietsnetieieie oeceeceneeece cnet ine dsandoesiewenc eee ae meee 259
Little Bastisn csncccosice ccacbecce ence mene sauce seco scutes aissne tareiseimareemiatels 31
Washi ccecrtncece una eeces sess meesmoad sta scehawn Stee cere tiner east Se eee 112
Zapadni. ..-.- 222-222. eee ne eee eee eee cee eee cen ne eee canes 199
Staraya Artel.... 22. sce eee eee eee cee eee eee eee ener eee eeees 135
Poti sa winicicd ce oicyaia crvinte ini ia Didtace! winnie Gerais cio oars sim imidinin ic wieieisid Bi Rte aray a Rtereseieislejs) aia’ ee)
Grand total .... 2.00. cece ee cee s cee nce we cece eee e sens ojs sw Sinletaisialo'sisiete’s 11, 045
5947—PT 3 7
98
THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Causes of death among nursing fur seals on St. Paul, as determined by the dissections of 1896-97.
Up to August
Cause. i=
Total.
After August
1b5b—
1896, 1897.
1896. | 1897.
Uncinaria...
Starvation .........
Uncinaria plus starvation
Trampled..........
Drowned
Inflammation of bowels
Falling from cliffs -
Bitten or otherwise injured -..-..-.--.--- 20-2 eseeeen ence neee ences
Crushed under rocks
Inflammation 6f KidnGYS <.1....ccce.scceeesceeeesesaspesceeneeran
Catarrhal pneumonia ....- 2-00-22 eee reece eee nee en eens
Papaneting shoulders
Un.
TOW 2 een cer cen w cece tres eunsceusacnaes cesneurceruaneeuesneenees ens
Summary of dissections on St. Paul in 1897 divided into periods of five days. _
” Cause of death.
Uncina-
Date. és : sae Eo z - -| Total.
Starva- | Uncina. | ria plus |; Un-
“tion. ria. ane" Violence.) Sundry | nown.
, ‘tion. ee .
6
22
40
68
18
21
54
g
107
345
St a Starva- i a
A Starva-|Uncina-| tion rio- n-
Rookery. Date. “tion. | ria. [plusun| lence. [SY4°Y-)nown,| Total.
cinaria.
Northeast Point -..| August 6........--.-+...0-+2--ceeeeeenemeene 10
Polovina...--..---- July 31 10
Lukanin...--.-.--- July 24,25, 26; August-1, 12. 12
Kitovi...... ...| July 26; August 3, 12,14 17
Reef......-- ---| July 19, 27; August 2, 5, 9,16; September 1.. 53
Gorbatch ......---. August 4,16; September 1...............-.- 33
Lagoon .----------- August2........- ceceeee ee Soucice seaman less = 4
Tolstoi .......-----| July 28, 29; Aagist 7, 11, 14, 19, 23, 24, 27; 109
September.1,4._.
Zapadni ...----.--. July 30; August 7, 24; September 4..-...... 93
Total .....--.|-- 2 scene nene enn cence renee teen ee ceonee reeeee ; 345
' Summary of dissections on Tolstoi between July 28 and September 4, 1897.
‘ \ = = zs =
Cause of death.
Ay, Uncina-
Date. ‘ A
Uncina- | ria plus Un-
Starved. | ria, starva. | Sundry. known, | Total.
2 tion:
3
9
8
3.
6
8
24
vi
9
21
1
109
PLaTe XVI.
DEAD PUPS ON TOLSTOI, 1892.
From a photograph by J. M. Macoun,
‘unooey “WW “¢ Aq Ydersoj0yd ve wo1y
"9681 ‘1V14 GNVS IOLSTOL NO Sdfd av3aa
es
= = 3
r ,
“HAX 311d
PLaTE XVIII.
STARVED PUP, AND PUP DEAD FROM UNCINARIA.
graph by C, H. Townsend, September 12, 1894.
From a photo:
‘unooselt ‘It “¢ Aq ydearsojoyd v wor
“4b LSNONY 40 31VD 3HL AG dN GSHSVM “9681 ‘ANSHOOY 1OLSTOL JO GNZ 3HL LV SdNd Gva0 4O MOUGNIM V
“XIX 3LV1d
PLATE XX.
PART OF SKELETON OF YOUNG BULL, SHOWING INJURIES PROBABLY DUE TO THE BITE OF A KILLER.
VII—INTERNAL PARASITES OF THE FUR SEAL.
By Cu. WARDELL STILES, PH. D., \
Zoologist of the Bureau of Animal Industry,
- and~
ALBERT HASSALL, M. R. C. V. S.,
Inspector in the Bureau of Animal Industry.
SUMMARY.
I.—Introduction: The first parasitic worms recorded from Bering Sea were
collected by Steller in 1742 from the now extinct sea cow (p. 100). Since that time
parasites (p. 100) have been mentioned from the fur seal of Bering Sea by Elliot,
1882, and by the British Commissioners in the Paris hearing, but the worms were not
studied. The subject of the parasites of the fur seal bears an intimate relation to
the parasites of marine mammals in general (p. 101), but references to the parasitic
diseases of marine mammals are meager, and none of them treat the subject in detail
(p. 101-102).
The parasitic worms collected by Lucas in Bering Sea came from the fur seal, the
hair seal, and the sea lion (p. 102), and belong to three different ‘families of worms
(p. 103): mawworms of the genus Ascaris, strongyles of the genus Uncinaria, and
tapeworms of the genus Bothriocephalus. Of these the ascarides and strongyles
are the most important in connection with the subject at hand, and of mawworms
alone we have sufficient material for proper study.
IL—Family Ascaridae (p. 103). Genus Ascaris: Synonymy (p. 103); diagnosis
(p. 103). These worms occur normally in the digestive tract, but are occasionally found
in other parts of the body (p. 104); a few specimens have little or no effect upon the
host, but heavy infections may injure the hosts in various ways; by stoppage of the
bowels, by wandering, taking food intended for host, wounding the mucosa, production
of a toxic substance (p. 104). None of these effects have been observed in any degree
of importance in the case of the fur seal, but there is no reason to assume that the
effects of ascarides upon these animals will be different from the effects of mawworms
upon other animals (p. 104). In our opinion, while the mawworms will undoubtedly
be a factor in the general debility of seals in cases of excessive infections, the relation
of the worms to the mortality of seals will be insignificant (p. 104). The seals become
infected with their ascarides by eating fish; these worms accordingly play no réle
1 This report on the parasitic worms of the fur seal, collected by the United States Commission of
1896, was prepared under the direction of Dr. D. E. Salmon, Chief of the Bureau of Animal Industry,
United States Department of Agriculture, at the request of the Secretary of the Treasury.
: 99
100 THE FUR SKALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
in the death rate of pups too young to catch fish, and a crowded condition of the
rookeries is of no importance in connection with the spread of infection. There is
evidently no way open to prevent infection. Ascaris decipiens was collected by Lucas
from the fur seal, the hair seal, and the sea lion; and A. osculata from the sea lion
(p. 105). These same worms are found in other parts of the world (Greenland, etc.) in
other hosts.
The Ascarides of marine mammals.—Under this head we discuss the history of
the subject, the. division of the genus, and the history and structure of all of the
various forms described.
III.—Family Strongylidae; (p. 164), subfamily Sclerostominae; genus Uncinaria.
A few worms of this genus were found by Lucas in a fur-seal pup, three months
old, but our material is not sufficient to permit a detailed study of the form. The
worms of this genus are blood suckers of the worst type, and a heavy infection would
undoubtedly have very serious effects upon the pups, as allied worms do upon man,
dogs, cats, and other animals. The life history of and source of infection by the seal
Uncinaria is not demonstrated, and can not well be demonstrated at this distance from
its habitat, but analogy would point at a direct development without an intermediate
host. (See also Supplementary Note, p. 165.) If this view drawn from analogy is‘
correct, the infection would take place upon the rookeries, and a crowding of the
rookeries with an open season and lack of nourishment would give the conditions
necessary for an epizootic; thus this worm might under conditions play an important
role in the mortality of the pups,more especially if the latter were deprived of nourish-
ment from their mothers because of pelagic sealing or other causes.
IV.—Family Bothriocephalidae (p. 167;) subfamily Bothriocephalinae; genus
Bothriocephalus. A few worms of this genus were collected from the fur seal by Lucas
who states that about 40 per cent of the seals are infected with them. Lack of time
prevents our making a detailed study of the form. Analogy points to fish as the
intermediate host, and hence as source of infection. These worms would accordingly
not be found in young pups.
V.—Compendium of parasites arranged sia to their hosts.
VI.—Bibliography.
1 INTRODUCTION.
The earliest record we have been able to find of parasites in the marine mammals
of Bering Sea is a statement by Steller (1751') that in July, 1742, he found some
parasitic worms about half an inch long in the stomach of the now extinct sea cow,
Hydrodamalis Stellert. These helminthes (Ascaris rytinae, see p. 163,) are now uniden-
tifiable, but have been referred to by various helminthologists.
In helminthological literature we have not succeeded in finding any further
references to parasitic worms in Bering Sea, and especially of the fur seal, but Mr.
Lucas has called our attention to the following passages in other works.
Elliot (1882,' p. 35) in, his Monograph of the Sea Islands of Alaska, refers to
worms in the stomach of the fur seal and the sea lion as follows:
I have examined the stomachs of hundreds which were driven up and killed immediately after
their arrival in the spring near the village; I have the word of natives here, who have seen hundreds
of thousands of them opened during the slaughtering seasons past, but in no one single case has
1The dates enclosed in parentheses refer to the works cited in the bibliography, pp. 171-174.
INTRODUCTION. 101
anything ever been found other than the bile and ordinary secretions of healthy organs of this class,
with the marked exception of finding in every one a snarl or cluster-of worms (‘Nematoda) from the
size of a walnut to a bunch as large as a man’s fist. Fasting apparently has no effect upon the worms,
for on the rare occasion, and perhaps the last one that will ever occur, of killing three or four hondred
old bulls late in the fall to supply the natives with canoe skins, I was present, and again examined
their paunches, finding the same ascaridae within. They were lively in these empty stomachs, and
their presence, I think, gives some reason for the habit which the old bulls have (the others do not) of
swallowing small water-worn bowlders, the stones in some of the stomachs weighing half a pound
apiece; in others, much smaller. In one paunch I found over 5 pounds, in the aggregate, of large
pebbles, which, in grinding against one another, I believe, must comfort the seal by aiding to destroy
in a great measure those intestinal pests.
The sea lion is also troubled in the same way by a similar speciés of worms, and I preserved the
stomach of one of these animals in which there was more than 10 pounds of stones, some of them alone
very greatinsize. Of this latter animal, I suppose it could swallow bowlders that weigh 2 or 3 pounds
each. I can ascribe no other cause for this habit among those animals than that given, as they are
the highest type of the carnivora, eating fish as a regular means of subsistence, varying the monotony
of this diet with occasional juicy fronds of seaweed or kelp, and perhaps a crab or such once in awhile,
provided it is small and tender or soft-shelled. I know that the sailors say that the Callorhinus
swallows stones to “ballast” himself; in other words, to enable him to dive deeply and quickly; but
I noticed that the females and the ‘‘ holluschickie” dive quicker and swim better than the old fellows
above specified, and they do so without any ballast. They.also have less muscular power, only a tithe
of that which the ‘‘see-catch” possesses. No, the ballast theory is not tenable.
In the Report of the British Commissioners (p. 97, sec. 343) in the Paris Arbitra-
tion the following rather indefinite reference to the parasites of seals is found:
The fur seals upon the Pribilof Islands are, however, afflicted by at least one known trouble,
that of intestinal worms, and in the stomachs of every seal killed a certain number, and often a very
considerable number, of such worms are found. This can not, of course, be considered as constituting
in itself a very serious affection, but if under any particular train of circumstances it should be
considerably increased, it alone might become a danger to the continued well-being of the seals.
These, so far aS we are aware, are the only published statements regarding the
parasitic worms found in Bering Sea. The preliminary study of the parasitic diseases
of the fur seal is thus reduced to indefinite and vague statements of little or no value.
We may, however, expect that a review of the parasites of marine mammals will aid
us in the subject at hand, as basis for comparison and inference, and it will be well,
therefore, to take a glance at the literature upon this subject before passing to a
determination of the worms collected by Lucas in Bering Sea.
The greater part of the literature upon the parasites of marine mammals is purely
zoological, dealing with descriptions, lists, and synonymy of forms found in various
parts of the world.
Both worms and arthropods have been found parasitic in or upon marine mam-
mals. So far as the effect of animal parasites upon these hosts is concerned, the
majority of helminthological articles do not refer to it. The following references to
this subject have, however, been found:
Murie (1868) gives an account of a post-mortem examination upon a young male
walrus which died at London. In this account, which is reprinted in full in connec.
tion with the parasite present (see p. 139), Murie found a large number of worms,
Ascaris bicolor Baird, in the stomach, to the presence of which he attributed a con-
gestion and ulceration of that organ. He also states that an abscess was found in the
brain. In one portion of the account Murie says that “death seems to have resulted
from the ulceration of the stomach,” although he admits that “it is not clear why the
animal should have succumbed so suddenly,” and adds: “Literally speaking, these
102 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
ulcerations were so extensive that it is curious the animal should have survived so
long.” In another portion of his report Murie, in referring to the abscess of the brain,
remarks: “Whether this lesion was the more immediate cause of death, and not the
ulcerated condition of the stomach, is an open question.”
Admitting that the ulcerated condition of the stomach was caused by the worms,
and admitting that with “only the muscular and a very thin lining of the submucous
tissue” remaining perforation might have easily occurred and been followed by a fatal
peritonitis, we fail to see that Murie has made a clear case in diagnosing the cause of
death.
Cobbold (1879) devotes a portion of his work on “Parasites” to a discussion of
the animal parasites of Pinnipedia (Part V, pp. 313-315) and Cetacea (Part XT, pp.
416-430), from which the following passages are extracted :
Cobbold, 1879, page 418: The apparently healthy cetacean [Phocaena communis = Phocaena phocaena]
was shot by Mr. Jardine Murray in the Firth of Forth in April, 1855. I mention its condition because
the bile ducts were found to be diseased in a way similar to that ordinarily observed in cases of
fluke rot affecting sheep, cattle, and other animals. In my MS. note book I remarked: ‘‘The liver
ducts were in several places thickened and knotted near the surface of the organ. On opening these
they were found to be loaded with small distomata” [Distoma Campula—=Campula oblonga].
Cobbold, 1879, p.422: * * * Thesmall intestine of this porpoise [Delphinus phocaena— Phocaena
phocaena] was completely choked for the space of 8 or 9 feet by fine tapeworms so closely packed
together that the gut presented the appearance of a solid cylinder.
A most remarkable infection of a Globicephalus Svineval (—Globlicephala melas)
with thorn-headed worms (Echinorhynchus capitatus) was reported by Parona (1893),
who estimated that 25,305 specimens were present in the intestine. Parona does
not give a detailed account of the pathological effects of this infection, nor of any
symptoms observed by the captors, but argues in favor of the view that a heavy
infection like this one must have the same effect upon a wild animal as upon a
domesticated animal.
These four citations are the most important references we have found dealing
with the effects of parasitic worms upon marine mammals. It might, however, be
added that the supposed genus Conocephalus (see Ascaris typica, p. 127) was based
upon a coagulated body formed by mucus and epithelial cells from the stomach of
the host; but the relation of the worms to any possible erosion of the stomach wall is
not mentioned.
As it is impossible, in the time alloted to the preparation of this report, to discuss
in detail all of the different parasites we find recorded for marine mammals, our
discussion will be confined to forms directly bearing upon the parasites collected by
Mr. Lucas.
THE PARASITIC WORMS COLLECTED BY LUCAS IN BERING SBA,
Mr. Lucas has furnished us with the following data concerning his examinations
of marine mammals in Bering Sea during the summer of 1896:
Nematodes in varying numbers are always present in the stomach of the fur seal. There may be
only two or three or there may be, roughly speaking, one hundred or more. Only in rare cases does
their presence seem to cause any irritation, but occasionally a number may be found attached to one
spot, and the stomach wall is there thick and hard.
An extreme case of this is shown in the specimen of stomach of sea lion, Ewmetopias, but no case
so bad as this was met with in any fur seal. The tapeworm is found in about two out of every five
seals. Sometimes but one is present, sometimes ten or a dozen, though so many as this is rare.
THE PARASITIC WORMS COLLECTED BY LUCAS IN BERING SEA. 103
The tapeworms are found in the large intestine, in the majority of cases with the head fastened
in or near to the caecum, which, in the fur seal, is short.
No tapeworms were found in the two old males killed in August, which had not eaten for at least
two months.
The worms collected by Lucas came from the fur seal (Callorhinus ursinus), the
sea lion (Humetopias stellert) and the hair seal (Phoca largha Pallas).
. A species of tapeworm (Bothriocephalus, see p. 168) was found in Callorhinus; a
few strongyles (Uncinaria, see p. 165) were present in the intestineof a Callorhinus
pup, and ascarides (Ascaris) were present in Callorhinus, Eumetopias, and Phoca.
The ascarides alone were present in large numbers. As it is evidently these worms to
which the British referred in the Paris report, and as these were the only worms
presentin sufficient numbers in 1896 to come into consideration from a medical point
of view, furthermore as the time at our disposal for this report is exceedingly limited,
almost the entire time allotted for study of the seal parasites has been given to study-
ing the members of this genus.
IIl.—Family ASCARIDAE.
This family of round worms is variously diagnosed by different authors, but it
must be subjected to a rigid and critical study, with modern methods, before we can
tell with any degree of satisfaction which genera should be included in it and which
should be eliminated from it. For generic diagnoses of the forms which come into
question, Dujardin (1845), Diesing (1860), and Schneider (1866) especially should be
consulted.
No attempt will be made in this report to define these various genera, as only
one of them, the type of the family, comes into consideration in connection with the
parasites of seals. It may, however, be remarked that the genus Conocephalus and
probably also Peritrachelius fall as synonyms of Ascaris.
ASCARIS Linnaeus, 1788.
11758. Ascaris LINNAEUS, Systema naturae, 10th. ed., p.648. Type by elimination, A. lumbricoides Lin-
naeus, 1758.
1800. Capsularia ZepER, Erster Nachtrag Naturg. Eingeweidew., pp. xl, 5, 7. Encysted larvae in
Salmo and Clupea.
1800. Fusaria ZepER, Erster Nachtrag Naturg. Eingeweidew., pp. xl, 6, 16. Ascaris renamed and
including A. lumbricoides, hence type, ‘A. lumbricoides. :
1845. Ascaris (Ascaris) DUJARDIN, Hist. nat. Helminthes, p. 154. Includes type of genus, hence type,
A, lumbricoides.
1845, Ascaris (Anisakis) DuJARDIN, Hist. nat. Helminthes, p. 20. Type, ‘4. simplex Rudolphi,” misde-
termined — A. Dussumierii.
1860. Conocephalus DimsinG, Sitzungsber. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, XLII, no. 28, p. 669. Type, Cono-
cephalus typicus Diesing, 1860.
Dracnosis.—Body more or less elastic, elongate, cylindrical, more or less attenuated toward both
extremities. Mouth anterior, terminal, with three terminal convergent lips, two of which are ven-
tro-lateral, the third dorso-median; armed pharyngeal bulb absent. Anus near postorior extremity.
Sexes separate.
Male: With two spicules, ventral caudal papillae present; praeanal sucker absent.
Female: Vulva in anterior two-thirds of body.
Type: Ascaris lumbricoides Linnaeus, 1758.
'No pretensions to a complete generic synonymy are here made. Only such genera and sub-
genera are cited which have a direct bearing upon the type species and those species considered in
‘this paper. A complete revision of the nematodes must be made to establish complete generic
synonymy.
104 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Worms of this genus occur in the adult stage in the stomach and intestine of various
animals. They are occasionally reported in other portions of the body, as the mouth,
nasal passages, bile ducts, peritoneal cavity, etc. In many instances this aberrant
position of the worms is-undoubtedly due to an active wandering of the parasites after
‘ the death of the host, although cases are also recorded where the nematodes have been
taken from other portions of the body than the stomach and intestine immediately
after death. Cases are also recorded of expulsion of ascarides through the mouth
or nose during the life of the host.
A few ascarides may occur in an animal and yet not have any serious éffect upon
it, especially if the host is large. When present in considerable numbers, however,
they are undoubtedly of importance and may bring about serious trouble. The injury
to the host may be of different kinds:
(1) By the presence of a large number of ascarides the lumen of the intestine may
be so filled as to cause a temporary stoppage of the bowels.
(2) A wandering of ascarides from the intestine to the liver through the bile
ducts, which rarely occurs, may interfere with the flow of the bile, and may even result
in more serious complications.
(3) It is claimed by some that the ascarides may perforate the intestine, especially
in case of intestinal ulceration, and thus gain access to the body cavity. An ingress
of faecal matter through the perforation will result in peritonitis and thus lead to
death. Such active perforation of the intestinal wall is, however, certainly rare.
(4) The assimilation of food by the ascarides results of course in depriving their
hosts of a certain quantity of nourishment; but this will be insignificant in cases of
light infections.
(5) Some ascarides have very strong lips and become firmly attached to the walls
of the intestinal tract. It is but natural that numerous wounds in the mucosa arising
from the lips and teeth of the worms should produce some injury, as they would form
points of attack for bacteria. If Murie’s opinion (see p. 139) is correct that the ulcers
in the stomach of the walrus he examined were due to the presence of the ascarides
found, these ulcers probably began in this way.
(6) It has been shown that some ascarides secrete a substance which produces a
swelling around the eyes, a profuse flow of tears, and. intense itching. This action
on the part of the ascarides of seals does not seem to have been noticed as yet.
The above-known conditions are taken from ascaride infection of land animals.
We know nothing of the effects of these parasites upon the seals; but we do not
hesitate to assume from analogy that they will have practically the same effect upon
seals which similar parasites have upon other animals. We do not, however, believe
that they will enter into serious consideration in connection with the mortality of
seals, since death from ascarid infection must be exceedingly rare.
It is generally assumed that ascarides are all autoecious parasites; that is, they
have a direct development with only one hust. While this point has been established
for A. lumbricoides of man, it will be shown below that seals become infested by eating
fish.
This fact has an important bearing upon the relation of these worms to the
diseases of the seals, for although we may find ascarides in very young dogs and cats,
the pups of seals will not become infected with them until they begin to eat fish. In
other words, while the crowding on the rookeries would naturally present conditions
ASCARIS. 105
which would be most favorable to the development of parasitic diseases, such condi-
tions in no way enter into the consideration of infection by the ascarides in question.
The infection takes place in the water, not upon the land.
The maw worms collected in Bering Sea by Lucas have been referred to two
species, both of which have already been recorded for other parts of the world.
Ascaris decipiens was found in the material taken from the fur seal, the hair seal, and
the sea lion, and Ascaris osculata in the material taken from the sea lion.
As these two species are considerably confused in helminthological works, not
only with each other, but with still other forms, it has beeu necessary to consult the
entire literature upon the ascarides of marine mammals; and as a knowledge of
the characters of all these parasites is. necessary in judging the forms found by Lucas,
it has been decided to incorporate in this report their descriptions, hosts, and
synonymy.
THE ASCARIDES OF MARINE MAMMALS.
According to Krabbe (1878), O. Fabricius (1780, p. 272—not accessible to us)
mentioned three species of nematodes, namely Ascaris phocae, A. bifida, and A. tubifera
from Greenland seals, but Krabbe states that none of these forms can be recognized.
Goeze (1782, pp. 73, 74) described an Ascaris phocarum collected by Soemmering in
1781 from Phoca vitulina; the animals were 44 inches long and not quite a line thick.
Gmelin (1790, p. 3030) cites A. phocae, to which he refers Goeze’s A. phocarum; he also
cited A. bifida; short diagnoses are given. Rudolphi (1793, p. 10) also refers to.
A. phocae, but does not add anything to the description.
The later history of these worms is intimately connected with the history of the
genera Rictularia Froelich, Ophiostoma Rudolphi, and Dacnitis Dujardin. As so much
uncertainty exists comienninestbe forms, and as they can not be properly judged with-
out a careful study of the history of the genera in question, they will not be considered
further in connection with this report.
The history of the ascarides of marine mammals, so far as species recognized
to-day are concerned, begins with Rudolphi (1802), who described an Ascaris osculata
from Phoca. Between the appearance of Rudolphi’s article containing a description
of this worm and the appearance in 1866 of Schneider’s Monographie der Nematoden,
authors pretended to recognize Rudolphi’s species and to distinguish from it certain
other species and genera described as new.
With Schneider (1866) a new epoch in nematode literature began. This author
restudied Rudolphi’s material, together with other specimens preserved in the Berlin
Museum, and gave good descriptions and figures. Very unfortunately he failed to
state in most cases whether the description of a given form was based directly upon
Rudolphi’s originals or upon other material, so that in many cases we are left in uncer-
tainty regarding the weight which should be attached to his diagnoses of Rudolphi’s
forms. As Schneider definitely states, however, that he examined Rudolphi’s origi-
nals, and as his- work in reality represents the first extensive publication upon
nematodes prepared in a manner to be of much service, we consider it obligatory upon
us to accept his determinations as correct until they are proved to be erroneous. We
consider all literature upon the subject of the nematode parasites of marine mammals
published prior to 1866, and all determinations made before this date, except i in so far
as the specimens have since been reexamined, as open to question.
106 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Since Schneider’s monograph appeared, various authors have studied the nema-
tode parasites of marine mammals; some of their articles are worthless, as they show
a complete ignorance of the literature of the subject as well as superficial study of
the worms. The most important studies upon the subject have been made by Krabbe
(1878) and Jiigerskidld (1894), whose writings will frequently be referred to in the text
of this report.
Before passing to a description of the worms to be studied, it will be necessary to
consider for a moment the classification of the genus Ascaris.
Various attempts have been made to divide this genus into subgenera and sections.
The divisions made by earlier authors, Rudolphi (1809), and de Blainville (1828) need
hardly be considered here.
Dujardin (1845) proposed a division based upon anatomical characters, and this
classification, although not generally accepted, should be given here because of its rela-
tion to some of the forms which occur in marine mammals. The following table shows
the various groups proposed by Dujardin.
I. Subgenus Ascaris: Uterus with two parallel branches extending caudad.
1. Section: Oesophagus simple, with or without ventricle, but without pyloric (caecal) append-
ages. This section, with 54 species, included the type of the genus and Ascaris osculata
Rudolphi (see p. 151).
2. Section: Oesophagus followed by a more or less distinct ventricle, with oesophageal caecum,
or with an intestinal pyloric appendage. Species Nos. 55 to 66, none of which are considered
in the present report.
3. Section: Oesophagus prolonged by a caecum or pyloric appendage at the side of the intestine,
and accompanied also by another caecum from the intestine and directed cephalad. Species
Nos. 67 to 71, none of which are considered in this report.
4, Section: Oesophagus with a single caecum or pyloric appendage extending caudad at the
side of the intestine. One species, 4. acus.
II. Subgenus Ascaridia : Uterus with two branches extending in opposite directions. Species Nos.
73 to 75, not considered in this report.
III. Subgenus. Anisakis : Male with two unequal specules. See 4. Dussumierii, p. 161.
IV. Subgenus Polydelphis : Uterus divided into more than two branches. Type and only species, 4.
anoura. i. ;
Investigations since Dujardin’s time seem to-prove that this classification can not
be accepted.
Schneider (1866) proposed to divide the genus Ascaris as follows:
A. Lips with dentigerous ridge, but without intermediate lips.
B. Lips with dentigerous ridge and with intermediate lips.
C. Lips without dentigerous ridge, but with auriculae and intermediate lips.
D. Lips without dentigerous ridge, with “‘ Léffeln” and intermediate lips.
The importance of the intermediate lips as a means of classification seems to be
well established, and will be adopted in this report.
As stated above, a study of the ascarides collected by Lucas necessarily led to a
study of all of the ascarides found in marine mammals, since it immediately seemed
probable that the parasites from Bering Sea were closely allied to the forms collected
from allied hosts from Greenland and Iceland. Unfortunately we have had very little
material for comparison, and have not had time to obtain for consultation any of the
types contained in the European collections.! Our determinations are therefore based
entirely upon the diagnoses of other workers.
1 See pp. 113, 126, 134, 142, 157.
THE ASCARIDES OF MARINE MAMMALS. 107
The material we had on hand for comparison consisted of a few worms collected
in Europe by Stiles and a few bottles found in the Leidy collection. Taking the
characters from our own specimens and from the literature upon the subject, the follow-
ing key has been prepared and will be of service in determining the known ' ascarides
of marine mammals.
KEY TO THE ASCARIDES OF MARINE MAMMALS.
DAG OE f0ris c.ccoc aoc ocnner ners ison i nuaans were ee aeea cami ceawrnwmerioneea es ake aEkaoeaas 2
Larval forms which are not devatopad to a degree permitting the determination of the species;
generally with prominent tooth ventral of mouth and with conical spine on the tail.
A. capsularia (p. 164).
2. Antermed (tei ps ADSON bs a.o5 wise seen navy neiminncseieenn Setewee aces ceeen ohh areurssidasecee te ewes eens 3
Intermediate lips present .-....-.---- -- 222. ee eee eee ce ee ee ee ree eee eee 9
No data at hand concerning intermediate lips ........-. 2-22. +22. 22-22 - eee eee eee eee eee 10
3. Dentigerous ridge present on lips-.-........---- -- 2-2 eee enn ee ee ee ene ne ee eee 4
One papilla on each ventro-lateral lip, said to bear 6 to 7 teeth; oesophageal and intestinal caeca
apparently absent; second portion of oesophagus usually sigmoid.
Male: 70 to 90"™ long; tail with 7 to 8 pairs of postanal papillae, of which 1 to 4 are near the
tip, 5, 6 4+ 7, and 8 near the cloaca; left (2.3™™) spicule longer than right (1.7™™) spicule.
Female:'80 to 100™™" long; vulva near the middle of the body.
Host: Delphinapterus leucas. See also A. simplex (p. 121) A, Kiikenthalii (p. 144).
Data concerning dentigerous ridge are wanting ...--...---. -------- +2222 ene eee eee 8
4, Dentigerous ridge, single... -.--...----- ---- 2. +--+ een ne ene eee ce ee cee cee nee 5
Dentigerous ridge, double; cuticular bands provided with fine transverse striae.
Male: 28™™ long; caudal papillae numerous.
Female: 57™™ long; vulva?
Host: Otaria jubata; Patagonia ....-...-.-.--- 22 22 eee ee eee eee eee A, patagonica (p. 143).
5. Cuticular bands with finer transverse striae; spicules nearly equal....-...-.-.--.------.- pete 6
Cuticular' bands without finer transverse striae, but arranged so as to give a serrate appear-
ance to the margin of the worm when seen under the microscope; oesophageal and
intestinal cacca: absent 22.006 02006 seen ve eee e ved tee secessesnceees esses dheseoweew aves 7
6. Lips of nearly equal diameter, but of very different outline; oesophageal caecum may be present or
absent; intestinal caecum present, long or short.
Male: 33 to 70™™ long; 5 to 6 pairs of praeanal papillae, of which 1, 2, 3 are conical and nearer
the tip, 3 larger than 2, 2 larger than 1; 4, 5, 6 shorter and nearer the cloaca, 5 larger than
4or6. About 60 pairs of praeanal papillae, increasing in size from first to eighth; spicules
nearly equal, 1.5 to 2.5"™ long.
Female: 25 to 80™™ long; vulva near middle of the body.
Hosts: Phoca, Cystophora, Odobenus, Halichoerus, Callorhinus, Eumetopias; Arctic Ocean ape
BeliING SOaieicwi isons ewarcegenveasiacemees soeea she eseedincsewase A, decipiens (p. 109).
Lips of nearly equal size (Krabbe), or dorsal lip (0.12™™) much smaller than ventral (0.30"™)
lip; oesophageal and intestinal caeca absent.
Male: 37 to 130™™ long; 6 to & pairs of postanal papille, of which 1 to 4 nearer the tip, the
outer pair being longest; 5 to 8 are shorter and nearer the anus;.praeanal papillae arranged
each sidé in one or two rows, the first six pairs nearest the cloaca are shortly pedunculate;
the others are longer; spicules 1.68™™ long.
Female: 97 to 200™™ long; vulva a little in front of the middle of the body.
Hosts: Balaenoptera, Delphinapterus, Monodon, Hyperoodon, Lagenorhynchus, Otaria, ? Phocaena,
? Delphinus, ? Platanista; Greenland, Iceland, Denmark, and elsewhere ..4. simplex (p. 120).
1 Heterocheilus tunicatus found in. Manatus inunguis and Peritrachelius wmsignis found in Delphinus
amazonicus (= Inia Geoffroyi) are not considered inthis key. From Drasche’s studies it seems probable
to us that Peritrachelius, type P. insignis, is a synonym of Ascaris, but we hesitate to suppress the genus
at present without first examining specimens of it. Heterocheilus also may be an Ascaris, but we have
no specimens for study. See footnote, p. 103,
108 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
7. Cuticular bands, 32 u broad; dorsal lip divided into a large base, and a very small anterior
bilobed projection; ‘second portion of oesophagus generally sigmoid.
Male: 31 to 70™™ long; with 9 to 10 (11) pairs of postanal papillae, of which 1, 2, 3 are conical
and near the tip, 4 to 10 (11) shorter and nearer the cloaca; praeanal papillae numerous,
arranged in three rows each side; left (3™™) spicule about three times as long as right
(0.96™™) spicule.
Female: 37 to 90™™ long; vulva near middle of the body.
Hosts: Delphinus and Prodelphinus; Atlantic and Pacific oceans .-...--.-.---- A. typica (p. 127).
Cuticular bands 24 4 broad; lips not well studied, but apparently of nearly equal size.
Male: unknown.
Female: 62 to 75™™ long; of a dark brownish or white color.
Host: Odobenus rosmarus ...... 202 ..-0-- eee e ee eee e een ee ee eee A. bicolor Baird sp. ing. (p. 138).
8. Lips of nearly equal size; intestinal caecum present.
Male: 85 to 115™™ long; one pair of postanal papillae, four pairs of praeanal papillae; spicules
short.
Female: 85 to 144™™ long; vulva one-third to two-thirds the length from anterior extremity.
OSG DuUgong: dug on xine wicnd siorsin winisiart gicigsts'eicigniniciele! « s'sic'e% sinipin Siet's sieimicieeisins & A, halicoris (p. 147).
Host: Antarctic seal (genus? species?). Wings said to extend the whole length, becoming
thicker at distal extremity. Worms 37 to 50™, of a dark olive color.
A. similis, sp. ing. (p. 146).
9. Cuticle immediately back of lips, in deep folds; posterior portion of oesophagus, including
oesophageal caecum, between one-third and one-half as long as anterior portion; cuticular
bands 8 sz broad, without finer striation.
Male: 34 to 70™™ long; 8 to 10 pairs of postanal papillae, of which 1 to 4 are near the tip,
and one pair of double papillae between these and cloaca; 30 or more pairs of praeanal
papillae, arranged on each side irregularly or in a double row; spicules equal, 3 to 8rm
long.
Female: 40 to 80"™ long; vulva on a prominent tranverse ridge about one-third the length of
- the body from the head.
Host: Phoca, Halichoerus, Stenorhynchus, Ewmetopias; cosmopolitan ......... A, osculata (p. 151).
Posterior portion of oesophagus, with oesophageal caecum, scarcely one-sixth as long as anterior
portion.
Male: 40™™ long; 12 pairs of postanal papillae, of which 1 to 3 are near the tip, 4 to 12 irregu-
larly arranged; praeanal papillae in a single row.
Female: 50™™ long; vulva about one-fourth the length of the body from the head.
Host: Platanista gangetica; Ganges Piaiieigs Saleen eeicisin ciercicy cite ewe eiae e Sees A. lobulata (p. 159),
10. No details of structure known.
Hosts: Platanista and the extinct Hydrodamalis...........0220.2.2002 0-0 wpfeireiece)aets Btieics ascleieiSye 11
First portion of oesophagus 5"™ long; second portion 1.5™™ long, sigmoid ; cuticular bands
29 to 30 « broad; head 0.4™™ broad; lips small.
Male: 79™™ long, tail curled, caudal sil present with 8 to 10 papillae; spicules unequal (27:15).
Female: 70 to 100 long, vulva 25 to 40™ from anterior extremity.
Host: Dolphin (gen.? sp.?), Indian Ocean............ 202.0222 eee dA. Dussumierii (p. 161),
UNIDENTIFIABLE SPECIES,
11. Host: Dolphin of the Ganges (Platanista gangetica) near Calcutta. Length over
an inch long.........--- 2222-222 cee cee cece ee cee eee eee cee eens A. delphini (p. 162).
Host: Steller’s extinct sea cow (Hydrodamalis gigas) Bering Sea. Length
Shalf a f00b? acerewe oxen de nace see cicieceinicies busca eee Scie neve crcisssiens eareleaew A. rytinae (p. 163).
I. Intermediate lips absent.
A. Dentigerous ridge present on lip.
a. Dentigerous ridge simple.
a, Cuticle with broad cuticular bands, and narrow transverse striae; spicules of
nearly equal length.
ASCARIS DECIPIENS. 109
1. ASCARIS DECIPIENS Krabbe, 1878.
(Figs. 1-22.)
#1853, Ascaris similis BAIRD, see p. 146.
1878, Ascaris decipiens KRABBE, Oversigt K. Danske Videnskab. Selskabs Forh., pp. 45-47, fig. 1;
pl. 1, fig. 3; résumé pp. 10-12.—JAGERSKIOLD, 1894, Zool. Jahrb., VIL, pp. 452, 467-474, pls.
xxv, fig. 14, xxvi, 26, xxvim1, 40-41.—Stossicn, 1896, Boll. Soc. adriat. Sci. nat. Trieste,
XVII, p. 20.
? 1888, Ascaris bulbosa Copp, Jenaische Zeitschr. Naturw., XXIII, (n. F., XVI), 1, 8 Dec., 1888, pp.
59-64, pl. v, figs. 29-30.—Cons, 1889, Arch, f.. Naturg., 55 Jhg., I, p. 150, pl. vu, figs. 7-8.
1894, ‘‘ Ascaris osculata RUDOLPHI,” misdet. in Coll. Leidy, see StiLEs & HassaL_, Veterinary Mag.,
I, 5, p. 340.
D1acnosis.—Intermediate lips absent; lateral cervical alae absent; lips of nearly equal diameter,
but with different outlines, with bilobed anterior projection, which is much more prominent on the
dorsal than on the ventral lips, and armed in both on its inner surface with a dentigerous ridge.
Cervical papillae about 0.5 to 1™™ from the anterior extremity. Body attenuated more toward the
anterior than toward the posterior extremity. Cuticle with 40 to 48 « transverse cuticular bands,
which are provided with much smaller (4 4) striae. Oesophagus divided into two portions: oesopha-
geal caecum may be distinct or incorporated in the second portion of the oesophagus; intestinal
caecum present, may be short or long. Excretory pore median, anterior, between the ventral lips.
Male: 33 to 70™™ long, by 1 to 1.5™™ thick; tail with lateral dlae, about 3™™ long; 5 to 6 pairs of
postanal papillae divided into two groups; 1, 2, 3 near the tip of the conical tail, 3 larger than 2, 2
larger than 1; 4, 5, 6 nearer the cloaca, 5 larger than 4 or 6; about 60 pairs of praeanal papillae,
arranged on each side in single or double row, increasing in size from first to eighth; spicules of
nearly equal length, varying from 1.5 to 2.5™™ long,
Female: 25 to 80™™ long by 1 to 2™™ thick; vulva marked by a transverse ridge in the middle
third of the body. Eggs spherical, 48 to 56 u, segment to morula stage in the uterus..
Habitat: Stomach and intestine of marine mammals, larvae encysted in marine fish.
Hosts. Locality. Collector, Authority.
.
A. For adult.
Oallorhinus ursinus -| Bering Sea....0. Lucas, 1896 Stiles & Hassall, 1899, p. 113.
Oystophora cristata. Green. rik ... Krabbe, 1878, p. 45.
ii Greenland Vahl, Olr: Krabbe, 1878, p. 45.
Spitzbergen Kiikenthal Cobb, 1888, p. 64; 1889, p. 150.!
Specimens from Vien- |......--.--.+.+206+ -| Stiles & Hassall, 1899, p. 113.
na Museum.
EBumetopias stellert.....-.-+.00+-00- Bering Sea..........-- Lucas, 1896 Stiles & Hassali, 1899, p. 113.
Halichoerus grupus .-----..------++- Bohuslan ......-.--+++/.----------- -| J prem ioes 1896, p. 467.
Macrorhinus angustirostris. Chapman . -| Stiles & Hassall, 1899, p. 112.
Odobenus rosmarus .....- Greenland ............ Zimmer... -| Krabbe, 1878, p. 45.
Phoca foetida......-- exes| Greenland sonnncannesns BEL ecviunewnnnceneess Krabbe, 1878, p. 45.
Phoea groenlandica.....-++.0---0+-+ Greenland ....-...-..- Merch, Moller, Ander-| Krabbe, 1878, p. 45.
sen, Pfaff.
Phoca groenlandica..--..4++----++06 Specimens from Vien- |............-.....--+--+ Stiles & Hassall, 1899, p. 113.
na Museum.
Phoce, largna . ..2-4-000eeeecenceee Bering Sea.........-.. Lucas, 1896 ...........| Stiles & Hassall, 1899, p, 113.
Phoca vitulina... Greenland .......----. Merch, Ulrik, Pfatf ...| Krabbe, 1878, p. 45.
Phoca vitulina. . - -| Schleswig .........--- Krabbe, 1878, p. 45.
Phoca vitulina... as) Leipzig «i. soos sse0.5-% -| Stiles & Hassall, 1899, p. 113.
Phoca vitulind. ..----.---seceerennne Specimens from Vien- Stiles & Hassall, 1899, p. 157.
na Museum.
Seal, gon.? sp.?.....----+--eseeeeeee Faroe ....-....2+ee0eee Krabbe, 1878, p. 46.
Seal, gen.? sp.? --| Iceland .......-...-..- .| Krabbe, 1878, p. 46.
Seal, ons? Spi lessccrsevewre wen eens Greenland ...... pecees Krabbe, 1878, p. 46.
B. For larva.
Gadus macrocephalus....200e+0+-++++ Bering Sea..........-- Lueas, 1896 ........--. Stiles & Hassall, 1899, p. 119.
Theragra chalcograima ......------ Popoff Island .........|.-.0222:eeeeeee see neeeee Stiles & Hassall, 1899, p. 120.
Recorded as Ascaris bulboga. ‘See p. 111.
110 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
SumMary.—The ascaride of the Alaskan fur seal is specifically indentical with an
ascaride found in Phoca largha and Eumetopias stellert in the same locality, and with
the form described by Krabbe in 1878 as Ascaris decipiens from the stomach of Phoca
vitulina, P. groenlandica, P. hispida (=P. foetida), P. barbata (=Hrignathus barbatus), ~ -
Trichechus rosmarus (= Odobenus rosmarus), Cystophora
cristata and several undetermined marine mammals. .
The species from Phoca barbata, described by Cobb in
1888 as Ascaris bulbosa, does not appear to differ essen-
tially from this form. Baird’s (1853) Ascaris similis,
from the stomach of an Antarctic seal (see p. 147), and
his Ascaris bicolor, described in 1868 as parasitic in
the stomach of Trichechus rosmarus (see p. 142), are
possibly also identical with Krabhbe’s species. The
parasite has a wide geographical distribution, and is
acquired by seals through eating fish. In detail the history of the worm is as follows:
HISTORICAL REVIEW.—Regarding A. similis, see page 147; for A. bicolor, see
page 139.
Krabbe (1878, pp. 45-47, résumé, pp. 11,12) described this species from material
collected in Greenland by various persons (see p. 109) from Phoca groenlandica, P.bar- ‘
bata (= Erignathus barbatus), P. hispida (=P. foetida),
P. vitulina, Cystophora cristata, and Trichechus ros-
marus (= Odobenus rosmarus). Besides these hosts,
from which the worms were collected, in all in seven-
teen c ses, specimens were found
three times in unnamed seals from
Faroe (by Miiller), Iceland (by
Steincke), and Greenland (by An-
dersen). It was also found once in
Phoca vitulina off the west coast of
Schleswig. The parasite often oc-
curs with A. osculata in the same
host, and for both of these species
the stomach is a more common hab-
itat than the intestine. In one case
a “couple of hundred” worms were
present, of which one-third were
males. The males attained 45"" in length, the females 60™™,
The lips are nearly alike, without intermediate lips; each lip
bears (fig. 1) a broad, rounded anterior double lobe, separated from
the basal portion of the lip by a lateral concave border. The inner
surface of the margin of the anterior lobe is provided with a den-
tigerous ridge, arranged in a tripply curved line. Of the six pairs of
postanal papillae in the male (fig. 2) three pairs of conical papillae
‘ are near the tip, and increase in size from the tip forward, so that
the third pair is the largest; nearer the anus are three pairs of
smaller papillae; antero-lateral of the anus is situated on each side a row of conical
papillae, which increase in size from the first to the seventh or eighth.
Fig. 2.
Fig. 3.
ASCARIS DECIPIENS. 111
Krabbe was not able to definitely determine whether or not this form was identical
with A. maritima, but Leuckart, who examined A. decipiens at Krabbe’s request,
stated that it was specifically distinct from A. maritima. The two forms belong to the
same group, but there seems to be no evidence in support
of the view that A. maritima of man occurs in seals.
Cobb (1888, pp. 59-64) described as a new species
A. bulbosa, some nematodes taken by Kiikenthal from
the stomach of Phoca barbata (=Hrignathus barbatus);
although certain important details of structure are omitted
in Cobb’s article, there can be scarcely any doubt regard-
ing the specific identity of his form with A. decipiens, as is
shown by the following abstract of Cobb’s work:
The male (figs. 3, 4) measures 50 to 70™™ long, with
cylindrical body attenuated anteriorly; the head is about j
0.33™™ broad, while the breadth of the body is one-twenty- ai
fifth to one-twenty-sixth of its length. The transverse striae can be seen only with
the aid of the microscope. The tail is curved and possesses papillae (fig. 4) which
can be distinguished with the hand lens. Cobb’s figure shows 7 pairs of
postanal papillae; 1, 2, and 3 nearer the tip, 4, 546, and 7 nearer the
cloaca; praeanal papillae about 60 in number on each side, extending for-
ward in two irregular rows; in the figure the first five praeanal papillae
are smaller than those which follow; the spicules
measure 2 to 2.5™™ long, are nearly similar, but the
left spicule (2.5"™) is slightly longer than the right
(2.3 ™"), The female measures 50 to 80", the vulva
is situated somewhat more than one-third the length
of the body from the anterior extremity. The 3,.3™
long oesophagus is composed of three portions: an
anterior portion 2™ long by 0.5" in diameter (broad-
est portion); a second bulb-like portion 0.33™™, and
terminal cylindrical portion 1™™ long by 0.33"™ broad.
The intestine possesses a proximal caecum. The ex-
cretory organ opens. between the ventro-lateral lips.
The vagina measures 2 to 3™™ long; the uterus, includ-
ing the horns, 15 to 16™™; eggs develop to the morula stage in
the uterus. The cervical papillae are situated 0.5™™ back of the
mouth. From the fact that the excretory organ opeus between
the ventral lips, intermediate lips must be absent.
In his second paper Cobb (1889, p. 150) gives a short abstract
of his first article.
Jigerskidld (1894, pp. 452, 467-474) determined as identical
with A. decipiens parasites preserved in the Zoological Institute -
of the Upsala University and taken from the mouth and pharynx
‘of Halichoerus grypus Nilsson. From his anatomical discussion the folloying data
are abstracted. .
The oesophagus is divided into two portions: The anterior portion agrees.
essentially with the corresponding portion of the oesophagus in “A. simplex” as
Fig. 5.
Fig. 6.
112 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
defined by Krabbe; the second portion is shorter than the first, and may be united
with the intestine in two different manners; either the dorsal surface of the oesophagus
may be united with the ventral surface of the intestine, thus leaving the distal portion
of the second part of the oesophagus and the proximal portion of the intestine as two
caeca (fig. 5), or the distal end of the oesophagus may be united with the intestine in
such a way that the intestinal caecum is present, the oesophageal caecum on the other
hand, absent (fig. 6). The excretory organ is developed in the same peculiar manner
as in A. osculata and A. spiculigera, but discharges between ventral lips, while in
A. osculata and A. spiculigera it discharges distally of the intermediate lip; the gland
extends beyond the middle of the body. The vulva is situated about in the middle of
the body, or somewhat distal to the middle. “ The vagina, which first runs cephalad
for about 5™™ and then turns, becomes widened into the uterus a few millimeters back
Fig. 7.
of the turning point; about 6™™ back of the foremost point of the vagina, that is,
immediately distal of the vulva, the uterus branches into two horns 8™™ long.”
Jigerskiéld calls attention to the resemblance which A. bulbosa Cobb bears to
this form; he believes they are identical, but owing to the lack of certain details
regarding the lips of Cobb’s form, he reserves definite judgment upon the case.
The observations by Krabbe, Cobb, and Jiigerskidld seem to be the only original
‘work upon A. decipiens which has been published, and in this connection it must be
recalled that the specific identity of the worms described by Baird and Cobb, with
the parasites discussed by Krabbe and Jagerskidld is probable, but not absolutely
established; furthermore, that Rudolphi’s (1809) original A. simplex may possibly
belong to this species rather than to A. angulivalvis (see p. 124).
Stiles and Hassall (1894, p. 340) catalogued specimens found in the Leidy collec-
tion (No. 259=U.S.N.M., No. 5051), collected by Dr. Chapman from Macrorhinus
angustirostris, and determined as Ascaris osculata. An examination of this material
ASCARIS DECIPIENS. 113
shows that the worms agree in essential characters with A. decipiens. There are
also a few unrecorded female specimens of the same species in the Stiles collection
(U.S.N.M., No. 5341), taken from Phoca vitulina, at Leipzig, in July, 1890; the origin
of the host is not noted on the label.
After this manuscript was ready for press we received a sending of parasites
from Dr. von Marenzeller, of the Vienna Museum. The labels do not give the history
of the specimens, but an examination of the material has resulted in the following
determinations: —
B. A. L, No. 2829, contains several young specimens, labeled Ascaris decipiens.
No host is given. There are no males present, but we believe the determination to be
correct.
Fig. 11.
One bottle with the label “Ascaris osculata, Phoca barbata,” contains both Ascaris
decipiens (B. A.I., No. 2841), and A. osculata (B. A. I., No. 2831). One bottle, with
the label “Ascaris osculata, Phoca groenlandica,” contains both Ascaris decipiens,
(B. A. L, No. 2843) and A. osculata (B. A. I., No. 2835).
SPECIMENS FROM BERING SEA.—Among the parasites collected by Lucas, from
the Alaskan fur seal, Phoca largha and Humetopias stelleri, we find quite a number
of ascarides (figs. 7-9) which agree in essential characters with A. decipiens, as
diagnosed by Krabbe. The worms represent various stages of development, from
larval forms 14™” long by 0.5™™ broad, described below, to adults 80™™ long by 2™™
in diameter.
Adults.—The head of the adult is about 0.46™™ broad in an average specimen,
but varies, of course, with the size and development of the worm. Intermediate lips
are absent, as shown by transverse sections (fig. 10) and other views (figs. 11-14).
Transverse sections show that the bases of the lips are of nearly equal size; dorsal and
5947—PT 3——8 ;
114 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS,
ventral views (figs. 12, 13), however, show that the outline of the dorsal lip is some-
what different from that of the ventral lips. The dorsal lip has a large base. 0.27™™
broad by 0.128™™ long, which bears the usual pair of sense papillae, one on each -
antero-lateral margin; it bears also an anterior double-lobed projection 0.144™" broad
by 80 long, the measurements varying somewhat in different specimens; a dentig-
erous ridge is present on the inner surface of the anterior projection; the ventro-
lateral lips are essentially of the same differentiation, namely, a large base with a
smaller double-lobed anterior projection, but in the ventral lips the base is longer,
aud the anterior projection extends more into the space between the three lips, so that
|
|
oo
|
a
\
|
|
|
|
Fig. 12.
the lobes are somewhat concealed; on apex view (fig. 14) and on transverse section
(fig. 15), however, these lobes are plainly visible; they are provided with an inner
dentigerous ridge; the basal portion of each ventral lip is provided with the usual
sense papilla, The excretory pore (figs. 11, 14) opens in the median line between
the ventral lips, immediately ventral to the apex of the oesophageal triangle.
Cervical alae are absent; cervical papillae are. plainly visible about 1™™ from the
anterior extremity.
The cuticle of the body is provided with 40 to 48 wu transverse bands, which are
provided with a much finer striation.
ASCARIS DECIPIENS. : 115
Our examination of the oesophagus of the Bering Sea form gives the same results
which Jiigerskiéld obtained in studying parasites of the same species taken from
Halichoerus grypus. Figs. 16,17 bring out this point very clearly, so that it is scarcely
necessary to repeat the description, although it may be remarked that the intestinal
caecum may be long or short, in some cases so short as to appear almost absent,
while it is usually concave on the surface which rests upon the oesophagus. -
The adult males (fig. 9) vary from 33 to 63™™ in length by 1 to 1.5" jn diameter;
the body is slightly more attenuated toward the anterior than toward the posterior
extremity; the latter (fig. 18) is curled ventrally; it appears somewhat flattened
“
|
|
|
\
|
|
t
\
|
i
|
\
i
\
Fig. 13.
dorso-ventrally, and upon closer study is seen to possess a rounded keel-like dorsal
ridge, with lateral alae which are curled ventrally, giving the ventral surface a
concave spoon-like appearance. Numerous caudal papillae (figs. 18, 19) are present.
The six pairs of postanal papillae (fig. 19) are divided into two groups; 1, 2, and 3 are
nearer the tip of the conical tail and increase in size so that 2 is larger than 1, and 3
larger than 2; occasionally one or another of these papillae are absent; 4, 5, and 6 are
nearer the cloaca, and of these 5 is larger than 4 or 6. The praeanal papillae are
arranged in a single or double row each side, and increase in size from the cloaca to.a
short distance in front (about praeanal No. 7 or 8), the papillae farther forward being
slightly smaller. The spicules are nearly equal in size, 1.5™™ long.
116 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
The adult females vary in length from 25 to 75™™, with a diameter of 1 to 2™™,
The body is attenuated more toward the head than toward the tail. The vulva is ,
found in the middle third of the body, generally near the middle; in a specimen 65™™
long it was 27™™ from the anterior extremity. In the same specimen the vagina 4
Torsal.
e Veritral.
Fig. 15.
measures 5™™ Jong, the body of the uterus 12™™, the horns of the uterus 18™™, The
eggs are spherical, 48 to 56 4 in diameter, and reach the morula stage in the uterus,
Immature stage.—Among the nematodes taken from the stomach of seals are to
be found a number of smaller worms, which upon closer examination proved to be
young specimens of Ascaris. Similar worms were found also in Leidy’s collection
Fig. 16. Fig. 17.
‘in association with A. typica. These parasites agree in a general way with the
descriptions given of A. capsularia, and we have no hesitation in considering them
the immature stage of the adult worms with which they are associated. This is by
no means intended to imply that all specimens recorded by various authors as :
“A, capsularia” are the young forms of A. decipiens or A. typica. On the contrary, ae
ASCARIS DECIPIENS. 117
A. capsularia is probably a collective designation, including the young stages of a
number of distinct species of Ascaris, and would thus from a biological standpoint
nearly correspond to such expressions as Agamodistomum, Cysticercus, etc.
Fig. 18.
The young stages (figs. 20-22) in the fur seal attained 14™ or more in length
_ by about 0.528" in diameter, and possessed a finely traversely striated cuticle.
The head is provided with a well-developed spine, ventral of the round mouth, and
four papillae; in some specimens the cuticle was being cast, and within it the three
118 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
characteristic lips were then visible. A small, conical spine, about 20 » long, is also
present on the tip of the tail; this spine is finely striated tranversely and is curved
ventrally or dorsally. Of internal organs, the intestinal tract is well developed; the
oesophagus is divided into an anterior portion about 1.8"™ long and a posterior
portion about 0.8" long; in younger specimens (fig. 20) in which the oral tooth was
present, the oesophageal and intestinal caeca were absent, but in specimens which
had shed the oral tooth the intestinal caecum was present, the intestine and rectum
were distinct. From lack of time the other internal organs were not studied carefully.
Von Linstow (1878, pp. 237, 238) described a young nematode from the muscles
of Osmerus eperlanus under the name Ascaris eperlani. These worms measure 23.4™™
long by 0.72" broad; the oral tooth is absent, but the three lips are present; the
intestinal caecum is also present. ‘‘ Nematoidewm salmonis eperlant Rud.” is given
My i
SS,
=
ies
Ly
SS
PM
yy)
GY
yp
Os
aA Bet :
et co
Aung’
Fig. 19.
as a synonym, and Ayamonema bicolor Diesing is mentioned as the embryonic form.
This latter worm von Linstow also found in Osmerus eperlanus; it measured 8.8™™
long by 0.23"™™ broad, the oral tooth was present, and the intestinal caecum was well
developed. Later von Linstow (1895, pp. 519-524) describes Ascaris eperlani more in
detail and suggests that it represents the larval stage of Ascaris decipiens. Agamo-
nema bicolor was first described as Filaria bicolor Creplin, and is reported from “ Perca
fluviatilis, Acerina vulgaris, Osmerus eperlanus, Lota communis, and Gasterosteus
fluviatilis.”
Von Linstow may be correct in his supposition that the worms known as Agamo-
nema bicolor (Filaria bicolor), Nematoideum salmonis eperlani and Ascaris eperlant
represent the younger stages of A. decipiens, in which case the five fish just mentioned
would form intermediate hosts, but our experience with the earlier determinations
ASCARIS DECIPIENS. 119
of nematodes has been such that we are inclined to suspend judgment upon them all
until the originals have been restudied. (See Ascaris capsularia, p. 164.)
Source of Infection.—From the facts that ascarides corresponding to the so-called
A. capsularia are present in the seal’s stomach, and that all intermediate stages
between these young forms and the adults are found, it is clear that the seal
becomes infected with A. decipiens by eating fish. According to the reports of those
who have studied the question, the food of the fur seal consists mainly of surface
swimming fishes and of squid. The Alaskan pollock (Pollachius chalcogrammus =
Fig. 20.
Theragra chalcogramma), a species of red rockfish (Sebastodes), a squid (Gonatus
amoenus) are the forms most frequently eaten; salmon and other fishes are occasion-
ally taken.
Numerous encysted specimens (U.S. N. M., No. 2821) of ‘A. capsularia” were found
in a specimen of Pacific cod (Gadus macrocephalus) collected by Lucas in Bering Sea.
We have been unable to recognize any differences between these larval worms and
the youngest forms found in the stomach of the seal. At the same time we have
not been able to distinguish the lips clearly in this form, and on that account it is
-
120 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
1
impossible to state definitely whether these larvae represent the young of A. decipiens
or A. osculata. Mr. Lucas informs us that the seal ovcasionally, though rarely, eats
this species of cod, which is a deep swimmer and almost too agile for the seal, but
from the general structure of the worm, and from the fact that the seal does occa-
sionally eat this food, we are inclined to look upon it as one of the sources of infection
of the seal ascarid.
The chief source of infection is probably the Alaskan pollock (Theragra chalco-
gramma). In a specimen of this species taken off Popoff Island, which we owe to
the kindness of Mr. Barton Bean, of the U. 8. National Museum, we have found
encysted nematodes which also agree essentially with the so-called “ Ascaris cap-
sularia,” and with the youngest forms found in the seal’s stomach.
We have, of course, not been able to make any direct infections, so that this
view that the Alaskan pollock and the Pacific cod form the intermediate hosts for
Ascaris decipiens is not absolutely demonstrated, but taking into consideration the
similarity of the encysted worms with the youngest worms found in the seal, and
ee
oe
—"o
eee
Fig. 21. Fig. 22.
the fact that the seal feeds upon these fish, the probabilities in favor of the view
border upon a certainty.
From the probable fact that the seals thus obtain their ascarid parasites from
their regular food, and from the fact that we are dealing in both cases with wild and
marine animals, it will be seen that nothing can be done to prevent infection.
2. ASCARIS SIMPLEX Rudolphi, 1809, det. Krabbe, 1878.
Figures 23-29.
#1804, Ascaris simplex RUDOLPHI, Bemerkungen, etc., p.94. Nomen nudum.
? 1809, Ascaris simplex RuDOLPHI, Entozoorum hist. nat., II, 1, p. 170.—RupoLpuH, 1819, Entozoorum
synopsis, p. 49.—DinsinG, 1851, Systema helminthum, II, p. 155.—van BENEDEN, 1870, Bull.
Acad. roy. Belgique, 2 ser., XXIX, 363.—CoxBxoxn, 1876, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 297.—
CoBsBoLp, 1876, Journ. Linn. Soc. London, Zool., XIII, No. 65, Sept. 19, 1876, pp. 42-43.—
CoBBOLD, 1879, Parasites, p. 426.—CoBBOLD, 1886, Linn. Soc. Journ., XIX, pp. 176-177.—Mon-
TICELLI, 1889, Boll. Soc. Naturalisti Napoli, III, pp. 69-70.
71819, Ascaris delphini RUDOLPHI, see p. 162.
121
1851, Ascaris angulivalvis CREPLIN, Arch. f. Naturg., 17 Jhg., I, pp. 158-160.—DrEsiN«, 1860, Sitzungsber,
k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, XLII, No. 28, pp. 656-657.
1878, Ascaris simplex RuDoLPHI, of Krassx, Oversigt k. Danske Videnskab. Selskab Forhand., 1878, 1.
pp. 47-49, fig. 2, pl. 1, fig. 4, résumé, p. 12.—Von Linstow, 1888, Report H. M. 8. Challenger,
Zool., XXIII, part Lxx1, pp. 2-3, pl. 1, figs. 1-4.—Braun (1891), Arch. d. Fr. d. Naturg. i. M., p.
110.—JAGERSKIOLD (1891), Biol. Féren. Férhandl., Stockholm, III, No. 7, p. 182.—JAGERs-
KIOLD, 1894, Zool. Jahrb., vir, pp. 474-476, pl. xxvul, fig. 42.—Srossicu, 1896, Boll. Soc. adri-
atica Sci. nat., XVII, p. 17.
#1889, Ascaris Kitkenthalii Coss, see p. 144.
ASCARIS SIMPLEX.
Diacnosis.—Intermediate lips absent; lateral cervical alae absent; lips of nearly equal size
(Krabhe), or (von Linstow) dorsal lip (0.12™™) smaller than ventro-lateral lips (0.30™™) ; lips with two
anterior lobes, constricted from the base, and armed on their inner surface with a dentigerous ridge;
cervical papillae. Body attenuated more toward the anterior than toward the posterior end. Cutic-
ular bands 23 4« broad, with finer striae about one-eighth as broad; lateral lines 0.23 « broad, dorsal
and ventral lines 35 “4. Oesophagus composed of two portions; anterior portion increases gradually
in diameter; posterior portion begins with a swelling and then decreases; caeca absent.
Male: 37 to 130™™ long by 0.9 to 2.5™™ in diameter; tail with lateral alae about 2.5™™ long; 6 to
8 pairs of postanal papillae; of these, 4 pairs are near the tip, the outer pair being the longest; the
other 2 or 3 pairs are shorter and nearer the anus; 50 or more (pairs?) praeanal papillae; of these, 6
pairs of shortly pedunculate papillae lie aniero-lateral of the cloaca; then follows cephalad on each
side one row of long papillae, or two rows which are closely approximate; spicules long (1.68™™), with
saber-like curvature (Linstow).
Female: 79 to 200™™ long by 2.2 to 2.75™™ thick; vulva three-sevenths the length from the ante-
rior end (Linstow), about one-half (36:72 and 70: 150) the length from the anterior end (Jiigerskiéld).
Eggs spherical, 52 42 with roundish elevations.
Habitat: Stomach of marine mammals.
Authority.
Host. Locality. Collector.
Dalacnoptera rostratd.....00. 2-02 ces|acerce rene enasenvonacnes Creplin, 1857, PP. aaa 4
Balaenoptera rostrata ..--0+---++---|ecaece cece eeeneees -| Krabbe, 1878, p. 1
Balaenoptera rostrata. «+02. -++002-|ecee ence anseecee een eeees Jigerskiéld, 1894, — 475.
Balaenoptera sibbaldit -| Specimensfrom Sparre| Schneider of Tromso .| Jigerskiéld, 1894, p. 475.
Delphinapterus leucas
Delphinapterus leucas
Delphinus ap
Hyperoodon rostratus...-
Lagenorhynchus albirost:
Monodon monoceros
Monodon monoceros
Otaria jubata
Phocena phocena®...
Phoceena phocena?......
Plantanisata gangetica?
Porpoise, gen.? sp.?*.....-----
-| Greenlan
Sepecimens from el
Greenland
pag from Steen-
stru.
Harciéa Tslands....
..| Anderson. . =
r Darwin, 1835. did Sie wietsierais
Olrik, esi Andersen
Chierchia....
Suenson
Ibsen, Reinhart.
Olrik, Pfatf-...
Krabbe, 1878, p . 48.
Jigerskidld, “1b04, p. 475.
Monticelli, 1889, p. 6
I<rabbe, 1878, p. 48.
Krabbe, 1878, p. 48.
-| Krabbe, 1878, p. 48.
Diesing, 1860, p. 657.
Linstow, 1888, p. 2.
Krabbe, 1878, p. 48.
“ Gaea 1809, p.170.
Cobbold, 1876, p. 297.
Cobbold, 1886, p. 176.
1 Recorded as Ascaris angulivalvis. 2In need of verification, see p. 124.
SummMaRy.—Our first exact statements regarding this species we owe to Krabbe
(1878), who determined certain worms from toothed whales as Ascaris simplea Rudolphi,
and upon examination of material collected by Koren, a part of which was described by
Creplin (1851) as A. angulivalvis, determined the latter form as identical with the former.
We haveat present absolutely no exact knowledge of the forms determined as A. simplex
prior to the appearance of Krabbe’s worx, and some of the later determinations are
exceedingly doubtful. The exact status of A. delphini, quoted by most authors as a
synonym of A. simplex, can not be ascertained (see p. 162), but further investigation
122 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
may show that A. Kiikenthalii Cobb (see p. 144) is synonymous with the form now
under discussion. In detail the history of A. simplex is as follows:
HISTORICAL REVIEW.—Rudolphi’s (1809, p. 170) original diagnosis reads as
follows:
35. Ascaris simplex R.
Ascaris: Capite tenuiore caudaque teretibus obtusis.
Hab.: In Delphinit Phocaenae ventriculo prime ab am. Albers magna copia reperta, et mecum
communicata.
Descr.: Vermes pollicem vel sesquipollicem Jongi, crassiusculi, albidi, spiraliter convoluti.
Caput obtusum, trivalve, valvulis exiguis. Corpus undique teres, utrinque, antrorsum tamen
magis attenuatum. Cauda obtusa. Membrana linearis nullibi conspicua.
Obs. : Inter specimina plurima vix unum alterumve possideo, cujus cutis vel in antica vel in postica
parte in processum pellucidum et vacuum protracta non sit, ut Ascaride obiter spectata mox caput
mox cauda vacuaappareat. Nil nisi emphysema post mortem obortum, cutem laxiorem tamen indicans,
alias enim haec in crepvas potius abiisset.
Later Rudolphi (1819, p. 49) adds:
Asc. capite nudo, corpore retrosum crassiore, cauda obtusa. * * * An huen. 82?
N. 82, to which he refers, is Ascaris delphint, cited by Rudolphi (1819, pp. 54, 296)
as having been collected by Lebeck in Delphinus gangeticus (= Platanista gangetica).
There is, however, nothing in Lebeck’s citation of the worm which warrants the
assumption that his form was Ascaris simplex, and although nearly all authors consider
it a synonym of that species, and on this ground give A. simplex as one of the parasites
of Platanista gangetica, it seems to us much more logical to dispose of the doubtful
species A. delphini by making it a doubtful synonym of Ascaris lobulata, which is
described from the same host species (P. gangetica), or by ignoring it entirely. (See
p. 162.)
Regarding the worms which Dujardin (1845, pp. 220, 221) determined as Ascaris
simplex Rudolphi some difference of opinion exists among authors. Diesing (1851, p.
155) and Stossich (1896, p.17) accept the determination as correct, while van Beneden
(1870, p. 362) considers that these parasites represent a distinct species A. Dussumierii;
von Linstow (1888, p. 3) even doubts whether the Dujardin’s worms belong to the
genus Ascaris. The host was a dolphin, taken near the Maldives in 1830. (See
p. 161.)
Creplin (1851, pp. 158, 160) described under the name Ascaris angulivalvis: three
specimens of nematodes igken from Balaena rostrata (=Balaenoptera rostrata); the
worms were given to him by Oskar Schmidt, who received them in 1850 from Mr. Koren,
of Bergen. One of the specimens was deposited in the Zoological Museum in Greifs-
wald. More exact data concerning the origin of specimens were not published. Oreplin
was unable to utilize Rudolphi’s diagnosis of A. ‘simplex in trying to determine his own
specimens, since the description was so poor, but he considered his parasite closely
related to, yet perfectly distinct from, the worms which Dujardin determined as
A. simplex. Creplin’s description reads as follows:
Die drei oben erwihnten Specimina bestanden in einem—dem Anschein nach—erwachsenen Paare
und einem jiingeren Weibchen. Sie waren simmtlich schmutzig grau von Farbe. Das Miinnchen des
Paares war ungefahr 2} lang und in der Mitte 13’’’ dick, das Weibchen desselben etwa 3}” lang und
in der Mitte 1#’'’ dick. Das jiingere Weibchen hatte eine Liinge von 2’ und eine mittlere Dicke von
ce. 2’, Beide Geschlechter waren nach vorn ein wenig mehr, als nach hinten, verschmiichtigt; von
Seitenmembranen fehlte hier, wie bei Rudolphi’s und Dujardin’s Species, jede Spur.
ASCARIS SIMPLEX. 123
h
Die Mundklappen waren mittelmissig gross, eckig, mit einer nach aussen stark vorspringenden
Ecke, und mit schief von hinten nach vorn abgestutzter Endspitze.
Des Minnchens Schwanztheil war von auffallender Bildung, auf eine 1}' lange Strecke, vom
Ende ab gerechnet, nimlich leicht einwarts gekriimmt und von der Bauchseite daneben der Linge
nach tief ausgehéhit; die Rinder dieser Héhlung waren dick-wulstig und convergirten, so wie sich
der Schwanztheil ein wenig verschmiilerte, nach hinten, traten aber am letzten, sehr stumpfen Ende
des Schwanztheils aus einander und liessen hier, ganz dicht vor der stumpfen Spitze zwischen sich
ein ganz kurzes, borstenférmiges Penis-Spiculum heraustreten, und zwar nicht aus der Mitte ihres
Zwischenraumes, sondern ein wenig nach der einen Seite hin. Wie in anderen Askariden-Minnchen
ist jedoch auch in diesem kein einfacher Penis zu erwarten, und das hier vermisste Spiculum lag
daher ohne Zweifel nur neben dem hervorgeschobenen versteckt. Eines Afters ward ich nicht
ansichtig. Auf der Riickenseite des Wurms zog sich, dem eingekriimmten Schwanztheil entlang, so
weit sich unten die Aushéhlung erstreckte, zwischen den Wulstrindern eine hohe, iibergerundete
Carina, wie ein dritter, héherer, dicker Wulst, zum Schwanzende hinab. Die seitlichen Wiilste waren
stark quergerunzelt und gestreift, und dieser ganze, so eigenthiimlich gebildete Schwanztheil zeigte
ein jiusser straffes und rigides Ansehen, (Dujardin giebt von den Minnchen seiner ‘Ascaris simplex
Rud.” an, dass der eingekriimmte Hintertheil an der Bauchseite zwei membranése, durch 8-10 Papillen
gestiitzte Fliigel besitze. Von solchen war hier keine Spur zu sehen).
Von dem Weibchen habe ich wenig zu bemerken. Der Kérper ging hinten dick und abgestumpft,
ohne Verschmiichtigung des Endtheils, aus. Der After stand, wenn ich nicht irre, an der Unterseite
der stumpfen Endspitze. Die Vulva ward mir nicht sichtbar; sie befand sich vermuthlich an einer
Stelle des Kérpers welche durch Druck und Quetschung gelitten hatte, dergl. sich an diesem, wie an
dem jiingeren Weibchen hier und da fanden, bei welchem letztern ich denn die Vulva ebenfalls
vergebens suchte. ,
Character speciet
Ascaris angulivalvis m.
_ Ascaris utrinque, sed antrorsum magis, attenuata, nuda, valvulis oris mediocribus, in angulem
acutum extrorsum protractis, cauda maris incurva, infra excavata, supra carinta, feminae recta,
obtussissima.
Hab. : Specimina nobis adducta in Balaena rostrata a cel Koren reperta erant.
Greifswald, den 5. Mirz 1851.
Diesing (1851, p. 155) adds no new facts to our enowledes of A. simplex; he
accepts A. delphini Rudolphi and Dujardin’s specimens (=A. Dussumierit) as identical
with this species. In his publication (1860, pp. 656-657) he accepted A. angulivalvis
as distinct from A. simplex. To a condensed diagnosis of the former, based upon
Creplin’s description, he adds:
Specimina plura feminea Musei zootomiei Hafniensis e Monodonte Monocerote lecta, a cl. Steen-
strup benevole communicata, probabiliter ab hac specie vix diversa.
Van Beneden (1870, p. 363) had evidently not seen Ascaris simplex; he cites it as
a parasite of Phocaena communis (=P. phocaena) simply stating “Ce ‘ver est signalé
dans ’estomac du marsouin par Rudolphi, Synopsis 54 et 296.” This bibliographic
citation refers to “Ascaris delphini Rudolphi,” collected by Lebeck, but as van Bene.
den mentions this form elsewhere (1870, p. 359) as A. delphini, an error must be
assumed in his bibliographic references. As he does not mention A. simplex in any
other species of Phocaena, nor in any species of Delphinus, his citation of the presence
of this worm in “Phocaena communis” (=P. phocaena) must refer to Alber’s original
collection from Delphinus phocaena (=Phocaena phocaena), and his bibliographic refer-
ence should read Rudolphi, Synopsis, p. 48.
Cobbold (1876, p. 297) examined four female ascarides collected by Dr. John
Anderson from the intestine of the dolphin of the Ganges (Platanista gangetica), the
124 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
largest of which measured 12 inches long; “they presented the peculiarly flexed state
of the chylous intestine or stomach, as described by Dujardin.” Cobbold determined
the worms as “characteristic specimens” of A. simpler Rudolphi, and states that
“A, delphini of Rudolphi” must clearly be regarded as identical with this species.
Regarding Cobbold’s statements, it may be remarked that they were made two
years before Krabbe determined what a “ characteristic specimen” of A. simplex was,
and also, as his later articles show, he did not clearly understand the history of A.
delphini. His determinations, therefore, are worthless. Cobbold (1876®, p. 42) refers
again to the specimens collected by Anderson, and states
they correspond to A. simplex of Dujardin.
Krabbe (1878, p. 47-49, résumé, p. 12) referred to A. sim-
plex all the ascarides found iu the toothed whales from the.
coast of Denmark, Faroe, and Greenland, namely, in two
specimeus of Lagenorhynchus albirostris from Denmark, in
seven specimens of Beluga leucas (= Delphinapterus leucas)
from Greenland, in one specimen of Hyperoodon rostratus
from Faroe, and in three specimens of Monodon monoceros
from Greenland. He also had some young specimens of Ascaris from Phocaena com-
munis (=P. phocaena), but he could not definitely state that they belonged to A. simplem.
In one Beluga leucas 177 specimens were taken, about one-third of which were males;
the males measured 130™", the females 200™", This form (A. simplex) belonged to
Schneider’s Group A (intermediate lips absent, labial dentigerous ridge present).
The lips were of nearly equal size; each bore anteriorly twu lobes (fig. 23), which
were constricted from the base and armed on their inner surface with a row of small
teeth; on the end of the tail of the male (fig. 24) there were four pairs of conical
papillae, of which the outermost
was longest; between these and
the cloaca were found two short
papillae, occasionally apparently
united in a double papillae; on
each side antero-lateral of the clo-
aca were six short papillae, then
followed on each side one row of
long papillae or two rows which
were closely approximate. Krabbe
obtained from Koren specimens of
the worm which Creplin had de-
scribed from Balaenoptera rostrata
as Ascaris angulivalvis, but was
unable to notice any specific dif.
ferences between these and the form he (Krabbe) had determined as A. simplex.
The following year Cobbold (1879, p. 426) reverts to the species A. simplex, but
has decidedly confused the history of the worms he discusses. He states that A.
simplex was originally found in the dolphin of the Ganges, and later by Albers in the
common porpoise; he admits A. Dussumierii as distinct from A. simplex, but claims
that.“‘Lebeck’s A. delphini” is identical with the latter species; yet the worms from
the dolphin of the Ganges which he (Cobbold) examined and determined according to
Fig. 23.
Fig. 24.
ASCARIS SIMPLEX. 125
Dujardin’s description (=A. Dussumierii) he still retains under the name “A.
simplex.” In a later publication Cobbold (1886, pp. 176, 177) mentions some ascarides
which Charles Darwin collected ‘from stomach of a porpoise off the island of Chiloe,
January, 1835.” There were thirteen specimens, mostly females, the longest of which
did not exceed 3inches. These Cobbold determined as “A. simplex,”
again stating that A. delphini found by Lebeck belonged to the same “~~
species; this view he “corifirmed from an examination of nematodes |
procured from a Platanista gangetica, by Dr. John Anderson,” and he
thinks “it probable that the Ascaris found by Krefft and Masters in rare
a dolphin captured in Port Jackson is of the same species. If so, the Fig. 2.
worm occurs in Delphinus phocaena, in D. Forsteri, and in Platanista gangetica, and
probably in the dolphins generally. * * * The ova from Mr. Darwin’s specimens
are nearly spherical, furnished with thin, transparent chorional envelopes. They give
an average diameter of g$7 of an inch from pole to pole. M. Dujardin, whose descrip-
tion of the species is the best on record,
found the eggs to be a trifle longer.” In
his bibliography of this worm Cobbold
does not cite Krabbe’s paper.
It is evident from Cobbold’s discus-
sion that at no time had he any clear
idea of the worms he was attempting to
describe; and all of his statements con-
cerning them should be either preceded.
with a prominent mark of interrogation
or rejected in toto.
Leidy (1886, p. 311) next recorded
“Ascaris simplex Rudolphi from the stom-
ach of a dolphin, Lagenorhynchus? Pacific
ocean,” but as we show on page 134 of this report, his specimens belong to Ascaris
typica.
Von Linstow (1888, pp. 2, 3) appears to be the next zoologist to examine A.
simplex. He records it “from the stomach of Otaria jubata, January 27, 1874,
Kerguelen Island,” collected by the Challenger expedition. Thirteen specimens (fig. 25)
were taken, the largest measuring 79"™ long and 2,2™™
broad. The dorsal lip (fig. 26) is described as semicircular,
with an anterior’protrusion; the pulp sends two cylindrical
protrusions into the latter, and these are rounded off ante-
riorly; the anterior end bears a dentigerous ridge with
pointed teeth; accessory lips wanting; dorsal lip (fig. 27)
(0.12™™ broad) smaller than ventro-lateral lips (0.30"™). The
cuticle exhibits cuticular bands 23 y broad, with finer striae
about eight times as narrow; lateral lines 0.23™ broad,
dorsal and. ventral lines 35 ». The male measures 37 by 0.9"; its tail is provided
with four [pairs] of conical papillae on extremity, two or three others of round form
“just in front of the cloaca,” at each side of these six other shortly stalked papillae,
and again in front an inconstant row of fifty or more; cirri long (1.68™") with saber-
shaped curvature. The female attains 79™™ in length by 2.2™" in breadth; anus
Fig. 26.
126 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
0.48"™™ from the tip, which is rounded and bears a small styliform process embedded
in the cuticle; vulva three-sevenths of the length from anterior extremity. The ova
(fig. 28) are spherical, 52 ,. in diameter, with roundish elevations.
Von Linstow does not believe that Dujardin’s (1845) “Ascaris simplex Rud.” (see
A. Dussumierii) is identical with the species he studied.
Monticelli (1889, pp. 69, 70) records A. simplex from the stomach of
“ Delphinus sp., of Porto La gunas (canali Patagonici),” taken by Captain
Chierchia in the voyage of the royal corvetta Vettor Pisani. His determi-
nation was made by comparing the specimens with the worms (N. 529, 829)
Fig-28. at the Vienna Museum determined by Diesing. It will thus be seen that
this record depends entirely upon a determination made before Krabbe definitely
defined Ascaris simplex, and on this account calls for confirmation.
Braun (1891, p. 110) and Jégerskidld (1891) are not accessible to us at present.
Jagerskidld (1894, pp. 474-476) examined specimens of A. simplex from Beluga
leucas (—Delphinapterus leucas), which he had obtained from Levinsen; he found the
bursa as well developed in these as in A. angulivulvis Creplin
from Balaenoptera rostrata, and no longer doubts the identity of
the two forms. He describes the oesophagus (fig. 29) as com-
posed of two portions, an anterior longer portion, which increases
gradually in diameter, and a second shorter portion, which begins
with a swelling and then gradually decreases in size; no caeca
are present. The intestine’ is provided with several rows of
groups of elongate cells, each group having a V shape, the apex
directed caudad. The excretory organ is about one-third as long
as the animal. The vulva was 36™™ from the anterior end in a
specimen 72™™ long, and 70"™ from the anterior end in one 150™™
long, these measurements thus differing considerably from those
given by von Linstow (1888). The vagina is long and narrow,
the uterus bicorn. Ji&gerskiéld inclines decidedly to the opinion
that A. Kiikenthalii Cobb, from Beluga leucas (= Delphinapterus
leucas) is identical with A. simplex as defined by Krabbe, but,
being unable to examine specimens of Cobb’s species, he reserves
positive judgment.
Stossich (1896, p. 17) adds no new facts to our knowledge of
A. simplex. He considers A. delphini and A. Dussumierii, as well
as A. angulivalvis, as synonyms, but gives A. Kiikenthalii as a
distinct species.
Regarding A. Kiikenthalii see p. 144.
Since finishing this manuscript we have received from Dr. von Marenzeller, of
the Vienna Museum, a bottle of specimens with the label “Ascaris simplex, Delphinus
phocaena.” These worms we have redetermined as Ascaris typica (B. A. L, No. 2828),
The label does not show whether these parasites were determined by Diesing or not.
A. Cuticular bands do not exhibit the finer transverse striae, but give a serrate appearance to the
margin of the worm when viewed under a microscope ; oesophageal and intestinal caeca
absent.
Fig. 29.
ASCARIS TYPICA. 127
3. ASCARIS TYPICA (Diesing, 1860) Jiigerskiéld, 1894.
(Figs. 30-51.)
21845, “Ascaris simplex RUDOLPHI, 1809,” of DUJURDIN, see p. 161.
1860, Conocephalus typicus Dinsinc, Sitzungsber. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, XLII. No. 28, p. 669.—Von
Linstow, Compendium: d. Helminthologie, p. 59.—Carus, 1863, in Peters, Carus & Ger-
P staecker, Handbuch der Zoologie, II, p. 462.
21870, Ascaris Dussumierii BENEDEN, see p. 161.
1878, Ascaris conocephalus KRaBBE, Oversigt K. Danske Videnskab. Selskabs Forhand., 1, pp. 49-51,
fig. 3, pl. 1, fig. 5, résumé p. 12.
1889, “(Ascaris conocephala KRABBE,” in VON LINstow, Compendium: Nachtrag, pp. 25, 26.—STossicu,
1896, Boll. Soc. adriatica Sci. nat. Trieste, XVII, pp. 17-18.
1883, Peritrachelius typicus (DIESING, 1860) von DrascuE, Verhandl. k. k. zvol.-bot. Gesellsch. Wien,
XXXIII, pp. 109-111, pl. 111, figs. 1-9.
1886, ‘Ascaris simplex RUDOLPHI,” misdetermined, LrIpy, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., p. 311.
1894, Ascaris ( Peritrachelius) typicus (DIESING, 1860) JAGERSKIOLD, Zool. Jahrb., VII, p. 453.
Diacnosis.—Intermediate lips absent; lateral cervical alae absent; lips with very different outline
and with dentigerous ridge; dorsal lip with basal portion 0.16 to 0.2™™ broad by 80 to 88 « long, which
is divided into two large lateral lobes, bearing in its median line a prominent anterior double-lobed
projection 48 4 long by 48 to 64 4c broad; the latter contains on each side a lobe of parenchyma and
on its inner surface a dentigerous ridge; the lateral lobes bear laterally what appears to be a very
delicate dentigerous ridge, but what is evidently a striation; ventro-lateral lips with large, almost
semicircular basal portion 0.16™™ broad, bearing on the inner surface of the anterior portion a par-
tially concealed double-lobed projection provided with a dentigerous ridge; they bear laterally also
what appears to be a very delicate dentigerous ridge, which resolves itself into a striation; cervical
papillae 0,66™™ from anterior extremity. Body attenuate more toward anterior than toward posterior
extremity, which ends conically. Cuticle with cuticular bands 32 ~ broad, but apparently without
finer striae. Oesophagus composed of two portions: anterior portion 4™™ long by about 0.3 to 0.4™™
in diameter at distal end; posterior portion 1.25™™ long by 0.25"™™ in diameter, generally sigmoid;
oesophageal and intestinal caeca absent. ;
Male: 31 to 70™™ long by 1 to 1.5™™ in diameter; tail compressed dorso-ventrally with dorsal
median rounded keel and with lateral alae. It is curved ventrally and bears numerous papillae; 9 to
10 (occasionally 11) pairs of postanal papillae, of which 1, 2, 3 are conical and uear the tip; 4 to 10
(11) shorter and nearer the cloaca; 3 and 9, 10, 11 may occasionally be wanting; more than 75 praeanal
papillae each side, arranged in three rows; those nearer the cloaca smaller and more irregularly
arranged; cloaca 0.27"™ from tip of tail; spicules unequal, left spicule (3™™) about three times as long
as right spicule (0.96™™).
Female: 37 to 90™™ long by 1.5 to 2™™ in diameter; vulva in middle third (generally near
middle) of the body. Eggs globular, 46 to 56 ~, segment to morula stage in the uterus.
Types: Diesing’s types in Vienna Museum; Krabbe’s types in Kopenhagen Museum. Typical
specimens (Stiles & Hassall det.) in Coll. Leidy (U.S.N.M. No. 5015); from which specimens will be
distributed as follows: U.S.N.M. No, 2813; Coll. B. A. I. (U.S.N.M. No. 2812); Coll. Stiles (U.S.N.M.
No. 5456) ; South Kensington Museum, London; Berlin Museum; Coll. R. Blanchard, Paris; Copenhagen '
Museum; Vienna Museum.
Habitat: Stomach of marine mammals.
Hosts. Locality. Collection. Authority.
Delphinus (?delphis)...-.-.-----.++- Atlantic Ocean ...--.. ay om...--- race. alavare eps Diesing, 1860, p. 669.
Delphinus sp-.------1------20000---- Pacific Ovean......... a Jones........-- Stiles & Hassail, 1899, p. 132.
Phocena phocena....--.------+---- Specimens from Vi- |...-.-...-.-sseeeeceeees Stiles & Hassall, 1899, p. 134.
enna Museum.
Prodelphinus....-.----++-----+-+00+ Atlantic Ocean....... Andrea......-...0.204 Krabbe, 1878, p. 49.
Dolphins gen.? 8p.?.-----.--seeeeee Atlantic Ocean....... Hygom, Iverson, An- | Krabbe, 1878, p. 49.
rea,
128 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
SuMMARY.—A. typica (Diesing) belongs to Dujardin’s subgenus Anisakis (type,
A. Dussumierii). It was described in 1860 by Diesing as type of a supposed new genus
Conocephalus, but Krabbe (1878) and Drasche (1883) showed that the structure upon
which the genus was based was nota part of the worm. Krabbe described it as a
new species, A. conocephalus; Drasche placed it in the genus Peritrachelius; Leidy
misdetermined specimens from the Pacific Ocean as “Ascaris simplex Rudolphi,” and
Fig. 30. Fig. 32.
it is not at all impossible that Dujardin’s “A. simpler Rudolphi” =A. Dussumierii is
identical with this form (see p. 161). In detail the history of the species is as follows:
HISTORICAL REVIEW.—For a discussion of Dujardin’s form see page 161. Diesing
(1860, p. 669) described a parasite (fig. 30) as Conocephalus typicus, type and only
species of a supposed new genus, as follows:
Familia XII. Conocephalidea. Character generis unici simul familiae.
XLI. ConocrruaLus Diesing.
Corpus elongatum teretinsculum. Caput conicum, limbo suo postico crenulato a corpore distante,
retractile. Os in apice capitis. Extremitas caudalis maris semispiralis, subtus excavata, papilla
ASCARIS TYPICA. i 129
duplici subterminali, feminw subrecta. Penis apertura genitalis feminea infra corporis medium sita;
uterus simplex, ovariis et oviductibus duobus. Ovipara. In Cetaceorum ventriculo endoparasita.
Echinorhynchorum more caput totum in corpus retractile.
I. Conocephalus typicus Diesing. Tab. I, fig. 1-11.
Corpus subaequale, transverse striatum. Os minimum. Longit. mar. ad 2”, crassit. ad 2/’,
feminae ultra 2’, crassit, 1’’’, longit. capitis ad 3” '.
Habitaculum. Delphinus (Delphis?): in ventriculo, in oceano atlantico sub latit. b. 20° et longit.
oce. 39° (Mus. Hafniense). :
Cl. Steenstrup specimina nonnulla generis hujus insignis Museo Caesareo Vindobonensi dono
obtulit.
Krabbe (1878, pp. 49-51, résumé 12) states that the worms Diesing obtained from
Steenstrup were collected by Captain Hygom, and that several were retained in the
Fig. 33.
Dorsal.
Fig. 34.
Ventral.
Fig. 35. Fig. 37.
Zoological Museum of the University of Kopenhagen. Upon examination of this
material Krabbe convinced himself that the supposed hood on the head was composed
only of coagulated mucus and epithelial cells from the mucosa of the host. When this
is separated from the head, three lips are seen and an impression of the lips is noticed
on the inside of the hood. Krabbe has noticed similar structures on ascarides of
seals, and he explains Diesing’s error of interepretation by the fact that when this
author published his Revision der Nematoden he was blind, and able to work only by
the aid of others. Diesing’s fig. 8, in fact, which is supposed to represent the head
retracted into the body similar to the proboscis of Hchinorhynchus, in reality exhibits
the lips without foreign appendage.
5947—PT 3. 9
130 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Krabbe proposed the name “Ascaris conocephalus n. sp.” for this parasite, which
was collected by Hygom nine times, by Iverson once, and by Andrea twice, from the
stomach of dolphins of the Atlantic between America and Africa, ranging from 4°
south latitude to 20° north latitude, and from 23° to 67° west longitude. Reinhardt
determined the toothed whales in which Andrea found the worm as belonging to the
genus Clymenia (= Prodelphinus); but regarding the other hosts he was unable to
state anything definite. . i :
In one lot of 370 specimens the proportion of males to females was 1:1. The
males attained 70 in length, the females 90™™, The worms are somewhat similar to
“A. simplex,” but differ in essential details of the lips and caudal papillae. The lobes
of the lips are provided with a dentigerous ridge, are narrower, and more distinctly
separated from the rest of the lip (see fig. 31) than is the case in A. simplex. Wine or
ten pairs of postanal papillae are found on the tail of the male (fig. 32). Of these
Fig. 39
Fig. 38. Fig. 40.
generally three pairs, occasionally two pairs, are conical and near the tip. The other
seven pairs are shorter and situated near the cloaca. ‘lhe numerous praeanal papillae
are conical and arranged on each side in three rows, well separated from one another,
those situated nearer the cloaca being shorter and more irregularly arranged.
Drasche (1883, pp. 109-111), evidently overlooking Krabbe’s paper, reexamined
Diesing’s original specimens. He found one male with the umbrella-like structure
on the head, as described and figured by Diesing, one worm without the head, ‘and
‘two which plainly showed three lips. Upon closer examination he found that the
umbrella-like structure on the head was simply a portion of the mucosa of the host.
Upon the removal of this mucosa the three lips were plainly visible. These lips
(figs. 33-37) Drasche (p. 110), describes as follows:
Die Lippen zerfallen in eine Riicken -und zwei Bauchlippen. Nicht allein jedoch dass die erstere
von den letzteren sehr verschieden ist, ja selbst die Bauchlippen sind nicht ganz symmetrisch zu
nennen. Die Dorsallippe (Taf. III, Fig. 6 und 7) besitzt eine schrig nach aussen geneigte Basis und
zerfallt in zwei halbkreisformige Seitenlappen und einen zweigetheilten Mittellappen. In letzteren
ASCARIS TYPICA. 131
gehen zwei Lobi ein; an seiner Innenseite bemerkt man eine fein zerschlitzte Zahnplatte, ebenso trigt
der Vorderrand der beiden Seitenlappen eine Zahnreilhe. Die beiden Bauchlippen haben einen
halbkreisformigen Vorderrand. An ihrer Innenseite sind zwei Zahnplatten zu sehen, welche eine
vielfach zerschlitzte Lamelie tragen. Der bogenfirmige Vorderrand der Lippe ist mit feinen Zihnen
versehen. Wie die 280fache Vergrisserung (Taf. III, Fig. 1 und 2) zeigt, sind diese Bauchlippen
keineswegs symmetrisch. Ich muss hier ausdriicklich bemerken, dass die Lippen, ohne durch ein
Deckgliischen beschwert zu sein, mit der Camera lucida gezeichnet wurden, dass also die verschiedene
Gestalt derselben nicht etwa die Folge einer ungleichen Compression sein kann; iibrigens constatirte
ich die Asymmetrie det Bauchlippen an zwei Exemplaren. Hinter den Lippen zeigen die Cuticularringe
einen schneidenden Rand.
Drasche further. mentions the presence of a “Gefiissband” similar to what he
found in “Peritrachelius,” in a female 40™™ long, it being directly back of the lips and
extending caudad for 20™; its greatest breadth. was 1™, and it extended from the
—— |
——
Fig. 42.
right lateral line to the ventral line, surrounding a portion of the intestine. The
furrows of the intestine were particularly well developed in the middle portion. The
vulva was in about the middle of the animal, 23" from the anterior extremity in a
specimen 40" long; vagina short, uterus double.
The tail of the male (fig. 38) was curved and was provided with a bursa; ten post-
anal papillz were observed, of which Nos. 1,2, and 3 were conical; over seventy
preanal papille were present, arranged in several longitudinal rows; spicula were
not observed.
Drasche concluded that the mouth parts, “‘Gefassband,” bursa, arrangement of
the papille and presence of an evertible penis sheath undoubtedly showed that this
worm belonged to Diesing’s genus Peritrachelius, and he proposed to name it P. typicus.
In one of Leidy’s (1886, p. 311) articles, we find “(Ascaris simplex” cited as having
occurred in large numbers in “the stomach of a dolphin, Lagenorhynchus? Pacific
132 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Ocean.” The collection was made by Dr. William H. Jones, U.8.N. Leidy does not
describe the specimens, but in his collection we find a bottle (Coll. Leidy, No. 23=
U.S.N.M., No. 5015) containing numerous specimens of Ascaris, with the label “Ascaris
simplex. ‘Delohinas Dr. W. H. Jones.” As these are the only specimens we find in |
Leidy’s collection bearing a label which in any way corresponds to the data given in
Leidy’s article, they are probably the worms which Leidy had before him at the time
he quoted “Ascaris simplex” from the Pacific Ocean. These specimens, as will be
shown below, agree in essential charactérs with the description of Diesing’s Conoceph-
alus typicus as given by Krabbe and Drasche. \
Dorsal.
Ventral. _
Fig. 43. Fig. 44.
Von Linstow (1889, p. 25) cites “Ascaris conocephala” with Jonocephalus typicus”
and “Peritrachelius typicus” as synonyms.
Jigerskidld (1894, p. 453) does not state that he has examined this species; his
remarks are of historical and nomenclatural nature, and he accepts the name
“Ascaris (Peritrachelius) typicus.”
Stossich (1896, pp. 17, 18) has evidently overlooked Drasche’s article on this
worm, but gives a diagnosis by which, however, it would scarcely be possible to
recognize the parasite. He has evidently not examined specimens, but bases his
statements upon Diesing (1860) and Krabbe (1878). He includes Leidy’s specimens
under A. simples.
133
ASCARIS TYPICA,
Fig. 45.
THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
134
Since completing this manuscript we have received from the Vienna Museum a
bottle containing nematodes labeled “Ascaris simplex, Delphinus phocaena;” these
worms we have redetermined as Ascaris typica.
ASS
Fig. 46.
SPECIMENS IN LEIDY’s COLLECTION.—The bottle in Leidy’s collection (No. 23
U.S.N.M., No, 5015) contains about half a pint of nematodes (figs. 39, 40, 49), rather
poorly preserved.
135
ASCARIS TYPICA.
ii
aon
Ds
S—=
|
aN & AK
BAS
CYAN
136 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
These specimens, which we have determined as A. typica, represent various stages
of development, from young worms 10™ long by 0.27™™ broad to fully grown worms
44™ long by 2™™ broad.
The head of a female specimen examined measures 0.288"™ broad, and 0,112™™
long. The base of the dorsal lip measured 0.2"™ broad by 88 y long, while its anterior
projection measured only 64 4 broad by 48 u long (compare figs. 41, 43); the denti-
gerous ridge of the dorsal lip located on the inner surface of this dorsal prolongation,
as was figured by Krabbe.
Our observations also agree with those of Krabbe, in that we find the anterior
margin (figs. 41, 43) of the median projection indented in the median line, thus
forming two lobes, and at this point a prominent tooth is occasionally noticed. The
parenchyma forms an anterior lobulate branch into each side of the projection. The
basal portion is divided into two lateral rounded lobes, near the antero-lateral margin
of which a round papilla is plainly visible. Drasche states that the lateral lobes also
Fig. 48.
bear a dentigerous ridge. This we have not been able to verify, although on the margin
of the lobes we noticed a structure which might be interpreted as a dentigerous ridge,
but which appeared to us more like a striation.
The ventro-lateral lips do not, upon first examination, show the distinct division
into a prominent anterior narrower and a basal broader portion, such as is described
for the dorsal lip; pon careful investigation, however, and especially upon isolation
of the cuticle, a bilobed anterior projection may be seen extending into the space
between the three lips, similar to but broader than the bilobed anterior portion of the
dorsal lip; this projection bears a dentigerous ridge; the base of the lip is about
0.16™" broad, and the lip is 0.12" thick; ordinarily the ventro-lateral lips appear
nearly semicircular but asymmetrical in outline. We have not been able to clearly
define any dentigerous ridge on the >ase, but we find a number of striae, which might
easily be mistaken for such a ridge. The usual papilla is found on the basal portion
of each ventro-lateral lip. Intermediate lips are absent; cervical alae absent. The
cervical papillae ar. plainly visible 0.66™™ from the anterior extremity. The cuticle of
the body is provided with 32 y transverse cuticular bands, apparently without the finer
ASCARIS TYPICA. 137
striae seen in some other species. The posterior edge of each cuticular band projects
prominently beyond the anterior edge of the one next succeeding, so that the edge of
the worm appears distinctly serrate. The oesophagus (fig. 44) is divided into two
portions; an anterior portion about 4™" long by 0.4™™ in diameter at its distal end.
This part, which is extremely muscular, is followed by a second portion of different
histological appearance and wider lumen, measuring about 1.25"™ long by 0.25™™ in
diameter, and in all cases examined it was sigmoid. The distal end of this body
leads directly into the anterior end of the intestine; both oesophageal and intestinal
caeca are absent.
Fig. 49.
The adult males (fig. 37) vary from 31 to 38™™ long and 1 to 1.5™™ in diameter;
the proximal extremity is more attenuate than the distal end (figs: 45-47), which is
curled, flattened dorso-ventrally, and provided with lateral alae; the postanal portion
is conical and bent vertically. Nine to ten, or possibly eleven, pairs of postanal papillae
are present; of these, three occasionally two or two and a half pairs of conical papillae
are nearer the tip, while six to seven, possibly eight, pairs of shorter papillae are
nearer the cloaca. The arrangement of the praeanal papillae varies greatly in different
specimens; there may be over seventy-five on each side, arranged in three irregular
tows. The cloaca is 0.27™ from the tip of the tail, and extruding from it may
frequently be seen the spicules. The latter are of very unequal size, the left spicule
(3™™) about three times as long as the right (0.96"™ long). :
138 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
The adult females (fig. 40) vary in length from 37 to 44™™, in breadth from 1.5 to
2>m, and are attenuated slightly toward each extremity. The vulva, according to
Diesing, lies distal of the middle of the body; according to Drasche, about in the
middle. In one of our specimens, 44"™ long, the vulva was found 20™ from the head.
The vagina measured 6™™ long, the body of the uterus 8™", the horns 8™™, The eggs
(fig. 48) are globular, 40 4 to 56 u, and undergo segmentation in the uterus. The anus
is about 0.26" from the tip of the conical tail.
Nomenclature.—The specific term typica has priority, while Diesing’s (1850) name
Perittrachelius can not be applied to this form, either as generic or subgeneric name,
even should, as Drasche thinks, A. typica be generically (or subgenerically) related to
Peritrachelius insignis, since A. typica belongs in Dujardin’s (1845) subgenus Anisakis,
of which we make it the type.
Young specimens of Ascaris typica.—Besides the adults described above, U.S.N.M.
_ No. 5015 contains numerous specimens (figs. 49-52) of young ascarides corresponding
|
1 |
1
i |
F
Fig. 50. Fig. 51.
. to the young forms of A. decipiens described on page 116. They measure 15 to 22™™
in length by 0.25 to 0.34™™ in breadth, and present the characters usually given for
“A.capsularia.” The ventral tooth is slightly more prominent than in the young of
‘A. decipiens. Specimens may be found with the larval cuticle, or with this cuticle
partially discarded.
We do not hesitate to look upon these as the young of A. typica and to assume that
the host becomes infected by eating fish.
4. ASCARIS BICOLOR Baird, 1868 [nec Rudolphi, 1793]. Sp.ing. .
(Figs. 53-57.)
21809, Ascaris simplex, Rudolphi, see pages 120-126.
1868, Ascaris bicolor BAIRD [nec RUDOLPHI, 1793], Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 71, figs. A-C.— Murin,
1868, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, pages 67-71.—Von Linstow, 1878, Compendium der Helmin-
thologie, p. 42.—STossicu, 1896, Boll. Soc. adriatica Sci. nat. Trieste, XVII, p. 67.
DiaGNOsIS.—Intermediate lips absent; lateral cervical alae absent; lips distinct, prominent,
rounded, of moderate size, more distinct and larger than in A. simplex, and provided with a dentiger-
ous ridge. Body cylindrical, attenuated anteriorly (but less so than A. simplex), of a brownish color,
except at the anterior extremity which is white; the posterior extremity is sometimes red. Cuticle
ASCARIS BICOLOR. 139
provided with cuticular bands 0.024 broad, but without finer striae; the bands give a serrate appear-
ance to the margin of the worm, when seen under the microscope. Oesophagus consists of two por-
tions, an anterior and a posterior; oesophageal and intestinal caeca absent.
Length (all females?): 62 to 75™™; breadth 2 to 2.5m™,
Cotypes: British Museum and Coll. B.A.I. (U.S.N.M., No. 2824),
Habitat: Stomach of marine mammals.
Host. Locality. Collector. Authority.
Odobenus rosmarus ....-.----.00008 Died at London.....-- Murie, 1867 ....-...--- Murie and Baird, 1868, pp. 67-71.
SUMMARY.—This supposed species from Trichechus rosmarus (=Odobenus rosmarus)
should not be confused with “A. bicolor Rudolphi, 1793,” from Perca fluviatilis. A.
bicolor Baird was described in 1868 from specimens taken from a walrus; it has not
been reported since that time. We have examined several of Baird’s originals, but
having no males we are unable to definitely place the worm, although we are somewhat
inclined to look upon it as identical with A. simplex. Murie, who collected the
nematodes, considered them to be the cause of death of a walrus he examined. The
worm is cited by von Linstow (1878) and Stossich (1896), but these authors did not
examine specimens. In detail the history of the parasite is as follows:
HISTORICAL REVIEW.—AsS the original article by Murie and Baird has an impor-
tant medical as well as zoological bearing, we quote it here in full, with the original
illustrations:
(1868. ) [p. 67.]
4, On the Morbid Appearances observed in the Walrus lately living in the Society’s Gardens. By James
Murie, M. D., Prosector to the Zoological Society. With a Description of a New Species of Ascaris
found in phe: Stomach. By Dr. Baird, F. L. 8.
In 1853 the society obtained a very young walrus (Trichechus rosmarus, Linn.), which specimen
unfortunately only lived some few days after its arrival. From that time up to the 1st of November
last (1867) no opportunity has offered of adding another example of this exceedingly interesting animal
to the collection. When, therefore, a tolerably well-developed, although still young, male sea horse
was reported to have arrived safely in the gardens, the euriosity of the members of the society and the
public generally naturally was aroused, Notwithstanding the inclemency of the weather the number
of visitors was great.
The proper food of a walrus in a state of nature has been variously stated by different naturalists.
Some assert it to be a vegetable eater; others believe it to be entirely carniverous, while a third notion
has gained ground that it may occasionally partake of food of the one kind or the other.
Our superintendent, therefore, under these circumstances, felt a difficulty in deciding what might
be the best food to giye the creature so as to retain it in as good health as possible. The results of his
experiments concerning suitable diet he has himself laid before the society’s meetings on a previous
occasion. I shall just reiterate his conclusions, namely: It refused every kind of seaweed offered, but
it greedily gulped up the soft bodies of Mya truncata and M. arenaria, which were its principal food,
besides quantities of whelks, mussels, fish cut up in small strips, and the viscera of fish; these last,
however, having previously been well washed and cleaned.
It may be remarked that the young walrus dissected by Professor Owen in 1853 had been fed during
its captivity on oatmeal, milk, and water. The specimen at present under consideration, when first cap-
tured, and on shipboard, had also received a certain allowance of the above, along with strips of fat pork.
I have taken notice of the animal’s food for the purpose of directing attention to the question,
whence were the ova of the entozoa obtained that ultimately led to the walrns’s death?
At the period of arrival in the gardens the walrus looked thin and lean. There was an amount
of loose skin, however, which indicated that better regimen than that which he had lately been under
would soon render the body plump and comparatively free from the very numerous skin folds. These
wrinkles, it may be observed, in several places met each other, so as to form a series of elongated
diamond-shaped inclosures.
140 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
It was early noticed that the conjunctive were suffused and injected with blood. This gave the
eyes a disagreeable appearance [p. 68]. The animal at times chattered or rattled his teeth together in
avery remarkable and noisy manner. This last habit, however, was put down to temper, or as a
sign of hunger; the sanguineous effusion to a cold received during transport.
After the lapse of a few weeks it would seem that the body and limbs acquired more vigor; for
the gait became altered; so that in walking on all fours, sea-bear fashion, the abdomen and chest
were raised from the ground, whereas at first the animal rather trailed or draggled along than walked.
This showed that the animal was growing stronger in body, an equivalent in some measure to improve-
ment in health. It was noticed all the while that it remained emaciated and did not increase in
stoutness or otherwise become fatter, although the quantity of food it consumed was enormous. The
ravenousness of its appetite was something extraordinary, and many thought that the animal was
underfed.
The walrus thus was considered by every one who saw it to have had apparently uninterrupted
health till Monday the 16th of December. On that day the keeper first began seriously to apprehend
that the animal was out of order—as he thought—constipated, but meanwhile it did not refuse food.
On Mr. Bartlett being consulted, he proposed to give it some oily substance which might act as a
purgative. One pound and a half of horse fat, cut in strips, was therefore given the afternoon follow-
ing. The next morning there were copious alvine evacuations. What passed at first was hard, black,
and fetid, but the excretions became moister, though still very dark colored.
When this occurred it was thought relief was obtained and that the animal would go on well. It
did not seem, however, to rally, but died rather suddenly on Thursday the 19th.
The body was examined by me a day afterwards and disclosed unusual conditions.
Not a particle of subcutaneous fat was present, and the mesentery and other abdominal parts
usually contaiting fatty substances were equally destitute of such.
The viscera of the thorax and abdomen, with the exception of the interior of the stomach,
appeared quite sound. The brain was also normal in structure. ! ‘
[69.] On opening the stomach, which was of moderate size, I was much surprised to find that it
contained small, round worms, a species of Ascaris, in such quantities that, when these were turned
out, there was altogether about half a pailful. They occupied the entire interior of the visens, but
were in greatest abundance at the bend of the peculiar siphon-like stomach. :
The entozoa swarmed between the rugae, and in many cases were firmly attached to the mem-
brano. The mucous membrane lining the interior was of an intense red hue; but here and there were
somewhat paler patches. More rigid examination showed that these last were extensive ulcerations,
the mucous membrane being entirely eroded, and only the muscular and a very thin lining of submu-
cous tissue remained, preventing perforation of the walls of thestomach. The chief ulcerations were
some four in number, and varied in size and situation.
One, nearly circular, three-fourths of an inch in diameter, occupied the anterior wall at a dis-
tance of between 5 and 6 inches from the cardiac end. Another, somewhat diamond-shaped, 2}
inches by 14 at widest, also existed on the anterior wall of the viscus and about its middle. In the
ulcerated erosion, the mucous coat was in some parts so excavated underneath as to leave one-half
inch of an overhanging lappet of membrane. On a section being made vertically, the submucous
tissue was seen to be absent, the muscular and serous coats alone preventing perforation of the wall.
At this part of the wall the stomach had a thickness of only 0.1 of an inch, although it seemed as if
the muscular fibers were slightly increased in numbers here, possibly from the effects of the irritation
‘When the brain was taken out, its general appearance and firmness of texture, as implied above,
was that of health. As it was desired for anatomical investigation, it was not then cut into or inter-
fered with further than cursory examination permitted. At one point it was noticed that unusual
yascularity existed; but as the diseased condition of the stomach was thought sufficient of itself to
ancount for death, no great attention was then paid to this superficial cerebellar congestion. Subse-
quent examinations showed, however, that upon the upper surface of the ccrebellum (between the
posterior cerebral lobes) and underneath the injected pia mater an abscess had begun to be formed.
The brain surface immediately underneath was very slightly softened, but around it was quite firm.
The morbid deposit and infiltration had chiefly implicated the pia mater over the superior vermiform
process. Whether this lesion was the more immediate cause of death, and not the ulcerated condi-
tion of the stomach, is an open question. Some of the symptoms ,during life might, indeed, be
referred to it. ~~ ;
oe
ASCARIS BICOLOR. 141
going on in the neighborhood and within. A third ulcer, of'an elliptical form, 2} inches long, and
with more regular edges than the preceding, had been eaten away on the anterior wall, close to the
lesser curvature of the stomach and between 5 and 6 inches from the pylorus. Bebwoon the second
and third erosions here described, but on the posterior wall of the stomach, another very extensive
patch of ulceration had taken place. This ulcer stretched between the greater and lesser curvatures.
It had a semilunar figure, was rather more than 4 inches long, possessed irregular borders, and
varied from one-half to Linch in width. Themucous coat around had been undermined in a manner simi-
lar to that described above as occurring in the second ulcer. To the right and lying parallel with
this large excavation were a series of small circular and ovoid spots, which had been eroded in like
manner with those already described. The spots just spoken of varied in size from about a three-
penny piece to a shilling, and they evidently were fast running into one single, long ulcer, resembling
that upon the left side. Only avery few worms were found here and there in the intestinal tract;
some were observed to have passed previously to the horse fat having been given.
Dr. Baird, of the British Museum, having examined some of the entozoa, considers them new to
science, and sufficiently different to require a new specific name. He proposed therefore, that of
Ascaris bicolor, on account of a peculiarity common to most of [p. 70] them, viz, that the posterior
half of the body is more or less of a reddish or pinkish hue, the remaining segment being pale colored.
I myself incline to the opinion that this coloration may not be of a specific kind, but due in some
measure to the intensely congested condition of the stomach and sanguineous nature of the food.
The accompanying figures I have had drawn under my supervision; and Dr. Baird is pleased to
consider them a faithful delineation.
ASCARIS BICOLOR, Baird.
Fig. 55. 4 Fig. 56, Fig. 57.
A. [Figs. 52-54.] Three female specimens, of about the natural size; that to the left shows the
manner in which oceasionally the caudal end is found coiled up.
B. [Fig. 55.] Portion near the middle of the body, enlarged so as to display the transverse striations
and how some of them interdigitate.
C. |Fig. 56.] Magnified view of the head and labia.
142 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
There still remain two points worthy of consideration—viz: the cause of death, and whence the
entozoa were derived.
1. Death seems to have resulted from the ulceration of the stomach. It is not clear, though, why
the animal should have succumbed so suddenly. Literally speaking, these ulcerations were so
extensive that it is curious the animal should have survived so long. The chronic stage of the
ulceration alone accounted for this. This instance is one exemplifying ‘pure, chronic gastritis, due,
no doubt, to the presence in such numbers of the entozoa.
2. It Tes been said by some parties that the entozoa were possibly derived from food given to the
walrus after its arrival at the gardens; but there are many reasons against this being a likely
circumstance. In the first place, the fact of the entozoa being a new species peculiar to the walrus
militates against the above assertion [p.71]. Again, the ulceration apparently took a longer period
to attain the chronic stage extent than the few weeks’ residence of the walrus in the gardens would
account for. Furthermore, the nature of the food given at the gardens and the care and regularity
with which it was examined make it unlikely that such swarms of entozoa were derived from it and
developed in so short a period. Whether the entozoa had been derived from the food given on board
ship or in what manner they had originally reached ‘the stomach of the walrus are questions which I
am quite unprepared to answer, and speculation leaves the matter quite as undecided.
Dr. Baird has furnished the subjoined description of this Ascaris, which proves to belong to a new
species.
ASCARIS BICOLOR, Baird.
Head naked; labia distinct, prominent, rounded, and of moderate size. Both anterior and
posterior portions destitute of alae or wings. Body of worm cylindrical, attenuated anteriorly, of
a brownish color, except at anterior extremity, which is white; the posterior extremity is sometimes
red. The surface of the body is beautifully and minutely put distinctly striated across; as seen
under the microscope (with a power of two-thirds of an inch), the striae on each side terminate in
such a manner that the edges of the body appear as if serrated. Caudal extremity thicker than
anterior, obtuse, and generally convoluted.
A great many specimens were found in the stomach; but apparently all were females.
The Ascaris simplex of Rudolphi, found in the stomach of the porpoise (Phocwna communis), very
nearly approaches this species in general appearance and size, but differs from it in several respects.
The Ascaris bicolor is less attenuated at the anterior extremity than the 4. simplex, and is desti-
tute of alae or wings equally at the posterior and at the anterior extremity. The striations on the
surface of the body are much finer, and the labia or valves at the mouth are more distinct and larger.
Length from 2} to 3 inches; breadth from 2 to 24 millimeters.
Habitat: Stomach of a young male walrus (Mus. Brit.).
REEXAMINATION OF COTYPES.—AIlmost at the moment of going to press we have
received through the kindness of Prof. J. Jeffrey Bell, of the British Museum, several
of Baird’s originals of this worm. All of the specimens are females, and on this
account we are unable to definitely place the parasites. They are poorly preserved,
but we were able to distinguish a dentigerous ridge on the lips; no intermediate lips
were present; the cuticular bands measure 24 yu broad, and are apparently not provided
with any finer striation; the oesophagus resenibites the oesophagus described by
Jigerskiéld for 4. simplex, oesophageal and intestinal caeca being absent. Further
than this we are not willing to make any statements upon the material at hand.
We refrain from proposing a new name for the homonym A. bicolor Baird, as we
doubt the validity of the species.
b. Dentigerous ridge double.
ASCARIS PATAGONICA. 143
5. ASCARIS PATAGONICA Linstow, 1880.
(Fig. 57.)
1880, Ascaris patagonica Von Linstow Arch. Naturg., XLVI, 1, pp. 41-42, pl. 111, fig. 1.—von Linstow
1889, Compendium. Nachtrag, p. 18.— STossicu, 1896, Boll. Soc. Adriatica Sci. nat. Trieste,
XVII, pp. 20-21.
DraGNosis.—Intermediate lips absent; cervical alae absent; lips with a double dentigerous ridge;
in all three lips, the pulpa of the inner surface is divided into two roundish lobes; outer surface of
dorsal lip elongate, oval, with narrow base; body thick and solid; cuticle with rather broad transverse
cuticular bands together with very much finer transverse striae; tail clavate.
Male: 28" long by 1.3"™ broad; tail with obtuse conical projection; caudal papillae very
numerous and crowded.
Female: 57™™ long by 2™™ broad; eggs 60 in diameter, with hyaline membrane widely separated
from vitellus.
Type: Kiel University Museum, No. 40.
Habitat: Stomach of marine mammals.
Host. Locality. Collector. Authority.
‘
Otaria jubata...-..2..-.20.0-eeenee Patagonia.....--..---. () Von Linstow, 1880, p. 41.
Von Linstow (1880, p. 41-42) described this species with the following diagnosis:
1. ASCARIS PATAGONICA u. sp. (K. Nr. 40).
Fig. 1 [see fig. 57].
Fig. 58.
Aus dem Magen von Phoca jubata. Patagonien.
Die Gestalt ist dick.und gedrungen. Lippen ohne Zwischenlippen mit doppelten Zahnleisten ;
bei allen dreien ist die Pulpa an der Innenseite in zwei rundliche Ausliiufer gespalten. Die Aussen-
seite der Oberlippe ist lingsoval mit schmaler Basis. Die Haut zeigt Querstreifen in ziemlich breiten
Abstiinden, zwischen denen wieder viel feinere Querstriche eng gedriingt stehen. Das Schwanzende
ist kolbig, beim Miinnchen in eine stumpfe, conische Spitze ausgezogen.
Die Linge des Miinnchens betriigt 28, die Breite 14™™; die Papillen am Schwanzende stehen
sehr dicht und sind zehr zahlreich.
{p 42]. Das Weibchen hat eine Liinge von 57 und eine Breite von 2 mm.
Die Eier sind kugelrund; sie haben eine hyaline, von dem Dotter weit abstehende Hiille und
einen Durchmesser von 0.06™™,
144 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
_ Die bekannten Formen, welcher hier in Frage kommen kénnten, sind Ascaris osculata, decipiens
und similis welche von dieser Form durchaus verschieden sind, wie aus Krabbe’s neuester (1878)
Darstellung der in Robben und Walen gefundenen Ascaris-Arten ersichtlich ist.
No other original observations have been made upon this parasite.
B. The ventro-lateral lips, said to bear a papilla armed with 6 to 7 small teeth [—dentigerous ridge on
a bilobed projection?].
6. ASCARIS KUKENTHALII Cobb, 1888. Sp. inq.
(Figs. 58-64.)
21809, Ascaris simplex RUDOLPHI, sce page 121.
1888, Ascaris Kikenthalii Cops, Jenaische Zeitschr. f. Naturw., XXIII (n. F. XVI), 1, Dec. 8, 1888, pp.
44-59, pls. 111, figs. 1-11, Iv, 12-30.—Cosp, 1889, duckie f. Naturg., 55 Jhg., I, pp. 149-150,
pl. vu, figs. 4-6.—StossicH, 1896, Boll. Soc. adriatica Sci. nat., XVII, p. 53.
1894, Ascaris Kiikenthalii Cops, as probable synonym of 4. simplex Rud., JAGERSKIOLD, Zool. Jabrb.,
VII, pp. 474-476.
D1aGnosis.—Intermediate lips absent; lateral cervical alae absent; head (male) scarcely 0.33™™
broad, lips of nearly equal size; lobes not mentioned; dentigerous ridge not mentioned, but one
papilla on each ventro-lateral lip said to bear teeth; dorsal lip bears a symmetrical pair of papillae,
the ventro-lateral lips said to possess 3 papillae each; an upper one [double lobed projection?] with
6 to 7 teeth, a lower one on which no teeth were visible, and a very small one about in the middle of
the inner side; cervical papillae 1™™ from the head. Excretory organ discharges between the
ventro-lateral lips. Body attenuated toward both extremities. Transverse cuticular bands 30 yu.
Oesophagus composed of two portions; anterior portion 5™™ long by 1™™ in diameter (distal end);
posterior portion 2 to 2.5™™ long, generally sigmoid; caeca apparently absent.
Male: 70 to 90™™ long by 2 to3™™ thick; tail with lateral alae; 7 to 8 pairs of postanal papillae;
1 to 4 near the tip; 5 to 8 near the cloaca, of which 6 and 7 are doyble; about 90 pairs of pracanal
papillae extending about 10"™ forward from tip of tail; of these 6 to 10 pairs of short papillae lie
antero-lateral of the cloaca; then follows cephalad on each side a row of longer papillae; apparently
two median papillae iramedintely in front of the cloaca; left spiculum (2.3"™) slightly larger than
the right (1.7™™).
Female: 80 to 100™™ long with maximum breadth of 2.5™™; vulva a little anterior to middle of
the body. Eggs reach the morula stage in the uterus.
Habitat: Stomach of marine animals.
Host. Locality. Collector. Authority. ,
Delphinapterus leucas...-..-------- Advent Bay, West | Kiikenthal ........... Cobb, 1888, p. 44; 1889, p. 149.
Spitzbergen.
9 Phoca DATbAta ... 2-4-2002 eeenee nn elenne ee cee e ence reece eal nee ee eee ence eeneneee Stossich, 1896, p. 53.
HISTORICAL REVIEW.—This species was described by Cobb, but Jigerskiéld
thinks it probably identical with A. simplex. In detail the history of the species is as
follows:
Ascaris Kiikenthalii, collected by Kiikenthal, August, 188€, from the stomach of
Beluga leucas (=Delphinapterus leucas) in the Advent Bay (West Spitzbergen), was
described as a new species by Cobb (1888, pp. 44-59). While his anatomical discus-
sion is excellent, he omits some extremely important points of systematic value;
apparently he was not acquainted with Krabbe’s work upon the parasites from this
host.
He describes the male (fig. 58) as 70 to 90" long, by 2 to 3™™ broad: head
scarcely 0,33"" broad; body attenuate anteriorly, and very slightly pointed pos-
teriorly; tail is curved and provided with a bursa; the papillae are figured (fig. 61)
ASCARIS KUKENTHALI, 145
and agree to a great extent with the papillae figured by Krabbe for A. simplex; there
are four pairs near the tip of the tail, three other pairs closely posterior to cloaca, an '
irregular row of simple papillae on each side antero-lateral to cloaca, and a row of
longer papillae anterior to these; one larger and one small papilla appear to be present
in the median line immediately anterior to the cloaca; in all about 100 papillae are
present on each side, extending about 10" forward from tip of tail. The cuticular
bands measure 30 ¢. The left spicule (2.3"") is slightly larger than the right (1.7),
The dorsal lip (fig. 62) bears in the middle a symmetrical pair of papillae (evidently
a double-lobed projection); the ventro-lateral lips apparently possess three papillae
each; an upper one with 6 to7 small teeth (possibly another double-lobed projection),
a lower one on which no teeth were visible, and about in the middle of the inner side
a third of very small dimensions. :
Fig. 59. Fig. 61.
The female (fig. 63) is described as 80 to 100™™ long, with a maximum breadth of
2.5""; the vulva is five-elevenths of the length of the body from the anterior extremity
(a little anterior to the middle of the body); the vagina measures 10" long, the bicorn
uterus 20™", the receptacula seminis 10"; the ovaries 210 to 216”, the entire female
genital organs thus being about three times as long as the worm. Eggs reach the
morula stage in the uterus, y
The oesophagus (fig. 64) is divided into two portions; an anterior part 5™™ long
by nearly 1"™ in diameter (at posterior end), and a posterior portion 2 to 2.5™ Jong,
generally sigmoid. The intestine has three rows of V-shaped cellular bodies, such as
Jigerskiéld (1894) described for A. simplex. Intestinal caeca are apparently not
present. The sub-intestinal glands (back of the oesophagus) measure 0.6" broad by
30 to 40™™ long. The sub-oesophageal excretory organs are 2™™ broad and extend
beyond the middle of the body. The cervical papillae are situated 1™ from the head.
5947—pr 3——10
146 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Cobb’s second (1889, pp. 149, 150) article is for the most part a reprint of page 44
of his first article.
Jigerskidld (1894, pp. 474-476) calls attention to the resemblance of A. Kiikenthalit
to A. simplex; he inclines decidedly to the view that the two forms are identical, but
in the absence of specimens of A. Kiikenthalit for comparison he reserves judgment.
Stossich (1896, p. 53) cites A. Kiikenthalii as a distinct species, gives a condensed
diagnosis taken from Cobb’s description, and adds Phoca barbata as a host. This new
host, for which Stossich does not give his authority, is probably an error, and might
have occurred while referring to Cobb’s second article.
From the above review it will be clear that, A. Kiikenthalii bears a close resem-
blance to A. simplex; we agree with Jigerskidld that the two forms are probably.
identical; in fact, we think there can be scarcely any doubt regarding this point.
Cobb’s median symmetrical papille of the dorsal lip would correspond to the small
anterior bilobed projection of A. simplex, as his figure (see fig. 62) shows; the armed
papilla of each ventral lip would correspond to dentigerous ridge of the ventral lips of
Fig. 62. Fig. 63. Fig. 64,
A, simplex; the other essential characters are practically the same in both forms. Not
having specimens of either A. simplex or A. Kiikenthalii, however, we follow Jagerskiéld
in retaining the species as distinct, hoping that the originals of A. Kiikenthalii may be
found and reexamined. ‘
C. Data concerning the dentigerous ridge wanting.
7. ASCARIS SIMILIS, Baird, 1853. Sp. ing.
( Figs. 65-69.)
1853, Ascaris similis, BaArrD, Catalogue Entozoa Brit. Mus., p. 19,pl. 1, figs. la~d.— Barr, 1853, Proc. Zool.
Soc, London, Part XXI, p. 18.—Barrp, 1855, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., 2 ser., XV, pp. 69, 70.—
DissinG, 1860, Sitzungsber. Akad. Wiss. Wien, XLII, no. 28, p. 656.—Von Linstow, 1878,
Compendium der Helminthologie, p. 44.—STosstcu, 1896, Boll, Soc. adriatica Sci. nat. Trieste,
XVII, p. 63.
DraGnosis.—Intermediate lips absent; lips of about equal size, slightly projecting beyond the
margin; dentigerous ridge(?); body attenuated more toward anterior than toward posterior extrem-
ity, which is thick, round, and obtuse; wing extending along the whole length and becoming thicker
and stronger at inferior extremity; cuticle with fine transverse stria. .
Male (female?): About 50™™ long by 2™™ broad; straight to within a short distance of tail,
which is inflected; of a whitish color.
ASCARIS SIMILIS. 147
Female (male?): About 37™™ long by 1.5 broad; spirally twisted in many convolutions; of
a dark-olive color.
Types: In British Museum.
Habitat: Stomach of marine mammals.
Host. Locality. Collector. Authority.
Antarctic seal, gen.? sp.?...-..--.-- Antarctic..........--- (?) Baird, 1853, p. 19.
HISTORICAL REVIEW.—This form was described by Baird in 1853, and has not
been found or examined since that time. Professor Bell writes to us that the types
are in very poor condition. Baird’s (1853, p. 19) original diagnosis reads as follows—
ACARIS SIMILIS, Baird.
Fig. 65. Fig. 66. Fig. 67. Fig. 68. Fig. 69.
Length of male 2 inches, breadth 1line. Length of female 14 inches, breadth three-fourths of a line.
Anterior portion much narrower than posterior. Head small, mouth with three small valves slightly
projecting beyond the margin. ‘Tail rounded, thick, obtuse. Females spirally twisted in many con-
volutions, of a dark-olive color. Male straight to within a short distance of tail, which is inflected;
of a whitish color. Skin minutely and finely striated across. Wing extending along the whole length
and becoming thicker and stronger at inferior extremity. Differs from preceding species (4. osculata)
in having the wing stronger and thicker at inferior extremity, in having the head and mouth smaller,
and having the skin finely striated across.
Habitat: Stomach of a seal from Antarctic regions.
Collected during the late Antarctic expedition. Presented by the Admiralty.
Baird’s figures show that the intermediate lips are absent; his figure la, of a sup-
posed male, is probably a female, while 1c, of a supposed female, is probably a male.
In his second paper Baird (1853, p. 18) repeats his original diagnosis, with some slight
verbal changes. The diagnosis in his third paper (1855, pp. 69, 70) isa reprint of the
diagnosis given in the second paper.
Neither Diesing (1860, p. 656), von Linstow (1878, p. 44), nor Stossich (1896, p. 63)
add any original observations.
8. ASCARIS HALICORIS Owen in Baird, 1859.
(Figs. 70-75.)
(1833), Ascaris halichoris Owxn, Catalogue of the Physiological Series of Comparative Anatomy,
Museum of the College of Surgeons, p. 121, London. Nomen nudum. (Quoted from Baird,
1859.)
(1834), —— ? ——~ RuprELt, Abhandl. Senkenberg. Museum, I, p. 106.
1838, ‘‘Ascarides” in Dugong Owen, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, Part VI, p. 30.
1839, “Ascaris of a Dugong,” OwEN, Art. Entozoa, Todd’s Cyclopedia of Anatomy and Physiology,
II, p. 136.
1851, Ascaris dugonis Dirsina, Systema Helminthum, II, p. 191. Nomen nudum. Refers to Riippell,
1834.
148 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
1859, Ascaris halichoris BatrD, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, Part XX VII, pp. 148, 149, pl. Lv1, figs. 2-2¢.—
Reprinted without figures, Barrp, 1860, Aun. Nat. Hist., 3 ser., V, No. 28, April, pp. 329-
331.—D1EsiInG, 1860, Sitzungsber. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien., XLII (1860), No. 28, p. 662.—VON
Linstow, 1878, Compendium der Helminthologie, p. 59.—C. Parona, 1889, Ann, Mus. civico,
Storia nat. Genova, 2 ser., VII (KX VII), 10 Oct , pp. 751-761, figs. 1-3, pl. x111, figs. 1-16.—
Srossicu, 1896, Boll. Soc. adriatica Sci. nat. Trieste, XVII, p. 68.
DriaGnosis.—Intermediate lips and lateral cervical alae absent; lips of nearly equal size, dorsal
lip slightly broader than ventro-lateral lips; dentigerous ridge?; body attenuated toward both
extremities; cuticle with fine transverse striae; intestinal caec:im 11™™ long, arises about 17™™ from
mouth, and extends cephalad parallel to oesophagus. :
Male: 85 to 115™™ long; tail in a spiral; caudal papillae symmetrical, one pair postanal, near the
cloaca, four pairs praeanal ; spicules very short.
Female: 85 to 144™™ long, with maxium diameter of 3.5"™; vulva about two-thirds the length
from the anterior extremity (Baird), one-third the length from the anterior extremity (Parona); eggs
segment to morula in the uterus. ;
Types: In British Museum.
Habitat: Stomach of Dugongs.
Host. Locality. Collector. | Authority.
7 |
Dugong dugon.. -++| Owen... ----' Owen, 1838, p. 30.
Dugong dugon. . -| Riippell.. ----| Baird,1859, pp. 148,149.
Dugong dugon. . Ragazzi.. Parona, 1889.
HISTORICAL REVIEW.—According to Baird (1859, p. 148), Professor Owen in
1831 prepared a specimen of an Ascaris from the stomach of a Dugong, and deposited
the same in the museum of the College of Surgeons, London; Baird also refers to the
Catalogue of the Physiological Series of Comparative Anatomy, which was pub-
lished by the college in 1833, in a way which leads the reader to assume that Owen
named the species Ascaris halicoris. This catalogue is not at our disposal, but as
Baird adds (1859, p. 149) that “Ascaris halicoris, though named long ago, has never
been fully described or figured,” it may safely be assumed that Owen’s name was a
nomen nudum, and hence not entitled to further consideration.
Riippell, according to Baird, “found the same species of worm in the stomach of
‘the same species of animal. He very briefly notices this in describing a Dugong which
he found in the Red Sea,” but merely mentions that the entozoa “were found in a
clustered glandular apparatus in the stomach and were 5 inches long.” His descrip-
tion of the Dugong was sent in a letter to Dr. Simmering, and is dated from the island
of Dahalac, on the Abyssinian coast of the Red Sea, in the month of January, 1832.
This paper was published in the first volume of the Museum Senckenbergianum, in
1834,”
Owen (1838, p. 30), in discussing the stomach of the Dugong, refers to his speci-
mens with the sentence: “And in each case the gland was infested by Ascarides, here-
after to be described, which left impressions upon the spiral membrane.”
Owen (1839, p. 136) again refers to this parasite, in discussing the accessory
glands of the digestive system of entozoa, as follows:
The second example of an accessory digestive gland occurs in a species of -lscaris infesting the
stomach of the Dugong. Here a single elongated caecum is developed from the intestine at a distance
of half an inch from the mouth, and is continued upward, lying by the side of the beginning of the
intestine, with its blind extremity close to the mouth; from the position where the secretion of this
caecum enters the intestine, it may be regarded as representing arudimental liver. (See the Prepara-
tion, No. 429A, Mus. Coll, Surgeons, Phys. Catalogue, p. 121.)
ASCARIS HALICORIS. 149
Brandt (1846, p. 192) simply mentions the worms found by Riippell and Owen in
connection with the ascarides of Steller’s sea cow.
Later Brandt (1849, p. 100) briefly refers to these parasites as follows:
In ventriculo ceterum nec non glandulae cavo et duodeno invenit (Stellerus) lumbricos candidos
(Ascarides) numerosos } longos. Simile quid observarunt Ruppelius (Museum Senkenb., I, p. 106) et
Owenius (Zoolog. proceed., P. VI, p. 30) in Halicore;
It is evidently this passage upon which the citation by some authors of the occur-
rence of A. halicoris in Rhytina stellert (=Hydrodamalis gigas) has been based. It is
clear, however, that from the data at hand there is no justification for assuming that
the parasites from the two hosts are identical.
Diesing (1851, p. 191) next cites this parasite as “Ascaris Dugonis Brandt” among
his species inquirendae, referring to the articles by Riippell and Brandt (1846 and
1849). The name was not used by Brandt; it is to all purposes a nomén nudum, as the
description reads only “ Longit. corp. 5.”
From a nomenclatural standpoint the parasite was not described until 1859, when
Baird (1859, pp. 148, 149, pl. Lv1) figured it, and gave the following dexcrintint:
ASCARIS HALICHORIS Owen.
Caput nudum, epidermide stricte adnata; os labiis rotundatis, porrectis; corpus, in utroque sexu,
extremitatibus mayvis attenuatis; extremitate auiidalt brevi, subulata, nuda.
Long. feminae, 3} unc.; maris, 2} unc.
The body is of a whitish color, thickest in the center, gradually tapering to each extremity. The
body is strongly striated across; in the female, apparently all its length; in the male, till nearly
about half an inch from its posterior extremity. This latter portion is smooth or slightly striated
lengthways. In the female the vagina is situated at about two-thirds of its length from the anterior
extremity. The spicula of the male appear very short. The intestine, as described by Professor
Owen, has a caecum developed from it at the distance of about half an inch from the mouth, and is
continued upward, lying by its side, and terminating in a blind extremity near the mouth. The
specimens, now in the British Muscum, are shorter than those noticed by Riippell.
(The figures will explain this structure. )
In the collection of the British Museum.
Baird’s (1860, pp. 329-331) second article is practically a reprint of his first dis-
cussion (1859).
Diesing’s (1860, p. 662) diagnosis is based upon Baird’s (1859) description; Stos-
sich (1896, p. 68) gives a citation of this worm by Diesing (1861, Sitzungsber. k. Akad.
Wiss. Wien, XLVII, p. 277), but we have been unable to verify the reference. .
Von Linstow (1878, p. 59) gives both Halicore cetacea and Rhytina stelleri as har-
boring A. halicoris, but does not cite his authority for the latter host.
Parona (1889) appears to be the next to discuss Ascaris halicoris. He studied
specimens of ascarides collected by Vincezo Ragazzi in two Dugongs (‘Halicore ceta-
cea”) in Assab. After an historical review of the parasite he describes the anatomy
of Ragazzi’s specimens, the description differing in some particulars from the diag-
nosis given by Baird. According to Parona the females measured 85 to 144°" in
length; with a maximum diameter of 3.5™™; the males measured 85 to 115™™ in
length. The head is apparently without intermediate lips, and no mention is made
of labial dentition. A caecum is present running parallel to the oesophagus, as
described by Owen; in a female 135™™ long this caecum opens into the intestinal
tract 17™” from the mouth and measured 11™” in length. The vulva was about on
150 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
the border between the first and second thirds of the body, 42™™ from the anterior
extremity in a specimen 124™™ long, 45™™" in one 135"™ long, and 40™” in one 110°
long. Baird states that of his specimens “the vagina is situated at about two-thirds
of its length from the anterior extremity.” The position of the vulva is the great
point of difference between the descriptions of the worms studied by Baird and
Parona. Whether Baird accidentally measured from the tail instead of the head, ‘we
do not care to state; such an error would be possible, but hardly probable. That such
a variation in the position of the vulva would occur, seems improbable. The vaginal
canal measured 6.5™™" in length, the double uteri 29™™,
Baird described the cuticle of the female as transversely striated the entire length
of the body, while the striae of the male extended only to within half an inch of the
ASCARIS HALICORIS. 151
end of the tail; Parona, on the other hand, found the striation of the male present on
the tail as well as on the other portions of the body.
Unfortunately Parona’s figures of the tail of the male are rather unsatisfactory.
He states that the tail is spirally wound; that the spicules are short, not protruding
more than 2", and that five symnietrical pairs of papillae are present. Judging
from his figure, four pairs of these papillae are praeanal and one pair postanal.
Fig. 74. Fig. 75. :
Stossich (1896, p. 68) places Ascaris halicoris among the doubtful species; his diag-
nosis is evidently based upon Parona’s work, and he cites both Halicore indica and
Rhytina stelleri as hosts.
II. Intermediate lips presént.
9. ASCARIS OSCULATA Rudolphi, 1802, det. Schneider, 1866.
(Figs. 76-92. )
? 1802, Ascaris osculata RUDOLPHI, Arch. f. Zool. und Zootomie, II, u, pp. 14, 15.—RupoLPut, 1809,
Entozoorum hist. nat., II, 1, pp. 135-136.—Rupo.LPui, 1819, Entozoorum synopsis, pp. 39,
651-652.—BELLINGHAM, 1844, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., XIII, p. 169.—Duvsarpin, 1845, Hist.
nat. des Helminthes, p. 164.—D1EsING, 1851, Systema helminthum, II, p. 169.—Barrp, 1853,
Cat. Entoz. Brit. Mus., p. 18.—BasTaINn, 1866, Phil. Trans. R. Soc. London, CLVI, pp. 545-638,
pl. xxv1, figs. 6-12.
? 1803, Fusaria osculata (RUDOLPHI, 1802), ZeDER, Anleitung z. Naturg. Eingeweidew., p. 105.
1866, Ascaris osculata RUDOLPHI, 1802, of SCHNEIDER, Monographie d. Nematoden, p. 44, with fig., pl. 1,
fig. 13.—KRaABBE, 1878, Oversigt K. Danske Videnskab. Selskabs Forhand., p. 45, pl.1, fig. 1.—
CoBBoLp, 1879, Parasites, pp. 313, 314, figs. 59a-b.—Von Linstow, 1880, Arch. f. Naturg.,
46 Jhg., I, pp. 44, 45.—von MaRENZELLER (1882-83), Internat. Polarforsch. Wien., p. 18.—
NEHRING, 1884, Sitzungsber. Gesellsch. naturf. Freunde Berlin, no. 4, p. 59.—BRAUN (1891),
Arch. d. Fr. Naturg. i. M., p.110.—JAGERSKIGLD (1893), Akadem. Afhand]. Stockholm, pp. 10-
16, pls. 11, fig. 12, rv, 35, v,39.—Von Linstow, 1892, Jahr. Hamb. wiss. Anstalten, IX, 2, pp.
8,9, pl. 11, figs. 11-16.—JAGERSKIOLD. 1894, Zool. Jahrb. VII, pp. 457-463, pls. xxv, fig. 12,
XXVIII, 35, 36, xxviu1, 38.—Von Linstow, 1895, Archiv. f. mikr. Anat., XLIV, pp. 528-531,
pl. xxx1, figs. 1-14.—Srossicu, 1896, Boll. Soc. ardiatica Sci. nat. Trieste, XVII, pp. 37-38.
D1aGNosis.—Intermediate lips present; lateral cervical alae absent; lips large, of about equal
size, with an inner lateral dentate projection, but without dentigerous ridge. Immediately back of
the head for about 0.13™", the anterior border of the each cuticular ring covers the posterior border
of the ring immediately in front; beyond this peculiarly formed differentiation the posterior margin
of each cuticular ring covers the anterior margin of the next ring. Cuticular bands 8 yu broad
without finer striation. Oesophagus composed of two portions; distal portion generally with caecal
appendage; oesophageal and intestinal caeca present.
Male: 34 to 70™™ long by 1.5™" in diameter; tail hooked or curled ventrally, with narrow or
broader alae; 8 to 11 pairs of postanal papillae; of these 1 to 4 are near the tip; one pair of double
papillae and several (3 or more) pairs of: single papillae nearer the cloaca; 30 or more pairs of
praeanal papillae arranged on each side somewhat irregularly or in two rows; spicules equal 3,7™™
(von Linstow), 6 to 8™™ (Stiles and Hassall) long.
152
THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Female: 40 to 80™ long by 1.5 to 2™™ in diameter; vulva on a prominent transverse ridge about
one-third the distance from the anterior end. Eggs spherical, 67 to 83 4 segmenting to the morula
stage in the uterus.
Habitat: Stomach of marine mammals.
Host. Locality. Collector. Authority.
Oystophora cristata .-....---.0+0+-- Greenland ............- Oltik ccvensaweconsesine Krabbe, 1878, p. 45.
Erignathus barbatus ......--.-+---- Iceland .... Thienemann ..-.-.-.-. Diesing, 1851, p. 169.
Erignathus barbatus .........+.---- Battins Bay Dr. Leach...-..-...---- Baird, 1853, p. 18.
Erignathus barbatus ...-.-.--++---- Greenland ......-..----- Oltik, 2.200 cnec20siee5 Krabbe, 1878, p. 45.
Erignathus barbatus ...--..-------- Specimens from Vieuna |.-.--...---------------- Stiles and Hassall, 1899, P. 157.
useum.
Eumetopius stelleri........--.0+---- Bering Sea......----.--. Lucas, 1896 .........-- Stiles and Hassall, 1899, p. 158.
Hatllichoerus gry pus ......-.0ceee.-2-[ee ence eee cece weer eeeeeee Creplin ..-..-.--...--- Diesing, 1851, p. 169; abbe, 1878,
. 45.
Halichoerus grypus..-.-----++++---- Specimens from Kiel |-.........-----+------2+ Linetow 1880, p. 44.
Museum, \
Halichoerus grypus.....++++-------+ Riigen sraisiitacprciemeciaysialeaes Nehring ..--.--------- Nehring, 1884, p. 59.
Monachus albiventer.......-...+-+++ Specimens in Vienna |..........--.-.--------- Diesing, 1851, p. 169.
Museum.
Monachus albiventer.....-. teaeoaee Specimens from Vienna |..--.-.-------+-+-++----- Stiles and Hassall, 1899, p. 157.
Odobenus rosmarus
Otaria jubata....----
Phoca foetida.....-.---+---------2++
Phoca groenlandica........--+.+----
Phoca groenlandica
Phoca groenlandica
Phoca groenlandica
Phoca groenlandica
Phoca groenlandicea.....-.-.----+---
Phoca pamtherina
Phoca pantherina
Phoca vitulina..-.--.--..-0-.-0--00+
Phoca vitulina ..
Phoca vitulina ..
Phoea vitulina
Phoca vituling .....0-00-00---2eee ee
Phoea vitulina
Stenorhynchus leptonyx...----...---
Seal, gen. ?, sp. ? -..----------------
Seal, gen. 4, sp.
Seal, gen. ¢ , Sp. ?
Museum.
Greenland
Patagonia -...-
Specimens in “Greifs-
wald Museum.
Greenland
Iceland -
Specimens from Vienna
Museum.
Greenland
Specimens from Vienna
Museum.
sinieeaie
Specimens of collection
of Siebold, British
Museum.
Oresund
Specimens from Vienna
Museum.
Antarctic, South Geor-
-
Rudolphi
Wewetzer
Bakker
Krabbe, 1878, p. 45.
Parona, catalogue MS.
Diesing, 1851, p. 169.
Rudolphi, 1819, p. 651.
Diesing, 1851, p. 169.
Diesin "1851, p. 169.
Schnei er, 1866, p. 44.
Krabbe, 1878, p. 45.
Stiles and Hassall, 1899, p. 158.
Diesing, 1851, p. 169.
Stiles and Haucall, 1899, p. 157.
Rudolphi, 1809, p. 135; 1819, p. 59.
Rudolphi, 1809, p- 135.
-| Rudolphi, 1819, p. 651.
Bellingham, 1844, p. 169; Baird, 1853,
p. 18.
pgerakigie. 1894, p. 457.
iles and Hassall, 1899, p. 157.
Linstow, 1893, p. 89.
Krabbe, 1878, p. 45.
Do.
Do.
SuMMARY.—This worm, found ir the stumach of the sea lion of Bering Sea, is iden-
tical with the form described by Rudolphi in 1802, as defined by Schneider in 1866. It
is also found in Iceland, Greenland, and elsewhere.
In detail its history is as follows:
HISTORICAL REVIEW.—Rudolphi (1802, pp. 14, 15) was evidently the first to
describe Ascaris osculata; his article is not at our disposal at present. The following
year Zeder (1803, p. 105) placed Rudolphi’s species in the genus Fusaria, giving the
following short diagnosis, taken from Rudolphi:
Osculata Fusar. capitis corpore angustioris valvulis orbicularibus marginatis, cauda brevissima
acuta,
Habitat in ventriculo phocae vitulinae.
Rudolphi (1809, p. 135, 136) next describes the worm as follows:
7. ASOARIS OSCULATA, R.
Ascaris: Capitis valvulis orbicularibus marginatis ; corpore aequali, linea laterali non exstante, cauda
acuta.
Hab. : Inter ventriculi Phocae vitulinae plicas specimina complura Novembri offendi.
Descr. Vermes quinque ad decem lineas lon
gi, tenues, albi aut flavescentes.
Caput corpore parum angustius, valvulis tribus orbicularibus magnis, distincte marginatis, et sub
vermis motu formam mutantibus, ut cum Taeniarum osculis suctoriis (unde nomen triviale desumsi)
ASCARIS OSCULATA. 153
quodammodo conveniant. Corpus utrinque subattenuatum, antrosum fere tenuius. Cauda brevis-
sima acuta. Genitalia feminae ut in reliquis; maris duplo minoris spicula exserta uon vidi. Tubus
cibarius pro more.
Obs. 1. Vermes phocae ante biduum occisae vividissimi, vasculo aquae repleto et furno (mane et
modice tantum calefacto) imposito commissi, nycthemeron, 36 horas et ultra vixere.
Obs. 2. Cl. Hellwig specimen a cl. quondam Wewetzer, Med. Cand.in Phoca vitulina, nescio quo
loco, repertum mecum communicavit, meis duplo majus, crassiusculum, cujus pars postica anteriore
omnino crassior est, ceterum vero, quantum in verme mortuo conspicere licet, huc pertinere videtur,
ut Ascaris nostra forsan ad sectionem quintam amandanda sit.
Later (1819, pp. 39, and 651-652) he mentions that it was at Greifswald that he
found his specimens; that Bakker found specimens which were larger than his, and
Fig. 77.
Fig. 76. Fig. 78.
that Bremser found specimens in Phoca groenlandica, of which the male was 15, the
female 18 to 24 lines long. In describing the worms, Rudolphi adds: —
Caput valvulis majusculis marginatis, suborbicularibus, a quibus nomen desumsi, instructum.
Corpus posteriora versus minus attenuatum; cauda crassa, maris inflexa, apice brevissimo acuto, ante
quem spicula dno longissima, incurva; cauda feminae recta obtusa cum brevissimo et tenui apice
acuto. Membrana lateralis in apice colli latior obtusiuscula, tum tenuis decurrens, brevi tenuissima
et fere invisibilis.
Specimina mea pusilla comparavi, et horum quoque reperi, quibus pars posterior crassior est,
reliqua conveniunt, .
Bellingham (1844, p. 169) mentions the presence of A. osculata in the oesophagus
and posterior nares of Phoca vitulina, but makes no further observations on the species.
Dujardin (1845, p. 164) takes his description from Rudolphi (1809 and 1819) and
does not appear to have seen this form. Diesing (1851, p. 169) adds nothing in the
way of anatomical characters, but gives several additional hosts, namely, Phoca pan-
_therina [=?], P. gryphus (=Halichocrus grypus), P. hispida (=P. foetida), P. barbata
(=Erignathus barbatus), and P. monachus (= Monachus albiventer).
154 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Baird (1853, p. 18) cites A. osculata in the collection of the British Museum, the
specimens coming from the stomach of Phoca vitulina (collection of Siebold) and of
P. barbata (= Erignathus barbatus), collected by Leach at Baffius Bay.
Schneider (1866, p. 44) appears to be the first to clearly define this worm and to
figure it (see figs. 76 and 77); his diagnosis reads:
C. Lippen ohne Zahnleiste mit Aurikeln und Zwischenlippen. \
14, ASCARIS OSCULATA. Rk.
f°) 50mm, EG 49mm,
Eckzahn klein und ‘stumpf, hinterer Rand der Aurikeln beginnt mit einem convexen Bogen.
Rinne tief. An der Basis der Lippen und Zwischenlippen unter der Haut liuft rings herum ein car-
wl. ee . ~ 720.
Fig. 79.
IP ~ 72.
Fig. 82.
minrother Pigmentstreif. Schwanz des ¢ 8 Papillen hinter dem After, 1 und 2 mit kegelférmiger
Pulpa, 7 und 8 bilden eine Doppelpapille, dann folgen vor dem After 20 und mehr Papillen unregel-
miissig zu 2, 3, und 4, und zuletzt eine Reihe Papillen. Im Ganzen 70 gezihlt.
Phoca groenlandica. Darm.
Bastain (1866) in his extensive discussion of the anatomy of nematodes refers a
number of times to a worm determined as A. osculata. One of his figures of the
anterior extremity shows three lips, but no intermediate lips; he states that the
intestinal caecum is present, but the oesopbageal caecum absent. It is not at all
improbable that Bastain had some other form, possibly A. decipiens, as suggested by
von Linstow, rather than A. osculata.
Krabbe (1878, p. 45) mentions the worm from various hosts. It was found ten
times in Phoca groenlandica, in Greenland, by Vahl, Merch, Olrik, and Pfaff; in
ASCARIS OSCULATA. 155
Iceland, by Hallas; twice in Phoca barbata (= Erignathus barbatus), by Olrik, in
Greenland; three times in Halichoerus grypus, locality not given; once in Cystophora
cristata, by Olrik, in Greenland; twice in Trichecus rosmarus (= Odobenus rosmarus),
by Olrik, in Greenland, and five times in undetermined seals, on Faroe, by Miiller;
Iceland, by Steinche, and Greenland, by Jérgensen and Miiller. As many as 200 to
300 were occasionally found in a single seal, the proportion of males to females being
about 2:3.
While Schneider gives the measurements of the male as 40™, of the female 50",
Krabbe found the males attaining 60™", the females 80™" in length. He was unable
to observe the carmine pigment ring mentioned by Schneider.
Cobbold (1879, pp. 313, 314), states that Ascaris osculata seems to be present in
full-grown seals of every kind. In 1862-1864 he conducted a series of experiments
with the eggs of this worm, rearing embryos both in salt and fresh water, but the
feeding of the young worms to various animals led to no result. He watched the
_ Fig. 83. Fig. 84. Fig. 85.
growth of the embryos until they had acquired well-marked digestive organs and a
length of one twenty-fifth of an inch, their size when emerging from the egg shell in
the water having been about one one-hundred-and-fiftieth of an inch only. His figure
of the female shows a characteristic prominent transverse ridge at the position of the
vulva, about on the border of the first.and second anterior thirds of the body.
Von Linstow (1880, pp. 44, 45) records the same species from the stomach of
Halichoerus grypus (Zool. Mus. Univ., of Kiel, No. 9). His observatious on the dorsal
lip differ somewhat from Krabbe’s, as he found the margin provided with teeth; the
rounded lateral projections belong to an inner layer and lie in the same plane with
the outer surface. .
Von Marenzeller’s (1882-83, p. 18) article is not at our disposal.
Nehring (1884, p. 59) states that he found numerous specimens in a Halichoerus
shot at Goehren.(Riigen) in 1882; he also found an Ascaris in 1884, in Halichoerus
grypus; the parasites were not determined definitely, but Karsch stated to him that
they were closely related to A. osculata.
t
156 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Von Linstow (1892, p. 89) records Ascaris osculata from stomach of Stenorhynchus
leptonyx, in Siid-Georgien, Autarctic (Hamburg Museum, No. 15326). The cuticula is
regularly striated at distances of 7 to 8 4; the cervical papillae are situated 0.85"™
from the anterior end; the lips are large and without any dentigerous ridge; the dorsal
lip measures externally 0.091™™ long by 0.12™™ broad, and on its inner anterior surface
it is prolonged laterally on each side in an angular projection. Immediately back.of
the lips the cuticle possesses deep folds. In both sexes the tail is conically pointed.
The oesophagus is 1/8.4 as long as the body. Oesophageal and intestinal caeca are
present. The males attained 40™™ in length by 1.5"™ in diameter; spicules equal and
actin Aten em is
a= oe eee
sm aeeee
Fig. 86.
very long (3.7™™); tail 1/91 as long as body; caudal bursa present; about 45 pairs of
caudal papillae are present, of which about 15 pairs are figured as postanal, one pair
of large double papillae being present about halfway between the cloca and tip. of the
tail. The females attain 54™™ in length by 1.58" in diameter; the vagina is situated.
about one-third the length from the head; eggs measure 83 by 67 yu.
Jaigerskiéld’s (1893) article is not at our disposal at present. In his second paper
(1894, pp. 457-463) Jagerskidld discusses specimens collected by Klinckowstrém from
the nasal cavity of Phoca vitulina at Oresund. He finds the vulva situated oue-third
the length of the body from the head, and describes the oesophageal and intestinal
caeca as present (fig. 83); his other statements are chiefly regarding the microscopic
death oo
ASCARIS OSCULATA. 157
anatomy and histology of the intestinal tract and glands; the excretory pore is found
closely back of the ventral intermediate lip.
Von Linstow (1895, pp. 528-531) contributes an histological discussion of some
portions of the worm; he believes that Bastain’s (1866) specimens were probably
A. decipiens rather éhan A. osculata.
Stossich (1896, pp. 37, 38) gives a short diagnosis of the worm, including Ascaris
\
bulbosa Cobb (see p. 111) as synonym.
In Leidy’s collection we find a bottle (No. 259=U.S.N.M., No. 5051) containing
3
mematodes with the label “ Ascaris osculata, Macrorhinus angustirostris, Dr. Chapman,”
which we cited in a former publication (Stiles & Hassall, 1894, p. 340.) We have as
aS.
ee
wen,
afer
Peal e
ats.
=.
ss
aa
Fig. 87.
yet been unable to find where Leidy published this determination, or whether he
A reexamination of the parasite has resulted in changing the
published it at all.
determination to Ascaris decipiens (see p. 112).
Since finishing this report we have received several bottles of parasites from the
Vienna Museum, which we have examined with the following results
labeled “Ascaris osculata, Phoca barbata” contained both A. osculata (B. A. I., No
2331) and A. decipiens (B. A. I., No, 2841).
Phoca vitulina” we have redetermined as A. decipiens (B. A. I., No. 2832)
(B. A. I., No, 2833) labeled “Ascaris osculata, Leptonyx monachus” is correctly
_ ACL,
determined. A bottle(B. A.I., No, 2834) labeled “Ascaris oscwlata, Phoca pantherina”
One bottle
One bottle with label “Ascaris osculata,
A bottle
158 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
contains very poorly preserved specimens, but the determination is evidently correct.
A bottle labeled “Ascaris osculata, Phoca groenlandica” contains both A. osculata
(B. A. I, No, 2835) and A. decipiens (B. A. I., No. 2843).
SPECIMENS FROM EUMETOPIAS STELLERI.—In the material brought to Wash-
ington by the seal commission are three bottles of worms taken from the stomachs of,
three specimens of Humetopias Stellerit. The worms were collected by Mr. Lucas in
August, 1896, on St. George Island, Bering Sea, and two of the lots represent very
(
Fig. 88. Fig. 89.
heavy infections. One lot (tag of seal commission 82) contained both Ascaris decipiens
(U.S.N.M., No. 2822) and A. osculata (U.S.N.M., No. 2767), while the other two lots
(tag of seal commission 84—U.S.N.M., No. 2764, and tag 85=U.S.N.M., No. 2766)
apparently contained only Ascaris osculata.:
Our determination of these worms (figs. 84, 85) as Ascaris osculata is based upon
the following details:
Intermediate lips present (figs. 86, 87); lips with lateral ‘projections 3 oesophageal
and intestinal caeca present; cuticular bands without finer striae; cuticular folds
back of lips (fig. 88).
ASCARIS OSCULATA. 159
Male: 9 to 10 pairs of postanal papillae (fig. 89), of which 1 to 4 are near the tip;
1 pair of double papillae and 3 to 4 pairs of single papillae nearer the cloaca; spicules
very long, 6 to 8™™,
Female: Prominent vulvular ridge about on border between first and second
anterior thirds of body.
As the species is quite well studied from a systematic standpoint, we will not give
a detailed discussion of the worm found in Bering Sea, but will confine ourselves to
the following statements: .
‘Von Linstow mentions deep cuticular folds immediately back of the lips. These
folds, which are very prominent in our specimens, are due to the arrangement of the
cuticular bands (fig. 88). For a distance of about 0.13"™ back of the lips the anterior
border of each band extends for some distance over the posterior border of the band
immediately in front of it, while on the rest of the body the posterior border of each
band extends ouly very slightly over the anterior border of the band immediately
distal to it. The portion of the body to which the lips are attached is thus differen-
tiated into a peculiar and quite characteristic manner. On the body the cuticular
bands are about 8 y broad, but the finer intermediate striation is lacking. The cervical
papillae are found about 0.9"™ from the head.
We find considerable variation in the arrangement of the caudal papillae in the
males, but the arrangement of four pairs of papillae near the tip of the tail and a pair
of double papillae between these and the cloaca appear quite constant.
The prominent transverse vulvular ridge figured by Cobbold is quite characteristic.
We also find that the eggs (68 to 72 4) segment to the morula stage in the uterus.
10. ASCARIS LOBULATA Schneider, 1866.
(Figs. 90-92.)
#1819, Ascaris delphini RUDOLPHI, see page 162.
1866, Ascaris lobulata SCHNEIDER, Monographie der Nematoden, p. 44, one fig. ¢ tail.—KRaABBE, 1878,
Oversigt K. Danske Videnskab. Selskabs Forhand, 1, p. 47, pl. 1, fig. 2.—JAGHRSKIOLD,
1894, Zool. Jahrbiich, VII, p. 467, pl. xxvii, fig. 37,—Strossicu, 1896, Boll. Soc. adriatica
Sci. Nat. Trieste, XVII, p. 43.
Diacenosis.—Intermediate lips present; lateral cervical alae ?; lips similar to those of 4. osculata,
but stronger; the anterior lobes of the pulpa extend into the lateral projections; cuticular striation?
Oesophagus composed of two portions; posterior portion unusually short in proportion to anterior
portion; oesophageal and intestinal caeca present. Excretory organ similar to that of 4. oseulata, |
Male: 40™™ long; tail with 12 pairs of postanal papillae, of which 1 pair is conical and lateral, but
varying in position; 1, 2, 3 in a row near the tip; 4 to 12 irregularly arranged in groups of two and
three; praeanal papillae in a single row; spicules?
Female: 50™" long; vagina about one-fourth the length of the body from the head; eggs?
Habitat: Intestinal tract of marine mammals.
Host. Locality. Collector. Authority.
PHAN E QanGEEE ciarcnwsaarcens ananaacdng naa de ie eas iets edanersanna eee ss| ipsa sr excasewernss wees ee Schneider, 1866, p. 44.
Platamista gangetica .....-+-.0...-+ Houghly River, near Calcutta.....--. Reinhardt .-.---.-..-- Krabbe, 1878, p. 47.
Platanista gangeticd ....0s-.s2e00s Specimens from Eopenhagen Museum |.-.-.--...--.------+----+ Ji figerskilld,1894, p.467,
¢
160 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
HISTORICAL REVIEW.—For the history of Ascaris delphini see page 162, Schneider
(1866, p. 44) originally described Ascaris lobulata with the following diagnosis:
C. Lippen ohne Zahnleiste mit Aurikeln und Zwischenlippen.
15. Ascaris lobulata u. sp. gi und 2 40™™.
Rinne tief. Die Spitze des Eckzahns bildet einen rechten Winkel. Die Loben reichen in die
Auriculae. Vulva? Schwanz des ¢ leicht gekriimmt, auf der Bauchseite glatt. 12 Papillen hinter
dem After, eine an unregelmiissiger Stelle mit conish verlingerter Pulpa seitlich. 1, 2, 3 hinter
einander nahe an der Spitze, 4-12 unregelmissig zu 2 und 3 neben einander, vor dem ‘After eine Reihe
Papillen.
Delphinus gangeticus, Crassum.
Fig. 91. Fig. 92.
Krabbe (1878, p.47) examined specimens deposited in the museum of the Uni-
versity of Kopenhagen; they were collected on the Galathea expedition of Professor
Reinhardt from the buccal cavity of dolphins of the Ganges in Hooghly River near
Caleutta. The lips (fig. 91) resemble those of Ascaris osculata, but are more strongly’
built.
Jagerskiéld (1894, p. 461) examined specimens from the buccal of Platanista
gangetica, which he received from Levinsen, of the Kopenhagen Zoological Museum.
These may possibly have been the same specimens which Krabbe studied, but
Jigerskiéld does not state so. He found the vulva 6"™ from the head in a female
25™" long. The excretory organ agrees with the same organ in A. spiculigera and
A. osculata; the posterior division of the oesophagus (fig. 92) is unusually short, and
possesses a caecum; the intestinal caecum is also present.
ASCARIS LOBULATA. 161
Stossich (1896, p. 43) takes his diagnosis from the other authors and evidently did
not examine specimens.
III. Data concerning the intermediate lips are wanting.
a. Spicules unequal.
11. ASCARIS DUSSUMIERII Beneden, 1870. Sp. ing.
1845, ‘‘ Ascaris simplex RUDOLPHI, 1809” misdetermined, Dusarpin, 1845, Hist. Nat. Helminthes, pp.
220-221
#1860, Conocephalus typicus DIESING, see p. 127.
1870, Ascaris Dussumierii BENEDEN, Bull. Acad. R. Belgique, 2 ser., XXIX, No. 4, p. 362-363. Dujardin’s
specimens renamed.
DriaGnosis.—Intermediate lips?; lateral cervical alae absent; head obtuse, 0.4™™ broad; lips
small, body whitish, quite thick, slightly more attenuated toward the head than toward the tail.
Cuticle with cuticular bands 20 to 30 « broad, giving the margin of the worm a serrate appearance.
First portion of the oesophagus 5 to 5.5™™ long, 0.5™™ broad; followed by a second portion, which is
sigmoid, 1.5™™ long 0.4™™ broad; intestinal and oesophageal caeca ?
Male: 79™™ long by 2.2™™ in diameter; tail curled, with lateral alae and 8 to 10 (pairs?) papillae;
spicules unequal, one 27™™ (2.7™™#) the other 15™™ (1.5"™?) long.
Female: 70 to 100™™ long by 2 to2.5™™ in diameter; tail very short; vulva in anterior half of body
25 to 40™™ from anterior end. Eggs globular, smooth, 41 to 43. Anus 0.2™™ from tip of tail.
Habitat: Intestine of marine mammals.
Host. Locality. Collector. Authority.
Dolphin (gen. et sp?)......--. West of Maldive Islands ..........-.. Dussumier. ........... Dujardin, 1845, p. 221.
Summary.—Dujardin (1845) determined some worms, collected by Dussumier, as
Ascaris simplex; as the form differs essentially from A. simplex of other authors van
Beneden (1870) proposed to make it a distinct species, A. Dussumierti; von Linstow
(1888) thinks the worm may belong to some other genus than Ascaris; Stossich (1896)
considers it identical with A. simplex. The question can not be definitely decided
without a reexamination of the type specimens, but judging from the description we
are suspicious that Dujardin’s form is identical with Ascaris typica. In detail the
history of the species is as follows:
HISTORICAL REVIEW.—Dujardin (1845, pp. 220, 221) proposed the subgenus
Anisakis in the genus Ascaris for forms in which the spicules are unequal. He cites
as members of this subgenus A. distans Rudolphi, which he had evidently not
examined, and the supposed “A. simplex Rudolphi” (=A. Dussumierii) which he had
studied. We designate this latter form as type of the proposed subgenus. Dujardin’s
diagnosis reads as follows:
ANISAKIS.
Ii[¢ Sous-genre. .
Male ayant deux spicules inégaux. <
77 Ascaride des Dauphins. Ascaris simplee—RUDOLPHI. Entoz., II, 1, p. 170, et Synops, p. 60 [49],
No. 53.
Corps blanchAtre, assez épais, trente-six 4 quarante fois aussi long que large, un peu plus aminci
en avant; téte obtuse, large de 0™™, 4 & trois lobes trés-petits; sans aucune trace d’ailes ou membranes
latérales; oesophage long de 5 4 5™™, 5, un peu renflé en massue et large de 0™™, 5, suivi d’un
ventricule mince flecueux, long de 1™™, 5, large de 0™™, 4; intestin épais, large de 1™™; queue trés-
courte, obtuse; tégument & stries transverses, trés-prononcées, distantes de 0™™, 02 4 0™™, 03, et comme
denté en scie latéralement. .
5947—PT 3
162 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Male long de 79™™, large de 2™™, 2; partie postérieure enroulée et munie de deux ailes ou mem-
branes latérales, étroites, soutenues par huit & dix papilles 4 la face ventrale; deux spicules inégauz,
un peu arqués, larges de 0™™, 04, l’un long de 27™™, autre long de 15™™,
Femelle longue de 70 4 100™™, large de 2™™, 4 2™™, 5,a queue conoide trés-courte; anus & 0™™, 2
de Vextrémité; vulve située en avant du milieu (4 25 ou domm de la téte); utérus trés- patiplé, long de
28 & 30™™, ddirind en arriére, commengant par une partie presque filiforme (vagin), longue de 5 4 8™™,
puis fevenant eylindrique, large de 1™™, 8, dans une longueur de 10417", et se divisant enfin en —
deux branches paralléles contigués, larges de 1™™, longues de 7 4 10™™, qui se retrécissent ad la fois
pour se continuer chacune avec Voviducte et l’ovaire filiforme correspondant, dont les replis nombreux
occupent toute la partie postérieure du corps, & partir de la vulve; mufs globuleux, lisses, larges de
omm, 041 & Om, 043,
Je décris ainsi des helminthes assez nombreux de la collection du Muséum de Paris, étiquetés
comme trouvés par M. Dussumier dans un dauphin, no 5, 4 l’ouest des tles Maldives, en 1830, et je ne
doute pas qwils ne soient identiques avec ceux que Rudolphi a décrits sous ce méme nom comme
trouvés dans le premier estomac d’un marsouin (Delphinus phocena).
Van Beneden (1870, pp. 362,363) did not consider Dujardin’s determination as
correct, and proposed to call the swim A. Dussumierii.
No one appears to have restudied the species or to have found it again, but von
Linstow (1888, p. 3) agrees with van Beneden that the determination by Dujardin
is incorrect, and he even doubts whether the worm belongs to the genus Ascaris.
Stossich (1894, p. 17), on the other hand, accepts Dujardin’s determination as correct.
In the abserfce of specimens it is ‘mpossible to give a definite opinion upon the
form, but we incline to the view that A. Dussumierii may perhaps be identical with
A. typica and that Dujardin made an error in his decimals in the length of the spicules.
b. Unidentifiable forms.
12. ASCARIS DELPHINI Rudolphi, 1819.
1801, ‘‘ Ascarides” of LeBEck, Neue Schriften Naturforsch. Freunde Berlin, III, p. 281.
1819, Ascaris delphini RUDOLPHI, Entozoorum synopsis, pp. 54, 296. Refers to Lebec’s specimens.—
' -Dusarvin, 1845, Hist. Nat. Helminthes, p. 221—van BeNneDEN, 1870, Bull. Acad. Roy.
Belgique, 2 ser., XXIX, p. 359.
1851, Ascaris delphini gangeticti DiesING as synonym sub 4. simplex, Systema helminthum, II, p.
155.=Ascaris delphini Rudolphi, 1819.
71866, Ascaris lobulata SCHNEIDER, see p. 159.
1878, ‘Ascaris simplex Rud.,” von Linstow, Compendium der Helminthologie, p. 60, a8 parasite of
Platanista gangetica.
DiaGnosis.—Over an inch long.
Habitat: Mouth and stomach of dolphin of the Ganges. 4
Host. Locality. Collector. Authority.
Platamista gangetica......-.---- secaaeet eases Near Caleutta......-. Lebeck ......----..2.- Lebeck, 1801, p. 281.
Lebeck (1801, p. 281) found some ascarides in a specimen of “Delphinus gangeticus”
(=Platanista gangetica) taken in November, 1797, near Calcutta. Regarding the
parasites he simply states: “‘Sowohl in seinem Munde als Magen, waren viele
lebendige und iiber einen Zolllange Ascarides—L. wie auch im letztern Nellu-Kérner.”
Rudolphi (1819, pp. 54-296) named these worms Ascaris delphini, but did not
study them; he suspects that they are identical with Ascaris simplex. Dujardin
(1845, p. 221) simply mentions the worms, while Diesing (1851, p. 155) refers them to
A. simplex under the trinomial synonym “Ascaris Delphini gangetici,” while van
ASCARIS DELPHINI. . 163
Beneden (1870, p.'359) again reverts to “Ascaris delphini,” citing Lebeck’s reference
as to the occurrence of parasites in the dolphin of the Ganges Platanista gangetica
(Delphinus gangeticus), Von Linstow (1878, p. 60) cites Ascaris simplex as parasite of
Platanista gengetica, but undoubtedly he refers to the supposed synonym A. delphini.
Stossich (1896, p. 17) also makes A. delphini a synonym of A. simplex and cites
Platanista as host.
It is impossible to identify this worm, but Schneider has described A. lobulata
from the same host (p. 159), and the two forms may possibly be identical.
13. ASCARIS RYTINAE Diesing, 1851.
1751, ‘‘Lumbrici candidi” of STzLLER, Nov. Comment. Acad. Sci. Imp. Petropol., II, ad Ann. 1749,
p. 311.
1846, ‘‘Ascarides” of Branpr, Bull. Physico-Math. Acad. Imp. Sci. St. Petersbourg, V, p. 192. Refers
to Steller’s specimens.
1851, Ascaris rytinae Dimsine, Systema helminthum, II, p. 190. Species inquirenda; refers to Steller
and Brandt.
1851, Ascaris rhytinae Stellert in synonymy, DiEsine, Systema helminthum, II, p. 190.
1878, ‘ Ascaris rhytinae BRANDT,” in von Linstow, Compendium der Helminthologie, p. 59.—Srossicu,
1896, Boll. Soe. adriatica Sci. nat. Trieste, XVII, p. 69.
DiaGnosis.—Length 6 inches.
Habitat: Stomach and duodenum of the Northern extinct sea cow.
Host. Locality. Collector. Authority.
Hydrodamalis gigas. ...--..400+--+1+--eneee-e Bering Sea......-----. Steller .......--.-....- Steller, 1751, p. 311.
SumMARy.—Our entire knowledge of this worm is based upon the statement by
Steller (1751) that specimens were present in the stomach and duodenum of the now
extinct sea cow. Brandt (1846) thought they must be ascarides since Riippel and
Owen found ascarides in the stomnach of the dugong. Diesing named the worm more
than a century after Steller found it. The parasite is unidentifiable. In detail the
history of the worm is as foliows:
HISTORICAL REVIEW.—Steller (1751, p. 311) in his “De bestiis marinis” found
some worms of the stomach and duodenum of a sea cow qn July 12, 1742, taken in
the Bering Sea. He refers to the parasites in the following passage:
Interior ventriculi tunica a lumbricis candidis 4 pedem longis, quibus totus ventriculus, pylorum
et duodenum scatebat, perforata erat, et lumbrici in glandulae canum, vsque penetrauerant, glandula
discissa copiosum, succum sundebat. Non licuit posthac plures ventriculos examinare ob id, quod
necessario auxilio carebam, nec cum paucis animal semel inuenire iacens in dorsum vertere possem,
propterea dubito, an haec glandula res constans, vet potius morbidum quid fuerit.
Brandt (1846, p. 190-192) in referring to the ectoparasites mentioned by Steller
(1751, pp. 298, 324, 330), and for which he (Brandt) proposed the genus Sirenocyamus
, and the specie name S. Rhytinae, also cites the worms found by Steller; he believed
“them to be “Ascarides,” but did not name or describe them. He also refers to the
worms found by Riippel and Owen, but does not name or describe them. Diesing
(1851, p. 190) cites “Ascaris Rhytinae Brandt” among the species inquirendae; the term
is practically a nomen nudum, the only description being “ Longit. 4/’,” and refers to.
the worms found by Steller in July, 1742; von Linstow (1878,.p. 59) mentions the
parasites as “Ascaris rhytinae Brandt.” Stossich (1896, p. 69) also refers to the same
WOrMS as @ species inquirenda, giving the length as 160™™.
164 : THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
As Steller’s sea cow is now extinct it can never be demonstrated what species
Steller found. The names A. rytinae and A. rhytinae may, therefore, be buried, and
all time used in speculating as to the affinities of this worm with corresponding para-
sites in other hosts may be considered lost.
14. “ASCARIS CAPSULARIA.”
Ascaris capsularia is a name applied to immature nematodes, supposed to be
ascarides, and found in fish. Numerous supposed species have been separated under
distinct specific names, generally taken from the names of the hosts, the generic names
Agamonema, Nematoideum, or Ascaris being used by various authors. Personally, we
must confess our inability to distinguish at present these numerous forms from each
other or to determine from the published descriptions of the worms which forms should
be considered synonyms, which forms should be looked upon as distinct, and which
forms should be associated with this, that, or the other adult Ascaris. We do not deny
that other authors are correct in their interpretations of these larval worms, but we
would suggest that a thorough study of the exact food habits of fish-eating mammals
in connection with this subject would aid in solving the problem of the life history of
many of these parasites.
III.—Family STRONGYLIDAE.
Di1aGnosis.—Nematoda with body elongate, cylindrical, rarely filiform. .Mouth is probably
always provided with six papillae, of which the four submedian are generally salient in form of nodules
or conical points. In some cases the mouth is in the axis of the body; in others, turned dorsally or
ventrally, and occasionally provided with a chitinous armature. Oesophagus more or less swollen in
posterior portion, but without forming « distinct oesophageal bulb. Males provided with a caudal
bursa, open or closed, entire or divided, with one or two spicules. Females with one or two ovaries;
vulva anterior or posterior to middle, in some cases near the anus. Eggs deposited during segmenta-
tion, in some cases containing embryo.
Type: Strongylus, O. FP. Miiller.
Subfamily SCLEROSTOMINAR.
DiaGnosis.—Strongylidae; meromyaria; mouth with more or less complete chitinous armature.
Male with two equal spicules; caudal bursa with rays, the postero-median and postero-external being
united in a common base. Female with two ovaries, except in Ollulanus.
Type: Sclerostoma, Blainville, 1828.
Genus UNCINARIA Fré6lich, 1789.
1789, Uncinaria FR6LIcH, Der Naturforscher, XXIV, pp. 137-139. Type, Uncinaria vulpis Frélich, 1789.
1843, Agchylostoma DuBinI, Annal. univers. di medic. Milano, CVI, April, pp.5-13. Type, Agchylos-
toma duodenale Dubini, 1843. ;
1845, Ancylostoma CREPLIN, Archiv. f. Naturg., 11 Jhg.,I, p.325. For Agchylostoma Dubini, 1843.
1845, Dochmius DUJARDIN, Histoire naturelle d. helminthes, pp. 267-275. Type, Dochmius irigonoceph-
alus (Rudolphi, 1809) = Uncinaria vulpis Frilich, 1789.
(1846), Anchylostoma DuLLe CuiasE Rendicon. dell Accad. delle Sci. Napoli, V, p. 339.
1851, Anchylostomum DiEsiNG, Systema helminthum, II, p. 321-322. For Agchylostoma Dubini, 1843.
1855, Ancylostomum KUCHENMEISTER, Die in und auf d. Kérper d. lebenden Menschen vorkommend.
Parasiten, I, p. 297.
1861, Monodontus Moin [nec Monodonta Lamarck, 1799], Il Sottordine degli Acrofalli, pp. 11-43.
Type, M. semicircularis Molin, 1861.
; DiaGNnosis.—Sclerestominae with anterior extremity curved dorsally ; mouth round to oval, open-
ing obliquely, limited by a transparent border and followed by achitinous buccal capsule; the dorsal
portion of ‘the capsule is shorter than the ventral, and is supported by a conical structure the point
of which sometimes extends into the cavity; ventral at the base of the buccal capsule are found two
UNCINARIA. . 165
teeth; toward the inner free border the ventral wall bears on each side of the median line chitinous
structures or teeth often recurved in shape of hooks; the inner dorsal wall may also bear teeth.
Type, Uncinaria vulpis Frélich, 1789.
This is an extremely important genus from a medical standpoint as it contains a
parasite (U. duodenalis) which causes a serious disease in man, and two parasites
(U. vulpis and U. stenocephalus) which cause serious trouble in young dogs.
Lucas found five specimens of worms of this genus in a 3-months old far seal
which had starved to death.
15. UNCINARIA sp.
(Figs. 93-96.)
a
DIAGNOSIS.—Body white. Buccal capsule apparently with a single pair of rather weak anterior
ventral recurved teeth, and with posterior ventral chitinous lamellae. ;
Male: 6.5™™ long; caudal bursa very similar to that of U. duodenalis, spicules very slender,
equal, 0.5™ long. -
Female: 12™™ long; tail acuminate; vulva slightly posterior to the middle of the body. Eggs
elliptical 124 to 132 u by 84 to 88 uw.
Habitat: Intestine of fur seal (Callorhinus ursinus) Bering Sea. Type: U.S.N.M., No. 2815.
Our material of this form does not permit a detailed study of the
mouth, and on this account we hesitate to place the worm specifically. ad, )
No other ‘species of Uncinaria is known for :
marine mammals. '
The few specimens which Lucas collected certainly
could have been of no importance in the economy of the
host, but as Uncinaria is a blood sucker of the worst type,
and as allied species produce serious troubles in man and
dogs, analogy would imply that a heavy infection of the
seal would produce similar troubles in that host. Analogy
would also imply that.the development of the parasite is
direct, without intermediate host, and that a crowded con-
dition of the rookeries would render an epizootic probable.
Under these circumstances the worm might play an impor-
tant réle in the mortality of the seal pups, more especially
if the latter were deprived of food by reason of the killing
of their mothers by pelagic sealing.
Fig. 98. Fig. 94.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE TO,THE UNCINARIA OF THE FUR
SEAL.
During the season of 1897 Lucas collected a number of
specimens of Uncinaria from seals, and fully verified the
prophecy made above. In connection with the study of the
new material, the seal commission has requested us to pre-
pare a monograph of the genus Uncinaria, discussing the
subject from a medical as well as from a zoological stand-
Fig 9%. point. This monograph is now in course of preparation,
but it is impossible to complete it in time for incorporation in this report, owing to
the absence of one of our number from the country.
166 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
In compliance with request, we will finish the work later and submit it fer publi-
cation as a supplement to this present article. We here add only the following very
brief summary: ; ,
From our studies this far we are inclined to look upon the seal Uncinaria as a
new species, but are not willing to commit ourselves until further comparison with
a
Fig. 96.
types of other species. Should our present view on this point be confirmed by our
later study, we shall dedicate the species to its original collector, Mr. F. A. Lucas.
There is at present no reason to assume that the uncinariosis of the seal will
differ essentially from the same disease in man, dogs, and cats. The injury to the
host caused by worms of this genus results (1) from loss of blood and (2) from the
UNCINARIA. 167
inability to absorb nourishment, due to the diseased condition of the intestinal
mucosa. Whether the parasites produce a specific poison which affects the host is
still an open question; the intense inflammation of the small intestine can easily be
explained by the wounds produced by the buccal armature.
We at present see no possible outlook either in the line of treatment or prevention,
so far as this disease in the seals is concerned. In man thymol is a specific.. It is
difficult to disinfect against the eggs of the genus.
The symptoms and pathological lesions in various animals will be described in
the later paper.
LIFE HisTtoRy.—In the case of two species (U. vulpis and U. duodenalis) it has
been experimentally demonstrated that these worms are autoecious parasites—that is,
that they require no intermediate host for their development. The life cycle, which
will be given more in detail later, is essentially as follows: The eggs laid by the
parasitic females are in the first stages of segmentation; upon being passed with the
faeces they develop into a rhabditiform embryo, the time required varying from twelve
hours to twelve days or more, according to the conditions of the medium in which they
are found, the temperature and the accessibility of air; the eggs find their most
favorable conditions in the superficial portion of rather compact faecal matter. The
embryos, which measure about .0.3 mm. in length, take nourishment, and after about
two or three days undergo the first ecdysis, during which the pointed tail is partially
lost. A second ecdysis begins about five to seven days after the escape from the egg,
and the worm is soon ready to enter upon its parasitic life; it has lost its rhabditiform
character and with its ability to take food during its free life. About five days after
entering their host (by means of drinking water or contaminated food) the worms
submit to a third ecdysis, during which a provisional buccal capsule is formed. A final
(fourth) ecdysis then occurs, four to ten days later, which transforms the parasite into
its definite form. About four to five weeks appear to be necessary for the development
from the egg to the fully mature stage.
There is no reason to assume that the. life history of the seal Uncinaria will be
materially different from the life history of U. vulpis and U. duodenalis, but slight
variations in the length of the different stages may occur because of the colder
climate.
IV.—Family BOTHRIOCEPHALIDAE.
D1aGNosis.—Cestoda; head provided with two groove or slit-like suckers; rostellum wanting;
uterus with special pore; genital pores generally dorsal or ventral.
Type. Bothriocephalus Rudolphi, 1808.
Subfamily BOTHRIOCHPHALINAR.
e ‘
DiaGnosis.—Bothriocephalidae with distinct external segmentation; head with two elongate
slit or groove-like suckers.
Type. Bothriocephalus Rudolphi, 1808.
Genus BOTHRIOCEPHALUS! Rudolphi, 1808, emend. R. Blanchard.
DraGnosis.—Bothriocephalinae with two suckers; penis, vulva, and uterus open ventro-median.
Type. B. latus? (Linnaeus, 1758) Bremser. '
1 See pp. 77-82 of this volume, where the subject is discussed by Lucas.
2 We fail to see how this generic name can be held for the group to which it is now assigned ;
certainly 8. latus can not be taken as the type of Bothriocephalus. We refrain from attempting to
straighten the synonymy, as a number of names are involved and « proper interpretation of the
genera demands a most cautions revision of the entire family.
168 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
16. BOTHRIOCEPHALUS sp.
(Figs. 97-100.)
In the material collected by Lucas we find several specimens of a Bothriocephalus
taken from the fur seal. Lucas states that tapeworms were found in about 40 per
cent of the seals examined.
To properly place this parasite would require an extensive study of the family
Bothriocephalidae, and for this we have not the uecessary time at our disposal at
Fig. 98. Fig. 100.
present. We will simply remark that analogy would point to the fish as the source of
infection by this worm.
The specimens collected by Lucas have been entered in the Helminthological
collection of the United States National Museum as Nos. 2765, 2768, 2769, 2817.
V.—COMPENDIUM OF PARASITES, ARRANGED ACCORDING TO THEIR HOSTS.
This compendium covers only the genera Ascaris, Uncinaria, and Bothriocephalus;
for all other parasites see von Linstow (1878 and 1889) and van Beneden (1870 and
1889.)
MARINE MAMMALS.
We have personally examined those forms marked with an asterisk (*) under the
various hosts. We can not, of course, guarantee the original determinations of the
hosts, but taking the determinations given on the labels or by other authors we have
corrected the names to those now used in mammalogy. In all cases of doubt we have
been guided by the advice of Dr. F. W. True, of the United States National Museum.
270. BALAENOPTERA ROSTRATA.
Ascaris simplex.
271. BALAENOPTERA SIBBALDI Gray.
Ascaris simplex.
COMPENDIUM OF PARASITES,
265b. BELUGA LEUCAS see DELPHINAPTERUS LEUCAS.
CALLORHINUS URSINUS.
“Ascaris decipiens.
* Uncinaria sp.
*Bothriocephalus sp.
271b. CLYMENIA see PRODELPHINUS. ‘
197. CYSTOPHORA CRISTATA.
Ascaris decipiens.
Ascaris osculata.
Bothriocephalus anthocephalus.
Bothriocephalus elegans.
Krabbea variabilis (Bothriocephalus variabilis),
265b. DELPHINAPTERUS LEUCAS (Pallas).
Ascaris Kiikenthalis.
Ascaris simplex.
263. DELPHINUS AMAZONICUS see INIA GEOFFROYI.
257. DELPHINUS DELPHIS Linneus.
Ascaris typica. '
256. DELPHINUS PHOCAENA see PHOCAENA PHOCAENA.
DELPHINUS sp.
DOLPHIN, genus? species? Maldive Islands.
Ascaris Dussumierii.
DOLPHIN, genus? species?
* Ascaris typica.
DOLPHIN, genus? species?
Ascaris simplex.
254. DUGONG DUGON.
Ascaris halicoris.
198. ERIGNATHUS BARBATUS.
* Ascaris decipiens.
* Ascaris osculata.
Bothriocephatus anthocephatus.
Bothriocephalus cordatus.
Bothriocephalus hians. ,
Bothriocephalus lanceolatus.
Krabbea variabilis (Bothriocephalus variabilis).
EUMETOPIAS STELLERI.
| *Asearis decipiens.
*Ascaris osculata.
195. HALICHOERUS GRYPUS.
Ascaris decipiens.
Ascaris osculata.
254, HALICHORE CETACEA see DUGONG DUGON.
254. HALICHORE DUGONG see DUGONG DUGON.
255. HYDRODAMALIS GIGAS. Extinct.
Ascaris rytinae.
266. HYPEROODON ROSTRATUM (Chemnitz).
Ascaris simplex.
263. INIA BOLIVIENSIS, see INIA GEOFFROYI.
263. INIA GEOFFROYI (Desmarest).
Peritrachelius insignis, see p. 107.
LAGENORHYNCHUS ALBIROSTRIS, Gray.
Ascaris simplex.
196. LEPTONYX MONACHUS see 195a MONACHUS ALBIVENTER.
MACRORHINUS ANGUSTIROSTRIS.
* Ascaris decipiens.
253. MANATUS EXUNGUIS see MANATUS INUNGUIS.
169
170
THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF
253. MANATUS INUNGUIS. :
Heterocheilus tunicatus see p. 107.
MESOPLODON BIDENS (Sowerby).
Ascaris simplex.
MESOPLODON SOWERBIENSIS, see MESOPLODON BIDENS.
195a. MONACHUS ALBIVENTER.
* Ascaris osculata.
Bothriocephalus hians.
265. MONODON MONOCEROS Linnzus.
Ascaris simplex.
194. ODOBENUS ROSMARUS.
Ascaris bicolor.
Ascaris decipiens.
Ascaris osculata.
Bothriocephalus cordatus.
203b. OTARIA JUBATA.
Ascaris osculata.
Ascaris patagonica.
Ascaris simplex.
200. PHOCA ANNELLATA see PHOCA FOETIDA.
198. PHOCA BARBATA see ERIGNATHUS BARBATUS.
197. PHOCA CRISTATA see CYSTOPHORA CRISTATA,
200. PHOCA F@TIDA.
Ascaris decipiens.
Ascaris osculata,
Bothriocephalus hians.
Krabbea fasciata (Bothriocephalus finan:
199. PHOCA GROENLANDICA.
* Ascaris decipiens.
Ascaris osculata.
PHOCA GRYPHUS see HALICHOERUS GRYPHUS.
208a. PHOCA HISPIDA see PHOCA FOETIDA.
PHOCA LARGHA Pallas.
* Ascaris decipiens.
PHOCA MONACHUS see MONACHUS ALBIVENTER.
201. PHOCA PANTHERINA=?
* Ascaris osculata.
202. PHOCA VITULINA.
* Ascaris decipiens.
Ascaris osculata.
Bothriocephalus elegans,
Bothriocephalus hians.
Bothriocephalus [or Krabbea? | tetrapterus,
Krabbia variabilis (Bothriocephalus variabilis).
256. PHOCAENA COMMUNIS see PHOCAENA PHOCAENA.
256. PHOCAENA PHOCAENA (Linnzeus).
“ Ascaris capsularia” in the stomach.
Ascaris simplex.
Bothsiocephalus stemmacephalus.
264. PLATANISTA GANGETICA (Lebeck).
Ascaris delphini sp. inq.
Ascaris lobulata.
? Ascaris simplex.
PORPOISE, genus?, species?, Chiloe Islands.
Ascaris simplex.
ISLANDS
COMPENDIUM OF PARASITES. 171
271b. PRODELPHINUS sp.
Ascaris typica,
255. RHYTINA STELLERI see HYDRODAMALIS GIGAS.
203. SEAL, genus?, species?, Antarctic.
Ascaris similis.
Bothriocephalus [or Krabbea?] antarcticus.
SEALS, genera? species?, Faroe.
Ascaris decipiens.
Ascaris osculata.
SEALS, genera?, species?, Greenland.
Ascaris decipiens.
Ascaris osculata.
SEALS, genera?, species?, Iceland.
Ascaris decipiens.
Ascaris osculata.
STENORHYNCHUS LEPTONYX.
Ascaris osculata.
194. TRICHECHUS ROSMARUS see ODOBENUS ROSMARUS.
FISH.
For the parasites of fish, see von Linstow, 1878 and 1889, and Stossich, 1894.
GADUS MACROCEPHALUS.
* Ascaris decipiens.
POLLACHIUS CHALCOGRAMMUS see THERAGRA CHALCUGRAMMA.
THERAGRA CHALCOGRAMMA,
* Ascaris decipiens.
VI.—BIBLIOGRAPHY. zs
(Papers the dates of which are inclosed in parentheses have not been verified.)
BairD, W. °
1853. Catalogue of the Species of Entozoa, or Intestinal Worms, contained in the collection of
the British Museum, London, 132 pages; 2 plates. :
1853". Descriptions of some new Species of Entozoa from the Collection of the British Museum <
Proc. Zool. Soc. London, XXI, pp. 18-25, pls. XxXx-xxxI.
1855. Descriptions of some new species of Entozoa from the Collection of the British Museum <
Ann, and Mag. of Natural History, Zool. Bot. Geol., XV, 2 ser., pp. 69-76. (Reprint of
Baird, 1853°.)
1859. Description of a rare Entozoon from the stomach of the Dugong <Proc. Zool. Soc, London,
XXVII, pp. 148-149, pl. LvI, figs. 2-2c.
1860. Description of a rare Entozoon from the stomach of the: Dugong <Ann. and Mag. of Natural
History, V, 3 ser., pp. 329-331. (Reprint of Baird, 1859.)
1868. Description of a new Species of Ascaris found in the Stomach of a Walrus <Proc. Zool. Soc.
London, p. 71. (See Murie, 1868.)
BELLINGHAM, O’BRYEN
1844. Catalogue of Irish Entozoa, with observations < Ann. and Mag. of Natural History, XIII, pp.
: 101-105, 167-174, 254-260, 335-340, 422-430; XIV, pp. 162-165, 251-256, 317-323, 396-403,
471-479.
BEnepDeN, P. J. VAN
1870. Les cétacés, leur commensaux et leurs parasites < Bull. Acad. Royale Belgique, 2 sér., XXIX,
pt. 1, pp. 347-368, 7 figs. : ;
1889. Histoire naturelle des cétacés des mers d’Europe. Bruxelles. 664 pp. Reprinted from <<
Mém. couronnés et'autres Mém. Acad. roy. des sci. lett. et des beaux-arts de Belg., T.
XXXVITI, XLI, XLIII..
172 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
BRANDT, J. F.
1846, Wher den gleichzeitig mit der Ausrottung der Pflegemutter bewerkstelligten geschichtlich
nachweisbaren Untergang einer kleinen parasitischen Krebsart (Cyamus? oder richtiger
vielleicht Sirenocyamus Rhytinae) und eines Eiugeweidewurms der Jetztwelt <Bull. 4.1.
Classe physico-math. d. Acad. Imp. d. Sci., St. Petersbourg, No. 108, V, No. 12, pp.
189-192. (Published April 20, 1846.)
1849. Symbolae sirenologicae, quibus precipue rhytinae historia naturalis illustratur (Mém. de
VYAcad. Imp. d. Sci. d. St. Petersbourg, 6 ser., V, pt. 11, Sciences naturelles, Zoologie
et Physiologie, pp. 1-160, pls. I-v.
Braun, Max
(1891.) Verzeichniss von Eingeweidewiirmen aus Mecklenburg <Arch. d. Ver. d. Frede. d. Naturg.
i. Meckl., 45 Jhg., pp. 97-117.
CaRus, J. VICTOR
1863. Riderthiere, Wiirmer, Echinodermen, Coelenteraten und Protozoen < Handbuch der Zoologie
von Peters, Carus und Gerstaecker. Liepzig. 11, pp. (Vermes) 422-600.
Cons, N. A.
1888. Beitrige zur Anatomie und Ontogenie der Nematoden <Jenaische Zeitschr. f. Naturwiss.
XXIII, N. F. XVI, 1, pp. 41-76, pls. 11-v. (Issued Dec. 8, 1888.)
1889. Neue parasitische Nematoden (Beitriige zur Fauna Spitzbergens)<Arch. f. Naturg., 55 Jhg.,
I, pp. 149-151, pl. vir, figs. 4-10.
CoBBoLD, T. SPENCER
1876’. Notes on Entozoa, Part IV<Proc. Zool. Soc. London, pp. 294-298, pl. xx1.
1876". Trematode Parasites from the Dolphins of the Ganges. Platanista gangetica and Orcella
brevirostris< Journ. Linnean Soc. London, XIII, pp. 35-46, pl. x, 1 fig. in text.
1879. Parasites, a treatise on the Entozoa of Man and Animals, including some accounts of the
Ectozoa. London, XI + 508 pgs., 85 figs.
1886. Notes on Parasites collected by the late Charles Darwin, Esq.<Linnean Soc. Journal
P London, XIX, pp. 174-178, 1 fig.
CREPLIN, FR.
1851. Ascaris angulivalis eine neue Spulwurmart, aus dem Schnabelwalfische <Arch. f. Naturg.
17 Jhg., I, pp. 158-160.
Dissine, K. M. :
1851. Systema helminthum, II, Vindobonnae, 588 pgs.
1860. Revision der Nematoden <Sitzungsber. k. Akad. Wien, XLII, pp. 595-736, i pl.
DRASCHE R. VON
1882. Zur Charakteristik der Nematoden-Gattung Peritrachelius Diesing <Verhandl. d. k. k.
Zool.-bot. Ges. in Wien (Jhg. 1881), XXXI, pp. 187-194, pl. x11.
1883. Revision der in der Nematoden—Sammlung des k. k. Zoologischen Hofcabinetes befind-
lichen Original—Exemplare Diesing’s und Molin’s<Verhandl. d. k. k. Zool.-bot.
Gesellsch., XXXITI, pp. 107-118, pls. m1-v, figs. 1-4, pp. 193-218, pls. x1-xrv.
DUJARDIN, F.
1845. Histoire naturelle des Helminthes, ou vers intestinaux. Paris. 645 pgs., pls. I-x11.
Evviort, H. W.
1882. A Monograph of the Seal Islands of Alaska <Special Bulletin No. 176, U. S. Commission of
Fish and Fisheries, Washington. 176 pgs. 29 plates, figs. and maps.
GMELIN.
1790. Linné’s Systema naturae, 13 ed., I, vi, pp. 3021-3910.
GorzE, J. A. E.
1782. Versuch einer Naturgeschichte der Eingeweidewiirmer thierischer Kérper. Blankenburg.
471 pages, 44 plates.
JAGERSKIOLD, L. A.
(1891). Einiges tiber die Schmarotzer der Nordatlantischen Balaenopteriden <Férhand. Biolog.
Foren. Stockholm, III, 7, pp. 127-134.
* (1893). Bidrag till kiinnedomen om Nematoderna <Akad. Afhand., pp. 1-86, 5 pls.
1894. Breitrige zur Kenntnis der Nematoden <Zool. Jahrb. Abt. f. Anat. u. Ontog., VII, 3, pp.
449-532, pls. XXIV-XXVII.
BIBLIOGRAPHY. 173
KRABBE, H. ;
1878. Saelernes og Tandhvalernes Spolorme < Oversigt. Kgl. Dansk. Videnskab Selskab. Forhand-
linger, 1, pp. 43-51, pl.1 and figs. 1-3 in text. (Issued Sept. 12,1878.) Abstracted as Sur
les Ascarides des Phoques et des Baleines & Dent < Résumé du Bull. Acad. Roy. Danoise d.
Sci. et d. Lettres pour l’année 1878, pp. 11-12.
LEBECK, H. J.
1801. Delphinus gangeticus beschrieben <Der Gesellsch. Natrf. Fr. zu Berlin, Neue Schriften, ITI,
pp. 280-282.
Leipy, J.
1886. Notices of Nematoid Worms < Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., pp. 308-313, 1 fig.
LinsTow, O. VON
1878. Compendium der Helminthologie. Hannover.
1880. Helminthologische Untersuchungen < Arch. f. Naturg., XLVI, 1, pp. 41-51, pl. 1.
1888. Report on the Entozoa collected by H. M.S. Challenger during the years 1873-76 <Report on
the scientific results of the voyage of H. M. 8. Challenger during the years 1873-76.
Zoology, Vol. XXIII, pt. Lx x1, 18 pgs., pls. I-11.
1889. Compendium der Helminthologie: Nachtrag. Hannover.
1892. Helminthen von Siid-Georgien <Jahrb. d. Hamb. Wiss. Anst. IX, 2,19 pp., pls. 1-111.
1895. Untersuchungen an Nematoden <Arch. f. mikros. Anat. XLIV, pp. 509-533, pls. xXxX-XXXI.
1896. Nemathelminthen <Hamburger Magalhaensische Sammelreise, 21 pp., 1 pl.
MONTICELLI, FRA. Sav.
1889. Elenco degli Elminti raccolti dal capitano G. Chierchia durante il viaggio di cireumnaviga-
zione della R. Corvetta ‘‘Vettor Pisani.” < Boll. Soc. Nat. Napoli, III, fase. 1, pp. 67-71.
Morir, J.
1868. On the Morbid Appearances observed in the Walrus lately living in the Society’s Gardens
Z <Proce. Zool. Soc. London, pp. 67-71.
Owen, R.
(1833). Catalogue of the Physiological series of Comparative Anatomy, Museum of the College of
Surgeons. London.
1838. On the Anatomy of the Dugong <Proc. Zool. Soc. London, VI, pp. 24-46.
1839. Entozoa <Todd’s Cyclopaedia of Anatomy and Physiology, II, p. 136.
Parona, C,
1889. Intorno all Ascaris halicoris, Owen ed a qualche altro nematode racolti in Assab dal Dott. v.
Ragazzi < Ann. d. Mus. civ. Genova, 2 ser., VII, pp. 751-764, 2 pls.
1893. Sopra una straordinaria polielmintiasi da pehinornigg nel Globicephalus Svineval Flow.,
pescato nel mare di Genova <Atti Soc. Ligustica Sci. nat., IV, 11 pp., pl. x.
Rupo.pat, C. A.
1793. Observationes circa Vermes intestinales, etc., Berlin, Diss.
1802. Fortsetzung der Beobachtungen iiber Kingeweidewiirmer <Arch. f. Zool. u. Zootomie, II,
U1, pp. 1-67, pl. 1.
1804. Bemerkungen aus dem Gebiet der Naturgeschichte, Medicin und Thierarzneykunde, auf
einer Reise durch einen Theil von Deutschland, Holland, und Frankreich. Berlin, I.
296 pp.
1809, Entozoornm, sive vermium intestinalium historia naturali II, 11, Amstelaedami.
1819. Entozoorum Synopsis, etc. Berolini, X + 811 pp., pls. I-111. ,
RUPPELL.
(1834). —— ? —— <Abhandl. Senkenberg. Museum, I, p. 106.
SCHNEIDER, ANTON.
1866. Monographie der Nematoden. Berlin, 357 pp., pls. I-xxvull, also figs. in text. |
STELLER, G. W.
1751. De bestiis marinis <Nov. Comment. Acad. Sci. Imp. Petrol., II ad Ann. MDCCLIX, pp.
287-398.
STILES, CH. WARDELL and HassaLi, ALBERT.
1894. A preliminary Catalogue of Parasites contained in the Collections of the U. 8. Bureau of
Animal Industry, U. 8. Army Medical Museum, Biological Department of the University
of Pennsylvania (Coll. Leidy), and in Coll. Stiles and Coll. Hassall <The Veterinary
Magazine, I, No. 4, pp. 245-253-No. 5, pp. 331-354.
174 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILUF. ISLANDS.
STILEs, CH. WARDELL and HassaL_, ALBERT—Continued.
1899. Internal parasites of the Fur Seal. The present paper, pp. 99-177, 98 figs. in text.
Stossica, M.
1896. Il genere Ascaris Linné < Boll. Soc. adriatica Sci. nat. Trieste, XVII, pp. 9-120.
ZEDER, J.G. H. |
1803. Anleitung zur Naturgeschichte der Eingeweidewiirmer. Bamberg. 432 pp., 8°, 4 pls.
~ DESCRIPTION OF FIGURES.
Fig. 1. Dorsal lip of Ascaris decipiens, showing the basal portion, the anterior bilobed projection and
the dentigerous ridge, x 100. After Krabbe, 1878, pl. 1, fig. 3.
Fig. 2. Tail of male specimen of Ascaris decipiens, ventral view, showing the cloaca, the six pairs of
‘ postanal papillae, and some of the praeanal papillae. x 100. After Krabbe, 1878, p. 46,
fig. 1.
Fig. 3. Dissection of a male specimen of Ascaris bulbosa (=A. decipiens) from Erignathus barbatus: “b.,
bulb of the oesophagus; d., intestine; de., ductus ejaculatorius; eo., excretory organ; h.,
testicles; mb., bursal muscle; sf., lateral line; sl., vas deferens; ss., vesicula seminalis
(“Samenschlanch”), x2. After Cobb, 1888, pl. v, fig. 29. :
Fig. 4. Ventral view of tail of Ascaris bulbosa (=A. decipiens) from Erignathus barbatus, showing the
cloaca and the éaudal papillae. x 80. It will be noticed that postanal papillae 5+ 6 are
double; otherwise this figure agrees essentially with Krabbe’s figure given above (fig. 2).
After Cobb, 1888, pl. v, fig. 30.
Figs. 5 and 6. Two variations of the anterior portion of the intestinal tract of Ascaris decipiens from
Halichoerus grypus. Cf. figs.16 and 17, Fig. 5 shows the two portions of the oesophagus,
the oesophageal caecum, the proximal portion of the intestine and the intestinal caecum.
Fig. 6 shows the two portions of the oesophagus without formation of an oesophageal
caécum, and the proximal portion of the intestine with intestinal caecum. Zeiss 2/A2.
After Jiigerskidld, 1894, pl. xxviu, figs. 40 and 41.
Figs. 7 and 8. Two female specimens of Ascaris decipiens from the Alaskan fur seal and the hair seal.
The transverse ridge on the ventral surface designates the position of the vulva. Natural
size, Original.
Fig. 9. Male specimen of Ascaris decipiens from the Alaskan fur seal, showing the curved, flatted tail.
Natural size. Original.
Fig. 10. Transverse section of the head of Ascaris decipiens from the Alaskan fur seal, showing three
lips with their sense-papillae ; the triangular lumen of the oesophagus, with apex extend-
ing between the ventral lips. The section is slightly diagonal. Zeiss 4/8, stage.
Original.
Fig. 11. Apex view of the cuticle of the lips of Ascaris decipiens from the Alaskan fur seal. The excre-
tory pore is seen between the ventral lips. Zeiss 4/8, stage. Original.
Fig. 12. Dorsdl view of the anterior portion of Ascaris decipiens from the Alaskan fur seal, showing the
dorsal and ventral lips and the cervical papillae. Zeiss 4/16, stage. Original.
Fig. 13. Ventral view of the anterior portion of 4scaris decipiens from the Alaskan fur seal, showing
the ventral lips and cervical papillae. Zeiss 4/16, stage. Original.
Fig. 14, Apex view of the lips of Ascaris decipiens from the Alaskan fur seal, showing the anterior
double-lobed projections; the excretory pore is seen between the ventral lips. Free-
hand drawing under a magnifying glass. Original.
Fig. 15. Transverse section through anterior extremity of the lips of Ascaris decipiens from the Alaskan
fur seal, showing the double-lobed projections with dentigerous ridge. Zeiss 4/4, stage,
afterwards reduced one-half. Original.
Figs. 16,17. Two views of the proximal portion of the intestinal tract of Ascaris decipiens from the
Alaskan fur seal, Cf. figs5 and 6. Zeiss 4/a*10, stage, afterwards reduced one-half.
Fig. 18. Lateral view of tail of male of Ascaris decipiens from the Alaskan fur seal, showing carinated
dorsal ridge, lateral alae, concave ventral surface, sense papillae, and spicules. Zeiss
4/16, stage. Original.
Fig. 19. Ventral view of tail of male of Ascaris decipiens from the Alaskan fur seal, showing some-
what the swollen lateral alae, the cloaca, and sense papillae. Original.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
20.
21,
22.
23."
24,
30.
. 31.
- 82.
DESCRIPTION OF FIGURES. 175
e
A young Ascaris found in the stomach of the Alaskan fur seal, and corresponding to “4. cap-
sularia.” Zeiss 4/a*10, stage, afterwards reduced one-third. Original.
Anterior extremity of same. Zeiss 4/8, stage, afterwards reduced one-third. Original.
Posterior extremity of same. Zeiss 4/8, stage, afterwards reduced one-third. Original.
Dorsal lip of Ascaris simplex, showing basal portion with bilobed anterior projection and
dentigerous ridge. After Krabbe, 1878, pl. 1, fig. 4.
Ventral view of tail of male specimen of Ascaris simplex, showing cloaca and’ sense papillae.
The postanal papillae are divided into two groups; four pairs of conical papillae near the
tip; one and a half pairs of sessile papillae near the cloaca; the praeanal papillae near
‘ the cloaca are less prominent than those situated further cenbaladl, x 100. After Krabbe,
1878, p. 48, fig. 2.
. Ascaris simplex from Otaria jubata. Natural size. After von Linstow, 1888, pl. 1, fig. 1.
. Dorsal view of dorsal lip of Ascaris simplex from Otaria jubata. After von Linstow, 1888,
ply, fig!2.
. Apex view of lips of Ascaris simplex from Otaria jubata: u., upper lip; b., mouth; c. , ventral lip.
After von Linstow, 1888, pl. 1, fig. 3.
. Egg of Ascaris simplex from Otaria jubata. After von Linstow, 1888, pl. 1, fig. 4.
. Proximal end of intestinal tract of Ascaris simplex from Balaenoptera sibbaldii, showing two
divisions of the oesophagus and proximal end of the intestine. Zeiss 2/A*2. After
Jaigerskiéld, 1894, pl. xxvutt, fig. 42.
One of Diesing’s original figures of ‘‘Conocephalus typicus” (—= Ascaris typica). The drawing
shows a partially dissected female, with the umbrella-like structure on the head which
was mistaken for a generic character; the intestine and one of the longitudinal lines are
visible in the body cavity; the vulva is distal to the middle of the body; an error has
undoubtedly been made in the original drawing in the structure of the genital tract, since
the vagina and body of the uterus should be comparatively short. After Diesing, 1860,
fig. 10.
Dorssl lip of ‘‘ Ascaris conocephalus” (= Ascaris typica), showing the structures described in the
text. x 100. After Krabbe, 1878, pl. 1, fig. 5.
Ventral view of tail of male specimen of ‘Ascaris conocephalus” (= Ascaris typica), showing
the caudal papillae as described by Krabbe. x 100. After Krabbe, 1878, p. 50, fig. 3.
. Ventral view of dorsal lip of ‘Peritrachelius typicus” (= Ascaris typica), showing the structure
described in the text. x 125. After Drasche, 1883, pl. 111, fig. 6.
. Dorsal view of dorsal lip of ‘‘Peritrachelius typicus” (= Ascaris typica), showing the structures
described in the text. x 125. After Drasche, 1883, pl. 111, fig. 7.
. Inner surface of ventro-lateral lip of ‘‘Peritrachelius typicus” (=Ascaris typica), showing the
structure described in the text. x 280. After Drasche, 1883, pl. 111, fig. 1.
. Inner surface of right ventro-lateral lip of ‘Peritrachelius typicus” (— Ascaris typica), showing
the structure described in the text. x 280. After Drasche, 1883, pl. 111, fig. 2.
. Apex view of lips and mouth of ‘Peritrachelius typicus” (=Ascaris typica), showing the rela-
tive position of the lips and the absence of intermediate lips. x 125. After Drasche, 1883,
pl. 1u, fig. 5.
. Ventral view of tail of male specimen of ‘‘Peritrachelius typicus” (=Ascaris typica), showing
the cloaca and caudal papillae as seen by Drasche. x 60. After Drasche, 1883, pl. 111, fig. 9.
. Male specimen of Ascaris typica from Leidy’s collection (U.S.N.M., No. 5015) determined by
Leidy as ‘‘Ascaris simplex.” Natural size. Original.
. Female specimen of Ascaris typica from U.S.N.M:, No.5015. Natural size. Original.
. Dorsal view of anterior portion of Ascaris typica from U.S.N.M., No. 5015, showing dorsal lip,
ventro-lateral lips, and cervical papillae. Zeiss 4/16, stage. Original.
. Ventral view of anterior portion of Ascaris typica from U.S.N.M., No. 5015, showing ventral
lips and cervical papilae. Zeiss 4/16, stage. Original.
. Apex view of isolated cuticle of lips of Ascaris typica from U.S.N.M., No. 5015, showing gen-
eral form of lips-and the dentigerous ridge. The cuticle of the dorsal lip is somewhat
misplaced. Zeiss 4/4, stage, afterwards reduced one-half. Original.
176 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Fig. 44. Oesophagus of Ascaris typica from U.S.N.M., No. 5015, divided into an anterior straight portion
and a posterior sigmoid portion. Intestinal and oesophageal caeca are absent. Zeiss
4/a*\. Original.
Fig. 45. Lateral view of tail of male of Ascaris typica from U.S.N.M., No. 5015, to show the structures
described in the text. Zeiss 4/16, stage. Original.
Figs. 46-47. Ventral view of the tails of two male specimens of Ascaris simplex from U.S.N.M., No.
5015, showing the unequal spicules and variations in the position of the caudal papillae.
Zeiss 4/16, stage. Original.
Fig. 48. Eggs of Ascaris simplex from U.S.N.M., No. 5015, in various stages of segmentation. Zeiss
4/4, stage. Original.
Fig. 49. A young specimen of Ascaris typica from U.S.N.M., No. 5015, partially surrounded by its larval
cuticle. Zeiss 4/a” io. ‘
Fig. 50. Anterior extremity of a young specimen of Ascaris typica which has cast part of its larval
cuticle. Zeiss 4/8, stage. Original.
Figs 51. Caudal extremity of a young specimen of Ascaris typica betore the larval cuticle has been
cast. Zeiss 4/8, stage. Original.
Figs. 52-56 are given in text, ‘
Fig. 57. Dorsal lip of Ascaris patagonica, showing the double dentigerous ridge and other structures
’ given in the diagnosis. After von Linstow, 1880, pl. 111, fig. 1.
Fig. 58. Male of Ascaris Kiikenthalit, Natural size. After Cobb, 1888, pl. 111, fig. 1.
Fig. 59. Male of Ascaris Kiikenthalii, opened on the left side to show the anatomy: b., bulbus of the
oesophagus; de., ‘‘end portion of the intestine” (or ductus ujaoulatoriastye ed., rectum;
e0., excretory organ; h., testicle; kmd., smaller portion of the intestine; 1., glandular
organ; m., mouth; mb., bursal muscles; md., intestine; msp., muscles of a spicule;
oe., oesophagus; sl., vas deferens; sp., spicules; ss., vesicula seminalis (‘‘Samenschlauch”).
After Cobb, 1888, pl. 111, fig. 7.
Fig. 60. Tail of male of Ascaris Kiikenthalii, opened ventrally to show the anatomy: a., anus;
de., ductus ejaculatorius; dlm., dorsal longitudinal muscle; ed., rectum; h., testicle;
mb., bursal muscle; af., lateral line; sfb., broadened portion of lateral line; sl., vas
deferens; sp., spicules; ss., vesicula seminalis (‘‘Samenschlauch”). x 2, After Cobb,
1888, pl. 111, fig. 5.
ig. 61. Ventral view of tail of male of Ascaris Kiikenthalii, showing the cloaca and caudal papillae as
as seen by Cobb. After Cobb, 1888, pl. 111, fig. 3.
Fig. 62. Apex view of head, showing the position of the lips: pe, excretory pore. x50. After Cobb,
1888, pl. 111, fig. 11. ;
Fig. 63. Female specimen of Ascaris Kiikenthalii. Natural size. After Cobb, 1888, pl. 11, fig. 2.
Fig. 64. Anterior extremity of Ascaris Kiikenthalii, opened ventrally to show the anatomy: ag., termi-
nal duct of excretory organ; e¢o., excretory organ; eaf., constriction of lateral field;
geo., duct of excretory organ; m., mouth; md., intestine; r., neural ring; om., muscle;
rn., dorsal nerve; gf., lateral line. x2. After Cobb, 1888, pl. 111, fig. 4.
Fig. 65. Ascaris similis, natural size, after Baird, 1853, pl. 1, fig. 1a. Baird states that this is a male,
but it is more probably a female.
Fig. 66. Head of male, magnified, showing three lips; intermediate lips are absent. After Baird,
_ 1853, pl. 1, fig. 1d. After Baird, 1853, pl. 1, tig. 1b.
Fig. 67. Ascaris similis, natural size, after Baird, 1853, pl. 1, fig. lc. Baird states that this is a female,
but it is more probably a male.
Fig. 68. Head of female, magnified, after Baird, 1853, pl. 1, fig. 1d.
Fig. 69. Tail of female, magnified, after Baird, 1853, pl. ., fig. le.
Fig. 70. Ascaris halicoris, after Baird, 1859, pl. Lv1, fig. 2.
Fig. 71. Head of Ascaris halicoris, showing the three lips; intermediate lips are absent. After Baird,
1859, pl. LVI, fig. 2a.
Fig. 72. Tail of Ascaris halicoris, after Baird, 1859, pl. LVI, fig. 20.
Fig. 73. Anterior portion of Ascaris halicoris, dissected to show the oesophagus, intestine, intestinal
caecum, and a portion of the genital organs. After Baird, 1859, pl. Lv, fig. 2c.
Fig. 74, Transverse section of head of Ascaris halicoris, showing the relative position of the three lips
and the absence of intermediate lips. After Parona, 1889, pl. x11, fig. 3.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
81.
82.
83.
84.
85.
DESCRIPTION OF FIGURES. 177
Ventral view of tail of Ascaris halicoris, after Parona, 1889, p. 760, fig. 2.
Tail of male of Ascaris osculata from Phoca groenlandica, showing cloaca and caudal papillae.
Ventral view. x90. After Schneider, 1866, p. 44.
Inner view of dorsal lip of Ascaris osculata from Phoca groenlandica; the intermediate lips
are not figured. x 90. After Schneider, 1866, pl. 1, fig. 13.
Dorsal lip of Ascaris osculata, showing intermediate lips. x 100. After Krabbe, 1878, pl. 1,
fig.1.
Dorsal view of anterior end of Ascaris osculata from Stenorhynchus leptonyx, showing: 7l., dorsal
lip; vll., ventro-lateral lip; nJ., intermediate lip; the folds of the cuticle near the lips are
visible. After von Linstow, 1892, pl. 1, fig 11.
Transverse section of lips near the base, showing the relative position of lips and intermediate
lips of Ascaris osculata from Stenorhynchus leptonyx. After von Linstow, 1892, pl. 1, fig. 14.
Transverse section of same near the apex. After von Linstow, 1892, pl. 11, fig. 15.
Ventral view of tail of male of Ascaris osculata from Stenorhynchus leptonyx, showing lateral
caudal alae, caudal papillae, and two spicules. After von Linstow, 1892, pl. u, fig. 16.
Oesophagus of Ascaris osculata from Phoca vitulina. Zeiss 2/A,. After Jiigerskiéld, 1894,
pl. xxvill, fig. 38. s .
Male of Ascaris osculata from Eumetopias Stelleri. Natural size. Original.
Female Ascaris osculata from Eumetopias Stelleri. Natural size. Original.
Figs. 86 and 87. Dorsal (fig. 86) and ventral (fig. 87) views of anterior extremity of female Ascaris
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
88.
89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97
osculata (U.S.N.M., No. 2767) from Lumetopias Stelleri. Zeiss 4/16, stage. Original.
Margin of anterior extremity of Ascaris osculata from Eumetopias Stelleri, to show the peculiar
cuticular folds, Zeiss 4/8, stage. Original.
Ventral view, tail of male of Ascaris osculata (U.S.N.M., No. 2766) Humetopias Stelleri, showing
narrow lateral alae,.caudal papillae, and cloaca. Original.
Ventral view, tail of male of Ascaris lobulata from Platanista gangetica, showing cloaca and
caudal papillae. x 90. After Schneider, 1866, p. 44.
Dorsal lip, inner surface, of Ascaris lobulata, from Platanista gangetica. x 100. After Krabbe,
1878, pl. 1, fig. 2. ‘ ‘
Oesophagus and anterior portion of intestine of Ascaris lobulata, showing the long anterior
portion of the oesopbagus, the short posterior portion with oesophageal caecum, and the
intestine with intestinal caecum. Zeiss 2/A,, extended tube. After Jiigerskiéld, 1894,
pl. xxvull, fig. 37.
Adult male Uncinaria sp. from the intestine of an Alaskan fur-seal pup, U.S.N.M., No. 2815.
Natural size. Original.
Adult female Uncinaria sp. from the intestine of an Alaskan fur-seal pup, U.S.N.M., No. 2815.
Natural size. Original.
Anterior end of Uncinaria sp., U.S.N.M., No. 2815, showing the mouth, buccal capsule, and
oesophagus. Zeiss 4/16, stage. Original. ,
Dorsal view of caudal extremity of fig. 93, showing the bursa with its rays, and the two
spicules. Zeiss 4/8, stage. Original.
. Bothriocephalus sp., U.S.N.M., No. 2768, from the intestine of the Alaskan fur seal. Natural
size. Original.
Figs. 98-100. Head of same, enlarged. Zeiss 4/a*\o, stage. Original.
5947—PT 3 12
VIIL—THE EARLY HISTORY OF THE NORTHERN FUR SEALS.
THE BEASTS OF THE SEA, BY GEORGE WILLIAM STELLER.
Translated by
WALTER MILLER,
Professor of Classical Philology, Leland Stanford Junior University,
and
JENNIE EMERSON MILLER.
PREFACE.
Steller’s work, published in 1751 in the memoirs of the Imperial Academy of
Sciences in St. Petersburg for the year 1749, is a posthumous publication. The greater
part of the work was finished in $742, and Steller himself died, while on his way from
Siberia to St. Petersburg, in November, 1745. He was the naturalist (a volunteer)
of the Russian expedition sent out to explore the northwest coast of North America
and to ascertain definitely whether it was or was not joined to Asia, and to search
for the imaginary island known as Compagnie Land.
The following pages contain a translation of those parts of Steller’s report which
treat of the Manatee, or sea cow (Vol. II, pp. 289-330), and the natural history of the
sea bear (fur seal) (pp. 346-359), sea lion (pp. 361-366), and sea otter (pp. 382-398).
The measurements and descriptions of the last three are omitted, inasmuch as they can
be made better and with more scientific accuracy in our own times. But as the sea
cow is extinct, and as nearly all knowledge of it is to be obtained from Steller’s
account, that portion of his work is given in full.
Circumstances have combined to render the work of translation difficult; not
only is Steller’s account written in the zoological Latin of the eighteenth century, but,
as printed, it contains errors and omissions due to the fact that it was published
after Steller’s death, and consequently without revision. Finally,it has beeu necessary
to rely on a type-written copy, the original not being accessible to the translator.
Thanks are due to President David Starr Jordan and to Professor Oliver Peebles
Jenkins for much kind assistance with the technical, scientific, physiological, and
anatomical parts of the work. _
SEA BEASTS.
No one whu has studied various lands doubts that the vast ocean contains many
animals which to-day are unknown, and that there are very many regions in the ocean
1The full title of Steller’s work is as follows: De | Bestiis marinis | Avctore | Georg. Wilhelm.
Stellero {| Novi | Commentarii | Academiae Scientiarum | Imperialis | Petropolitanae | Tom. II | ad
annum MDCCXLIX | Petropoli | Typis Academiae Scientiarum | MDCCLI. ims
180 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
where the curious and venturesome inquiries of Europeans have not yet penetrated ;
and so no one has been able to examine their contents. Thus it stands with the animals’
of the sea as compared with the animals of the land. Some live anywhere and every-
where, and through long association come to vary their species in accordance with
differences of climate and food, not only in respect to size and color, but also in respect
to the softness and thickness of their hair; but when transferred to a different climate,
after a long interval of time they lose again their specitic difference and revert to the
first. So European horses when transferred to Siberia become perceptibly smaller and
hardier; and, on the other hand, when taken to India or China they become so much
slighter and smaller that after a lapse of time they form a peculiar species. Yakut
cattle when transported to Kamchatka become not only larger, but more prolific; and
this is the case also with cattle that are sent to the port of Archangel. With English
sheep that are taken to Sweden on account of the excellence of their wool, not only
the wool changes after a short time, but also their size. If one did not observe this,
it would seem that the species of animals increased gradually in Siberia alone; for
example, the squirrels on the Obi are large, and covered with long, ashy gray fur;
Obdoric squirrels are one-third smaller, and covered with short but thicker fur; Bar-
gusian squirrels are covered with black, and Werchoian squirrels are mottled with
black and ash-colored fur. All this difference, as far as concerns size and thickness
of fur, is due to climate, and as far as concerns the color it is due to the food. Where
evergreen larches, or, as they are commonly called, spruce and pines, grow, there the
fur is a bright, ashy gray; where the larches are deciduous, there they grow with
black fur.
Among animals the seal (phoca) is the only one which lives not only in every part
of the ocean, but in the Baltic Sea, the Caspian Sea, and lakes which have no com-
munication with the sea, as in Lakes Baikal and Oron; it is found everywhere at all
times of the year. Notwithstanding, this difference occurs, that the ocean seal (phoca
oceanica) is more common and is distinguished in color from all the rest; it is covered
with muddy gray fur, and on the back of its body it has a large spot that is chestnut
colored and covers one-third of the whole hide.
Now, I divide seals into three varieties on the basis of size. (1) The largest, which
is greater in size than a bull, grows only in the eastern ocean from the degrees 56 to
59 north latitude, and is called by the Kamvhatkans “ Lachtak.” (2) Those of medium
size are all as large as a tiger, and are marked with many smaller spots. (3) The
smallest ones — the ocean seal, for example — are found in the Baltic Sea, as well as
in the port of Archangel, in Sweden, Norway, America, and Kamchatka, and in fresh-
water lakes. They are monochroiis; that is, of one color; for example, those found
in Baikal are of a silvery gray color. It we inquire why this sort of amphibian alone
lives in every ocean and lake, I reply, because it lives upon a sort of food which is to
be had everywhere in the world, and upon flesh. But the case of the sea cow (Manatee)
is different. It feeds only upon certain sorts of sea weeds not found everywhere, and
on account of the structure of its body can not live everywhere even in shallow places.
But the sea otter, although it lives upon crustaceans and shéllfish, can not find this
sort of food everywhere beneath a certain depth of water on account of its closed
foramen ovale; and hence it inhabits the rocky, rugged, shallow shoals of America, of
theislands in the channel, and of the land of Kamchatka. The sea lion and the sea bear
are migratory animals, and seek the recesses of the sea and uninhabited islands in the
STELLER’S ACCOUNT OF THE SEA COW. 181
Same way as geese and swans, so that there they may get rid of their fat, copulate,
and give birth, and when that is done they return home in the same way as birds.
The amphibious Bieluga, a most voracious animal, selects those places where there
are long inlets of the sea; they generally wander about very widely, where they can
drive the fishes together and devour them more quickly in larger numbers — such
places as are at the mouth of the Ud and Ochotsk and the arm of the sea at the mouth
of the river Olutora. The walrus, from his love of ease, seeks out desolate and unin-
habited places, and because of his fatness selects a cold place in the midst of ice, and
because he finds these conditions at any time of the year at the mouth of the river
Obi, Yenisee, Lena, and Kolima, and around Cape Tschutschi, he is fond of those
regions. The right whale (balaena), because it is fond of peace, chooses those parts
of the sea less frequented by ships, and since those places are for the most part in the
north, whales live there and select those regions for sleep, for giving birth to their
young, and for breeding. .
Accordingly, the reason why other amphibious animals inhabit not all but only
some certain regions of the ocean, must be looked for in the uature of the animals
themselves. For some the food that they eat, for others their love of ease, for others
still different characteristics fix their boundaries and determine their dwelling-places.
But all sea animals have something, either in appearance or in habits, in common
with laud animals, on account of which even at first sight they are compared by the com-
mon people to these animals, and thus get their names. So the host of natural philoso-
phers talk about bulls, horses, wolves, and, dreaming of allegories, bring in monks and '
other men. It has seemed to me worth mentioning that Ruthenian sailors when they
first saw the manatee called it “Korova Morskaia,” with exactly the same propriety as
the English and Dutch called it a “sea-cow;” *‘ Sivutcha” they called “‘sea-lion,” and
“ Kot,” “‘sea-bear.” Not noticing the criteria offered by nature, they less appropriately
called the ‘“sea-otter” “ Bobr Morskoi.” But all these animals became known only half °
a century ago; in fact, Maregraf makes mention of the sea otter, but somewhat brietly
and obscurely. The navigator Dampier, a tireless explorer, speaks of the sea lion and
the sea bear; and many learned men, and Dampier as well, mention the manatee.
But I must admit that the accounts given by the scholars are fragmentary and imper-
fect and for the most part fabulous and false. Dampier, on the other hand, has by
many parasangs excelled them with a most accurate description, as good as could
be expected from an unlearned man.
But one must not suppose that these places do not contain more great and won-
derful animals that are still unknown, besides those which I shall describe. For if
weather, time, and place had favored my desire I should have enriched natural history
with many curiosities of that sort, as indeed 1 desired when I took the risk of this
journey to parts so distant and unexplored. Thus, for instance, I describe the traces
of a certain unknown animal upon the island of Shumagin, and I insert a sketch of a
sea ape, and with this imperfect account I must content myself and others.
In what order I shall next year examine the shores of the sea near the mouth of
the river Kolima time will tell. My zeal is fired by those mammoth skeletons and the
slight accounts of them. And I do not doubt that the American shores are to become
better known to us, and with them this wonderful subject as well. As long as things
escape us and perish unknown with our consent, and through our silence are counted as
fabulous—things which may be seen with little labor in the very land where we, with all
182 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
our inquisitiveness, live—it is not strange that these things, which we are prevented
from observing by the great sea that lies between, have remained to the present time
unknown and unexplored. In the farther confines of Asia and the Russian Empire I
learned that the “ Sukac” of the Scythians was regarded as fabulous. ‘I also learned
that in the Desert of Azof, and in that where the Saporozkiensian Cossacks live, the
one-horned goat bears the same name—an animal very common and very well known
_upon their tables. There is likewise a Scythian wolf, black in color, and described by
Aristotle as longer than the common wolf but with shorter legs, exceedingly fierce
and savage. There is also in the neighborhood of Voronesch and Astracan anu animal
that barks like a dog. It is sly and bloodthirsty and will attack people lying asleep
or steal whatever it can from the household stores. This may be the hyena of ancient
times. And I desire nothing more than that, after I have explored Siberia, the
authorities may think well to intrust to me the exploration of the deserts—provided
no one else undertakes it; and I hope that if my efforts prove acceptable I may be
sent into exile for -everal years on their account, that I may spend there a long time,
which I prophesy will prove but too brief.
THE MANATEE.
The following is a description of the manatee, or, as it is called by the Dutch,,
Vacca marina (sea cow), by the English, “sea cow,” and by the Russians, “Morskaia
Korova;” the description is made from a female killed on the 12th of July, 1742, on
Bering Island, which lies in the channel between America and Asia. It had, accord-
ing to the English scale of measurement, the following dimensions:
‘ Inches.
Length from the extremity of the upper lip to the extreme right cornu of the caudal fork.... 296. 00
From the extremity of the upper lip to the nares...... 2.2.2. ..2 002 eee eee cece ee eee eee ee 8.00
From the narial septum (columna narium) to the anterior angle of the eye .-....-............ 13.50
From the anterior angle to the posterior angle of the eye .......-.--. 2.22. eee ene cece ee eee . 80
Distance between the eyes at the anterior angles...... haces smn Cemewetowae aeaaeneaee tweed 17.40
Distance between the eyes at the posterior angles... .... 222. 2-2. nee eee ee eee ee eee eee 22. 20
The breadth of the narial septum (columna narium) at its base...---....... .220 eee eee eeenee 1.50
Height of the mares sqpicae eee ase esies sess ecei eos wesitiaic.nie diersinlciaeind Spee hawbanesaweecce norma 2,50
Breadth. of the nares... s02se.0 cenceas cesses cece Se.nciekeicins ecoeee ncaa stew cces Be Scat 2.50
From the extremity of the upper lip to the angle of the mouth (oris froenum).............--- 15.50
From the extremity of the upper lip to the shoulder........ 2-22.12 2222 cece ce cen e cece eee 52. 00
From the extremity of the upper lip to the opening of the ily sitcoe sceaemaentiowanieses ches 194. 00
Length Of the: Val Va vised inc everswetscmecisises Dewees ones tees sees cee dices aloes use caawaccecas 10. 20
Length of the tail from the anal sphincter to the region of the caudal fin................... 75.50
Circumference of the head above the nostrils (supra nares) .-.... 2... 2-2 eee wee ce ee eee nee 31. 00
Circumference of the head at the eyes .....--. 2. eo. ee eee ee eee ee ee eee deen cece eee 48, 00
Circumference of the neck at the nape (mucha) .....-.. 2.00 eee cee eee eee cece eee Renae 82. 00
Height of the end of the snout... .... 2.22. -0- eee ee cee ce ee eee eee oe eee cone ee cece eee 8. 40
Circumference of the body at the shouldats. siefeinins Aersteise sisbicoe heb eeamec seas cceeued Sennen 144. 00
The greatest circumference about the middle of the abdomen...-... 2.022. ceeeee cece ceccce ce. 244. 00
The circumference of the tail at the origin (insertio) of the fin.-.......2.........0..... ee 56.00
Distance between the extreme points of the caudal fin (this is the breadth of the fin)..... ss 78.00
Height of the fin.-..-. 2.020200 sees cece ee ene cece ee cence eee cen ene cece sewene neue emeece 8.80
The whole length of the inner lip, which is villous and rough, like a brush. ................ 5. 20
Width of the same.....-.-2. .--- 2. eee eee eee eee ne eee cece cee een nee cone ee cee eee 2.50
The width of the exterior upper lip, which stands obliquely to the lower jaw and is covered all
over with rather i WHS DISHES ao ncicda lic auls wanetenee cs sn saaaeccempeccc 14.00
Height of the same......--.... Coes Sewiinle weinminineinicis sinin'e anesieecinisteeecee fo Ce Seale sera tues oor "40.00
STELLER’S ACCOUNT OF THE SEA COW. 183
The breadth of the lower lip, which is hairless, black, smooth, and slopes toward the sternum, ot
And,18 Heat t-shaped..j:.:22c20 ose Haus de eben eec pesiniesmme see mecemnsemecureagetuas semeeeeren 7.40
Height of thesaMme:..:.). 2.05 s2ace cess water anise ciieccaienwmcicmeond-cete tewabnceamneenenesesasen 6. 80
From the lower lip to the sternum... ...-..---- 6.0226 ces eee cee eee cee eee eee cee cee eens 54.00
The diameter of the mouth at the angle (oris froenum)......2-- 226-222 cee e cee eee eee ne 20, 40
From the pharynx to the end of the oesophagus.... ....---- 20. 2e ee cee eee cee eee nee teens 32.00
The width, or rather length, of the stomach ..........2.------ 02-222 eee eee eee eee cee eee 44,00
The whole intestinal tract, from pharynx to anus -... 2220.22 o cee ee cee cee nee eee 5, 968. 00
(And so it is 204 times as long as the whole animal.)
From pudenda, to anal sphincter . ....-------- +22 eee eee ee ee cece ne cree eee eee ee ee 8.00
Diameter of the trachea below the glottis..........-.-.-- 2. 0-2 - cece cee cee eee eee 4,20
Height of the heart. -.-....--...- 2-2 eee ee eee eee cee eee eee een nee cee eee 22.00
WiAGEGF CHS NAP. 5.25c0:nic. in Sore cei cccimide tine dadeenenemeaibeemmaiinenia Reds ceabencteeweameaamen 25.00
Length of the kidneys -.........------------+- eves onde dcoeeeeescasegseecetracee co eelamaes 32. 00
Width of the kidneys..-....--.-.--2------ 22+ eee ee eee ene cee cen eee eee eee 18. 00
Length of the tongue... --..-----..- 2-2 2-2-8 eee ene ee ee ee cee re ree eee eee 12. 00
WAGth Of CHE tO GUS aoa: occa cain: aisinie naididiewiesdiwinie bisa wine anise a wits Aaerercies blame samiSiaidic! mwibicie.iesiRie eceiniein eis 2.50
Length of the nipples sac. isis acne deisisien asec seis nes nhaeoeeReckececseed meee cemmcecaesune bess 4.00
Width of the humerus...........- aid umnausini faiSioasSiaieizimebadesle Shae Sty atareie omnes meee Baie cle velawin iatica 14.50
Length of the ulna........ 2... 2-22. 2-1 nee ee cee ee ee ee cee eee nee cee eee cee eee 12, 20
Length of the skull from nares to occiput ..-..------. 0-20 eee eee eee ree cee eee eee eee 27.00
.Width of the occiput.....-.. 2.2. ---- een eee eee eee cee ee eee eee cee eee cee eee eee 10.50
DESCRIPTION OF THE EXTERNAL PARTS.
This animal] belongs practically to the sea, and is not amphibious, although some
authorities have so narrated; but they have misunderstood the stories of some others
who tell of its feeding upon vegetation about the shores of the sea and rivers. But
by this was meant not the vegetation of the land, but seaweed that grows out in the
water on the shore of the sea. This seemed quite an unwelcome fact (that it fed on
seaweed) and most absurd to Celsius Clusius, who had seen a whole hide stuffed with
straw; but it is found to be so also in the case of the living beast (strange as it is
true), if one will but have regard to its form, movements, and habits.
It is covered with a thick hide, more like unto the bark of an ancient oak than
unto the skin of an animal; the manatee’s hide is black, mangy, wrinkled, rough,
hard, and tough; it is void of hairs, and almost impervious to an ax or to the point of
a hook. It is an inch thick, and a transverse section of it is very like unto ebony
both in smoothness and in color. This exterior cortex, however, is not skin (cutis),
but cuticle (cuticula); but in the dorsal region it is smooth. From the nape to the
caudal fin the surface is uneven with nothing but circular wrinkles, but the sides are
exceedingly rough, especially about the head,.and bristling with many cup-shaped
promineuces like stemless mushrooms (pezicas). This cuticle which surrounds the
whole body like a crust is frequently an inch in thickness; and it is composed of
nothing but tubules, in the same way as we observe in the Spanish cane or Mambu
of the Indians and Chinese (ac in arundine videmus Hispanicove Mambu Indorum et
Sinensium). The structure of thexe tubules is perpendicular to the skin. Longitudi-
nally they can not be torn or separated from one another. The tubules are implanted
in the lower part of the skin; they are roundish, convex, bulbous, and hence pieces
of the skin that are torn off from the cuticle are full of tubercles like Spanish bark,
and the underlying cutis is excavated with a great many very small holes, like a
thimble (netricum digitale), which were before the receptacles of the bulbous
184 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS
tubules of the cuticle. Now, these tubules rest upon one another very closely; they
are tenacious, wet, and tumid, and they do not appear when- the cuticle is cut
horizontally, but the surface is smooth, as the hoofs of certain animals when they are
cut. But as soon as it is hung up in pieces and exposed to the sun and becomes dry,
it has perpendicular fissures and can be broken like bark, and then this tubulous
structure comes clearly to view. Through these tubes a thin, serous mucus is exuded,
in larger quantities on the sides and about the head, and in smaller quantities on the
back. When the animal has lain for some hours upon the dry shore, the back becomes
dry, but the head and sides are always wet.
Now, this thick cuticle seems given to the animal for two purposes principally:
(1) That, inasmuch as the animal is compelled, for the sake of getting a living, to live
continously in rough and rugged places, and in the winter among the ice, it may not
rub off the skin, or that it may not be beaten by the heavy waves and bruised with
the stones, and when pursued it is protected by this coat of mail; (2) that the natural
heat may not be dissipated in the summer by too profuse perspiration (nimium trans-
pirando), or completely counteracted by the cold of winter. And that would be |
natural, for it has to live, not in the depths of the sea as other auimals and fishes, but
it is always compelled in feeding to expose half of its body to the cold.-
I have observed in the case of many that were cast up dead upon the shore of the
sea, that the cuticle had been broken off on one side or the other, and that that had
been the cause of their death; and this happens principally in the winter time, from
the ice.
And I observed many times in animals that had been captured and drawn on
shore with a hook, that great pieces of cuticle had been pulled off in consequence of
the violent thrashing of its body and tail and its resisting with its front feet, and that
the broken piece of cuticle that covered the arms and caudal fin was like a hoof; all
this goes to make my opinion stronger. Cuticle of exactly the same sort covers the
whale (balaena), although no mention is made of it by the authorities; and almost the.
whole of the cuticle was rubbed off from a whale that was washed up dead upon our
island on the Ist day of August, for during several days it had been tossed about by
the waves, this way and that, and bruised upon the rocks before it camé to our shore.
While this cuticle is wet it is tawny black, like the skin of a smoked ham, but:
when it is dry it is wholly black. Jn certain animals it is marked with rather large
white spots and zones, and this color penetrates clear to the cutis. This cuticle
about the head, eyes, ears, breasts, and under the arms, where it is rough, is thickly
infested by insects, and it frequently happens that they perforate the cuticle and
wound even the cutis itself. When this happens, large, thick, warty prominences
arise from the lymph of the cutis, or from the broken glands that preserve the oil, as
it were, in the little cells, in the same manner as in whales, and oftentimes make the
above-mentioned places foul. .
Under the cuticle lies the cutis surrounding the whole body. This is 2 lines
thick, soft, white, very firm in strength and structure just like that of the whale, and
it can be put to the same uses.
In comparison with the huge mass of the rest of its body the head is small, short,
and closely connected with the body; in figure it is a square oblong, widening from
the top toward the lower jaw. The top itself is fat and covered with a black cuticle,
exceedingly scraggly and a third part thinner than the rest of the cuticle and more
STELLER’S ACCOUNT OF THE SEA COW. 185
easily torn off. The head slopes from the occiput to the nares and slopes again from
the nares to the lips. The end of the snout is 8 inches high and grows rapidly thicker
trom the nose to the occiput.
The opening of the mouth (rictus oris) is not underneath (supinus), but in a line
with the sides; but the exterior upper lip is so large, broad, and oblique to the angle
of the mouth, and lengthened out so much above the inferior mandible, that to one
who looks at the head alone the opening seems to be located underneath.
“The opening of the mouth itself is not very large in proportion to the animal, nor
is it necessary that it should be, as it lives on seaweed.
The lips, both the upper and the lower, are double and divided into external and
internal lips.
The external upper lip, finishing the end of the snout obliquely, is like a half
circle; itis flat, tumid, thick, 14 inches broad, 10 inches high, in color a glossy white,
and overgrown with a great many little hills or tubercles, from the center of each one
of which grows a white, translucent bristle 4 or 5 inches long.
The internal upper lip is 5 inches long and 24 inches wide. It is everywhere |
detached from the external lip, and fastened to it only at the base; it overhangs the
palate, and it looks like a calf’s tongue, all villous and rough like a brush. It closes
the mouth firmly above; it is movable, and by its own motion serves to tear off the
seaweed and bring it into its mouth; for it feeds in the same way as horses and cattle,
by protruding its lips and bending them outward.
The lower lip is likewise double; the external lip is black, and smooth, and
without bristles; it is roughly heart-shaped and like a chin, if we may so call it; it is
7 inches wide and 6.8 inches high.
The interna: lower lip is separated likewise from the external; it is villous and is
not visible when the mouth is closed, because the external lip reaches out and covers
it; and being set opposite the internal upper lip it closes the mouth firmly.
When the lower mandible is applied to the upper, the space which intervenes
when both are closed is filled up with a dense array of very thick white bristles 14
inches long. These bristles prevent anything from falling out of the mouth while
the animal masticates, or from being washed out with water which flows into the
mouth and is driven out again through the opening when the mouth is closed.
The bristles are as thick as a dove’s quill; they are white, hollow inside, bulbous
below, and, even without the aid of a microscope, they show clearly the structure of
the human hair.
If the animal lies prone upon its belly, the end of its snout on a line perpendicular
from the nares to the lips is 8 inches high and is rounded in front, like a ball, from
the nose to the ends of the lips and also to the lateral regions of the upper jaw.
It grows thicker and increases rapidly in circumference. The external lips are very
prominent, thick and swollen, and perforated with a great many large pores, like a cat’s,
from each one of which grows a strong white bristle; these bristles are perceptibly
stouter the nearer they are tc the opening of the mouth itself, Of the bristles those were
especially noticeable for thickness which grow between the lips of either jaw. They
take the place of teeth in pulling off the seaweed and prevent anything from falling
out of the mouth while the animal masticates. The inferior maxilla is shorter than
the superior; it alone is movable, but the lips of both maxillae move, as do the lips
of cattle. With these the submarine plants which they tear off from the rocks with
186 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
their arms are so cut off from the hard, uneatable roots and stems that they seem
to be cut off with the edge of a dull knife. When the tide comes in these roots
and stems are washed ashore, and lying there in great heaps on the seashore they
betray to the visitor the present quarters of these guests; inasmuch as the stems of
sea plants are tougher and thicker than those of !and plants, the lips are made much
stronger and harder than are the lips of any of the land animals; therefore the lips
are‘also inedible, and can not be softened by boiling or in any other way. The internal
structure of the lips is so arranged that when cut they are like a checkerboard,
consisting of very small squares; there are countless very small, thick, red, rhomboid
or trapezoid squares, with which others that are white, tendinous, full of cells like
network and containing liquid oil, are interspersed in equal numbers. These lips
when boiled in water very easily yield a great amount of oil, and when this oil is
tried out the white cells appear like so much tendinous network. The purpose of
this structure seems to me to be a threefold one: (1) That the strength and density
of the lips may be increased, and that they may not be so easily exposed to any
danger from without; (2) that the heavy lips may be more easily raised and moved,
inasmuch as the origin and insertion of the muscles (caput et caudae horum muscu-
lorum) are so disposed that the origin of the muscles is set obliquely to the opening
of the mouth, and the insertion of the muscles obliquely to the top of the head; so
that with their beginnings and ends the lips make, as it were, a wreath of muscles;
(3) that by means of this structure the lips may be moved with a sort of spiral motion,
and that, since the head on account of the continuous thick crust can be moved only
with difficulty, it may not be necessary for them to move the whole body as often as
they wish to pull off the tenacious seaweed.
They masticate differently from all other animals; not with teeth, which they
lack altogether, but with two strong white bones, or solid tooth masses, one of which
is set in the palate and the other is fastened in the inferior maxilla, and corresponds to
the first. :
The insertion itself, or connection, is entirely anomalous, and would be expressed
by no known name; gomphosis we can not call it, because the bones are not fastened
in the maxillae, but each is held by many papillae and pores, pores and papillae
alternating, in the palate and in theiuferior mandible. Besides, in front it is inserted
into the papillary membrane of the internal upper lip, and at the sides in the grooved
edge of the bone, and at the back, with a double process, into the palate and inferior
maxilla, and is in this way made firm.
These molar bones are perforated below with many little holes, like a thimble
(netricum digitale), or like a sponge, in which the arteries and nerves are inserted in
the same way as in the teeth of other animals. Above they are smooth and excavated
with many winding, wavy canals, and between them are eminences which in mastication
fit into the canals of the corresponding bone so perfectly that the seaweed (fuci) is
ground and mashed between them as between a fuller’s beams or between millstones.
I have had a drawing made of these bones, which will explain more clearly what is
less intelligible trom the description.
The nose is situated in the farthest tip of the head, as in the horse; there are two
nostrils, and a thick cartilaginous column 14 inches wide between them. The nostrils
themselves are 2 inches long and just as wide in diameter. They are flat, and stretch
back with.many curves or labyrinths. Inside, the nostrils are very wide, wrinkled, and
STELLER'S ACCOUNT OF THE SEA COW. | 187
covered over with a nervous membrane, which is perforated with mauy black pores.
From each pore grows a bristle as thick as cobbler’s waxed-end, a half inch long;
they are easy to pull out, aud they take the place of vibrissae in other animals,
The eyes are situated exactly half way between the end of the snout and the ears
in a line parallel with the top of the nostrils, or just a very little higher. They are
very small in proportion to so huge a body, being no larger than a sheep’s eyes. They
are not provided with shutters, or lids, or any other external apparatus, but protrude
from the skin through a round opening, scarcely a half inch in diameter. The iris of
the eye is black, the ball livid; the canthi of the eye are not seen éxcept when the skin
is cut away aroun the opening of the eye. At the inner canthus of the eye there is
a cartilaginous crest (precisely like that of the sea otter), which, when necessity arises,
covers over the whole eye aud takes the place of a nictitating membrane adapted to
warding off and removing any injury that might chance to fall while the animal feeds.
This cartilaginous crest in the back part constitutes one wall of the lachrymal sac,
with which it is joined by a common nervous membrane. When the lachrymal sac is
cut a great amount of sticky mucus is found in its cavity. The sac itself would
easily hold a chestnut, and inside it is enveloped m a glandular membrane.
The ears outside open only with a small hole, like ‘the seal’s. There is not the
slightest trace of an external ear, and the holes can be seen only by examining very
closely; for the opening of the ears can not be distinguished from the rest of the pores,
and would scarcely admit the quill of a chicken’s feather. The internal canal of the
ears is smooth and covered with a highly polished black skin, and when the muscles
of the occiput are separated from it, as they may easily be, it betrays itself by: its
own color and can be seen.
The tongue is 12 inches long and 23 inches wide, and is like that of an ox. Itis
pointed at the end and the surface is rough with short papillae like a file. It is so
deeply hidden away in the fauces that to many the animal has seemed to be without
a tongue; for drawn as far forward as it may be by the hand, it still can not be made
to reach the froenum, but will fall short of it by 14 inches. If it were longer, as in
other animals, it would be in the way in mastication.
The head, like the neck, is ill defined, and joins the body in such a way that a
line of distinction is nowhere visible, as is the case with all fishes; but what obscurely
suggests a neck is shorter by one-half than the head itself, and is cylindrical and more
slender than the occiput in circumference. Notwithstanding, it is not only constructed
with movable vertebrae, but has its independent action, a motion observed in the
living animal only when it feeds; for it bends its head in the same way as cattle on
dry land, but the thick and shapeless cuticle makes the quiet or dead animal look
as though if were provided with an immovable neck, for no trace of vertebrae is to
be seen at all.
From the shoulders toward the umbilical region it grows rapidly wider, and
from there on to the anus it again grows rapidly slender; the sides are roundish and
paunched like a belly which is swollen with a great mass of intestines, and elastic and
puffed up like an inflated skin, and diminishes in size from the umbilical region toward
the anus, and again from the mamme toward the neck.
When the animals are fat, as they. are in spring and summer, the back is slightly
convex; but in wiuter, when they are thin, the back 1s flat and excavated at the spine
with a hollow on either side, and at such times all the vertebran with their spinous
processes can be seen.
188 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
The ribs rise on both sides in an arch to the back, and where they are joined to
the vertebrae of the back by amphiarthrosis, as they are in a man, they extend down-
ward like a bow, and in the place where they are joined on both sides to the vertebrae
they make a double hollow on the back.
At the twenty-sixth vertebra the tail begins, and continues with thirty-five ver-
tebrae. The tail grows perceptibly thinner toward the fin. It is not so much flat as
rather somewhat quadrangular, for all the vertebrae of the tail have two epiphyses
[zygapophyses] and four processes. Of these the lateral processes are broad, flat, and
blunt at the point. The spinous process on the dorsal side or spine (processus superior
in dorso seu spina) is sharpened; the lower one is a broad, flat bone, like unto a Greek
lambda. This is joined by a cord to the main body of the tail and is fastened to it
with very strong ligaments and tendons. As a result of this quadruple position the
muscles of the tail fill these cavities of the vertebrae and the angles between the
processes, and so the tail itself gets the form of a square oblong with obtuse angles.
For the rest the tail is thick, very powerful, and ends in a very hard, stiff, black
fin, which is not divided into rays, but solid, and is in substance like prepared whale-
bone, and consists of nothing but layers, one upon the other, as if one solid piece.
This fin is frayed out for a distance of 9 inches from the extremity, and is something
like the fins of fishes that are spined with a ruder sort of spines. The fin itself that
ends the tail is 78 inches wide or long, 7.3 inches high, and 1.5 inches thick, and is
inserted in the muscles of the tail as if by gomphosis, or a triangular canal.'
The fin of the tail is somewhat forked, and both cornua, differently from the tail
fins of larger sea fishes, as the shark and the like, are of the same magnitude. In this
respect it agrees with the whale. And so the caudal fin is parallel with the sides, as
is the case of the phocaena and balaena, and not with the back, as is the case with
most fishes. With a gentle sidewise motion of its tailit swims gently forward; with
an up-and-down motion of the tail it drives itself violently forward and struggles to
escape from the hands of enemies who are trying to draw it in.
The strangest feature of all, in which this animal differs from all other animals
both of land and sea and from amphibia, is its arms, or, if you please, its front feet;
for two arms, 26.5 inches long, consisting of two articulations, are joined immediately
to the shoulders at the neck. The end of the humerus is joined to the scapula by
arthrodia. 5
The ulna and radius are like a man’s; the ulna and radius terminate bluntly with
tarsus and metatarsus. There are no traces of fingers, nor are there any of nails or
hoofs; but the tarsus and metatarsus are covered with solid fat, many tendons and
ligaments, cutis and cuticle, as an amputated human limb is covered with skin. But both
the cutis, and especially the cuticle, are much thicker, harder, and drier there, and so
the ends of the arms are something like claws, or rather like a horse’s hoof; but a
horse’s hoof is sharper and more pointed, and so better suited to digging. On the
back (supine) these claws are smooth and convex, but underneath they are flat and
hollowed out in a way, and rough with countless very closely set bristles, half an inch
long and hard like a brush.
1There is an evident omission here, as these measurements would give the animal an absurdly
narrow tail, whereas we know from the references to the power of the animal, as well as from the
figures that have been preserved, that the flukes were broad and powerful. The vertebre and their
muscles lie in the fibrous mass of the flukes as if driven in.—Ep.
STELLER’S ACCOUNT OF THE SEA COW. 189
T have seen in one animal these claws divided into two parts, like an ox’s hoof.
The division, however, was no more than marked, and that only in the cuticle; this
happened more by mere chance than by the will of nature, and was the more easy
and the more possible as the cuticle that covered the claws was disposed on account
of its dryness to crack.
Now, this Platonic man, as the eminent John Ray was pleased in jest to call him,
performs with these arms various offices: with these he swims, as with branchial fins;
with these he walks on the shallows of the shore, as with feet; with these he braces
and supports himself on the slippery rocks; with these he digs out and tears off the
algae and seagrasses from the rocks, as a horse would do with its front feet; with these
he fights, and when taken with a hook and dragged from the water upon dry land
he resists so vehemently that the cuticle surrounding these arms is often torn and
pulled off in pieces; and finally with these the female when smitten with the sting of
passion, swimming prone upon her back, embraces her covering lover and holds him
and permits herself in turn to be embraced.
The two breasts are different from those of most other animals, but in place and
form are exactly as in man; they are situated one under each arm; and one breast is a
foot and a half in diameter, convex, rough with many spiral wrinkles, full of glands,
very hard—harder than a cow’s—and without any intermingling fat. But the adipose
tissue that surrounds the whole body rests upon them only with the same thickness
as everywhere else, but the cuticle is thinner there and softer, and more wrinkled,
and the papillae are likewise surrounded with a black cuticle with circular wrinkles,
“but soft. Under the arm itself, or axilla, the breast hangs, and when the animal is
in milk the nipple is 4 inches long and 1} inches in diameter; in those, however,
which have gone dry, or have not yet given birth, it is so short and contracted that
it seems nothing more than a chance wart, for the breast is not swollen.
The milk is very rich and sweet, and in consistency is very much like sheep’s
milk, and very often it was my wont to get the milk in large quantities from dead
ones in the same way as from cows. The nipple is very much wrinkled and a little
higher than the rest of the breast. When the glands are cut they give out milk
which is like that which I collected by squeezing the papillae. Ten or twelve lacteal
ducts open into each papilla. The breasts when boiled are a little harder than beef,
and give out the odor of game, but mild.
They come together after the human fashion, the male above and the female below.
The penis of the male is 32 inches long, and with its sheath is bound firmly in front
to the abdomen, and reaches clear to the navel—in a word, it is very coarse and
obscene to look upon, very much like that of a horse, and ends with the same sort of
a gland, only larger.
The female pudenda lie 8 inches above the anus. The opening of the vulva is
almost a triangle, and wider above, where the clitoris lies, and narrower toward the
anus. The opening itself would without difficulty admit five fingers together. The
clitoris is about 14 inches long. Itis cartilaginous and surrounded with a very strong,
smooth skin, and is uneven, with many short wrinkles that fold together. The skin is
variegated with yellow and white, and so is the vulva. The labia vulvae are very
rigid and hard. The urethra empties into the vulva about 5 inches from the opening
of the vulva. Below this is stretched a strong, crescent-shaped membrane, partly
muscular and partly tendinous, which separates the vulva from the vagina uteri,
190 THE FUR SEALS ‘OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
properly so called, with a sort of vestibule, and makes a kind of hymen. But the
aperture between the cornua of this membrane is so large that the penis of the male
can without any difficulty enter the vagina. The vagina itself is 94 inches long and
covered with a very strong, fibrous membrane, which is ribbed longitudinally and
hollowed out upon its surface with many furrows; between these furrows are seen a
great many glands not larger than a pin’s head, which secrete the mucus with which
the vagina is covered all over. Next appears the uterus itself, spherical in shape,
in size as large as the head of a cat. When I cut it open it was covered with mucus
in the same way as the vagina, and wrinkled with a great number ot folds half an
inch wide. The substance of the vagina was so hard that I could scarcely cut it with
a knife. The ligaments of the uterus and of the fallopian tubes had precisely the same
structure as those of a horse.
‘The anus is situated 84 inches below the pudenda. It is closed by a sphincter
that is not very tightly contracted. In diameter it is 4 inches wide. The sphincter is
white; the inside coating of the rectal intestine is smooth, slippery, olive-gray, just
as in horses, where it is sometimes black, sometimes white spotted.
DESCRIPTION OF THE INTERNAL PARTS.
I opened the heads of four animals, and with the greatest painstaking I searched
for the stones, incorrectly so called, of the manatee. But so far was I from being able
to find anything in the least like a stone or bone that from this I decided that either
those bones were not found in all of them, or were found only in certain climates, or, _
what seemed more probable, that Schréder and others who describe these bones as
having the form of a ball, had, like too superficial and untrustworthy compilers, given
it this round form after the analogy of the bezoar stone, and that they had never
with their eyes seen stones or bones of the manatee as they described; and so we
should rather understand that they meant the masticatory bones, or those white tooth
masses to be found in the palate and inferior maxilla; and this was the more likely,
as the description given by the eminent Samuel von Dale in his Pharmacologia
coincides with my own; and his description also corresponds to these masticatory
bones. For he gives, perhaps from autopsy (ex avroy ta), because he did not under-
stand the mechanism of these bones, the following description: “The stone of the
manatee is a white crustaceous bone similar to ivory, taken from the head, and it is of
various forms,” by which he no doubt meant to indicate the openings and meanderings
of various forms to be seen upon the surface of both bones.}
The cranium is very solid; it has but little cerebrum, and the cerebrum is not
separated from the cerebellum by any bony plate. Of the rest I could observe nothing
striking.
The oesophagus or gullet is very capacious. Inside it is surrounded with a
very tough, white, fibrous membrane, and with many perpendicular wrinkles and folds
it goes to the stomach, and there, before it ends, it concludes with a large number
of little triangular appendices one line long, which turn back upward toward the
oesophagus. The use of these is, I think, that they may hinder the reflux of the food
! These bones are undoubtedly the ear bones, and that Steller failed to find them is due to the
fact that he looked for them inside the cranial cavity. The ear bones of Rytina are not unlike those
of the existing Manatee.—ED.
STELLER’S ACCOUNT OF THE SEA Cow. 191
back into the gullet, and at first sight they refute the preposterous opinion that has
been held in regard to the animal’s being a ruminant.
The oesophagus is inserted into the stomach nearly at the middle, as in the horse
and the hare.
The stomach is of stupendous size, 6 feet long, 5 feet wide, and so stuffed with food
and seaweed that four strong men with a rope attached to it could with great effort
scarcely move it from its place and drag it out.
The coats of the stomach could not by any means be separated; together they
were 3 lines thick. A very strange fat omentum 2 lines thick surrounds the stomach.
In the upper part it adheres firmly at the middle to the membranous coat of the
stomach; for the rest, it is detached and seems more to warm the stomach with its
own heat than to hold it in place. The inner coat of the stomach is white, smooth,
and not wrinkled nor villous. But what was most peculiar, and perhaps incredible
to many, is that I found contained in the stomach, and not far from the entrance of
the oesophagus into the stomach, an oval gland as large as a man’s head, and grown
fast to it something like a large aneurism between the muscular and fibrous (nervosa)
coat; this gland opened through the villous coat with many pores and openings and
exuded into the cavity of the stomach a great quantity of whitish liquid, in consis-
tency and color like pancreatic juice. I had as a witness of this curious phenomenon
the assistant surgeon, Bettge. What the character of this juice was I discovered by
a double chance experiment; when I inserted a silver tube through the pores of
the inner coat, in order to discover by blowing into them the excretory ducts, the
tube came out black, as is wont to happen when silver touches sulphurous acid. I
observed the same thing when I ordered Archippus Konovalow, the helper of the
assistant surgeon, to take out the contents of the stomach with his hands, and when
this was done a silver ring that he had upon his finger was stained with the same color.
The inner coat of the stomach was perforated by white worms half a foot long,
with which the whole stomach, pylorus and duodenum, swarmed; and the worms had
penetrated clear into the cavity of the glands. The gland when cut poured out a
great quantity of juice. After that I could not examine any more stomachs, because
I lacked the necessary assistance; and with the few men I had I could not, if I found
an animal lying anywhere, turn it over upon its back; and therefore I am in doubt
whether this gland is a constant thing or rather the result of some disease.
The pylorus was so large and tumid that at first sight I took it for a second
stomach and was anxious to find the two others, too, because 1 thought the animal
was a ruminant. But when I cut into the pylorus I was otherwise informed, and
from its.being like the stomach I saw that it was the pylorus. But to my misfortune
it happened that the pancreas along with the duct into the duodenum and the ductus.
choledochus were cut, for the simple reason that the stomach could not be taken out
whole with the liver on account of its great size, and besides, my assistants, who had
been hired for just one hour with tobacco, which took the place of money, became
tired of the work. Yet I recognized that the pancreas. was divided into two lobes
and composed of many flat, rather large glands, and that it was, for so large an
animal, comparatively small; for it did not extend in length beyond 4 inches.
There are more intestines in this animal than in any other, except, perhaps, the
whale alone, which hitherto I have not been in a position to inspect. The abdominal
192 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
cavity was so full that the abdomen was tumid and swollen like an inflated skin.
Hence, when the common coverings and muscles of the abdomen were removed and the
peritoneum received ever so slight a wound, the wind came out with such a whistle and
hum as it is wont to come from an aeolipile. For the same reason the whole abdomen
is covered with a very strong double, membranous, fibrous peritoneum for holding in
the intestines. The peritoneum reaches-from the os pubis to the sternum, and is
attached on both sides to the false ribs, from each one of which strong tendons,
spreading out in many rectilinear branches, run from both sides to the linea alba; and
when the muscles of the abdomen on the surface of the peritoneum are removed the
tendons meeting each other and crossing each other make the surface of the peritoneum
tessellated like a checkerboard, and present a pleasing spectacle to the eye. Other iike
tendous grow from the inner side of the ribs and are seen to intertwine (impeat) tightly
with the peritoneum on the inside, increasing its firmness as with horizontal processes.
Both membranes run into a single one in the middle about the linea alba, but toward .
the sides they are double.
When the peritoneum is cut the intestines gush out violently, and without any
outside assistance they move from their original place, because they are found always
so tightly stuffed that from oesophagus to anus they make a solid pack without any
open space. The thin intestines are smooth, rolled up in a great amount of fat; they
are round and 6 inches broad in diameter. If only a very slight aperture should be
made with the point of a knife, the liquid excrement (a ridiculous thing to behold) would
squirt out violently like blood from a ruptured vein; and not infrequently the face of
the spectator would be drenched by this springing fountain whenever some one opened
a canal upon his neighbor opposite, for a joke.
The coecum was very large, as was also the colon, and by a ligament that extended
lengthwise on either side was divided into many little cells. But the valve of the colon
I could not find, search as I might. To be brief, the intestines were different from a
horse’s in size and capacity alone, but not in structure. And so the final product of
this workshop is so like the excrement of horses, in shape, size, smell, and color, and
all other attributes, that it would deceive the most expert stable boy. And I will
not deny that on the first days after our arrival on the island I was ignominiously
deceived; I considered it no slight marvel, but I did not make the boast to have found
what the boys did in the beans ( faba; fabula (?) ), when I found the stuff frozen
together and so inexplicable (cimmeliwm). Now, I, not knowing from whence it came,
argued from utterly false premises to an absolutely true conclusion that America lay
opposite this island and not far away (for up to that time the continent had not been
seen on account of the autumnal fog). But since horses are not kept in Kamchatka,
but are kept in parts of. America, the fact that the dung was brought over there
whole and not dissolved, was an unquestionable proof of the proximity of land.
The whole intestinal tract, from gullet to anus, when this Augean stable was
thoroughly cleansed, measured fully 5,968 inches, and so the intestines are twenty and
a half times as long as the whole living animal.
The mesentery is exceedingly thick and half covered with a mass of little glands,
varying in size from that of the acorn to that of the walnut. The lacteal, as well as
the lymphatic vessels, I could not observe because of the opacity of the very fat, thick
mesentery, although I searched while the intestines were still warm, for the veins are
ouly obscurely and darkly transparent, inasmuch as they are as thick as one’s finger,
STELLER’S ACCOUNT OF THE SEA COW. 193
A very strong, double membrane constitutes the pleura. Inside this, one con-
tinuous muscle an inch thick is interposed and covers both sides.
The urinary bladder, 2 lines thick, was very strong, but not larger than a man’s
head, and smaller than the bladder of an ox.
The trachea is composed of long, cartilaginous circles or semicircles, but has an
entirely anomalous structure. One continuous piece of cartilage is twisted into a
spiral and covered with a strong continuous membraue, both inside and outside. But
the spirals of the trachea are not everywhere equal in breadth, but in some places the
edge of the upper circle is hollowed out to receive the opposite eminence of the lower
circle, and so makes it crooked. And so, by the help of this double membrane that
encircles the trachea, the spirals are kept from being dislocated, either inside or out-
side. Through this mutual intertwining the rings are prevented from being loosened
laterally. By this spiral structure the trachea is separated into branches below the
glottis and reaches to the bronchi, and is seen to be such in the very substance of the
lungs; it is so constructed for no other reason, perhaps, than that by the continuity
of these spirals the huge mass of lungs may be more easily lifted up in breathing; for
neither muscles nor anything else give so much help to the motion of lungs, which
are situated in the back.
The glottis is like that of an ox, but is closed by the epiglottis much more closely
and firmly than is the case in the land quadrupeds, xo the epiglottis is in proportion
much thicker. The diameter of the trachea below the glottis is 4.2 inches.
The thyroid gland is very large, and when cut it poured out a large quantity of
liquid of double consistency and color: that which came from the larger exterior
glands when cut was of the color of milk, but thicker than sheep’s milk, and sweet
to the taste; that which came from the middle portion of the gland or receptacle for
the gland was contained in a membranous sac of its own; it was glutinous and had
the consistency of meal poultice; it was somewhat sweet, with a very slight taste of
bitter, and was yellowish-white in color. It occurred to me only in the last animal
that I opened to make a closer inspection of this gland. I am very sorry that I did
not think of it sooner, and take the pains to have the trachea, with the gullet, heart,
and the rest of the viscera taken out entire. But it was not possible without the
help of many men to do so with an animal so huge. If I had been in a position to do
that, I should have observed whether or not it unloaded this liquid through some tube
into a duct of its own, or into the stomach, as Vercellonius thought, or somewhere
else. I saw the duct only after it was cut, but whither it led I neither saw nor do I
wish to conjecture.'
As to the heart it differs in many respects from the heart of all other animals: (1)
In regard to situation, the apex of the heart stands in a line oblique to the sternum,
the base in a line oblique to the back. (2) As to connection, the heart does not rest
against the mediastinum, but is detached on every side and has no mediastinum at
all. (3) It has a pericardium (but this does not envelope the heart closely) and
a sac; but it forms rather a species of cavity in the thorax and lines the thorax.
Toward the back and the base of the heart the pericardium is nearer to the heart than
it is anywhere else. When the animal is feeding, the heart itself, with the pericar-
dium, hangs not quite perpendicularly but somewhat obliquely from back to sternum;
and so there the pericardium takes the place of a mediastinum. Lower down toward
the abdomen the pericardium is fastened to the inner wall of the diaphragm, and with
5947—pPr 38——13
194 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
it constitutes one wall; and so it rests against the pleura at the sides. (4) As to size,
‘when placed in a scale it weighed 342 pounds, and was from base to apices 2 feet 2
inches long, and from the extremity of one auricle to the other 23 feet broad; and so
it was broader than it was long. (5) As to form, it was broad and thick, rather
than long, and what was the greatest peculiarity of all it ended, not like a top in
one apex but, in accordance with the number of ventricles, in two apices. Now, this
slit in the apex extends to one-third the length of the heart, and from there on the
two apices coalesce in one and form the septum of the heart, dividing the veutricles.
The left apex is just a little longer than the right and thicker in circumference. The
ventricles of the heart are extended farther below the septum, each into its own apex.
The chordae tendineae and the columnae carniae (cordis trabes) or sulci (furrows)
exceed the equipment of the human heart, not only in size and strength but also in
number. The valves are the same in the pulmonary vein, the vena cava, the aorta,
and the pulmonary artery, as in a man. The base of the heart is surrounded
with a great quantity of thick fat that is placed around it like packing, distributed
everywhere to the thickness of half an inch. Below this the large coronary veins of
the heart are seen, covered inside with little valves which I have never observed any-
where else before in any other animal. With great care I searched for the foramen
ovale and for the ductus arteriosus Botalli, but in vain. When I cut through the
cavity of the pericardium I found it half full of liquid, so that even by this quantity
alone I was led to believe that this liquid was unnatural (praeter naturalem), and that
at the end it had been collected into this cavity, from whatsoever source it may have
been secreted, in consequence of the slow and distressing death of the animal.
The lungs are’ two very long, white lobes that extend to the middle of the
abdomen, one on either side along the dorsal spine. They are, however, detached,
and not fastened anywhere, in which respect they differ from the lungs of birds,
although they agree with them in respect to their position in the back. Either lobe
is covered outside with a very strong membrane, and so if.one should think only of
the external structure and color of the lun Bs one would scarcely consider them to be
lungs at all.
The liver consists of two very large isp and a third of quite peculiar form; the
third is almost square and looks like.a blacksmith’s anvil. It is situated half way
between the two larger lobes, and is raised above them and lies immediately under the
sternum. Outside, the liver is covered with a very strong fibrous membrane, so that
it suggests anything but a liver. Through this membrane, in the gibbous part, the
branches of the coeliac vessels (venae celiacae) excessively tumid, shine through like
a tree, blue in color. When this membrane was cut the aubstanen of the liver
appeared, in color a tawny yellow, like that of an ox, but externally soft and most
delicate in structure, so that at the touch it dissolved as if putrid under my hand.
The animal has no gall bladder. But the ductus choledochus, like that of a horse,
would easily admit five fingers together; and so it was very capacious; it was halfa
line thick and very strong, whitish outside and yellow inside, and, opening into the
duodenum, it coalesces along with the pancreatic duct into one canal.
The kidneys are hidden away in a cavity of the lumbar region on either side of
the dorsal spine. They are 32 inches long and 18 inches wide; they have the ordinary:
form of kidneys and are included in a very strong membrane; when this was removed:
there appeared a great number of renules of the same form, as in the seal and the
STELLER’S ACCOUNT OF THE SEA COW. 195
sea otter, but in size they were much larger than these. They were 2 inches long
and 14 inches wide on the surface, and they were pyramidal in form toward the
interior. Each one of these lobules (renunculi) is provided with an urethra, papillae,
and artery of its own. The urethras form six larger principal branches, and at last
carry down the urine through one canal to the urinary bladder. But the ee is
like an elephant’s.
I overlooked the suprarenal capsules (cupsulae atribilariae), and also the aisle
and likewise the.internal organs of generation, and many other things which occurred
“to me in order only when I had no longer time nor opportunity for making full obser-
vations.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE BONES.
As to the bones of the manatee, the bones of the head in respect to strength and
firmness are like those of a horse, but in respect to size and thickness they surpass
the bones of all animals of the land.
The bones of the head taken together are not larger than a horse’s head, nor are
they very different in respect to form and articulation.
-The cranium is anteriorly entire, without any suture, extending toward the nasal
bones' in two hard processes, and joining the nasal and maxillary bones by an
arthrodia, while the nasals join the maxillaries by ginglimus. The nasal bones meet
in a rough suture. The temporal bone joins the cranium by suture, but the occipital
by coalescence, being very hard and almost like rock. The inferior maxillary in
adults consists of one bone, in calves of two.
The head from the nares to the occiput is 27 inches long, and at the occiput 133
inches wide.’
There are sixty vertebrae in all: Six in the neck, nineteen in the back, and
thirty-five in the tail.
There are five pairs of true ribs and twelve of false.
The body of the vertebrae of the neck is narrow, in general structure like the
vertebrae of the horse’s neck. How much they differ in certain special features I will
not indicate, as I have no books nor a horse’s skeleton, nor should I trust my memory
or imagination.
“ The spines of the dorsal vertebrae are ‘sharp and broad, and in lean animals, as
there is no thick cuticle or thick adipose tissue in the way, they are perfectly visible.
The vertebrae of the back in the region of the stomach and liver are ridged on
the inside, but all the rest are rounded and lack this sharpened prominence.
The vertebrae of the tail have each four processes; the lateral processes are long
and broad; the superior process is like the lateral process in width but is shorter; and
the inferior processes (chevrons) are single bones like the Greek lambda in shape,
and are fastened to the body of the vertebrae by a cord and held firmly with very
strong ligaments. All the vertebrae are joined together longitudinally by a great
number of very strong, broad tendons, and are everywhere so covered up that because
of them the bones can not be seen. {
The five pairs of true ribs are joined to the sternum with cartilage. Both the
true and the false ribs are all solid and very heavy and thick.
1 Really the frontals.—Ep. . 2 Given in the previous table as 103.—Eb.
196 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
The sternuin in the upper portion where the ribs are fastened on is cartilaginous;
in the lower portion toward the notch of the heart (scrobiculum cordis) it is bony to a
distance of a foot and a half. . :
In place of the innominate bone of the hip there are two bones, one on each side
in size and form like the ulna of the human skeleton, and joined with very strong
ligaments to the thirty-fifth vertebra on one side and to the os pubis on the other. It
has no clavicles.
The arms consist of two bones, tarsus and metatarsus.
DESCRIPTION OF ITS HABITS AND NATURE.
I should have abstained from an extended description of this animal if I had not
observed that there are in existence some brief and imperfect histories of the
manatee, swarming with fables and false theories after the manner of the last
century and the century before, in which the writers of natural history saw only
through a lattice what they might have seen with their eyes; when investigating the
unknown habits of animals, their character, and a thousand other things that have
nothing to do with their subject, they only involved the best known facts ° in ‘more
than Cimmerian darkness.
Therefore I have endeavored to give a clear and succinct idea of its external form
and that of the structure of its internal parts by stating its agreement and disagree-
ment with others, next by explaining the mechanism and nature of the animal, and
after that the use of its parts for food, medicine, and other things, and finally to add
in perfect truth what I observed with my own eyes in regard to the movements, nature,
and habits of the living animal.
Various things combined to cause me many disappointments. The weather at
the time when the animals were captured was almost constantly rainy and cold; my
observations had to be made in the daytime; then there were the tides of the sea;
and the droves of blue foxes (isatides) would spoil everything with their teeth and
steal from under my very hands; they carried away my maps, book, and ink when I
was studying the animal and worried me when I was writing; the great size of the
animal itself and the bulk of its parts were also a hindrance, as I had to be both
observer and workman, as all the rest were anxious about the construction of a ship
and our liberation from the island. At my own expense I could hire them for barely
an hour at evening time for some of the simpler assistance, and in their ignorance and
dislike for the work they would tear everything to pieces, and acted according to their
own inclinations; so the injury they wrought and the loss they caused ought to be
commended in that they did not desert me entirely. Not a single gut could I get out
entire, nor unfold if I had got it out, so as to do anything worth while; so that for all
the pleasure I got from certain observations I had twice as much trouble and annoy-
ance in consequence of those useful things which I had to leave alone. So I beg of
my kind readers, when they have finished reading this feeble description, that they
will judge it by my will and my zeal rather than by the circumstances.
I had prepared a skeleton of a manatee calf, and I had taken the cutis with the
cuticle separated from it and stuffed it with grass to bring it home with me; but when I
saw that on account of the small size of our craft this was impossible I wanted to bring
with me at least the spoils (skin), but even this wish was vain. I intended to do the
STELLER’S ACCOUNT OF THE SEA COW. 197
same with the sea lion, the sea bear and the sea otter, but I was reckoning without
my host, for in Kamchatka there is no hope of getting everything.
But let me cease from narrating my complaints and my hindrances.
The manatee is not the sea cow of Aristotle, for it never comes upon dry land to
feed. And itis of little consequence whether it is the same or not, for it is not this
animal that he described; indeed, he never saw it and never heard anything about it
to tell. In the second place, I remark that Lopez Francisco Hernandes themselves
saw the animals, and that Clarissimus Clusius and Ray, misinformed by them, have
affirmed many things of the animal that are inconsistent with truth and autopsy.
1. The animal has no hair at all that can properly be called hair. It has bristles
rather, or hollow quills, and these are found only around the mouth and under the feet.
2. The head of this animal is not that of a calf, as Cl. Clusius says; not that of
an Ox, as Hernandes was pleased to describe it; but in the character of its covering it
is like no other animal, but has its own peculiar appearance.
3. The feet are entirely without claws, but skin covers them as it does the bone
of an amputated limb, so that the animal moves upon a skin that is rough with
bristles.
4, As to the fact that Hernandes attributes to this animal nails like those which
“men have, in order to make it more like the Platonic man, that is equally false, for
the animal has no fingers at all a any more than nails, unless perchance the hoof of a
horse, to which it bears a certain resemblance, impresses anyone as being like a
human nail.
5. And so, by the way, it is evident even from this how much obscurity envelops
this subject if we start with false premises and arrive at worse conclusions. For
instance, all authors with one consent agree that this animal ascends rivers and feeds
upon the grass that it may manage to get along the banks, for they may perhaps have
heard from the people that it feeds on herbs; but those are not land herbs, but sea-
weeds.
Nor does the statement have the appearance of truth, that they are in the habit
of lying upon the rocks and of coming up on the land, even if I say nothing of the
fact that the structure of the animal is totally unfitted for moving on dry land.
Indeed, it happened that as the tide went out the waves receded from uuder one of
the animals sound asleep and left him high and dry upon the shore; but he was help-
less and unable to get away, a pitiable object, at the mercy of our cudgels and axes.
That this animal should be tamed seems more likely than do the anecdotes that
are given of its remarkable sagacity, since even the untamable can be tamed through .
its stupidity and greediness. It happened to me on one unlucky occasion that I could
watch the habits and ways of these beasts daily for ten months from the door of my
hut, and I will briefly note down the observations that I made with great care.
‘These animals are fond of shallow sandy places along the seashore, but they like
especially to live around the mouths of rivers and creeks, for they love fresh running
water, and they always live in herds. They keep the young and the half-grown
before them while they feed, but they are careful to surround them on the flank and
rear and always to keep them in the middle of the herd. When the tide came in they
came up so close to the shore that I often hunted them with my stick or lance, and
sometimes even stroked their backs with my hand. If they were badly hurt, they did
nothing but withdraw to a distance from the shore, and after a short time they would
‘
198 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
forget their injury and come back. Most commonly whole families live together in
one community, the male with one grown female and their tender little offspring.
.They appear to me to be monogamous. The young are born at any time of year, but
most frequently in autumn, as I judged from the new-born little ones that I saw about
that time. From this fact, as I noticed that they copulated by preference in the early
spring, I concluded that the foetus remained more than a yearin the womb. From
the shortness of the [uterine] cornua (ev cornuum brevitate), and from the fact that
there are only two mammz, I infer that they have but one calf, and I have never seen
more than one with the mother at a time.
These animals are very voracious and eat incessantly, and because they are so
greedy they keep their heads always under water, without regard to life and safety.
Hence a man in a boat, or Swimming naked, can move among them without danger
and select at ease the one of the herd he desires to strike—and accomplish it all while
they are feeding. When they raise their noses above the water, as they do every
four or five minutes, they blow out the air and a little water with a snort such as a
horse makes in blowing his nose. As they feed they move first one foot and then the
other, as cattle and sheep do when they graze, and thus with a gentle motion half
swim and half walk. Half of the body—the back and sides—projects above the water.
While they feed, the gulls are wont to perch upon their backs and to feast upon the
vermin that infest their skin, in the same way as crows do upon the lice of hogs and
sheep. The manatees do not eat all seaweeds without distinction, but especially (1)
Crispum Brassicae Sabaudicae, with cancellate leaf [sea-cabbage]; (2) that which has
the shape of a club; (3) that which has the shape of an ancient Roman shield; (4) a
very long seaweed with a wavy ruffle along the stalk. Where they have stopped, even
for a day, great heaps of roots and stems are to be seen cast upon the shore by the
waves. When their siomachs are full some of them go to sleep flat on their backs,
and go out a distance from the shore that they may not be left on the dry sand when
the tide goes out. In winter they are often suffocated by the ice that floats about
the shore and are cast upon the beach dead. This also happens when they get caught
among the rocks and are dashed by the waves violently upon them. In the winter
the animals become so thin that, besides the bones of the spine, all the ribs show.
In the spring they come together in the human fashion, and especially about evening
ina smooth sea. But before they come together they practice many amorous preludes.
The female swims gently to and fro in the water, the male following her. The female
eludes him with many twists and turns until she herself, impatient of longer delay,
as if tired and under compulsion, throws herself upon her back, when the male,
rushing upon her, pays the tribute of his passion, and they rush into each other's
embrace. —
Their capture used to be effected with a large iron hook whose point resembled an
anchor’s fluke. The other end was secured by a very long, stout rope to an iron ring.
A strong man took this hook and entered the boat with four or. five others, and while
one held the rudder three or four rowed gently toward the herd. The spearman stood
in the prow of the boat holding the hook in his hand, and struck as soon as he was
near enough. As soon as this was done, thirty men standing on the shore with the
other end of the rope in their hands held the animal, and in spite of its frantic efforts
at resistance they dragged him laboriously toward theshore. The boat was held steady
by another rope, and the men wore the animal out by constant blows, until, tired and
STELLER’S ACCOUNT OF THE SEA COW. 199°
rendered thoroughly passive by the spears, it was finished by their knives and other
weapons and drawn to land. Great pieces were cut from the animal while still alive,
but all that he did was to work his tail vigorously and to brace himself with his fore
feet, so that great pieces of skin were often torn off. Besides, he breathed heavily, as
with a groan, and the blood from the wounded back spurted up like a fountain. As
long as he kept his head under water the blood did not flow out, but as soonas he raised
his head to breathe the blood leaped forth anew. This happened because the lungs,
being situated at the back, were wounded first, and as often as they were filled with
air they increased the force of spurting blood. From this I have concluded that the
circulation of the blood in this animal, as in the seal, is in a double fashion—in the
open air, through the lungs, but under water, through the foramen ovale and ductus
arteriosus, although I did not find both. But I think it happens that they breathe
differently from fishes, so that they can better swallow solid food, rather than for the
sake of promoting circulation (propter deglutitionem solidorum potiusquam propter cir-
culationem promovendam).
The full-grown, very large animals are more easily taken than the young ones,
because the young move about far more vigorously, and even if a whole hook should
be fixed in one of them it can get free by tearing the hook out of the skin. We saw
this done more than once. ,
But if one animal is caught with the hook and begins to plunge about rather vio-
lently those near him in the herd are thrown into commotion as well and endeavor to
assist him. To this end some of them try to upset the boat with their backs, others
bear down upon the rope and try to break it, or endeavor to extract the hook from the
back of their wounded companion with a blow from their tails, and several times they
proved successful. It is a very curious evidence of their nature and of their conjugal
affection that when a female Was caught the male, after trying with all his strength,
but in vain, to tree his captured mate, would follow her quite to the shore, even
though we struck him many blows, and that when she was dead he would sometimes
‘come up to her as unexpectedly and as swiftly as an arrow. When we came the next
day, early in the morning, to cut up the flesh and take it home, we found the male still
waiting near his mate; and I saw this again on the third day when I came alone for
the purpose of examining the entrails.
As to voice, the animal is dumb and utters no sound, but only breathes heavily and
, seems to sigh when wounded. I will not venture to assert how much their eyes and
ears are worth. Anyway, they see and hear but little, because they keep their heads
under water. At all events, the animal himself seems to neglect and despise the use of
these organs. .
Of all those who have written about the manatee, no one has given a fuller or
more careful account than that most curious and painstaking explorer, Captain
Dampier, in his travels, published in English in London in 1702. As I read it I could
find no fault with it, although a few statements did not correspond with our animal.!
For instance, he says that there are two species of manatees, in one of which the eyes
are better than the ears, and in the other of which the ears are better than the eyes.
What he says about the manner of hunting the animal, namely, that the Americans
approach without any noise and without speaking, so as not to frighten the manatee,
1It is of course to be remembered that Dampier was speaking of the true manatees Trichechus
inunguis and T. latirostris.
200 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
is no doubt true of places where they are caught in great numbers and have learned
by long experience that men are dangerous to them. It was the same way with the
otter, seal, and blue fox (satis), which lived in this desert island and never saw a
man before and never were disturbed while lying at their ease. They were slain with
no trouble at all when we first came to Bering Island, but now they have become just
as wild as those living in Kamchatka, and take flight at once as they discover, not
only with their eyes, but even with their sense of smell, the approach of an enemy.
It sometimes occurred that these animals were cast up dead by storms around
the cape called Kronotskoi, as well as about Avatcha Bay. Because of the food they
eat they are called by the inhabitants, in their language, ‘““Kapustnik” (Kraut Esser;
weed eaters); this I learned after my return in 1842.
Now, I must tell the uses to which the parts of this animal are put. The skins,
which are very thick, firm, and tough, are used by the Americans, according to
Hernandes, for the soles of shoes and for belts. I understand that the Tschuktschi
use the skins for boats; that they stretch it with sticks and use it in the same way as
the Koriaks use the skins of the largest sort of seals, called “Lachtak.”
The fat underlies the cuticle and the skin and covers the whole body to the depth
of a span, and in some parts is almost 9 inches thick. It is glandulous, stiff, and
white, but when exposed to the sun it becomes yellow like May butter (butyri maialis).
Its odor and flavor are so agreeable that it can not be compared with the fat of any
other sea beast. Indeed, it is by far preferable to that of any other quadruped.
Moreover, it can be kept a very long time, even in the hottest weather, without becom-
ing rancid or strong. When tried out it is so sweet and fine flavored that we lost all
desire for butter. In flavor it approximates nearly the oil of sweet almonds and can
be used for the same purposes as butter. In a lamp it burns clear, without smoke or
smell. And, indeed, its use in medicine is not to be despised, for it moves the bowels
geutly, producing no loss of appetite or nausea, even when drunk from a eup; and, in
my opinion, it would do calculous persons more good than the masticatory bones or
so-called stones (lapides) of the manatee. The fat of the tail is harder and stiffer and
so more delicate when tried out. The flesh has a grain somewhat tougher and coarser
than beef, and is redder than the flesh of land animals; and what is remarkable, even
in the hottest days it can be kept in the open air for a very long time without any bad
odor, even though all full of worms. I attribute this to the fact that the animal lives
entirely upon seaweed and sea plants. These weeds contain a smaller proportion of
sulphur and more sea salt and nitre. This salt prevents the loss of sulphur and the
softening and decaying of the flesh, preserving it in the same way as salt or brine
sprinkled upon meat; but they work even more powerfully, as these salts are more
intimately mingled with the substance of the flesh and are combined more permanently
with the sulphurous parts (or particles of sulphur?) (cum sulphureis partibus fortius
cohaereant).
Although the flesh needs to be cooked longer, yet when done it has an excellent
taste, not easy to distinguish from that of beef. The fat of the calves resembles fresh
lard, so that you can hardly tell the difference; but their flesh is just like veal. When
boiled it soon becomes tender, and if the boiling is continued it swells up like young
pork so that it takes up twice as much space in the pot as it did before boiling; but
the muscles of the abdomen, back, and sides are far better. The flesiy does not really
refuse to be salted, as many have thought, but the salt only modifies.it, so that it
becomes quite like corned beef and very excellent in flavor. ,
STELLER’S ACCOUNT OF THE FUR SEAL. 201
The internal organs—heart, kidneys, and liver—are very tough, and we did not try -
to do much with them, because we had a great abundance of meat without.
A full-grown animal weighs about 8,000 pounds, or 80 hundredweight, or 200
Russian ‘‘pud.” There is so large a number of these animals about this one island
that they would suffice to support all the inhabitants of Kamchatka.
The manatee is. infested with a peculiar insect something like a louse, which is
wont to occupy and inhabit in great numbers especially the wrinkled arms, the adder,
the teats, the pudenda, the anus, and the rough hollows of the skin. When they bore
through the cuticle and the cutis, here and there wart-like prominences are produced
by the lymphatic moisture that exudes. So these insects attract the gulls to perch
upon the backs of the animals and hunt this dainty with their sharp beaks, thus
rendering the animals, which are worried by the vermin, a friendly and welcome
service. . :
These insects are for the most part half an inch. long, articulated, six-footed,
translucent, white or yellowish. ‘The head is oblong, sharp, larger than a millet seed.
In front extend two short, jointed little antennez half a line long. In place of a lower
mandible it has two slender, two-jointed little arms like a shrimp, very sharp and
pointed on theend. Furthermore, in accordance with the number of his feet, he is com-
posed of six articulations, convex on the back, and one-thira of a line wide. But
the ring of the thorax is twice as wide, and they grow narrower toward the tail. The -
ring of the thorax resembles the half of a lentil. On the sides of this a pair of thick
claws grows, with two joints each. Each claw ends in a flexible point, by means of
which it holds fast to the skin of the manatee; the rest of the legs are rather slender,
all ending in prickly points, and gradually shorter. The Jast two are the shortest,
and, growing out from the orbicular ring of the tail, form the end of the body itself
and steer the insect as it moves.
THE HABITS AND CHARACTERISTICS OF THE SEA BEAR.
Dampier has given us a description of this animal, called Kot by the Russians,
which is, to be sure, brief and imperfect; but he mentions its characteristics so
definitely and plainly and so clearly at first sight that I can not doubt that the
animal is his ‘ sea bear.” i
Report, as I gather from the account of the people, has declared that the sea bear,
as it is called by the Rutheni and other people, is different. They say it is an amphib-
ious sea beast very like the bear, but very fierce, both on land and in the water.
They told, likewise, that in the year 1736 it had overturned a boat and torn two men
to pieces; that they were very much alarmed when they heard the sound of its voice,
which was like the growl of a bear, and that they fled from their chase of otter and
seals on the sea and hastened back to land. They say that it is covered with white
fur; that it lives near the Kuril Islands, and is more numerous toward Japan; that
here it is seldom seen. I myself do not know how far to believe this report, for no
‘one has ever seen one, either slain or cast up dead upon the shore.
(his is certain, whether we consider the appearance of the body or the habits of
the beast, it is more nearly related and more similar to no other land animal than to
a bear.
They are never seen in the gulf of the Penshin Sea nor in the land of Kam-
chatka, nor do they goon shore in the Kuril Islands except very seldom; they are
202 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
not taken except on three Kuril Islands, and from there to the mouth of the river of
Kamchatka, in the so-called Bobrovi [sea otter] Sea, from latitude 50° to 56°. N. These
bears pass by the Kuril Islands in the early spring, and in September they are taken
in small numbers about the mouth of the river called Shupanova and from there
to Cape Kronotski in greater numbers. Here, to be sure, between the two capes,
Kronotski and Shipunski, the sea is quieter and there are more inlets and recesses;
hence the animals delay here longer as they pass by and more of them are caught.
Almost all that are caught in the spring are females, and have the young almost ready
for birth within them. The fwetuses, when removed, are called “ Viporotki.” All that
are found are put on the market. They are no longer to be seén anywhere from the
first of June to the end of August, when, with their young, they return to the south.
For many years these migratory animals have been a source of wonder and specula-
lation to the people who have been interested in hunting them. For, whence did
these animals come in early spring? Whither were these very fat, these pregnant
beasts, going in countless droves? What are the reasons for this migration? Why
do they return with their offspring in the fall so thin, dry, and weak? And whither
are they going?
From the fact that the animals come very fat from the south in early spring and
return thither in the fall, it was naturally inferred that they had taken no long
journey, and that their winter quarters could not be very far distant, else they would:
become too thin upon the way. And from the fact that they were all going toward
the east and were never seen beyond Cape Kronotski or the mouth of the Kamchatka
River, either going east or returning home, they concluded that there must necessarily
be some land, either island or mainland, near the land of Kamchatka and in a line
with Cape Kronotski.
Among amphibious sea beasts these are the migratory animals, like geese, swans,
and other sea birds, or like catauadromous trout among fishes; the blue foxes, hares,
and mice occupy this place among quadrapeds. , Now the migration of the blue fox is
undertaken because food becomes scarce. Birds and fishes migrate to lay their eggs
or to indulge undisturbed their sexual instincts, and, because their strength is reduced
or their feathers shed, and hence they are unable to flee trom their foes until these
can grow once more, solitary places are chosen by birds and quiet lakes by fishes.
Accordingly, for a similar reason, these northern places are chosen by the sea bears;
and these desert islands, lying in great numbers between America and Asia from 50°
to 56° north latitude, are chosen for the following reasons.
That the mothers may bear their young there upon the land and after parturition
recruit their strength; further, that the young may there be brought up.and nourished
and may grow strong enough in three months to follow their parents home in the
autumn. The pups are fed with their mother’s milk for two months. The mothers
have nipples corresponding in form, size, and position with those of the sea otter, and
they are situated near the pudenda. They bear one pup at a birth, very seldom two,
After parturition they gnaw the umbilical cord off from the pups with their teeth, as.
dogs do, and lick it till itis dry, so as to keep the blood soft until it heals; and they
devour the afterbirth greedily. The pups are born with their eyes open, and their
eyes are as large as those of a calf. When they are born they have thirty-two teeth
started out on a level with the gums; but there are four larger canine teeth, ferocious
and suitable for battle, still hidden in the gums. These come out after the fourth day.
When the pups are born they are covered with shining black fur all over. But the
STELLER’S ACCOUNT OF THE FUR SEAL. 203
fourth or fifth day after birth the fur under the front legs changes color perceptibly
and takes on the color of the hair of Pliny’s goat; and after a month the belly and
sides become speckled with an intermixture of hairs of the same color. At birth the
males are much larger and darker, and in the years that follow they get a blacker
coat than the females. These latter become almost wholly ashy gray, but have rusty
spots under the forelegs. The females differ so much from the males in size, weight,
and strength, that a careless observer might almost take them for a different species,
so timid and so little ferocious are they.
The parents love their young exceedingly. The females, after parturition, lie in
crowds upon the shore with their pups and spend much time in sleeping. The pups,
however, directly in the first days play together like children, and imitate their
parents in playing at copulation, and practice fighting until one throws the other to the
ground. When the father sees this he rises up with a growl and hastens to separate
the combatants, kisses the victor, licks him with his tongue, tries with his mouth to
throw him upon the ground, and makes vigorous demonstrations of his love for the
youngster, who struggles bravely against it. In short, he rejoices that he has a son
worthy of himself. But they are less fond of the lazy and ease-loving pups. Hence
some of the young are always near the father, others near the mother. The males are
polygamous; one often has eight, fifteen, or even fifty wives. He guards them with
anxious jealousy, and goes into a rage if another male comes ever so little too near.
Although many thousands of them lie upon the shore together, yet it may always
be observed that they are separated into families—the one male lies with his wives,
his sons, and daughters, as also his yearling sons who are not yet old enough to have
a harem. One family often numbers as many as 120. For this reason also they swim
in the sea in shoals. :
All the married ones are vigorous, but the aged and those that are too old for the
warfare incident to keeping up a harem, or that are driven to it by impotence or the
voluntary desertion of their wives, lead a monastic life, and pass it constantly in fast-
ing and sleep. These married ones are the fattest of all, and without the females
they come first to the island, like scouts. All the males have a strong odor, but
theirs is the worst. These old animals are very cross and very savage. They live a
whole month in one place without food or drink; they sleep all the time, but rage with
exceeding fierceness at all who pass by. Indeed, they are so very fierce and jealous
that they would a hundred times rather die than give up their place. And so if they
see a man they go out to get in his way and prevent his passing; one of the others
meanwhile gets his place and is ready to fight with him. When we were obliged to
come into conflict with them because of the necessity of continuing our journey, we
threw great stones at them. They in turn would rage at the stone thrown at them
just as a dog would, and start up in defiance and fill the air with their terrible roaring.
What we first attempted was to knock out their eyes and break their teeth with
stones; even though wounded and blind they would not give up their place or dare to
leave it;, for if one of them went even a pace away, So many enemies would rise up and
attack him with their teeth as he fled that he should not leave his place, that even if
he escaped our hands he would be torn to pieces by his fellows. Indeed, if one leaves
his place, the rest run up to prevent his flight; one attacks the other on suspicion of
wishing to flee, and from a single attack so many duels originate that oftentimes for 2
or 3 furlongs by the seashore you can see nothing but duels, battles, and a thousand |
sights absurd but bloody, accompanied by a terrific roaring and growling. While
204 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
they fight with one another they let us alone, and we are able to pass by unmolested.
If two fight against one, another comes to his aid, for they can not bear to see an
unequal combat. When there is fighting going on, others who are swimming in the
sea lift up their heads to see the outcome of the contest, and finally they are worked
into such a rage themselves that they come on shore and mix in crowds with the
combatants and make the sight more awful. I often went with my Cossack and
attacked one on purpose and knocked out his eyes; and when I had done that I pelted
four or five others with stones. When these pursued me I took refuge near the one I
had blinded. As he could not see but heard his brothers in pursuit and did not know
whether they were fleeing before us or pursuing us, he would attack his fellows.
Meanwhile, quite af my ease, I would sit down in some high place and watch them
fighting together for some hours. The blind one would attack all that came near,
whether enemies or friends, and was pursued by all as a common foe. If he fled
to the sea he was pulled out again, and on land was torn by their constant blows until
he lost all his strength, and falling down breathed out his angry soul amid constant
groans, and became a prey to the hungry droves of blue foxes which attacked him
with their teeth as he lay there still breathing.
While two often fight for an hour, they make a truce, and both lie down near one
another, panting to get their breath. When they are recovered they both get up and
in gladiatorial fashion take.a certain place and refuse to leave it as long as the fighting
continues. They duck their heads and strike back, and one tries to ward off the blows
of the other. As long as they are evenly matehed. they strike only with their front
flippers, but as soon as one gets the advantage of his adversary he tears him with
his teeth and jaws, shakes him, and throws him down. Then the others, who have
meantime been mere spectators, seeing this, hurry up to assist the weaker one, as if
they were umpires in the fight. With their teeth they inflict wounds as large and
cruel as if they were nade with a saber. At the end of July a sea bear is seldom seen
that is not marked with a wound. After a battle the first thing they do is to go into
the water and bathe their bodies.
They fight mostly for one of three reasons: (1) The most bitter warfare is about
their wives; trouble begins when one steals those of another, or even tries to take the
grown daughters from the father’s family. But the females get up at once and follow
the one that comes out ahead. (2) They fight for their place if one takes the place of
another, or if the space is too small and another, out of lust, gets too near and excites
his suspicion. (3) They fight for right and justice, to settle disputes.
They are very fond of their wives and their young, and are much feared by both.
They get in a towering rage with their young for the most trivial causes and practice
a tyrant’s right.
Often we entered the harem and stole the pups. In these cases, when flight was
possible, if the mother through fear left her pups and did not snatch them up in her
mouth and take them with her, but left them where we could get them, the male
without entering into any quarrel with us snatched the female up in his teeth, lifted
her up high, and threw her in a 1age two or three times against the rocks with such
‘violence that she lay still as if dead. But when her strength returned she wouldcrawl
like a worm as a suppliant to his feet, and kiss him, and sbed tears in such quantities
that they ran down on her breast as from an alembic and made it all wet. Fora time
he would walk back and forth roaring and rolling his eyes terribly, and would shake
his head from side to side like a bear ; but at length when he saw that we were going
STELLER’S ACCOUNT OF THE FUR SEAT. 205
to go away with the pups, he would weep in the same way as the female, and just as
copiously, so as to flood his whole breast, even to his feet, with tears. The same
thing occurs when he suffers grievous wounds or some severe injury which he can not
avenge. I have seen captive seals weep in a similar way.
A second reason why the sea bears in early spring go east to these desert islands
is doubtless this. By rest, sleep, and a three months’ fast, they must rid themselves
of their burdensome fat, in the same way as land bears do in winter. For during the
months of June, July, and August, they do nothing except sleep upon land, or lie at
ease in one spot like a rock, and look at each other, roar, kiss, and stretch, taking
neither food nor drink. One in particular I noticed lying in the same spot for a
whole month. Although at different times I dissected the old males, yet I found
nothing at all in their stomachs except froth and gastric juice, and no faeces in the
bowels. Furthermore, I noted that meanwhile the layers of fat wasted away more
and more, the size of the body becoming diminished and the skin becoming so loose
that it hung like a sack and swayed with each motion of the body. The younger ones
that are not so fat begin to cohabit about the first of July; they are active and run
here and there, living on land and in the sea by turns. This fact convinced me still
further that in accordance with his nature I should call this animal a bear.
They cohabit after the manner of the human kind, the female below and the male
above, and especially near evening time do they desire to indulge their passion. An
hour before, male and female cast themselves into the sea and swim around quietly
together. Then they come back together, and the female lies flat on her back while
the male comes up out of the sea uponher. He seizes herin his arms and indulges his
passion with the greatest heat. During the coition he presses the female down and
buries her in the sand by his weight so that only her head sticks out, and he himself
digs into the sand with his front feet, so that he presses down and touches the female
with his whole belly. For this they choose a sandy spot upon the very shore, where
the waves come even to the place. So absorbed are they and so forgetful of them-
selves that I could stand near them for more than a quarter of an hour without being
observed. And I should not have been seen even then had I not struck the male a
blow, whereupon with a great uproar he attacked me so wrathfully that I got away
with difficulty. But nevertheless when I gained an eminence from which I could look
down he went on for another quarter of an hour with what he had begun.
These animals have three different kinds of speech. ‘To pass away the time while
they lie upon the land they cry out, and their voice is not at all different from the
‘lowing of cows when deprived of their calves. In battle they roar and growl like a
bear; and if they get the victory they utter a very sharp and often repeated note like
our common crickets. But when wounded and overcome by their enemies they groan
terribly or hiss like a cat or sea otter.
When they come out of the sea they shake their bodies and wipe off their breasts
with their back flippers, and smooth their fur. The male places the tip of his lips to
those of the female as if to kiss her. When the sun shines clear in the sky they lie
down and raise their back flippers in the air and move them in the same way as a dog
wags his tail. They lie sometimes on their back and sometimes on their belly like a
dog; sometimes curled up in a ball, sometimes stretched out on one side with their
front flippers’ resting on the side. But although they sleep soundly, and though a
man may approach ‘softly, nevertheless they are speedily aware of his presence and
get up, whether informed by hearing or the sense of smell I know not.
206 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
The very large old ones never run away from a man or a crowd of men, but. pre-
pare at once for battle. Nevertheless, I have seen whole herds put to flight if a man
whistle. The females flee in haste, and likewise whole droves of adult males, even
many thousands, are driven in headlong flight to the sea, if suddenly, when they feel
secure, they are attacked with a great noise. But when, as often, we drove many
thousands of them before us into the ocean, those that were swimming accompanied us
constantly as we walked along the shore, gazing in wonder upon their unusual guests,
They swim so rapidly that in an hour they can easily swim two German miles. If
they are wounded at sea with a harpoon they draw the boat with the hunter after them
so swiftly that the boat seems to fly, and they often overturn the boat and drown the
hunter unless the steersman prevents it by watching and skillfully directing his
course; they swim with the back sloping, and the front flippers are never seen, but the
back ones sometimes project up from the water. On account of the open foramen they
stay a long time under water. But they afterwards come up to breathe, with their
strength much exhausted; they delight to swim around near the shore and swim now
prone and now on their backs, but not far under water, so that I was always able to
make out their course. They often raise their hind flippers out of the water. When
they have breathed enough, or when they first start into the water from the land,
they plunge into the water head first like a wheel, as do almost all the larger sea
beasts—the otter, the lion, the balaena orca, and the porpoise.
When they climb a rock, they take hold of it with their front flippers as seals do,
and drag the rest of their body behind them, bending the back like a bow and holding
the head low, to give elasticity to the body. In swiftness they almost if not quite
excel the swiftest runner, and the females are especially fast. There is no doubt that
many of us would have been killed by them if their legs were worth as much on land
as they are in water. And, indeed, it is not wise to fight with them even ina large
level place, for there one can get away with difficulty. Steep places were always our
‘refuge of safety, because they can not climb up them. They sometimes laid siege to
me for more than six hours, and at length compelled me, at very great peril of my
life, to ascend a precipice, and in that way to escape from the infuriated beasts.
If I were required to state how many.I saw on Bering Island I should truthfully
say that I could not guess—they were countless, they covered the whole shore. Not
infrequently they obliged me and my Cossack, in our rambles this way and that
through the entire island, to leave the shore and prosecute our journey with difficulty
over the tops of the bills.
The sea otters are very much in fear of the sea. bears, and very seldom come in
among them, and it is the same with the seals. But the sea lions live among them in
great herds and are much feared by them. They always have the best places. The
sea bears do not like to stir up quarrels when the sea lions are present for fear they
have these savage beasts as umpires; for they run up immediately, as I have sometimes
seen. So also they dare not try to prevent their females from playing with the sea lions.
And, by the way, this is a curious fact, that the sea bears are not found every-
where on the shores of their islands, as are the sea cows, the seals, the otter, and the
sea lions, but only on the southern shore, which faces Kamchatka. The reason of this
is obvious—for they see this part of the island first when they come on their journey
eastward from Cape Kronotski. They are not found in the northern part unless they
have strayed there by mistake.
STELLER’S ACOOUNT OF THE FUR SEAL. 207
Now about the hunting of these animals.’ Those that we first blinded on land with
stones were afterward dispatched with clubs without any artifice. But the beasts are
so tenacious of life that two or threé men beating only their heads with clubs could
scarcely kill them with 200 blows, and frequently would have to rest and refresh
themselves two or three times, When the cranium is broken into little bits and
almost all the brains have gushed out, and all the teeth have been broken, he still
attacks them with his flippers and keeps on fighting. I have purposely broken the
skull and put out the eyes of one and then left him, and afterwards.for more than two
weeks he still stood alive and unmoved, like a statue, in the same place.
In the sea around Kamchatka they very seldom come ashore on the mainland,
but they are wounded at sea by the natives with an iron spear called “nosok,” which
detaches from the handle and remains in the body, and this iron part of the spear,
because inside it is oblique to the wound, sticks fast. 1t is bound to a stout thong,
the other end of which is held by those sitting in the boat. But the wounded animal
flees very swiftly like an arrow, and takes the boat and men along with him, until he
pauses, worn out and exhausted with loss of blood. As soon as he pauses they draw
him up to them by the thong and pierce him with spears, and if he attempts to upset
the boat they crush his front flippers and his head with axes and clubs, lift him dead
into the boat, and hasten home. By preference in spring they kill the pregnant
females and the young males. But they dare not attack the large, old males, but
when they see one they say “ Sipang” (the devil), for they mean by that to call the
big fellow evil and destructive. So likewise they say if they see a sea lion or a very
large sea bear on land when they have no companion or weapons.
Very many sea bears die a natural death from old age on this island every year,
and as many more fall in battle and die from the wounds that they have received; so
that in some parts the whole shore is covered with bones and skulls, as if great
battles had been fought there.
Ican not omit to mention that these animals have a very large thymus gland,
composed of many little glands, and rolled up in a membranous sac. I have made
an incision into a branch of the main artery of the lungs, and when I inserted a little
tube and blew in with my mouth I discovered that not only the ventricles of the
heart but also the thymus gland swelled up. I would rather not suggest what others
may couclude in regard to this, unless I could make many more experiments on other
sea beasts. ng
Here, at the end, I will mention that it is a very curious thing what the explorer,
Dampier, says of the Island Ferdinand (Juan Fernandez), below 36° south latitude;
he asserts that there upon the land he found the whole shore covered with countless
herds of seals, sea lions, and sea bears, in the same way as we found it in Bering
Island. This does not lead me to believe that these animals come hither from those
southern latitudes, for this distance would be far too great, but I gather from it two
facts: first, that the sea beasts of the southern hemisphere are the same, or not
very different, from those of the northern in about the same longitude; and, second,
it is credible that our sea bears spend the winter at about the same degree of nor
latitude. Perchance some time fate will grant that since we have found their summer
camping ground others may somewhere discover their winter home; if this be not
the Jand called “ Compagnie land,” perchance it may be a land lying not far away and
some time to be discovered.
208 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
I have had two pictures made, of which the former represents a male resting on a
rock, as they are generally seen; and the second, a smaller female lying upon her back.
Thave her represented in this position chiefly for the reason that the shape of the hind
leg may appear, and this could not be brought out true to nature if she were in sitting
position.
As to style and arrangement of matter, pressure of duties does not permit me to
spend too much time in perfecting any one thing, unless I am to allow many things to
go to waste upon my hands. 1 therefore set out my porridge in carefully made earthen
vessels. If the vessel is an offense to any one, he will perform for me and others a most
friendly service if he will pour it all into a gold or silver urn. As to the fact that I
have noted the minutest circumstances, I did it for this reason: that I might omit
nothing that I learned from careful watching. For the rest, I guarantee that I say
nothing that is not most true; an account can always be made shorter, but not longer
or fuller, if it has been from the outset, restricted within rather narrow limits.
HABITS AND CHARACTERISTICS OF SEA LIONS.
These beasts are indeed terrible to look upon when alive, and they far surpass
the sea bear in strength and size as well as in endurance of the different parts. They
are hard to overcome and fight most viciously when cornered. They also give to the
eyes and mind the impression of a lion. Nevertheless, they fear so much the very
sight of man that if they see one even at a distance they rush in headlong flight from
the land into the sea. But if, when they are sound asleep, @ Man comes up near and
wakes them by a blow from his stick or by a loud noise, they take to flight at once,
panting likea furnace, and with their. limbs shaking so with fear that they can not
control them. But if one of them is cornered and all chance for flight is shut off he
turns against his enemy with a great roar, shakes his head in wrath, rages, cries out,
and puts even the bravest man to flight. The first time that I tried this experiment
was almost the last of me. On this account this animal is never hunted at sea by
the Kamchatkan tribes, because he overturns the boat of the hunters and slays them
most savagely. Nor does anyone dare engage him even on land in open battle, but
he is caught by guile when off his guard and quite at ease, or even sound asleep.
When the beast is asleep on land, the hunter who has most confidence in his strength
and swiftness, creeps silently up to it with the wind in his face and plunges into it
under its fore flippers an iron or bone spear called a “nosok.” It is made to fly out
of its socket and is fastened to a thong made from the skin of this very animal. The
other hunters keep the thong, which is wound several times around a rock or a stake
driven deep into the ground. While the beast that has been wounded and aroused
attempts to get away, the other men shoot arrows at it from a distance, or transfix it
with a second spear fastened toa thong. At length when its strength is gone they
pierce it with spears and kill it with clubs. But when they attack it they attack it
asleep on the shore where there are few rocks; they shoot poisoned arrows, and then
run away. The animal is compelled by the poison to come on shore, as the salt sea
water increases the pain of the wounds; and then, if the place is a convenient one, he’
is stabbed, or otherwise, if left to himself, he w ill die of the poison in- twenty-four
hours. <All who have the skill and iinvfag to hunt this beast, and who have killed .
many, are held in great honor by their fellows, and are regarded as heroes and braves.
Accordingly the love of glory, as well as the excellence of the flesh, turns many to the
aa
STELLER’S ACCOUNT OF THE SEA LION. 209
hunt and makes them ready for hazardous enterprises. They often load their boats
with two or even three of these animals, till they threaten to sink in the water. But
they are so skillful that this seldom happens in the smooth sea, even though the rim
of the boat may be even with the surface of the water. They consider it a great
disgrace if, through fear of death, they abandon the quarry that they have once secured,
so that if their hands should not avail to bail out the water they would sink. To
hunt this beast the bravest men go out to sea in their light canoes four or five German
miles-to the uninhabited island called Alait. And it notinfrequently happens that the
sailors without a compass are taken by a contrary wind four, five, or even eight days
out to sea without anything to eat, and see neither island nor mainland, and have
only the rising and setting of the sun and moon to direct them.
The blubber, as well as the sweet flesh, is well flavored and highly prized, and
the gelatinous flippers are considered a prime delicacy. The fat is not greasy, like
that of seals and whales, but is stiff, and resembles that of sea bears in color, but
not in flavor and smell. The fat of the young is sweeter than mutton tallow and
resembles the marrow of leg bones. From the skin they make thongs, the soles of
shoes, and even shoes themselves and leggins.
They are polygamous. ‘One male has two, three, or four females. The pups are
born on land about the beginning of June—one only at a birth, and are suckled by their
mothers. They come together in August and September, renee the young remains in
the womb nine months, as indeed seems reasonable. They copulate like the sea bears.
The males hold the females in great respect and do not treat them so harshly as the
sea bears do their wives. They delight exceedingly in the caresses of the females
and count their affection worthy of much more demonstrative return. The males, like
the females, have a very indifferent love for the pups. The mothers when asleep some-
times crush the young at their udders by their weight and kill them, as I have often
seen, and they were not the least bit disturbed when, as often, I cut the throats of the
young, even before the eyes of their parents and threw the entrails tothem. The pups
are not so lively and active as those of the sea bears, but sleep all the time or play a
little ina lazy way, and indulge in amatory sports. At eventide the mothers with the
young go out into the sea and swim quietly near the shore. When the pups get tired
of swimming they are wont to perch upon the backs of their mothers and rest. But
the mother rolls over like a wheel and shakes the lazy pups off, and accustoms them to
swimming. As an experiment I have thrown young sea bears and equally young sea
lions into the water; but they were so far from being able to swim or to use their flip-
pers well that they beat the waves irregularly with their flippers and hurried to the
shore. The pups are twice as large as those of sea bears.
. Although these animals are exceedingly afraid of man, yet I have seen them grow
used to him and become tame by meeting him frequently without injury, and especially
at that time when the pups had not yet learned to swim easily. I lived a season in
the midst of a herd of them, and for six whole days on a spot above them, where from
my hut I watched their habits carefully. They lay around me in every direction; they
watched my fire and what I did, and did not run away any longer even when I walked
around among them and took their pups and killed them and examined them. They
practiced coition, fought jealously for their wives and for the best places, and fought
most bitterly in just the same way and with the same motions and the same héat as
the sea bears do. One from whom a female had been taken fought with all the rest for
5947—pT 3——14
210 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
three whole days, and was wounded all over in more than a hundred places. The sea
bears never mingle in their fights, but if a quarrel arises they run away, looking ail
around them. They yield them the choice of places and allow their females and pups
to indulge in various sports, and dare not object. As far as possible they avoid all
dealings with the sea lions, but these, uninvited and unwelcome, often mix in their
quarrels, The old and decrepit among them grow white around the head, and beyond
all doubt these beasts are very long-lived. They scratch their ears and head with
their hind flippers, as the bears do, and stand, swim, lie down, and walk in the same
way. They low like cows and the young bleat like sheep, and while I was among them
it seemed to me as if I were playing shepherd and were mingling with herds of cattle.
The old and worn-out emit an odor, but far milder and less offensive than that of the
sea bears. They are found in this island in spring, as well as in winter and summer,
but only in certain parts—those that are rocky and near precipices. Nevertheless,
others come here every year along with the sea bears. I have seen them in great
numbers along the American shores. They are found in Kamchatka almost all the
time. They do not go above 56° north latitude. They are hunted a great deal near
Cape Kronotski and around the island Ostrovnaia, around Avatcha Gulf, and from
here as far as Cape Lopatka. They are found in the Kuril Islands and almost as far
as Matmej Island. Captain Spangberg on his chart has named a certain island from
the number of these animals that he found upon it, and from a cliff overhanging their
city, the “Palace of Sivutch.” The sea lion is never seen in the Penshin Sea. The
reasons why these beasts come hither in June, July, and August, are for quiet, for par-
turition, for rearing and teaching the pups, and for copulation. Before and after this
period they are found in greater numbers on the shores of Kamchatka.
As to the food of these beasts, they prey upon fish and seal especially, and also
upon otter and other sea animals. The old ones eat little or nothing at all in June
and July, but take their ease and sleep, and at the same time become very thin.
HABITS AND CHARACTERISTICS OF THE SEA OTTER.
These animals are very beautiful, and because of their beauty they are very valuable,
as one may well believe of a skin the hairs of which, an inch or an inch and a half in
length, are very soft,,very thickly set, jet black and glossy. The soft underfur also
among the longer hairs is black; but the tips, or the hairs from the middle on, are
black, while the bases or roots are whitish, lustrous like silk, and silvery. The most
valuable skins are almost perfectly black; others are found with silvery fur shining
quite white all over, but they occur very rarely. Although as time goes on they change
the color of their hair, they are still much more constant than the sables, and sable
Skins never shine with so deep a natural blackness as the otter’s. The one thing to
be deplored is that the skin is too thick and heavy, and for that reason is less pleasing
to the eyes of the gentler sex; for the skin of an adult otter weighs, on an average, 34
pounds,
Rarely is an otter caught that is black all over; the head of the best grade of
otters is silvery gray; the cheaper grade of otter has a head of a tawny color and
yellowish fur; and the lowest grade of otter is that which has no long hair, and is
clad only in-short, dirty-gray fur. With these animals matters stand like this: the
skins of certain animals always grow red hairs, rarely very long, while the animals
themselves are stupid, sluggish, surly, sleepy; they lie forever asleep upon the icy
rocks; they move slowly, and can be captured without any painstaking or ingenuity,
STELLER’S ACCOUNT OF THE SEA OTTER. 211
as if they knew that because of the inferiority of their hides they were not very
seriously exposed to death. Many of them, however, have most beautiful tails, covered.
with long, black fur. From these considerations I have come to two conclusions.
(1) That the skins of sluggish animals are overgrown with only short hair, for the
simple reason that in summer time, while they roll about in the sand, the longer hairs
are worn off by the constant friction, and in the winter, while they lie upon the damp
ice, the longer hairs stick fast to the ice, and are pulled off when the animal moves.
This I have seen with my own eyes. (2) That black hair, through the influence of
air and sunlight, grows lighter and feebler, and so the tail, as it is curled under the
lying animal, is less exposed to friction and to the rays of the sun, and so preserves
the original blackness and length of hair. The more active and cunning and fleet the
animals are, the more beautiful is the fur with which they are covered, and .again,
unlike the others, they are captured but rarely, and that only by well-laid snares.
Such animals are so careful about their own safety that if they come out on dry land
alone to sleep, they look around very carefully, and, inasmuch as their eyes are not
very strong when on land, they turn their noses in every direction before they go to
sleep, to make sure that no man is in the neighborhood—and then, even though they
perceive no sign whatever of danger, they do not get far away from the sea. They
often wake up with a start, look around, and never sleep very soundly. But if whole
herds sleep together on the land, the finest looking leaders [of the herd] stand on
sentinel duty, and arouse the rest if any danger threatens.
The skins of females can be distinguished from those of males at the very first
sight, because they have shorter, finer, more beautiful hairs on their backs and longer
ones on the belly; the flesh of the females is more tender, more savory, and more
delicious because of the distribution of the fat. In the former respect they are differ-
ent from quadrupeds and birds, for in these classes it is the males that are covered
with the more beautiful hair and feathers and the brighter colors.
They do change their hair, however, like land animals and birds, but with this
two-fold difference: some lose their hair in the months of July and August, but they
lose very little of it; the others change their color somewhat and come out a darker
gray, and are for that reason called by the Russians and merchants “Letnie Bobry,”
and are sold at a smaller price. The most prized skins are those which are taken
from animals in March, April, and May.
The adult males are called “ Bobry,” the females, “ Matka,” and the one-year-olds,
which have taken on the soft, short fur, ‘ Koschloki”; the oul are called ‘ Medviedki,”
or “little bears,” because they have very long, thin, tawny hair like bears; their skins
can scarcely be distinguished from the skins of the young bear, but after five months
they lose their hair, and then they are called “ Koschloki,” as intermediating between
the cubs and the one-year-olds, and are then covered only with soft, downy far.
Upward of fifteen years ago, the. finest skins were exchanged by the natives in
the land of Kamchatka for knives and firearms, and were sold by Russian merchants
for 5 or 6 rubles; those of medium quality sold for 4 rubles; those from the Yakut sold
for 8 or 10 rubles. But ever since the Chinese began to appreciate and earnestly to
covet these wares the finest skins of the adult animal were sold even in the land of
Kamchatka for 25 and 30 rubles; those of medium quality for 17, while 1-year-olds
(those called ““Koschloki”) brought 8 rubles, and cubs: I ruble. Tails were held at a
particularly high-price, and were purchased for 14 or even 2 rubles, and were much
sought after for caps and mittens.
212 THE FUR ‘SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Very few are brought to Russia; almost all are taken to China, where the best
ones command a price of 70 and 80-rubles. In 1735 and 1736 they were quite ready to
offer 20 rolls of “Kitaika” for one skin, while the Russians on their return to Irkutsk
obtained for it 100 rubles.
These skins, moreover, being rather heavy, are for that reason dearer to the
Chinese than the skins of sables and foxes, and they are better suited to increase the
weight of the too light silk gowns. In addition to their beauty they make the silk fit
more closely to the body and resist the wind better; and for those reasons the Chinese
make of this fur borders of a hand’s breadth and put them around their robes on every
side; and this. has become the fashion also with both sexes, not among the tribes of
Kalmue and Siberia only, but also in Russia. In the land of Kamchatka nothing is
considered a finer adornment than a dress sewed up like a sack (a “Parka,” they call it),
made out of the white skins of reindeer fawns (called “Piischiki”) and having a border
of sea otter fur around it. Mittens and caps are also made of sea otter fur.
In addition to their weight, these skins have also this disadvantage, that they
retain too little heat about the body and become moist, although, because of their
thickness, they do afford excellent protection against the violence of the wind.
Up to a few years ago the people there also used to make their clothes out of
those skins, as they did long ago out of the skins of foxes and sables (Zobelae), but
that custom has gone out of date now that their value has increased so much; and
they are not very much aggrieved at that change of fashion, for the people there have
always looked on dog skins a8 warmer, more beautiful, and more lasting.
The hides of the cubs have this advantage, that they heat the body less than fox
skins do.
These animals are captured only on the shore of Kancnathe, from 50° to 56°
north latitude. They are never seen in the Penshin Sea, nor are they observed to go
beyond the third Kuril Island. From this fact, and from the hunting of the animal,
the ocean from the neighborhood of Lopatka to the Promontory of Kronotski has
received the name of “Bobrovi Sea.” For a long time back it has been believed by
the people, as well as by Russians, and asserted that this animal is not an Asiatic,
but a stranger in that region and a foreigner from other lands that lie quite near
Kamchatka, where they are taken every year. When the east wind blows for two
days together in the winter time, they are floated over with the ice on which they
have been lying, and so are caught. Those which escape death in the winter stay in
the summer about the rugged and rocky shores of Kamchatka and the Kuril
Islands, give birth to their young, and remain there; for they have not the strength
to swim away, and, on account of the foramen ovale of the heart, they can not while
swimming over the sea seek their food in its depths; neither can they hold out
against hunger for three or four days.
The hunting of the otter is on this wise: if the winter has been cold and great
quantities of ice are repeatedly blown over, there will be an abundance of sea otter
not only in winter, but also, from those that survive, in the Summer; and, on the
other hand, from the year 1740 to 1743 there was no cold weather in this locality, no
ice could be frozen about the shores and brought over there, and so the otter were
few and the hunting exceedingly limited.
The region famous for the hunting of the otter twenty years ago extended from
the mouth of the Kamchatka to the Tchaschma, and was more renowned for that
STELLER’S ACCOUNT OF THE SEA OTTER. 213
than any other place; now, however, it is but little and rarely used. Hunters came
in greater numbers about the Promontory of Kronotski, which has come to be most
frequented next after the mouth of the river Kamchatka; but there also the catch has
grown smaller. About Ostrovnaia, the Gulf of Avatcha, the Promontory of Lopatka,
and the first three Kuril Islands they are now caught in much greater numbers than
before. The Penschin Sea they do not enter, although crabs and other shellfish are
to be found there in at least as great if not greater numbers than on the Kamchatkan
shore. But why they do not go beyond the first three Kuril Islands, although they
might easily pass from one to the other and so on clear to Japan, admits of a three-
fold explanation. (1) Because the sea lions and sea bears, inhabiting the desert
islands in very great numbers, devour the sea otter and injure them in every possibie
manner, the latter are very much afraid of them and are driven away. (2) There is
never any ice in those regions, and so no sea otter are ever brought. (3) The distance
between America and the farther Kuril Islands is very great, and there are no islands
in between, and so these animals cannotreach them by swimming. Besides, these crea-
tures are not naturally of a roving disposition; but if they might find a suitable place
designed, as it were, for them, even so the inhabitants of the first islands are so bent
on hunting them that those which have managed to escape in winter rarely escape in
summer. They hunt the otter in all seasons, but in most diverse manner according to
the demands of the season. They are captured in greatest numbers in winter, par-
ticularly in the months of February, March, and April, but their capture is made at
the expense of tremendous exertion, great daring, and not infrequently loss of human
life. When in the months before mentioned the east wind blows for two or three days
in succession, a vast quantity of ice is carried over from the American shore; the ice
comes over even more quickly if it has been carried away in the autumn and held in
the channel between the islands. While the wind blows, the hunters lie in wait
in their straw-covered huts; the ice drifts in in so great quantities that it fills
the surface of the sea for several miles out from land in the region of the Kuril
Islands, and oftentimes connects the Promontory of Lapatka with the first island.
Then the hunters, arming themselves with clubs and knives, put on their snowshoes
(called “lapki”), and either alone or attended by dogs go out upon the ice. With
their clubs they kill the otter they find in a few moments, moving continually the
while that they may not break the ice. They have the skins carefully pulled off, and
leave the carcasses, if they be too far from the shore. Meanwhile the dogs hunt out
others. When the otter catches sight of the dog and the dog stops, the otter is
brought terrified to bay, and attempts to hide, until the hunter, following the foot-
prints of the dog, comes upon his quarry and dispatches it. So eagerly do they pursue
the hunt that they often go out so far upon the ice that they get out of sight of land.
If, as often happens, the ice is brought in with a gale or tempest and a heavy fall
of snow, the catch is even larger, but fraught with greater danger; for when the
hunters can not look ahead nor see the holes in the ice at their feet, they must follow
their dog or mere blind chance. This most venturesome chase can not be witnessed
from the land without terror. The ice rises and falls with the waves; the hunters walk
now upon a mountain which was but a moment before a valley or a deep pit; again they
are lifted up on high, and again they sink and disappear from sight. But the best and
easiest hunting takes place when the ice remains on the shore for a Jong time; for while
the tempest lasts, the otter, not knowing whether they are on the floating ice or on the
214 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
land, go inland 5, 10, and even 15 furlongs. For they are misled by the roaring of
the wind in the trees and bushes and think they are going toward the sea, and that
what they hear is the roar of the waves. In this way a single huntsman often kills as
many as thirty or forty or more, and saves the meat as well as the skin.
While the people hunt upon the ice, they are generally very careful to observe the
winds, for fear that by adverse winds they be carried, as not infrequently happens,
out into the open sea. It is not arare thing for them to float up and down with the
ice upon the waves for three, four, five, and even six days, and then, with favoring
fortune and favoring winds, to be brought in again and come safely to shore. When
the wind blows from the other quarter the ice is drifted away. If it drifts along the
shore, the hunters follow the ice continually, for while the ice is drifting away, whether
by day or by night, the otter try to get back upon it again, and so the latter part of
the hunt is often richer than the beginning. The hunters wear snowshoes, in order
that the ice, which is often very thin, may bear their weight and keep them from
breaking through. Each shoe is from 5 to 6 feet long, 8 inches wide, and is fastened
to the foot with straps.
As this hunt takes place upon the ice, it is considered good news all through the
Kuril Islands, Lopatka, Kronotski, and Avatcha that the ice has come. Moreover,
besides the otter, seals also and sea lions are brought in upon the ice.
The hunting of the otter is planned for in the winter time, because the colder,
windier, and stormier the winter the greater the catch, and the milder the winter the
poorer the catch. Although in the years 1740, 1741, and 1742 great quantities of ice
with great numbers of otter drifted in, still the catch was very insignificant; but the
reason was that the ice was very thin and would not hold the hunters.
In summer the otter are caught in four ways. (1) While lying upon their backs
asleep at sea they are speared from boats with harpoons. (2) Even when awake they
may be driven about in the sea by two boats until they are tired out and then speared,
for they can not live under water for more than two minutes without breathing. If pur-
sued moderately, therefore, they swim along and soon get so out of breath that they can
flee no farther and are forced to stop. (3) When the tide is out they take refuge on
the rocks that rise up above the surface of the sea. There they sleep and are killed
by the hunters with clubs. Before the advent of the Russians they used in the same
way to come out on Jand to sleep on the shores of Kamchatka and the Kuril Islands;
but ever since they began to be hunted for their skins to satisfy the avarice of man
they are never caught upon the mainland, or very rarely, when they have come there
unaware. (4) They are caught in nets. The nets are spread above the water and
tied with stones to hold them firmly in position in not very deep places, where sea
weed grows in great quantities, for the otter feed upon shellfish and crustaceans that
live concealed in the sea weeds, and there they are caught in the nets or are killed
by the hunter, who comes upon them in his boat. Sometimes they carve out wooden
otters, paint them black, and set them afloat. The otter, seeing these images, swim
up and indulge in various strange capers about them; and by this trick are caught.
When they are caught in the nets they are so frantic that in their despair they bite
off their front feet; but if a male and a female are caught together they both lacerate
their skins terribly and knock out their eyes.
We killed them on Bering Island with spears, nets, aud, when they were lying
asleep or in the act of copulating, with clubs.
STELLER’S ACCOUNT OF THE SEA OTTER. 215
They were found there in so great abundance that from the beginning our numbers
did not suffice to kill them. They covered the shore in great droves; and as the
animal is not migratory, but is born and bred there, they are so far from fearing man
that they would come up to our fires and would not be driven away until, after many
of them had been slain, they learned to know us and run away. Nevertheless we
killed upward of 800 of them, and if the narrow limits of the craft we constructed had
permitted we should have killed three times as many.
As to the beauty of the animal, and particularly of its skin, this sea otter is alone
incomparable, without a peer; it surpasses all other inhabitants of the vast ovean,
and holds the first rank.in point of beauty and softness of its fur.
As to its habits, it loves to live both in the water and on the land; but for the
sake of sweet peace the otter inhabits in great droves, by preference, the great islands
of the ocean. For getting food it seeks, when the tide is out, the shallow, rocky reefs
overgrown with seaweed, and there devours crustaceans, mussels, clams, snails,
limpets, polyps, cuttlefish. Only when forced by hunger to do so, do they eat sea-
weed; but they eat fish, smelt, and a little fish called in Kamchatkan idiom the “ Uiky,”
which is washed in by the spring tides in countless numbers. They are also fond of
meat. I have seen an otter eating the flesh of another otter which had been skinned
and thrown away. It may therefore be concluded that this animal is omnivorous.
In the winter they lie some upon the ice, some upon the shore. In summer they
go up the rivers and penetrate even to the lakes, where they greatly enjoy the fresh
water. On warm days they seek the valleys and shady recesses of the mountains and
frolic there like monkeys, They surpass all other amphibiain play and frolicsomeness
and in fleetness of foot.
On the land they lie, as dogs do, with the body curled up. As they come out of
the sea, like dogs they shake off all the water before they lie down to sleep; then with
their paws they wash their faces, just as cats do, smooth out their bodies, straighten
out their fur, turn their head from one side to the other as they look themselves over,
and seem to be greatly pleased with their personal appearance. I have also seen the
males play with their genital organs like monkeys. When they are engaged in
sleeking their fur they are so intent upon it that they can be killed readily.
A swift runner can scarcely overtake an otter when it runs, for it runs with many
windings, in a fashion to mislead. When it sees its path to the sea intercepted and
finds itself exhausted and out of breadth, it puts up its back like a cat, threatens to
leap upon its pursuer, and spits like an angry cat; but we, being conscious that its anger
was not dangerous, were not frightened off; and when it receives a vigorous blow upon
the head it falls upon the ground, covers its eyes with its paws, and keeps them so, no
matter how many times it is struck upon the back. But if one hits it on the tail,
which is extended out as the animal runs, it turns about and faces the striker in the
most absurd fashion. But more frequently it happens that they fall down at the first
blow and pretend that they are dead, and then as soon as they see that we turn our
attention to others, they suddenly-take to flight. From this it would appear that the
animal is very cunning. Oftentimes we would drive them into narrow places on pur-
pose, without any thought of doing them any harm; we would hold our clubs ready,
and they would fall down fawning and looking around in every direction. Then they
would slowly slink past us like dogs, and as soon as they saw that they were out of
danger they would hurry with mighty leaps to the sea.
216 « THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
When they stand up they keep their necks extended in line with the body, and
the hinder part, because of the length of the legs, stands higher.
They swim now upon the belly, now upon one side, and again flat upon the back;
they also swim standing bolt upright in the water.
They play together, and, like human beings, embrace with their arms and kiss
each other. If they escape the club, they gesticulate in a very ridiculous manner, as
if making fun of the hunter. With one paw raised over their eyes, as if bothered by the
rays of the sun, they watch the man, continually rubbing their pudenda as they lie
upon their backs, and then go off into the water, still watching the man steadily and
urinating as they go, in the same way as sea bears and whales also do.
They copulate at all seasons, and so throughout the year the mothers are seen busy
with their cubs. Whether they give birth twice within one season I would not venture
to decide; but I have seen, and I have sometimes killed, mothers with two cubs, one of
which was a year old and the other three or four months old. So much is certain, they
never, or at most very rarely, give birth to more than one ata time. The first year
after they are born they do not copulate, but the second year they do. The period of
gestation is eight or nine months; and so they bring forth perfectly developed young,
with eyes open and with all their teeth ; the four canine teeth are smaller than common,
just as I have observed, also, in the case of the sea bears, seals, and sea lions.
They suckle their young almost a whole year. They preserve their conjugal affec.
tion most constantly, and the male does not serve more than one female. They live
together both on sea andon land. The 1-year-old cubs, the “ koschloki,” live with their
parents until they set up housekeeping on their own score. Rarely, therefore, are
females seen apart from cubs two or three months old, which are called “ medviedki.»
The females always give birth‘to their young on land. Whether in the sea or on
land, they carry their cubs in their mouths; but when they sleep at sea they fold their
young in their arms just as mothers do their babes. They throw the young ones into
the water to teach them to swim, and when tired out they bring them to shore again
and kiss them just like human beings. They toss the young out into the sea and with
their paws catch them when tossed, like a ball; and with them they engage in all
the delightful and gentle games that a fond mother can play with her children. When
the mother sleeps on shore the cubs keep watch, clinging to her dugs or arms. They
embrace their young with an affection that is scarcely credible. When hunters press
upon them, whether by land or by sea, they seize their young with their mouths and
never let go of them except when compelled by extreme necessity or death itself. And
so they are killed often when they might have got away themselves. I have sometimes
deprived females of their young on purpose, sparing the mothers themselves, and they
would weep over their affliction just like human beings. I once carried off two little
ones alive, and the mothers followed me at a distance like dogs, calling to their young
with a voice like the wailing of an infant; and when the young ones heard their
mothers’ voice they wailed; too. I sat down in the snow and the mothers came close
up and stood ready to take the young ones from my hand if I should set them down in
the snow. After eight days I returned to the same place and found one of the females
at the spot where I had taken the young, bowed down with the deepest sorrow. Thus
she lay, and I approached without any sign of flighton her part. Her skin hung loose,
and she had grown so thin in that one week that there was nothing left but skin and bones.
This happened several times in succession. It happened one other time that, in com-
STELLER’S ACCOUNT OF THE SEA OTTER, “ 217
pany with Mr. Plenisner, I saw in the distance a mother otter sleeping with a, year-old
cub. When she caught sight of us the mother ran to her offspring, woke him up, and
warned him to flee; but, as he preferred to go on sleeping rather than to run away,
she picked him up in her paws in spite of himself and rolled him like a stone down
into the sea.
On land they can not see very well, but their sense of smell is very keen. They
ought, therefore, to be hunted from the lee side. Their sense of hearing is just as
sharp.
The cry of the sea otter is very like the cry of an infant. They doubtlessly live
many years. They never breed strife among themselves, but always live on the best
of terms with one another. They are very much afraid of sea lions and sea bears,
and they do, not like the company of seals.. Accordingly the places which those.
animals frequent are carefully avoided by the otter.
The flesh of the adult otter is much more tender and savory than that of the
seal. The flesh of the female is best, for it is fatter and more tender, and the fat lies
between little membranes. It is for that reason a little hard. In the case of preg-
nant mothers, the nearer they are to parturition the fatter they are. In this respect
they are different from land animals. The flesh of the young otter is most delicious;
it can not easily be distinguished from the flesh of an unweaned lamb, whether
roasted or boiled, and the gravy from its preparing, in either way, is most delicious.
Otter flesh was our principal food on Bering Island; it was also our universal medi-
cine. By its use we were saved from scurvy, and no one got sick of it, although we
ate it every day half raw aud without bread. ‘he liver, heart, and kidneys tasted
exactly like those of the calf. The natives of Kamchatka and the Kuril Islands
give the first preference to the-flesh of eagles, the second to otter’s flesh. The liver
and kidneys they eat raw, and declare them most excellent. Not only the natives
but also the Russians use scrapings from the bony base of the penis as the proper
remedy to cure the tertian fever.
The skins go through the following processes before they are ready for use. (1)
After the skin has been taken from the animal shreds of muscle are cut from it with
a knife. This process the Russians call by the Slavonic term, “bolon sniat.” (2)
Then the skin is stretched to its utmost; for, besides the fact that the price increases
with the size, the skins thus prepared become lighter, although the fur does hecome
less beautiful. (3) After this they straighten out the hairs with bones from the wings
of gulls, and sleep upon them, naked, for several weeks to make them glossier, nicer,
and more beautiful. This process the Russians call “vyspat bobr.” (4) While the
Cossacks are getting the skins from the natives they frequently beat the skins upon
the snow with sticks, and if the fur is gray, or any other color than black, they color
them with alum and empetrum berries cooked to the proper consistency with fish oil.
This makes them glossy black. But the fraud can be detected —pull out of a dyed
skin a single hair and it will show three colors: at the end, the black of the dye;
from the middle down, the native color; and, finally, the base of the hair.
While the skins are being prepared for use, the natives treat them also as follows:
they smear the inside of the skin with a powder made of dried fish eggs, as the
Rutheni do with simple yeast; then they roll it up and lay it away for several days,
and after that they scrape it with shells and glass, and finally smooth it down with
pumice stone. During this time they knead the inside with a wooden hook and with
218 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
the hands until it grows soft with the fermented dough of the fish eggs and all the fat
disappears and the skin comes out soft and pliable. All other skins which are sold to
traders are exported without any preparation, for it has been observed that these
undressed skins keep their native color better.
I have wished to report about the sea otter what 1 have seen as an eye-witness, and
also what I have heard from the natives, in hunting them.
I have had two pictures made: Fig. 1 (Tab. XVI) represents an otter walking
upon land; fig. 2 represents one swimming with her cub in the water.
Ce ete Se |
VENIAMINOF’S ACCOUNT OF THE SEA BEAR.
Translated by LEONHARD STEJNEGER. =
The following is a translation of Bishop Ivan Veniaminof’s account of the fur
seals of the Pribilof Islands, published in Wrangell’s Information Regarding the
Russian Provinces on the Northwest Coast of America, forming the first volume of
von Baer and von Helmereen’s Contribution to the Knowledge of the Russian
Empire and the adjacent countries of Asia.!
THE SEA BEAR. Phoca ursina. Morskoit ko).
The sea bears are chiefly taken in the (Russian) colonies on the Commander and
Pribilof islands,’ but the most important locality for this industry is the island of St.
Paul, where many Aleuts and some few Russians reside for this purpose. The
method of taking the seals will be better understood if I give a short description
of the habits of these animals. The sealers distinguish the sea bears as sikatchi,
polusikatchi, holostiaki, matki, and kotiki.
By sikatch is understood a full-grown male not less than 6 years old, and either
possessing or able to possess a harem. His size is about three or four times that of
the female and equal to that of a 2-year-old calf; the color of the hair is dark gray,
the hair from the head half way down the body being stiff and much longer than on
the other parts. Polusikatchi are males 4 or 5 years of age, which, although fully
able to fecundate the females, are not allowed to possess a harem. Their mane is stiff
but much shorter than that of a sikatch.
Holostiaki are males from 2 to 3 years old; they have no mane and the color of
the hair is lighter gray (than in the adults), especially in the spring.
Matki are the females capable of bearing young. They are only two or three
times the size of the young. The color is not exactly the same in all. In some itis a
reddish brown, in others grayish, and in still others reddish gray.
Kotiki are the young males and females from 4 months to a year old, including
those born in the spring and killed in the fall. It is the furry pelt of these which is
the most highly valued. This furry quality of the pelage particularly distinguishes
the fur seals from the hair seals, sea lions, and other kinds of seals in general,
rendering it preferable to all others for the fur trade.
' Beitriige | zur Kenntniss | des Russischen Reiches | und der | angrinzenden Linder Asiens. | —Auf
Kosten der Kaiserl. Akademie der Wissenschaften | herausgegeben | von | K. E. v. Baer und Gr. v.
Helmersen. | —Erstes Baindchen. | Wrangell’s Nachrichten tiber die Russischen Besitzungen | an der
Nord westkiiste von Amerika. | —St. Petersburg, 1839. | Im Verlage der Kaiserlichen Akademie der Wis-
senschaften.—Special title: Statistische und ethnographische Nachrichten | iiber | die Russischen
Besitzungen | an der | Nord westkiiste von Amerika. | Gesammelt | von dem ehemaligen Oberverwalter
dieser Besitzungen, | Contre-Admiral v. Wrangell. | —Auf Kosten der Kaiserl. Akademie der Wissen-
schaften | herausgegeben | und mit den Berechnungen aus Wrangell’s Witterungsbeobachtungen | und
andern Zusitzen vermebrt | von K.E. v. Baer. | —St. Petersburg, 1839, | Buchdruckerei der Kaiserlichen
Akademie der Wissenschaften.
2The animals were formerly plentiful on the Farallone Rocks, out at sea, opposite the bay of San
Francisco, but the Americans of the United States have extirpated them completely. A species of
sea bear is also found on Guadalupe, but this inhabitant of a warmer region is smaller than its
more northern relative and its color is less silvery. (Footnote by von Baer.—TR.) a9
220 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
At sea the sea bears feed on fish and shellfish; they have a cry like the bleating
of a sheep. They pass northward into the Kamchatkan Sea through the straits
between the different groups of the Aleutian Islands, especially through Unimak
Pass; they are not found to the north of St. Paul. The sikatchi are the first to
arrive. They always approach St. Paul Island about the 20th of April'—i. e., between
the 18th and 23d, even if the island is still beset with ice. The sikatch takes his
station on shore, at exactly the same spot he occupied the preceding year, not seldom
lying down on snow and ice. Sandy shores are never chosen for breeding grounds
jliterally laying grounds], but always flat beaches covered with large stones and
mostly on the southern side of the island. At the time of their arrival the sikatchi
are usually extremely fat, but later, about the middle of July, they become lean. On
land they sleep almost without interruption, and they are never heard to utter a
sound except when they catch sight of a new comer. By the middle of May they
begin to look out over the sea, because at that time the females begin to arrive.
From now on the sikatch does not leave the shore unless it might be to intercept
some female trying to leave him. Before the female has been delivered she is watched
by her lord with jealous supervision, nor is she, under any conditions, allowed to
leave him; later she is even permitted to go into the water, but he keeps the young
as a hostage.
When the females arrive at the island every sikatch tries to get hold of as many as
possible, This frequently causes bloody contests between the males, who besides
endeavor to frighten their rivals by roaring loudly. Later on they steal the young
from their mothers in order to entice them into their own harem. ?
From one to one hundred and fifty females have been observed with one sikatch, the
number depending entirely on the courage of the male. The sikatch is the unrestricted
lord, the guardian and protector of his harem. He takes no food whatever while
staying on shore; on very hot days he will drink a little sea water, discharging it
however after an hour, in the form of a white foam.
The polusikatchi and holostiaki arrive later than the sikatchi. They do not
always occupy the positions held the preceding season, choosing their resting place
apart from that of the sikatchi, collected in large companies, and rather distant from
the sea. Nor do they remain all the time in one place, like the sikatchi, often
changing their position, and even from time to time returning to the sea,
The females begin arriving about the 26th day of May (very seldom on the 21st), or
shortly before giving birth to their young. They do not haul out immediately, or
without discriminating, but spend a day or two swimming up and down along the
shore before associating with the chosen sikatch, or, as is more frequently the case,
being violently seized by the enterprising male. Each harem is separated from all
others by a space which is not allowed to be intruded upon by any outsider.
The arrival of the kotiki usually takes place during a southerly, or sometimes
during a southwesterly wind, but rarely when it is blowing from any other direction.
Nor do they all arrive at the same time, but gradually and singly; not all being
assembled by the middle of June, as there are instances of yearlings having arrived
as late as July. When gathered in bands, these young fur seals keep up a constant
calling, day and night, particularly, as has been observed, before bad weather.
1 All dates are “old style.”—Tr. °A misinterpretation of the ‘‘podding” of the pups.—Eb.
VENIAMINOF’S ACCOUNT OF THE FUR SEAL. 221
Sealers are doubtful about the age of the female when she bears her first young,
as also in regard to the age generally reached by the fur seals. The first probably
takes place in the fifth year, while the age hardly exceeds 25 years.
This question, so very important (in its relation) to the sealing industry, is not
yet settled.
The delivery of the female commences the 30th of May, and lasts through the
whole of June and even to the 10th of July. Usually only one young is borne annually,
though instances are known, aowever, of a mother giving birth to two pups, but
always paying for it with her life. :
The sikatch does not begin his conjugal attentions to the female immediately after
she has been delivered, rather giving her time for complete recovery. Copulation
continues for a quarter of an hour or more. The bull has intercourse but once with
each female, afterward paying no attention to her whatever, she being allowed to
move from the harem in whatever direction she pleases. The sikatch is able to cover
from fifteen to twenty-four females in twenty-four hours. He is deprived of sleep until
all the females have been fecundated, and if he sometimes seems to doze, yet the
lightest step of a female trying to escape is noted, when raising himself he utters a
menacing roar. :
In spite of the disproportion of their bulk, it never happens that the male crushes
the female. But the female of the fur seal will sometimes get crushed when covered
by a young sea lion. The result of such an intercourse, if she survives, is a hybrid,
having the head, feet, and hair of a sea lion together with the fur of a fur seal.
The young fur seals feed exclusively on their mother’s milk from birth until
leaving the island. The female never suckles her young while in the water, but comes
ashore for that purpose, and attends her offspring in a resting position.
The pups do not go into the water very soon after birth. When 30 to 35 days old
they commence to take to the water close to shore, in places sheltered from the wind,
and always without being guided by their mothers. Having by and by become famil-
iar with the water—that is to say when about 40 to 50 days old—they assemble in
separate bands, visiting the neighboring rocks and sand banks. By August longer
excursions are made, still unaccompanied by the mothers. In September the pups
retire in smaller squads to warm and quiet sands, sometimes passing the entire day
in such a spot where they may be joined by the young females of the preceding
season. If one of the pups stays away longer than twenty-four hours the mother will
go in search of it.!
The pups learn to swim without any guidance, but their mothers teach them how
to escape from the attacks of their enemies and from other dangers. [rom time to time
false alarms are made for this purpose, all running toward the sea, obliging the pups
to hasten after them. Such exercises are generally practiced a short time before leav-
ing the island, this comprising the entire course of education.’
The color of the young fur seal when born is black, but after the 10th of September
it changes to gray, the old hair being shed and new growing out.
The yearlings stay in the neighborhood of the females uutil September, passing the
time in all manner of play. Some carry a comrade into the water, others bite each
1Probably a misinterpretation of the actions of cows fresh from sea and looking for their
young.—ED.
2 Veniaminov had probably witnessed partial stampedes, such as that noted elsewhere in this
report, and had made the above interpretation of them.—ED,
222 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
other, others again wake those which are asleep, or sport in the sea. Those born in
June or July lie in a large herd encircled by the mothers, or frolic in the water if they.
have learned to swim. A grown male never purposely bites or injures a pup.
The taking of the fur seals commences in the latter days of September. A chilly,
disagreeable day is selected for the purpose, when the wind is blowing against that
quarter where the animals are lying, so that they may not discover the approaching
sealers. Such weather setting in, the entire gang, old and young, men, women, aud
children, proceed to the hauling ground of the animals. All circumstances are minutely
examined and taken into consideration before commencing work. The most courage-
ous hunters, practiced in running over stones and rocks, lead the way, walking in
single file, followed by the old people and the children; last of all comes the chief of
the expedition, supervising and directing the entire party. All, without exception,
are armed with clubs. The intent of such an attack is to cut off from the sea, as
rapidly as possible, all animals on shore, and to drive them from the beach into the
interior of the island. Halting a short distance from the shore, the old males are
separated from the females and young, the former being driven back and liberated.
The old females which have experienced several attacks return to the breeding places
as soon as they detect an open passage, but the younger ones must be driven off. It
frequently happens that they return again shedding large tears while searching for
their slaughtered young. The sikatchi and old females having been removed, the
others, divided into small squads, are carefully driven to the place where they are to
be killed, sometimes more than 10 versts distant. Such a march, however, is very
laborious for the seals and so long a journey can not therefore be completed in one day
without being injurious tothem. As their progression is effected by leaps and notata
walking pace many of them would meet their death on the road from overexertion.
‘They are, therefore, permitted to halt frequently, when the quite young animals will
immediately fall asleep. When brought to the killing grounds the seals are rested for
an hour or more, according to circumstances, and then killed with a club.
The quite young seals, that is to say, those only 4 months of age, are killed without
exception. Of those 1 year old the males are separated.from the females and killed,
while the latter are driven cautiously back to the beach. The 2 and 3 year old animals
(holostiaki) are treated in a similar manner. All sikatchi are allowed to live.
The meat of the young seal is rather palatable and is used for food, both fresh and
salted. The skins are taken off, dried, and sent to Russia. The mothers of the killed
animals swim about the island during the following two or three days or more in
search of their young, crying mournfully.
About the 5th of October, sometimes earlier, the sea bears leave the island in the
same manner as they arrive, and always with a northerly or northwesterly wind. The
quite young animals which have succeeded in escaping the sealer’s club remain longer
on the island than the rest, and are often seen after all others have left. Sometimes
old sikatchi have been observed on the island during November and even in December,
but during January and February not a single animal of this species is ever seen. It
very seldom happens that two or three sikatchi appear in March, but only for a short
time.
Since the discovery of the islands of St. Paul and St. George—that is, from the
vear 1786 until 1833—3,178,562 fur seals have been taken there. At present the skin
of a young fur seal is worth 25 to 30 rubles in the Siberian market.
IX.—PELAGIC SEALING.
WITH NOTES ON THE FUR SEALS OF GUADALUPE, THE GALAPAGOS, AND LOBOS
ISLANDS.
By Cuar.es H. TOWNSEND.
The first pelagic sealing conducted from vessels appearsto have been done off the
coast of Vancouver Island between 1871 and 1878. The history of this sealing is
involved in obscurity, but a pelagic-sealing industry in connection with coastwise
trading among Indian villages gradually sprung up, and by 1880 there were four
vessels engaged. The catches made were not of much importance, and the price of
skins was very low, ranging from $3 to $5. It was an outgrowth of the canoe sealing
by Indians that from time immemorial had been practiced in those waters. There are
no records to show that the vessels procured any important number of the skins
brought to market. it is not unlikely that the coast sealing regularly practiced by
the Indians was greatly stimulated during these years by the presence of the trading °
vessels, and that the catch was largely made in this way, the vessels themselves
contributing but little toward the capture of the seals.
The annual catch of the Indians under ordinary conditions has until recently
averaged between 2,000 and 3,000 skins. Subsequent to 1880 the few vessels trading in
this region increased in number and became practically pelagic sealers. So far as
known the crews were composed chiefly of Indians. The vessels being regarded as
traders, no satisfactory records were kept as to the source of the seal skins brought
to port.
In a private log kept by John D. Ford on the schooner Undaunted, engaged in
sea-otter hunting in 1880, it is stated that 70 otters and 1,425 seals were taken. There
are comparatively few references to seals, most of the log being taken up with‘notes
on the otter hunting from day to day. The vessel left San Francisco on May 5, and
returned to Victoria on September 10. The hunting was done on the south side of
the Alaska Peninsula. There are references to previous sealing by members of the
crew at Robben Island, in the Kurile Islands with the schooner Caroline, and at Cape
Horn.
By 1883 there were eight or nine Canadian vessels engaged in sealing off the
west coast of Vancouver Island. The average catch for vessels at this time was
about 500 skins, worth about $6 each. In 1884 the Canadian vessels began sealing in
Bering Sea, and one German vessel sailing from Japan began sealing in Bering Sea,
223
i
224 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
where she was seized in the vicinity of the Pribilof Islands. In 1885 the average
catch for Canadian vessels sealing on the Northwest coast and Bering Sea was over
1,600 skins per vessel, the average per vessel for the Northwest coast being but 547
skins. Since this time it has decreased rapidly, the catch for 1897 averaging only 149
seals per vessel. The greatest annual catch in the Northwest coast region was that
of 1892, when 46,642 seals were taken.
The first pelagic sealing in Bering Sea was probably that done in 1880, when
nearly 500 seals were taken by Captain Kathgard, of the schooner San Diego!, 39 tons.
For a number of years the San Diego, with other vessels, had been engaged in
walrus hunting along the northern shore of the Alaska Peninsula, and in 1880 Captain
Kathgard began taking seals, the hunting being done from two boats.
The success attained led Captain Kathgard to continue seal hunting the following
year, 1881, when he procured 950 seals with three hunting boats. The seals taken on
this cruise were worth $10 each. Several thousand dollars’ worth of walrus products
were obtained on the same voyage. Captain Kathgard practiced pelagic sealitg in
Bering Sea for two or three years before it was taken up by anyone else. In 1883 the
schooner City of San Diego, 48 tons, procured 2,500 skins in Bering Sea, and along the
Northwest coast.! In 1884 the hunting of walrus was practically given up, and all the
i ' Random extracts from log of American schooner City of San Diego, 1883, D. McLean, Master.
Date. ene | Henge | Seata, Date. inh, | Longi- | seals,
1883 1883 w
MEAP BOS ois ciaierercs ccecicnaioeicdincwecnaec 87 55 | 125 30 1B DUNS Mos. Siciwcsicnicicmic pe sewce ieee 55 34 | 163 30 22
ey CN ere eT aR eat 47 23 | 127 24 29 || Tuly 19. . ccs ccceesccceeeeceeecesee| BB 40 | 169 12 |...-.--
May sestesisedecacawcwcicccensennan 51 04 | 181 45 |........ July asinine aie aietniaie wieiain wy aie ow wie ara 55 00 | 169 00 298
Catch for whole season, 2,500.
vessels hitherto resorting to Bering Sea for that purpose engaged in sealing. Most
of the vessels began their work in the winter time on the Northwest coast, gradually
following the seal herd northward. In February, 1886, the San Diego began sealing
at the Farallone Islands, California, and followed the seal herd all the way to Bering
Sea, where the vessel was seized by the United States Government. Captain Kath-
gard’s catch averaged about 1,800 seals a year with three hunting boats, until his
vessel was seized, when he went out of the business. From.1884 on it was the custom
for sealers to begin the season’s work on the Northwest coast and finish in Bering Sea.
At this time there were 34 vessels sealing in Bering Sea. The seals were taken
from late in June to early in September, the catch frequently being 1,200 to 1,500 seals
for vessels carrying from four to six boats.
Vessels were then being built especially for pelagic sealing, and the number of
hunting boats carried was gradually increased. The catch of seals was over 27,000
in 1891, sealing not being permitted in Bering Sea from that time until 1894, when
31,585 seals were taken—an average per vessel of 853,, The greatest annual catch for
Bering Sea was made in 1895, when 59 vessels procured 44,169 seals. In 1897 16,464
seals were taken, the average per vessel being 588. Since 1894 sealing in Bermg Sea
‘This vessel should not be confused with the schooner City of San Diego, which was built iu 1881,
and first entered Bering Sea as a sealer in 1883,
PELAGIC SEALING. 225
has been limited to August and September, and has been prohibited within 60 miles
of the Pribilot Islands, while seals have been taken with spears ouly.
The following extracts from the log of the Mary Ellen, engaged in sealing along
the Northwest coast and in Bering Sea in 1884, show the course of the vessel and the
catch of seals from day to day. The entire number of seals taken was 1,954:
American schooner Mary Ellen, 1884, D, McLean, master.
Lat- | Longi-| . | Lat- | Longi-| «
Date. itude. | tude. | Seals. |]. Date. | itude, ate Seals.
Feb. 2
14
3
7
2
4
18
Mar. > -
q
! 44
98
64
22
22
43
t 4
43
4
25
15
6
63
8
10
soe
140
67
63
14
28
41
26
10
. 50
53
66
2
May : 1, 954
48 35 | 128 15 5
The Mary Ellen continued sealing in the same waters for several years afterwards.
Her catch for 1885, was 2,304; for 1886, 4,295, and for 1887, 2,474 seals.
There are many indications that the neledi catch of anal during the eighties was
much greater than is generally supposed. For instance, in the British commissioner’s
report, Bering Sea Arbitration, pages 207 et seq., the Mary Ellen is credited with seal
skins landed at Victoria as follows: 1884, 1,500 (estimated); 1885, 1,989; 1886, 3,553;
1887, 1,460. The logs of this vessel for the same years (see Townsend, Senate Doc.
137, 54th Cong., Pt. I, pp. 50-53) give the catches as follows: 1884, 1,953; 1885, 2,304;
1886, 4,295; 1887, 2,474. This being an American vessel, portions of the catch may
have been taken to San Francisco. The writer obtained these logs from Captain
McLean, master of the vessel.
Another instance is that of the British schooner San Jose, credited with 107 seals for
the Northwest coast in 1888. Original records appended to this report state the catch
at 355 seals,
5947—pr 3——15
226 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
On page 211 of the British commissioner’s report referred to above the catch of
the British Columbia sealing fleet in 1889 is given as 27,868 seals for 22 vessels.
In certain original records loaned me by Capt. N. Hodgson, of San Francisco, I
find the catch of Canadian vessels for 1889 stated by vessel and corresponding very
closely with the figures given on page 211. Three additional vessels are named, how-
ever—the Triumph, with a catch of 72 seals on the Northwest coast; the Venture, with
a catch of 317 seals for the same region, and the Mollie Adams, with 1,553 seals from
Bering Sea.
On page 209 of the British commissioner’s report the Northwest coast catch of,
the schooner Favorite is given as 1,726 seals. This vessel was reported by the revenue
cutter Corwin as sealing in Alaskan waters in 1885, with 2,065 seuls. (See Cruise of
the Corwin, 1885, House Doc. 153, 49th Cong., p.18.) The catch of this vessel, with
other vessels reported by the Corwin, in Alaskan waters during the same season is as
follows:
Catch of certain vessels sealing in Alaskan Waters in 18865.
Vessel. ‘ Seals. Vessel. Seals.
Lookout <.<0i:0scciseegoce aecisceewscccacs SiOrrals on ae osc oi cisig aleve sce swicecslies meee 1, 312
’ Mary Ellen ..........-..-.--- ae Vanderbilt.. ---| 1,000
Favorite ( British ) -.....--.- ae Henrietta .- 1, 200
San Dieg0 secs wasinexccccdosessscasaases Alexander 660
In the Cruise of the Corwin in 1884 (House Doc. 153, 49th Cong., pp.8 and 16)
the schooners Favorite and Alexander are both referred to as sealing in Alaskan waters.
No complete official records having been kept for the American sealing fleet, the
statements of catches up to 1890 are only approximate. There are many reasons for
believing that the accepted figures are below the number actually taken.
On the Japan coast seals have long been taken by the boats of Japanese fisher-
men, but the first vessel to engage in pelagic sealing in Japanese waters was the
C. G. White, which in 1890 secured 680 seals in Japanese and Russian waters. In the
following season this vessel again visited the Japanese sealing grounds and the catch
of the preceding season was nearly trebled. By 1892 there were on the Japanese
sealing grounds 9 vessels, which made a catch of over 14,000 seals. In 1893 the
number of vessels in Japanese waters had reached 53 and the catch of seals amounted
to 53,526. 1n 1894, owing largely to restrictions in the award area, sealing in these
waters reached its greatest height, a fleet of 70 vessels taking over 71,667 seals. Less
than half that number were taken in 1895 and Jess than one-third in 1896, while in
1897 the Japanese catch was only 13,843 seals for a fleet of 27 vessels. In Japanese
waters the average of over 1,000 seals per vessel for 1893 and 1894 decreased to 512
in 1897. Vessels under the Japanese flag are now supplanting those sealing under
other tlags.
Pelagic sealing in the waters adjacent to the Commander Islands was of no
special importance until about 1892, when, by reason of the modus vivendi, the
operations of the sealing fleet were transferred from American waters.
Prior to that time the desultory sealing carried on about the Commander Islands
virtually amounted to sealing on the rookeries, the seals having been taken in foggy
weather close to the shores, or, when opportunity afforded, on unguarded rookeries.
PELAGIC SEALING. 227
In 1893 a 30-mile protected zone was established for the purpose of preventing raids
on the islands. During that season about 12,000 seals were taken just outside this
limit. Since then the catch of seals about the Commander Islands has decreased, the
catch for 1897 being only 1,382.
The annual average per vessel for the Canadian, Japanese, and United States
sealing fleets in all waters during recent years has been as follows: !
x Average |
| Year. | . Vessels. Sous) per vessel.
189580 cei cafenincin 102 92, 437 906
1896. cccciceciceaan 94 69, 536 739
Dl eee 71 39, 511. |, 556 |
VESSELS, BOATS, AND METHODS OF HUNTING.
The vessels employed for pelagic sealing are schooners ranging in size from less
than 20 tons to 150 tons, the average size being 60 or 70 tons. The vessels of less
than 20 tons are usually not employed elsewhere than on the sealing grounds off
‘Washington and British Columbia, and are frequently owned and manned by Indians.
The greater part of the sealing fleet sails from Victoria, British Columbia, and the
crews are made up chiefly of British Columbia Indians, who hunt in canoes. The
largest vessels carry as many as 18 canoes, the number carried being dependent on
the size of the vessels. The smaller vessels carry about 8. Where white crews and
hunters are employed there are from 6 to 10 boats carried, the larger vessels carrying
12 boats.
Boats are usually manned by three meu and canoes by two. The total number
of boats carried by the British Columbia fleet in 1897 was 149 and of canoes 288. The
total number of boats carried by the American sealing fleet in 1897 was 62 and ot
canoes 67. The total tonnage of the British Columbia sealing fleet in 1897 was 2,708,
the number of vessels employed being 41. During the same season there were 17
_vessels in the American sealing fleet, with a total tonnage of 898. The total number
of whites carried by the British Columbia fleet in 1897 was 495 and of Indians 587,
the American fleet carrying 235 whites and 182 Indians.
In 1885 the American vessels engaged in sealing numbered 36, with a total
tonnage of 2,263. The total value of the vessels was $125,050, the value of the.
hunting boats, outfit, and provisions amounting to $74,779 more. The value of the
catch for this year was $209,232.
1 These figures do not include the catch made by Japanese and Indian canoes hunting from coast
villages.
d
THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
228
“968T “3doy “wp 8h. ‘S'O Wot.
28z ‘602] 106 ‘Z| G9 ‘sT| SBT ‘8 | Tsz‘s | Ler | OTT ‘kZ| LOT ‘se] Bce'z | 86z | ez ‘T | ATF Oz9‘6 | O6F‘eT| OFe| G99 ‘eT| Foz] LIL | OGO‘szT| Le "e9s‘el"°-- "~~ TEIOL,
00G‘L | 000'T | 099 | OFE = |-~*7~"}"""-"77) ODOT | O08 ‘T | 06 OL | Got | oe] 00g | oz {st} ooo't|2L | F | 900' | OFA § |7-"""” BASTO Ae “7 Bogs
T8L's | 608 000‘T | #8 et mes 000‘ | 46‘8rT | -teqgug eiqdog |------- puegaog
ez 'y | F9S 008‘T | O8t | 02 9 {-€6 | 000'¢ | 69 [°7-7777 777" BIA BPT
32g ‘9 | eF8 009 «| (06 OL GL | #2 | 000‘ | SL‘9F 7777777" Beg BuLIog
108 ‘9 | TF8 006 | 06 OL aL | #% | o0¢'s | [69h |°°** PueLIg TIES
0L6'8 | 96T‘T 00T‘'S | O8T 0% 9 | 000°9 | Groh = |-77* 40ST VC ONLY
age'L | $86 00% ‘TE | 06 OT > | PT | oos'e | elem [777 TIaoyT AN
“Y320
109 ‘ST 06 is G jLt | 000% | OP's | SULLY PIB
a § : 61 oe LZ"GE 0 [otter gaswey, |-----"- epyqveg
9t | 008'T | TS ‘08
ef elo jou” loner pate
0 0
8 é 9 | eI | 00S‘L | e6'0E8
6 Er 4 r | 6 006 8L FL
8T z 9 | 8I 000'T | 12 ‘sz
6 T 9 | sr | 00% 88 ‘eg
#g 9 y or} ez | 000'2 | SB"aF
99 L oor | ost | ¢ | 00% | OT | € | o08‘t UeAS “DH somes
#9 9 oO. | Ost |¢ | oes | IL} ee | oog'e v7 7S eIquinyoD |*----- Avg [eoNT
8I z 00T 008 9 | 008 y |8 000 ‘T
cP ¢ > Paeesce ESR SSE COR AiG lier |s0Ge'e
7¢ 9 00g =| OOF | OT | 0g | ot} oz | oos‘e puesuaMoy, y10g
9¢ 8 oor | 028 | 8 | 00F |F% | 9E | 000'8 “> sopesuy sory
78 ral 009 «| 186 |e} OL | 4 | 2a | 00¢'6
#8 aL 00g | 468 | 02] 099 | 9 | € | 000'9
¥8 ran 08 «=| «Och «=O FT | OS «=| 9 | Fe 00g ‘¢
8 ra occ =| 998 «| #1] c6G «=| 2 | es | 000'8 777 2op99ByY
oP 9 ose =| ogr | zcr}ooe | | or | o00'T | eF'ez BUny pue ey
78 ae 009 «=| 079 | 9T| os? |8 | Ga | oos'e | sr -LOT ~aesaiddg “¢
58 aL 00g =| 02L =| 8L/ 008 |8 | | 000'6 | SF -0OT
OL OL 00g =| O22 | 8Tt| 008 |8 | | 000'S | 98°86
OL ot 00% | 009 | et] 00g |9 | 12 | 000% | cers
8 ras 00g =| 0F9 | OT} OL | L | 9 | 000'S | O48 [eeMOT pay emMA
OL ot ose | 0@S | er} ore | 9 | 2% | 000'% | zo‘L0L |--**-7** Sery ouer
: #8 aL oo =| 099 «| FL | 0S «6 9 | & ; rig LW
FF6 ‘OLS ore ‘T$] OLS =| OT 00c$ | 009$ | ST | 008s | 8 | $% “ezuvuog |" oos~ouRi, Teg
i : onieaay : “48809 | *48v00 “m0T}
on[eA! "ON | *y8v00| “Bag = ,
My. qsoA | UBIS | -ao19 i 5 F i “Tuna |, i t e '
pe eed “10 NT] -8N YY 0} =| ‘sTOTS ONTBA |STOLONTCA ON | cae #0 OnTBA PON ONTB AON moro | P8884) ose i “s[essea
[ROL WOLT | WOLT lseouea|-raorg| enteA jo “on a A [HOF $ON S[e8804 JO BOWEN | 55 20d omy
—| PV
‘UOYL} sees Jo JoquIn NT “4789 | “sivedg "suny
“S]vOg
“GEST Wy yoqno L10y3 {0 p.i00d. ay; pun ‘pazsaaus jopvdvo ay) ‘Buyvos anf ovinjad ww pabpbua sjaseaa uvoriamp ay) Gurmoys yuamaynig
PELAGIC SEALING. 229
The boats employed for sealing are sharp at both ends and 18 to 20 feet long, with
about 43 to 5 feet beam. They are fitted with single masts and sails, and when out
for hunting carry a gaff for seizing seals, club for killing the wounded animals, compass,
food, and water.
The canoes used by the Indian sealers are the cedar dugout canoes employed by
the Indian tribes of the Northwest coast. They are light and graceful craft.of the
high bow and stern pattern, common from Washington to Yakutat, Alaska. The
outfit of the canoe is similar to that of the sealing boat.
The guns in use are generally shotguns of 10 bore, shooting 21 pellets of No, 2
buckshot. Repeating rifles are also carried, but not to the same extent as in former
years. The number of guns carried is, of course, not less than the number of boats
and canoes in use. Guns are used almost entirely in the.waters of the North Pacific
Ocean; but since 1894 spears have been employed in all seal hunting in the eastern
part of Bering Sea, in accordance with the provisions of the Paris award. Each
vessel is provided with a fog horn, and a small signal gun or yacht cannon for
disclosing the position of the vessel in foggy weather.
A sealing vessel’s outfit of provisions is sufficient for the entire cruise, which may
last eight to ten months if several sealing grounds are visited.
The spear used in Bering Sea since 1893, in conformity with the regulations of the
Paris award, is similar to that which has long been employed by the Indians of the
Northwest coast in hunting seals from shore. The pole is 12 to 14 feet long, pronged
with two detachable barbed iron spear points secured by a 30-yard line, the end of
which is tied to the boat. When a seal is struck the barbed points slip off the pole,
the latter being recovered after the seal has been pulled alongside the boat and
clubbed. Seals fight savagely at such times and require to be brought alongside
carefully, while large animals are very dangerous.
In hunting, the boats leave the vessel at daylight and, when the weather is good,
remain out all day. They work to windward, sailing, if possible, and take posi-
tions a mile or more apart, all hunting on the same tack. The vessel follows slowly
in the course taken by the boats, keeping a position that will enable the boats to sail
down to her in case of unfavorable weather. When there is no wind, the boats not.
infrequently pass out of sight of the vessel altogether, keeping their own bearings on
her position to find their way back. When many seals are taken, it is necessary to
skin them in the boats to prevent overloading, but a light catch is usually brought
back to the vessel and the seals skinned on deck. The method of hunting practiced
by Indians is somewhat less regular, but the canves also carry small sails. As a rule
the catch is made from seals found sleeping, those traveling or fishing being usually
difficult to secure. The sleeping seals must be approached from the leeward, and the
shooting is usually done at distances of 30 to 40 feet. When the animals are awake,
they have to be shot at much longer range and are much more difficult to get. Asa
rule, seals that have been killed must be recovered quickly in order to secure them
before they sink, although if killed instantly by shooting in the head many will float
for a long time.
In calm weather the hunting boats pull away from the vessel in all directions the
‘vessel maintaining her position until the hunters return. The favorite position of the
sleeping seal is on its back, with its nose protruding above the water, the hind flippers
turned forward and the fore flippers stretched along the breast. The sleeping seal makes
230 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
many uneasy movements, frequently allowing its head to sink below the surface,
rolling from side to side, scratching, or raising its flippers in the air. Swimming seals
go along sometimes swimming by continuous easy dives, appearing at the surface to
breathe, or go slowly with little more than the back exposed. This is usually the way
with single animals. Where there are several seals traveling together, they -will
frequently rise clear of the water with dolphin-like leaps. The greatest care is
necessary in approaching a sleeping seal, as the slightest noise will awaken it. The
hunter stands in the bow ready to fire at the first favorable opportunity, letting the
boat approach very close if the animal shows no signs of awaking.
In taking seals with the spear still more care is necessary, as the range of the
weapon is less and it is necessary to approach somewhat closer.
The best catches are made when the sea is smooth, as seals have little chance to
sleep when the sea is rough.
An important number of seals is wasted in pelagic sealing, as some of them sink
before they can be recovered, while others are wounded and dash away apparently
uninjured, only to succumb to their wounds later. The indications of these are traces
of blood left upon the water and the considerable number of male seals killed on the
fur-seal islands that retain buckshot in their skins. A few seals die on the rookeries,
from gunshot wounds. :
Many seals that are considered by the hunters as missed are undoubtedly seriously
wounded. There is no means of knowing what proportion the injured seals arriving
at the islands bear to the number that have died of their injuries before reaching the
islands.
Seals killed instantly when their heads are above the water sink quickly; the rest
of the body being submerged, the pressure of the water forces the air from it and it
goes down at once. Sleeping seals killed when the head is low in the water float for a
time, as the head settling into the water first retains the air in the lungs, causing the
body to float. —
Pelagic sealing is very effective as a means of destroying seals. Each vessel
carries many boats, and these boats, hunting in all directions, frequently miles away
from the vessels to which they belong, are able to explore a great extent of ocean.
When many vessels are huating on the more contracted sealing grounds, they are
frequently so close together that the hunting areas of the different schooners overlap.
Sealing vessels starting out for the full season’s work engage for a short time in
sealing in the winter on the northwest coast sealing grounds; then proceeding across
the Pacific Ocean, begin operations off the Japan coast in the spring. By the end of
June the seals have left this region on the northward migration, and are followed by
the sealing fleet to the sealing grounds in Bering Sea. As the sealing there is not
concluded until late in September, the vessels return to British Columbia frequently
after a cruise of eight or ten months. This is a long and more or less rough voyage
for schooners of rather small size, and it is perhaps surprising that the loss of vessels
has not been greater.
VESSELS LOST.
Pelagic sealing, like other industries carried on on the high. seas, is subject to
many dangers. The more northerly sealing grounds are in stormy and foggy latitudes,
and vessels have frequently been lost during gales, while others have been wrecked
on imperfectly surveyed coasts, or have been carried in the fog into dangerous places
PELAGIC SEALING. 231
by unknown currents. The spring sealing off the coast of southeast Alaska has
been attended with frequent loss of vessels, and many vessels have been lost on the
coast of Japan and.in the Kuril Islands. Quite a number of vessels have been
capsized and lost with all hands during gales. Sealing in Bering Sea has not been
accompanied with disasters to the same extent as in the North Pacific Ocean. This
is probably due to the fact that sealing in these waters has been carried on during the
summer and restricted to a shorter season. The following list of vessels lost during
the past nine years is incomplete, but probably includes nearly all the losses that
occurred during that period:
Year. Vessel. Remarks.
Annie ....-. : --| Lost with all hands.
. -| Wrecked on the northwest coast.
-| Wrecked. >
--| Maggie Mac. - -| Lost with all hands.
---| Bessie Rutter.........-...--
-| Matthew Turner. .
---| Mary Parker ...
-| Henry Dennis ...-.....-.... Wrecked Japancoast. Eventually repaired as Japanese schooner, Kaio Maru.
---| Narwhal ......- Wrecked.
-| George R. White... Lost with all hands, Bering Sea.
-| Mascot Capsized and lost off Japan coast.
0.
Capsized and lost off Japan coast.
-| Fortuna --| Lost with all hands.
-| San Diego --| Lost. (Built New York, 1850.)
Unga...-. Lost.
-| Mary H.T Do. ,
Walter A. Earle Capsized, all hands lost. (Originally the Sylvia Handy, built 1886.)
Brenda -| Vessel wrecked on Kuril Islands.
Mattie T. Dyer .
eof Dart scones eccavescecenssecad Vessel lost.
--| George Peabody ......--..-- Lost with all hands.
-| Rosie Olsen..........------- Vessel wrecked on Japan coast.
| C. G. White ....--.----.20.. Wrecked on Kadiak Island, Alaska. Most of crew lost.
--| May Belle ...............-.. Lost with all hands.
---| Wanderer .......-..----.--- Vessel lost.
wec| GAN DOS. sceccicine woe ciaresiats Wrecked on Aleutian Islands, Alaska.
-| Rose Sparks .. --| Lost with all hands.
-| Katherine ..-. Foundered at sea,
-| Agnes McDon: Wrecked on Japan coast.
Maud S.. Wrecked on Queen Charlotte Islands, British Columbia,
Sapphire Burned at sea off northwest coast.
Pointer -| Lost, Skotan Island, Japan.
-| Golden Fleece . -| Lost off Japan coast.
PIQOEN so cin ciewiaiasesisis gieiala siaie Lost with all hands. Bering Sea.
In addition to the loss of vessels, there are few vessels in the sealing fleets that
have not lost boats and hunters. This ig a constant danger connected with pelagic
sealing. On the Japan coast, where there are many strong currents setting in
different directions, the hunting boats are frequently carried long distances from the
vessels, and, being sometimes unable to regain the vessels, are lost if not picked up
by other vessels of the fleet. Fortunately, on the principal sealing grounds the
sealing fleet is of considerable size and the chances for boats being picked up by other
vessels are good. On the Japan grounds killer whales are abundant and a number
of the losses of boats and men have been attributed to this cause, as in several cases
killers have been seen to attack and overturn hunting boats. On the northwest coast
sealing grounds boats are frequently lost from their vessels, but they have in most
cases managed to reach some part of the mainland. This is also true of the Bering
Sea sealing grounds. The lost hunters have at times remained for days in their boats
and subsisted on the flesh of seals that they picked up, while heavy gales have been
ridden out by keeping the boat lying toa drag made from the carcasses or skins of
seals. Indian hunters havé, on a few occasions, been lost in their canoes from vessels
in Bering Sea, and finally reached some of the Aleutian Islands greatly exhausted.
232 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
HUNTING GROUNDS OF THE SEALING FLEET.
The pelagic sealing fleet frequents four hunting grounds during the year, two in
Bering Sea, adjacent to the Pribilof and Commander islands, and two in the Pacific
Ocean, off the American and Asiatic coasts.
The Pribilof (or “Bering Sea”) sealing ground lies to ‘the westward and south-
ward of the Pribilof Islands, outside of the 60-mile protected zone. Its northwestern
portion is in general about 75 miles wide, its width increasing toward the southeast-
ward, where it reaches the Aleutian Islands.
The Commander (or so-called ‘Copper Island”) sealing ground extends almost
around the Commander Islands, its most important part lying to the southward and
southeastward, and extending for about 60 miles beyond the 30-mile protected zone.
The sealing area to the northward and westward is of less importance. Its northern
limit is reached in Ukinsk Bay, at a distance of 200 miles from Bering Island.
The Japan sealing ground, which during the last four or five.years has been the
most important of the Pacific sealing grounds, has its southern limit in about latitude
36°, a little to the northward of Yokohama, the northern limit reaching nearly to
latitude 46°, opposite Iterup Island. Its southern and central portions are nearly
400 miles wide, the northern being quite narrow. Throughout the north and south
extent of this area sealing is carried on close to the coast and well into its
indentations -
The American (or “Northwest coast”) sealing ground extends from the Santa
Barbara Islands, California, northward along the coast to Bering Sea, a distance of
nearly 3,000 miles. It is divided into three favorite sealing areas. The first extends
from about latitude 36° northward to Cape Mendocino; the second and most impor-
tant, from Yaquina Bay, Oregon, to the northern end of Vancouver Island; and the
third from Sitka to Middleton Island. They are frequently referred to as the “Faral-
lon,” “ Vancouver,” and “Fairweather” grounds. Sealing is carried on throughout
the entire Northwest coast region, from the Santa Barbara Islands northward, but
the most important part of any catch is derived from one or more of the three favorite
sealing grounds, on each of which the seals appear to linger for a time during their
general movement northward. Since the Paris regulations went into force in 1894
there has been no sealing along the southern coast of the Alaska Peninsula.
Sealing commences off the coast of California about the middle of December, but
during this month is limited to three or four San Francisco and San Pedro vessels.
The earliest date noted is December 10. In 1894 the Canadian schooner Umbrina
took seals during the last week in December 800 miles off the coast of Oregon, and
early in January 1,000 miles off northern California.
it does not appear that seals are taken in December along the coast north of the
Farallon ground, and the catch for that month is usually less than 100 skins per
vessel. January sealing on the Farallone ground is regularly engaged in by San
Francisco vessels, some of these bound for the Japan coast, stopping for a short
time oft the California coast before taking their final departure. The most southerly
catches noted for the American coast were made south of Point Conception in 1896
and 1897, In the latter year 764 seals were taken south of the award area, 717 being
females.
Sealing on the Farallon ground continues through February and March. ' Seals
are scarce on the Vancouver ground in January, their huntingseldom being attempted
before February, while March and April seem to be the best months for this ground.
PELAGIC SEALING. 233
On the Fairweather ground sealing is carried on from March until June.
Sealing on the Japan coast does not regularly commence before the middle of
March, and the sealing fleet is not on the ground in full force before April 1. For
January and February there appears to be but the record of a single vessel, at the
southern border of this sealing ground.
March sealing is practically limited to the southern quarter of this ground. Seal-
ing in April is extended north to about the latitude of Hakodate, and operations in
May extend but little north of it. June sealing begins a little south of Hakodate
and extends to the north end of Iterup Island, when the seal herd begins to move
rapidly, there being no July sealing of any importance south of the summer habitat
in Bering sea. The height of the sealing on both sides of the Pacific is in March,
April, and May, but.the difference in the latitude of the hunting grounds is very great,
90 per cent of the northwest coast catch being made from 500 to 1,000 miles farther
north than that of the Japan coast.
The coastwise hunting range on the Japan coast for any month averages little
more than 400 miles, while the range for the same month on the northwest coast is
from two to five times as great. Thus, for February there is a range of 1,000; for
March, 2,000; for April, 1,500; for May, 1,000, and for June, 1,000 miles.
For both of the Bering Sea sealing grounds sealing is practically limited to July,
August, and September, and is conducted within a radius of 500 miles. There is no
sealing anywhere in October and November.
Vessels sealing on the Japan coast in 1896 cleared from Canadian and American
ports between December 20 and January 20, reaching the sealing ground, or some of
the Japanese ports, early in March, a few calling at Honolulu on the way. Vessels
going to Bering Sea leave the Japan sealing ground in June, those clearing from Puget
Sound or Victoria sailing usually after the middle of the same month.
Vessels refitting at Japanese ports call at Yokohama only at the commencement
of the season, Hakodate being the most convenient port later in the season.
In June, 1895, 15 seals were taken in the northern part of the Sea of Japan and
in La Perouse Straits, by the American schooner Penelope. Seals occurring in these
waters are probably referable to the Robben Island herd.
Although sealing vessels have for the past eighteen years taken more than 60,000
seals from islands in the Okhotsk Sea, there are no data at hand to show that any
important number was procured in the water. In 1895 the American schooner
Anaconda took 170 seals in the Okhotsk Sea, in the vicinity of St. Iona Island.
Late in June, 1895, the American schooner M. M. Morrill took 80 seals in the
Kuril passes south of Paramusir Island, many of which were females in milk, indica-
ting their connection with the now nearly obliterated rookeries in the Middle Kuril
Islands. A slightly earlier breeding season is also indicated for seals belonging to
the Kuril rookeries.
Pelagic sealing off the Japan coast was not engaged in to any important extent
until the restrictions of the modus vivendi in 1892 excluded the sealing fleet from the
American side of Bering Sea. Since then the Japan ground has been regularly visited
by a Jarge portion of the fleet.
Prior to 1892 the seals taken in May and June off the southern coast of the
Alaska Peninsula constituted an important part of the pelagic catch. Since the Paris
regulations came into force in the award area there has been no May, June, or July
234 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
sealing in this-section of the Northwest sealing belt, the season closing April 30,
before sealing operations have extended to the westward of the Fairweather ground.
While the restrictions placed on pelagic sealing at various times during the last
half dozen years have scattered the fleet over all parts of the Pacific Ocean north of
latitude 35°, it does not appear from the abundant sealing records at hand that seals
occur in important numbers anywhere outside of the coastwise hunting grounds
already outlined.
In June and July sealers passing from the Japan coast to Bering Sea or to North
American ports pick up stragglers, consisting chiefly of young seals, at many points
in mid-ocean, but the entire number of seals taken in this way would probably not
exceed a thousand.
COMPARISON OF MIGRATION ROUTES.
Although the American and Asiatic seal herds migrate between the same degrees
of latitude—34° and 60° north—the length of the route followed by the former is
nearly twice that of the latter. It extends not merely through 26 degrees of latitude,
but through 56 degrees of longitude, or from longitude 119° to 175° west, while the
Asiatic herd has but 30 degrees to traverse, or from longitude 141° to 171° east. The
extreme range of the American herd is but little short of 3,500 miles. Both herds
arrive at and depart from the summer habitat in Bering Sea simultaneously, but
there the resemblance in their respective migratory movements begins to diminish.
What the ocean temperatures, currents, and prevailing winds they encounter along
their respective migration routes may have to do with their progress we do not know,
but it appears that the American herd, traversing a vastly longer route, reaches the
common southern limit of 34° first. Its movement for the next six months is slowly
and steadily northward toward the summer habitat, which is reached by the adult
portion of the herd but littie earlier than the actual commencement of the breeding
season. The younger classes of seals arrive somewhat later.
The Asiatic herd, on the contrary, lingers in the winter habitat until the breeding
season is near, when its northward movement is sudden and rapid. The two herds
thus differ much in the course and extent of their migration routes and the progress
they make in following them.
SEALING GROUNDS IN RELATION TO FISHING BANKS. :
It does not appear that the various tracts of ocean frequented by the seals during
their seasonal movements have any very direct relation to the coast fishing banks, as
the greater part of any sealing ground isoff soundings. On the Japan sealing ground
the hundred-fathom line is reached at a distance averaging less than 10 miles from the
shore, while a few miles beyond it exist some of the most profound depths that have
yet been sounded. Even in the great gulf opposite the Straits of Tsugar, where an
important part of the Japan seal catch is made, the hundred-fathom curve follows the
shores, an arm of the deep sea penetrating far in between the islands. The same is
true of the Commander sealing ground, the hundred fathom line being everywhere
close along shore, while at the southern border of this sealing ground there exists a
depth of 2 miles.
Fully three-fourths of the Pribilof sealing ground lies off the western border of
the great plateau from which the Pribilof Islands rise. Perhaps the seals would not
be found on soundings there were it not that their breeding grounds are located far
back on the plateau. ;
| 120° (25° 130° 135° 140° 145° 150° 155°
- KEY TO COLORS
January ®
February °
March ®
April °
May e
June °
July e
Augus t oO
September e
December °
(S ealing not carried on in October and November,)
Vladivostok of
A §°
: S 3
%
4,
Z,
RiL?/ mel, 2
M. : ae =
J } é; Oy. 6°
a. yoruru Usp. é Shea / ° ES oe
eee on /
° J e ~ ay ee
e ri / / -
° / js /
~ / ° /
Fs = yp / /
/ as / /
~ ey
y * / =e ° / /
J
e I “a
/ 43
/
/o / /
/ 2 / . /
a, dy /
/ °
/ "eG : /
a /
/
/
[ /
/ ° f
/ : /
f > /
/ ° ii”
/ / ea
/ aa —_ /
/ cr.
/ be BS
/ /
~ /
Sad 7 /
Rees, |
i |
| a
/ /
/ | |
/ j
See |
ec a
ee
eos
| ae
eis
| cee ee
)
165° 170° \75
165° 160° 155° 150°
| PACIFIC. OCEAN | —_
_. 7 ——erseens MAP |
BERING SEA AND THE NORTH PA
| :. DISTRIBUTION and MIGRA
| | OF THE
| | AMERICAN AND ASIATIC FUR S
|
ae. ee L | BASED ON THE LOG RECORDS OF 123 VESSELS ENGAGED IN 1
Se ee | AT VARIOUS TIMES FROM 1883 TO 1897, WITH AN AGGREGATE Ca’
| | |
| | |
| a Prepared by C. H. TOWNSEND
| idway J.
| | | U. S, FISH COMMISSION
i | |
sc °
——t ° ° ° °
175° 180 Fs) 170 105 160 185
35? 130° tae 120° is" 110° 105° 100°
Each colored platting wdicates the latitude and
longitude Of a@ vessel Jor one days Sealing.
Lach months sealing zs colored distinctively -
see key to colors. cing
Sealing positions tre full represent an aggre-
gate catch of 304713 seals.
Sealing position for month of May at Guada-
liipe 1da.,Mex., relates to the Guddalupe Fur
Seal :
Positions of sealing vessels from logbooks col-
lected by CH. Tounsend, AB. Alexander; and
, a Irl. Steneger, with additions jrom records
; Jilted tr the Treasury Department and com-
prising all available data.
Names of tsltarias on which fur seals breed
i wrnportant nimbers are underlined in red.
Names of islands on which the fur seal ts
_g. Practically exterminated are underlined
' tH blue.
No May June or Jilly sealing tn award
area since 1893.
June and July positions in mid-ocean
said to represent young seals.
Latest data omttted for want of SPACE
(Location indicated thus —>)
PACIFIC OCEAN
TRATIONS
, SEAL HERDS -
iD IN PELAGIC SEALING - . 2
\TE CATCH OF 304,713 SEALS.
D
“160° 145° 140° 135° 130° 125°
PELAGIC SEALING. 235
Throughout the extensive Northwest sealing belt the seal herd, while following
the coast very closely, keeps as a rule off the plateau included within the hundred-
fathom curve. The Fairweather ground is altogether off soundings except in the case
of a few stragglers.
' The Vancouver and Farallon grounds lie mostly off soundings, their inshore
margins overlapping on the plateau. Elsewhere along the coast seals are found
almost entirely off soundings, the submerged plateau being very narrow.
‘ In the case of the Farallon and Vancouver grounds, where seals are taken: very
close to the coast, there are great salmon runs toward the Sacramento and Columbia
rivers and the Straits of Fuca, which may have some influence on the seal herd. We
know very little about the food of the seal herd during its migration up the coast.
INSPECTION OF SEAL SKINS—EXCESS OF FEMALES IN THE PELAGIO CATCH.
Tn order to give effect to the award rendered by the Tribunal of Arbitration at
Paris, relative to the fur-seal fishery, masters of sealing vessels were required to file
with collectors of customs full information respecting the sex of all seals taken.
It soon became evident that the proportion of sexes was not being reported in
accordance with the facts, and inspectors of seal skins were appointed to examine
all skins entered at United States ports. Practical furriers were selected for this
purpose, and as a guide to such persons examining skins an explanatory circular
was furnished.!
The inspections showed in most cases, a much greater proportion of females than
was reported by the masters of vessels. Many of the latter discredited the inspections,
contending that the sex of skins could not be determined with accuracy. Experience
has, however, proved thatthe sex of salted skins can be determined, except in the case
of yearlings.
Mr. L. J. Hansen, a furrier of thirteen years’ experience, who has inspected all
catches of seal skins entered at San Francisco since 1894, affirms that the determination
of the sex of skins is practicable, except in yearlings, and offers no difficulty with
proper care and attention. Mr. Hansen relies mainly on the evidence furnished by the
presence or absence of teats and the size and shape of the pelt. He finds the pelt of
the female broader in the region of the teats and narrower at the tail end than that of
the male of the same size.: ; i
In the circular referred to the directions for the determination of sex furnished
by the writer, are as follows:
As a guide to inspectors in examining skins, appended hereto will be found outline sketches of
male and female fur seals, seen from under side after removal of skins, showing the lines along which
-the cuts are made in skinning (figs. 1 and 2); skins of male and female seals, seen from the raw side,
showing the positions of the indentations on the margins of the male skin (caused by cutting through
the genital opening), and of the teats in the female skin by which the sexes may be determined (figs.
3and4). The presence or absence of teats furnishes the best evidence as to sex represented by the
skins of adult seals, the differences presented by the skins of the two sexes being shown in the figures
which accompany this circular. The teats, four in number, are situated near the margins of the skin,
about midway between the flipper holes and the tail end. They are not readily discernible, but their
positions will be disclosed by feeling with the fingers over the raw side of the skin, and when found,
they can easily be pushed throughthe fur. In the males, the teats exist only in an undeveloped condi-
tion, and the genital opening, cut through by the operation of skinning, forms a slight indentation on
each margin of the skin, a short distance in advance of the rear end; these indentations, however,
1 Treas. Dep., Div. Special Agts., Circular No. 75, 1895.
236 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
being often disfigured in the cutting. The skins of male seals over 3 years old may be recognized by '
their large size. The sex of young seals is more difficult to determine, the teats being undeveloped,
but traces of the genital openings of the young males may be looked for on the margins of the skins,
as above described.
In the light of experience it seems desirable to make some additions to these
directions: The pelts of females are broader across the belly and narrower at the tail
end than in males of the same size. The difference in the tail end of the pelts may be
observed more readily by bringing the edges of the skin together. In adult females
an additional clue to the sex and age exists in bluish spots on the raw side ofthe skin
opposite the teats, which may be seen by turning back the blubber, which generally
conceals them.
Diragram showing differences between commercial skins of male, a, and female, b, fur seal.
No official inspection of seal skins as to sex has been undertaken by Canadian
customs authorities, and the proportion of female seals reported by masters of sealing
vessels has averaged much larger than at United States ports where inspections
have been made.
When seals are skinned in the boats and canoes, in order to lighten them,
the tally of the sexes is troublesome as the daily catch is brought on board ship,
and the proportion of sexes represented is seldom determined faithfully. There
is an enormous excess of breeding females in the pelagic catch, in Bering Sea
especially, which is not so reported, as sealers fear further restrictions on their wasteful
methods of sealing. This subject has been discussed at some length by the writer in
reports on pelagic sealing in 1894-95.1 For the year 1896 the number of females
! Senate Doc. 137, Part II, Fifty-fourth Congress, first session, Cond. Seal Life, etc.
PELAGIC SEALING. 237
reported by American vessels. from all hunting grounds is three times that of the
males, while. Canadian vessels report the two sexes in nearly equal aumnbars, the
‘females being slightly in excess. .
Comparison of Canadian and American figures on proportion of sexes represented in pelagic ‘catch for 1896.
Russian Total Northwest
Japan coast. oGEah. tal. Gunak: Bering Sea. Total. Grand total.
Males.|_ ¥®- |Males.| Fe |Males.| Fe. | Males.
Fe- ¥Fe- Fe-
wales iiales: lenaree Males. Males. Males
Fe-
males. males. males. *| males.
Canadian ....| 8,470 | 9, 498 479 829 | 8,949 | 10,327 | 5,015
3,335 | 10,185 | 15,515 | 15,200 | 18, 850 | 24,149 29,177
American. ...| 1,820 | 2,788 19) 253 | 1,889 | 3,042 222
3, 229 959 | 2,831 | 1,191 | 5,050 | 3,030 9,101
Similar comparisons for 1897 show that Canadian vessels reported the two sexes
in more nearly equal numbers, while American vessels reported the number of females
as more than five times that of the males:
Japan coast, sail Total. a Bering Sea. Total. Grand total.
Fe- Fe- Fe- Fe- |aro1..| Fe- Fe- | Fe- -
Males. males. Males males. Males. males. Males. males. Males. males. Males. males. Males. males.
Canadian ....-- 8, 677 | 3,644 454 928 | 4,131 | 4,572 | 2,263 | 2,819 | 6,720 | 8,887 | 8,983 | 11,706 18, 114 | 16,278
American ..... 222 | 1,053 |....---|---.--- 222 | 1,053 193 | 1, 565 229 628 422) 2,193 644 3,
The effect of these inspections on the returns made by masters of American
vessels has been wholesome, and the difference in the figures for each sex, as reported
by the two fleets may be seen in the above tables.
In the Northwest coast catch of 1896, made by the American schooner J. Eppinger
we have 1,340 females against 17 males. It is unnecessary to cite further differences
in this respeok: The facts are against the possibility of a preponderance of males
being taken on any sealing ground.
Following the. pelagic sealing season in Bering Sea a loss of young seals takes
place on the islands that is proof of the great numbers of adult females destroyed,
while the killing of most of the nonbreeding males on the islands, and the fact that the
. breeding males remain on land during the best of the pelagic season, precludes the
possibility of any such proportion of males being found in the Canadian pelagic catch
as has been reported. In addition to this, advices under date of January 8, 1897,
from London establishments, where the pelagic catch is prepared for market, show at
least 85 per cent of it to consist of the skins of females. This is also true of preceding
seasons.
The log-book records of the two fleets during recent years being at hand, inter-
esting comparisons have been made. |
Canadian vessels reporting a preponderance of male seals having been sealing
side by side with American vessels proved to have taken a majority of female seals, it
is evident that the returns of the Canadian fleet in this respect are unreliable. The
records show also that a few Canadian vessels reported a large majority of females.
‘
WEATHER CONDITIONS ON THE PELAGIC SEALING GROUNDS.
- The following tables have been prepared from the log records of the Canadian
and American vessels engaged in pelagic sealing in Bering Sea from 1894 to 1897.
They are interesting chiefly as showing the large number of days during the season
when the weather conditions were such as to permit of seals being taken. Sealing
begins in Bering Sea on August 1 and is continued actively until some time after the
238 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
middle of September, when the vessels leave for home. The records do not show any
very great differences in the weather conditions from year to year. In August seals
are taken nearly every day, there having been but three August days from 1894 to
1897 when ‘seals were not taken. In September during the same years sealing has
been nearly continuous until after the middle of the month, when the rapid with-
drawal of vessels begins on account of heavy weather. Very few vessels remain after
the 20th, and they are usually all out of Bering Sea before the end of the month.
There are days on some parts of the sealing grounds when vessels do not lower their
boats while vessels elsewhere make fair catches. A careful examination of the
records shows that summer storms in Bering Sea are local and do not necessarily
interrupt hunting over the entire sealing area.
Table showing number of days during months of August and September, 1894, when pelagic sealing was car-
ried on in Bering Sea, as indicated by log entries of a majority of the vessels of the sealing fleet.’
1894. Vessels.
Aug. 1 | Mascot, Borealis, Earle, Favorite, Rich, Minnie, Etta, and Beatrice.
2 | Mascot, Therese, Etta, Triumph, Sapphire, Moore, and Katherine.
3 | Mascot, San Jose, Borealis, Earle, Favorite, Rich, Therese, Minnie, Etta, Columbia, Beatrice, and Fawn.
4 | Jose, Borealis, Earle, Favorite, Rich, Therese, Minnie, Etta, Columbia, Beatrice, Fawn, and L. Olsen.
5 | Jose, Borealis, Favorite, Rich, Erland, Minnie, Etta. Columbia, Beatrice, and Fawn.
6 | Jose, Ellen, Earle, Rich, Kilmeny, Therese, Deeahks, Erland, Minnie, Etta, Columbia, Fawn, and L. Olsen.
7 | Ellen, Borealis, Earle, Favorite, Therese, Deeabks, Minnie, Etta, Columbia, Beatrice, Fawn, and L. Olsen.
8 | Jose, Borealis, Ellen, Favorite, Kilmeny, Therese, Deeahks, Erland, Minnie, Columbia, and Beatrice.
9 | Mascot, Borealis, Kilmeny, Deeahks, Columbia, Beatrice, Fawn, and Johnson.
0 | Jose, Borealis, Ellen, Earle,
son, and L. Olsen.
LL | J ae Borealis, Ellen, Favorite, Kilmeny, Therese, Deeahks, Minnie, Etta, Sparks, Beatrice, Fawn, Johnson, and L.
sen.
12 | Jose, Borealis, Rich, Kilmeny, Erland, Minnie, Beatrice, and Johnson.
13 | Rosie Olsen, Jane Grey, Arietis, Vera, Sapphire, and Aurora.
14 | Borealis and Deeahks,
15 | Borealis, Favorite, Grey, Rich, Deeahks, Minnie, Beatrice, Algar, Johnson, and Sparks.
16 | R. Olsen, Rich, Deeahks, Erland, Minnie, and Fawn.
17 | R. Olsen, Grey, Kilmeny, Minnie, Columbia, and Beatrice.
18 | Borealis, R. Olsen, Earle, Favorite, Grey, Rich, Kilmeny, Deeahks, Erland, Minnie, Etta, Beatrice, Henrietta,
Algar, Fawn, Johnson, and Sparks.
19 | Favorite, Rich, Kilmeny, Deeahks, Minnie, Etta, Columbia, Henrietta, Beatrice, Algar, Johnson, and Sparks.
Mascot, Favorite, Rich, Kilmeny, Deeahks, Minnie, Columbia, Beatrice, Fawn, John-
Kilmeny. .
22 | Ellen, R. Olsen, Earle. Favorite, Grey, Kilmeny, Deeahks, Erland, Minnie, Etta, Algar, and Fawn.
23 | Favorite, Rich, Kilmeny, Therese, Deeahks, Minnie, Etta, Columbia, Beatrice, Algar, Fawn, Johnson, and Sparks.
24 | Favorite, Rich, Kilmeny, Therese, Decahks, Minnie, Etta, Columbia, Henrietta, Algar, Johnson, and Sparks.
25 | Rich, Tilmeny, Erland, Minnie, Beatrice, and Sparks. ,
26 | Grey, Rich, Kilmeny, Deeahks, Minnie, and Etta.
27 | Grey, Rich, Kilmeny, Therese, Deeahks, Erland, Minnie, Etta, Beatrice, aes Fawn, and Johnson.
28 | Grey, Hr ea Therese, Deecahks, Erland, Minnie, Etta, Columbia, Henrietta, Beatrice, Algar, Fawn, John-
son, an arks,
29 Grey, Rich, een Therese, Deeabks, Erland, Minnie, Etta, Columbia, Henrietta, Beatrice, Algar, Fawn, John-
son, ali parks.
30 Grey, Rich, Kilmeny, Therese, Deeahks, Erland, Minnie, Etta, Henrietta, Beatrice, Algar, Fawn, Johnson, and
parks.
31 Grey, Hick, Kilmeny, Deeahks, Erland, Minnie, Etta, Colambia, Beatrice, Henrietta, Algar, Fawn, Johnson, and
parks. 7 F
Grey, Bich Balen yi Therese, Decahks, Erland, Minnie, Columbia, Etta, Beatrice, Henrietta, Algar, Fawn, John-
son, and Sparks
Grey, Rich, ilmeny, Therese, Deeahks, Erland, Minnie, Etta, Columbia, Beatrice, Henrietta, Algar, Fawn, John-
son and Sparks. ‘
Sept.
1
2
3 | Therese, Columbia, and Katherine.
4 | Triumph, Senehre, Borealis, Ainoko, and Kate.
5 | Rich, Columbia, Beatrice, Henrietta, Algar, Fawn, Johnson, and Sparks.
8 | Beatrice, Henrietta, Fawn, and Sparks. ;
7 | Erland, Henrietta, Algar, Fawn, Etta, Deeahks, and Johnson.
8 | Beatrice, Erland, Etta, Deeahks, Johnson, and Therese.
9 | Columbia, Beatrice, Fawn, Etta, Deeahks, Johnson, and Therese.
10 | Columbia, Beatrice. Erland, Fawn, Deeahks, and Therese.
11 | Sapphire and San Jose.
12 Briand, Fawn, Deeahks, and Mascot.
13 | Columbia, Beatrice, Fawn, Deeahks, and Johnson.
14 | Beatrice, Erland, Fawn, and Deeahks.
15 | Beatrice, Erland, Fawn, Deeahks, and Johnson.
16 | Beatrice, Etta, Kate, Saucy Lass, and Beatrice,
17 | Beatrice, Etta, Shelby, Ainoko, and Beatrice.
18 | Beatrice, Etta, Venture, Saucy Lass, and Beatrice.
19 | Etta, Shelby, Beatrice, Sapphire, and Rosie Olsen.
20 pe Shelby, and Rosie Olsen.
2.
1Senate Doc. 157, Part II, Fitty-fourth Congress, first session, pp. 48-50.
PELAGIC SEALING. 239
Table showing number of days during months of August and September, 1895, when pelagic sealing was
carried on in Bering Sea, as indicated by log entries of a majority of the vessels of the sealing fleet.'
1895. Vessels.
Aug. 1] Rattler, Maud S., M. M. Morrill, Enterprise, Vera, Victoria, Triumph, G. W. Prescott, C i
Swan, Bering Sea, Stella Erland, J. Eppinger, Herman, and Dora Siowerd, peels Bepanits, oa
2| Rattler, Maud 8., Enterprise, Vera, Victoria, Yriumph, G. W. Prescott, Columbia, Deeahks, Willard Ainsworth
J.G. Swan, Bering Sea, Stella Erland, J. Eppinger, erman, and Dora Siewerd. :
3 eee a ta aia Vera, Victoria, Triumph, Columbia, J. G. Swan, Bering Sea, Stella Erland, Alton, and Dora
iewerd.
4 Rattler, Maud_S.,M.M. Morrill, Enterprise, Vera, Victoria, Triumph, Columbia, Deeahks, Allie Al i
Ainsworth, J.G. Swan, Bering Sea, Stella Erland, J. Eppinger, and Dora Siewerd. : ergs
a Borpalis, We M. Morrill, Victoria, Triumph, Columbia, Deeahks, Allie Algar, and Stella Erland.
ering Sea.
7 | Maud §., Borealis, Vera, and Deeahks.
8 | Maud S., Victoria, Columbia, Deeahks, J. G. Swan, Bering Sea, Stella Erland, Louisa, and Rattler.
9 | Mand S., Borealis, M. M. Morrill, Enterprise, Vera, Victoria, Triumph, Deeahks, Willard Ainsworth, J.G. Swan
Bering Sea, Stella Erland, E. E. Webster, Bonanza, J. Eppinger, Rattler, and Dora Siewerd. ,
10 | Maud S., M. M. Morrill, Enterprise, Vera, Victoria, Triumph, G. W. Prescott, Columbia, Deeahks, Willard Ains-
worth, J. G. Swan, Bering Sea, Stella Erland, Louisa, E. E. Webster, Alton, Bonanza, J. Eppinger, and Therese.
11 | Maud S., Enterprise, Vera, Victoria, Triumph, G. W, Prescott, Columbia, Deeahks, Allie Algar, M. M. Morrill,
wee Ainsworth, J. G. Swan, Bering Sea, Stella Erland, Louisa, E. E. Webster, Alton, J. Eppinger, and
erese.
12 | Maud S., Vera, Victoria, Triumph, G. W. Prescott, Columbia, Deeahks, Allie Algar, M. M. Morrill, Willard Ains-
is eo .G. Swan, Bering Sea, Stella Erland, Louisa, E. E. Webster, Alton, ‘Baan za, J. Eppinger, and Tharseo.
‘riumph. '
14 | Victoria, Triumph, Deeahks, M. M. Morrill, Willard Ainsworth, J. G. Swan, Louisa, Alton, Bonanza, J. i
Therese, Rattler, Herman, and Dora Siewerd. * ¥ * : p Pndeppinger,
15 | Victoria, Triumph, G. W. Prescott, Columbia, Deeahks, Allie Algar, M. M. Morrill, Willard Ainsworth. J. G. Swan,
Bering Sea, Stella Erland, Louisa, E. E. Webster, Alton, Bonanza, J. Eppinger, Therese, Rattler, and Herman.
16 | Louisa, J. Eppinger, and Dora Siewerd. :
17 | Victoria, Triumph, G. W. Prescott, Columbia, Deeahks, Allie Alger, M. M. Morrill, Willard Ainsworth, J. G.
Swan, Stella Erland, Louisa, &. E. Webster, Alton, Bonanza, J. Eppinger, Therese, Rattler, and Herman.
18 Teamph, G- W. Prescott, Deeahks, Louisa, E. E. Webster, Alton, J. Eppinger, Therese, Rattler, Herman, and Dora
iewerd. - 2 ,
19 | Victoria, Triumph, G. W. Prescott, Columbia, Willard Ainsworth, J.G. Swan, Stella Erland, Louisa, J. Eppinger,
Therese, Herman, and Dora Siewerd.
20 | Victoria, Triumph, G. W. Prescott, Columbia, Deeahks, Allie Alger, M. M. Morrill, Willard Ainsworth, J. G. Swan,
Bering Sea, Stella Erland, Louisa, E. E. Webster, Alton, Bonanza. J. Eppinger, Therese, Rattler, and Herman.
21 | Columbia, Deeahks, G. W. Prescott, Allie Alger, M. M. Morrill, Williard Ainsworth, J.G. Swan, Bering Sea, Stella,
Erland, Louisa, E. E. Webster, Alton, Bonanza, J. Eppinger, Therese, Rattler, Herman, and Dora Seiwerd.
22 | G. W. Prescott, M. M. Morrill, Willard Ainsworth, J.G. Swan, Bering Sea, Stella Erland, Louisa, E. E. Webster,
Alton, Bonanza, J. Eppinger, Therese, Rattler, Herman, and Dora Siewerd. ‘
23 | Bering Sea, Stella Erland, Louisa, Therese, and Herman.
24 | Columbia, G. W. Prescott, Allie Algar, M. M. Morrill, Willard Ainsworth, Stella Erland, E.E. Webster, Alton, J.
Eppinger, Rattler, and Dora Siewerd.
25 | Allie Algar, Louisa, J. Eppinger, Therese. Rattler, and Herman.
26 | Allie Algar, Columbia, M. M. Morrill, J. G. Swan, Bering Sea, Louisa, E.E. Webster, Alton, J. Eppinger, Therese,
Rattler, Herman, and Dora Siewerd.
27 | Deeahks, G. W. Prescott, Allie Algar, Columbia, M. M. Morrill, Willard Ainsworth, J.G.Swan, Bering Sea, Stella
Erland, Louisa. E. E. Webster, Alton, Bonanza, J. Eppinger, Therese, Rattler, Herman, and Dora Siewerd..
28 | Deeahka, G. W. Prescott, Allie Algar, Columbia, M.M. Morrill, Willard Ainsworth, J.G. Swan, Bering Sea, Stella
Petey Louisa, E. E. Webster, Alton, Bonanza, J. Eppinger, Therese, Rattler, Herman, and Dora Siewerd.
29 oODaANZaA.
30 | Deeahks and G. W. Prescott.
31 | Deeahks, G. W. Prescott, Columbia, J. G. Swan. Bering Sea, Alton, Bonanza, Herman, and Dora Siewerd.
Sept. 1 | Deeahks, G. W. Prescott, Columbia, M. M. Morrill, Willard Ainsworth, J.G. Swan, Bering Sea, Louisa, E. E. Web-
ster, Alton, Bonanza, J. Eppinger, Therese, Rattler, Herman, and Dora Siewerd.
2 | Deeahks, G. W. Prescott. Columbia, M. M. Morrill, J. G. Swan, Bering Sea, Stella Erland, Louisa, Alton, Bonanza,
J. Eppinger, Therese, Rattler, Herman, and Dora Siewerd.
3 | G. W. Prescott, Allie Algar, Columbia, Bering Sea, and Louisa.
4|J.G.Swan and Bering Sea.
5
6| Therese and Rattler. {
7 | Deeabks, Columbia, M. M. Morrill, Bering Sea, Stella Erland, Bonanza, and Dora Siewerd. 2
8 | Deeahks, G.W.Prescott, Columbia, M. M. Morrill, Willard Ainsworth, Bering Sea, Louisa, E. E. Webster, Bonanza,
J. Eppinger, Therese, Rattler, Herman, and Dora Siewerd.
9| Deeahks, G. W. Prescott, Columbia, M.M. Morrill, Willard Ainsworth, Bering Sea, Stella Erland, Louisa, Bonanza,
J. Eppinger, Therese, Rattler, Herman, and Dora Siewerd. -
10 | Deeahks, G. W. Prescott, Columbia, M. M. Morrill, J. G. Swan, Bering Sea, Stella Erland, Louisa, Bonanza, Rattler,
and Dora Siewerd.
11 | Deeahks, Columbia,.and Bonanza.
12 | G. W. Prescott. .
13 | Bering Sea, Louisa, and Herman.
14
15 | Deeahks, Bering Sea, Stella Erland, J. Eppinger, Rattler and Dora Siewerd.
16 | Columbia, Bering Sea, and Stella Erland,
17
18 | Columbia, Louisa, and Rattler. .
90 | Stella Erland, Rattler, and Dora Siewerd.
21 | Bering Sea.
1§enate Doe. 157, Part II, Fifty-fourth Congress, first session, pp. 48-50.
THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
240
*
Table skowing number of days during season of 1896 when pelagic sealing was carried on in Bering Sea.
‘
seals taken.]
Canadian vessels—51.
‘eTT9_, UvEIQ. rr eKK KX
ix EX EXXXXXKXK EXK I
“omar | XX 1 KX KXKKXXKXX
Ix Ex IXXKKKXKXX
‘preumeyg | 3X 1 XX IXXKXX
‘gpuvyy | xx 1 EXxK EX IXxX
ixxxX 1XKXXX
qooseym | GX EEE EX EXXK PEt ixxxx IxXxKKX
sophez Avem | i iixitipixm titi ix ix ix pxx
‘uot Arey | XX 1 IXXXK EXXK Ebb ix IX KXMKXXXX |
ramqarr | ix tix ix tixxx tix Pixxx IxXxx IxxK!:
ey ep || xX 1X 1XXXxXX IX! LIXxXXX EXXX t
“qymg eoueropg | 1X 1 tx 1 IXXXXX } 1X IXxXK IXXXX ?
vumug | xX 1 IXXXxK IX M PEEL Ex IxKx [Xxx x }
tegpgoaegy |X PIX IXXXXMX PETE IX IXKK IXXKXX
‘ULAIE TL A XXX EXMK PPP biixxx IxXKxxx
*srLog. 1X 1 IXxXxXxxX 1 EXXXKKXX !
ix 1X IxXxxX
“paemorg vI10q,
IXXKXX IXX |
“urgdjoq. XX IX IXXX iXKK IXKK KX
‘odoIq weg Jo A110 1 IXxXXXXKX | :
eit: ae 8) ix KX IXXKXX ‘
“AA ‘OD OFTRD 'XXXXKXXKRX ot
‘KOO ¥IVOTIED ixXxXXXXXX :
‘“sT[Bolog: DliK UKXKKK :
“(yeySavyg) ooyveg
*(qaAu0oNe A) eoTTyeog, : i : a a Pe
"wromny aeEEEE
“suey 1KXKK RK
“‘qUIeg eruny iMMMN KKK
" -exooyy otuty ix 1X IXKK XK OK 1 UK
aeSTy ony cM IME KKM | LMK KKK
wouy [xx Pix iiifiiifedififpds
‘prevogoy souty | ix | ixx f ixxxx TERRE ER
py | ix | [ek Tec Tix taxis Tepenex
4 Mam woeraasnNaes oh MARR RRARRA
fs
241
PELAGIC SEALING.
ng was carried on in Bering Sea—
i
Table showing number of days during season of 1896 when pelagic seal
Continued.
‘eoucrmegT yg | ix ! 'XXXX IXXXXxX ! :
‘yyomesury mw | xx | 1xXxX IX XKXXXXXXKKK ! :
dq ‘mom "Ww | ix i ixxxx ixXxx Phi bis ixxxK ixxxx™x ! :
a "wag Sursog. | XX} 1xXx 1X [Xxx } | :
2 tupagspceee| ix tix iiiiiiii: :
E ‘sygeoog | 1X | IXXXXXXXXX ! :
I : : ; : :
& ‘erqumyog | !xXxX 1Xx 1XXXXX | :
§ ‘uogeg | ft: : :
< “a011¥ | x : hEEXxK EEX XX :
‘rope, | XxX IX : DIxxxXXx 11 EXx
‘qeemoy | : xx : X EEK IXXxK IXK : ‘x
“Sey RINT, xx : iXXx EX Xx } ix fb ix
“TORT J0g1@ AA ‘x! : x iXXxXXXXxXX KEE IK EK
x “BEIOPOTA | XX 1 ixXxXxxX } iXKXXMX IXK PPP Ix Ex EE IxKK t
“B10, | XEXKEXK PPh ixxxKx 5 ExXxXKX XK IK DT IXKKx
‘eInqUa A LEEXXXKK PEPE EK IKK EXXKXK EEX IK EEX Ix
~eutiqury, ix bExxXxXxXX ! IXXK XXX PEXK PIM x Ex txt
“yduniazy, XXXX IXXX I IXXXXXXXXXK IKK EX IX TX IX I
“BRIO J, XEbIxXxxXxXx XXX EXKXKXK EXKXKKK | EXKXX!
a “pueg qyn0g XXX EXXXK PEELE IXXXX IX IX IXK IXKK EEXX I
a “eureg IX IXKXK PEEP DE IX IXKXxx ! 1 IXxXX
2 -seery Aoneg IM IXKM EEE EEE IKXXK Kx ES XIX ix?
o 7 . ry 7
E -orryddeg Xb IXXXXX LL iXXXX IXXXXX | IRM
3 = rf . 7 +
=| ‘esop uBg xXXXxXXXX : IXXXXXXXX | xxx
a 7 7 7 7 7
8 ‘jeding, erpeg x IXXXXX IXX } xX IXXX
-r09N0tg 1 OORne wie | Lex
-edopousg a4 iXXXXXXXXKX } ixXxX
“ono if a dd BROOK 1 Saar os x XRX
*£e1dsQ : ‘ : ‘ : xxx
onyeH puw xeosq | ix } ix ixxxxxt! ix ie mx
-aoaoy wwaoQ | XX 1XXXXXXXXK PL 1K Ix Ix ix 1 ixxxx
3 TNE WG O00 SA RASA RAR RRR ARRARRR GINS Ere
& o) ; 2
a a a
4 n
16
5947—Pr 3,
THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
242
Table showing number of days during season of 1897 when pelagic séaling was carried on in Bering Sea.
[XxX = seals taken.]
a ‘QOUGIMY'T “IG : ixx x ‘ ‘x ixx xxx ; ws
ga = rears : as
Ee sresuiddg "¢ 1 axXxXxXXXXK IXXXKXXX res
2 = ; ae ; ae
<2 ‘O18 LLixx IX 1xxxxx IXx :
“Sem WETZ ‘ixxx ixx ix ixx ixx :
‘ “BEIOVOL A, ix ixx ixxxxx Ixx Ixx ixxxxx di :
“B10 A. iixx ixxx Ixxxxxxxx 1xXxxxx 1xx :
“eurquin sti eee 7 tae | deere
*qduniy, tiXX EXXKXK EXKKXXKXXKX
: “ee0r9J, i Ixxxxxxx 1XXX XXX X
*jediny, orpeg : :
“190TOLT :
-odojeueg i Hehe
8 on10 | XX it ti
3 ‘omeg ueeog | xx | IxxXxxxxxx 1! :
Qa 7 7 rary 7 7 7
- “oTUUIFL 1XXX IXXKX IS 11XxXxX IXXXXKXX IXXKXXXKXKX
i ‘roe, Arey ; ixxx 1xXxxx xx 1xxxxx Ixx ! i
a Ean se Fear
“eB. eae & @ 1
8 neues) Lat eee :
= “TART 1X" XXX x
aVFN048,T Dixxx ixx ixxxxx ix i!
-estadz0quy 1 IxXxKxX IXK 1 EXXXxXXX
vorasep ag || XX bX XXKX EXX EEXKKXXK EX IXXKXKXK | EXKKK XXX
“promorguiog | XX ! iXXXXXXXX 1 iXXXXxXXXX 'XXXKXX :
odor weg yo M419 | XX b IXXK IXKXK PE IXKKK IKKE EXXKXXX ! :
‘syeorog | xX !EXXXXXK IXXKXK EX TS x
soorywog | +X ‘Xp EXXxXxXX XK 1 EXXXXXX ! :
‘serty |: x XXX EEXXXXXX IXXXXXXKK IF x
qureg-a*w | xx xx EIXXXXKK IXXKKXXK DP EXKK Et :
‘oyoury | Xxx, XXX bE IXKXMX EXX EXKXKXKXKK IXXKMKK XK Te © ane pbb nee
a TASES ri eye HI NSS NAAR ERAS MIAO Mier mm SK awe oOas NRA RRS Ses
c=] 7 3
E Ef a
4 ‘a
Norz.—One seal taken October 4, Bering Sea schooner Geneva; only October date recorded.
PELAGIC SEALING. 243
On the Northwest coast sealing grounds sealing begins late in December and ends
the last of April. Very few vessels are actively engaged until February. As soon
as the vessels are on the ground, sealing goes on more or less regularly until the close
of the season, The great extent of this hunting ground permits of seals being taken
along some portions of their migrating route when the weather does not permit of
their being taken on others. The following tables show the days when seals were
taken along the Northwest coast during the seasons of 1895, 1896, and 1897. The
earliest sealing is off the coast of California, where it is commenced by two or three
American and Canadian vessels late in December, some of these vessels proceeding
to the Japan coast in January. During January and February other vessels clear for
the sealing grounds, but the fleet, as a whole, is not actively engaged until March and
April, when the bulk of the ea toh is taken. In 1896 most of the Canadian fleet
cleared from Victoria late in Jauuary, eight vessels not clearing until late in February.
No seals were taken by Canadian vessels until February 24 of that year. Vessels
clearing from ports in Puget Sound in January, 1896, did not commence sealing until
after the middle of February, and three of the Puget Sound vessels did not clear
until some time in March.
From an examination of the table for 1896 showing the number of days from
January 10 to April 30 when pelagic sealing was carried on by the Canadian and
American vessels off the Northwest coast, it appears that seals were taken every day
during the month of April, and every day but four during the month of March. From
January 10 to February 28 there were 17 days when seals were not taken, but many
vessels had not yet cleared, while those already cleared were making up their crews
at Indian villages along the coast.
The vessel making the longest cruise on the Northwest sealing ground was the
J. Eppinger, which began sealing off the coast of California on December 17 (1895),
took the last seals for the season off the coast of Washington on April 21. During
this time seals were taken on 69 days or a little over half of the whole number of days
for the cruise. A similar table for the season of 1895 shows that there were 3 days in
April and 1 in March when seals were not taken.
In 1897 about a third of the fleet was engaged in January; by the end of
February more than half the Canadian and American vessels were sealing, the
entire fleet not being at work as a whole until March and April. Late in December
(1896) 110 seals were taken by 4 Canadian and 2 American vessels off the coast of
California. In 1897 seals were taken by many vessels with more or less regularity
throughout the season.
THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
244
, when pelagic sealing was
March, and April, 1895
carried on off the Northwest coast.
8 in months of February,
y
Table showing number of da
American vessels—14.
slesarddg “¢
‘BULLY pues oiBy
"007 “'W
ccd
‘S9TPT
‘a Pou
Buried
‘Bog SULIOg
‘erst |
nt iKKKXK IKK
‘epinen |
thee eK LIK
‘1eseay, |
tL ixkKKxKxX I
"PaeITA VSS
iXKXXKXXX 2
“UBAG “4 ‘SUP
cee iXKxKXK
“eIquInj[oy
[xX =seals taken.]
Canadian vessels—29.
“aS “ALT
“Aqqeus
‘estidi0}uq
-Auoullry
‘JOITO Ueno, !
‘ooaRyT |
"EBO10T, |
‘B101In VT
218
“WORT “TA
“B110}0TA
TMeT
i
‘eso BG
‘aneywUry
‘osoULy
_ PRN eNsTE |.
‘arog Avy
“010
‘OFQQIT
XXXXKXK !
“2100 'O"V
-artyddesg
*qduntiy,
o1178A{ pur 1v08Q
‘euLIONIe
‘S paeAL
“(Ys) eotayvog:
*PIVMOTY VOGT
‘pueda ‘0
‘sse'y Aoneg
1895,
Feb. 1 |-.-|.--|--
245
SEALING.
PELAGIC
gic sealing was
, when pela
1895
tinued
=
March, and Abril
thwest coast—Con
carried on off the Nor
Table showing number of days in months of February,
American vesselsa—14.
‘resurddy ‘¢ |
“eOUY pUe oy
Bicrocers
‘oIssor?
“PTPI |
_ aT pouung |
“aqeeoq |
‘vag Sutog |
‘Omsta
“SPINeW
"IeSeeT,
“pUelIg BIS
"TEMG “© “BBP |
“erquinjor)
Canadian vessels—29.
“qytarg "Wa
“AqeTS
-ostidi0j ag
AMM
“FoI WeTA0 WT
“OPIOART
"B8aI0 I,
“Bl0INV
“OPV.
“Gore "TM
“BI10JOT A
Xf--]--[X[--
TMB
“e807 TRG
“Ineyeuy
“Pre J0qSh aT
“oHOUTy
_ oTeg ABIL
"0130
‘orqqrT
‘e100 ‘OF
orrqddrg
*qduuti1y,
oT}WeH puy 1v9soQ
QUIIONIe
'§ pneyy
x} x |x] x | xXIxpxPx)x
*(-qs) ooTTyeog.
He leatelic
*pLOAOIG BIO,
‘purr ‘a0
‘ssurT Soneg
1895.
Apr.
12|xX|X|x|x/ xX
13
30 | x
Table showing number of days during January, February, March, and April, 1896, when pelagic sealing was
carried on off the Northwest coast.
Dates of clearance.)
o=
Dates when seals were taken.
[x
American vessels—11.
‘reseoy, |
“vag Supiog | <
‘TReAg py stp |:
“syqeood.
“BIqmN {oD
voeqing
“BULLY PUB oye
‘SUTyIOg
‘orssor
-odoyeueg |
aeSarddsy
|
Canadian vessels—23.
‘puog qynog |
“‘OPLIOAR A
*(qaanooue A) sdTIyvog
‘edopousg
“arqdjog
*(reyZueyg) eopryvoq?
ory} pur e060
“erqarT |:
*ssury Aoneg
“oBerq weg A419
“9100 'O"V
“A 'O OnTEA |
‘zoperqe’y |
848 yT
-ourqddeg
‘280 TRS
CeUULCHY
“ooury
*pIBMOIG BIO.
*BIIOJOLA.
“Word TAA
UMRT
“OPTUTL
1896.
ISLANDS.
THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF
246
ling was
ipril, 1896, when pelagic seali
and A
January, February, March,
uring
Table showing number of days d
inued,
A
carried on off the Northwest coast—Cont:
American vessels—11.
“zesueL,
1XKX UXKKK EX
"BOQ Supeg
Pv SON IS
feu. --- . “TBAG “OD ‘sep
‘xx 1: IxXXxXxX XxX
“‘syVeaq,
Duxx t wes Sat
“eIqun[og
Sheer
“aeyTMg
XXKXX IKK KXXXX
‘ 1 xx
‘x ‘xxx
- " SUIY pus 0383
‘XxXXXXX MEK Cee Ck Ue
‘sured
me hex bi be | tex
“olssop
xx ‘xxx xxx
‘edojoueg
xx
‘rasmiddy
“pueg qnog |
ESE
OUTOABT
tXXKX UXKXKXXKX
*(doanooue A ) O11} vEg
-odojoueg
Lixx xXx:
‘arqdjoq.
‘xx KKK
*(geqSuevyg) corsye0g
{REN OOK rar
1X :x iXXXMXXX
Or7@H puv 1e0sQ
(EX EX Ix EIxXxX* IXXxXxXxXxX
'XXXXXXXXXX !
“OIQqFT
Sbrixx ixXxXxXxxXxXX !
ixXxX IXXXXxXx
“ssery Aoneg
iXXX IXXXXX t
LyX EXXxXXXXx I
‘odoiq, weg A419
Dix bixXxKxxKx
“OLOOTT ‘O°
Phi hiwx fixxxxx
“A ‘0 errTeQ
LE txXxXKK
‘ropeaqey]
'xxxXx
078 y
ixxXxK EIXXXKX !
:iixxxx™x
Canadian vessels—23,
orryddeg
Pixxx ix 1 IxXxXxXx
‘o80p uty
Liinx [XXxXXxxx
*e.1N9U2 A
LiXxx PIX EEX:
‘osoury
*pIBAOTG B10.
“BEIO}OT A
“rT TM
‘UME
“OrUOI YL
1896,
247
pelagic sealing was
PELAGIC SEALING
6, when
and April, 188
?
March
coast—Continued.
thwest
carried on off the Nor
Table showing number of days during January, February,
American vessels—11.
“108¥Oq,
"eog Supeg
“TBAG “4H ‘BEL
“ax qe00CT
“BIquIn{oD
“ueyng
‘BUY pUue oye yL
*suTqIog |
‘oIsser
‘edopomeg
re8urddy
Canadian vessels—23.
“pueg qjnog
‘ouLIOAC AT
+(JoANOOME A ) ODTI}VI
-edopoueg
curqdpoq
*(reqsuvgg) eoltyeog
‘orgVy PUE IEDSO |
“orqqrt
*sse'y Loney
‘oder eg Aq19
‘1001 0 '¥
“M'O ORtIED
wee] sws|oxeleve|ecs] %
-Ioperqe'y
Ng
saatqddeg
xX) x |X
+ 980" TRY
x
COSTS TPS PTD
*eIN}U9 A.
‘oqoury
*preaolg Bog.
"BlIOJOTA,
"Wore "TAA
UMC T
eyuUTL
1896.
27 |---| X
28 | X
29 |...)..
30 | x
Apr. 26 |...) X |X
Three Canadian and one American vessel omitted—no logs.
Table showing number of days when pelagic sealing was conducted off the Northwest coast in 1897,
[|X = seals taken.]
11.
American vessels.
"WUIOMSULY “AL
*19sBey,
«|--1X
tit ixKX
“IOV
“q BsinoT
uXxXxXXXKXKXKXK UX
‘OULY pur oye yy
ssosurddg "¢
TK KXKIXKKXKKK
"WBA "D ‘Ser
tx xk KK
XK at
“soig IOTOSTT
“sqqvee
7
i]
“erquinjoo
‘0g SUNog
Canadian vessels—29.
“qdomiy,
“AVM YIUZ
"esaley,
‘pac qqn0S
“IseUOLT
xKK KKK
‘edojeueg
‘sTyoM qed
0710,
“eT19M WBd0Q
“preue yy
oT
“neg Arey
Lx
xX XXX
r0yhuy, Arey
‘lopearqeys
“Pre JOUSLT |
TMC
‘estidio}ug
“UATB A A |
*pqgMalg BIOL
*10}90ITC.
“-oSer weg Jo A110
"x09 °D'D
‘purer ‘a'0
wan] X fon [encbecelera[eee[ee-[-neloee
‘eolrqwog.
‘sHOLy
“Ineyeury
‘qureg ‘g OTUTY
‘eS TV “TI ONIV
“ooury
1897.
| [2 pazomsary a |
*198vaT,
XK ixXKXxKXKXK IK
SD CL: §
‘@ esu0T
‘OnUY pay oyey |
x
x
x
ssesuiddg "pf |
1897—C ont’d.
"TEAS “H “sue |
m
"s01g, JOQOSt
“syyReoq:
American vessels—t11.
*eIq uANoD
"9S Sawoeg
‘qdumry,
‘Sew UBIZ |
*BS010],
“pueg yjnog
“1e2UOLg
‘edopaneg
“aITeayord |
“010 |
‘aTI9g URED |
‘preauoyy |
‘orauryy |
‘uetta Srey
sro kvy, Arey
_ dopeiqe'yT
xXx:
“prey 128ys1
TMU
astaid10j 0g
UTAIG YK
Canadian vessels—29.
“*ploMOIY BIO,
“100911,
“oS aq weg Jo A410
"x09 ‘DD
‘peer a‘
THE FUR SEALS.OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
of days when pelagic sealing was conducted off the Northwest coast
‘golleog:
‘sIaTV
-maqvury |
“yayeg “g eruay |
‘aeS LV “TONY |
1 x
xx!
‘oWOury
xX
!XXXX IXXX |
Table showing number
248
1897.
Feb. 17 | X | X |--
a
CO SUE SH UE 00
Ao
tal
aa
Nore. —110 seals taken off California and Oregon late in December, 1896, by 4 Canadian and 2 American vessels,
249
An examination of the records of ten vessels sealing off the Japan coast in 1896
shows that there were but six days between March 14 and June 30 when seals were
SEALING.
not taken, less than half the records being at hand.
PELAGIC
ling
,
1896
uring the months of March, April, May, and June,
ber of days di
ing num
Table show
when pelagic seal
was carried on off the coast of Japan.
[X = seals taken.)
x
x
x
x
x
1896.
2-a0--|osee
BO canve nese
a ieseaee :
aa | -aStyonty | ixx ! XXXXXXX |
Os . : :
‘souemmegtag| fii: 1X XX XX XX ;
a vsmor | ixx! iXXXXXXK EXX EX
‘eovatg uepioy | Xxx } iXXXXXXXKKRK XXX
= “uot y | xx iiitixx ixxxxxxxx
a ee :
o om . . =e ry
Py soe | x 1x | it eee RIKI |
| s ‘ hie me
4 Tsao 7r | XXX I ti rixidds :
‘Yqioasury | x ix : i XXX KX ixxXXXX xxXXX 1X 1XXX
-kerp oueg | xx } ix xKX 1x
*OISIa ixx : ‘XX XXX X
a Hsiitee nee nae wee Rees
a ‘bm
CI
P|
: : ee
a ; : rg 34
a3) -aeStyouy| | aie
bas i Cone
*Q0UGIMBT “99 i IXXXX f
‘q@ BsInoT : XXXKXXX :
‘9099, 7 Teploy :
a ‘mONV | st
g :
oO .
3 ‘reper |:
4 a0y, |:
“qQIoMsUry : ix IxXxxxxXX :
*£BIy one : 1xxxXx XXX X ‘
‘or | | i
a
dq
a
250 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
The only log-book records at hand relating to the sealing grounds adjacent to the
Commander Islands show that eight Canadian vessels and one American vessel, seal-
ing in August, 1892, found the weather conditions similar to those of recent seasons,
there being but one day in that month of 1892 when seals were not taken.
Table showing number of days during the months of August and September, 1892, when sealing was carried
on about the Commander Islands.
i [X =seals taken.]
Vessels. Vessels.
a a
s|o/]a a s/o |4
zt * ey o a a 5 aS awe =|
1892. = z .|/4/a] 2 1892, a s [8/3] oe
gle i@/3\2/s/z/a|4 ple) alga lale
Ble |ela\e/alala|e Bleie/a/e|elalglg
g ry . | o Oo iS o s
PIF (Sls \/4/al4le fa piE|S\/al4/al<4le la
August 1...-..-.... XK [----[--.-| X |X | X Je-e-] X | X |] August 27-.....-. sene| X | X | X -[| X
2 0 | X |X |X | KY K | K feccel K fowee 2B) onesie: e| siise| dimes arate: x
3 x|x]x]x|x] x] xx} x 29.
4 DE |) OR | SKE] eS OR PK. I Oe OS 30...
5 xT xXTxKITxX] x] x)]x {|x| x By eee aie
6.. |x |x 1x | xX I....) X | X | X | X || September 1...--.- ee a
Eee ol X Jowee] X | KM | KH | MK feces] WM | Dousa:
8.. einae| Of | XK |vewe] Ki fewes| 1 OM ess: 3...
9... eraiaial|| 6: [ieee Oe [OSes OS. (a aerate] | OS 4.
10... |x )]xX |x] xX] x] xX f.---} &K | Xx 5..
11... Nx |x |x] x [eee x PZ x | x 6..
12 Kfewenleocsleas oma rl ees Fis:
13 XK [en Bisces “B..
14 -| X |. -| xX Di svc
15... sees | sixes ast Staal istanaie 10) sp eaass
16... | X Jeee-|eeee[e-eefegee SC |swar| a ia Ue sessece
ee «| X Genel X | K fe--.] K | X I. matey 12 eccecs
18... air OK wiser] OSV OS se EARS | ie sail tasers OS | eee
19... 3] DS dsesal. PS cles ice| owes feirele| 2X ||Daaa|l DS 14. 2 cea
20 .. | ararais| ae.sce| Sous || OS dams) eens | ames 9 aes wel 45.
21 a Re] | KN OS Pawel B64) DE [= Sealy 16...
22, ep 4 Se | oe oe He Se PO x 47...
23 Me face ae) OS: Vewesid [eew-ate | FX. | OS Ih x 18...
24 .. o| OX [sa se| sms] ae Pe ae rere lapenia 19 ..
2D cinco aware Xo | eens] OS || 2S 20. senses
8 sia Sele ccal Setlevatlecec|en ea x Ye aelge cal eoe cee eee claoedls becca
On the whole, it doés not appear that the average weather conditions from season
to season are worth considering in their effect upon the catch of seals.
WASTEFULNESS OF INDISCRIMINATE SHALING.
Pelagic sealing is not regularly practiced elsewhere than in Bering Sea and the
North Pacific Ocean. During the voyage of the Canadian schooner Director from
the Atlantic to the Pacific in 1895, 620 seals were obtained by pelagic sealing off the
Falkland Islands, and in 1897 a catch of 224 seals was made adjacent to the seal
rookeries of the Galapagos Islands. During the progress and decline of this industry
in the North Pacific Ocean and Bering Sea those engaged in pelagic sealing have
stoutly maintained that the industry was not especially disastrous to the race of seals,
alleging that there was no excessive number of female seals destroyed; that the decline
in the catch during recent years has been due more to stormy weather than to scarcity
of seals, and that the various international restrictions of the past seven or eight years
have also greatly restricted the catch. It is a matter of fact, however, that the pelagic
catch is made up largely of female seals; that the weather conditions have not mate-
rially affected the annual catch, and that sealing, while restricted in some localities,
has remained unrestricted in others, thus leaving the fleet always at liberty to operate
PELAGIC SEALING. 251
somewhere. The industry is undoubtedly responsible for the great reduction that has
taken place in the American and Asiatic seal herds, and is rapidly declining. The
history of all seal fisheries, except where the seals breed in well-protected localities
and are killed under government supervision, has been a history of wasted resources,
Unrestricted fur sealing in other parts of the world has, during the past century,
resulted in the ruin of all the great seal rookeries of the Antarctic.
About the close of the last century a traffic sprang up in the skins of fur seals,
and as a result of the many voyages made to the Antarctic regions enormous numbers
of fur seals were taken. These were not, however, procured at sea by the ordinary
methods of pelagic sealing, but were taken from the rookeries on which they bred.
By 1830 the supply of fur seals in the southern seas was nearly exhausted. No
discrimination was made in the character of the seals taken, whether males or females.
The markets were frequently glutted and much of the vatch wasted. In many parts
of the Antarctic remnants of these seal herds still linger about their ancient breeding
places, and new rookeries could doubtless be established by their protection against
indiscriminate sealing.
In pelagic sealing no selections can be made; males and females must be taken
indiscriminately. So long as indiscriminate sealing continues the restoration of the
seal fisheries to their former importance will be impossible. American citizens are no
longer permitted to engage in it, and no portion of the pelagic catch can be imported
in any form into the United States. The American and Russian seal islands have
already been rendered nearly valueless by reason of pelagic sealing, and the industry
itself is greatly diminished in consequence of the scarcity of seals. It is almost as
suicidal as the indiscriminate raiding of seal rookeries.
The value of the seal skin procured in pelagic sealing does not average more than
one-third that of the skin taken on land. The land catch, made under the supervision
of the American and Russian Governments, consists of the skins of 3-year-old males
taken when they are in best condition, and constitutes a single grade of the best
quality. The pelagic catch is obtained in season and out of season. It consists of
young and old, male and female, with all skins more or less damaged by shooting or
spearing. It ere therefore, be divided into several grades, most of them of poor
quality.
Pelagic sealing is not only responsible for the destruction of large numbers ot
adult female seals, but equal numbers of young seals have died of starvation on the
seal islands in consequence of the loss of their mothers.
THE LOG-BOOK RECORDS OF THE SEALING FLEET.
Many of the difficulties in the way of solving problems connected with the life
history of the fur seal have been due to the fact that the animal is absent from its
island home in Bering Sea for about half the year, migrating thousands of miles into
the Pacific: Ocean. - Investigations of seal life af sea, especially in the vicinity of
the Pribilof Islands, have been undertaken several times by means of Government
vessels, and the work accomplished has not been without important results, but
information regarding the seal’s migration has been derived chiefly from the log-book
records of the sealing fleet. The gradual extension of pelagic sealing by vessels
from Bering Sea, where it originated in 1880, over all parts of the Pacific Ocean
252 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
frequented by fur seals, made such records important, and a large number of them
have recently been gathered together.
These records, based on actual captures of hundreds of thousands of seals at all
seasons of the year throughout the fur-seals range, include at the present time the
log books of 123 different vessels sealing at various times during a period extending
over fourteen years.
It appears from a study of the records of the sealing fleet that the American
herd, as a body, follows the continental outlines in its lingering northward migration.
As the seals do not leave the summer habitat until November, and make their first
coastwise appearance far to the southward in December and January, there is good
reason for supposing that the southward movement is well offshore and very rapid.
From the limited references in the log-book records to the different classes ot
seals taken on each of the American hunting grounds, the indications are that the
adult females migrate farthest—to the Santa Barbara Islands—the younger classes
reaching the coast a little farther to the northward—on the Vancouver ground—
while the adult males are seldom taken south of the Fairweather ground. The
schooner Penelope, in a catch of 215 seals taken south of San Francisco in 1896,
reported only 8 males. <A catch of 1,266 seals made in 1897 south of San Francisco
by the schooners Eppinger and Louisa D. contained only 72 males. Young seals 6 or
7 months old appear in large numbers along the coasts of Oregon and Washington.
Yearlings of both sexes are reported to linger in small bands far offshore in June and
July, but sealers do not spend much time in bunting them, as their market value is
small,
On the Japan coast there appears to be a larger proportion of medium-sized
. Males among the adult females than on any other Pacific hunting ground.
In Bering Sea, as is well known, the adult females taken by the sealing fleet
outnumber all other classes of seals combined.
The latitude and longitude of the daily sealing operations of all these vessels
have been platted on the accompanying map, and, each month’s sealing being
indicated distinctively, the map may be considered as representing our present
knowledge of the seasonal movement of the American and Asiatic seal herds, as well
as outlining the hunting grounds of the pelagic sealing fleet.
List of the log-book records used in the preparation of the map showing the migration and distribution of the
Sur seal,
Seals.
All United States official data (Asiatic and American coasts), 1894 to 1897, statistical tables,
fur-seal catch, Treasury Department...-..-... 222.2222. eee eee cee eee cee ce ee cee ee 85, 985
Canadian official ‘date (award area only), 1894 to 1897, department of marine and fisheries,
OGLE WE sos a tec see aedcelowin ape cibinde d £ satan cise acme miemnceivecesb ete emis ete eta cul ees ces 142, 009
Canadian official data (Asiatic, in part), 1893, department of marine and fisheries, Ottawa... 21, 055
Miscellaneous Canadian and United States data (Senate Doc. 157, Part II, pp. 50-55), 1883 to
TUE ices meee an RR re Re Reo cnn ac cesensin ie arn menace nega decline Ls oer 21, 877
Miscellaneous Canadian data (Fur-Seal Arbitration, vol. 8, pp. 816-843), 1892 ................ 15, 875
Miscellaneous Canadian and United States ‘data DENNER collected by C. H. Townsend),
1836 60: 1896) cxeawsite seisiates ence seeeeaisin on. ciecieciais aims Goede wea aeons emi von ccece 14, 828
Miscellaneous Japanese data (unpublished; collected by L. Stejneger), 1894 to 1897_.....___. 3, 084
PELAGIC SEALING. 253
List of hitherto unpublished pelagic-sealing records collected by C. H. Townsend.
Year. Schooner. Range.
Vanderbilt Northwest coast and Bering Sea.
Alexander . Do.
San Jose... -| Northwest coast.
Alton....-.-...--..-- -| Northwest coast and Commander Islands.
.| Sophia Sutherland. Northwest coast and Bering Sea.
-| Bowhead ...-.....-. Japan coast. ‘
wise! do... _ Do.
Alton... Do.
Therese .. Northwest coast and Commander Islands.
Bowhe: Japan coast.
Therese ....-.. Do.
Anna Matilda . Do.
Alexander ....- Japan coast and Kuril Islands.
Jane Gray ..--- Japan coast.
M. M. Morrill . Do.
Brenda .......-. Japan coast and Kuril Islands.
-| Mascot ........ Japan coast.
Golden Fleece . Do. ‘
Allie I. Algar ... oa Do. .
Miscellaneous log-book records of sealing vessels collected by C. H. Townsend.
SCHOONER VANDERBILT.
Northwest coast and Bering Sea. From private log of John T. Ford.
1886, Lat. N. | Long. W.| Seals. 1886. Lat.N. | Long. W.| Seals. 1886, Lat.N. | Long. W.| Seals.
fo} a o t fe} ‘ ° ’ o ‘ fo} ‘
May 17 38 29 125 40 20 || July 11 58 05 173 42 4 || Aug.. 5 54 43 167 20 13
23 38 40 126 42 2 12 56 40 171 10 30 54 56 167 33 3
24 40 128 20 3H 13 56 10 170 25 | 36 8 55 03 167 44 6
26 40 10 128 54 21 14 56 171 05 9 9 55 47 167 23 46
June 10 55 10 169 41 1 16 56 10 170 57 14 10 55 10 168 34 38
11 55 30 170 1 17 56 14 171 03 64 11 55 30 168 40 3
20 55 40 170 25 16 18 55 57 17 45 2 13 55 168 09 1
21 54 56 169 57 21 20 55 43 172 20 3 15 54 33 168 25 13
23 54 58 169 43 32 21 55 37 172 43 38 16 54°43 168 24 9
25 54 37 168 37 3 22 55 43°) 171 57 iB 19 55 03 168 53 125
26 50 16 169 42 4 24 55 23 171 05 31 21 54° 57 168 24 48
27 55 47 170 10 2 25 54 58 170 54 20 23 54 44.) 167 54 56
28 |. 55 57 171 (20 48 28 54 57 170 43 90 24 54 40 167 33 14
30 55 48 171 48 4 29 54° 27 169 23 57 26 55 27 166 47 1
July 1 56 20 172 05 68 - 30 54°15 168 37 10 29 55 37, | 166 387 92
2 56 33 173 20 22 31 54° 37 164 56 4 =
3 56 45 172 54 4)| Aug. 1 54 39 167 60 53 Total.) ......-.-. 1,425
7 57 (05 173 «(08 3 2 54 53 166 57 val
10 57 32 173 25 1 3 54 37 166 43 41
Miscellaneous notes from this log are follows:
Schooner Vanderbilt, 1886 (sealing), Captain Mayer.
Left San Francisco March 26. One hundred and twenty seals taken by April 21; 90 of these taken on
banks off Point Arenas; remaining 20 taken near Cape Perpetua.
April 23.—One seal.
April 26.—Salmon jumping and seals seen off Tillamook.
May 1.—Two seals; saw a sea lion eating a rock cod. Off Point Grenville.
May 2.—Twenty-four seals off Point Grenville 35 miles. s
May 3.--One seal; females here large, and most of them have large pups in them.
May 4.—Four seals. Almost impossible to find “sleepers.” In sight of 4 schooner, which have 15
to 20 canoes and boats; sails could be seen in any direction.
Schooner Granger reported 300 seals
in three days. The Siwash uses both gun and spear, and can get closer than we can. He
furnishes his own canoe, assistant, and grub, sells his catch to the vessel at a discount, and pays
one-third for use of the schooner.
254 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
May 9.—At Victoria. Schooner Sierra, 202 seals; Mary Ellen, 460 seals.
June 5.—Anchored in the Pass near Ugamok Island. Passed schooner Therese.
June 6.—First day in Bering Sea.
June 11.—In sight of St. George Island.
June 27.—Boarded by Corwin and notified not to hunt in Bering Sea, but captain produced papers
which were considered sufficient as permit. Guns and ammunition of schooner Sierra, Captain
Lee, seized by Corwin. ,
July 10.—Saw schooner Black Diamond, with Siwash crew.
August 3.—Spoke Mary Ellen, with 2,850 seals on board—full catch from San Francisco 3,550 seals.
August 11.—Spoke Therese, with 1,200 seals.
August 15.—Fifty miles north of Unalaska Island. Longitude, 167° 25’ north; 54° 33’ latitude.
August 30.—Starting home. About 54° 36’ latitude; 171° 50 longitude. Catch for the season: Ufron,
528; Ball, 244; Cooper, 366; Bremond, 421; Ford, 258; Captain Meyer, 104, Catch for Bering Sea:
Ufron, 323; Ball, 257; Cooper, 240; Bremond, 303; Ford, 241; Captain Meyer, 81. Rifles used
during cruise.
September 23.—Victoria.
September 24.—Sold skins at $6.25 each. *
October 12.—San Francisco.
SCHOONER ALEXANDER. ‘
[Northwest coast and Bering Sea. ]
1887. Lat.N. | Long. W.| Seals. 1887. Lat.N. | Long. W.| Seals. 1887. Lat. N. | Long. W.| Seals.
° i fe $ io} i ° t fo} ‘ °o f
Feb 8 37 10 123 30 1 || Apr. 18 41 35 125 00 9 || June 13 53 45 162 49 4
10 37 «15 123 45 2 20 43° 35 124 57 12 18 54 00 162 38 6
16 37 27 | 124 10 5 21 44 50 | 124 54 16 19 53 43 | 163 07 7
17 37 «50 123 45 6 22 44 45 124 57 29 20 53° 27 163 20 10
26 37 45 | 123 50 2 28 45 48 | 124 50 62 22 "3.37 =| 163 10 11
28 87 45 | 123 43 3 28 47 58 | 124 30 2 24 53 40 | 162 57 12
Mar. I1'| 38 00 | 124 00 3 || May 12 48 10 | 125 20 36 26 53 45 | 162 40 14
15 88 30 | 123 57 4 13 48 30 | 126 20 42 27 53 47 | 163 35 18
18 38 35 | 123 47 2 4 48 45 | 126 40 47 28 53 59 | 162 57 18
23 39 10 | 124 40 9 15 48 30 | 127 10 58 29 53 387 163 10 5
28 39 00 | 124 45 1 22 51 10 | 138 20 63 || July 12 53 46 | 163 25 65
30 39 15 | 124 47 2 23 52 40 | 148 30 65 || Aug. 18 54 00 | 162 25 86
Apr. 3 40 00 | 124 40 7\| June 7 53 30 | 163 05 1
14 40 15 | 124 50 12 53 40 | 162 57 2 Teta.) caorsencas 800
‘ 15 41 25 | 124 55 38 10 53 50 | 162 47 3
Extracts from a private log kept on board the Canadian schooner San José during a sealing cruise along the
coasts of California, Oregon, and Washington in February, March, and April, 1888.
1888. Position. Seals. 1888. Position. Seals.
Feb. — | Westport, 35 miles NE .......-. Raineenee ae 7 || Mar. 26 | Lookout, 15 miles NE 21
6 | Cape Gorda, 35 miles NE......... 2 27 |....-do... 15
8 | Cape Mendocino, 25 miles E...... 5 || Apr. 2 | Haystack Rock, 15 as 14
9 | Klamath River, 20 miles NE ..... 6 8 | Haystack Rock, 20 miles ENE . 5
17 | Off Albion .......-..- wieuieiem wiewicrosate 1 4 | Haystack Rock, 25 miles ENE . 4
25 | Fort Ross, 30 miles NE............- 4 5 | Haystack Rock, 15 miles ENE 3
Mar. 5/ Farallones,10 miles ENE .. ‘ 6 5 | Tillamook Head, 30 miles N 10
6 | Point Reyes, 35 miles ESE . 2 9 | Tillamook Head, 18 miles N’ 11
7 | Point Arena, 25 miles NE -. 1 10 | Columbia River, 30 miles NE. 8
9 | Cape Mendocino, 60 miles N 4 11 | Columbia River, 35 miles ENE 22
10 | Cape Mendocino, 40 miles N 3 12 | Columbia River, 40 miles ENE . 18
14 | Umpqua Shoal, 20 miles E.. 17 13 | Columbia River, 45 miles ENE ..... 2
15 | Cape Perpetua, 60 miles E. by N . 7 16 | Tillamook Head, 30 miles E. by N ........ 29
16 | Cape Perpetua, 40 miles NE.... 15 17 | Tillamook Head, 40 miles BE. by N........ 13
TT |ecinwere dO memaiccesnewsesence cine 5 18 | Columbia River, 35 miles NE. by N ...-.. 7
19 | Cape Perpetua, NE 2 21 | Destruction Island, 30 miles NE ......... 29
20 Cape pooreny # mies ae i ze epi Leet gaffed from schooner Pevaweawn 1
2 Jape Lookout, 30 miles | ape Flattery, 40 miles NNW.....-.... a
23 | Cape Lookout (from deck), NNE ... 1 a so re eee
24 | Haystack Rock, 6 miles (Davis 2) E. 34 DANA axaipae ea Radom inmennas nan axa as 355
PELAGIC SEALING.
Miscellaneous log-book records of sealing vessels collected by C. H. Townsend—Continued.
SCHOONER ALTON—GEORGE WESTER, MASTER.
[Northwest coast and Commander Islands.]
255
1891. Where obtained. Seals. 1891. Where obtained. Seals.
Mar. 1 | Off Tillamook, Oregon............----- 2 Lat. N. Long. W.
: “ae é ie. seeins aie ms a Gate eisielerewieafeareieiere 2 ‘ ° 1
ape Disappointment ............. 7 |) June 1/57 1
4 | Shoalwater Bay, Washington -..-. 5 4| 58 22 os
5 | Cape Flattery, Washington ....... 9 “6 2 4
6 | Cape Beale, British Columbia ..... 2 8 2
~ 23 | Cape Flattery.........-.--..---.-. 16 9 7
27 | Shoalwater Bay....-..-.-..-...--+ 4 10 | 58 15.... : 10
ce Cape Disappointment - = a - Houle Bk. (center) -.. 5
31 | Grays Harbor...-.. 21 a
Apr. 18 | Cape Disappointment - 4
24 | Mount Edgcombe, Ala: 6 506
27 | Mount Fairweather 6 Off Commander Islands:
16 || July _ 15 | Copper Island, SE., near shore... 200
4 17-23 | 1.2: OO see creu,cetereate to daen eesti 288
0 di 7 24 | SW. of Bering , near shore... 1
May 1-10 | Mount Fairweather (5 pos.)...-.... 69 28-29 | SE. of Copper Island, near shore ...... 84
12-15 | Pamplona Rocks (2 pos.).--...-.-- 35 |) Aug. 4-9] Lat, N. 54° 42’, long. E. 169° 12! (3 days). 28
17-25 | Cape St. Elias (5 pos.)..--- ating 76 10-11 | SE, of Copper Island, near shore...... 45
27-31 | Mount Fairweather (4 pos.).........-.| 79 7
DO) cenaseseomenmien weenie cain 1, 162
SCHOONER SOPHIA SUTHERLAND.
{Northwest coast and Bering Sea.]
1892. Lat. N. | Long. W.| Seals. 1892. Lat.N. | Long. W.| Seals. 1892. Lat.N. | Long. W.| Seals.
° ‘4 fe] f Oo t oO t oO i ° if
Mar. 7 37 (35 123 44 1 |} May 12 51 30 1382 57 4|| June 7 59 20 143 05 10
8 38 42 124 00 14 15 53 45 133 48 1 59 35 148 10 6
9 38 «23 124 15 3 Ih 16 54 57 134 57 2 10 58 40 143 20 8
10 38 «32 124 30 4 || 18 55 40 134 43 3 12 58 34 142 57 25
1 38 57 124 40 9 20 56 47 136 42 19 14 59 47 142 50 10
4 38 43 124 56 3 22 58 00 139 40 40 17 58 30 143 00 14
16 39 33 124 40 5 24 58 00 140 40 40 21 57 50 148 43 6
18 40 20 124 56 1 25 58 30 140 34 5 22 57 45 150 00 i
- 31 43 47 124 57 2 26 57 43 141 35 4\|| July 4 56 30 164 45 2
Apr. 13 47 48 125 57 9 27 57 «57 142 10 10 18 56 03 167 23 9
“ 18 47 57 125 56 1 28 58 03 142 03 1 21 55 40 169 34 2
May 1 49 30 | 128 05 4 30 58 49 142 17 9 a22 55 35 170 34 , 2
2 49 33 128 07 1 31 58 47 142 43 40
9 49 43 128 34 19 || June 4 58 57 | 142 33 20 Total.|........-- 392
11 50 07 131 43 20 59 21 143 30 3
aOrdered out of Bering Sea.
SCHOONER BOWHEAD.
[Japan coast.]
1892. Lat.N. | Long. E. | Seals. 1892. Lat.N. | Long. E. | Seals. 1892. Lat. N. | Long. E. | Seals.
oF o UF o 8 Oo 4 * o Ff oon
Apr. 14 38 17 144 25 37 || May 20 41 04 144 28 185 || June 14 41 40 142 10 1
16 38 38 144 06 16 41 15 143 56 26 15 41 47 142 09 1
17 40 25 143 02 1 22 41 27 144 20 22 16 40 45 | 142 20 66
18 40 35.| 144 57 21 23 41 15 144 14 23 17 41 40 142 10 5
20 41 20 145 00 41 24 41 24 144 45 2 18 41 40 142 30 26
21 40 45 144 40 2 31 41 21 144 18 29 19 |}, 41 25 142 25 1
22 40 30 145 08 31 || June 1 41 30 1 08 70 20 41 30 142 40 19
23 39.47 |. 145 56 13 41 30 | °144 18 2 21 41 45 143 23 1
26 39 27 142 48 1 3 41 38 143 55 23 23 43 12 146 47 2
27 40 41 142° 25 36 4 41 00 142 57 12 25 44 30 148 08 29
May 6 40 34 142 09 29 5 40 55 143 02 25 28 45 06 150 40 3
7 40 40 142 35 38 6 41 04 142 49 19 || July 6 53 (20 167 24 5
8 40 37 143 (05 18 7 41 15 142 (57 41 11 54 05 169 12 2
10 39 45 142 56 37 8 41 00 142 03 102 12 54 27 169 27 1
13 40 27 143 00 3 9 41 11 142 18 69 14 64 11 168 39 6
15 40 20 142 30 20 10 41 15 141 54 12 15 54 23 169 00 12
16 40 55 144 11 5 11 41 20 141 30 73 17 54 30 168 48 1
17 41 05 144 15 36 12 41 16 141 35 58
18 40 56 144 17 92 13 41 45°| 141 45 108 Total.) cacssences 1,712
19 41 04 144 29 205
256 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Miscellaneous log-book records of sealing vessels collected by C. H. Townsend—Continued.
. SCHOONER BOWHEAD—Continued.
[California coast—Japan coast. ]
1893. Lat. N. | Long. W.} Seals. 1893, Lat. N. | Long. E. | Seals. 1893. Lat. N. | Long. E. | Seals.
° ‘ fe} A ° , fe} ‘ ie} a io} f
Jan. 23 38, 24 123 20 8 || Apr.‘ 23 39 33 143 56 8 || June 4 41 37 142 56 41
24 38, 00 | 123 40 2 24 39 40 | 143 55 27 5; 41 48 | 142 50 3
25| 37 40 | 123 50 3 |! 27| 40 14 | 144° 34 3 6] 41 26 | 143 00 5
28 39 44 144 06 53 7 41 40 143 50 7
Lat. N. | Long. E. | 29 40 03 144 04 23 8 41 51 145 44 - 18
Apr. 1 38 22 146° 30 2 | ‘May 1 39 41 144 10 3 9 41 40 143 40 il
. 2) 38 46 | 146 44 30 || 7| 39 59 | 145 49 2 15 43 10 | 145 50 7
4 37 38 145 32 1 10 39 45 142 20 9 16 43 04 145 54 10
5 38 03 145 35 2 | 11 39 37 142 55 30 19 43 20 146 16 8
6| 38 45 | 145 40 15 13 39 48 | 142 30 42 22! 43 12 | 146 30
9] 36 56 | 145 21 49 || 14/ 39 45 | 142 30 37 29) 43 15 | 146 45 2
10 37 50 | 145 30 5s 16; 39 39 | 142 40 22 || July 15) 45 18 | 151 25 5
12} 38 13 | 145 18 2) 17} 39 54 | 142 36 74 45 41 | 152 25 8
13 37 36 | 144 53 2), 18; 39 52 | 142 42 47 23 53 46 | 169 00 3
4 39 05 | 144 52 5 |, 19; 39 58 | 142 56 11 || Aug. 1 53 17 | 167 43 9
15! 39 41 | 145 00 21 20| 39 50 | 142 32 47 53 22 | 168 18 2
16 | 40 00 | 145 10 53 21) 39 53 | 142 47 8 3 53 37 | 168 10 1
17| 40 17 | 144 40 2 23) 39 58 | 144 41 10 4 53 38 | 168 08 3
18) 40 05 | 144 50 19 24/| 39 51 | 144 28 40 10| 53 57 | 167 00 2
19 | 39 32 | 145 03 3 25) 40 18 | 144 30 25 12 53 53 | 167 20 16
20) 39 46 | 145 06 16 26]; 41 15 | 144 00 8 —
21 39 57 | 143 51 34 29]; 40 15 | 143 10 t Total.|.....-.--. 987
22| 39 41 | 143 49 2/|June 2{ 41 30 | 141 55 5
SCHOONER ALTON.
[Japan coast.]
’ t
1893. Lat. N. | Long. E. | Seals. 1893. Lat. N. | Long. E.| Seals. 1893. Lat. N. | Long. E.| Seals.
° a oO ra ° f oo ‘ fo} f fo} i .
Apr. 15 37 «42 142 40 7 || May 18 41 143 20 41 |} June 18 41 30 142 10 35
16 38 10 143 15 6 19 40 40 143 30 23 19 41 37 142 15 16
18 | + 38 143 10 30 20 40 30 143 05 25 20 41 18 142 20 12
19 38 40 | 142 40 34 24 42 20 | 144 40 33 24 41 20 | 142 30 3
20 38 20 | 148 10 50 25 42 35 | 145 01 24 25 41 40 | 142 29 24
22 37 48 | 143 09 16 29 43 146 30 29 41 44 | 142 35
24 38 24 | 144 8 30 43 10 | 146 40 16 ||/Aug.(2)5 53 30 | 167 5
30 87 24 | 143 56 10 || June 2 43 15 | 146 57 8 10 53 40 | 167 40 1
May -6 39 42 | 144 37 11 3 43 57 | 147 25 6 12 538 17 | 167 58 5
7 40 27 | 145 15 9 6 43 48 | 147 30 6 14 53 35 | 166 58 1
8 41 30 | 143 45 4 7 43 38 | 147 42 41 7 54 30 | 166 40 10
9 41 20 | 142 57 5 9 43 40 | 147 30 22 19 54 20 | 165 37 3
11 | 41 05 | 144 20 7 11 43 10 | 147 20 3 20 53 57 | 166 27 4
13 41 23 | 143 10 4 12 43 146 25 1 21 53 37 | 168 42 9
14 42 144 13 u 42 40 | 146 45 20 ea
15 41 57 | 143 20 3 15 41 50 | 146 30 1 Potal eens seasce 795
16 40 20 | 142 40 22 16 41 30 | 144 53
17 40 50 | 143 30 17 41 37 | 142 30 35
PELAGIC SEALING.
Miscellaneous log-book records of sealing vessels collected by C. H. Townsend—Continued.
SCHOONER THERESE—SCHMALING, MASTER.
[Northwest coast and Copper Island.]
257
1893. Lat.N. | Long. W.| Seals. 1893. Lat. N. | Long. W. | Seals. 1893. Lat.N. | Long. E. | Seals.
° = Oo A Q t oO i ° i oO i
Mar. 12 38 1238 34 2 || May 15 57 10 136 01 4 || July 15 53 55 168 29 13
18 38 05 123 42 1 17 57 38 136 32 13 16 54 03 168 12 14
18 49 125 08 9 18 57 41 136 47 15 17 53 48 168 09 71
22 42 16 124 51 6 19 57 51 137 07 16 18 54 167 35 10
24 44 05 124 34 7 20 58 11 137 12 oh 24 53 49 167 54 20
28 44 30 124 25 2 22 58 25 141 13 3 26 53 59 167 24 49
29 44 49 124 56 2 24 59 06 146 13 2 27 53 11 167 20 9
30 44° 26 124 50 3 25, 59 06 146 18 13 28 59 10 167 07 12
Apr. 5 46 55 124 48 8 27 58 40 147 25 2 29 54 07 168 4
7 46 30 124 32 5 30 58 30 148 51 4 || Aug. 1 54 43 168 02 29
8 46 25 124 25 6 || June 5 58 14 152 03 2 5 53 45 167 55 13
9 46 54 124 46 15 13 55 20 155 59 18 8 53 14 168 21 29
10 47 25 124 53 4 26 51 59 162 51 2 10 53 25 168 11 4B
15 47 125 12 || July 4 49 52 178 22 4 12 53 34 167 44 85
17 45 54 | 124 59 5 14 53 10 167 20 21
18 46 56 124 56 14 Lat. N.! | Long. E. 17 53 167 59 49
25 57 20 131 10 1 || July 12 53 45 146° 04 8
May 12 56 06 136 25 4 13 53 387 165 39 9 Total.|scsees cose 750
14 56 58 136 20 10 14 54 168 35 47
10ff Copper Island.
SCHOONER BOWHEAD.
[Japan coast.]
Date. Lat. N. | Long. W.| Seals. || Date. Lat.N. | Long. E. | Seals. || Date. Lat.N. | Long. E. | Seals.
1893. Oh Oo. 1894 oO Oo of 1894, OL. wd OF.
Dec. 18 35 34 126 46 2|| May 7 37 41 145 41 19 || June 9 42 20 145 40 21
8 37° (27 146 22 50 12 42 40 144 50 12
1894, Long. E 9 37 33 146 15 13 13 42 50 145 35 5
Apr. 1 38 06 145 1 11 37 40 146 45 45 15 42 40 145 35 1
3 39 O01 146 07 25 12 37 «53 146 04 18 17 43 36 146 40 3
5 38 48 145 57 15 15 38 10 146 50 80 18 43 a4 146 40 21
7 38 38 146 25 78 18 38 12 147 50 69 19 42 60 147 10 17
10 38 51 146 40 33 22 37 «48 148 09 32 21 44 45 148 57 2
neh 39 02 146 30 53 26 39 41 144 45 3 22 44 40 149 23
12 39 12 146 40 84 28 41 48 144 12 1 24 44 15 149 20 3
13 39 20 146 40 75 29 41 58 143 50 5 25 44 26 149 25 16
18 39 «(05 146 32 6 31 42 50 145 25 40 26 44° 36 148 56 33
19 38 54 147 (09 42 | Jutie 1 42 48 145 40 32, 27 44 40 149 02 14
25 39 16 144 30 4 2 42 40 145 25 6 28 44 45 149 08 4
26 39 30 145 & 3 42 30 145. 28 13 29 44 36 148 50 3
27 38 28 145 13 20 4 42 51 145 35 10 || July 16 43 30 1438 30 6
29) 38 28 145 30 14 5 42 37 143 32 19 :
30 38 35 145 35 48 6 42 20 143 28 4 Total.|...... -.-. 1,375
May 3 36 28 145 10 79 7 42 30 143 20 40
37 23 146 38 92 .8 42 10 145 20 33
SCHOONER THERESE.
s [Japan coast.]
1894, Lat. N. | Long. E. | Seals, 1804. Lat. N. | Long. E. | Seals. 1894. Lat. N. | Long. E.| Seals.
° ¢ ° £ fe} Ul fe} f co} t a fe} f
Apr. 1 37 25 146 10 29 || May 5 41 04 143 (07 1 || June 1 42 57 144 20 16
2 37 45 145 56 53 6 41 35 142 57 34 ‘ 2 43 145 30 22
3 37 «50 146 53 vi 41 40 142 35 3 3 43 59 145 45 -—9
4 38 145 54 33 8 41 37 142 40 4 4 43 09 145 57 3
5 38 10 145 41 8 11 41 29 142 30 23 51] 43 07 146 6
6 38 20 144 45 1 15 41 30 142 30 ‘4 6 43.10 | 146 15 8
7 38 30 144 15 3 Ww 41 37 142 35 27 7 43 25 146 57 8
8 38 35 145 57 7 21 41 40 142 23 8 8 43 20 146 54 6
12 39 03 148 47 1 22 42 02 142 1 9 43 30 147 10 18
18 39 07 144 40 23 41 57 142 36 10 12 43 40 147 (54 1
26 39 38 144 20 10 24 41 54 142 50 18 16 43 45 148 1
27 40 146 1 26 41 50 142 38 15 19 43 57 148 38 9
‘28 39 56 142 57 11 27 41 57 142 48 1 || July 12 50 34 162 1
30 40 07 142 50 19 28 42 07 1438 35 13 24 53 50 165 40 12
May 1 40 35 143 02 7 29 42 15 143 40 6 25 53 45 166 57 3
40 39 142 44 46 30 42 20 143 45 35 —_——.
4 41 08 142 37 1 31 42 18 144 57 26 Total.|.....- ---- 680
5947—pr 3——17
258 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Miscellaneous log-book records of sealing vessels collected by C. H. Townsend—Continued.
SCHOONER ANNA MATILDA.
[California coast—Japan coast.]
Date. Lat. N. | Long. W.| Seals. Date. Lat. N. | Long E. | Seals. Date. Lat. N. | Long. E. | Seals.
1893 Oi aul Os al 1894. Or OF 1894. oY 2 f
Dec. 16 38 13 123 57 2 || Apr. 21 44 142 40 1 || May 27 41 54 142 10 2
17 38 06 123 55 5 23 41 14 141 34 5 41 58 142 06 3
18 37 (47 123 43 11 26 42 12 141 43 23 29 41 50 142 30 9
19 37 «49 124 08 10 28 42 25 142 50 8 30 41 46 140 46 23
21 38 13 124 03 1 || May 4 41 50 141 10 6 || June J 41 44 144 25 16
28 38 24 124 12 2 5 41 40 141 6 42 18 144 12 12
30 38 02 123 40 2 6 41 30 141 50 3 3 42 144 7
31 37 42 124 04 1 7 40 40 142 °24 17.|, 4 42 40 144 10 1 Hs
13 40 30 142 9 5 42 40 144 30 10
1894. Long. E. 14 40 30 142 23 | 6 42 34 144 20 16
Apr. 2 39 25 144 09 12 16 40 30 140 30 22 7 42 46 145 08 11
3 39 14 144 20 24 17 40 55 142 14 8 42 58 145 10 8
4 39 49 145 03 14 19 41 17 141 8 12 43 145 50 6
5 39 48 144 34 _14 20 41 20 141 50 9 17 44 20: 147 35 6
7 39 07 145 30 5 21 41 29 142 03 3 18 43° 52 147 16 6
11 39 37 143 03 1 24 41 36 148 20 3 19 43 58 147 4
13 39 34 144 36 11 25 41 30 148 «3 3 |_—__—__~ ix
18 39 49 145 03 10 26 41 32 142 25 8 Total.| ..-....... 436 .
SCHOONER ALEXANDER—C. LORENSEN, MASTER.
[Japan, Kurile Islands.]
1894. Lat. N. | Long. E. | Seals. 1894. Lat.N. | Long. E. | Seals. 1894. Lat.N. | Long. E. | Seals. oe
°o # °° ‘ ° oF °o ae fe} V fe} I }
Mar. 5 38 34 143 03 2 || May 7 41 11 142 02 19 || Jume 5 42 40 144 57 8
6 38 01 144 58 1 10 41 25 141 50 1 6 42 43 145 6
15 38 19 176 26 52 11 41 30 142 05 3 7 42 38 145 20 12
19 38 37 147 17 6 12 41 15 142 02 24 8 42 29 144 50 15 s
21 38 21 146 40 4 13 41 32 141 55 16 9 42 09 143 53 24
23 37° (39 146 22 10 14 41 35 142 20 23 13 41 56 142 11 3
24 37 30 145 32 5 16 41 25 141 40 3 14 41 52 142 4
25 38 145 58 27 17 41 15 141 57 16 15 41 45 142 16 1
: 26 38 02 146 10 18 41 20 142 4 || July 21] 2 p.m., 1 mile off
Apr. 1 38 18 146 48 39 19 41 26 142 30 20, hoe ‘hton Island,
2 38 30 146 24 12 20 41 30 142 25 7 Kuriles, sent one
4 38 58 146 41 12 25 41 45 141 30 14 boatashore to look
5 39 14 146 33 22 26 41 30 141 35 3 for seals; boat
7| 39 12 | 146 5 27| 41 55 | 142 08 4 with 7 seals—all ae
12 40 22 142 35 1 28 41 30 141 55 14 they could find.
20} 41 17 | 142 30 13 29 41 40 | 142 03 11 Squared away for
23 40 53 142 55 13 30 41 43 141 57 12 Rashua Island (re-
24| 40 24 | 142 19 3 31} 42 10 | 1483 40 1 turned).
25 40 16 | 142 18 19 || June 1 42 35 145 15 25 | Rashua Island, one
26| 40 11 | 142 09 4 2| 42 37 | 145 10 1 sea otter.
May 2 39 25 142 5 3 142 39 145 20 4 ao ae
3 40 25 142 25 1 4 42 30 145 09 7 Total .....-... 561
SCHOONER JANE GRAY—E. W. FUNCKE, MASTER.
1894. Lat. N. | Long. E. | Seals. 1894. Lat. N. | Long. E. | Seals. 1894, Lat. N. | Long. E. | Seals.
° / °o / : fe) f °o f oO f ° Uy
Mar. 4 37 42 142 50 1 || May 5 40 29 142 29 5 || June 1 4
6 37 38 142 32 34 6 40 10 142 22 8 2 re 20 is i 3
Apr. 1 36 38 141 47 2 8 40 42 143 06 12 3 42 34 144 24 8
= 7 40 08 144 24 78 11 41 29 142 03 25 4 42 35 144 35 8
8 39 21 143 32 2 12 41 30 141 41 50 5 42 44 142 24 17
12 39 49 143 37 2 14 41 28 141 39 20 8 43° 32 143 30 22
13 39 54 142 45 1 15 41 32 142 34 2 12 43° 02 144 26 8
20 | Yamada Head, N. 17 16 41 15 142 42 16 13 42 31 144 33 3
by W. 10 miles. 17| 40 52 | 142 53 20 17| 43 20 | 147 28 1
22, 39 23 142 41 15 18 40 39 142 13 9 18 43 20 146 58 8
23 | 39 47 |° 142 30 58 19| 40 47 | 141 43 29 19} 43 18 | 146 19 38
25 39 51 | 142 12 19 |) 20 41 19 142 24 21 43° 25 146 18 7
26 | Yamada Head, SW. 17 21) 42 39 | 142 18 67 23]; 42 45 | 146 50 2
15 miles. : 24 41 29 |. 142 26 53 26 | Arrive at Akisha
27 39 32 142 40 16 27 41 32 142 10 4 Bay.
28 39 30 148 1] 28 41 46 142 15 34 . as
30| 40 26 | 143 21 12 29] 41 39 | 142 30 12 Total.....---. 879
May 1 40 23. | 142 48 2 30 41 38 142 26 61
PELAGIC SEALING.
Miscellaneous log-book records of sealing vessels collected by C. H. Townsend—Continued.
SCHOONER M. M. MORRILL—E. CANTILLION, MASTER.
[Japan coast.]
259
1895. Lat. N. | Long. E. | Seals. 1895. Lat. N. | Long. E.| Seals 1895. Lat. N. | Long. E.| Seals.
|
Mar. 27 ) Off Kin- | Long. 25 24 Or ak Oe 72 || June 13 | 8 miles southeast of 16
kasan. miles, May 4 40 17 142 30 6 Yeterop Island.
29 |....do -...) S.E. 10 5 40 37 142 40 13 14 | 15 miles east of Yet- 17°
; miles 7 40 30 142 10 7 erop Island.
30 |..-.do ....{ 50 miles 1 8 41 30 143 22 15 | 20 miles southeast 17
ow a4 9 41 26 143 13 of Yeterop Island.
Apr. 3 37 «46 140 48 5 10 | 30 miles south of Ce a e ‘ 11
5 388 40 | 142 15 4 Cape Yerimo. 4 17 44 20 147 18 5
6 39 45 142 42 1 12 41 56 | 15 miles|” 18 44 20 | 15 miles
10 41 37 143 21 2 offshore. 6 offshore.|: 26
ag 40 48 | 142 53 9 24 41 41 144 20 4 25 | Amphitrite Strait.. 16°
12 40 42 | 142 35 12 25 40 42 | 144 49° 37 2B cis iat O sawesenvata, wtsrerdiate 27
15 39 37 145 ,1|| June 2| Off Christmas Har- 29} Amphitrite Strait,
16 38 27 147 30 1 bor, Shikotan Is- anchored, Paramu-
18 40 15 143 50 14 Jand, 15 miles. 16 sir Island. 10
19 40 23 | 143 43 20 6 44 20 | 147 12 16 30! Amphitrite Strait,
21 40 16 144 01 32 7|20 miles southeast Paramusir Island. 1
23 40 35 144 05 8 of Yeterop Island. 13 || July 2| Amphitrite Strait... 1
27 40 143 51 13 8 | 12 miles off Yeterop 10 miles east of Par-
28 40 15 144 05 11 Island. 14 amusir Island. 1
May 1 39 54 | 15 miles 1 10 | 15 miles south of 6 53 09 163
offshore Yeterop Island. 5
2 40 50 143° 05 1 11 | 20 miles south of Total]........-. 581
3 40 11 142 47 15 Yeterop Island.
SCHOONER BRENDA—C. LOCKE, MASTER.
[Japan coast.]
1895. Lat. N. Long. E. | Seals. 1895. Lat. N. | Long. E. | Seals. 1895. Lat.N. | Long. E. | Seals.
fe} ¥ fo] t ° f ° q fe} td ° i
Apr. 2 38 07 143 15 20 || May 3 39 56 142 45 1 {| May 30 42 52 146 16 2
3 38 35 144 12 6 4 39 56 | 142 27 104 || June 7 43 32 | 146 40 8
5 39 56 | 143 17 18 5 40 34 | 142 28 4 8 43 26 | 146 22 9
6 39 23 142 25 2 6 40 24 | 142 15 8 9 43 10 146 53 1
7 39 50 142 44 1 UE 40 54 | 142 31 24 13 44 28 | 147 28 5
11 88 39 | 142 01 30 8 40 55 | 142 17 7 14 44 20 147 32 27
12 88 42 142 01 58 9 40 53 | 141 56 27 15 44 38 | 148 02 12
16 89 28 | 142 58 11 10 41 07 | 142 52 29 17 44 35 | 148 01 42
18 39 48 | 143 18 55 12 41 09 | 142 03 3 18 45 14 | 150 6
19 39 43 142 39 49 14 41 45 | 142 55 41 || 19 45 31 | 150 53 3
20 39 41 142 42 W7 15 41 51 | 143 35 17 29 50 08 BirdIsl'd, q
22 39 43 141 13 38 20 | - 41. 23 | 142 58 36 2 Kurile
23 30 34 143 09 15 21 41 142 53 7 Strait.
26 38 55 146 12 2 23 41 44 | 143 17 54 || July 1 | Vessel lost.
27 39 20 146 33 10 24 42 15 | 144 20 1 . oe
28 88 25 145 33 2 25 42 47°) 144 44 14 Total .......... 843
SCHOONER MASCOT—E. LORENZ, MASTER.
[Japan coast.]
1895. Lat. N. | Long. E.* Temper: Seals. 1895. Lat. N. | Long. E. aoa aes Seals.
oO ‘ fe} f fe}
35 50 144 54 54 84 37
36 13 147 58 22 57
36 57 145 29 55 5 49
86 39 146 25 54 28 18
37 «13 145 20 55 15 55
38 42 145 45 65 8 23
39 146 27 62 5 6
39 34 146 18 51 55 20
89 43 147 25 54 10 5
89 54 147 25 58 5 26
40 21 146 18 42 32 17
40 42 145 54 44 46
40 41 145 53 42 209 797
260
THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Miscellaneous log-book. records of sealing vessels collected by C. H. Townsend—Continued.
SCHOONER GOLDEN FLEECE, SAN FRANCISCO—E. W. FUNCKE, MASTER.
[Japan coast.]
: - :
Fe- Shot |! Fe- Shot
1896. | Lat. N. | Long. E.| Males.) | aig, | Total. | “ot, 1896. | Lat.N. | Long. E, | Males.) ).o3¢5,| Total.) "4
°o t o tt q
Mar. 14| 37 07 | 141 40 1 9 7 3
15| 37 23 | 141 50 4 12 2 1
16| 37 38 | 141 40 |........ 1 29 8
18| 38 02 | 142 12 5 11 39 16
2 39 11 | 142 16 2 3 27 5
24/ 39 10 | 142 28 |........ 3 12 8
26] 38 18 | 142 20 1 2 4 1
30 | 38 06 | 141 58 2 6 7 5
Apr. 4] 38 16 | 142 12 1 2 2 2
6} 89 18: |sesessoses 5 8} 13] 16]/ $18] 41 44 | 143 12 |......-- 1
6| 39 038 | 142 51 7 5 1 3
7/| 39 06 | 142 40 |........ 1} os 14]eeeee-}} 16 | 42 Bd | 144 41 fe... 1
8} 39 08 | 142 25 1 1 3 1
9) 39 11 | 142 40 8 19 2 |. a
10| 38 36 | 142 26 6 9 DT lesecereee
13 | 39 08 | 142 57 |....---- 2 8 1
17} 39 18 | 142 27 1 3 DA) cist macssteic
19] 40 10 | 143 50 1 1 1 1
22] 40 14 | 142 23 |........ a Tl icmieeaiess
24| 88 47 | 142 16 3 7) 10]; 15] 25] 57 80 | 166 04 !........ 1
26/ 88 11 | 143 07 3 8 1 2
29) 37 38 | 142 56 1 8 2 12
30 | 37 40 | 142 38 |........ 1} 1|-..---]} 29] 56 89 | 165 58 }......-. 1
May 1] 88 36 | 141 56 Dei cia esate 8 42
2] 38 82 | 142 23 1 10 2 7
3] 88 383 | 142 29 |........ 5 4 37
7| 40 387 | 145 20 3 1 | Ea
8] 40 29 | 145 32 3 12 3 17
9) 41 12 | 145 18 |........ 1 2 10
11 | 42 04 | 142 30 19 3 6 33
12| 41 53 | 142 36 2 1 1 2
13 | 39 55 141 42 |........ 2 1 7
14} 41 53 | 142 45 6 7 a 1
15 | 41 57 | 142 40 56 oh : ; 2
16| 41 49 | 142 42 14 11 8
17| 41 54 | 142 40 WL eerie ree 34
18| 41 54 | 142 43 54 21 16
19) 41 56 | 142 40 41 11 4
20; 41 55 | 142 43 5 1} 6] . 8|} 27) 55 80 1168 | 2)...
21) 42 07 | 142 28 19 4 7
23 | 42 142 50 Lj.-......[ 1 |...-..|| Sept. 6] 46 338 (153 51 | 1 ]e.-..-..
24) 42 07 | 142 23 4
25 | 42 03 | 141 55 11. 2
28 | 41 57 | 142 38 4 2 550 535 | 1,085 | 1, 299
29) 41 55 | 142 39 21 7
Nots.—Schooner, 121 tons; crew, 19; hunters (white), 5; boats, 8.
SCHOONER ALLIE I. ALGAR—C. LOCKE, MASTER.
[Japan coast.]
1896. Lat. N Long. E. | Seals. 1896. Lat.N. | Long. E. | Seals. | 1896. Lat.N. | Long. E. | Seals.
|
|
° ‘ [e} 4 . ° ‘ ° t | ° ' ° !
April 1 87 52 143 06 4 || Apr. 29 38 51 145 16 17 |' May 24 39 06 145 53
2 87 «50 142 20 6 May 2 388 47 | 145 51 27 |i y 25 39 12 146 06 8
3 38 28 | 142 02 7 3 38 58 145 02 61 28 41 52 142 57 10
4 88 22 | 142 50 2 7 39 00 144 16 5 |i 29 41 50 142 57 12
6 89 39 145 08 13 8 38 56 144 45 125 31 41 42 142 39 6
9 40 07 145 30 17 9 88 59 | 144 55 5 || June 6 41 30 142 00 1
13 40 11 142 47 4 10 39 24 | 145 31 3 10 42 50 148 00 2
15 40 00 | 144 04 1 11 89 24 145 07 7 |I ll 43 23 147 51 14
16 40 00 | 144 30 1 13 40 36 | 144 12 6 12 43 24 147 16 9
17 39 20 145 00 5 14 40 16 | 145 20 1 | 15 44 18 148 04 22
19 39 55 142 19 2 15 40 05 145 30 4 16 44 08 148 06 4
21 88 51 144 56 T 16 89 26 | 145 27 4 |{ 18 44 50 148 40 5
22 38 53 144 51 55 17 38 51 145 56 13
23 88 48 | 144 56 Jl 18 39 12 145 50 380 Total.| .......... 653
24 39 08 145 380 40 19 B89 02 | 145 52 28
28 88 47 145 12 19 22 39 17 145 54 12
PELAGIC SEALING. 261
MISCELLANEOUS NOTES.
FUR-SEAL CATCH OF BRITISH COLUMBIA VESSELS IN 1898.
The pelagic catch made by British Columbia vessels from the American fur-seal
herd in 1898 was 28,142 skins; 10,746 were taken off the Northwest coast and 17,396
in Bering Sea.
Catch.
Crews. Boats.
Vessels. Tons. Northwest Coast. Bering Sea. Total.
Whites,| Indians. | Boats. /Canoes.| Male. | Female.; Male. | Female.
Abbie M. Deering ....-..-...-. 96 20 icmeeiaien (ig Beeeeeee tere. ccc ecdiciumemen 59 319 378
ae ae Seen Gsmacn ee ea aoeecoErsG! 97 9 2 185
Ct) 95 6 2 1,117
Aine 1. oie sieemer vf) 23 7 706
Arietis .....--..--+-+2-0--+-+5 86 8 643
asics: 66 5 581
92 6 657
tee 51 8 242
49 6 961
50 |-.--ene- 327
87 23 |. 30
93 10 1,114
iss 60 6 341
69 6 901
#0 6 769
93 24 892
i 72 7 1, 024
Ida Etta.-...-.00.0-02e00- 0-0 69 6 641
Tin eecamvaccnswanecvonsatas et 491
Mary Ellen... 63 8 276
Mary Taylor - 43 6 1, 257
Mermaid ... 76 10 1,473
Minnie ..... 46 6 664
Ocean Belle... 83 % 702
Ocean Rover. - 55 6 485
Otto .-....-. 86 8 1,249
Penelope e 70 6 1, 087
Pioneer ....- - 73 6 453
Saucy Lass . 38 6 416
Teresa... - 63 8 626
Umbrina 99 8 1, 968
Victoria -- 63 7 2, 105
Viva........ 92 va 650
Walter L. Ric 84 6 636
Zillah May 66 7 1, 045
‘Catch by Indians in canoes... ’ 1,100
Total sca ceceuewsy sieeee se 2 673 92 336 4, 093 5, 553 7,595 9, 348 | 28, 142
Nore.—To the above should be added the catch made by the American schooner Kate and Anna otf Point Conception,
California. ‘This vessel took 336 seals south of the award area—1 male and 335 females.
The schooner Director took 360 seals off the Japan coast (201 males, 159 females) and 50 in vicinity of Commander
Islands (20 males, 30 females).
The following table! showing the pelagic seal catches made from the American
and Asiatic seal herds from 1868 to 1897 is inserted for general reference. It is
imperfect in many respects, the earlier records being incomplete, and the catches of .
Japanese vessels during recent years not fully stated.
1 Treasury Document 2009, Division of Special Agents, pp. 25 et seq.
‘IMOUHID @ ‘Rog SULLOg PUB 4ySBOd 3S0.Mq}I0N JO STeIO} O44 Jo us OL, V “BOQ SULIOG g6E'LT ‘J8¥OO JSOMUIION OFL OT *49IVO S68T—"ALON
lanes ee Be |
ie {os eh gee'gz816'6 ext |ese't |e |--reron |t99 _les's et |""TeI0n jece're jg jaas |ror‘oT fae Te}0L fro err face's “* TRIO,
sr le0n'g ieLt jese'T |g _|----wep |go9 ee TL |"777WeD [204 ‘TS [ZG anj¥29 |209'ST [se [77 WED [eg op [ST : jou is
t saleieiadia Beale eee acc wa fram elinaey ae 404 CG op wiO0T ‘9 weg L68T
GLB ‘Fw i a uy |segiguz't i wry |ST9'S eso 988 |L98 € [7 WW [68 op [921 18d 'T Ory
f c t r ae = | Bs 5 SS === |_ =| | == ——|—|_-=———
we {its = oy [088 Fooif6L've [tet _jeue't et |" ron jezo__jetg'ze_ ge |" TeI0L |216‘eF (29 jorP ooc‘es 29 |" Te90L op joes LIF FT - [eqOI,
PLe ‘6 GIT [90g ‘T zo go6'2T [ge |"7""78O leon ‘9e [09se.92F looL‘se Fo 608 «el£0L ‘OT ato tna
: ‘ ! Ja ete eel£02 ‘OT meg 9681
TEP ‘I 98 L1G‘ jake [aue isc ovary 8 WY |FISL —PLecidTe j008'e = eT 898 oe FIL ‘E cory
{= "96 8 “"lee6‘ne |TLo |2FO'L ees ese ‘ez joe |" 1900 \tez‘9¢ |-""-\8FL [OOTP 6s eez (gate - [eqOI,
. : PIE |18Z ‘Dee [02 |----WeO ers (489 ‘Bless |""""TBO |TLL ‘GF oz (9G zel928 [STG SE cx |IF saat |pGqtaaae : Led eases
- : AZt_jooree [9 |----mW Ise9 [log ‘Treel FI “---ury logs ‘OT se eLwlesr Tse'ee0 Br ett 690 "2 ay oe
6 wee eeee , t eeeelee oe ir eaee =
% sine {FE TPT oe Sos ‘6s 889 ‘2 TeIOL jezo'T |t99‘TZ os |”* 1&0, [ges ‘to lees |ssc'‘Te [ze |" e300 |---- Fo LOL Fe
Nee ie LEP ‘Lez SIF ‘T lest ‘6FzS8 |°°" "TBO igar: sg ‘92 sso-ueg |----"lzee [e0L ‘Th az ares
am cast {[o oe “TTT SPT ‘99 LT9 ‘BT j600'T |ozc‘ec |eo |-"T830L iere‘os [-7*"|"7"* Tarsectee[prees[tereteeseleeesslree lore gg
fe verssrscafesrcrestssso707 lope asleT0 ‘BL a n2eT (902 6eeciee [7777 ®BO leT9 ‘82 2c |7-*|"--“|-ata “po does: : Beene
ees ees ee es eas 7 A
S 509 tz PSL. loze Po rziE@ ar] "SV [6st ‘2 ee ices BOL ee i
«© S68T ree ‘EL 2S ‘98 ar peteyreesteses legge Ta seas
$2 Test [000 '89er BEF ‘Bon eee eva. OF et ones ESE
Geet (Ret ‘er ee ewe “1077 088
Ps gaat [c16 ‘9 Be ce eines Cone
1set |gzo ‘9% Gee
Pl OR6E rer ee Bee
Fi S88T 1096 Fe ‘
pest lest ‘ZT ae
eset |cao ‘9T ae
esat_|tee's eee
© Test [ese ‘or eat
cm —088T_ ‘lor6's aa
6st |198'8 ise"
< 881 [FPG ‘¢ FES ‘g
Ss LLBT «OT ‘¢ Oz ‘¢
R = gt8l |gtg's STS '¢
SL8T [eno ‘¢ 860 ‘¢ weiss
Pi FIST e18'S B18 ‘¢ bse BEBE
D = Sl8E l6zz's 622 ‘¢ sleicne eee
Lal oe gee ‘¢ ges ‘g ‘
overt logos ie at ek i
Host joer > fee aie ;
898T |L98 ‘> L98 ‘BF seeeeeeeee Sdesnilsweceawery +--+ gost
lo ad] p| bl se [sl 2 >| « jal 2 s | po -
eve ler®] elaq) Bf] € | af) 2/8) 2 | 2 legal £ |@) 2 letled] 2G] 2
Se | ee QP g — & ° Dies e g o i elf 2 D ~ 3 [cm] J D so
4 8 BoSl ea ae ° ee 5 2p o 2 £ 7 Size 5 o 8 Bo|33 ei 3, 2
“eax a eet Be | 2S al ed 28 e |* = ee a3 5 E: ee o3| 8 = “1e0X
gee | s6) F |&l © (na aed = ‘S| 8] F ¢ |e] Ble 2 2
ie = B ° = ; - -
c=] isd er .
5 5 go Bee 48800 TBISsSny “qsvoo uvder aia oe "BOG SulIog “48809 4SOA9I0N
262
*21qDUIDIGO s9dLN0R fyzLOMIEN.L) JRO BYR WOLf uoyDINGD, Dv buI9q ‘LEST 0} S98T MoLf splay 1Da8 OYDISP pun uvyen] F 97 wolf apow ‘sayo}vo v8 ODI
PELAGIC SEALING. 263°
AUTHORITIES FOR FIGURES USED IN FOREGOING TABLE.
(In quoting from Fur-Seal Arbitration Papers, the first edition is always referred to.]
' Fur-seal Arbitration. App. to U.S. Case, vol. 1, p. 591.
2Catches for years 1868 to 1879, inclusive, are made up of’ northwest coast catches (Fur-Seal Arbitration; British
Commissioners’ Report, p.207 et seq.); Indian canoe catches (British Commissioners’ Report, pp. 207, 208), and skins
obtained through the Hudson Bay Company's trading stations (British Commissioners’ Report, p. 213.
3 Catches of pelagic sealers and Indian canoes (British Commissioners’ Report, pp. 207, 208),and returns from Hudson
Bay Compuny’s posts (British Commissioners’ Report, p. 213).
4San Francisco custom-house records; Deputy Collector Jerome's letters of February 26 et seq., 1892, on file in
Treasury Department.
5 Catch of schooner City of San Diego (British Commissioners’ Report, p. 208).
® Catches of pelagic sealers in North Pacific and Bering Sea (British Commissioners’ Report, p. 209), and returns from
Hudson Bay Company’s posts (British Commissioners’ Repott, p. 213).
7 Catches in North Pacific from all sources (British Commissioners’ Report, pp. 210, 213).
8Marketed catches from Bering Sea (British Commissioners’ Report, p. 210) plus 2,000 skins seized on schooners
Onward, Thornton, Carolena, and San Diego (H.H.McIntyre's manuscript report to Alaska Commercial Company, a copy
of which is in possession of Department.
* British commissioners’ estimated catch of American vessels in all localities (British Commissioners’ Report, p. 212).
10 North Pacific catches (British Commissioners’ Report, pp. 210, 213).
11 Marketed catches from Bering Sea (Britisii Commissioners’ Report, p. 210) plus 8,910 skins seized in Bering Sea and
unaccounted for by British commissioners; 11,901 skins were seized that year (United States Counter Case, p. 337), and the
British commissioners, on page 210 of their report, account for 2,991 of them.
12North Pacific catches (British Commissioners’ Report, pp. 211, 213).
13 Bering Sea catches (British Commissioners’ Report, pp. 211, 212).
“North Pacific catches (British Commissioners’ Report, pp. 211, 213).
16 This figure, 27,450, is the sum of the figures 22,530 and 4,920, the origin of which will be found under note 16. The
British commissioners, on page 18 of their report, give the approximate total catch as 68,000.
16In a letter from the British foreign office to the Secretary of State, dated May 17, 1895, the Bering Sea catch of
British vessels for 1891 is quoted at 29,146. It has been found by this Department that these figures represent the total
catch in Bering Sea—that is, including seals killed off the western side, in Russian waters, as well as off the eastern
side, which afterwards became the award area. This is borne out by the fact that it appears by the British case before
the tribunal at Paris that 41 vessels were warned out of the American side of Bering Sea between June 29 and August
15, 1891, under the modus vivendi of June 15 of that year. It is certain that many of these vessels crossed over to the
Russian side of Bering Sea and continued sealing until the close of the season.
Statistics made by Mr. Alfred Fraser, now in possession of the Treasury Department, show that 8,432 skins were
thus taken on the western side of Bering Sea in Russian waters. Of these, 6,616 were taken by British vessels and 1,816
by American vessels. We should, therefore, deduct from the British figures (29,146) the sum of 6,416, leaving 22,530 as the
British catch in the award area—that is, the eastern side of Bering Sea—for the year 1891.
It farther appears from Mr. Fraser’s fignres that the American catch in Bering Sea in 1891 was 6,736, of which 1,816
were taken in Russian waters and 4,920 in the award area. Adding to the corrected British catch, 22,530, the catch of the
American vessels, 4,920, we have 27,450 as the total catch of British and American vessels in that part of Bering Sea known
as the award area for the year 1891.
In the report of the Committee on Ways and Means to accompany H.R. 8909, Fifty-third Congress, third session,
Report No. 1849, the catch in Bering Sea for the year 1891 was given as 23,041 on the authority of the Treasury Depart-
ment. These figures included only the returns of British vessels, as no reliable returns as to American vessels were then
in possession of the Department. The result was reached by deducting from the estimate given by Consul Meyers in his
report (United States counter case), 28,605, a number of skins estimated to have been taken off the Russian coast. This
estimate was reached by a careful examination of all catches referred to in the affidavits and other papers in the case and
counter case of the United States and Great Britain, excluding those which were claimed to have been taken off the
Russian coast. : j
That the British returns (above cited), 29,146, include seals taken on the western side of Bering Sea, from the Russian
herd, will appear, as above stated, from the fact of the warning of said vessels, under the modus vivendi, and their subse-
quent crossing to the Russian coast.
The report of the minister of marine and fisheries of Canada for 1891 credits none of the catch to Russian waters. In
1892, however, said report credits 14,805 skins out of a total of 53,912 from said Asiatic shores. The fact that this large
catch was made in 1892 points strongly to similar catches in the year 1891, which are confirmed by the above-mentioned
evidence.
17 Obtained by subtracting the total of 27,450 and 8,432 from 68,000.
18 See United States Counter Case, page 408.
19Taken from Alfred Fraser’s estimates for American sealing fleet in Asiatic waters. Skins entered in United
States ports.
2 The smallness of the number, 2,199, suggests that either many of the vessels after clearing sailed directly for the
Japan coast, or else the catches off the northwest coast were transshipped at Japan ports.
21 The American catch for 1893 is based upon statistics compiled by A. Fraser and on file in the Treasury Depart-
ment. The United States consul at Victoria states (Consular Reports No. 161, p. 279) that American schooners in 1893
264 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
transshipped at Yokohama and Hakodate between 17,000 and 18,000 skins. This is further confirmed by the report of the
Canadian department of marine and fisheries for 1893, page clxviii, which gives the catch of American vessels landed at
Hakodate as 18,587.
2 The figures for the catches of Canadian vessels are taken from the report of the Canadian department of marine
and fisheries for 1893, page clxvii.
23 The London trade sales for 1893 account for the disposition of 109,669 pelagic skins.
*Compiled from the reports of collectors at ports of entry on the Pacific coast. These reports are on file in the
Treasury Department.
% The figure 23,710 is obtained by taking the 6,886 skins noted under the caption, ‘‘ Locality undetermined ” in the
letter of the Secretary of the Treasury to Congress, dated January 21, 1895 (Fifty-third Congress, third session, Ex. Doc.
243),and dividing them between the Asiatic and American herds in similar proportions as the other skins landed at
United States ports in United States sealing vessels during 1894. The result would be: American herd, 6,152; Asiatic, 684.
Adding 6,152 to the catch on the northwest coast (12,398) already given and the Bering Sea catch (5,160) already given, we
have the total 23,710. ,
% Made up of skins as per records of collectors of customs on the Pavific coast, which credit 1,500 to Asiatic waters;
684 skins, previously referred to in note 25, and the 20,000 skins which it is estimated were transshipped in Japan (Ex. Doc.
243, Fitty-third Congress, third i ‘Notes ning catch for 1894,"’ p. 4).
27 Taken from report of Canadian department of marine and fisheries for 1894, page 9.
The figures 26,425 include one American vessel, whose catch was 84 skins.
The figures 49,843 contain the catches of three American vessels, which aggregated 490 skins.
The facts in the two foregoing paragraphs are given in a report of Fisheries Commissioner Costigo to the Governor-
General of Canada, under date of January 9, 1895, page 9.
% Reports of collectors of customs at American ports of entry on the Pacific coast.
2% Official statement sent by United States Consul Roberts at Victoria, under date of November, 1895, and on file in the,
Treasury Department.
30 Dead pups.—The grand totals for 1894 and 1895 do not include dead pups. In 1894, by careful estimate based upon
partial count, 20,000 pups perished, and in 1895, by actual count, 28,000. This would swell the known deaths, exclusive of
the land catch in 1894 to 161,143 and in 1895 to 121,326. See note 37 for dead pups for 1896.
The pelagic catch for 1895 is further increascd by a catch of about 10,000 skins taken by vessels clearing from
Japanese ports.
31From returns of United States inspectors who examined skins landed in United States ports.
32 From official returns of collector of customs, Victoria, British Columbia. Skins not inspected.
[Notes 33 and 34 omitted.} :
Explanatory notes relating to catch for 1896.
%In averages per vessel relating to northwest coast catch the canoe catches are not included; British Columbia
canoe catch, 2,353, included in Canadian northwest coast total.
36 Total catch of American and Canadian vessels for 1896 further increased by a catch of 3,392 skins taken by vessels
clearing from Japanese ports, and of 1,497 skins taken by natives in the passes of the Aleutian Islands.
37 The grand total for 1896 does not include the loss of pups on the Pribilof Islands, amounting to 21,228 dead and to
1,546 dying at time of count.
36 All log entries relating to American pelagic catch sworn to by masters of vessels, but most of them changed as to
proportion of femalea upon examination of catches by inspectors of seal skins.
% Proportion of females in all Canadian returns taken from statements by masters of vessels. Catches not officially
inspected as to sex.
4 Data concerning catches of American vessela in all waters for 1896 are based on reports from United States custom-
houses, supplemented by information collected by Mr. C.H. Townsend; data concerning catches of British Columbia ves-
sels furnished by the Canadian collector of customs at Victoria; catches in 1895 of vessels belonging to Japanese ports
furnished by United ‘States consular officers in Japan. Catches of similar vessels in 1896 are from unofficial sources, are
incomplete, and less than number actually taken.
Explanatory notes relating to catch for 1897.
“In averages per vessel relating to the northwest-coast catch, the British Columbian-canve catch, amounting to 1,018,
are not included.
@ The total catch of the British Columbian and American fleets for 1897 is increased further by the catch of the J apa-
nese sealing fleet during the year—16 vessels, 6,838 skins.
4 The data from which were compiled the statistics relating to the American catch for 1897 were obtained from the
official reports from U. 8. custom-houses; the statistics of the British Columbian catch for the same period were obtained
by the consul at Victoria, B. C., from custom-house records at that port; the figures showing the catch of ihe Japanose fleet
were furnished by Dr. Leonhard Stejneger.
44The grand total of seals taken by United States vessels include 764 skins taken south of the award area by the
schooners J. Eppinger and Louisa D, but undoubtedly from the herd frequenting the Pribilof Islands, and 224 skins which
were taken off the Galapagos Islands by the schooner Prosper, of a species (Arctocephalus phillipi) distinct from that of the
seals on the Pribilof Islands.
4 Statements by masters of American vessels as to the sex of seals taken, verifted in every instance by examination
by inspectors at ports of entry. Proportion of females in Canadian catches taken from figures submitted by United States
consul (see note 43); catches not officially inspected.
NOTES ON THE FUR SEALS OF GUADALUPE, THE GALAPAGOS, AND LOBOS ISLANDS.
ACCOUNT OF THE WRITER’S EXPEDITION IN SEARCH OF THE FUR SEAL OF
: GUADALUPE ISLAND IN 1892.
I was detached from the United States Fish Commission steamer Albatross at
Seattle, Wash., on May 5, 1892, by the United States Commissioner of Fish and Fisher-
ies, and directed to charter a small vessel at San Diego, Cal., for a trip to Guadalupe
and San Benita islands, lying off the coast of Lower California, for the purpose of secur-
ing specimens of the Guadalupe fur seal, for the use of the Department of State in
connection with the Bering Sea Tribunal of Arbitration about.to convene at Paris,
it having become necessary during the progress of the Bering Sea controversy to
identify the species of seal inhabiting these islands. I first visited Guadalupe Island
in October, 1884,! when in charge of the schooner Laura on a voyage in search of
specimens of the elephant seal, for the United States National Museum. At that time
stormy weather prevented us from examining the windward side of the island—where
the animals were said to haul out—on account of the danger of keeping the schooner
lying off alee shore. After looking over the eastern shores in a hurried manner and
shooting some goats to add to our stock of provisions, we sailed for the mainland of
Lower California, which promised better results, and where we finally obtained, at
San Cristobal Bay, 15 specimens of the elephant seal.
My second visit was made in February, 1889, in the Fish Commission steamer
Albatross, but we spent only one day, and that at the southern end of the island,
where we observed at a distance 3 seals, which appeared to be Phoca vitulina, ©
It was not until the present visit that I was able to examine the entire shore line
of the island. According to Findlay’s North Pacific Directory, Guadalupe Island is
140 miles off the coast of Lower California, its northern end being in latitude 29° 10’
50’ north and longitude 118° 18’ 30” west. It can be seen at a distance of 60 miles,
and has near its northern end an elevation of 4,523 feet. It is very imperfectly :
represented on the charts. In 1880 and 1881 Capt. H. E. Nichols, U.S. N., commanding
the Coast Survey steamer Hassler, made a reconnoissanco of it “sufficient to give its
general outlines and topography.” The results of the Hassler’s voyage have not been
published, but according to Captain Nichols’ chart in the archives of the United States
Coast Survey, Guadalupe Island is 212 miles long by 54 to 6 miles in general width.
Upon the northern end of the island grow scattered tracts of conifers, oaks, and palms,
The southern part is treeless, but generally covered with a low sage brush.
According to Mr. J. N. Rose, United States Department of Agriculture, there are
145 species of plants known to the island, of which 29 are peculiar to it. Its flora is
more closely related to that of California than to the adjoining region of Mexico.
Many of the trees and plants once known to be abundant are now disappearing,
chiefly on account of the presence of large numbers of goats.
Of the 36 species of birds known to Guadalupe, 9 are peculiar to the island, some
1Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1885, pp. 90-93 (Recent captures of the sea elephant.—C. H. Townsend).
265
266 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
of them being reduced in numbers by cats, and one of the largest, the Caracara (Poly-
borus lutosus) has been nearly exterminated by the guns of former. goat herders. As
the island is at present uninhabited, the latter species of bird may reestablish itself.
During the greater part of the year dense fogs prevail about the more elevated
parts of the island, which are in consequence rather fertile. Mr. W. E. Bryant, who
resided upon one of the northern plateaus of Guadalupe during part of the winter of
1886, experienced considerable rain and occasional frost.
i May, after the subsidence of a northwest gale which had prevented our landing
from the schooner for three days, I found the weather very warm. So far as I am
aware no water is found upon the southern half of the island, the herds of goats rang-
ing chiefly over the plateaus of the northern part of the island where there are a few
springs. The goats are said to number about 10,000 at present, and a resident of San
Diego is endeavoring to obtain a lease of the island for a goat ranch, the term of the
former lessee having expired some time ago. The goats are killed for their hides
chiefly, but small quantities of the flesh being saved. In dry seasons many of them
perish for lack of water.
TI left San Diego on the schooner Santa Barbara' on May 14, 1892, reaching Gua-
dalupe Island on the 16th, the first landing being at the @eserted settlement of North
Point. We at once commenced a thorough search of the shores with the dory, rowing
close under the cliffs, usually within a distance of 40 feet of the rocks, landing and
entering the caves and volcanic holes which could not be inspected from the boat.
By the 25th we had in this manner rowed almost entirely around the forty or more
miles of coast line, followed at a mile or two from the shore by the schooner, to which
we always returned at nightfall. The work was very laborious on account of the small
size of our party and the limited time at our disposal, while rough weather made many
of the landings dangerous in the extreme. We were most unfortunate in our equip-
ment. Our 12-ton schooner, the only vessel then available at San Diego, was incapa-
ble of carrying a suitable hunting boat, and the work of exploring the island, devolv- °
ing upon Messrs. Anthony, Streator and the writer, was further hampered by the
added labor of standing regular watches with the captain and the cook in the care of
the vessel. To the drawbacks in the way of equipment and crew must be ascribed
our failure to secure a complete specimen of the rare Guadalupe seal.
During the exploration of the island only 7 fur seals were seen—none of them on
land. I killed the only one which could be approached within shooting distance, but
it sank before it could be reached.
The island was visited too early in the season to find seals on shore, the young
not being brought forth until June, but on the site of a former rookery near Jacks
Bay, on the west side of the island, 4 skulls were found which proved to belong to a
species of Arctocephalus, which has since been described as A. townsendi, Merriam.
The fur seals seen at Guadalupe were, with two exceptions, more than a mile off shore,
the others having been found close to the rocks. One which seemed to be a male
about 4 years old lay asleep with the flippers held out of the water in the manner
characteristic of the species. Owing to the swell and thumping of our dory on the
waves, it could not be approached near enough for an effective shot. Another, appar-
ently a female, raising its head near the boat, I killed instantly with the rifle. It
began sinking immediately,and disappeared before we could reach it with the gaff.
‘Party on board, George M. Hunt, master; A. W. Anthony, Charles Smith, C. P. Streator, and
C. H. Townsend.
‘FUR SEALS OF GUADALUPE, GALAPAGOS, AND LOBOS ISLANLS. 267
Guadalupe Island is thoroughly volcanic and has volcanic caves and holes along
nearly every mile of its shore line, which were the favorite resorts of fur seals. Seal
hunters finding them tightly packed in these places, killed them with guns and clubs.
Frequently they were killed in caves so dark that their eyes were the only target to
fire at, while at other times candles were used to disclose their hiding places. Young
and old alike were taken. The young appear to have been brought forth in June and
July and the species was present upon the island throughout the year. Its fur was
worth about half that of the Northern fur seal, as taken on the Pribilof Islands, being
worth about $15.
At the northwest side of Guadalupe, on May 23, 1892, we found “ Sea Elephant”
beach, a locality formerly frequented by elephant seals. This is one of the three
sand beaches on the island. The others are at Jacks Bay, a few miles farther south,
and at the village on the opposite side. At “Sea Elephant” beach we found 6 sea
elephants sleeping near high water mark, which we shot. They were very slow in
their motions and made scarcely any effort to get away. While we were skinning
these, 2 others hauled out where we were working. The smallest of these we added
to our collection, the larger one was not mo-
lested. It came and went several times during
the afternoon and we frequently had our hands
on it without its assuming any threatening atti-
tudes. With the proper facilities it could have
been taken alive.
In the meantime a heavy surf made it im-
possible to launch the boat, while the lofty cliffs
not only prevented our ascent to the plateau of
the island, but, extending into the sea on either
side, imprisoned us on the beach, where we
were without water or food. After repeated
attempts we made our escape to the schooner
late in the evening, without having been able
to take any of the heavy elephant skins in our
small boat. On the following day we recovered three of our prizes with great exer-
tions and danger and were finally compelled to abandon the rest. The species brought
back represent about the last of this exceedingly rare species. Captain Wentworth,
of San Diego, counted 80 sea elephants upon this beach in 1883. We found nothing
in the stomachs of those killed by us but small quantities of sand—a pint or more to
each animal. The large animals were shedding their short, stiff hair at this season—
May. ‘The proboscis of the elephant seal is imperfectly represented in all figures of
the species that I have seen. It is not rounded like that of the elephant or tapir,
but flattened above and below, and in the largest male specimen we obtained is 8
inches long. It hangs downward as a flap, about 4 inches broad and 2 inches thick,
entirely concealing the mouth, the nostrils being at the corners of its nearly square
tip. It is very soft and flexible and in life is kept in constant motion, the usual
position being a forward and downward curve. It is frequently turned upward, the
animal in the meantime opening and shutting its mouth without any sound. In
crawling, the belly alone is lifted from the ground as the animal hitches itself along.
About 30 sea lions (Zalophus) were seen at the time of our visit on one of the
southerly outlying rocks of Guadalupe Island.
Fig, 1.—Nose of elephant seal from beneath.
268 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. ‘
The Guadalupe fur seal formerly inhabited other islands off Lower California. It
may have been the species exterminated on the Farallones, near San Francisco, by the
Russians. It is reported that 5 seals were taken on Richardsons Rock, off San Miguel
Island, one of the Santa Barbara group, in 1890. Morrell, in 1825, found no fur seals
on this group of islands, but took 400 on San Martin, off Lower California, and
reported having seen about 20 fur seals, 300 sea leopards, and 1,550 hair seals at
Socorro Island.
During my own visit to the islands of the Socorro group, in March, 1889, no seals
of any species were seen, but the shores were only partially examined. We saw no
seals at Alijos Rocks during the same cruise, but Capt. Charles Haritwen saw two sea
lions there in May, 1880. We found sea lions (Zalophus californianus) along both
coasts of Lower California, and they inhabit also the Tres Marias Islands. Although
Fia. 2.— Left fore flipper of elephant seal, showing arrangement of claws.
several species of the seal kind have always existed in this region and at the Gala-
pagos Islands, there are no records concerning the occurrence of any species of seals
off the west coast of Central America,
We found no pinuipeds at Cocos Island, 300 miles off Costa Rica, during the cruise
of the Albatross in 1891.
The lessees of the Commander Islands, Bering Sea, had the seals slaughtered
upon Robben Island, Okhotsk Sea, in the vain hope of driving the remnant of the
herd to the Commander Island rookeries. There are no records to show that the
slaughter of seals upon the rookeries of Gaudalupe and San Benita islands ever
resulted in driving the animals to other localities. From the history of the smaller
seal rookeries of the Pacific Ocean it would seem that the fur seal can not be driven
away to new islands, but stupidly lingers about its ancient haunts until extermination
overtakes it. If the remnant of the race remaining near or on the shores of Guadalupe
Island were protected by the laws of Mexico and by a resident guard upon the
island, its reestablishment would be quite within the range of possibility.
After returning to San Diego, where we arrived on May 30, I obtained from a num-
ber of men who had formerly engaged in sealing at Guadalupe and the San Benita
islands information concerning the habits and capture of this species of fur seal, with
FUR SEALS OF GUADALUPE, GALAPAGOS, AND LOBOS ISLANDS. 269
sworn statements as to its former abundance upon these islands. The time at our dis-
posal did not permit of a visit being made to the San Benita Islands, where, however,
I observed numbers of Zalophus in 1884.
The following early reference to this species, brought to my attention by Dr. L.
Stejneger, will be of interest in this connection:
In former days there was a great multitude of seals on the rocks of the Farallones, in the ocean
opposite the Bay of San Francisco. The Americans of the United States have completely extermi-
-nated them there. On Guadalupe there is also found a species of sea bear, but these inhabitants of
a hot climate are smaller than their brothers in the north. Their color is also less silvery.!
% Fia. 3.—Hind flippers of elephant seal.
PARTIAL RECORD OF FUR SEALS TAKEN ON GUADALUPE AND SAN BENITA ISLANDS
FROM 1876 TO 1892.
1876-77: Mr. George W. Chase, of San Diego, Cal., killed a few fur seals on San
Benita Island, and reports that they were accompanied by pups.
1877: The late Capt. Charles Haritwen, of Alameda, Cal., resided on Guadalupe
Jsland in 1877 in connection with the island goat ranch. He informed me that sev-
eral vessels were sealing there then, one of which he remembers to have taken about
300 and another 500 seals. Seal skins at that time were worth only $2.50 each.
1 Baer in Wrangell’s Stat. Ethn. Nachr. Nordwest. Amerika, St. Petersburg, 1839, p. 39.
270 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
1877: Captain Kathgard, of San Francisco, took 15 fur seals from Guadalupe,
and states that about 1,000 were secured by other parties.
1879: About 1879 Messrs. James Borges and Fred Sisson obtained 1,550 fur
seals on Guadalupe and San Benita islands, both adults and young being taken. The
skins sold in San Francisco at $10 and $15. (Statement by Hunt and Chase.)
1880: Captain Haritwen took 104 fur seals on Guadalupe Island between May 1
and 23,1880. They were taken at several points on the island, but chiefly on the
west side, where the largest rookery contained 600 or 700 seals. ‘
At the easternmost of the San Benita Islands 2 fur seals were taken on May 24.
There were three other vessels sealing off Guadalupe at the same time, one of which,
remaining longer than the others, took 500 seals. This vessel reported that the young
were born about the middle of June.
The seal skins were of good quality, and those in Captain Haritwen’s catch sold at
$15 each.
1880: In 1880 George W. Chase again sealed at Guadalupe Island, taking 185 in
in June, 150 in July and August, and 75 in September. The skins were.worth $15
each at that time.
There were 3,000 or 4,000 seals there that year, but other vessels came and seals
soon became scarce. They were found breeding in June and. July, and were present
every month in the year. They were observed at times about 100 miles west of Gua-
dalupe. Seals were observed at Guadalupe on trips made by Chase since 1880, but
they were not hunted.
1883: In 1883 Capt. George E. Wentworth, of San Diego, sealed at Guadalupe,
making four trips in November, December, January, and February. About 4,000
seals were seen and 2,000 taken. Other vessels were there, and the seal rookeries were
practically broken up during that season.
1885: In 1885 James M. Niles, of San Diego, made six trips to Guadalupe Island,
finding seals present during most months of the year. About 2,000 were seen and
200 killed. There were pup seals in plenty, which he believed to have been born in
June.
1885: Seals also taken at Guadalupe by Captain Cannon. (Statement by
Haritwen.)
1885. F. Lupp, sloop Puritan, saw 5 seals, 1 killed in a cave.
1890: George M. Hunt, of San Diego, visited Guadalupe in 1890 on the schooner
Hunter. Only 4 fur seals were seen.
1891: In December, 1891, George M. Hunt visited Guadalupe Island for the pur-
pose of fur sealing, taking 5 adults on the east side and 1 pup on the northwest side.
Seven other pups were seen.
In June, 1891, Messrs. Burke and Farwell took 4 seals on San Benita Island.
(Statement by Hunt.)
1891-92: Capt. F. M. Gaffney found no seals at Guadalupe.
1892: The writer visited Guadalupe May 16-25, 1892, in the interest of the State
Department. Seven fur seals were seen, one of which was killed but not secured.
Four skulls were obtained.
1893: Mr. A. W. Anthony, of San Diego, states that 36 seals were taken in 1893.
1894: Mr. Anthony reports the capture of 15 seals in 1894,
This incomplete record accounts for 5,575 fur seals killed at Saeaempe between
1876 and 1894.
FUR SEALS OF GUADALUPE, GALAPAGOS, AND LOBOS ISLANDS. 271
DESCRIPTION OF THE GUADALUPE SEAL.
The following description of the Guadalupe seal (Arctocephalus townsendi) as a
new species, is by Dr. C. Hart Merriam, and was published in the Proceedings of the
Biological Society of Washington for 1897, pages 175 to 178: ;
Recently I have compared the skulls collected at Guadalupe by Mr. Townsend with a series of
skulls of Arctocephalus australis or phillipi from the Galapagos Islands, also collected by Mr. Townsend,
and find the two to be very distinct species. In view of these facts it seems particularly appropriate
that the new species should bear Mr. Townsend’s name, which I take pleasure in bestowing upon it.
The material on which the new species is based consists of four skulls picked up on the beach.
One of these, the type, is an adult male which has lost the teeth and lower jaw. Another is a young
adult female with both jaws and all the teeth. The remaining two are very imperfect, lacking both
the jaws and face. i
The species seems doomed to speedy extermination and so far as known no museum in the world
has a single specimen. It is hoped that our National Museum will be able to secure complete
specimens before it is too late.
Arctocephalus townsendi sp. nov. Guadalupe fur seal.
Type locality.—Guadalupe Island, off Lower California. Type No. 83617, g ad., U. S. National
Museum. Collected on the beach on west side of Guadalupe May 22, 1892, by C. H. 'Townsend.
Cranial characters.—Contrasted with skulls of Arctocephalus (australis or phillipi) trom the Gala-
pagos Islands, skulls of 4. townsendi differ in somewhat smaller size; much shorter rostrum; shorter
nasals; larger and more freely open incisive foramina; heavier and shorter ascending branches of
premaxillae, which do not push. backward along. the. nasals as in australis; smaller, flatter, and
smoother audital bullae; much uarrrower and more deeply excavated palate; narrower postpalatal
notch; broader and heavier jugals; broader zygomatic processes of maxillae, which are expanded to
form a broad floor under the anterior half of the orbit; larger, broader, and more rounded anterior
nares in the male, and absence of sagittal crest between frontals.
The most important characters are the exceedingly narrow and excavated palate, flat audital
bullae, short and thick ascending arm of premaxilla, and broadly expanded zygomatic root of maxilla,
forming a floor under the anterior half of the orbit. There are also tooth characters: the first upper
molar (fifth molariform tooth) is mainly posterior to plane of anterior root of zygoma; both upper
true molars are double rooted, and the last upper premolar is incompletely double rooted.
In the female of townsendi the narrow and deeply excavated form of the palate is even more
emphasized than in the male, and the postorbital constriction is very much narrower than in the
female of australis. :
Measurements of male skull of Arctocephalus townsendi (the type).
Greatest basal length (gnathion to occipital condyles)
Basal length (gnathion to basion)-...-..-...-------5 222 ween eee eee eee eee
Basilar length of Hensel (basion to incisors) .--......--...---.------------
Palatine length (gnathion to postpalatal notch).....----------------------
Postpalatal length (postpalatal notch to basion) ...-:..-.--.-.------------
Zygomatic breadth ........---..------e-nee eee e ee ee Widiajeacinainsebea wecieieave Seas 151
Lateral series of teeth (canine to last molar inclusive). .-..-.---- Nore ee 88
Distance between canines -...---- 220-222 eee ee ee cee eee nee eee 22.5
Distance between third pair of molariform teeth ............-.-.-.--..---- 22.5
Breadth (anteroposterior) of zygomatic root of maxilla between inferior lip
of antorbital foramen and orbit. ...... 2.222. +--+ pee eee cnc ene seeeeeceee 21
272 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
MEASUREMENTS OF SALTED SKIN OF ELEPHANT SEAL.
Following are the measurements of the largest of the male elephant seals killed
on May 23, the salted skin being greatly shrunken:
Ft. To
Length, nose to end of tail ...... 0.022. 22. ee nee eee ee cee ee cee cece cee cece nee en eeees 8 10
Length, nose to end of flipper ...... r cpapcreerd ciehnictensh aviase okinoeteheieeionee REE eeina cance ee Eee Sees 11
Length, nose to end of eye ...-- 2-2-2. een ne cece ee cece cece reece cee nee crc nee ceneee tenes 1 38
Length, nose to end of upper lip........------ 20-202 eee ee eee eee cee cee ne cee nee eens tees 8
Length, tail scavecawes conduc ee sceaswewessccomnd povebe sense emenecsaredacineseinns MERE EMER 4
Length, bare part of fore flipper...-... SERDUECET BORE Sry tt a ee Ue cs Pate A Chih Saat eis 1 8
Width, bare part of fore flipper .----. ..-.-- --- 20. eee en eee eee ee eee eee cen ee eee tees 7
Length, longest whiskers. ...--.---.------ 2-22-22 eee eee eee eee cee ee teen cere cee eee ceneee 64
Length, longest bristles over eye -.... 2-2. 2-22 nee ne eee eee cee cee cee eee eee tenes 4
Length, outer claw, longest ...... .----- --- 222 wee eee cee en eee eee cee nee cee eee eens 1%
Length, inner claw, shortest...........-------- Tis fu cla SNe Fale aINIS, o DiuaMiewidec ec ohavemicwesese eins CERES 14
Width across back to end of fore flipper ..--...----. -220 2-22 nee cee ee ene cee ree en eee 6
Width across tips of hind flipper ..----.---.--------- sitbeviewubeadeaanenaesctecerscisceee weed 2 3
Width. between eyes... ..0-20sccceecncesesitasa sce cuicee cane cece s incase id cisigagnidebine sree eee 7
Whiskers, 48 on each side.
Bristles over eye, 8 each side (their positions opposite to back of eye).
Rear and lower whiskers longest (front one-half inch long) grading back to iienwenk
No trace of claws on hind flippers; claws black and broad.
Oiiber Gla W (WIGED) «coos esc enie ae nieunainaiewinie selene at emne taweer science cept siteimind wenie seine +
TNHSTMIGlAW" CWO) eile eeceshe ceeeimine. sities mems aie oeinie Geewiaye in eimiduervlale onsen heroes daienemeieccie cae. t
Spread of, Clawsis: <2 nossanceues ccc teeeseedtsonseeoenessme usec sete emnekuceeese denen 64
Space between first and second claws . -.--.---2. 2-22 0- one cee ene eee cee nee wee een eee 4
Space between second and third claws ......-..- 02-222 ---- 22 cece ee cen cee eee cone cee een ee +
Space between third and fourth claws ..-.-- 2-22. -22. eee eee een cee cee cee eee eee ones 3
Space between fourth and fifth claws -...2.. 222-2200 cee. cee eee cee eee ee cee eee ee eee 2
NOTES ON THE FUR SEALS OF THE GALAPAGOS ISLANDS.
The history of the extermination of the Galapagos fur seal (Arctocephalus philippii)
is similar to that of the Guadalupe seal; an unrestricted slaughter of male and female,
old and young alike, whenever and wherever found. The notes relating to its capture
in recent years were furnished me by sealers who were engaged in hunting it.
During the voyage of the Albatross to the Galapagos Islands in 1891 we were
informed that a scattered remnant of the herd still frequented the more inaccessible
rocks of the archipelago.
The Galapagos fur seal was usually found on beaches overhung with cliffs, and
sought caves during the day to avoid the heat. The young were usually born in
caves, and were observed at all times during the summer. The species was found
present at the islands all the year round and does not appear to have migrated at all.
The history of the Galapagos seal furnishes additional proof of the fact that fur
seals cling to their ancient and accustomed breeding places with the greatest persist-
ence. So certain are they of returning to their old breeding ground, that the reestab-
lishment of the different species would undoubtedly result from a complete protection
of these places, and the result would be the building up of valuable seal fisheries for
the future. The later sealing voyages to the Galapagos, from 1880 to 1887, resulted
in the killing of all the seals that could be found. The log book of Captain Harit-
wen’s voyage in 1880, now in my possession, shows that: seals taken at that time fre-
quented certain localities on Culpepper, Albemarle, Narborough, Tower, Wenman, and
FUR SEALS OF GUADALUPE, GALAPAGOS, AND LOBOS ISLANDS. 2738
Abingdon islands. During the long-continued Bering Sea controversy, when all mat-
ters pertaining to the world’s seal fisheries received a general overhauling, the records
of the Galapagos seal fishery were looked up, but no one supposed that the race of
Seals there had in any degree revived. It was a matter of surprise to those interested in
the subject that during the past month (December, 1897) a vessel arrived at San Fran-
cisco from the Galapagos with a catch of 224 seals. This shows that the few that
‘had escaped the slaughter of the last voyage, made just ten years before, had reestab-
lished themselves on the identical rookeries where Captain Haritwen’s catch had been
made, and the nucleus of a herd existed there unknown to anyone. There is no doubt
that it could have been developed into an important seal fishery if the fact had been
discovered in time to prevent its destruction by raiders. It is probable that indi-
viduals have escaped this latest slaughter, and that by the protection of the rookeries
a fishery could be established.
PARTIAL RECORD OF FUR SEALS TAKEN ON THE GALAPAGOS ISLANDS.
1816: During Fanning’s voyage, in 1816, 8,000 seals were taken at the Galapagos
Islands.
1825: In Morrel’s voyage it is recorded that a few seals were taken at the south
end of Albemarle Island.
1872-1880: Capt. C. W. Reed made four sealing voyages to the Galapagos Islands
between 1872 and 1880, during which about 6,000 seals were taken. The skins are
said to bave been less valuable than those from Guadalupe, Santa Rosa, and Santa
Cruz islands.
1879: Capt. W. P. Noyes found “more seals than in 1897” (his latest voyage).
1880: In 1880 the late Capt. Charles Haritwen, of Alameda, Cal., sealed on the
Galapagos Islands, taking 261 seals between June 28 and August 30, trou ‘Culpepper,
Albemarle, Narborough, Tower, and Wenman islands. Many young pups were seen,
which he thought were born in July. Many seals were seen on the southwest side of
Wenman, the southeast side of Narborough, and the west side of Abingdon islands,
but no landings could be effected at these places. The seals taken at Narborough
were procured at the northwest point. The fur was poor, the skins selling at $5 each.
1882: Captain Haritwen stated that he knew of a vessel which took 800 seals at
the Galapagos about 1882.
1885: Capt. F. M. Gaffney, in 1885, obtained about 1,000 seals between August 30
and December 8.
1887: Capt. Samuel Smith, of San Francisco, took 1,200 seals from the Galapagos
Islands about 1887, the skins of which sold for $7 each.
1897: Capt. Ww. P. Noyes, of the schooner Prosper, of San Francisco, visited the
Galapagos Islands in 1897, and between July 16 and October 19 secured 224 seals, 139
of which were females. Although the log-book records of this voyage state that the
seals were procured at distances varying from one-half to 7 miles from shore, the
master subsequently stated that some of the animals were killed in caves and else-
where on land. The positions given in the log show that the catch was made in the,
vicinity of the old sealing localities on the islands above mentioned. These incom-
plete records account for 17,485 fur seals killed at the Galapagos Islands, but probably
represent only a small proportion of the numbers actually. taken,
5947—PT 3——18
274 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
NOTE TO ACCOMPANY A PHOTOGRAPH OF ONE OF THE SEAL ROOKERIES OF
LOBOS ISLAND, URUGUAY.
When in Montevideo, Uruguay, in January, 1888, I procured a photograph, taken
in 1886, showing a portion of Lobos Island covered by seals. It represents the south-
ern fur seal (Arctocephalus australis), and is interesting, as it seems to be the only one
to be found representing southern seals of any species.
The small rookeries of Lobos Island illustrate the good results following the care-
ful protection of the fur seal upon its breeding grounds. Although situated directly
in the track of commerce and within 5 miles of Maldonado, a town more than one
hundred and fifty years old, a profitable seal fishery has been maintained to the
present time.
Commercial sealing was carried on here prior to 1820. The present lessees of the
island, operating under the direction-of the Government of Urugnay, placed upon the
London market, from 1873 to 1897, 319,746 salted skins, or an average of over 13,000
a year. Lobos Island is less than a mile in length, is low, brushy, and has a few
houses near its center. The odor and the noise from the rookeries are noticeable on
passing vessels.
x
»s
‘xD ag
A 3rd Bluff
Round Ton
oe
i
“ ‘ ‘
x
x
“\ va
\
iN /
) Nope Point
© Bick Rock
_
U
See
Sy%
an =
wo Ss
Red Hill Sy
GUADALUPE ISLAND
LOWER CALIFORNIA
Showing explorations made by C.H Townsend in 1892
for the Department of’ State,relating to
the species of fur seal inhabiting Guadalupe Island.
NOTE:
Snare pace Track of Schooner Santa Barbara ------
ates TT 1: 4 ; ;
0 'b | 2 3 we yon ae : BAY gory,
SS = — Stat. M. oe an Fur Seals iitled 4
| ee eee ee ae EERIE Pn Serene Eee rere A M pipe ee ee Yee, “ " observed x
Faia S « -Skiills collected +
ner : >, Lion Rockey Fionn Seals killed +
BASC INA furnis shed by the US.C.& GSI vey,
LOM CL PECCONTAISSANCE 172 JEG!
by Lieut. Con): Hk. Nichols WSN.
Commanding CLSO 8 GuSuST7? Hassler
SOUPLMIGS: 170 [thors
—_—
‘pussumoy, pur Jo Aq yderZojoqd e wor,
“SONVO ONIIV3S
“AXX 3LV1d
“YaTIVa JONVO GNV ‘370d0vd ‘GNI ONITT™ ‘S3NIT ONY SLNIOd Yv3adS ‘YvadS GaNYOS
“IAXX 31iV1d
PLATE XXVII.
HOISTING ABOARD THE CANOES,
From a photograph by A. B. Alexander.
JONMA “aN 4q Gdeusojogd ev wo1g
‘MOL NI SSONVD HLIM VIGWN100 Y3NOOHOS NVOINSNV
wea: Des
THAXX 311d
PLATE XXIX,
CANOE LEAVING THE SCHOONER.
CANOE RETURNING.
CANOE UNDER SAIL.
From photographs by C. H. Townsend.
‘puesumoy, "H 'O Aq YdesZojoyd @ WoL
‘968 ‘ATNC ‘VMSVIVNN LY 13314 ONINWAS AHL JO Luvd
: S : |
"XXX aLlvid
‘pussuMoy *H ‘Oo fq ydearsojoyd & WoL,
*NOODV1 LIVS SHL OL JONVYLNS SHL GYVYMOL SNIXOOT SQOVTIIA WNvd “LS LV ONIGNVT
“IXXX J3Lvd
‘puasumoy ‘H ‘O 4q yderso0j0qd B MOI]
“SANVS 1O.L10Z GHYVMOL DNINOOT ‘1NWd “LS 4O SOVTTIA SHL
eraeVWwVvy agIewa
‘puasumoy, “H ‘OD Aq Ydeisojoqd v wooly
“STV3S AG GALN3ANDAYS ATHYSWYOS SAAVO ‘GNNOYOMOVE AHL NI “GNVISI 3dAIVGVND JO GNZ LSVSHLNOS ‘39VTIIA GaLyu3ssa
“WIXXX SLvId :
‘puesumoL “H ‘O Aq sjusweimsveu pues SoyoIeys Wor ‘UIMpleg “Hy <g
"NOISSSYDOud NI AGOS SHL SNIHOYV JO YANNVW GNV SIOSOSOUd AHL 4O NOILISOd TWASN SHL SNIMOHS
‘S21ASOLYSNBUD SNUMYLOLINFY ‘WAS INVHd3713
“AIXXX 341d
ydeisojoqd v WOIYf
“AYNONUN ‘GNVISI SO8O7 NO ‘s279.49snD snyDYydaI0}94F ‘WY3S YUNA NYBHLNOS AHL AO AYSHOOY
5822 olgoo\..
‘go#olag \1sI
ES
"AXXX 3Lv1d
' X.—REPORT OF AN EXPEDITION IN SEARCH OF THE FUR SEAL OF
GUADALUPE ISLAND, LOWER CALIFORNIA, JUNE, 1897.
INCLUDING A SURVEY pE THE ISLAND AND NOTES ON THE ANIMAL AND PLANT LIFE
OF THE REGION.
By WILBUR WILSON THoBURN, Ph. D.,
Professor of Bionomics, Stanford University.
JUNE 8, 1897.
My Dear S1r: You are hereby appointed assistant to the Commission of Fur Seal Investigations,
to take charge of the expedition to Guadalupe Island.
It is understood that yourself and assistants are to serve without salary, but that all necessary
expenses of the trip will be paid by the United States Treasury. It is understood that Prof. R. L.
Green shall be assistant in charge of the topographic survey of the island and that Prof. Charles B.
Wing shall have charge of the photography.
You are directed to take the steamer Gedney, of the United States Coast Survey, at San Francisco
on June 16; to provide yourselves with instruments for topographic reconnoissance; with material
for the collection and preservation of specimens of natural history, and with apparatus for photo-
graphing all objects of interest which you may find on the island.
You are directed to give special attention to the fur seal rookery which is supposed to be near
the middle of the western side of the island. Should you find such a rookery actually present, you.
are directed to count the seals in the different categories; to take photographs of the individual ,
animals and of the rookery as a whole; to preserve in formalin three pups and three young male skins, —
and, if possible, the skin of an adult male; and skeletons of three adult males and of as many young
males should be procured, if possible. iis general, you will ascertain all that can be found out in
regard to the natural history of the animal, with special reference tv the comparison between it and
the fur seal of the north. :
Further, as full an investigation of the natural history of the island as is practicable should be
made. This should include the collection of any reptiles and mammals that may be found; of the
fishes and marine invertebrates in the tide pools, and as far as possible the birds and plants.
To this end you will utilize all the facilities which may be given by the officers and crew of the
Gedney, and your stay on the island is at your own discretion unless orders to the captain of the
Gedney, Lieutenant-Commander Osborn, require him to leave at any particular time. On leaving
you may proceed back with the Gedney to San Francisco, or, if the reasons for doing so justify the
expense, you may proceed to San Diego and return by rail.
Any information concerning the past or present occupation of the island by the sea elephant
should be carefully noted.
In general, the first work of the expedition is to secure information in regard to the fur seal and
to secure specimens of the seal, which is an undescribed species. *
Yours very truly, Davip §. JORDAN,
Commissioner in charge of Fur Seal Investigations.
Dr. W. W. THOBURN,
Assistant to the Commiasion of Fur Seal Investigations,
Stanford University, California.
* This fur seal has since been described by Dr. C. Hart Merriam as a new species, Arctocephalus
townsendi. Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., July 1, 1897. ee
276 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Following the instructions given in the letter above, we left San Francisco on
June 16 on the steamer Gedney and reached Guadalupe Island on the morning of
June 21. We remained eleven days, and during this time we carefully studied the 50
miles of coast line, landing when it was possible or running the steamer or launch so
close inshore that every detail could be closely observed. Nearly the entire eastern
and southern shores were explored on foot and about half of the western shore. The
northwestern shore, where most of the caves are located, could not be reached on
account of the heavy surf, but it was possible to run the steamer within 500 feet of
the surf line and carefully observe every point by means of the glasses.
The interior of the island was thoroughly explored and nearly every form of bird
and insect and plant life seen was collected. A list of these forms is appended to this
report. No reptiles were found.’ A list of the fish collected is given below.
To Professors Green and Wing fell the very difficult and often dangerous work ot
exploring the interior of the island, while I gave most of my attention to the coast line.
Lieut. Commander A. P. Osborn, commanding the Gedney, put his ship and crew at
our disposal, and from him and his officers we received most efficient help. A
complete survey of the shore line and a sketch of the island was made by the officers
of the Gedney. A copy of this sketch map is transmitted with this report.
The shore line is everywhere composed of ragged masses of rock freshly fallen
from the cliffs above and seems too unstable to allow the growth of marine forms or
of tide-pool life. There is, for these tropical waters, very little life, and the inverte-
brates that were found were small in size and not very numerous.
There are no kelp beds about the island, and everywhere but in a little cove on
the south side of the island, where it is comparatively shallow, the water is very deep
a short distance from the shore. This may be the explanation of the small number of
water birds. During the ten days I saw but two shags and eight gulls. The only
water bird that seemed quite common was a night-flying petrel. On the northwestern
coast are numerous caves into which the waves break. It was in these caves that the
fur sea] was formerly found in large numbers.
A very careful study of the 50 miles of coast line was made with special reference
to the present or past occupation by the fur seal. In some places it was impossible to
land on account of the high surf. In these cases the boat was run as close inshore
as possible and every object visible was examined with glasses. Unfortunately, the
sea was too rough to make a complete and minute examination of all the caves. But
in the repeated trips around the island and six trips along the northwest shore, where
most of the caves are located, no fur seal or bones other than the bones of goats were
seen. Two sea lions (Zalophus californianus) were seen on an outlying rock off
Steamer Point(see map). From the bluffs, which on the west coast are from 500 to 1,000
feet high above the shore, the coast line was carefully studied, but no seal were noted
on the rocks‘or in the water. On the south side of the outer island (see map) is a
rookery of sea lions (Zalophus californianus). A count made at 8 o’clock a. m. showed 10
bulls, 50 cows, aud 31 pups. This rookery was repeatedly examined in hopes of finding
fur seal among the sea lions, but none were seen. One day was spent on the rookery
sketching and photographing the sea lions. The adults were quite timid and took to
the water if we approached within 40 feet of them. Though the bulls tried to herd
the cows back on to the rocks and frequently succeeded, none of them would come
near us, nor did any of the bulls come ashore while we were on the rookery. The
'In Bull, Cal. Acad. Sci., Vol. I, p. 220, Prof. E, L. Greene speaks of seeing two or three small lizards.
‘ FISH OF GUADALUPE ISLAND. 277
pups were quite fearless and crawled around our feet. We took one skin and a
skeleton and two pups. On the rookery we found a cow that had been dead two or
three weeks, and evidently shot. There were everywhere signs that the island is
frequently visited, and the unprotected fur seal whose hide is said to be worth $15
has probably been almost, if not entirely, exterminated by those who visit the island
for other purposes.
As to the presence or absence of ‘fur seal on the island at the present time, I can
only say that if there are any left they are few. During the eleven days we were at
Guadalupe parties were in various parts of the island, all on the lookout for specimens,
and none were seen. Mr. A. W. Anthony, of San Diego, who visited the island a few
months before our party, says that he saw two or three then, though he failed to
secure them. .
In this connection we may put on record certain notes furnished concerning these
seals. Mr. Anthony, under date of November 26, San Diego, writes:
It would be impossible for me to give you any idea of the number of fur seal still left at Guadalupe
Island. That a few are left there I know, for I have seen two or three the past spring, and none have
been killed since. There are, however, very few left, and these are scattered and are only to be found
in a few caves that are exposed only at low tide. I can give you no landmarks whereby these cows
could be found; but I think they are confined to the weather (northwest) and eastern sides! of the
I have made several trips to the island, the first with Mr. Townsend in 1892. We failed to obtain
any specimens. ‘The following year, however, 36 seals were killed there, and again 15 were taken the
second year after our visit. Since then the sealers have considered these seals extinct, but they are
again talking of sealing the island.
In conversation with those who sealed there when the species was common I learn that the old
pulls left the females and pups as soon as the latter were a week or so old, and were not again seen
until the following year. It is thought that they go to sea, but it is far more likely that they resort
to caves opening below the surface of the water, since the species seems to be resident only on the
island, and has never been seen, so far as I can learn, east of the Los Benitos Island, not even hauling
on Cerros Island, 20 miles east of the Benitos, when they were common on the latter.
: I think all are gone from the Benitos, since I have called there four times in the past two years
and have not found any. I am, however, satisfied that enough are still on Guadalupe to restore the
herd in time; but absolute protection is necessary and, for all I can see, impossible.
Since learning that the Guadalupe seal belonged to the southern genus I fully expected to find
some about the Revillegigedo Islands, thus connecting them with the Galapagos species, but a careful
search about those islands failed to bring to light evidences of seals of any species.
Jacks Bay, where Mr. C. H. Townsend found four skulls of fur seal in May, 1892,
‘and Sea Elephant Beach, on the northwest side, were both visited by Professors Green
and Wing; but a careful search revealed neither seal nor elephant seal, nor did they
find any parts of the skeleton of either animal.
The fish collected about the island were identified by Dr. C. H. Gilbert, and the
list is given below. Except in the tide pools, which were worked by Professor Green,
no thorough study of the fish was made. Bonito and yellow-tail were quite common
and were caught by trolling from the steamer.
Gyrapleurodus francisca Girard. Pimelometopon pulcher (Ayres).
Carcharhinus fronto (Jordan and Gilbert). Tridio semicinctus (Ayres).
Trachurus synvmetricus (Ayres). Clinocottus analis (Girard).
Paralabrax clathratus (Girard). Caulolatilus princeps Jenyns.
Girella nigricans (Ayres.) Remora remora (Linnzus).
Hypsypops rubicundus (Girard).
1The eastern side was so thoroughly examined by our party that I feel justified in saying that
there were none on that side during the period of our visit,—W. W. T.
278 THE FUR SEALS QF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. .
THE BIRDS OF GUADALUPE ISLAND.
The absence of water birds was constantly noticed. In one trip of 18 miles along
the western shore I saw but two gulls (Larus occidentalis), two cormorants, and one
sooty albatross. Nowhere did we see any signs of the extensive breeding grounds so
common on the islands nearer the Mexican shore.
' But two forms of water birds were at all common. The first was the night-flying
petrel (Oceanodroma leucorhoa macrodactyla). This was abundant about the ship at
night when we were anchored near the cliffs, and specimens were repeatedly captured
alive. It was attracted by the fires of parties camping on the shore and was frequently
mistaken for a bat.
The other water bird that was seen in large numbers was called by the sailors
‘(sea pigeon.” We met them in large numbers some distance from the island, either
resting upon the surface or flying close to the water, but we could uot get near enough
to identify them. It may have been the black-vented shearwater (Puffinus gaira)
which Mr. Walter E. Bryant saw here. The following list includes the birds identified:
during the ten days from June 21 to July 1. I have followed the paper on the Orni-
thology of Guadalupe Island, by Walter E. Bryant (Bul. Cal. Acad. Sci., Vol. IT, 269).
1. Larus occidentalis. Western gull.
Two specimens, seen nearly every day on the rocks along the southern shore.
2. Oceanodroma leucorhoa macrodactyla. Bryant’s petrel.
This little bird was very common on dark nights. It would fly around the ship
uttering a peculiar ery. Occasionally one would strike the rigging and fall to the deck
or enter the cabin. Several specimens were secured in this way and kept alive several
days.
3. Buteo borealis calurus. Western redtail.
Two specimens were seen over the southern part of theisland. It was frequently
seen in the southern part. No specimens were secured.
4. Falco sparverius. American sparrow hawk.
5. Colaptes rufipileus. Guadalupe flicker.
Three specimens were secured among the pines at thenorthern portion of the island.
6. Micropus melanoleucus. White-throated swift.
A swift of some kind was occasionally seen about the higher parts of the island.
None were secured for positive identification, and these may have been some other
species.
7. Carpodacus amplus. Guadalupe house finch.
Very common about the springs on the top of the island.
8. Junco insularis. Guadalupe junco.
Very common among the pines and cypress trees of the summit.
9. Pipilo consobrinus. Guadalupe towhee.
One specimen.
10. Salpinctes guadeloupensis. Guadalupe rock wren.
Very common everywhere, especially among the rocks along shore.
SPIDERS AND INSECTS OF GUADALUPE ISLAND. 279
GUADALUPE ISLAND SPIDERS AND INSECTS.
By WILLIAM APPLETON SNow,
Assistant in Entomology, Leland Stanford, Junior, University.
Class ARACHNIDA.
e
Order ARANHEIDA.
1 Lycosa sp.
Immature male. One specimen.
2. Habrocestum n. sp. ?
“Probably new, but as it is not adult, I would rather not describe it, although
its coloration is doubtless Chamscteristie”— Banke in litt. Two apeaiiiene
3. Callilepsis insularis n. sp. Banks MS.
“Olosely resembles Callilepsis pluto, from Washington State.” Two specimens.
4. Marptusa californica Peck?
One immature specimen.
Class HEXAPODA.
Order ORTHOPTERA.
1. Trimerotropis lauta Scudd.
Known only from Guadalupe. Ten specimens.
2. Gryllus guadelupensis Scudd. MS.
One specimen. There were also several immature Acridide.
Order COLEOPTERA.
Calosoma semileve Lec. Colaspidea cuprascens Lec.
Amara insignis Dej. Monoxia consputa Lec.
Amara californica Dej. Celotaxis punctulata Horn.
Dermestes vulpinus Fabr. Ccelotaxis muricata Horn. ?
Trogosita virescens Fabr. Helops bachei Lec.
Pristoscelis sp.
Order NEUROPTERA.
1. Myrmeleon sp.
One specimen.
Order HEMIPTERA.
1. Lygeid.
One specimen, fragmentary.
2. Psyllid.
One specimen, fragmentary.
Order DIPTERA.
1. Anthrax sp.
Two specimens, in very poor condition.
2. Eupeodes volucris Osten Sacken.
One specimen, male. A Western species, which extends as far eastward as western
Kansas.
3. Hristalis tenax Linn.
One specimen, male.
4, Mesogramma sp.
A single shrunken and discolored specimen.
fi
280 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS,
5. Drosophila sp.
One specimen.
6. Sarcophaga sp.
Four specimens.
7. Compsemyia macellaria Fabr.
One specimen, male. °
8. Lucilia cesar Linn.
Four specimens.
9. Calliphora vomitoria Linn.
One specimen.
All of these insects were preserved in alcohol. The more delicate of them—the
diptera—were consequently somewhat shrunken and discolored.
Judging trom this little collection, the insect fauna of Guadalupe Island can not
differ markedly from that of some parts of California.
REPORT ON THE PLANTS OF GUADALUPE ISLAND.
By WILLIAM RussEeLL DUDLEY,
Professor of Systematic Botany in Leland Stanford Junior University.
The collection of plants‘made on Guadalupe Island in 1897 was gathered during
the last week in June by Profs. Rufus L. Green, Charles B. Wing, and Wilbur W.
Thoburn. The dry season was, of course, well advanced, and the collection is chiefly
interesting as showing what is to be found in bloom in the summer.
The island had been visited by Dr. Edward Palmer, who collected from February
till May, 1875; visited all parts of the island, and obtained 131 species of plants. These
were published by Sereno Watson in the Proceedings of the American Academy of
Arts and Sciences, XI,105. Of these, 21 were peculiar to the island. Dr. Palmer
again visited Guadalupe Island in 1889, for a short time. A list of Dr. Palmer’s last
collection was reported upon by Dr. J. N. Rose in the Contributions to the U. S.
National Herbarium, I, 21. Here 4 new species are published and 29 species are
listed as peculiar to the island.
Prof. Edward L. Greene next collected there seven days during the last half of
April, 1885. He added several to Palmer’s list, including several new species. His
observations, together with a revised list of the plants of the island, were published
by the California Academy of Sciences, Bulletin, I, 214.
Dr. F. Franceschi, of Santa Barbara, collected there during December, 1892, and a
part of January, 1893, aud published an interesting series of notes on his observations
in Zoe, (San Francisco), IV, 130.
A. W. Anthony and T. 8. Brandegee visited. the island in September, 1896, for a
short time, and again in March, 1897, and have already distributed a limited number
of herbarium specimens from there.
About 135 species of flowering plants have been reported. The Stanford
University party brought back 37 species, of which 3 (a Talinum, a Frankenia, and
a Phyllospadia), have not before been reported and belong to genera new to the island.
Nots.—The Arachnida were determined by Mr. Nathan Banks; the orthoptera, by Mr. S. H.
Scudder; the Coleoptera by Mr, Samuel Henshaw,
PLANTS OF GUADALUPE ISLAND. | 281
;
Our party landed at the anchorage at the south end and explored the dry central
valley occupying the south half of the island; they also explored the northern half
from the west anchorage, and from that on the northeast side. The northwest and
much of the central part remained unvisited, chiefly on account of the dryness
and heat and the difficulty of transporting water; therefore the collection could not
have been by any means exhaustive.
Destructive of vegetation as are the goats, they are debarred from visiting the
southern half of the island in the dry season by the distance from the only fresh
water—the springs at the north end. If anyone could make a thorough survey. of the
summer flora of the south end, he would find apparently the natural conditions nearly
undisturbed, and would be rewarded probably by new discoveries.
The Stanford party report, as all others have done, that the woody plants of the
island are doomed if the present conditions continue. They made careful search, but
were unable to discover that a single young or seedling tree had escaped destruction
by the goats. Many dead but no living junipers were seen, and the cause of the
death of so many of the cypresses appears to have been demonstrated. The goats
strip off the living bark of the latter in places, and the tree in its effort to repair the
injury forms a new somewhat hypertrophied growth, leaving a dead streak underneath.
The increase and decay of these dead spots finally leaves but a shell of living bark
and wood near the base of the tree, and the winter winds overturns it years before the
time of its natural death.
The presence of a considerable amount of dead wood in the southern part of the
island has been observed by collectors previous to ours, and it was supposed to be
the juniper; but the structure of thé specimens brought home agrees well with that
of the cypress and not with the wood of the juniper collected on the mainland. The
cypresses, therefore, probably extended over the southern half of the island until
destroyed by the goats, and their disappearance may have caused the disappearance
of subperennial springs, as none exist in that region.
It was gratifying to find Phyllospadix existing on Guadalupe. It is another link
connecting this flora with central California. It is, moreover, the most southern station
reported to me, the next northerly being at Ensenada, in the ee part of Lower
California. It is the most insular also.
The flowering plants are given below, and the few mosses, lichens, and alge
brought back will be reported elsewhere.
FLOWERING PLANTS COLLECTED IN THE SUMMER OF 1897 ON GUADALUPE ISLAND.
Eschscoltzia ramosa, E. L. Greene.
All parts of the island. Only a few in flower.
Oligomeris subulata, Boiss.
Near the northeast landing.
Silene gallica, L.
Spergularia moerothica, Heynh.
In fruit. Densely glandular-tomenton. Abundant among rocks, south end of
island.
Frankenia grandifolia, Cham. and Schlecht.
On the side of the bank near the northeast anchorage.
282 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Talinum Guadalupense, n. sp.
Leaves thick and fleshy oblanceolate, 2 to 5 centimeters long, all radical. Root
fusiform, fleshy, broadening at top into a short rhizoma extending, laterally. Flower-
ing panicles 3. to 5 decimeters in height, ascending, naked except for the deltoid
acuminate scarions bracts at the bases of the divaricate, scattered branches which
occupy the upper half. Flowers in terminal close clusters. Sepals 2, roundish, per-
sistent. Petals rose-colored, broadly oborate, nearly 1 centimeter long. Stamens
numerous. Slender exserted style with a 2 to 3 lobed stigma. Capsule broadly ovoid
acute. Walls three-valved, splitting from above. Placenta basal. Seeds disk-shaped,
numerous.
Sphaeralcia?
Material scanty. Near northeast landing.
Malva borealis, Wallm.
Erodium Cicutarium, L’Her. Alfilarilla.
In fruit.
Erodium moschatum, L’Her.
In fruit. Contrary to Professor Greene’s experience in 1885, the Erodiums have
become widely extended over the island and form the favorite food for the goats.
Rhus Laurina, Nutt. Laurel sumach.
In flower. Collected from the shrubs mentioned by Franceschi in the old crater
on the northeast side of the island. The only ones seen.
Trifolium microcephalum, Pursh.
In fruit, north end of island.
Hosackia ornithopus, Greene?
Too fragmentary for exact determination; near northeast landing.
Mentzelia micrantha, Torr. & Gr.
North end, in the canyon.
Cactus Goodrichii (Scheer.), Kuntze. (Mamillaria yoodrichii Scheer.)
In fruit. Not many specimens observed, and all contined to the south end of the
island.
Opuntia prolifera, Engelm, Prickly pear.
Abundant near the northeast part of the island, also near the west side anchorage,
and scarce at the south end in the central valley.
Mesembryanthemum crystallinum. L.
Near south anchorage.
Filago Californica, Nutt.
Franseria camphorata, Greene.
Hemizonia frutescens, Gray. Guadalupe tar weed.
In full flower. Abundant in the south part of the island on very rough, rocky
lava soil, or sand near the red lava cones. Reported by Palmer in 1875 as very rare,
by Greene as abundant. It may have increased, as goats do not relish it. It is
remarkable as a suffrutescent species in a genus of annuals, and was so observed by
Dr. Palmer and by our collectors in 1897, as evidenced by specimens.
Perityle incana, Gray.
This fine species was in full flower. Abundant in southern part of island.
PLANTS OF GUADALUPE ISLAND. 283
Perityle Grayi, Rose.
In flower and frequent in the canyon above the northeast landing. (This is the
P. Emory of Watson’s aud P. Californica of Greene’s list.)
Centaurea Melitensis. L. Napa thistle. ,
Along the trail near north end. Collected also by Dr. Palmer in 1889.
Sonchus oleraceus, L. Sow thistle.
Gilia Nevinii, Gray.
In fruit. (The Gilia multicaulis millefolia, Gray of Watson’s list.)
Phacelia floribunda, Greene.
In fruit and flower. Canyon at the north end.
Krynitzkia maritima, Greene.
Wrongly referred in Watson’s report on Palmer’s collection of 1875 to Eritrichium
angustifolium Torr.;.included later by Gray under his K. ramosissima, from which
it was separated by Greene. Bull. Cal. Acad. 2: 204.
Mirabilis Californica, Gray.
Chenopodium murale, L
Atriplex Palmeri, Gray.
In fruit. In the central valley at south end.
Cypressus Guadalupensis, Watson. Guadalupe cypress.
Excellent young flowers and fruits. Its time of flowering must therefore be much
later than C. macrocarpa, the Monterey cypress, with which Dr. Masters has been
inclined to unite it. The bark’on sections of limbs 6 inches in diameter scales off in
irregular flakes, suggesting the Platanus, and photographs of the native groves show
a broad, round head in isolated trees. The stringy bark and spire top of C. macrocarpa
_ are well known. Moreover, the seeds in the latter are nearly twice as many and often
only half as large as in C. Guadalupensis.
Pinus insignis, Dougl. var. Binata. Engelm. " Guadalupe pine.
Few, not more than fifty, on the northeast ridge.
Phyllospadix Torreyi, Wats. Sea grass.
Scarce, near the west anchorage and the south anchorage. Only a single flower-
ing branch was obtained and no fruit. The leaves and spadix are more attenuated
than in the California plant, but the inflorescence and abundant root-stocks and
leaves are of similar habit. Not reported so far South elsewhere.
Brodiaea capitata, Benth. ,
Bulbs of what is apparentl y this species were obtained.
Erytheza edulis, Watson. Guadalupe palm.
Prof. R. L. Green obtained photographs of this beautiful island palm and observed
it in three canyons opening the central valley above the south anchorage, in one canyon
on the west side, and on the northeast side. Fifty or more trees in each canyon.
Polypogon monspeliensis, Desf.
Common about the springs.
Hordeum murinum, L. Wild barley grass.
Abundant over the island, especially in the more fertile northern part.
Steamer Pt.
pt North Pount
3
SKETCH OF
Baighta ivi Laue
£50 feet Curves
NAUTICAL MILES
SKETCH OF
GUADALUPE ISLAND
WEST COAST OF LOWER CALIFORNIA
By the Officers of the U.S.Coast Survey Str.Gedney
Lieut. Comdr.A.P. Osborn U. S.Navy Commanding
JUNE 1897.
(2: e, wan’ Cx A
CHW Firzcenaco Deavonrs mgm,
XI.—OBSERVATIONS DURING A CRUISE ON THE DORA SIEWERD, AUGUST-
SEPTEMBER, 1895."
By A. B. ALEXANDER.
Pursuant to instructions from the Hon. Marshall McDonald, United States Com-
missioner of Fish and Fisheries, to secure passage on a pelagic sealing vessel for the
purpose of making a cruise in Bering Sea, with the object of gathering information con-
cerning the pelagic habits of fur seals, the methods employed for their capture at sea,
their food, the proportion of each sex represented in the catch, etc., I left the Albatross
at Unalaska, the middle of July, 1895, to await the arrival of the sealing fleet. Subse-
quently accommodations were obtained, through the kindness of Capt. H. F. Siewerd,
on his vessel, the Dora Siewerd, a schooner of 100 tons register, and one of the largest
in the fleet. She carried 18 canoes and 2 boats, and a crew of 36 Indians and 9 white
men. As two Indians go in a canoe, the spearsmen and boat steerers were equally
- divided.
The writer went on board the Siewerd in the evening of July 27, but owing to
stormy weather she did not sail until the morning of the 31st, getting under way in
company with 27 other sealing vessels. The wind being light we were obliged to
anchor off Ulakhta Head. Hand lines were put over here and fishing carried on for
two hours, resulting in the capture of 22 cod and 4 halibut.
Early in the afternoon, with a light wind from the eastward, we worked toward
Cape Cheerful, which, the next morning (August 1), bore southeast 25 miles, the fleet
by this time being considerably scattered. At9 a.m. 2 sleeping seals were observed,
and shortly afterwards the vessel was hove to and the canoes put over. Each hunter
among the Indians was anxious to secure the first skin, a superstition prevailing that
he who kills the first skin at the beginning of a cruise will be attended with good
luck during the remainder of the season. No time was lost in getting the canoes in
the water, as a number of other vessels in sight had already lowered their boats.
After the canoes had gotten about 2 miles ahead, the vessel followed in their wake;
and as the day was clear they could be seen for a long distance. Occasionally a sail
would be seen to lower, which indicated that the canoes were among seals.
Before entering into a discussion of the details of my observations it may be well
to state that the positions of each day’s catch will be found in appended Table No. 1,?
the same corresponding with those given in the vessel’s official log. The noon posi-
tion each day is shown in Table No. 2,? in which is also recorded the direction and
1 Reprinted from Seal Life, Pt. II, Senate Doc. 137, 1895. ?Here omitted.
285
286 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
force of the wind, the barometer reading, and the temperature of the air and water.
The. temperature of the water was taken 5 feet below the surface. The material
found in the stomachs of seals has been labeled with reference to the noon position.
In the afternoon we passed numerous patches of seaweed and, kelp. In a few
instances seals were seen with their heads and flippers thrust up through this floating
material. Occasionally they would dive and swim a short distance, soon returning
to the surface, however, rolling over and over in the tangled seaweed, but some-
times stopping in their play on the alert for danger. When on sealing ground,
hunters always carefully inspect floating seaweed, and, as a rule, if there are seals
about, they are almost sure of finding one or more in each large patch. Late in the
afternoon we passed close to such a patch, covering a considerable area, in which 6
seals were playing. They paid no attention to the vessel, although within 100 yards
of them. A hunter with a shotgun could have captured 2 or 3 of the number, and
an Indian with a spear would have secured at least 2.
At 5 p. m. the canoes returned with a catch of 42 seals. Three of the males were
about 5 years old, all the others of both sexes being from 2 to 4 years old. Their
stomachs were nearly all empty, a few containing some material, which, however, was
too much decomposed to be identified. The hunters reported seeing but few seals
asleep, and these appeared uneasy. Most of those observed awake were finning. No
great body of seals had been noticed, and in such pleasant weather, if there had been
many on the ground, 18 canoes and 2 boats could have picked up 100 or more.
This number of boats, traveling. as they do, in a path from 10 to 15 miles wide, must
necessarily see nearly every seal within that belt. The few seals seen traveling to-day
were going toward the northwest. >
The chief of the tribe reported hearing the discharge of firearms a short distance
to windward of his canoe, but he could not tell to what vessel the boat belonged.
The next day, August 2, the boats were lowered at 7 a.m. The weather bid fair
for a successful day’s hunt, the wind being north-northwest and light, and the sea
smooth. In the early part of the forenoon we jogged close to 3 seals playing. Fre-
quently they would roll over several times, stop suddenly to scratch themselves, and
stand upon their heads with their hind flippers about 2 feét out of water. They
repeatedly performed this operation. When quite near them one of the seals lifted
its head up, but the sight of the vessel caused ‘no alarm. Having no boat to lower
or spear to throw, a loud noise was made by shouting and beating upon a tin can.
This did not have the effect of frightening them, but a light thump on the rail of the
vessel caused them to dive instantly, and when next seen they were about 200 yards
away. Pausing to look at the object which had frightened them, they then swam
rapidly away in an easterly direction.
From the above it would appear that seals are ordinarily but little frightened by
the presence of vessels, provided they are to leeward of them. Had we been on the
windward side the seals would have taken alarm almost. instantly, and would either
have dived or swam rapidly away. :
At1 p.m.a heavy fog bank appeared in the northwest, and shortly afterwards the
canoes and one boat returned. The other boat had evidently gone astray, but as the
weather was smooth no great anxiety was entertained for her safety. Forty-five seals
were brought on board, 26 being males and 19 females. All the females except 2 were
with milk. Their stomachs were mostly empty.
SCARCITY OF SEALS. 287
Through the night the weather continued foggy. Early the next morning, August
3, a sharp lookout was kept for the missing boat, and also for seals. No attempt had
been made to lower the canoes although the sea was comparatively smooth. The
light fog which hung over the water, in connection with the fact of the missing boat,
caused the Indians to hang back. At 7 a.m. a sleeping seal was observed under our
lee close aboard, but not in a position to detect us by the sense of smell. A canoe
was soon launched and started in pursuit, but the short choppy sea made it somewhat
difficult to capture it. In calm weather, or at times when there is only a light wind
stirring, a canoe in approaching a seal is generally paddled directly from the leeward,
but in a choppy sea, such as prevailed on this occasion, an Indian always approaches
side to the wind, which brings the canoe in the trough of the sea and prevents it from
making any noise that would disturb the “ sleeper.”
About noon the missing boat returned, bringing the skins of 2 seals, 1 male and
1 female. .
At 1p. m. another sleeping seal was observed close under our lee. In ninety-
nine cases out of a hundred a sleeping seal will awaken when a vessel is close to it to
windward, but not so with this individual, for it slept on wholly unconscious of
danger and was easily captured. At this time the weather showed signs of Clearing,
and soon afterwards the canoes were lowered. The vessel continued jogging to the
westward under sealing canvas. One vessel was in sight. Three hours later the
canoes began to return, the wind having increased in force, accompanied by a choppy
sea, which prevented seals from sleeping. They were reported scarce, and the few taken
bore out this statement. The day’s hunt amounted to only 13 skins, 6 males and 7
females. Four of the females were with milk. Two of the males were quite large,
about 5 years of age or over, the others from 3 to 4 years. Very few seals had been .
observed from the canoes, and those noticed awake were traveling to the southwest.
In the morning of August 4 the weather was foggy and the wind northwest and
moderate. White hunters would not have hesitated about going out in this kind of
weather, but the Indians indulged in considerable unnecessary talk and paid no atten-
tion to a few scattering, sleeping seals that: were observed among patches of seaweed.
It was only when an occasional glimpse of the sky was seen through the clouds and
fog and indications of good weather were plainly visible that the Indians showed a
disposition to hunt. At 10 o’clock all the boats went out. At the time of lowering
two other sealing vessels were in sight. During the absence of the canoes no seals
were observed from the vessel, although floating seaweed was plentiful.
The canoes returned early in the afternoon, on account-of a heavy fog bank which
suddenly shut down. Only 16 seals had been taken, 8 males and 8 females. Their
stomachs were entirely empty, which would seem to indicate a scarcity of surface fish
in this locality. One of the hunters spoke the schooner Annie C. Moore, which
reported having taken 65 seals, a comparatively poor catch, considering that the
weather had been fairly good.
‘The following day (August 5) the weather was not suitable for sealing, owing to
fog and mist most of the time. The wind was from the west-southwest to east-south-
east, gradually increasing from a gentle to a fresh breeze, accompanied by a sea sufii-
ciently choppy to prevent seals from sleeping. One “sleeper,” however, was observed '
from the vessel and captured.
288 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
On stormy days a lookout is kept by the hunters, and the one who first sees a
seal is entitled to stand in the bow of the canoe as spearsman. At such times three
men go in a canoe, the weather usually being too rough for one man to manage it.
No selection of canoe is made, the most handy one being used, and also the first spear
that can be gutten hold of.
In the afternoon we stood to the east-southeast 18 miles and during the night to
the south by west 17 miles, sighting Unalaska Island on the morning of the 6th.
The weather was stormy and blowing a moderate gale from southeast, with falling
barometer. The noon observation placed us in latitude 55° 01’ north, longitude 168°
07’ west, which showed that we had been in a strong southerly current for the past
twenty-four hours. Later in the day we ran 19 miles on a northwest course and hove
to on the port tack under a two-reefed foresail and fore-staysail and trysail. In the
evening we passed close to the schooner San Jose. During the night the wind hauled
to the southwest and decreased in force to a very fresh breeze. At times during the
following day the sea was very rough, not wholly due to the wind, but caused by a
strong current running to the southward. At noon the fog and clouds cleared
enough to enable us to get an observation—latitude 54° 56’ north, longitude 167° 27’
west. In the afternoon we stood to the northward at a rate sufficient to offset the
effect of the current. Late in the day we spoke the schooner Walter L. Rich, which
had taken only 65 seals. She had been cruising to the westward of our present posi-
tion, near the 60-mile zone, and while in that region had seen but few seals.
Toward evening two young seals played about the vessel for some time. They
were enticed quite near by whistling, but not close enough to spear. It is only rarely
that seals are speared from the deck of a vessel. The young will often approach very
near and play about, sometimes for an hour or more, but keeping out of reach.
Occasionally, however, their curiosity overcomes their customary prudence, and at
such times they are generally captured.
In the morning of August 8 there were indications of clearing weather, with
rising barometer and an occasional clear spot in the sky. A dozen or more seals in
bands of three and four were. noticed, causing considerable commotion among the
Indians. A week of the sealing season had already passed and only a few seals had
been captured, in consequence of which the Indians were becoming restless. At 8
a.m. wore ship and shook the reef out of the foresail, but in a short time the fog
again settled down and remained so for the remainder of the day.
Tn the afternoon we saw quite a large number of seals, more than at any time since
entering the sea. They were not moving in any particular direction. Orcas or killer
whales were plentiful, and kept close to the seals, but they did not have the effect of
driving them from the ground. The sealers claim that the orcas destroy large num-
bers of seals annually, especially in and about the humerous passes through the
Aleutian Islands and off the coast of Japan. Many hunters say that when out in
their boats it is not an unfrequent occurrence to see oreas devour seals. One hunter
on board of the Sieirerd informed me that on two occasions, off the Japan coast, orcas
attempted to take the seals that he had shot. During the afternoon we saw five other
of the sealing vessels.
On August 9 the canoes were put over for the first time in five days. The white
hunters made a start at 9 a. m., the weather having moderated, and being prompted
so to do by the sight of a sleeping seal. The Indian hunters held back for a time, but
INDIAN HUNTERS EASILY DISCOURAGED. 289
several other seals being observed, the remaining canoes were lowered. During most
of the time while the hunters were absent numerous birds and whales and several
porpoises were observed about the vessel. Early in the afternoon the wind began to
increase in force and the canoes to return. By 4 o’clock they were all on board,
having secured 20 seals, of which 13 were males and 7 females. The stomachs were
nearly all empty, a piece of squid being taken from one and a few fish bones from
another. One of the females ‘had lost a hind flipper and shot were found in two of
the skins. One of the seals represented by these skins had been recently wounded,
the other probably some time early in the spring, the shot being found encysted. All
females were in milk; the males were all young bachelors.
Two vessels, the F. M. Smith and Saucy Lass, were in sight at the time the canoes
returned. The captain of the former came on board and reported having taken 105
skins. He also said that the schooner Triumph had obtained 283; Maud 8., 240; 0. D.
Rand, 100, and the Saucy Lass between 60 and 70.
On the following morning (August 10) the weather was cloudy and ccol. At7
o’clock the canoes and boats started out. At the time of their going the sea was long
and rolling and the temperature of the water 2 degrees below that of the air. When
the air is a great deal colder than the water experienced hunters do not asa rule
expect to find many sleeping seals. They state, however, that there are exceptions
to this rule, but in most cases extra cold air makes them restless and very difficult to
approach within spearing distance; but with shotguns they may when in this con-
dition be killed with comparative ease.
In the middle of the forenoon two vessels were sighted. Only one seal was
noticed from the vessel. This individual was “mooching,” a term used by the hunters to
indicate swimming at the surface of the water with only a very small portion of the
body exposed, occasionally thrusting the head out far enough to breathe, Seals fre-
quently swim this way on raw, cold days, when they may readily be shot with guns,
but are not easily approached with spears.
At 2 p. m. the Indians began to return, much earlier than they should have done,
having lost patience and become discouraged. They lack the persistence and judg-
ment of the white hunters, and will give up the chase on the slightest pretext. The
latter, on the contrary, will remain out as long as a chance remains of adding another
skin to their catch. One. hunter, however, had secured 14 seals, the largest catch of
any one canoe since entering the sea. The total number of seals in the day’s catch
was 73, 18 being males and 55 females. Their stomachs, like those previously
examined, contained but little food; only a few pieces of fish and fish bones were
found. In one of the canoes 3 female seals had been skinned; of those brought on
board 3 were without milk. When asked if the seals skinned in the canoe were in
milk, the Indians said they had not noticed. If the condition of the seals had been
observed the same answer would have been given, for as soon as these Indians learn
that certain information is wanted they are very reticent, and but little dependence
can be placed in what they do say. Seemingly, they have been taught to look with
suspicion on every person in search of sealing data.
The canoes that went to the northwest of the vessel were more successful than
those that went in other directions, and the one that brought in the 14 seals hunted
about 6 miles to the northwest of all the other canoes in that locality. A great many
traveling seals were observed, all bound to the northward. Nearly all information
5947—PpT 3——19
290 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
concerning the direction in which seals were traveling was obtained from the white
hunters. Indians, as a rule, pay but little attention to traveling seals, generally
attempting to capture only those that are asleep, but sometimes they will endeavor
to spear them when rolling and finning.
In two of the seals taken shot were found, the wounds being comparatively
fresh—not more than a week old.
On August 11 the canoes and boats went out at 5 o’clock, light wind and cloudy
weather prevailing all day. In the afternoon sleeping seals, two and three in a bunch,
were frequently observed from the vessel. Whales were plentiful from sunrise pntil
dark. The smoke of a revenue cutter could be noticed to the southwest all the
morning, the sight of which caused our canoes to hover much nearer the vessel than
usual, the Indians having a dread of all Government vessels. At 10 a.m. a canoe
helonping to the schooner Triumph came alongside with 5 seals. Our canoes began
to return at 5.30 p. m. and continued to come in until 7 o’clock, when the last one
arrived. The largest catch was 10 skins, and one canoe obtained nothing. Sleeping
seals were reported in small bunches from 1 to 2 miles apart. The huiters who
happened to be near these bunches did fairly well, but a few miles to the southwest
only few seals were found. Traveling seals were also plentiful among the bunches.
Considering the fine weather prevailing and the number of seals observed from the
vessel, the catch was comparatively small, only 89 having been taken—10 males and
79 females. Sixty-five of this number were examined. The stomachs in 49 were
empty, 13 contained liquid matter, and 7 material which it wonld be possible to
identify; the latter was preserved. A large number of canoes hunting on the same
ground tends to destroy the chances of a good catch by any of them. Canoes from
other vessels were in close proximity to ours and none of them did well. This day’s
catch was made 12 miles north and 9 miles west from that of the day before.
On August 12 the hunters made an early start, the weather being cloudy and
cool, the wind from the westward and light; sea smooth; temperature of air and
water the same. Later in the forenoon a heavy fog bank Fie atened to envelop us,
and shortly after noon it came in thick, causing all the canoes to return, having
obtained only 15 seals.
Ou August 13 the weather was unsuitable for sealing, being cloudy and threaten-
ing; the wind fresh from the southwest and west-southwest. In the morning we were
in company with the schooners Triumph and Sapphire, of Victoria, the former having
taken 500 skins and the latter 450 skins. Captain Siewerd and the writer went on
board of the Sapphire. It had been noticed that the water about us was very dark
in color, much darker than usual, and it had also been observed that in localities
where we had taken the most seals the water had been the most discolored. Captain
Siewerd had on more than one occasion noticed that seals frequent water of this
character in considerable numbers, and had noted the fact in his log. Captain Cox,
of the Triumph, stated that when in Bering Sea last year he got most of his catch in
this locality, namely, latitude 54° 56’ north, longitude 168° 15’ west. He found seals
at the commencement of the voyage in water very much discolored, and he endeavored
to keep in such water as muchas possible. This experiment resulted in his averaging
126 seals for each time the canoes were lowered during the month of August, 1894,
On the strength of meeting with such good success, he has been cruising this season on
the same ground, and is now more convinced than ever that seal life is more abundant
SLEEPING AND TRAVELING SEALS. 291
in discolored water than in clear water. Captain Cox attributed the poor catch of
seals on August 11 to the great number of canoes roaming over a comparatively small
area. On the day mentioned the Sapphire took only 68 seals and the Triumph 73.
A few days before a large bull seal was captured by the Sapphire with two spears
embedded in its body.
On the forenoon of the next day (August 14) the weather did not bid fair for sealing,
the sea being choppy and the wind fresh from the west-southwest. No seal life was
observed until the middle of the day, when one seal was noticed asleep not far from
the vessel, and so soundly that the flapping of the canvas did not disturb it. It was
captured. Its stomach was empty.
At 12.15 p. m. the weather began to show signs of moderating, and soon after-
wards the canoes were lowered in latitude 55° 3’ north, longitude 167° 45’ west, where
a number of seals were observed playing. The good weather was of short duration,
however, the canoes returning by 3.15 p. m., a heavy fog having settled over the
water. The white hunters did not come in until nearly dark, thus showing the dif-
ference between the two classes. The fog lifted in about an hour after the Indians
returned, but they could not be induced to go out again. In several instances where
Indians have become discouraged and wanted to return home, they have, in order to
accomplish their purpose, broken their spears and smashed their canoes, thereby break-
ing up the voyage. Previous to about two years ago there was no law in British
Columbia regulating the conduct of Indian hunters on sealing vessels, and the result
was that every possible advantage was taken of the situation. Under the law recently
passed Indians are now held accountable as much as white men for the success of the
voyage.
The boats containing the white hunters brought back 4 seals, making the total
number for the day 30, of which 14 were males and 16 females. The females were all
adults, and with milk; the males were small, from 3 to 4 years old. Only three stomachs
contained food. In one young male’s stomach was found a number of squid beaks; in
the stomach of a female, a piece of squid; and in another, material resembling partly
digested crustaceans.
The water through which we had passed was considerably discolored, and the
few seals taken were captured where crustaceans were the most abundant. In the
evening large flocks of guillemots, petrels, and auks were noticed, apparently feeding.
No small fish being noticed, it was supposed that the birds were feeding on minute
surface life.
On August 15 the weather was very pleasant, only light airs disturbing the water,
and a finer day for sealing could not be desired. By 5 a. m. all the boats had left the
vessel, not returning until about the same hour in the evening. A considerable numn-
ber of sleeping and traveling seals were in sight most of the day. Those that.were
traveling were not, so far as was observed, going in any one direction. Sometimes a
bunch of two or three would suddenly start toward the southeast, swim rapidly for a
few minutes, stop, and go in an opposite direction. Frequently four or five would
make a complete circle around the vessel at a distance of a quarter of a mile. Ina
few instances young seals came and played about, diving and swimming, etc.
An abundance of seals was seen from the vessel, but, as they occur in bands more
or less widely separated, it was not certain that the canoes and small boats would get
among them. All through the day whales and birds were numerous and the water
292, THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
was very much discolored, signs now looked upon as favorable indicatious for a suc-
cessful] day’s hunt.
At 4p. m. the boats began to return, and by 6 o’clock they had all arrived except
one. The day proved fairly successful, 99 seals having been taken—31 males and 68
females. Nine was the highest catch and 1 the lowest by a single boat or canoe.
They were by far the largest seals yet obtained, only 8 of the females being under 3
_years of age. All of the stomachs were examined, but only 10 of the number con-
tained food—some a small amount of liquid matter and others Alaskan pollock and
what appeared to be pieces of cod.
In the evening the wind began to freshen from the east-southeast, and later the
stars were visible for the first time since we had entered the sea. All through the
night the wind was fresh, causing a choppy sea by morning. During this time we
had worked 20 miles to the westward. A sharp lookout had been kept for the miss-
ing canoe, and a torchlight was displayed at frequent intervals.
No boats were lowered during the day, the conditions being unfavorable. The
wind did not blow hard at any time, but was strong enough to prevent the seals from
sleeping. In the afternoon we spoke the schooner Louis Olsen, which had taken 30
seals the day before. At4 p.m. we attempted to sound in latitude 55° 15’ north,
longitude 168° west, but got no bottom, although we were close to the edge of the
bank. Just before dark a young seal came alongside and began to play about the
vessel, first on one side and then on the other, affording great amusement to the
Indians. After a good many wild throws it was captured and proved to be a female.
On August 17 a fairly good day’s work was accomplished. Light airs prevailed
from southeast and east-southeast, with frequent calms. Light fog and showers
occurred several times during the day, but they were not heavy enough to prevent
seals from sleeping. Early in the morning a young seal came alongside and was
taken. At 6 a. m. all the canoes were lowered; after their departure no seals were
seen from the vessel. Early in the afternoon a canoe belonging to the schooner San
Jose boarded us and reported that vessel as having 530 skins, At 7.30 p. m. our
hunters returned, bringing 85 seals—28 males and 57 females. All of the females
were exceptionally large; the males were all young bachelors from 4 to 5 years old.
A careful examination was made of the stomachs, only 6 of which contained food. In
one stomach was found small pieces of squid; in the others small bones and pieces
of fish. The catch to-day was not very evenly distributed among the boats, the
highest bringing in 14 and four 1 each.
On August 18 the wind was from the southeast by south to south-southwest,
decreasing from a stiff to a gentle breeze. The sea was choppy in the morning, and
a Jong rolling swell prevailed in the afternoon. ‘lhe weather was foggy and variable,
all of which conditions were unfavorable for sealing. At noon there were signs of
clearing up, and shortly after that the canoes were lowered in latitude 55° 51’ north,
longitude 168° 32’ west. The Indians had no great desire to go out, and probably
would not have ventured had it not been that the schooner Willard Ainsworth was a
short distance away and had already lowered her boats. Five other vessels were also
in sight. At the end of three hours the hunters returned, having secured only 2 seals—
1 male and 1 female. Very few seals had been seen, the only “sleepers ” being the 2
that were captured. The others were traveling in various directions.
SEALS FOUND IN DISCOLORED WATER. 293
The next day, August 19, rain prevented seals from sleeping. At 8 a, m. the
canoes were lowered, but the weather did not give promise of satisfactory results, even
in case seals were plentiful, The canoes remained out only two hours, returning with
2 males and 2 females. Their stomachs, like those of yesterday, were empty. The
mate of our vessel while absent had boarded the schooner Florence M. Smith, and
learned that she had taken 546 seals, On the 15th she secured 160 seals; her position
on that day having been not far from where we hunted—latitude 55° 08’ north, longi-
tude 167° 40’ west. He was also told that our canoe which went astray on the 15th
had taken 12 seals, making our total catch for that day 111 skins.
Shortly after the boats returned a sleeping seal was observed close aboard, and
although it was raining hard it slept on, wholly unmindful of the weather. Such an
occurrence is very unusual, for it is seldom that seals rest well while it is raining,
unless they have become thoroughly exhausted by a long spell of rough weather.
Later in the afternoon a few traveling seals were seen; they frequently changed their
course, but the general direction of their movements was northwesterly. We had
been in discolored water all day, but late in the afternoon we suddenly jogged out of
it into clear water. The noon observation, latitude 54° 56’ north, longitude 168° west,
indicated that we were in a strong south-southwest current.
On August 20 a very satisfactory catch was made, the wind being a light breeze
from the westward, and the Sea smooth. A light fog hung low over the water at
times, occasionally clearing for the space of half to three-quarters of an hour, which
enabled the hunters to keep track of the vessel. The boats were lowered at 4.30 a. m.,
at which time seven other sealing vessels were in sight. During the afternoon we
frequently saw canoes lower their sails, indicating that they were among seals. We
could not tell to which vessel they belonged, as both boats and vessels were well
mixed up together.
One canoe returned early in the afternoon with 11 skins, and by 7 p. m. 111 seals
had been landed on deck, 44 being males and 67 females. Sixty-two of the latter were
nursing females. All the males were from 4 to 5 years old except 2, which were about
6 yearsold. Squid and pollock made up the bulk of the food found in their stomachs,
a few being gorged with it. In proportion to the number of seals taken, however,
only a few contained food. The squid and pollock were in a comparatively fresh state.
From the stomach of one male an eelpout was taken.
It is a fact worth mentioning that all the seals taken by us to-day were found in
“streaks” of discolored water from 1 to 3 miles wide, and extending nearly in a north
and south direction. The character of the water could hardly be accounted for by our
close proximity to the bank, for if such had been the case it would have been the same
allover. It had previously been noticed that these discolored bands ran parallel to
each other in northeast and southwest or northwest and southeast directions. Water
in this condition would not ordinarily be noticed from the deck of a steamer unless on
the lookout for it. The mate reported seeing an abundance of Alaskan pollock jump-
ing and many traveling seals in pursuit of them.
Most of the seals taken to-day were captured asleep, only four having been awake
when speared. The latter were “mooching.” :
In and about the neck of a male seal were found several shot wounds, with blood
oozing from them. Another seal had a bullet hole close to its rigat forward flipper.
294 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
On the morning of August 21 there was every indication of favorable sealing
weather. The sky was dark and cloudy, but the wind was light and the sea smooth.
The Indians went out at an early hour. Not long after their departure we spoke the
schooner Agnes McDonald, which had picked up our hunters who went astray on the
15th. The McDonald reported having 900 skins. Her white and Indian hunters were
equally divided as to numbers, and the former had taken between 40 and 50 more
seals than the latter.
The Indians of the Northwest coast have always been of the opinion that white
men could never become expert in the use of the spear, and this spring they ridiculed
the idea when told that white hunters were to be employed on a few vessels. If white
men will only exercise the same patience when hunting with spears as with shotguns,
they will soon become as proficient in its use as the Indians. Such a result would be
greatly to the advantage of captains and vessel owners, as the Indians have had the
opportunity heretofore of dictating their own terms.
At noon a heavy fog settled down, causing the boats to return; but fairly good
results were obtained, 69 seals being taken—12 males and 57 females. The males were
small, ranging in age from 2 to4 years. Forty-eight of the females were exceptionally
large, 4 medium in size, and 2 about 2 years old. The first mentioned were all with
milk, the others without. An examination of their stomach showed that they had
been feeding largely on squid, Alaskan pollock, and salmon, a considerable amount of
which could not have been in their stomachs more than a short time, as it was very
fresh in appearance.
The mate reported seeing, while hunting, a’small school of squid, but observed no
seals among them. The other white hunters noticed numerous small fish jumping, and
frequently seals in pursuit of them. The fish could not be approached near enough
to determine their species.
At the time of lowering the canoes a dead whale was seen to windward, about 14
miles distant. We kept in sight of it all day. In the evening, after the work of skin-
ning had been finished, a party of Indians went to it and brought back a quantity of
blubber. The head had been cut off. Numerous birds were hovering over the carcass
and many were feeding on it, but no seals were noticed near at hand.
On August 22 the boats were lowered at an early hour, the weather being similar
to that of the day before, with light and gentle winds from the westward. At the
time of lowering four other vessels were in sight, directly to windward. This, of
course, placed our boats in a bad position, as a windward berth is superior to all
others. When following in the wake of other boats only poor results are to be
expected, as the windward hunters disturb the sleeping seals.
At noon a hunter on the Agnes McDonald, who came on board, reported his vessel
as having 920 skins, the highest catch for one day haviug been 253, and the next
highest 180. The 253 seals were taken on the 15th, and not far from our position on
that date. The hunter informed the writer that on the day before he speared a large
male just as it came to the surface with a red rock-fish in its mouth. The fish was
alive, and as it was not at all mutilated it was taken on board and cooked. He also
stated that he speared a sleeping seal close to the floating carcass of a dead one.
Indians claim that seals will not remain where carcasses are floating, but this is not
always true, for on several occasions we had noticed seals among such objects.
\
LARGE CATCH OF SEALS. 295
At 4 p.m.a heavy fog set in, putting an end to further hunting for the day.
Forty-four seals composed the catch, 12 being males and 32 females. The males were
all young bachelors and all the females were in milk except 2. The stomachs of 33
were empty, 11 contained pieces of squid, salmon, pollock, and numerous fish bones.
In the evening we shaped our course to north-northeast, and during the night ran
25 miles in order to get near our position of the 21st. In the morning the weather
was unfit for sealing, and as the day advanced the chances grew less favorable.
At 10 a. m. we sounded in 90 fathoms, the first time we had been on soundings
since leaving Unalaska, At4p.m. our longitude by observation was 168° 05’ west,
latitude at noon 55° 28’ north, near where the 69 seals had been taken on the 21st.
In the evening we were boarded by officers from the revenue cutter Rush.
On August 24 the weather was too variable to entertain hopes of success at hunt-
ing. A heavy, wet fog in the morning, combined with a moderate breeze and choppy
sea, prevented an early start. At 7.30 a.m. a slight clearing caused the canoes to be
lowered.. The signal gun was kept firing at short intervals until 10 o’clock, when the
fog entirely cleared. The spell of good weather was of short duration, however, for
at noon a squall from the north brought all the hunters back. In the short time that
the boats were out 21 seals were taken. This was encouraging, for it indicated that
we were on good sealing ground. Most of the seals captured were restless, few being
sound asleep, or, in sealers’ parlance, they did not “lay up” well. The mate came
across two seals sleeping side by side, one of which was speared. Instead of the
other one becoming alarmed and diving, as is usuaily the case, it remained near its
struggling companion until the latter was hauled into the boat. The food found in
the stomachs of the seals to-day did not vary much from that recorded in those pre-
viously examined in this locality, namely, squid, squid beaks, salmon, pollock, and
fish bones. The males were comparatively large; the females were all adults and
with milk.
During the night we stood to the westward 50 miles, and then hove to.
The weather on August 25 prevented sealing, being cold with a fresh breeze from
north to north by east, accompanied by a rough sea. The vessel was hove to under
sealing canvass. Excellent observations were taken, it being the first time the sun
had remained out for any length of time since the cruise began. All day birds
had been numerous, and occasionally a sleeping seal was observed; sometimes two
and three were seen. together. This, combined with the great number of birds,
assured us that we were on good ground. We frequently wore ship in order to hold
our position. In the evening rain squalis passed over.
On the morning of August 26, the wind and sea having subsided, the canoes were
lowered in latitude 55° 15’ north, longitude 170° 53’ west. The weather was pleasant
but cool, the air being 2 degrees colder than the water. This difference, according to
the theory of many sealers, would cause seals to “lay low,” or, to put it in clearer
terms, they would sleep with less of their body exposed.
In view of the number of seals observed before the boats went out, a large catch
was anticipated, nor were we disappointed, for in the evening when the last canoe had
returned there were 157 seals on deck.
The opinions advanced to the effect that seals are more plentiful where birds occur
seem to be entitled to consideration, and it is very probable that had we not heeded
296 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
their presence yesterday, and had sailed by them, our catch’ to-day would not have
been large. Our captain had become thoroughly convinced of the value of these signs
after years of experience.
The canoes were all back at 6.30 p.m., having been absent over twelve hours.
In the forenoon seals were inclined to be restless, but occasional warm rays of sun in
the afternoon caused them to sleep soundly. It was noticed that a large portion of
to-day’s catch was speared either in the breast or back, close to the forward flippers,
indicating that the seals slept soundly, with their bodies largely exposed, which gave
the hunters an opportunity to strike the most vital part. Aside from the favorable
condition of the weather, the absence of other vessels from the ground materially
aided in increasing the day’s catch.
In only 12 stomachs was food found which could be identified, the others being
empty. In the full stomachs were observed squid, pollock, and one piece of salmon.
Fifty of the 62 males were 4 to 5 years old, the other 12 about 3 yearsold. Ninety-two
of the females were adults, and 2 under 3 years of age.
All through the night of the 26th and the morning of the 27th the weather was
calm, or nearly so. At daybreak a light fog hung over the water; in the middle of the
day it cleared away. On the strength of yesterday’s success the hunters went out at
an early hour. From the vessel scattering seals were observed all through the day.
The water was very much discolored, and whales and porpoises were abundant, but
there was a marked scarcity of birds as compared with yesterday. At noon a good
observation of the sun was taken, which placed us in latitude 55° 10’ north, longitude
170° 47’ west.
At 4 p. m. the hunters began to return, and at 7.30 o’clock the last one had
arrived. The catch nearly equaled that of yesterday, amounting to 146 seals, (8 being
males and 78 females. It will be seen by this that there are times when the sexes are
nearly equally distributed, but as a rule the majority of seals taken at sea are females.
Sixty of the 146 seals were opened; food was taken from 6 males and 14 females, con-
sisting of squid, pollock, aud a small quantity of fishbones. The stomachs of the,
females opened contained a greater quantity of food than the males. ‘Thus far, in the.
examination of stomachs, it had been noticed that those of the males contained much
less material than the females.
Most of the males caught to-day were very young, 3 and 4 years old; the females
were much larger. Seventy-four of the latter were in milk; those that were not were
from 2 to 3 years old.
On the morning of August 28 the weather looked favorable for a repetition of
the previous day’s work. The hunters were well clear of the vessel at 5.30 o'clock, at
which time another vessel and the smoke of a steamer could be seen low on the
horizon. In the middle of the day a canoe belonging to the schooner James G. Swan
came alongside and reported that vessel as having 860 skins. During the latter part
of the day the weather became threatening. The barometer had been falling rapidly
since noon, the wind had shifted from southwest to southeast, and no seals had been
observed from the vessel. At 6 p.m. the hunters returned, bringing 57 seals. Two
of the males were large, the others were all small.
As soon as the canoes and boats were hoisted in and secured for the night, a
single reef was put in the foresail and a reefed trysail set, and preparations made for
stormy weather, At dark the wind began to increase in force, and by midnight it was
PHENOMENAL CATCH OF SEALS. 297
blowing a moderate gale, which continued until the following noon. Occasional
heavy rain squalls passed over, which kept the sea down somewhat. In the evening
two sleeping seals were noticed, which was unusual under the circumstances.
In the morning of August 30 the wind had again increased to a moderate gale,
and since midnight had changed 2 points to the southward. The sea was very rough;
weather clear and sunny.
At 10 a. m. wore ship and lay to on the starboard under close-reefed sails. Both
in the forenoon and afternoon we saw scattering seals. They were seemingly not
bound in any particular direction, and most of them were playing. One Was observed
asleep.
We had been in comparatively clear water all day, but late in the afternoon
suddenly jogged into discolored water. At 5.30 p.m. the jib was set, and we stood
on a southeast by south course, so as to give the 60-mile limit a wide berth, the wind
and sea for the past twenty-four hours having carried us toward it. We worked to
the south and west all night. In the morning of August. 31 the wind and sea had
gone down considerably, and one vessel was in sight. At noon we were in latitude
55° 11’ north, longitude 170° 05’ west. We spoke the schooner Enterprise, of Victoria,
with 1,387 skins on board. She reported the schooner Libbie, with 1,040 skins, and
the Carlotta Cox, with 600. The last-named vessel carried only 6 boats, and white
hunters, which speaks well in their favor as seal hunters with spears.
Shortly after meridian we passed several sleeping seals, but the condition of the
weather prevented the hunters from going out. About two hours later several more
were seen, and at 4’ p.m. we came across a bunch of “sleepers.” At this time the
weather showed signs of clearing, and 7 canoes were lowered, but they were out only
a short time when the weather again became threatening. Eleven seals was the
result of this short trial, 5 being males and 6 females. They were all very small and
only one contained food. Four of the females were without milk.
Through the day we had been in markedly discoloréd water, and the other
indications were favorable to the presence of a considerable body of seals on this
ground, which turned out to be the fact, as proved by the results of the hunting on
the following day.
The wind had been moderate all through the night, and in the morning of
September 1 a light air was moving from the southwest, the sea being smooth. The
sky was cloudy and the air cool, but as the day advanced it grew warmer. Whales
could be heard blowing through the night, and at daylight a number were seen close
by; also immense flocks of birds. At 5.30 a. m. the hunters started under very
favorable conditions, the sea being smooth and nothing in the atmosphere indicative
of achange. The wind being very light, the vessel remained in one position most of
the day. Numerous seals were observed, both awake and asleep. The former were
moving only slowly, seldom going over 100 yards, and spending most of the time in
finning, rolling, and scratching themselves. In the afternoon we were boarded by the
revenue cutter Rush. At 5.30 p. m. the canoes began to return, each one bringing a
good catch, the largest amounting to 25 seals, the smallest to 11. The total catch was
336. This was a phenomenal day’s work, affording the greatest number of seals ever
taken in Bering Sea in one day, except that the schooner Sapphire in 1894 captured
about 400 in the same length of time. There were 120 males and 216 females. The
stomachs of those opened showed a remarkable scarcity of food. The materia] from 8
298 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
males and 10 females was all that was in suitable condition to identify, and consisted
chiefly of squid; although pollock and what looked like cod made up a portion of the
food preserved. Taking into consideration the amount of surface life observed from
day to day, it has appeared remarkable that so few seals should have food in their
stomachs.
To-day both Indian and white hunters reported numerous seals, finning, rolling,
and asleep. In the early part of the day they were inclined to be restless, but in the
afternoon the warm sun caused them to sleep soundly, and so plentiful were they
that sometimes it was a hard matter to decide which one to spear first. Of course,
where seals sleep so near together, those in close proximity to the one speared are
liable to be disturbed, but there were enough others in the near vicinity to keep the
hunters busy without paying much attention to the disturbed ones. They were
reported as lying about like logs, as far as the eye could reach. The hunters claimed
that in all their experience they had never before beheld anything like the sight
presented. Small schools of squid, pollock, and other fish were plentiful. One of
the white hunters reported seeing several Atka mackerel, and from the description
given it is possible he was correct. The day had been a perfect one for sealing, and
no other vessels were on the ground.
During the night we jogged to the southwest 14 miles. In the morning of
September 2 the hunters were out at an early hour, weather being clear and pleasant,
the sea smooth, and the wind light from northeast by north. At 10 a. m. two of
the canoes returned, the hunters claiming that the air was too raw and chilly for
the seals to sleep well, there being 2 degrees difference between the air and water.
Only a few scattering seals had been seen, and they were rolling and finning. It was
not long before all the canoes returned, bringing altogether 10 seals—6 males and 4
females. Three of the latter were nursing females. Their stomachs were compara-
tively empty, what little food they contained being of the same character as on the
previous day, namely, squid.
At 4p. m. an observation of the sun placed us in latitude 55°22/ north, longitude
170°36’ west. At this time we saw several patches of seaweed in which seals were
finning and playing. We spoke the schooner Enterprise and learned that she had
captured 236 seals on the 1st, about 12 miles south of our position. We were also
informed that a number of other vessels had been very successful, which would
indicate that the seals covered a considerable area on that day and were not wholly
confined to our immediate vicinity.
September 3 was cold and cloudy, the wind being northeast and fresh, the sea
short and choppy. A few “mooching” and finning seals were occasionally seen; no
travelers were observed. At 5 p.m. we spoke the schooner Ainoko, which had taken
750 skins. For the past week she had been cruising in the vicinity of Akutan Pass,
but had not found seals abundant enough to remain on that ground. Last season
good catches were made there. She was now bound to the westward in search of a
large body of seals which had been reported a few days previous by the revenue cutter
Grant.
We continued to jog to the northward for about 20 miles and then hove to. All the
afternoon scattering seals had been observed, most of them in our wake. They would
follow the vessel for a half hour at a time, seemingly through curiosity. At times
during the night seals could be heard playing arouud us. In the morning several
bunches were noticed close by, a few playing, but the majority going in a northwest-
STOMACHS OF SEALS EMPTY. 299
erly direction. In the early part of the day the barometer began to fall, the weather
became threatening, with the wind east and sea rough. At 10 a.m. wore ship and
jogged to the southeast under snug canvas, wind a moderate gale from the east-north-
east. From daylight until dark more seal life had been observed from the vessel
than at any previous time since entering Bering Sea. Our attention was especially
attracted to the character of the water, which had the appearance of being filled with
minute surface life. Birds were numerous, and an occasional whale was in sight.
During the next three days stormy weather prevailed, the wind being east-north-
east and blowing from a moderate to a strong gale; the sea was heavy most of the
time. On the morning of the 7th the wind had subsided to a moderate breeze. During
this long spell of boisterous weather seals were frequently observed, some playing
and others traveling in a southwesterly direction. Birds were plentiful most of the
time. At noon on the 7th we were in latitude 56° 22’ north, longitude 171° 50’ west,
and it was quite evident that we had encountered a strong northwesterly current.
At 8 p. m. wore ship and stvod to the southeast so as to give the 60-mile zone a wide
berth. A vessel cruising near this line without getting an observation for several
days, and having no means of knowing the direction of the current, is very apt to be
from 30 to 40 miles out in her reckoning.
At 6a. in. on September 8 the hunters were making preparations to lower, the
sea being smooth and a light breeze blowing from the eastward; the weather was
cloudy. At 10a. m. the hunt was interrupted by a heavy, damp fog. Ten seals had
been obtained—7 males and 3 females. Five of the former were between 4 and 5
years old; the other two were very small, about 1 year old; the females were all nurs-
ing cows. The stomachs of these seals were nearly all empty. Only a few of the
hunters saw seals, and according to appearances there were but few in this locality.
Two of the boats rowed and sailed fully 15 miles each without encountering a single
one. Fish and other surface life were correspondingly scarce. As our position—lati-
tude 56° 35’ north, longitude 172° 20’ west—placed us very near the bank, the scarcity
of seals was surprising.
While a number of the canoes were waiting alongside to be hoisted on board a
small seal came up in our wake, apparently attracted by the blasts of the fog horn
and remaining unconscious of danger until one of the canoes had closely approached
it aud the spear had been poised for striking. It was captured.
: At 3 p.m. we made all sail and stood to the southeast. Shortly after this the
fog lifted for a.short time and an observation of the sun was taken, placing us in
latitude 56° 32’ north, longitude 172° 45’ west. :
The next morning we had made 50 miles in a southeast direction; the weather
was pleasant, the sea smooth, and the sky periodically clear. A few seals were
noticed early in the day. At 9 a. m. the presence of 3 seals, supposed to be sleeping,
prompted two hunters to launch their canoes, but they dived just as the spears were
being thrown. The appearance of seals, however, acted as an incentive for all the
canoes to go out, but they soon returned in consequence of fog. Nine seals only were
obtained, 4 being males and 5 females. Although fish were reported jumping, nothing
was found in the stomachs of these specimens.
In the night we had worked to the east-southeast, and in the morning we were in
latitude 55° 50’ north, longitude 171° 49’ west. At 5 a.m.a sleeping seal was speared
close to the vessel; its stomach was well filled with food, consisting apparently of
Alaskan pollock. At this hour the weather was very foggy and the Indians were not
300 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
inclined to start. Presently, however, the fog lifted somewhat and several more seals
were seen. A signal guu could now be heard, indicating that a sealing vessel was
near and that her boats were out. This circumstance stimulated the hunters to action,
and in a short time the canoes were hoisted out. As the fog cleared, birds, whales,
and porpoises could be seen to the northwest, and also flocks of petrel on the water
close by. The season being now well advanced, the hunters were expected to take
advantage of every opportunity, and, moreover, on the strength of their previous good
success, they were quite eager to add a few more skins to the number on board. The
weather could no longer be trusted for any length of time, and that proved to be the
case on this day. At 11 a.m. the fog became so dense that the captain was as anxious
to get the hunters back as they were to return. Seventeen seals composed the catch,
5 being males and 12 females. Eleven of the females were nursing cows, and the
males were all young. One canoe obtained 5 of the number, all of which were asleep
and separated just far enough so the noise made in capturing one did not disturb the
others. A considerable number of “rollers” and “finners” was noticed, but the
damp fog seemed to prevent them from sleeping. Had the day been warm it is
probable that a good catch would have been secured.
In proportion to the number of seals taken, a greater amount of food was found in
their stomachs than on any previous occasion. Squid and pollock, mixed with crusta-
ceans, composed the greater part of the material identified. Squid beaks were very
conspicuous in every stomach in which food was found. As in previous cases the
stomachs of the females were much better filled than those of the males.
The second mate while out hunting had boarded the schooner Triwmph, whose
gun had been heard earlier in the day. She reported having 1,800 skins. The day
before she took 20 skins 30 miles to the eastward of our present position. For the
past few days she had been gradually working to the westward, but only a few scat-
tered seals had been noticed. To-day her hunters brought in 42 skins. Captain Cox
expressed the opinion that if good weather should prevail for a few days encouraging
results would follow, as there was every indication that seals were plentiful on this
ground. The elements were against us, however, and for the next four days the
weather was rough and boisterous.
On September 11 the wind blew a very fresh breeze, varying in direction from
south by east to southwest, accompanied by a rough sea. No seals were seen, but
many birds were about. During the night of the 11th and the morning of the 12th
the wind increased in force and hauled to the westward. The sky was filled with
heavy clouds, the air was raw and chilly. Occasionally we wore ship to hold our
position. Scattering petrels and other sea birds were frequently seen, but only one
seal was sighted during the day. At sundown the barometer began to rise. In the
evening the sky cleared and the stars came out, but the sea continued heavy and was
accompanied by a flying scud.
On September 13 the wind varied in force from a light to a stiff breeze, with
changeable weather, rain, mist, fog, and rough sea, occasionally clearing. Birds were
plentiful, one of which was seen to dive close to the vessel and bring up a fish about
10 inches loug. In the afternoon 3 seals were observed sleeping side by side, the
vessel almost running over them before they awoke. They must have been much
exhausted from loss of sleep in the recent gale.
In the morning of September 14 the wind had again increased to a moderate gale.
The weather was foggy and misty at times, with a heavy, rough, and tumbling sea.
¥
ABUNDANCE OF MARINE LIFE. 301
Two seals were observed in the forenoon. Near noon we ran into an area of discolored
water, in latitude 55° 20’ north, longitude 171° 25’ west, in which were a number of
seals. Notwithstanding the very rough condition of the sea and the moderate gale
prevailing, several of them were asleep. Their bodies were but little exposed, and it
was only when we were quite near them that they could be made out. The gale
finally broke, and in the morning of September 15 only a light variable air was
moving. The sea had also gradually gone down with the wind. At 7.30 a. m. several
seals were observed and the canoes were lowered. Two sleepers were captured a
short distance from the vessel. At 11a. m., however, a heavy fog and mist settled
down, accompanied by a cold wind from the northwest, which had the effect of bring-
ing back the hunters, all of whom were on board at 1.30 o’clock, having captured 24
seals—16 males and 8 females. Pieces of squid were found in the stomachs of some of
them. Fourteen of the males were very small, and 2 between 4 and 5 years old. The
females were larger, 5 being with milk. The hunters reported seeing a large number
of seals rolling and finning.
Numerous birds and a great many whales were in sight allday. At noon we were
in latitude 55° 10’ north, longitude 170° 06’ west, which was not far from the position
where we had taken 157 seals on August 26 and 146 on August 27. The color of the
water varied but little on these dates, the strips of discoloration also running in
the same general direction. It would appear as though these bands of discolored
water were governed chietly by the currents, being but little affected by the wind.
Late in the day the fog gave way to occasional rain squalls. Birds were exceedingly
abundant, and we frequently sighted scattered seals, the most of which were playing.
In the evening several hail squalls passed over, after which the sky cleared.
Preparations were made to lower the canoes on the following morning, but the
work was interrupted by the sudden breezing up of the wind from the westward. In
the afternoon the clear weather suddenly changed to mist and rain, with an occasional
squall. Only 2 seals were seen, 1 asleep and the other playing. A canoe was lowered
for the “sleeper,” but it was lost sight of in the choppy.sea. Whales and birds were
plentiful all day, and in some places immense flocks of petrel were sitting on the water.
They were evidently feeding on small marine organisms, for as soon as we had jogged
past they would settle down in the same spot from where they had been frightened.
Early in the evening a sealing vessel passed to windward with her flag set,
indicating that she was homeward bound. The sight of this vessel put the Indians in
high glee, for the season was now getting late and they were anxious to go home.
On September 17 the weather was a repetition of that of the previous day. In the
early part of the day we saw 9 seals circling around in various directions and '
occasionally rolling and finning. Observing this number of seals from the vessel with
a choppy sea running was a good indication that under better conditions they would
be found plentiful. At noon the weather showed signs of moderating, but the Indians
could not be induced to venture out on account of a few squally looking clouds low on
the horizon. At 2 p.m. two white hunters started out, but after a two hours’ hunt
they returned empty handed. Only 4 seals had been seen, 3 finning and 1 asleep.
At the time the boat left the vessel the water was comparatively clear, but about 3
miles to the northwest it came into very much discolored water, in which birds were
plentiful and a few fish were seen jumping.
Early in the following morning, September 18, the canoes were lowered, the wind
being light from the southeast and the sea smooth, The barometer indicated no
302. THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
change, but in a short time the wind began to increase. No seals were observed
either by the small boats or from the vessel during the day.
On September 19 the weather was similar to that of the previous ‘day. Four seals
were seen, 2 asleep, the others traveling to the north-northeast. The former did not
awake until the swash of the water from our bow struck them. In the evening we
headed for Unimak Pass. As the season was now late, it was thought inadvisable to
remain longer in the sea. The condition for the last ten days had convinced the
captain that little, if any, more sealing weather could be expected.
The next morning we sighted the schooner San Jose, which had made a catch of
600 skins. Her captain came on board and reported that until recently he had been
hunting northwest of the Pribilof Islands. In that region seals were abundant, but
the weather had been too stormy to operate. On September 13, in latitude 58° 30’
north, longitude 172° 30’ west, several hundred seals had been observed, but the sea
was too rough for lowering the boats. In the latter part of August the San Jose had
hunted near Unimak Pass, but few seals were found there.
At 10a. m., the wind being light, 8 of the canoes were put over, but at 2 p.m. a
dense fog settled down. Ten seals were secured, 4 males and 6 females. They were
all small and their stomachs were empty. On this ground birds were plentiful and
one orca was observed. At 2.45 p. m. we continued on our course, and at 6 p.m. Cape
Cheerful bore abeam about 15 miles. The next day we were off the northern entrance
of Unimak Pass, four other sealers being in sight. In the evening we cleared the
southern entrance of the pass and shaped a course for Cape Flattery. On the morning
of October 8 we anchored off Ucleuet, an Indian village, situated on the north side of
Barclay Sound, Vancouver Island, where most of our Indians belonged. We reached
Victoria on October 8, having been twenty days on the passage home.
OBSERVING SEALS.
In sealing weather hunters do not wait until seals have been seen from the vessel
before lowering the boats. They start out as early as possible and search for them,
as otherwise the catch of the entire: fleet would be small. Very often, when no seals
are observed from the vessel’s deck, the boats will be among bunches of them. only a
mile or two away, and, on the other hand, it sometimes happens that wheu scattered
seals are noticed from the deck the boats may be cruising over barren ground. Asa
rule, however, the number observed from the vessel is small as compared with the
number sighted from the boats. A vessel while jogging will naturally frighten a
great many which lie in her path; the flapping of the canvas and the creaking and
slatting of the booms arouse the sleepers long before they can be seen and give them
ample time to escape. In the early days of pelagic sealing the boats used to be
stationed at different distances and in different directions from the vessel and would
drift, waiting for seals to come near. This method, however, proving unremunerative,
it was given up, and the hunters began to cruise, whioli custom they have continued
to follow ever since.
MANNER OF COUNTING THE SEXES.
Considerable controversy has arisen from the accounts rendered by the sealing
captains regarding the proportion of male and female seals taken in the North Pacific
Ocean and Bering Sea. Previous to the time when sealing vessels were required to
enter the number of each sex taken in their official logs little thought was given to
this question, and it was always claimed that the two sexes occurred in almost equal
HOW RECORD OF SEALS IS KEPT. 303.
numbers, All sealers knew which sex predominated but clung to their original story,
and there was no one who could controvert their assertions, although theré was every
reason to doubt them. An order from the United States Treasury Department
requiring the catch of all American sealers to be examined on their arrival in port was
the means of throwing considerable light on the subject, and the information gained
from this source fully established the fact of the great preponderance of females.
It has generally been supposed by most sealers, and the view is still held by
many, that if it were known that a greater number of females than males were taken
it would greatly affect and possibly restrict their privileges when the time came for a
readjustment of the pelagic regulations. The fact has generally been lost sight of
that the condition of the rookeries at the end of five years will have the most weight
in deciding the matter.
That pelagic sealers should pay little attention to the sexes of the seals taken was
but natural, as they had no object in determining which sex predominated; the
thought uppermost in their minds being to capture as many seals as possible.
No check is placed upon the official logs of the Canadian sealers by the custom-
house officials at Victoria, who accept such records as authentic. If the skins landed
at Victoria were subjected to the same rigid examination as those landed in United
States ports, little or no difference would be found in the proportion of each sex ‘rep-
resented in the catch by the vessels of the two countries. It seems strange that on
several occasions when American and Canadian sealers have hunted on the same
ground and in close proximity to each other, the catch of the former has always
been composed largely of females and the latter of males. There are days when
more males than females are taken, but such times are not frequent. It is only fair,
however, to state that a number of both American and Canadian sealing captains
have admitted the truth to the writer, and all United States hunters with whom he
has conversed admit that the majority of seals captured off Japan and around the
Sommander Islands are females.
During the season of 1894 the schooner Louis Olsen kept an account of the seals
taken off the coast of Japan, and it was found that out of 1,600 two-thirds were
females. In 1893 the schooner Brenda obtained 896 seals on the samé coast, fully
two-thirds of which were also females, according to the statement of one of her
hunters. In nearly every instance where the writer has spoken with hunters on this
subject they have admitted that in all waters where the northern seal herd is found,
with one exception, females largely predominate. This exception is the Fairweather
ground, where, a féw years previous to the beginning of the close season now in force,
most of the pelagic sealing was carried on during the month of May. On this ground,
as recorded by the writer in a previous report, is found a great number of large males,
and, according to the statement of all sealers and of others, it is now quite well estab-
lished that large breeding males frequent this ground in greater numbers than any
other known region.
It may be well to illustrate briefly a few of the conditions under which the record
of seals is kept. When seals are brought on board in small numbers it is very easy to °;
identify the sex, but when they arrive in large quantities, a hundred or more, it
requires considerable time to examine each one, and sealers have, to them, more impor-
tant duties to attend to. Ifoftens happens that the hunters are forced to return,on
304 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
account of bad weather or an approaching storm, at which times the safety of the
canoes and vessel is of more consequence than the determination of the character of
the catch. When the boats and canoes are being hoisted in, the officers and men are
stationed at either side of the vessel to do this work, as well as to keep the records,
and, as is to be expected, in the bustle arid excitement a very correct account of the
sexes is not given In many cases the seals are not examined at all. By the time the
last canoe is lashed on board the weather is rough and stormy and the hunters are
anxious to go below; and if it be dark the seals will be left until morning for skinning.
No further examination is made, and, right or wrong, the first account rendered is
accepted. The fact of the matter is that in only a few cases is the sex correctly
recorded.
Inaccuracies in this respect also result when the seals are skinned in the boats.
Upon arrival at the vessel the skins are at once thrown into the hold without exami-
nation, and nobody knows or cares whether they are male or female.
Although United States revenue cutters have the privilege of boarding vessels
and overhauling the catch made in Bering Sea, the conditions under which this work
is carried on, however zealous the officers may be, render it difficult for the sexes to be
separated, and they return to their ship little wiser than when they came.
CONDITIONS OF THE FEMALE SEALS TAKEN BY THE DORA SIEWERD.
Of the 982 female seals secured by this vessel, 882 were opened and examined by
the writer. Of this number 839 were found to be adults, and 668 were clearly in milk.
Many of the remaining 171 may also have been nursing females, which at the time of
their capture had not obtained sufficient nourishment to cause their milk glands to fill.
SEALS MADE SHY BY HUNTING.
Inquiry was made of several captains and hunters as to whether seals were as
easy to capture this year as last in Bering Sea. They all give it as their judgment
that seals were more difficult to approach this season than in 1894. Captain Cox, of
the schooner Sapphire, said he had noticed a marked difference in that respect, and
attributed it to the hunting that had been carried on. In many cases they appeared
to be unusually shy when there was no apparent cause for it.
FOOD OF SEALS.
The material which has been found in the stomachs of seals taken in different
parts of Bering Sea indicates that only a small percentage is composed of fish which
inhabit deep water. It is only reasonable to suppose, however, that when seals are
in shallow water they feed both on bottom fish and on those swimming near the
surface. A not uncommon component of their food is the red rockfish, which occurs
both in deep and shallow water and possibly also near the surface at times, which
would account for its being found in the stomachs of seals captured where the water
is 100 fathoms or more deep.
On August 22, 1895, in latitude 55° 04’ north, longitude 168° 35/ west, the head
of a macrurus was found in the stomach of a male seal. This group of fishes inhabits
considerable depths, and much speculation arose as to how it had been obtained by
the seal. It was subsequently learned, however, that the Albatross had been dredging
in deep water near our position from the 18th to the 22d, and during that time there
Z
DISADVANTAGES OF WHITE HUNTERS. 305
had been thrown overboard many rejected specimens, among which were a number of
macruri, which would be apt to float for some time at or near the surface if not molested.
It has been claimed that seals will not eat dead fish, but this is a mistake, for the
writer has seen them devour salmon that had been dead several days.
Surface fishes, and especially squid, seem to be the natural food of the seal. In
the stomachs that have been examived a variety of material was found, such as pieces
of Alaskan pollock, salmon, and other fishes, but it has also been observed that in
localities where squid are plentiful very little other food may be looked for. I am
informed by hunters that on the coast of Japan and off the Commander Islands squid
occur in great abundance, and that it is not an uncommon sight to see a half dozen or
more seals together feeding on the tentacles of octopus floating on the surface. Sealers
usually find squid plentiful off the island of Kadiak, and in that locality they have
often been found in large quantities in the stomachs of the seals.
WHITE HUNTERS AT A DISADVANTAGE,
The white hunters on the Dora Siewerd did not have the same opportunity ot
getting seals as the Indians for several reasons, one of which was that, as a rule, they
were the last to leave the vessel in the morning and the first to return at night. They
were expected to hoist out all the canoes, and in the evening to hoist them in again,
stow them away, and lash them. Indians are useless in this kind of work, and.upon
their arrival alongside their duties have ended, as the skinning of the seals devolves
upon the steersmen.
The Indians, therefore, had every advantage in respect to hunting. On leaving
a vessel the boats nearly always form a line so that each will have a clear space to
windward. When all the boats start out together they are all on an equal footing;
but when one or two boats, as was the case with our white hunters, are obliged to
follow in the rear of others, their chance of seeing many seals is greatly lessened, for
they are hunting in water already passed over, but the situation improves as the boats
become more widely separated. Sometimes, also, a sudden change of wind favors the
last boats to go out and places them to windward, a coveted position which they could
not otherwise have secured, a windward position being always considered the best.
In perfectly calm weather one position is as good as another.
Record of the position of the vessel and of the catch of ‘fur seals each day by the sealing schooner Dora Siewerd
during a cruise in Bering Sea in August and September, 1895, showing also the number of each sex taken
daily as entered in the official log of the vessel.
1895. Lat. N. | Long. W.| Males. ats, Total. 1895. Lat. N. | Long. W.| Males. ae Total.
fo f
36 6 168 38 20 24 44
26 19 168 30 10 11 21
q 6 171 55 4 83 157
8 8 W145 68 18 146
14 6 170 43 28 29 57
18 55 170 10 5 1t
29 60 170 26 191 145 336
6 9 170 50 6 10
14 16 172 50 7 3 10
48 51 171 56 4 5 9
(a) (a) 171 45 5 12 17
3i 47 170 06 16 8 24
1 1 167 33 5 5 10
2 2
44 6h ULL. || Wetal. esses creme se cee eeeeeciess 756 809 1,577
26 43
aOn August 15 a canoe went astray, but afterwards returned, bringing in 12 skins, of which the sexes were not
determined. ;
5947—pTr 3——20
306 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Record of the catch of fur seals and of the number of each sex taken daily by the sealing schooner Dora Siewerd
during a cruise in Bering Sea in August and September, 1895, as determined by A. B. Alexander.
1895. Males. | Females.| Total. 1895. Males, | Females.} Total.
34 8 42 || Aug. 22 12 32 44
26 19 45 10 1. 21
6 7 13 62 95 157
8 8 16 68 78 146
13 7 20 14 43 57
18 55 73 6 11
10 79 89 || Sept. 120 216 336
3 12 15 2 4 10
14 16 30 7 3 10
31 68 99 4 5 9
(a) (a) 12 5 12 17
28 57 85 16 8 24
1 1 2 4 6 10
2 2
44 67 111 583 982 1,577
12 57 69
aOn August 15 twelve skins were taken, of which the sexes were not determined.
Approximate ages of the seals and the number of nursing females taken during the cruise of the sealing
schooner Dora Siewerd in Bering Sea in August and September, 1895, based upon examinations made by
A, B. Alexander.
Males. Females. bt esl Number Males. Females. ate ber Number
1895. | ber Mahe ing /Rotexam-|/ 1895. FO Nani ing *not exam-
i umber i
taken. | 48° | taken. | 48° ¢ |females| ed. taken.] 48 |taken. | 48° ¢ |females| ie¢-
Years. Years. Years. Years.
Aug. 1 3 5 5 ad. Aug. 20 35 4
21 3 3 2 9 5
10 Di | seeemacalsGiesceay 21 5 4
2 18 3 17 ad. 4 3
8 2 2 3 2
3 6 | 3to5 : att 22 12 4
4 5 4 4 ad. 24 10 5
3 5 4 2 26 50 | 4 tod
9 12 4 7 ad, 12 3
1 gl epee cren meee nae 27 65 | 3to4
10 1 6 55 ad. 3 | 4to5
8 Ce eee eisierimiae 28 14] 3t05
9 D). [aiwiats severe fred cicicicve’s BL 3 to 5
11 10 | 3to5 70 ad. Sept. 1 119] 3to4
stofe die torwin | iatain dra ya) 9 2 1 a)
12 2 4 9 ad. 2 61 4tod5
é 1 5 3 2 8 5; 4to5
14 12 3 16 ad. 2 1
2 el he5 sashes al 'Saigie sicaane 9 4| 2to3
15 27 5 60 BON Bb baccceendll - eeweelneavennn
4 4 8 2 10 5 | 2to4d
1G |o-ec222:|ecceeece 1 OMe seceewleioeseecn|f Wedel Semaanrie
17 20 4 57 ad. 15 14] 2to38
8 GF | sees eel| aasomers 2] 4tod
18 1 3 1 ad. 20 3 3
19 2 4 2 ad. 1 5
a All females above 2 years old are classed as adults, ‘‘ad.”’
XII—FUR-SEAL HUNTING IN THE SOUTHERN HEMISPHERE.’
By Dr. J. A. ALLEN.
Fur seals formerly existed in great numbers along portions of the southern coasts
of South America, South Africa, Australia, and New Zealand, on the outlying islands
off these coasts, and also on many of the pelagic.islands of the southern oceans. Seal
hunting for commercial purposes began here during the closing decades of the last.
century, and as early as the beginning of the presént century the industry had
assumed gigantic proportions. The skins at this time and fer many years after were
taken to the Canton market and exchanged for teas, silks, and other well-known prod-
ucts of the Chinese Empire. The price obtained for the skins was small in comparison
to their value in later years, usually ranging from 50 cents to $4 or $5 per skin, Yet
the sealing business proved immensely profitable, and led to an indiscriminate and
exterminating slaughter. One after another of the populous seal rookeries was vis-
ited and reduced to the verge of extermination, followed by new voyages of discovery
in search of new sealing grounds, which in turn were quickly despoiled. Every seal
that could be obtained was killed regardless of age or sex. The fur seals generally
selected for their homes barren, volcanic islands, situated in stormy seas, often inac-
cessible except to the most venturesome, skillful, and hardy seamen. The seals that
escaped the hunters usually owed their preservation to the inaccessibility of their
haunts.
Sealing first began in the southern hemisphere at the Falkland Islands about
1784, The immense far-seal rookeries at the islands of Mas-4-Fuera and Juan Fernan-
dez were first visited in 1793, where millions were taken during the next fifteen years.
In the year 1800 the South Georgian rookeries were attacked and speedily exhausted.
In 1801 the sealing fleet at this island numbered thirty vessels, while an equal number
of vessels were employed during the same year in sealing off the coast. of Chile. At
about this date sealing began on the Patagonian coast in the archipelago of Tierra .
del Fuego, at St. Marys Island, off the coast of Chile, and at the St. Felix group. In
1803 and 1804 voyages were made to the coast of Australia, Borders Island, and the
Antipodes. In 1804-1806 seal rookeries were discovered at the Crozet and Prince
Edward islands. In 1820 the immense wealth of seal life at the South Shetlands was
discovered and the seals nearly exterminated in a single season. At the Auckland
Islands sealing began to be vigorously prosecuted in 1822 and 1823. At these and
numerous less noted fur-seal resorts sealing has been intermittently prosecuted from
the date of their discovery till the present time, although of late years the catch has
been small, and in many instances the vessels have made losing voyages. . At ‘most
1 Reprinted from Proc, Fur Seal Arb., Appendix to U.S. Case, Vol. I, p. 365.
307
308 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
of the fur-seal resorts above mentioned there are now not enough seals left to make it
worth while to attempt to capture them. At all of them the slaughter has been
indiscriminate and to the highest degree improvident; since, if the killing had been
wisely regulated, tens of thousands of seals might have been taken annually at
each of a dozen to twenty of the larger rookeries without any undue decrease in the
seal population.
In contrast-to this may be cited not only the history of the seal rookeries in Bering
Sea, but those at Lobos Island, Auckland Island, and on the west coast of South
Africa, where the killing has been more or less stringently regulated by the several
governments to whose jurisdiction these seal rookeries pertain.
In the following pages a succinct general history is given of each of the principal
rookeries and fur-sealing grounds of the Southern hemisphere.
FALKLAND ISLANDS.
The first cargo of fur-seal skins obtained at the Falkland Islands, or probably
from anywhere south of the equator, appears to have been secured by the American
ship States, from Boston, about the year 1784. In 1792 several vessels obtained full
cargoes of fur-seal skins at these islands, and they were visited by one or more ves-
sels nearly every year as late as 1800, and subsequently at less frequent intervals till
the present time, as the Falkland fur seals were less abundant than at many of the
islands off the coast of Chile and elsewhere in the Southern seas. Yet the vessels
which first visited them seem to have found little difficulty in securing good cargoes
of fur-seal skins. Later the rookeries became nearly exterminated. According to the
affidavit of Capt. James W. Budington, a close season, lasting from October to April,
was established in 1881, but owing to the granting of licenses for killing during the
close season the ordinance was of little benefit to the seals. About 1886 the annual
catch varied from 50 to 500 skins. So far as our knowledge extends, there are still a
few fur seals left at these islands.
As supplementary of the foregoing account we may quote the following, taken
from Venning’s report,’ in the department of marine and fisheries for 1895. The
incident seems to us to need verification, which we are unable to obtain. There is no
good reason why the skins could not have been taken off the coast of California, and
their reported similarity to skins usually ‘secured by the British Columbian fleet”
suggests this. We give the account for what it is worth. Mr. Venning reports it as
follows:
Perhaps one of the most noteworthy incidents in the industry this year is the catch by the
schooner Director, in the North Atlantic Ocean, off Falkland Islands, of 620 seals.
Inquiries were instituted for the purpose of collecting any information in connection with the
incident which might be of interest to the question of the sealing industry generally.
It was ascertained that Capt. Frederick W. Gilbert, of the schooner Directer, 87 tons register,
with a crew of 25 men, sailed from Halifax, Nova Scotia, on the 20th of December, 1894, bound for the
Asiatic side of the North Pacific Ocean.
On reaching the tenth degree of south latitude, the master was obliged to change his course, by
reason of his supply of provisions and water being insufficient to enable him to complete his voyage.
The run from Halifax to the Falkland Islands was made in forty-eight days. While off the
southern end of the islands he encountered several groups of seals. He consequently devoted thirty-
six days to sealing in that neighborhood, as well as off the east and west end of Staten Island, result-
ing in the capture of 620 seals, which he took to the port of Victoria.
‘ Pamphlet entitled “The Bering Sea Question,” etc. Venning, 1895, p. 15.
MAS-A-FUERO AND JUAN FERNANDEZ. 309°
The captain reports that he was compelled to suspend his sealing operations, owing to a change
.. in the weather, which became quite stormy, and, as it was getting late in the season, he proceeded on
his voyage to Victoria, reaching there on May 21, 1895.
Captain Gilbert reported that allthe seals were secured at sea, far distant from any ‘of the seal-
ing preserves, and were shot in the same manner as are those taken in the North Pacific Ocean by the
Victoria sealing fleet. He met with no interference.
In reply to the inquiries made, it was ascertained that no record existed of the landing, in the
past, of any seal skins at a British Columbia port which did not form part of the catch of the sealers
operating in the North Pacific Ocean, either on the American or Asiatic sides thereof.
The skins are reported to have been in good condition, and to be of the same kind as those
usually sold by Messrs. Lampson & Co., London, and are classed and known with the Lobos Island
seal skins, from the mouth of the River Platte, and bring about the same prices as those taken in the
North Pacific Ocean.
The character of the skins is represented as being very similar to that of those usually secured
by the British Columbian fleet.
MAS-A-FUERO.
The island of Mas-4-Fuero, situated off the coast of Chile, in latitude 34° south
(about 400 miles west of Valparaiso), when first discovered, in 1563, swarmed with
fur seals. The islaud seems to have been first visited for fur seals by the ship Eliza,
Capt. William R. Stewart, of New York, in 1792. This vessel secured a cargo of
38,000 skins, which were taken to Canton and sold for $16,000. In 1798 Capt. Edward
Fanning, of the ship Betsey, from New York, took 100,000 seal skins to the Canton
market, nearly all of which were obtained at Mas-4-Fuero. He estimated at the time
of his leaving Mas-4-Fuero there were still left on the island between 500,000 and
700,000 seals.!
Capt. A. Delano, writing of the same subject, says:
When the Aniericans came to Mas-4-Fuero, about the year 1797, and began to make a business
of killing seals, there is no doubt but that there were 2,000,000 or 3,000,000 of them on the island. I
have made an estimate of more than 3,000,000 that have been carried to Canton from thence in the
space of seven years. I have carried more than 100,000 myself, and have been at the place when
there were the people of fourteen ships or vessels on the island at one time killing seals.”
It is therefore scarcely a matter of surprise that in 1807, according to Captain
Morrell,’ “The business was scarcely worth following. * * * In 1824 the island,
like its neighbor, Juan Fernandez, was almost entirely abandoned by these animals.”
In other words, the seals had become so nearly exterminated that there were not
enough left to render the pursuit of them profitable. In later years the island has
been visited at intervals by fur-seal hunters and small catches obtained. ‘As late as
1891 Capt. Frank M. Gaffuey states (affidavit) that on visiting the island for fur seals
he saw 300 or 400, and took 19, showing that a few are still to be found at Mas-4-Fuero.
JUAN FERNANDEZ.
The island of Juan Fernandez, situated a few miles to the eastward of Mas-4-Fuero,
was formerly the home of immense numbers of fur seals. Dampier, who visited this
island in 1683, says:
Seals swarm as thick about this Island of John Ferando as if they had no other place in the World
to live in; for there is not a Bay or Rock that one can get ashore on that is not full of them. * * *
These at John Ferando’s have fine, thick, short Furr; the like I have not taken notice of anywhere
1 Voyages, etc., pp. 117, 118. ‘Narr. Voy. and [rav., 1817, p. 306. ‘Voyages, etc., p. 130.
310 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
but in these Seas. Here are always thousands, I might say possibly millions of them, either sitting
on the Bays, or going and coming in the Sea round the Island; which is covered with them (as they
lye at the top of the Water playing and sunning themselves) for a mile or more from the shore. When
they come out of the Sea they bleat like Sheep for their young; and though they pass through
hundreds of others’ young ones before they come to their own, yet they will not suffer any of them to
suck. The young ones are like Puppies and lie much ashore; but when beaten by any of us, they, as
well as the old ones, will make toward the Sea, and swim very swift and. nimble; tho on shore they
lie very sluggishly, and will not go out of our way unless we beat them, but snap at us. A blow on
the nose soon kills them. Large ships might here load themselves with Seal Skins and Trayne Oyl,
for they are extraordinary fat.'
Seal hunting began at Juan Fernandez at the same time as Mas-4-Fuero, the two
islands being but a few miles apart and the fur seals frequenting them belonging to
the same herd. Owing to the early settlement of this island (it had a population of
3,000, according to Delano, in the year 1800) the seals probably found the island an
uncongenial resort almost before the sealing business fairly began, as Delano, writing
in 1800, says there were not then any seals on any part of it.? Subsequently the
island appears to have been visited at intervals by sealers in search of fur seals, but
always with poor success. Although not yet extinct there (see affidavit of Capt.
Frank M. Gaffney, who reports seeing a few fur seals there in December, 1891), the
number left is too small to possess any commercial importance.
GALAPAGOS ISLANDS.? \
The Galapagos Islands, situated under the equator, about 600 miles west of
Ecuador, are the home of fur seals, which probably belong to a different species from
that formerly so abundant farther south. The Galapagos seals reside at the islands
throughout the year. They are said to breed in caves and to bring forth their young at
1A New Voyage Round the World, etc., 1697, pp. 89, 90.
2 Voyages and Travels, etc., 1817, p. 313.
3 The following facts regarding the cruise of the schooner Prosper during the summer of 1897 to
the Galapagos Islands were obtained by Mr. George A. Clark, secretary of the Fur Seal Commission,
in a recent interview with the captain of the vessel, William L. Noyes.
The captain said: ‘The group of islands, known as the Galapagos, from certain interesting turtles
found there, lie under the equator and in the region of the ninetieth degree of west longitude. They
are 600 miles off the shores of Ecuador, to which they belong, and were uninhabited until a penal
colony, now abandoned, was planted there. The climate is tempered by the cool currents of the ocean.
The shores are broken and precipitous, marked by cliffs. Parts of the surface reach an clevation of
3,000 and 4,000 feet. Ther are five islands of considerable size in the group and ten small ones.
“T sailed from San Francisco May 9, 1897, in the schooner Prosper, avessel of 23 tons register, owned
by George W. Kneass & Co., of San Francisco, and carrying a crew of five men. We arrived at Wen-
man Island, one of the Galapagos group, lying in 1° 20’ north latitude, July 17, and, landing, found
seals with their young already born. The breeding grounds occupied by the seals were rough bowlder
beaches. The animals did not haul inland to any great extent, and were not found upon the sandy
beaches. The seals were not very numerous. In the hope that more seals would appear later and in
order to let the pups grow, we left Wenman Island and sailed to the south of the equator.
“On a certain island in 8’ south we found more seals, and a number were killed which contained
unborn pups. This we found to be characteristic of the seals south of the equator. Some killed as
late as September were still bearing, and, I should judge, would not be delivered until some time in
October or November.
“In October we returned to Wenman Island, finding and taking a few seals, but none of the pups
we left in July. On another island I saw a single pup alone swimming in a little pool.
“The waters about the island were infested by sharks of the man-eating type. One of these we
killed while at anchor beside the vessel. Its stomach contained the flesh and bones of an adult seal,
ST, FELIX AND 8ST. AMBROSE ISLANDS. 311
all seasons. The supply here appears never to have been abundant. Delano, writing
in 1800, says: “These islands afford some seals of both the hair and fur kind, and [
think a vessel might procure several thousands of the two kinds upon the whole
cluster of islands, as all of them afford some.”! They were frequently visited later,
and Captain Fanning states? that in 1816 he obtained there 8,000 fur seals and 2,000
hair seals. Capt. Benjamin Morrell mentions taking a few fur seals at the south end
of Albemarle Island in November, 1825,? and doubtless many have been taken at the
Galapagos since that date. Capt. Charles W. Reed (affidavit) states that in 1872 he
took 3,000 fur seals at these islands, and about as many more during three subsequent
voyages between this date and 1880. In 1885 Captain Gaffuey (affidavit) obtained
1,000 fur seals there.
ST. FELIX, ST. AMBROSE, ST. MARYS ISLANDS, ETC.
Many of the small islands off the coast of Chile, from the Strait of Magellan north-
ward, were formerly inhabited by colonies of fur seals. Even before the annihilation
of the seal rookeries at Juan Fernandez and Mas-4-Fuero, these islands were visited
by sealers, from some of which they reaped rich harvests. Delano, writing in 1801,
I believe that the sharks must have eaten the pups we saw at the time of the first visit to the island
in July.
‘““We killed one seal which had a flipper bitten clean off, probably by a shark. In one case we
saw a bull seal lying on the surface of the water and a few feet under him were a number of hungry-
looking sharks. They did not seem inclined to attack him, but he evidently watched them closely.
“While the sharks were not seen to touch the living seals when uninjured, they on one occasion
attacked a wounded one which had succeeded in getting into the water and was endeavoring to escape.
They were probably incited by the taste of the blood. a
‘‘ The seals were often found in caves and under the great bowlders. In one cave to which there
was but a small opening I shot and dragged out three in succession, one appearing as soon as the other
was taken away. Inside the cave, which could not be entered, sounds from other seals could be heard.
“The seals were very tame and manifested no fear. We used the rifle in killing them, whether in
the water or on shore. In the water we got as close as possible, which was usually 6 or 8 feet. We
did not lose any of the seals shot in the water. A few killed on shore near the edge rolled off and
sank in deep water before we could get to them. We killed all we could find.
“The seals evidently do not migrate. They do not seem to have a definite rookery life, as on the
islands of the north. At one island we saw a number of yearlings and a score of old bulls lying about,
but apparently no cows. At another island a number of bulls seemed to be scouring the caves and
shores as if in search of cows.
“There is not the marked difference in size between the male and female that is characteristic of
the northern seals. A typical bull would be about 5 feet in length. The nose seemed shorter and
blunter. The fur is more uniformly dark shade. The throat and belly do not show the lighter colors
found in the northern seals. There is little or no difference in shade between the back and under
parts of the body except in rare cases which show a patch of lighter brown on the flank. The fur
seems everywhere shorter, and is particularly short on the belly, probably because the animal spends
so much of its time on land.
“We probably did not get all the seals, but there were few left. I visited the islands in 1879, at
which time there were more seals than in 1897. Our total catch numbered 224 skins, of which, accord-
ing to the examinations in the custom-house, 85 were males and 139 females.
.“In former years a great many skins were taken on the Galapagos Islands. One catch of 5,000 ©
was lost through imperfect curing. The catch of the Prosper was brought in in good condition, having
been dry-salted first and then kept in pickle until arrival in port, when they were again dry-salted,
“We left the Galapagos Islands on October 22 and reached San Francisco on December 14.”
' Voyages and Travels, p. 381.
2 Voyages, p. 410.
‘Narrative of Four Vee, etc., 1832, p. 221.
312 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
speaks of St. Felix and St. Ambrose islands as being visited by the sealers, the greater
part of the catch being taken from St. Felix, the larger island of the group.
In 1816 Capt. Edward Fanning took 14,000 fur-seal skins at St. Marys.? He also
speaks of having visited these islands in 1801 and finding there a small fleet of
American sealers, five ships and a schooner.’ While it is impossible to give even
approximate statistics of the catch, the aggregate number of seals taken must have
been large,
At some of these islands small remnants of the former herds still exist, as shown
by the affidavits of Capt. Frank M. Gaffney and George Fogel. The latter states that
in 1870 he saw at Chiklaway thousands of fur seals; in 1891, however, there were “no
seals worth mentioning.” In December, 1891, Captain Gaffney saw only two fur seals
at St. Felix and St. Ambrose islands, where formerly they were so abundant. At
Rees Islet (latitude 46° 45’ south, longitude 75° 45’ west) during a stay of two weeks
in December, 1891, he obtained one seal. He says, however, that they still breed
there, but that the Chilians go there and kill all they can obtain, as has been the
case for many years at other islands off the Chilean coast. Hence there is little oppor-
tunity for the recuperation of the seal herds.
TIERRA DEL FUEGO AND THE PATAGONIAN COASTS,
The group of islands south of Patagonia known as Tierra del Fuego, with which
may be here included the Diego Ramirez group, are celebrated for the number of sea
elephants and fur seals which they have yielded to commerce, as are also the coasts
and outlying islands of Patagonia. Without going into details as to the former
abundance of tur seals in this general region, it may suffice to show that at present
the species is practically extinct, at least in a commercial sense. Says Captain Bad-
dington (affidavit), great numbers were formerly taken on the east coast of Patagonia;
at the present time there are no seals there. There are not enough on the Patagonian
coast to pay for hunting them. He says that in 1881 he took 600 fur seals on the
western coast, at Pictou Landing. In 1889 he again visited this coast and obtained
only four skins,
At Tierra del Fuego and tie adjacent islands he took 5,000 skins during the
season of 1879-80; in 1891-92 he obtained only 900, and these came from another
part of the coast. Formerly thousands of skins were taken there, “but the animals
are practically extinct there to-day.”
Mr. George Comer states (affidavit) that he spent the years 1879 to 1882 about
Tierra del Fuego and the coasts of Patagonia and Chile, on a three years’ sealing
cruise. During these three years, he says, “‘our catch was 4,000 seals, 2,000 of which
were taken the first year, and we practically cleaned the rookeries out.”
The testimony of Capt. Caleb Lindahl (affidavit), a sealer of long experience, is
to the same effect. He states that in October, 1891, he went on a sealing cruise to the
South Seas, starting in sealing off the coast of Patagonia and sealing there and in
~the neighboring seas till the following March. He says:
The seais are nearly all killed off down there, so that we got only about twenty skins. It is no
use for vessels to go there sealing any more. I was there twelve years ago on a sealing expedition
and the rookeries were full of seals. Now they are nearly all gone. They never gave the seals a
chance to breed there. They shot them as soon as they came up onthe rocks.
'Voyages and Travels, p. 354. 2 Voyages, ete., p. 411. ‘Tbid., p. 306.
LOBOS ISLAND AND SOUTH SHETLANDS. 313
The so-called “Cape Horn” catch, which presumably includes all of the fur seals
taken off the coasts of South America and the various outlying islands and archi-
pelagos to the southward, from 1876 to 1892, aggregates a total of about 113,000 skins,
varying in different years from about 17,500 in 1880 to less than 1,000 in 1886, but
averaging for the last ten years about 3,500 annually.
LOBOS ISLAND.
The fur-seal rookery on Lobos Island, off the mouth of the Rio de la Plata, and
belonging to the Republic of Uruguay, is one of the few that have escaped annihila-
tion at the hands of the seal hunter. Many fur seals were taken here prior to 1820.
Captain Morrell? found men stationed there to take seals in 1824, and Captain Wed-
dell,? writing in 1825, refers to Lobos Island as being farmed out by the Government of
Montevideo for sealing purposes, under regulations designed to prevent the extermina-
tion of the seals. As evidence that the matter has been long managed with discretion
may be cited the statistics given in the affidavits of Messrs. Emil Teichmann and
Alfred Fraser (of the firm of C.M. Lampson & Co., of London), which show that the
catch for the last twenty years has averaged about 13,000 a year, or a total of some
250,000 fur-seal skins. This throws into strong relief the folly of the exterminating
slaughter of fur seals that has been waged unremittingly for nearly a century
throughout the Southern seas.
SOUTH SHETLAND ISLANDS.
The South Shetlands constitute a numerous group of small islands situated about
300 miles south of Cape Horn. Sealing began here in 1819, when the American brig -
Hersilia, from Stonington, Conn., and an English vessel from Buenos Ayres obtained
cargoes of very fine fur-seal skins. News of the discovery of this new sealing ground
quickly spread, and before the end of the following year a fleet of 30 vessels (18
American, 10 English, and 2 Russian) had reached the South Shetlands to gather in
the valuable pelts of the hapless seals. Captain Weddell, writing in 1825, gives the
following account of slaughter which ensued.
The quantity of seals taken off theso islands by vessels from different parts during the years 1821
and 1822 may be computed at 320,000, and the quantity of sea-elephant oil at 940 tons. This valuable
animal, the fur seal, might, by a law similar to that which restrains the fishermen in the size of the
mesh of their nets, have been spared to render annually 100,000 fur seals for many years to come. This
would have followed from not killing the mothers until the young were able to take the water, and
even then only those which appeared to be old, together with a proportion of the males, thereby
diminishing their total number, but in slow progression. This system is practiced at the River Plata.
The island of Lobos, at the mouth of that river, contains a quantity of seals, and is farmed by the
Government of Montevideo, under certain restrictions, that the hunter shall take them only at stated
periods, in.order to prevent extermination. The system of extermination was practiced, however, at
the South Shetlands; for whenever, a seal reached the beach, of whatever denomination, he was
immediately killed and his skin taken, and by this means, at the end of the second year, the seals
became nearly extinct. The young, having lost their mothers when only three or four days old, of
course died, which at the lowest calculation exceeded 100,000.+
1 Affidavit of Emil Teichmann, of London firm of C.M. Lampson & Co.
2 Voyages, p. 154. 3lbid., p. 142. 4 Voyages, etc., pp.141, 142.
314 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
~The history of the South Shetland seal fishery, since this indiscriminate and
exterminating slaughter, is thus given by C. A. Williams in his report to a committee
of Congress on Merchant Marine and Fisheries, in 1888.
In 1872, fifty years after the slaughter at the Shetland Islands, the localities before mentioned
were all revisited by another generation of hunters, and in the sixteen years that have elapsed they
have searched every beach and gleaned every rock known to their predecessors and found a few
secluded and inhospitable places before unknown, and the net result of all their toil and daring for
the years scarcely amounted to 45,000 skins; and now not even a remnant remains save on the rocks
off the pitch of Cape Horn. The last vessel at South Shetland this year of 1888, after hunting all the
group, found only 35 skins, and the last, at Kerguelan Land, only 61, including pups. So in wretched
waste and wanton destruction has gone out forever from the southern seas a race of animals useful to
man and a possible industry connected with them. And it is plain, without the aid of the law to
guide and control, no other result could have been expected or attained.
The narrative is brought down to date by the following testimony from the
affidavit of Capt. James W. Budington:
The shores of these islands were once covered with seals, but there are practically none there
now. I don’t think 100 skins could be taken from there at the present time, while I have known of
one vessel taking 60,000 in a season.
He adds that in the season of 1871-72 six vessels took about 12,000 skins, and
that in 1873-74 a fleet of seven vessels took about 5,000. Up to 1880 from 100 to 200
were taken annually. Since 1880 the rookeries were not worked until 1888-89, when
Captain Budington took 39 skins, and 1891, 41 skins.
SOUTH GEORGIA ISLAND.
The island of South Georgia is situated about 300 miles east of Cape Horn, in
about latitude 55 degrees south. When the island was first discovered sea elephants
and fur seals were abundant on its shores. Capt. Edmund Fanning, of the American
corvette Aspasia, visited this island in 1800 and secured a cargo of 57,000 fur seals,
and states that 16 other vessels procured at the same island, between November,
1800, and February, 1801, 65,000 fur-seal skins, making a total of 112,000 skins taken
there in a single season.'! The slaughter continued during the succeeding years until
the supply of skins was exhausted, the total number of fur-seal skins taken here
during these early years being estimated by Captain Weddell at none less than
1,200,000. He also states, writing in 1822: ‘‘These animals are now almost extinct.”?
During many years following this period of slaughter the island was rarely molested
by sealers, but so few seals had been left alive that their increase was very slow.
Captain Morrell, in November, 1822, vainly searched its shores for several days for
fur seals.? Capt. James W. Budington states (affidavit) that on visiting the island in
1874 he took 1,450 skins, and that in 1875 five vessels secured 600; the next season
(1876) four vessels obtained 110. The island was not worked again till J anuary, 1892,
when Captain Budington took 135 fur-seal skins, ‘‘none, however, coming from the
old rookeries,” which had become practically exterminated long before. “The seals
of South George,” says Captain Budington, “are practically extinct.” +
Mr. George Comer, who visited the island in 1885 and 1886 as mate of a sealing
1Fanning, Voyages, p. 299. * Voyages, p. 53. 3 Voyages, p. 58.
‘See also affidavit of Alfred Fraser, of the firm of C. M. Lampson & Co., London.
TRISTAN DA CUNHA. 315
vessel, says (affidavit): ‘We heard reports of the number of seals formerly taken
there, but we did not get a seal; and saw only one.” He took three there, however,
in 1887,
SANDWICH LAND.
Early in the present century many fur seals were taken at Bouvette Island and
Sandwich Land, small islands a few hundred miles southwest of South Georgia, but
when visited by Captain Morrell in 1822 he found not a single fur seal at Sandwich
Land, and succeeded in procuring only about 200 at Bouvette Island.
According to Captain Budington (affidavit), in 1875-76 the southern island of
Sandwich Land was searched unsuccessfully for seals, but about 2,000 were taken
that season on the northern island, where also, in the season of 1876-77, six vessels
took about 4,000. The next year’s catch, however, did not exceed 100 skins. During
the season of 1880-81 the island was again visited, but no seals were taken. In 1891-92
about 400 were obtained and about 200 more were seen. Prior to 1871 the Sandwich
Land group of islands had not been worked for twenty-five or thirty years, during
which time the seals had greatly increased in numbers and had become very tame.
At first they were easily killed with clubs, but since 1880 it has been necessary to
shoot them. Old and young were killed indiscriminately, only young pups being left,
which were killed by buzzards or died of starvation. Captain Budington further adds
that “seals in the Antarctic regions are practically extinct, and I have given up the
business as unprofitable. The whole annual catch for seven vessels has not exceeded
2,600 skins for the last four years.”
TRISTAN DA CUNHA ISLANDS AND GOUGH ISLAND.
The Tristan group of islands, situated in the South Atlantic about midway
between South America and the Cape of Good Hope, was first visited for fur seals in
1790 by Captain Patten, of the American schooner Industry, of Philadelphia, who
secured 5,600 skins. Large numbers are said to have been subsequently obtained
there, probably from the smaller islands of the group, Inaccessible and Nightingale
islands. The latter is apparently still frequented by a few fur seals.
Gough Island, somewhat to the southward of the Tristan group, formerly
abounded with fur seals. Captain Morrell, writing in 1829, says:
This island used to abound with fur seal and sea elephants, but they were so much annoyed by
their relentless persecutors that they have sought more safe and distant retreats, perhaps some lonely
isles in the southern ocean as yet unknown to that fell destroyer, man. These places might be easily
found, however, if merchants were willing to risk the expense of the attempt.’
Fur seals appear to have survived at Gough Island, however, till the present
time. Mr. George Comer states (in his affidavit) that his vessel put six men on the
island in 1887, where they remained nine months, taking about forty to fifty skins.
He adds: “Years before the English had had the working of Gough Island and had
run the business out, so there were practically no seals there.”
PRINCE EDWARD AND CROZET ISLANDS.
The Prince Edward Islands are situated about 900 miles southeast of the Cape of
Good Hope. They formerly yielded a large supply of both fur seals and sea elephants.
1 Morrell’s Voyages, pp. 58, 59, and 66. 2 Voyages, p. 356.
316 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
About 1806 Capt. H. Fanning, in the American ship Catherine, of New York, obtained
a full cargo of fur seals at these islands, as did other vessels the same year. At that
time the islands were frequented by vast numbers of seals, but definite statistics
respecting the number taken are not available.'
The Crozet Islands are in the same latitude (about 46° south) as Prince Edward
Islands and Kerguelen Land, and about half way between these two groups. The
first sealer to visit them was Captain’ Fanning, in 1805; but, although he found an
abundance of fur seals there, he passed on to the Prince Edward group. Later both
sea elephants and fur seals were taken in large numbers, seal hunting being carried
on here for many years. At Possession Island, the largest of the group, Capt. Linde-
say Brine, R. N., refers to finding, in 1876, “hundreds of seals, which were resting on
the damp grass bordering on the stream which at this point enters the sea.”?
In 1887, according to George Comer (see his affidavit), a sealing party was left by
him on these islands for five months, but they took only three seals. The English at
Cape Town, says Mr. Comer, had recommended us to go there because, they said, that
‘formerly they had taken a great number of skins there.”
KERGUELEN LAND.
This large island, also known as Desolation Island, which lies in the southern
Indian Ocean, in about latitude 49° south and in about longitude 69° east, has long been
celebrated for the great numbers of sea elephants taken there. It has also furnished
a small supply of fur seals. Sealing began here as early as 1830, and has continued
till the present time, mainly for sea elephants. Mr. H. M. Moseley, of the Challenger
expedition, states that in January, 1874, two of the whaling schooners then at the
island “killed over 70 fur seals on one day and upwards of 20 on another at some
small islands off Howes Foreland. It is a pity,” he adds, “that some discretion is
not exercised in killing the animals. * * * The sealers in Kerguelen Land kill all
they can find.”? ,
Respecting its still more recent history, the following may be cited from the affi-
davit of Mr. George Comer, who spent five months there in the winter of 1883 and
1884, obtaining six seals. He says further: “About 1850 this island was visited by
an American who practically cleaned off the seals. The captain I shipped ‘with—
Joseph Fuller—visited the island in 1880 and took 3,000 seals—practically all there
were—and this was the increase for thirty years from 1850.” Heard Island, about
300 miles south of Kerguelen Land, which has been a noted -hunting ground for sea
elephants, appears to have never been much of a fur-seal resort.
BORDERS ISLAND, ANTIPODES ISLANDS, BOUNTY ISLANDS, AUCKLAND ISLANDS, ETC,
About the beginning of the present century the occurrence of fur and hair seals
in considerable numbers along the southwestern coast of Australia and in the vicinity
of Tasmania and New Zealand was made known by Cook, Bass, Flinders, Anson,
Peron, Koss, and other early navigators. A little later, stimulated by these reports,
'Fanning’s Voyages, pp. 336 and 338. ‘Notes by a naturalist on the Challenger, p. 189.
2 Geogr. Mag., 1877, p. 267.
MACQUARIE AND AUCKLAND ISLANDS. 317
the adventurous sealers discovered an apparently almost inexhaustible supply of these
animals on the numerous small islands off the southeastern coast of New Zealand.
Borders Island was discovered by Captain Pendleton, of the American brig Union,
of New York, in 1802. Although he reached here toward the end of the sealing sea-
son, he secured some 14,000 fur-seal skins. He also visited Antipodes Islands, where
he left a crew of men to take seals and await the return of the vessel from Sydney,
New South Wales, which, however, was lost on a subsequent cruise to the Fiji Islands.
On the receipt of this sad news at Sydney, “Mr. Lord chartered a ship and proceeded
with her to the island of Antipodes. At this place the officers and crew whom Cap-
tain Pendleton had left there had taken and cured rising of 60,000 prime fur-seal
skins, a parcel of very superior quality.”!
Polack states that Macquarie Island was discovered by a sealing master in 1811,
who procured there are a cargo of 80,000 seal skins.’
Mr. A. W. Scott states, on information furnished by a professional sealer named
Morris:
In New South Wales the sealing trade was at its height from 1810 to 1820; the first systematic
promoters of which were the Sydney firms of Cable, Lord & Underwood, Riley & Jones, Birne, Hoak
& Campbell. * * * Toso great anextent was this indiscriminate killing carried that in two years
(1814-15) no less than 400,000 skins were obtained from Penantepod, or Antipodes Islands alone, and
necessarily collected in so hasty « manner that many of them were imperfectly cured. The ship
Pegassus took home 100,000 of these in bulk, and on her arrival in London the skins, having heated
during the voyage, had to be dug out of the hold, and were sold as manure, a sad and reckless waste
of life.*
According to other authorities, the New Zealand sealing industry ceased to be a
paying investment prior to 1863.
Respecting the Auckland Islands, Morrell says:
In the year 1823 Capt. Robert Johnson, in the schooner Henry, of New York, took from thie island
and the surrounding islets about 13,000 of as good fur-seal skins as were ever brought to the New
York market. * * * Although the Auckland Isles once abounded with numerous herds of fur and
hair seals, the American and English seamen engaged in this business have made such clean work of
it as scarcely to leave a breed; at all events, there was not one fur seal to be found on the 4th of Jan-
uary, 1830.4 ;
Early in the present century many fur and hair seals were taken from Bounty
Isles, near the southern end of New Zealand; from the Snares and the Traps, from
Stewarts, Chatham, and Campbells islands, and also from other islands to the south-
ward of New Zealand; but at most of these points they appear to have become very
soon practically exterminated. A few survived the general slaughter, and in recent
years, under the protection of the government of the colony of New Zealand, have so
far increased that there have been of late years a small annual catch of fur seals in
the New Zealand waters, amounting to from 1,000 to 2,000 per year.°
1 Fanning, Voyages, etc., p. 326. ‘Morrell, Voyages, p. 363.
2Polack, New Zealand, II, p. 376. 5 Affidavit of Emil Teichmann.
°Scott, Mammalia, Recent and Extinct, Pinnata, pp. 18, 19.
318 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
ST. PAUL AND AMSTERDAM ISLANDS.
These is'ands are situated in the southern Indian Ocean (about latitude 38° south,
longitude 77° 35/ east) midway between the Cape of Good Hope and Australia; were
first visited by Capt. Henry Cox in May, 1789. He says:
On first landing we found the shores covered with such a multitude of seals that we were obliged
to disperse them before we got out of the boat. * * * We procured here a thousand skins of
very superior quality, while we remained on the island of Amsterdam, besides several casks of good
oil for our binnacles and other purposes.! 4
Lord Macartney, who touched at Amsterdam in 1773, found five men here col-
lecting seal skins for the Canton market. He says of the seals:
In the summer months they come ashore, sometimes in droves of 800 or 1,000 at a time, out of
which 100 are destroyed, that number being as many as five men can skin and peg down to dry in the
course of aday. * * * Most of those which come ashore are females, on the proportion of more
than thirty to one male.?
I find no definite reference to sealing at these islands in later years, but it is prob-
able they were not overlooked by the enterprising sealers who, during the next fifty
years, explored every nook and corner of the southern seas in search of prey. Scores
of voyages are simply credited, in Mr. A. Howard Clarke’s statistical history of fur
sealing (already cited ), however, simply to the “Southern Seas.” M. Charles Vélain,
who visited these islands in 1874 with the French Transit of Venus Expedition,
reports that they were at that date still visited by considerable herds of fur seals.
WEST COAST OF SOUTH AFRICA AND ADJACENT ISLANDS.
As early as the year 1790 sealing voyages were made to the west coast of South
Africa, and a greater or less number of fur seals appear to have been taken there at
intervals from that time till the present. In October and November, 1828, Capt. Ben-
jamin Morrell cruised along the west coast from Cape of Good Hope to Walfish Bay,
in about 23° south, searching for seals. From his narrative it appears that he first
met with them at a small island in latitude 31° 32’ south, about half a mile off the
coast.*
At Ichaboe Island, 8 leagues north of Angra Pequena, he found great numbers
of fur seals, and “took about a thousand of their skins in a few days.” He speaks of
the island as the resort of ‘multitudes of fur seals;> as many fur-seal skins here as
was practicable.” He passed on a few leagues farther to Mercury Island (latitude
25° 42’ south, longitude 14° 58’ east), where he took about a thousand fur-seal skins.
At Bird Island, about 1 degree farther north, he obtained “the skins of 1,400 fur seals
at one time, although the landing was very bad.”* “As the season (November) was
not sufficiently advanced for the seals to come up in their usual numbers on the islands
and rocks” south of Walfish Bay, he made an excursion into the interior and again vis-
ited these islands about the end of December. He then took a few seals from Bird
1Cox Voy. to Teneriffe, Amsterdam, etc., p. 10.
Sir G. Staunton, Account of an Embassy from the King of Great Britain to the Emperor of China,
I, p. 210. :
3Cf. J. W. Clark, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1875, p. 653. *Ibid., p. 294,
‘Morrell, Voyages. ‘Thid., pp. 295, 296.
COAST OF AFRICA. 319
Island, and made an attack upon those on Mercury Island. “The rush of my little
party,” he says, “was simultaneous; every nerve and muscle was exerted, and we
reached the opposite side of the rookery, killing several seals on our way, when we
found that the other party, under command of Mr. Burton, had been stopped in ‘ mid-
course’ about the center of the rookery by the immense number of seals that began to
pour down the steep rocks and precipices like an irresistible torrent, bearing down
their assailants, and taking several men nearly into the sea with them. * * *
Several hundred fur seals were left lifeless on the shore and rocks.” Owing to a fatal
accident to one of his most valued men, due to a heavy breaker engulfing three of the
party, the island, with its wealth of seals was immediately abandoned and the vessel
returned directly to the Cape of Good Hope, having taken in all about 4,000 seals.'
In 1830 Capt. Gurdon L. Allyn, with the sealing schooner Spark, of New London,
Conn., visited Ichaboe Island, but arrived too late in the season (January 14) to
secure many fur seals. He found the carcasses of about a thousand from which the
skins had been removed by sealers who had preceded him the same season. He says,
speaking of the coast generally:
The coast was well sealed, and we could only glean a few from the roughest rocks. * * * We
found a few seals at each landing, * * * and by the 6th of September had taken 600 seal skins.
He secured small catches at intervals during the following months, and started
for home on March 31, 1831, with a cargo of 3,700 skins. In 1834 he made another
voyage with two vessels to the same coast, visiting Ichaboe, Mercury, and Bird
islands. The first season’s work amounted to only 800 skins, the seals being scarce
and shy. Respecting the next season (1835) he says:
The seals having been harassed so much, the prospect was slim for the next season, but by
putting men on the small rocks to shoot them, and by great diligence we managed to secure about
1,000 skins to both vessels, which was a slim season’s work.?
Sealing seems to have been abandoned for some years following on the African
coast, owing to the low price of seal furs and the scarcity of the seals. It has,
however, since been resumed and placed under restrictions by the government of the
colony of the Cape of Good Hope, the seal islands being rented to a sealing company
under certain stipulated conditions, and poaching rigorously prohibited. The yield
is small but steady, averaging about 5,000 skins per annum.!
1 Morrell, Voyages, pp. 304-306. .
2Capt. G. L. Allyn. The Old Sailor’s Story, as quoted by Mr. A. Howard Clarke.
3 Affidavit of Emil Teichmaun, of the London firm of furriers, C. M. Lampson & Co.
XIII.—THE ROOKERY MAPS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
\
By JEFFERSON F. Moser,
Lieutenant-Commander, U. S. N.
In the instructions of May 9, 1896, given prior to the detail of the Albatross to
assist the Fur-Seal Commission, the following work was outlined:
The correction of inaccuracies in the shore lines of the rookery maps; the location of Mr. Town-
send’s landmarks; the determination of the length and width of, at least, the most important rookeries_
by actual measurement, where this could be undertaken without disturbing the seals; the establish-
ment of rookery outlines by plane-table surveys, discriminating accurately as to the limits of breeding
and hauling grounds as indicated by Mr. Townsend.
In subsequent instructions of date of May 13 I was directed to determine discrep-
ancies between the maps of Elliott, Townsend, Stanley-Brown, and Drake, and to
verify the accepted ones. As these instructions were afterwards modified by a different
detail of the vessel, it was impossible to carry out the original orders in their entirety,
but I was able to ascertain what the differences in the maps are and how they may
be remedied.
The Albatross was at the islands of St. George and St. Paul from July 8 to 18,
and when the conditions were in the least favorable not a moment was lost in making
observations in the field for the verification of the rookery maps.
I was supplied with a set of the Stanley-Brown rookery maps on a scale of 264
feet to linch. A set of the same maps showing the areas of 1895 and shore line cor-
rections by Drake with Townsend’s criticisms, and also a set of the Elliott maps, were
furnished me. Before arriving at the islands a set of the Stanley-Brown maps were
prepared with Drake’s shore-line correctious in black, and Elliott’s shore line trans-
ferred, so far as it was possible,in blue. The Elliott shore line, as taken from the prints
furnished, was a bad misfit, as will be seen from the records accom panying my fuller
report to the Fish Commission, and it rarely stood the test of an instrumental angle.’
I desire, however, to say that the Elliott maps furnished seem to be a photo-
graphic, enlargement to fit the scale of the Stanley-Brown maps. It is plain to be
seen that the enlargement of any map, even by the most expert draftsman, necessarily
enlarges the errors, and when enlarged by photography, unless done by special
appliances, and by an expert in this particular line, other errors are introduced. It
is hardly fair to test a map with instruments i in the field unless the original work is at’
hand, and this holds good not only with the Elliott maps but with the Stanley-Brown
maps, for it is well known that the wet print in drying is very appreciably distorted.
I will only add that the topography of the Elliott prints as issued to me is so very
vague and indefinite that it is next to impossible to do anything with them; I should
call them sketches.
I had several interviews with Mr. Joseph Stanley-Brown upon the methods:
employed in making these surveys and learn as follows: The triangulation of St. Paul
821
5947—Pr 3——21
322 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
on the general map of the islands, scale 1:60,000, was done by Dr. Thomas C. Menden-
hall in 1891, when he served as one of the American commissioners in the investigation
of the fur seals. The topography was supplied by Mr. Stanley-Brown. Dr. Menden-
hall was on St. Paul from July 29 to August 9, and during that time investigated the
seal question, made observations for gravity, and did the triangulation. A base was
measured on the east side of the Lagoon with an ordinary steel tape, and, from wLat
I can learn, no pressure balances were used and no corrections for temperature or
curvature were applied, and no signals were erected. I should call this triangulation
@ reconnoissance, and think Dr. Mendenhall claims no more for it. The topography by
Mr. Stanley-Brown was filled in by methods which I will refer to later. The survey
of St. George on the general chart, scale 1:60,000, was the work of Mr. Stanley-
Brown.
The rookery surveys, scale 1 inch to 264 feet, were made with a plane table
according to Geological Survey methods, and ave entirely independent of those pre-
viously mentioned. Each sheet stands by itself; that is, each rookery is a separate
survey and the rookeries on the different sheets were not connected. The bases were
measured with an ordinary steel tape and no corrections were made nor pressure
balances used. The azimuths were observed by means of a compass attached to an
ordinary geologist’s clinometer. Cairns were built of loose rock at prominent points
and flags placed in favorable positions for observation points. No regular signals
were built, nor were angles observed nor computations made. The plane table was
placed over each end of the base successively and different points cut in, after which
these points were occupied and others made. No high or low water line was observed;
the water line was cut in at the height it happened to be when the observations were
made. The contours were traced with an aneroid barometer. The scale of the original
sheets is the same as that published—1 inch to 264 feet, or 20 inches to the statute
nile,
We tested these maps as thoroughly as our limited time would permit. The
sheets accompanying the fuller report will show the large number of angles observed,
and the data, though more or less incomplete, is sufficient to show thoroughly what
has been done in the past and what is required for the present and future. I do not
think Mr. Stanley-Brown claims great accuracy for his maps. I should call them a
fair reconnoissance. They are not accurate in the sense of a finished survey; they
lack detail, and what is given is in most instances badly represented and indefinite;
the lines and symbols leave one constantly in doubt as to what is intended to be
understood. Yet, considering the means employed, the facilities, and the methods, it
is surprising to me that they are as good as they are. These surveys by Mr. Stanley-
Brown are no doubt the very best for these islands that have ever been made, and he
deserves nothing but praise in carrying out the work under the many trying conditions.
When the rookeries were so full of seals that a few tens of thousands, more or
less, was a matter of no importance, these maps served their purpose and served it
well; they were a good general guide. They satisfied the demands at the time they —
were made, but as the number of seals have been so much reduced and it is necessary
to make an estimate within small limits, we are unable with these maps to make an
eye survey of the areas occupied by the herd.
The present need requires a topographical map of the rookeries so accurate and
in such detail that a person from an accessible position and commanding the rookeries
THE ROOKERY MAPS. 323
may, map in hand, sketch in accurately the areas occupied by the breeding seals
which are inaccessible. With the Stanley-Brown maps it is difficult to establish one-
self in position, and if established the same difficulty is experienced in recognizing the
reference points; this bowlder, that gorge, this slope, that projecting ledge are not
indicated, or if indicated are indefinitely shown or out of position. The result is that
one is in doubt how to sketch the rookery areas, and, after they are sketched one is
equally uncertain as to their accuracy.
But if a map executed in the highest style of the topographer’s art now existed
it would fail to satisfy the immediate demands, unless many reference points positive
in their character were located on the rookeries, maintained by the Government, and
accurately represented on the map. Every prominent land feature might be indicated
and contours multiplied, and yet we would be unable to sketch in the desired area
properly, in most instances, without artificial marks. It must be remembered that
when it is desirable to-map the areas occupied by breeding seals the rookeries are
inaccessible. No man could possibly invade the breeding grounds without suffering
probably the loss of his life; therefore measurement isimpossible. Nor is it practicable,
in my opinion, to locate stations from which instrumental observations can be made
for the purpose of cutting in the limits of the breeding ground. Exceptionally the
harems are spread out in plain view, but generally a single station on shore commands
only a few harems. In fact, in some instances they can only be seen from seaward.
I can not too strongly dwell upon the necessity of well-located artificial marks on
the rookeries for reference points. These should be numerous and occupy seal area
if possible. Crosses have been painted on some of the rocks and seem to wear well.
I would therefore suggest for the purpose serial numbers painted in white on the
largest bowlders and ledges where the breeding grounds impinge on the shore, and
that are visible from prominent points. A hole drilled in the rock or a cross cut with
a chisel would serve to identify it in the event of the paint being worn off.
It must be remembered that these islands are surrounded by ice during the winter,
and that under its influence bowlders may be moved. Hence the necessity of fixing
these bowlders with reference to located positions on the cliffs, so that the reference
may be tested in case of doubt. On the slopes occupied by the breeding herds which
are not reached by the ice, and where no prominent natural features exist, heavy posts
projecting a foot or two from the ground might be adopted. With kage reference
points well located on a good topographical map on a liberal scale the areas occupied
by the seals can be sketched within very narrow limits of error.
The work originally laid out for this vessel, namely, to correct inaccuracies of
rookeries and shore line, to properly locate Mawtinanils landmarks, to determine
length and width of at least most important rookeries by actual measurement, to
establish outlines of rookeries by plane table, or, in other words, to correct the
existing maps and furnish a set of rookery maps that were correct in every detail, was
impracticable, even if the original order had not been modified by a different detail,
and for the following reasons:
By reference to the Stanley-Brown maps, on which the angles observed by the
party on board the Albatross this year have been set down, it will at once'be seen
that the maps are as arulein error. In some places the error is small, in others large.
In other words, the maps are not topographically correct. If, therefore, any one of
these data is accepted with the intention of making corrections, a start is made with
324 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
an error from the initial point, and the corrections are no correction at all, but must
necessarily be in error. I was asked quite frequently to locate different features on
or near the rookeries. I did it simply to satisfy the person making the request, but I
knew the location was an error.
In a few words, then, I do not hesitate to say that it is impracticable to correct
the present rookery maps and hope to obtain thereby maps that are topographically
correct, because there is no absolute data from which to make the correction. If you
accept the Stanley-Brown data you accept his maps. The only remedy I see is to
make a new survey with the best means the Government has at hand. Todo anything
else is simply to produce maps which have no greater value than those now in use.
The survey of the rookeries must be made by a skilled topographer, using the best
means that can be supplied. e
The Treasury Department, most interested in having correct maps, has fortunately
at hand in one of its bureaus the best means possible in the world of making such a
survey. I refer to the United States Coast and Geodetic Survey. This bureau has
two items in the appropriations, under either of which the work I think can be done.
The one, “Alaskan explorations,” and the other “ For objects not named that may be
deemed urgent.” .
It will take a competent assistant with an aid and five men equipped with the
best instruments at least one full year to make the rookery surveys on a scale of
1:2,500. A party leaving by the earliest steamer in spring and wintering on the
islands might finish to return by the following summer. Generally the breeding seals
lie from the base of the cliffs to a line reached by the spray of the heaviest seas, to the
high-water mark in fact, on a cliff or series of shelves projecting from the base of the
cliffs, and when a breach or gorge through the cliffs forms a valley the rookeries
extend partly up the valley. This shelf is narrow in places, wide in others, and still
in other locations it merges into the valleys. In some places the harems are three or
more deep, in others two, tapering to one, and then broken. In the valleys the gorges
may be six or seven or more harems deep. To map this shelf or shelves with all-the
ramifications into valleys and gorges and represent it so that it is intelligently
expressed to the nonexpert requires topography of the highest order.
The rookery surveys to have exact value must be made duriug the season when
the seals are not occupying them. The rookery must be occupied by the topographer.
During the breeding season bases can be measured and the work carried on to the’
edge of the rookeries. In my opinion it is not necessary to measure the base for
these rookeries. I believe that all the rookeries on the south side of St. Paul from
Polovina to Zapadni can be connected with one good base.
I would again repeat the necessity of locating permanent marks for reference
points on a rookery for the purpose of accurately sketching the areas occupied by
breeding seals. These marks must be plainly visible, numbered or lettered, and in
considerable numbers. Without such reference points the most elaborate survey will
fail to meet the wants of the future fur-seal investigator.
In closing this portion of my report I beg to say that it is my opinion, based on
twenty years’ experience in surveying, that no party, however well equipped they may
be, can go to the Pribilof Islands during the summer season and either correct the
topography of the rookeries on existing maps or make new surveys of the rookery
areas that will fulfill the existing requirements.
XIV.—PRACTICAL EXPERIMENTS IN THE BRANDING AND HERDING OF
THE SEALS.
By Davip Stark JORDAN and GEORGE ARCHIBALD CLARK.
In his report for 1895 Mr. F. W. True made certain suggestions as to ways ane
means of remedying the condition of the fur-seal herd. One of these was to brand
the seals either with a property mark on the flipper or with such a mark on the back
as would destroy the value of the skin. Another plan was to drive the seals back
from the rookeries in August and confine them in the salt lagoon and certain fresh-
water lakes, where they could be held during the sealing season.
With these suggestions in mind, in the autumn of 1896 the present commission
undertook to test these plans and determine by actual experiment their feasibility.
These experiments we may consider somewhat in detail.
ee
THE BRANDING OF THE SEALS.
The commission was fortunate in having as a special assistant Col. Joseph Murray,
whose former residence as a Treasury agent on the islands made him familiar with ‘the
handling of the seals and whose experience in the branding of cattle enabled him to
understand the practical workings of the plan of branding. He was from the outset
an enthusiastic advocate of branding and had unbounded faith in its success. To
his judgment and supervision therefore the experiments of the commission in this
direction were intrusted.
—~At-the outset it was decided that a mere property mark would not answer the
immediate needs of the situation and would be of doubtful value. Accordingly, the
experiments were directed toward so marking the skins as to destroy their value, know-
ing that a mark. accomplishing this result would prove quite as effective as a property
mark. Naturally the branding was limited to the females. Here again it became at
once apparent that the older animals could not be handled with safety on account of
their viciousness and the difficulty in controlling them. The work therefore finally
resolved itself into the branding of the female pups.
It was found possible in the month of September to drive up the pups and handle
them just as the older seals are handled in the killing season. The smaller size of the
pups made it possible to catch and hold them without danger or difficulty. With
this work the Aleuts found themselves at once familiar. For twenty years prior to
1890 it had been customary for them to drive up from 10,000 to 15,000 pups from cer-
tain rookeries and sort out the sexes to secure the 5,000 males to be killed for winter
food. This process was identical with that necessary for branding, and at the outset
laid at rest the question of the possibility of handling the pups.
; 825
326 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
The pups to be branded were driven back in herds from the rookeries to the flat
grassy plains in the rear and at a convenient distance. Here the larger droves were
broken up into smaller pods and herded separately. The Aleuts then examined the
pups, and sorting out the males allowed them to go back to the rookeries, leaving only
the females, which were then ready for branding.
As no thought had been. given to this subject prior.to our starting for the islands
in the spring of 1896 no special preparation was made. It was therefore necessary for
Colonel Murray to improvise a set of irons and other necessaries for carrying out the
experiments. The brands were made of pieces of iron about 8 inches long by 1 inch
wide and thick. These were welded to iron handles about 4 feet long. A small
portable forge furnished the necessary heat. A home-made salve composed of ingre-
dients designed to promote healing was also prepared for application to the wounds.
This constituted. the original apparatus for branding.
During the season of 1896 377 pups and 11 adult cows in all were branded. Of
these, 124 pups on Lukanin rookery were marked on the back with the following
brand: ==. Two young cows on this same rookery were branded with two marks
asross the shoulders, thus —-. On Kitovi rookery 191 pups were branded thus ;
with a single mark across the shoulders. On North rookery of St. George 62 pups
were branded thus, ——; and 9 cows thus, ——.
The branding of the cows was attended with great difficulty. It was necessary to
lasso them by means of a loop affixed to the end of a pole, by which they could be
pinned to the ground. The experiments clearly enough showed that any general
branding of the adult females would be impossible.
‘With the pups the matter was comparatively simple. The little animals could be
‘easily held down by placing one hand on the neck and holding the hind flippers with
the other. While held in this position the red-hot iron was applied to their backs,
burning through the fur the width of the iron, With the edge of the iron a deeper
burn into the skin was made, which was destined to produce a scar. It was expected
that the fur would replace itself on the bare space on either side of the scar, thus
affording protection to the pup by the overlapping of the fur. As a matter of fact,
however, while this replacement of the fur did, as a rule, take place, it was more or
less imperfect, and left the skin marred throughout the entire extent of the burning.
The mere mechanical features of the work of branding, involving the handling of
the pups and the application of the irons, was entirely successful from the start. It
only remained to be seen what effect the operation would have on the pups themselves.
With a view to determining this the pups were closely watched during the months of
September and October, 1896.
For a week but little change could be seen in their condition. The wound showed
only the dull scar of the burning. In some cases suppurationeset in at the angles
made by the crossing of the brands on the pups branded first on Lukanin. The skin
curled slightly at the corners in these cases, and made apparent the inadvisability of
putting on a brand so that two scars crossed each other.
After a week or ten days the wounds appeared raw and apparently inflamed,
The cause of this was not at once apparent, but later on, when opportunity was afforded
for closely examining the skin of a branded pup which had been drowned, it was found
that, instead of being raw and sensitive, the salt water had merely washed out the
BRANDING NOT DETRIMENTAL TO SEALS. 327
ga leaving the healing skin in a pinkish condition resembling the color of corned
eef.
During this time the pups appeared very uncomfortable when out of the water,
as the skin tended to dry and crack and doubtless the movements of the animals
caused them pain. On going again into the water the wounds were softened up and
washed out. With each return from the sea they became narrower until healing was
finally completed in about three weeks to a month after the branding. The pups then
appeared in their usual spirits and seemed not to have suffered any inconvenience by
their experiences.
While the wounds were still sore the pups manifested little disposition to play.
They resented the curious attention which their companions sometimes gave to their
backs. Occasionally a mother would smell the back of her branded pup, which called
forth its vigorous protest. As a rule, however, as characteristic of the wounds of the
fur seals in general, neither the animals themselves nor their companions paid any
attention to the wounds from branding.
That no adverse change in the habits of the seals resulted from the branding is
clear from the fact that no alteration was seen in the relations of the pups and their
mothers. They were treated exactly as if nothing had happened. The relations of the
pups among themselves remain unaffected. Five out of nine of the adult cows were
found in 1897 on the breeding grounds with their pups. One of the cows was found
in a harem on Lukanin rookery, in practically the same spot from which she was driven
at the timeof her branding in 1896.
Only four of the branded pups were positively known to have died, and the rookeries
of Kitovi and Lukanin were closely inspected on various occasions with a view to find-
ing them, if present. One of these was killed to furnish a specimen skin. Another
was found in good condition at high-water mark on Lukanin beach, plainly drowned.
A third was killed while almost dead from starvation. The cause of death in the case
of the fourth could not be determined, because the animal was long dead when found
and decomposition wae far advanced. At the time of the count of dead pups in Octo-
ber, 18 of the branded pups and 2 of the branded cows on St. George were seen all in
perfect condition and the brands showed distinctly. Throughout this month an inspec-
tion of Lukanin and Kitovi rookery on any day showed from 50 to 100 of the branded
pups, which was a large percentage considering the difficulties of an inspection.
On our way to the islands in the season of 1897 we obtained, through the kindness
‘of Mr. Gray, the agent of the Alaska Commercial Company at Unalaska, the skin of
a branded pup which had been taken late in November by the natives at Akun Island.
This skin showed the fur of the pup in a more advanced stage than the one taken on
the islarids in October. The brand was perfectly healed except for a slight break in
the skin at the crossing of the brands. The skin was tanned with a view to determin-
ing the effect of branding on the prepared pelt. This demonstrated more clearly than
ever the true effect of the branding. When the blubber was removed and the skin
was worked over, the part which had been affected by the brand in nee fell out,
leaving a long slit in the skin. ~
This fact adds emphasis to the statement made in 1896 by Mr. J. D. Williams, of
Brooklyn, N. Y., a dyer and dresser of seal skins, that ‘if a brand were to be applied
to the back of the seal even so imperfectly as to leave no permanent scar or trace in
328 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
the raw skin, in the process of curing the fur would doubtless come out, and the
very fact that any class of skins were liable to this defect would cast doubt on the
whole lot and depreciate their value.”
We thus find that branding is not only a feasible operation, but that it is entirely
effective. Without injury to the animal itself or interference with its habits and
relations, its skin cau be so marked as to destroy its value for commercial purposes.
Pelagic skins are now of much less value than are the island skins. Two or three
cross brands at intervals through the most valuable part of the skin must reduce
still lower its value and leave the business of taking these skins at sea unprofitable.
We may note here that there is no truth whatever in the assertion so strenuously
urged by Mr. Henry W. Elliott, that the fur of the branded seal will replace itself
without scar. This contention is based on ‘analogy to the way the wounds of the
seals from cuts or bites heal. The difference between the result of a bite and of the
application of a hot iron is too evident to need comment. The one destroys the hair
cells; the other does not. It is probable that most of the minor wounds of the seals
heal perfectly and without a scar; but it is not true that all do, as the welts in the
skin, due to imperfect healing, which causes seals to be rejected on the killing fields.
abundantly show.
But the proof necessary to break down this contention was found in the case of
the adult cows branded in 1896 which were present in the season of 1897. Five of
these were seen and the marks were clear and distinct, leaving no doubt as to their
destructive effect on the fur. That this would be the result was a foregone conclusion.
The process of branding domestic animals has been in vogue long enough to show
that a scar thus made in the skin of an animal remains permanently. There is no
reason why we should suppose a ‘special exception in favor of the seal. There is none.
It is necessary, also, to refute an equally absurd report that the branding had
the effect of driving the seals away from the Pribilof Islands across to the other side
of the Pacific, it being reported that during the season of 1897 branded skins had
been taken off the Japan coast.
We may say that an inspection by Captain Hooper of the catch of the schooner
St. Lawrence, the vessel said to have taken the skins, in Unalaska, failed to discover
any branded skins, and the master made affidavit that he not only did not take any
skins of this sort on the Japanese coast, but he had not even heard of any being
taken there.
This of course is merely negative evidence. The fact that five out of nine cows
branded in 1896 were seen present in 1897 is sufficient proof that they were not
driven away by the process of branding. That four should have been overlooked
among the thousands of seals on the rookeries is not strange. If any class of the
seals were likely to be affected by the branding it would be the adults. It is absurd
to suppose for a moment that the pups of 3 months old would remember what
had occurred, or, in case they did, that a mere temporary experience should weigh
against such an unerring and thoroughly fixed instinct as the homing instinct of
the seal.
During the season of 1897 the work of branding was largely extended. Colonel
Murray branded on St. Paul Island in all 5,371 pups and 118 adult cows. Mr. James
Judge, Treasury agent in charge of St. George Island, branded 1,880 pups on the
HERDING: SEALS. 329
rookeries of that island. The details of the work of branding for the season of 1897
will be found in the reports of Agents Murray and Judge, appended herewith
(Appendix I, II).
AS @ result of the experiments of 1896 it was suggested that an electrical cautery
might be used instead of the red-hot iron as an instrument of branding. With this
end in view experiments were conducted by Mr. Elmer E. Farmer in the laboratory of
electrical engineering in Stanford University.. The necessary apparatus was con-
structed and taken to the islands. In the report of Mr. Farmer, also appended
herewith (Appendix I), will be found a detailed account of the matter.
The apparatus for electrical branding was not landed at the islands before our
. departure. As a result we did not have an opportunity to test its working in person.
The actual conditions were so different from the experimental conditions that the
apparatus proved in some respects inadequate. Its use was therefore confined to
experiments. The actual work of branding was done by Colonel Murray by means of
the simpler and already tested irons.
It will be seen from Mr. Farmer’s account of the experiments with the electrical
cautery that the practicability of this principle with improved and perfected apparatus
is proved. This answers our present purpose. If branding as a business becomes
necessary it will be a comparatively simple matter to develop the principle of electrical
branding and make it work. The advantages of the white-hot cautery wire over the
clumsy red-hot iron are too obvious to need comment.
It is to be hoped that branding as a means of protecting the fur-seal herd will not
be necessary. It must be said, however, that the plan is entirely feasible. The task
involves some labor and expense, but no insurmountable obstacle. As Colonel Mur-
ray puts it: “With an assistant and a duplicate set of forges and men, 5,000 pups a
day could be easily branded, or in twenty working days 100,000 pups.” This is about
double the number of female pups on the islands at present, so the work could be
done in ten days; or one brander with the force of men now on the islands could do
the work in twenty days, and the period in which branding can be done will admit-of
fully this time. To brand all these female pups for five years in succession would
settle the fate of pelagic sealing.
HERDING.
No attempt was made in the experiments in herding to carry out Mr. True’s idea
of driving back and holding all classes of animals. Whether this could be done in
any event seems to us extremely doubtful. It ought not to be tried, we think, because
it is probable that such a course would result in the death of most of the pups and the
complete demoralization of rookery lite.
On the contrary, we accepted the plan of herding as forming merely a complement
to the plan of branding. The latter plan was designed to protect the female portion
of the herd. Herding can in a similar manner protect the young males. At the close of
the killing season in July, if such of the bachelors as are left can be herded up during
the month of August, or even longer, they can be kept out of the way of the pelagic
ler.
oF During the season of 1896 the practicability of this plan was tested by driving up
and retaining in the salt lagoon on St. Paul Island about 3,000 bachelors and half
bulls under guard of a force of natives. No difficulty seemed to be encountered, and
330 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
so during the season of 1897 fencing was taken up to St. Paul Island and the salt
lagoon was inclosed. This lagoon, covering as it does upward of 300 acres of space
and having a direct connection with the sea, is admirably adapted for the purpose. It
is, moreover, conveniently located for all the rookeries on the southern end of the
island. For the two remaining breeding areas—Polovina and Northeast Point—fresh-
water lakes are available, several in the vicinity of the former and one of considerable
size—Webster Lake—near the latter.
The fencing, unfortunately, was not delivered at the islands untillate in August,
and so the only use which could be made of the inclosure for the present season was
in further testing its utility. Seals were confined in the inclosure during the first
week of September, and it was found entirely feasible to so retain them. Of the details
of this experiment an account will be found in the daily journal of the commission
for September, 1897, and also in Colonel Murray’s brief report appended herewith
(Appendix IT). R
The proper time in which to utilize this inclosure is in the early part of August.
The younger bachelors come to the islands late in July, and in the last few days of this
month the bachelors should be gathered up and held in the lagoon or elsewhere as
long as it is possible to hold them. Whether they could be retained longer than the
month of August would remain to be seen. But judging from the length of time
which it takes the fur-seal pup of three months old to starve, they would not suffer
for want of food within a month.
itis to be hoped that neither branding nor herding the seals may be necessary in
the future as a means for the protection of the fur seals; but in case such measures
are necessary, we desire to call attention to the fact that both plans are entirely feasi.
ble, and that, systematically carried out, they furnish a means of dcing away with
pelagic sealing, or at least so seriously crippling it as to make its abandonment certain.
With its mark of ownership and reservation thus stamped upon its herd of breeding
females, the United States should then set about a determination of its rights of redress
against the slaughter of such animals, wherever killed.
In conclusion we may call attention to the fact that both of these experiments
have an important place in the proper management of the fur-seal herd, aside from
their bearing on the fur-seal question. As the young yearlings and 2-year-old males
swarm over the hauling grounds late in July, they crowd the drives and become a
nuisance and obstruction on the killing fields. From the beginning of the season,
moreover, the half bulls and idle bulls, of which many get into the drives, are a menace
to those conducting the killing. These seals, rejected from the killin g, should be
turned into the salt lagoon instead of being allowed to go back to their hauling
grounds to reappear in the very next drive. They should be held for a week at least,-
or until a second drive has been made, and then released, their place in the lagoon
being filled by the new lot of rejected seals. The unnecessary driving which marks
the close of the season will be in a large measure diminished, and the work of handling
the seals on the killing grounds will be made much simpler and easier. Furthermore,
it will not be devoid of interest to study the actions of the seals themselves under
confinement, opportunity to do which will be thus afforded.
In the matter of branding, also, we may note it is of the utmost importance to the
Government to know just what proportion of breeding males are necessary for its
2 SEALS SHOULD BE BRANDED. 331
herd. This fact once known, it then becomes equally important to see that the proper
number of young males are reserved for the replenishment of the breeding stock.
Under present conditions the matter of securing this reserve is left more or less to
chance. There is no evidence that the 3-year-old which is allowed to escape from one
drive will not be taken in the next.
It is more than probable that the reserves are at present sufficiently supplied
from those hauling grounds which, through inaccessibility or from other cause, it is
‘difficult to reach. But this still leaves the matter to chance. In the future manage-
ment of the herd it ought to be possible to reach and utilize these hauling grounds.
With the full product of the herd under control, it should be the business of those
having it in charge to choose out, brand, and so reserve for all time those males which
are to be set apart as breeders. Whether this branding should be done when the
males are pups or at the age of 1 year or at the age of 3 are matters of detail which .
must be worked out in practical experience. What we wish to point out now is the
fact that branding can be and should be thus employed to make certain that the
proper reserve of males is left.
APPENDIX I.
REPORT ON. THE ELECTRICAL EXPERIMENTS IN THE BRANDING OF THE FUR-SEAL
PUPS—SEASON OF 1897.
By ELMER E, FARMER, Assistant to the Commission.
The earliest experiments in electrical branding, made in the laboratory at
Stanford University, were carried on under serious difficulties, resulting from a lack
of suitable apparatus and machinery as well as of suitable fur on which to operate.
. Having neither low-voltage dynamo nor suitable rheostat, it was necessary to use the
incandescent-light circuit, on account of the high voltage of which approximately
11,000 watts were used instead of the necessary 300, This excessive voltage caused
<< in the loaded dynamo and reacted on the experiments by changing factors
which were supposed to remain constant. —
The only available fur of a living animal approaching that of the seal which we
could obtain for use in the early experiments was cat’s fur. On this our results were
very satisfactory. Searing the outer surface of the skin of the cat, without burning
* underneath, was found sufficient to destroy the hair cells. This could be accomplished
with one stroke in about ten seconds, a mark 1 inch wide and about 5 inches long
being made. When we came to deal with the actual fur of the seal we found it so
different that these early experiments gave us no real idea of what was wanted.
As a result of the preliminary tests, under your authorization I set about the
preparation of more suitable apparatus.
THE APPARATUS,
The apparatus provided for the work in electrical branding consisted of a direct-
current dynamo, compound wound, and weighing 85 pounds. The dynamo was con-
nected to a half-horse power gasoline engine weighing 160 pounds. The gas was
ignited by a battery and coil.
Platinum was chosen as a cautery wire, on account of. the high temperature of its
melting point and its comparative nonoxidizability. The size of wire used was No. —
18 B. & S., which seemed large enough to insure the required strength at white heat
and yet small enough to require only an economical amount of power, with a mini-
mum expenditure for replacement in case of fusing.
333
334 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
The hand rheostat to which the cautery wire was attached had, in its final form,
simply a coil of iron wire short-circuited by a heavy lever arm and plug “cut out”
inserted in series with the wire.
The connections were as represented in the figure: a, plug cut out; b, cautery
wire; c, iron wire resistance; d, lever arm; ¢ and /, terminals to be connected to the
dynamo.
After the dynamo of low voltage was completed, a run of five hours was made
with the current at its full value, to test the plant. The test also showed that the
current could be controlled by the rheostat, and was large enough to keep the cautery
wire white hot during the burning.
Our practical work with the apparatus shows that improvement can be made on
the present handle, in the method of holding the cautery wire, and also in the form
of the lever for the control of the current. The least weight possible was put into the
plant, as it was supposed to be necessary to carry it by hand from place to place,
This made parts of the apparatus too light. For permanent work a heavier plant
ec
mounted on wheels would be better suited to the conditions. There are few of the
rookeries which can not be reached with a team.
THE FIRST TESTS.
The first tests were made on dead pup skins soon after the apparatus reached the
island, and were a failure. The engine furnished an insufficient amount of power to
burn with any degree of ease through the seal fur, which is several times denser and
much finer than that of the cat.
The power generated in the earliest tests was less than that previously obtained
in the trial run. This was due to the following causes: A bent shaft on the engine,
caused by rough handling in transport; slipping of the belt; dampness in the coils of
the dynamo, allowing a leakage of the magnetizing current; and an inferior quality
of gasoline which had been supplied.
Before the time arrived for work in active branding, these faults were corrected
and an improvement made in the commutation of the current, but thére was still
insufficient power to do the branding rapidly. Two hand gears were then mounted
on the base between the engine and dynamo. They were belted to the vacant fly
wheel and a wooden pulley mounted on the same shaft. With this arrangement more
power was generated than could be used.
ELECTRICAL BRANDING. 335
Under these conditions the apparatus proved satisfactory. Dead pups were
branded with a uniformly smooth brand 14 inches wide at a single stroke.
THE TESTS OF LIVING PUPS.
When the apparatus was thus made ready, 12 live pups were brought up in a
wagon trom Kitovi rookery. :
The conditions in dealing with the living animal were found to be entirely differ-
ent from those in connection with the dead. It took some time to learn how to handle
the cautery over the loose and yielding skin of the living pup. As a result it was
found necessary to make two strokes instead of one.. On the whole, therefore, the
branding of the first 8 live pups was much less satisfactory than the branding of
the dead ones. On the last 4, however, better results were obtained. Experience
gave confidence in handling the cautery, and the brands were satisfactory in all
respects as regards length, breadth, intensity, and uniformity. They were acceptable
to Colonel Murray. The only unsatisfactory element was that of time. It required
fully thirty minutes from the beginning to the end to brand the 12 pups.
The time was greatly lengthened, however, by several delays due to accidents.
A belt was thrown from one of the hand pulleys, and one of the improvised stands
was completely overturned by the loosening of a screw in the soft redwood base.
The plug “cut out” had been soldered up, to do away with a small loss of power, and
it therefore became necessary to stop the entire plant each time a cautery wire fused.
This occurred four times in the branding of the first 8 pups but not at all in the
‘ branding of the last 4. The unknown factor of how long a cautery wire would
last under constant use could only be tested by actual continuous trial. These and
all other questions we had no opportunity to properly test, as, the Commission having
left the island, we were not allowed by the Treasury agent in charge to experiment
further on living pups neither at this time nor at any time later.
CONCLUSION.
While this test was wholly inadequate to show the full possibilities of branding
by the cautery wire, its action in the case of the last 4 pups indicated that the
principle of the cautery was a success. With the apparatus improved and perfected
the work can undoubtedly be greatly accelerated. Barring accidents, it is my belief
that after a little practice 4 pups a minute could be branded with the cautery wire,
as running at the close of our test. With the perfection of the apparatus, aided by
experience and practice, this number could undoubtedly be increased. It was possible
with the irons to average five a minute, and in that case it was necessary to burn
through the entire fur, whereas with the cautery wire only a short length of fur at the
surface of the skin had to be burned.
COMPARATIVE RESULTS.
We were allowed for a short time at the first day’s branding to ooserve the method
of branding with the irons. It was in the whole very satisfactory. In the matter of
speed and simplicity the process is all that could be desired. A round iron would be
better than the rectangular one used by Colonel Murray. We made one of these and
he used it for a time.
336 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
The principal objection, which is in no sense fatal, to the present method of brand-
ing by the hot irons lies in the smallness of the animal and the weight of the iron. It
is difficult to control the depth of the burning and the long handle (nearly 4 feet)
removes the work too far from the eye to make it possible to see clearly what is being
done. It would be better to use a small iron with a short handle, which would bring
it under the direct control of the muscle and sight of the operator. The heavy irons
now used are adapted more to the branding of cattle than to the branding of a small
animal like the fur-seal pup.
The advantages of the electrical cautery are that it brings the work closely under
the control of the operator; it requires no weight or pressure; it does not necessitate
the burning down through the thick, oily fur. The wire cuts through the fur at the
surface of the skin like a razor. The platinum being kept at a uniform and much
higher temperature, the scar can be made more quickly and practically without pain.
APPENDIX II.
EXPERIMENTS IN BRANDING AND HERDING SEALS ON ST. PAUL, 1897.
By JosePH MurRay.
In accordance with instructions from Dr. David S. Jordan, under date of August 8,
I submit the following brief report on the results of the experiments in herding and
branding the seals:
HERDING IN THE LAGOON.
The fence about the lagoon was completed in due time by the young men assist-
ants left for this purpose and to help in the branding. On September 1 the seals were
driven from the hauling grounds of Reef, Kitovi, Lukanin, Tolstoi, and Middle Hill
and kept within the inclosure under close watch until September 7, when the fence
was opened and they were allowed to return to the sea and to their respective hauling
grounds, which they did by degrees during the following week, many of the animals
showing no particular haste in abandoning the inclosure.
At first the seals gave evidence of feeling the restraint put upon them. They
patrolled the inside of the fence until they established a beaten path. A few climbed
over and others found holes under the fence through which they crawled. After a
day or two, however, the novelty wore off and no further attention was paid to the
fence. The closest observation during the time of their captivity failed to discover
anything in their actions or movements that indicated uneasiness or suffering of any
sort.
The experiment of holding the seals in the lagoon by means of a fence may
therefore be considered entirely successful. I never doubted its practicability, and
the test has removed all possible doubt. I strongly favor the fencing of every
important body of water on the islands, which can be conveniently used for the
BRANDING WITH IRONS. 337
purpose, and the holding in them-of the young seals for a month or six weeks in the
sealing season.
BRANDING.
The branding was begun on September 7, at Lukanin rookery. About 350 pups
were driven up, assorted, and branded during the forenoon, an effort being made to
‘make the natives familiar with their work rather than to accomplish large results.
The natives entered into the spirit of the work, and soon became skillful and effective
in its various operations.
On the 8th, getting an earlier start and having two forges running, we branded
1,017 pups. During the forenoon of the 9th 600 pups were branded on Kitovi, and
" in the afternoon 900 on the Reef.
Heavy rains interfered with the work until the 14th, when 804 additional pups
were branded on the Reef. On the 15th work was again interrupted by th8 rain, but
on the 16th a third branding of 600 pups and 100 cows was made on the Reef.
On the 17th we crossed over to Zapadui in boats and branded 600 pups and 8
cows. The following day 500 pups and 10 cows were branded on Tolstoi rookery.
In all we branded 118 cows and 5,371 pups. I used two forges, with two men to
attend each, keeping six irons hot. One man carried the irons to and from the forges.
With nine, antive young men to handle the pups, I found it possible to brand 300 an
hour without special exertion. :
With an assistant, and a duplicate set of forges and men, 5,000 pups a day could
easily be branded, or in twenty working days 100,000 pups, which is nearly double
the number of female pups at present ou the islands. So far as the labor is concerned,
the branding of all the female pups each year is entirely possible. It is simply a
matter of time and men.
BRANDING DOES NOT INJURE THE ANIMALS.
It is evident that the branding does not injure the animals. The adult cows
branded last year were seen in good condition and with their pups on the rookeries
this year. The pups branded last year were also to be seen in numbers hale and
hearty on the hauling grounds and rookeries. The salt water helps rather than
hinders the healing of the wound. Neither pups nor adult cows are driven from the
islands by the operation of branding.
The most difficult part of the work is the driving of the pups and the anttne of
the sexes. This requires men and careful supervision, but this is all. The pups stand
the handling well. Of the number handled this season, which must have exceeded
10,000, only one pup was killed.
The appearance of the branded cows, as well as of the yearlings, shows clearly
the effectiveness of the brand to depreciate the value of the skins, Hach brandmark
stands out bare and clean, not a trace of fur having come to replace that which was
burned.
CONCLUSION.
I am well satisfied that in the plan of herding the bachelors and branding the
female seals has been struck the keynote of the whole situation. Carried to their
logical conclusion, these methods will forever settle the vexed question of pelagic
sealing.
5947—pt 3——22
338 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
The following is a detailed list of the brandings, together with the different marks
used, which will doubtless be of value to future observers:
Statement of seal branding on St. Paul Island for the season of 1897.
1897. Rookery. Cows. | Brand. | Pups. | Brand. Total.
350
1,017
600
900
804
700
608
510
Geddes weer 5, 489
fos
i
r=4
.
APPENDIX ITI.
BRANDING ON ST. GEORGE.
Mr. JAMES JUDGE.
In pursuance of instructions received from Dr. David 8. J ordan, commissioner in
charge of fur-seal investigations, I submit the following statement regarding the
work of branding female fur-seal pups on the island of St. George for the season
of 1897.
Date. Rookery. be a |
The pups on North and Staraya Artel rookeries were branded across the back
with this mark, ===; those on East, Little East, and Zapadni rookeries with this,
The marks extended well down on the sides of the pups, giving the brands a
circular appearance.
In the drive on East rookery four sea lion pups were included among the fur-seal
pups and were branded, one with three and the others with two marks each, similar to
those put on the fur-seal paps. These may be of interest to future obsarvans,
‘SSOA 0910 ‘ag Aq Yde180j,0Nd B WO.
“AHANOOY NINVXNT NO S1V3S ONIGNVHS
“IAXXX SLvId
‘sup[s o18ejed Jo onyva ayy Suyvisaidap jo suvam v sv SuIpuvig JO sseusaoaye oy SULMOYS ‘qo Uel[yJ se] uo ayy Aq peuing ULYS ayy Jo uos40d ev Suruuey
20 ssao0id ayy Ul “BysBpeUg jo ‘fey “vy “IW Aq UOTsstuMtMOS aT]4 07 18A0 potany PUL “O68T “JoquiosoN Ut ‘spuylsT UeNETy ‘UNYY FV 1OQIvY oY} UI party yeas eBay B WlOIj USYe] SEA ULYS STILL
NIMS 1V3S Q30NvyE Vv
‘DIAXXX 31Lv1d
PLATE XXXVII.
Ja
pi! |
HERDED SEALS IN THE SALT LAGOON.
Drawn from nature by Bristow Adams.
XV.—THE BLUE FOX OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
By Davip Starr JorpAN and GeorGE ARCHIBALD CLARK.
One of the important resources of the Pribilof Islands is the so-called Arctic fox
or blue fox, Vulpes lagopus, which is widely distributed along the coasts of Alaska
and on the islands of Bering Sea. It is associated with the fur seals both on the
Pribilof and on the Commander islands, and in these places it has received a certain
degree of protection. The blue fox and the white fox are identical as species, both
being found in the same litter, the white fox being simply an albinistic form of the
other, its inner fur showing always some blueness or grayness.
Of the general distribution of this animal Ivan Petroff in his report of 1883
gives the following account:! _
_ Of the Arctic fox we find in Alaska two varieties—one white and the other a bluish gray, com-
monly called “blue fox” by the traders. The white fox is found along the coast of continental
Alaska from the mouth of the Kuskokwim northward to Point Barrow and the eastern boundary, Its
fur is of a snowy white, especially in the young, and both soft and long; but, owing to the lack of
durability, it does not command a high price in the market.
The animal is very numerous northward ot Norton Sound, and not at'all shy. Natives and
travelers alike report instances of the fearlessness with which these foxes enter their camps, and
even dwellings, in search of food or out of mere curiosity. A large portion of the skins secured by
Eskimo and other natives are used by themselves for trimming their garments, and the remainder
falls chiefly into the hands of whalers and whisky smugglers, so that it is impossible to obtain
accurate figures as to the annual catch. They may be called omnivorous, and they refuse nothing
that will fill their stomachs. I observed one sleek and apparéntly well-fed specimen which devoured
nearly the whole of a large salmon and afterwards worried down, with considerable difficulty, a thick
leather strap with a heavy buckle attached to it. In the depth of winter the natives find it unsafe
to leave any article of clothing, dog harness, or boat material within their reach. t
The blue fux exists now on several of the Aleutian Islands, where it was found by the first dis-
coverers in 1741. The animal is also found on the Pribilof Islands, and here, where it has been pos-_
sible to protect the species against intermixture with other and inferior foxes, the skins are of the
finest quality, commanding a high price in the market, Traders report the existence of the blue fox.
to a limited extent in the vicinity of Oogashik, on the Aliaska Peninsula, and also on the Lower
Kuskokwim; and it occurs also on the delta between the mouths of the Yukon and Kuskokwim.
Captain Hooper, of the Revenue Marine, who commanded the U. 8.8. Corwin during two successive
cruises in the Arctic, reports that he saw blue foxes at Cape Espenberg, Elephant Point, Hotham
Inlet, Point Hope, Point Belcher, and Point Barrow. The same gentleman also states that he ‘‘found
the blue fox much more plentifyl on the Siberian than on the American coast, and that all the blue
foxes in the far north are so inferior to those on the islands of Bering Sea as to suggest the possibility
of their being a different species.” Even on the Arctic coast Captain Hooper saw blue foxes, taken
at the same time and place, differing very much in the color and quality of the fur. On the Pribilof
Islands from 1,000 to 1,500 of the best quality of blue-fox skins are annually [1883] shipped, and several
‘hundred of a little inferior quality from Attoo and Atkha islands, but it is impossible to ascertain the
quantity obtained along the Arctic coast by whalers and illicit traders.
1 Seal and Salmon Fisheries and General Resources of Alaska, 1897, Vol. IV, pp. 255-256.
339
340 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
In our investigations of the past two seasons we found these little animals objects
of much interest. They live in the crevices and interspaces of the castle-like masses
of angular bowlders that crown the various headlands of the islands. These head-
lands are also the home of the myriads of sea birds which frequent the islands.
In our visits: to certain rookeries of St. Paul the peculiar rasping ery of these
little animals as they caught sight of us soon became a familar sound. After a few
visits to the Reef on St. Paul, a pair of these foxes regularly followed us about over
the parade ground, dogging our footsteps and at times snapping at-our heels. The
animals are protected from molestation and annoyance in the summer; as a result: of
this immunity they grow overbold and impudent.
The natives are allowed to take the foxes only in traps during a short period in
midwinter when the fur is in the best condition. From our limited opportunities for
studying the animals it would seem that they breed in pairs, bearing several young at
a birth, and that the time of bringing forth the young is in June or July. On the
29th of June two of the little foxes, which appeared to be about a week old, were seen
playing about the mouth of a fox burrow at Northeast Point. They were so tame that
they could be handled like kittens,
Of the past history of these animals we have but little data beyond the account
of Ivan Petroff, just quoted. As to the importance of the herd of blue foxes on the
Pribilof Islands, we may gain some knowledge from the statistics of the furs pur-
chased by the Russian-American Company during the period from 1842 to 1860; also
given in Petroff’s report. From this we may take the following summary:
Arctic foxes purchased by the Russian-American Company from the Pribilof Islands, 1842-1860.
Date. | St. Paul. |St. George.|| Date. | St. Paul. |St. George.
1842 505 1,491 1853 641 1, 238
1843 515 1,377 1854 624 1,291
1844 394 1, 343 TBS5) | seccicicesi ccc 1,123
1845 365 1, 366 1856 514 1, 145
1846 528 1,418 1857 1, 417 1, 198
1847 515 1, 354 1858 558 1, 555
1848 461 1, 298 1859 619 1, 296
1849 519 1, 069 1860 625 911
_ 1850 519 1, 073
1851 517 1, 268 YY
1852 645 1,477 Total........ 34, 767
For the period between the transfer of the fur-seal islands in 1867 to the United
States and the year 1880, Petroft gives a total of 27,731 foxes as taken from Alaskan
sources, doubtless including others in addition to those taken from the Pribilof
Islands. He remarks that these returns are incomplete and “necessarily below the
real figures.”
In recent years the catch of blue foxes has diminished. In so far as we have been
able to get the returns, it is as follows:
Blue foxes taken on the Pribilof Islands, 1890+1896.'
Season. St.Paul. | St. George. Season. St. Paul. | St. George.
1890-91... 505 793 1894-95... nil. nil.
1891-92... nil. nil. 1895-96... 467 233
1892-93... 438 875 - 1896-97... 176 497
1893-94... nil. nil. See eth
MOtalic 20 sine saes 3, 784
‘These figures were furnished by the North American Commercial Company.
? The taking of foxes on St. George in this season was stopped by the Treasury agent.
CARE OF BLUE FOXES. ‘B41
When we contrast these recent catches with those of the earlier period covered
by the statistics of Petroff, we find that there has been a marked falling off in the
product of the herd. It is not necessary to look for the probable cause. While the
foxes are protected at other seasons of the year, during the period of trapping their
only safety lies in the limitations of the trapper’s ingenuity and in their skill to elude
him. With an extended period of hunting, especially at the time when food is scarce,
doubtless the whole herd could be wiped out in a single season.
The precarious condition of the herd, or at least the importance of taking better
care of it, has evidently been recognized by the Department, as ‘the following
quotation from Chief Agent Crowley’s report for 1893 will show:!
I have ordered that the catch of blue foxes be limited to the month of December, 1893, and that the
price fixed for the skins taken be $5 apiece. The cause for limiting the time to one month for trapping
was, in my judgment, necessary for the preservation of the foxes. It is suggested in my instructions
in connection with the blue-fox trapping that if a trap could be contrived in such a way as to prevent
injury to the fox, and all females so caught turned loose, such a course would tend to increase the
supply of these valuable animals. Such a method would certainly be an advantage if it were possible
to carry it into effect; but at least two obstacles will be in the way of making this method a success.
First, to invent a trap sufficiently large to hold a fox without doing him some bodily injury, and
devising a plan to induce the wary fox into it; second, to take chances on the native trapper, who
has probably tramped across the island from five to seven times a week through cold and snow knee
deep, having convictions of honesty and courage enough, when he comes to his trap and finds the only
fox he has caught that week to be a female, to turn it loose. I advised, however, that this sort of a
box trap be tried as an experiment. To avoid the wholesale slaughter of foxes, the better plan would
be to adopt the rule of only trapping foxes every alternate winter until they have increased sufficiently
to warrant a more frequent limited catch.
Here the attempt has been made to exempt the females from slaughter. Doubt-
less in accordance with these same instructions, Mr. James Judge, agent in charge of
St. George Island, in the season of 1896-97 put the idea of a box trap into practical
execution. By salting away meat in the killing season and freshening it in the winter
to feed the foxes, he attracted them to certain centers where his traps were located,
and the females caught were released.
It may be noted that these efforts to better the condition of the foxes are based
upon a mistaken analogy. It is attempted to treat the blue fox as though it were
identical in habits with the fur seals. The female of the fur seals is exempt from
slaughter on the islands, and this principle is applied to the fox. The latter is not,
however, polygamous, and therefore the saving up of females without making pro-
vision for a like supply of males would be folly, unless it should have in time the effect
of developing in these animals a polygamous habit.
We do not know the breeding habits of the blue foxes sufficiently well to say just
what should be done for their protection. From our casual observation it would seem
that they breed in pairs and bring forth several young at a time—two at least, possibly
more. With these fundamental facts in mind, any system of preserving females only
is inadequate. The aim should be to leave a definite number of breeding pairs to
survive. When the number of pups born at a birth is exactly known, from a given
stock of breeders, it will be possible to know the approximate product. The problem
would then resolve itself into the discovery of practical methods for insuring the
reservation of an ample breeding stock and making provision for its growth.
How this can be accomplished we are not prepared to say. The box-trap method
1 Seal and Salmon Fisheries and General Resources of Alaska, 1897, Vol. I, p. 411.
342 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
of capture, in some modified form, might attain the desired end. A certain definite
number of animals in pairs from the first foxes caught might be set apart as breeders,
which, being marked in some way, could be released if again caught. It may be that
a time limit, cut short enough to make it impossible to catch all the foxes, is the only
feasible one. The necessary protection to a breeding herd might be afforded by
exempting certain tracts of the island from the operations of the trappers. But we
offer these merely as suggestions.
It has further been attempted to provide artificial means for feeding the foxes.
A successful beginning in this regard was made on St. George Island during the sea-
son of 1896 by Mr. James Judge, who salted away in silos the superfluous seal car-
casses on the killing field, freshening the meat in the winter time and giving it out to
the animals. It was understood during the past season that the lessees would make
experiments on St. Paul Island in the same direction with artificial food of some sort.
Here again intention, while good, has clearly outrun adequate knowledge on the
subject. The question naturally arises whether it is necessary to thus provide food
for the foxes. We may note that during the nineteen years of which we have the
record given by Petroff the number of foxes taken averaged three and one-half times as
great as for the past seven years. We are not aware that any effort was made to
feed the foxes then, or that they did not have food enough. The decline in the fur-
seal herd has probably had nothing to do with the matter. The presence of the
bones and feathers of sea birds about the fox dens, and the broken egg shells along
the fox trails in summer when the killing grounds are covered with seal meat, clearly
shows that the chief diet of the foxes is not seal meat. In the autumn of 1896 the
foxes were known to have eaten dead pups on St. George, but a similar phenomenon
was not witnessed on St. Paul.
It appears from the early records that St. George has always furnished the
greater proportion of foxes, although always the smaller proportion of seals. As the
sea birds are far more numerous on St. George than on St. Paul, it would seem that
their flesh and eggs rather than seal meat is the regular diet of the fox while they
are to be had. The fox-runs on the islands all point toward some cliff or place
frequented by the sea birds.
Whatever may be said of these attempts to better the condition of the fox herd,
it must be borne in mind that they clearly recognize the two important factors of the
problem. Some plan must be adopted whereby a definite breeding herd is insured
and if possible enlarged. As this grows, artificial means of increasing the food
supply must be devised after the natural limit has been reached. The criticism
we have to offer is that an attempt has been made to apply methods and means of
protection without definite knowledge as to the facts and needs of the herd. Toa
monogamous animal, wholly confined to the land and bearing several young at a
birth, has been applied the regulation which was designed to serve an amphibious
animal, polygamous in its habits and bearing but a single young at birth. The
attempt to feed the animals by artificial means has been undertaken without definitely
knowing whether or not such a course was necessary.
What we wish to emphasize in this connection is the fact that a thorough study
of the natural history and breeding habits of the blue fox should precede any final
plan for its protection. With full knowledge of the problem to be dealt with, means
for solving it can be intelligently devised and effectively carried out.
NEED OF A NATURALIST IN CHARGE. 343
It has not been our purpose to give an exhaustive treatment either of the history
or habits of the blue fox, but to point out the necessity and desirability of a serious
and systematic study of the subject. As we have seen from the table of annua]
catches of foxes, for nineteen of the years of Russian control the average number of
skins was 1,800 a year. This number, at the rate which the lessees now pay the
natives for fox skins, would yield a sum of $9,000 annually, which is no insignificant
matter to the Government in providing for the natives. It is to be supposed also
that with proper management and care the output of the herd might be made still
greater than it has ever been in the past.
We have had occasion to recommend that the fur-seal herd be placed in charge
of a trained and capable naturalist, in order that its needs and possibilities may
become the object of systematic study and care. The problems connected with the
blue-fox herd demand equally such attention and furnish an additional field for
study.
XVI—MAMMALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
By FREDERICK W. TRUE.
The species of terrestrial mammals of the Pribilof Islands are so few in number
that they can scarcely be said to constitute a fauna. We find only a shrew, a
lemming, and a fox. The first two are closely allied to species on the American
mainland, and the fox is supposed to be a late introduction. The islands are com-
posed almost exclusively of volcanic materials, but certain fossil remains have been
found on St. Paul which are believed by some to indicate that their origin was not
entirely volcanic. However that may be, if the present mammals were derived from
a preexisting fauna we might properly expect them to differ more than they do from
the mainland forms. That they are very closely related would seem to indicate that
they are late arrivals from the mainland. The fox, as already stated, is believed to
be certainly such, and the same is probably true of the lemming and shrew.
It is a singular fact, however, that the lemming is confined to St. George Island
and the shrew to St. Paul.
The pinniped carnivora—the fur seal, sea lion, and walrus (now extirpated)—are
not peculiar to the islands, and no cetacean is known e frequent their shores
exclusively.
PRIBILOF SHREW.
* Sorex pribilefensis Merriam.
Sorex pribilofensis, Merriam, North American Fauna, 10, December 31, 1895, p. 87.
This beautiful little shrew is readily recognizable by its peculiar coloration, being
grayish sienna brown on the back and abruptly whitish on the sides and belly. The
white of the sides is tinged with buff, while that of the under surface is purer.! The
chin, throat, and feet are white and the tail is bicolored, brown above and white
below.
Dr. Merriam gives the following average dimensions of five individuals: Total
length, 4.13 inches (105™™); tail vertebra, 1.50 inches (34.5™™); hind foot, 0.52 inch
(13. 2mm), 2
The Pribilof shrew, so far as known, occurs only on St. Paul Island. Mr. Wil-
liam Palmer reported in 1890 that the natives considered it very abundant on the
1There is another American shrew, Sorex richardsoni, which is sharply tricolored, but this is a
species with the under parts dusky and washed into chestnut.
2Mr. William Palmer’s measurements of seven adults give 3.7 inches as the average total length.
345
346 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
north shore. He obtained no less than sixteen specimens, including both adults and
young. Dr. Merriam also obtained specimens in 1891. Mr. Prentiss and myself put
out traps for it many times, in 1895, but either for want of proper bait or for some other
reason did not capture any. By impressing the native boys into our service, however,
we obtained specimens. These were caught at the East Landing salt house near the
village of St. Paul.
I found two dead shrews on the low ground at the west end of village hill, and later
one was picked up alive on one of the hills north of the village during a seal drive
from Lukanin hauling ground. The natives report that they are often seen in the
water, and their tracks are to be found on the muddy shores of the village pond.
The shrew feeds on the seal carcasses and such insects as are obtainable. One
seen by Mr. Palmer in 1890 was feeding on whale blubber.
The young are noticeably duller in color than the adults, and the color of back
merges much more gradually into that of the belly. The feet and tail are more hairy,
and the hairs at the end of the tail form a long pencil.
A male taken June 22, 1890, is molting. Two males taken August 13, 1895, are
also in this condition, though it seems somewhat early for them to take on the winter
coat, if such itis. A female taken August 14, 1895, also shows traces of the molt.
In the skeleton the vertebre formula is as follows: c¢. 7. d. 13.1. 6.s. 5. ca. 14=45,
PRIBILOF LEMMING.
Lemmus nigripes (True).
Myodes nigripes, True, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., 17, No. 999. Advance sheet April 26, 1894.
‘The occurrence of a lemming mouse on St. George was reported by Elliott in 1875!
and also 1882? from notes made between 1872 and 1876. He identified it with the
Asiatic species, Lemmus obensis. Later, Mr. Charles H. Townsend collected two
specimens for the National Museum, and finding it apparently distinct from any
described species, I gave a diagnosis of it in 1894, under the name of L. nigripes.
The following is a repetition of the original diagnosis:
LEMMUS NIGRIPES (True).
Upper surfaces nearly uniform cinnamon-gray, without bands or spots. Sides, including the lower
part of the cheeks and neck, clear tawny brown. Under surfaces paler tawny, which tint is gradually
merged into the stronger color of the sides. Nose black. Fore feet black above, tawny below. Hind
feet black both above and below. Tail bicolored, black above, pale tawny below.
Dimensions (from dry skin; type).—Head and body 130™™; tail vertebrae, 13™™; hind foot
(without claw), 17.5™™.
Type.—No. 59152, U.S.N.M., male, St. George Island, Alaska. Collected by Charles H. Townsend,
August 18, 189(?).
The only specimens of this lemming I have seen are from St. George, and Elliott
in 1875 states that it was restricted to that island. Dr. Merriam also, in his enumera-
tion of the mammals of the Pribilofs, cites it as a species found “only on St. George.”?
Mr. Palmer’s manuscript record of 1890, however, contains the note “none seen on
St. Paul, though a few have been introduced.” In 1895 I saw at Northeast Point, St.
Report upon the Condition of Affairs in Alaska, 1875, p. 72.
2 Monogr. Seal Islands of Alaska, Special Bulletin U. 8. Fish Com. 176, 1882, p. 125.
3 See Abstract in Science, new series, I, p. 698, June 21, 1895. ;
THE MAMMALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 347
Paul, what appeared to be the droppings of this mouse, but as the circumstances
permitted only a hasty inspection of them, I may have been mistaken. It may be
stated positively that no specimens of the lemming are known from St. Paul, and if
the animal occurs there at all the fact remains to be demonstrated.
Mr. Elliott wrote as follows in 1875:
Aside from seal life on the Pribilof Islands, there are no indigenons mammalia, with the exception
of blue and white foxes and the lemming (Myodes obensis),' which latter is restricted, singularly
enough, to the island of St. George, where it is exceedingly abundant. Its burrows and paths under
and among the grassy hummocks and moasy flats literally checker every square rod of land there
covered with this vegetation; and although St. Paul Island lies but 29 miles to the northwest, not a
single one of these active curious little animals is found there.?
Mr. Palmer reported that though formerly abundant, they had become scarce in
1890. My own observation in 1895 led me to the same conclusion as regards the north
side. In the lichen-covered fields between the village and Staraya Artel their run-
ways were enormously abundant, but they were very largely deserted. Mr. Prentiss
labored faithfully during a sojourn of ten days on the island to obtain a series of spec-
imens, but only secured four. He reported, however, that on the south side of the
island, in the vicinity of Zapadni rookery there were numerous fresh runways, and
at one point he saw two lemmings running through them.
In 1896 and 1897 the scarcity of lemmings was very noticeable, but one specimen
being seen and none taken. This scarcity is attributable to the foxes, which are
abundant and devour the lemmings whenever possible.
The condition of knowledge regarding the American lemmings of the present
genus is not at all satisfactory. Richardson described two species from Arctic British
America, under the names of helvolus* and trimucronatus.* Middendorf considered
them both identical with M. obensis Brandt, in which opinion he was followed by
Coues.?
From the scanty material at command, it would appear that the American lem.
mings are certainly distinct from the Asiatic obensis, and that there are two species
besides the Pribilof form. Whether Richardsou’s two species are really distinct from
each other, and whether either are represented in the National Museum collection can
not be definitely determined at present. A form from the Arctic coast and from the
mouth of the Porcupine River, which appears to represent trimucronatus, is close to
the Pribilof species, differing anly, so far as can be determined, by its smaller size and
brownish rather than black feet. The island form may thus prove to be at most only
a subspecies of one of the mainland species.®
1 The shrew was not then known to exist there.
2 Report, 1875, pp. 72, 73.
3Fauna Boreali Amer. I, 1829, p. 128.
4Parry’s Second Voyage, Appendix, 1825, p. 309; 1. c., p. 130.
5 Coues and Allen, N. A. Rodentia, 1877, p. 240.
6Wagner also described an American species under the name of Myodes athogutarte. (See
Schreber’s Sdiugeth., Suppl., 3, 1843, p. 602.)
348 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
HOUSE MOUSE.
Mus musculus Linnaeus.
The house mouse is extremely abundant about the village of St. Paul and has
been noted by various observers also on St. George, though I did not observe it there
myself. As soon as the natives on St. Paul learned that I wanted specimens they
brought them in abundance, but not always in a condition to be preserved. The mouse
is a great pest in the houses. A colony of them invaded our laboratory, which was
established in one of the houses built for the use of the natives, and before we were
aware of it took up headquarters, with disastrous results, in a box of birds which Mr.
Prentiss had taken great pains to collect.
I am not aware that any record has been made of the date of introduction of the
mouse into the islands. Veniaminof in 1840 includes mice among the animals of
the islands, and presumably has reference to the present species. According to his
account it was introduced into the Aleutian Islands by the Russians. Mr, Elliott
includes it among the species observed by him between 1872 and 1876, but as it was
then common in the villages it must have arrived at a considerable earlier date. In
his report on Alaska, published in 1875, Mr. Elliott, referring to the Pribilof Islands,
remarks: “The islands are as yet free from rats, but mice have been brought long ago
in ships’ cargoes and are a great pest in the winter.” !
I saw nothing of rats while on the islands in 1895, but observe that Mr. Palmer
has noted that they arrive occasionally in ships, but do not breed. Veniaminof states
that the rat was introduced into Unalaska in 1828 by the ship Finland and increased
rapidly.
ARCTIC FOX (WHITE FOX AND BLUE FOX).
Vulpes lagopus (Linnaeus).
Next to the fur seal and the sea lion the fox is the most interesting mammal of
the Pribilof Islands. Oue is not long on the islands before making his acquaintance,
and his maneuvers are a continual source of interest. Now he will be seen trotting
along in the distance, turning neither to the right hand nor the left, and again he will
spring up almost from under one’s feet, giving utterance to his high-pitched and
querulous bark. There is something uncanny in the dogged persistence with which
he follows one’s footsteps, falling back and barking if one faces about and drawing
near again the instant one proceeds. I tovk paius on one occasion, when a fox had
been following me for some distance, to ascertain whether these little footpads could
be readily frightened away. I commenced by throwing large stones in the direction
of the animal, thinking to alarm it, but it merely drew aside to let the missiles pass,
and coutinued to bark at intervals, as before. Finally I aimed some rather smaller
stones directly at the fox, one of which struck it forcibly on the forehead. The fox
merely drew back a little and barked defiance, so I desisted, fearing that I might kill
the animal, which I had no wish to do. AsI proceeded the fox drew near again and
followed me to the boundary of his domain, for each fox, like his neighbor the bull
seal, seemed to have a definite territory which he regards as his own and upon which
he resented intrusion.
'Réport upon the Condition of Affairs in Alaska, 1875, p. 73.
THE MAMMALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. B49
On the hillside to the west of the Lagoon and over toward Lukanin I frequently
heard the harsh bark of the fox proceeding from among the piles of rock, and here
and there the little brown head of a cub would appear at the mouth of a burrow.
All about these burrows were scattered fragments of sea birds’ bones, of skulls and
limbs of fur-seal pups, and other similar relics of repasts. Once I observed a fox
trotting along toward its burrow with a fresh fur-seal placenta in its mouth, and foxes
may be frequently seen on the outskirts of the rookeries hunting for placentas.
During the summer all these articles, as well as birds’ eggs, are eaten by the foxes,
but in winter they lead a somewhat precarious existence and subsist largely on sea
urchins (Strongylocentrotus drobachiensis), which they obtain at low water. During
the fall of 1896 the foxes devoured all the seal pups which had perished of starvation
caused by pelagic sealing.
The fields all over the islands are traversed by fox trails, and many lead up and
down across the face of the precipitous cliffs that bound the islands at different points.
All the foxes I saw on St. Paul were of the brown or so-called “blue” variety.
Of the whole number of about 300 taken on that island in any one year not more than
a dozen are white. Mr. Palmer reported in 1890 that of 800 or 1,000 taken on St.
George annually not more than 30 or 35 were white.
The fox is slow in changing the winter coat and presents a ragged appearance
throughout June, though retaining some patches here and there of the long winter
fur. The tail remains unchanged after the molt is completed on the body, and by its
faded color and the density of the fur presents a curious appearance.
The largest blue fox obtained by Mr. Palmer in 1890 had a total length of 374
inches. This was a female. Two adult males measured 36 inches and 343 inches,
respectively.
Mr. J. B. Crowley, special agent of the Treasury, reported in 1895 as follows:
The past winter [1894-95] was an exceptionally long and severe one at the seal islands. There
was more snow fall than usual and the ice remained attached to the shores much later than common.
The result was that food for blue foxes became very scarce and many of them starved to death.
Special Agent Ziebach on St. George Island bought food in such quantities as he could procure and
fed to the foxes that came to the village in search of food, and in this manner averted the death of
many that would have otherwise perished. No foxes were trapped on the islands during the past
winter.!
Veniaminof in 1840 commented as follows upon the foxes on the Pribilof Islands:
Blue foxes are confined to the Pribilof Islands, on St. George especially, where they annually
kill about 1,500. -It is said that when these islands were first discovered there was naught but blue
foxes there of most excellent quality; but a few winters afterwards came white foxes, which breed
very rapidly, and in a great measure spoiled the fur; that now the fur which once was called blue is
called smoky.’
Of late years some effort has been made to attract the foxes to the village by.
placing out food for them, and the white ones have been shot.
In 1896 and 1897 Mr. Judge, the Treasury agent, had the bodies of seals salted
in order to feed the foxes during the winter, and in 1897, owing to the scarcity of seals
on St. George, it was necessary to bring bodies from St. Paul.
1 Senate Doc. 137, Pt. I, Fifty-fourth Congress, first session, 1896, pp. 31, 32.
2 Condition of Affairs in Alaska, p. 258.
350 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
FUR SEAL.
Callotaria ursina (Linnaeus).
As the natural history of the fur seal forms the basis of discussion in this whole
report, and is furthermore spread over the pages of numberless other reports bearing
on the fur-seal question, I shall refrain from any attempt to summarize it here. No
one who has seen the great seal herds will hesitate to reckon them among the chief
wonders of the world, and there is no naturalist who would not think himself well repaid
for a journey half around the earth by the sight of them, were it but for a few days.
Nowhere else, I presume, is an equal body of large wild animals to be found which
can be observed at close range in their natural surroundings from day to day and
week to week without danger to the observer or fear in the observed.
STELLER’S SEA LION.
Eumetopias stelleri (Lesson).
I had but a few opportunities of observing the sea lion at close range while on the
Pribilof Islands in 1895, and can add little, therefore, to Mr. Elliott’s elaborate
description of its natural history, published in 1882.)
The great northern sea lion is an animal more grotesque and fully as interesting
as the fur seal, but its reduced numbers at the present day and the general inaccessi-
bility of its stations render detailed observation of the species more difficult.
On St. Paul the main station is at Northeast Point, and on St. George at Tolstoi
Point and the East rookery. In 1895 a few resorted to Gorbatch Bay, Kitovi rookery,
and other points on St. Paul Island, lying on the rocks at the water’s edge. They
appeared to be females. They were very conspicuous among the black basaltic rocks
and the dark fur seals on account of their light color, which on sunny days appeared
white by contrast.
At the Kast rookery, St. George Island, the old bulls and harems mingled at the
water’s edge with the fur seals, but neither gave the slightest leed to the other, the
buil sea lions dozing contentedly on the beach, while the fur seals passed to and fro,
seeking the water or returning to the rookery. Many of the bull sea lions at this
point take up their stations near the shore in the shallow water, which covers them
to the shoulders. Viewed from the neighboring heights, they presented the appear-
ance of so many casks half covered by the waves.
I surprised the group at Northeast Point, St. Paul Island, at quite near quarters,
and succeeded in photographing them with a snap-shot camera, but the females
quickly scented danger and plunged into the waves with a great splash, followed by
the bulls.
The movements of the bulls on land are awkward and labored to an extreme
degree. Their great weight, though easily sustained in the water, oppresses them
when on land and renders them almost helpless. Mr. Elliott affirms that they can be
driven but 2 miles in twenty-four hours.
Fifty large males were killed in June, 1890, by the natives, and the skins of six of
the largest were measured by Mr. Palmer, with the following results, the measure-
1U. 8. Fish Com. Special Bull. 176, 1882, A Monograph of the Seal Islands of Alaska, pp. 84-92.
THE MAMMALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 351
ments being from the tip of the nose to the root of the tail: No. 1, 10 feet 7 inches;
No. 2, 10 feet; No. 3, 10 feet; No. 4, 10 feet 3 inches; No. 5, 10 feet 2 inches; No. 6, 9
feet 10 inches.
Mr. Palmer obtained a male on Walrus Island June 13, 1890, which measured 11
feet 1 inch in total length. Regarding this bull, Mr. Palmer furnishes the following
note:
While on Walrus Island on June 13 I noticed that several small rocks about 40 yards from
the main island were literally covered with sea lions. One old bull occupied the center, six or
seven smaller ones, probably females, surrounded him, and some twenty-five of all sizes occupied
every other available space. Upon my-trying to creep within gunshot, the smaller sea lions rapidly
plunged into the water, followed -by the others, until, as I neared the water, none but the old bull
remained. He slowly raised himself and looked around, and while doing so received two shots in the
neck, which hastened his movements, but before he could leave the rock a lucky shot from my rifle
through the base of the brain stretched him lifeless.
The skins of the sea lion are still employed, to a limited extent, for covering the
large bidaras or skin boats. The frames of these: boats are made of wood, formerly
lashed, but now mainly nailed and bolted together, and over these the skin covering
is tightly stretched. See Pl. XXXI. The skin is-oiled and is carefully removed at
the end of the season. Bidaras are used by the North American Commercial Com-
pany for transferring the seal skins from the warehouses to the steamer, and tor gen-
eral lightering purposes. They are not so heavy as a wooden boat, and have also this
advantage, that if they strike a rock, as not infrequently happens, the bidara gives
to the blow and receives no injury, when a wooden boat would be caused to leak.
THE HARBOR SEAL.
Phoca largha Pallas (?).
The hair seal found about the islands has generally been regarded as the common
Phoca vitulina, but in a recent communication before the Biological Society of Wash-
ington, Dr. Merriam has shown that it differs in some respects from that species, and
is probably to be identified with the P. largha of Pallas. According to Dr. Merriam’s
statements, though extremely like P. vitulina and preseuting, in like manner, two color
phases, it is larger and exhibits certain peculiarities, of which the most salient relate
to the form of the teeth and the premaxillary bones. In P. vitulina the lower pre-
molar and molar have usually four cusps each, but in the Pribilof seal three. Again,
in P. vitulina the upper extremities of the premaxillae merely touch the sides of the
nasals, while in the Pribilof seal they run along the sides of those bones for a con-
siderable distance.
Solitary representatives of this seal were seen by myself on the rocks in Gorbatch
Bay, St. Paul, in 1895, and at other points, and they were more numerous on the rocks
of Southwest Bay, but their headquarters is on the north shore. Three young ones
were brought to the village.
RIBBON SEAL.
Histriophoca fasciata (Zimm.).
A young female of this species was taken by one of the sealers 84 miles west of:
St. Paul in August, 1896, so that it may be regarded as a probable occasional visitant
to the Pribilofs.
352 THE. FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
BOWHEAD WHALE.
Balana mysticetus Linnaeus.
Bones of the bowhead are numerous about the islands, particularly at Northeast
Point. I made the following measurements of a right mandible on the beach north
of Lukanunon:
Ft. In
Total length (straight). ...-...-.. 2-2-2. -- 2-20 eee cee eee eee eee eee 18 8
Length along outer curve .......-...----- Cage itera ce Woe he Ses Soe es See 20 4
Greatest depth of the proximal end.......-------- ------ e202 eens eee eee 2 0
Depth at the middle of length.......--2-. .-.--- ----0- -- eee eee eee eee 1 3
Depth 1 foot from distal end -.....-.-----. 2220 0-2 - en een eee ee ee eee eens 1 4
Diameter of incisive foramen, 7 by 5 inches.
The left mandible, presumably of the same individual, lay near by, but was much
weathered. :
Iu the right mandible the internal groove started from the lower margin of the
incisive foramen as a shallow trough, about 1 inch broad, and curved down toward the
lower margin of the jaw, becoming a narrow line inclosing a narrow channel fully 1
inch deep. It ran along close to the lower margin for three-fourths the length of the
jaw and then forked, and, becoming more and more shallow, was finally lost. The
coronoid process was represented only by a faint swelling of the margin.
The bones on the beaches are from dead whales which wash up from time to. time
in winter.
One stranded on St. George in 1889, and about 1,500 pounds of whalebone, accord-
ing to Mr. Palmer, were obtained from it by the natives, who received $1 a pound
from the company. Another came ashore the same year near East Landing, on
St. Paul. The mass of cervical vertebra and a number of ribs were still there in
1895. I also found a portion of a skull imbedded in Zoltoi Sands, which may have
been of the same individual.
LARGE FINBACK WHALE.
Balenoptera velifera (Cope).
The hind part of a skull of a large finback, which may be this species, was found
by Mr. Prentiss and myself on the shore of the lagoon in 1895. The greatest breadth
across the temporals was 6.35 feet. The height of the occipital from the upper margin
of the foramen magnum to the nasals was 3.15 feet.
I saw nothing of these whales about the Pribilof Islands in the summer of 1895,
but when returning homeward observed them in large numbers on September 3 along
the south coast of Kadiak. Mr. Palmer remarked in 1890: ‘* Not common about the
islands in summer, but a number were seen after leaving St. George for the south on
August 11. A dead one was stripped of its ‘bone’ on St. Paul last winter.”
DAVIDSON’S LESSER RORQUAL.
Balenoptera davidsoni Scammon.
The bones of a small finback belonging without doubt to this species! were found
at Rocky Point, St. Paul. There were 27 in all—the seventh cervical, 11 dorsals, and
15 lumbars and caudals.
‘If distinct from the B. acuto-rostrata of the Atlantic, which Van Beneden denied.
THE MAMMALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 353
KILLER WHALE.
Orca gladiator (%)
The skull of a killer was brought from St. Paul Island in 1895 by Mr Charles H.
Townsend, obtained from a specimen which came ashore to the south of Hutchinsons
Hill. Many nominal species of killers have been established, but it has not yet been
demonstrated whether there are really several or only one.
I saw two killers on one occasion quite close inshore at St. Paul in 1895. In 1890
Mr. Palmer wrote: ‘‘A few seen about the islands in May and early in summer. They
return in August. We saw quite a number on August 12 between St. George and
Unalaska.”
Most of the natives have seen killers chasing sea lions, and have seen both sea
lions and killers strand on the rocky shore. The majority of the killers seen had a
large whitish blotch on each side of the back, immediately behind the dorsal. In no
case was this blotch pure white, though the center and upper part of it was always
lighter than the sides. The tip of the dorsal in no case turned over.
HARBOR PORPOISE.
Phocena communis Lesson.
A few bones of a small porpoise, apparently of this species, were picked up at
St. Paul June 3, 1890, and two small schools were seen on the harbor at Unalaska
May 20 and 21, the same year. A specimen of this species was obtained by Mr.
Charles H. Townsend at Captains Harbor, Unalaska, August 17, 1895.
The range of several other cetaceans, as given by Scammon, would include the
Pribilof Islands. These are the California gray whale, Rhachianectes glaucus, the
humpback, Megaptera versabilis, the right whale, Balena sieboldit (2), and the right
whale: porpoise, Tursio borealis. As regards the humpback, Scammon remarks:
“The last seen of them in high latitudes by whalemen is on their return from the
Arctic Ocean, when they are found in the vicinity of St. Paul Island, Bering Sea, in
the month of October, and these are usually very large.”! Elliott also cites the
Humpback as occurring about the Pribilof Islands, but says there are “a few only.”?
SPECIES EXTERMINATED.
Sea Otter.—Sea otters occurred in great numbers on the Pribilof Islands at the
time of their discovery, but were soon extirpated. Elliott states that they were all
gone in eight or nine years. I note, however, that Veniaminoff reported them as
“scarce generally in 1811, and in the next thirty years extinct.”
In the report of Treasury Agent McIntyre in 1875 an account is given of the
appearatice of the schooner Cygnet off St. George in September, 1874, and the captain
is reported as claiming ‘‘that he was looking for a kelp patch to the west of the
island, where he expected to find otter in abundance.”* How much reliance can be
placed. on such an intimation is uncertain.
1Marine Mammalia, 1874, p. 68.
2Monograph of the Seal Islands, 1882, p. 125.
3Seal fisheries of Alaska, House Doc. No. 83, Forty-fourth Congress, first session, 1876, p. 124.
5947— Pr 3. 23
354 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Nothing was seen of sea otters in 1890 by Mr. Palmer. In 1892 Mr. Townsend
picked up a skull from the beach at St. Paul, and this is now in the National Museum.
There is also another skull in the Museum from the Pribilofs, without definite record.
In 1896 Mr. Lucas learned that a sea otter had been found on the beach near Rocky
Point, St. Paul, in the spring of that year.
Walrus.—W alrus formerly occurred on the Pribilof Islands, and in large numbers
at first, if we may believe the Russian agent, Sarytschew (quoted by Elliott and
Allen), who stated that they “formerly resorted in summer in large numbers to St.
Paul and St. George islands, where 28,000 pounds of their teeth were obtained in a
single year.”! He reports, however, that they were all gone from these islands in
1805.
Veniaminof in 1840 includes “a few walrus” among the animals belonging to the
Pribilof Islands. These were presumably on Walrus Island, where they still occurred
as late as 1890. In that year Mr. William Palmer went to Walrus Island in the hope
of getting specimens for the National Museum. He saw eight then, but obtained none,
and they were reported all killed the following season.
During my sojourn on St. Paul in 1895 I noted that the bones were very abun-
dant, especially at Northeast Point, and in 1890 Mr. Palmer found the natives digging
in the low sand bluff near Webster House, as opportunity occurred, for the sake of
the tusks, which they sold to the company for about 20 cents per pound. I dug
about there a good deal myself in 1895, but found no skulls with tusks.
I saw a pair of tusks, however, in the possession of. Dr. Voss, which were obtained
there, and a few others were procured in 1897.
Red Fox and Polar Bear.—These animals are said to be occasionally brought to
the islands on the ice in winter. I saw nothing of the red fox in 1895, and Mr. Palmer
reported in 1890 that not more than six or seven had been taken in twenty years.
} Allen, J. A., North American Pinnipeds, 1880, p. 176.
SCHNATR We
24,
25.
26.
27.
28.
29,
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
XVII.—THE AVIFAUNA OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
. Phalacrocorax urile.
Merganser americanus.
. Harelda hyemalis.
Histrionicus histrionicus.
. Eniconetta stelleri.
Somateria v-nigra.
Nettion carolinense.
. Anas penelope.
. Anas boschas.:
. Anser albifrons gambeli.
. Branta canadensis minima.
. Philacte canagica.
. Olor columbianus.
. Diomedea albatrus.
. Fulmarus glacialis rodgersii.
. Oceanodroma furcata.
. Gavia adamsii,
. Gavia arctica.
. Colymbus holbeellii.
. Lunda cirrhata,
. Fratercula corniculata.
. Cyclorrhynchus psittaculus.
23.
Simorhynchus cristatellus.
Simorhynchus pusillus.
Synthliboramphus antiquus.
Cepphus columba.
Uria troile californica.
Uria lomvia arra.
Stercorarius pomarinus.
Stercorarius parasiticus.
Stercorarius longicaudus.
Larus schistisagus.
Larus glaucescens.
Larus barrovianus.
Pagophila alba.
.
By WILLIAM PALMER.
CHECK LIST OF THE SPECIES.
36.
37,
39.
41,
42.
43.
44,
45.
46.
47.
48,
50.
51.
53.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
38.
40.
49.
52.
dd,
Rissa tridactyla pollicaris.
Rissa brevirostris.
Xema sabinii.
Sterna paradisea.
Grus canadensis,
Crymophilus fulicarius,
Phalaropus lobatus.
Tringa ptilocnemis.
Tringa maculata.
Tringa damacensis.
Ereunetes pusillus.
Limosa lapponica baueri.
Totanus flavipes.
Heteractitis incanus.
Numenius hudsonicus.
Numenius borealis.
Charadrius dominicus fulvus.
AXgialitis semipalmata.
Arenaria interpres.
Halixetus leucocephalus alascensis.
Falco rusticolus gyrfalco.
Falco peregrinus anatum.
Asio accipitrinus.
Nyctea nyctea.
Cuculus canorus telephonus.
Merula migratoria.
Anthus pensilvanicus.
Anorthura alascensis. ;
Hirundo erythrogastra unalaschkensis.
Ammodramus sandwichensis.
Calcarius lapponicus alascensis.
Passerina townsendi.
Acanthis linaria.
Leucosticte griseonucha.
INTRODUCTION.
This list has been prepared partly from my own experience and collections on the
islands from May 27 to August 11, 1890, and partly from the published results of the
visits of Mr. Henry W. Elliott in 1872-73 and 1876; also from such other matter as I
355
356 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
“have been able to glean from the literature, the collections in the United States
National Museum, and from the naturalists who have visited the group in recent
years. I have attempted to give a full measure of credit in all cases, with reference
to the actual specimens when any are known to exist. Nearly all of these I have
seen. The chapters on Migration and Distribution seem pertinent to an understanding
of the avifauna of these islands and are offered as suggestive for future work in the
region.
As to the systematic arrangement, I must confess my responsibility. I have
begun the list with what appears to me the lowest and most generalized type—the
cormorant. Not only upon general physiological grounds, but upun the purely
morphological one of the nature and development of the feathers have I considered
this group the lowest of the birds given in the list. At the other extreme, the higher
and more specialized, I have placed the Fringillida. Several reasons might be
advanced for this, but the following may suffice here: As in botanical science the
Spermatophyta are, geologically and chronologically speaking, the higher and most
recent, so in birds the seed eaters and their allies are necessarily, in point of time,
the most recent, and as a group more highly specialized. In an evolutional sense
they have kept pace with the general development of the higher botanical groups,
even specializing to a very high degree in their food-getting habits. If the vegetation
of the world had never advanced beyond a pteridophytan stage, it is difficult to
imagine the development of the Conirostres; nevertheless the insectivorous birds
would have beeu prominent. The arrangement in such a small list of the intermediate
groups is not so satisfactory. Tbe value of the purely nonfunctional and almost non-
adaptive characters of the neossoptiles' and mesoptiles,! when they are better known
and have been comparatively studied, may aftord a clearer insight into the relation-
ships of genetic groups as well as of the lowest members of the various orders. The
taxonomic values of the neossoptiles may be indicated as follows: In Phalacrocorax
they are almost entirely dissociated externally with the mesoptiles. The rachis is
short and weak, and the rami connect with it in an uneven manner. In the Anatide
the rachis is strong and long, and the connection with it of the rami is regular. These
neossoptiles are carried for a time on the tips of the new growing mesoptiles, either on
the flight feathers by a strong connection with the enlarged tip of the rachis of the
mesoptile, or on the body feathers on the united tips of the rami and weakened rachis.
In all the other groups the neossoptiles divide, have no rachis, and are carried singly
on the tips of the rami of the growing mesoptile. In the higher groups this division
into single parts is usually prevented by a band formed of a persistent portion of the
sheath. Correlated with the above are other conditions, such as the condition at
hatching, the duration of growth or nongrowth either of these feather structures or
of the basal portion of the neossoptile, the period and time of further changes, etc.
There is no consistent practice concerning the use of the comma between the
specific part of a name and the name of the authority or citer. I have used the
comma only to indicate the fact that the author following is the user and not the
authority or original describer.
To Mr. Robert Ridgway and Dr. C. W. Richmond, curator and assistant curator
of the Department of Birds of the National Museum, my thanks are due for many
courtesies in connection with examining the specimens and literature. To Mr. F. A.
‘Page 424,
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 357
Lucas Iam under deep obligation for many favors. To Mr. Henry W. Elliott I am
especially indebted for much assistance, specimens and notes, when on the islands,
together with kind attentions during exceptionally unfortunate circumstances, as well
as for his published notes.
Necessarily this list is incomplete, as the winter-occurring birds have been little
noted. Under each species will be found a synonymy as far as it relates to the islands
and with the addition of the names from several general works, such as the Bird
Catalogues of the British Museum, the American Ornithological Union’s Check List
of 1895, Coues’ Key of 1890, and Ridgway’s Manual of 1896.
THE TOPOGRAPHY OF THE ISLANDS, ORNITHOLOGICALLY CONSIDERED,
I have simply confined myself to an account of the topography as it influences
the summer distribution of the birds.
The Pribilof group consists of four small islands, St. Paul, Otter, and Walrus
Island constituting a subgroup, St. George another. The subgroups differ mark-
edly in appearance and size, and though evidently of the same volcanic origin, being
simply rocky uplifts through which volcanoes have broken, and with a more or less
special surface deposit of lava and volcanic cinders, may be of somewhat different
age; and certain circumstances of life distribution would seem to warrant the opinion
that they have never since they were uplifted been united.
St. Paul.—This is the largest and most important. It is 13 miles long from
Northeast Point to the Reef and about 9 miles wide. The area given by Elliott, who
first surveyed the group, is 33 square miles. The character of the surface is rolling,
with many rounded hills of volcanic cinders and a few with rugged, weathered sum-
mits. Usually a crater or two is found at or about the centers of these hills and are
often filled with snow or water. About these elevations, which do not exceed 600 feet,
birds are very scarce. Much of the flat surface consists of huge masses of rocks,
which were once uplifted and broken and are now almost completely covered with a
dense carpet of flowering plants, mosses, and lichens, mixed in indescribable confusion.
In some places it is possible to descend between these rocks for 8 or 10 feet and even
to lunch on the coarse, granular ice snow to be found there. The cinder débris from
the hills has covered a great extent of these rocks, and inland along the shores the
drifting sands from the beaches have also had a large share in producing a flatness
which enables one to journey almost entirely around the island with some comfort,
even much of it being accessible to teams. On the slopes and lower grassy places
the Lapland longspur is abundant; about the tundra and small rocky cliffs and
gorges the Pribilof snowflake is to be found, while practically all over the tundra the
Pribilof sandpiper makes its sammer home. Between the slopes at many places are
ponds of water of varying sizes, while along the entire eastern side numerous ponds or
lakes occur at intervals, many caused by the throwing up by the sea of sand barriers,
while others seem due to steam eruptions from the now extinct volcanic forces. About
these ponds waders and waterfowl generally are found, sometimes in great numbers.
The oldsquaw duck makes her nest in their vicinity and leads her young to take their
first lessons in swimming on their surface. A few mallards and northern phalaropes
also nest in their neighborhood. At intervals all around the shores bold headlands
jut into the sea and are connected by magnificent, curved stretches of fine, compact
sandy beaches, back of which is an extensive area of dry, loose sand, with patches of
358 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
grasses, sedges, and wild peas, together with pieces of driftwood and occasional bones
of cetaceans. Occupying the land side of the more extensive of these sandy areas
are many, mostly grass-grown, sand dunes, some in process of demolition by the winds,
and all increasing or decreasing in size and shape as its varying velocity or direction
compels. The headlands, always rocky, generally have cliffs from 2 or 3 to 60 feet
in height, the bases of which are constantly washed by the ever-present surf. The
bold and exceedingly broken faces of these cliffs furnish innumerable crevices and
shelves in and on which various species of waterfowl breed and roost in great numbers.
These cliffs are generally capped by cinder deposits. In other places, where the rocky
shores are flat for some distance, numerous huge rounded bowlders have been pushed
up by ice pressure until they are mostly above high tide. Under these the choochkie
(and a few of other species) lays its solitary egg and is always to be found in compact
little flocks perched on their summits. At the southern end of the island, but opening
on the west side, is an extensive flat, sandy area—the only one of the kind on the
group—in which the tide ebbs and flows, and which is known as the Lagoon. On its
beaches during the summer the Pribilof sandpiper flocks in numbers, gulls and ducks
are always to be found, and later the migrating swarms rest and feed in and about its
waters.
Otter Island.—This is a small copy of its relative, St. Paul, from which it is dis-
tant about 6 miles south-southwest. It is rather more than a mile in length and
about half a mile in width. Three sides fronting to the sea consist of bold, rocky cliffs
ranging to some 300 feet in height. On the north side, toward St. Paul, is a small
rocky beach, back of which is a small pond. From this pond the ground slopes
upward to the crest of the cliffs. Here occurs most of the species found breeding on
St. Paul, and, besides, a colony of fulmars, which are only to be found elsewhere,
on St. George. Mr. C. H. Townsend, in June, 1895, collected here many specimens
of fourteen species, breeding and migratory, including an addition to the American
avifauna, Tringa damacensis.
Walrus Island.—Seven miles eastward of Northeast Point, on St. Paul, lies an
exceedingly rugged huge rock on which in summer innumerable individuals of com-
paratively few species of birds breed and roost. The central portion is an irregular
plateau some 40 feet above sea level. (PI. XX XVIII, fig. 1.) Its edges either end in
bold cliffs or slope in a series of shelves to the shore line. On the lower and more exten-
sive of these shelves are numerous rounded and much-crowded huge bowlders (PI.
XXXVIII, fig. 4), while almost entirely around the island low shelves of rock extend
irregularly for some distance seaward, and which are always covered at high and but
slightly uncovered at low water. The only vegetation are some clumps of grass and a
few other plants on the central higher portion. The area is about 5 acres, the length
about a quarter of a mile, the greatest width less than 80 yards. The various species
oceupy definite portions, and practically all available space is utilized by the breeding
birds. Under the bowlders the horned puffin and paroquet auk breed in numbers, and
on the cliffs of the southern end both species of kittiwakes nest in colonies. Upon
the central portion of the plateau, at its southern end, several hundred nests of the
glaucous-winged gull are to be seen, and a few of the larger Point Barrow gull. These
nests are built but a few feet apart, are large, and their surroundings are invariably
clean, in great contrast to the nesting sites of other species. From the edge of the
bluffs and extending all over the available space from the shore line to the gull nests
are to be found the large, strongly marked, and often gaudily colored eggs of the
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 359
oe
murres, Uria lomvia arra, and U. troile californica. (Pls. XX XVIII, XX XIX.) They
keep apart. In 1890 the first named occupied the western side, while the other, the
slender-billed and paler-colored bird, swarmed on the western side. An idea of their
numbers is shown in the following extract from Elliott: ‘On the occasion of one visit,
and my first one fhere, July 5, 1872, six men loaded a bidara at Walrus Islet, capa-
ble of carrying 4 tons exclusive of our crew, down to the water’s edge with eggs in
less than three working hours.” Thousands and thousands of these birds breed here
close together, almost touching each other, constantly quarreling, even fighting; com-
ing and going; while overhead the large gulls and more delicate kittiwakes are
hovering on quivering wing or protecting the vicinity of their nests from the crowding
swarms of the murres. At intervals entirely around the island are solitary or small
colonies of nests of the red-faced cormorant built in niches on the larger shelves.
(Pl. XX XVIII, figs. 3, 4.) As the cormorant comes early, it is able to select and
maintain its position, but the murres crowd closely about its home.
St. George.—Unlike St. Paul, this island has an exceedingly bold, rocky shore
line with no sand beaches, and but three small places worthy the name of a beach.
“The island itself is a trifle over 10 miles in extreme length, east and west, and about
44 miles in greatest width, north and south. * * * There are several small reser-
voirs of fresh water—I can scarcely call them lakes—on this island; pools, rather,
that the wet sphagnum seems to always keep full, and from which drinking water in
abundance is everywhere found. At Garden Cove a small stream, the only one on
the Pribilof group, empties into the sea. St. George has an area of about 27 square
miles.”—(Zlliott.) Standing on the deck of the steamer anchored off the village of
St. George and facing the shore, one sees on his right the eastern end of a great cliff
which extends around the western end of the island, with an elevation of from 75 to
900 feet for some 14 miles. The sea washes its base for its entire length, but the force
of the waves is considerably broken by a multitude of huge, rounded bowlders, the
débris of former parts of the cliffs. The base of the cliff is basaltic, hard and durable,
but above the rock is less compact and is fractured into innumerable crevices and
holes; and generally a rough stratification is noticeable—the shelves—which are parallel
to the surface of the water. These crevices and shelves afford innumerable nesting
sites for myriads of birds, which crowd every available space, are constantly coming .
and going, quarreling and shifting, screaming,and even dying. Back from the cliff
toward the village is an immense area of rolling, sloping ground thickly studded with
huge masses of rock which lie in every possible position, and under which, deep down
in their recesses, myriads of the least auklet breed. Some twelve species only make
these places their summer home, but the numbers of individuals of several of these
may well challenge the admiration of the world. During early morning and late even-
ing their numbers are incalculable. For hours they swarm about the cliffs, the adjacent
land and sea, in indescribable numbers and confusion. Similar conditions prevail
almost entirely around the island. Inland the surface is rolling, with valleys and hills
deeper and higher than on St. Paul, but of the same general aspect. The same species
as on that island occur on these uplands, but another, the smallest bird of the group,
is found about the cliffs, the little Aleutian wren, which is not found ou any of the
other islands. On the south side of St. George large colonies of the fulmar breed,
which, outside of a few on Otter Island, is its only summer home on the group. In
all else the avifauha agrees practically with that of St. Paul.
360 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
THE ORNITHOLOGICAL HISTORY OF THE ISLANDS.
I have had little opportunity for looking up ancient references to the birds. They
are but meager and fragmentary. Coinde in 1860 made a list of but nine species that
were collected by an officer of the Russian navy, Mr. Warneck, in 1852. The jealous
care exercised by the Russians for the preservation of the seals prevented any out-
siders from studying the avifauna, so that it was not until the islands passed under
the control of this Government, and Mr. Elliott made his investigations, that any great
effort was made to study the bird life. Dr. W. H. Dall had indeed in 1868 spent a
short time at the islands and, together with the officers of his surveying vessel, had
collected some specimens, one of which was described as new by Prof. S. F. Baird,
but the first systematic investigation was made by Mr. Henry W. Elliott. The result
of this gentleman’s work was a list of 40 species, based on copious notes and numerous
specimens which were named and elaborated by Dr. Elliott Coues in Mr. Elliott’s
report for 1873,and which was reprinted in 1875. Mr. Elliott made another more
extensive elaboration in his monograph of the seal islands in 1882. Besides the
above, various other Government expeditions which have visited the waters of Bering
Sea for different reasons during the past sixteen years have generally touched at the
seal islands and given several naturalists opportunities for collecting and noting the
bird life. Thus, Mr. L. M. Turner in 1878, Dr. T. H. Bean in 1880, Mr. E. W. Nelson
in 1881, Lieut. J. E. Lutz in 1884, Mr. C. H. Townsend in 1885 to 1896, myself in 1890,
Messrs. I’, W. True and D. W. Prentiss, jr., in 1895, Mr. I’. A. Lucas in 1896-97 have
spent from a day or two to several months on theislands. The results I have brought
together in the following list. Besides, several employees of the sealing companies
and several Treasury agents have collected and preserved some specimens, though
few of them have been noted in publications or are available for study. The specimens
collected by the naturalists of the various Government expeditions were deposited in
the collection of the National Museum, of which they are now a part. The following
list is based on them; but of many of the species a better series would have been
more acceptable, Of many but a single specimen is available, while of many more
only the observations of the collectors have been the means of incorporating the
species in the list. Mr. Elliott translated for his 1873 report the following bird note
from Bishop Veniaminof’s work, Zapieska ob Octrovah Oonahlashkenskaho Otdayla,
1840: i
Birds: The guillemots (or arries); gulls; puffins; crested, horned, and white-breasted auks; snow
finches; geese (two kinds); a few kinds of Tringa; sea ducks, black and gray. Most of these birds
come here to lay, and with them jégers, hawks, owls, and “chikecs” (big Larus glaucus), and the
albatross is frequently to be seen around the beaches.
Mr. Elliott has enumerated 41 species in his various lists, 3 were added by Mr.
Townsend in 1885, 3 others were collected by Messrs. True and Prentiss in 1895, Mr.
Lucas added another in 1897, and I am responsible for 21 others, thus bringing the
total to 69.
EXAMINATION OF STOMACHS.
I preserved a number of stomachs of many of the species, which were turned over
to the Division of Biological Survey of the Department of Agriculture. Dr. ©. H.
Merriam, the chief of that division, has kindly permitted Mr. Sylvester D. J udd, one
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 361
of his assistants, to examine them for this paper, and the results are given under the
species with Mr. Judd’s initials attached. A few were examined by myself on the
islands, in which cases my own initials follow. Mr. Judd speaks as follows of his
examination:
The birds, principally sparrows and shore birds, collected by Mr. W. Palmer on the Pribilof
Islands during the summer of 1890, had lived for the most part upon insects, although mollusks, seeds,
and berries had occasionally been resorted to. The food of these birds is very different from that of
birds along the eastern coast of the United States in that it consists in its greater part of flies. Some
beetles were eaten, but not to nearly such an extent as would have been commonly expected. Little
pieces of red and black porous lava were found among the mineral matter contained in the stomachs,
plainly indicating the volcanic origin of the collecting ground. Of the 32 stomachs examined, 6 were
Pacific godwits; one of these contained hundreds of specimens of an exceedingly rare beetle.
The chilly damp nights are doubtless responsible for much of the fly food.
VALID SPECIES WHICH HAVE BEEN DESCRIBED AS NEW FROM THE GROUP TYPES
IN THE UNITED STATES NATIONAL MUSEUM COLLECTION,
TROGLODYTES ALASCENSIS Baird. Trans. Chic. Ac. Sci. i, 1869, 315, pl. 30, fig. 3. Type, No. 54447
im. g, U.S.N.M. Coll. August 17, 1868, St. George Island, W. H. Dall. A species confined to the
Aleutians, and to St. George.
TRINGA PTILOCNEMIS Coues. In Elliott’s Report, Seal Islands, Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 182.
Type, No. 64249 ad. [3] 9?, U.S.N.M.Coll. July 22, 1873, St. George Island, H. W. Elliott. A
species confined in summer to the Pribilofs, and to St. Matthew’s Island.
PASSERINA TOWNSENDI (Ridgway). Manual of N. Am. Birds, 1887, 403. Type, No. 106695 ad. ¢;
U.S.N.M. Coll. June 8, 1885, Otter Island, C. H. Townsend. A species confined to the Pribilof,
Aleutian, and Commander islands.
CALCARIUS LAPPONICUS ALASCENSIS Ridgway. Auk, 1898,320. Type, No. 118904 ad. ¢ U.S.N.M. Coll.
Juned, 1890, St. Paul Island, William Palmer. Residentin Alaska and intergrading to the eastward
with lapponicus. 2
SPECIES DESCRIBED AS NEW, BUT WHICH HAVE PROVED SYNONYMS.
Larus WaRNECKI Coinde, Rev. et Mag. Zool. 1860, 401, = Rissa brevirostris (Bruch).
TRINGA GRACILIS Harting, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1874, 243, pl. XL. = Tringa ptilocnemis Coues, 1873.
SPECIES WHICH HAVE BEEN ADDED TO THE NORTH AMERICAN AVIFAUNA FROM
THE ISLANDS; SPECIMENS IN THE NATIONAL MUSEUM COLLECTION.
Anas penelope Linn. by H. W. Elliott, No. 62525 ad. g U.S.N.M. May 27, 1872, St. Paul Island (Dr.
Coues, in Elliott’s Rpt., Seal Islands, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 191). Since taken many times through-
‘out North America.
Charadrius dominicus fulvus (Gmel.), by H. W. Elliott, No. 64273 ad. 9 U.S.N.M., May 1, 1873, St. Paul
Island (Dr. Coues in Elliott's Rpt. Seal Islands, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 179). Since found to breed
abundantly on the Bering Sea and Arctic coasts of Alaska. Since ascertained to have been taken
by the Russian officer Warneck in 1842 and confused by Coinde with C. pluvialis.
Tringa damacensis (Horsf.), by C. H. Townsend, No. 106809 ad. 9, U.S.N.M. June 8, 1885, Otter Island
(Ridgway, Auk, ITI, 1886, 275). As yet unique from North America.
Cuculus canorus telephonus (Heine), by William Palmer, No. 118864 ad. ¢ U.S.N.M. Coll. July 4, 1890,
St. Paul Island. (Palmer, Auk. XI, 1894, 325). As yet unique from North America.
Species of which but one specimen, presumably, is known from the group (17 apecies).
Colymbus holbeellii...-...----------- + +2220 cee eee ee eee eee eee Taken by Elliott, 1873.
Gavia adamsii -......--. ------ ------ --- 222 eee ee ee ce eee eee eee Taken by native, 1885.
arctica. ...--.------ eee e ee eee ee eee eee eee teens Taken by Elliott, 1873.
Stercorarius parasiticus .........----------------- eens eee ee eee eee Taken by Elliott, 1872.
longicaudus ......-...------- e--- eee eee eee eee eee Taken by Elliott, 1872.
362
THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Species of which but one specimen, presumably, is known from the group (17 species)—Continued.
Pagophila:alba.s ss sc c0c0 seesescsecxeeweiasccedsces
Larus barrovianus .......-.------- -- +--+ --- 2-5 eee
Anas) penelopeicvecccu co aatecsaaicicinit cee weiss
Branta canadensis minima ......-..---------------
Tringa damacensis....-....--...---.------ 2-2 ones
Ereunetes pusillis:..-+..6.0- 2c cs saasnieisigie soe tes
Numenius borealis ...-....-.-..----------- +--+. 2+
4igialitis semipalmata......---.-2--2-..----.------
Falco rusticolus gyrfalco .....--...----------+-----
peregrinus anatum .....-..----..----.+-----
Cuculus canorus telephonus...---...---.----------
Anthus pensilvanicus ........-.. 2-2. 2-22----------
weicdatdtihtavatels Taken by True and Prentiss, 1895,
Eee aya cates Ue Taken by Palmer, 1890.
Beau cdiaratarsreraimaeisiat Taken by Elliott, 1872.
ance seememe eee Taken by Elliott, 1872.
metiateree Reine neie Taken by Townsend, 1885.
Se ceee eRe, Taken by Palmer, 1890.
hata ahcegebiaieiapies Taken by Elliott, 1872.
Cabins ated aig rata Taken by True and Prentiss; 1895.
eae: Taken by Elliott, 1873.
cia arsed erecta Taken by Palmer, 1889-90.
Sreceonmseenate Taken by Palmer, 1890.
pobeeecaseeeeee Taken by Dall, 1868.
Species of which only two specimens are, presumably, known from the group (5 species).
Stercorarius pomarinus .-.........----.-----.------ Taken by Elliott, 1872, Lavender, 1890.
Diomedea albatrus....-.-.--..---.---------------- Taken by Adams, 1874, Palmer, 1890.
Oceanodroma furcata _.-..-..-----.-----------+---- Taken by True and Prentiss, 1895, Thompson, 1897,
Eniconetta stelleri......---.---.-------..--------- Taken by Palmer, 1890.
“Tri Ga MA CUAL esa eoemenceamesta nonest aren saacee Taken by Palmer, 1890.
Species of which no specimen, presumably, is in collections from the islands (18 species).
Synthliboramphus antiquus...-..-... 2-2-2 2-22 eee eee eee eee eee eee Mentioned by Dall.
Cepphus columba: soc sce sete cosas sos ensmeeatbes weet seweeee skieectes Seen by Nelson, Palmer.
Larus schistisagus wc css aoveee one ceecebs ce ccaceessisacedeisemesincsesiesss Seen by Palmer.
Sterna ParadisRar ..ciscos- wie ssede sewaseccrc ces cscicieacsspoewis cesew <e Seen by Webster, Lucas.
Merganser AMericana.:ciasis:cciee:sinnis cicisinin's vies teases sicseis oe Sei esisisiaiercicte scteiciciate Seen by Lockhart, Nelson.
Anas boschas ..-.-.. Sictstanatduuctagionniwinie € Smealseemiemns se Se atmasiaiemaawinanisies,siare Seen by Elliott, Palmer.
NettionCarolinens@..<:sciccina cso eceesee ees seca ed nae s ees saasmmcnincaine Seen by Palmer. :
Homateriar Veni Gra «.ciccc ccas case seciseatte ccs cicacee Sere semees sesees neceeaes Seen by natives.
Anger albifrons gambeli ....:cs00 sceces veces sce ccisincecisecieesccccn eee e cen Seen by Palmer.
Phi ache: canagica.« == cmc meccacnacisimasid salgaisiets sittieldstos Gots aehig ieee sexes Seen by Elliott and others.
Olomcolumbianits.. cca scans cckdademie ops aie rtceistactelbs Sigel ee neeae Seen by residents.
Totanus Mavi pes sso sce pubes came tacoendecrcec we geeecesce acess cee OCD by Palmer.
Numeniughidsonicus:: scwiese. sc kcc sea cen macesauenaceoueics seis os tecie sae Seen by Lucas.
Halizetus leucocephalus alascensis .-..--...----- hes rag es avshearapetaraierayen neste aysrasiers Seen by natives.
Asio accipitrinus..........22.. 02222222 e ee ee ee eee eee eee eee Seen by Palmer, Elliott.
ACADUNS TOT acc rannswacens Hee cede tame wma ns ercmteicisneim arses cia wetremiandians Shot by Elliott.
Ammodramus sandwichensis ......----.----.-----------.----+-----+-++---Seen by Palmer.
Hirundo erythrogastra unalaschkensis.........---.--.----.----.--------- Seen by Palmer.
Merulla. migratoria: a. os ceris since tneajne amen eeee sien sis seer siamcaecemarseine Seen by Elliott.
Species known to breed (20).
Lunda cirrhata .......---... umeugeaace Common. | Larus glaucescens...........--.--------Common.
Fratercula corniculata ........-..-.---- Common. | Fulmarus glacialis rodgersii..-....-.--. Common.
Cyclorrhynchus psittaculus -.......-...Common. | Phalacrocorax urile ........--..-.---.-.Common.
Simorhynchus cristatellus......,...--.- Common. | Harelda hyemalis --.......-..---..----- Common.
PUSHIUS sans sees sec ssees Common. | Phalaropus lobatus..._....-.-.---.---.- Few.
Uria troile californica .............----- Common. | Tringa ptilocnemis...--...---.-.-...-.- Common.
DOM1VIR PITS occ ceces cone new wecwwme Common. | Leucosticte griseonucha..-....-...--.-- Common.
Rissa tridactyla pollicaris .......-.----- Common. | Passerina townsendi .....--.---.-----.- Common.
brevirostris ...---.-
Larus barrovianus ......--..--..-----.- Few.
Calcarius Japponicus alascensis. .....-..Common.
Troglodytes alascensi§ -...-............ Common.
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 363
Species which probably breed (9).
Cepphus columba. Eniconetta stelleri?
Larus schistisagus. Crymophilus fulicarius?
Xema sabinii? Asio accipitrinus.
Anas boschas. Nyctea nyctea?
Histrionicus histrionicus.
Of regular occurrence as migrants, evidently an incomplete list.
Nettion carolinense.............--.-. Uncommon. | Limosa lapponica baueri.-....... Common.
Somateria v-nigra .-.............-... Common. Heteractitis incanus ...-......-. Common.
Branta canadensis minima ........... Few. Numenius borealis ..........--..- Few.
Crymophilus fulicarius ..............Common. Charadrius dominicus fulvus..... Fairly common.
Phalaropus lobatus.................. Common. Arenaria interpres............--- Common.
THE GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF PRIBILOF BIRDS.
The Holarctic region comprises all of the Northern hemisphere except the south-
ern portions. It is divisable into the following subregions: Palearctic, Europe and
Northern Asia; Aleutican, North Pacific and adjacent shores; Nearctic, North
America,
American (Nearctic) forms occurring on the islands (18 species).
Colymbus holboellii -.-....... Migrant. Totanus flavipes.........-.... Once.
Merganser americanus........ Migrant. Numenius hudsonicus ‘. Once
Nettion carolinense ........-. Migrant. borealis...-...-.-.. Migrant.
Anser albifrons gambeli ...--. Migrant. Aegialitis semipalmata..-..... Once.
Branta canadensis minima.... Migrant. Falco peregrinus anatum -.... Migrant.
Olor columbianus ............ Migrant. tusticolus gyrfalco ..... Few, migrant.
Grus canadensis.-...........- Rare, accidental. | Hirundo erythrogastra ....-.. Twice, accidental.
Tringa maculata ..........-.- Twice. Anthus pensilvanicus........- Once, migrant.
Ereunetes pusillus.....-..---- Once. Merula migratoria....-....--. Once, accidental.
Asiatic (Palaearctic) forms, none breeding.' :
Anas penelope........--------- Few, accidental. | Charadrius dominicus fulvus... Migrant.
Tringa damacensis -....---.--- Once, migrant. Arenaria interpres........-...- Migrant.
Limosa lapponica baueri. .-...- Migrant. Cuculus canorus telephonus-.. Once, accidental.
Pacific (Aleutican) forms (29 species, 18 breeding).
Gavia adamsii..........-.-.-+--.---- Migrant. Diomedea albatrus..........-.-.---- Migrant,
Lunda cirrhata......--.-.----------- Breeds. Fulmarus glacialis rodgersii.....-.... Breeds.
Fratercula corniculata ....-....----- Breeds. | Oceanodroma furcata ..-....-...--.- Breeds?
Cyclorrhynchus psittaculus -.......- Breeds. Phalacrocorax urile...-...----.----- Breeds.
Simorhynchus cristatellus........... Breeds. Somateria v-nigra..........-.-..-.--- Winter.
pusillus ....-....---.. Breeds. Philacte canagica ......--- Umea .--- Migrant.
Synthliboramphus antiquus ........- Doubtful. | Tringa ptilocnemis...-..--. .-.--.-- Breeds.
Cepphus columba .....--.----------+ Breeds? Heteractitis incanus .........-.-..-- Migrant.
Uria troile californica ..........---.- Breeds. Halixetus leucocephalus alascensis.. Accidental.
lomvia arra...-..-------------- Breeds. Leucosticte griseonucha......-..-.-- Breeds.
Rissa tridactyla pollicaris........... Breeds. Passerina townsendi ......--...----- Breeds.
brevirostris ....-.-.-.--------- Breeds. Ammodramus sandwichensis ....-.. -- Accidental.
Larus barrovianus ....-.------------ Breeds. Calcarius lapponicus alascensis. ..--. Breeds.
glaucescens .....--.....--.--- Breeds. Troglodytes alascensis ...........--- Breeds.
schistisagus ....-.-...-------- Doubtful.
1It is of course understood that these birds are found here at about the most eastern portion of
their range, while of the 18 American forms they here occur at about the most western part of their
habitat.
364 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Circumpolar (Holarctic) forms (13 species, 2 breeding).
Gavia arctica ......---.--- Sashes wales Once. Harelda hyemalis .--.....---..- Breeds.
Stercorarius pomarinus ...----------.- Migrant. | Eniconetta stelleri ....-....... Migrant.
parasiticus.....-..-...-.- Migrant. | Crymophilus fulicarius..-..... Migrant.
longicaudus..........---- Migrant. | Phalaropus lobatus ........... Breeds sparingly.
Pagophila alba. ......-------.---.---- Once. Nyctea nyctea ....-.-.-------- Migrant.
Sterna paradisaea..-.......-.--.------- Migrant. | Acanthis linaria ..-...-...--.. Migrant.
Xemua sabinii-...--..----.---.--------- Migrant.
Of doubtful category.
Anas boschas subsp.......--.---------------+---- Probably Palaearctic.
Histrivnicus histrionicus.......----.------------- Probably Aleutican,
Asio accipitrinus subsp .....----..-.------------- Probably Aleutican or Nearctic.
The birds represented by the above three names have not been critically com-
pared. When this is done the Pribilof birds may be placed as indicated above.
Exclusively American species form but an insignificant feature of the avifauna.
This is accounted for, in part, by the small area of the islands and consequent lack of
land birds, but principally because of the preponderating abundance of exclusively
Northern Pacific forms; in fact, the islands are located in the midst of a quite different
subregion, the Aleutican. More than half of the American or Nearetic forms are
casuals or accidental visitors. On the other hand, Asiatic forms have a much less
influence in numbers of species, but regarding individuals it is greater. Of the 6
species, 3 are noted for one specimen each, the other 3 being more or less numerous,
far more so than any American form. The circumpolar species need little comment.
The 29 Pacific forms, however, are entitled to some consideration. Of them, 16 may
be said to have close relatives on the Atlantic side of North America, but the remain-
ing 13 are utterly distinct, even 8 of them generically. If we add to these the various
members of the subfamily Phalerinae, which occur abundantly throughout the Aleu-
tian Islands, and several forms which as yet are unknown from the Pribilofs, we are
confronted with the fact that a very large number of Bering Sea birds have no close
natural affinity with Atlantic forms. Of the family Alcidae there are known from
the coasts of North America 25 species and subspecies, of which only 9 occur on the
Atlantic side. Buta single species (Cepphus mandtii) occurs on both sides. Of the 12
genera in which these forms are placed, 3—Alca, Plautus, and Alle—are exclusively
Atlantic. Three others—Fratercula, Uria, and Cepphus—have their species about
equally divided on each side. The remaining 6, belonging to the subfamily Phalerinae,
are exclusively Pacific. Besides these we have Lunda, Diomedea, Philacte, Heteractitis,
Aphriza, and Leucosticte, to say little of such forms as Rissa brevirostris, Oceanodroma
furcata, Sterna aleutica, and others, which have no representatives on the Atlantic
side. Most of the species and subspecies of the genera Fratercula, Uria, and Cep-
phus breed in the far north and are little differentiated from each other. These birds
could readily have made their way from ocean to ocean during some extraordinarily
warm summer in the remote past, and having been unable to return have remained
and perpetuated their kind with consequent variations. It would seem correct to
consider that the ancestral stocks of these genera were Pacific.
Many eastern American species summer in western Alaska, even to the shores of
Bering and the Arctic seas. Certain Siberian forms also summer in the same region.
On the American side there is now continuous land connection, but it may not always
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 365
have been so. On the Asiatic side we have no present continuous land connection,
but evidently it has been otherwise, for these Siberian species could hardly have
learned their way into Alaska over the present bleak and forbidding route. The
facts thus require that when the Asiatic or Siberian forms first reached what is now
Alaska they did so over continuous or narrowly separated land areas. The American
forms only extended their range as the rising or clearing land became available for
their needs. The Siberian species have simply continued their migration over the
slowly disappearing land.
The practical restriction of the family Alcidae to the Pacific, and the actual restric-
tion of so many genera and species, would seem to require that when, previous to the
glacial periods, ice existed in but small quantities about the North Polar region what
is now Bering Straits was tightly closed to the members of this family in the Pacific.
If it were not so, it is perhaps impossible to account for the restriction of these birds
to the North Pacific, and also for the reason that such Atlantic forms as Plautus,
Alcea, and Alle failed to diffuse themselves throughout circumpolar areas during pre-
glacial times.
Of the 29 Pacific forms, 16 have close relatives on the Atlantic side, but they
belong to genera of wide distribution, and, excepting a few land genera, Passerina,
Calcarius, Ammodramus, Troglodytes, are water birds of extensive northern habitat
and gene-ic circumpolar distribution, like Rissa, Larus, etc. These last all have
extremely well-developed powers of flight. It would seem that where related forms
inhabit both sides, the Pacific birds are the larger, with longer and larger bills. Of
the various species of the subfamily Phalerinae nearly all occupy generic or sub-
generic divisions by themselves and are consequently distinctly differentiated, few
genera containing more than one species and none subspecies.
The above facts would indicate that the Atlantic members of the Alcidae have
been derived from Pacific ancestors during several warm periods of the past, Alle,
Plautus, and Alea having been much the earlest.' Thus, besides the present and
past ice, there would seem to have existed a barrier to transpolar mixing and dis-
persal of Atlantic and Pacific forms.
That this ancient Bering Straits land barrier prevented Pacific types from
spreading east and west into the Atlantic, and vice versa, seems extremely probable,
and that this same barrier may have had considerable to do with the causation of the
Glacial epochs seems evident, considering the general topography of the region sur-
rounding the Arctic Basin. The result now of damming up the waters flowing south
through the Straits, the influence of which is felt and seen by every traveler in
Bering Sea, and even when hundreds of miles south of the Aleutians, would be
disastrous in its effects on the present climate of Asia, and especially to North
America, and most certainly so to the present distribution of northern forms of life.
The North Pacific Basin is a vast amphitheater. The volcanic activities which dot
its circumference—the grandest in the whole world, yet now in its last throes—have
consumed considerable material that has most evidently been derived from a seaward
direction. Destruction and submergence has necessarily followed, and deep water
is now found where most probably low, extensive, and volcanic island areas were
1I consider Alle misplaced with the other genera. It is more closely allied with the lower
Alcidae, the neossoptiles being structurally distinct from those of the Alcinae.
366 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
formerly numerous. The present rugged and precipitous coast line of the Pribilofs
and other islands of Bering Sea are certainly indicative of their former much greater
extent. Also the low coast line and the shallow seas of the western coasts of Alaska
point to the same previous condition.
The relationships and zoogeographical distribution of the avifauna of the region
under consideration have often been variously determined by naturalists. Sometimes
considered as Nearctic, then as often Palaearctic, we now find them settled by
Professor Newton as Alaskan, a province of his Holarctic.' On Dr. Merriam’s pro-
visional maps of the principal life areas of North America, Alaska is divided between
his Arctic and Boreal, the last being distinguished as a region and described as
circumpolar.? I doubt if either of these names can be properly applied to primary
life divisions, for Palaearctie types must have been in existence long before glacial
times, which alone has produced Arctic and most of the present boreal conditions.
Besides, the avifauna of northern North America is not greatly different from, and
has most evidently been derived from, that of Eurasia. As well-known authorities
completely differ as to the values of the elements of the avifauna of Alaska, their
relations may be discussed here briefly as an effort toward determining the status of
the birds of the Pribilof Islands.
We have first a very large number of forms, common transients of eastern North
America, which are summer residents of Alaska, and which reach that region by way
of the Mississippi and Missouri watersheds. From western North America also quite
a number of forms reach and enter Alaska as far as Kadiak Island and the Aliaska
Peninsula, though a few penetrate farther, even to Point Barrow. Certain forms
cross over from Siberia and also summer in Alaska. Others again, summering in
Alaska and Siberia, winter on the islands of the middle and southern Pacific. So
much for the true migrants. Resident forms may also be divided into four groups
which are to be correlated with the same directions. We have resident forms in
northern Alaska whose nearest relatives are found eastward in British America.
Others are resident about Sitka and the Aliaska Peninsula and adjacent islands
whose nearest relatives are directly southward. The Siberian influence also has
stamped itself in such a way that we find resident Alaskan forms whose nearest
relatives are in Asia. And; last, there is another group, resident about the shores
of Bering Sea and on the islands, and but rarely found elsewhere. The first
mentioned in each of these two divisions belong to the Nearctic subregion. Those of
the second belong to another division of the Nearctic, the Sitkan. The third group
is essentially Palaearctic, and therefore Siberian, and the fourth Aleutican.
Mixed as these bird elements certainly are, especially during the summer season,
we can, perhaps, readily unravel the causes which have produced such a conglomera-
tion. In preglacial times, when Arctic ice and its effects were absent, the continent of
North America was undoubtedly inhabited by species the great majority of which
were most evidently of Neotropical derivation. The archipelagic character of the
northern parts of North America and the land continuity of its southern portion
assisted in preventing any predominating influence from the Eurasian (Palaearctic)
continent. But with the gradual cooling incidental to preglacial conditions the Neo-
tropical influence gave way gradually to the hardier and nearer elements of Palaearctic
' Dict. Birds, 1893, 331. °N. A. Fauna, No. 3, 1890, p. 24,
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 367
life. This became greatly intensified when the glacial influence reached a maximum.
Those Palaearctic types which under the former mild, cooling conditions had effected a
‘foothold on the American continent were then forced southward and readily displaced
the previous Neotropical stock. This must have been a comparatively easy task, for
the cooling climatic conditions were in their favor. Thus a number of forms of various
genera and families of Palacarctic types were cut off from the parent body and subse-
quently became differentiated into what should be considered as a branch or subregion
of the Triarctic (or Holarctic) region—the Nearctic subregion. The retreat of the ice
permitted not only the reoccupation of the more northern portion of the continent by
these now fixed Nearctie forms, but also a northern extension of the remains of the
more northern Neotropical forms. These movements, the result of the retreat of the
ice sheet, plus the altering topographical conditions resulting and in connection there-
with, or following, have effected the present mixed condition of the Alaskan avifauna
and of North America generally. The northwestern trend of the western outline of
the ice sheet and the lacustrine conditions thereby induced as the glacial influence
diminished, plus the influence of the Missouri and Yukon drainage systems, assisted
in the extension, even to the mouths of the Yukon, of the common migratory forms of
the Mississippi Valley. The same result evidently occurred on the Pacific watershed,
but modified by the western trend of the Rocky Mountains and the barrier of the
Mount St. Elias region. The probably extensive island condition then of Bering Sea,
and perhaps of the North Pacific, assisted in permitting the return of Asiatic forms
to again reside in summer in Alaska. The extreme cold of the glacial periods and the
voleanic activities of the North Pacific region have undoubtedly effected the extermi-
nation of some prior forms and the dispersal of others. The habits of the sea species,
especially the Alcidae, have favored their preservation.
The common migrating forms of Limosa and Charadrius have a peculiar status,
which may be mentioned here as illustrating one phase of Alaskan bird life. The first.
is closely related to the European L. lapponica, but is paler and larger and does not
occur in North America except in western Alaska. The second is closely related to
the American 0. dominicus, though smaller, but also occurs on the Pacific coast of
Asia as a migrant. Both occur in their greatest abundance in winter on the islands
of the Pacific and rarely if ever on the mainlands except in summer in Alaska and
Siberia, and both are good subspecies. The winter distribution of the Limosa is
more southerly than the other. Of Arenaria, another extensive Pacific islands’
migrant, rarely found on the northern mainland in winter, I have treated fully under
that genus.
It would appear then that we should be right in considering that the Palacarctic
ancestors of our present Alaskan avifauna were originally breeding residents on the
island land areas immediately about the North Pole and became diffused as that
region became covered with ice. As this refrigeration began at a center—whether
that center was at the Pole or elsewhere is immaterial—it would have caused, more
markedly than before, the individuals of each species to migrate southward over
ocean island routes when that suited their needs and over land routes when that was
more to their taste. This separation of the main.body of breeding birds and their
segregation into several noncommunicating parts began early in the first glacial
period and continued and increased as time went on. Then there occurred, naturally,
368 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
variations in the scattered noncommunicating members of each species because of
their different environments. That differentiation increased in time, but varied in
amount in the different groups for various reasons. Some of these divisions now
constitute good ‘species, while others are only considered worthy of ranking as
subspecies, while of still others opinions differ as to the sufficiency of causes for
separation as species or subspecies or even for separation at all. This explains the
differences between such forms as Somateria mollissima and dresseri, and S. v-nigra,
Arenaria interpres and A. morinella, and Larus glaucus and L. barrovianus, This
differentiation is correlated by the time which has elapsed since the separation began
and the differing environment, but the species or subspecies also vary in amount of
difference by the effects of another factor, the degree of communication possible during
the early or intermittent stages of the separation. The generally so-called circumpolar
species are really not circumpolar except generically, the amount of our ignorance
being wore than sufficient to fill up the measure of our knowledge of what constitutes
a usually so-called circumpolar species. A. good example is the case of the turnstone.
Thus it would appear probable that western Alaska and the Bering Sea islands
are the remnants of former land areas originally connected with or narrowly sepa-
tated from the Palacarctic continent, the differences now observable as to resident
faunal and floral life being due to greater or less volcanic action and greater or less
glacial influence in affecting and isolating that life. And the same is true of North
America asa whole. It is now essentially Nearctic, with a very strong double intrusion,
pre and post glacial (of Palaearctic derivation), from the northeast and northwest,
consequent on glacial and volcanic action, destruction, and dispersion. Where these
opposite types meet the modifying influences of the varied environments have effected
results tending to bridge over the gaps, thus producing transitional forms. Thus the
retreat of the ice permitted the reextension northward of Nearetic types, but con-
tact with boreal influences differentiated these frontier forms, so that we now find
them generically and specifically distinct from their nearest relatives. In less degree
have the southern outliers of northern forms differentiated.
It would consequently seem from this discussion that from the elements of the
Bering Sea avifauna and vicinity are deducible several zoogeographical provinces and
subprovinces, and that the whole constitutes a division of the Holarctic region.
Professor Newton’s term Alaskan can be retained for the region north and east of
the Aliaska Peninsula. This peninsula, with the islands adjacent on the south and the
mainland to British Columbia, may retain Mr. Nelson’s name of Sitkan. Itis properly
a true transitional subprovince of the Nearctic. The Aleutian Islands, the islands
of Bering Sea, and much, perhaps all, of the mainland coasts of Alaska and north-
eastern Asia to the Arctic Sea constitute a single subregion to which the name
Aleutican is more properly applicable.
These views are necessarily somewhat suggestive and void of details, but seem
pertinent to a consideration of the avifauna of the Pribilof Islands. Unfortunately,
little is known concerning the exact distribution of many of the forms, and the col-
lections that have been made in the region are so widely scattered that it is impossible
to bring them together for comparison.
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 369
DISTRIBUTION OF THE FAMILY ALCIDAE IN NORTH AMERICA.
PAcIFic. ATLANTIC.
Fraterculinae, Fraterculinae.
1, Lunda cirrhata. 1, Fratercula arctica.
2. Fratercula corniculata. 2. glacialis.
Phalerinae Phalerinae.
3. Cerorhinca monocerata.
4, Ptychoramphus aleuticus, 3. Cepphus grylle.
5, Cyclorrhynchus psittaculus.
6. Simorhynelhns cristatallus.
7 (Phaleris) pygmaeus.
8. (Ciceronia) pusillus.
9. Synthliboramphus antiquus.
10. Brachyramphus marmoratus.
11. kittlitzii.
12. hypoleucus.
13. eraveri.
14. Cepphus columba.
Alecinae. Alcinae.
15. Uria troile californica. 4, Uria troile.
16. lomvia ana. . 5. lomvia.
6. Alcea torda.
7. Plautus impennis.
Allinae. , Allinae.
8. Alle alle.
/ COMMON TO BOTH SIDES.
Phalerinae. Phalerinae.
17. Cepphus mandtii. 9. Cepphus mandtii.
I have prepared the above table for the purpose of illustrating the great differ-
ence between the two sides of North America as represented in this order.! But one
form is found on both sides, and this a high northern species which can readily in a
very mild season pass from one side to the other. The Alcinae are distinct, but have
hardly been separated for any great length of time. The characters of the others
indicate, however, that when the present boreal climate was milder a barrier existed to
prevent dispersion.
THE MIGRATION OF PRIBILOF BIRDS.
I can do little more than hint at the facts, phases, and factors that are concerned
in the bird migration of this portion of Bering Sea. For the true migrants (not sum-
mer breeders) the course is undoubtedly north and south through the islands, prac-
tically all the individuals going to breed on the islands north of the Pribilof group
and on the adjacent Alaskan and Siberian coasts, below and also beyond the Straits.
As to the course taken by the migratory flocks on their way south after reaching the
1 All Atlantic species are given, but there are a number of additional Pacific forms confined to the
Asiatic side. The British Museum catalogue, vol. XXVI, gives a total of 26 species for this order, of
which 18 are Pacific, 5 are Atlantic, and 3 are common to both.
5947—PT 3. 24.
8370 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Aleutians there is little direct evidence. That which is available indicates three
routes—one southward toward the Californian coast,! a second toward the Hawaiian
Islands, and a third along the Aleutian chain, thence toward the Asiatic coast and
islands. I am unaware of any positive movement from the Aleutian Islands eastward
along the coast to California southward. When over 800 miles south of Unalaska a
Savanna sparrow (A. sandwichensis) boarded the vessel, staid with us all night, and I
saw it depart the next morning in an east of north direction which would take it to its
summer home. Mr. Nelson records that when he approached the Aleutian Islands in
the spring of 1877 several turnstones were seen ten or twelve hours’ steaming from
the islands. They were headed north. Mr. Elliott also tells us that when 700 miles
off the Straits of Fuca he saw many individuals of the same species heading north-
west for the Aleutian Islands. In May, 1890, soon after passing the halfway point
between San Francisco and Unalaska we began to see phalaropes (C. fulicarius) and
for some hundreds of miles they were common. Their course was northward. Nelson
tells us ‘While the Corwin was midway between the Aleutian Islands and San Fran-
cisco, in October, 1881, a small party of birds, undoubtedly of this species | C. dominicus
Julvus|, was seen passing high overhead, coming from the direction of the Aleutian
Islands and passing directly toward the Hawaiian group.” He adds, “This is certainly
a remarkable flight for birds of this character to undertake, and its accomplishment
indicates great powers of flight as well as great endurance.”
Dr. Thomas H. Streets, in Bulletin No. 7, United States National Museum, page
17, tells us, in speaking of the same species—the Asiatic golden plover: ‘‘In regard
to the habits of these birds we were informed by residents of the island [Oahu,
Hawaiian Islands] that they make their first annual appearance about September.
When they arrive they are very poor and weak, having evidently been on a lengthy
voyage and been deprived of food for a long time. During their stay through the
winter they become very fat. About March or April they begin to prepare for their
departure. They can be seen during the day, at this time, taking loug or short flights
out at sea and returning again to the islands. This exercise is undoubtedly for the
purpose of strengthening themselves for the final effort, their muscles during the win-
ter’s life of luxury and ease having become flabby and feeble. We have met them at
sea a long distance from any land very much exhausted, and have known them to
take refuge aboard the ship; where if not molested they would remain until we
reached land.” As this plover is unknown from the American continent in winter,
breeding only in summer in America on the Bering Sea side of Alaska, we are com-
pelled to the conclusion that it traverses twice a year the 2,000 miles or more of ocean
between the Aleutian and Hawaiian islands.” The species breeding in Alaska and
occurring in, winter on the Fanning and Hawaiian groups are the tattler (H. incanus),
the turnstone (A. interpres), the sanderling (C. arenaria), the Asiatic golden plover (C.
d. fulvus), the bristle-thighed curlew (NV. femoralis)—taken several times in Alaska, the
-pintail (D. acuta), the shoveler (8. clypeata), and perhaps many others. We are thus
! This is probably wrong and should be added to the second. The barn swallow breeds at Una-
laska and far northward, and evidently reaches there through California. It and the robin are but
accidental on the Pribilofs.
2In the extracts from the diary of Henry Palmer (Rothschild, Avifauna Laysan, 1893, Vol. I,
p. xiv, occurs the following: ‘‘A kolea (Golden Plover, Charadrius fulvus) flew also round the ship and
considerably astonished me by sitting on the water several times to rest.” This oceurred just pre-
vious to August 18.
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 371
justified in the belief that migration does take place across these extensive wastes of
waters. The barred-tailed godwit (Limosa lapponica baueri)'.is another example of a
Pacific migrant. They pass through the Aleutian Islands in spring in small flocks,
reach St. Michaels before the end of May, and breed along that coast of Bering Sea.
They return in the fall, pass through the Pribilofs and the Aleutians, and winter on
the islands of Polynesia and Southeastern Asia, Australia, and New Zealand. They
are absent from North America during our winter, there being but one record—in
Lower California.? Their course is probably through the Aleutian chain, on many
islands of which they have been taken, thence to the Japanese coast, and southward.
Other species of Asiatic wintering birds occur, breeding in Alaska; also indiviauals.
of eastern American species have been taken with them on the islands of Bering Sea,
thus pointing conclusively to a migration route over the western Pacific Ocean. An-
other group of migration movements from the Alaskan breeding grounds is shown in
’ such species as the Pribilof sandpiper (T. ptilocnemis), and the emperor goose (P. cana-
gica) and many other species. These winter on the shores of the southern islands of.
the Aleutian chain and along the Aliaska coast southward.
The fact that many species of Alaskan birds boldly launch themselyes into the
wide expanse of ocean between their summer and winter habitats naturally leads us
to expect that at sometime in the remote geological past their ancestors had a more
happy course over contiguous land areas which have since been submerged. No other.
solution seems possible, and many probabilities point to such a conclusion in spite of
the fact now of considerable deep water intervening. Birds have no inclination to
explore unknown regions lying at such great distances apart. Their movements must
necessarily have begun gradually over contiguous or narrowly separated areas which
have been widened during the operation of geologic changes. The Pribilof group is
some 250 miles from the nearest Alaskan coast; they are nearly 200 miles north of the:
Aleutian chain. They are 200 miles south of the next island to the northward, St..
Matthew. The Commander Islands lie 750-miles westward. The islands of the Aleutian
chain are generally visible from each other in clear weather, but gaps of 40 to 60 miles
are frequent. Attu, the most eastern of the chain, is about 180 miles from the nearest
of the Commander Islands and about 500 from the nearest coast of Asia, Cape Shi-
punski in Kamchatka. California is some 2,000 miles southeastward of Unalaska,
and Sitka is about the same distance almost directly eastward. The Hawaiian
Islands are also 2,000 miles directly southward from Unalaska, without intervening
land. Bird migration between the the Pribilofs and the Aleutians and between the
Aleutians and Asia, Polynesia, and the Hawaiian group undoubtedly occurs with
- many species and in enormous numbers.
Tt has often been asserted that migrating birds take advantage of geographical
‘objects, as mountains, valleys, rivers, etc., in directing their course during their long
journeys from their summer to their winter habitat. However plausible this may be
as applied to land-migrating birds it fails completely upon consideration as a factor
of the movements of the Pacific birds noted above. I am not even sure that it is a
necessary factor even to land-migrating birds, but however that may be it most
certainly can not be considered when one is endeavoring to account for causes that
enable these birds to continue in a direct line; for instance, from the Aleutian to the
1 =Limosa nove-zealandica.
2La, Paz, No. 86418, U.S.N.M., 1882, L. Belding (in spring, head)..
372 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Hawaiian islands. Migrating birds evidently have a power of keeping a straight
course for very long distances, a sense of direction, as it were, which enables or allows
them to fly at certain periods for a certain time, the starting and arriving places being
positive factors as well as the distauce between, thus insuring an arrival—winds and
other influences permitting—within a certain time near some objective point, the
exact location of which can be ascertained by the ordinary powers of observation.
As we in ourselves combine in a marvelous degree certain attributes or powers, purely
educational ones, unknown to, or only in an embryonic stage in our ancestors, so
birds, migrating first from necessity over short distances, have during the lapse of
countless ages, as necessity enforced, developed a sense of direction which is practi-
cally unknown among mammals and is consequently difficult to be imagined and
understood by ourselves. This accounts for the great loss when migratory species,
like the Pacific salmon and the European migratory quail, are transplanted to
localities geographically opposite that to which their ancestors had for ages been
accustomed to.
It must not be understood that I am wedded to the idea that land connection
must have been straight and continuous between the Aleutian and Hawaiian groups.
It would seem more probable that these ancient connective land areas existed
between these points, but fronting on the American and Asiatic continents, respec-
tively. The descendants of our ancient migrating birds possibly have simply gradu-
ally straightened out the originally somewhat perhaps crooked course.. In other
words, the lines of migration to-day are somewhat different from the ancient lines
because of the tendency of natural selection to weed out gradually those individuals
or groups of individuals not adapting themselves to the altering physical condi-
tions and availing themselves of the direct, less dangerous, and shortest route
between the starting and objective points. Our knowledge of Pacific migration is
still in its infancy, and this brief chapter may suggest further investigation.
Synopsis of Pribilof birds.
MSNVIMMMOTS 2/2 2 ic Setar eccrsjers esse csarea eo eevee eceiscibes Saari o nee A Sa meeee 39
"WES OD aoiecé. x dvs bicccstieiaacb eseusidie) cise sreede els ie See peisicnsts Mer awae AAS waeea el eeeeeenns 15
BIPdS OF Prey sae ike caiessn cb Accent. heehee sce gasdeca nes sodceeredeteat 5
POPCMOTS o2ce ceca viernes eee cares emisee sae bk Seemed ede oem ieelemace ewe 10
Total SPOCIOS sos sersroee week seve ee teed cesebee sous eeecng ens Hee diceeeeae 69
Total families se 0e0 oe seem vaewenwSeewseewes cee eels Sew decic-dcreeessere see 21
Total POnvSra wisps sess eeee es sree seems de tase kee seein ged bcc,s aveseels 56
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Order STEGANOPODES. Totipalmate Swimmers.
Family PHALACROCORACIDAE. Cormorants.
But one species of this family, the only one of the order, is found on the islands.
But there would seem to be no reason why one or more of the various species of cor-
morants found in Bering Sea should not wander occasionally within our limits,
1. Phalacrocorax urile (Gmel.). Red-faced Cormorant. ‘‘Oreel.”
Carbo pelagicus, COINDE, Rev. et Mag. Zool. 1860, 401.
Graculus bicristatus, DALL and BANNISTER, Trans. Chic. Ac. Sci., 1869, 302, Pl. XX XIII.—Dat1,
Proc. Cal. Ac. Sci., 1874, 275.—Cougs, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875,
192.—ELuio1T, Mon. Seal Ids., 1882, 130.
Phalacrocorasx bicristatus, Cours, Key, 1890, 728.—GRANT, Cat. B. Br. Mus., 1898, 358.
Phalacrocorax urile, NELSON, Bds. Alaska, 1887, 65.—A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 45.—Ripeway,
Man., 1886, 80.
Fairly abundant and one of the few summer birds which winter. But few breed
on St. Paul, the chief nesting places being on Walrus, Otter, and St. George islands.
They are far less abundant now than formerly. When one is in a boat some distance
from land and cormorants are about, several will usually alter their course to circle
_ about and inspect at close quarters. ‘3
“As this bird is found during the whole winter, in spite of severe weather,
perched on the sheltered bluffs, the natives regard it with a species of affection, for it
furnishes the only supply that they can draw upon for fresh meat, soups, and stews,
always wanted by the sick; and were the shags sought after throughout the year,
as they are during the short spell of intensely bitter weather that occurs in severe
winters, driving the other waterfowl away, they would certainly be speedily extermi-
nated. They are seldom shot, however, when anything else can be obtained.”—
( Elliott.)
A somewhat critical comparison of the feather conditions of my specimens of
various ages has led me to doubt the correctness of the position usually assigned the
birds of this order in our lists. Consequently, | have examined all the specimens
accessible to me, not only of this order, but of most of the families of North American
birds. Part of the results are embodied in the present. paper.
In winter specimens in adult plumage the necks are profusely decorated with
long, white, club-shaped filoplumaceous feathers. Most of these drop out before sum-
mer, but a few are persistent and can be found on the necks, usually just below the
head and sometimes on the breast (fig. 6, Pl. XL). One of my immature (brown
yearling) specimens also has quite a number on the neck (fig. 7), and some of these
have one to several rami scattered irregularly down the rachis (fig. 8). Also on my
373
374 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
two young collected on August 7 (about two months old), the necks have a great
number of these long, white filoplumes projecting beyond the down (fig. 9). These
average about 12 millimeters in length, and are also to be found sparingly all over
the body, especially on the thighs. I am at a loss to interpret these feather struc-
tures. They are evidently degenerate and homologous with those so abundant about
the bases of the larger feathers of eagles, etc., but in this instance they precede the true
feather growth. The feathers of the white thigh patches of the fully adult generally
begin to loosen by June, so that few specimens are perfect in that respect among
those taken on June 13. On August 7, good-sized young were found hiding among
the rocks, and two were collected, Nos. 118726, 118727, 2? 2 ; one of these, 28 inches long,
is stillin the downy stage on the body, but the wings and scapulars are well feath-
ered, and some new feathers are showing down the breast. Others are to be seen all
over the body upon parting the down. The tail is well grown. The down is darkest,
sooty seal brown, toward the tail, gradually changing to drab gray toward and on the
head. The other specimen is older aud has lost the down on the body and partly
up the neck, where it has been replaced by the shorter and much-paler new growth
of down. This change takes place all over the body, the long, brown, first down
giving way to the new true feathers after they have grown for a time, and a new,
short, whitish down, which evidently is permanent until the next year’s molt.
A very small nestling (No. 62533, St. Paul, July 2, 1872, H. W. Elliott) is scantily
clothed with dark-brown down, it being especially abundant on the thighs and scanty
elsewhere. Most of the down is still bound with the remains of the sheaths, but on
the thighs it is dry and fluffy. On one of the thighs and on the neck downward all
over the underbody are single white downs scattered about somewhat evenly. On
the other thigh there is but one. A few white downs can be seen on my two larger
specimens when the long dark down is parted, but there are very few.
The absence of down attached to the tips of the new feather growth of the cor-
morant and which is so conspiciuous in many species, especially in the higher birds,
led me to examine these specimens closely. The sequence of feather growth on the
body of the cormorant is as follows. The bird is hatched nude. In a few days down
appears on the feather tracts of the dorsal surface, the growth gradually spreading
until the whole body is covered with the down, the head being the last to be com-
pleted. This down increases in length as the bird grows, reaching a length on the
back of about 24 millimeters. When this down has reached its full length and abun-
dance, our young bird is about one-third grown. Then the new plumage contour
feathers appear, as I have described. As these new feathers increase in length this
first down loosens and drops out and another downy growth follows. Thus in the
young cormorant, before it has become fully feathered, there have developed two dis-
tinct downs, structurally similar, but differing in color and length, and functionally,
if such a word can be applied here, dissimilar. These two down growths are common
to many other birds, especially the hawks, but there the first is attached to the tips of
the first plumage feathers as they grow out, whereas in the Steganopodes the opposite
is the case. Hence I have formed the opinion that the first down growth of the cor-
morant is homologous with the first down growth of other groups. An examination
and comparison of many specimens of young birds of this order reveals similar con-
ditions to those of the cormorant. Hence the conclusion is inevitable that in this
order we have early plumage conditions quite different to those that obtain in all the
other groups.
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. “375
On the lower portion of the legs of. my larger young specimen there are quite a
number of feathers nearly full grown, which in their appearance differ greatly from
those on the body. Their distal outline, instead of being clean cut, have the rami
considerably lengthened and fluffy. At first glance this would seem to be similar to
the down attached to the first feathers of other birds, but under the microscope it is
seen that the rami tips are simply lengthened, they having longer radii than usual.
They are really partially semiplumaceous feathers. But attached to the tips of one
or two of the rami on nearly every one of these feathers is a slight swelling with a
continuation of the rami at its apex. These ends are variously broken and imperfect,
but there can be no question but that they are a relic of the first down growth, and
hence are identical with those described under Tringa ptilocnemis, but of course greatly
degenerate. Also on the early upper tail coverts the tips carry a rudiment of the
down growth.
In the higher groups, according to the position of the birds in the avian scale and
the flight and nidification characteristics, the suppression of the first downs on the
=
EE
es
> Fie
Le.
ay
EL
Saad
Sage
ead
2
an
LES
eS
=
‘
a |
ye
=
a
Tips of FEATHERS OF YOUNG CORMORANT.
a, b, ¢, d, e, from lower portion of leg, showing variously worn rami tips, d@ and e with rudiments of down attached;
f, tip of a secondary, the upper portion being the degenerate down; g, tip of an upper tail covert, with rudimentary down
attached; h, tip of a tertial with a more perfect though rudimentary down. All greatly enlarged.
tips of the flight feathers is either complete or partially so. In the birds of this order
there is a slight difference according to the family, but as a rule the down is persistent
on a small portion of the growing flight feather. In the cormorant it is much less so
than in the other examples of the order that I have seen. On some secondaries and
tertiaries of the larger of my young specimens there are attached to the tips a pro-
longation of the rachis, having longer rami but shorter radii than those immediately
below. A very similar though more perfect structure is found in some other birds of
other orders, where there can be no question as to their downy nature and position.
Unquestionably this irregular, imperfect, and short-lived growth is the remnant of
the downs of the flight feathers. They rarely exceed 3 or 4 millimeters in length.
In Sula they are much larger and more persistent, and differ but little in the other
families. ;
Unlike most water birds, the cormorant is hatched nude and its eggs are very
small, considering the bulk of the parents. Soon after hatching the down appears,
short at first but increasing in length as the bird grows. As it reaches full size the
376 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
first true feathers, the wintering plumage, appears, and as it covers the body the down
loosens and drops out. A microscopical examination of this down reveals a true
bunch of down rami but all united at their proximal ends in a somewhat uneven
manner, so that their combined mass at that point is homogeneous and can not be
separated, when fully grown, into rami parts. Figs. 10 and 11 show the structure of
these downs. We have thus a peculiar case quite unlike any other North American
bird except the members of this order in that the first body downs are not pushed out
by and attached to the tips of the new feathers.
The presence of a well-defined persistent rachis or calamus, the unequal and
irregular dividing of the bases of the down rami and their nonattachment, externally,
to the tips of the new feathers, their slow growth, and the long period of use of the first
true feathers, suggests that we have to do with feather conditions much more primi-
tive and degenerate than in water birds generally, and quite different to those to be
considered later. No structure or rami bases can be seen in the rachis when fall
grown, though as it is growing the bundles of rami fibers are distinctly to be seen
even to the growing end, as shown in fig.12. Further explanation will be found with
the plate. : ;
Consideration aud comparison of these feather structures and the environing
influences of the habitat of the species has led me to the conclusion that the cor-
morauts, with the other members of the order, occupy a much lower position on the
avian scale than the other species of this list. The very small egg, the nudity at birth,
the growth and character of the first and second feathering are morphological charac-
ters, which, taken together, are so strikingly different from our other water birds as
to be explained only on the ground of the birds being less advanced, and therefore
more generalized. The principal use of feathers is as a protection to the cuticle,
especially to prevent the rapid loss of body heat; therefore the great differences
noticeable between the feathers of land and water birds—such, for instance, as the
long, narrow, fluffy, less rigid and less oily feathers of the former as compared with
the short, broad, and more compact, greater curved, and more oily feathers of the
latter . are adaptive and their use highly mechanical. It thus follows that differences
of method and sequence of growth of the feathers of water birds, when the mechani-
cal stress due to similarity of use varies but slightly, or not at’ all, are of value on
purely morphological grounds, and suggestive of the path of their evolution. The
specialization of any group is due to the constant efforts of such to adapt themselves
to minute changes of environment during millions of years, the pathway being
selected by the tastes of a more or less numerous body of individuals, separate
bodies diverging in different directions and gradually becoming more different, thus
forming other species and genera. But the slight need of further physiological
specialization of the feather growth, after having once attained a high plane, is shown
by the sufficiency of their development in securing an end necessary for the direct
preservation of the species—the prevention of the rapid loss of. body heat and protec-
tion of the cuticle. Further changes (color and shape) must necessarily result from
the action of psychological or psychodynamical influences. According to this view
the cormorant has remained at, or probably degenerated to, a lower point on the
avian scale than any of the other forms of this list. And this seems true also of the
other members of the same order, although all of them have variously differentiated
in the direction of greater specialization, but not in all respects to the same extent as
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 317
other water birds.' The fact that different species have accomplished similar com.
parable results in mature plumage, by roads so strikingly different, argues, I think,
an evolutional suggestion of the chronological changes which have taken place. Our
knowledge of the relationships of extant to extinct forms is obviously crude and
inexact, because of the great lack of precise data and the deficiencies of the known
and guessed at geological record; and on the other hand one is apt to be misled by
not properly discriminating between the purely morphological characters and those
that are partly or entirely and strikingly adaptive, either on physiological or psycho-
logical lines.
Tam fully aware that in thus placing this species at the foot of my ornithological
ladder I am doing violence to current opinions; yet considering its life history, its
evident generalized low structure, and lack of advanced specialization, I can not
consider it as anything but lower in the avian scale than the other species of water
birds to follow. :
The nest of the red-faced cormorant is large, 16 to 18 inches in diameter, and is
placed in the center of a niche or shelf of the rocks. It is composed almost entirely
of sea ferns with a few quill feathers of the large gulls inserted in the sides, perhaps
for ornameut or recognition. The nests are very filthy; insects, especially maggots,
swarm beneath them, and evidently they are used for many seasons, with repairs.
They breed early. Elliott took two eggs, well incubated, on June 1, 1872, and I
‘secured young, sowe a week old, on Walrus Island, on June 13, together with eggs
more or less advanced in incubation. Some nests contained two, others three, and a
few four eggs. Usually the birds leave the nest upon our approaching, but in one
case by moving slowly I succeeded in capturing a female by the neck with my hand.
“From the nest of a cormorant I removed two full-grown birds, to all appearances
the parents of the brood of chicks, and I afterwards observed two other adult birds
feeding the chicks and taking a parent’s care of them.”—Lutz.
The eggs of this species are very small for the size of the birds. The general
color is a light, pale blue, over which is deposited, thinly and thickly, a layer of white,
chalky lime, which is roughened by contact with the nesting material. Usually the
blue can be seen through this white layer, but often it is thick and can be picked off
and scraped from the bluish surface of the egg. That the white surface layer is soft
when the egg is deposited is shown especially by No. 16741, which has several small
pieces of grassy matter imbedded in the surface, besides numerous impressions of
others. The eggs are filthy, as a rule, when in the nest, and when advanced in
incubation are apt to be stained yellowish, even when well washed and cleaned.
The largest and smallest eggs were collected by Mr. Elliott in the summer of 1872,
and measure 2.60 by 1.45, 2.26 by 1.57. A set of three taken by myself on June 13,
1890, on Walrus Island; measure 2.50 by 1.55, 2.41 by 1.52, 2.36 by 1.54. A single.
egg taken at the same time is 2.40 by 1.40. I saw several sets of four.
The following are the weights of seven specimens collected June 13, 1890: Adult
1'Thus in Sula dowus are prowinently attached to the tips of the flight feathers and their coverts,
and in one species at least to the scapulars. Otherwise they are as in Phalacrocorax. The explana-
tion is perhaps simple, the higher food-getting habits of Sula having produced and fixed a correspond-
ing advancement of feather structure on the parts mentioned, owing to their habitual use. The low
grade of the members of this order has permitted a degeneration of the connective portion of the first
two feather structures on those parts less concerned in the powers of flight, and which, in Phalacro-
corax, has extended to nearly a the feathers.
378 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
males, BA and 58 pounds; adult females, 44 and 33 pounds; immature (brown) males,
48, 52, and 52 pounds.
Order ANSERES. Lamellirostral Swimmers.
Family ANATIDAE. Ducks, Geese, and Swans.
Eleven are here noted as occurring on the islands; others are undoubtedly to be
found during migrations and in winter. Three species traced, two commonly and
the other in small numbers. Of one of these, the Harlequin duck, it would seem that
the nest and eggs have not been seen on the islands, though the young apparently
have been taken.!
2. Merganser americanus (Cass.). American Merganser.
Mergus americanus, DALL, Proc. Cal. Ac. Sci., 1873, 30.
M[ergus] merganser, COUES, Key, 1890, 716.
Merganser americanus, SaLvapori, Cat. B. Br. Mus., XXVII, 1895, 477.—A. O. U. Ch. List,
1895, 47.—RipGway, Man. 1896, 89. ;
Of undoubted occurrence during migrations and in winter, but the only knowl-
edge 1 have is from Dr. Dall’s reference as above, which simply notes its occurrence
in winter.
3. Harelda hyemalis (Linn.). Old-Squaw, ‘‘Saafka.”
Harelda glacialis, CouEs, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 191; Key, 1890, 706.—
ELLiotTt, Mon. Seal Ids., 1882, 130.—SaLvapont1, Cat. B. Br. Mus., XX VII, 1895, 389.
Clangula hyemalis, A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 55.—RipGway, Man. 1896, 106.
Harelda hyemalis, A. O. U. Com., Auk, 1897, 125.
A common species. Breeds near the freshwater ponds. ‘The Saafka is a very
lively bird, particularly in the spring, when, with the breaking up of the ice, it flies
into the open reaches of water-and raises its peculiar, sonorous, and reiterated cry of
ah-naah-nadh-yah, which rings cheerfully upon the ear after the silence and desolate
dearth of an ice-bound winter”—(Hlliott). They can be found on all the ponds, and
it is common to see a male resting quietly on the surface at no great distance from its
sitting mate. When disturbed and made to fly, the lond cries of the male sounded very
like ow-ow-6w-owerrr, Between the foxes and the natives, who, upon finding a nest,
generally suck the eggs, it is a wonder that the species is so common. Before or
about the time that the young are hatched and brought to the ponds by their mothers,
the males have forsaken their usual haunts on the ponds and have left for the open
sea. This occurs early in August. The nests are placed almost anywhere on the flat
ground near the ponds, on a little rise, usually. On June 12 I found a nest and nine
fresh eggs about 40 feet from the village pond on St. Paul. + It was placed on a little
hillock on the killing ground. When flushed, about 10 feet off, the bird tlew directly
to its mate in the pond. Leaving the eggs, I returned soon, to find that she had been
back, had covered them completely with down and dry, short grass, and returned to
‘the pond. June 17, before 8 a. m., I found a nest, merely a few pieces of short grass
stems, and containing one egg. Each morning thereafter at the same time I found
another CBE @ and more nest material, Tnelading from the second morning an addition
“This is a very distinc ‘orden, “Tt aioula: ‘probably rank higher, but to place it elsewhere would
do violence to the sequence following. The feather structure and growth (especially of the neossop-
tiles) are quite different and distinct from all our other orders.
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 379
of black down, which was always placed on and around the eggs, not beneath, and
which was evidently from the bird’s own breast. On June 10 several males were to
be seen still in the winter plumage, and one remained for a considerable time after
with the head feathers unchanged. A female, June 21, had not changed at all. No.
118728, 3, June 7. Tip and base of bill black, center bright salmon, blending in
front, but joining black in front of nostrils by a sharp curved linc. Salmon color
continued across lower jaw, with the tip blackish. Feet pearly white, webs darkish,
also joints, as well as between scales; iris yellow gray. No. 118726,?, June 7. Bill
very dark olive, base behind nostrils blotchy greenish; feet similar to 4 ; iris light
hazel. Downy young: Bill dark brown, center of tip of upper mandible horny
reddish, reaching back on the sides somewhat; iris dark brown; feet glossy greenish
gray, joints darker; webs at sides of toes light olive, reaching partly over toes between
the joinis.
4. Histrionicus histrionicus (Linn.). Harlequin Duck.
Histrionicus torquatus, COUES, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 199.—ELLIOTT,
Mon. Seal Ids., 1882, 130.
H[istrionicus]. minutus, COUES, Key, 1890, 707.
Cosmonetta histrionica, SALVADORI, Cat. B. Br. Mus., XX VII, 1895, 395.
Histrionicus histrionicus, NELSON, Bds. Alaska, 1887, 74.—TOWNSEND, Cruise Corwin, 1887,
99.—A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 55.—RipGway, Man. 1896, 107.
An abundant species about the rocky islets and shores, usually in quite large
flocks. “It is the most gregarious of all the duck tribe known to these islands; flocks
of a hundred closely bunched together may be found at every turn by the traveler on
the coast; nor is it particularly wild or shy, for every morning at St. George * * *
I could have a shot at fifty or a hundred of these birds. * * * It is a remarkably
silent bird, and from it I never heard any cry whatever during the whole year; for it
is about the island, unless the ice drives it away, throughout that entire period. _
(Elliott.) On a little rock off shore, under Village Hill on St. Paul, I saw frequently
fully 150 of this species. They came about 7 p.m. to roost during favorable weather.
Seeing a person on the cliff, they fly off into the sea; but if one remains quiet they soon
return, and, taking advantage of the crest of a wave, make a short flight to the rock.
Among them, on June 12, I saw three male Steller’s eiders and several females. In
bad weather on the western side of the island they roosted at night on the rocks in
the harbor, and often during the summer came into the harbor, and even flew up the
lagoon. On July 10 I counted 63 in the harbor, of which only 3 were males in full
plumage. I was told that some young were killed on St. George during the summer.
The eggs, of which few are known, even these being of doubtful identification, are
given by Mr. Ridgway in his manual as “ buffy white or pale bufty, 2.30 by 1.62.” Nos.
64297-64301, ¢ 2 2 ¢, June-July, 1873, St. George, H. W. Elliott. No. 106839, ¢,
June 14, 1885, Otter laland, C. H. Townsend.
5. Eniconetta stelleri Pall. Steller’s Eider.
Somateria stelleri, Cours, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 192.—ELLIOTT,
Mon. Seal Ids., 1882, 130.
Somateria (H.) stelleri, CouES, Key, 1890, 709.
Heniconetta stelleri, SALVADORI, Cat. B. Br. Mus., XX VII, 1895, 418.
Eniconetta stelleri, NELSON, Bds. Alaska, 1887, 75.—A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 56.—Ripaway, Man.
1896, 108.
From the Village Hill at St. Paul in May, 1872, Mr. Elliott shot two examples, and
from the same point of view I saw several on June 10, 1890, in company with many
380 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Harlequin ducks. He also mentions two others that were shot off East Point on St.
George in 1872, In the harbor of St. Paul, off the wharf, on June 14, I saw four and
shot three of them, all adult males. Later I saw others frequently, both males and
temales, iu the harbor, sometimes on the lagoon beach of the killing ground, some-
times flying up the lagoon, and even with the old squaws. I could find no trace of
their breeding, though they were often in pairs. No. 118744, ad. 4, June 14, 1890, St.
Paul, W. Palmer. Length, 17.55; extent, 28.75; wing, 8.57. Stomach and crop
contents: Sand, small shellfish, and a great quantity of sea fleas. W. P.
6. Somateria v-nigra Gray. Pacific Eider.
Somateria v-nigrum, SALVADORI, Cat. B. Br. Mus., XX VII, 1895, 4830.—Couus, Key, 1890, 712.
Somateria v-nigra, A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 57.—RipGway, Man. 1896, 110.
Visits the islands in winter. Seldom seen near shore. Usually common outside
of the ice.
7. Nettion carolinense Gmel. Green-winged Teal.
Nettion carolinensis, SALVADORI, Cat. B. Br. Mus., XX VII, 1895, 250.
Querquedula (N.) carolinensis, CouES, Key, 1890, 695.
Anas carolinensis, A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 50.—RipGway, Man. 1896, 94.
We saw one in a pond near the village of St. George May 28, 1890, which was
killed later the same summer. They are migratory and usually occur every year in
small numbers, but are not known to breed.
8. Anas penelope Linn. European Widgeon.
Mareca penelope, Cours, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aft. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 191; Key, 1890,
694.—ELLIOTT, Mon. Seal Ids., 1882, 130.—SaLvapor!, Cat. B. Br. Mus., XXVII, 1895, 227.
Anas penelope, A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 49.—Ripa@way, Man. 1896, 96.
“Jt is an interesting fact that the widgeon which visits the Pribilof Islands is not
M, americana, which would have.been anticipated, but the true M. penelope, as Mr.
Elliott’s specimen attests.”—(Coues.) ‘It is seldom seen, never in pairs, does not
breed on the islands, and apparently the few individuals noted during two years’
observations were windbound or astray.”—(Hlliott.) Mr. Elliott?s specimen added
this species to the American avifauna, but quite a number of others have been taken
since in various places, especially among the Aleutians, where they probably breed.
No. 62525, ad. 6, May 27, 1872, St. Paul, H. W. Elliott.
9. Anas boschas Linn. Mallard.
nas boschas, Couns, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 190; ELLioTr, Mon.
Seal Ids., 1882, 130; A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 48.—Rrpaway, Man. 1896, 91,
A[nas] boscas, Cours, Key, 1890, 691.
Anas boscas, SALVADORI, Cat. B. Br. Mus., XX VII, 1895, 189.
A few undoubtedly breed about the Great Lake and the ponds at Polovina, on St.
Paul, and sometimes visit the other lakes. I am not aware that the nest and eggs
have been taken, but the birds are often seen, as I saw them frequently during the
summer. They are more numerous during the migrations. No specimens.
10. Anser albifrons gambeli (Hartl.). American White-fronted Goose.
Anser gambeli, SALVAporI, Cat. B. Br. Mus., XXVIT, 1895, £5.
Anser albifrons gambeli, A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 61.—Couzs, Key, 1890, 684,—RipGway, Man.
1896, 116.
On June 11, 1890, on a little grassy islet in the village pond on St. Paul I saw two
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 381
geese having no black on the heads or necks. Later I saw two others. They probably
occur as migrants every year.
11. Branta canadensis minima Ridgw. Cackling Goose.
Branta canadensis, var. leucopareia, COUES, in Elliott’s Rpt, Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 190.
Branta canadensis, ELLIOTT, Mon. Seal Ids., 1882, 130.
B[ranta] c[anadensis] leucoparia, Couss, Key, 1892, 689.
Brania minima RipGway, Proc. U.S. N. M., 1885, 22.—SatvaporiI, Cat. B. Br. Mus., XX VII,
1895, 116.
Branta canadensis minima Ripa@way, Proc. U.S. N.M., 1885, 355.—Man., 1896, 117.—A. O. U. Ch.
List, 1895, 63.
Does not breed, but seen every year, spring and fall. While walking to East
Landing on June 25 a goose flew past me while on its way up the island. On June 28
a native saw twenty-nine in Kamminista Lake About the same time I saw two
others come in out of the fog on the reef and pass on, flying very low, up the island.
No. 62526, ad. 6, May 14, 1872, St. Paul, H. W. Elliott.
12. Philacte canagica (Sevast.). Emperor Goose.
Philacte canagica, Cours, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 189; Key, 1890, 686.—
ELLIoTT, Mon. Seal Ids., 1882, 130.—TURNER, Con. Nat. Hist. Alaska, 1886, 142.—Town-
SEND, Cruise Corwin, 1887, 99.—A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 64.—Ripe@way, Man. 1896, 118. —
SALVADORI, Cat. B. Br. Mus., XX VII, 1895, 109.
Stragglers occur almost every summer and as migrants. Elliott says they get
“over here by mistake, I fancy, for the flock of which I witnessed the capture landed
on St. Paul so exhausted that the natives ran the birds down in open chase over the
grass.” One was killed on St. George July 16, 1890, and others have been taken
since. They occur nearly every year in-varying numbers. ‘Three or four stragglers
were also seen on St. Paul Island in September.”—( Townsend.)
13. Olor columbianus (Ord). Whistling Swan.
Cygnus columbianus, SALVADORI, Cat. B. Br. Mus., XX VII, 1895, 32.—Couss, Key, 1890, 686.
Olor columbianus, A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 65.—R1ipGway, Man. 1896, 120.
They occur occasionally. Several were seen on St. George in the fall of 1889 and
three rested on the shore at Halfway Point, on St. Paul, during the same autumn.
Order TUBINARES. Tube-nosed Swimmers. !
Family DIOMEDEIDAE. Albatrosses.
14. Diomedea albatrus Pall. Short-tailed Albatross.
Diomedea brachyura, Cours, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 194; Key, 1890,
775.—EL.iottT, Mon. Seal Ids., 1882, 131.
Diomedea albatrus, SALVIN, Cat. B. Br. Mus., XXV, 1896, 427.—A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 28.—
Ripaway, Man., 1896, 51.
While I was on St. Paul a brown immature bird was decoyed to a fishing boat
by means of small pieces of fat and was killed with a stick by a native. Generally
a few can be seen among the kelp and wash off the Reef point, but they are quite
rare as compared with many years ago when whales and whalers were numerous, for,
as Elliott says of one that he shot, ‘For as I first discussed the large bulk and’
spread of the albatross prior to shooting the natives clapped their hands and said,
¢You should have been here twenty years ago, when instead of this solitary example
you would have seen thousands.’ They came with the whalers and disappeared as
' The first and second feather structures of the members of this order are not greatly different to
those of the grebes and loons and the lower mémbers of the auks, though evidently inferior.
382. THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
they had done.” On August 10, when leaving St. Paul, we saw five brown birds off
the reef, but the adult white-bodied birds are occasionally seen. A specimen is
recorded on the National Museum Catalogue as having been taken between St. George
and Walrus Islands, No. 68346, 2°, U.S.N.M., August 12, 1873; No. 11872, im. 3,
U.S.N.M., August 4, 1890, St. Paul, W. P., was as follows: Upper bill entirely pale-
rosy flesh color, with nail darker; lower bill much lighter, with the center of tip
greenish; iris, dark brown. Feet, flesh color with a brownish tinge, darker toward
tip of toes and, altogether darker than bill. Testes, very minute. Length, 37.45;
extent, 93.30; wing, 24.25. Stomach contents, the bait with which it had been
decoyed, three small intestinal worms, and a few white feathers, W. P.
Family PROCELLARIIDAE. Fulmars and Petrels.
I am aware of but two members of this family which have been found on the
islands. One is common and breeds; the other is rare, but may breed. Other species
undoubtedly occur and will be taken. 7
- 15. Fulmaris glacialis rodgersi (Cass.). Rodger’s Fulmar. ‘‘ Lupis.”
Fulmarus rodgersii, DALL and Banw. ‘rans. Chic. Ac. Sci. 1869, 303, Pl. XXXIV, fig. 1.—Bairp,
t. c, 323, Pl. XXIV, fig. 1.—Sa.vin, Cat. B. Br. Mus., XXV, 1896, 427.—[Covxs], Am. Nat.,
IV, 1870, 371.
Fulmarus glacialis, ELLiotr, Mon. Seal Ids., 1882, 131.
Fulmarus glacialis rodgersii, Couns, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 195.—
Nexson, Bds. Alaska, 1887, 62.—TowNsEND, Cruise, Corwin, 1887, 99.—Couxs, Key, 1890,
778,.—A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 30.—RipGway, Man., 1896, 58.
This gracefully flying bird is abundant off the south and east shores of St. George,
and also on the cliffs of Otter Island. They breed at both these places, but not on
either St. Paul or Walrus Island. A number of specimens in the National Museum
collection were collected by Elliott and Townsend. They are all in the white phase.
On August 11, 1890, when leaving St. George I saw a single dark-bodied bird evi-
dently of this species. It ‘‘comes very early in the season and selects some rocky
shelf secure trom all enemies save man, where, making no nest whatever, but squat-
ting on the rock itself, it lays a single large, white, oblong-oval egg and immediately
commences the duty and labor of incubation. It is of all the waterfowl the most
devoted to its charge, for it will not be scared from the egg by any demonstration
that may be made in the way of throwing rocks or yelling, and it will even die as it’
sits rather than take flight, as I have frequently witnessed. The fulmar lays from
the 1st to the 5th of June.”—(Hlliott.) The eggs are highly prized for food, but their
collection is dangerous work, They evidently come early or remain near the islands
all winter. “The chick comes out a perfect puffball of white down, gaining its first
plumage in about six weeks. It is a dull gray, black at first, but by the end of the
season it becomes like the parents in coloration, only much darker on the back and
scapularies. They are the least edible of all the birds about the islands. Like others
of the family they vomit up the putrid contents of their stomachs upon the slightest
provocation.”—(Hlliott.) The eggs are white and are well pitted. One collected by
Elliott on Otter Island in 1872 measures 2.95 by 1.88. Two others from St. George,
June 10, 1873, Elliott, measure 2.80 by 1.78, 2.68 by 1.86. Nos. 62538, 62539, 62540,
62541, June 10, 1872, Otter Island. H. W. Elliott. No, 106859, 2, June 14, 1885, Otter
Island, C. H. Townsend. No. 63345, 2, March 1, 1874. George R. Adams, Walrus
Island.
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 383
16. Oceanodroma fureata (Gmel.). Forked-tailed Petrel.
Oceanodroma furcata, A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 36.—Cours, Key, 1890, 782.—SaLvin, Cat. B. Br.
Mus, XXV, 1896, 357.—Rrpq@way, Man. 1896, 70. _
A fresh specimen was picked up on a beach of St. Paul by Mr. F. W. True. It is
found throughout the Aleutians, breeding on many of the islands and may often occur
about the Pribilofs. Also, it is possible that they may breed about the interior of
St. Paul, visiting, as is their habit, their burrows at night. Several suspicious places
that I saw about Boga-slov may be thus explained. A second specimen was picked up
near the head of the lagoon on St. Paul and preserved as a skeleton by Prof. d’Arcy
- Thompson about August 12, 1897, as I am informed by Mr. Lucas. No. 151464, °,
July 12, 1895, St. Paul, F. W. True.
Order PYGOPODES. Diving Birds.
Family GAVIIDAE. Loons.
. Loons are seldom seen, but may occur in numbers during the winter and migra-
tions. Other species than those mentioned undoubtedly occur.
17. Gavia adamsii (Gray). Yellow-billed Loon.
C[olymbus] t[orquatus] adamsi, Couns, Key, 1890, 790.
Urinator adamsii, TOWNSEND, Cruise, Corwin, 1887, 98.—A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 4.—-Ripaway,
Man. 1896, 5.
Colymbus adamsii, GRANT, Cat. B. Br. Mus., 1898, 500.
One of this species was killed by a native in August, 1885, on St. Paul, as men-
tioned by Mr. Townsend in the cruise of the Corwin. The specimen was preserved
for one of the Treasury agents, who informed me in 1890 that he still had it.
18. Gavia arctica (Linn.). Black-throated Loon.
Colymbua arcticus, COUES, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 201; Key, 1890, 791.—
ELuioTT, Mon. Seal Ids. 1882, 133.
Urinator arcticus, NELSON, Bds. Alaska, 1887, 36.—A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 4.—R1p@way Man.
1896, 7.
Colymbus pacificus, GRANT, Cat. B. Br. Mus., 1898, 494.
Mr. Elliott, while surveying Zapadni on St. George in 1873, found a nearly dead
individual which had been thrown ashore by the surf. It was an adult male and the
natives who saw it agreed that it was very rare. While on the Rush, off the north
shore of St. Paul on August 7, 1890, Mr. Elliott and myself saw a loon which may
have been of this species. No. 64303, U.S.N.M. ad. 3 June 22, 1873, St. George, H. W.
Elliott.
Family PODICIPIDAE. Grebes.
Owing to obvious difficulties it is not possible to procure many of these birds
about the islands. I saw none; they are seldom seen.
18. Colymbus holboellii (Reinh.). Holboell’s Grebe.
Podiceps griseigena, COUES, in Elliott’s Rpt. Affairs, Alaska, 1875; Reprint, 1875, 201.—ELLioTT,
Mon. Seal Ids, 1882, 133.
Podiceps griseigena holboellit, Cours, Key 1890, 749.
Colymbus holboellii, NELSON, Bds. Alaska, 1887, 35.—A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 1.—Rip@way, Man.
1896, 5.
Podicipes holboelli. GRANT, Cat. B. Br. Mus., 1898, 542.
Presumably uncommon during the fall and winter. Mr. Elliott obtained one on
St. George; No. 64302, im. 0, U.S.N.M. Coll. June 22, 1873.
384 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Family ALCIDAE. Auks, Murres, and Puffins.
The nine members of this family which occur well represent the diversities found
in this group. They are exceedingly abundant and all breed on the islands, some of
them in communities of numberless individuals. During the early morning and in
the evening during the summer hundreds of thousands of several species may be seen
from one point of observation on St. George at the huge cliff near the village on the
north shore. Here is a sight of which perhaps the equal is not known. On Walrus
Island their number is legion, practically the whole surface being covered in the even-
ing and morning with the vast numbers of the breeding birds. They leave the islands
at the close of the breeding season, when the young are able to take to the water, and
are seldom seen during the winter, though a few linger until driven off by ice and
snow. They return in immense numbers early in May. The eggs and bodies of all
are utilized by the natives for food, but the murres especially are of great importance
as well because of their abundance as for their size. Except the Cepphus, they all lay
but one large egg.
20. Lunda cirrhata Pall. Tufted Puffin. ‘ Tawporkie.”
Fratercula cirrhata, COUES, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 203.—ELLioTtT, Mon.
Seal Ids. 1882, 134.
Lunda cirrhata, COINDE, Rev. et Mag. Zool., 1860, 403.—TURNER, Contr. Nat. Hist. Alaska, 1886,
117.—TOWNSEND, Cruise, Corwin, 1887, 98.—CouEs, Key, 1890, 804.—A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895,
5.—RipGway, Man. 1896, 10.—GRant, Cat. B. Br. Mus., 1898, 612.
This odd and fantastic bird is common, and is usually seen perched in rows of
four or five aud more on the edges of the upper shelf of the precipitous blufis. Here
they breed in inaccessible recesses in the broken rocks, but in some places, and espe-
cially on Walrus Island, they nest among the bowlders that have been pushed up by
the ice. In most cases, perhaps, the single large egg is laid on the bare rock, but I
found a nest on Walrus Island on August 7 which contained a slightly incubated egg.
This nest was placed between bowlders, was open to the sky, and was made of dry
seaweeds and sea ferns. It was quite large, about 15 inches in diameter, scanty in
material, and was practically bare in the center. No young were flying by August 10,
The natives secure them by thrusting an arin between or under the bowlders and
grasping a bird on the nest. They are killed by knocking them on the head or by
biting on the base of the skull, the wings being then locked in a peculiar manner by
twisting to prevent escape during their struggles. Elliott records that they come
“up from the sea in the south to the cliffs of the island about the 10th of May, always
in pairs, never coming singly to or going away from the Pribilofs in flocks.” They do
not seem to be as abundant as the following species. Most eggs show but very faint
spotting; but one, nearly fresh, taken by Mr. Elliott on Otter Island July 4, 1890, has
many very obscure irregular and a few fine dark spots, with a large, dark, irregular
blotch near the small end. It measures 2.65 by 1.86. Another taken on St. Paul by
Mr. Elliott is 3.00 by 1.95.
21. Pratercula corniculata (Naum.). Pacific Puffin. ‘“ Zpatka.”
Fratercula corniculata, Cours, in ENiott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 202.— ELLIOTT,
Mon. Seal Ids. 1882, 133.—Turner, Con. Nat. Hist. Alaska, 1886, 118.—Nrson, Bds. Alaska,
1887, 38.—TOWNSEND, Cruise, Corwin, 1887, 98.—Couus, Key, 1890, 801.—A. O. U. Ch. List,
1895, 6.—RivGway, Man. 1896, 11.—GranT, Cat. B. Br. Mus., 1898, 620.
More abundant than the above species and found in the same situations with
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 385
them. They are fairly. tame, and one can with care approach quite close without
frightening them. Like all the other members of this family, they leave the cliffs in
the morning and pass the day at sea, returning in the evening with food in their
mouths and throats for the young, or possibly for the sitting mate. Thus during the
day few are seen as compared with the thousands at other times, and on days of bright
sunshine fewer still remain on the cliffs. They are very noisy when down among the
rocks, but silent when in the open. Alarmed and compelled to fly off the rocks, they
will frequently return and, flying parallel with the cliff, survey the intruder with a
curious twist of the neck, which is made all the more comical by the peculiar waxy
bill and oddly colored head. No. 118672 ad. 2 U.S.N.M., August 2, 1890. St. Paul,
W. Palmer. Callosity at corner of mouth, pale orange. Feet pale orange, webs
darker; is evidently a female just off from sitting. Eggs white with obscure spotting
wreathed around large end. Three specimens collected by Mr. Elliott on St. George
July 4, 1873, are 2.78 by 1.80; 2.57 by 1.75; 2.77 by 1.75.
22. Cyclorrhynchus psittaculus (Pall.). Paroquet Auklet. ‘Baillie-Briishkie.”
“ Phaleris aleuticus, COINDE, Rev. et Mag. Zool., 1860, 403.
Phaleris psitiaculus, Cours, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 204.—E..1ort,
Mon. Seal Ids., 1882, 134.—Grant, Cat. B. Br. Mus., 1898, 607.
Simorhynchus psittaculus, CoUES, Key, 1890, 806.
Cyclorrhynchus psittaculus, NELSON, Bds. Alaska, 1887, 41.—TOWNSEND, Cruise, Corwin, 1887,
98.—A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 7.—RipGway, Man. 1896, 12.—STEJNEGER, Cruise, Corwin,
1884, 125.
As mentioned by Elliott and others, the Whitebreast is almost a solitary bird.
They never fly inland and rarely pass inside of the edges of the bluffs. While the
greater number spend the day far out at sea, some can always be found dozing near
the entrance to their burrows, and can then be easily approached. Their pure white
breasts, red upturned beaks, and quaint, watchful movements as one is gradually
drawing nearer make them very interesting objects. On Walrus Island they lay their
solitary egg under the bowlders like the puffins and are often taken by the natives
when they visit that rock. When they return from the sea in the evening to their
young or mate, their mouths and throats are greatly distended with an enormous
quantity of a small, almost colorless crustacean, which they obtain far out at sea.
The burrows on St. Paul, as far as I saw, were excavated in the volcanic cinders over-
lying the rocky bluffs, so that the entrance was always at the edge of the cliff, with
the rock as a floor. On St. George they are quite abundant in small flocks of four and
five, and may often be seen perched on the loose rocks, surrounded by numbers of the
least auklet. Taken on a bright day, the white iris of a wounded bird is so wide that
the pupil is reduced to the size of a small pin’s head, and this changes in size rapidly
as the bird is placed in the dark or light.
White filoplumaceous feathers are to be found on the heads and necks of some spec-
imens mixed in with the dark normal feathering. No. 151598, 2, July 12, 1895, St. Paul,
True, and Prentiss, has a few on the nape. Another 3, August 2, 1890, W. Palmer,
has many all over the head, especially on the throat. No. 62551, 2, July 9, 1872, St.
Paul, H. W. Elliott, is a peculiar one in this respect. There are several Jarge ones on
each side of the head, just above the eyes, and also a number clustered directly back
of the eyes, with an intervening dark space. All these feathers are pure white, have
a long, glossy white stem or shaft, are club shaped and pointed at the upper end and
5947—PT 3——25
386 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
are longer than the adjoining ordinary dark feathers. Under the microscope these
club-shaped ends are seen to be double, each branch having long rami on each side,
the crossing and prolongation of which on the inner side producing the point. (See
figs. 2-4a, Pl. XLI.) No, 62555, 2, July 9, 1872, St. Paul, H. W. Elliott, has a white
patch behind each eye, but it is composed of the ordinary feathers. Other specimens
show a tendency to a stripe at this point, and some have the dark feathers tipped
with white. Dr. Stejneger has described the downy young from some specimens col-
lected by Lieut. J. E. Lutz on Otter Island, July 17, 1884, as being “dark smoky
gray; darker, nearly blackish on the head and sides of neck; chin, throat, and fore-
neck of the same general color, scarcely paler; rest of the under surface light ashy
gray” (No. 100378, U.S.N.M.). ‘Feet bluish gray, light between the toes, underside
black.”—(Lutz.) Cruise of tho Corwin, 1884, page 125. The eggs vary from white to
others showing very obscure spotting. One that I took on Walrus Island, June 13,
1890, was fresh, and measures 2.15 by 1.42. Two obtained by Elliott on St. George,
July 1, 1873, and July 27, 1873, measure, respectively, 2.20 by 1.55, 2.25 by 1.55.
No. 118675, 2, U.S.N.M., June 5, 1890, St. Paul, W. Palmer, measured 10.25 long by
20.50 in extent.
23. Simorhynchus cristatellus (Pall.). Crested Auklet. ‘ Canooskie.”
Phaleris cristatellus, COINDE, Rev. et Mag. Zool., 1860, 402.
Simorhynchus cristatellus, COUES, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 206.—ELLIoTT,
Mon. Seal Ids., 1882, 134.—Nr.son, Bds. Alaska, 1887, 41.—TOWNSEND, Cruise, Corwin, 1887,
98.—CouEs, Key, 1890,807.—A.O.U.Ch. List, 1895,7.—RipGway, Man., 1896, 13.—STEJNEGER,
Cruise, Corwin, 1884, 126. —GRANT, Cat., B. Br. Mus., 1898, 601.
This is an abundant species and differs greatly in its habits from its relatives.
“This fantastic bird, the plumed knight of the Pribilof Islands,” breeds in colonies of
some 10 to 20 pairs on the roughest and usually most prominent points on the bluffs,
and I think also among the bowlders above high tide, and where the egg is placed in
the deepest and most inaccessible recesses. Unlike the preceding species, they
usually fly in small compact flocks over the land about their breeding places; and dur-
ing the season this is a common occurrence, especially near the village of St. George,
where, among the countless thousands of the least auklet, small flocks of this dark-
bodied and peculiarly crested species are conspicuous when they sweep in over the
land. At such times they fly over the arc of quite a large circle, returning again far
out to sea. Among the white residents they are known as “sea quail,” and this name
is certainly suggestive, as their resemblance at even a little distance to California
quail is very striking. They are very wary, but may be readily observed with care.
Upon approaching a flock perched upon a rocky shelf they will instantly take flight.
One can then conceal himself as close to the place as possible, for the birds will soon
return, not, however, flying directly to the place, but almost parallel with the shore
line. If nothing unusual is noticed, upon their next return they will perch upon the
shelf, though a few may repeat tle trip. In this way I have made them repeat the
journey several times simply by showing myself a little. Some would perch and
watch, while other species would gradually gather around, and in their comical way
wonder about the strange object moving between the rocks. When disturbed they
utter an honk-like sound impossible to describe on paper; but it is when quarreling
among the rocks that the climax is reached. While stepping one day from rock to
rock under one of the cliffs, I was startled by suddenly hearing the most unearthly
sounds issuing from among the rocks at my feet. J was soon satistied that several
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 387
foxes were quarreling over some prey, but was rather taken aback when soon after
several of these birds emerged and flew off. White filoplumaceous feathers occur on
the head of this species directly over each eye, but a few are to be found also else-
where about the head on some specimens.. There are two extremes of the shape and
extent of the swollen parts of the bill. In one, usual in male birds and rare in the
females, the upper mandible is strongly hooked and the bare mouth parts are very
much enlarged and highly colored. In other specimens, apparently immature birds,
male and female, there is little or no hooking of the bill, the mandibles are much
smaller, and the mouth parts much less in size as compared with the other specimens.
As a rule, it would seem that the small-billed birds have the swollen parts smaller and
softer, so that they shrivel much; in fact, almost dry up. A male collected August 1
had the bill of a clear pale orange, with the tip horny white. A female, the same day,
had a similar colored bill, but the base around the feathering was whitish flesh color.
I saw no specimens showing the shedding of the mouth parts. The downy young
have been described by Dr. Stejneger from specimens taken on Otter Island by Lieut.
J. BE. Lutz, July 22, 1884, No. 100374, U.S.N.M. They are uniform dark, smoky, and
somewhat brownish gray, scarcely lighter on the underparts. Cruise, Corwin, 1884,
page 126. The egg is white, with few very obscure spots. Two, taken by Elliott on
St. George, June 19, 1873, measure, respectively, 2.25 by 1.45, 2.20 by 1.30. Another,
taken the next day, is 2.10 by 1.45.
24, Simorbynchus pusillus (Pall.). Least Auklet. ‘Choochkie.”
Phaleris pusillus, COINDE, Rev. et Mag. Zool. 1860, 403.
Phaleris pusilla, DALL and BANNISTER, Trans. Chic. Ac. Sci. 1869, 309.
Simorhynchus pusillus, COUES, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 208; Key,
1890, 808.—ELLioTT, Mon. Seal Ids. 1882, 134. —Turnur, Con. Nat. Hist. Alaska, 1886, 120.—
NELSON, Bds. Alaska, 1887, 42.—TOWNSEND, Cruise Corwin, 1887, 98.—A. O. U. Ch. List,
1895, 8._Ripeway, Man. 1896, 13.—GRaNT, Cat. B. Br. Mus., 1898, 605.
About as abundant as all the other species together; certainly no one can be
blamed for thinking so after seeing their abundance about the village of St. George.
I can only compare their numbers to an apiary where the ltives are placed, for acres,
about 50 feet apart. Now, imagining that all these hives swarm at once, that each
bee is larger than a swallow and flying in an almost straight line, each about its own
business, we may then have some idea of what can be seen every summer évening
about 7 on the west side of the village of St.George. As Elliott has well said, “it
comes here every summer by millions to breed.” They are usually quite indifferent
to man, but on St. Paul, where their numbers are much less, they will hardly allow
one to get nearer than 30 yards before taking flight. “Usually, about the Ist or 4th
of May every year, the Choochkie makes its appearance around the islands for the
season, in small flocks of a few hundred or thousand, hovering over and now and then
alighting upon the water, sporting one with the other in apparent high glee, making
an incessant, low, chattering sound. But they are only the van to flocks that by the
1st or 6th of June have swarmed in upon the islands, like those flights of locusts
which staggered my credulity on the great plains of the West. They frequent the
loose, stony reefs and bowlder-bars on St. Paul, together with the cliffs on both
islands; and, what is most remarkable, they search out an area over 5 miles square
of basaltic shingle on St. George Island, which lies back and over inland from the
north shore line. To the last position they come in greatest numbers, They make no
nest, but lay a single egg far down -below among the loose rocks, or they deposit it
388 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
deep within the crevices or chinks in the faces of the bluffs. * * * To walk over
their breeding grounds at this season is highly interesting and most amusing, as the
noise of hundreds and thousands of these little birds, which are directly under your
feet, give rise to an endless variation of volume of sound, as it comes up from the
stony holes and caverns below, while the birds come and go, in and out, whistling
around your head, comically blinking and fluttering.”—(HUiott.) On this vast breed-
ing range of this species, on the 28th of May, I accompanied a native for the purpose
of getting a few specimens for myself, while he desired a meal. With a large long-
handled dip net I crouched behind one of the numerous large moss- and grass-bedecked
rocks which so liberally covered the ground. As the birds tly low and in a nearly
straight line and have great difficulty, in fact they have little necessity, in making a
sudden curve to avoid an object, it was only necessary when a flock was seen approach-
ing to raise the net directly in their path. If the distance and their velocity had been
well calculated several birds would be unable to swerve off in time and in consequence
would be engulfed in the net. A quick bringing of the net to the ground would then
complete the capture. A half-hour’s work resulted in my securing some twenty
specimens, but the Aleut close by had ten times as many. Sometimes other species
are also secured. During the last days of May hundreds of thousands swarm about
the anchorage off the village of St. George. They are mating and copulation is going
on on all sides. The females remain on the surface of the water while the males
approach from behind by a short fiight, both then taking flight. Many are diving,
the surface is covered with the swimming birds, but the majority are in the air flying
in all directions. Their chattering is incessant and rest is unknown. The morning
departure and the evening return of the hosts of these little auklets are really the most
interesting and attractive features of the bird life on St. George, and one never tires
of the fascinating and extremely novel sight. They are most abundant on land about
3 and 4a. m.and from 7 to 10 p.m. When coming to the surface after a dive they
come up with quite a bounce and after a few hasty turns take flight. Individual
variation in this species is considerable. Of the decorative white head feathers every
possible variation in size and number occurs, evidently having no relation to sex, or
age, or color condition (see figs. 5-8, Pl. XLI, and explanation). Of 42 specimens
examined in the National Museum collection, the blackest-breasted bird is a female
(No. 151453, July 30, 1895, St. Paul, True and Prentiss), even the usual white throat
patch being half black, and white feathers being decidedly in a minority on the under
parts. The whitest-breasted bird is also a female (No. 62593, May 23, 1872, St. Paul,
H. W. Elliott). It has merely one dark feather in center of breast and a few at the
sides of the neck. A few others have dark feathers in the white throat patch, and
these are all females. In one male a dusky bar runs across the throat at the angles
of the mouth and divides the white into two parts. Nearly every specimen that I
have seen (over sixty) has a few or a greater number of dingy white feathers mixed
in the scapulars, really unmolted winter feathers. Sometimes they are well worn,
in contrast with the newer surrounding dark feathers; often, however, they appear as
fresh as those. The only two winter specimens that 1 have seen have the scapulars
nearly white. The darkest plumaged summer specimens have little or no white
among the scapulars. These dark-backed birds are uncommon in May and can readily
be counted among the thousands of the ordinary spotted-breasted birds. Two fresh
eggs, taken on St. George on May 28, 1890, measure 1.60 by 1.10, 1.55 by 1.17. Of
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 389
eight taken on St. Paul on June 5, 1890, the largest is 1.60 by 1.20, the smallest 1.55
by 1.08. They are always white.
25. Synthliboramphus antiquus (Gmel.). Black-throated, or Ancient Murrelet. “Starik.”
Brachyrhamphus antiquus, DaALL and BaNn., Trans. Chic. Ac. Sci. 1869, 310.
Synthliboramphus antiquus, NELSON, Bds, Alaska, 1887, 43.—Cours, Key, 1890, 811.—A. O. U. Ch.
List, 1895, 8.Ripeway, Man. 1896, 14.—GRANT, Cat. B, Br. Mus., 1898, 596.
In the List of the Birds of Alaska, Dr. Dall tells us (p. 310) that this species is
“common at St. George,” ete. It is found throughout the Aleutian Islands, also on
the Commander group. It may occur on the Pribilofs, but I can not find any further
definite information nor specimens, and Dr. Dall is unable at this late date to furnish
conclusive evidence of its occurrence.
26. Cepphus coiumba Pall. Pigeon Guillemot.
U[ria] columba, CouEs, Key, 1890, 815.—Gnrant, Cat. B. Br. Mus., 1898, 586.
Cepphus columba, NELSON, Bds. Alaska, 1887, 44.—A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 8.—R1p@way, Man.
1896, 17.
I have no information of this species breeding on the islands but they probably
do. I only observed them once, on June 13, while on a boat trip to Walrus Island,
when they were quite common to the southward of ‘that place, but very shy. Elliott
does not mention them, but Nelson says “they nest on the fur seal islands,” and he
tells me that he certainly saw them under the cliffs of St. George. The blackness ot .
‘the bird and the white wing patch render them conspicuous objects on the sea. Their
breeding places are among rocks near the water’s edge and they may possibly breed
on Walrus Island, and perhaps at Polovina on St. Paul, and on St. George. They lay
two white eggs, which measure about “2.41 by 1.64.”—( Ridgway).
27. Uria troile californica (Bryant). California Murre. ‘‘Arrie.”
Lomvia troile var. californica, Couxs, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 210;
ELLIOTT, Mon. Seal Ids., 1882, 1385; Key, 1890, 817.
Uria troile californica, NELSON, Bds. Alaska, 1887, 45.—A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 11.—Ripe@way,
Man. 1896, 18.
Uria troile, GRANT, Cat. B. Br. Mus., 1898, 573 (part).
Occurs in small squads on the cliffs of St. Paul and St. George. Seen from the
edge of the cliffs above, I found that I could readily distinguish them from the other
darker and more robust species. They are much slenderer, with smaller and sharper
bills; the upper parts are a light brownish ash color as seen from above when one is
directly over them. I could thus readily distinguish them when mixed with the
thousands of arra. On a visit to Walrus Island, on June 13, I saw none of these
birds, those taken being the next species, and my visit being confined to the western
and northern parts of the island; but on Janding again, on August 7, on the south-
eastern part, I was astonished by their abundance, none of the other species being
seen. Thus the two forms were occupying different portions of the available space
and breeding by thousands. On this last date, from the water’s edge, extending. back
perhaps 30 yards and along on either side for a considerable distance, were thousands
of murres, which opened before me and, rushing over the rocks, threw themselves off
into the sea by thousands. Some hundreds of eggs nearly ready to hatch were to
be seen and young of various sizes were numerous. In some cases an old bird
sheltered under her wings several young of different ages. The rocks were very wet
and dirty, but by sudden rushes I succeeded in capturing several adults by grasping
390 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
them by the neck, very few trying to -fly and all scrambling in all haste over the rough
slippery rocks in the utmost confusion. Their habits are doubtless the same as the
more common arra. The downy young of californica would seem to differ from arra
in the dry skin by being of a paler color, and by having the upper edge of the white
of the under parts blending into the dark neck color, instead of being bluntly and
sharply separated, as in arra. The first feathering to appear on the young bird is on
the wings and scapulars, along the sides of the breast and across the lower neck.
Soon the down begins to drop off between the nostrils and the eyes and around the
mouth and the base of the lower mandible, and as the birds get older the new
feathering extends across the back, up the sides of the neck, and all over the under
parts up to the bill. At the same time the feathering extends around the eyes and
bill and running well back of the eyes, so that the only remains of the downy plumage
is on the top of the head, extending down the back of the neck almost to the scapulars,
scattering down the back, and extensive about the rump, where it is still attached to
the tips of the new feathering beneath. I see no difference between the sexes. They
occur about the islands all winter apparently, as a specimen is in the Museum
collection. This is an immature bird, and has the white of the under parts meeting
across the back of the neck. No. 118684, ad. 2, U.S.N.M., August 7, 1890, Walrus
Island, W. P.; wing, 8.00; culmen, 1.66; tarsus, 1.52. No. 68332, January 29, 1874,
Pribilof Islands, George Rk. Adams.
28. Uria lomvia arra (Pall.). Pallas’s Murre. ‘‘d4rrie.”
Uria arra, DaLu and Bann., Trans. Chic. Ac. Sci. 1869, 309.
Lomvia arra, Couss, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 211; Key, 1890, 817.—
ELLIoTT, Mon. Seal Ids. 1882, 135.
Uria lomvia arra, NELSON, Bds. Alaska, 1887, 45.—TOWNSEND, Cruise, Corwin, 1887, 98.—A. O.
U. Ch. List, 1895, 12.—RimGEway, Man. 1896, 18.
Uria lomvia, GRANT, Cat. B. Br., Mus. 1898, 577 (part).
The interesting account of this bird given by Mr. Elliott in his Monograph is as
true to-day as when written. At anchor off the village of St. George at the end of
May and early in June one can view one of the most marvelous ornithological exhibi-
tions of the world. Thousands of the Least Auklet are close about us, in the water
or flying in every direction in indescribable confusion; but the more stately Murres
sweep by in numerous and somewhat regular platoons, as if passing inspection. These
platoons consist of perhaps from fifty to five hundred individuals, and while never
forming a straight line seem to be continually trying to do so. The central birds are
nearly always in advance, the whole usually forming a very wide_-—”-__ and again
a7; Sometimes a double curve or a combination of flat curves and angles,
_ continually changing, but the approach to a straight line is always the dominant
feature. Comparatively few pass between us and the shore; but on the seaside of the
vessel their number is legion. As far as the eye can see file upon file are moving,
in an apparently endless succession and nearly always in the same direction—
into the wind. It is no exaggeration to say that three platoons pass our line of sight
every second, often many more; these will average at least a hundred each; thus we
have 18,000 birds passing every minute, or 1,080,000 in an hour. But we only see the
edge, not the center, of the parade and from one point only, and many are flying over
the land or are perched on the cliffs! This parade continues until Jate in the morn-
'T have endeavored to estimate the total number of individual birds of all species occurring on
the Pribilofs during a year. My figures reach 9,000,000, which I can not think is an exaggeration.
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 391
ing, when hunger admonishes them that it is time to seek food far out on the waters of
Bering Sea. In the evening it is again gone over before settling on the rocky shelves
of the 900 vertical feet of the great cliff of St. George. As Elliott has well said, “this
is a dress parade of ornithological power which I challenge the world to rival;” and,
taken in connection” with the enormous abundance of the choochkie, it is hard to
conceive that its equal can be found. They mass in close ranks on the numerous pro-
jecting shelves of the cliffs, where they lay their single large, spotted eggs on places
where one wondersif it is possible for them to remain uninjured for the period of about
twenty-five days necessary for hatching. When setting they face the rocks, back out,
and have to turn before leaving; so that when alarmed or excited during their con-
stant quarrels and making a sudden turn it often happens that the eggs roll off and
are dashed upon the rocks below. Like other water birds, they pluck out the feathers
of the center of the upper abdomen to permit the egg to come in contact with all the
body warmth possible, and this assists in causing the egg to leave its rocky nest when
the movement of the bird is hasty. Elliott speaks thus of their actions on the cliffs in
the early summer:
They quarrel desperately, but not by scolding; itis spirited action ; and so earnestly do they fight,
that all along below the high bluff of the north shore of St. George, when I passed thereunder during
the breeding season, I stepped over hundreds of dead birds which had fallen and dashed themselves
to death upon the rocks while clinched in combat with their rivals; for they seize one another in mid-
air and hang with their strong mandibles so savagely to each other’s skin and feathers that, with the
swift whirring of their powerful wings, they are blinded to their peril and strike the earth beneath
ere they realize their danger and immediate death.
Several times during the season at Walrus Island and, when opportunity offers,
elsewhere, the eggs are collected for food. Soon after the 1st of June several natives
paid a visit to Walrus Island and selecting the freshest eggs ruthlessly destroyed all
the others, so that when we visited the place on June 13 we were able to secure
between three and four thousand fresh eggs. This occurs every year with no appreci-
able effect on their numbers, as later visits are not permitted. The eggs are fairly
good eating when one gets accustomed to them, but the albumen is extremely viscid
and the yolk dark; the taste is not disagreeable. Like probably all their conge-
ners the small young are fed by disgorged crustaceans, but I know that the larger
young and even quite small individuals are fed upon whole fish. On August 4, I col-
lected a young murre and also a small fish, a tufted blenny, Bryostemma polyacto-
cephalus (No. 43005 U.S.N.M.), lying at its side. I had previously witnessed the feed-
ing of several others. With the breast to the rock the mother lands, and bending her
head downward to her young utters a harsh, croaking sound. The youngster raises
its head and, taking the fish from its parent’s bill by the tail, works it sideways in its
own bill, until it gets the head in its mouth, when the fish rapidly disappears. If the
* young has had enough the fish is laid at its side until needed. The fish is carried by
the parent with the head partly down its throat, the tail sticking out from between the
mandibles. In some adult specimens the dilated part of the base of the upper man-
dible, the tomia, is quite whitish, The tarsi are yellowish pearl gray in color, dark
between the scales in front and especially at the joints. The webs are also dark. In
some specimens the toes are a brownish yellow. I have a series of seven specimens
of the downy young not over a week old, the youngest having been assisted out of the
shell by myself. The white of the underbody and the dark of the neck forms a sharp
line, little blending showing. The general color of the back is darker than in cali-
/
392 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
fornica. The body is densely covered with down, that of the head and neck being
blackish, but profusely spotted with white. The white down is less fluffy and is gener-
ally longer than the dark, especially on the neck, where it is yellowish. When the
young murre emerges from the egg, much of this down is still in the sheaths and all is
damp and wiry. As the bird dries, this becomes separated arid flufiy, but with the
long white and yellowish downs this drying is slower than in the other. Thus until
separated each tuft of down appears as a single part and may sometimes be seen as
shown in fig. 9, Pl. XLI, where a tuft is held in the center by the persistent remains of
the sheath. In fig. 10 will be seen one of the tufts sheathless but not separated, and the
tip, really composed of many, appearing as a single piece. The black down soon
becomes dry and fluffy, but the longer white tufts remain as an apparent single growth
for sometime except on the throat and face, where it is soon separated by the move-
ments of the young bird in rubbing its throat and neck on the rocks. Though to the
eye these long, yellowish, pointed dowus appear as single, under the microscope they
are found to consist of six or more, as shown in fig. 11, where a tuft is beginning to
separate. As the new plumage appears it is seen that these bunches of down are
attached to the tips of the growing nestling feather, but the constant rubbing of the
youngster against the rocks and its parent causes the greater number of these downy
parts as they grow out to break off, so that when the bird is three or four weeks old
_ but few remain, and these mostly on the back of the neck. These, however, do not
appear as tufts but as filaments, each attached to the tip of a ramus of the new grow-
ing feather, as shown in figs. 16 and 17. At the point of apparent juncture there can
be seen a slight swelling (a, fig. 14), which is greatly enlarged (a, fig. 18). Instead of
the downy tufts separating, they are often held together around their bases by a some-
what persistent part of the sheath through which the down grew, or by a gluing
together (figs. 12 and 13). In such cases friction soon removes all at once from the
tip of the growing feather. Therefore it will be seen that the tuft of down has no true
rachis of its own, only the temporary one of the sheath. And the parts into which
the tuft can be divided are only elongations of the rami of the first true plumage
feather, as shown in fig. 14. The bunch or swelling is formed, I believe, in this way.
The down grows to its full length before the young murre is hatched. Then the longi-
tudinal growth ceases, but cell making continues and causes the part at or near the
surface of the skin, being soft, toswell. Then after a few days the new feather begins
to appear, slowly at first but steadily, until the downy stage is all pushed out and its
place occupied by the entirely different first-plumage feather.| Sometimes several of
these downy tips will remain attached to the tips of their respective rami, the whole
being held together at the swellings by a sticking or joining (fig. 15). Usually the
downy tip breaks oft below the swelling, but often above, so that it ends some of the
rami of the new feather, but occasionally the break occurs in the center of the swell- .
ing (fig. 18). The same process obtains in the case of the underbody feathers but
varied somewhat in the belly feathers. Here the joined bases of the downy tufts
appear double, as shown in fig. 19. These are numerous and somewhat persistent
until separated by the movements of the bird, plus the growth of the new feather.
But these downs are not readily broken off, so that they persist attached as filaments
to their respective rami much longer than those on the back, except the ones on the
back of the neck, which are the last to be lost. It is curious that these last persist in
'The swelling is found in many birds which I hope to illustrate later.
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 393
pairs on each feather until the youngster is several weeks old. The swelling on the
belly downs is seldom as large as on the others. Usually some swelling is noticeable,
but often the rachises of the rami continues into the downs with little appreciable
increase of size. The figures in P]. XLI and the explanations opposite will explain
these changes. The double effect seen in fig. 19 is common on the belly, and may be
caused. by two tufts adhering. The radii of the down rachis lie flat against it pointing
upward. They evidently adhere until dried and loosened by friction. The first down
of these birds differs from the other species of auks in being stronger and shorter.
From some hundreds of eggs I selected nine as typical of extremes of color and
markings. These are shown in the accompanying photograph, Pl. XXXIX. The
greater number of eggs, by far, is made up of intermediates.
Wing. | Culmen. | Tarsus.
No. 118689 9 ad, Auzist-4, 1890, St. Paul, Wi Pisesweccscsrucenss vensneneveunasecroeenesemseewvawer 8.92 1.60 1.55
No. 118688 § ad. July 30, 1890, Sie Pals We Pes ace -eweh ceed cea ewe een teety< wuredacee seen 9.02 Lae 1.50
No. 151625 ? ad. July 29, 1895, St. George, D. WB y aD wiaisicin ciaeyonseie bioin sie tei Movwsie es Meine ciaie cic ARREST io S Wie 8.50 1.40 1.40
Order LONGIPENNES. Long-winged Swimmers.
Family STERCORARIIDAE. Jaegers.
Three of the four American members of this family occur casually on the islands.
Possibly they are more numerous during the migrations. They breed northwards.
29. Stercorarius pomarinus (Temm.). Pomarine Jaeger. ‘“ Raz-hoi-nik.”
Stercorarius pomatorhinus, Cougs, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 196; Key,
1890, 735.—ELLIoTY, Mon. Seal Ids. 1882, 132.—SauNDERs, Cat. B. Br. Mus. 1896, 322.
Stercorarius pomarinus, TOWNSEND, Cruise, Corwin, 1887, 98.—A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 14.—
Ripeway, Man. 1896, 22.
A rare visitor. Elliott found one ‘perched in a listless attitude on the high,
mossy uplands between Kamminista and Polovina Sopka.” Mr. C. H. Townsend
obtained another on the same island. During the summer of 1890 two were seen on
St. George eating the carcass of a fur seal. One of these was killed and preserved
by Mr. Ed. Lavender. No. 62522, ad. ?, U.S.N.M., June 23, 1872, St. Paul, H. W.
Elliott, light phase. No. 106857, 6, June 16, 1885, St. Paul, C.'H. Townsend.
30. Stercorarius parasiticus (Linn.). Parasitic Jaeger.
Stercorarius parasiticus, COUES, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 196; Key,
1890, 736.—ELLIOT, Mon, Seal Ids., 1882, 132.—A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 14.—Rip@way,
Man. 1896, 22.
Siercorarius crepidatus, SAUNDERS, Cat. B. Br. Mus. XXV, 1896, 327.
Casual. “I have seen but four or five examples of this species, which may be rated
as an infrequent visitor. It may be found upon the grassy uplands, where it will
alight and stand dozing in an indolent attitude for hours.”— —(Elliott.) He found half-
digested berries of Empetrum in the stomachs. No. 62524, ? , U.S.N.M., June 15, 1872,
St. Paul, H. W. Elliott, dark phase.
31. Stercorarius longicaudus Vieill, Long-tailed Jaeger.
Stercorarius buffoni, Couxs, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 197; Key, 1890,
738.—ELLIoTT, Mon. Seal Ids. 1882, 132.
Stercorarius longicaudus, A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 15.—Ripa@way, Man. 1896, 23.
Stercorarius parasiticus, SAUNDERS, Cat. B. Br. Mus. XXV, 1896, 334.
Seldom seen. “The specimen in my collection is one of the only two I ever
394 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
obtained on the Islands.”—(Hlliott.) They were apparently feeding upon insects and
upon the small blackberry of Hmpetrum. No. 62523, ad. 2, June 13, 1872, St. Paul,
H. W. Elliott.
Family LARIDAE. Gulls and Terns.
Of the eight members of this family given here from the islands, three are strik-
ing features of the summer fauna. The others are either rare breeders or are casual
visitors during migrations or in winter. Of two no specimens appear to have been
taken, and of several others but few have been seen or collected.
32. Larus schistisagus Stejn. Slaty-backed Gull.
Larus marinus schistisagus, COUES, Key, 1890, 892.
Larus schistisagus, A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 18.—SaunpErs, Cat. B., Br. Mus. XXV, 1896,
284.—Ripaway, Man., 1896, 29.
Several of the natives informed me that a large black-backed gull, different from
the following, bred sparingly on the cliffs of Otter Island, and that they rarely visited
St. Paul. Daniel Webster, an old experienced sealer who had then spent twenty-two
years on the islands, also told me that a large dark-backed gull was to be found in
small numbers on the cliffs of St. George. On June 11, on St. Paul I saw three, and
on June 12, another, which came in over the Reef from the direction of Otter Island.
Several evenings after August 1 I noticed some large gulls flying slowly in from the
Reef (on oneevening I counted seven). The mantle was much darker than in glaucescens.
They were probably this species, the status of which is very uncertain on the American
side of Bering Sea.
33. Larus glaucescens Naum. Glaucous-winged Gull. ‘‘ Chikie.”
Larus glaucus, COUES, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 198.—ELLioT?, Mon.
Seal Ids., 1882, 132. :
Larus ylaucescens, SAUNDERS, Cat. B., Br. Mus. XX V, 1896, 284.—Couxs, Key, 1890, 741.—A. O. U.
Ch. List, 1895, 17.—RipGway, Man., 1896, 27.
Resident except when ice and snow compels its absence. This is the common large
gull of the islands, the chief scavenger. Breeds on the cliffs of St. George and Otter
islands, and abundantly on the flat central portion of the southern end of Walrus
Island. It does not breed on St. Paul, owing, doubtless, to the smallness of the cliffs.
It is common there, however, for it is a prime scavenger and regularly visits the rook-
eries and killing grounds, and nothing in the shape of food comes amiss to it. On
Walrus Island the nests are quite numerous. On June 13 many contained three eggs
well incubated, some had two fresh eggs, while a few had one or two young and an
egg or two. Larger young were picked up on the rocks near the nests. The nests
are well made, clean, and are generally composed of dead grass stems, which the birds
bring from St. Paul. While most were placed on the flat rock, a few were in depres-
sions of the sand which filled some of the larger crevices of the rocks. The following
may possibly be an unique occurrence: After 5 p.m.on June 13, while returning trom
our trip to Walrus Island, I noticed a large gull flying rapidly toward us. As it
approached I saw another a little on its left and somewhat lower. Soon the fixity of
this relation and similarity of their movements attracted my attention. The wind
had died out and we were taking turns at the oars. The air was chilly, the sea was
icy cold, and as I had nothing else to do and nothing except the distant shore of St.
Paul was in sight, I watched them. Still they remained in the same relative position,
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 395
and so I called the attention of the ten Aleuts in the boat to them and asked if they
also saw two birds. They all replied “ Yes.” Still there appeared something peculiar
about the birds, and I continued watching. Suddenly they veered off to the right,
and I instantly comprehended the situation. The upper one was really a gull, but the
lower was only its shadow thrown on a fog bank which was rapidly rolling down on
us. Only those who while lying becalmed at sea have seen a fog bank pass in between
them and the desired haven can appreciate the rapidity with which this occurs and
the solid appearance of the rolling, incessantly changing, and compact-appearing mass
of the fog. It was on the upper surface of the front edge of such a fog bank that we
saw this shadow. The bank was moving but a very little slower than the gull, and
after the bird had veered off toward the land it was but a few moments before we
were enveloped, so that it was impossible to see little farther than our boat’s length.
These birds feed on pretty much everything in the way of offal. Even the dead
seals are soon devoured by them, and they vie with the foxes in their ability to search
out and dispose of all animal matter. Evidently the whole colony of this species
about St. Paul breeds and roosts during the summer on Walrus Island.
The ground color of the eggs varies from light-drab gray to sepia, with very dark-
brown, sharply defined, irregular spots from the size of the head of an ordinary pin to
many one-fourth of an inch, and even one three-fourths of an inch, in length. Two of
the eggs in a set of three have a few obscure spots, but the other has more than half its
spots obscured by the later deposits of egg lime. On one egg the spots are somewhat
streaked and penciled. Another set taken the same day, June 13, had two nearly
white eggs and one of the normal color. These white eggs are pale-bluish white, with
very faint spotting; no dark coloring whatever. The first set measure 2.80 by 2.15,
2.85 by 2.05, 2.86 by 2.07. The pale two are 3.05 by 2.11, and 3 by 2.15, the dark egg
having been broken.
34. Larus barrovianus Ridgway. Point Barrow Gull.
Larus barrovianus RipGway, Auk, 1886, 330; Man., 1896, 26.—Netson, Bds. Alaska, 1887, 51.—
A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 16.
Larus glqucus, SAUNDERS, Cat. B., Br. Mus. XXV, 1896, 289 (part).—Couns, Key, 1890, 741 (part).
Among the hundreds of Larus glaucescens seen I collected one specimen of this
large pale gull ou Walrus Island on June 13, 1890. It is the only one that I noticed.
It had three bare places on its lower underbody, thus indicating that it had been sitting
on eggs, though it was a male, Three eggs in the National Museum collection, taken
by Mr. Elliott June 4, 1873, and labeled St. Paul (but evidently from Walrus Island),
have been identified (perhaps wrongly) as belonging to this form. They measure 2.83
by 2.10, 2.93 by 2,and 3.15 by 2.11. They are similar in color to the eggs of L. glaucescens,
though there is a slight tendency to blending about the edges of the spots. No. 118713,
ad., U.S.N.M. Walrus Island, June 13, 1890, W. P. Length, 31.50; extent, 63;
wing, 18.75
35. Pagophila alba (Gunn.). Ivory Gull.
P[agophila] eburnea, CouEs, Key, 1890, 749.—SaLvin, Cat. B. Br. Mus. XXV, 1896, 301.
Gavia alba, A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 15.—Ripe@way, Man., 1896, 24.
A northern species, perhaps a regular visitor in winter. One was taken by the
natives in February or March, 1895, and the speciinen was afterwards secured by
Messrs. F. W. True and D. W. Prentiss. No. 151788, U.S.N.M. Wing, 12.88; tail,
5.28; culmen, 1.42; tarsus, 1.50.
396 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
36. Rissa tridactyla pollicaris Stejn. MSS. Ridgw. Pacific Kittiwake. ‘ Chornie-naushkic Gore-
rooskie.”
Larus tridactyla, COINDE, Rev. et Mag. Zool., 1860, 401. a
Larus tridactyla var. kotzebui, CouES, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 199.—
ELuiort, Mon. Seal Ids,, 1882, 132.
Rissa tridactyla pollicaris, TURNER, Con. Nat. Hist. Alaska, 1886, 124.—A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895,
16.—Ripeway, Man., 1896, 25.—NELson, Bds. Alaska, 1887, 49.—TOWNSEND, Cruise, Corwin,
1887,98.
Rissa] t[ridactyla} kotzebuii, COUES, Key, 1890, 748.
Rissa tridactyla, SAUNDERS, Cat. B. Br. Mus. XXV, 1896, 305 (part).
“This gull breeds here by tens of thousands, in company with its first cousin,
Larus [Rissa] brevirostris, coming at the same time, but laying a week or ten days
earlier than its relative. * * * In building its nest it uses more grass and less
mud cement than the brevirostris does.”—(Hlliott.) Abundant near the village of St.
George on May 28, where a few nests were seen, but no eggs. On June 21, and for
days afterwards a perfect stream of kittiwakes was seen carrying material from the
vicinity of the ponds on St. Paul toward the Reef cliffs and Otter Island.
Viewed from the cliffs the flight of these birds is remarkably graceful, and espe-
cially 80 when they have been disturbed from a midday siesta. I thus disturbed
several dozen one day, aud carefully watched thein as they passed and repassed the
spot where 1 sat on the edge of the cliff. They were all within 20 yards and contin-
ually paraded parallel with the cliff, all the while intently watching me. They would
pass by for some 30 or forty yards, then turn and fly an equal distance on the other
side before again making a turn. Usually the whole distance was accomplished by
sailing, and often the turns and several lengths were traveled in the same way. Thus,
selecting an individual and keeping my eyes on him, I often counted from two to three
trips without a flap of a wing. One individual thus noted made the trip seven times
without once changing his wings from their rigid outstretched position. The length of
his parade was fully 50 yards, and he sailed in an almost straight line and rarely
varied his level, being about as high above the sea as I was on the cliff. Not a move-
ment of the air was perceptible to my senses. He was often so close that as he passed
I could distinctly see the movement of his eye as he slightly turned his head to view
me. Several times the fly lines of two birds would cross at about the same level, but
rarely would one flap to gain impetus enough to get rapidly out of the way. Jt was
more often accomplished by a quiver of the wings on the part of one of the two, a
slight rise as the other passed beneath, and then a similar descent, and the continu-
ation of the journey without any distinct flapping whatever. They thus sailed in
plain view as long as I remained on the rocks, probably thirty minutes.
On August 2, most of the nests contained young, but a few had a young and an
egg, and sometimes two eggs, rarely three. Curiously enough, I never saw a nest
which contained more than one large young. Possibly the first hatched may in its
restlessness crowd the other egg or smaller young out of the nest.! The nests are
usually built on little projecting points of rock, too small to be utilized by any other
species, and are generally placed in groups of four or five or more. The adult plum-
age is attained before the bird is a year old, but a few individuals then show Blens of
1¢¢The Kittiwakes, in many cases, laid but one egg each; sometimes fr) and a set of three eggs
was extremely rare, according to my observation.”—( Lutz.)
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 397
immaturity, some of which are described below.’ No. 118703, im. é, August 5, 1890,
St. Paul, W. P., has three feathers, next to tlie two outside ones on each side of the
tail, with a black blotch near the end; in some there is a blotch on each web. There
is considerable black on the alula feathers and on the primary coverts. A few dark
feathers around the eye. Eye ring, dull red; feet, dark brown, paler on the toes and
tarsi. No. 118700, im. é, July 8, 1890, St. Paul, W. P., has dark spots on tip of alula,
slight black edging running down second primary. Eye ring, indian red; bill, green-
ish yellow, base and tip lighter; angle of mouth and interior, deep orange red; feet
dark, except upper part of inner webs and inside of tibia, which are blotched with
orange yellow. Length 17.25, wing 12.95. No. 118702, ¢, July 27, St. Paul, W. P.
A few black spots on edge of wing, and second primary partly edged. with black on
the white for aninch. Bill yellow, brightest toward base, tip very pale horny; eye
ring vermilion; angle of mouth and interior deep orange red; feet brown, tinged
with yellowish; naked part of tibia, angle of webs and sides of tarsi, orange yellow;
tongue dark flesh color. No.118699,?. Plumbeous on sides of head; bill pale horny
yellow; base of lower, black; angle of mouth and inside orange red, black in front;
feet dark brownish, webs a little lighter; iris, dark brown; eye ring, vandyke brown.
Length 16.75, spread 39.50, wing 12.37. Two eggs, August 2, St. Paul, W. P., well
incubated, measure 2.20 by 1.70, 2.17 by 1.61. Two eggs June 8, 1889, Walrus Island,
C. H. Townsend, are 2.42 by 1.63, 2.19 by 1.52. They vary from a white ground color
to a pale brownish, and are spotted with numerous irregular small blotches of various
shades of brown. Many of these blotches are obscured by later deposits of shell
lime. Some eggs show a tendency to a segregation of spots around the larger end
and a few show a decided belt, but there is no rule. A few have some wavy lines.
37. Rissa brevirostris (Bruch). Red-legged Kittiwake. ‘‘Goverooskie.”
Larus Warnecki, COINDE, Rev. et Mag. Zool., 1860, 401.
Larus brevirostris, CouEs, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 199.—Elliott, Mon.
Seal Ids., 1882, 133.
Rissa brevirostris, DALL and BANnn., Trans. Chic. Ac. Sci. 1869, 305.—TuRNER, Con. Nat. Hist.
Alaska, 1886, 124.—NrE son, Bds. Alaska, 1887, 50.—TOWNsEND, Cruise, Corwin, 1887, 98.—
A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 16.—Ripa@way, Man. 1896, 25.—Cours, Key, 1890, 748.—SauNDERS,
Cat. B. Bri. Mus, XXV, 1896, 312.
To my mind this is the most beautiful species on the islands. Always graceful,
whether on the cliffs or flying, its beautiful form and delicate snow white plumage,
with its vermilion feet, adds much to the avifaunal wonders of these islands. I can
add little to Mr. Elliott’s very full account. Unlike its cousin, which carries its feet
extended when flying, this species nearly always buries them in the feathers of its
underbody as if fearful of showing their beauty except when absolutely necessary.
Their eyes are very dark and very large, much more so when alive than when dead;
the eye rings are vermilion. When fog envelops these islands, both the land and sea,
the sea birds away from home find their way by flying along the edges of the bluffs
where the stored heat in the rocks dissipates the rapidly drifting fog. The wily Aleut,
knowing these characteristics, eusconces himself behind a rock in a suitable location
and with a large dip net intercepts the birds on their way along the bluffs. Thus
2 These specimens readily suggest color changes by means of pigment movement, but really are
imperfectly changed young birds. As the dark color exists always on the.apical part of the feather,
it indicates in such birds a failure for a brief period to suppress the tendency to continue the color of
the first plumage, an individual lapse from the evolutional line of progress of the species.
398 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
many a meal is obtained, and unfortunately our pretty red-legged kittiwake too often
falls a victim. Some summer specimens show signs of immaturity by having a pluw-
beous band on the back of the neck or darker plumbeous spots on sides of head back
of the eyes and around the eyes.! Such specimens have slenderer and less strongly
hooked bills than more adult birds, and have more or less yellowish feet. No. 118712,
?, is evidently immature. Head, spotted; bill, pale greenish yellow, tip lighter;
angle of mouth, greenish yellow; interior, deep orange red; feet, dull orange red; toes
lighter and yellowish; eye riug, vandyke brown; iris, dark brown; naked part of
tibia, and tarsi, yellowish. Six eggs taken by Mr. Elliott on St. George, June 25,
1873, measures 2.06 by 1.61, 2.23 by 1.70, 2.22 by 1.67, 2.31 by 1.58, 2.31 by 1.60, and
2.36 by 1.70. Their color and markings are similar to those of pollicaris but perhaps
lighter. ‘Once in a while an egg will have on its smaller end a large number of suf-
fused blogd-red spots.”—( Elliott).
38. Xema sabinii (Sab.). Forked-tailed Gull.
Xema sabinii, A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 22.—SaunpDERs, Cat. B. Br. Mus. XXV, 1896, 162.—Covuus,
Key, 1890, 753.—RipGway, Man. 1896, 38.
Possibly of regular occurrence. Mr. Elliott saw one on St. Paul, June 4, 1890, and
I saw probably the same individual several times afterwards up the Lagoon. Several
were taken during the summer of 1896, as I am informed by Mr. F. A. Lucas, and ove
was shot on St. George by Mr. D. W. Prentiss. No. 151605, ad. ?, U.S.N.M., Jurtie
26, 1890.
39. Sterna paradisaea Briin. Arctic Tern.
Sterna macrura, SAUNDERS, Cat. B. Br. Mus, XXV, 1896, 62.—Couss, Key, 1890, 764.
Sterna paradiswa, A. 0. U. Ch. List, 1895, 25.—RipGWway, Man. 1896, 43.
Capt. D. Webster, who has spent many winters on St. George, informed me that
a tern, which he accurately described, was fairly abundant every fall under the clifts
of St. George. None breed on the islands. Mr. F. A. Lucas informs me that he saw
two of this species flying over the Lagoon on St. Paul on July 26, 1897,
Order PALUDICOLAE. Cranes and Rails.
40. Grus canadensis (Linn.). Little Brown Crane.
Grus canadensis, TOWNSEND, Cruise, Corwin, 1887, 99.—Couns, Key, 1890, 667.—SHarpR, Cat. B.
Br. Mus. XXIII, 1894, 256.—A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 75.—RipGway, Man. 1896, 35.
Jake, a well-known Aleut sealer, told me on June 28, that he had seen three cranes
that morning north of Kamminista Lake. Going there, I found five, but they were
very wild. They remained in the neighborhood until after August 1, as I saw them
frequently picking up insects on the tundra. One was caught in a trap near the
village in June, 1888. “While at St. Paul Island some natives came to me and
reported having seen a large, long-legged bird wading in a shallow pond near the
village, and gave me a long feather which the bird dropped in its flight.” —( Townsend.)
Order LIMICOLAE. Shore Birds.
Fourteen species are known to occur, of which one is a common summer resident,
almost entirely confined to the islands; another breeds in very limited numbers, while
the others are either stragglers or transients. Several occur in enormous numbers.
! Apparently, according to some, a case of feather repigmentation, but evidently due to defective
change, a lapse or partial failure to attain the higher colors of the species.
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 399
Family PHALAROPODIDAE. Phalaropes.
41. Crymophilus fulicarius (Linn.). Red Phalarope.
Phalaropus fulicarius, Cougs, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 181; Key, 1890,
614.—ELLIoTT, Mon. Seal Ids. 1882, 129.
Crymophilus fulicarius, TOWNSEND, Cruise, Corwin, 1887, 99.—A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 82.—
SHARPE, Cat. B. Br. Mus. XXIV, 1896, 693.—R1p@way, Man. 1896, 144.
' An abundant migrant; found in greatest numbers in the autumn. They arrive
about the middle of May in nearly full breeding dress, but soon leave, and few remain
after the 10th of June. The first fall arrivals I noted, adult males and females, on
July 17; these were very tame, tired, and poor, and a few white feathers of the com-
ing new plumage were showing among the worn breeding feathers. They landed first
on the sandy beaches, but soon spread about the lagoon and ponds; were generally
solitary, and always silent. The later-arriving birds were much the more advanced
in molting. Between June,10 and July 17,1 collected several specimens and saw
others. These were about the ponds at Polovina, but though they seemed perfectly
at home I do not think that they bred. These generally had some injury to the feet. On
May 12, when 800 miles southward of Unalaska, we saw this species, and they grad-
ually became more abundant as we approached land. These were almost entirely in
the white plumage. Mr. Townsend collected eight specimens between June 8, and 12,
1885, on Otter Island. Of the June specimens few have entirely changed to the nup-
tial plumage, nearly all having some white on the under parts and about the face.
No. 118748, ad. °, June 21, 1890, W. P., has changed least of all; has much white
beneath, some on throat, and a great deal in front of eyes and on forehead. Fall
specimens indicate the progress of the molt as follows; No. 64278, ad. 6, July 22,
1873, H. W. Elliott, few white feathers mixed in on scapulars, back, breast, and flanks,
and scattered on head and neck, except in front of eyes; No. 118752, ad. 2, July 29,
1890, W. P., many old feathers on belly, few on neck and around bill, head partly
white, base of occiput black, back almost changed; Nos. 151465, ad. 4 , 151466, ad. ?,
August 7, 1895, D. W. Prentiss, almost entirely changed; white feathers in the major-
ity except immediately around bill and on occiput and nape. No molt of the wings
or tail in any specimen. Stomach contents: “Predaceous beetles (Carabidae).”—
S. D. J.
42. Phalaropus lobatus (Linn.). Northern Phalarope.
Lobipes hypeyboreus, COUES, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 180; Key, 1890, 612.—
EL.iotTt, Mon. Seal Ids. 1882, 129.
Phalaropus hyperboreus, SHARPE, B. Br. Mus. XXIV, 1896, 698.
Phalaropus lobatus, A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 82.—RipGway, Man. 1896, 145.
Principally migratory; but a few breed. Elliott collected young on St. George in
1873, and I obtained two just from the eggs on St. Paul, near Rocky Point, on July 2,
1890. The birds arrive in small numbers about the end of May and mostly pass
northward, only a few pairs remaining on the islands to breed. Elliott found an
empty nest on St. George, June 13, 1872. I could find no nest, though the birds soon
found the intruder on their domestic affairs. The males show the greatest anxiety,
hovering near one, at the same time uttering a shrill series of notes—tweet-tweet—for
such a small bird. By constantly noting the movements of the adults I had fixed
upon a rather dense growth of sedges, near the open water and some 30 feet from
shore, as the place where the young were, and was not disappointed upon wading out
400 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
to find after considerable search two small young clinging to the sedges. They had
evidently made their way through the scanty sedge growth for fully 30 feet from the
shore. Ever and anon as I was watching the old birds would swim near the place,
constantly turning in all directions with head and neck erect. Suddenly the bill
would be thrust into the water, a nutritious morsel would be swallowed and the
turning and paddling continued. No, 118756, ad. ¢ , July 24, 1890, St. Paul, W. P., is
beginning to molt; there are a few new white feathers appearing on the scapulars
and scattered all over the head and neck. Stomach contents: one specimen, ‘(many
diptera”—S. D. J.
Family SCOLOPACIDAE. Snipes, Sandpipers, ete.
43. Tringa ptilocnemis Coues. Pribilof Sandpiper. ‘‘ Wie-lits-kie.”
Tringa crassirostris, DaLL, Proc. Cal. Ac. Sci. 1873,28; Am. Nat. VII, 1873, 634.—Couxs, in
Elliott’s Rpt. Seal Ids. 1873; Reprint, 1875, 182.
Tringa ptilocnemis, CoUES, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873 (note); Reprint, 1875, 182; Am. Nat.
VIII, 1874, 500.—Extriorr, Mon. Seal Ids. 1882, 129.—NELSON, Bds. Alaska, 1887, 105.—Harr-
LavB, Jour. fiir Orn. 1883, 279.—A. O. U. Ch, List, 1895, 87.—Rip@way, Man. 1896, 154.—
PALMER, Nidiologist, I, 1894, 175.
Tringa gracilis HARTING, P. Z. 8. 1874, 243, Pl. XL.
Tringa maritima, DALL and BANNISTER, Trans. Chic. Ac. Sci. 1869, 291; Proc. Cal. Ac. Sci. 1874,
275.
Tringa maritima ptilocnemis, ELLIOT, N. Am, Sh. Bds. 1895, 72.
T(ringa] m[aritima] ptilocnemys, ELLIOT, N. Am. Sh. Bds. 1895, 235.
A[rquatella] ptilocnemis, RIDGWAY, Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club, 1880, 163.—CouEs, Key, 1890, 630.
sae ptilocnemis, NELSON, Cruise, Corwin, 1883, 86.—STEJNEGER, Bull. 29, U. 8. N. M. 1885,
Arquatella maritimus ptilocnemis, SHarrx, Cat. B. Br. Mus. XXIV, 1896, 584.
This bird is unquestionably a good species, and is very distinct in all plumages
from T. maritimus and T. couesti. My series of 64 specimens, together with Mr.
Elliott’s and others in the National Museum collection, show this conclusively. Com-
paring adult breeding birds we find that ptilocnemis is the largest, is much the whitest,
has a strong rufous tinge across the chest, over most of the head and neck, and always
has a black pectoral area. The black, however, varies in different degrees, because in
ull cases the white feathers of the previous plumage are persistent about the center of
the breast and down the abdomen, and do not drop until replaced again by similar
feathers. The rutous tinge is always found, and is especially marked on some speci-
mens. In one, No. 118776, this ovchraceous-rufous of the edgiugs of the back and neck
feathers extends strongly across the lower neck between the white of the throat and
the black pectoral patch. The scapulars are very broadly edged with the same color.
In a few specimens the rufous is confined to a slight tinge around the neck and on
the edges of the back feathers, but all specimens show it. While the bill is practically
straight on most specimens, a few have it slightly decurved near the tip. The white-
ness is quite a prominent feature, and is in great contrast to the darker colors of the
related forms. As to the causes of the greater whiteness of this species, it may be
suggested that it may be due entirely to isolation, with comparative freedom from
enemies, and also from competition with related forms. Mase of acquiring, together
with the abundance of foud, would also seem to operate. During the summer the
adults lead a lazy life. There is abundance of food, easily obtained, and there is very
slight cause for activity. They have no competition and uo enemies except foxes, from
whom it is easy for them to escape. As great activity under contrary conditions tends
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 401
strongly to produce dark colors, it would seem that the environments of this species
would lead, through a kind of inanition, to the nonnecessity of a great production of
pigment-bearing cells. I would ascribe the whiteness of gulls and of the snowy owl
to the same cause—easy life, abundauce of food, and especially, freedom from special
enemies which would provoke constant watchfulness and activity.
One result of Mr. Elliott’s ornithological work was the discovery of this species
as new, and later the knowledge of its restriction to these islands and to St. Matthews
as a Summer resident. It is abundant and tame, and is usually found all over the
moss-covered tundra and in the vicinity of the ponds, and in the autumn on the
beaches ; but it is rare about the higher and central portions of St. Paul. The nest
is a mere hole scratched out in a bed of moss or lichens.. Though I tramped many a
weary mile over their favorite grounds, where the birds were in pairs and abundant, I
did not succeed in finding eggs and but few very small young. This was probably
owing to a very early spring. The young leave the nest soon after hatching, and are
thoroughly well concealed by their mimicry of the confusing mixture of mosses, lich-
ens, and other forms of vegetation which abounds and are so well intermingled on
these islands. It requires much patience and a close scrutiny to detect a crouching
young, even when it is directly within reach. Obedient to their mother’s cries they
flatten themselves with head and neck extended ; with each yard of the ground pre-
cisely similar in pattern and color with every athe yard, aud the parents, especially
the female, trying their best to coax us in other directions, and the uncertainty as to
the exact location of the young, all combine against the collector, so that few speci-
mens reward a tramp that seems exasperatingly needless. The young will not move,
though one stands with the foot touching them, but when once handled and released
they scamper off with all the quickness their long legs can give them. When we
invade the vicinity of a nest or young it is amusing to watch the antics of the female.
She invariably flies in front and flutters with feigned lameness but a few feet away.
If the ground is rough it is more amusing to watch the precipitancy of her flight until
she disappears in a hollow, to reappear in a moment on the other side, cautiously turn-
ing round and eying us to see if we are following. She always keeps in front of us, no
matter which way we turn, and will continue thus for several hundred yards, when
she will suddenly fly off to some distance and after waiting a while will return to the
vicinity of the nest or young. ‘They appear stupid when solitary and without a family,
and will stand perfectly: still, eying one from a little eminence. Occasionally we are
startled by a loud druuett from the side of a sand dune, and I was at a loss for some
time to discover the owner of this most uumusical sound, which finally turned out to
be an individual of this species standing motionless and watching us. It would seem
impossible for this sound to have issued from this bird if I had not seen it in the act.!
These sandpipers have the habit in common with others of their kind of suddenly
elevating the wing directly over the back. Often when alighting on the tundra, as
soon as they stopped up went one wing, followed soon after, perhaps, by the other.
Often while watching a flock on the lagoon beach first one would elevate a wing, then
another ; it was always the near wing which weut up first. I never saw a bird elevate
the off wing first. I know of no reason for their doing so. They are tame. I have
'Their ordinary note is quite musical, something like wher-wher-wher-wher, quickly uttered.
5947—p1t 3——26
402 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
walked up to a flock of about fifty, and with care could drive them before me for some
distance before they took fight, being but a few feet away. The females always pluck
out a patch of feathers on each side of their underbody, and fully half of the males
collected had done the same, thus showing that they also had taken part in incuba-
tion, They-are often seen feeding in the water up to their breasts, and seem to take
delight in it. They swim readily, but not often. On June 30, I saw one fly out to a
stone in a pool, and, after gathering all the food possible, it deliberately swam to
another, and having visited each stone in the same way, flew back to the shore and
then bathed itself, occasionally taking a swim. ,
The downy young are beautiful little things, silvery white beneath, bright, rich
ocherous above, varigated with black and dots of white. The general color above
lacks the grayness of the similar age of maritimus. The white dots are interesting
under the microscope. They are composed of a bunch of highly specialized down, in
which the radii near the tip are crowded and colorless. Fig.1, Pl. XL, shows a bunch
composed of six downs, and also a single component, 1,a. The ordinary down is shown
in Fig. 2; these surround each dot or bunch. As they grow older the first feathers
appear on the sides of the breast, on the back and scapulars; then the primaries and
larger wing coverts appear. Tig. 3 shows the down attached to the tips of the rami
of these new feathers, and the amount of wearing near their tips. In fig. 4 atip ofa
ramus is shown with a down attached; at ais seen the swelling mentioned under Uria
lomvia arra. The feathering continues until the breast and under parts are covered,
when the tail appears. Atthis time there are no feathers on the rump or on the head
or neck. In the next stage feathers have appeared on the occiput and on the auricu-
lars, and are also extending up the neck. At the same time the tips of the back feath-
ers have become somewhat worn, so that the colored margins are narrower and the
black more prominent. The wing coverts are also to some extent worn on their tips.
When the bill is an inch long the down has nearly all disappeared, and when it has
entirely gone the birds appear in small flocks on the beaches, the young generally
keeping together. Then another change takes place, for the entire plumage now gives
way to another, that in ‘hich the bird passes the winter. A few late July, immature
birds show the beginning, for No. 118832, im. ¢, July 29, has a few new feathers on
the middle of the back and on the scapulars. They soon extend all over the back, so
that specimens collected up to August 10 have many of the new whitish feathers on
that region. The contrast is striking between these feathers, the latest being of an
almost even shade of pale plumbean with darker centers and generally with a narrow
white margin. There are no specimens to show the complete change, but it is prob-
able that these young birds remain on the island until it is completed. By the mid-
dle of June the adults have fully changed to the breeding plumage, but on some
specimens a few feathers of the previous winter’s plumage persists much later. Thus
on many specimens some alternate feathers of the scapulars and tertials are of the
previous winter’s well-worn plumage. In fact, few specimens are free from these old
feathers. Soon after the middle of July the new plumage of the next winter begins
to appear. At first a few feathers show about the breast, then on the scapulars,
thence up the neck and over the head, so that by the 10th of August they have
changed one-half. On No. 118764, July 12, the three shortest primaries and on No.
118787, same date, the four shortest have been dropped. The tips only of the new
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 403
feathers can be seen. In No. 118769, July 30, only four old primaries remain, and the
new ones are well grown, but do not yet reach to the tips of the unmolted tertials. The
order of length in these new primaries is 4-3-2-1-5, and sixth very short, counting
from the innermost. No. 118770, August 5, is still further advanced; but three old
outer primaries remain in place. The longest new one, the fourth, is as long as the
tertials and the fifth is within half an inch of it. The sixth is yet very short. The
outer three tail feathers on each side of 118769 are still in place, the central having
dropped out and new ones showing. In 118770 the tail is like the other, but one of the
middle tail feathers is still undropped. In both these birds many new feathers have
appeared all over the body, so that the birds have assumed quite a gray appearance
owing to the whiteness of the winter plumage. No. 54586, August 13, 1868, St. George,
Capt. E. E. Smith, is an adult still further advanced, and is more than two-thirds
changed. The new tuil still has the outer feathers short and partly in the sheaths,
only the two outer old primaries on one wing and one on the other being in place. But
few of the summer feathers are to be seen. It would thus appear that before this species
leaves the islands they assume entirely their new dress. ‘And at this season [August
10] old and young flock together for the first time, and confine themselves to the
‘sand beaches and surf margins about the islands for a few weeks, when they take
flight by the Ist or 5th of September, and disappear until the opening of the new
season.” —( Elliott.)
As shown by Hartlaub (Journ. fiir Ornith., 1883, p. 257), Drs. Arthur and Aurel
Krause found this species wintering along the Portage Bay shore of Alaska. Mr. J. W.
Johnson in April, 1885, also collected a number at Nushagak which are in the National
Museum collection. One, an adult female, is beginning to change to the summer dress.
A few black-tipped feathers of the pectoral patch have appeared on the breast, and
some new ones, full grown, dot the back, scapulars, and the occiput. On two ‘imma-
ture males, taken about the same time, there are a few dark feathers scattered on
the back; otherwise they are in the whitish winter plumage.
We have in this brief sketch of the life history of this species four conditions or
phases which are possibly unique among the Limicolae. First, they remain at their
summer home until the autumn molt is complete, and, conversely, they remain at or
near their winter habitat until the spring molt is at least well advanced; Second, they
have possibly the shortest migration range of any species of the order; third, their
migration route is first eastward! 200 miles over Bering Sea and thence southward
for some distance, to be reversed in the following season; and, fourth, it is probably
the fewest in numbers and the most restricted in habitat, during the summer espe-
cially. “These snipe are now in the lagoon at low water in fiucks of from ten to fifty
or more. They run readily into the water up to their wings and sometimes swim the
small pools in the sand. They are constantly feeding, and will allow one to approach
with caution within a few feet. They feed head to the deeper water and keep the
bill well under the surface. They are apt to quarrel at such times, uttering a low,
harsh cry.”—(Notes, W. P., August 5.). When several are flying past, one or more may
return and perch upon a rock or bank and indulge in a period of watching. The
'This probably indicates the ancient proximity or continuity of the Alaskan shore line to the
islands.
404 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
blackest breasted specimen is a female. A glance at the measurements will show
that the female is rather the largest and always has a longer bill.
Catalogue No. Sex. Date. Collector.| Locality. | Wing. | Tail.
-| June 5,1890 | W.P...; St. Paul..| 5.28 2, 40 1.32 | 0.98
| June 5,1890 | W.P...| St. Paul 4.90] 2.20| 1.19 96
=.) July 12,1890 | W.P-.:| St. Paul 5.00; 2.38] 1.14] .96
=_| July 30,1890 | W.P ---| St. Paul 4:90) |i eece Vi9 | 99
ad..| Aug. 5,1890 | W.P-..| St. Paul 4.90] 2.35] 1.22] .96
AVOLAZC «|. 2200 aceleecsneeesceence|seeeereene|coeenscecnee 4,99 | 2.38 1.21 97
118771...
118786.
118782.......--- ad..| July 5.1890 | W.
118787...-..-.-. .-| July 12,1890 | W. St. Paul 4,92 2.39 1.36 97
AVOLAZO .|. 202-000 )o- 0 - sane enn nen le cee n enon leone cc en eee 5.14 2.44 1.39 -99
64249, Type ....| 9 ?ad| July 22,1873 | H.W.E.| St.George! 5.10 2. 25 1,12 - 90
The eggs have rarely been collected. They were described by Dr. Coues in
Elliott’s reports for 1873 and 1875, and the specimens—a set of four—are in the collec-
tion of the National Museum, No. 16767, June 19, 1873, St. George Island, H. W.
Elliott and George R. Adams. “The ground is nearly clay color, but with an appre-
ciable olivaceous shade. The markings are large, bold, and numerous, of rich burnt-
umber brown of varying depth, according to the quantity of the pigment. These
surface markings occur all over the shell, except the extreme point, and are solidly
massed by confluence on the larger half of the egg. All the markings are strong, as if
laid on freely with a heavily charged brush. With these surface spots occur numerous
shell markings of the same character, but of course obscure, presenting a stone-gray
or purplish-gray shade. Some of them look as if the color of the surface spots had
‘run’ and soaked into the olivaceous drab of the general surface.”—(Cowes.) These
eggs measure 1.55 by 1.08, 1.52 by 1.05, 1.50 by 1.05, 1.48 by 1.05. Another set of four
was taken on St. Paul, July 6, 1895, by Messrs. True and Prentiss, and are now in the
National Museum collection. Stomach contents: “The Pribilof sandpipers had taken
predaceous beetles (Carabidae), but had also caught parasitic wasps and a fly.”—S. D. J.
44, Tringa maculata Vieill. Pectoral Sandpiper.
A[ctodromus] maculata, Cours, Key, 1892, 626.
Heteropygia maculata, Suarre, Cat. B. Br. Mus. XXIV, 1896, 562.
Tringa maculata, A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 88.—RIDGWAY, Man. 1896, 156.
Directly east of the village of St. Paul and but a few yards from it lies a shallow
and irregular pond, a favorite resting aud feeding place for migrating birds. I
generally made an early morning visit to this pond, and was frequently rewarded
with desirable specimens. The morning of June 12 I was especially fortunate,
obtaining three species which I did not see at other times, two being new to the
islands. On a little grassy islet I flushed and secured two females of this species, in
company with a semipalimated sandpiper. There are few instances of the capture of
this species in the Pacific, though according to Nelson and Murdock it is abundant
trom the mouth of the Yukon to Point Barrow. Nos. 118833, 118834, 2 2, June 12,
1890, St. Paul, W. P. Length, 8.25; extent, 16.55; wing, 5.10; tail, 2.22; tarsus, 1.10;
culmen, 1.15. Stomach contents, two specimens: “These birds had eaten predaceous
beetles (Carabidae) and pupae.”—S. D. J. ,
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 405
45. Tringa damacensis (Horsf.). Long-toed Stint.
Tringa damacensis, Ripcway, Auk, 1886, 275; Man. 1896, 158.—ToWNSEND, Cruise, Corwin,
1887, 100.—Covgs, Key, 1890, 886.
Limonites damacensis, SHARPE, Cat. B. Br. Mus. XXIV, 1896, 553.
This bird has a place as North American solely on a specimen secured by Mr.
C. H. Townsend on Otter Island. “It was feeding in a shallow salt-water pond, with
other Tringae, which I supposed to be Actodromas.”—( Townsend.) No. 106809, ad. ?.,
June 8, 1885, Otter Island, C. H.T. Wing, 3.55; culmen, 0.72; tarsus, 0.88; tail, 1.50;
middle toe and claw, 0.94.
46. Ereunetes pusillus (Linn). Semipalmated Sandpiper.
Ereunetes pusillus, CouES, Key, 1890, 624.—A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 90.—SHaRPE, Cat, B. Br.
Mus. XXIV, 1896, 514.—Ripeway, Man.. 1896, 161.
I saw and obtained but a single bird, which was in company with two Tringa
maculata. They had evidently just arrived from the South and were quite tame.
This is probably the first instance of the taking of this species in Bering Sea. The
allied species, H. occidentalis, has often been taken on the islands of the Aleutian
chain, and may occur on the Seal Islands. I took two at Unalaska August 15, 1890.
My bird was not recognized by the natives, who give the general name kie-lits-kie to
waders. No. 118835, °, June 12, 1890, St. Paul, W. P. Length, 6.13; extent, 11.61;
wing, 3.70; tail, 1.57; tarsus, 1.82; culmen, 0.72. Stomach contents: “Minute
‘flies."—S. D. J.
47. Limosa lapponica baueri (Naum.). Pacific God wit.
Limosa uropygialis, Couss, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint; 1875, 187; Key, 1890,
636.—ELLIOTT, Mon. Seal Ids., 1882, 130.
Limosa lapponica novae-zealandiv, Suarrr, Cat. B. Br. Mus. XXIV, 1896, 377.—NELson, Cruise,
Corwin, 1883, 89. :
Limosa lapponica baueri, A.O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 92.—RipGway, Man. 1896, 163.
A fairly abundant migrant through the islands. They appear early in May and
a few small flocks were seen up to June 13, when I saw eight, and secured one on
Walrus Island. On July 7 I saw two, which after being disturbed flew directly
northward up the island. No migrants had returned by August 10. A great differ-
ence exists in size between the sexes. The natives invariably picked out a female as
being the “man,” that being their idea of the superiority of the sex, and no argument
could convince them that the contrary was correct. Elliott says that they return
“toward the end of August, going south in flocks of a dozen to fifty, making then, as
before, scarcely an appreciable visit.” In the ponds they feed by keeping their bills
in the water and move invariably all in the same direction, heads to the wind. With
care I could approach within a few feet. Beneath, all my specimens are still in the
old feathering, except that on all save one the new reddish breeding plumage is
scattered over the under parts, mostly, however, on the breast and slightly up the
under neck and throat. Otherwise there are no new feathers, and no pinfeathers,
the back, tail, and wings especially being well worn. Few of the specimens have a
majority of rufous feathers, and it would seem that as a rule, after examining many,
that this bird rarely assumes a fully changed new breast plumage. All these birds
have the upper tail covarts strongly barred, and the barring obscured or absent on
the epical half of the rectrices. There are no pure white feathers on the rumps, but
several specimens have a few feathers with a reddish tinge, but all are barred. Pin-
feathers are not found on these birds. It would seem to be the case that the long
ocean migration of the species prevents the completion of the molt. It would seem,
d
406 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
also, that ornithologists generally have considered the presence of new feathers,
together with others more or less worn, on waders as evidence tending to prove the
renewal o. growth in such feathers without a molt. But it seems to me that a better
explanation is possible. As a rule waders acquire their summer plumage before they
migrate, though it may not be completely changed before they leave for their summer
habitat. If, for instance, molting is but half completed on the breast when the bird
obeys its seasonal instinct, then on its journey those feathers which are still in their
sheaths complete their growth, though often with less pigment, because the powers of
the bird are more necessary for its preservation during its journey; and no others
grow out, perhaps not during that summer. Again, as a rule, waders make very long
migrations, and spend but a very short time at their summer habitat, hence the
necessity for molting before they start or during the early stages, for later all their
time and strength are taken up in other affairs more important for the preservation of
the species. That feathers well worn, and some entirely unworn, together with
others in all intermediate stages of wearing, are found on waders taken near their
summer habitat is undoubtedly true, but their presence can be explained on the lines
laid down above. It is very rare indeed that pin feathers are found on such birds
when within several hundred miles of their summer home, especially on those which
have traveled over vast stretches of ocean during their long journey. Land-migra-
ting waders show greater molting changes than those species which move northward
over vast tracts of ocean. A fully molted spring specimen of baweri is rare, but not
so with lapponica. No. 62443, ?, May 16, 1872, St. Paul, H. W. E., is the reddest
breasted bird, few feathers of the winter plumage being left. No. 62447, ?, July 5,
1872, St. Paul, H. W. E., is one of the palest, few new breeding feathers having
appeared. No. 118843, ?, June 11, 1890, St. Paul, W. P., has not a single feather of
the breeding plumage. The extreme sensitiveness of the bill of this bird is shown
by the character of their food as here shown.
Stomach contents: “Much the greater part of the stomach contents of these
birds consisted of hundreds of minute threadlike aquatic larvae of a midge (Chiro-
nomis). Pieces of mollusks’ shell had been swallowed by several of the birds. Flies,
closely related to our common house fly, and tiger beetles were detected in small
quantities. Of the six godwits, five had been killed on St. Paul Island, and had
fed for the most part upon midges, which were probably abundant in a fresh-water
pond on the island. The sixth bird was taken on Walrus Island. It had caught
over five hundred specimens of a species of beetle (Aegialites debilis'), the sole repre-
sentative of a unique family of beetles, described some time ago and subsequently
lost sight of until recently discovered again.”—S. D. J.
Measurements of eight specimens.
ar era Sex. Date. Length. |Extent.) Wing. ae Locality. Collector.
118838 | og | June 11,1890 14.13 | 27.38 8.61 | 2.87 | 1.94 | St. PanlIsland..| W. P.
118842 | oS |..... OO ecicisiciecs 14.50 | 27.75 8.87 | 3.13 | 2,27 |.--.. AO aciewissiscic Do.
118841 fe fad Rey (1 (eee 14.75 | 27.94 8.75 | 3.38 | 2.13 |..-.. Ocean meses Do.
118844 cy series Oe ss2222%5 15.38 | 27.32 9.38 | 3.25 | 1.96 |..-.. Oss aiss.ec3.cee Do.
118856 | ¢ | June 13, 1890 16.38 | 31.00 8.87 | 3.06 | 2.00 | Walrus Island .. Do.
118840 g June 11, 1890 17.06 | 31.75 9,32 | 4.06 | 2.32 | St. Paul Island.. Do.
118843 Be lasted do ...---. 16.87 | 31.13 9.38 | 3.94 | 2.15 |..... Os cence beinn Do.
118839 De Nravsrateee OO wexiese's 17.32 | 30.61 9.06 | 4.50 | 2.25 |..... UO sisiercte rei osc Do.
''These beetles were quite common on the higher shelf rocks of Walrus Island.
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 407
48. Totanus flavipes (Gmel.). Yellow-legs.
Totanus flavipes, A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 93.—Couss, Key, 1890, 638.—SHARPE, Cat. B. Br. Mus.
XXIV, 1896, 431.—RipGway, Man. 1896, 166.
On June 11, 1890, I walked up to a flock of godwits, feeding in the village pond
on St. Paul, to see how close I could get to them. Feeding with them, a dwarf among
giants, I looked down on a bird of this species. Having only my cane gun, and being
but 15 feet off, I aimed just over its back, hoping to secure it without much damage,
but it flew away uninjured with the godwits and failed to return when they did.
Apparently this species is not otherwise known from Bering Sea.
49. Heteractitis incanus (Gmel.). Wandering Tattler.
Heteroscelus incanus, Cours, in Elliott’s Rpt. Att. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 187; Key, 1890,
643.—ELuIoTT, Mon. Seal Ids. 1882, 130.
Heteractitis incanus, TOWNSEND, Cruise Corwin, 1887, 100.—A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 95.—
SHarpe, Cat. B. Br. Mus. XXIV, 1896, 453.—RipGway, Man. 1896, 168.
A migrant; I saw none in May except at Unalaska. It is the first species to
return in the fall; adult birds, July 10, and afterwards. Usually in pairs on the surf-
swept rocks, but sometimes seen—usually the brownish, unbarred, and less wary
immature—on open sandy places, and sometimes with the tiirnstones on a sandy
beach. They are not shy, but are seldom noticed when perched on the wet rocks
‘which harmonize so well with their color. Solitary birds remain quiet and unseen,
and will permit one to approach quite close, frequently startling us as they get up
suddenly, almost under our very feet, and uttering their loud, shrill cry, flying off to
another resting place. But when two are together it is difficult to stalk them, as one
is sure to tattle. No. 62249, May 27, 1872, St. Paul, H.W. E. No. 106521, ° , June 8,
1885, Otter Island, C.H.T. No. 118854, 6, July 29, 1890, St. Paul, W.P. No.
115855, 2°, July 31, 1890, St. Paul, W. P. .
50. Numenius huasonicus Lath. Hudsonian Curlew.
Numenius hudsonicus, COUES, Key, 1890, 645.—A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 97.—SHARPE, Cat. B. Brit.
Mus. XXIV, 1896, 364.—RipGway, Man. 1896, 171.
Probably a regular migrant. Mr. F. A. Lucas saw one at very close range on
St. Paul, on July 16, 1897.
51. Numenius borealis (Forst.). Eskimo Curlew.
Numenius borealis, Cours, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 188.—E LuiorTt,
Mon. Seal Ids. 1882, 130.—Suarpg, Cat. B. Br. Mus. XXIV, 1896, 368.—A. O, U. Ch. List,
1895, 97.—CouEs, Key, 1890, 646.—RipGway, Man. 1896, 171.
Mr. Elliott collected a Single specimen on St. Paul, which is still the only one
I know of from the islands. No. 62448, ad. 2, May 26, 1872; wing, 3.18.
Family CHARADRIIDAE.: Plovers.
52, Charadrius dominicus fulvus (Gmel.). Pacific Golden Plover.
Charadrius pluvialis, COINDE, Rev. et Mag. Zool. 1860, 400.
Charadrius fulvus, CCUES, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 179, —ELLIOTT, Mon.
Seal Ids. 1882, 129.
Charadrius dominicus, SHARPE, Cat. B. Br. Mus. XXIV, 1896, 195 (part).
Charadrius dominicus fuluus, NELSON, Bds. Alaska, 1887, 125.—Cousrs, Key, 1890, 600.—A. O. U.
Ch. List, 1895, 100.—RipGway, Man. 1896, 174.
Common, and a migrant. “The single specimen of golden plover preserved by
408 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Mr. Elliott is of special interest and importance, since it is conclusively determined
to be the true Asiatic fulvus and not the North American var. virginicus.”—(Coues.)
I saw but one. It was alone in the grass of the village pond on St. Paul. “A few
stragglers land in April, or early in May, on their way north to breed, but never
remain long. They return in greater number in the latter part of September, and
grow fat upon the larvae generated on the killing grounds, leaving for the south by
the end of October.”—(Hlliott.) Coinde says of Mr. Warneck’s specimens: ‘Three
examples of this species have been given me exactly identical with individuals that
we find in Europe. They had been killed in the port of St. Paul the 18th and 20th of
April, 1852.” In the male the black of the under parts has a few white old worn
feathers in the center of the breast and a few on the throat; the female has some few
new black feathers mixed in with the old plumage on the breast. Both specimens are
unchanged otherwise, and the feathers are well worn on the back and wings. No
molting feathers are to be found on the birds. No. 64273, ad. 2, May 1, 1873, St. Paul,
H.W.E. Wing, 6.37; tarsus, 1.70. No. 119085, ad. 3 , June 12, 1890, St. Paul, W. P.
Length, 9.75; extent, 21.75; wing,6.50; culmen,0.93; tarsus, 1.78. Stomach contents:
“Ten predaceous beetles (Carabidae) and seeds of crowberry (Empetrum nigrum).”—
S. D. J.
53. Aegialitis semipalmata Bonap. Semipalmated Plover.
Aegialeus semipalmatus, Suarrr, Cat. B. Br. Mus. XXIV, 1896, 250.
Aegialitis semipalmata, A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 100.—Ripeway, Man. 1896, 176.
Ae[gialitis] semipalmatus, Cours, Key, 1890, 602.
I saw none, nor did Mr. Elliott. Mr. D. W. Prentiss, jr., secured one in very worn
plumage from a flock at Northeast Point. No. 153543, ad. 2, July 6, 1895, St. Paul,
D. W. P., jr. Wing, 4.70; culmen, 0.40; tarsus, 0.87. :
Family ARENARIIDAE. Turnstones.
Genus ARENARIA.
Genus characters.—Nonpalmate hind-toe shore birds of moderate size, about 11
inches long; culmen, shorter than head or tarsus; bill, hard, gently tapering from a
stoutish base and with a slightly upward trend toward tip; black or blackish across
breast and shoulders; under parts and upper and middle back white; tail coverts
white; tail, white, with apical half broadly banded with black or blackish; axillaries,
white; feet. and tarsi, robust; midtoe little shorter than tarsus; tarsi, regularly and
broadly scaled in front, smaller scaled and reticulated behind.
GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF THE SPECIES,
Enrope, Asia, Africa and Pacific islands, Western Alaska from the Aleutians to Point Barrow; Green-
land. Breeds from Japan and Alaska westward around to the more northern British islands,
Azores:(?), and: Greenland 2i-ccs2:c2 scjes ais ee cane Seeing sk cca tees eeu eeanesceesgccese A. interpres.
America from the Arctic regions north of Hudson Bay and westward to the Mackenzie River, along
the Atlantic watershed, though generally coastwise, to Patagonia and the Falkland Islands.
Rare on the Pacific slope. Breeds about Hudson Bay, northward and castward.. A. morinella.
Western Alaska from the Arctic Ocean to and throngh California. Breeds in northwestern Alaska.
A. melanocephala.
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 409
KEY TO TIE SPECIES, BREEDING PLUMAGE.
Large, wing usually more than 6.00. Black above
predominant, with little clove brown, feet ver-
: ION: wansc sete ceemun tewwedeseeeniena int :
With chestnut above, feet reddish, throat white.. sli wher pres,
Smaller, wing nearly always lessthan6 00 Chest-
nut above predominant, with much clove brown,
feet orange red ....--.----.---+----- morinella.
Without chestnut above, feet blackish, throat dark .........22. 2-22 sees eens nee cweeee melanocephala.
54. Arenaria interpres (Linn.). The Turnstone. ‘‘ Krass-nie ko-lits-kie.”
Strepsilas collaris, COINDE, Rev. et Mag. Zool., 1860, 400.
Strepsilas interpres, DALL and BANNISTER, Trans. Chic. Ac. Sci., I, 1869, 290.—CovEs, in
Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 180; Key, 1890, 605 (part).—ELLroTt, Mon.
Seal Ids., Alaska, 1882, 129; Ibis, 1882, 478.
Arenaria interpres, NELSON, Nat. Hist. Alaska, 1887, 128.—R1IDGWAyY, Man. 1887, 180 (part).—
SuarpE, Cat. B., Brit. Mus. XXIV, 1896, 92 (part).—A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 103 (part).
Adult ¢ , breeding plumage.—Interscapular, glossy black, slightly greenish, medially
divided by a narrow line of chestnut; scapulars, anteriorly chestnut, longer feathers
glossy greenish black, irregularly tipped and notched with chestnut and occasionally
with whitish; body, white; lower back, blackish; breast, extensively black and
extending forward, nearly encircling the neck with a broad band margined with
white, a narrower line reaching the base of the lower mandible and margining the
white throat, another, but broader, black line extending from the center of this last
and encircling the eye, but mostly in front, from whence a branch runs forward to the
center of the base of the bill; head and neck otherwise white,somewhat streaked
down the upper eck with dusky and heavily and distinctly streaked on the pileum
with black with slight rufous edgings; a black blotch on the sides of the base of the
head behind eye; flight feathers, dark olive brown lightening to white on the lower
portions, the dark color simply as a blotch near the tips of the innermost secondaries;
shafts white, browning toward bases; tertials whitish toward bases, their greater
length very dark olive, nearly black, variously tipped and indented with chestnut and
whitish; lesser wing coverts, dusky olive mixed with black and white; median coverts,
chestnut with extensive black centers; long coverts, chestnut broadly banded with
black; tail, white, irregularly and broadly banded toward tip with blackish; tail
coverts, white; legs and feet, vermilion, joints darkish; bill, black with reddish spot
near base of lower mandible.
Adult 2 , breeding plumage.—Similar in pattern to the é, but larger, with white of
head and neck more obscured with dusky and spotting; but little or no chestnut on
wings; chestnut spotted all over back near tips of the feathers, and strongly so on
front part of scapulars, otherwise nearly as black as the males.
Immature 6, first plumage.—Pattern of coloration as in adult, but generally
obscured or less defined, especially about the head and neck. Above, dark dusky
brown, each feather margined with sandy buff or rufous, on the wings with deeper
rufous, on the head and neck with paler brown or buff. Breast patch obscured by
pale rufous and white tips to the feathers. Tail white, with subterminal band of
blackish, whith narrows toward outside feathers, each feather irregularly clouded at
tips with rusty, especially the central ones. "Throat white, somewhat sharply bor-
410 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
dered by the dusky of breast and sides of face. Sides of face generally brownish,
drab gray, broken under eyes, with white inclosing drab spots, and by a black trian-
gular spot in front of eyes, paler brown drab gray at base of mandibles and on fore-
head. Bill slaty black; legs deep orange, blackish around joints.
Immature 2 , first plumage.—Similar to 4 , slightly duller and larger.
Wearing rapidly darkens the plumage so that migrating birds vary, some being
darker than others. Birds in their second summer are usually smaller than the fally
adult, and the black of the breast is less extensive, being then very similar in area
and appearance to the following species. Sometimes the chestnut of ‘the wing cov-
erts is entirely wanting in the males, as in the females, the winter coverts persisting.
This bird differs from its American relative by its more extensive black areas
and much less amount of chestnut. It is larger and the feet and legs are more
strongly colored. A comparison of a good series of Pacific birds from the Pribilofs,
Japan, and other points, with a fine series from eastern America shows their unlike-
ness; and a comparison of these Pacific birds with birds trom Europe, Greenland,
and Africa shows a great general resemblance; in fact, two Greenland adult speci-
mens kindly loaned me by Mr. F. M. Chapman are indistinguishable from interpres,
though easily so from our eastern bird. Female birds from the Pacific seem to be
blacker than the European bird, but whether a good comparable series of these last
taken in spring and summer would show it I am unable to say, my series not being
extensive enough. All Alaskan and Greenland specimens that I have seen, about
forty, are readily distinguished from our common eastern American species. Alas-
kan and Unalaskan specimens are a trifle smaller than Japanese or Pribilof birds, but:
they may be younger. I am not aware that this species occurs in spring on the
Pribilofs, but there would seem to be no reason why they should not.
It is an abundant fall migrant on the Pribilofs. I saw none in May or June,
except four at Unalaska May 19. On July 12, 1890, I saw probably the first birb
that landed on St. Paul during the fall migration. From that date they daily
increased rapidly until by the end of July they swarmed everywhere. They reach
the island by way of the northeastern shore and in straggling flocks or singly fly
southward through the island during the day, banking up in large numbers when the
village killing ground is reached. They spread out on the slopes, resting on the
rocks and little hillocks during the day. They soon find the feast awaiting them on
the killing ground, and the marks of their work around nearly every seal carcass is
soon noticeable. As the water disappears by soakage and evaporation in the village
pond they turn up the black sand in thousands of little hillocks, each with a narrow
depression made by their bill beside it. At low tide the lagoon beaches are a favor-
ite resting and feeding place. By the end of July many become so fat that they are
run down and captured by the young Aleuts. Their departure from St. Paul is
quite a feature of the avifaunan exhibition. About 6 in the evening a small flock of
perhaps forty birds will rise into the air from about the village pond and uttering
loud shrill cries will fly up to near the head of the lagoon. Here making a wide
sweep they return, gathering fresh recruits on their way, until the vicinity of the’
pond is again reached. Sweeping around in a constantly ascenditg course they
return up the lagoon, and turning once more, screaming as they go, and adding
to their numbers, they make a straight course high over the village hill and on out to
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 411
sea over the Reef point. This invariably took place every evening during the latter
part of my stay on the island. It was always the rule that a dense fog bank hung
all around the island at that time, so that even the Reef point was not visible, but
the birds went into the fog without the slightest hesitation. They left their land-
marks behind. Several flocks averaging about a hundred birds left nearly every
evening from the end of July until [left on August 10. The first arrivals on the island
were always adults; the young were not noted for at least ten days. According to
Elliott: they all leave the islands after the 10th of September. On August 12,
when the mountains of the Aleutian chain were but faintly outlined to the southward
of our steamer, a turnstone in full straight flight passed the vessel. It was hardly
more than a few feet from the surface of the sea and so close to the vessel that stand-
ing on the deck I looked directly down on the back of the bird. It continued its
course direct for the land as long as I could see it. I saw none at Unalaska during
the week next following. Elliott says, “I have met with it at sea 700 miles from the
nearest land, flying northwest toward the Aleutian Islands, my ship being 800 miles
west from the Straits of Fuca.” There is nothing, perhaps, very remarkable about
the journey of these birds from the Pribilofs to the Aleutians. Let us trace it.
They gather in flocks about 6 p. m., and after the maneuvering that I have already
described head directly into the fog and fly southward. We can be sure, first, that
many in each flock, and especially the leaders, have made the trip on previous occa-
sions, hence they know the way. Now, assuming that they fly at: the rate of 30 miles
an hour, and knowing that it is about 200 miles to the Aleutians, it would take them
about six hours to make the trip. As darkness in that region at that time does not
set in until near midnight, they have sufficient time in which to make the vicinity of
the Aleutians. Their rate of travel is undoubtedly faster than 30 miles an hour, so
that they readily reach the Aleutians before dark.’ As to their movements thence
we know little. .
I have been unable to find molting feathers on any specimens, but nearly all have
mixed in with the colored summer plumage some of the dull-colored feathers of the
winter plumage. Evidently these birds start on their spring migration after the
plumage has almost entirely changed. The strength of the bird is then needed for
the long journey, so that molting stops and the remaining_unchanged feathers are
retained. These unmolted feathers are found in the plume feathers of the wing, the
tertials, the median coverts, and the scapular plumes. In some cases only a few are
found, in others many. Their worn condition, and especially their lack of black and
chestnut, render them distinctly noticeable. Fall specimens show these feathers also,
so that the evidence of their retaining is complete. It would thus seem that these
birds molt all their essentially important feathers before they migrate, the purely
decorative ones—the tertials, wing coverts, and scapular plumes—changing last and
being interrupted in their growth and change by the effects of an extremely long
oceanic journey. Few Pribilof specimens show a complete change, while on the con-
trary Asiatic specimens are the reverse, thus indicating, probably, that the Pribilof
birds winter on the islands of the Pacific.
‘Our steamer made at least 12 knots. The bird mentioned as passing the vessel easily distanced
us, going at least three times as fast, and was soon ont of sight.
412
THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Arenaria morinella, (L.). The Ruddy Turnstone.
Tringa interpres LINNAEUS, Syst. Nat. ed. 10, 1758, 148 (part).—WILson, Am. Orn., VIII, 1813,
32, pl. 57, fig. 1.
Tringa morinella LINNAEUS, Syst. Nat. ed. 12, 1766, 249 (based on ‘‘The Turn-stone, or Sea-
Dottrel,” Catesby, Nat. Hist. Carolina, etc. I, 1731, 72, pl. 72, and Arenaria cinerea Brisson=
Catesby.—GMELIN, Syst. Nat. 1788, 671.—LatuaM, Ind. Orn. 1790, I, 738).
Tringa hudsonica P. L. 8. MULLER, Syst. Nat. Anhang, 1776, 114 (based on “The Turn-stone, from
Hudson’s Bay,” Edwards, Nat. Hist. Birds, III, 1750, 141, pl. 141).—Cassin, Proc. Phila. Ac.
Sci. 1864, 246.
Cinclus interpres, GRAY, Gen. Bds. III, 1849, 549 (part); Hand-list, Bds. III, 1871, 22 (part).
Morwnella interpres, STEINEGER, Proc. U.S.N.M. 1882, 34 (part).
Strepsilas interpres, ILLIGER, Prodr. Orn. 1811, 263 (part).—LrEacu, Syst. Cat. Mam. and Birds,
Brit. Mus. 1816, 29 (part).—SrrpHEN, Gen. Zool. XI, 1826, 520 (part).—AupuBon, .Orn.
Biogr. IV, 1838, 31, pl. 304; Synopsis N. A. B. 1839, 227 (part); B. Am. V, 1842, 231, pl. 323
(part).—BonaPaRTE, Syn. N. A. B. 1828, 299; List, 1838, 46 (part).—-SwAINSON, Faun. Boreali
Am. 1831, 371.—JaRDINE, ed. Wilson’s Am. Orn. II, 1832, 324, pl. 57, fig. 1.—NuTTaLt, Manual
Orn. 1834, 30 (part).— FRASER, P. Z.8. Lond. 1843, 118 (Chile).—Giraup, B. Long Island,
1844, 220.—Dr Kay, Nat. Hist. N. Y. pt. 2, Birds, 1844, 216.—Hoxprr, Pub. Lynn, N. H. Soe.
I, 1846, 6 (Mass.).—TscHunlI, Fauna Peruana, Aves 1846, 297.—Gossk, Birds, Jamaica, 1847,
333.—CaBanis, in Schomburgk’s Reis. Brit. Guiana, ITI, 1848, 751; Journ. fiir Orn. IV,
1856, 423 (Cuba).—LEMBEYE, Aves de la Isla de Cuba, 1850, 100.—BURMEISTER, Syst. Ueb.
Th. Bras. III, 1856, 364 (Brazil).—Cassin, Rep. Pacific R. R. Surv. 1X, 1858, 701 (part).—
Bryant, Proc. Bost. Soc. N. H. VII, 1859, 121 (Bahamas).—NEWTON, Ibis, 1859, 256 (St.
Croix, W. I.); Handb. Jamaica, 1881, 115.—Brewenr, Proc. Bost. Soc. N. H. VII, 1860, 309
(Cuba); Cat. B. N. Engl. 1875, 12.—McILwraitnu, Canad. Jour. V, 1860,6; Proc, Essex
Inst. V, 1866 (Hamilton, Ontario).—GuNDLacH, Repert. Fisico-Nat. Cuba, I, 1866, 357;
Journ. fiir Orn. 1875, 331 (Cuba).—WHEaTON, Rep. OhioS. Bd. Agri. 1861, 368, 371; reprint,
10; 1880, 460.—ALBRECHT, Journ. fiir Orn. 1862, 205 (Jamaica).—BoARDMAN, Proc. Bost.
Soc. N. H. IX, 1862, 128 (Maine).—Couss, Proce. Phila. Ac. Sci. 1861, 228 (Labrador); Proc.
Ess, Inst. V, 1868, 292 (N. Engl.); Proc. Phila. Ac. Sci. 1871, 29; Key, N. Am. B. 1872, 246;
1884, 609; 1890, 608 (all part); B. N. West, 1874, 459 (part).—BLaxkisTon, Ibis, 1863, 130
(Mackenzie R.).—Marcu, Proc. Phila. Ac. Sci. 1864, 66 (Jamaica).—SaLvin, Ibis, 1864, 385
(Brit. Hond.); 1. c. 1866,198 (Guatemala); 1. c. 1886, 178 (Brit. Guiana); J. c. 1889, 379
(Cozumel and Yucatan).—LavuRENcE, Ann. Lyc. N. Y. VIII, 1867, 100 (Sombrero); Mem.
Bost. Soc. N. H. I, 1874, 308 (Mazatlan, Mex.); Bull. U.S.N.M.I, 1878, 67 (Dominica),
197 (St. Vincent).—Barrp, Am. Jour. Sci. Arts, XLI, 1866 (part); Ibis, 1867, 281 (part).—
ScratEr, P. Z. 8. Lond. 1867, 339 (Chile).—SamugEzs, Birds N. Engl. 1868, 436, 478.—
LANGpon, Journ. Cin. Soc. N. Ii. I, 1870, 184 (Ohio); List, Cin. B. 1879, 16.—Ross, B. Can-
ada, 1871, 79.—SUNDEVALL, Oefv. k. Vet. A kad. Forh. Stockh. 1869, 588 (St. Bartholomew),
602 (Porto Rico).—PELZELN, Orn. Bras. 1871, 297 (Brazil), —ScLATER and SALVIN, Nomencl.
av. Neotr. 1873, 143.—Taczanovskl, P. Z. S. Lond. 1874, 560 (Peru); Orn. Pérou, ITI, 1886,
349.—REID, Zoologist, 1877 (Bermuda); Bull. U.S.N.M. 25, 1884, 230 (Bermuda).—MERRIAM,
‘Trans. Conn. Ac. IV, 1877, 103.—Maynanp, B. East. N. Am. 1879, 366.—RATHBUN, List B.
Cent. N. Y. 1879, 30.—McCursnery, B. Dakota, Bull. U. 8. Geo. Surv. I, 1879, 88.—Cory,
B. Bahamas, 1880, 151.—Brown, Cat. B. Portland, Maine, 1882, 24. CHAMBERLAIN, Bull.
Nat. Hist. Soc. N. Brunswick, 1882, 52.—Dionnn, Ois. Canada, 1883, 171.—Strrarns, Proc.
U.S.N.M. 1883, 119 (Labrador).—TRIsTRaM, Ibis, 1884, 168 (Sto. Domingo).—WELLS, Proc.
U.S.N.M. IX, 1886, 627 (Grenada).—Hancock, Bull. Ridgw. Orn. C. Chic. 1887, 13 (Texas).—
SEEBONM, Geogr. Distr. Charadr. 1887, pp. xxv, 410, figs._I'n1LpEn, Ibis, 1889, 492 (Barba-
does).—AVERILL, List B. Bridgeport, Conn., 1892, 9.—Hartert, Ibis, 1893, 307 (Aruba,
W.I.).—Barpour, Auk, XIII, 1896, 297 (Nebr.).
Arenaria interpres, ViriLLotT, N. Dict. d’Hist. Nat. XXXIV, 1819, 345 (part).—STEsNEGER, -
Auk, I, 1884, 229 (part).—Turner, Proc. U.S.N.M. 1885, 245 (Labrador).—A. O. U. Ch.
List, 1886, 165 (part); 1895, 103 (part).—Cory, Auk, ITI; 1886, 502 (Grand Cayman); Lc.
VI, 1889, 32 (Cayman Brack); Birds W. Indies, 1889, 231; Auk, VIII, 1891, 351, 2, (Ina-
gua, Cay Sal); 1.c¢. 1892, 48 (Maraguana); Cat. B. W. I. 1892, 95 (many local.).— ALLEN,
Bull. Am. Mus. N. H. I, 1886, 241; Auk, VIII, 1891, 164 (N. Scotia),—RaLpuand BaGG, Trans.
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 413
Oneida Hist. Soc. III, 1886, 116 (N. Y.).—Butier, B. Frankl. Co., Ind. Bull. 2, Brookv.
Soc. N. H. 1886, 21.—Dwicut, Auk, IV, 1887, 16 (C. Breton).—Ripuway, Manual N. Am.
B. 1887, 180 (part); Auk, VIII, 1891, 337 (Bahamas); Orn. Illinois, II, 1895, 20.—WaRreEn,
B. Pensyl. 1888, 237, 2d ed. 1890, 103.—Bryant, Proc, Cal. Acad. Sci. 1888, 44 (Faral-
lones).—SmizH and PaLmer, Auk, V. 1888, 147 (Wash. D. C.).—SENNET, t. c, 110 (Texas,
July).—Cooxks, Bird Migr. Miss. Val. Bul. 2, U. 8. Dep. Agri. 1888, 101 (Migrations,
ete.).—DutcuEr, Auk, V1, 1889, 129 (Lit. Gull. Id. N. Y.).—Scov7, t. v. 159 (West Coast,
Fla.) ; 1. c. VII, 1890, 309 (Dry Tortugas); 1. ¢. IX, 1892, 15 (Jamaica); t. c. 212 (Caloosa-
hatchee R., Fla., winter).—CanTwELL, l. c. VI, 1889, 240 (Minn.); List, B. Minn, O. and O.,.
XV, 1890, 1381.—CLarx, Auk, VII, 1890 321 (Hudson Bay).—Rivers, Proc. Newp. N. H.
Soc. 1890, 59 (Va.).—Patmurr, Proc. U.S.N.M. XIII, 1890, 261 (Mingan, Labrador).—
MacFaR ang, |. c. XIV, 1891, 430 (Arctic Am.)—Fannin, Ch. List, Brit. Col. B. 1891, 19.—
CHAMBERLAIN, Nuttall’s Man. 1891, 71 (part).—MackEy, Auk, IX, 1892, 306 (Nantucket
Mass.).—Hatcu, Geo. and N. H. Surv. Minn. 1892, 153.—Ruoaps, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci.
Phila. 1892, 105 (Texas, June); 1. c. 1893, 37 (Puget Sound); Auk, V, 1893, 17 (Wash. )—
Coox, Bull. 94, Mich. Agri. Coll. 1893, 66.—Brown, Nidologist, I, 1893, 144 (Cobbs Id.,
Va.).—Stonx, B. E. Penna. and N. J. 1894, 81.—Kirkwoop, Trans. Md. Ac. Sci. 1895, 295
(Maryland).—E.uiot, N. Am. Shore B. 1895, 202, 250 (part).—Cuapman, Handb. B. E.
N. Am. 1895, 177.—RoBINnson, Proc. U.S.N.M., 1895, 657 (Margarita Id., Venez.).—Woop-
rurr, Auk, XIII, 1896, 181 (Illinois)—WINTLE, B. Montreal, 1896, 48.—McILuENNY,
Auk, 1897, 289 (Louisiana, resident).
Adult 3, breeding plumage.—Similar in pattern to A. interpres, but smaller and
zeneral color above chestnut with sides of interscapular black; scapulars for the
most part chestnut, the outer feathers broadly tipped with black and slightly with
white, longer feathers blackish olive irregularly tipped with chestnut; body, head,
and neck as in interpres, but the black of the breast less extensive and narrower,
white areas on head more extensive, and the black streaking on top of head with
whiter edgings; wings with more extensive white areas; tertials, various shades of
clove brown, rarely blackish, broadly blotched, margined and tipped with chestnut
with white tips; lesser wing coverts pale dusky olive, with much less black and more
white posteriorly than in interpres; median coverts extensively chestnut with little or
no blackish centers; long coverts, chestnut with black blotches or narrow bands near
the tips of the feathers; tail as in interpres, but usually less broadly banded and
less sharply defined; legs and feet, deep orange red strongly and broadly crossed at
the joints with blackish; bill, black.
Adult 2, breeding plumage.—Similar to the male in pattern, but larger and more
subdued in color, grayer with white of head and neck obscured with dusky; chestnut
of mantle obscured with dark streaking; chestnut all over much less rich than in
males; pileum less strongly black, with wider rufous edgings; median wing coverts,
mixed grayish and pale chestnut with dark sometimes black center streaks; much
grayer and less black than in 2 interpres; tail band as in 2 but duller; long tertials
more plain colored, less positively chestnut tipped and margined; feet and tarsi as
in 3. \
Immature é , first plumage.—Similar to same age of interpres, but with the pileum
and face aud upper neck drab gray obscurely and sparingly dark streaked and paler
on forehead and at base of mandibles. Margins of dorsal feathering more whitish.
Sides of face much whiter. Throat patch larger and much less sharply bordered with
the dusky of breast and spotting of face. Wing coverts with much less black, being
generally of varying shades of drab gray and rusty, with blackish streaky centers. Bill
-slaty black, legs orange with dusky joints.
Immature @ , first plumage.—Similar to 4 , but larger and paler.
414: THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Immature & , winter plumage.—Pattern as in summer adult, but very much less
definitely marked, especially on head and neck. White of face and throat more
extensive even than in first immature plumage. Dark breast feathers broadly tipped
with white. Dark dorsal feathers margined with dusky buff and broadly and irregu-
larly shaded at tips with white or whitish. Pileam dark drab gray, each feather with
a pronounced blackish center. Feet and bill as before. 4149, W. P. Collector,
Smiths Island, Virginia, September 2, 1895. Wearing results in a darkening of the
back and across the breast, though never to the same extent as in interpres. Thus
immature morinella are readily distinguishable by smaller size, paler colors, larger
throat patch less definitely margined, and whiter face, and paler pileum. The blackish
of the wings is much less extensive and the margins of the dark feathers of the back
are much less buffy and rufous, being almost whitish. In the winter plumage
morinella is very similar to interpres of similar age, but the black of the back and
breast is much less intense, and the throat patch is much less sharply defined. The
general hue of interpres is always darker. Specimens in undoubted winter non-breed-
ing plumage are so few, and these so badly made up and so old, that it is difficult to
determine the extent of change that has taken place. Usually the specimens are
unsexed or wrongly sexed. The winter dress is undoubtedly worn for but a brief
period. The change to the breeding dress is by a molt, and not by a “change in the
pattern of the feather,” as stated by Dr. Sharpe, (Cat. B. Br. Mus., Vol. XXIV, 98).
In a molting specimen collected on Marguerite Island, Venezuela, by Lieutenant
Robinson (No. 151634) there are in the wings feathers of three plumages, those of the
new winter, a few of the chestnut summer, and a number of the previous winter’s,
these last being mostly present in the tertials.
The common turnstone of eastern North America, as shown above, is quite a
different bird to its Palearctic relative. It is smaller and more highly colored, and
lacks the extensive black areas of interpres, besides lacking the chestnut and black
mottling of that bird on the median wing coverts. The scapular and tertiary plumes
are usually without the black, and are much more highly and more extensively chest-
nut. My series of 32, fresh male, Smiths and Cobbs islands, Virginia, specimens, all
in complete breeding dress, together with some dozen other males taken at various
places in the eastern United States and in Mexico, show little variation, and all agree
closely with that described above, though several are much more highly colored. The
females of morinella never appear to reach the extreme blackness observable in interpres
from the Pacific. Two males, collected by myself, one at Mingan, Labrador, and the
other on Smiths Island, Virginia, in August and September, show the extent of sum-
mer wearing, and are thus comparable with specimens of interpres collected on the
Pribilofs by Mr. Elliott aud myself at about the same dates. One specimen only of
interpres collected by Mr. Elliott approaches my autumn morinella in the amount of
faded chestuut on the center median coverts, but the extensive blackness and larger
size puts to rest any doubts as to its proper place. One specimen of morinella, No.
154384, 6 , Smiths Island, Dr. B. M. Hasbrouck, has the chestnut of the interscapular
much decreased in area and the black correspondingly increased, but the other color-
ation and its size prevent any doubt as to its place. These are the only specimens
that I have seen showing much variation. Wearing of the feathers of morinella, both
males and females, tends to a graying of the plumage as viewed from above; in
interpres it itensifies the blackness, so that autumnal birds are much blacker than
spring and summer specimens. None of these Virginia male specimens are in
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 415
absolutely full breeding plumage, though nearly so. A few well-worn feathers of the
preceding winter plumage are still to be found among the feathers of the wing coverts
aud among the tertials and long scapular plumes. In some cases each alternate
feather of the tertials is an uncolored worn and a new highly colored one respectively,
while sometimes either predominates. In fact few individuals of either morinella or
interpres ever attain a complete breeding (psychological) plumage, though in the
latter the change seems to be the more complete, especially in Japanese specimens.
In interpres the contrast of dark color and chestnut on the scapulars and tertials is
nearly always sharp; in morineila it is nearly always blended. The first is mostly
black, the latter mostly clove brown. Fully one-half of the specimens of morinella
show an absence of black at the junction of the black eye and bill stripes; in some,
except a little black at the base of the bill, the forehead is entirely white; in others
partly white feathers obscure the black at their bases, so that few specimens show
the decided black lines common in interpres. The feet and legs of morinella lack the
rich, deep, orange red or vermilion color of interpres. They are orange red in color,
but pale in contrast to the deeper and highly colored interpres.
The female morinella from Smiths Island, Virginia, as contrasted with the males
from the same place, collected in the same month, show an interesting condition.
Whereas in the males nearly the whole of the body plumage is new and unworn, thus
indicating'a recent molt; in the females the reverse is generally true. On these the
new feathers are confined to the under parts and to but a slight extent on the upper
parts. The strengthening of the contrast of the black and white on the sides of the
head and neck seems to be due almost entirely to wearing, but it seems probable at
least that the white of the underbody, on account of the slightly unworn condition,
may be due to a recent molt. Scattered about the back and in the tertials on some
specimens are unworn feathers, in ones and twos, which are somewhat chestnut
colored and are usually tipped with a little white. Surrounding them are grayer
feathers most decidedly worn at the tips and sides. This contrast of wearing and
color is so positive, that one can not do otherwise than believe that the abundant worn’
feathers are really the wintering plumage, while the unworn and much fewer are an
effort toward a summer breeding plumage. There is no regularity whatever as to the
position of these new feathers. No two specimens are alike and hardly a dozen
occur on some; on others, fewer. Another explanation of the presence of these unworn
feathers may be mentioned. The autumnal molt of the adult turnstones takes place
after they have reached their winter habitat. It is possible that the feathers mentioned
above may be the last grown, possibly appearing just before the bird leaves for its
journey northward. A specimen taken on Smiths Island, August 24, 1895, No, 4072,
W. P. collection, is an adult female in a very much worn condition with no new
feathering; but among the tertials of the right wing there are two sets of feathers,
the plain feathers of the previous winter’s plumage and others darker and deeply
indented with the originally chestnut-colored parts similar to the same feathers of the
male. Thus a comparison of these birds leads inevitably to the conclusion that the
amount of spring plumage change is different in the sexes; nearly complete in
the males, but slight and varying in the females, though rarely nearly complete.
Thus the change is not 4 physiological or a necessary one, but is traceable to the
superabundant sexual energy of the males and perhaps also of the older females. No
molting feathers are to be found on any of these specimens, so that the case is a
416 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
similar one to that considered under Limosa.! But as these birds have less of an
ocean journey and of course have frequent stoppages, greater progress has been made
in the changes of the plumage of the males, the less masterful spirit of the females
tending to prevent the evolution of their plumage. Among the Limicolae we fiud
numerous gradations of plumage change from the species which makes an almost
complete spring molt to others where the change is slight and confined to a few colored
feathers. Evidently such changes are purely psychological, but modified by many
causes, chief among which is the distance to which the winter habitat extends and the
retardation or prevention of change caused by the return journey.
Several immature birds that I collected on Smiths Island, Virginia, in September,
1897, were just beginning to molt from the worn first plumage into the winter dress.
No adults were to be seen, and it would seem probable that all wintering birds in the
United States are immature birds. The material from the west coast of South America
that I have examined cousists of five specimens, two from the Galapagos Islands, two
from Chile, and one from Peru. They are in differing degrees of change and plumage,
though mostly in winter dress. The Galapagos birds are referable to interpres, the
coast birds to morinella.
The name Tringa morinella of Linnaeus is based primarily on Mark Catesby’s
plate 72. The specimen figured is most evidently an adult female,’ and, as Catesby
remarks, was taken alive on board his ship while off the coast of Florida. The
picture is defective in fine detail drawing of the feathering, but as a whole it is very
well done, a credit to the time and artist. In his letterpress Catesby tells us:
All the Upper-part of the Body is brown, with a Mixture of White and black. ‘The Quill-
Feathers of the Wings are dark brown; the Neck and Breast black; the Legs and Feet light red. In
a Voyage to America, Anno 1722, in 31 Deg. N. Lat. and 40 Leagues from the Coast of Florida, the Bird
from which this was figur’d flew on Board us and was taken. It was very active in turning up
Stones, which we put into its Cage, but not finding, under them the usual Food, it died.
In the figure the wing is 5 inches, the bill 0.90, but the tarsus is 1.37—evidently
guesswork. Miiller’s name of hudsonica ten years later was based on Edward’s
“The Turn-Stone from Hudson’s Bay,” which was a specimen collected by Mr. Isham.
Edward’s elaborate description, and his generally excellent plate, evidently fits our
male bird very well. He says first: ‘‘ This bird is here figured of its natural bigness.”
(Wing, in figure, 5.40; bill, 0.72; tarsus, 1.05.) At the close of his remarks he says:
“The Turn-Stone is also found on the western coasts of England, * * * but as
Willoughby’s and Catesby’s differ from each other, and mine widely from them both,
I believe them to be distinct species. The above-described at least from its great
difference [ must pronounce a nondescript. It agrees very nearly in size, shape of
body, and parts with the Turn-Stone found with us [viz, in England], but differs very
greatly in color.” In his plate he figures and in his description he tells us of the
black collar. I have only found one specimen (No. 572, E. J. Brown collection, Smith’s
Island), which has a full black collar; but several others approach it.
It may be held by some that the differences between interpres and morinella are
but subspecific, but I can not agree with that, for the difference in their lines of
1 Late summer adult birds taken in the United States show no molting, but a specimen, No. 151635,
Margarita Island, off Venezuela, July 7, 1895, Lieut. Wirt Robinson, is an adult female, though not
sexed, changing to the winter plumage. As others were seen it is probably » nonbreeding bird that
failed to reach its arctic howe.
2 Not a young, as usually considered by authors.
417
migration indicates a separation for the whole of that vast period since the Glacial
period began. During and since that time these birds have differentiated in opposite
directions as wide as their winter habitats are apart. It seems certain that morinella
during the whole of Glacial time was a resident of North America, while probably
interpres was excluded therefrom, owing to the frigid conditions of Greenland and
Alaska. The presence now in these places of interpres indicates an extension of its.
range due to the retreat of the ice. It would thus seem that morinella was cut off
from the parent stock by the Arctic ice accumulations and has continued isolated.
Since the retreat of the ice to its present position the birds have reextended their
habitat to its present limits. Thus the distinctness and causation of the habitats of
the two birds, their varied migrating lines, the smallness and brighter coloration of
morinella are correlated factors bearing on the question of relationship. ‘That mori-
nella has escaped its proper place till now is due to several causes. First, the
confusion by ornithologists of generic and specific characters in such a strongly
specialized genus; second, the absence of specimens in American museums showing
what the European, bird really is, and also a lack of home specimens, and, third, a
lack in European collections of a series of properly made fresh skins of the American
bird. For instance, Mr. Seebohm had but two unsexed specimens of morinella, yet
had positive views. The fact that individuals of morinella winter about the southern
borders of the United States will perhaps account for the differences observable in
the extent of the spring change, those that winter in southern South America
perhaps undergoing a less change on account of the greater length and severity of
their migration. To Drs. C. W. Richmond and E. M. Hasbrouck, and especially to
Mr. E. J. Brown, I am indebted for the use of many specimens. I have examined in
all 167 specimens—85 of interpres, 82 of morinella.
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Measurements of thirty-one Virginia Spring specimens of A. morinella.
Cat. i i i :
number. Sex. Date. Locality. Collector. Wing. Tail. Culmen.| Tarsus.
646 | | | May 23,1892 | Cobbs Island .......... E. J. Brown.........-- 5.50 2. 30 0. 87 1.00
5401. | May 27, 1892 |.....do .....-.....-----4/- CO: asecvesasanes ses 5. 65 2. 37 89 1.02
6431 ot | May 16,1892 |.....do ..---....-.seenee[eneee 10) aiajarene ones se sinion 5. 85 2.52 92 1.05
BEE | [acca aoc eeae| ae ie AO ce anawnatenneninne|an ene! OO cenennnsae eens 5. 45 2.45 89 - 96
542) of | May 11,1892 |....-do ..-........00----]- -dO .....-.+ 5. 60 2.47 - 86 1.00
BAL || oot | Bay VO UR0 ace lO oceans ners aed eed do ..-....4 5.78 2.55. . 87 95
og --do 5.95 2.47 «95 1.05
o --do 5. 67 2, 35 95 1.02
647 | oS -.do 5.73 2.35 .90 1,00
646| o do 5,74 2, 25 90 89
3779 W.P.| o --do .. 5.77 2.20 .90 1.03
135322 | o C. W. Richmond . 5. 72 2.45 88 - 96
135319 | oi | May 16,1894 |.....d0.......2.-+-0.00-/----- do 5.90 2, 48 93 1.04
135320 | cf | May 15, 1894 |..... OO witsincowdneseaes ed ees 5.70 2,44 .90 1.05
1102 | o | May 16,1892 | Cobbs Island .. 5.73 2. 58 90 1.03
1337 | of May 15,1894 | Smiths Island . 5. 80 2. 42 . 93 1.07
1336| of |.-.-- 0 saaeene do ..... 5.50 2, 32 -89 1.04
1342 | o& | May 21,1894 -do 5.74 2. 30 86 1.06
1335 | of | May 15,1894 -do 5.70 2.50 94 -99
4143 | of | Sept. 1,1895 -do 5. 80 2.37 88 - 98
1388 | 2 | May 15,1894 -do 5. 87 2.33 -99 1.05
pb a eee do ......- -do 5.72 2.41 89 1.02
1340] 9 |....- 0 wcawcee Oo ois einiaiace 5. 82 2, 35 .88 1.01
1341 May 21, 1894 |....- BO ccnrmwnn 6. 08 2.44 -91 1.05
135321 May 16,1894 |..... WO ccwxnnnws 5.75 2. 35 -91 .99
643 | 2 | May 15,1894 |..... do ........- 6.00 2,53 - 90 1.00
-Q | May 16, 1894 |..... do ......-.. 5.75 2, 43 -97 1.00
645} Q | May 19, 1894 |..... do .. 5. 80 2. 40 96 1.01
644] Q | May 21,1894 |..... EO) cis. aiecie 6. 00 2.40 96 1.01
545 | ¢ | May 16,1892 | Cobbs Island 5.80 2, 42 +91 1,02
4072} 9 | Aug. 24,1895 | Smiths Island 5. 92 2.42 99 1.07
5947—pT 3-——27
418 THE FUR SEALS OF ‘THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Average measurements of A. morinella and A. interpres.
Wing. Tail. | Culmen. | Tarsus.
20 Virginia spring males:
PA OLB Oi fya ncais.clasecishneidis side ein aeieiniee dapis sia nis ea Sissel e a Aicielersiaisieseencie 5.70 2.40 0. 90 1.02
Largest.......-- adbaie ole aint ave atesicictara sie eekiaEsieiate @.leia1e cb mere aim sin/sisimiwieiase Sjeinns 5. 95 2.47 - 95 1.05
Smallest .......-... sbsewbaisince Gadean te eeemaseetacae easiness 5.45 2.45 89 -96
11 Virginia spring female
Average .. 5. 86 2. 40 91 1.02
Largest... 6. 08 2.44 91 1.05
Smallest - - 5.75 7 2.35 91 -99
10 Pribilof autumn males: !
5. 83 2. 38 . 86 1.02
6.00 2. 40 85 1. 04
5. 70 2.37 . 88 1,03
Average .... 6.05 2.47 -91 1,02
Largest. -. 6.35 2. 60 95 1.04
Smallest -...-....-..-.--- 5.77 2. 32 89 + 98
6 Japanese spring males, averag 6. 06 2.53 86 1.02
2 Japanose spring females, average. 6, 24 2.47 - 90 1.05
2 Bering Island males,! average ......-..----------- Reis rows niaiavedinene aisisicimere ae 5. 87 2.38 86 1.02
3 Alaskan summer males,! average ....-..-.-------- Hacigadimee (ee sewen isco seine 7 5. 83 2.43 . 84 1.03
3 Alaskan summer females,! average ..-.- sahweceds eieewniwckeyekecewseees ees 5.79 2,39 85 1. 06
5 European females,! average.....-.....--- sc RBOC RE SkE SO NStetEeg eee aeetanenss — 6.01 2.41 .87 1.02
3 European males,! average.......------ 2-2-2 ee ee eee eee ee ee eee sueeisaienis 5.99 2.51 . 86 1.00
1 Greenland female !.......-- <HaCReeooSeae 6.11 2.56 -90 1.04
L Greenland Male? 2.0:.2<00sc6ccsscmeene sa ncmiesiacsinsia ce (4) 2. 50 81 -99
Breeding males, as given in British Museum Catalogue -. 6. 20 2. 30 -90 95
Breeding females, as given in British Museum Catalogue. 6. 30 2.45 90 -95
1 Worn wings and tails, summer or fall birds.
Order RAPTORES. Birds of Prey.
Three hawks and two owls are known from the islands, but several others possibly
occur. The limited area doubtless prevents undue increase in individuals of raptorial
species, though the great abundance of other birds during the summer, at least, would
naturally lead us to expect the reverse. Hawks and owls are rarely seen, but oftener
on St. George than on St. Paul, because of the presence there of numerous lemmings.
Family FALCONIDAE. Falcons, Hawks, Eagles, ete.
55. Haliaeetus leucocephalus alascensis Townsend. Cliff Eagle.
Haliacetus leucocephalus, Saarpr, Cat. B. Br. Mus. I, 1874, 304.—Cours, Key, 1890, 555.—A. O.
U. Ch. List, 1895, 136.—Rip@way, Man. 1896, 243 (all part).
I took with me to St. Paul a specimen that I had shot at Unalaska, and it was
immediately recognized by many of the natives as being occasionally seen about the
islands. Usually abundant on the cliffs about Unalaska, especially in severe weather.
56. Falco rusticolus gyrfalco (Linn.). Gyrfalcon.
Fatco sacer, Cours, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 179; Key, 1890, 532.—
Exviorr, Mon. Seal Ids, 1882, 128.
Hierofalco gyrfaico, SHARPE, Cat. B. Br. Mus. 1, 1874, 416 (part).
Hierofalco gyrfalco sacer, BEAN, Proc. U.S.N.M., 1882, 161.
Falco rusticolus gyrfaleo, NELSON, Bds. Alaska, 1887, 146.—A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 187.—Ripa-
WAY, Man. 1896, 246.
Mr. Elliott collected a specimen, the only one he saw. Dr. T. H. Bean collected
one that was trying to alight on the vessel while 60 miles east-southeast of St. George.
No. 64296, im.o., March, 1873, St. Paul, H.W. E. No. 81398, 2, September 24, 1880,
off St. George, T. H. B. (Length, 21.00; extent, 44.00; wing, 14.00 ; tail, 9.00; tarsus,
2.37, Dr. T. H. B.).
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 419
57. Falco peregrinus anatum (Bonap.). Duck Hawk.
Falco communis, SHARPE, Cat. B. Br. Mus. I, 1874, 376 (part).
Falco] peregrinus, Cours, Key, 1890, 534.
Falco peregrinus anatum, A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 138.—Rip@way, Man. 1896, 247.
An early spring and late fall migrant, but some may winter. ‘Usually seen as a
mere dot circling high up in the air, and are sometimes shot by the natives as they
come in over the bluffs in bad weather.” (Natives.) I dug the remaius of one from a
sand dune; it had been killed the previous December. A large hawk seen on St.
George during the summer of 1890 may have been of this species.
Family BUBONIDAE. Horned Owls, etc.
58. Asio accipitrinus (Pall.). Short-eared Owl.
Asio accipitrinus, SHARPE, Cat. B. Br. Mus. II, 1875, 334.—Couss, Key, 1890, 507.—A. O. U. Ch.
List, 1895, 142.—Ripaway, Man. 1896, 258.
One was seen by Mr. Elliott and myself on the north side of the village hill on
St. Paul June 17, 1890. The same or another had been seen by Mr. Elliott up the
island in May. This bird often visited the same place during the night or early iu the
morning to feed upon the least auklets which were breeding in the vicinity. I often
found on the moss a round patch of feathers, which showed the fate of a Choochkie.
A few are seen every winter by the natives, but they all agree that hawks and owls
are more abundant on St. George, owing to the presence of numerous lemmings, which
are entirely absent from St. Paul. An owl, No. 68348, ? , is recorded on the Museum
catalogue as having been taken by G. R. Adams February 12, 1874. I have been
unable to find it.
59. Nyctea nyctea (Linn.). Snowy Owl.
Nyctea scandiach, SHARPE, Cat. B. Br. Mus. II, 1875, 125.—CouEs, Key, 1890, 510.
Nyctea nyctea, A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 149.—Ripeway, Man. 1896, 264.
Usually seen in winter, but occasionally in summer. One was killed on St. George
June 10, 1890, which had been seen repeatedly since and during the previous winter.
I killed one on St. Paul on June 13, 1890. One of the Treasury agents shot seven
during the winter of 1884-85. Mr. F. A. Lucas saw three during the summer of 1898.
June 13, 1890, St. Paul, ad. 2. Length, 2450; extent, 58.00; wing, 16.25. Stomach
contents: full of the flesh and feathers of the least auklet.—( W. P. and Dr. A. K. F.)
Order COCCYGES. Cuckoos, etc.
Family CUCULIDAE. Cuckoos, Anis, ete.
60. Cuculus canorus telephonus (Heine). Siberian Cuckoo.
Cuculus canorus, SHELLY, Cat. B. Br. Mus. XTX, 1891, 245 (part).
Cuculus canorus telephonus, PALMER, Auk, 1894, 325.—Ripaway, Man. 1896, 596.—BENDIRE,
Life Hist. II, 1896, 32.—A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 155.
Above, plain bluish-gray, darker across back and on wing coverts, paler on fore-
head; chin, throat, and chest light ash-gray, darkening on sides of head and neck;
under parts, buffy-white with narrow blackish bars; tail, dark bluish-gray, blackening
toward tip, each retrix white tipped and white spotted at intervals along shafts,
smaller on central and larger on external ones, the basal spotting forming bars; inner
edges of rectrices, saw-edged with white; wings, brownish; primaries, white spotted
along inner edges; lateral and basal edges of longest upper tail coverts narrowly
420 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
edged with white with a long white shaft streak; longer under tail coverts irregulary
barred with blackish. Bill horny black; base of upper yellowish, of lower greenish;
bluish in center; base, yellowish; angle of mouth, orange-yellow; eye ring, bright
lemon-yellow; inside of mouth, bright orange-red, lighter toward tip of bill; feet, deep
yellowish. Length, 14 inches; extent, 18.25; wing, 8.70; tail, 6.65; culmen, 0.81;
tarsus, 0.83. Outer primary, 2.30 less than the third, the longest. Outer retrix, 1.80
less than the longest. Iris, dull yellow. No. 118864, ad. ¢ , U.S.N.M., July 4, 1890, St.
Paul Island, Bering Sea, W. Palmer.
While becalmed in a fog on June 13, 1890, between Walrus and St. Paul islands,
a bird with a long tail and broad wings, short head and neck, circled over us for a
short time and then flew northward. On June 30, at Northeast Point, near Cross
Hill, I saw what I then thought was a hawk, which was perched on the sand or drift-
wood, and which now and then flew up and captured flies. The next morning I saw
it again, and with a glass determined it to be a cuckoo with bars on the breast, and
thus an Asiatic species. As the use of my gun at this point was taboed, in fact it
was locked up because a report might possibly affect the next morning’s kill of seals,
I was unable to secure it, and consequently returned to the village leaving my prize
behind. On July 4,I tramped the weary stretch of 13 miles to the Point, this time
with my little .22 cane gun, and after a considerable chase among the grass-grown
sand dunes secured the bird by a lucky shot. It had been seen for fully two weeks
by the natives stationed there, and was probably the same bird that I saw on June
13, and is the only one of its kind known from North America. Stomach contents:
Literally packed with large bottle flies. “This cuckoo contained more than 100 crane
flies. Many of these insects were full of dark-brown eggs.”—(S. D. J.)
Order PASSERES. Perching Birds.
Of this vast order of birds it would appear that but nine species are known from
the islands. These belong to five famiiies. Of these, four are common summer resi-
dents; the others are only casual or accidental. The four residents thrive exceedingly
well in summer, but their powers of endurance (in the cases of three, the other being
migratory usually) are sorely tested in the long, dark, and stormy times of winter.
Indeed, if it were not for the shelter afforded by the exceedingly rugged rocky crevices
in the cliffs and on the surface of much of the islands, and their adaptability as lurk-
ing places for abundant insect life, it is doubtful if even these species could hold their
own on these exposed and storm-swept shores. In fact, their ranks are often greatly
thinned in severe winters. Other casual species may be expected and will undoubt-
edly be found in time.
Family TURDIDAE. Thrushes, Stonechats, ete.
61. Merula migratoria (Linn.). American Robin. “Rap-o-loof.”
Turdus migratorius, COUES, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 172; Key, 1890,
244,—SHarPE, Cat. B. Br. Mus. V, 1885, 220.—ELLioTT, Mon. Seal Ids. 1882, 127,
Merula migratoria, A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 320.—Ripaway, Man. 1896, 577.
The history of this bird on the islands is as follows: “I was most agreeably
surprised, one cool morning early in October [1872], while walking upon the village
hill, St. Paul Island, to see a robin, a red-breasted robin, silent and gloomy, hopping
and fluttering before me. It had evidently been brought to the island by the gale
_ which blew two days previously, and was even now casting about for a good chance
to leave. In order that I might observe the length of time this old friend of mine
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 421
would stay with us I did not shoot him, but strolled out to the locality every morning
and evening until the end of the third day, when I missed him. The natives recog-
nized it as a chance visitor, though seen almost every year in this manner.”—( Elliott.)
Family MOTACILLIDAE. Wagtails.
62. Anthus pensilvanicus (Lath.). American Pipit.
Anthus persylvanicus, SHARPE, Cat. B, Br. Mus. X, 1885, 596.
Anthus ludovicianus, Couzs, Key, 1890, 286. :
Anthus pensilvanicus, A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 289.—R1p@way; Man. 1896, 536.—NELSoN, Bds.
Alaska, 1887, 208.
A specimen of this species is in the collection of the National Museum, which was
taken on St. George by Dr. W. H. Dall. They probably occur in small numbers every
year. No. 54407, ¢, August 15, 1868, St. George, W. H. D.
Family TROGLODYTIDAE. Wrens, ete.
63. Anorthura alascensis Baird. Aleutian Wren. ‘“Limmershin”—Chew of tobacco. :
Troglodytes alascensis, DALL and BANN. Trans. Chic. Ac. Sci. 1869, 280, Pl. XXX, fig. 3.—Barrp
t.c. 315, Pl. XXX, fig. 3.—NxELson, Bds. Alaska, 1887, 210.—A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 301.—
Ripeway, Man. 1896, 555. ;
Troglodytes hyemalis var. alascensis, DALL, Proc. Cal. Ac. Sci. 1874, 273.
Troglodytes parvulus var. alascensis, ALLEN, Bull. N. O. C. II, 1877, 82.
Anorthura troglodytes var. alascensis, CouES, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875,
173; Key, 1890, 279.—ELLiorr, Mon. Seal Ids. 1882, 127.
Anorthura alascensis, NELSON, Cruise, Corwin, 1883, 61.—SHARPE, Cat. B. Br. Mus. VI, 1885, 273.
The following extracts are the beginnings of the history of this bird: “A single
specimen of a very common bird was obtained at St. Georges Island, Bering Sea. A
number were shot but were lost in the luxuriant growth of grass and weeds. It is
found all the year round on the island; breeds in May, building a nest of moss in the
crevices of the rocks, and, according to the Aleuts, lays six eggs.”—(Dall.) “This wee
bird is not migratory, but remains permanently upon St. George; its nest is built in
small, deep holes and crevices of the cliffs. I have not myself seen it, but the natives
say that it lays from éight to ten eggs in a nest made of dry grass and feathers, roofed
over, with an entrance at the side to the nest chamber, being thus elaborately con-
structed. The male is exceedingly gay during the period of mating and incubation,
flying incessantly from plant to plant or from rock to rock, and singing a rather loud
song for a small bird. * * * Although St. Paul Island is but 27 miles to the
northwest, as the crow flies, from St. George, not a single specimen of this little wren
has been seen there.”—(Hlliott.) The specimen taken by Dr. Dall was made the type
of a new species by Professor Baird, and has since been ascertained to inhabit most
of the Aleutian Islands. It is fairly common on St. George, but, strange to say, no
one has ever seen it on St. Paul. I saw five or six on May 28, near the village of St.
George, and secured several at the same place on August 11. Dr, J, A. Allen has
described the nest and eggs. (Bull. Nutt. Ornith. Club, Vol. II, 1887, p. 82.) They
were collected by a native and forwarded by Mr. W.J. McIntyre. He says: “The
nest is quite large and very compactly built, being composed externally of fine moss
of a light green color interwoven with fine roots and lined heavily with hair and
feathers. Conspicuous among the latter are the rosy-tipped feathers of the Leucosticte
griseinucha, The hairs are rather coarse and white, 3 to 4 or 5 inches in length, and
appear to be hairs of the Polar bear.” But two eggs out of a set of twelve were
422 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
saved. The birds live entirely about the bluffs and even seek their food under the
huge bowlders at the bases of the cliffs, where they enter the crevices and, remaining
under some minutes, reappear some ten or more feet away. Eggs: “Dull white with
a very few minute dots of reddish, so few and small as to be easily overlooked, 0.68
by 0.51, 0.60 by 0.50.”—(Allen.) No. 54447, im. 6, Type, August 17, 1868, St. George,
W.H. Dall. Length, 3.50; extent, 6.00.
Family HIRUNDINIDAE. Swallows.
64. Hirundo erythrogastra unalaschkensis (Gmelin). Alaskan Swallow.
Hirundo erythrogastra, SHARPE, Cat. B. Br. Mus. X, 1885, 137 (part).
H[irundo] erythrogastra horreorum, COUES, Key, 1890, 322 (part).
Chelidon erythrogaster, RIDGWAY, Man. 1896, 461 (part).
Chelidon erythrogastra, A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 258 (part).
Similar to H. erythrogastra, but larger, with longer wings and tail and relatively
smaller bill; white areas of tail larger, with narrow white outer edgings to the
feathers. ;
Walking along the bluffs near the village of St. George on May 28, 1890, with
Mr. Ed. Lavender, we saw a swallow skimming along the edge of the bluff, catching
the flies which the warm sun had enticed from the crevices of the rocks. Shortly
afterwards it flew just over my head while among the houses of the village. Drs.
Noyes and Hereford, who have each spent more than ten years on the islands, assured
me that a swallow was unknown there, but later in the evening 1 had the opportunity
of showing them the bird on another part of the bluff. It remained about the village
for nearly two weeks. On June 4, while standing on Black Blufts, St. Paul, I watched
a swallow coming in to the land and then fly northward up the island.
I found a nest at Unalaska, on August 13, containing three large young, a male
and two females, and secured the adults also. The nest is of mud held together by
grass rootlets. It is 9 inches wide and 4 inches deep; the cavity is 2} inches in
diameter and 13 inches deep. Grass rootlets encircle the cavity, which is well-lined
with gull and raven feathers. It was built in a large cavity, almost a cave, of a rock
on a hillside, and was placed on the slightly sloping face of the back portion, about its
center. A slight inequality of the rock face was sufficient to hold it in place. Tu
enter the cavity the birds had to fly to the face of the rock and then dip downward
between the rock and many tall plants, which effectually hid the opening. I saw no
others.
Family FRINGILLIDAE. Finches, Sparrows, ete.
65. Ammodramus sandwichensis (Gmel.). Sandwich Sparrow.
Passerculus sandwichensis, SHARPE, Cat. B. Br. Mus. XII, 1888, 674 (part).—Covurs, Key,
1890, 362.
Ammodramus sandwichensis, A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 224.—RipGway, Man. 1896, 408.
‘On June 3, 1890, in a grassy patch near Lukanin Beach, on St. Paul, I several
tumes flushed a sparrow which I identified as this species, having seen and collected a
number several days before at Unalaska. '
66. Calcarius lapponicus alascensis Ridgway. Alaskan Longspur. Karesch-navie Snaguiskie.
Plectrophanes lapponicus, COUES, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 177.— E..iort,
Mon. Seal Ids. 1882, 128. \
C[entrophanes] lapponicus, CouEs, Key, 1890, 357.
Calcarius lapponicus, SHARPE, Cat. B. Br. Mus, XII, 1888, 579 (part).—A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895,
221 (part).—RipGway, Man. 1896, 404 (part).
Calcarius lapponicus alascensis RIDGWAY, Auk, 1898, 320.
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 423
“An abundant bird on the island in summer but rare or absent in winter. This
bird is the vocalist par excellence of the Pribilof group, singing all through the month
of June in the most exquisite manner, rising high in the air and hovering on fluttering
wings over its setting mate.”—(Hlliott.) And this is certainly true. It could always
be found, and its song was a most beautiful variation on the usually monotonous
stretches of foot-wearying tundra, The male invariably spends his time in the close
vicinity of the setting female but never lends his assistance to the ornithologist in
finding the nest. He either sits close by on a little eminence, watching silently, or
flies off to a little distance, and when we move follows us for some distance.
No constant differences are noticeable in the sexes of the young of this species in
the nestling plumage, like the snowflake; variation in the amount of spotting on the
breast and in the general amount of paleness and darkness is noticeable, but it is
individual. An immature male, August 15, that I took at Unalaska is acquiring the
new teleoptile plumage, a streak of half-grown pale-chestnut feathers having appeared
down each side of the neck, and under the nestling feathers of the breast the tips of
new feathers can be seen as jet black as in the adult, with rather broad edgings
of tawny. Many new feathers can be seen all over the ae by lifting the feathers of
the nestling plumage. An adult female, July 29, St. Paul, has many new pinfeathers
of the new plumage just jutting out from the skin, and partly felt. Nests were found
as follows: June 20, 5 eggs; June 21, same; same date, 3 eggs, 2 young; July 2, 6
young, well feathered; July 5, 5 young, just from the nest. The down is very pale,
tawny in color, almost white, and is quite long. A bunch is shown in fig. 5, Pl. XL,
attached to the nestling feather, and another somewhat separated. At a is shown a
single ramus with its down attached and the slight swelling between.
The nest is placed on a slight slope, usually under a tall plant, but sometimes on
the open tundra where a bunch of dried sedge or grass at its upper side partly or
wholly conceals it. It is sunk even with its rim. The female will not leave it until
almost stepped upon, and then tries her utmost, by feigning lameless, to entice the
intruder away. This undoubtedly works very well with the numerous foxes. Her
colors harmonize so well with the surroundings that it is certainly difficult to detect
her when on the nest and only a few feet away. The young are to be found by the
end of June. Externally the nest is composed of old coarse grass and plant stems,
inside of fine grass tops compactly interwoven and lined with a few white and dark
small feathers. It measures 44 inches in diameter, with the opening 24 by 1} inches
deep. The eggs agree well with those from other places—a confusion of faint brown-
ish blotches on a slightly paler base, with a few spots, and irregular, wavy, short lines
of dark brown generally about the center of the eggs. My series varies from 0.80 by
0.63 to 0.91 by 0.63. The small young have the bill dark, with the edges yellowish
white. In some the tip was yellowish. Feet yellow ocher, with the upper sides dark-
est. Stomach contents, six species: “‘These birds were nestlings, and, save one in
which there were a few bits of insect cuticle, they contained nothing but pieces of
red and black voleanic lava.”—(S. D. J.)
67. Passerina townsendi (Ridgw.). Pribilof Snowflake, “ Snaguiskie. m
Plectrophanes nivalis, DALL and Bann., Trans. Chic. Ac. Sci., 1869, 282 (part).—DaLL, Proc.
Cal. Ac. Sci., 1874, 273.—Covugs, in Elliott's Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875, 176; Key,
1890, 356. _ELLiorT, Mon, Seal Ids., 1875, 128.—NELsoNn, Bds. Alaska, 1887, 180 ipart).
Plectrophenax nivalis, TOWNSEND, Crnise Corwin, 1887, 100. anaes Cat. B., Br. Mus. XII,
1888, 579 (part). :
Plectrophenax nivalis townsendi RiDGWAY, Man., 1887, Ist ed., 405.—A. O, U. Ch. List, 1895, 220,
I have been unable to find.any examples of intergradation between this form and
424 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
the bird: inhabiting the adjacent shores of Alaska proper. Its larger size, much longer
and larger bill, more extensive whiteness, and more strongly colored larger eggs, give
it a distinctiveness which should entitle it to specific rank. It inhabits the Aleutian,
Pribilof, and Commander islands.
“The snowbird is another permanent resident of these islands, but one which,
unlike the Leucosticte, is rather shy and retiring, nesting high on the rocky, broken
uplands, and only entering the village during unusually severe or protracted cold
weather.”—(Hlliott.)
It is always in sight wherever one goes, either singing its cheery song on the
uplands or else flying to the rocky shores at low water, where it often picks up a meal.
Ordinarily it utters only a “chir-r-r,” but the song of the male is quite striking in its
brilliancy, but though louder than the longspur’s is hardly as sweet. They sing very
early in the morning, about 3 or 4 a. m., and I often heard them while lying in bed.
A pair had a nest just behind the house in which I lived, and often on awaking I
could have sworn that I heard a white-eyed vireo, so close is the resemblance some-
times to the well-known notes of that bird. Usually, howéver, it has a higher pitch
and is sweeter. They nest commonly under the bowlders which dot the hillsides, the
entrance, well worn, being on the southern side and looking more like the entrance
to the burrow of amammal. The nest is placed on ‘the ground, just about an arm’s
length in, so that it can not be reached by a fox. Some nests are built in crevices, or
behind a rock in the face of a cliff, not, however, in those which face the sea, our bird
having no such inclination for the surf-swept shores like the Leucosticte. ‘Upon the.
female the entire labor of the three weeks’ incubation required for the hatching of
her brood devolves. During this period the male is assiduous in bringing food, and
at frequent intervals sings his simple but sweet song, rising, as he begins it, high in
the air, as the syklark does, and at the end of the strain drops suddenly to the ground
again.” —( Elliott.)
I have seen a female repeatedly make trips to the lagoon shore, where she picked
up dead sea fleas for her young. They are also not averse to the capabilities of the
killing grounds to produce food, for the young bred about the village are soon found
in those places, the effects soon being visible on their plumage, which becomes
extremely dirty beneath. A series of nine young from the nestling to quite long-
tailed birds illustrates the changes incident to the nestling plumage. In three, taken
June 16 from a nestful of six, the long dusky down’ is abundant along the sides of
the head and along the sides of the back and on the rump. The nestling plumage is
covering the body except on the throat and down the center of the breast. This
plumage is as follows, and, curiously enough, the females are much the darkest:
Nestling 3 .—Above, mouse gray, obscurely streaked with darkish; beneath, very
1This down has received the name of Neossoptiles, given by Dr. Gadow in Newton’s Dictionary
of Birds, 1893, page 243. To the mature feathers, all that follow, he has applied the name Teleoptiles,
but curiously enough he does not distinguish between the really mature feathers—those to which every
species ultimately attains—and the nestling plumage, which in many species is so transitory and
always intermediate; that is, between the Neossoptile and the first Teleoptile. This so-called nestling
pluniage, which is always, in point of time and position, between the other two named, may be
called the Mesoptile. Thus first we have the Neossoptile, which is usually attached to the tips of
the rami of the Mesoptile, and this again as the succeeding growth appears is seen (often) attached
to the tips of the rami of the Teleoptile, which sometimes are found entering the umbilicus inferior
of the Mesoptile. Tlus these feather growths are common to nearly all birds in-the order mentioned,
are quite different in structure, are variously connected, and differ in their uses and periods of growth
and disconnection.
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 425
pale yellowish, darkening on throat, which is somewhat streaky; nearly white on
abdomen. ‘Tips of primaries and secondaries slightly showing. Wing coverts as far
as grown out, about half their length, entirely white; tail just appearing. No. 118964,
U.S.N.M. Coll.
Nestling °.—Much darker above, with darker streaks; also darker (slaty) and
more heavily streaked on the under neck and sides of breast; much less yellowish
beneath. No, 118965, U.S.N.M. Coll.
This difference between ths sexes is noticeable at a glance at any age of the
nestling plumage. As they are growing this difference intensifies, so that the darker
slaty-coiored females are readily distinguishable from the much paler and tawny
males, This color difference also holds good in the sexed specimens of P. nivalis that
Ihave seen. But in nivalis of similar age there is very much less white on the wing
coverts and also on the ‘secondaries, and the bill is smaller.
The nest is quite a cosy affair, about 5 inches in diameter, with an opening of 24
by 14 inches deep. It is made of old weathered grass and plant stems, lined inside
with some finer grass and an abundance of white gull feathers which entirely cover
the inside. A few long black hairs are also added. The eggs are nearly always six
in number, sometimes seven. A set taken June 4, 1890, is pale greenish, profusely
- spotted and blotched at larger end, sparingly at small end, with some small, distinct,
very dark wavy lines, and spots. Blotches dark vinaceous. Large space at large
end bare of blotches but not of spots. These eggs vary from 0.93 by.0.70 to 0.95 by
0.70 and 0.94 by 0.72. Another set of six, June 24, is creamy with many blotches of
dark vinaceous, and brownish generally covering the larger end and to a great extent
the smaller. Small place at center of larger end with few blotches or none. A very
few very dark wavy lines on nearly all. These eggs vary in size from the smallest,
0.96 by 0.74, to the largest, 1.01 by 0.74. The general color of all these eggs is much
darker than in nivalis, the blotches are more numerous and darker, and the eggs are
decidedly larger. Base of the bill in the immature is bright yellow, with the tip dark;
feet dark gray. In the summer adult the bill and feet are black entirely. Stomach
contents, seven specimens: “The snow buntings had obtained maggots (fly larvae)
from abundant decaying carcasses. They had also eaten midges by the hundreds
and crane flies in quantities. Two of the birds had taken seeds, and one a leaf-eating
beetle (Chrysomellidae).”—(S. D. J.)
The following measurements were made to show the range of size, the larger
measurement in each group indicating by the plumage that the bird was fully adult,
while the smaller shows a bird of the previous summer:!
PASSERINA TOWNSENDI
at. 1 :
Red Sex. Date. Locality. Collector. Wing. Tail. | Culmen.| Tarsus.
ber.
118953 | o | June 19,1890 | St. Paul Island ........-... W. Palmer....-.------ 4. 60 3. 05 0.47 0. 97
64195,| ot |-..----2--2- 02 St. George Island .......... H.W. Elliott ....00... 4.48) 2.80. 49 91
62410'| g | May 18,1872 | St. Paul Island ............|..... Orca ccesaet ca sees 4,43 2. 80 .43 92
106698 | o | June 12,1885 | Otter Island ....-....-. . | C.H. Townsend ....-. 4,37 2. 60 .49 - 88
118950 | of | June 7,1890 | St. Paul Island ........-... W. Palmer.......-.--- 4,27 2, 88 43 -90
G4198:| “Os |eccwemunenders St. George Island .......... H. W. Elliott ......... 4,21 2.54 45 - 93
118959 | @ | June 5,1890 | St. Paul Island .....-...... W. Palmer.....---.--- 4.20 2. 60 42 -90
106696 | 9 | June 8, 1885 | Otter Island ..-....----.... C. H. Townsend ...... AL 2. 67 -41 = 92
118960 | Q | June 20, 1890 | St. Paul Island .........-.. W. Palmer........-... 4.11 2.57 45 -90
"118957 | Q | June 4,1890 |..... gees ene ea phe es Mol cacnseeeteacene 4.10 2. 64 42 90
! Immature townsendi—that is, birds of the previous summer—are larger than the oldest Alaskan
specimens of nivalis.
426 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
PASSERINA NIVALIS.
Cat. P
mum- | Sex, Date. Locality. Collector. Wing. Tail. | Culmen. | Tarsus.
ber.
88752 | co | May 8, 1882 | Point Barrow...........-.- J.Murdock.........-. 4.48 2. 60 0. 40 0. 87
88751 fof Apr. 9,1882 |....- OO: erie erage cedcerge ciays|'e asia Og ixisteteicveisinivtesisvaers 4.39 2.74 40 . 86
95560 | o | Apr. 24,1882 | Nushagak ........-----.--- C. L. McKay . : 4,39 2. 62 40 88
88748 fou June 18, 1882 | Point Barrow....... .| J. Murdock .. 4, 26 2.50 40 - 88
110128 Ss July 3,1886 | Aliaskan Peninsula J.W.Johnson 4, 20 2.70 41 87
106069} @ | June, 1885 | Cape Lisburne.....-. H. D. Wolfe. . 4.18 2.52 40 - 87
88754 | 2 | June 19, 1882 | Point Barrow..... J. Murdock.. 4.02 2. 65 42 - 88
93111 Q | Sune 18, 1882 |.-..- C0: cccwiceen wteebacisc: WO -sscc cir 4.00 2. 50 40 . 89
54493 i. Apr. 30,1868 | Nulato........... .-| W.H. Dall... 4.00 2.51 38 - 85
93112} @ | June 22,1883 | Point Barrow..-....--..... J. Murdock ........--. 3.90 2.50 39 ~ 85
68. Acanthis linaria (Linn.). Redpoll.
Acanthis linaria, SHARPE, Cat. B. Br. Mus. XII, 1888, 245.—A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 217.—Ripe-
WAY, Man. 1896, 397.
“ Aegiothii,” ELLIoTT, Mon. Seal Ids. 1882, 136.
Mr. Elliott collected several specimens on St. Paul, June 21, 1872. They were
preserved in alcohol, but have not been seen since. He saw others in October, 1872.
They doubtless occur as migrants in small flocks.
69. Leucosticte griseonucha (Brandt). Aleutian Rosy Finch “ Patoshkie.”
Leucosticte tephrocotis var. griseinucha, Cours, in Elliott’s Rpt. Aff. Alaska, 1873; Reprint, 1875,
174.—ELLio1T, Mon. Scal. Ids. 1882, 127.
Leucosticte tephrocotis, HARTING, Fauna Prybilov, 1875, 16.
Leucosticte griseinucha, DALL and BANNISTER, Trans. Chic. Ac. Sci. 1869, 282, Pl. XXIV, fig. 1.—
_ Barrp, t.c., Pl. XXIV, ibid.—Covugs, Key, 1890, 351.
Leucosticte griseonucha, TURNER, Cont. Nat. Hist. Alaska, 1886, 171, Pl. vu1.—NeELson, Bds.
Alaska, 1887, 176.—TOWNSEND, Cruise, Corwin, 1887, 100.—A. O. U. Ch. List, 1895, 215.—
RipGway, Man. 1896, 391.
Montifringilla griseinucha, SHARPE, Cat. B. Br. Mus. XII, 1888, 275.
Dr. Dall collected a number of these birds on St. George in August, 1868. He
says: “This beautiful bird had no song at that season except a clear chirp, sounding
like “ wéet-a-wéet-a-wee-wéet.” It was on the wing a great part of the time, avoiding
lighting on the ground, but darting rapidly in a series of ascending and descending
curves, now swinging on the broad top of an umbelliferous plant and now alighting
on. some ledge of the perpendicular bluff, jumping from point to point, and seemingly
delighting in testing their own agility.” Unlike the longspur, which is never seen
about the houses in summer, and the snowflake, which is not often found at the same
place, the pahtoskie appears in the greatest abundance about the villages of St. Paul
and St. George, and even frequents the houses and streets. ‘This agreeable little
bird, always cheerful and self-possessed, is a regular and permanent settler on the
islands, which it never leaves. In the depth of dismal winter, as well as on a sum-
mer’s day, the pahtoskie greets you with the same pleasant chirrup, wearing the
same neat dress, as if determined to make the best of everything.”—(Zlliott.) They
love to stay about the bold cliffs, in the chinks and crevices of which they build their
rather large nests, and about the rocks of which they obtain the great part of their
insect food. I have picked from the mouth of a freshly killed bird the most minute
insects, and have watched them feeding on the drying carcass of a seal hanging out-
side the house of an Aleut, and they do not scorn the possibilities afforded by the
decaying seal carcasses on the killing ground. I have seen no specimens of nestlings.
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 427
There is no noticeable variation in the immature birds, or, in fact, in the adults.
Young birds had up to the end of July completed the growth of the wings and tail,
but no new feathers of the winter plumage had appeared. In the young the bill is
very dark dusky and in the summer adults it is black, Winter specimens of all ages
from other localities have pale-yellowish colored bills, with dark tips. No specimens
are at hand showing the change, but as the bills of winter birds (=0.46-0.48-0.50) are
much shorter than in summer specimens (=0.51-0.53-0.57), it may be that the change
occurs by a molt or renewal of growth. After the young leave the nest they remain
about their rocky home for some days and are then taken by their parents to the
killing grounds. The nest is quite bulky, 6 inches or more in diameter, made outside -
of old, coarse grass stems and lined thickly with new, small, and apparently well-
chewed clean grass stems and a few white feathers with a little hair. Sometimes a
little moss is added to the outside material. The eggs are large, the shell very thin
and pinky when fresh; white with a slight gloss in the cabinet. A set is five or six,
and they measure from 0.93 by 0.68 to 0.96 by 0.71 and 0.98 by 0.70. Stomach con-
tents, two specimens: ‘A carabid beetle, crane flies, grass seeds, and fruit skin formed
the contents of the stomachs of these birds.”—(S. D. J.)
RECENT LITERATURE OF THE AVIFAUNA OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Quite a number of very important reports dealing with the birds of this region
have been issued by various departments of the United States Government; in fact
little of importance has been effected by private means. They are the results of the
labors and experiences of a number of naturalists who have spent from a season to
several years in the region. The specimens, numbering perhaps several thousand,
and containing many types and unique and unusual specimens, are in the United
States N ational Museum collection in Washington, instead of being scattered through
many widely separated collections, or perhaps lost, as they might have been if more
of the pioneer work in this region had been done otherwise than under Government.
auspices. The wisdom of the late Prof. S. F. Baird, Secretary of the Smithsonian
Institution, and of the various Secretaries of the Treasury and other Government
officers in assisting and permitting in every way in their power the detailing of
naturalists to accompany the various naval and revenue vessels which have had busi-
ness in those waters, has been many times proved, and the work done in the many
branches of science, as shown in the various reports, has certainly justified the under-
takings. Our knowledge of the fauna of that region, small as it really is, would be
but meager if these opportunities had been neglected. In the following list I have
attempted to note all of these papers dealing with the birds and published in recent
times. I have noted especially the year in which the work was done, the Department
to which the author was attached, and some mention as to the extent of the results.
Many of the writers have visited ‘the seal islands for short periods, though few had
opportunities for any extended collecting. Such notes as they made were incor-
porated in general results, and special mention was made in most cases concerning
one or more species of Pribilof birds. I have added also a few general works dealing
with the waters of Bering Sea. A very fall bibliography of Alaskan binds will be
found in Mr.-Nelson’s work of 1887.
428 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
GENERAL PAPERS.
1842. J. P. Coinde: Notice sur la fauna ornithologique de Vile de Saint Paul, suivie de l’énumeration
de quelques espéces d’insectes (Coléopteres) des Aleoutiennes et du Kamtschatka. In
Revue et Magasin de Zoologie, xii, 1860, 396-405.
Mention of nine species collected on St. Paul by Mr. Warneck. One described as new, Larus Warnecki,=
Rissa brevirostris. -
1865-1868. W. H. Dall and H. M. Bannister, of the Russo-American Telegraph Expedition: List of
the Birds of Alaska, with Biographical Notes. In Transactions Chicago Academy of
Sciences, I, Pt. II, 1869, 267-310.
Notes on 212 species, 8 plates of 16 birds.
8. F. Baird, Smithsonian Institution: On Additions to the Bird Fauna of North America, made
by the Scientific Corps of the Russo-American Telegraph Expedition. In Transactions
Chicago Academy of Sciences, I, Pt. II, 1869, 311-325.
Critical notes and descriptions of 16 species. Based on Dall and Bannister’s collections, as above, with same
plates. Troglodytes alascensis described as new, from St. George.
[E. Coues], United States Army and Smithsonian Institution: Ornithological Results of the
Exploration of the Northwest. In The American Naturalist, IV, 1870, 367-371.
A review of Dall and Bannister’s list as above. Fulmarus rodgersi, p. 371, second known specimen, noted as
from St. George.
1871-72, W. H. Dall, United States Coast Survey: Notes on the Avifauna of the Aleutian Islands,
from Unalaska eastward. In Proceedings California Academy of Sciences, V, first series,
1873, 25-35.
Notes on 54 species; some mention of the Pribilofs.
1873. W. H. Dall, United States Coast Survey: Notes on the Avifauna of the Aleutian Islands,
especially those west of Unalaska. In Proceedings California Academy of Sciences, V, first
series, 1874, 270-281. 7
Notes on 45 species; some mention of the Pribilofs.
1872-73. H. W. Elliott, United States Treasury Department: Report. on the Pribilof Group, or Seal
Islands, of Alaska. Appendix. Ornithology of the Pribilof Islands, by Dr. Elliott Coues.
Washington, 1873.
Based on Mr. Elliott’s collections, with copi notes by Mr. Elliott. Tringa ptilocnemis described as new.
Forty species mentioned.
H. W. Elliott. A Report upon the Condition of Affairs in the Territory of Alaska, by H. W.
Elliott, Washington, 1875. Chapter IX. Ornithology of the Pribilof Islands, by Dr. Coues.
A reprint of above; no new matter.
J. E. Harting, London, England: The Fauna of the Pribilof Islands, etc., abridged from
Elliott’s report as above. In The Field, London, 1875; also reprinted in pamphlet form, 38
pages, 1 plate.
Based on Elliott's report and Dr. Coues's treatment of the specimens collected.
1872-73-1876. H. W. Elliott, United States Fish Commission, for Census Report of 1880: A Monograph
of the Seal Islands of Alaska. Special Bulletin No. 176, U.S.F.C., 1882.
Catalogue of the birds, pp. 125-136. Copious notes on 41 species, and illustrations.
1874-1881. L. M. Turner, Signal Service, U. 8S. A.: Contributions to the Natural History of Alaska.
Arctic Series of Publications, No. II, Signal Service, U.S. A., 1886. Part V, Birds, 115-196,
11 plates, 14 species figured.
Extensive notes on 165 species; some Pribilof mention.
1877-1881. E. W. Nelson, Signal Service, U.S.A.: Report upon Natural History Collections made in
Alaska. In Arctic Series of Publications, No. III, Signal Service, U. S. A., 1887, Part 1,
Birds of Alaska, 35-226.
Copious notes of 258 species, 12 plates of 21 species; some Pribilof mention.
+
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 429
1880. T. H. Bean, United States Fish Commission: Notes on Birds collected during the summer of
1880 in Alaska and Siberia. In Proceedings United States National Museum, V, 1883,
144-178.
Notes on 77 species, some from the Pribilofs.
1880-81. L.,M. Turner, Signal Service, U.S. A.: Notes on the Birds of the Nearer Islands, Alaska. In
the Auk, 1885, 154-159.
Notes on 70 species,
1881. E. W. Nelson, Signal Service, U.S. A.: Birds of Bering Sea and the Arctic Ocean. In Cruise of
the Corwin in Alaska and the Northwestern Arctic Ocean, 1883. :
One hundred and ninety-two species mentioned, some from the Pribilofs.
1882. Arthur and Aurel Krause. Beitrag zur Ornithologie von Alaska. Nach den Sammlungen und
Noten von Dr. Arthur Krause und Dr. Aurel Krause. In Journal fiir Ornithologie, 1883,
257-286.
Notes on 83 species, especially Tringa ptilocnemis, showing winter habitat..
1882-83, Leonhard Stejneger, United States National Museum: Results of Ornithological Explorations
in the Commander Islands and in Kamtschatka, Bulletin No. 29, U.S.N.M., 1885, 1-382, 9
plates.
Critical notes on 142 species; some Pribilof mention.
1884, J. E. Lutz, lieutenant, United States Revenue Marine: In Cruise of the Corwin. Report for
1884 (1889).
Mention of 14 species and their eggs; noted on Otter Island during the summer of 1884.
Notes on the Downy Young of the Parrot Auk and the Crested Auk, by Leonhard Stejneger. In
Cruise of the Corwin, 1889, 2 plates.
Descriptions, based on Lieutenant Lutz’s specimens and notes.
1885. C. H. Townsend, United States Fish Commission: Notes on Birds [ete.] between the Aleutian
Islands and Kotzebue Sound. In Cruise of the Corwin for 1885 (1887), 98-101.
Notes on 49 species; some from the Pribilofs.
1885. C. H. Townsend, United States Fish Commission: Notes on the Natural History of Northern
Alaska. In Cruise of the Corwin for 1885 (1887), 90-94.
Mention of 58 species, some from the Pribilofs.
The following are short notes of interest relating directly to the birds of the
Pribilofs, generally of single species:
W.H. Dall: American Naturalist, VII, 1873, 634.
Note on occurrence of Tringa crassirostris = T. ptilocnemis.
E. Coues: American Naturalist, VIII, 1874, 500.
Note on Tringa ptilocnemis, with description.
H. W. Elliott: A Ton of Birds’ Eggs Picked up inan Hour. Am. Sportsman, IV, 1874, 170.
Murres on Walrus Island.
J.E. Harting: On a new Species of Tringa from Alaska, Proc. Zool. Soc., Lond., 1874, 243, PI.XL.
Description of Tringa gracilia = T. ptilocnemis.
J. A. Allen: Nest and Eggs of the Alaskan Wren. Bull. Natl. Ornith. Club, 11,1877, 82.
Eggs and nest of Troglodytes alascensis described.
R. Ridgway: On a new Alaskan Sandpiper. Bull. N.0.C., V, 1880, 160.
Includes description of Tringa ptilocnemis.
R. Ridgway: Note on the Anser leucopareius of Brandt. Proc. U.S.N.M., 1885, 22.
Description of Branta minima.
R. Ridgway, Tringa damacensis (Horsf.) in Alaska: A Sandpiper new to the American Fauna. Auk,
1886, 275.
Mention of Tringa damacensis from Otter Island. An addition to North American birds.
430 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
R. Ridgway: Manual of North American Birds, 1887, 403.
Description of Plectrophenax nivalis townsendi from Otter Island.
W. Palmer: An Asiatic Cuckoo on the Pribilof Islands, Alaska. Auk., 1894, 325.
Note on occurrence of Cuculus canorus telephonus on St. Paul Island. An addition to North American birds.
D.G. Elliot: North American Shore Birds, 1895, 72, 235.
Discussion concerning the validity of Tringa ptilocnemis.
C. Bendire: Life Histories, II, 1895, 32.
Mention of Cuculus canorus telephonus as an American bird.
R. Ridgway: Auk, 1898, 320.
Description of Calearius lapponicus alascensis. Type trom St. Paul.
The following popular works contain more or less mention of the birds of the
islands and surrounding waters:
Alaska and its Resources, by W. H. Dall, 1870.
Contains list of the birds of Alaska, pp. 580-586.
Our Arctie Province, by H. W. Elliott, 1886.
Bird matter, pp. 208, 225, three illustrations.
The Voyage of the Vega, A. E. Nordenskidld. Translation, 1882.
Popular bird matter concerning the islands of Bering Sea.
Bidrag till kinnedomen om Sibiriska Ishafskustens Fogelfauna. In A. E. Nordenskiéld’s Vega-Expe-
ditionens Vetenskapliga Iakttagelser, Stockholm, 1887.
Bird matter in vol. 5, eighty species mentioned, with full notes.
A Few Sea-Birds, by H. W. Elliott, in Harper’s Magazine, LVIII, 1879, 497, 505.
A popular account of the sea-fowl] about the seal islands.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXVIII.
Figs. 1, 2. Uria troile californica; as seen on Walrus Island, August 7, 1890.
Fig. 3. Phalacrocorax urile; nest of four eggs in situ, with dead adult, June 13, 1890, Walrus Island.
Fig. 4. ——; nest with two eggs and live bird, August 7, 1890, Walrus Island. These pictures show
the rugged character of the island surface and shore line.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXIX.
Eggs of the Pacific Murre, Uria lomvia arra. Nine specimens selected as typical of extremes of
color and markings. Nos. 2, 3, 6 represent more nearly the average eggs. Specimens in National
Museum collection.
No. 1. White, with but few faint markings; rare, 3.35 by 2.15.
No. 2. The darkest, deep glaucous green, with irregular band of mostly confluent ‘black blotches
mixed with some brown; spots black; very common, 3.26 by 2.08.
No. 3. Very pale greenish, many small black and obscure spots; a blotched mass of black covers the
larger end, with a few brown blotches; common, 3.10 by 2.03.
No. 4. Uniformly pale greenish; has some wavy and roundish light brown spots; no black; uncom-
mon, 3.37 by 2.08.
No. 5. Dull ae green; no spots, but long wavy lines of varying shades of brown; rare, 3.10
by 2.10. ‘
No. 6. Creamy; numerous black and obscure blotches all over; very common, 3.30 by 2.01.
No. 7. Deep glaucous green; few black spots, mostly with light greenish centers; very rare, 3.10
by 1.95.
No. 8. White, nearly equally covered with obscure and a few black spots; no blotches; uncommon,
2.95 by 2.00. F
No. 9. White, the Sea of thousands; large light brown or yellowish spots, many obscure; rare,
2.86 by 1.90.
THE BIRDS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 431
The darker eggs all have much paler areas at their smaller ends than shown in the plate. Those
in the lower line do not show, in comparison with the others, as dark as they really are. They are
arranged in the plate according to color, beginning with the palest in the upper left-hand corner
(fig. 1) and ending with the darkest (fig. 2). These color differences fail to show in the reproduction.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE XL.
Fig. 1. Tringa ptilocnemis; a bunch of white-tipped neossoptiles from the back and a single n¢ossoptile
from the same bunch.
Fig. 2. ——; one of the unicolored neossoptiles which surrounds the dots.
Fig. 3. ats a back mesoptile with worn neossoptiles attached.
Fig. 4, ——; the tip of a mesoptile ramus with neossoptile attached and showing the swelling or
hatching point between.
Fig. 5. Calcarius lapponicus alascensis; a neossoptile bunch attached to the tips of the rami of the
growing mesoptile, confined by a part of the sheath remains; also, another mesoptile with
somewhat separated neossoptiles and a single one showing the slight swelling.
Fig. 6. Phalacrocoraz urile; a filoplume from breast of adult.
Fig. 7. ——; a filoplume from neck of immature (June).
Fig. 8. ——; a filoplume from neck of immature, showing a ramus along the rachis; sometimes two
or more are found.
Fig. 9. ——; three filoplumes from neck of young about two months old.
showing the uneven division of the upper
part of the calamus into double, triple, etc., parts.
Fig. 11. ——; a part of the calamus of a similar neosscptile bunch, more highly magnified, with one
of the parts torn down to show the homogeneous nature of the calamus.
Fig. 12. ——; a bunch of down from a nestling about a week old, showing the bases of the growing
rami forming a temporary calamus, which separates as it grows.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE XLI.
Fig. 1. Cyclorrhynchus psittaculus; tip of feather from white eye stripe.
Figs. 2, 3,4. ——; filoplumes from the nape and face.
Fig. 4a. ; large, worn filoplume from the nape, showing crossing of radii.
Fig. 5. Simorhynchus pusillus; tip of white feather fronr eye stripe.
Figs. 6-7. ——; filoplumes from back and nape.
Fig. 8. ——; white feather from forehead.
Fig. 9. Uria lomvia arra; a downy (neossoptile) bunch from the neck of a few-days-old young, still
partly inclosed by the sheath remains.
Fig. 10. ——; an unseparated neossoptile bunch and tip of same.
Fig. 11. ——; a bunch partly separated.
Fig. 12. ——; a bunch attached to the rami of a nestling back feather (mesoptile), but held by the
persistent remains of the sheath.
Fig. 13. ——; asimilar bunch with part of the rami of a breast feather, the mesoptile rami being
longer than on the back. .
Fig. 14. ——; a mesoptile ramus with the neossoptile attached and showing the swelling between at a.
Fig. 15. -——; bases of two neossoptiles and the tips of two mesoptile rami longitudinally adhering—
a common effect.
Fi ; tips of a back and a breast mesoptile with many of the neossoptiles attached.
Fig. 18. ——; shows the point of breakage of the neossoptile rachis, usually below the swelling, but
sometimes above, rarely central; also one double-tipped—rare.
Fig. 19. ——; a belly mesoptile with reospoptilas, showing double and long connection.
PLaTe XXXVIII.
VIEWS ON WALRUS ISLAND.
From photographs by William Palmer.
PLATE XXXIX.
EGGS OF THE PACIFIC MURRE, Uria lomvia arra, SHOWING VARIATION IN MARKINGS.
PLaTeE XL,
DEVELOPMENT OF FEATHERS.
PLATE XLI.
DEVELOPMENT OF FEATHERS,
XVIII.—THE FISHES DF BERING SEA.
By Davip STARR JORDAN and CHARLES HENRY GILBERT.
The fishes of Bering Sea were first studied by George Wilhelm Steller, naturalist
of Bering’s Sea voyage of 1741, and by Stephan Krascheninnikof, another able natu-
ralist, likewise connected with the great exploring expeditions of the Commander Vitus
Bering. Steller died in 1745 and Krascheninnikof about 1750, and the observations
of both men were printed posthumously by others.
The manuscript notes of Steller were published in part by Tilesius, Pallas, and
others, 1809 to 1811, and a portion of them appear in Krascheninnikof’s own work,
“Description of Kamchatka,” which appeared about the time of his death. We have
not seen the original of this work, aud in the English translations the parts relating
to natural history are greatly condensed. Both Steller and Krascheninnikot confined
their attention mainly to the salmon and trout of Kamchatka, describing correctly
the different species under the Russian names they now bear. In 1792 these vernacular
names were taken as scientific designation by Walbaum (Artedi Piscium), the descrip-
tions being copied from Krascheninnikof through Pennant’s compilation, all these
authors, Pennant, Krascheninnikof, and Steller, being nonbinomial.
Later the fishes of the Aleutian Islands and Kamchatka, as collected by Steller,
Merk, Billings, and others, were carefully studied by Tilesius, and especially by Pallas,
whose Zoographia Rosso- Asiatica (1811) ranks with the best ichthyological work of
the time. Most of the larger fishes of Kamchatka and Unalaska were described
by Pallas, and the fuller study of our day shows the comparative accuracy and
completeness of his work.
Later explorers brought some material to the museum at Paris, where it was
studied by Cuvier and Valenciennes, to the museuin at London, and to the collections
of the Smithsonian Institution. It is only within the last fifteen years that large
collections have been made in Bering Sea. The various collections made by the
officers of the revenue cutters and the weather observers have been especially studied
by Dr. Tarleton H. Bean, and the rich results of the deep-sea dredging of the Albatross
have been described by Dr. Gilbert and Dr. Bean, while Dr. Bean and his brother,
Barton A, Bean, have placed on record the collections of Dr. Leonhard Stejneger and
Col. Nikolai A. Grebnitzki from Bering Island, Medni Island, and Kamchatka.
In the summer of 1896 the steamer Albatross, Capt. J off, F. Moser, was assigned
to the use of the Commission of Fur Seal Investigation. Under Dr. Jordan’s direction
collections were made about Unalaska, off Bogoslof Island, off St. George, and off St.
5947—pr 3——28 433
434 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Paul. Other specimens were obtained from tide pools and by hook and line fishing,
After the Albatross left St. Paul, Captain Moser and Dr. Stejneger, with the assistance
of Mr. N. B. Miller, photographer and preparator, made collections by dredge and
seine about Petropaulski, off Robben Reef, and among the Kurile Islands and Yeso. |
The collection thus obtained was especially valuable, as it includes numerous species
not seen since the time of Krascheninnikof and Pallas. A small collection of fishes,
mostly from Tareinsky Bay, Kamchatka, was received from Mr. Gerald E. H. Barrett-
Hamilton, of the British commission.‘ A small collection was also made by the
Albatross under Dr. Jordan’s direction in the Shelikof Straits, off Karluk, in 1897,
On these various collections the present paper is based. For completeness sake.
reference is made to all species of fishes thus far authentically recorded from Bering
Sea, As the synonymy of each of these species is given in Jordan and Evermann’s
Fishes of Northern and Middle America, it is not repeated here. The new species
here described are also included in the latter work, the second part of which was
published October 3, 1898, the third, Nov. 26, 1898, both dates being prior to the
appearance of the present paper, which was, however, written first.
Family PETROMYZONID~-.
1. Lampetra aurea (Bean).
Recorded only from the Yukon River; not seen by us.
2. Entosphenus tridentatus (Gardiner).
Taken by Dr. Gilbert at Unalaska; common southward along the coast. Five
specimens were found by Mr. Lucas in the stomach of a fur seal from Bering Sea.
3. Entosphenus camtschaticus (Tilesius).
Tilesius and Pallas briefly describe a lamprey from Kamchatka. It has not been
recorded by later writers. It probably belongs to Lntosphenus, but this is not certain.
A larval lamprey obtained by Stejneger in the Paratunka River, near Petropaulski,
Kamchatka, is apparently of some species of Entosphenus. It can not be distinguished
from the larva of HE. tridentatus, though the adult may show peculiar characters.
Family SQUALIDA.
4. Squalus sucklii (Girard). Dogfish.
A single specimen of the dogfish was brought by Stejneger from Bering Island.
It is otherwise unknown from Bering Sea. The dried specimen referred to this species
by Mr. H. W. Elliott, found by Mr, William Palmer on Zoltoi Sands, St. Paul Island,
is a shriveled ray, Raja parmifera. The dogfish is said to occur about Kadiak, but
we did not find it there. The salmon shark, which is destructive to the salmon at
Karluk, is not the dogfish, but Zamna cornubica. .
Family SOMNIOSID.
5. Somniosus microcephalus (Bloch). Sleeper shark.
Not uncommon in Bering Sea; not seen by us.
Family RAJIDA.
6. Raja parmifera (Bean).
Common in Bering Sea; found by us on the beaches of St. Paul; recorded by
Bean from St. Michael and Unalaska.
THE FISHES OF BERING SEA. 435
7. Raja stellulata (Jordan & Gilbert). 2
An adult female was taken with hook and line on the halibut bank at Dutch
Harbor, Unalaska. Length, 214 inches. It has been compared with specimens from
Alaska, Washington, and California. The median row of spinous bucklers is inter-
rupted along middle of back in our specimen, none being present between shoulders
and point opposite base of ventrals. Sides of tail without definite series of differen-
tiated spines, the spinous prickles of the upper surface of tail being somewhat enlarged
aterally; no supraocular spines.
Similar specimens were dredged off Karluk in 31 and 110 fathoms.
8. Raja roseispinis Gill and ‘Townsend.
Several specimens taken by the Albatross in Bering Sea,\the one described as
Raja obtusa being the young of the other.
9. Raja interrupta Gill and Townsend.
Bering Sea, in deep water.
10. Raja aleutica Gilbert.
Originally described from Sannakh Pass, Aleutian Islands, Albatross station
3257, in 81 fathoms. A second large specimen dredged off Karluk in Shelikof Straits,
in 1897, station 3676, in 120 fathoms. ,
Family CATOSTOMIDZ.
11. Catostomus catostomus (Forster).
Obtained by Mr. Dall from the Yukon River at Nulato.
Family SYNAPHOBRANCHIDA.
12. Histiobranchus bathybius (Giinther).
Known from various localities in the Pacific. One specimen recorded by Dr.
Gilbert as taken in Bering Sea by the Albatross.
Family CLUPEIDA.
13. Clupea pallasi Cuvier and Valenciennes. Pacific Herring.
Common in Bering Sea, southward on both shores. Seen by us at Unalaska.
Recorded by Dr. Bean from Petropaulski, Unalaska, St. Michaels, and Port Clarence,
and by Dr. Gilbert from Unalaska and Herendeen Bay. The original type was from
Kamchatka. The species was described from Unalaska under the name of Spratel-
loides bryoporus by Cope.
Family ALEPOCEPHALID&.
14. Ericara salmonea Gill and Townsend.
One large specimen of this remarkable fish is known from the deep waters of
Bering Sea.
Family SALMONIDA.
15. Coregonus kennicotti Milner.
Described from Fort Good Hope, British America; also recorded from Yukon
River at Nulato.
436 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
16 Coregonus quadrilateralis Richardson.
Recorded by Dr. Bean from Nulato.
17. Coregonus clupeiformis (Mitchill),
Recorded from St. Michaels and Nulato by Dr. Bean.
18. Coregonus nelsoni Bean.
Described from Nulato; also recorded from Bristol Bay.
19. Argyrosomus pusillus Bean.
Recorded from St. Michaels and other localities in northern Alaska.
20. Argyrosomus laurettz Bean.
The original types from Port Clarence and Point Barrow; also recorded from
Nulato, Yukon River, and by Dr. Gilbert from Nushagak and Naknek rivers, Bristol
Bay.
21. Argyrosomus alascanus Scofield. (Plate XLII.)
Described from Point Hope and Grantly Harbor.
22. ‘Oncorhynchus nerka (Walbaum). Redfish; Krasnaja Ryba. Blue-back.
Recorded from many localities in southern and western Alaska and from Kam-
chatka; the common salmon of the canners in Alaska. Obtained by us in Captains
Harbor, Unalaska, at Karluk, and Bering Island.
23. Oncorhynchus kisutch (Walbaum). Silver salmon. Kisutch.
Summer Bay, Unalaska (fresh-water lake), July 3, 1896; Nikolski, Bering Island,
July 31, 1896; Karluk, 1897.
From the lake near Summer Bay we have three sizes, probably representing as
many years’ growth. The smallest are 30 to 60 mm., the second size 110 to 135 mm.,
the third 200 to 215 mm. Intermediate sizes are of course likely to occur, but the
majority of specimens seem to range themselves in these groups. The larger size
show the parr marks faintly and much more silvery than the smaller specimens,
appearing as though they were recently in from the sea. The black blotch on dorsal
followed by the sharply contrasting white posterior rays forms a very conspicuous
mark in advanced stages. The adipose fin is black margined. Coarse black spots or
blotches are present along the back in the very young, in addition to the parr marks.
They are soon replaced by the finer spots of the adult. Very young specimens have
a whitish anterior margin to dorsal and anal fins, followed by a blackish intramarginal
band, and the anterior rays may be produced. Common at Unalaska, the young
abounding in the sea and lakes. The dorsal fin largely black in life. The species is
recorded by Dr. Bean from various stations in Alaska.
24. Oncorhynchus keta (Walbaum). Dog salmon; Hayko; Calico salmon; Chum salmon.
Seen by us only at Karluk. Found in Bering Sea, but the localities uncertain.
It is probably, like the two preceding species, universally diffused, but it is less
abundant than either of these. It is not used by the canners, as it is said to “taste
like mush” when boiled. It is said to be of fair quality when fresh. It was not taken
by Stejneger on Bering Island.
25. Oncorhynchus tschawytscha (Walbaum). King salmon; Tschawytscha; Tsavicha.
Recorded by Dr. Bean from Yukon River, and by Dr. Gilbert trom Unalaska and
from the Nushagak River, Bristol Bay; not seen in the summer of 1896, except at
THE FISHES OF BERING SEA. 437
Karluk. It is widely distributed in Bering Sea, but in relatively small numbers.
Although superior in quality to the other species and much larger, it is not abundant
enough to be of much value to the canner. Not seen by Stejneger on Bering Island,
but he reports that it is occasionally taken there and on Copper Island mostly in
August.
26. Oncprhynchus gorbuscha (Walbaum). Gorbuscha; Humpback salmon.
Common in Bering Sea; seen by us at Karluk. Two adult specimens from Petro-
paulski Harbor. ‘The young common in the salt lagoon on St. Paul. Recorded
by Dr. Steindachner from Decastris Bay, by Dr. Bean from Plover Bay, and by
Stejneger from Bering Island.
27. Salmo mykiss Walbaum. Mykiss; Somka; Kamchatka salmon-trout. (Plate XLIII.)
By an unfortunate error, the writers have heretofore used the name Salmo mykiss
for the Cut-Throat trout of the Northwest. It was known that the Cut-Throat was the
only true or black-spotted trout in Alaska, and it was assumed that its range extended
along the coast to all streams in Bering Sea. But our recent explorations have shown
that it probably does not occur in Bering Sea, nor is there any undoubted record to
the north of Wrangel. If it reaches Kadiak, or Sitka, or Prince William sound, it
is only rarely, and the streams of the Aleutian Islands and the east coast of Bering
Sea contain no species of Salmo. The name Salmo mykiss must therefore be restricted
to the Kamchatkan species, while the species of the American rivers heretofore called
Salmo mykiss must be Salmo clarki.
We have therefore studied with great interest a specimen of the genuine Salmo
mykiss, the first on record since the times of Pallas, Krascheninnikof, and Steller. The
specimen, an adult male 960 mm. long, was taken by Dr. Leonhard Stejneger, Septem.
ber 15, 1897, in the Kalakhtyrka River, near Petropaulski, Kamchatka. It was called
“sonka” or “somka” by the natives. It is said to occur rarely and to be found in but
few rivers, the Kalakhtyrka among them. ‘ It is considered to be superior as food to
other Salmonide, except the king salmon (0. tschawytscha).
Head, 4 inches in length; depth, 44. D. 11. A. 10 (developed rays). Scales,
24-125. Mouth, large, the maxillary 14 in head, being somewhat produced at the top.
Vomerine teeth, few, evidently deciduous, only three being present. Eye, 84 in head;
snout, 22. Pectoral, 2 in head, longest anal ray, 22. Anal fin high and somewhat fal-
cate; ventrals inserted under anterior third of dorsal, reaching about halfway to vent.
Adipose fin over posterior end of anal. Caudal lunate.
Color, dark grayish above, sides silvery; a few small, faint, round, black spots on
back and on top of head, these sparse and obscure; a few faint spots on base ot
dorsal, and some on adipose dorsal. Spots on caudal small, but distinct, especially in
middle of fin.
No trace of red at throat in example preserved in formalin and doubtless none in
life. The specimen is now a half skin, in good condition.
The following measurements were taken from the fresh specimen by Dr. Stejneger:
mm.
Total length ...-.....-..----2- eee e ee eee cece eee teen eee eee eee cee eens ee --- 960
Total length without caudal....---.------ .---2- 1-2 2ee eee eee ee ee ee eee teen eee 853
Head ...... 22. 2+. 22 ene nee ee ree ene enn ree eee ee ene cee nee mene ee nee cone een ee 215
Tip of nose to anterior end of dorsal... .------- --- 0-020 eee eee cee cece eee eee eee ee cee e eens 400°
Length of base of dorsal...-..--.-- 2-22. 2-220 eeeeee seeeee cee eee cece ceee poctdvcauvescenastay 100
Posterior end of dorsal to anterior end of adipose fin...... 2.22... eee ee eee ee cence cece ee cee 167
438 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
mm.
Length of base of adipose fines ..060. cesses Lene sees nade see cee cee ses be smed cbse tes cases cece 17
Posterior end of adipose to caudal...... 222-2. ---- eee. cece ee ene cee et cece eee ee nec ene caeene 81
Posterior end of anal to: caudal s.cisceccs0 ines cceeea coe cae seswen sostcrven cemswesacs seeeoecceess 81
Length: of; base: of sanalncscens scans secs phones ses sist Ieee sees ee Sees Be eras see eeeom esse ewes val
Anterior end of anal to posterior of ventrals......-.-. 2-222. -2 2-2. ee eee eee cee eee eee 165
Height'of body in front:of oxredl 2.222 cccs cscccecciccics ne ceee ses cse venscecameses seeeeest eases 195
Height of body at posterior end of adipose and anal...-...--------- ----2. -2-- cece ee eee ee et ‘105
Height of body at beginning of caudal ...-........------ 2-222 eee eee eee ee eee eee eee V7
Ventrals under anterior third of dorsal.
Adipose fin over posterior end of anal.
Ventrals reach about one-half distance to vent.
Twenty-four scales in transverse series from origin of dorsal to lateral line.
One hundred and twenty-five scales in lateral line.
Color, silvery, gray on back, black spots obsolete.
This species is evidently a close ally of the Atlantic salmon, belonging to the
restricted subgenus Salmo; from Salmo salar it differs in the slightly larger mouth and
rather different coloration, and in very little else.
The names Salmo mykiss Walbaum, Salmo penshinensis Pallas, and Salmo purpura-
tus Pallas, belong to this species.
28. Salvelinus malma (Walbaum). Golet; ‘(Salmon trout.” (Plate XLIV.)
Everywhere very abundant in fresh-water streams and along the beaches. Pyra-
mid Creek, Captains Harbor, Unalaska, Nikolski, Bering Island, Karluk, Petro-
paulski.
In all these specimens the head is short (44 to 44 in length) as compared with
specimens from farther south (head, 32 to 32). The latter may be possibly recogni-
zable as a distinct subspecies, Salvelinus malma parkei (Suckley). We have not at
hand, however, sufficient material to determine this point.
The species is very common along the Aleutian Islands, as also on Bering Island,
where many specimens were seen. Specimens taken above the fall in Pyramid Creek,
a little tributary of Captains Harbor, Unalaska, are very small—not over 5 inches
long—and brightly colored. They are not otherwise different.
29. Salvelinus kundscha (Pallas). Kundseha. (Plate XLV.)
Kundscha, Krascheninnikof, Descr. Kamtch., 1745.
Salmo kundscha, Pallas, Iter. App., 706.
Salmo kundscha, Gmelin, Syst. Nat., 1788.
Salmo leucomaenis, Pallas, Zoogr. Rosso. Asiat., III, northern and eastern shores of Kamchatka.
Giinther Cat., VI, 145.—Brevoort, Narr. Exped. to China and Japan, 276, Pl. X, fig. 3.
Salvelinus leucomenis, Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 1896, XIX, 382.
Salmo curilus, Pallas, Zoogr. Rosso. Asiat., III, 251, 1811, Kurile Islands.
One specimen taken by Mr. Barrett-Hamilton at Petropaulski. It has also been
recorded by Dr. Bean as Salmo leucomenis, from Petropaulski, where it was taken by
Stejneger and Grebnitzki. This interesting species is well known in Kamchatka,
and its distinction from Salvelinus malma is very evident.
One specimen, about 14 inches long, collected at Petropaulski by Barrett-Hamilton
agrees with Bean’s description above cited, except in the longer head, which is con-
tained 47 times in length to base of caudal. We present a figure of this specimen.
.30. Cristivomer namaycush (Walbaum).
Recorded from the Yukon region.
\ THE FISHES OF BERING SEA. 439
Family THYMALLIDA.
31. Thymallus signifer Richardson.
Recorded by Dr. Bean from Nulato and St. Michael.
Family ARGENTINIDA.
32. Mallotus villosus (Miiller). Capelin.
Two females were taken at Captains Harbor, Unalaska, where it is common).
The young were very abundant around the island and were marked by their trans-
lucent body, pointed snout, and very long adipose fin. Great numbers were seen at
Sitka at the end of September running on the shore at high tide and dying there.
It is recorded by Dr. Bean from St. Michael, Cape Lisburne, Point Belcher, and
Plover Bay, and by Stejneger from Bering Island.
33. Thaleichthys pacificus Richardson. Eulachon; Candlefish.
Recorded from Nushagah River by Dr. Gilbert.
34, Osmerus albatrossis Jordan and Gilbert. Kadiak smelt: New species. (Plate XLVI.)
Length, 8 inches; head, 44 in length; depth, 53; dorsal rays, 2-10; anal, 1-20;
scales, 75; maxillary, 2; in head; eye, 54; snout, 34; mandible, 2; pectorals, 14;
ventrals, 12; dorsal, 12; base of anal as long as head; caudal, 12.
Body elongate, moderately compressed. Back elevated at nape, so that anterior
profile is somewhat depressed between and behind eyes. Interorbital space 32 of
head. Mouth large; lower jaw heavy, strongly projecting. Opercle with concentric
strie. Pectorals moderate. Ventrals long. Dorsal high. Anal fin low, very long;
its longest ray 22 in head. Caudal moderate, well forked. Ventrals inserted before
dorsal. Scales small, deciduous; those on back still smaller. Lateral line distinct.
Gill rakers long and slender, about 12 below angle of arch; longest about as long as
eye. Tongue with moderate teeth, the anterior two to four small hooked canines.
Upper jaw with small sharp teeth similar to those in lower jaw, none of them canine-
like. Small teeth on palatines and pterygoids. Vomer with two very small canines.
scarcely fang-like. Color bluish above with bright reflections. Scales margined with
dark points. Sides silvery with golden and coppery luster. Inside of’ gill openings
dusky. Fins white, somewhat dotted.
Two specimens caught in the upward haul of a dredge in Shelikof Straits, north
of Karluk, Kadiak Island, Alaska, Albatross station No. 3675. The depth of the
dredge haul was 109 fathoms, but these fishes were no doubt taken from near the
surface. One specimen is 8, the other about 7 inches in length.
The species is allied to Osmerus dentex, the rainbow smelt, but differs in the
extremely long anal and in the very weak vomerine and lingual canines.
35. Osmerus dentex Steindachner. Rainbow smelt.
One specimen from Petropaulski. Head, 42; depth, 4,%,; dorsal, 1, 10; anal, 1, 14;
lateral line, 68. It seems not to ditfer from Alaskan specimens.
It was also obtained at Petropaulski by Stejneger and Grebnitzki. It is found
on the east shore of Bering Sea from Bristol Bay northward.
Originally described from Decastris Bay. It has been recorded by Dr. Bean from
St. Michael and Port Clarence, and by Dr. Gilbert from Naknek and Nushagak
rivers, and in Bristol Bay.
440 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
36. Osm2rus thaleichthys Ayres.
Several young specimens from Nushagak River were referred to this species by
Dr. Gilbert. There is no other record of it from Alaska, and these northern examples
may prove distinct from the Californian species.
37. Mesopus olidus (Pallas).
Petropaulski Harbor, Shana Bay, Iturup Island. Alsorecorded from Petropaulski
by Stejneger.
The posterior insertion of the ventral fins has been exaggerated in this genus.
Instead of being below or posterior to the middle of the dorsal, we find it approxi-
mately under front of dorsal, varying from slightly in advance of this point in the
young to slightly behind in the adults.
Specimens from the two localities given above differ somewhat from each other in
length of dorsal and in scale formula. Those from Petropaulski have 65 to 67 scales,
and 9 or 10 developed rays in the dorsal; from Iturup Island, 57 to 60 scales, and 8 or
9 rays in the dorsal. We do not venture to separate the two lots on the basis of our
limited material, although the distinctive characters are constant in. about 20 speci-
mens of each. In M. oligodon Kner (=M. olidus) from Decastris Bay there are said
to be about 60 scales, but the figure of Kner shows 68. Representatives of this
species from St. Michael, Alaska, are reported as having 56 to 60 scales, thus agree-
ing with those from Iturup. In the former, however, the paired fins. appear to be
longer. M. pretiosus from southeastern Alaska and Puget Sound differs from M.,
olidus from Petropaulski no more than the latter do from Iturup or St: Michael
specimens here called M. olidus. It seems probable that we are dealing either with
one species or with three or four.
The generic name Mesopus was regularly proposed, the genus characterized, and
type specified on page 14, Proceedings Academy Natural Science, Philadelphia,
1862. On the following page, in a key to the genera, there appears in its place the
name Hypomesus. In the index to the volume the name Mesopus alone appears.
There is nothing in the article to indicate which of the names was the final choice of
the author. Even were that evident, we consider it safer to conform Series to the
law of priority without permitting any exceptions.
38. Leuroglossus stilbius Gilbert.
Recorded from near Unalaska in 351 to 406 fathoms.
39. Therobromus callorhini Lucas, new species. Seal fish. (Plate XLVII.)
Among the fishes obtained from the stomachs of fur seals by Messrs. Townsend
and Alexander were many examples of an undescribed isospondylous fish related to
the Argentinidx, although possibly representing a new family. For this species the
name Therobromus callorhini is proposed, from the fact that it is so extensively eaten by
the fur seal. Owing to the tenderness and small size of this fish, it is so quickly acted on
by the gastric juice that nothing but bones remained of the many hundred specimens
that were seen and while evidently common, it can be described only from the
skeleton. No example of Argentina being available it can only be said that Thero-
bromus differs from that genus in the shape and proportions of the component bones
of the jaw and gill covers, and that it finds its nearest relative in Mesopus, from
which it may be readily distinguished by its cranial characters as well as by the small
number of vertebrae, 26, 22 as against 32, 22.
THE FISHES OF BERING SEA. 441
The species may be diagnosed as follows: Chondrocranium well developed;
superior maxillary edentulous; pointed teeth on vomer and anterior portion of pala-
tines; lower jaw very deep; pointed teeth on dentary; articular well developed.
Vertebral formula 26 precaudals, 22 caudals, plus 1 hypural; last 4 precaudals with
short, wide hypapophyses; other hypapophyses long; neural spines of first.22 vertebre
double, remainder confluent; an epineural present and confluent with basal part of
neurapophysis on many of the anterior vertebra; short transverse processes, directed
downward from lower part of anterior vertebre. Vertebre simple; anterior but very
little shorter than the posterior; centra not sculptured, but bearing many fine longi-
tudinal ridges.
Total length of fish, 34 to 44 inches. The seal fish, as it may well be called, from
the large numbers eaten by the fur seal, has been found in the stomachs of seals taken
between latitude 54° 43’ N. to 55° 29’ N. and longitude 167° 41/ W. to 170° 53’ W.
Seals taken on August 20, in the vicinity of 55° 24’ N., 167° 49’ W., contained large
numbers of this little fish, and it was abundant September 1 to 15, in 55° 29’ N.,
170° 26’ W. A's these Toaalities lie outside the 100-fathom line, it wonld seem that
Therobromus inhabits the open sea, but swims near the surface. (F. A. Lucas.)
Details of structure are shown on Plate XLVII.
Explanation of abbreviations on plate showing details of structure.
ATtiacess Articular. Pop ..-.Preoperculum.
Den ....Dentary. Prfe scan Prefrontal.
Hy ...-- Hyoid. PT .....Post temporal.
HAym....Hyomandibular. Pif ....-Post frontal.
Top..--- Interoperculum. Pto..... Pterotic.
ME acsc< Maxillary. Qu ..--- Quadrate.
NGF seus Nasal SO ..... Supra-occipital.
Op ..--- Operculum. Vo ..... Vomer.
Pals coe Palatine.
Family MICROSTOMATID-.
40. Bathylagus borealis Gilbert.
From Bering Sea, north of Unalaska, Albatross station 3,027, in 322 fathoms.
Family MYCTOPHID€.
41. Nannobrachium leucopsarum (Eigenmann and Eigenmann).
Recorded by Dr. Gilbert from Bering Sea, near Unalaska, in 225 to 1,625 fathoms.
The original locality was the Cortez Banks, near San Diego.
42, Nannobrachium nannochir (Gilbert).
Found in the North Pacifie and Bering Sea in many localities in 313 to 1,625
fathoms. The original type came from the Santa Barbara Channel.
Family CHAULIODONTID 2.
43. Cyclothone microdon (Giinther).
One specimen from station 3634, off Bogoslof Island, in 664 fathoms. The species
is widely diffused through the North Atlantie and Pacific. Dr. Gilbert records it
from off the Pribilof Islands in 1,033 and 1,625 fathoms.
442 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Family PLAGYODONTID&.
44, Plagyodus zsculapius (Bean).
A specimen 44 feet long came ashore at Summer Harbor, Unalaska, August 29,
and was taken alive by James G. Blaine, United States Marshal at Unalaska, who
has presented it to the United States National Museum. Another specimen ran
ashore alive at Unalaska the preceding year. The species is said to be common in
that locality. The following 1s a description of the specimen when fresh:
Head, 64; depth, 13; D., 40; A., 16: V. L, 8; P., 13 or 14. Length of longest
dorsal ray, 54 in body; pectoral, 1,3; in head; ventral, 34 in head; longest ray of
anal, 24 in head; maxillary, 14; snout, 24; eye, 64.
Body not much compressed, the flesh somewhat pellucid and gelatinous, covered
with thin, smooth, mackerel-like skin. Lateral line beginning anteriorly above level
of eye, becoming straight at about two-thirds distance from its origin to ventral,
where it gradually rises to a high fleshy keel, black in color, and conspicuous nearly
all the way from the ventrals to caudal. Maxillary with many small teeth in an-
irregular series or narrow band; lower jaw laterally with 11 stout, saw-like teeth
turned backward, then with three much longer but similar teeth directed backward,
their length about half diameter of eye; a slender canine on each side at tip of lower
jaw; then about 8 short, slender, sharp teeth between these and the enlarged lateral
teeth already described. Front of vomer with three immense fixed canines as long
as eye, two close together in front, one behind them, all sharp, flat, and knife-shaped.
Palatines each with a stout compressed canine like those in side of lower jaw; then
five broad, close-set, saw-like teeth behind it. Opercles with strong striz which
radiate from the upper anterior corner; these not parallel with the strong subhori-
zontal striz of the subopercle. Lower jaw with striw which radiate from behind.
Eye very large, two sharp, low ridges above it; interorbital space broad and
smooth; gill rakers small, few, and sharp; pseudobranchiz present, a membrane
below them joining the first gill arch.
Pectorals long, the first ray broader than the following, strongly serrate on outer
edge; first ventral ray with a few distant serrations, mostly confined to basal portion.
Ventral fins small, few rayed, inserted at a distance behind the head nearly equal to
twice its length. Dorsal much lower than in a specimen from San Luis Obispo County,
Cal.,! the first ray serrulate inserted just behind gill opening; adipose fin high and
long, narrower at the base than above, inserted but little behind middle of anal.
Caudal unequal, slightly forked, the upper lobe the longer; caudal peduncle slender,
as thick as deep.
Color dusky gray, not silvery anywhere, but with metallic reflections. Fins and
lateral keel black; lower side of head whiter; some green shades in eye, and dull
blue luster on dorsal fin.
Family STERNOPTYCHIDA.
45. Sternoptyx diaphana Lowe.
Four fine specimens found by the schooner Allen floating at the surface off Kurile
Islands, said to have been with many others killed by the earthquakes. We can not
see that these differ from Atlantic specimens.
‘Notes on a specimen of Alepisaurus wsculapins Bean, from the coast of San Luis Obispo County,
Cal. Flora Hartley (Mrs. C. W. Greene), Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci., V, 1895, 49.
\
THE FISHES OF BERING SEA. 4438
Family DALLIIDA.
46. Dallia pectoralis Bean. Blackfish.
Common in the rivers and swamps of Alaska; recorded by Dr. Gilbert from
Nushagak River. Originally described from St. Michael.
Family SYNAPHOBRANCHIDA.
47. Histiobranchus bathybius (Giinther).
Recorded by Dr. Gilbert from station 3308 in Bering Sea, 1,625 fathoms.
Family NOTACANTHID.
48. Macdonaltiia challengeri (Vaillant).
One specimen dredged at station 3308, west of the Pribilof Islands, in 1,625
fathoms. The type from off Tokio.
Family AMMODYTIDZ-.
49. Ammodytes personatus Girard. (Ammodytes alascanus Cope.)
Numerous specimens were taken at Bering Island. In six specimens the lateral
folds count 146 to 159, the dorsal fin 60 to 64, the anal 30 or 31. The single specimen
obtained at Unalaska has 183 lateral folds, a number much larger than we have found
in any other individual.. _It agrees in this respect with the type of A. alascanus, but
probably represents merely extreme variation in this direction. In this specimen the
dorsal rays are 61, the anal 31. It does not differ except in number of lateral folds
from specimens obtained by the Aldatross at Makushin Bay, Unalaska, in. 1890. In
eight of these the folds range in number from 145 to 159. In three specimens the
dorsal varies from 61 to 63 and the anal from 30 to 32. Compared with specimens ,
from Puget Sound, the counts average slightly higher. In six individuals from the
Sound the dorsal has 58 or 59 rays, the anal 29 to 31. In one specimen the lateral
folds are but 136 in number, in the other five ranging from 144 to 158. In these counts
all of the folds are given, including the very short ones at the side of the nape.
Dr. Bean records the species from many localities from Kadiak to Plover Bay.
50. Rhynchias septipinnis (Pallas.)
This species, which would seem from the description to be an Ammodytes with
ventral fins, has not been seen since the original description. It is not certain what
it is nor to what family it belongs. It has been made by Professor Gill, the type of a
distinct genus, Rhynchias.
Family GASTEROSTEID-A.
51. Gasterosteus cataphractus (Pallas).
This species is distributed universally along all shores from Bering Sea south to
California. When strictly marine it exhibits little variation, but on becoming colo-
nized in fresh water it is subject to more or less important modifications, which are
mainly in the same direction, but occur in varying degrees in different localities.
Some of these colonies are strictly isolated and would receive recognition were it not that
they are extremely variable among themselves and that it seems impossible as yet to
444 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
devise a scheme which shall present at the same time their relations to the parent
form and to the limitless number of other colonies. We have them along the entire
range of typical marine G. cataphractus, where they seem to present an accompanying
series of variant fresh-water groups, which have been in the main independently
derived from the marine stock. The amount of divergence which they exhibit from
typical cataphractus is not geographically progressive. Thus we have in the present
collection, from a lake on Medni Island, specimens in which all of the lateral plates are
invariably present, though narrow and perfectly smooth, the modification being evident
in the reduction of the spines, the pubic plate, and the pectoral fins. On the neigh-
boring island, the fresh-water form develops but 8 plates or less. (See Bean, Proc.
U. S. Nat. Mus., 1896, 250.) In San Francisquito Creek at Palo Alto there is an
average of 6 plates; in San Gregorio Creek, but a few miles away, there is an average
of 20 plates, while other neighboring streams have fully plated specimens only. It
seems evident, therefore, that the partially plated form (“G. microcephalus”) does not
possess the characteristics of a subspecies, its divergence from the parent form not being
geographically progressive. Still less can we recognize it as a species, the fully plated
groups into which it passes being indistinguishable from G. cataphractus. Further
evidence of complete intergradation of fully plated, partially plated, and wholly
naked forms is found in a carefully prepared table by C. Rutter (Proc. Cal. Acad.
Sci., 1896, 248). The naked forms are confined to a few streams in southern Cali-
fornia, and may be designated Gasterosteus cataphractus williamsoni. A larger amount
of material and more detailed investigation may ultimately demonstrate the possibility
of recognizing among the fresh-water groups of stickle-backs subspecies coextensive
in range with the fresh-water faunal areas in which they occur, but this does not seem
probable. An apparently similar condition is presented by G. bispinosus of the North
Atlantic coast of America and G. aculeatus of northern Europe. The characters alleged
to separate these species from each other and from G. cataphractus can not be con-
sidered satisfactory. It seems probable that all will be ultimately nnited under one
specific name.
Specimens in the present collection are from Tareinsky, Kamchatka (collected by
Mr. Barrett-Hamilton); Nikolski, Bering Island; the Lagoon, St. Paul Island; Sum-
mer Harbor, Unalaska; Freshwater Lake, Medni Island.
Among all the collections we note here as elsewhere the great preponderance of
females over males. The males can be distinguished at sight by the larger head and
longer pectorals. As already noted, the marine specimens exhibit little variation.
We note, however, that those from the Kamchatka coast, Bering and St. Paul islands,
as compared with those from southeastern Alaska and Puget Sound, exhibit slightly
longer heads, longer pectoral fins, deeper sculpturing on the head, and much rougher
spination of the plates, which are also deeper. In this they agree with specimens
which we have examined from Alaskan coast near Bering Straits. Unalaska speci-
mens agree, however, with the southern form.
52. Pygosteus pungitius (Linnus).
Petropaulski Harbor, fresh-water lake near Tareinsky Bay. In.the specimens
from Petropaulski the ventral spines average shorter than in those from the lake,
being contained 2% to 3 times in the head in the former, 24 to 22 in the latter. The
pubic bone varies greatly in length and in relative width. It is evident that neither
THE FISHES OF BERING SEA. 445
bone nor spines are available for subspecific distinction, and the form brachypoda
should be no longer recognized.
Family BERYCIDA.
53. Plectromus lugubris (Gilbert).
One specimen taken from station 3327, north of Unalaska, in 322 fathoms.
Family SCORPAENIDA.
54. Sebastolobus alascanus Bean.
Common in deep waters, 106 to 786 fathoms, from Monterey to Unalaska and
Unimak.
55. Sebastolodus altivelis Gilbert.
With the preceding; the type taken south of the peninsula of Alaska in 625
fathoms.
56. Sebastodes introniger Gilbert.
Numerous specimens in 85 to 350 fathoms, recorded by Dr. Gilbert, from’ about
Unalaska.
57. Sebastodes alutus Gilbert.
Numerous specimens taken in 38 to 350 fathoms, recorded by Dr. Gilbert, from
the waters about Unalaska, Unimak, and Bristol Bay. -
58. Sebastodes aleutianus! Jordan and Evermannu. New species. (Plate XLVIII.)
Perca variabilis, Pallas, Zoogr. Rosso-Asiat., II, 241, 1811. Aleutian Islands; in part, the sup-
posed adult specimen. No. 8145, Berlin Mus.
Sebastichthys matzubarea, Jordan, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1883, 291. Jordan, Cat. Fish. N. A.,
1885, 108. Probably not Sebastes matzubare, Hilgendorf, Sitzungsb. Ges. Naturf. Freunde,
Berlin, 1880, 170.
Head, 22; depth, 3; D., XIII, 18; A., III, 8; scales, 55. Gillrakers, 4 by 20; maxil-.
lary, 2.1 in head; eye, 4; snout, 4; interorbital space, 4; pectoral, 13; ventral, 1%;
third dorsal spine, 33; soft dorsal rays, 24; second anal spine, 33; soft anal rays, 2;
caudal, 1.9; longest gill raker, 4 eye.
Body rather deep, back arched, the anterior profile stiff and nearly straight, the
top of head broad and flattish. Interorbital space very broad, with a frontal ridge on
each side halfway between the median line and the orbital rim, on either side of which
the surface is somewhat concave, most concave along median line. Nasal spine sharp.
Preocular spine short and sharp. Supraocular ridge low, its spine inconspicuous but
present; postocular similar, but larger; tympanic similar, but still larger. Frontal
ridge ou either side naked, without spine, but with a short, sharp coronal spine behind
it and continuous with it under the scales. Occipital midge sharp, ending in a low
spine and sometimes one or two spines on its surface, a low cross-furrow separating
it from the short, sharp nuchal spine. A sharp spine on the orbital rim under the eye
1A related species, Sebastodes caurinus, was described by Richardson from specimens taken at
Sitka. It had been since Richardson’s time uncertain for which species this description was intended.
On our return from Bering Sea in 1896 considerable collections were made by the revenue cutter Rush,
under our direction, at Sitka, and Richardson’s species was found in abundance. Fortunately it is the
same one for which we had in 1880 adopted provisionally the name caurinus.
We present herewith (Plate XLIX) a figure of a specimen taken just south of the village of
Sitka, the original locality of Richardson’s collection.
446 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
on base of the suborbital stay, three others on the orbital rim before it, and three on
the edge of the preorbital. Post-temporal with two or three spinous points, a sharp
spine on the postero-temporal and a tlat one on humerus. Opercle with two strong
spines diverging, each forming a ridge on the bone. Two spines at junction of sub-
opercle and interopercle. Preopercle with five radiating spines, the second longest,
34 ineye. Space between occipital spines nearly flat. Posterior nostril twice as large
as anterior. Lower jaw with four large mucous pores on each side. Scales rather
large, rough-ctenoid, deciduous. Rough scales on middle of maxillary and on almost
the whole surface of lower jaw. Tip of lower jaw somewhat projecting, the symphysis
thickened. Dorsal spines low, slender. Soft dorsal higher. Second anal spine some-
what shorter than third, the soft rays high. Pectoral rather long, not quite reaching
vent, but beyond tips of ventrals. Caudal slightly lunate. Color, plain uniform brick-
red, the edge of dorsal, anal, caudal, and ventral blackish. Pectoral without dusky
Sebastodes aleutianus (type), Karluk.
shade. Traces of three dusky shades across cheeks and opercles. Inside of mouth
and gill opening coppery red. Peritoneum silvery.
The species is here described from four specimens dredged by the Albatross on
July 20, 1897, in Shelikof Strait, off Kadiak, Alaska, in 120 fathoms. They are from
14 to 24 feet in length.
The species is nearest Sebastodes miniatus, but is well separated from all the other
American species by the increased number of cranial spines. It needs comparison
only with Sebastodes matzubare (Hilgendorf), a Japanese species described from Yeso,
not known to us. It is evident that this is the red species wrongly identified by
Pallas as the adult of his Perca variabilis, the type of the latter being the Hpinephelus
ciliatus of Tilesius. One of Pallas’s specimens from the Aleutian Islands has been
examined by Dr. Jordan and described under the probably erroneous name of Sebast-
ichthys matzubare.
Specimens probably of this species have been taken in stomachs of four seals in
THE FISHES OF BERING SEA. 447
in the Gulf of Alaska. It-is said that specimens are occasionally taken with Sebas-
‘todes ciliatus in the salmon nets about Karluk, on Kadiak Island.
59. Sebastodes ciliatus (Tilesius).
The only specimens now known in collections are from Kadiak, where it is-
reported to be abundant. ,
60. Sebastodes taczanowskii (Steindachner).
One specimen, 16 cm. long, from Shana Bay, Iturup Island (one of the Kuriles).
Our specimen agrees well with Steindachner’s description of the types which came
from northern Japan.
Color warm brown above and on sides, paler brown below; obscure shadings of
darker brown on upper part of sides; many scales with basil or central area darker.
Opercles with a dusky shade; no dark streaks on head. Fins brown, all except the
pectorals, and caudal becoming distinctly black on distal portion. Lining of buccal
and gill cavities white, but with a narrow dark streak'along each side of floor of
mouth anteriorly. Peritoneum brownish-black, uniformly and densely pigmented.
Crown and occiput evenly convex, without spines or ridges. Nasal spines low
and strong. A rather wide low preocular ridge, ending in a strong depressed spine.
Supraocular ridge nearly obsolete, without spine, its posterior portion evenly scaled
over. Preorbital sinuate anteriorly, without spines. Preopercular spines short and
strong, flattened, the second and third the largest, directed backward, the fifth repre-
sented by a slightly projecting lobe. Opercular.spines similar to those on preopercle,
the lower the largest. Gill rakers long and slender, 10 + 27, the longest half the
orbital diameter. ;
Head, 31 in length; depth, 2,,. Least depth caudal peduncle, 3} in head. Eye,
34 in head; interorbital space, 44; snout, 4; maxillary, 2. D., XII, 1,14; A., III, 7.
Peectorals with 16 rays, of which the lower 7 are simple. Forty-five pores in the
lateral line.
Spinous dorsal low, with evenly rounded contour, the fourth, fifth, and sixth
spines equal, twice the twelfth, 24 in head. Longest soft ray of dorsal, py in head.
Second anal spine longer and much stronger than third, 2 in head. Caudal slightly
emarginate. Pectorals reaching beyond vent, 32 in length. Ventrals slightly over-
lapping the vent, equaling distance from tip of snout to upper end of preopercle.
Scales strongly ctenoid, except on cheeks, breast, and fins. Top of head scaled
forward to naSal spines. Cheeks, opercles, and preorbitals wholly invested, except the
anterior extremity of the latter. Maxillary and mandible with partially embedded
cycloid scales. Branchiostegal rays naked, or partially invested. Scales on breast
and prepectoral area excessively small. Many small accessory scales on back and
sides. Basal half to three-fourths of vertical fins densely scaled. Series of fine
scales follow pectoral and ventral rays nearly to their tips.
61. Sebastodes glaucus (Hilgendorf).
One specimen, 49 cm. long, from Bering Island. Originally described from Yeso.
The identitication is made with some doubt, owing to lack of any detailed descrip-
tion of the type, a dried. specimen from Yeso, and to some minor discrepancies
between the two. Our specimen has 56 (not 49) tubes in the lateral line, the nasal
spine is small, but not properly to be called rudimentary, the dorsal notch seems some-
what deeper, and the second anal spine somewhat shorter. Following is a detailed
description of our specimen:
Crown and occiput very broad, more convexly arched than in any other species
448 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
known tous. Nasal spines low, butstrong. Ocular ridge low, evident only above front
of eye. Occipital ridges barely evident, evenly scaled over. Top of head otherwise
without spines, ridges, or furrows, the even convex curve unbroken. Vertical distance
from middle of interorbital space to upper edge of orbit equaling half vertical diam-
eter of orbit. Anterior margin of preorbital with two rounded lobes which do not
bear spinous points. Preopercular spines very strong, the upper two closely approxi-
mate, the others widely separated. All the spines are sharp pointed, the uppermost
very wide at base, the second much narrower, the others short and wide. Upper two
spines directed backward, the three lower downward and backward. Opercular
spines strong, flat, often bifid or trifid. Spines on adjacent angles of subopercle and
interopercle sometimes bifid; behind these on margin of subopercle a few short spinous
points. Gill rakers very long and slender, 11+29 in number, the anterior one or two
of lower arch tubercular; the longest (22 mm.) more than two-thirds diameter of orbit.
Mandible very heavy, the symphysis not produced, the two jaws subequal. Vomerine
and palatine patches of teeth extremely narrow.
-Head, 34 in length; depth, 23. Eye, 42 in head, 1} in snout. Interorbital width,
32 in head. D., XIV,16; A., ITI, 8. Lateral line with 56 pores, Highest dorsal
spine, 24 in head; thirteenth spine, 42; fourteenth spine, 33; second anal spine, 34;
third anal spine, 31; longest soft ray of dorsal, 1,%.
Fins high, the third to seventh dorsal spines subequal. Caudal very slightly
emarginate. Anal spines graduated. Pectorals scarcely reaching vertical from vent,
the lower 9 simple, the 10 upper forked. Ventral not reaching vent, two-thirds length
of head. Caudal scaled to tip on membranes and rays. Soft dorsal and anal with
narrow bands of scales following the rays to or nearly to their tips, the membranes of
the first three or four rays in each fin wholly scaled on basal third. Spinous dorsal
naked. Pectorals scaled on basal half; ventrals naked. Of the head, the maxillary
and mandible, the branchiostegal rays, the anterior and upper half of interopercle and
all of preorbital except a minute area along its posterior margin are naked. The
body is covered with small weakly ctenoid scales, largely covered over by the extra-
ordinarily developed accessory scales. Scales on breast, belly, and prepectoral area
smooth. The naked skin covering bores of head is minutely wrinkled or pappilose.
Color in spirits light brownish on body and fins, with darker shades on lips, gill
membranes, opercles, and top of head. It may have been reddish in life. Mouth and
gill cavity white. Peritoneum jet black.
We prefer at present not to separate this species from Sebastodes on the strength
of the increased number of dorsal spines.
Family HEXAGRAMMID€.
62. Hexagrammos stelleri Tilesius.
Hexagrammos asper (Steller) Tilesius, Act. Acad. Petrop. II, 340, 1810.
Labrax heragrammus Pallas, Zoogr. Rosso-Asiat. III, 284, 1811.
Chiropsis nebulosus Girard, U.S. Pac. R. R. Surv., Fishes, 45.
Chirus trigrammus Cope, Proc. Amer. Philos. Soc., Phila., 1873, 29.
Hexagrammos hexragrammus Jordan and Evermann, Checklist, 434.
Two specimens from Petropaulski; several specimens from Unalaska and Karluk.
This species seems much less abundant along the shores of Bering Sea than H. octo-
grammus (ordinatus). The Petropaulski specimens give the following data: Dorsal
XXII, 21; XXIII, 20; anal 23,24; pectoral, 20. Cheeks scaled above and behind the
suborbital stay, uaked in front of and including the stay, except for a small patch of
i
THE FISHES OF BERING SEA. 449
scales immediately below the stay, present in one specimen. Interopercle, subopercle,
and opercle naked, except for a small patch of scales on upper part of the latter.
Upper lateral line ending under second or fourth spine in one specimen, under tenth
or twelfth spine in the other. The fourth extends barely to base of ventrals in one
Specimen, to opposite end of basal fifth of ventrals in the other. There are 7, 8, or 9
scales in an oblique series between second and third lines, counted near middle of
body. The lowermost line forks at a point slightly nearer base than tip of ventrals,
its distance from ventrals less than half its distance from vent. Ventrals pointed,
extending beyond pectorals and more than halfway to front of anal. The caudal fin
is strongly emarginate when closed, becoming truncate when spread. It is scaled on
basal half only. Color as usual in the species, the light spots on sides numerous,
about as large as pupil. Fins bright reddish or orange, especially on basal half.
Dr. Bean records this species from Kadiak, Unalaska, Atka, St. Michael, and
Port Clarence, and Stejneger found it on Bering Island and at Petropaulski.
63. Hexagrammos octogrammus (Pallas). (Plate L.)
Chirus ordinatus Cope, Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., Phila., 1873, 28.
The commonest shore form of the genus in Bering Sea. Specimens were taken at
Unalaska, Petropaulski, Robben Island, and Iturup Island. Dr. Bean records it from
Unalaska, aud Dr. Stejneger found it on Bering Island and at Petropaulski.
This species is currently known as 4H. ordinatus. We make the identification
with octogrammus for the following reasons: (a) It occurs abundantly at the type
locality for octogrammus, and so closely resembles H. asper as to often require close
scrutiny to separate the two species. According to Pallas, octogrammus and asper are
not considered distinct by the natives and were even confounded by Steller. (b) Octo-
grammus is said to be abundant throughout the Kamchatkan region and the Aleutian
Islands. Yet, if not ordinatus, it is not to be identified with any known species, and
must have escaped the notice of all recent collectors. (c) Octogrammus is described
as having 19 dorsal spines and 24 anal rays. This is the usual formula for ordinatus,
while no other species is known to have as few as 19 spines The only important ele-
ment in the description of octogrammus which fails to apply to ordinatus is the squa-
mation of the cheeks. Octogrammus is said to have the subocular lamella minutely
scaled, while in all species except H. decagrammus the suborbital ring as well as the
suborbital scale are scaleless, The present species shows some variation in the
squamation of the opercles. The lower portion of subopercle is usually naked in our
specimens, but is in some of them completely scaled. There may be exceptionally a
few scales on adjacent edge of interopercle. We append fin counts in 14 specimens:
Dorsal. | Anal. | Pee Locality.
XIX, 22 23 18 eine Bay, Iturup Island.
0.
XIX, 23 24 19 Do,
XIX, 23 24 19 Do
XIX, 23 4 20 Do.
XIX, 28 25 19 Do.
XX, 22 24 19 Do.
"93 24 19 Do. .
XIX, 28 24 18 | Petropaulski.
XIX, 24 24 18 0.
XIX, 24 4 19 Do.
XIX, 24 25 18 Do.
XX, 23 23 18 Do,
XX, 23 23 20 Do.
5947—pr 3-29
450 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
64. Hexagrammos lagocephalus (Pallas). (Plates LI, LII.)
Hexagrammus decagrammus Bean and Bean, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., 1896, 383 (Petropaulski); not
of Pallas.
Numerous specimens from Robben Island, one specimen each from Bering and
Iturup islands. It is not yet known from the American coasts. It is recorded by
Bean and Bean from Petropaulski under the erroneous name of H. decagrammus.,
Young specimens up to 20 cm. in length have the scales all rough ctenoid, as in H.
asper and H. octogrammus. Specimens 30 cm. long have most of the scales smooth, a
few along middle of sides still ctenoid. In an adult 54 cm. long all the scales are
smooth, those on head and nape partially imbedded.
In shape and general appearance this species much resembles H. octogrammus.
It has a deep caudal peduncle, a convexly rounded caudal fin, and a rather bluntly
rounded snout.
Head, 32 to 4in length; depth, 32 to 32. D., XX to XXII, 22 to 24; A., 22 to 24;
P., 20 to 21. Outer row of teeth enlarged in both upper and lower jaws. Teeth on
vomer and front of palatines. Maxillary extending to below middle of eye in adults,
24 in head (24 in young). A small flap above eye, fringed along the margin. No
tentacles on nape. Fins high, the spinous dorsal deeply notched, the last spine
somewhat longer than the one preceding. In the adult the fifth spine is the longest,
nearly half length of head, the third and fourth spines nearly equal to the fifth.
From the fifth the spines gradually diminish in height to near the end of the fin,
when they become rapidly shortened to form the notch.
Caudal very broad at base, convex at its posterior margin even when the fin is
closed. Pectorals broadly rounded, rather short, the longest rays 14 to 14 in head,
not nearly reaching vertical from vent. Ventral fins 13 to 2 in head, short and rounded
in the young, becoming longer and more pointed in adults. The pectoral and ventral
rays are very broad, especially toward their tips, and are much branched. The soft
rays of dorsal and anal fins are cleft on terminal fifth, as in other species, the two
halves not diverging.
There are five lateral lines on each side, as usual, two dorsal, a median, and two
ventral. The upper dorsal line is continued to hevond middle of second dorsal fin,
usually ending under the fourteenth or sixteenth rays. The lower dorsal line and the
median line are extended to base of caudal. The upper ventral line originates below
and in front of the pectoral fin, passes immediately above base of ventral, to which it
does not send a separate branch, and terminates opposite middle of anal fin. The
lower ventral line is single on breast, forks in advance of middle of ventral fins, the
branches passing to base of caudal.
In the young the scales are all ctenoid except those in mid-ventral region, breast,
prepectoral area, and sides of head. The snout, subocular ring, suborbital stay,
interopercle, and usually the lowermost portion of subopercle,'scaleless. Basal half
or more of caudal, and basal third of soft dorsal, with the membrane densely scaled.
Pectoral basis dik densely sealed. Scales on br pact not greatly reduced; more than
half as large as those on middle of sides. Median lateral line with 110 pores. Hight
or 9 scales in an oblique series between median line and the one above it.
Color in most of our specimens a nearly uniform warm brown, lighter on under
parts, marked only with irregular, small, black spots and lines, which may extend on
the dorsal and pectoral fins. The anals and ventrals are black, the thickened tips of
THE FISHES OF BERING SEA. “ABI
the rays in these and the pectoral fins often white. A large, blackish humeral spot
in young specimens, often disappearing in adults. One spevimen (Iturup Island) has
the upper parts, including dorsal and caudal fins, bright reddish, with some dusky
blotches and cloudings, the humeral spot conspicuous. The fin rays are as follows in
12 specimens: .
Peo Pec-
Dorsal. Anal. toral. Dorsal. Anal. toral
KX, 24 22 21 XXII, 23 23 21
XXI, 23 23 20 XXII, 23 23 21
XXII, 22 22 21 XXII, 23 23 21
XXII, 23 22 21 XXII, 23 24 21
XXII, 23 23 20 XXII, 24 23 21
XXII, 23 23 21 XXII, 23 23 21
For convenience we append a short diagnosis of each of the known species of
Hexagrammos. -It will be noted that all of these, except H. otakii, were known to
Pallas. H. otakii has also been long known to collectors, though but recently distin-
guished from H., stelleri (H. hewagrammus). It seems probable that all existing species
of Hexagrammos are now known to us, ‘There are uniformly five lateral lines on each
side in all species of Hexagrammos. The second, third, and fifth lines are complete in
all, while the first and fourth are variously developed, and offer valuable specific
characters.
a, Cheeks and opercles fully invested with cycloid scales, including the area overlying suborbital
stay; snout, jaws, preorbital, interopercle, and adjacent portion of preopercle
scaleless. Breast and prepectoral area with cycloid scales much less than half
the size of those on sides; scales elsewhere ctenoid. Ten or 11 scales in an
oblique series between lateral line and the one above it. Upper line of pores
extending to or beyond middle of soft dorsal, the fourth line unbranched,
extending to opposite middle of anal; lower line branching usually behind
middle of ventrals. Membranes of soft dorsal and caudal densely scaled for more
than half height of fin. Two pairs of cutaneoas flaps on head, the usual sipraoc-
ular pair, less than half diameter of pupil, and a much smaller occipital pair
which is present in no other species. Dorsal deeply notched. Caudal emargi-
nate when closed, slightly convex when widely spread. Adults brightly colored,
the males with large sky-blue spots, the females with smaller red or orange
spots. Young sometimes plain brown, with dark plain humeral spot. D., XXI,
24; A., 24. Sitka,’ to Monterey. ........-.---...---.--.+---- H. DECAGRAMMUS.
aa. Cheeks not fully scaled, the area, at least, overlying suborbital stay naked. No flap on occiput.
b. Fourth line of pores short, forking in advance of base of ventrals, the lower branch running to
base of ventral] fin, where it ends, the upper branch usually short, ending oppo-
site middle of ventrals, rarely longer. Second line reaching middle of second
dorsal. Scales very roughly ctenoid, except on breast, prepectoral region, and
sides of head. Seven or 8 scales in an oblique series between third lateral line
and the one above it. Lower line forked in front of middle of ventral fin. Caudal
densely covered with comparatively large scales to behind middle of fin, the scales
in single series except on middle rays. Supraorbital flap large, coarsely fringed,
equaling or exceeding vertical diameter of eye. Eye very small, 5} in head in
adults. Caudal peduncle deep, its depth greater than length of snout, the caudal
fin very broud, rounded behind, even when the fin is closed. Dorsals deeply
notched. Adults usually deep brown, with blackish mottlings and more or less
distinct traces of radiating streaks around the eye, and around dusky humeral
1Recorded by Dr. Bean from Unalaska; but this vecord needs verification. It is abundant at Sitka, both the large-
spotted (maculoseriatus) and small-spotted females (guttatus) being present, but no males (constellatus) were seen.
452
THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
spot. Younger specimens are often lighter, resembling Z. stelleri, with small silvery
spots on sides and reddish fins, often showing very conspicuously 7 V-shaped or
quadrate blackish blotches at base of dorsal fin, and 5 black radii diverging from
eye. The anal fin is usually black in adults, but often shows oblique cross bands
in the young. D., XIX or XX, 22 to 24; A., 22 to 25. Kurile Islands to Unalaska
idhiaieendadiGuece detect nesses eee teERed seeeeeceneeeeeeeee- H, OCTOGRAMMUS.
bb. Fourth line of pores simple, long, passing close to ventral fin.
c. Cheeks and opercles largely naked, a patch of scales on upper portions of cheeks and oper-
cles, and a small patch sometimes present on middle of cheeks. First and fourth
lateral lines very short, variable, the first rarely extending beyond middle of spin-
ous dorsal, the fourth to middle of ventrals, rarely beyond. Lower line forked in
front of middle of ventrals. Caudal fin narrow, emarginate when closed, less
densely scaled than in other species, the scales large, in single series. Commonly 9
scales in an oblique series between third lateral line and the one above it. Seales
on sides of head, breast, prepectoral area smooth, elsewhere strongly ctenoid.
Dorsal fins less deeply notched. Caudal peduncle narrow, the depth less than
length of snout. Supraocular flap small, shorter than diameter of pupil. Color
in varying shades of gray and brown or light reddish, blotched, marbled or barred
with dusky and usually with numerous round silvery spota nearly as large as
pupil. In brightly marked specimens there is a series of quadrate dusky blotches
along base of dorsal fin, continued on base of fin, much as in H. octogrammus.
Like the latter there are radiating dark streaks around the eye, of which the two
anterior are the most conspicuous and permanent. No humeral spot. D., XXIII
(XXII to XXIV), 19 to 21; A.,23 or 24. Size small. Kamchatka to Puget
SOUN A yace.cio. sip. ciais Seis adie wiomseiees Sbunieinie Sime Sisie ete ease a teie Bet ies oie H. STELLERI.
ec. Cheeks and opercles largely scaled; the subocular ring, the region overlying the suborbi-
tal stay, and the interopercle alone naked.
d. Supraorbital flap long and slender, densely fringed, its length about equaling vertical
diameter of orbit. Scales most cycloid, a band of ctenvid scales often present on
post-axillary region. A small patch of teeth often present on front of palatines.
First and fourth lateral lines long, usually reaching beyond the middle of soft dor-
saland anal. Caudal very broad, rounded posteriorly, even when fin is closed; the
membranes covered basally with small scales, those on median membranes in sev-
eralseries. Dorsals very deeply notched. Eight ornine scales in an oblique series
between second and third rows of pores. Colors usually bright, but varying
through green, brown, and bright red, usually dark green with large round red
spots, but extremely varixble and sometimes finely mottled. D., XX, 23; A., 22.
Bering Island (Bean) to Monterey -....-.--..---------.------ H. supPErciiosvs. '
dd Supraorbital flap small, little if at all longer than diameter of pupil.
e Caudal very broad, the posterior margin convex even in closed fin. Scales of
moderate size, those on breast more than half as large as those on sides of body.
Scales all strongly ctenoid in the young, except on breast, prepectoral region,
and sides of head, all becoming smooth in adults, First and fourth lines long,
extending beyond middle of dorsal and anal. Fifth line forking in front of middle
of ventrals. ight or 9 scales in an oblique series between second and third rows
of pores. Eye small, less than one-fifth length of head in a specimen 23 cm. long.
Pectoral and ventral rays wide, appearing dilated at tip, concealed in very thick
fin membranes. Ventrals short and broad in the young, not pointed. Color, plain
brown or reddish, with dusky mottlings on dorsal region; a large round humeral
spot. Fins not conspicuously marked. D., XXII (XX to XXIII), 22 to 24; A., 22
to 24. Size large. Kurile Islands to Bering Island.......... H. LAGOCEPHALUS.
ee Caudal narrower, the posterior edge emarginate when fin is closed. Scales smaller
than in any other species, those on sides of head and breast minute, nearly uniform,
less than one-fourth the size of those on sides of body. Eleven or 12 scales in an
oblique series between second and third lines. Scales on mid-ventral region,
breast, prepectoral area, and sides of head smooth, all others strongly ctenoid
throughout life. First lateral line extending beyond middle of second dorsal.
THE FISHES OF BERING SEA. 453
Fourth line short, not reaching tips of ventrals. Fifth line forking behind middle
of ventrals. Eye large, 44 in head. Supraorbital tentacle very small. Anterior
teeth in jaws much enlarged, canine-like. Palatines toothless. Fin membranes
thin. Dorsals low, less deeply notched than usual. Color brown, blotched and
barred with darker, many of the scales each with a silvery spot. No radiating
; streaks abouteye. Black blotches on dorsal fin corresponding toa similar number
on back along base of dorsal. D., XX, 23; A.,21. Size small. Known only from
TOKIO, JAPAM.« = oa ce se ao. cecetcde enesincewasinne see meceancs aeaperecsvae H. OTAKITY
65. Hexagrammos superciliosus (Pallas).
Seen by Dr. Jordan at Captains Harbor, Unalaska, where it is abundant.
Recorded by Dr. Bean from Kadiak, Unalaska, and Attu; by Dr. Gilbert from
Unalaska, Makushin, and Chernofski harbors, and by Stejueger from Bering Island.
Hexagrammos scaber Bean from Amchitka and Unalaska is evidently the young of
Hexagrammos superciliosus. We have examined the types.
66. Pleurogrammus monopterygius (Pallas). Atka fish.
Obtained by us at St. Paul, where it is rare. It is common about Atka and Attu,
and it is said to be occasionally taken as far east as Belkofski. Recorded by Dr. Bean,
from Unalaska and Attu. Taken by Stejneger at Saranskaya, Bering Island.
Family COTTIDA.
67. Ulca marmorata (Bean).
Recorded by Dr. Gilbert from about Unalaska; by Dr. Bean from Sitkalidak
Island (near Kadiak).
68. Hemitropterus cavifrons Lockington.
Recorded from Kadiak.
69. Icelus spiniger Gilbert.
Stations 3643 and 3644, off Povorotnaya, Kamehatka, in 100 and 96 fathoms, '
Originally described from Bristol Bay and about Unalaska.
Females of this species seem more spinous than males. The spines on supra-
orbital ridge are higher, the suborbital stay is frequently provided with two low
spinous points, and the top and sides of head as well as the bases of the dorsal series
of spinous plates may be thickly beset with small prickles.
70. Icelus bicornis (Reinhardt).
Recorded from Bristol Bay and stations to the westward, as well as from Green-
land and the North Atlantic, if the Pacific species is the same, which is doubtful.
71. Icelus canaliculatus Gilbert.
Described from near Unalaska.
72. Icelus vicinalis Gilbert.
Described from Bristol Bay.
73. Icelus euryops Bean.
Described from Trinity Islands.
!The synonomy of H. otakii is as follows:
Hexagrammus otakii Jordan and Starks, Proc. Cal. Acad. Sei. 1895, 800.
Labrax hexagrammus Temminck and Schlegel, Fauna Japonica, 1847, p. 53, Pl. XXIII; not of Pallas.
Chirus hexagrammus Giinther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus., II, 91 (in part).
Hexagrammus asper Steindachner, Beitr. Fische Japans, IV, 10; not of Steller.
454 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
74, Rastrinus scutiger (Bean).
Trinity Islands and westward, south of the Alaskan Peninsula.
75. Icelinus borealis Gilbert.
Described from about Unalaska and from Bristol Bay in deep water, with species
of Icelus, ete.
76. Artediellus pacificus Gilbert.
Very common. Stations 3637, 3638, and 3639, off St. Paul Island, in 32, 34, and
27 fathoms; 3643 and 3644, off Povorotnaya, Kamchatka, 100 and 96 fathoms; 3647
and 3648, off Robben Island, in 20 fathoms; station 3674, off Karluk, in 31 fathoms.
Recorded by Dr. Gilbert from Bristol Bay and about Sannak and Unalaska.
Some of these specimens are in better state of preservation and show the head
with more pores than could be made out in the types. The top of head is thickly
studded with these pores, three or four of which are iu the interorbital space. A
series of very wide slits along under surface of mandible, continued to base of preop-
ercular spine. The wide slits along edge of preorbital and on cheeks are usually six
in number.
!
ARCHISTES Jordan and Gilbert. New genus.
Head and body compressed. Lateral line armed with a series of spinous plates;
a series of smaller similar plates along base of dorsal, widening anteriorly so as to fill
the space between dorsal and lateral line, but not extending around front of dorsal to
connect with band on the other side. Head naked. Gill membranes broadly united,
free from the isthmus. No slit or pore behind last gill. No spines above eye or on
vertex. A single gently curved preopercular spine, not forked, and without cusps or
processes. A large fringed supraorbital flap; smaller flaps and cirri on occiput, sides
_of head, and along lateral line. Teeth on jaws, vomer, and palatines. Dorsals con-
tinuous, notched between spinous and soft portions. Ventrals I, 3, without setze.
Vent far forward, immediately behind base of ventral fins; male with a long anal
papilla.
77. Archistes plumarius Jordan and Gilbert. New species. (Plate LIII.)
A single specimen, 72 mm. long, from Ushishir Island, one of the Kurils.
Head, 33 in length; depth, 4. Dorsal, X, 23; anal, 18; pectoral, 15 or16. Anterior
portion of head compressed and narrow, with vertical sides, the width at angle of
mouth little greater than diameter of orbit. From the ocular region the head widens
rapidly backward and downward to preopercular spine, leaving the occiput narrow.
The greatest width of head and body is near preopercular spine, and is slightly less
than depth of head at occiput. The body is compressed, everywhere much deeper
than wide.
Mouth slightly oblique, maxillary reaching slightly beyond vertical from front of
pupil, 3} in head. Hye, 34 in head. Jaws and vomer with rather wide bands of
uniform fine teeth; a small patch on front of palatines. Nasal spines strong, fixed.
Preopercular spine strong, simple, directed upward and backward, gently curved.
Preopercular margin without further spines or prominences. Opercle thin, without
rib or spine. Supraocular rim elevated, projecting above profile of head. Interor-
bital space narrow, deeply channeled, the sides sloping convexly. Occiput depressed
behind the eyes and transversely rounded, rendering the profile somewhat concave.
THE FISHES OF BERING SEA, 455
Posteriorly the occiput rises and is laterally angulated, and is somewhat quadrate, there-
fore, in cross section. The vertex is without ridges or spines. Supraocular flap as long
as eye, lanceolate iu form, coarsely fringed along the margins. A pair of broad, deeply
cleft flaps near middle of occiput, and a second pair at posterior edge of occiput..:
A long nasal cirrus, a series of short filaments along margin of preopercle, one on
suborbital stay, one near tip of maxillary, a cleft filament near opercular angle, and
a series of four filaments along middle of lateral line. Anterior nostrils in a short
tube. Gill membranes widely joined across the throat, entirely free from isthmus.
Lateral line rising in a high convex curve anteriorly, the curved and straight
portions equal. Along its course is a series of 44 plates, with the upper edge free
and spinous. They are large along the curved portion of the line, but diminish
rapidly in size posteriorly, the free edge becoming smooth or nearly so. A series of
much smaller but similar plates lies along base of dorsal, extending halfway along
back of caudal peduncle, widening under anterior half of spinous dorsal to form a
band which nearly fills the space between dorsal and lateral line: Skin otherwise
entirely naked. ,
Dorsal beginning a pupil’s diameter behind occiput. Spines very slender, the
anterior ones highest, each crowned with a membranous flap, which is digitately cleft.
The third spine is the longest, half length of head; the last spine about two-fifths the
the third and one-half the succeeding short ray. Pectoral rays all simple, the lower
thickened with incised membranes, the longest rays reaching vertical from third anal
ray. Ventrals narrow, reaching front of anal when declined. Vent immediately
behind ventral fins, the long anal papilla reaching frout of anal fin when declined.
Color in spirits light grayish olive; a series of five irregular quadrate blotches
along the back, usually connected at their lower margins. Middle of sides with dusky
marblings, from the lower edge of which a series of seven V-shaped black blotches
descend toward lower outline. The dusky marking of sides inclose small round
spots of ground color. An oblique dark bar on snout, and a black blotch on lower
portion of cheeks. Interopercle and upper branchiostegals with cross series of black
spots. Pectoral with a large dark blotch and indistinct crossbars on the rays. Anal
crossed by oblique dark bars. Caudal indistinctly crossbarred. Dorsals dusky,
without definite pattern. Ventrals plain.
78. Triglops beani Gilbert.
Generally common, stations 3635, 3637, and 3639, off St. Paul Island, in 24 to 37
fathoms; station 3646, off Robben Island, in 18 fathoms; station 3674, off Karluk,
Kadiak, in 31 fathoms. Recorded by Dr. Gilbert from various localities about the
Aleutian Islands. Recorded by Dr. Bean (as Triglops pingeli) trom Plover Bay,
Siberia. ,
79. Triglops scepticus Gilbert.
Recorded from deep water about Sannak and Unalaska
80. Sternias xenostethus (Gilbert).
Recorded from deep water north of Unalaska.
81. Blanura forficata Gilbert. ‘
Recorded from deep water near Sannak and Unimak.
82. Melletis papilio Bean.
Described from a rock pool on St. Paul Island; not found by recent collectors.
456 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
83. Astrolytes fenestralis Jordan and Gilbert. Shumagin Island (U.S.N.M., No. 23936).
Dr. Bean records Astrolytes notospilotus from Unalaska. If the locality is correct,
the specimen probably belongs to A. fenestralis.
84. Artedius lateralis Girard. U.S.N.M., No. 23934, from Unalaska.
No. 38985, from Bering Island, small and in bad condition, seems to be the same,
according to Mr. B. A. Bean.
STELGISTRUM Jordan and Gilbert. New genus.
Body formed as in Hemilepidotus, which it resembles in appearance but with
which it is not closely related. Gill:membranes widely joined across the throat,
wholly free from the isthmus. Teeth on jaws and vomer; none on palatines. No slit
or pore behind last gill. Upper preopercular spine simple, gently upcurved, three
short spines below it. No opercular rib or spine. Nasal spines short and strong.
Vertex without spines or ridges and without long tentacles. Spinous dorsal without
anterior notch, the vertical fins all few-rayed. A series of plates along lateral line,
and a band along the back which merges anteriorly into the mass of minute plates
covering top and sides of head. Ventrals I, 3, without sete. Vent immediately
before origin of anal.
85. Stelgistrum steinegeri Jordan and Gilbert. New species. (Plate LIV.)
One specimen, 52 mm. long, from station 3645, off Robben Island; depth 10
fathoms.
Head, 22 in length; depth, 34. Dorsal, IX, 17; anal, 13; pectoral, 16. Caudal
with 9 divided rays. Lateral line with 40 plates. Lower series of dorsal band con-
taining 35 or 38 plates.
Head narrowly wedge-shaped, tapering upward; width below eyes equaling length
of snout and half eye; width at preopercles equaling depth at occiput. Mouth large,
slightly oblique, the wide maxillary reaching vertical behind pupil, equaling length
of snout and eye, half length of head. Teeth small, uniform, in narrow bands on
jaws and vomer. Palatines toothless. A deep naked transverse groove between.
nasal spines and front of orbits. Orbital rims moderately elevated, the interorbital
space very narrow, channeled. Occiput flat or slightly concave, angulated along
lines running backward from orbits, but without spines or ridges. A slender fila-
ment above each eye, two minute pairs along sides of occiput, one on suborbital stay,
one on maxillary, and a few on plates of lateral line. No nasal cirri, none along edge
of preopercle. Upper preopercular spine gently curved upward, without cusps or
processes. Below it three short spines, the first directed backward, the second
vertically downward, the third, somewhat lounger, directed downward and forward.
Eyes small, the diameter equaling length of snout, one-fourth length of lead meas-
ured to end of opercular flap. Interorbital width equaling diameter of pupil.
Straight portion of lateral line longer than the obliquely placed anterior portion,
which is not strongly curved. The plates of lateral line are strongly spinous on their
upper free edges, and are similar and of nearly equal size throughout. Tbe dorsal
band is continued onto back of caudal peduncle, where it is continuous with the baud
of the opposite side. The lower plates of the band are in a definite lengthwise series,
and are as large as those of lateral line or slightly larger. The other plates of the
band decrease rapidly in size toward base of fin, where they are minute. They are
THE FISHES OF BERING SEA. 457
partially arranged in series running obliquely upward and backward from the lower
larger plates to the bases of the dorsal rays, ou whieh they extend for at least half
the height of ray. Dorsal spines with minute spinous plates extending almost :or
quite to their tips. The snout, top of head, nape, suborbital ring, opercles and cheeks
above the suborbital stay covered with minute plates similar to the upper part of
dorsal band, with which the invested area on top of head is continuous. Sides below
lateral line naked, except for a few plates behind axil.
Dorsals divided to the base, the last spine extremely short, its membrane joining
extreme base of the first soft ray. Spinous dorsal low, of slender, weak spines, the
longest ray one-third length of head; longest soft ray, 24 in head. Anal beginning
under third ray of soft dorsal, ending under its fourteenth ray. Caudal peduncle
slender, its least depth one-third its length. Pectorals broad and short, the rays all
simple, the lower thickened with moderately incised membranes, the eighth to the tenth
rays the longest, extending beyond vertical from origin of anal. Ventrals not reaching
vent, 2% in head.
Ground color light grayish-olive; lower part of sides regularly reticulated with
narrow dusky lines. A dusky crossbar from base of posterior dorsal spines and -
forward to axil. A second much broader bar from front of soft dorsal, ending irregu-
larly below where it merges into the reticulating lines, A third broad bar, less clearly
defined, under posterior portion of soft dorsal. A conspicuous, broad, V-shaped blotch
at base of caudal, the apex directed forward. A faint dark streak from eye forward
to tip of mandible, and a crossbar behind eyes, continued faintly onto cheeks.
Spinous dorsal with a smali dark spot on anterior and one on posterior spines. Rays
of soft dorsal and caudal with dusky markings so.arranged as to form fine crossbars.
Terminal half of pectorals finely crossbarred, the proximal half plain, with a large
dusky blotch on extreme base. Anal very faintly barred. Ventrals unmarked.
86. Hemilepidotus hemilepidotus (Tilesius)..
One specimen from Bering Island; also taken at Sitka.
Although much less abundant in Bering Sea than Hemilepidotus jordani, this is
the only species which came into the hands of the older writers. The Cottus trachu-
rus of Pallas, Blepsias ventricosus Eschscholtz, H. tilesii Cuvier and Valenciennes, and
H. gibbsi Gill all belong here. In addition to the striking differences in color, H. hemi-
lepidotus is distinguished by the much narrower and deeper interorbital space and
the more extensive granulations of the bones of the head in adults. The occipital
and temporal ridges are more elevated, the granulations finer, extending onto upper
portion of opercle, suborbital ring, and bony bridge across cheeks. The opercular
rib and the suborbital stay are smooth or faintly striate in H. jordani. The vertical
fins are constantly shorter and lower than in H. jordani, the formula, D., XI, 19; A.,
15, being constant in all specimens examined.
The species is recorded by Dr. Bean from Unga, Unalaska, Kyska, Adakh, Atka,
Amchitka, and Attu.
87. Hemilepidotus jordani Bean. Irish Lord.
Very abundant; specimens secured at Captains Harbor, Unalaska, at St. Paul
Island, Bering Island, Karluk, Unga, and at Station 3635 off St. George Island;
depth, 24 fathoms.
This species is recorded by Dr. Bean from Cooks Inlet, Kadiak, Shumagins,
Unalaska, and Plover Bay, Siberia. It was taken by Stejneger on Bering Island.
A458 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Characterized by its comparatively plain coloration, the pale parts being largely
bright yellow in life; by the wider and shallower interorbital space, the smoother side of
the head, and the longer dorsal and anal. All specimens examined have dorsal XI, 71,
anal 17. At anterior and posterior ends of occipital ridges are centers around which
radiate very coarse broken strix, contrasting with the finer granulation of H. hemi-
lepidotus, which are also disposed in radiating lines. The males differ from females i:
the great development of all the fins, the higher flaps on head, and the presence of more
yellow on jaws and branchiostegal region. The ventrals are dusky in the males, yel-
low or speckled in the females. The general color of body and upper fins is dull olive,
mottled with bluish, the sides of belly often obscurely speckled, the upper parts
translucent white in spirits, but largely bright yellow in life.
88. Bnophrys claviger (Cuvier and Valenciennes). (Plate LV.)
One specimen, 51 mm. long, from Station 3645, off Robben Island; depth, 10
fathoms. The specimen is entirely similar to the one reported from Bristol Bay by
Gilbert, Report Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries, 1896, 426. The latter is also 52
mm. long—not 25, as stated in the text.
Preorbital with two strong, spinous projections, which overlap the premaxillary in
closed mouth. Interorbital space deeply channeled, the orbital rim raised posteriorly
into a blunt spinous tubercle. A small, spinous, occipital tubercle, behind which
rises a high, sharp nuchal ridge, which is highest posteriorly and has its upper edge
finely toothed. No cirri on top of head. Upper preopercular spine long, simple,
reaching beyond head to fourth or fifth plate of lateral line. Below it are three short,
strong spines, the lowermost directed downward and forward. The outer surface
of the upper spine contains three or four low, finely serrated ridges. Its inner edge
is smooth, without accessory cusps or spinules. Opercular ridge high, serrate. Two
sharp spines on anterior angle of subopercle. Top and sides of head rough, with
minute spinous points. Preopercle and lower jaw with numerous short filaments; a
longer one on end of maxillary.
Body entirely covered with minute prickles, which invest also the abdominal
region. Those above lateral line are longest and most thickly placed. Lateral line
with a series of plates similar to those in H. bison, each surmounted by a sharp spine.
Lateral line with two curves approaching back most nearly at end of spinous and at
end of soft dorsal. Many conspicuous white filaments scattered over sides below
lateral line. Dorsals entirely separate, the free interspace as wide as pupil.
Head, 23 in length; depth, 33. Hye larger than interorbital width, 43 in head.
D., VIII-14; A., 12 (11 in previously noted specimen); P., 16; Lateral line ‘with 35
plates.
Dusky above, with faint darker crossbars; light below. Two black blotches on
cheeks. Some faint dusky V-shaped prolongations of the coloration of the back down
toward base of anal fin. Fins indistinctly cross-banded. A dark area at base of
pectoral, a narrow oblique dusky crossbar on base of caudal fin.
89. Ceratocottus diceraus (Pallas). (Plate LVI.)
One specimen from Robben Island, collected by Mr. Barrett-Hamilton, and three
young specimens from Petropaulski. Recorded by Dr. Gilbert from Herendeen Bay,
and taken by Colonel Grebnitzki on Bering Island and at Petropaulski.
The depth of the occipital depression, the height of the different ridges and
spines, and the amount of the irregularity in the cusps of the preopercular spine is
THE FISHES OF BERING SEA. 459
subject to great individual variation. We find no important differences between this
specimen aud those from the Alaskan Peninsula reported on by Gilbert, Report Com-
missioner of Fish and Fisheries, 1896, 426. The occipital depression is less and the
cross ridge behind it much lower in the adult from Robben Island, the occiput com-
paratively flat and without cross ridge in the young. We do not venture to base any
distinctions on these differences, which may be due in part to age and in part to indi-
vidual variation.
90. Ceratocottus lucasi! new species. (Plate LVII.)
Two specimens 135 and 132 mm. long, one taken from the stomach of a cod, the
other from a halibut, both of which were captured near St. Paul Island. The skin is
digested off from both specimens, so that the details of color can not be determined,
but they are otherwise in good condition.
Dittering from C. diceraus in the deeper, narrower interorbital groove and the
smaller size aud different armature of the preopercular spines.
Head 2: in length, measured to end of opercular flap; depth 3. D., VII-13;
A., 12; P.,17 or 18. Measured into the head, the eye is contained 43 times, the max-
illary 24, the preopercular spine 23, the pectoral fin 1}.
The maxillary reaches nearly to the vertical from posterior margin of eye. Villi-
form teeth on jaws and vomer, the outer series in jaws enlarged; no teeth on palatines.
Interorbital space very deeply channeled, its least width three-fifths the diameter of
eye. The upper edge of orbital rim is sharp and beset with a single series of small
teeth. the occiput is abruptly depressed behind the eyes to below the floor of inter-
orbital space, as in OC. diceraus. It is nearly flat both transversely and longitudinally,
the occiput ridges being very low, and the transverse ridge, so conspicuous at back of
occiput in adult C. diceraus, is here not developed. The nuchal ridges are high, ele-
vated, and compressed into a minutely serrated edge, a very small cusp-like elevation
at their base anteriorly. The nasal and preorbital spines are as in C. diceraus. The
upper preopercular spines are slender and somewhat decurved toward tips. They
are minutely roughened on the outer surface, and bear on their upper edge three
retrorsely hooked spines, resembling the spines on a rose bush. Below this are three
short, strong spines, the first immediately below the upper spine and diverging from
it, the second directed nearly vertically downward, the third downward and forward.
Two strong diverging spines at anterior angle of subopercle. Opercular ridge ele-
vated. All exposed bones of head roughened with radiating series of lines which are
beset with minute-prickles. Lateral line with 36 bony plates decreasing in size pos-
teriorly. Each plate bears small slender spines, those on the middle of plate longer
than the others and directed backward.
From fragmenis of skin left on snout and side of head in one specimen, it is evi-
dent that this species is colored much as in C. diceraus, the ground color light olive,
thickly covered with small dusky spots, around which the ground color forms narrow
reticulating lines. When taken the bones of the head were a bright vitriol green.
A fine specimen from Avatcha Bay, Kamchatka (U.S.N.M. No. 48859, L. Stejneger
coll. 1897), presents the following color markings:
Blackish-brown on back and sides of head and body, the posterior part of body
with three dark bars, one on caudal peduncle, one at beginning and one at end of soft
' Since this description was written, other specimens of Ceratocottus have come to hand, which
make it seem possible that C. lucasi is based on the young of C. diceraua.
460 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
dorsal. In these dark markings can be made out small roundish or polygonal spots of
of black, separated by reticulating lighter lines. Under side of head and body whitish,
the lower lip dusky; breast minutely black speckled; dorsal mottled light and dark,
without definite color pattern; anal whitish, with oblique series alternately of small,
roundish spots, and of still smaller dots; caudal with a dark crossbar at base, and two
or three more or less irregular ones on outer half; pectorals with a iarge black area at
base, the posterior portion with elongate spots forming ill-defined cross series, the
lighter area with smaller dark markings of varying shapes; ventrals whitish, with
two or three faint dusky crossbars.
Specimen 117 mm. agreeing well with types. The interorbital is narrow and very
deep. There is no cross ridge on occiput; the occipital ridges are very high, com-
pressed, knife-like, with serrulate edge. There are three strong hooks on one preopercu-
lar spine, two on the other. Each plate of the lateral line has a central, backwardly
‘directed spine. D., VII-14; A.,12; P., 18; plates 35. Lines of plates converging at
interspace between dorsal, then again at end of second dorsal.
91. Gymnocanthus pistilliger (Pallas). (Plate LVIII.)
Petropaulski; station 3646, off Robben Island, 18 fathoms. Recorded by Dr.
Gilbert from many specimens from Bristol Bay, and by Dr. Bean from Kyska, Point
Belcher, and Cape Tchaplin, Siberia. Mr. Scofield found it at Port Clarence, and
Dr. Stejneger on Bering Island and at Petropaulski.
No males are included in the number taken. The females differ from those we
have examined from Bristol Bay in having the top of head more extensively plated,
the rough plates extending onto middle of interorbital space, or in one specimen onto
snout. The preorbital ridges are less regular aud have lower tubercles. The speci-
mens indicate an approach therefore in this respect to G. galeatus. The fin rays are
as previously given. In eight specimens they are as follows:
Dorsal
spines. Dorsal rays. | Anal rays. |
Number of ray..-.-.-----+-eeeee ee eee ences Ix X 14 15 16 16 17 |
1 1 6 3
7 1 5 |
92. Gymnocanthus galeatus Bean (Plate LIX).
Seined in Captains Harbor, recorded by Dr. Bean from the same waters, and by
Dr. Gilbert from Chernofsky, all these localities being about the island of Unalaska.
Dr. Bean records it from Unalaska and from Cape Sabine in the Arctic, and Mr. Sco-
field from Point Barrow.
Many very young specimens, about 35 mm. long, were also collected by Mr. Wil-
liam Palmer on St. Paul Island. In these, the preopercular spine is simply furcate
at tip, without trace of the upwardly directed processes characteristic of the adult.
The roughened plates on head are also undeveloped. Fin rays are: D., XI, 16; A., 19;
P., 20 or 21.
93. Argyrocottus zanderi Herzenstein. (Plate LX.)
Three specimens of this beautifully marked cottoid were taken in Shana Bay,
Iturup Island. Originally described from Sakhalin Island.
The branchiostegal membranes are widely joined across the throat, narrowly
THE FISHES OF BERING SEA. 461
united in front of the middle line of isthmus, with a rather wide free margin behind.
The lateral line is without plates. The nasal spines are small, and there are four
short spines on preopercular margin.
Our specimens answer well to the detailed description of the type, but are still
more ornate in that they possess along the back a number of broad dark bars alter-
nating with lighter bars, the former confluent below with the ground color of the sides.
In our largest specimen, 7 cm. long, the ventral fins extend only to base of third anal
‘ray. There are no tubercles on the rays, and the membranes extend nearly to tips of
the two outer rays, and two-thirdslength of theinnerray. The ventral spine is slender,
nearly as long as the inner ray, and is firmly adnate to outer ray. The smaller
specimens are respectively 4 cm. and 3.5 cm. long, the ventrals reaching in one to
front of anal, in the other to vent. ‘As will be seen from our drawing the fins are
finally crossbarred, more variegated than in the type. .
94. Cottus minutus Pallas.
Described from Talek Island, Okhotsk Sea; not seen by us.
95. Cottus aleuticus Gilbert. (Uranidea microstoma Lockington; name preoccupied.)
% i
Abundant in the brooks of Unalaska; also recorded from Departure Bay,
Vancouver Island. Recorded by Dr. Bean from Kadiak and Unalaska.
96. Myoxocephalus nivosus (Herzenstein), (Plates LXI, LXII.)
Cottus nirosus Herzenstein, Mélanges Biologiques du Bull. Acad. Imp. des Sci., St. Petersb.,
XIII, 113, 1890 (Olga Bay).
One specimen 39 cm. long, from Iturup Island. D., 1X, 15; A., 13, P., 17, lat. 1,
33 to 35. Coloration very dark on back and sides, white below with traces of blackish
crossbars below the dorsal fins. Along lower part of the sides a number of large
roundish white spots, which are present also in a band along base of anal, but become
smaller posteriorly and toward middle of sides. Sides of head and body, and
especially the dorsal, caudal, and pectoral fins, with scattered small spots of pearly
white. Spinous dorsal with large roundish transparent spots, the anal margined with
white and marked with scattered white spots of various sizes and shapes. The
thickened pectoral rays largely white. Ventrals with three dusky crossbars. Lower
lip and mandible with white areas surrounded by dusky reticulations.
Head comparatively deep and compressed, with large mouth, narrow deeply con.
cave interorbital space, and depressed concave occiput, which is bounded by strong
lateral crests. At the anterior end of these crests they are each accompanied on the
outer side by a short ridge, and on the inner side by‘a still shorter ridge or a small
tubercle. The occipital crests converge strongly toward the nape. Temporal ridges
are also strong. A short filament above posterior edge of orbit and one at posterior
end of occipital crest, each surmounting a very low tubercle.
Upper preopercular spine straight, directed toward opercular flap, scarcely reach-
ing middle of the opercle, its length two-thirds diameter of orbit. The second spine is
three eighths length of upper, directed downward and backward. The third points
downward and forward, the long interval between it and the second being smooth,
without spine or tubercle. The contiguous angles of subopercle and interopercle are
provided with prominences which are not spinelike. Opercle and suprascapula each
with a strong ridge ending in a spine. No scapular spine. Nasal spines small, not
projecting. Top of head, nape, and suborbital ring with small warts, many of which
462 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
contain openings of the mucous canals. Both pairs of nostrils with short wide tubes.
Jaws and vomer with wide bands of cardiform teeth of equal size. A round pore
nearly as large as nostril immediately behind last gill. Gill membranes with a short
free border inesially.
D., IX, 15; A., 13; P., 17; pores of lateral line 33 or 35. Head (measured to end
of opercular flap) 24 in length; depth about half head. Least interorbital width
three-fifths diameter of orbit, which is one-fifth length of head to tip of opercular
spine. Greatest width of head 14 in its length. Mouth large, the lower jaw included,
the maxillary reaching the vertical immediately behind the orbit; its length 22 in head.
Third, fourth, and fifth dorsal spines nearly equal, the fifth strongest, equal to
length of snout and half eye. A very short interspace between the two dorsals.
Second dorsal very high, the longest rays equaling length of snout and eye. Caudal
gently rounded when spread, its length half that of head to end of opercular spine.
The ventrals reach halfway to front of anal, equaling height of second dorsal. Pece-
torals scarcely to vent, the length of the longest rays equaling distance from eye
to tip of opercular spine. Vent midway between base of caudal and base of lower
pectoral ray. Skin everywhere smooth.
Our specimen agrees well with the description of the much smaller type (185 mm.),
apparently differing in the shorter pectorals and more deeply concave interorbital
space. The white spots also show no tendency to run together to form streaks either
along back or on the bases of the fins.
97. Myoxocephalus jaok Cuvier and Valenciennes.
Cottus humilis Bean, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus. 1881, 149; Chamisso Island, Eschscholtz Bay.
Cottus polyacanthocephalus Kner, Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad. d. Wissen. LVIII, 1868, p. 21; taf. IV,
11. Decastris Bay (not of Pallas).
Cottus teniopterus Bean and Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 1896, 384 (not of Kner).
In a report on the ichthyological collections of the Albatross in Alaska (Report of
United States Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries for 1893, p. 421), Dr. Gilbert writes
as follows: “A. humilis closely resembles the description of A. jaok, with which it
may well be identical. We do not venture to make this identification as A. jaok is
said to have but 7 dorsal spines, a number we have not found in A. humilis.” On
further consideration we have decided that the two must be identical. The type of
jaok was a large dried specimen, the same which had served Pallas for bis account of
Cottus scorpius. In such a dried specimen it would be very difficult to enumerate
correctly the low, feeble spines, of which the first two are very closely approximated
and the last one often minute and hidden in the membrane. M. humilis is abundant
along the coast of Kamchatka and agrees with the account of jaok in having the
upper parts covered with small brown spots, the back with a series of round spinous
plates, and the sides below the lateral lines with posteriorly directed spines; it also
agrees in reaching a very large size. In the description of jaok, the fin formula,
except the number of dorsal spines, is that most frequently found in himilis.
Specimens are in the present collection from Petropaulski and from stations 3646
and 3648, off Robben Island, in 18 and 20 fathoms. All of these have the supraocular
and occipital crests higher and sharper than in those from the eastern portion of Bering
Sea, and the preopercular spines are longer, usually reaching in young specimens
to or beyond opercular margin. These are, however, characters subject to much
. variation within the group, in which it will always be unsafe to recognize subspecies
THE FISHES OF BERING SEA. A638
unless based on very extensive collections. Our 21 specimens show the following fin
formule: ,
F shai , cece Anal. Pectoral. | ,
Rays tows ava ninjelaia wrelalahe sreredits xX xX 15 16 12 13 14 #15 ae 18
Specimens .............. 18 38 10 10 1 11 5 “4 |
Dr. Bean records this species from St. Michael, Chamisso Island, Eschscholtz
Bay, Point Belcher, Arctic Ocean. Mr. Scofield found it at Port Clarence and
Grantly Harbor. v4
98. Myoxocephalus polyacanthocephalus (Pallas). (Plate LXIII.)
Several specimens from Unalaska and one from Robben Island, the latter per-
fectly typical in all respects and giving us the first Okhotsk Sea record for the species.
In the Robben Island specimen the pectoral rays are roughened'on their inner surface
with horny tubercles, as is usual with adult males of this spevies. The fin rays are:
D., X, 14; A., 12; P., 18.
Seen also at St. Paul and Unga, the species being generally common in Bering Sea.
Dr. Bean records it from Sitka, Kadiak, Cooks Inlet, Shumagins, Unalaska, Atka,
Amchitka, Port Moller, Cape Lisburne, and Plover Bay. Stejneger found it on
Bering and Medni islands and at Petropaulski.
99. Myoxocephalus stelleri Tilesius. (Plate LXIVa.)
Myoxocephalus stelleri Tilesius, Mém. Acad. Petersb. 1811, IV, 273.
Cottus decastrensis Kner, Denk. Kais. Akad. Wissen. XXIV, 1865, 2, taf. 2, figs. 1, 1a.
Cottus platycephalus Bean and Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 1896, 240, 384; not of Pallas.
Cottus niger Bean and Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 1896, 240, 384 (in part: Nos, 33899, 33872,
33833, 33850, 33908, 33844, and 33879); not of Bean. ;
? Cottus meriensii Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Pois. VIII, 496.
? Cottus marmoratus Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Pois. VIII, 497.
This species is now recorded from Bering and Copper islands, Petropaulski, and
the mouth of the Amur River. It is evidently abundant in western Bering Nea, but
probably does not occur among the Aleutian Islands or on the Alaskan coast, There:
seems to be no doubt that our specimens are correctly identified with Myoxocephalus
stelleri, with which they agree in fin rays and in the peculiar and characteristic
coloration. They agree also with the description of C.decastrensis, the figure of which,
however, diverges in several important details. It is highly improbable that C.'
mertensti and C. marmoratus cau ever be satisfactorily identified, as we have only very
brief accounts of them, based on colored drawings. :
Yollowing is a detailed cesmanuen of our specimens: _Resembling in en
Characteristic features are.the greatly thickened papillose lips, the! presence of a
supraocular tentacle, and the peculiar coloration. The skin is naked or with a few
scattered: small plates in adult males; the ‘interorbital is deeply. concave, and the
occipital and parietal ridges are heavy and more or less broken or rugose. iid
Head 22 to 22 in length; depth, 4; least depth of caudal peduncle, 14 in snout;
greatest width of head equaling’ distance from tip of snout to base of preapercalar
spine. Depth of head at occiput equaling half its length.
Mouth large, the lower jaw included, but less conspicuously overlapped than i in
A464 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
M.jaok, the maxillary reaching beyond the eye, 24 in head. Lips very thick and
fleshy in adults, the inner margin of each with a dense band of fine papille. The
lower lip may also bear externally a few papill or short filaments. A fleshy slip or
filament often present on upper posterior angle of maxilla.
Nasal spines pungent, rather short. Preopercle with two diverging spines at
angle and a third remote one below directed downward and forward. The upper
spine varies in length but extends usually about half way to tip of opercular spine.
Opercle with a strong rib and spine. Humeral and subopercular spines strong.
Interorbital width 54 to 6 in head, gently concave, its floor usually with traces of
two ridges. A definite supraorbital tentacle borne on the anterior end on the occipi-
tal ridge, its basal tubercle never conspicuous. A slender occipital tentacle is often
present, especially in the young, but is not infrequently absent. The ridges on the
occiput are strong, often irregular
or partly interrupted, their surface
roughened with lengthwise lines or
with clusters of granules. Occiput
more déeply concave than in MM,
polyacanthocephalus. Usually a cluster
of short digitate ridges behind the
eye. Top aud sides of head with
small warty protubreances. A minute
pore behind the last gill, to be detected
with difficulty in the young.
Dorsals with short interspace or
none, the membrane from last spine
usually joining base of first soft ray.
Spinous dorsal very high in adult
males, the fifth spine highest, half as
long as head. ‘The longest soft ray
24 inhead. The pectorals reach front
of anal. The ventrals not to vent.
In the young the vertical fins are much
lower.
Below are fin-formule in 11 speci-
Myoxocephalus stelleri.—Petropaulski, Kamchatka.
mens:
pee Soft dorsal. Anal. Pectoral.
RAY: sciiscintesjocis ca sevens VIII 1X 15 16 11 12 13 16 17
Specimens ..........-..+-- 1 10 10 1 2B 1 2 9
Skin smooth, without plates or spines in young 7 or 8 inches long; one adult
male of 14 inches with scattered, small, subcircular spinous plates, all but a few of
which are below the lateral line.
In the young, the maxillary and mandibular membranes are whitish, very con-
spicuously marked with irregular jet-black spots and blotches. Branchiostegal and
gular membranes aud the membrane behind the preopercle crossed with narrow,
THE FISHES OF BERING SEA. 465
dark streaks; entire underside of head faintly dusky, mottled and. maculated with
white, “like a frog’s belly.” Iris with small, black spots and blotches. These colors
are fainter in our adult specimen, where the underside of the head is nearly uniform
whitish. The maxillary membranes are, however, conspicuously black spotted. The
body is brownish, with three light gray saddles, the most conspicuous of which crosses
the back of the caudal peduncle immediately behind the dorsal fin. Thesecond is below
the dorsal notch, and the third, often obscure or wanting, forms a V-shaped area on
top.of the head, the two arms diverging from interorbital space toward the base of
opercular spine. The dark areas are often lighter centrally, and are variously blotched
and mottled with brown or dusky. The dorsals are very irregular in the marking.
The anal has usually three or four oblique, dark bars. The caudal has usually a
basal translucent bar, followed by varying alternations of translucent and black.
The ventrals show two black crossbars. “The pectorals have no definite color pattern
on their outer face, but are crossed on their inner face with a few irregular black bars.
Males show the usual round white spots on sides of abdomen.
Several specimens from Petropaulski and Bering Island.
100. Myoxocephalus mednius, B. A. Bean, new species. (Plate LXIV 0d.)
Head, 34; depth, 44; eye,4inhead. D., VIII,17; A.,12; V.,1I, 3; P.,14; C., 14.
Profile of head and body gradually ascending from tip of snout to sixth dorsal spine,
thence tapering to caudal peduncle; veutral line almost straight, slightly tapering to
caudal peduncle; longest dorsal spine almost as long as longest ray, 3 in head includ-
ing flap. Mouth moderate, maxillary reaching about to vertical through middle of
eye. Pectorals large, reaching slightly beyond anal origin, the middle rays being
four-fifths as long as the head; ventrals moderately well developed, reaching anal;
anal origin under third ray of dorsal, ending under fourteenth ray of that fin. Gill
membranes united, forming a fold across the isthmus. Preocular spines moderate;
opercular spines but moderately developed; two flattish tubular pores, one on each
side of front of eye; numerous pores on head; two rows of pores, one above and one
below the raised ridge, running laterally on dorsal half of body. General color dark
reddish brown, mottled, barred, and spotted with white; under parts whitish; a wide
whitish bar from opercles across nape; posterior part of interorbital space whitish;
the dark color on front of snout and under.lower jaw relieved by bars and mottlings
of whitish; pectorals and ventrals barred; rays of caudal finely mottled; several (5)
small white spots on body immediately behind pectoral origin, and several larger white
blotches on lower posterior half of body. Bering Sea. A single example, 2 inches
long. It is allied to M. stellert, from which it differs greatly in form aud coloration.
(Type, No. 33863, U.S.N.M. Collected at Meduni (Copper) Island, Bering Sea, spring
of 1883, by Dr. Leonhard Stejneger.) (B. A. Bean.)
101. Myoxocephalus niger (Bean). Kalog. (Plate LXV.)
Abundant in the rock pools of’the Pribilof Islands. Recently reported by Bean and
Bean from Bering and Medni Islands (Nos. 33881, 38980, U.S.N.M.; Coll. Stejneger and
Grebnitzki) and earlier by Dr. Bean from St. Paul and from Sanborn Harbor, Shumagins.
This strongly marked species can be readily distinguished by its peculiar colora-
tion, by the greatly thickened naked skin, which partly conceals the short nasal and
opercular spines, and by the numerous tentacles surmounting the warty tubercles on
crown and occiput.
5947—-PT 3——30
466 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
The fins may be uniformly black with a narrow white tip to the soft rays, or may
be more or less varigated with white. On the soft dorsal these marks are in the form
of white spots which may become confluent to form ove or two streaks. In some
specimens the caudal membranes are white in their middle portion, the rays remaining
black. The under side of the head and maxillary membranes are sometimes marked
with large blackish spots with ill-defined edges.
In addition to the minute pores which lie at intervals along the course of the
lateral line, the latter gives off pairs of lateral branches each of which opens in three
or more small pores. The sides of the head are also thickly studded with pores.
Owing to the thickened integument the pectorals and ventrals are more largely adnate
to the body than in other species,
The fin rays are as follows in 10 specimens:
en peeuneiee, Anal. Pectoral.
| NYE cincnenciadanemaunainemanien Ix xX 15 16 17 11 12 16 17
| Specimens .........-------.- 6 4 1 8 1 3 0°77 2 8
Cottus mertensti, Cuvier and Valenciennes, scantily described from a drawing, may
be this species.
102. Myoxocephalus verrucosus (Bean). (Plate LXVI.)
Recorded by Dr. Bean from Plover Bay, Siberia, and by Dr. Gilbert from about
Unalaska and Bristol Bay. Mr. Scofield
found it at Kings Island, Port Clarence, and
Grantley Harbor.
103. Myoxocephalus axillaris (Gill). (Plate
LXVIl1a.)
Recorded from Bering Straits by Dr.
Gill, by Mr. Nelson from St. Michaels, and
by Mr. Scofield from Port Clarence, Chignik
Bay, and Herendeen Bay. Found on Bering
Island by Nicolai Grebnitzki.
104. Porocottus sellaris (Gilbert).
Recorded from Bristol Bay.
105. Porocottus quadrifilis Gill.
Recorded from Bering Straits.
106. Porocottus quadratus, B. A. Bean, new spe-
cies. (Plate LXVIID.)
Head, 23; depth, 33; eye, 34 in head;
mandible, 35; maxillary,3; interorbital width,
2in eye. D., VIL, 14; A., 12; V., 1,3; P.,
bone 16. Head rather short and broad, quad-
ae conics es i His rangular; the profile from tip of upper jaw
ascends almost vertically to end of nasal
spine, rounding over orbital ridge, and thence gently sloping upward to origin of
dorsal, from which point the body gradually tapers to the tail, the depth of the caudal
THE FISHES OF BERING SEA. 467
peduncle being contained about 34 times in greatest depth of body. The long diameter
of the eye equals the length of the mandible, almost that of the maxilla, and is contained
34 times in the extreme length of the head. Interorbital space narrow, its width one-
half length of eye. Gill membranes united and forming a fold across the isthmus.
Opercular spines well developed, the lowermost on opercle and that on preopercle
being curved downward and forward. Cranial ridges ending in spines of small size.
Numerous pores on head, those in front visible to the naked eye; tubular pores on
body, especially above anal base, where they appear to the naked eye as raised white
specks.
Fins all well developed, large; length of first dorsal base little more than one-half
length of second; anal fin beginning under third and fourth rays of second dorsal and
ending opposite its last ray; length of longest dorsal spine about three-fourths as long
as longest ray, or equal to length of longest anal ray; pectorals large and broad;
ventrals reaching past anal origin. -
Color reddish brown, relieved by much white; under parts whitish; head above
and below brown, flecked with white; lips pale; a broad white half bar on body
extending from end of spinous dorsal to fourth ray of second dorsal, another extending
from sixth to ninth ray, and a third from last ray to near end of caudal peduncle,
which it encircles in connection with a dark bar, the latter extending on the caudal
fin; pectorals and caudal barred; ventrals with round black blotches forming
rows on the rays. Bering Island; only the type known. (B. A. Bean.) (Type,
No. 33875, U.S.N.M., a single example 3 inches long, Bering Island, 1883; collected
by Dr. L. Stejneger.)
107. Megalocottus laticeps (Gilbert).
Recorded from the neighborhood of Bristol Bay. Mr. Scofield found if at Port
Clarence.
108. Megalocottus platycephalus (Pallas). (Cottus teniopterus Kner.)
Recorded from Kamchatka by Pallas, and from Decastris Bay, near the mouth of
the Amur River by Kner.
109. Oncocottus hexacornis (Richardson). (Plate LX VIII.)
Northern part of Bering Sea and northward through the Arctic to Greenland.
Very doubtfally distinct from Oncocottus quadricornis of Europe. Recorded by Mr.
Scofield from Herschel Island and Grantley Harbor, and from Bering Island by Dr.
Stejneger.
110. Zesticelus profundorum (Gilbert).
Originally described from three specimens from Bering Sea. . A fourth specimen
dredged by us off Bogoslof Island, a little larger than the types, has D., V1, 10; A.,
8; P., 20. One of the original types has D., VII, 12; A., 10; P., 20; but in all other
respects the two specimens agree absolutely and they are no doubt identical.
111. Blennicottus globiceps (Girard).
Recorded by Dr. Bean from Kadiak, Adakh, and Amchitka. These records need
verification, as perhaps some other species was mistaken for it.
112. Oxycottus acuticeps (Gilbert).
Originally described from Unalaska; found later by Dr. Gilbert at Departure
468 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Bay, Vancouver Island; by Mr. Arthur W. Greeley in Prince William Sound, and by
Dr. Jordan at Sitka and Kadiak. These specimens vary considerably in color and in
length of preopercular spine.
This species is the type of a distinct genus or subgenus Oxycottus, nearest allied
to Blennicottus, but differing in the sharper spine of the preopercle and the lateral
cleft of the mouth. Ovxycottus embryum is a second species of the same group, inter-
mwnediate in form and armature between Blennicottus globiceps and Oxycotius acuticeps.
113. Dasycottus setiger Bean.
Taken by us off Karluk; recorded by Dr. Gilbert from various localities north
and south of Alaska Peninsula, by Dr. Bean from Sitkalidak, and by Mr. Starks from
Puget Sound.
114. Malacocottus zonurus Bean.
Recorded from the Trinity Islands, and from about Unalaska and Unimak in deep
water.
115. Histiocottus bilobus (Cuvier and Valenciennes).
This species was collected by Stejneger on Bering Island in 1897 (U.S.N.M. No.
48857).
116. Blepsias cirrhosus Cuvier and Valenciennes.
Captain Harbor, Unalaska; Petropaulski; Iturup Island; also recorded by Dr.
Gilbert from Unalaska, and by Dr. Bean from Unalaska, Adakh, Kiska, and St. Paul;
found by Stejneger on Bering Island. Adults from Unalaska show the following
color:
Olive green, of varying shades, the belly bright coppery yellow, the cross blotches
on back nearly black, with paler margins; naked patches on sides, white or brassy,
those on tail colored like body, those on head silvery. First dorsal light olive with
2 translucent patches; second dorsal mottled olive with dark spots and translucent
patches. Caudal with 3 blackish and 4 translucent bands. Anal yellowish olive
with uumerous spots and translucent patches. Radiating blackish bands running
out from eye. The upper barbels black, the lower olive.
117. Nautiscus pribilovius Jordan and Gilbert, new species. (Plate LXIX.)
Nautichthys oculofasciatus Gilbert, Report U. 8. Fish Commissioner, 1896, 434; not of Girard.
Differing from Nawtichthys oculofasciatus in the shorter lower fins, the lower
cranial ridges and the coloration.
Head, 3 to 35; depth, 33; D., VIII, 23; A., 15; V., 1,3; P., 15; eye, 34 in head;
maxillary, 22; lateral line with 39 spines.
Shape of head and body much as in MX. oculofasciatus. Head short, the snout
rather sharp, the anterior profile steep; nasal spines prominent; a short ocular cirrus,
much smaller than in WV. oculofasciatus, shorter than pupil; interorbital space narrow,
about half eye, deeply concave; a blunt triangular ridge above each orbit, with a deep
cross furrow behind it which deepens to a pit at the vertex; nuchal ridges lower than
in VN. oculofasciatus, each with a coarse tubercle, lower and larger than in the other
species. From the nuchal depression the base of first dorsal spines rises much less
abruptly. Preopercle with four blunt prominences, the upper often longer and more
spine like. Mouth nearly horizontal, the lower jaw included; a slender filament at
end of maxillary; teeth small, a few on vomer and a narrow band on palatines. Gill
THE FISHES OF BERING SEA. 469
membranes broadly united to isthmus, the gill opening extending a little below the
lower edge of pectoral. Skin covered with close-set villous prickles, among which
large ones are frequently seen arranged in rather definite longitudinal series, of
which there may be two or three parallel with the back and one running near lower
line of tail. No smooth areas on sides. Lateral line conspicuous, the plates with
short spines directed backward.
Dorsals separate, the first not notched, comparatively low; the first spine highest,
1% in head in type; in other specimens 14 to 14 in head. Soft dorsal and anal also low,
none of the rays reaching base of caudal when depressed. Pectoral longer than head;
ventrals 14 to 2 in head. :
Color dull light olivaceous, mottled with darker; three or four dark bands below
soft dorsal, one below spinous dorsal; a black band through eyes and across cheeks,
extending onto branchiostegal membranes; seven dusky spots along Jateral line, a
conspicuous pink blotch, rather larger than pupil, between first and second spots.
First dorsal dusky; second dorsal, anal, and pectoral dotted and checked; caudal
with faint finely checked cross lines, which deepen to form a dark bar at its base and
a broader one toward its tip; ventrals pale; belly mottled.
One specimen 6 cm. long, from station 3635, off Zapadni rookery, St. George
Island, in 23 fathoms.
Another specimen, barely an inch long, was dredged in 7 fathoms in the harbor
of Unalaska. Very numerous specimens were obtained by the Albatross in 1890 in
Bristol Bay and south of the Alaskan Peninsula. It was at that time incorrectly
identified by Dr. Gilbert with WN. oculofasciatus. In five specimens of those from
Bristol Bay the dorsal contains VIII or [X—23 or 24 rays, the anal 16 or 17, the
pectoral 15 or 16.
‘Dr. Bean records Nautichthys oculofasciatus from Unalaska, Adakh, Kiska, and
St. Paul. Perhaps he had the present species instead of the more southern Nautich-
thys oculofasciatus. The genus Nautiscus Jordan and Evermann is closely allied to
Nautichthys, differing in the low spinous dorsal, the base of which is scarcely raised
above the nape. The skin is rougher than in Nautichthys, and the anal fin is shorter.
118. Psychrolutes paradoxus Giinther. .
Psychrolutes zebra Bean, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 1890, X, 3.
Head, 22; depth, 3. D.,—,15; A.,13; P.,19; eye,4in head; width of mouth from
angle to anele, 13; snout, 3h; interorbital, 34,
Body short, broad, thick, tadpole shape, the texture soft like that of a Liparid,
especially about the head; the skin is limp and smooth, covered with little soft dermal
warts, that of the head sapocially lax, the cheeks tarnfil and translucent. No trace of
spines on head, the bones all thin and weak; nostrils each in a short tube; mouth
broad, its cleft chiefly anterior, the jaws equal; teeth very minute, none on vomer or
palatines; lower jaw with eight large open pores. Gill membranes broadly united to
the isthmus, the gill opening extending to slightly below base of pectoral. Lateral
line obsolete. Dorsals united, with a slight notch between, the first buried in a ridge
of skin, so that its delicate spines can not be counted from without; second dorsal
low, similar to anal, both of them free from the caudal. Lower pectoral rays progres-
sively shortened, the longest 13 in head. Ventrals moderate, I, 3, reaching vent, 24
in head; caudal rounded.
Color creamy white, with blackish cross-bands, irregular in form and broken by
470 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
whitish patches; five black spots on lower jaw; top of head blackish; a narrow blotch
at shoulder; a wider one across first dorsal; a broad one on second dorsal abruptly
broadened on body, then narrowed extending across anal; an irregular bar at base of
caudal; a narrow bar and some spots and streaks on the fin; pectoral with two
curved bars, the inner concave, the outer convex backward, the two inclosing a
rounded pinkish area. ;
One specimen 50 mm. long from station 3640 off St. Paul Island; depth, 26
fathoms. The species is abundant from Puget Sound through Bering Sea to the
Kuril Islands. The present collection contains a specimen 16 mm. long from station
3653 off Iturup Island; depth, 18 fathoms. The species was also taken at station 3674,
off Karluk. In these specimens the coloration is variable, the bands on the back
being sometimes divided. The pectoral fins are orange at base in life, the color vary-
ing to bright yellow.
Family AGONID-.
119. Occa dodecaédron (Tilesius).
Two specimens from Shana Bay, Iturup Island. Recorded by Dr. Gilbert from
Bristol Bay. These agree
very closely in details of form,
structure, and coloration with
material from eastern Bering
Sea and seem to differ only
in the longer, sharper spines .
with which the plates of the
dorsal series are provided.
The ridges on the top of the
head are also narrower and
sharper. This may indicate
specific or subspecific separa-
tion, but our material is
insufficient ‘to indicate that
such is the case. From Cuvier’s description, based on an individual sent him /by
Tilesius, our specimens differ in the coloration of the caudal fin, the longer head, and
the shorter snout and eye. The caudal is nearly uniformly blackish, not spotted with
brown like the pectorals. The head is contained 43 times in total length (not 6 times),
and the eye and snout are about one-fifth length of head (not one-fourth).
The species is closely allied to O. verrucosa, but differs conspicuously in coloration
and in numerous structural details. The cheeks are naked below the stay, the stay
is without spine, the medial portion of gill membranes are plated, and the invest-
ment of the breast is very different. Compare in this respect the accompanying
figure with Steindachner’s plate of Agonus barkani (= O. verrucosa) in Ichthy.
Beitrage IX, taf. V. Fin rays in our specimens: D., X, 8; A., 14; P.,140r15. The
two species verrucosus and dodecaédron form a minor group or genus, distinguished
from Brachyopsis (rostratus) by the short snout, which is not produced and Syngnathus.
like. Siphagonus Steindachner is identical with Brachyopsis. For the group typified '
by verrucosus and dodecaédron Jordan and Evermann have taken the name Occa
(meaning a harrow).
Occa dodecaédron, Shana Pay, Iturup Island. Anna L. Brown del.
THE FISHES OF BERING ‘SEA. A771
120. Brachyopsis segaliensis (Tilesius).
Recorded from Sakhalin by Tilesius; not seen by recent writers.
121. Brachyopsis rostratus (Tilesius). (Plate LXX.)
Several specimens from Shana Bay, Iturup Island, show the following characters:
Dorsal face wider than in Occa dodecaédron or in Pallasina barbata and deeply con-
cave; snout elongate, depressed, its width taken at middle of its length one-half
greater than its depth at the same point, and one-half its length, measured from tip of
lower jaw; lower jaw much longer than upper, the symphysis entering upper profile of
snout, vertically furrowed at tip; maxillary not reaching orbit, 4 in head; preorbital
elongate, with a lengthwise ridge which divides anteriorly, the branches not termi-
nating in spines; the edge of preorbital entire; anterior nostril in a short tube. Teeth
all minute, present on jaws and vomer, often absent on palatines, sometimes present
in a small patch on extreme anterior end. Suborbital stay without spine, forming a
gibbous striated protuberance on middle of cheek, between which and the horizontal
edge of preopercle is a series of three or four small plates; two strong diverging spines
at angle of preopercle; ashorter spine below them; orbital margins elevated superiorly
and posteriorly; interorbital space very narrow, grooved, and longitudinally striated,
its width equaling one-half diameter of orbit, which is 6 in head; no spines on top of
head, the ridges low and rounded. Head 42 to 43 in length; width of body 83 to 84;
length of caudal peduncle 33 to 4.
Body anteriorly hexagonal, the upper lateral ridge becoming obsolete immediately
in front of spinous dorsal; lower lateral ridge also becoming rounded and obsolescent
anteriorly; dorsal face widening rapidly from occiput to front of spinous dorsal where
its width equals snout; it gradually narrows posteriorly, the dorsal ridges becoming
confluent at a point much nearer base of caudal than end of second dorsal; ventral
ridges spineless, the lateral ridges with short spinous points, often distinguishable
with difficulty; dorsal series anteriorly with stronger spines which rapidly diminish
posteriorly; branchiostegal and gular membranes without plates; plates on body with-
out the minute prickles so characteristic of Occa verrucosa and O. dodecaédron; breast -
covered with polygonal plates, a series elevated to form a median ridge, the marginal
plates also prominent; prepectoral area wide, with four prominent plates, the upper-
most bearing a short spine posteriorly; in the dorsal series of plates, 10 lie in advance
of first dorsal, 11 between origins of first and second dorsals, 9 or 10 along base of
second dorsal, 6 to 9 between second dorsal and the point of confluence of the dorsal
series, and 5 to 7 between the latter point and base of caudal; total number of plates
in dorsal series 43 to 45, in 6 specimens examined.
Pectorals long and narrow, 14 in head; dorsal with 8 (rarely 9) spines and 8 soft rays;
anal with 13 (rarely 14) rays; pectoral with 14rays. Color dusky above, marked with
small black spots and lines; white below, growing dusky posteriorly; caudal blackish;
ventrals white, anal white, with the last rays dusky; dorsals and pectorals with the
‘rays finely dotted with black..
Recorded by. Grebnitzki, from Yeso, Japan.
f
122. Pallasina barbata (Steindachner).
Two specimens from Shana Bay, Iturup Island, one from Tareinsky Bay, Kam-
chatka. Recorded by Dr. Gilbert from Bristol Bay, and by Dr. Bean from Yakutat,
Unalaska, and Port Clarence. Mr. Scofield found it, at Port Clarence and Stejneger
’ at Petropaulski. They show the typical arrangement of plates on the breast, the
472 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
median series in front of ventrals containing three plates, not two as in Pallasina atx,
The mandibular barbel is subject to considerable variation in length, and can probably
not be relied upon to distinguish the two species.
123. Podothecus hamlini, Jordan and Gilbert, new species. (Plate LXXI.)
D., IX to XI, 8; A., 9 or 10; P., 15. Head, 32 in length; depth, not including
spines of dorsal plates, 82; width at base of pectorals, 74; Jength of caudal peduncle,
from base of last anal ray, 25; snout long and slender, depressed, produced beyond
the mouth for a distance equaling a little less than half its length, the tip formed of
two spines, the space between which is covered with membrane; a pair of strong,
nearly erect spines at their base, between which are two or three very small spines on
the median line; a second pair of strong spines at posterior end of premaxillary fossa,
the ridges bounding which may bear one or more pairs of small prickles; preopercle
with a wide, wing-like crest terminating in a bluntish spine; snout long and slender,
its lateral profile concave as seen from above or below; suborbital crest with three
very strong, backwardly hooked spines; interorbital space very narrow, deeply
concave; supraocular ridge strong and much elevated, the interorbital space deeper
and narrower than in any other species of this group, its least width 14 in orbit; post-
orbital spine small; ridges on sides of snout minutely serrate; an irregular group of
small spines above and behind anterior nostril; lateral ridges of head with three pairs
of very strong backwardly directed spines in line with the greatly expanded preoper-
cular ridge; the posterior portion of this ridge produced into a compressed, bluntish
process which overlaps the subopercle and reaches margin of gill opening; opercular
and temporal ridges low and sharp. Teeth present on jaws in the young, becoming
nearly or quite obsolete in adults; in the type, 17 cm. long, a few weak teeth on one
side of upper jaw, but none elsewhere; vomer and palatines toothless. A cluster of
14 barbels on each side of lower surface of snout in front of mouth, and a cluster of 14
occupying end of maxillary and angle of mouth; each side of lower lip with two barbels;
gill membranes widely joined to the isthmus, without distinct free fold posteriorly.
Plates on body with very strong spines, those of the dorsal series the largest, but
decreasing rapidly backward, becoming much smaller than the lateral series under
the second dorsal fin; a median series of short, sharp spines still persists along entire
back of tail after the confluence of the dorsal series; the lateral series lower ante-
riorly, the upper row persisting to gill opening, the lower row now becoming obso-
lete about four plates behind axil; the abdominal series bear short, sharp spines
(longer in the young), becoming obsolete along anterior portion of anal fin; of the
dorsal series, 4 are in front of the first dorsal, 10 (or 94) along base of first dorsal, 1
(or 13) between dorsals, 9 along base of second dorsal, 15 along back of tail, the first
of the latter being the plate in which the dorsal series first become confluent; anterior
portion of Jateral line running along upper lateral series, gradually descending to
middle of sides, wheré it runs on a special row of plates which bear no spines; where
the lateral line begins to ascend, three of these plates become confluent with cor-
responding plates of the upper lateral series; in advance of these, five members of the
series again appear distinct, considerably enlarged and bearing spines; 40 pores in the
lateral line.
Fins all comparatively short and low; pectorals reaching twelfth plate of upper
lateral series, the longest ray equaling length of snout and one-half eye; rays becoming
rapidly shortened below, the lower five or six slightly thickened with exserted tips; -
THE FISHES OF BERING SEA. A7T3
ventrals very short, not exceeding length of snout before mouth, not received into
longitudinal groove. We consider it very doubtful whether such a groove exists in
any of the other species of this group. It has been described as existing in the types of
P. gilberti (Collett) and P. peristethus, Gill. In both cases the type specimens were in
a poor state of preservation, and the groove was probably due to a softening of that
longitudinal strip of the abdominal wall which includes the anal opening, and extends
backward from the base of the ventral fins and is interposed between the firm outer
series of ventral plates. That such a softening had occurred in the type of Podothecus
peristethus is evident from Gill’s statement that the ventrals had dropped out. This view
is rendered more probable from the fact that P. peristethus is apparently identical with
the common P. acipenserinus, which contains no such groove. We have also examined
two of the type specimens of P. gilberti without being able to satisfy ourselves of the
‘existence of any special groove. The dorsal fins are closely juxtaposed, the interspace
including 1 or 14 pairs of plates. The base of the last ray of second dorsal is midway
between base of caudal and origin of spinous dorsal.
Color dark or brownish above, with irregular spots or dashes of darker, which do not
form definite crossbars; a black streak from eye to tip of snout, passing onto lower side
of rostral spines; a dark blotch on expanded limb of preopercle; a black spot on base of
middle pectoral rays, the fin very obscurely marked with dusky; dorsal spines and rays
with linear dark markings, one or two black spots near tip of spinous dorsal anteriorly ;
under parts, including fins, unmarked.
Two specimens from Albatross station 3653, off Shana Village, Iturup Island, in 18
fathoms. A young individual from Albatross station 3646, off Robben Tsland, 18
fathoms, seems to belong to the same species, but has the snout less produced and the
dorsal VIII, 6; anal 8. (We take great pleasure in naming this species in honor of
Hon. Charles Sumner Hamlin, late Assistant Secretary of the Treasury, under whose
auspices the investigations described in this memoir were undertaken.)
124. Podothecus thompsoni, Jordan and Gilbert, new species. (Plate LXXII.)
D., VII or IX-6; A., 6; P., 16. Head rather broadly triangular, its greatest
width across preopercular ridges greater than distance from anterior end of preoper-
cular ridge to tip of snout. Lateral ridge on head continuous from tip of snout: along
suborbital bones to base of preopercular crest, the lateral.spines usual in this genus
being represented by triangular processes borne on the ridge; preopercular ridge
produced posteriorly beyond gill opening, but not spine like; snout terminating
anteriorly in two rounded processes, each bearing on its upper surface a vertical crest,
and finely serrate along its margins; no terminal pair of strong spines as in other
species ; under side of snout with an acute median spine directed downward and
backward; a pair of strong spines on upper side of snout behind terminal nostril
ridge; a pair of coalesced spines behind the nostril groove; a semitircular series of
spinelets below the eye; two small tufts of filaments on under side of snout, one on
middle of maxillary and one at its tip. A narrow band of sharp teeth in each jaw;
vomer and palatines toothless. Gill membranes united to isthmus, without evident
free fold. Orbital rim much elevated; interorbital space narrow, deeply concave, its
width nine-tenths diameter of orbit; occipital ridges strong, elevated posteriorly,
ending in a backwardly directed apind which is much larger than those of the body
plates; occipital area narrow, deeply concave, its central portion sunk somewhat
below level of interorbital space, from welitcls it is separated by a shallow transverse
ATA THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
groove; asimilar groove behind occipital spines; area between occipital and temporal
ridges also deeply concave; a strong opercular ridge.
All the plates with strong spines, including those of the ventral series; the
weakest spines are on the anterior plates of the lateral series; plates on breast with
central spine and radiating ridges; dorsal series with fewer plates than in other
species; 3 in front of spinous dorsal, 11 (or 12) along base of spinous dorsal, 2 (or 1)
between dorsals, 6 at base of soft dorsal, 14 (or 13) unpaired plates on back of caudal
peduncle. The unpaired plates have the spine notched at tip. All the plates are
marked with strong radiating ridges and have the surface of the spines minutely
roughened.
Color, light gray above, white below; top and sides of head with black dots and
dashes; back crossed by six narrow black bars. Distinguished from all other species
of the genus by the great development of the lateral ridge and spines on head. This
gives the head and especially the snout a much broader outline, approaching in this
respect Agonus cataphractus. The species is represented by several young specimens
in rather poor condition, the type being 53 mm. long. The outline and armature of
the head are not, however, essentially different in young and adults of such species
as are known to us from specimens of different sizes. Off Shana Bay, Iturup Island,
Kuril group. (This species is named in honor of Prof. D’Arey Wentworth Thompson,
of the University of Dundee, the commissioner of Great Britain in the fur-seal
investigations in Bering Sea in 1896 and 1897.)
125. Podothecus veternus Jordan and Starks.
Described from Robben Island.
126. Podothecus accipiter Jordan and Starks.
Described from Robben Island.
127. Podothecus acipenserinus (Tilesius).
One specimen of this abundant species was taken from the stomach of a codfish
at St. Paul Island. It is recorded by Dr. Bean from Kadiak, Unalaska, and Port
Clarence, and was found by Stejneger on Bering and Copper islands.
128. Podothecus gilberti (Collett).
Described from Petropaulski.
129. Sarritor frenatus (Gilbert).
One specimen from station 3643 extends the range of this species to the Kam-
chatka coast (off Povorotnaya, in 100 fathoms). Anomalous arrangement is shown in
the predorsal plates, most of which occur alternately instead of in pairs. The inter-
space separating the dorsals is longer than in any other specimen we have seen,
extending over five pairs of plates. The interspace extends usually over but two or
three pairs of plates, four pairs being included in but one of our specimens from
eastern Bering Sea. No further differences could bedetected. The original localities
of this species are about Unalaska and Unimak.
130. Sarritor leptorhynchus (Gilbert).
Described from various stations north and south of the peninsula of Alaska.
131. Xenochirus alascanus Gilbert.
Dredged by us off Karluk: recorded by Dr. Gilbert from many localities about
Unimak Pass.
THE FISHES OF BERING SEA. 475
132. Bathyagonus nigripinnis Gilbert.
Recorded from about Unalaska in deep water.
133. Hypsagonus quadricornis Cuvier and Valenciennes. .
Recorded by Dr. Gilbert from about Unalaska and Bristol Bay. Also known
from about Kamchatka; found by Col. Nicolas Grebnitzki at Bering Island.
134. Percis japonicus (Pallas).
Known only from the waters about Sakhalin.
135. Aspidophoroides giintheri Bean.
Bering ‘Sea; not taken by us.
136. Aspidophoroides inermis (Giinther).
Recorded from about the Aleutian Islands and Unalaska. It was: originally
described from Unalaska.
137. Aspidophoroides bartoni Gilbert.
Stations 3637 and 3639, off Pribilof Islands, 32 and 27 fathoms, locally abundant;
recorded by Dr. Bean from many stations about the Alaskan Peninsula and Unalaska.
Found by Stejneger on Medni Island.
Family CYCLOPTERID@.
138. Eumicrotremus orbis (Giinther).
One specimen taken from the stomach of a halibut off St. Paul Island. The back
was seal brown, the lower parts pinkish, the region about the ventral disk bright
pink. Also recorded by Dr. Bean from Unalaska, St. Paul, and Plover Bay. Found
on Bering Island by Col. N. Grebnitzki.
139. Lethotremus muticus (Gilbert).
Recorded from near Unimak Pass.
140. Cyclopterichthys ventricosus Pallas. Miakinka or soft fish.
Numerous specimens taken at Petropaulski by Prof. D’Arcy W. Thompson, and
on St. Paul by Mr. Trevor Kincaid. Found by Stejneger on Bering Island. Recorded
from Atka. The species is rare in collections, but seems to be locally abundant.
141. Cyclopteroides gyrinops Garman.
Described from St. Paul. A few very young specimens, apparently of this species,
dredged by us in Golinski (Dutch) Harbor, Unalaska.
142. Liparops stelleri (Pallas).
Originally described from Petropaulski; not since seen.
Family LIPARIDIDA.
143. Neoliparis callyodon (Pallas).
Specimens were taken at Kamchatka (Mr. Barrett-Hamilton); Captains Harbor,
Unalaska; St. Paul, St. George, and Sitka. They vary much in plumpress and some-
what in color, some being plain yellowish olive, others finely spotted with black. The
disk varies from 2} to 23 times in head. These variations are not correlated, and we
are unable to recognize more than one form, though it is not impossible that two
476 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
species are included among our specimens. Dr. Bean records this species from Una-
laska, Adakh, Amchitka, St. Michael, and Plover Bay. Stejneger and Grebnitzki
found it on Bering and Medni islands.
144. Neoliparis cyclopus Giinther.
Recorded by Dr. Gilbert from Bristol Bay. It ranges southward to Vancouver
Island.
145. Liparis pulchellus Ayres.
Recorded by Dr. Gilbert from Bristol Bay, whence it ranges southward to San
Francisco. Dr. Bean notes it from Unalaska and Kadiak.
146. Liparis cyclostigma Gilbert. (Plate LX XIII.)
One specimen known, from near Unalaska.
147. Liparis agassizii (Putnam).
Originally described from Sakhalin; generally common in the north of Bering
Sea, south to Bristol Bay, whence it was recorded by Dr. Gilbert. Dr. Bean records
it (as Liparis gibbus) from Unalaska and Petropaulski.
148. Liparis herschelinus Scofield. (Plate LXXIV.)
Northern parts of Bering Sea; described from Herschel Island.
The specimens from Bering Island collected by Grebnitzki, recorded as Liparis
tunicata by Bean and Bean, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 1896, 243, probably belong to this
species.
CRYSTALLICHTHYS Jordan and Gilbert. New genus.
Closely allied to Liparis, from which it differs chiefly in the single nostril. A
single dorsal fin; a well-developed sucking disk; wide bands of teeth, many of which are
trilobate near tip; an inferior mouth, much overhung by the produced conical snout;
a single nostril, corresponding to, the anterior nostril of other Liparids, the posterior
opening being wholly wanting. The typical species, C. mirabilis, differs from all
known species of Liparis except L. cyclostigma in its large size, compressed form, aid
translucent gelatinous texture.
149. Crystallichthys mirabilis Jordan and Gilbert, new species. (Plates LXXV, LXXVI.)
A large species, soft and gelatinous in texture, the color translucent grayish or
purplish, marked on back with many large light circles, which were probably deep red
or crimson in life.
Type, a specimen 330 mm. long, from station 3643, off southeast coast of Kam-
chatka, at a depth of 100 fathoms.
Head 4 in length; depth 24; snout 24 in head; eye 34 in snout. Width of mouth
one-half length of head. Length of gill slit, one-half snout, equaling distance from
front of eye to front of nostril tube; P., 33.
Head and body compressed, especially along upper profile, which descends in a
gentle, nearly even curve to tip of snout. Lower profile less curved, nearly straight
and horizontal on anterior third of body. Snout conical, tapering to a sharp tip, its
lower profile nearly horizontal, protruding beyond the mouth for a distance (measured
axially) equaling two-fifths its length. Mandibular symphysis vertically below nostril
tube. Upper jaw strongly arched anteriorly, the mandible much shorter, nearly
transverse in position. When the mouth is closed there is exposed the entire width
of the thick upper lip, and the anterior portion of the band of fringes which precedes
THE FISHES OF BERING SEA. ATT
the premaxillary teeth. Teeth slender, shorter than in L. cyclostigma, arranged in
about 25 oblique series in the half of each jaw. The posterior longer teeth are more
or less distinctly three lobed in both jaws, the anterior teeth shorter, simple. A deep
cleft on lower side of snout running from its tip to front of premaxillaries, deepening
backward, opening into the deep groove above premaxillaries. From base of cleft arises
a high free fold, the sharp edge of which nearly reaches the margins of the cleft. A
series of three large pores along each side of this cleft, with three more equally spaced
on each side and parallel with front of mouth. Belonging to this series, but distant
from them and much smaller, we find one on middle of cheeks below eye, and one
halfway between eye and middle of gill slit. A pore behind eye and a series of four
on each side of nape. No pore in the position of the posterior nasal opening. A
second series of six on each side of mandible and preopercle. No other pores on head.
Nostril single, in a distinct wide tube, as long as the diameter of pupil. Distance
from eye td angle of mouth 3} in head. Vertical from angle of mouth passing through
front of orbit. Gill cleft narrow, reaching base of first pectoral ray, its length 43 in
head. Lateral line rising in an abrupt curve from upper end of gill opening, decurved
again behind pectorals to reach middle of sides, on the posterior half of which it
becomes obsolete. Anteriorly the lateral line is accompanied above by a second
series of pores which is not curved, but runs straight forward from just above the
summit of the curve.
The dorsal and anal fins are enveloped anteriorly in thick gelatinous tissue, so
that their points of origin and number of fin rays can not be determined. The fins
are high, the longest anal ray equaling length of snout and eye. Thirty-two dorsal
and 33 anal rays can be distinguished in the posterior transparent portions of the
fins, the total number of rays beiug greater. The last anal ray joins outer caudal ray
at middle of length of the latter. Dorsal joined narrowly to base of caudal at end of
basal seventh of outer caudal ray. Longest caudal ray 24 in head. Lower seven
pectoral rays thickened, forming a lobe, the distal third of each ray free from the
membrane. Longest pectoral ray 14 in head. Disk of moderate size, anteriorly
placed, its posterior margin under the gill slit, its length one-third that of head.
Color translucent, according to Stejueger, beautifully pink flesh color in life, the
dorsal region, including dorsal fin, marked with many large round spots, probably
deep red or crimson in life, each spot surrounded with a faint darker ring.
Two specimens were taken, one, about 45 mm. long, from station 3638 in 34 fath-
oms off St. Paul Island, the other, 340 mm. long, from station 3643 in 100 fathoms off
southeast coast of Kamchatka. The remarkably beautiful coloration of the smaller
example was similar to that of the type specimen of Liparis cyclostigma, the body and
fins in life being translucent, with large roundish deep red spots, each surrounded by
a dark brown ring and this in turn by a light ring. Belly, lower side of head, and
lower half of pectoral light yellow. The rings are not always strictly symmetrical
on the two sides and do not exactly correspond in different specimens. They soon
fade in spirits.
The translucent coloration of this species, extremely beautiful in life, is very dif-
ferent from that of the other Liparids.
150. Careproctus simus Gilbert.
Recorded from near Unalaska in deep water.
478 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
151. Careproctus ostentum Gilbert.
Recorded from near Unalaska.
152. Careproctus phasma Gilbert.
From Bristol Bay.
153. Careproctus spectrum Bean.
From near Unga.
154. Careproctus colletti Gilbert.
From waters to the south of Alaska peninsula.
155. Careproctus ectenes Gilbert.
From near Unalaska.
156. Careproctus gelatinosus (Pallas).
Petropaulski; not recognized by recent writers.
157. Prognurus cypselurus Jordan and Gilbert, new genus and species, (Plate LXXVII.)
This species is most nearly related to Careproctus melanurus, from which it differs
in darker coloration and shorter gill slit. From all known species of Careproctus it
differs in the very elongate caudal fin, which is forked at the tip. The feature defines
the genus Prognurus.
Head 42 in length; depth, 4,%,; cleft of mouth, 13 in head, seven-fifths distance
from symphysis of lower jaw to angle of mouth; total interorbital width, 2} in head;
eye large, equaling length of snout, 33 in head; gill opening entirely above base of
pectoral, not reaching base of upper ray, its length 3 in head; the opercular lobe
broadly rounded.
Snout blunt, broadly rounded, the mouth horizontal along its lower margin,
scarcely overlapped by it. Upper lip wide. Teeth acute, without cusps, in about 27
oblique rows in one side of each jaw. Maxilliary reaching the vertical from posterior
edge of the pupil. Nostril opening in a wide, low tube.
Front margin of ventral disk very slightly behind angle of mouth, its diameter
three-fifths that of eye, about one-seventh length of head.
Pectorals broadly rounded, regularly shortened below, not deeply notched, the
lower 7 rays thickened and exserted; the longest free ray about half length of head.
Upper portion of fin with 26 rays, the tips only protruding, the longest equaling
length of head. Dorsal beginning shortly behind vertical from gill slit, its distance
from tip of snout 3§ in length. Dorsal with about 58 rays. Caudal very long and
narrow, only its basal third connate with last rays of dorsal and anal. Unlike all
other Liparids, the caudal is forked at tip, the terminal notch involving about one-
seventh of fin.
Translucent dusky, darker around snout, gill openings, and on the fins, the verti-
cal fins largely jet-black. Mouth and gill cavity dusky, not black.
Type a single specimen, 21 cm. long, dredged at station 3644, off Bogoslof Island,
at a depth of 664 fathoms. A second specimen was obtained by the Albatross in 1889
at station 3074, off the coast of Washington, in 877 fathoms, but it was too seriously
mutilated to admit of description.
158. Rhinoliparis barbulifer Gilbert.
From deep water off Unalaska.
THE FISHES OF BERING SEA. 479
159. Gyrinichthys minytremus Gilbert.
One specimen from deep water off Unalaska.
160. Paraliparis cephalus Gilbert.
Recorded from oft Unalaska and off Point Reyes by Dr. Gilbert. Obtained by
us in Shelikof Straits off Karluk.
161. Paraliparis ulochir Gilbert.
Recorded from near Unalaske in deep water; the original type from the Gulf ot
California.
162. Paraliparis nalanisigg Gilbert.
From near Unalaska in deep water.
Family BATHYMASTERIDA.
163. Bathymaster signatus Cope. (Plate LXXVIII.)
Recorded by Dr. Gilbert from about Unimak and Unalaska; taken — us at Sitka.
Dr. Bean records the species from Kadiak, Shumagin, and Unalaska, Found by
Stejneger and Grebnitzki on Bering and Medni islands.
* 164, Ronquilus jordani (Gilbert).
‘Recorded by Gilbert from Bristol Bay. Otherwise known from Seattle and
Wrangell.
Family TRICHODONTID2.
165. Arctoscopus japonicus Steindachner.
Two specimens from station 3652, off Iturup Island, depth 14 fathoms. D., X
or XI, 13; A., 30 or 31.
Originally described from the Gulf of Strietok, Japan, and recorded, perhaps
doubtfully, from Sitka.
166. Trichodon trichodon Tilesius.
Abundant about St. Paul Island, and often cast up by the surf; recorded by
Dr. Gilbert from Herendeen Bay and Bristol Bay, and by Dr. Bean from Shumagin
Islands, Unalaska, and Nunivak. Recorded by Stejneger from Bering Island.
Family BLENNIIDA.
167. Bryostemma polyactocephalum (Pallas).
Blennius polyactocephalus Pallas, Zoogr. Rosso-Asiat., III,179. (Kamchatka.)
Chirolophus japonicus Herzenstein, Mélanges Biologiques, XIII, 1890, 123.
One specimen, 75 cm. long, from Kamchatka, agrees perfectly with Herzenstein’s
detailed description above cited. There is no reason to doubt that this is the species
described by Pallas as Blennius polyactocephalus. We are not wholly satisfied that
specimens listed under this name from eastern Bering Sea and Puget Sound (see Bean
in Nelson’s Report, p. 305, Pl. XV, fig. 2, and Jordan and Starks, Fishes of Puget
Sound, 1895, 841) are identical with the Kamchatka form. Alaskan specimens have
the posterior pair of supraocular cirri smaller than the anterior and have those of
the anterior pair united for often half or more than half their length. We know too
little of the variation within the species to warrant specific separation at present.
Recorded by Dr. Gilbert from about the peninsula of Alaska, One specimen
- obtained by us on St. Paul. Found by Stejneger and Grebnitzki on Bering and
Medni islands.
480 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
168. Pholidapus dybowskii (Steindachner).
Centronotus dybowskii Steindachner, Ichthy. Beitrige, IX, 1880, 22, northern Japan.
? Pholidapus grebnitskii Bean and Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1896, 390, Yeso, Japan.
Five specimens, the largest 25 cm. long, from Shana Bay, Iturup Island. Stein-
dachner’s excellent and detailed description leaves nothing to be desired, and corre-
sponds perfectly with our material except in the character of the scales. <A careful
examination of these under high magnification fails to show that they are ‘‘am hinteren
Rande mit kurzen Zihnchen bewaffnet.” The posterior border is entire and the -
scales strongly marked with concentric striz. Dorsal spines number 62, 63, 63, 64, 64.
Dorsal ocelli are present in all our specimens, two of them being faintly visible even
in the youngest, 55 mm. long.
Pholidapus grebnitskiit may differ in the shorter dorsal fin (57 spines) and in the
absence of teeth on the vomer, if these details are correctly reported.
The genus Pholidapus is closely related to Opisthocentrus, differing in the naked
cheeks, the dentition, and in the less differentiation of the posterior dorsal spines.
169. Opisthocentrus ocellatus (Tilesius). (Plate LXXIX.)
Opisthocentrus quinquemaculatus Kner.
Blenniophidium petropauli Boulenger.
? Opisthocentrus tenuis Bean and Bean.
Numerous specimens: Tareinsky Bay, Kamchatka; Petropaulski Harbor; Shana
Bay, Iturup Island. Recorded by Dr. Bean from Petropaulski.
The number of dorsal ocelli varies from 5 to 9 in our specimens, 6 being the pre-
vailing number. Of 24 specimens whose fins we have examined, 4 have 58 dorsal
spines, 10 have 59, 5 have 60, and 5 have 61. In addition, 1 specimen has but 55
spines. The latter is the only male in the collection, and is conspicuous by the absence
of distinct dorsal ocelli and the great height of the vertical fins, the longest dorsal
spine exceeding the length of the pectoral and contained 1} times in head. In females
the longest spine is 2+ in head.
The anal contains 36 to 39 rays in all our specimens. The dorsal fin is composed
exclusively of spines, the anterior flexible ones passing into the strong pungent ones
near the posterior end. The stronger spines vary from 7 to 12 in number in our
specimens.
Our material answers the description of the type, which had 57 dorsal spines and
36 anal rays. It also agrees with specimens from Petropaulski, reported on by Bean
and Bean (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 1896, 391), with dorsal spines 58in number. Blenni-
ophidium petropauli Boulenger (Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1892, 583) has but 52 dorsal
spines, but it is otherwise not to be distinguished from O. quinquemaculatus. Still
more aberrant are 4 specimens from northern Japan reported on by Steindachner
(Ichthy. Beitrige, IX, 25), with but 50 to 53 spines and 32 to 34 anal rays. .
Opisthocentrus tenuis Bean and Bean, from Yeso, D., 54; A., 38, is probably not
a distinct species, although differing from any specimen examined by us. Our first
impression on examining the type was that it was a valid species.
170. Pholis fasciatus (Bloch and Schneider).
Blennius tenia, Pallas, Zoogr. Rosso-Asiat., III, 1811, 178. Kuril Islands.
Muraenoides maxillaris Bean, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., 1881, 147. (St. Paul.)
Pholis tenia Bean and Bean, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., 1896, 388.
Three large specimens from St. Paul Island, the type locality of P. maxillaris,
have been compared with a number of individuals of Pholis fasciatus from Upernavik,
THE FISHES OF BERING SEA. 481
Greenland. We can appreciate no differences between the two. The size of the
mouth and the length of the head are the same in specimens of equal length, and no
difference exists in the development of the ventrals. The agreement seems to be
perfect in the fin rays, relative proportions, and coloration.
Pallas’s short account of Blennius tenia contains nothing distinctive except the
number of fin rays and the statement that the body is banded. As both of these
items agree with the present species, we may safely follow Bean and Bean in making
the identification.
This species has been recorded by Gilbert from Bristol Bay, and by Dr. Bean
from Petropaulski and St. Paul.
In a specimen from St. Paul, 29 em. long, the length of the maxillary is contained.
2¢ times in distance from tip of snout to origin of dorsal; the mandible equals the
length of the pectoral. In a younger specimen, 15 cm. long, from Bristol Bay, the
maxillary is contained 3} in predorsal length; the mandible approximately equals
length of pectoral.
171. Pholis ornatus (Girard).
Abundant at Captains Harbor and Ilialiuk, Unalaska. Two specimens, agreeing
entirely with the above, taken by Mr. Barrett-Hamilton at Bering Island, D.; LX XVII
and LX XIX; A., II, 35 and II, 37.
Dr. Gilbert rocorde the species from Herendeen Bay, and Dr. Bean from Kadiak,
Shumagins, Belkofski, Unalaska, Atka, Adakh, Amchitka, Attu, and Port Moller.
Stejneger and Grebnitzki found it on Bering and Medni islands.
172. Pholis pictus (Kner). Plate LXXXa.)
Orocentrus pictus Kner, Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad. d. Wissensch., LVIII, 1868, ». 51, taf. VII,
fig. 21.
ane pictus Steindachner, Ichth. Beitrige, IX, p. 25..
Numerous specimens from Shana Bay, Iturup Island. As already shown by
Steindachner, this is a typical Pholis, Kner having been in error in ascribing to it an
isolated and channeled first anal spine. The ventral spines are bound down by the
integument more closely than usual, but they are in other respects not peculiar.
Each is accompanied by two short spinous rays, concealed in the membrane and
difficult to detect. The latter are stiff and pungent, and seem to be not articulated.
The veutrals of P. ornatus show the same structure. Kner gives the anal formula as
II, 40. This must be a misprint for I, 49, as the artist figures 51 rays in the fin, not
differentiating the two anterior ones.
D., 94 to 104 in length to base of caudal. Depth, 8 to 10; D., XCIII or XCIV;
A., II, 46 to 48.
173. Pholis dolichogaster (Pallas).
Gunnellus ruberrimus Cuvier and Valenciennes, Hist. Nat. Poiss., XI, 440.
One specimen, 18 em. long, taken by Mr. Barrett-Hamilton at Bering Island.
Also, taken by Stejneger and Grebnitzki on Bering and Medni islands and at Volcano
Bay, Yeso.
The color is cherry-red on the body and fins; lighter on ‘belly, lower half of cheeks,
and under sideof head. Lips blackish anteriorly, a narrow black streak running from
them along snout to eye and from eye across cheeks and opercles toward upper edge
of pectoral base. This line separates the deep red upper part of the head from the
5947—pT 3——31
482 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
lighter area below. Sides of body with a number of minute scattered black spots.
Along middle of sides is a distant series of light spots as large as pupil, the margin:
of each with 2 to 4 black specks, like those scattered over sides.
The dorsal and anal are more widely joined to the caudal than in other species,
the fins being higher posteriorly and without perceptible notch. This does not seem
sufficient ground for generic division. The dorsal contains 93 spines; the anal 2 spines
and 47 rays; the pectorals 15 rays. Head, 93 in length; depth, 73. Eye, 5 in head;
maxillary, 33; pectorals, 24; caudal, 24. Ventral spine, 21 in eye.
Blennius dolichogaster (Pallas) is undoubtedly identical with the present well-known
species. They agree in the very long dorsal and anal fins (D., XCITI; A., I, 50 in
dolichogaster), and in the color. Dolichogaster is described as having the color
brownish-olive, shaded with greenish and yellowish, spotted with green above the
lateral line, belly yellow; anal, caudal, and pectorals yellowish; dorsal and anal dusky,
with transverse pale bars. Compare with this details of coloration recently published
concerning P. ruberrimus by Bean and Bean, (Procs. U.S. Nat. Mus. 1896.248). “Color
olive-brown, with minute black spots; belly yellowish.” In another specimen: ‘Across
the spinous dorsal there are 20 narrow, nearly vertical pale streaks. Similar streaks,
to the number of 12, cross the anal.” The species is evidently not always red in life.
174. Enedrias nebulosus (Schlegel). (Plate LXXXb.)
For comparison we present a figure of this species, which was collected by the
Albatross in Hakodate Harbor. -In 7 specimens the dorsal spines are 78, 79, 80, 80,
81, 81, 81; anal, IT, 37; II, 38; II, 38; II, 39; II, 39; IT, 39; If, 40. In 4 specimens
from Tokio, with which these have been compared, the dorsal spines are 81, 82, 82, 83;
the anal, II, 39; II, 39; Il, 40; 11,40. The dorsal formula is given by Schlegel as 74,
but his artist represents 78 spines.
Pholis nebulosus may be taken as the type of a distinct genus, Hnedrias, distin-
guished from Pholts by the scaly head.
This species is recorded by Bean and Bean from Yeso, where it was taken by
Grebnitzki.
175. Xiphistes chirus (Jordan and Gilbert).
Recorded by Dr. Bean from Adakh and Amchitka.
176. Alectrias alectrolophus (Pallas).
Three small specimens, 75 to 209 mm. long, taken at Tareinsky Bay by Mr.
Barrett-Hamilton. Also recorded from Grebnitzki’s collection from Petropaulski and
Stejneger’s from Bering and Copper islands.
They differ from specimens of Anoplarchus atropurpureus in the higher crest, the
more numerous fin rays, and in having the gill membranes posteriorly free from the
isthmus. The latter character will define the new genus Alectrias Jordan and
Evermann.
Head 6% in length; depth 72; D., LXII or LXIII; A.,43. Mouth oblique, maxil-
lary reaching vertical behind pupil, 2} in head. Teeth in narrow bands on the jaws,
the outer series in upper jaw somewhat enlarged; vomer and palatines with narrow
bands of teeth. The dentition is similar to that in Anoplarchus atropurpureus, which
has been erroneously described as having the teeth in the jaws in single series and the
vomer and palate toothless. The gill membranes are rather narrowly joined to the
isthmus and have a free posterior edge slightly wider than pupil. A. atropurpureus
THE FISHES OF BERING SEA. 483
has the gill opening somewhat more restricted and the gill membranes without free
fold. Large pores on head arranged similarly in the two species.
Spinous dorsal beginning slightly in advance of base of pectoral, its distance from
snout less than length of head. Distance from origin of anal to tip of snout 22 in
length to base of caudal. Pectoral short and broad, rounded, 24 in head.
Scales small, embedded, those on the anterior part of the body concealed by the
thickened integument, as in A. atropurpureus.
Coloration in our specimens nearly uniform dark olive, with obscure dusky mot-
tlings on the side. In one specimen there is a light bar extending obliquely downward
and backward from eye, with a dark bar above and below it, the three separated ‘by
narrow light-gray lines. The caudal is narrowly cross-banded with light and dark, as
in atropurpureus, and the anal is obliquely barred with the same. In the smallest
specimen is a series of roundish spots about as large a8 eye along back just below
dorsal fin. Each spot seems to have a narrow dark margin, a light ring, a dusky
ring, and a light center. A series of similar but smaller spots along middle of sides
posteriorly. The colors were probably brighter and more varied in life.
177. Anoplarchus atropurpureus (Kittlitz).
Found at St. Paul Island. Recorded by Dr. Gilbert from Unalaska and by Dr.
Bean from Unalaska, Atka, Amchitka, Kiska, and St. Michael.
178. Stichzeus punctatus (Fabricius).
Recorded from Bristol Bay by Dr. Gilbert, and by Dr. Bean from Kadiak and St.
Michael.
179. Leptoclinus maculatus (Fries).
Three small specimens from station 3650, off Robben Reef, near the Kamchatka
coast; 28 fathoms. No comparison has been made with Atlantic specimens. The
lateral line is much more distinct than in our specimens of Lumpenus medius, where it
can be made out with difficulty on scattered scales along middle of sides. The species
was also recorded by Dr. Gilbert from Unimak Pass and Bristol Bay. One specimen
was taken by us off Karluk.
180. Lumpenus anguillaris (Pallas).
Recorded from Unalaska by Dr. Gilbert, and by Dr. Bean from Tidak’ and
Point Belcher.
181. Lumpenus mackayi Gilbert.
Described from Nushagak River, Alaska.
182. Lumpenus fabricii (Reinhardt).
Numerous specimens taken by Dr. Gilbert in Bristol Bay. D., LXIIT; A., I, 42.
We are unable to distinguish them from others taken at Upernavik and in the Gulf
of St. Lawrence.
The Bristol Bay specimens are paler in color, but not otherwise different. Lum-
penus nubilus Richardson is not distinct from LZ. fabricii. Most specimens have
small teeth on the palatines, but in two or three examples, and in the young, these
are not appreciable. The specimens from Petropaulski and Plover Bay referred by
Bean and Bean to Lumpenus anguillaris (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1896, 386) seem to
belong rather to L. fabricit. The number of fin rays in the true anguillaris are
greater.
484 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
183. Lumpenus medius (Reinhardt). (Plate LXXXI).
We have had no Atlantic material for comparison, and make this identification on
the basis of the current figures and descriptions. The dorsal contains 59 to 61 spines
in our specimens; no vomerine teeth are present, and three or four teeth only on the
front of each palatine bone. Very young specimens have a series of short dark
dashes along middle of body. Adults are nearly uniformly light, with a few very
faint roundish dark spots and indistinct blotches or bars on the dorsal fin. The
progressive lengthening of the posterior anal rays in this species does not seem to
us of sufficient importance to warrant the retention of the genus Anisarchus.
184. Poroclinus rothrocki Bean.
Recorded by Dr. Gilbert from near Unalaska.
Family ANARHICHADID.
185. Anarhichas lepturus Bean.
This species is said to occur in abundance about St. Paul, but we did not find it.
Recorded by Dr. Bean from St. Michael and found by Stejneger on Bering Island.
186. Anarhichas orientalis Pallas.
Recorded from Kamchatka; perhaps the same as the preceding. In any event
no recent writer has observed it.
Family CRYPTACANTHODID£&.
187. Delolepis virgatus Bean.
Found by Dr. Gilbert at Unalaska; originally described from Kingcombe Inlet
and Wrangel.
188. Lyconectes aleutensis Gilbert.
Described from north of Unalaska Island.
Family PTILICHTHYIDA.
189. Ptilichthys gcodei Bean.
Dredged by Dr. Gilbert at Unalaska; originally described from Port Levashef,
Unalaska.
Family ZOARCIDA.
190. Lyciscus crotalinus (Gilbert).
Sannak Islands.
191. Furcimanus diapterus (Gilbert).
North of Unalaska. The genus Furcimanus is well distinguished by its forked
pectoral from Lycenchelys, which it otherwise resembles.
192. Lycodes concolor Gill and Townsend.
Deep waters of Bering Sea.
193. Lycodes digitatus Gill and Townsend.
Deep waters of Bering Sea. This species may prove to be the adult of Lycodes
palearis.
194. Lycodes brevipes Bean.
From numerous localities about Unalaska. Dredged by us off Karluk.
THE FISHES OF BERING SEA,
195. Lycodes palearis Gilbert.
From Bristol Bay.
196. Lycodalepis turneri Bean.
Described from St. Michael and Plover Bay. Found by
Mr. Scofield at Point Barrow. Lycodes coccineus Bean, from
Big Diomede Island, Bering Strait, is identical with this
species, being based on a specimen with some scales on the
tail.
197. Bothrocara mollis Bean.
Bothrocara mollis Bean, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 1890, 38.
Maynea brunnea Bean, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 1890, 39.
One adult and two young, the latter 14 and 17 cm. long,
from station 3634, off Bogoslof Island, depth 664 fathoms.
Bothrocara mollis was evidently based on the young of May-
nea brunnea, in which the vomerine and palatine teeth are
absent, or very weakly developed and hidden under the skin.
In our young specimens the head is 54 or 54 in total length,
the depth of body about 10. The eye is 34 in head. The
maxillary reaches nearly to below middle of eye. The large
mucous cavities are conspicuous along mandible, subocular
ring, and top of head. The length of fins is as described
for the type of B. mollis.
Our young specimens are especially valuable for compari-
son with Bothrocara pusilla, which apparently does not reach
a large size. The differences assigned to distinguish the two
species are valid, B. pusilla being more elongate and less
compressed, with shorter head, much smaller mouth, and
with much less development of the mucous cavities. In B.
mollis the gill openings are wider, with narrower isthmus, the
anterior end of the cleft being under the posterior margin of
eye, and the width of the isthmus less than half diameter of
pupil. In B. pusilla the anterior end of gill cleft is under
the margin of the preopercle, and the width of isthmus is
equal to half the diameter of the orbit, or but slightly less.
As it is doubtful whether either species belongs to the
Antarctic genus Maynea, we retain for the present the genus
Bothrocara.
198. Bothrocara pusilla Bean.
Recorded from north of Unalaska.
199. Gymnelis viridis Fabricius.
Found at Unalaska and Bristol Bay by Dr.Gilbert. Also
recorded by Dr. Bean from Shumagin, St. Michael, Unalaska,
and Plover Bay. Found by Stejneger on Medni Island.
200. Gymnelis stigma (Lay and Bennett).
One specimen obtained by the Albatross at station 3688,
near St. Paul Island. Originally described from Kotzebue
Bay.
485
Bothrocara mollis. Oi Bogoslof
Island. Anna L. Brown del.
486 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
This species seems to differ from Gymnelis viridis in the more backward insertion
of the dorsal, at least an eye’s diameter behind the pectoral, and in the presence of a
large, jet-black ocellated spot on the dorsal over the vent. The small white spots
on anterior part of the body were apparently taken by Dr. Collie, its discoverer, for
“very small scales.” The species is naked, and this discrepancy led Richardson to
redescribe this form as Gymnelis viridis var. unimaculatus. Richardson’s figures of
the two forms (Last Arctic Voyage) are excellent. Whether they are really distinct
remains to be proved. ;
Family LYCODAPODID@.
201. Lycodapus extensus Gilbert.
From off Unalaska.
202. Lycodapus parviceps Gilbert.
From near Unalaska. 2
Family GADID#.
203. Lota maculosa (Le Sueur).
In the Yukon, Nushagak, and other rivers of northern Alaska.
204. Theragra chalcogramma (Pallas).
Unalaska, St. Paul, St. George, Bering Island, Petropaulski; station 3651, off
Robben Reef, depth 20 fathoms. Everywhere abundant. The following notes are
from adult specimens:
Olivaceous above, sides silvery, with two interrupted stripes of dark, brassy olive
along sides; these irregular on their edges, each about half width of eye; a trace of
a third similar stripe below anteriorly, the stripes very irregular; back mottled
Dorsal plain dark olive; pectoral quite dark; lower fins ashy; caudal ashy olive.
D., 12, 14, 18; A., 19, 20. Ventral nearly to vent; pectoral to anal, 14 in head;
eye 5; snout 34; maxillary 24. Head 4; depth 6.
The Alaskan pollack seems to be the type of a distinct genus, for which Mr. Lucas
suggests the name of Theragra. The following is Mr. Lucas’s note on the genus:
The Alaskan pollack differs from the Atlantic pollack in having 19 precaudal and 33 caudal
vertebrx instead of 23 precaudals and 32 caudals; the bodies of the vertebra are also slightly longer
and more deeply sculptured in the Alaskan fish and the spinous process of the anterior dorsals less
elevated.
The greatest differences between the two species; however, are to be found in tho gill covers, for
the suboperculum of the Alaskan pollack is thick, smooth, and dense, instead of being thin and squa-
mous. The postclavicle is also similar in structure, while its proximal portion is subcircular in the
Alaskan species and rhomboidal in the Atlantic. This ivory-like character of the suboperculum and
post clavicle is so marked [in the Alaskan form] that it serves to distinguish these bones at a glance,
being entirely different from what is found in the corresponding bones of other gadoids.
The vertebral differences between the two fishes are merely differences of degree and of specific
value only, but the differences between the subopercula and postclavicula are differences in kind,
distinguishing the Alaskan pollack not only from the Atlantic pollack, but from other gadoids. This
being the case, it is proposed to establish a distinct genus for the Alaskan pollack, and the name
Theragra is proposed for this genus. (F.A.L.)
205. Gadus macrocephalus Tilesius., Codfish.
Everywhere common; taken at Karluk, Belkofski, Unga, Unalaska, St. Paul, St.
George, Bering Island.
THE FISHES OF BERING SEA. F 487
206. Boreogadus saida (Lepechin).
Common northward. Recorded by Turner from St. Michaels and by Scofield
from Herschel Island, Point Barrow, and Port Clarence.
207. Bleginus navaga (Kélreuter).
Petropaulski; station 3642, in Avatcha Bay, Kamchatka, depth 16 fathoms.
Recorded by Dr. Bean from Kadiak, St. Michaels, and Port Clarence, and by Mr. Sco-
field from Port Clarence; found at Petropaulski and Bering Island by Stejneger and
Grebnitzki.
208. Antimora microlepis (Bean). .
Originally described from off Queen Charlotte Islands. A specimen taken off
Bogoslof, station 3634, 664 fathoms. The filainentous ray of first dorsal is 14 times in
head instead of twice as described by Bean, and the eye is slightly shorter than snout.
Our specimen is somewhat larger than the type, however. Recorded by Dr. Gilbert:
from about St. Paul in deep water.
Family MACROURID.
209. Macrourus cinereus Gilbert.
Numerous specimens from station 3634, off Bogoslof Island, in 664 fathoms.
Originally described from near Unalaska.
210. Macrourus acrolepis Bean. (Plate LXXXII.)
One small specimen taken from station 3634, off Bogoslof Island, in 664 fathoms.
It agrees with other specimens from the coast of Oregon. The first dorsal in all has
11 rays.
211. Macrourus lepturus Gill and Townsend.
Deep waters of Bering Sea. Macrourus dorsalis Gill and Townsend, is the same
species, and it is very close to M. acrolepis, but the first dorsal has a greater number
of rays.
212. Albatrossia pectoralis (Gilbert).
Two adult specimens dredged by the Albatross in 664 fathoms, off Bogoslof Island,
station 3634, The species was known heretofore only from off the Oregon coast.
Nematonurus magnus Gill and Townsend, is the same species. This species is widely
different from Malacocephalus, and is the type of the genus Albatrossia.
The name Albatrossia is given in honor of the vessel of the United States Fish
Commission, the use of which for purposes of scientific investigation has shed luster
on American science and added enormously to the knowledge of the life of the depths
of the sea.
213. Bogoslovius clarki Jordan and Gilbert, new species. (Plate LXXXIII.)
The genus Bogoslovius Jordan and Evermann differs from Chalinura in having
the premaxillary teeth in two distinct series (as in Albatrossia), those of the inner
series small and representing the usual villiform band. The scales are also much
more spinous than in the species of Chalinura, and the ventral filament is much
produced. The type species, B. clarki, shows the following characters:
Snout short, slightly exceeding diameter of eye, 3,% in head, median and nasal
ridges very little projecting anteriorly, without radiating spines; tip of snout very
488 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
little projecting beyond the mouth, for a distance not exceeding one-third the inter-
space between ends of median and nasal ridge. Infraorbital ridge inconspicuous,
scarcely extending beyond the eye.
Mouth large, oblique, the lower jaw included, the maxillary nearly reaching
vertical from posterior edge of orbit, 24 in head. Outer premaxillary teeth slender,
sharp, unequal, rather distant, not very strong, slightly widened and arrow shaped
near tip, becoming very small toward angle of mouth. Within this, and well sepa-
rated from it, a close-set series of short teeth, directed inward. Mandibular teeth
slender, unequal, in a single series corresponding to outer series in upper jaw, slightly
widening at symphysis, which is not prominent. Barbel very short, less than half
diameter of pupil. Eye of moderate size, equaling distance from tip of snout to
middle of anterior nostril, 43 in head, 1,4; in interorbital width. Preopercle broadly
rounded, the angle little produced backward, leaving a strip of interopercle exposed
along its entire length. Gill membranes joined to the isthmus with a narrow free
edge. :
Gill rakers very short and thick, 3+ 12 in number, including rudiments.
Dorsal beginning above base of pectorals, the second spine long, filamentous at
tip, t2 in head, its anterior margin sharply serrate except in basal third. Base of first
dorsal 24 in head. Interspace between dorsals very short, usually less than diameter
of pupil. Pectorals very long and slender, equaling or exceeding length of head
behind snout, their insertion low, below angle of gill arch. Outer ventral ray excess-
ively produced, twice or more than twice length of head in uninjured adults, reaching
base of fiftieth anal ray or beyond. Vent immediately before anal origin.
Scales in a strip along the back firm and very rough, none others preserved in
our specimens. Scales with three to five sharp radiating ridges, each ridge with
several sharply projecting spines, the posterior of which project beyond the margin
of the scale.
Dorsal, 11,12; pectoral, 19; ventral, 10.
Color very light gray, the vertical fins blackish posteriorly. Mouth and gill
cavity and peritoneum jet black.
Four specimens, 24 to 41 cm. long, from station 3634, off Bogoslof Island, in 664
fathoms. The species is named for Mr. George Archibald Clark, secretary of the
Fur-Seal Commission.
214. Bogoslovius firmisquamis (Gill and Townsend).
Dredged in Bering Sea by the Albatross.
Family PLEURONECTIDA,
215. Hippoglossus hippoglossus (Linnaeus).
Generally common. St. Paul, Unalaska, Unga, Karluk,
216. Atheresthes stomias Jordan and Gilbert.
Generally common with the preceding, but reaching a much smaller size.
Unalaska, Unga, Karluk.
217. Hippoglossoides elassodon Jordan and Gilbert.
Perfectly typical specimens from stations 3643 and 3644, off Kamchatkan coast,
in 100 and 96 fathoms. Also taken by us off Karluk, and recorded by Dr. Gilbert
THE FISHES OF BERING SEA. 489
from Aleutian Islands and Bristol Bay. Dr. Bean mentions it from Kadiak, Shuma-
gins, Unalaska, and St. Michael.
Dorsal, 77 to 84; anal, 60 and 61. Pectoral short and broad, less than half length
of head. Interorbital ridge sharp, with a single series of scaled, Gill rakers, 14 in
lower limb of arch.
218. Hippoglossoides robustus Gill and Townsend.
Deep waters of Bering Sea; very close to the next.
219. Hippoglossoides hamiltoni Jordan and Gilbert, new species. (Plate LXXXIV.)
One specimen 17 cm. long, from station 3641, Avatcha Bay, Kamchatka; depth
16 fathoms.
Nearly related to H. elassodon, from which it differs in the fewer fin rays and
scales, the wider interorbital space, the longer caudal and pectoral fins, and the much
smaller symphysial knob. The nasal tubes are larger, the scales rougher, and the
anterior part of lateral line more arched. Its relationship with Hippoglossoides robustus
of the same region is still closer.
Head 3: in length, depth 22. Longest diameter of upper eye, 3 in head; snout
(measured from upper eye) 5 in head; maxillary of colored side 24, of blind side 24 in
head. Depth of caudal peduncle equaling its length, 34 in head. D., 72; A., 56; P.,
11. Pores in lateral line 91. ,
Upper profile of head continuing the dorsal curve without interruption, there
being a slight depression above the eye and an increased convexity on the snout.
The mandible is very heavy, and projects anteriorly so that its symphysial profile
completes the curve of the snout. A very short prominence at symphysis is directed
vertically downward. The gape is strongly curved and the mouth narrowed ante-
riorly so that the maxillary and premaxillary are almost wholly concealed along the
middle of their length by the overarching prefrontal. Teeth acute, in a single series
in each jaw, all except the anterior teeth in each jaw short. At the symphysis of
lower jaw the teeth are longer and directed inward, while in the anterior end of each
premaxillary the teeth are still more enlarged and the series on each side describes a
strong curve with its convex side toward the median Jine. The maxillary reaches
the vertical from slightly behind middle of lower eye. Nostril tubes conspicuous, the
anterior in closest proximity to the upper'lip, which it entirely overhangs. Posterior
nostril tube wider and slightly shorter.
Eyes of nearly equal size and opposite, separated by a wider range than in
H. elassodon, the ridge bearing in its narrowest portion two well-defined rows of strongly
spinous scales. A conspicuous series of pores joining lateral line with upper margin
of upper eye, and another encircling the lower eye below and behind; a third series
along mandible and preopercle; one large pore above posterior nostril. Gill rakers
slender, unarmed, 2 above the angle, 11 or 12 below it, the longest 23 in eye.
Dorsal fin beginning above front of pupil, the longest ray 23 in head. Anal pre-
ceded by a strong spine, its height equaling that of dorsal. Pectoral very long and
slender, two-thirds length of head; that of blind side shorter, half length of head.
Ventrals reaching to base of fourth or fifth anal ray. Caudallong, evenly rounded
behind, the middle rays not longer than those adjacent, their length equaling distance
from tip of snout to preopercular margin.
490 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Scales on colored side strongly ctenoid except in a strip along middle of sides
anteriorly. Elsewhere each scale is provided with two to four long spines. Ou blind
side they are smooth except in nape and caudal peduncle. Cheeks, opercles, and
interorbital space covered with larger rougher scales than those on sides. Mandible
and snout naked. A single series surrounds each eye anteriorly, a series on maxil-
lary of colored side. Blind side of head with maxillary naked, cheeks covered with
minute smooth thin scales, the opercles with a few scattered spinous scales, the preo-
percle naked.
Color nearly uniform brownish, without distinctive markings on body or fins.
The species is named for Mr. Gerald E. H. Barrett-Hamilton, of the British Fur-
Seal Commission.
VERASPER Jordan and Gilbert, new genus.
>This genus is most nearly allied to Xystrurys and Hippoglossina, having few short
gill rakers, like the former, and strongly ctenoid scales, like the latter. It differs
strongly from all its congeners in having premaxillary teeth in two series. The single
type is dextral. The teeth are uniformly small, without canines. The dorsal originates
above the front of pupil. The lateral line is strongly arched above the root of the
pectoral, without recurrent dorsal branch. The scales are extremely spinous. The
gill rakers are short, thick, and triangular, few in number. None of the fin rays are
notably produced or exserted.
Besides the typical species, Verasper moseri, a second species, Verasper variegatus
(Schlegel), is a common food-fish in the waters of the more southern islands of Japan.
220. Verasper moseri, Jordan and Gilbert, new species. (Plate LXXXV.)
One male specimen, 28 cm. long, from Shana Bay, Iturup Island, is the type of
the species; other specimens similar to this were taken in the harbor of Hakodate.
Dorsal, 82; anal, 58; pectoral, 12; pores in lateral line, 84. Head 34 in length to
base of caudal; depth 2; depth of caudal peduncle 4 in greatest depth of body;
length of caudal peduncle, measured axially, 13 in its depth. Head much depressed,
with rather wide flat interorbital space, resembling in appearance Psettichthys melano-
stictus; its thickness at interorbital space equaling distance between pupils of upper
and. lower eyes.
Mouth small, very oblique, the gape strongly arched, the broad maxillary reach-
ing a vertical behind middle of pupil, 2$ in head. Mandible narrowing toward tip,
with very rudimentary symphysial knob. Teeth in the upper jaw in two distinct
series throughout, those of the outer series increasing slightly in size toward front of
jaw, but none of them canine-like. Mandibular tceth in one row, except at symphysis,
where a few teeth form a short outer series. Nasal openings of eyed side approximated
in front of middle of interorbital space. The anterior has a short tube, the posterior
with a raised rim. Eyes small, their anterior margins opposite, the diameter of lower
eye equaling distance from tip of snout to posterior nostril, 64 in head. Interorbital
space rather broad and flat, not ridge-like, its total width equaling half the diameter
of orbit. Gill rakers short, broad, triangular, minutely toothed on inner margin,
one-third diameter of eye; 7 present on horizontal limb of outer arch.
Lateral line with a short, high anterior arch, the chord of which is one-fifth the
straight portion. The height of the arch is one-third its length. Behind the arch,
THE FISHES OF BERING SEA. 491
the lateral line descends ina gentle curve to middle of sides. The scales are very
rough, each possessing several long, sharp spines diverging from median portion of
posterior margin. Anterior and posterior portions of dorsal and anal fins naked, the
rays of the middle portion each with a series of strongly ctenoid seales. Caudal
densely scaled to tip. Pectorals and ventrals naked. Head covered with strongly
spinous scales, excepting snout, maxillary, and mandible. On blind side of head the
snout, jaws, preopercle, subopercle, lower half of opercle, and all but a central strip
on interopercle, scaleless. On blind side the scales are rough on head, ventral area,
and along bases of ventral fins; largely smooth elsewhere.
Dorsal beginning above front of pupil, the rays increasing in length to the forty-
fifth, which is 22 in head. Longest anal ray (the seventeenth), 2+ in head. Caudal
broadly rounded, 12 in head. Pectoral short and broad, 23 in head. Ventrals of
nearly equal length, reaching origin of anal, 33 in head. No anal spine.
Color in spirits: Centers of the scales light gray, the margins dark brown. Fins
light or dusky, the vertical fins with conspicuous black bars parallel with the rays.
These are most evident on the under side, where the pigment seems to principally
occur, and are seen through the fin more faintly on the colored side. Lining of cheeks
and gill cover of colored side dusky. Peritoneum gray. The species is named for
Jefierson F. Moser, U.S.N., commander of the Albatross.
Verasper variegatus (Schlegel), of the same genus, is closely related to V. moseri,
from which it differs chiefly in the much lower and smaller arch of the lateral line.
The fins in this species are spotted'with black, but not barred.
221. Lepidopsetta bilineata (Ayres).
Abundant everywhere in Bering Sea. Our specimens from, St. Paul Island;
station 3637, off St. George, 32 fathoms; Unalaska; Bering Island; MedniIsland. Dr.
Gilbert records the species from Unalaska, Herendeen Bay, Hagemeister Island, and
from various localities about the peninsula of Alaska.
222. Limanda aspera (Pallas).
Common; taken by us at Petropaulski, Avatcha Bay, Kamchatka; stations 3646
and 3647, off Robben Reef, in 18 and 20 fathoms. Recorded by Dr. Gilbert from Bristol
Bay, Herendeen Bay, and many other stations. Dr. Bean mentions it from Sitka,
Kadiak, Shumagins, Port Clarence, Plover Bay, and Indian Point.
223. Limanda proboscidea Gilbert.
Described from Bristol Bay and Herendeen Bay.
224. Pleuronectes quadrituberculatus (Pallas).
Station 3642, Avatcha Bay, 16 fathoms. Station 3647, off Robben Reef, 20 fath-
oms. Recorded by Dr. Gilbert from Chernofski Harbor, Herendeen Bay, and Bristol
Bay, by Dr. Bean from Kadiak, and by Mr. Scofield from Chigink and Port Clarence.
This species is a true Pleuronectes, having the lower pharyngeals narrow, separate,
with two rows of bluntish teeth. It is an ally of Pleuronectes platessa.
225. Liopsetta glacialis (Pallas).
Petropaulski. Recorded by Dr. Gilbert from Bristol Bay, by Dr. Bean from
Kotzebue Sound, and by Mr. Scofield from Port Clarence.
492 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
226. Liopsetta obscura (Herzenstein).
Pleuronectes obscurus Herzenstein, Mélanges Biologiques, 1890, 127.
Two males from Shana Bay, Iturup Island, are referred to this species. The
scales on the colored side are everywhere strongly ctenoid and imbricated, while in the
types (supposed to be females) they were cycloid. In our specimens the head is some-
what smaller, 3.2; in length instead of 3; to 33; the depth is greater, 2} in length
instead of 22 to 2 the interorbital space is covered with very fine scales, not naked;
the curve of the lateral line seems more marked, its chord contained five instead of six
times in the straight portion. All of the fins are higher than in the female types, the
pectoral of colored side being 12 in head, the caudal 13, the ventral half head, and the
highest dorsal ray 12. Some of these differences may well be sexual. The lower
pharyngeals are short and broad, 27 and 29 em. long. The teeth are large and very
blunt, like cobblestones, and are arranged in one row along the outer edge, a row of
larger teeth along the inner edge, and a short row along the posterior edge of the
triangle. The arrangement is very similar to that found in J. glacialis, but here a
few sinall teeth, without definite arrangement, are interposed in the middle of the
bone, between the three series described.
Dorsal, 59 and 62; anal, 45 and 46; tubes in the lateral line, 79.
Color on eyed side, uniform dark brown on body and fins, the extreme tips of the
fin rays white. On blind side the body is yellowish white, with a few irregular scat-
tered dark spots; the dorsal and anal are yellowish at base, becoming more or less
mottled with dusky on distal half, the fins marked with broad, dark bars parallel with
the rays, about 7 on the anal fin, 10 or 11 on the dorsal; caudal light on basal half
more or less blotched with darker, becoming black posteriorly.
With this species we identify also a number of young specimens 9 to 15 cm. long
from the same locality (Iturup Island), They are probably young females, but the
viscera are in such condition as to prevent positive determination. The scales are
perfectly smooth, but in other respects they agree perfectly with the adult males,
except in their more varied coloration. The head and body is brownish, profusely
spotted in coarser or finer pattern with light gray; also with a few scattered black
spots edged with gray. The markings on the fins are as described for adults. In
seven specimens the dorsal contains 60, 62, 62, 62, 64, 65, and 66 ae anal, 45, 45, 45,
46, 47, 47, 48.
227. Platichthys stellatus (Pallas).
Very common; taken by us at St. Paul, Unalaska, Petropaulski, Bering Island,
Robben Island, Karluk, Recorded by Dr. Gilbert from Bristol Bay, and by Dr. Bean
from Kadiak, Unalaska, and St. Michael. Scofield found it abundant at Port Clar.
ence, and Sicineper ‘on Bering Island.
228. Glyptocephalus zachirus Lockington.
Recorded by Dr. Gilbert from various localities about the peninsula of Alaska.
229. Microstomus pacificus (Lockington).
Recorded by Dr. Gilbert from about Unalaska.
LIST OF FISHES OBTAINED IN THE WATERS OF ARCTIC ALASKA.
By Norman BISHOP SCOFIELD.
This report is based on a collection of fishes made in 1896 by the author and Mr.
Alvin Seale, under the auspices of the Hopkins Laboratory of the Leland Stanford
Junior University.
Through the aid of Mr. Timothy Hopkins and of the late Capt. J. N. Knowles, then
president of the Pacific Steam Whaling Company, of San Francisco, the writer, with
Mr. Seale, received passage on the vessels of the company from San Francisco to
Herschel Island and return, and were afforded every opportunity to make collections
at the various ports of call.
Embarking at San Francisco on the J. D. Peters, one of the company’s sailing
vessels, our first stop was at King Island near Bering Strait, where we arrived on
the 3d of July.
King Island is about 10 miles in circumference, with precipitous, rocky sides, on
which it is possible to obtain a footing at only one place. This is occupied by a small
Eskimo village, the summer huts supported on stilts and clinging to the face of the
clifflike birds’ nests. It was impossible to use a seine at this point. With the hook
and line we succeeded in catching only one kind of fish, a sculpin (Myoxocephalus ver-
rucosus). We remained in the neighborhood of the island about a week waiting for
the harbor of Port Clarence to become clear of ice. The winter just passed had been
very severe throughout northern Alaska, and the breaking up of the ice at Port
Clarence, which usually occurs in the latter part of June, did not begin until the
11th of July. We succeeded in entering the harbor on the following day. Herring
and salmon were already running. The smelt (Osmerus dentex) was a little later in
arriving, and the capelin (Mallotus villosus) did not appear until the 25th, the day of
our departure. The lateness of the season retarded the arrival of the anadromous
fishes by about two weeks. We learned later that the same was true for that season
of the fishes which entered the Mackenzie River.
Port Clarence is situated 40 miles southeast of Bering Strait. The main harbor,
which is circular, is about 13 miles across, and is separated from the ocean on the west
by a long, low sand spit. The shores are all low, with gravelly beaches, and the water
averages about 6 fathoms in depth. The inner harbor, known as Grantley Harbor, is
-small and separated from the main port by another sand spit. Flowing into Grantley
Harbor is a river, about a quarter of a mile in width, which is fed by a large lake some
20 or 30 miles from its mouth. During our stay at Port Clarence we made a two days’
trip up this river, and spent the remainder of the two weeks in seining along the
beaches of the two harbors.
From Port Clarence we accompanied the steamer Jeanie on its annual trip to
Herschel Island, stopping on the way at Point Barrow. We stopped at Point Barrow
on our return also, but on both occasions the ice was so thick along the beaches that
we were able to make only a few hauls with the seine. The open season at Point
Barrow is short, extending from the middle of July to the latter part of September,
493
494 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
and there are nearly always large quantities of ice in the neighborhood. The shore
line here, as is indeed the entire Alaskan coast north of Bering Strait, is very low and
monotonous, with gravelly and sandy beaches. The fish are apparently not plentiful, |
and the natives at Point Barrow depend upon them but little for food.
Herschel Island, 80 miles west of the Mackenzie River, was the next and farthest
point reached by us. This island is composed of low clay hills and is about 25 miles
in circumference. Here we remained at the whaling company’s winter quarters from
August 18 until September 5. We were unable to make any extended trips, but did
all of our fishing on the shores of the island and on the opposite mainland, 2 miles
distant. There were no streams in the immediate neighborhood, so that all the fish
taken were from salt water. The herring are usually seen at the island earlier in the
season while on their way to the Mackenzie River, but none were seen by us.
On our return trip, after leaving Bering Sea, we made a stop of two days, Septem-
ber 28 and 29, at Chignik Bay, on the mainland opposite Kadiak Island. The coast
here is very rocky and the sand beaches are few and small, so we obtained but little.
Our collecting during the trip was limited to the four places mentioned: Herschel
Island, Point Barrow, Point Clarence, and Chignik Bay; of these, Port Clarence and
Herschel Island were the only ones favorable for thorough investigation.
1. Clupea pallasi, Cuvier and Valenciennes.
We found this fish abundant at Port Clarence, where it appeared a day or two
after the ice went out of the harbor.
2. Coregonus kennicotti, Milner.
We obtained one large specimen of this species, which was taken by native fisher-
men at Barter Island, near the mouth of the Mackenzie River. D.,10; A., 13; scales
11, 86, 11; gill rakers, 8 + 14, 84 13.
We have compared it with a specimen obtained by Miss Elizabeth Taylor in Great
Bear Lake and find they are the same. A description of the specimen obtained by:
Miss Taylor has been published by Dr. Gilbert, Bull. U. S. Fish Commission, 1894, 23.
3. Coregonus nelsoni Bean.
We found this fish in considerable numbers in the brackish water of Grantley
Harbor. Our largest specimen is 13 inches long; the others but little smaller. The
backs are not so conspicuously humped as in the type, which is a larger and more
mature fish. The distance from snout to nape about twice in distance from nape to
origin of dorsal, but it would be more in a more humpbacked individual. We did not
find this fish at Herschel Island.
Head. | Eye.) Dorsal.| Anal.| Scales. Gill rakers. Locality.
43 12 12 | 10 80 8 7+13 7413 | Grantley Harbor.
4h | 4h 12 | 12 | 9 80 8 | 7412 7413 Do.
45 44 12 12 8 88 8 7413 7415 Do.
4k 5 12 12 | 10 86 8 6412 7413 Do.
AL 5 12 12 9 80 8 6+12 7-413 Do.
43 435 11 12: |sesecemesese 6+12 7415 | Renideu station, Port
Clarence.
4. Argyrosomus pusillus (Bean).
This fish we found quite abundant in the river back of Grantley Harbor. We also
obtained two large specimens from Barter Island near the mouth of the Mackenzie
FISHES OF ARCTIC ALASKA. 495
River. Our specimens show quite a range of variation in the number of gill rakers
and fin rays, given in the accompanying table. One of the specimens from the mouth
of the Mackenzie is the only one that shows perfectly the black markings on the
dorsal, as given in the figure of a similar sea-run individual from northern Alaska.
(Whitefishes of America, Report of ‘U. 8. Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries, 1894.
Plate 23; also same plate in Cruise of steamer Corwin.) In addition to this it has a
few small, round black spots on top of the head and four or five similar spots on
adipose fin. All of the specimens have the articulation of mandible on a vertical with
center of eye. The diameter of eye equals the interorbital width and is greater than
length of snout.
. Gill rak- | Gill rak-
Locality. Length.| ers on ers on | Dorsal.! Anal. | Scales.
a left side. \rightside.
Inches.
16431: | 16432 11 13 92
6 17+32 18432 11 13 83
6 17431 17 11 14 93
6 17431 17+30 10 14 84
6 17-+30 17+30 10 13 85
6 17428 16+ 28 12 14 90
6 14 14429 12 12 84
6 16 Ct 15428 | 11 12 91
34 14428 . 10 1] 83
16428 10 13 a83
Nusbagaik River, Alaska (Albatross coll.) . a 12425 13 12 89
Naknek River, Bristol Bay (Albatross coll. ais 14+26 11 12 90
4 sf
aNo. 46,
5. Argyrosomus lucidus (Richardson). ‘
We obtained two specimens of this species in salt water off Herschel Island.
They are undoubtedly identical with the species found in Great Bear Lake and River.
We have compared them with two specimens from Great Bear River. One of our
specimens has a larger number of scales than the other, but it is not a larger varia-
tion than may be expected within a species of this family.
Besides the fin formula we give a few measurements not included in Jordan and
Evermann’s otherwise full description: Longest dorsal ray,-14 in head; longest anal
ray, 24 in head; pectorals reach less than halfway to origin of veutrals, or 14 in head;
ventrals reach less than halfway to vent, or 12 in head; ventral scale a little over
half length of fin; articulation of mandible with quadrate bone on a vertical with
posterior margin of eye. Length of each specimen, 16 inches.
= an eponsver?
um- Ven- i TOWS 0:
ber. Dorsal.) Anal. tral, | rakers. Seales. scales be-
4 low dorsal.
64 13 13 12 16-426 10 87 10 14
67 11 12 12 15+26 10 98 10 16
6, Argyrosomus alascanus Scofield, new species. (Plate XLII. )
Head, 44; depth, about 4; dorsal, 12; anal, 12; scales, 10, 85,9. Eye a little shorter.
than snout, 5 in head, 14 in interorbital space. Head wedge-shaped, the upper and
lower profiles straight and meeting with a sharp angle at the snout. Viewed from
above the snout is blunt, almost square, with the narrow, pale, rounded tip of the
496 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
lower jaw slightly projecting. Mouth oblique; the distance from the tip of the snout
to tip of maxillary is equal to the distance from the tip of snout to center of pupil;
the maxillary from its anterior articulation is contained 34 in the head, its width 3 in
its length, its upper anterior edge closing under maxillary; mandible, 24 in head, its
articulation with the quadrate bone beneath the posterior edge of the eye; width of
supplemental bone a little more than one-half width of maxillary. Preorbital broad,
its greatest width equals three-eighths of its length or diameter of pupil; width of
supraorbital equals two-sevenths ofitslength. Gill rakers, 12 to 14 + 21 to 23, long and
slender, the longest two-thirds diameter of the eye. The tongue, vomer, and palatine
without teeth. Distance from tip of snout to nape equal one-half the distance from
the nape to the front of the dorsal, or two-thirds length of head. Adipose fin large;
ventral scale one-half length of fin; longest dorsal ray, 13 in head; longest anal ray, 2
in head; the pectorals reach more than half way to the ventrals; the ventrals reach
two-thirds distance to vent; the caudal is forked for a little more than one-half its
length. Color dusky above, silvery beneath; the dorsal, adipose fin, tips of caudal
rays, and upper side of anterior pectoral rays dusky; fins otherwise pale. The fish
appears to be nearest related to Argyrosomus artedi, but it differs considerably in
number of gill rakers. We obtained but three specimens of this fish—one in salt
water at Point Hope, the other two in brackish water at Grantley Harbor. The largest
one is 104 inches in length.
~ Locality. Length. Gill rakers. Dorsal.| Anal. | Scales.
Inches.
Grantley Harbor....-....-. 84 14423 14422 |. 12 14 88
DO sc csecsinccscacsavsses 9 14422 124-22 12 12 87
Point Hope, Alaska........ 11 134+21 12421 12 12 85 |
7. Stenodus mackenziei (Richardson).
We obtained three specimens of this fish, one of which was brought to us by the
whaling vessel, the other two by native fisherman. All three are trom the mouth of
the Mackenzie River, and, as far as we could learn, it has never been seen any place
else by either natives or white people. The largest specimen is 35 inches in length.
This may be the same as the Siberian species Stenodus leucichthys (Giildenstadt), but
it is impossible to decide as the descriptions of that species are inadequate.
Head, 43; depth, 5; D., 13; A., 15; scales, 12, 103, 10; gill rakers, 6416, the
longest equaling diameter of eye; branchiostegal rays, 10; eye, 1,8; in snout, 14 in inter-
orbital space, 74 in head; snout, 44 in head; maxillary from its articulation, 3 in head;
from tip of snout to end of maxillary, 27 in head, its width contained 44 times in its
length, its end reaching vertical behind eye. Supplemental bone, 44 in head; its width
4 in its length, its anterior end notched; the point above the notch sharp, the lower
point rounded.
Preorbital, 4% in length of head; its greatest width, 24 in itslength. Mouth large,
the lower jaw projecting considerably beyond the upper. Tips of upper and lower
jaws, the palatines, vomer, and tongue with bands of short bristle-like teeth.
Distance from tip of snout to nape, 33 times into distance from tip of snout to
front of dorsal; front of dorsal nearer the median caudal rays than tip of snout by
width of eye; origin of ventral a width of eye behind the front of the dorsal. Adipose
FISHES ‘OF ARCTIC ALASKA. 497
fin large, inserted over the last rays of the anal; its height, 4in head. The ventrals
reach more than halfway to front of anal. The height of the dorsal, 1% in head; the
pectorals are slightly larger than ventrals, 14 in head; depth of caudal peduncle, 34
in head.
8. Oncorhynchus gorbuscha (Walbaum).
We found this species quite abundant at Port Clarence about the middle of July,
at which time it was commencing to run up the river back of the inner harbor. The
one specimen obtained by us is 16 inches long; its dorsal, 11; anal, 14; scales, 199
tranverse rows or 162 in lateral line; gill rakers, 13+17; ventral appendage nearly
two-thirds length of fin. The natives catch this fish by means of nets about 30 feet
long, one edge of which they attach at the edge of the water, shoving the other end
out with a pole in such a position that when the salmon strike the net they follow
along it toward the shore. When a sufficient number has congregated at the net the
outer end is pulled in by means of a rope attached for the purpose.
9. Oncorhynchus nerka (Walbaum).
At Chignik Bay we took four of the young of this species—specimens about 3
inches in length. We took six of the young of this species at Grantley Harbor; they
are about 5 inches long.
10. Salvelinus malma (Walbaum).
Specimens were obtained at Port Clarence, Point Hope, and Herschel Island. The
natives of Herschel Island catch this fish through holes in the ice at all times during
the winter.
11. Mallotus villosus (Miiller).
We found this fish only at Port Clarence, where it first appeared on the 24th of
July. On this day we observed them in great numbers in the edge of the water near
the sandy beach. They ran in small schools and were doubtless spawning. The
natives caught great quantities of them with small dip nets. We have compared our
specimens with others from Greenland and find no differences.
12. Osmerus dentex Steindachner.
We took several specimens at Port Clarence, where they were quite abundant.
They agree with Steindachner’s description ‘in all except the folléwing: The head is
contained a little over 4 times in length of body without caudal, instead of 32, and
there is no spur-like scale between the ventrals. We have dompared it with speci-
mens from Kamchatka and can find no differences.
13. Mesopus olidus (Pallas).
Head, 44; eye, 33; depth, 63. D.,9; A., 14; P., 11; V., 8; scales, 55 to 60; gill
rakers, 94-20, the longest two-thirds of eye; snout slightly shorter than eye; maxil-
lary reaching to center of pupil, or slightly less than 3 in head; least depth of caudal
peduncle equaling snout; the longest rays of the dorsal contained 6 or 7 times in the
length. The pectorals reach from four-fifths to two-thirds distance to base of ventrals,
contained 5 or 6 in the length; the rays of the pectorals and ventrals are slightly
enlarged at the base. The color is dusky, silvery below; no very evident silvery band
along lateral line. The scales are insecurely attached and rub off easily. We found
this fish quite abundant in the river back of Grantley Harbor. ,
5947—pT 3 —32
498 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
14. Pygosteus pungitius (Linnieus).
We obtained but one small specimen of this fish, which was taken from the
throat of a specimen Osmerus dentew at Grantley Harbor. The dorsal and anal fin
rays are in greater numbers than is usual, being: D., IX, 11; A., I, 10. The ventral
spines are almost one-half length of head.
Following are the dorsal and anal formule of five specimens from Nushagak,
Alaska, collected by the Albatross:
| Dorsal. Anal.
|
ee
COHeK Oo
HAAR
=
i—)
aac
In all, the ventral spines are slightly less than one-half of head.
15. Gasterosteus cataphractus (Pallas).
We found this fish abundant in the river at Grantley Harbor. They agree
perfectly with specimens from Kamchatka, the type locality. They also agree well
with Richardson’s description and figure of Gasterosteus insculptus from Northum-.
berland Sound. They are more robust than the southern form; the caudal keel is
more strongly developed; the pectorals are a little longer and stronger; the spines
are heavier, the lateral plates reach farther down on the sides, and their posterior
edges are much rougher.
This southern form is Gasterosteus serratus Ayers. (Proc. Cal. Ac. Sci., 1855, 47.)
The following is the fin count of our four specimens:
Dorsal. Anal. Pectoral. |
IIr 12 I 9 10
Tit 11 I 8 10
TI 12 I 8 10
III 12 I 9 10
16.Ammodytes personatus (Girard).
Type locality: Cape Flattery, Washington.
Measurements of two specimens from Chignik, Alaska: D., 60; A.,28, Head, 44
in length; depth, 11. Eye, 14 in snout and 43 in head. Lateral folds, 140 The pec
torals reach past front of dorsal and are a little longer than one-half head. D.., 61;
A., 30. Head, 44; depth, 103. Eye, 15 in snout and 5 in head; lateral folds 138;
pectorals a little longer than one-half head.
Port Clarence: D., 54; A., 28. Head, 44; depth 11. Eye, 14 in snout or 44 in
head; lateral folds, 140.
Summer Bay, Unalaska: D., 61; A.,31; Head,5; depth,9. Eye, 64; lateral folds,
173. Pectoral one-half head.
We have compared these specimens with specimens from the type locality of
Ammodytes personatus, and we are unable to find any difference between them. The
specimens from Neah Bay near Cape Flattery show more rays in the dorsal and anal
FISHES OF ARCTIC ALASKA. 499
and less depth to the body than is given by Girard in his original description of A.
alascanus. There is but little doubt that A. alascanus and A. personatus are the same.
We can find no difference between our specimens and one specimen from Green-
land. All are probably identical with Ammodytes tobianus of Europe.
The following shows the number of fin rays and lateral folds of specimens:
From Port Clarence,
Alaska. From Puget Sound.
D : Lateral 4) | Lateral
orsal.| Anal. fold. |Dorsal.| Anal. | “Rig.
61 29 145 59 30 138
58 28 138 59 30 151
56 28 140 59 31 140
57 28 140 59 28 151
58 29 140 58 30 148
53 26 136 57 29 133
59 29 135 58 30 149
58 28 147 59 29 138
58 27 145 “87 29 148
60 30 139 58 29 143
‘
From Upernavik, Greenland: Dorsal, 58; anal, 30; lateral fold, 140.
17. Myoxocephalus polyacanthocephalus (Pallas).
We took three specimens of this fish at Chignik Bay, Alaska. They are in no
way different from specimens of the same species from Unalaska or Puget Sound.
D., X,14; A.12. D., X,15; A.,12. D., X,15; A, 12,
18. Myoxocephalus jaok (Cuvier and Valenciennes).
Specimens of this species were taken at Port Clarence. and Grantley Harbor.
The number of. preopercular spines vaties; in the young there are four, in older
specimens the.third spine from the top may be only a -tubercle or entirely wanting.
In most of the specimens the caudal has two. narrow, vertical wavy bands on its
posterior half; in one of the specimens the color on the caudal shows.no tendency to
form in bands.
Our specimens show the following number of spines and rays:
Dorsal. Anal. Pepto
xX 15 13 18
IxX 15 4 17
IX 16 14 18
19. Myoxocephalus verrucosus (Bean).
Type locality: Plover Bay, Siberia.
We obtained seven specimens of A. verrucosus: four at Kings Island, two at Port
‘Clarence, and one at Grantley Hafbor. We have compared them with specimens
taken by the Albatross on Bristol Bay (Rep. U.S. Fish Comm., 1896, 421), and these
have in turn been compared by Dr. Bean with the type of the species. Six of our
specimens have eleven dorsal spines; the other, ten. In the sixteen specimens taken
by the Albatross only one has eleven dorsal spines; the rest have ten. In our speci-
mens the fins are a trifle larger and the maxillary slightly longer.
500 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Dorsal. Anal, Locality.
XI 17 13 Kings Island.
XI 17 14 10.
XI 16 13 Do.
XI 16 13 Do.
XI 16 13 Port Clarence.
XI 1€ 13 Do.
xX 16 13 | ‘Grantley Harbor.
20. Myoxocephalus axillaris (Gill).
Cottus axillaris, Bean, in Nelson’s Rep. Nat. Hist. Coll. Alaska, Pl. XVI, fig. 2.
Head, 23; horizontal diameter of orbit, 5 in head and.14 in snout; interorbital
space, 6 in head; depth, 44; maxillary reaches the vertical with posterior edge of eye
and is contained 24 times in the head; dorsal, IX or X, 15 or 16; anal, 11 or 12; pec-
toral, 15 or 16; caudal, 9 branched rays; lateral line, 40.
Head wide and depressed; mouth horizontal, lower jaw included; nasal spine well
developed, but completely covered by the skin. The preopercle has a straight spine
at its upper angle, almost covered with skin and equal in length to the vertical diameter
of the orbit; a second spine immediately below this, completely covered by the skin
and one-half as long as upper spine; at the lower angle of the preopercle there is a
tubercle. The opercle has a strong horizontal spine at its upper angle, completely
embedded in the membrane and not reaching the edge of the gill flap. At the lower
angle of the opercle there is a small downward-directed spine, also completely covered
by skin. Suprascapular spine well developed, but completely embedded. Pectoral
spine blunt and covered. The occipital ridges are scarcely elevated; four broad, con-
spicuous tentacles, corresponding to the positions of the supraocular and occipital
tubercles. The orbital rims are considerably elevated, having a flat, depressed space
between them. Top of the head covered with small wart-like protuberances. Above
the lateral line there is a row of osseous plates, smaller and more closely placed beneath
the second dorsal; a similar scattered row below the lateral line just beneath the:
second dorsal. The longest ray of the first dorsal (the fourth or fifth) 23 times in
head; the first six rays about equal in length. The second dorsal is higher and about
the same shape as the first; the longest ray 15% in head. The caudal truncated, the
corners about square. The pectorals are large and reach to the second ray of anal.
The ventrals scarcely reach the vent.
Color above quite dark, strongly marked with black and white; a saddle of black
under the anterior three-fourths of first dorsal; there are two similar but smaller
saddle markings over the back below the second dorsal, one beneath the anterior, the
other beneath the posterior end; a black blotch on the side of the caudal peduncle, a
characteristic marking in several of the members of this genus. The ventral surface
of the fish is lighter; the sides with large ovate white spots; four or five bright cream
spots at the edge of the black and hidden by the pectorals. The mandibles are
mostly black, the lower lip with black mottlings; angle of the mouth light; tip of
the waxillaries black; a black blotch at isthmus just back of membrane. The first
dorsal is mostly black; a white blotch covering lower half of membranes between
fourth and sixth spines; from the upper anterior angle of this blotch the white
extends across the fourth spine and runs into the spot at the edge of the mem-
brane and between the third and fourth spines; at the edge of the membrane and
between each spine there is a white spot, very small between first and second, but
FISHES OF ARCTIC ALASKA. 501
increasing in size posteriorly, and between the seventh, eighth, ninth, and: tenth
running together, leaving a tip of black at the end of the eighth spine. The second
dorsal is black with a few circular white spots, each spot with its center on a fin
ray and its edge reaching to the middle of the membrane. These spots are inclined
to run together. The caudal mostly black; partially divided by narrow interspace
of white into two heavy vertical bands. The anal is colored similar to the second
dorsal; the tips of the rays and edge of the membrane are white. The verttrals with
several black spots. The pectorals black with oval white spots on the membranes,
which join each other imperfectly across the rays to form four or five interrupted
‘vertical bars of black; two white spots at base of rays.
Locality. Dorsal. | Anal. | Pectoral.| Sex.
Port Clarence.....-.22--c-ecceeeceeeeeeeeeee xX 15 rel wl ¢
Chignik Bay.........-......0.- «| 2 12 16 Q
Herendeen Bay (Albatross coll.) -. IX 16 12 15 oi
Do IX 15 il 16 | 9
21. Oncocottus hexacornis (Richardson).
D., VIII or TX, 14 or 15; A., 14 or 15; P.,17; V.,1,3; Br.,6. Head (to end of
opercular spine), 3} in length; eye, 5 in head; snout, 34; interorbital space, 64; max-
illary, 2.
Body slender, tapering gradually from the rather narrow depressed head to a
very slender caudal peduncle. The mouth is large and horizontal, the maxillary
reaching past the orbit. The lower jaw shorter than the upper, but not quite
included within it. The head smooth and without tubercles or warts. In place of
the supraocular and occipital spines there are four large bony elevations, each much
resembling the comb of a cock; the upper surface rough and scabrous. In the
young these four protuberances are much less developed. The occipital ridges are
‘scarcely elevated and inclose an oblong and slightly concave area, narrowest poste-
riorly and running into the concave. interorbital space anteriorly. The nasal spines
are well developed, and in the older fish are inclined to be club-shaped and scabrous.
The upper angle of the supraclavicle is prolonged posteriorly into a strong spine, its
upper surface scabrous. Just at the base and immediately in front of it is a much
smaller spine or-tubercle on the posterior end of the post-temporal bone. There is a
spine, almost concealed in membrane, just above the base of the pectoral.
The preopercle has four spines; the upper, which equals the orbit in length,
extends upward and backward and is in some specimens curved slightly inward.
The second spine is immediately at the base of the first and is one-half as long. It
is straight and extends outward and backward. The third is curved downward and
the fourth, at the lower angle of the preopercle, is directed forward and downward.
The opercular spine is rather strong and does not reach the end of the opercular flap.
There is a slender sharp spine at the lower angle of the opercle.
The lateral line runs rather high and is composed of elongated rectangular plates,
each with a concave depression at either end, thus making a row of elliptical depres-
sions along the lateral line. The plates are not present on the posterior half of the
caudal peduncle. Above the lateral line is a row of rough circular osseous plates,
beginning on the nape and running to the base of the caudal, gradually becoming
smaller and nearer together. Under the second dorsal this row is double. Below the
502 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
lateral line and beneath the second dorsal there are about three irregular rows of
similar but smaller plates.
Adult female.—First dorsal lower than in the male, scarcely rounded posteriorly,
but sloping gradually toward the base of the second dorsal; third and fourth spine
longest and equal to length of snout. The second dorsal is about twice as high as the
first and varies a great deal in shape, the membrane is scarcely incised, and’ the first
three or four rays have rough, prickly edges. The anal is oblong and slightly rounded,
with the middle ‘rays longer than snout, and the membrane between the rays not
incised. The pectoral scarcely reaches to the front of the second dorsal; the first
two or three rays rough on their outer edge; the membrane not incised.. The caudal
is not rounded, but truncated, with rather sharp corners; ten developed rays; eight of
them branched. The ventrals reach two-thirds distance to the vent; the inner ray
no longer than the middle one.
Adult male.—The first dorsal is higher than in the female; the third and fourth
rays are longest and are equal in length to the distance from the snout to middle of
eye; the posterior end of the fin is more rounded. The second dorsal is more than
twice as high as the first; the membrane between the rays is deeply incised, the
anterior rays projecting for nearly half their length beyond the membrane; the mem.
brane follows around the edge of the projecting rays; the rays are scabrous on their
sides. The anal is oblong, but more angular than in female; the longest ray reaches
from snout to posterior edge of orbit. The membrane between the first four rays quite
deeply incised; the outer edge of the rays scabrous. The ventrals reach four-fifths
distance to vent; the inner ray longest.
Color.—In the young the color is gray above and white beneath, a dark saddle
marking over the back at the center of the first dorsal; another similar marking under
the anterior and another under the posterior end of the second dorsal; a dark spot
the size of the eye on top of the caudal peduncle and midway in its length (the young
may be distinguished at a glance by this marking on top of the caudal peduncle); a
V-shaped marking at the base of the caudal with the angle of the V on the lateral
line and directed forward. The caudal is marked by two vertical wavy bands on its
posterior half, the first one the wider, the last one at the tips of the rays; these bands
are solid, extending across rays and membrane; the pectorals are dark at the base,
the distal part marked by three vertical black bars. The first dorsal is slightly
dusted with black; the second is slightly mottled with black, but with no bars. The
anal has three or four vertical dark bars. In the adults the general appearance of
the fish is very much darker, sometimes almost black; the lower parts are light; the
markings are not so distinct; the fins except the ventrals are all dark and the
markings on the pectorals, caudal, and anal run together into solid black; the lower
parts, especially in the males, is brilliantly colored with red.
This fish differs from Oncocottus quadricornis, from the Baltic Sea, in having a
jonger maxillary, longer pectorals, and a square-cut caudal fin.
We can find no good difference between our specimen and one from Arctic Bay,
Greenland.
The fish figured by Bean as Cottus quadricornis (in Nelson’s Report on the Natural
History Collections made in Alaska, Pl. XVII, fig. 2) is probably the same as the one
here described, though the figure does not agree in all respects.
FISHES OF ARCTIC ALASKA. 503
_We found this fish very abundant along the shores of Herschel Island. It was
about the only fish to be found where the bottom was muddy. We took a few young
at Point Barrow, and at Port Clarence we took specimens of both the young and the
old. Three of the young were found in the river back of Grantley Harbor.
: < Head | Eye | Snout | Interor-| Maxil-:
Locality. Dorsal. | Anal. in- in‘ in bitalin | lary in Sex.
body. | head. | head. | head. head.
15 15 32 5k 3h 1 18 Ps
15 15 3} 5 33 64 2a5 g
4 15 325 5k 34 6 2 )
15 16 3h 5 3h 64 2 og
14 15] 84 5 3h 64 2 3
14 15] 3 5 es 2 Q
13 15 3y¢5 4h BL 64 2 2
a 14 13 3y5 43, 63 2 o
es 14 14 3e5 | 33, 64 I Juv. 2?
Axétig Bay, Greenland. . IX 15 16 3 44 3 | - 7 Juv. ?
Two very young examples of an unknown species of Oncocottus were taken at
Point Barrow. The spinous dorsal can not be made out accurately, but the number
is between 8 and 11, probably 10; the second dorsal has 14 rays and theanal 13. The
species is closely related to O. hexacornis, but comparison of specimens of the same
age shows numerous differences, which are indicated below.
Young of O. hexacornis from Point Barrow. Oncocottus sp.incog. from Point Barrow. 2
Head much depressed. Head compressed.
Occipital tubercles not developed. Occipital tubercles developed.
Interorbital space about one-half eye. Interorbital space 14 times eye.
Caudal peduncle slender and rounded. Caudal peduncle heavy and much compressed.
Lower jaw even with snout. Lower jaw projects beyond snout.
23. Megalocottus laticeps (Gilbert).
We took four specimens of this species at Port Clarence. They differ from the
types slightly in coloration. Our specimens are dark, almost black; below the anterior
portion of the second dorsal is a darker saddle-like marking on the body; the caudal
is black at the base, and has an undulating dark band on its posterior third; the pec-
torals vary, being either banded or mottled'(one specimen has distinct bands on one
pectoral while the others are simply mottled with black). There is no slit behind last
gill arch.
Dorsal. Anal. Dorsal. Anal.
Ix 16 13 IX bb 12
Ix 14 13° IX 14 12
24. Gymnocanthus pistilliger (Pallas).
Type locality: Coast of Alaska. Three specimens were taken at Grantley Harbor,
Port Clarence, Alaska.
Fin formule: 4, D., X, 14; A., 16; P., 18; C.,9 branched rays; ¢, D., X, 15;
A., 17; P., 18;. C., 9 branched rays; °,D., X, 13; A., 15; P., 17; C.,9 branched rays.
I have commpaned them with specimens taken by the Albatvons 3 in southern Bering
Sea and find them the same. In the female taken at Port Clarence the crown (not
between the eyes), nape, and upper half of opercles are covered with scabrous bony
504 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
plates. These plates are present in some of the females taken by the Albatross, but
are not so evident. The female has a few scattered rough prickles back of the origin
of -the pectorals. The males have the mushroom-like filaments behind the pectorals,
and the middle rays of the pectorals have papille along their inner edge.
25. Gymnocanthus galeatus Bean.
Type locality: Unalaska. We took one small specimen (34 inches) at Point Bar-
tow, Alaska.
Fin formula: 2, D., X, 15; A., 17; P., 18; V.,3.
H., 34 or 3,%;, including caudal; depth, 54; Eye, 33 in head, to end of opercular
spine; snout, 4; maxillary, 24 in head, reaching past posterior edge of pupil; interor-
bital width 2 in length of orbit; lat. line, 43 or 44. Fifth or sixth rays of pectorals
longest, reaching to third anal ray. Ventrals reach two-thirds distance to vent.
Mouth slightly oblique. Upper preopercular spine with three sharp points on its
upper side. No papille or sharp points under pectorals.
26. Pallasina barbata (Steindachner).
Siphagonus barbatus Steindachner, Ichthyologische Beitrige, V, 140, Taf. V, Bering Straits
and Japan.—Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 1881, 248; Turner, Nat. Hist. Alaska, 94.
Six specimens taken at Port Clarence, Alaska, averaging about 6 inches in length.
We have compared them with specimens of P. barbata from Bristol Bay, Alaska, and
find our specimens have a much longer barbel and slightly longer pectorals. In all
other points they appear to be the same. The barbel is one-third distance from tip of
lower jaw to edge of gillmembrane. The two dorsals vary in their distance from each
other. In one specimen they touch, in the others they vary in distance the width of one
or two plates. The specimens show a sexual difference, The females have shorter ven-
trals and a lower, smaller first dorsal than the males. The first dorsal, too, is without
color. The males have larger ventral fins and a large darkly colored first dorsal.
Following is the fin formule of the specimens:
Dorsal. |Anal.| ,F&* | sex.
7 | 10 12} 9
VIII 7 | 10 wz | o
VI 7 8 12 lag
VIL 7 9 2] ¢
VIII 6 | 10 2 | ¢
6 | 10 13 | 9
a The anal injured.
27. Pallasina aix Starks.
Two small specimens taken at Chignik Bay, Alaska. Fin formula: D., VII, 6;
A., 10; P., 12; D., VII, 6; A., 9; P., 12.
We have compared these specimens with the types of Pallasina aix and we can
find no good differences. One of our specimens has three median plates in the front
of the ventrals, the other two. (Our specimens of P. barbata have cither three or two
median plates in front of the ventrals.)
A few of the types have 12 pectoral rays, but the majority have 11.
28. Liparis herschelinus Scofield, new species. (Plate LXXIV.)
Head, 33 in body; depth, 33; dorsal, 42 (13 + 19); anal, 33; pectoral, 35; caudal, 10;
eye, 44 in head and 14 in snout; interorbital space, 3 in head; maxillary, 2 in head.
FISHES OF ARCTIC ALASKA. 505
Body tadpole like; head rounded and very little compressed; abdomen slightly
distended; just back of the abdomen the body is suddenly compressed to a width
equaling one-third its -height, and from this point the body gradually tapers to the
caudal, its height and width keeping the same proportions; the height of the base of
the caudal equals the diameter of the eye; the maxillary extends to posterior edge of
eye, and its end is concealed in the skin of the head; upper jaw slightly longer than
lower; teeth tricuspid; interorbital space flat; nape slightly elevated; gill openings
small, the width of the slit equaling the interorbital space; the lower edge of the slit
even with the first pectoral ray; the posterior nostrils end in very short, compressed
tubules, about one-half diameter of eye in front of eye; the anterior nostrils are simple
and placed directly in front of the posterior nostrils, separated from them by a dis-
tance equal to one-half diameter of eye.
The dorsal begins on a vertical line drawn from posterior edge of gill flap; the
anterior rays are short, gradually lengthening till middle of fin is reached, where the
rays equal 23 times the diameter of the eye; the last rays are scarcely shortened and
‘do not form a notch at its junction with the caudal; the last rays encroach on the
caudal for one-fourth of its length. The anal is the same shape as the dorsal and of
the same height; its last rays encroach on the caudal for one-third its length. The
upper lobe of the pectorals is composed of 25 rays; the eleventh and longest ray is
contained 14 times in the head; the length of the twenty-fifth is contained 4 times in
the head; the lower lobe is composed of ten rays, of which the third from the last, or
twenty-third, is longest, being contained in the head 2,4, times; the membrane between
the last four rays is incised. The caudal is slender, and rounded behind; its length is
contained a little more than twice in head. : ,
The diameter of the ventral disk is contained 8 times in length of body. Skin
very loose, attached only at opercle.and to the ends of the last rays of the dorsal and
anal and to the base of the caudal. The color of the body is dark, due to black
punctulations; the belly and the underside of the head is free from markings; the
last half of the dorsa] is darker than the anterior half; the anal is mottled with
black; the caudal has two black vertical bands, the first just back of the tips of
the last dorsal and anal rays; the second band is slender and faint and is at the top
of the fin.
Several specimens were taken at Herschel Island. The longest specimen is 23
inches long.
The fish is nearest like L. tunicatus, from the coast of Greenland, and appears to
be intermediate between it and’ L. agassizii.
29. Lycodalepis turneri (Bean).
We obtained one specimen 83 inches long of this species at Point Barrow, Alaska.
It was washed on the beach during a storm and was found in a dried-up condition, so
that the normal width of the head and distance between the eyes can not be deter-
mined. It corresponds almost exactly with the figure of the type (Turner’s Nat. Hist.
Alaska, 93); the light bands across the back and dorsal are not so regular; the third
_and fourth being slightly broken up. D., 86; A., 67; P., 18, reaching to sixth pectoral
ray. The teeth are all strong, with rounded points. The teeth on upper jaw in a
single series with no smaller teeth in front about the symphysis. Teeth on lower jaw
in a single complete series with another short series around the symphysis in front.
506 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Palatine with a single series. One large tooth on vomer. LL. turneri and L. polaris
are possibly the same species.
30. Boreogadus saida (Lepechin).
Head, 34 in length of body; depth, 55; eye, 4 in head; snout, 33; interorbital space
42; gill rakers, 9 to 13+30 to 32; dorsal, 13, 14, 20; anal, 16, 21; barbel minute.
Body long and slender and but little compressed. The head is rather long and
pointed, the lower jaw projecting beyond the upper. The maxillary reaches center
of pupil; the mandible is contained twice in the length of the head; its articulation
with the quadrate bone is on a vertical midway between pupil and posterior edge of
eye. The teeth in the upper jaw in a single series, except in front where there is a
double row; the teeth in the lower jaw are in a single row; the teeth are all of about
the same size, sharp and not closely set, those on the vomer are few, and of the same
size as those in the jaws. The gill rakers are numerous, long, and slender, the longest
equal to half the diameter of the eye. The vent is slightly in advance of the front of
the second dorsal. The caudal peduncle is slender and rounded, its depth scarcely
more than one-half eye. The pectoral fins reach the vent and are contained 14 in
head; the ventrals are contained 14 in head, their second ray produced for two-fifths
itslength. The space between the first and second dorsals is but very little shorter than
the space between the second and third dorsals; first dorsal highest; the front of
second dorsal midway between the tip of snout and the base of middle caudal rays.
The caudal is forked a distance equal to two-thirds the eye; the tips rounded.
Color plain brownish, light silvery below, the body covered with minute black
or brown punctulations which are most numerous above. The dorsal and caudal dusky,
becoming black toward the ends of the rays and narrowly edged with white. The
pectorals are uniform dusky with an edge of white. The ventrals are partly dusky.
The two anals are dusky; the basal half colorless; the edge of the fin white, as in the
others. Peritoneum dusky. We have compared our specimens with the Greenland
form and can find no differences.
This fish appeared to be quite abundant north of Bering Straits. It was espe-
cially brought to our notice by its habit of hiding in small holes in the floating ice,
from which they were dislodged by our steamer striking and turning over the blocks
of ice. This floating ice was usually in 7 fathoms of water and 1 or 2 miles from the
coast. At Herschel Island we took it with the seine in shallow water along the beach.
Turner reports it from St. Michael, where he took it through the ice in February, and
was told by the natives that it appeared there only in the winter. According to Rich-
ardson it spawns in Greenland in February, laying its eggs in the seaweeds along the
shore under the ice.
Dorsal. Anal. Locality. Dorsal. Anal. Locality.
13 12 18 15 21 | Point Barrow. 13°15 21 17 22 | Herschel Island.
alo 13 20 16 21 | Port Clarence. 15 14 22 15 20 | Davis Strait, Greenland. |
14 14 20 17 20 Herschel Island. 14 13 22 16 21 Do.
12 15 21 16 22 Do. 12, 15 19 16 20 | Melville Bay, Greenland.
13 14 20 17 20 Do. 144 15 20 17 (21 Do.
13 14 20 18 20 Do. 12 13 21 15 20 Do.
a First dorsal mutilated.
FISHES OF ARCTIC ALASKA. 507
31. Theragra chalcogramma (Pallas).
‘We took but one specimen of this species at Chignik Bay, where it is not abun-
dant. Out of 150 codfish taken with the hand lines only two were of this species, the
rest Gadus macrocephalus. Our specimen differs from the average, but we have little
doubt it belongs to this species. Its dorsal rays are 11, 16,17; the anal 18, 17; the
ventrals reach three-fifths to vent; the interorbital space is wider than the diameter of
the eye; the coloration is dark. In the few rays and shorter ventral and wide inter-
orbital space it agrees with Theragra fucensis (J. & G.) from Puget Sound, but in
coloration, high ventral fin, and in slender body it is like the Alaskan form. Below
we give noneamipanative fin count:
Dorsal. Anal. Locality. Remarks.
From pelginal description.
--| 18 inches long.
14 16 21 21 23 Do.
14 17 18 23 21 Do.
13 15 19 21 22 Do.
1417 19 21 20 Do.
14 17 «#18 22 20 Hamcnatea,, Do.
11 16 17"| 19 17 Chignik Bay - = Large specimen.
10 15 17 18 16 | Puget Sound .......-.. Type ee sane ee fucensis
(
11 15 16 19 18 |..... 0 cscs cccecsceces
10 14 16 16 19 J..... CO sacecwsiecienicirsion
12 13 #17 19 19 °j..... GO ooo cinsjncese ces
32. Bleginus navaga (Kélreuter).
Head, 34 in length; depth, 6; eye, 52 in head; snout, 3; interorbital space, 44;
gill rakers, 20 or 21 in all; barbel small, equal to pupil; dorsals, 12 to 14, 18 to 20, 18
to 22; anals, 20 to 23, 20 to 23; scales small, 157 transverse rows above lateral line from
gill opening to first rudimentary caudal rays.
Body slender and rounded, with a rather long head; the snout viewed from above
is rounded, but runs to a rather sharp point when viewed from the side; the lower
jaw is included; the fleshy snout projects beyond the maxillary, its length slightly
greater than that of the snout; the tip of the maxillary is on a vertical with the front
of the pupil; the articulation of the mandible with the quadrate bone is on a vertical
running midway between pupil and posterior edge of eye; the teeth are all slender
and curved backward, those in the upper jaw in several irregular rows, the outer row
regular and with slightly larger teeth; the teeth in the lower jaw are in a single row,
except in the front, where they are in a double row; the teeth on the vomer are few
and about the size of the smaller teeth in the upper jaw; the gill rakers are moderate,
the longest not quite equal to the diameter of the pupil; the caudal peduncle is com-
pressed, its depth equal to diameter of eye; vent under front of second dorsal. The
pectoral fins do not reach the vent; their length contained 13 times in the head.
The ventrals reach halfway to vent; the second ray moderately produced. The first
dorsal is highest; the distance between the second and third dorsals twice the distance
between the first and second. The caudal fin is very slightly concave. The third ray
of second dorsal is midway between tip of snout and base of middle caudal rays. Our
largest specimen 11 inches long, which is about the average.
Color somewhat mottled, grayish brown above, light silvery below; the three
508 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
dorsals and the caudal dusky and edged with white; the pectorals are uniform dusky;
the ventrals but slightly dusted with black; the anals have a few punctulations at
their anterior ends; the peritoneum is pale.
Dorsal. Anal. Locality. Remarks.
Albatross collection.
We have compared the skeleton of this with the skeleton of Microgadus proximus
(San Francisco) and find but very little difference in the skulls. There is no differ-
ence in the character of the neural spines of the vertebra, but there is a difference in
the character of the transverse processes. In M. proximus they are flattish and plate-
like, while in HE. navaga they are club shaped, narrow where they leave the centrum,
but expanding into a round, hollow bulb at the distal end.
We obtained this fish only at Port Clarence, where it was abundant, the natives
catching great numbers of them with their crude hooks and lines. According to
Turner, “the Eskimos assert that these fish spawn in February among the pebbles at
the bottom of the deeper portion of the bay.”
32. Gadus macrocephalus Tilesius.
We found this fish at Chignik Bay, where it is abundant. We preserved five
young specimens, whose fin rays are as follows:
Dorsal. Anal. Locality. Remarks.
11 16 17 21 19 | Chignik Ba;
Lar; ‘© specimen, L.S8. Jr. U.
collection.
15 18 17 18 16 |..... dO -oaseccdsemnnse 5 Do.
33. Atheresthes stomias (Jordan and Gilbert).
Quite common at Chignik Bay, where we obtained a large specimen in 18 fathoms
of water.
34. Hippoglossus hippoglossus (Linnzus).
Obtained one specimen at Chignik Bay, where it is abundant.
35. Lepidopsetta bilineata (Ayres).
We found this fish quite common along sandy beaches in Chignik Bay. They
are in no way different from specimens of the same species from Puget Sound.
36. Pleuronectes quadrituberculatus Pallas.
Two specimens of this species were taken at Grautley Harbor, where it was not
rare. It appears to be common at Chignik Bay, where we obtained one specimen.
FISHES OF ARCTIC ALASKA. 509
37. Liopsetta slacialis (Pallas).
This species was found at Port Clarence, in company with P. quadrituberculatus
and equally abundant.
38. Platichthys stellatus (Pallas).
Abundant at Port Clarence. In the four specimens obtained the fin rays are as
follows: dorsal, 53; anal, 38; dorsal, 50; anal 38; dorsal, 53; anal, 38; dorsal, 49;
anal, 35. : ;
The stellate scales large, much more jagged, and in fewer numbers than in the
Californian form. The four specimens are sinistral.
PLATE XLII.
ARGYROSOMUS ALASCANUS (type).
Point Hope, Alaska.
Drawn by Anna L. Brown.
PLaTe XLII.
ie egeas: ae
eae
te epieae
a
easeaiserseeere
ees
ena
SALMO MYKISS,
Kalakhtyrka River, Kamchatka.
Drawn by Anna L. Brown.
“uMOIg “J vuuy fq UMeId
“eysEpeny)
“VINTIVIN SONITSA1VS
Sees
“AVIX 241d
‘UMOIg "T vuUY Aq UMBIGg
“eyjeyourey ‘Aeg Aysutore],
“VHOSONNY SNNIVSATVS
"AIX 3Lv1d
PLATE XLVI.
OSMERUS ALBATROSSIS (type).
Shelikof Straits, near Karluk.
Drawn by Chloe Lesley Starks.
PLaTe XLVII.
THEROBROMUS CALLORHINI (type). x34.
(Drawn by F. A. Lucas, from specimens found in stomach of fur seal.)
PLATE XLVIII.
SEBASTODES ALEUTIANUS (type).
Off Karluk, Kadiak Island.
Drawn by Anna L. Brown,
‘umoIg "T euay fq uMeIg
“BYySely “By
“SANINNVS S3d0iSvaas
*XI1X 311d
“syaeqg As[so'J 90TGO Aq UMBIG
“eyse[euy)
‘SNAWVYEYDSOLDO SOWNVYDVX3H
sch
~
gait HEPEEEEFCPE PDE SEenEpE Hite
&'
ww +H FFEEER EF PERLE yy,
Rte
PEECEEEEREEEEEE
esas CRERRREE
eee
a
a
«
mt
oh
¢
"7 aLv1d
‘syreqg Assay sorqg Aq uMeRiq
“purysy ueqqoy
“SOIWHd3909V1 SOWWYYDYX3H
CG
ECE
a
EF AIAG ROSSI
ne
ace ee iS
( “ S
SEG :
"1 SLv1d
‘UMPC “H “V Aq uMeIg
“exyeqouey ‘rysinedoiyeg
SNWHd3900¥7 SOWWVYDYX3H
IT 3LVId
‘umOIg "J euuy 4q TMeIG
‘dnoixy [LIM y ‘puvysy igsrysp.
(ed) SNINVINATd SSLSIHOUY
“THT 34d
‘syieyg Ag[serT eo0[yO Aq uaeiq
“PaRIS] Uaqqoy Jo ‘cpg uoneyg ssoryeqry
‘(edf) (WSD3ANIBDIS NNYLSIOTSLS
“AV SLv1d
‘uMOoIg "T euuy Aq UMeIg
“‘puylsy ueqqoy YO
"MSADIAVID SAYHdONZ
"A aLV Td
‘uMOLg "I euuy fq Umea
“eysely ‘Avg usepuereyy
“SAVYHSOIO SNLLOODOLVYRD
NAT 3Lv1d
PLate LVII.
CERATOCOTTUS LUCASI (type).
Near St. Paul Island.
Drawn by Anna L. Brown. ‘
"syreyg Ag[se'T solyO Aq ume
eyQeyoMLy ‘Aoqrey rsnedoseg
YASITULSId SQHLNVOONWAD
\yieries
\
\
“IAT SL¥1d
‘syreyg Ag[se'T e07GO Aq uMBIg
“puUxys] neq “IG ‘Uoose’T yYeg
(Bunok M420) SALWATWD SNHLNVOONWAD
*XI7 3Lv1d
‘sy1ezg Asse] soryO Aq uMeIg
‘STN ‘puvyst dnangy ‘Aeg vueyg
‘THBQNVZ SNLLODOYNADUV
'X7] aLv1d
“‘syreyg Lose] voryO Aq UMBIG
“s[lanyy ‘puvysy dnanqy
“SNSOAIN SNIWHd3SD0XOAW
“IX7 SLv1d
Piate LXIl,
MYOXOCEPHALUS NIVOSUS,
Iturup Island, Kurils.
Drawn by Chloe Lesley Starks,
‘UlApTed “H “Vv Aq UMBC
‘purjs] eddog °
“SNINGSW SNIWHdSDOXOAN
pS Se ae By a a
“GQAIX1 3441d
‘syIeyg AZ[se'T ooTYO Aq umeig
“pussy [ned “49
“YADIN SNIVHdSDOXOAW
"AX 3LV1d
PLATE LXVI.
MYOXOCEPHALUS VERRUCOSUS.
Albatross Station 3232, Bering Sea.
Drawn by Chloe Lesley Starks.
‘UMOIg "J euUY Aq UMBIG
“eysery ‘Avg usepusrey
“SIVTTIXY SNIVHdS90XOAW
‘OHAXT 3Lv1d
“UIApleg "H “Vv fq Umer
“purest SuLieg
‘SNLvuaynd snLLodoUod
“QIAXT 3LWd
“UMOIg "T eumy Aq amvig
‘UBDDO OMDIV ‘puETST TeYOSIE_
“SINYOOVXSH SNLLODOONO
“THAXT 341d
PLaTe LXIX,
y
A
Ny
Wah
sb b
Watvanueaiey
ny Cis
RR
Nata SAD
NAUTISCUS PRIBILOVIUS (type).
Off Zapadni Mys, St. Paul.
Drawn by Anna L. Brown.
“‘ULMpreg "H “v Aq uae
aed ‘osax
“SNLVULSOY SISTOAHOVUR
*XX7 SLV1d
‘UMOIg "T suuy Aq umeig
“spugyst [My ‘Zé9g wong ssoaqeqry
*(9d) INTINVH SNOZH.LOGOd
IXX7 SLV 1d
“uMolg 'T euny Aq uMBig
“SpURIST TINY “Egge WoIV!IG ssoryeqry
*(ed) INOSHWOHL SNOSHLOGOd
“IXXT 3LVId
artes
‘UMOIg "J vary sq uaBig
“SYSL[eU) Ho ‘egzeg uoryeyg ssoryeqry
*-edAy ayy Jo ydesBojoyd & wo) VWOILSOTDAD Siuvdin
“WIXX7 3i01d
‘uUMOIg ‘]T euUy fq UMBIG
‘WB9DO STOIY ‘puR[sy Toyas.10}]
(ed) SANITSHOSYSH Sl¥vdI4
"AIXX7] 341d
*AXX71 Alvi
“WOSUPNTY “§ “A Aq UMBIg
“eyeyouey ‘edeuj01000g BO
(edi) siaveiw SAHLHOIMWISAND
~umoig ‘I eauy 4q TMBIT
qed ‘3S ‘SAW rapedez YO
“puelsl
“Bunok) siavylW SAHLHOITIWLSAND
"IAXX71 3tv1d
‘UMoIg “I suay Aq umBaq
‘PURIs] JO[sosog PO
“(3dM) SNYNTASdAD SNYNNDOUd
“HAXX7 3.LV1d
‘uUMOIg "T eauy Aq UMBIC
“eysery ‘eAUS
“SOLYNOIS YALSVNAHLVS
“MAXX 3L01d
“‘sy1eqg Aaiso'T soto Aq uMBIG
“exye:puey ‘oqiey Lysinedoyeg
“SNLVYTIS90 SNYLNSDOHLSIdO
*XIXX7 JLv1d
aete
‘UMOIg “J vuuy 4q uMBIg
‘uedep ‘ayepoyey
“SNSOINGAN SVINGSN3
‘syieig Aejse'y sorgO Aq ume
‘sTNyy ‘purysy dnanyqy ‘keg vueyg
“SNLOId SIIOHd
“XXX 3LVId
‘uUMO1g "T euuy Aq UMBIG
“eyyeqowey ‘Aeg vyoyeay YO
“SNIGAW SANAdWM
“IXXX7 311d
PLATE LXXXII,
MACROURUS ACROLEPIS,
Off Bogoslof Island.
Drawn by Anna L. Brown.
Plate LXXXIIi,
BOGOSLOVIUS CLARKI (type).
Bogoslof Island.
Drawn by Chloe Lesley Starks.
PLATE LXXXIV.
HIPPOGLOSSOIDES HAMILTONI (type).
‘Oss Station 3641, Avatcha Bay, Kamchatka.
Albatr
Drawn by Chloe Lesley Starks.
"“AXXX1 31V1d
‘sy1BIg Aa[se] sojyO Aq umeaq
‘syLany ‘pur[sy duangy ‘keg eueyg
(ad) [NASON YadSVYSA
eee
XIX.—A CONTRIBUTION TO THE KNOWLEDGE OF THE TUNICATA OF THE
PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
(
©
By Witi1am Emerson RITTER, Ph. D.,
Associate Professor of Zoélogy, University of California.
The Tunicata here described reached me in two installments. The first was
collected by President Jordan himself on Lukanin Beach, St. Paul Island, during
July, 1896; the second by Messrs. R. E. Snodgrass, Trevor Kincaid, and A. W. Greeley
from July to September, 1897. This second installment contains specimens gathered
from various points, which will be found specified in connection with the descriptions
of the species. The first lot contained four species, viz, Dendrodoa tuberculata, D.
subpedunculata, Aplidiopsis jordani, and Polyclinum globosum. Itis perhaps significant
that the last two species are not represented in the second installment, even though this
contains a much larger number of specimens all told and is the result of a considerably
longer continued and wider range of collecting. President Jordan informs me that
the summer of 1896 was particularly stormy at the Pribilofs. The following is a list
of the species contained in the collection:
Ascidiae Simplices:
Boltema elegans, Herdman.
Styela greeleyi. New species.
Dendrodoa tuberculata. New species.
subpedunculata. New species.
Ascidiae Compositae:
Polyclinum globosum. New species.
pannosum. New species.
Aplidiopsis jordani. New species.
Amaroucium kincaidi. New species.
pribilovense. New species.
snodgrassi. New species.
Synoicum irregulare. New species.
Facts of some interest relating to the geographical distribution are brought out
by considering the species here described in connection with other known far northern
tunicates. Of the genera represented, two, viz, Dendrodoa and Synoicum, are, so
far as we now know, confined to the Arctic or North Atlantic oceans. Of the other
' species, Boltenia elegans is known only from the extreme North Pacitic; Aplidiopsis
jordani has as its nearest ally A. sarsii, Huitfeldt-Kaas, from Lofoten Islands; and both
Amaroucium pribilovense and A. snodgrassi have apparently rather closer affinities
‘ é B11
512 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
with A. mutabile, Sars, from Hammerfest, than with any other species of the genus.
It would thus seem that at least half of the species might be regarded as character-
istically far northern; and the evidence at hand seems to justify the conclusion that’
there exists a distinct Arctic Ascidian fauna.
Before entering upon the main work in hand, I wish to express not only my
satisfaction at having the opportunity to make this contribution to the knowledge of
this group of animals, but also my pleasure at doing the work at the instance of one
-so watchful and energetic as President Jordan ever is in all his capacities as a
promoter of learning. I also most gladly acknowledge the important assistance
that has been rendered me in the work by one of my
advanced students, Miss Edith Byxbee.
Dendrodoa tuberculata, new species.
General characteristics—Subcylindrical, about one-
third longer‘than broad, quite regular in form, usually
attached by the posterior end, sometimes by one side.
Dimensions of a large specimen: Length, 53 mm.; greatest
diameter, 35mm. Entire surface closely beset with short,
blunt, irregular tubercles. Color brown to yellowish
brown, a little darker at the ante-
rior end. (Fig. 1.) 2,
Test—C oriaceous, almost /
horny, scarcely 1 mm. thick except-
ing through the tubercles. Dull
opaque white on cut surfaces; in-
ner surface, after being separated
from the mantle, with a somewhat
pearly luster. Contains no vessels.
Mantle.—Well developed, con-
siderably thicker than test, com-
posed mostly of muscle fibers, most of which run lengthwise
of the animal; some “‘mesenchyme” cells among the muscle
fibers. An orange coloring matter in the mantle, some of
which is contained in irregular branched bodies (crystals?
excreted material?), and some diffused through the muscle
fibers themselves.
Branchial apparatus.—No projecting siphons, orifices
scarcely detectable, so completely are they hidden by the
tubercles of the test. Both situated at anterior end, not far
apart. Branchial tentacles simple, about 24 in number, not of equal length, but not
regularly alternating, a long and a short one; the circle close to the peripharyngeal
band. Atrial tentacles present, numerous, short, and small. Dorsal tubercle con-
spicuous, biscuit-shaped, the horseshoe-shaped mouth of the hypophysis situated on
its surface. (Fig. 2 d. t.) ’
Branchial sac, figs. 3 and 4, with four longitudinal folds on each side, the pair
nearest the dorsal lamina somewhat larger than the others, each of these having about.
14 longitudinal vessels, while each of the others have about 10. Usually two or three
longitudinal vessels between each two folds.. Transverse vessels numerous, averaging
TUNICATA OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 513
0.2 mm. apart; intermediate transverse vessels, i. ¢., vessels crossing the stigmata,
frequently present, but small. About 20 stigmata in the space corresponding to the
interval between two internal longitudinal vessels. The series of stigmatae extend
fully to the dorsal lamina, (Fig. 3.)
Dorsal lamina a plane narrow membrane. “Endocarps” (fig. 5 en’e.) present,
numerous, and rather large, contain many pigment cells.
Digestive tract.—Situated on left side of branchial sac, the portion posterior to
the stomach forming an §, the two loops of which are closed; the end of the limb. of
the S corresponding to the pylorus is extended to form the stomach and cesophagus;
the two last-mentioned parts of about equal length. C&sophagus issues from the
dorsal side of the branchial sac. Stomach not well set off from intestine; consid-
erably longer than broad, its walls with numerous internal folds, but smooth on outer
. surface; rectal portion of intestine runs
3 Wf close along the cesophagus, but extends
eee a farther forward than mouth of esophagus.
Ses toes i Sexual organs.—On the right side of
ee e...- ed.
F = = 4g
A allel
TI
TTL
the animal only, closely attached to the inner surface of the mantle. Ovary (fig. 5, ov.),
a long, branched, ‘cylindrical body of uniform diameter throughout, the whole consist-
ing of a basal portion situated near to and extending approximately parallel with the
midventral line, and five or six simple branches given off from this basal piece, these
reaching dorsalward and being inclined somewhat toward the anterior end of the
animal.
This species clearly belongs to the genus Dendrodoa, founded by MacLeay, 1824,
as a subgenus of Ascidia. His species was from Winter Island, in Fox Channel.
Until now no other member of the genus has been described.
The chief differences between the present species and D. glandaria, MacLeay, are
as follows: ,
The test of the latter is described as “whitish, subpellucid, coriaceous, and
smooth ;” and in another connection the author speaks of the ovary as being visible
5947—pr 3——33
514 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
through the test. The “anterior nervous tubercle” (dorsal tubercle) in MacLeay’s
species is said to have “many spirals.” These are undoubtedly the hypophysis mouth,
which in our species, as shown by the description, is horseshoe shaped.
The “pharynx” of D. glandaria is described as being situated “‘at the bottom of
the body cavity.” By the “pharynx” is here evident)y meant the entrance to the
cesophagus; and this opening in our species, it will be observed, is on the dorsal side
of the branchial sac. (Fig. 3, 0. «.)
In the structure of the branchial sac the two species differ in the number of longi-
tudinal vessels between the folds, there being three and sometimes four in our species,
while there are only two in MacLeay’s species. It is
5 thus seen that the two species are very distinct.
Herdman, 1882, has expressed the opinion that the
genus Dendrodoa is not distinct from Styela. The genus
is based on the position and character of the ovary,
this being single, branched, and situated on the right
side of the body here, while Styela has several un;
branched ovaries situated on both sides of the body.
In his diagnosis of the genus Styela, written in
1882, Herdman speaks of the genitalia as being “in the
form of one or more simple, lobed, or branched bodies.”
According to this definition Dendrodoa would, so far as this character is concerned,
be merged in Styela. The same author has, however, in his Revised Classification of
the Tunicata, 1891, stated that the gonads of Styela are present ‘on both sides of the
body.” As this is essentially the view of the case held by Savigny, 1816, MacLeay,
1824, Hancock, 1868, and Heller, 1877, and others who have written about the genus,
it has seemed to me best to regard the difference as sufficiently great and constant to
justify the recognition of both genera. I do not, however, believe that it is any more
closely related to Styela than to Polycarpa, or any more closely related to Styela than
the latter is to Polycarpa.'! There are a large number of specimens in
the collection, all from St.. Paul Island. 4
Dendrodoa subpedunculata, new species.
General characteristics.—Subspherical; slightly elongated antero-
posteriorly, frequently showing a tendency to be pedunculated; some-
what laterally compressed. Usually attached by the posterior end,
and by only a small area, so that specimens may be more or less pen-
dulous. Of the two dozen specimens at hand, 13 are attached close
together on a small bit of seaweed, indicating an aggregated habit for
the species (fig. 7). In one instance two individuals were fused
together by their tests (fig. 7a). Length from 1 to 1.5 em.; surface rather closely but
‘Kier, 1893, has described and figured a species which appears to be Dendrodoa glandaria, or a
closely related form, but which he identifies as Styela aggregata J. Rathke, and he refers to Traustedt
as holding the same view. I find, however, on looking up the author’s references to Traustedt that the
latter does not mention Dendrodoa, but he does say of Styela aggregata that the ‘‘genitalorgane sind
wie gewohnlich beiderseits entwickelt” (Traustedt, 1893).
Kier does not believe that the single branched ovary as it exists in Dendrodoa is a character of
sufficient importance and constancy to justify the founding of a new genus upon it. Since, however,
we now have three species in which the character is well defined and constant, they certainly do make
a distinct group, so why not call the group a genus?
TUNICATA OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 515
not conspicuously corrugated. Color very light brown, uniform throughout. (Figs.
6 and 7.)
Test.—Coriaceous, not hard, scarcely half a millimeter thick in thickest portions.
Mantle.—Not greatly developed; somewhat thicker than the test; composed mostly
of longitudinal muscle fibers; ‘does not readily separate from the test.
Branchial apparatus—No siphons; orifices obscurely 4 lobed, rather close
together, both situated at anterior end. Branchial tentacles simple, variable both in
number, size, and distribution. In one specimen about 20 pres-
ent—a group of 4 long, large ones near the dorsal tubercle;
another group of about 10 large ones on the endostyle side, and
the other 6 smaller ones situated 3 on each side, comparatively
remote from one another. This arrangement of the tentacles
apparently typical for the species, though less perfectly carried
out in some specimens than in others. In some specimens not
above 14 tentacles present. The peripharyngeal band close to
the circle of branchial tentacles. Atrial tentacles present; un-
usually large; numerous.
Dorsal tubercle conspicuous, biscuit shaped, the hypophysis
mouth horseshoe shaped, with out-turned limbs.
Branchial sac with 4 longitudinal folds on the right side and 3
on the left; 1 or 2 internal longitudinal vessels between each two folds. The number
of vessels on the folds is as follows: Right side, first fold, 10 vessels; second, 4;
third, 8; fourth, 4; left side, first fold, 11; second, 8; third, 4, (The folds are num-
bered from dorsal to ventral.) These numbers are quite constant.
Distance between transverse vessels varies from 0.19 mm. to 0.50 mm. The ves-
sels are variable in size. but intermediate vessels—i. e., vessels crossing the stigmata—
are rarely present. Dorsal lamina a plain
narrow membrane, situated somewhat to the
left of the median dorsal line.
‘*Endocarps” present, prominent, and ir-
regular in form, with a tendency to become
lobed.
Digestive tract.—Situated on left side of
branchial sac, closely coiled, the posterior
half of the intestine running parallel, and in
contact with, the wsophagus and anterior
part of stomach. (isophagus not as long as
stomach, It issues from near the middle of
the dorsal side of branchial sac, the dorsal
lamina extending behind the opening and
passing to its left. Stomach considerably longer than broad, somewhat broadest at
cesophegeal end, not distinctly constricted off either from the esophagus or from the
intestine; smooth walled on its external surface, but inner surface thrown into
numerous deep folds, causing it to resemble the psalterium of the ruminant
stomach. (Fig. 8.)
Sexual organs.—Situated on right side of body only; ovary consisting of a basal
portion, extending antero-posteriorly along the ventral side of the animal, and 4
516 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
branches from this basal part projecting forward and dorsalward. Testis situated
around and among the branches of the ovary at their dorsal ends. Ova discharged
into the atrial chamber, where they collect in its posterior portion to undergo devel-
opment (fig. 8, ov.) (In this figure the visceral mass, lying loosely on the test, has
been turned halfway around; so that the rec-
gq tum, 7, is made to point toward the posterior /0
instead of toward the anterior end of the test.
This makes the ovary seem on the left instead
of on the right of the body.) Ova and sperm
ripe in the same individual at the same time,
Ova very large, 0.57 mm. in diameter; contains
much food yolk.
This species is so distinct from either of the
other two species of the genus, a comparison
between which was made in connection with the
description of D. tuberculata, that it would be
superfluous to dwell upon the point. It is represented in
the collection by a larger number of specimens than any
of the other species, there being some hundreds present.
All appear to come from St. Paul.
Styela greeleyi, new species.
General characteristics.—Body elongated, somewhat
flattened; tapering slightly toward both ends, at the pos-
terior abruptly contracted into a slender peduncle, which is from one and a half to
two times as long as the body. Dimension of one of the largest specimens: Length
of body, 1.8 cm.; greatest diameter, 1.1 cm.; length of peduncle, 4.3 em. Color,
yellowish brown, tinged with red on the anterior half. Siphons, bright orange red.
Surface covered with longitudinal folds, which are
less pronounced on the peduncle. Transverse folds
present on the anterior half, but these possibly due
to contraction. (Figs. 9 and 10.)
Test.—Tough, coriaceous, but scarcely 1 mm.
thick even through the folds. Dull grayish white
on the inner and cut surfaces.
Mantle.—Closely attached to test; muscula-
ture weak.
Branchial apparatus.—Siphons projecting
slightly, both placed at anterior end close together,
the atrial pointing straight forward, while the
branchial is bent over so that the opening is di-
rected ventrally. Branchial tentacles simple, of
two sizes arranged in two concentric circles, the
outer circle containing about 15 large and the
inner about 30 small ones. Circles close to the peripharyngeal band. (Fig. 13.)
Atrial tentacles filiform, numerous. Dorsal tubercle inconspicuous, the mouth of:
the hypophysis irregularly horseshoe shaped, close to the tentacles, which nearly hide
13
TUNICATA OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 517
it. (Fig.13.) Branchial sac with four folds on each side, the development of these
folds varying with the size (age?) of the specimen. In smaller (younger?) specimens
the folds on the left side more strongly developed than those on the right. In speci-
mens 3.1 to 6.7 em. (including peduncle), pair of folds next the endostyle had about
12 bars and those next dorsal lamina about 20. In specimen 0.85 to 1.8 cm. folds
next endostyle had about 6 and those next dorsal lamina about 12 bars. Folds closely
placed, only 3 to 5 bars between them. Transverse vessels of three sizes, a wide one
(Tr,, fig. 11) occurring at irregular intervals, and two narrower ones (Tr, and Tr,),
which usually alternate with each other. Intermediate transverse vessels (‘Tr,) some-
times present, often dividing the series of stigmata into two. Meshes nearly square
or longitudinally elongated with 4 to 6 (usually 5) long narrow stigmata. (Fig. 11.)
Dorsal lamina ribbed
on one side by the ves- “2
sels passing round the
cesophagus.
Digestive tract.—
Situated on the left
side of branchial sac
and making a narrow
turn. M@sophagus
short, opening from
the dorsal side of the
branchial sac near its
posterior end. Stom-
ach long and narrow, with numerous in-
ternal folds which show on the surface
as longitudinal markings. Anal open-
ing bilobed, each half cut into about six
lobes. (Fig. 12.)
Sexual organs.—Gonads on each side
of the body. Ovaries long, sausage
shaped, ending in a short oviduct, those
on the right side longer than those on
the left. One of those on the left side
placed in the loop of the intestine, the other beginning higher up and extending down
under the stomach. Testis small, clustered in bunches over the ovaries. Endocarps
rather numerous on the mantle.
The genus Styela is naturally divided into two sections—those in which the
species are pedunculated, and those in which they are not. The species here described,
of course, belongs to the first section. In this section 8S. greeleyi finds its nearest
allies in S. montereyensis of the coast of California, and S. clava, Herdman, of the
North Pacific. But it is quite distinct from either of these. So far as can be judged
from the specimens at hand, it is a much smaller species than either of them. In
general form it differs from S. montereyensis in its considerably more abrupt transition
from body to peduncle; while from 8. clava it differs distinctly by its lack of the prom-
inent irregular tubercles of the test of the latter species. The collection contains L7
518 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
specimens of the species, all from St. Paul.
small.
Boltenia elegans Herdman.
Of these all but three or four are very
The three specimens in the collection, all from St. Paul Island, which I identify
as this species, differ so trivially (our
individuals are slightly darker in color
and a little rougher on the surface) from
specimens of the species taken by the
Albatross (latitude 57° north, longitude
159° west, in 33 fathoms), that the cor- —
rectness of the identification can not be |
doubted.
Polyclinum globosum, new species.
General character of the colony.—
Massive, inclined toward the spherical
form, attached by a small area only;
apparently easily detached, since all the
specimens at hand are freed from their
original substrata. (Fig. 14.)
Dimensions of largest colony:
Length, 45 mm.; least transverse diameter, 35 mm. The other colonies considerably
smaller.
Color, greenish brown.
Zooids.—Large and numerous, though scarcely visible on
the surface of the preserved colonies. The irregular systems
contain numerous zooids, many of which are quite distant
from the broad but inconspicuous atrial orifice common to
the system. Positions approximately perpendicular to the
surface of the colony. (Fig. 14 Z.)
Body distinctly separated into three regions, viz, thorax,
abdomen, and postabdomen. (Fig. 15.)
Measurements of the zooids: Total length, 10 mm.; length
of thorax, 4mm.; length of postabdomen and abdomen, 6 mm:
Test.—Small in quantity among the zooids, so close are
these to one another; but a considerable mass in the middle
of the colony in which no zooids occur. (Fig. 14.) Surface
layer considerably denser and darker in color than the deeper
portions, a few scattered sand grains embedded on the sur-
face. The inner mass containing no zooids, rather firm in
character; opaque white, contains many small cells, but
no bladder cells; penetrated by the stolonic vessels of the
zooids, though these are not numerous. A few scattered stellate crystals present.
OK
‘Mantle.—Very thin, containing a few muscle fibers, mostly running lengthwise
of the body; some circular fibers at the anterior end of the thorax encircling the
siphons.
Branchial apparatus.—Branchial orifices indistinctly seen on the surface of the
i
TUNICATA OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 519
colony. (Fig. 14, area B, exaggerates the distinctness of the branchial orifices.) The
common cloacal appertures wholly obliterated to' superficial inspection. Branchial
siphon found, after isolation of zooids, to be six lobed. Atrial siphon with a broad:
languet the distal edge of which is armed with three small processes (fig. 16).
Branchial tentacles about 24 in number, rather large, though a few small; not forming
a well-defined single circle. Rather close to the branchial orifice. Branchial sac well
developed. About 15 series of stigmata and about 16 stig-
mata in each half series; these very regular in form and size. [b-
The interserial vessels broad and each containing a well-devel-
oped muscle band. (Fig. 15, m. ¢. v.)
Dorsal languets long and slender, about one for each series
of stigmata.
Digestive tract,—Cisophagus (fig. 15 @) issuing posterio-
dorsally from the branchial sac, longer than the stomach;
deflected to the right side by the rectum. Stomach spherical,
smooth walled both without and within. Duodenal portion of
the intestine with two well-marked constrictions. Rectal por-
tion large and straight, runs far forward, nearly in the median
dorsal line, which it reaches by a left curvature of the duo-
denal portion. (Fig. 15.)
Sexual organs.—Gonads contained in the large pear-shaped
pedunculated postabdomen; ovary a well-defined mass, confined
to the enlarged posterior portion of the postabdomen. (Fig.
15, ov.)
The ova pass into the atrial chamber, where they take a
position in its posterior portion and to the right side. The
larvae are developed in this incubatory chamber. No male
gonads have been found in any of the specimens examined.
No buds have been seen; and as the colonies at hand are all
in a state of prolific sexual reproduction, it seems probable that
in this species there is an alternation of periods of sexual and
asexual reproduction.
This species seems to be more closely related to Polyclinum fungosum Herdman,
1886, than to any other known member of the genus, but it is distinctly different
from this in the following points: (1) In P. fungosum the “colony
has a plano-convex discoid form.” “The Jower surface is almost
flat, and the point of attachment is at the center.” (2) The
branchial sac has 10 or 12 rows of stigmata in P. fungosum and
15 in P. globosum, and the stigmata appear to be longer and less
numerous in the rows in the former than in the latter species.
The collection contains but a single colony of this species.
Polyclinum pannosum, new species.
General character of colony.—Forin variable, from quite regu-
larly pear-shaped to depressed and irregularly elliptical. Not distinctly peduncu-
lated, though some colonies show a tendency in this direction. Largest colony in
collection measures 3 cm.
520 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
to 2m. tolfem. Unyielding to the touch, dirty greenish-brown in color. Portions
of the surface of the colonies smooth, almost shiny, but for the most part a surface
crust of test becomes broken up and the broken fragments partially or wholly peeled
off. Where these pieces are fully removed sand adheres to the underlying exposed
test. By reason of the conditions of the surface test thus described the colonies
usually present a ragged appearance, hence the specific name chosen. (Fig.17 A y.)
Test.—Matrix firm, relatively large in quantity, there being a large central core
in each colony, into which the zooids do not reach, and the zooids themselves are
rather remote, making the intervening test considerablein quantity. Cells numerous,
of many sizes, some of them large. The cells contain a diffuse greenish coloring
matter, to which is due the tint of the test when seen in section, The central core of
test penetrated by a wide areolar mesh work of rather fine
fibers. (Fig. 17,A.)
Zooids.—Moderately numerous, not visible on_ surface
view of the colony. Owing to their variously twisted con-
dition and the differing angles which they form with the
surface of the colony, the entire length of a single zooid
is seldom seen uncut on radial sections of the whole colony.
Average length of individuals, about 6 mm., about one-half
of which is postabdomen. Thorax about 2 mm.; abdomen
about 1 mm. Postabdomen joined to the postero-ventral
side of the abdomen, somewhat to the left side, by a nar-
row peduncle. (Fig. 18.)
Mantle.—Feebly developed. Longitudinal muscle fibers
in distinct bands; circular fibers almost wholly absent, ex-
cept in the siphons, and here they are not strongly developed.
Branchial apparatus.—Orifices very indistinctly seen on
the surface of the colony. On removal from test, branchial
siphon found to be encircled by six unequal rather pointed
lobes. Atrial languet not easily seen intact, of moderate
length, broad at base, tapering rapidly to a blunt point,
which, however, sometimes shows traces of two or three
lobes.
Branchial sac removed whole from test with much diffi-
culty, this due to the delicacy of it and the mantle, and the
fact of its being thrust up more or less sidewise into the
specially dense, firm, and rather thick layer of surface test. This displacement
apparently caused by the numerous large embryos contained in the atrial chamber.
Organs of the peripharyngeal region distinguished with much difficulty; ganglion
moderately large, tentacles about 25 in number, of different sizes, the largest oues
but few, not large. All situated close around the base of the siphon. Branchial sac
containing about 12 series (in some specimens 13, and some apparently 10 or 11) of
stigmata. Cilia of the stigmata unusually long and stout. In some specimens
the stigmata quite pointed and with a peculiar process, sometimes of considerable
length at the ends. A well-developed muscle band in each interserial space. Dorsal
languets long, sometimes reaching more than halfway across the sac, about equal in
number to the series of stigmata. (Fig. 18, dlg.)
alg al
TUNICATA OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 521
Digestive tract.—Csophagus rather wide at its mouth, issuing from nearly the mid-
dle of the posterior end of the branchial sac, distinctly curved so as to enter the stomach
on its right dorsal side. Stomach globular, smooth walled. Intestinal loop rather
wide, slightly shorter than the combined length of esophagus and stomach. Two well-
marked constrictions in the intestine at the base of the loop, these including between
them the base of the U-shaped loop; the rectum passing to the left of the wsophagus
to reach the atrial chamber. Anus sometimes with a wide, flaring lip. (Fig. 18.)
Sexual organs.—Ovary not large, situated far back in the post-abdomen, behind
the testis. The entire post-abdomen so filled with mesenchymatous cells that the
sexual organs are much obscured; no distinct lobulation of either ovary or testes
observable. The embryos, developing in the atrial chamber, greatly distend and dis-
tort this cavity.
This species appears to be more closely related to P. aurantium, Milne-Edwards,
than to any other member of the genus. The last-named species is, however, described
by both Milne-Edwards, 1842, and Lahille, 1890, as having a gelatinous test, and no
mention is made by either of these authors of the network of fibers in the test. This —
latter character, I take it, constitutes a distinct difference between the two. The
presence of such a network seems to be of such
rare occurrence in Polyclinum that were it pres-
ent in P. aurantium, Lahille, whose studies were
largely morphological, would have noted it.
. Furthermore, according to the figure of a zooid
of P. aurantium, given by Milne-Edwards (PI.
III, fig. 4, b), the postabdomen of this species is
relatively much longer than in P. pannosum.
There are about two dozen colonies of this
species in the collection, all from St. Paul Island.
Aplidiopsis jordani, new species.
General character of the, colony.—Massive,
irregularly polyhedral in form, the three dimen-
sions not greatly different. Attached by a small
area only (fig. 19). Quite hard and unyielding to the touch; surface rather uneven.
Light gray in color, with the yellowish zooids distinctly visible. A thin surface
layer of test considerably harder and less transparent than the interior portions,
which latter is quite transparent. A few sand grains imbedded on the surface.
Greatest diameter of the one colony in the collection, 2.3 cm.; least diameter,
1.5 mm. aoe
Cells in test very numerous, rather uniform in size. No vessels present in the test.
Zooids.—Rather large and numerous, readily seen on the surface of the colony.
No systems present, each zooid opening to the surface by its own atrial orifice. Many
of the individuals placed at very oblique but differing angles to the surface of the
colony, so that they are crossed by and wound around one another. Post-abdomen
not pedunculated. A finger-like ectodermal process projecting from posterior end of
body. Total length about 8 mm., one-fourth of which is branchial sac, another fourth
intestinal loop, and the other half post abdomen. (The post-abdomen outlined in fig.
20is unusually short.) Post-abdomen very large at its posterior end, and is dense and
522 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
opaque with the contained generative and mesenchyme cells. It gradually narrows
toward its attachment to the abdomen, but is not pedunculated, it being at the junction
fully as thick as the abdomen itself.
Mantle—Very thin, though its ectodermal layer presents, particularly in posterior
part of the post-abdomen, a layer of well-defined epitheloid cells. Musculature con-
sisting of a few small, widely separated bundles of longitudinal fibers and a still
smaller number of circular fibers, the latter confined to the anterior region of the
animal. Owing to this disposition of the circular fibers, in the contracted state the
anterior end of the thorax, becomes much smaller and denser than the posterior end.
But few mesenchyme cells in the mantle.
Branchial apparatus.—Branchial orifices readily seen on the surface of the colony
by the aid of a hand lens, but the atrial orifices scarcely visible; former circular in
outline, no lobes distinguishable till the zooids are removed from the test, when the
branchial siphon is found to be obscurely six lobed, while the atrial siphon, often
considerably elougated, has no constant lobulation. In some
zooids a large lobe, undoubtedly representing the atrial languet
of some species, is seen on the dorsal side of the atrial orifice
(fig. 20). Owing to the persisteutly contracted condition of the
anterior portion of the branchial sac the number and arrange.
ment of the branchial tentacles have not been determined; it
is, however, found that they are rather small and few in num-
ber. Peripharyngeal band situated close to the branchial
siphon. Ganglion not large, spherical, distinctly seen through
the mantle in uncontracted zooids. Hypophyseal duct distinct,
wide mouthed, well ciliated. Endostyle of moderate size, never
greatly tortuous, extends forward nearly to the base of the
branchial siphon. Branchial sac well developed, 12 or 13 series
of stigmata, each half series containing about 15 stigmata.
Well developed interserial muscle bundles. Dorsal languets at
least as numerous as the series of stigmata; highly developed,
sickle shaped, with the concave side directed forward, the
epitheloid cells of the wall of this side considerably higher
than those of the convex or posterior side.
Digestive tract.—Qisophagus about equaling the stomach in length, stomach
somewhat longer than broad when not contracted, extension of loop behind stomach
about equal to the combined length of the wsophagus and stomach; rectal portion of
intestine passing to left of the @sophagus to reach the mid dorsal line in the region
of the branchial sac. Stomach wall with a few irregular longitudinal thickenings, but
no well-defined folds.
Sexual organs.—Gonads contained in the large post-abdomen, the testis consisting
of a large number of closely crowded lobes, occupying its posterior two-thirds, while
the ovary is confined to its narrower anterior third. The ovary is situated close
behind the intestinal loop. Vas deferens, well filled with Tipe sperm, passes forward,
sometimes on the right and sometimes on the left of the loop of the intestine. No
embryos or ripe ova in the specimens at hand. No buds seen.
This species, which I take pleasure in dedicating to President Jordan, belongs to
a group of Ascidians, the exact systematic position of which has troubled me for some
TUNICATA OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 523
years. It has several representatives on the coast of California, so I have had ample
opportunity for studying it; notwithstanding this, I have not been able to fully satisfy
myself as to whether a new genus should be established for itor not. That it belongs
to the family Polyclinidae there can be no doubt. The possession by the zooids of a
large, well-marked post-abdomen in which are situated the reproductive organs and
heart leaves no room for question on this point. When, however, the effort is made to
determine with which of the known genera of this family the group is most closely
allied, much difficulty is experienced.
The entire absence of systems or coenobia in the colonies leads us, in the first
place, to compare it with those Polyclinidae presenting a like deviation from the pre-
vailing condition in this particular.
In the genus Tylobranchion, Herdman, no common cloacal apertures are present,
according to the author, but this is about the only resemblance between the two
groups; the most distinctive difference being, perhaps, the possession of papillae on
the internal transverse vessels of the branchial sac in Tylobranchion. Sigillina,
Savigny, is another genus in which the common cloaca is wanting; but the shortness
of the branchial sac and great length and slenderness of the post-abdomeu are char-
acters which preclude the admission of our species to this group. Sigillina australis,
Savigny, the only species known of this genus, has but four series of stigmata, while
there are never less than six or seven present in any of the representatives of the
group now under consideration, and the rule is that twelve or thirteen series are
present.
As regards the post-abdomen in Sigillina, its great length, relative to the length
of the rest of the animal, and its tenuity, set it off very sharply not only from our
forms, but also from all other known species of the family.
The genus Atopogaster, Herdman, contains one species, at least, viz, A. aurantiaca,
in which, according to this author, there are no systems or common cloacal apertures,
and there are certainly some rather weighty considerations in favor of regarding this
group as the one to which the present species is most closely related. Several points,
however, the most important being the transverse folds of the stomach wall in Atopo-
gaster, stand rather seriously in the way of doing this. There is considerable varia-
bility in the character of the stomach ‘wall in our species, and the folds are never well
pronounced. Such as are present, however, incline distinctly toward the lengthwise
instead of toward the crosswise direction of the stomach.
I am disposed to place somewhat less reliance than some writers have done on
this character as an index to relationships; nevertheless a condition so unusual as
a transverse folding must, as our knowledge now stands, be regarded as of real
systematic value.
I have resolved, after much deliberation, to place the species, for the present at
least, in the genus Aplidiopsia, Lahille. There are certainly some objections to this,
the rivet considerable being found again in the structure of the stomach wall. Lahille
instituted this genus for the reception of those Polyclinidae in the restricted sense in
which he recognizes this family, which have a smooth walled stomach, no torsion of
the intestinal loop, and a nonpedunculated post abdomen. The smooth wall of the
stomach, therefore, is one of the important characters on which the genus rests, and
the placing of my species in it does some violence to it, for there is certainly a strong
tendency, to say the least, for the stomach wall here to become folded, i. e., there are
524 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
more or less pronounced and regular thickened areas in the wall, and 1m connection
with these, at least in many of the preserved specimens, there are indications of
folding. (Fig. 20.) But in some specimens, again, I can detect scarcely a trace of
either thickening or folding, and there are so many and close resemblances between
our species and A. sarsii, Huitfeldt-Kaas, 1896, from the Norwegian coast, that I am
fully convinced of the very close affinities of the two. I have consequently deemed
it the wiser course to place it here rather than to add another to the already long list
of rather illy-defined genera into which the Polyclinidae are divided. In this connec-
tion I can not refrain, after having spent much time in examining the stomachs of
numerous species and genera, and in critically reading the utterances of other writers,
from quoting that master zoologist, Milne-Edwards, 1842, on this point. After
describing the stomach of his Amarouciwm argus (transferred by Giard, 1872, largely
on account of the structure of the stomach, to the genus Morchellium), he says: “ Mais
si Y on descendait 4 des caracteres de cet ordre pour en faire la base des divisions
génériques, on serait conduit 4 multiplier inutilement ces coupes et on rendrait les
déterminations @’ une difficulté extréme.” The advance of knowledge since this
remark was made has undoubtedly shown that the character of the stomach wall is
of diagnostic importance, but that it in itself can be relied upon in all cases, even as
a distinctive specific mark, to say nothing of its generic value, I do not believe. The
species is represented in the collection by a single colony from St. Paul Island.
Amaroucium kincaidi, new species.
Colony cake-like. irregular in outline, but always depressed. When attached to
cylindrical bodies of small diameter, as seaweeds, which seems to be the usual habit,
colony entirely incireling these. Firm and unyielding to the touch. In color, little
sand on the surface, zooids showing through the test quite distinctly. Common atrial
orifices large and open.
Dimensions of largest colony, 54 mm. to 31 mm. to 21 mm.; of smallest colony,
27 mm. to 20 mm. to 17 mm,
Test.—Surface layer, which is quite thick, containing so much brownish-gray
coloring matter that the transparency characteristic of the interior portions is here
wholly obscured. Cells of the test vary; abundant fibers absent. Sand grains
penetrating the entire mass, though not numerous, not incrusting the surface. Only
a small interior portion of test into which the Zooids do not reach.
Mantle.—Longitudinal muscle fibers in bands, though not as completely separated
from one another as in many species. Circular fibers almost wholly absent excepting
in the siphons, but not numerous even here.
Zooids.— Visible, though not distinctly so,on the surface of the colony. Arranged
in definite, circular systems, each containing about six or eight individuals. Standing
at various angles to the surface of the colony, and considerably contorted, so that
they appear only in fragments on cut surfaces of the colony, whatever be the direction
of the section. Subdivisions of the body not distinct. Size, medium; total length,
about 8 mm.; thorax, about 2.5 mm.; abdomen, about 1.5 mm., and post-abdomen
about 4 mm. Peduncular portion of post-abdomen easily noticeable, though not
conspicuous as compared with many other species (fig. 21). An ectodermal appendage
of the mantle at the posterior end of the post-abdomen.
Branchial apparatus.—Branchial orifice scarcely recognizable on the surface of
the colony. Common atrial orifice, large and open, at least in some colonies.
TUNICATA OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 525
branchial siphon, with six quite regular, broad, low lobes. Atrial siphon with a
dorsal languet, but this apparently never of considerable length, usually broad and
‘blunt, sometimes, probably usually, three lobed, sometimes two lobed, and at least in
one instance observed, only one lobed. Contraction of branchial sac about equal
throughout its length, in no portion so great as to render the structure indistinguish-
able. . Ganglion moderate in size, spherical, visible through the body wall. Tentacles
fairly well developed, about 24 in number, of unequal
length, somewhat more removed from base of siphon
than in the other species of the genus described in
this paper. About 16 series of rather small, short,
elliptical stigmata. A well-developed muscle band
in each interserial space of the sac. Dorsal languets
not conspicuous.
Digestive tract Unusually small and contracted.
Césophagus very short in proportion to its diameter,
at least as presented in all the specimens examined.
Stomach small and contracted, often apparently but
little greater in diameter than the rectal portion of
the intestine. Wall never with distinct longitudinal
folds, but never smooth. In some zooids it presents
merely thickened patches of irregular shape and un-
equal size, while in others there are distinct indications of areolation. In some indi-
viduals the areolae are elongated lengthwise of the organ, while in others their great-
est extent is crosswise of it, but this last condition may be the result of contraction.
(Figs. 21 A and 21 B.)
Remaining portions of the tract without characteristic features. The. constric-
tions of the intestine in the base of the loop irregular, but apparently never very
pronounced. :
Sexual organs.—Ovary immediately behind the intestinal loop in the peduncular
portion of the post-abdomen. Ova large, contain-
24. ing much yolk; not numerous. Testis situated
behind the ovary and extending to the extreme
posterior end of the post-abdomen; composed of
many small lobes; vas deferens not conspicuous.
Embryos developed to the completed tadpole
stage in the atrial chamber, this becoming much
distended by them. (Fig. 21).
There are four colonies of this species in the
collection, all from St. Paul Island. ;
Amaroucium pribilovense, new species.
General character of the colony.—Massive, regu-
lar in outline, smooth surface, subglobular, very little or no indication of peduneu-
lation, though usually attached by small area only. Greatest diameter of largest
colony 5.5 cm., least diameter 38cm. (Fig. 24.)
Unyielding to the touch; dark gray with a slight olive tinge; considerable sand
adhering to and embedded in the surface. Zooids quite distinctly visible on the
surface. Testicular mass not large in quantity, the: zooids being rather crowded,
¢
526 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
particularly in the larger colonies. A surface layer considerably denser and darker
colored than the deeper portions. Sand grains scattered over the surface and also
penetrating the whole test mass. Cells numerous in the test, but no vessels.
Zooids.—Closely crowded, particularly in the larger colonies, quite distinctly
visible on the surface of the colony, each standing generally at nearly a right angle to
the surface. Systems usually distinct, number of zooids in each usually small—é, 8,
or 10, sometimes more. The three divisions of the body distinct, but not constricted
off from one another. Length of thorax 3 mm., length of abdomen 3 mm., of post-
abdomen 5 to 10 mm., depending on the extent of develop-
ment of the testis. :
Post-abdomen when fully developed somewhat, though
not greatly, larger at its posterior than at: its anterior end.
(Fig. 25.)
Mantle.—Feebly developed. Circular muscle fibers almost
wholly absent, they being restricted to a few scattering ones
around the branchial siphon. Longitudinal fibers grouped in
distinct bundles, though these not numerous.
Branchial apparatus.—Branchial orifices easily recogniz-
able on the surface of the colony by the aid of hand lens,
though no lobes visible. Common atrial orifices moderately
large. When removed from the test, branchial siphon found
to possess six quite distinct and regular lobes. Atrial siphon
with a broad dorsal languet, usually two-lobed, but sometimes
three-lobed. This languet very variable in length, in some
zooids the siphon departing but slightly from the normal six-
lobed condition.
Anterior half of the branchial sac usually considerably
more contracted than the posterior half. The globular gan-
glion seen without difficulty when the anterior end is exam-
ined after having been cut off. Tentacles apparently about
twenty in number, of different lengths, about half of them
being long and stout. The circle situated close to the siphon.
Branchial sac well developed. Fifteen series of stigmata
certainly present in some individuals, but apparently twelve
or thirteen in others—possibly immature ones. Interserial
muscle bands present; posterior end of the endostyle invari-
ably produced into a U-shaped loop in the preserved specimens.
Digestive tract—Cisophagus issuing from the: postero- ‘
dorsal angle of the branchial sac; form and proportions of
the tract as a whole conforming closely to the usual type for
the genus. Stomach somewhat barrel-shaped, folded longitudinally, but the folds are
irregular and are neither conspicuous nor numerous, the number being about seven.
In addition to the folds, or rather furrows, which never involve the entire surface,
there is a tendency for the surface between the furrows to become areolated in many
specimens. (Fig. 25.)
Sexual organs.—Ovary immediately behind and in contact with the intestinal loop,
small in volume as compared with the testis, which latter is very large, it appearing
to constitute almost the whole of the long post-abdomen. ;
TUNICATA OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 527
Vas deferens filled with sperm in the specimens at hand, consequently large and
conspicuous; passes to the left of the intestinal loop. No embryos seen.
The simplicity of the systems of zooids, the two-lobed atrial languet, and the few
remote furrows in the wall of the stomach are the most distinctive characters of this
species. In the first-mentioned particular it. agrees more nearly with A. nordmani,
Milne-Edwards, than with any other species of the genus.
So far as I have been able to ascertain, this is the only instance in the genus in
which the atrial languet is two lobed, it being in all other species either one or three
lobed.
A collection contains a half dozen colonies, all from St, Paul Island.
Amaroucium snodgrassi, new species.
General character of the colony.—Form quite variable, but always depressed and
cake-like. Area of attachment considerably smaller than the superior free surface.
Greatest transverse diameter of largest colony 7 cm., greatest width 5 cm., greatest
thickness 2,8 cm. Rather soft and yielding tothe touch. Light gray in color, except-
ing where covered with sand, which is quite abundant on some of the colonies. The
zooids, indistinctly seen on the
top surface of the colonies, but dis-
‘ tinetly visible on the edges, where
the outermost ones show through-
out their entire length, as‘ they
reach entirely through the thick-
ness of the colony. (Tig. 22.)
Test.—Not in great quantity,
there being no central core into
which the zovids do not enter. A
few sand grains scattered through
entire mass. Cells very numerous,
but no vessels or fibers present.
Zooids.—Large, each reaching
entirely through the thickness of
the colony; quite straight, and placed nearly at a right angle to the surface of the
colony. As seen on a cut surface of a vertical section of the colony, the thoracic-
abdominal portion distinctly set off from the post-abdominal portion by the greater
thickness of the former and the lighter but more opaque color of the latter. Post-
abdomen joined to the abdomen by a very long, slender peduncle. ‘Total length of
zooid from 2 em. to 2.5 cm.; of this about 4 or 5 mm. are thorax, about an equal part
abdomen, and the remainder—12 or 15 mm.—post-abdomen. Systems not readily seen
either on surface of colony or on horizontal sections of same; dissection discovers
them to be present, however, with about 8 or 10 zooids in each.
Mantle—Musculature not highly developed. Longitudinal fibers, as usual, in
bands; circular fibers present, but confined to anterior half of thorax.
Branchial apparatus.—Branchial orifices found with difficulty on surface of colony;
common atrial openings quite large, though collapsed and not obvious until searched
after. Branchial siphon with six wide, well-defined, though not prominent, lobes.
Atrial languet three lobed, at least usually, broad and never very long. Anterior end
of thorax usually considerably contracted, so that the various contained organs are
528 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
seen with difficulty. Ganglion not spherical, not large. Tentacles not numerous,
apparently about twelve, presenting a peculiar distorted, shriveled appearance, situ-
ated very close around the base of the siphon. (Fig. 23 A).
£34 Branchial sac consisting of about twelve series of long, narrow,
regular stigmata. A well-developed muscle band in each in-
terserialspace. (Fig. 23 B.) Dorsal languets long and slender,
one for each series of stigmata. Endostyle nearly straight,
moderate in size.
Digestive tract.—Cisophagus issuing from the branchial
sac at its postero-dorsal angle. Nothing characteristic in the
general form and proportions of the tract as awhole. Stomach
distinctly longer than broad. Folds of its wall distinct, about -
six extending the entire length of the organ, and in addition
two or three shorter and narrower ones on one side; in some
cases these strongly suggesting the areolated condition (fig. 23).
Rectum terminating in a broad, trumpet-shaped anus.
Sexual organs.—Ovary small, situated in the post-abdomen,
a short distance behind but not in contact with the intestinal loop. Testis occupying
nearly the whole of the remainder of the long post-abdomen. The numerous rather
small regular lobes are distinctly visible, those of the anterior
narrower portion of the post-abdomen forming a single row only
in many specimens. Vas deferens conspicuous, passing to left
of intestinal loop. No embryos seen.
This species has much in common with A. pribilovense when
the two are compared with reference to the zooids only; though
from this standpoint they are rendered specifically quite distinct
by differences in size, in the atrial languets, and in the folds of
the stomach wall. The greatest difference between them, how-
ever, as will be noticed, is in the general character of the colony.
These species would appear to be somewhat closely related to A. 23 63.
mutabile, Sars, though, as I know this form only by the figures
and partial description given by Huitfeldt-Kaas, 1896, I ain unable to make a com-
plete comparison between them. A. mutabile is, however, represented as having a much
more distinctly 3-lobed atrial languet than either of my species,
and also with only 4 furrows or folds in the stomach. It is there-
fore well set off from the present species. There are about 8 col-
onies of this species in the collection, all from St. George Island.
Amaroucium dubium, new species.
I designate by this name a species of Amaroucium collected
by Mr. Leonhard Stejneger at Copper Island during his visit there
in the summer of 1897. There are only three fragments of colonies
at hand, and as these are considerably eroded, apparently from
having been torn from their anchorage and washed about by the
waves, and as the zooids are all in a state of extreme contraction,
[have hesitated very much about describing it as a new species.
As, however, sufficient information concerning its structure is obtainable to show it
to be different from any hitherto described species of the genus, I have concluded
TUNICATA OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 529
that a description of it would be justifiable, even though this must be more or less
incomplete.
General character of the colony.—A pparently flat and incrusting. Specimens at
hand closely adherent to and somewhat interwoven with laminaria roots. Quite dense
to the touch; a considerable quantity of sand imbedded in portions of the test; this
rather more abundant in the deeper parts than on the surface. ‘Greatest dimension
of largest piece 3 cm., average thickness about 1 em. Color grayish white; in portions
where sand is absent somewhat opalescent, so that the zooids can be seen through the
test with some distinctness.
Zooids; general characters.—Probably arranged in systems, each containing but
comparatively few individuals; but the specimens at hand do not permit of certainty
on this point. Moderately numerous, rather irregularly distributed, there being con-
siderable areas of test which contain none at all. Placed at various angles to the sur-
face of the colony. Removed from the test with much difficulty. Allin condition of
extreme contraction. Owing to this fact and the well-nigh impossibility of removing
them complete from the test, the length of the individuals can not be determined with
any accuracy, but this not more than a few millimeters—4 or 5. Thickness consider-
able as compared with length, even after contraction is taken into consideration.
Regions of the body very indistinct. Post-abdomen apparently about as long as
combined thorax and abdomen; broad at its origin, and tapering rapidly back to its
termination.
Branchial apparatus.—Little information obtainable concerning the orifices.
Branchial siphon short, its 5 lobes well marked, probably in living specimens quite
long. Atrial siphon inconspicuous, with a wide, short languet, apparently having but
one lobe. Thorax very dense,owing in considerable degree to the large quantity of
mesenchymatous tissue and the thickness of the epithelial layer of the mantle; for in
spite of the extreme state of contraction the musculature is not developed to an
unusual extent.
As nearly as can be determined the branchial sac contains about 10 series of
stigmata.
Digestive tract.—Intestinal loop very short, indistinguishable in its several parts
excepting the stomach and rectum, the latter being very wide and filled with dark
brown faecal matter not formed into pellets. Stomach somewhat broader than long.
Walls longitudinally ridged on the inner surface, though the ridges are not always
regular and parallel. Apparently about 10 or 12 in number.
Reproductive organs.—Ovary forming a compact mass situated some distance
behind the intestinal loop. Not large, so thoroughly embedded in the mesenchy-
matous tissue(?)—food yolk—contained in the post-abdomen that it is found with
difficulty. Testis not distinctly lobed, but large and massive, occupying most of the
post-abdomen. ;
Embryos present in the atrial chamber of a few zooids,
It is possible that careful study of more material of this species will prove there
are in reality two species represented here, distinguished by difference in size of zooids, °
form of post-abdomens, ridges in the wall of stomachs, and perhaps in some other par-
ticulars. But with the small number of specimens now available for examination it
is impossible to differentiate two such species with any satisfaction.
5947—pPT 3—34
530 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Synoicum irregulare, new species.
General character of the colony.—In all cases distinctly lobed, but the lobes very
variable in size and shape. In some instances they are separate almost to the base
of the colony, while in others the upper half or even less of the entire length of the
lobe is free from the common basal mass. Some of the lobes decidedly enlarged at
the summit, others not so. An occasional lobe stands out at
26. nearly a right angle to those with which it is in closest relation.
Rarely any free spaces between the free portions of the lobes.
No longitudinal furrows on the lobes marking the intervals be-
tween the zovids, though the zooids quite clearly visible through
the test on the sides of the lobes. Surface of the test at the
bases of the lobes and of the basal undivided mass often shows
well-marked transverse corrugations (fig. 26). Color of the lobes
milk white; of the basal portions Brayish. This appears to be
the predominating color characterization, but some colonies gray
throughout. Very little sand or other foreign substance on the
surface. Test relatively large in quantity, semicartilagenous, no distinct surface layer.
Cells very numerous. Basal portions traversed by a few vessels. Height of largest
colony, 3 cm.; length of longest lobe in this colony, 17 mm.;
thickness of base of this lobe, 8 mm.; thickness of summit
of same lobe, 13 mm. These values would not appear to be
greatly above the average.
Zooids.—F rom two or three to eight or ten in each lobe.
Not visible on the summit of the lobes in any of the speci-
mens at hand, but quite distinctly so on the sides of: the lobes
in some colonies. Of large size, always at least as long as
the lobes of the colony, usually extending to very near the
base of the colony. Average length about 17mm. Of this,
considerably more than half is post-abdomen. Thorax rela-
tively very short in all specimens at hand, but this largely
due to great contraction. Post-abdomen not pedunculated
(fig. 28). Condition as to systems in doubt. Apparently a
common cloaca not usually present, but material at hand
does not permit final determination of the point.
In some colonies zooids in a peculiar state of disorganiza-
tion. (This subject more fully treated in another connection.)
4 Musculature consisting almost exclusively of longitudi-
nal fibers; these not disposed in bundles to the usual extent
in compound ascidians.
Branchial apparatus.—Neither of the orifices found with
certainty on the surface of the colony in any of the speci-
mens at hand. In the few colonies in which the thorax is
present at all, so much contracted and so thick walled that
its structure could be but imperfectly determined. Branchial siphon six-lobed; these
thick and rather obscure. Atrial orifice obscurely unequally lobed. A short and
thick atrial languet present; its lobulation not determined. Tentacles not large or
numerous, of unequal sizes.
TUNICATA OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 531
At least 17 series of stigmata, the individual stigmata exceedingly small and
obscure, though the series fairly well marked by the heavy muscle band i in each inter.
stigmatic space. This muscle band as broad as, or broader than, the stigmatic area
(fig. 28, m. ¢. v).
Endostyle broad, not greatly tortuous. No information concerning the dorsal
languets.
Digestive apparatus.—Loop rather wide, not twisted, particularly characterized
by the great thickness of the rectal limb.
Cisophagus exceptionally broad, particularly at its mouth; much narrower at its
entrance into the stomach. Stomach apparently nearly spherical in its normal form,
but usually broader than long in preserved specimens. Its entire wall covered with
small, rather uniform, thickened patches or areolations (fig.'28). Length of the loop
behind the stomach considerably greater than combined length of cesophagus and
stomach. Rectal portion of intestine greatly enlarged in most specimens. It reaches
the dorsal side of the branchial sac by turning at a short angle immediately behind
the sac.
Reproductive organs.—Situated in the long, broad post-abdomen. Ovary in the
form of a long, narrow band placed at one side of the post-abdomen (fig. 28, ov.), the
ova distinctly amoeboid, and without recognizable follicular epithelium or “test” cells.
No oviduct observed. Testis distinguished with difficulty (excepting
when containing ripe sperm) from the great mass of mesenchymatous 22
material by which the post-abdomen is filled. Vas deferens not seen.
Embryos develop in packages in cavities of the test (fig. 27). No bud-
ding seen.
(See end of paper for account of sexual reproduction of this species.)
This species is certainly closely related to S. turgens Phipps, and-
at first I was much inclined to consider it to be identical with that spe-
cies. There seem, however, to be several points of difference between ~
them so considerable as to make it necessary to regard them as distinct species.
In the first place 8. turgens as figured by both Savigny, 1816 (Pl. III, fig. 3), and
Sars (see Bonnevie, 1896, p. 12, and Pl. IV, fig. 36), has the lobes in general much
more separate than is the case in 8. irregulare. And in his description Savigny
speaks of the systems as being in the form of solid cylinders “isolated or associated by
their peduncles.” Again, our species shows no trace of the channels on the surface of
the lobes marking the intervals between the zooids, such as are described and figured
by Savigny in S. turgens. The systems and common cloacal orifices of S. turgens are,
according to the authors already mentioned, very distinct, while in 8. irregulare, as will
be noted from my description, there is much doubt about their being present at all.
As concerns the zooids, it would appear that the two forms agree very closely,
though it is hardly possible that the branchial sac of S. turgens could be so closely
contracted, and the stigmata thereby so greatly obscured, as is the case in all the
material of 8. irregulare at my disposal, without having been mentioned by Savigny.
From 8. incrustatum, Sars, Huitfeldt-Kaas, 1896, the only other species of the
genus, the present species differs so markedly that a detailed contrast between them
would be superfluous.
The collection contains about a dozen colonies and pieces of colonies of this most
interesting ascidian, all, so far as my information goes, from St. Paul Island.
532 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Both Synoicum irregulare and Polyclinum pannosum present interesting conditions
in connection with their sexual reproduction. I describe that shown by the first-
named species only. Unfortunately, however, the collection does not contain sufficient
specimens to enable me to make the account as full as might be desired.
In the formal description of the species I have pointed out that the thorax is
very small relatively, and is much contracted and so dense and opaque as to make it
impossible to distinguish the branchial sac with any clearness. This is the condition
in all the colonies at hand in which the thorax of the zooids is found at all. But in
most of the colonies a great proportion of the zooids are wholly without the thorax.
It frequently happens that, although the lobes of the colonies are of nearly normal
size, the upper half or more of some of them may contain no zooids or parts of zooids,
and the test may be entirely solid, i. e., without cavities such as are usually found in
preserved specimens of compound ascidians in which the zooids have withdrawn
upon killing into the deeper portions of the test. This condition is the result of
degeneration of the zooids, or at least their anterior portions. Post-abdomens alone
are found in great numbers in such colonies. Jrequently these do not differ in any
respect, either in form, size, or composition, from others that are still connected with
branchial sacs. I have not been able to follow the process of disappearance, either
of the thorax or of the solidification of the test in the parts of the lobes containing
no zooids. It is very possible that the condition of the thorax as I have described it
is not typical for the species, but is a result of the retrogressive process having already
set in. Of this, however, I have no certain proof. Examination of the free post-
abdomens shows them to be densely filled with a material that is for the most part
undoubtedly of the nature of food yolk. This does not differ in any essential partic-
ular from the food material that is found in many compound ascidians. When fully
elaborated it consists of an enormous number of small granules, very regular in size,
form, and optical properties. They are almost perfectly spherical and are highly
refractive, and possess.a slightly yellowish tinge.
.In many species these granules.can be easily seen to be contained in the mesen-
chymatous cells, but here no evidence of cell structure in connection with them can
be made out in most cases. It is probable that the cell substance has become wholly
converted into the granules, though just how the thing is accomplished is not clear,
since the bodies into which the granules are aggregated are much larger than the
individual mesenchyme or body-substance cells ever are, and at the same time they
appear to be too definite and constant in form to permit, without much misgiving, the
supposition that they are formed from the running together of several cells. Their
form approaches spherical in almost all cases where they are not under external pres-
sure from some cause. Many of them reach a diameter of 45 or 50 M, while their aver-
age size would probably be about 30 Me From their form and behavior under pressure
of the cover slip, and from what is known of the similar bodies in other species, it is
quite certain that each one possesses an exceedingly thin membrane, But this is
difficult to prove directly. In most, if not in all of these free post-abdomens portions
of the mantle containing the characteristic muscle fibers and epithelial cells are
present, and also the heart and the epicardiac tubes may frequently be found.
But the most interesting facts in connection with them relate to the sexual cells
and their development. In many of the abdomens, particularly those that are least
changed in form and structure, the band-shaped ovary is found to differ in no respect
TUNICATA OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 533
from the condition which it presents in ordinary normal zooids. (Fig. 28,0v.) The ova,
however, many of them at least, are distinctly amoeboid, and at no period of their exist-
ence are they enveloped by cities a follicular eplileliat or “test” cells (P1]. LX XXVI,
figs. 29, 29°, 29°.) The absence of these two layers, the latter of which in particular
is so characteristic of the tunicate ovum, is noteworthy. I know of no other instance
of the kind in the group. This peculiarity of the individual ova gives an appearance
to the ovary as a whole strikingly different from that of the ordinary ovary of these
animals. The ova are very closely packed together, and the pseudopodia-like proc-
esses, in some instances guite long and narrow, lock together and overlap in an
intricate way; and as the cytoplasm is quite homogeneous and refractile, particularly
in the smaller and middle-sized ova, the appearance is, as remarked above, striking.
Whether or not this amoeboid condition prevails before the abdomen is separated from
the rest of the zooid, I do uot know; but in all probability it does, since the smaller
ova of the severed abdomens show it to almost as great a degree as do the larger
ones. The character is, however, wholly lost before maturation takes place. At
least this is the case so far as my observations have gone. I have found a few ova,
one of which is shown in Pl. LXXXVI, fig. 30, that are perfectly spherical, and as the
cytoplasm of these is entirely filled with food granules, I assume that they are nearly
ready to undergo the maturation changes.
In addition to the amoeboid form of the ova, they show the same nature to a still
greater extent in their power of ingesting other cells. Figs. 29 and 29» (P]. LXXXVI)
illustrate this. That the small cells are actually contained in the cytoplasm of the ova,
and are not merely situated on the surface, may be shown conclusively by isolating the
ova and so manipulating the cover slip as to cause them to swim about and turn over in
the fluid in which they are contained. Such ova as the ones figured, showing the cells
in various stages of penetration and disintegration, are very abundant. Ova are easily
found in which as many as five or six of the ingested cells may be seen,
I have not been able to satisfy myself as to the nature of these cells. Such
instances as that shown at a, fig. 29>, where the cell is only embedded in the surface
of the ovum, gives rise to the suspicion ‘that they represent either the follicular
epithelial cells or the “test” cells, characteristic of the ova of tunicates. They may
also, at least in some cases, be very young ova. Indeed it is highly probable that
many of the ova are consumed by their companions, for certain it is that only a small
fraction of the entire number contained in an ovary ever develop into embryos. Ihave
said that the cytoplasm of the smaller and middle-sized ova is quite homogeneous
and refractile, and also that in the older ones it is filled with food granules. These
granules in such an ovum as the one shown in fig. 30, for example, are not recognizably
different from those already described as constituting most of the bulk of the large
bodies which I have said fill the post-abdomen, and which are in all probability yolk-
laden mesenchyme cells.
.There is little doubt that the yolk granules serve as nutriment for the growing
ova and embryos, as do the ingested young ova and “test” cells (?). It is true I have
not been able to actually observe the ingestion of the granules by the ova, but the
fact that they have wholly disappeared from the cavities in which the embryos are
situated by the time the fully developed tadpole stage is reached hardly admits of
any other explanation. My failure to observe the ingestion of the granules by the
growing ova may be due to the fact that the process actually does not begin until a
534 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
comparatively late stage in the growth of the latter. If such be the case, itis probably
due to the fact that the young ova and the “test” and follicular epithelial cells
furnish a more accessible and an ample food supply for the ova during the early
stages of their growth. This would result not only from the fact that the ova are
held in the ovary for a time, but also from the further fact that the masses of yolk
granules are, as already pointed out, enveloped by a membrane at the time when the
post-abdomen is set free from the peoid
It, is worthy of special notice in this connection that at no time in the career of
the growing ovarian ova are there, so far as my observations have gone, any indica-
tions of amoeboid or other changes in their nuclei. As is seen by reference to figure
30, Pl. LX X XVI, the germinative vesicle presents in each ovum the familiar charac-
teristics of this body in ovarian ova, and this notwithstanding the fact that the
ova are actively ingesting and presumably digesting also.
The embryonic stages which I have observed are the early cleavage stages
(Pl. LXXXVI, fig. 31); late morula and early gastrula stages (fig. 32); fully developed
tadpoles, and tadpoles in which the metamorphosis is well advanced (fig. 33). I
describe the last two of these first. On making a section of the lobes of several of the
colonies, packets of bodies, a few of which are shown in figure 27, are found embedded
in the semi cartilaginous test. Cursory examination proves the bodies to be embryos
in various stages of development. In one capsule, almost perfectly spherical, 3 mm. in
diameter, were contained 13 embryos; in another, 3.5 mm. in diameter, were 16
embryos. Others examined contained fewer than the first mentioned, but none more
than the last. The embryos are very closely packed together in the capsule, and they
constitute its entire contents, so that after they are picked out the capsule is entirely
empty and its interior is almost as regular and smvoth as that of a bullet mold.
The capsules are perfectly closed at all points. Concerning the embryos themselves,
not much need be said. Figure 33 shows one in which the metamorphosis is well
advanced.
The structural fact of most interest in connection with the full-grown embryos is
the thickness and the composition of their own test. A general idea of this is given
by figure 33 ts (Pl. LXX XVI), and a more detailed representation is shown by figure
34. The interest that attaches to this point lies in the probable fact that some of the
elements contained in the test are unconsumed remnants of the extra ovarian portions
of the post-abdomens of the parent zooids. There can be scarcely a doubt that such
is the nature of the bodies shown at y’k, figure 34. These have the form, size, and
composition of many of the masses of yolk granules already described as constituting
so large a part of the bulk of the recently severed post-abdomen. In another part of
the test of the same embryo there occurred a considerable number of fibers (Pl.
LXXXVI, fig. 34 m. f.) which so strongly resembled the ordinary muscle fibers of the
mantle of ‘the adult that I should not have thought of questioning their nature but for
the remarkable position occupied by them. Structures more or less similar both to the
masses and the fibers are very common in almost every embryo. Most of these certainly
belong to the test of the embryo itself, and are of course the same as those similarly
situated in the embryos of all tunicates. But the number is here unusually large, and
when this circumstance is considered along with that of the structure of the ones
described above, it appears almost certain that, as already said, some of the various
bodies contained in the test of the embryos are remnants of the parent zooids. Whether
TUNICATA OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 535
or not this would signify that the test of the embryo serves in any way as a medium of
nutrition I-do not know. The mere fact of the presence in the test of parental sub-
stance that might be used for food by the embryo would not prove that it actually is
so used. Both the fibers and the bodies which I have described and figured are, as a
matter of fact, either imbedded in or only slightly beneath the surface of the embry-
onic test, and their presence there may signify no more, so far as the nutrition of the
embryo is concerned, than do the great variety of foreign bodies that may be found
imbedded in the test of almost all tunicates. Nevertheless, the facts as presented
do undoubtedly raise this very interesting question, and there is certainly some ground
for suspecting that the test in these embryos does actually play a part in the nutritive
function.
All the developmental stages that I have found earlier than the tadpole were
contained in a single post-abdomen. This had evidently been quite recently set free
from the zooid, since it still retained nearly its usual form and size. It was 4 mm. long
and quite narrow aS compared with the almost perfectly spherical shape assumed at
a later time.
It only remains to say a few words about the fertilization of the ova. I have
found fully developed spermatozoa in several post-abdomens, but not in any of those
containing embryos. I have, however, seen so few post-abdomens with embryos in
the early stages of development that I would not venture to conclude that the same
individuals never do contain both ripe sperm and ova at the same time, and hence
that self-fertilization does not take place. In fact it appears exceedingly probable
that this is the method of fertilization. Certain it is that ripe sperm and well-
developed ovarian ova occur together in the same abdomen, and it is difficult to
conceive either that self-fertilization would be avoided in such cases, or how it could
be accomplished in any other way after the post-abdomens have become set free and
fully and deeply imbedded, as they do, in the hard test of the colony.
In conclusion, I must express my regrets that I have not sufficient material to
make possible a fuller account of the interesting processes here seen in outline only.
The facts are sufficient, however, to render. this outline quite distinct, and we may
hope that opportunity will come before many years to fill in more of the details.
BERKELEY, February 17, 1898.
EXPLANATION OF FIGURES.
Fig. 1. Dendrodoa tuberculata, natural size.
Fig. 2, The branchial and atrial orifices of D. tuberculata, with their adjacent parts, seen from the
inside. ‘
Fig. 3. The left half of the branchial sac of D. tuberculata, seen from the inside.
Fig. 4. Small portion of the branchial sac of D. tuberculata, from the inside.
Fig. 5. The ovary, in place on the mantle, of D, tuberculata.
Fig. 6. General view of D. subpedunculata, natural size.
Fig. 7. A group of eleven individuals of D. subpedunculata attached to a fragment of seaweed. Two
of these fused together.
Fig. 8. Specimen of D. tuberculata dissected to show the digestive tract and ovary in outline. The
bands at x, and having considerable resemblance to the ovary, are foldsin the mantle. (See
note under description of species in the text relating to position of parts in this figure. )
Figs. 9 and 10. Styela greeleyi.
Fig. 11. Branchial sac of 8S. greeleyi.
Fig. 12, Digestive tract and sexual organs of same species.
536 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Fig. 13. Branchial tentacles of same.
Fig. 14. Colony of Polyclinum globosum, with a portion cut away. The small area at £ indicates
about the distribution of the zooids, and shows the branchial orifices, though much more
distinctly than they can actually be seen.
Fig. 15. A single zooid of, same species.
’ Fig. 16. Atrial languet of same, seen from the under side.
Figs. 17A and 17B. Two sectioned colonies of Polyclinum pannosum, 17A showing the zooids in their
normal form and position, and 17B the degenerated zooids. «Le characteristic Tagged
surface of the colony is shown at y, 17B.
Fig. 18. Portion of a zooid of P. pannosum.
Fig. 19. A colony of Aplidiopsis jordani with an individual of Dendrodoa subpedunculata, D.S., imbedded
in it.
Fig. 20. A zooid of A. jordani. The post-abdomen outlined in this specimen is unusually short.
Figs. 21, 21A, and 21B. Portions of different zooids of Amaroucium kincaidi. 21A and 21B drawn par-
ticularly to show the equivocal character of the irregularities in the stomach walls.
Fig. 22. A colony of Amaroucium snodgrassi. The specimen is seen from its base, B, and one of its
precipitous edges, on which latter the zooids z are visible through the semitransparent test.
Fig. 23. Stomach and small portion of intestinal loop of Amaroucium snodgrassi.
Fig. 23A. Anterior end of zooid of same species, seen from inside.
Fig. 23B. A few of the remarkably long, narrow stigmata of same species.
Fig. 24. A colony of Amaroucium pribilovense.
Fig. 25. A single zooid, the posterior part of the post-abdomen wanting, of the same species.
Fig. 26. A colony of Synoicum irregulare. :
Fig. 27. The cut surface of one of the lobes of a colony of same species, showing the packages of
embryos, e, imbedded in the test.
Fig. 28. A zooid of S. irregulare.
PuaTE LXXXVI.
Figs. 29, 29a, and 29b. Ovarian ova of S. irregulare, 29 and 29b containing ingested cells. x 360.
Fig. 30. An ovarian ovum, presumably nearly ready for maturation. X 360.
Fig. 31. Two-celled stage. x 360.
Fig. 32. Morula? early gastrula stage. x 360.
Fig. 33. Embryo well advanced in metamorphosis. This from one of the cavities containing embryos
only. x 40.
Fig. 34. Small portion of the test of an old embryo. The cellular masses, x, are the same as the
bodies shown at «, fig. 33. These probably belong to the test of the embryo itself. The
mass y. k. is imbedded in the test, and is without doubt a cluster of the mesenchymatous
yolk containing bodies found in the parental post-abdomen. m. f. appear to be muscle
fibers derived from the mantle of the parent.
BIBLIOGRAPHY.
BoNnNEVIE, KRISTINE.
1896. Ascidiae Simplices og Ascidiae Compositae. Den Norske Nordhavs-Expedition, 1876-1878.
XXIII, Zoologi.
Epwarps, MILNE.
1846. Observations sur les ascidies composées des Cotes de la Manche. Mémoires de l’Académie
royale des sciences de ]’Institute de France. T. XVIII, 1846.
GiaRD, A.
1872. Recherches sur les Ascidies composées, ou Synascidies. Theses, 1872.
Hancock, ALBANY.
1868. On the Anatomy and Physiology of the Tunicata.
Vol. IX, 1868.
HELLER, CAUSIL.
1877. Untersuchungen iiber die Tunicaten des Adriatischen und Mittelmceres. III (1) Abtheil-
ung. Denkschriften d. kais. Akad. d, Wissensch. Wien, Math.-naturwiss. Classe. Bd. XXXVII,
1877.
Journal Linnean Society—Zoology.
TUNICATA OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 537
HERDMAN, W. A.
1882. Report on the Tunicata collected during the voyage of H. M.S. Challenger during the years
1873-1876. Challenger Reports, Zoology, Vol. VI, 1882.
1886. Report on the Tunicata. Challenger Expedition, Part II. Ascidiae Campouttae, 1886.
1891. A Revised Classification of the Tunicata, with Definitions of the Orders, Suborders, Fam-
ilies, Subfamilies, and Genera and Analytical Keys to the Species. Linnean Society’s Journal—
Zoology. Vol. XXIII, 1891. :
Huitrevpt-Kaas, H,
1896, Synascidiae. Den Norske Nordhavs-Expedition, 1876-1878, XXIII, Zoologi.
Kir, JOHN. :
1893. Oversigt over Norges Ascidix simplices. Christiania Videnskabs-Selskabs Forhandlinger,
No. 9.
LaAHILLE, F..
1890. Contributions a |’étude anatomique et taxonomique des Tuniciers. Theses, 1890.
MacLzEay, WILLIAM §.
1824. Anatomical Observations on the Natural Group of Tunicata, with Descriptions of three
Species Collected in Fox Channel During the late Northern Expedition. Linnean Society
-Transactions, Vol. XIV, 1824.
SAVIGNY, JULES-CisaAR,
1816. Mémoir sur les Animanx sans Vertébres. 2d Partie, 1816.
TRAUSTEDT, M. P. A.
1882. Die einfachen Ascidien (Ascidiae simplices) des Golfes von Neapel. Mittheil. u.d. Zoolog.
Station zu Neapel. IV Bd. 4 Hft.
ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THE ILLUSTRATIONS.
Accisicighje seis Anterior, or siphonal end.
wD inte vinta ausisieis Base, or posteriur end.
a.l.......... Atrial languet.
Bs Ol Sxisreins-ctse Atrial orifice.
a.t......-... Atrial tentacles.
Difevscagiscse Branchial folds.
bes .---.---- Branchial stigmata.
br.8....-. .-. Branchial sac.
br. si....-... Branchial siphon.
pb. t.....----. Branchial tentacles.
d.1.......... Dorsal lamina.
d.t......--.. Dorsal tubercle.
emb.......-- . Embryo.
Ct “Endocarps. 2
OP seieieicwicsss Epicardiac tubes.
FH oo ss sfate'sicltare Heart.
il.v........ Internal longitudinal vessels.
m.¢.V-.-.---- Muscle bands of circular vessels.
0. @--.-.---- (Esophageal mouth.
0. Pi siaiereaietaere Optic pigment.
OD: sfaseiniwlere vies Csophagus.
ov ..-.--.--. Ovary. '
Pe D ssevacccs Peribranchial band.
T set ke seeks Rectum.
Bbiccee tenses Stomach.
t.......----. Testis.
ti, ta, ts, t4.-.- Transverse vessels of different orders.
tS cc se223es5 Test, or cellulose ‘‘ mantle.”
Ve Oo sacaecics Vas deferens.
A er Yolk-containing mesenchyme cells,
Deweeceeeeee- LOO.
PLaTe LXXXVI.
SYNOICUM x SYNOICUM X 360
Fic. 29 2 os
FIG. 29 a
FIG. 29 8
! X 360
SYNOICUM X : EUS ME SYNOIGUM Xx
FIG. 30
FIG. 31 ‘ FIG, 32
SYNOICUM X 40
vik,
x FIG. 34
DEVELOPMENT OF SYNOICUM IRREGULARE,
A.Hoen & ©
Lith, Rallimore.
XX.—THE MOLLUSK FAUNA OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
By WiLtiam H. Da...
(With a map.)
The west coasts of America, taken together in both hemispheres, so far as the
mollusks are concerned might be regarded as forming one great faunal region, modi-
fied only by the influence of temperature. In practice it is divided into three regions
between the Polar faunas: The Peruvian, whose northern limit is usually placed at
Cape Blanco, and whose extent roughly coincides with the coast washed by the
Peruvian current; the Mexican or Panamic, which extends from Cape Blanco north-
ward to Point Conception, California, though until lately supposed to be much more
restricted; and the Oregonian, which includes the coast northward from Point Con-
ception to and including the Aleutian Islands and that part of the basin of Bering
Sea south of the area covered by pack ice in winter. The Pribilof group stands on
the very northern verge of the Oregonian region. The latter is conveniently subdi-
vided into three provinces or subregions: The Californian, from Point Conception to
Cape Mendocino, California; the Oregonian proper, thence northward to Mount St.
Elias or Yakutat Bay; and the Aleutian, extending thence westward to and including
the Aleutian or Catherina Archipelago and the Commander Islands. The most north-
ern outpost of the Aleutian province is the Pribilof group. The faunal conditions of
Bering Sea are somewhat peculiar and require a particular description. They are
dependent upon bathymetrical and thermal factors. Contrary to the traditions of ©
the text-books, as I have elsewhere! shown at length, the chief current of this sea is a
drift of cold water southward, which is particularly marked along the Kamchatkan
coast. On the northern border of the Pacific, south of the peninsula of Alaska and
the Aleutian Islands, the tides rise toward the northward and westward, while a
reflected branch of the Japan current or Kuro Siwo, which is deflected northward from
the vicinity of Dixon entrance, in north latitude 54°, feebly reenforces the action of the
tides and at flood pours through the passes between the islands during summer a
certain amount of water having a temperature between 45° and 50° F., which has a
westerly set. This flow endures only for about a third of the twenty-four hours, and
is so feeble that west of west longitude from Greenwich 170° it can not be discrimi-
nated from the ordinary flow of the rising tide. A few fathoms below the surface the
water temperature rarely exceeds 40° F., which is the mean summer temperature of
1Notes on Alaska and the vicinity of Bering Strait; Am. Journ. Sci., 3d ser., XXI, pp. 104-111,
with map, February, 1881; and Appendix No. 16, Rep. U. 8. Coast and Geodetic Survey for 1880; The
Currents and Temperatures of Bering Sea, 46 pp., 4°, 2 maps and section, Washington, March, 1882.
539
540 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
the arctic water of the vicinity of Bering Strait. In winter the water temperatures
range but a few degrees above the freezing point of salt water, about 28° F.
The topography of the Bering Sea basin has been elucidated by the work of the
United States Fish Commission and the Revenue Marine, though much remains to be
done. In general, the southwestern part of the sea is deep on both sides of the
Aleutian Islands. The northern and eastern parts of the sea are relatively shallow,
forming a Jarge submarine plateau covered by less than 100 fathoms of water, and
over a great part of its extent by less than 50 fathoms. The western edge of this
plateau is some distance west and south of the Pribilof group, and the margin between
them and the peninsula is somewhat deeply embayed, so that the plateau joins dry
land on the south not far from the western end of the peninsula.
By platting the positions where the edge of the pack ice was met in early spring
from the log books of a large number of whale ships, I have been able to determine,
approximately, the usual extent of the pack in winter.’ It must be stated that the
margin of the ice pack is not a strictly determinate line, but is fringed with more or less
floating and broken ice, which varies in position with the prevailing winds. Occasions
have been known when long-continued northerly winds in February and March have
carried the loose ice as far south as the northern border of the eastern Aleutians, filling
the bays of Unalaska with the drift and obstructing navigation, but this is very excep-
tional. Usually the water about the islands is free of obstructive ice throughout the
year. The Pribilof group, however, lie so much nearer the average limit of the winter
pack that few winters pass when the shores are not, for at least a short period, sur-
rounded by the floes, and sometimes they are icebound for one or two months.
The presence of floe ice is destructive to a littoral fauna unless the animals can
retreat into the depths of the sea beyond the reach of ice. For this reason the Arctic
shores and the beaches of the Pribilof Islands are poorly supplied with living mol-
lusks. The shores of the Aleutians have a fairly rich littoral fauna, though for some
reason, perhaps the scarcity of the red and green seaweeds noted by botanists all
through this region, there is a general scarcity of the minuter, mostly phytophagous,
forms of mollusks, such as Rissoidae and the like. The dredgings of the United States
Fish Commission have chiefly been made with the beam trawl, which does not retain
the more minute species; but my own, done with the dredge, also failed to obtain
any large number of small mollusks, so we may regard the fact that the fauna is rather
deficient in them as fairly well proved.
The shallow waters around the Aleutians possess a well-marked and_ pretty
uniform fauna of some two or three hundred species of mollusks, a certain number of
which are common to the adjacent continental shores and the Pribilof Islands. This
fauna comprises a number of characteristic species, together with a contingent of
Arctic forms and a certain number of Oregonian types.
The work of the Albatross, however, has shown that another fauna exists in
Bering Sea largely distinct from that of its shores and widely spread over the great
plateau to which reference has been made. This is not a deep-sea fauna, for the water
is no deeper, and often shallower, than that of the bays and harbors of the Aleutians,
in which but few of its component species are found. It is marked by a rather limited
number of bivalves and an unusual predominance of species of Buccinum, Chrysodomus,
and Strombella (or Volutopsis). My study of this fauna has not progressed far enough
1 See accompanying map.
THE MOLLUSKS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 541
to enumerate its species, many of which are new, characteristic, and peculiar. A
number of them have been described and figured,! but many more remain to be worked
up. A few of them farther south descend into the Archibenthal region and extend
their range as far south as the Galapagos Islands, off the South American coast, but
the great majority seem to be limited to the Bering Sea plateau.
In acertain sense the inhabitants of this plateau might be regarded as forming
part of the fauna of the Pribilofs, although never found upon the beaches; but I have
in the accompanying list of Pribilof shells included only a few of them which have
been dredged in comparatively shallow water close to the islands. They are marked
with an asterisk to distinguish them from the littoral species. It might be considered
proper to enumerate as belonging to the Pribilof fauna all littoral species which have
been found both south and north from the islands, as a thorough search would probably
reveal them somewhere about the group. But for present purposes I have preferred
to catalogue only such species as have actually been collected by some one on the
islands, though it is certain that by this method the total number of species is con-
siderably underrated.
The first collections made on the islands were gathered by Elia Wossnessenski, a.
preparator of the Imperial Academy of Sciences at St. Petersburg, who was sent out
for the purpose of obtaining for the Zoological Museum a full representation of the
fauna and flora of Russian-America. He spent three years in the colony, and his
shells were worked up by Middendorff in his Malacozoologia Rossica and Sibirische
Reise, 1849-1854.
No other collector appears to have visited the Pribilofs for many years In 1868
I made a small collection from the beaches of St. George, but was unable to do any
dredging. In 1874 and 1880 I visited St. Paul and St. George and did a little dredg-
ing, but with scanty results. A few species were collected by Messrs. H. W. Elliott
and William Palmer in 1880. Later the work of the Albatross for the United States
Fish Commission resulted in rich collections from the plateau region of Bering Sea,
but very few specimens were actually obtained on the islands.
The following list includes all the species which I have been able to determine as
actually collected on the islands. JI have noted in separate columns the species found
on St. Paul and St. George and have given in parallel columns the range of these
species in Japan, on the Kamchatka coast, in the Arctic Ocean, the Aleutian chain,
and California. Species collected by. Wossnessenski are indicated by a capital W,
others noted by Middendorff with an M; Palmer’s species by a P; those collected on
the voyage of the Vega bya V; the Albatross shells by A; my own by a D, and others
by an X.
It must be distinctly understood that this list can not be regarded as complete,
since none of the collectors made thorough search on shore or by dredging. However,
the catalogue will serve for a beginning, and doubtless includes the majority of the
species most likely to be found on the shores of the island.
There are only three land shells known from the group—a Pupa, Succinea, and a
Vitrina—all of which are common to the Kamchatka coast as well as the north-
eastern coast of Bering Sea. There is much probability that a search by a competent
collector would reveal several small species of Zonitidae, Pupidae, etc.; and probably
Pisidium exists in the pools of St. Paul, as it does on many of the Aleutians.
‘Proc, U.S. Nat. Mus., XIV, pp. 186-190, July 1891; and XVII, pp. 706-713, 1895,
542 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF
ISLANDS
The characteristic marine forms of the fauna are Chitonidae, limpets and Bucet*
nidae, of which several highly characteristic forms occur. I have added the giant
squid, Onychoteuthis, as I have heard that specimens have been cast ashore at St.
Paul, though no naturalist has seen them.
Occurring as they do at Unalaska, it
would be strange if they did not also extend their range to the Pribilof group. A few
species have so far been found only in this locality, but there is no reason to suppose
that they are actually restricted to it.
Such are Chrysodomus insularis, Strombella
fragilis, and Beringius frielei, of the plateau fauna; and Strombella callorhina and
Buecinum fischerianum, of the shore fauna.
St. Paul seems to be the source of nearly
all the specimens of Strombella beringt Midd., which have hitherto been collected.
Altogether 86 forms are known from the group, of which 66 have been collected on
St. Paul and 42 on St. George; 17 are common to California, 72 to the Aleutian
Islands, 42 to the Arctic fauna, 31 to Kamchatka, and 10 to the northern islands of
Japan. Allof the latter are common to the American shores, so it can not be said
that there is any characteristically Asiatic element in the fauna.
For comparison, I have added a similar list of the species of the Commander
Islands, in which we have a squid, one land shell, one fresh-water shell, and one chiton,
which are known elsewhere only on the Asiatic coasts, a proportion out of 74 species
which can not be said to be large. Besides the mollusks an ascidian, Boltenia beringi,
was described by me from St. George, and a brachiopod, Rhynchonella (Hemithyris)
psittacea, is abundant at times on the beaches of St. Paul Island.
Pribilof Islands, Bering Sea.
FAUNAL SUMMARY.
Species identified.
St. George.
Range.
Pan ee
dd 8 a @
e/é}i] 3
‘ ms 3
a|/gleisi/ée
a | < by pai
C4 pa} 3
6 i=.) 4 qi] 5.
Onychoteuthis robusta Dall
Succinea chrysis Westerlund.......
Vitrina exilis Morelet......
Pupa decora Gould, var..? .
Cryptochiton Stelleri Midd ........ Sead
Amicula vestita Sby ......-
Amicula Pallasii Midd .....
Trachydermon ruber (L.) C
Tonicella submarmorea Midd
Tonicella saccharina Dall
Tonicella lineata Wood. .
Acmaea mitra Esch .....
Acmaea testudinalis Mull ..
Acmaea patina var. ochracea Dall. .
Acmaea Cumingi Rve ....--
Acmaea sybaritica Dall. .
Acmaea apicina Dall ......
Lepeta concentrica Midd ..
Velutina coriacea Pallas ...
Velutina cryptospira Midd
Crepidula grandis Midd ...
Litorina sitkana Phil... .
Litorina subtenebrosa Mi
Haloconcha reflexa Dall .
Cingula Martyni Dall .
Acrybia flava Gould...
Natica russa Gould........
Natica clausa Brod. and Sb:
Lunatia pallida Brod. and Sby..-..-...
Margarita helicina Fabr....
Scala grénlandica Fabr.....
Tritonium oregonense Redf ..
Trichotropis insignis Midd.
CO een ea
THE MOLLUSKS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 543.
Privilof Islands, Bering Sea—Continued.
FAUNAL SUMMARY—Continued.
Range.
Species identified.
Kamchatka.
Arctic Ocean.
Aleutians.
California.
Purpura lima Mart.............--.-- oS NadSheeaan mam aeecemrecmes epee acaieieacines
i: *Prophon Dalli Kobelt.s cic ccssjwacuwasancawawicais ocksia'se ite veardirerccmencuireaaasi
‘Chrysodomus liratus Mart .....-........ jpainichateefavshecersyeisiygje Herel signet SEI Sessa
Chrysadomus fornicatug Gray........ 22.2 2n eee eee eee eee eee eter
*Chrysodomus insularis Dall ..-.... 2.22.22 e eee eee tee ce cen cence ee eeee
Chrysodomus (var.?) communis Midd _....... 2.2 -20---- cee eee eee eee ee cere eens
Tritonofusus Kroyeri M6ll ...........-... Bh djatelarsis wate aise aie Selsele ait ees sarceicaiasicie
Sipho spitzbergensis Rvo..-...---.-.-.- 22-22 -+-nenee cece ee eee eee cence neee ee
Sipho? shantarica Midd 2.200 cesecceeccancoee cancesomessasanece semisacnnenecce
*Sipho Herendeenii Dall ..-......
*Heliotropis deformis Gray
Heliotropis deformis var. harpa Mérch ......---------.--0-0--0+eeeeeee erences
*“Steoin bella fragilis, Dale. iace.c2sseeeiciniatie ns wescinaniscwininicedoannsoioseoamseisesy seaiee
Strombella Beringi Midd....
Strombella callorhina Dall......-....-..--- 0-022 eee eee e ee eee ce eee nen as enee
*Strombella Middendorftii Dall .
*Beringius Frielei ‘Dall .................
*Ancistrolepis magnus Dall ..........-.
Volutoharpa ampullacea Midd ...--.. 2.22.22. 220- 2s cece nee eee e eee eee ee ee eens
Buccinum cyaneum v. Mérchianum F
Buccinum cyaneum v. Baeri Midd .....--.......2.--0- 2. e eee eee eee eee eee
Buccinum Fischerianum Dall .......-..-.-.-----+------ ais arginisit eisieieeimens arain cia estatn
Buceinum glaciale L .-....-..--.---.---0-seeeee eee
Buccinum tenue Gray
Bela simplex Midd ...-........----0---- ee eeee eee eee
*Pleurotoma Beringi Aur..-...--.----------20 2222-2 ence ee ne ete eee neem eect nee
*Pleurotoma circinata Dall
Saxicava rugosa L....---------s0-+------
Mya truncata L ...-...-..---.---------
Siliqaa pattls D200 a dnenesees nen veenats ss esneeenes erie nenceniaennacnawlnems ed
Biliqua media Gray cco .incanx cx naaccncans eeeeneens ever eee ererenvneseeeenecsee se
Spins Alaskans, Dall isa cusicccesascmesscanccacons seed peacaedaseasauieeceaieuc ais
ONnSY CANALS Dail evcseses wea ewiwad sane mows wien cacianicemesnaanae duane
Liyonsia arenosa MGI. 6.656220 wasteeicsnieg:- asi asennes scmesiciecsscins gececinee
‘acoma inconspicua Brod. and Sby .....---.-----0+--00-02 ee een e erence eeeee
‘Macoma frigida Gray....---.---------+- 2-2 ee eee eee e eee e ee cet eet eee nee ee eee
Macoma nasuta Conr......
Macoma Middendorffii Dall........-.--.--- 2-202 eee eens ee cee ne tee ene eee eeeee
Tellina alternidentata Brod .....--.-.--.+------------2eeceneee cere een eeeee Rian
Liocyma fluctuosa Beck ..... 22.222 -22 2-2 ee nen eee e eee eee ee eee eee meee wenneee
Cardium Nuttallii Conr ......2...0--2 22-2 eee cence ence eee nec e eee ne eem eee nnee
Cardium blandum Gld ........ Seeebedeeneeenes aemes dasesie
Cardium islandicum Gmel.......-.......0-------+ 0-202 ce cee e ee een ce meee ence ee
Serripes proulandicus Badr ..~2vo-se--c+0-n0 nnn sittin nctintine ne dte ne soeemnece
Astarte semisulcata Leach ..... 202-202. 02ccee nce c cree e eee ee een ce cece eneenances
Venericardia borealis Conr.....--.2-.- 2.22 nceccen nce racetenee teens aneneeneeees
*Lucina acutilineata Conr.... “
Pecten strategus Dall ...
Pecten islandicus Mull .....-..
Pododesmus macroschisma Desh
Mytilus edulis L
Modiolus modiolus L ....
Modiolaria vernicosa Midd ......-..----- pia Ble cikreleleisie mesa Se cio emieis wa diealsicis sieht
Total, 86 forms .........----- 0-0 sasaeneencccenn eer cnen cere nee cemamannaeee 66 42 10 31 42 72 17
544 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Commander Islands, Bering Sea.!
FAUNAL SUMMARY.
Range. Range.
5 d
& a|¢ ; a a |
Species identified. B pea =a | Species identified. : 3 |
aA/3|/$|sis al/s|/Sj3/ 8
eee: 2/8 /3/8/S
elaglalSid a] @ |] ala |
od
BiH I/a);a]o BIN J/4djdjo
Gonatus amoenus Fabr........-..----- --|----| X | X |...) Cerithiopsis stejnegeri Dall......-.... wecafeccelieas| X Jos
Lestoteuthis fabricii (?) Licht X |--.-/----|----|| Margarita helicina Fabr? .... Mo] KY XM | XK bese.
Cylichna propinqua Sars .........----- s+--|----| X | X |....]) Margarita vorticifera Dall... --| X | X | X |...
Aecolidia papillosa L..... ace -++-| X |.-..|| Margarita varicosa Migh ...- af Se PORE, Ee Sees
Cadlina pacifica Bergh ... Ste -e--| X |--..|| Purpura lima Mart........ x|x1|x |x
Acanthodoris pilosa Mull..........-.. | X |X |. Trophon truncatus Strom ..... sivete|| OS | OE ewe
Limax (A griolimax) hyperboreusWest.|. x | X |...-|| Strombella var. stejnegeri Dall aie|| XK Peters
Vitrina exilis Mor....-......----.----- x | x | X || Tritonofusus kroyeri Moller .-- siccatep DE OX
Hyalina radiatula Ald... x | X |..--|| Chrysodomus liratus Mart-...- 1% |X feces
Conulus fulvus var. Mull... x | X |..-.|| Chrysodomus spitzbergensis Rve.. 3K OX feces
Patula ruderata var. pauper Gld ----|----|-.--]} Volutharpa ampullacea Midd.... M1 KX
Pupilla decora Gld ........-- Semi x | X |....|| Astyris rosacea Gld ......... x 1X |x
Limnaea ovata Drap... e ---| |.-..|| Buccinum tenue Gray ..-........ seua| 9 |X: |e
Limnaea humilis Say .... (2) |---.|----!.--.|| Buceinum var. mérchianum Fischer Xcel OE te
Siphonaria thersites Cpr -. -+-|----{ X |.--.// Buccinum percrassum Dall...... =a] X& [nese
Trachyradsia aleutica Dall ses+|----|----| X |.---|/ Pleurotoma (Bela) violacea Migh =e XX
Tonicella marmorea Fabr.. .- -| x | X | XK | X | X || Pleurotoma beringi Aur....... ts mail G2) |
Tonicella submarmorea Midd x|x]x]x Zirfea crispata L....-........- ised laeicallle cio
Trachydermon ruber L.- x | xX | xX 1X |....|| Pholadidea penita Conr.......- ivaieieittnizal[real
Schizoplax brandtii Dall. -.| % |.---] X |..-.)} Saxicava rugosa L cc] xX |x |x
Leptochiton cancellatus Sby. --|----|----1----|---.]| Mya truneata L.........2.22----- «| XK 1 xX
Placiphorella stimpsoni Gld - C |---| ---/.---| (2) || Cuspidaria var. beringensis Leche - eaestesns|| O¢
Cryptochiton stelleri Midd .. x |X | X | X || Siliqua patula Dixon...........-. SS lini Sf DS
Acmaea patina Esch..... -| X | x | x | x || Spisula alaskana Dall.......... rosie OR | OS
Acmaea pelta Esch...... sasalescs| xX | & acoma middendorffi Dall..-.. ee ee
Velutina cryptospira Midd X |.-..| X |....|| Tapes staminea Conr .......... S: ecicrsh OS
Piliscus commodus Midd .. -.--| X | X |...-!) Cardium grénlandicum L...... 1K | XK faves
Crepidula grandis Midd ... x |x | x | X |..-.|| Cardium blandum Gld........... Ot fence || 2 eee
Litorina sitkana Phil........ x | X |.---| X | X || Pisidium aequilaterale Hald..... : wares |geee| XC Ison
Litorina var. subtenebrosa Midd x | xX | x | X |..-.|| Modiolaria discors Gray...-.......... Kw RK | He Tees
Litorina var. atkana Dall ...... cere[eee-|----/ % |.---]| Modiolaria laevigata (var. ?) Gray .-..|....| x | x | Xx JL...
Lacuna vineta Mtg ........ x |x | xX | * | X |} Modiolus modiolus L .. x}]x |x 1X
Haloconvha reflexa Dall . ----|----|---.] X |...-|| Mytilus edulis L dee 1K | 9e
Natica clausa Brod .....- x |X | xX | X |.--.|| Peeten alaskensis Dall _._....... ais.nai) tase OX: [ose
Natica russa Gld ............ ----| X |----| X ]..-.|| Pododesmus macroschisma Desh x x | x
Tachyrhynehus erosus Couth . > a Ie aad ee aie aad fe : ——
Trichotropis insignis Midd.. slats OS [ainiei|| | Nlese aia Total 74 species...-.-............ 28 | 44 | 41 | 63 | 17
Tritonium oregonense Redf..........-. MK [aoa] oe |
1 Modified from table given by me in Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus, for 1886. Report on Bering Island Mollusca, pp. 217, 218,
October, 1886. Cf. also these Proceedings for 1884, pp. 340-349.
? Since this paper was prepared a publication has appeared (Proc. Mal. Soe , of London, III, p. 205, Mar., 1899) on
Some Mollusca trom Bering Sea, by Mr. Edgar A. Smith, of the British Museum. ‘These were collected by Mr. G. E. H.
Barrett-Hamilton of the Bering Sea Commission, at the Commander Islands. They comprise (1) a species of Ommatostrephes
not specifically identified; (2) Astyris rosacea Gould; (3) Margarita beringensis Smith; (4) M. albolineata Smith (both
described under the generic name of Valvatella); and (5) Acmea sybaritica Dall (from Copper Island). This brings the
total number of species known from the Commander Islands up to 77, of which numbers 3 and 4 are known also from the
Aleutians, and number 5 from the Pribilof Islands, the Aleutians, and Japan.
FOSSIL MOLLUSKS OF ST. PAUL ISLAND.
The only molluscan fossils known in the group come from St. Paul Island, and I
have added an extract from my geological report on the Tertiary coals of Alaska
(Report on Coal and Lignite of Alaska, 17th Ann. Rep. U.S. Geol. Survey, 1886), which
summarizes all that is known of them up to the present time.
On the eastern side of the point which forms the southeastern extreme of the island is a bluff or
crag known as Black Bluff, which, according to the observations of Wossnessenski in 1847-48,
is composed of horizontal layers of a hard claystone, with others in which lime preponderates,
forming a pale gray, fine-grained, clayey limestone, or in which a conglomerate of pebbles of volcanic
origin is bound together in a limy matrix.! Over these are layers of black or brown volcanic breccia’
and vesicular lava. These blufts rise abruptly to a height of 60 to 80 feet above the sea at their base.
'Grewingk, Beitrag, p. 190,
\
er
\
— ALASKA \
ND ADJOINING REGIQ\
A~B,Winter \8.Limit of Pack \
THE MOLLUSKS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 545
From the limestone and argillite marine fossils have been obtained by Wossnessenski, Elliott, Dall,
W. Palmer, and C. H. Townsend, of which a collection exists in the National Museum, enumerated in
the following table. About twenty-eight species are known from this locality, which is stated to be
the only spot in the whole group where any fossiliferous rocks oceur,! the remainder of the islands
being composed of volcanic rocks and alluvium of very recent origin.
Observations made in 1891 by Mr. J. Stanley-Brown,? special agent of the Treasury Department,
convinced him that at present no distinct trace of any limy stratum is perceptible in the Black Bluff.
The fossils obtained by him were contained in rounded, apparently water-worn, pebbles, which were
indiscriminately included in a general mass of volcanic ashes and other eruptive matter of which
the bluff is formed. No extinct species appeared in the collection brought back by Mr. Stanley-
Brown, while several are noted from the material of the earlier collections. It would seem possible
that pebbles of more than one geological epoch may be included in the mass, or that the wear of the
waves for half a century has cut away enough of the bluff to hide or destroy the limy stratum
referred to by Grewingk and which may have been of limited extent. It is certain that from an
examination solely of the material collected in 1891 the fossils might be referred to an age as late as
the post-Pliocene, which would not agree very well with the fauna reported by Grewingk and others.
The fossils collected by Mr. Stanley-Brown and not included in the earlier collections are as follows:
Buccinum tenue Gray ?, B. polare Gray ?, Admete. couthouyi Jay?, Leda sp., Yoldia limatula’ Say,
Pseudopythina grandis Dall, Cardium islandicum (very abundant), Macoma sabulosa Spengler, and a
fragment possibly of a Panopea. All these occur lying at moderate depths in Bering Sea, adjacent
to the island, at present.
This deposit has been discussed by Dr. George M. Dawson,? who corroborates Mr. Stanley.
Brown’s description of the conditions under which the fossils are found, but regards them as having
been detached from the sea bottom by a volcanic eruption, with the products of which they were
mixed, and therefore does not consider them as fixing the age of the formation in which they occur,
but only as representing beds already in existence at the time of the eruption.
COMMANDER ISLANDS.
On the Commander Islands, west of the Aleutians, rocks of the same age probably occur, since
on Bering Island Stejneger collected some specimens of wu conglomerated hard gravel of highly
polished pebbles united by a limy cement, containing fragments of bivalves (Saxicava?) and a single
piece of claystone with the imprint of a bivalve not yet identified.
1 Cf. H. W. Elliott, Condition of Affairs in Alaska, 1875, p. 70.
2 Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., ITT, 1892, p. 496.
3 Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., Vol. V, 1895, pp. 130-132.
5947—PprT 3 35
546 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Table showing range of Black Bluff fossils.)
3 o
g a
. my : A o oO
pis 3. | 8 $
4a lS) 8] g|-s | 4 a Miocene. 8 = | Recent.
Name of species identified. g | a 44 E e a Ms a 2 5
= a A aiaia\/sialals a a
SIE(S/8/S 1/2/38 /%
Flele}518) 2/5 | |e | B.c.Oreg, cal. | cal. | cal. | NL] s
Glycymeris kashevaroffi Grewingk . .. wanclegealecne[ecccfecelacee| X [rons] X [eceecc|---eee[eeecce|eweecelacees Eealveee
Glycymeris patulus Conrad oa
Nucula tenuis Lamarck ....-..--
Nucula (Acila) ermani Girard - .
Yoldia limatula Say, var--.---.-
Astarte borealis Gray --...----
Cardium islandicum Gmel.......
Cardium decoratum Grewingk. -
Serripes gronlandicus Beck .-.
Liocyma fluctuosa Beck. .
Tapes staminea Conrad .
Lioconcha sp.-.-.---------
Tagelus sp .--.----------------
Pseudopythina grandis Dall . -
Soletellina sp...---------------
Tellina frigida Gray
Tellina alternidentata Brod. and Sby..
Macoma middendorfii Dall............
Macoma inconspicua Brod. and Sby -
Macoma sabulosa Spgl
Lyonsia arenosa Moller ...-..-.
Kennerlyia grandis Dall ......
Saxicava arctica L ...-....-..-
Teredo sp seccsc0ssececcccests<
Cylichna (alba Brown?).......
Admete couthouyiJday....-...
Buccinum tenue Gray .--.--.--
Buccinum polare Gray .-.--.:.--
Buccinum plectrum Stimpson .- -
Odostomiasp..-. ---------------
Lunatia (pallida B. and S. ?) ..-.
Neverita saxea Conrad.....-
Natica clausa Brod. and Sby ...-
Margarita striata Brod. and Sby
Margarita sp.-..-.-..--..-.--.02..----
KKXXXKKXKKXKXKKKKKKX KKK XK KKK KK KK KKK KK | St. Paul Island.
1This table is derived chiefly from a table of Alaskan Tertiary fossils given by me in the Seventeenth Annual Rept.
U.S. Geol. Survey, Part 1, 1896.
XXI.—LIST OF INSECTS HITHERTO KNOWN FROM THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.*
The insect fauna of the Pribilof Islands is still most imperfectly known, and I am
not aware that the islands have ever been visited by an expert entomologist. Among
the Russian explorers and visitors of Alaska in the first half of the present century,
Wosnesenski seems to be the only one who collected insects on the Pribilof Islands.
They are still preserved in the Imperial Museum of St. Petersburg, but only the
Coleoptera have been worked up.? After the acquisition of Alaska by the United
States a few small collections of insects were made on the islands, of which the fol-
lowing were transmitted to the Entomological Department of the United States
National Museum:
Accession No. 23646, received April, 1894, collected by Messrs. Elliott and Palmer in 1890—one species
of insects.
Accession No. 30147, received January, 1896, collected by Messrs. F. W. True and D. W. Prentiss, jr., in
1895—six species of insects.
Accession No. 31335, received November, 1896, collected by Mr. G. E. H. Barrett-Hamilton, of Ireland, in
1896—twenty-two species of insects and Arachnids.
The only general observations on the insect fauna of the islands which have been
recorded are those by Mr. Henry W. Elliott, published in Volume VIII of the Tenth
Census of the United States, 1880 (1884), page 12. Unfortunately, the determination
of the insects given by him is guesswork, and his collection never reached the Museum.
Whatever points of interest there are in his remarks are incorporated in the follow-
ing list.
The small size of the Pribilof Islands, their isolated position, and the inclement
climatic conditions are certainly not favorable to the existence of a rich insect fauna.
Still, according to a very moderate estimate, the number of insects on the islands
will amount to at least 400 species. Since of this number not more than about 40
can be enumerated at present, it is evident that any general considerations on the
character of this fauna, or a comparison with the faunas of Kamchatka, the Aleutian
Islands, and the mainland of Alaska would be premature, and the following list is
herewith given without further comment:
! Compiled by E. A. Schwarz, of the Division of Entomology, United States Department of Agri-
culture. .
2K, Ménétriés: Sur un envoi d’insectes de la cote N. O. de V Amerique (Bull. Acad. d. St. Petersbourg,
2, 1844). ’ :
V. von Motschulsky: Die Kafer Russlands (Bull. Soc. Imp. Nat. Moscow, 18, 1845).
C. G. von Mannerheim: Nachtrige zur Kiferfauna d. Aleutischen Inseln und der Insel Sitka, I-III
(Bull. Soc. Imp. Nat. Moscow, 19, 1846; 25, 1852; und 26, 1853).
547
548 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
I, COLEOPTERA.-
Family CARABIDAE.
Carabus truncaticollis Eschscholtz.
Numerous specimens collected by Messrs. Elliott and Palmer on St. Paul in 1890
and also by Mr. Barrett-Hamilton on St. Paul in 1896, Mr. Elliott says of this beetle:
“The famous green and gold Carabus is exceedingly common, crawling everywhere,”
but fails to record the food habits. The species is known from the Yukon River,
“Sierra Nevada,” and Kamchatka and eastern Siberia. The specimens from St. Paul
show great variation in sculpture and color.
Nebria bifaria Mannh. (carbonaria Mannh.).
Originally described from St. Paul. Two specimens were also found there by
F, W. True and D. W. Prentiss, jr., and by Mr. Barrett-Hamilton. It is known to
occur in Kamchatka and at St. Michael, Alaska.
Pelophila eschscholtzii Mannh.
One specimen collected by True and Prentiss. Originally described from Una-
laska; the species is also known from Methy, H. B. T.
Patrobus septentrionis Deg.
Six specimens from St. George Island collected by True and Prentiss and one
specimen from St. Paul collected by Barrett-Hamilton. A circumpolar species,
occurring also on the Alps of Europe and in the Rocky Mountains of North America.
Pterostichus (Pseudocryobius) pinguedineus Eschscholtz.
Originally described from St. Paul Island; also known from the Aleutian Islands,
Kadiak, and Sitka.
Pterostichus (Pseudocryobius) hyperboreus Mannh.
Hitherto recorded only from St. George Island.
Pterostichus (Pseudocryobius) similis Mannh.
Described from St. George Island; known also from St. Stephens.
Pterostichus (Pseudocryobius) quadricollis Mannh.
Described from St. George Island; occurs also in St. Lawrence Bay (Peninsula of
Tschutsk). :
Pterostichus (Pseudocryobius) empetricola Dej.
Eight specimens from St. Paul Island, collected by Barrett-Hamilton, and one
specimen from St. George (True and Prentiss). Widely distributed in Alaska, Hud-
son Bay territory, Kamchatka, and Siberia.
Pterostichus (Pseudocryobius) ventricosus Eschscholtz.
One specimen from St. Paul Island (Barrett-Hamilton) and two specimens from
St. George (True and Prentiss); also known from Unalaska and Sitka.
Amara hyperborea Dej.
Collected by Wosnessenski on St. Paul Island. Widely distributed in boreal
America and boreal Asia.
1 Determined by Mr. M. L. Linell.
INSECTS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 549
* Family DYTISCIDAE.
Laccophilus decipiens Lec.
Collected by Wosnessenski on St. George. Widely distributed in western North
America, occurring as far east as Kansas.
Family HYDROPHILIDAE.
Berosus maculosus Mannerheim.
Described from St. George Island; also recorded from Unalaska.
Cercyon lateralis Marsham.
Collected on St. Paul Island by Wosnessenski. Occurs along the Pacific coast of
North America; also in Siberia and the more boreal part of Europe.
Family SILPHIDAE.
Lyrosoma opacum Mannh.
Collected on St. Paul Island by Wosnessenski. Also known from the Aleutian
Islands, Bering Island, Copper Island, and Kamchatka.
Family STAPHYLINIDAE.
Hadrotus crassus Mannh.
Collected on St. George Island by Wosnessenski. A maritime species occurring
along the coast as far south as California.
Tachinus apterus Mén.
Found on St. George Island by Wosnessenski.
}
Olophrum fuscum Grav. (latum Maklin).
Found on St. George Island by Wosnessenski. Also known from the peninsula of
Kenai, Alaska, Siberia, Caucasus Mountains, and in more boreal parts of Europe.
Family CHRYSOMELIDAE. .
Chrysomela subsulcata Mannh.
Described from St. Paul Island (Wosnessenski), from which locality Messrs. True
and Prentiss forwarded two specimens. Another specimen from the same collectors
from St. George Island. This remarkable species seems to be peculiar to the Pribilof
Tslands.
Family AEGIALTIDAE.
Aegialites californica Motschulsky.
This remarkable species does not appear to be rare on St. Paul Island, for in the
stomach of a shore bird, Limosa lapponica (shot on Walrus Island, 6 miles distant from
St. Paul on June 20), which was examined at the Department of ‘Agriouttare in 1896,
numerous specimens were found. The locality, “California,” of the typical specimen
in Motschulski’s collection is extremely doubtful; the species is known to occur in the
peninsula of Kenai and in Sitka.
550 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS
Il. HYMENOPTERA.
Family CHALCIDIDAE.
Tridymus capreae L.!
One specimen found in vial with ticks and lice found on the fur seal (Barrett-
Hamilton). This is a common North European species and is parasitic in dipterous
galls on willow.
Family ICHNEUMONIDAE.
Exolytus sp.!
Four specimens were collected by Mr. Barrett-Hamilton on St. Paul Island.
Pezomachus sp.!'
Two specimens from St. Paul Island collected by Mr. Barrett-Hamilton.
Family APIDAE.
Mr. Elliott (Report on the Seal Islands of Alaska, p. 12) says: “The, to our eyes,
familiar form of the bumblebee, Bombus borealis, passing from flower to flower, was
rarely seen; but a few are resident here.” The determination must be considered
doubtful and the species may possibly be the B. gelidus Cresson, which has been
described from the Aleutian Islands. It is possible, also, that several species of
Bombus may occur on the Pribilof Islands.
Il]. LEPIDOPTERA.
Sutorder LEPIDOPTERA RHOPALOCERA.
No species of this suborder seem to be recorded from Pribilof Islands and none
were among the collections transmitted to the Museum, but Mr. Elliott (1. c.) remarks
that ‘‘a very few species of butterflies, principally the yellow Nymphalidae, are
represented by numerous individuals.” The yellow butterflies referred to are unques-
tionably Papilionids of the genus Colias, several species of which are recorded from
Alaska, viz, C. hecla Lef., C. palaeno Linn., C. chippewa Edw. The last-named species
is almost sure to occur on the Pribilof Islands.
Suborder LEPIDOPTERA HETEROCERA.
None are recorded from the islands, though various families are undoubtedly rep-
resented. The Museum possesses only two specimens of an undetermined Arctiid
larva collected by Barrett-Hamilton on St. Paul Island.
IV. Order DIPTERA.
No species have hitherto been described from the Pribilof Islands, but Mr. Elliott
(1. c.) records some interesting notes on Diptera which are incorporated in the fol-
lowing list. Nine species of this order (besides a single larva) were collected by
Mr. Barrett-Hamilton on St. Paul Island and have been determined by Mr. D. W.
Coquillett.
1 Determined by Mr. William H. Ashmead.
INSECTS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 551
Family CULICIDAE.
Arctic regions are notorious on account of the prevalence of mosquitoes, so that
the absence of the pests on the Pribilof Islands, as noted by Mr. Elliott, is certainly a
fact worth recording. He says: “Then, again, perhaps this is the only place in all
Alaska where man, primitive and civilized, is not cursed by mosquitoes.”
Family TIPULIDAE.
Trichocera sp.
A single specimen collected by Mr. Barrett-Hamilton. To this or an allied species
I am inclined to refer the “gnat” mentioned by Mr. Elliott which “flits about in
in large swarms, but it is inoffensive and seeks shelter in the grass.”
Tipulid.
A single larva from Mr. Barrett-Hamilton’s collection from St. Paul indicates a
larger species than the Trichocera just mentioned.
Family MUSCIDAE..
Calliphora obsccena Eschscholtz.
Four specimens collected by Mr. Barrett-Hamilton; originally described from
Unalaska from specimens found on the ocean beach. This is unquestionably the
large flesh fly mentioned by Mr. Elliott, but quite incorrectly named by him Bom-
bylius major. He says that it “appears during the summer and settles in a striking
manner upon the backs of the loafing natives or strings itself in rows of millions
upon the long grass blades which flourish over the killing grounds [of the seals],
especially on the leaf stalks of the Elymus, causing this vegetation on the whole
slaughtering field and vicinity to fairly drop to earth, as if beaten down by a tornado
of wind and rain. It makes the landscape look as though it had molded in the night,
and the fungoid spores were blue and gray.” The larva lives, no doubt, in the
carcasses of the slaughtered seals, and the species has enormously increased in
individuals in consequence of the sealing industry on the islands.
The absence of the common house fly, Musca domestica, noted by Elliott, deserves
mention.
Family CORDYLURIDAE.
Scatophaga squalida Meigen.
Three specimens collected by Mr. Barrett-Hamilton. Previously known from
temperate and boreal Europe and North America.
Scatophaga diadema Wiedemann.
Three specimens collected by Mr. Barrett-Hamilton. Previously known from
Montevideo (Uruguay) and Labrador.
Scatophaga dasythrix Becker.
Eleven specimens collected by Mr. Barrett-Hamilton. The type locality is “ Ber-
ing Straits.” No other locality is known for this species.
Scatophaga sp.
A single specimen collected by Mr, Barrett-Hamilton.
552 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Blepharoptera pectinator Loew.
Two specimens collected by Mr. Barrett-Hamilton. Widely distributed through-
out North America.
Family PHYCODROMIDAE.
Coelops frigida Fallen.
One specimen collected by Mr. Barrett-Hamilton. This is a maritime species
previously known from Europe and the New England States.
Family BORBORIDAE.’
Borborus annulus Walker.
One specimen collected by Mr. Barrett-Hamilton. Type locality, Albany River,
Hudson Bay Territory.
V. HEMIPTERA.
Family CAPSIDAE.
Orthocephalus saltator Hahn.
A single specimen of the brachypterous form collected on St. Paul Island by Mr.
Barrett-Hamilton. No other Hemiptera are recorded from the Pribilof Islands,
though this order, and more especially the suborder Homoptera, is no doubt repre-
sented on the islands by a number of species. Mr. Elliott says “the Hydrocorisae
occur in great abundance, skipping over the water in the lakes and pools everywhere,”
and from this statement we suppose that one or several of the aquatic families pos-
sessing the habit mentioned by Mr. Elliott are represented on the islands.
VI. NEUROPTERA.
Family PHRYGANEIDAE.
Limnophilus sp.
Two specimens from St. Paul Island, collected by Mr. Barrett-Hamilton.
Other species of the same family, as well as representatives of some other families
of the old order Neuroptera, are no doubt represented on the islands. Elliott men-
tions “a single dragon fly, Perla bicaudata, flitted over the lakes and ponds of St.
Paul.” The determination is of course erroneous and the species is one of the
Odonata.
VII. OPILIONIDA.
A single not yet determined specimen is among the collection of Mr. Barrett:-
Hamilton from St. Paul Island.
VUI. ARACHNIDA.
Family LYCOSIDAE.
Two species, Lycosa septentrionalis and Pardosa pellita, from St. George Island
are recorded by Dr. Marx (Proc. Ent. Soc. Wash., II, pp. 196, 197), but have never
been described.
Another undetermined species of this order from St. Paul, and represented by,
six specimens, was collected by Mr. Barrett-Hamilton.
INSECTS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 553
4 IX. ACARINA.
By Prof. HERBERT Osporn.
Haematopinus callorhini Herbert Osborn, new species. (Type, No, 3501, U.S.N.M.)
Head but slightly produced, less than a semicircle in front of the antennae, wider
behind the antennae than in front; eyes inconspicuous or wanting; dorsal surface with
a@ very strong basally swollen lateral bristle and a number of stiff
shorter bristles or spines merging anteriorly into short blunt spines;
posterior margin subangular and projected on to prothorax; beneath
with long slender bristles posteriorly and short blunt spines anteriorly;
antennae five-jointed, basal joint very large, succeeding joints gradu-
ally diminishing in size but of nearly equal length.
Thorax wider than long, concave in front and behind, lateral mar-
gins rather evenly arcuate; prothorax produced posteriorly, nearly
reaching abdomen; sutures of pro- meso- and meta- thorax converging
near posterior margin, posterior margin of meso- thorax strongly
chitinous, surface bristly and spiny, meso- and meta- thorax each with
larger bristles. No sternal plate, coxae wide apart, and surface of sternum scantily
armed with short spines.
Abdomen widest near the middle, tapering to apex; set with short stiff spines and
bristly hairs; the spiracles opening in small prominent tubercles; beneath with short
spiny hairs.
Legs nearly uniform in size, middle and posterior ones slightly larger; middle and
hind tarsal claws fitting into a semicircular cup on the spur of tibia.
Genitalia of male located dorsally, most apparent from above, where the chitinous
_ structure is conspicuous, especially the two bars converging forward so as to form a
triangle, from base of which, at apex of abdomen, the protruding penis and hooks
appear as a second triangle. Length, 2 mm.
This species falls in Haematopinus, on account of the five-jointed antennae and
structure of sternum, though approaching Hchinophthirius in body covering. It is
perhaps nearest piliferus, but stands pretty clearly by itself,
and may doubtless be referred to a distinct subgenus.
Described from a number of examples from the northern
fur seal, Callorhinus ursinus, from Pribilof Islands.
Fig. 1.
Ixodes arcticus Herbert Osborn, new species. (Type, No. 3500, U.S.N.M.)
Elongate oboval slightly contracted behind the middle,
finely transversely striated; dorsal shield deep chestnut brown,
oval except where truncated to join head; two divergent im-
pressed lines or furrows from near the anterior margin to
behind the middle, where they terminate abruptly, and exter-
nal to which, near their ends, are short, impressed lighter
marks, one on either side. Palpi rather short, blunt, truncate at apex, sharp edged,
flat, and somewhat impressed above; legs blackish except the joints, long, strong.
The dorsum of the expanded abdomen has two deep parallel furrows anteriorly and
three posteriorly, and the ventral surface has the ordinary furrows of the genus, much
as in ricinus. The color of the alcoholic specimens is a testaceous yellow. Length
ot expanded female, 6mm. Length of dorsal shield, 1.25 mm.; width, 0.92 mm,
Fie, 2.
5bD4 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
This species appears to be closely related to Ixodes ricinus, as determined for me
by the late Dr. George Marx, but is larger; the dorsal shield is more perfectly oval
and larger; the legs larger and much blacker; as also the head parts and the palpi are
shorter, more truncate at apex, and the spiracle is located in a larger, blacker circle.
These points, with its extreme difference in host, warrant its description as a distinct
species. The description is from a single female which appears to be mature and fully
expanded, but not distended to its full limit by development of eggs.
Both this tick and the louse described above seem to have been encountered here-
tofore, as I find in Allen’s Monograph of the Pinnipedia, (p. 352) the following, quoted
from Elliott: * * * “The seal, in common with all animals, is preyed upon by ver-
min, a species of louse and a tick, peculiar to itself,” but neither of them appears to
have been technically described.
XXII.—LIST OF CRUSTACEA KNOWN TO OCCUR ON AND NEAR THE
PRIBILOF ISLANDS
By Mary J. RaTHsun.!
Second Assistant Curator, Division of Marine Invertebrates, U. S. National Museum.
The Crustacea occurring at the Pribilof Islands are by no means restricted to
that.archipelago. For example, of the Brachyura or true crabs, Hyas coarctatus and
Chionecetes opilio are circumpolar, while Oregonia gracilis and Hyas lyratus are very
common in the North Pacific. The hairy crabs or horse crabs, Telmessus and Hrimacrus,
reach their fullest development in Bering Sea. The former, 7. cheiragonus, was first
recorded by Tilesius, the Russian naturalist, from specimens collected by Steller at
Avacha Bay, Kamchatka, where it occurred in great abundance, and was used for
food by the sailors. It extends southward to Oregon.
The three triangular anomuran crabs, Lithodes brevipes, Dermaturus mandtii and
Hapalogaster grebniizkii are distinctively Bering Sea species, inhabiting that body of
water and the Aleutian Islands. Nine species of North Pacific hermit crabs (Pagurus)
are known to inhabit the shores of the Pribilofs. Most of these are of recent discov-
ery. Of the sixteen shrimps enumerated eight are circumpolar.
It is to be expected that a more thorough study of the lower forms of Crustacea
will add many names to the list given below. ‘
Oregonia gracilis Dana. 25 to 26 fathoms; U.S. Fish Commission.
Hyas coarctatus Leach. 20 to 62 fathoms; U.S. Fish Commission.
Hyas lyratus Dana. 25 to 62 fathoms; U.S. Fish Commission.
Chioncecetes opilio (O. Fabricius). 20 to 65 fathoms; U.S. Fish Commission.
Telmessus cheiragonus (Tilesius). St. Paul Island; Palmer and Elliott.
Brimacrus isenbeckii (Brandt). St. Paul Island; Palmer and Elliott. 29 to 41 fathoms; U.S. Fish
Commission.
Lithodes brevipes Milne-Edwards. Young. St. PaulIsland; Palmer and Elliott. 25 to 47 fathoms;
U. §. Fish Commission. pA i
Dermaturus mandtii Brandt. 25 fathoms; U.S. Fish Commission,
Hapalogaster grebnitzkii Schalfeew. 25 fathoms; U.S, Fish Commission.
Pagurus alaskensis Benedict. St. Paul Island.
Pagurus aleuticus Benedict. 56 to 65 fathoms; U.S. Fish Commission.
Pagurus brandti Benedict. 65 fathoms; U.S. Fish Commission.
Pagurus confragosus Benedict. 57 to 65 fathoms; U.S. Fish Commission.
Pagurus dalli Benedict. 26 fathoms; U.S. Fish Commission.
1The lists of Anomura and Isopoda were made from specimens determined by Dr. James E.
Benedict.
555
556 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Pagurus rathbuni Benedict. 47 to 65 fathoms; U.8. Fish Commission.
Pagurus splendescens Owen. 41 to 62 fathoms; U. S. Fish Commission.
Pagurus trigonocheirus (Stimpson). 26 to 57 fathoms; U.S. Fish Commission.
Pagurus undosus Benedict. 20 fathoms; U.S. Fish Commission. St.Paul Island; Palmer and Elliott.
Crangon communis, sp. nov. 40 to 121 fathoms; taken at 31 stations by the U. 8S. Fish Commission
steamer Albatross.
Allied to C. crangon (L.). The most noticeable differences are as follows: Two
median spines on the carapace, considerably in front of the middle; rostrum longer,
more slender and spatulate; eyes larger; first to fifth abdominal segments each with a
transverse posterior smooth flattened crest; third to fifth segments with a similar
median longitudinal crest; sixth segment with two prominent blunt longitudinal keels.
Dimensions of female.—Length of carapace from tip of rostrum, 16 mm.; width,
11 mm.; length of body from tip of rostrum to tip of telson, 64 mm.
Type locality.—Lat. 57° 4’ 20” N., long. 170° 52/ 30” W.; 51 fathoms, station 3441
Types.—U. S. Nat. Mus., No. 22826.
This species is one of the most abundant shrimps in Bering Sea. It can not be
confused with C. intermedia Stimpson, in which the posterior of the median spines is
at the middle of the carapace, and in which the first two abdominal segments have a
median carina.
Crangon intermedia Stimpson. 32 to 34 fathoms; at 3 stations of the Albatross.
Sclerocrangon sharpi Ortmann. 54 fathoms; Albatross.
Nectocrangon lar (Owen). 33 to 368 fathoms; 36 stations of the Albatross.
Nectocrangon crassa, sp. nov. 17 to 34 fathoms; at 6 stations of the Albatross.
Allied to NW. alaskensis Kingsley in having three spines on the median line of the
carapace and a smaller spine or spinule just behind therostrum. The carapace differs
from that of N. alaskensis in being shorter and broader. All the abdominal segments
are sculptured and keeled; the first to fifth have a blunt median keel, very short and
hump-like in the first and second segments; the first three segments have transverse
sulci; the keel of the fifth segment disappears toward the posterior margin; the sixth
seginent is much shorter than in N. alaskensis; its double keel is not continued to
the posterior margin, and this margin is devoid of the sharp spines present in N.
alaskensis.
Dimensions of female-—Length of carapace, 13 mm.; width, 10.5 mm.; length of
body from tip of rostrum to tip of telson, 48.5 mm.
Type locality.—Lat. 57° 4’ N., long. 170° 24’ W.; 26 fathoms, station 3557.
Types.—U. 8. Nat. Mus., No. 22827,
Spirontocaris spinus (Sowerby). 41 to 121 fathoms; at 13 stations of the Albatross.
Spirontocaris gaimardii (Milne-Edwards). 20 to 368 fathoms; at 17 stations.
Spirontocaris gibba (Kriéyer). 50 to 52 fathoms; at 2 stations, :
Spirontocaris barbata, sp. nov.
Carapace with two spines on the anterior margin, one below the eye, the other
at the middle of the antenna. Dorsal carina extending to the posterior third of
the carapace. Rostrum about one-third longer than the carapace; upper margin
straight, armed with five teeth, one of which is on the carapace proper; distal two-
fifths of upper margin unarmed; extremity acute; lower limb of slight depth and
tapering from near the base to the tip, armed with about nine small teeth and
denticles, diminishing in size and distance apart, toward the tip of the rostrum.
CRUSTACEA OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 557
Inner antenne about two-thirds length of rostrum. Scale of outer antenne about
seven-eighths length of rostrum. Maxillipeds reaching a little over one-half length
of rostrum. i
Abdomen with the fourth, fifth, and posterior half of the third segment carinated,
the carina of each segment prolonged in a slender, sharp spine; carina of third segment
. with a subterminal hump; postero-lateral angle of fifth segment armed with a spine;
posterior margin of the sixth segment armed with a median and lateral spine, also a
spinule at the inferior angle.
Dimensions of female.—Length of carapace, to orbit, 12 mm.; length to tip of ros-
trum, 19.6 mm.; length of body from tip of rostrum to tip of telson, 74.5 mm.
Type locality.—Lat. 56° 18’ N., long. 169° 38’ W.; 86 fathoms, station 3497.
Type.—U. 8S. Nat. Mus., No. 22828.
Spirontocaris camtschatica (Stimpson). 20 fathoms; at station 3438, Albatross.
Spirontocaris macilenta (Kriyer). 39 fathoms; station 3511.
Spirontocaris avina, sp. nov.
Carapace with one anterior spine, below the eye; lower angle with a minute spinule.
Anterior half of carapace dorsally carinated; a small spine at the anterior fifth; in
front of this spine arises a thin arcuate crest which forms the chief part of the rostrum.
Rostrum short, extending beyond the carapace about one third of its length, but not
reaching the penult joint of the antennular peduncle; its Jamellate crest, half of which
is above the carapace, is armed with about thirteen small crowded spines; extremity
beak-like, straight, slightly deflexed, acute, unarmed above, one or two teeth near the
end below. Antennule extending considerably beyond the antennal scale. Antennal
peduncle a little shorter than antennular peduncle; scale extending two-thirds its
length beyond the rostrum. Maxillipeds slightly longer than antennal scale. Legs
long and weak.
Abdomen smooth, not carinate ; third segment produced over the fourth, posterior
margin convex; posterior angle of fourth segment armed with a spinule; of fifth and
sixth with a spine. ‘
Dimensions of female.—Length of carapace, to orbit, 9 mm.; length of rostrum
beyond posterior line of orbit, 3 mm.; length of body 35 mm.
Type locality.—North of Unalaska, lat. 54° 00’ 45” N., long. 166° 53’ 50” W.; 351
fathoms, station 3330.
Types.—U. 8S. Nat. Mus., No. 22829.
Spirontocaris polaris (Sabine). St. Paul Island (Brandt); William Palmer, June 21, 1890.
Pandalus borealis Kréyer. 36 to 121 fathoms; very abundant; taken at 34 stations by the Albatross.
Pandalus montagui Leach. 25 to 121 fathoms; taken at 22 stations’ less abundant than the last.
Pandalus dapifer Murdoch. 36 to 50 fathoms; at 3 stations.
Rocinela belliceps (Stimpson). St. Paul Island; F. W. True.
Arcturus beringanus Benedict. 32 fathoms; U.S. Fish Commission.
Idotea ochotensis Brandt.’ Seal stomach. St. Paul Island; F. A. Lucas.
Synidotea biscuspida (Owen). 49 to 62 fathoms; U.S. Fish Commission.
Synidotea nebulosa Benedict. 32 fathoms; U. 8. Fish Commission.
Anonyx nugax (Phipps). Seal stomach. St. Paul Island;, F. A. Lucas.
Amphipoda of family Lysianassidae. Seal stomach. St. Paul Island; F. A. Lucas,
Branchipus sp. St. George Island; F. A. Lucas.
XXII.—A LIST OF THE PLANTS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS, BERING
SEA. WITH NOTES ON THEIR DISTRIBUTION.
By Jamrs M. Macoun
Assistant Naturalist to the Geological Survey of Canada.
This list is believed to include all the plants that have been found on the Pribilof
Islands since their discovery in 1786. The early travelers who made such complete
collections on Unalaska and other islands of the Aleutian chain seem to have spent
very little time on the Pribilof Islands, only 35 species being recorded from them in
Ledebour’s Flora Rossica. I have been able to find no record of any collection hay-
ing been made there between the time of Chamisso and Eschscholtz and the purchase
of Alaska by the United States. Mr. Charles Bryant, in 1875, made a large collection
on the Pribilof Islands. A set of these plants is in the United States National Her-
barium at Washington, and, I believe, in the Gray Herbarium also. In 1890 Mr.
William Palmer collected about 100 species of flowering plants there, and many
mosses and lichens. The phaenogams were determined by Mr. Theodor Holm, the
mosses by Dr. Kindberg, the lichens by Mr. Calkins. In 1891 Dr. C. H. Merriam, one
of the United States Bering Sea commissioners, made extensive collections (over 90
species) on both St. Paul and St. George islands, and in 1892 published a list of the
plants he had collected.’ In 1895 Messrs. F. W. True and D. W. Prentiss, jr., brought
from the Pribilof Islands a very fine collection of flowering plants (90 species). Their
specimens are the best I have seen from that region. They were determined by Dr.
J. N. Rose and are in the National Herbarium at Washington.
My own collections were made in the years 1891, 1892, 1896, and 1897, principally
on St. Paul Island, and comprise 182 species and varieties of phaenerogams and
vascular cryptogams. In 18971 had ample time at my disposal, and had then seen
the collections of other visitors to the islands, so that I was able to greatly extend
the number of species collected by me in former years. Reference is made in the text
to the species that I failed to find. St. George Island has never been well botanized,
and future collectors on that island will probably add many species to this list.
Through the courtesy of Mr. F. V. Coville and Dr. J. N. Rose, the curator and
assistant curator of the United States National Herbarium, I have been enabled to
examine all the Pribilof Island plants in that herbarium, and have admitted no species
into the present list of which I have not seen specimens.
! Proceedings of the Biological Society of Washington, Vol. VII, pp. 133-150.
559
560 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
For the use of books from their private libraries and much kindly assistance in
the preparation of this paper I have to thank my friends Dr. Edw. L. Greene, Mr.
Theodor Holm, and my father, Prof. John Macoun. Mr. Holm’s beautiful and correct
figures of new species were made after a careful study of the plants they represent.
Species which I considered new have been described by specialists, and other difficult
species have been submitted to botanists who have made a special study of the groups
to which they belong—the Carices to Messrs. Bailey, Kukenthal, Holm, and Wheeler,
the grasses to Prof. Scribner—but I have in every instance given the result of my
own work. Where I have failed to agree with others who have examined my speci-
mens I have given the result of their investigation as well as my own.
Dr. Nils C. Kindberg. Dr. J. W. Eckfeldt, Pastor J. S. D. Branth, and Dr. C.
Warnstoff have verified or corrected my determinations of the cryptogams.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO
THEIR VEGETATION.
Dr. Merriam’s description of the natural features of the Pribilof Islands is so
good that I shall not attempt to improve upon it. He says:
The Pribilof group in Bering Sea is about 350 kilometers (220 miles) north of the Aleutian chain
and comprises the islands St. Paul and St. George, separated by about 644 kilometers (40 miles) of
sea, and two islets, known as Walrus and Otter islands, near St. Paul. St. Paul is the largest, meas-
uring about 23} kilometers (14 miles) in length by 12 kilometers (74 miles) in greatest breadth. St.
George is a little less than 19.3 kilometers (12 miles) in length by a little more than 8 kilometers (5
miles) in greatest breadth. The highest land is on St. George, where a precipitous cliff fronting the
sea and a hill in the interior exceed 275 meters (900 feet). The highest land on St. Paul is a little
over 183 meters (600 fect). The group is of volcanic origin and the general surface is rolling with
precipitous cliffs along the water front in many places, alternating with broad valleys and basins.
The cliffs predominate on St. George. In summer the islands are almost constantly enveloped in fog.
The atmosphere is saturated (the wet and dry bulbs registering the same) and the temperature is
uniformly low, the thermometer ranging from 7° C. (45° F.) to 9° C. (48° F.), or rarely 10° C. (50° F.).
The sandy shores and dunes of the Pribilof Islands support a very scant vegeta-
tion. Cochlearia officinalis, Arenaria peploides, and Hlymus mollis are the characteristic
species. Lathyrus maritimus and Mertensia maritima, though not rare, are far from
common, and these five species are the only shore plants that were seen. A few plants
that are not of general distribution grow on cliffs near the sea. Among these are
Draba hirta, Nesodraba grandis, Arabis ambigua, Sagina linnaei and Saxifraga bracteata.
Near the village on St. Paul Island and elsewhere on the lower levels on both islands
the ponds and lakes are surrounded by mud flats, on which a number of species grow
that are not found elsewhere. The commonest of these are Ranunculus hyperboreus,
Ranunculus reptans, Montia fontana, Stellaria humifusa, and Potentilla anserina.
Chrysanthemum arcticum is sometimes found with them, but is commoner in wet places
on higher levels, especially on St. George Island.
The number of bog and marsh plants is very small, though many of the species
that grow elsewhere are also found on the damp, boggy spots that are so character-
istic of both islands. There is but one true bog on St. Paul Island, several on St.
George. On these Rubus chamaemorus, Saxifraga hirculus, Pedicularis sudetica, and
Petasites frigida grow in profusion, but they are all found on other parts of the island.
The greater part of the surface of both islands is tundra-like and much resembles
the barren grounds of arctic America. The commonest plants throughout the wind-
THE PLANTS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 561
blown and elevated parts of the islands are Silene acaulis, Arenaria macrocarpa, and
Eritrichium chamissonis, all forming cushions a foot or more in diameter, Hutrema
edwardsii, Papaver radicatum, Geum rossti, Potentilla villosa, Artemisia globularia,
Campanula lasiocarpa, Pedicularis langsdorfii, and Pedicularis lanata. On the more
exposed places and of not nearly so general distribution are Cardamine bellidifolia,
Lychnis apetala, Ohrysosplenium beringianum, Suxifraga davurica, Saxifraga serpyl-
lifolia, Aster sibiricus, and Gentiana glauca.
Grassy banks and upland meadows are frequent, generally near the sea, and on
these grow many species that are not found on the bleaker and more elevated parts
of the islands. Conspicuous among these are Ranunculus altaicus, Ranunculus
Eschscholtzii, Valeriana capitata, Taraxacum officinale var. lividum, two species of
Polemonium and Pedicularis verticillata. Claytonia sarmentosa, Viola langsdorfii,
Gentiana frigida, and Primula eximia are sometimes found with the above species,
but are more common in damp sheltered places among the rocks in the interior. of
St. Paul Island. On one bank near a little pond at the southwest end of St. Paul
Island I found Coptis trifolia, Geranium erianthum, Arnica unalaskensis, and Veronica
stelleri, not seen elsewhere on the Pribilof Islands.
There are many level areas of considerable extent on both islands, called by Dr.
Merriam “moss-bogs,” but no true bog plants are found on them, though the soil is
saturated with water and covered with a thick carpet of moss, principally Hypnum
and Racomitriun—little Sphagnum. No plants: are found on these areas that do not
grow on the higher and drier ground, though Empetrum nigrum is in such places
more abundant than elsewhere.
Special reference has been made to but a small part of the whole number of
species on the islands, but those named give, it is hoped, a general idea of the nature
of the vegetation. Many of‘the commoner species have not been mentioned and no
grasses or carices have been referred to, but the relative abundance, and generally
the habitat, of each species is given elsewhere.
GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF THE PHAENOGAMS AND YASCULAR CRYPTOGAMS
KNOWN TO OCCUR ON THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
No part of this paper has been prepared more thoroughly and carefully than that
showing the geographical distribution of the plants found on the Pribilof Islands.
Some of the plants may have a wider range than I have indicated, but I have in all
cases good authority for the occurrence of species in the districts I have referred
them to. The authorities consulted will be found at the end of the list itself. This
part of my paper was written in conjunction with Mr. Theodor Holm. Mr. Holm has
collected from Greenland eastward to Nova Zembla, I from Labrador and Hudson
Bay westward to Bering Straits and Kamchatka.
As will be seen from the list itself, the great majority of the plants found on the
Pribilof Islands are circumpolar in their range, and in this respect the flora of the
Pribilof Islands affords a marked contrast to that of the Commander Islands, in
nearly the same latitude, on the west side of Bering Sea. Many of the species are
the same on both groups of islands, but on the Commander Islands the number of
species that are essentially Asiatic far exceeds the number of those on the Pribilof
Islands that are distinctly American.
5947—PT 3——36
562 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
\
ANNOTATED LIST OF SPECIES.
PHAENOGAMS,
1. Anemone richardsoni, Hook.
Very abundant among moss and grass. Flowering in June and difficult to
discover later in the season. Specimens collected with underground stems from 2
to 3 feet long.
-2. Ranunculus trichophyllus, Chaix.
Found in only one locality on St. Paul Island—a small lake near the village. The
water in this lake varies in depth in different years, and three forms have been
collected there—the typical, the subterrestrial (var. caespitosus), and “the dwarf form
with capillary, flabby leaves” (var. confervoides),
3. Ranunculus hyperboreus, Rottb.
Common by lakes and on mud flats on both islands. Generally associated with
Montia fontana.
4. Ranunculus pygmaeus, Wahl.
St. Paul Island. Collected only by Mr. William Palmer.
5. Ranunculus reptans, L.
Common by ponds and lakes on both islands.
6. Ranunculus pallasii, Schl.
Growing in Sphagnum by a small pond on St. Guage Island.
7. Ranunculus altaicus, Laxm.
Common in upland meadows on both islands. The specimens from these islands
have been generally referred to FR. nivalis, but in the writer’s opinion are not that
species.
8. Ranunculus eschscholtzii, Schl.
Not rare on St. Paul Island on grassy banks where the snow lies late in the spring.
9. Coptis trifolia, Salisb.
Two specimens of this species were found in 1896 on a grassy bank near the south
end of St. Paul Island.
10. Aconitum delphinifolium, DC.
From 3 or 4 inches high on bleak uplands to 2 feet high among grass near the
sea level. Common on both islands.
11. Papaver radicatum, Rottb.
P. nudicaule, L. var. arcticum, Elkan.
Common on both islands. The flowers of this poppy are on the Pribilof Islands
larger and more showy than I have seen them elsewhere. Murbeck has shown (fide
Botaniske Litteraturblade, No. 13, p. 208) that the arctic poppy so generally referred
to P. nudicaule is not that species.
12. Papaver macounii, Greene, Pittonia, Vol. III, p.247. (Plate LXXXVIIL.)
Perennial, scapose, the very stout scapes often a foot high in fruit, three or four
times surpassing the tuft of leaves, hirsute hispid; leaves, cyen the petioles, compara-
tively devoid of hairiness, sometimes wholly glabrous; leaf outline ovate rather than
obovate, the pinnae oblong lanceolate to almost linear; petals 4 (rarely 5), round
THE PLANTS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 563
obovate, erosdentate, often 14 inches long, yellow, fading greenish; pods 1 inch long,
narrow, clavate oblong, 4 to 5 angled, hispid except on the prominent angles or ribs.
Easily distinct from all other boreal poppies by its narrow capsules, which are
almost acute by the ascending position of the 4 or 5 rays of the stigma, thus approxi-
mating the scarcely tenable genus Meconopsis. *
This beautiful poppy flowers about two weeks later than P. radicatum. It was
while collecting the latter species in 1897 that the author’s attention was attracted by
the leaves of P. macounii, which differ in color as well as shape, etc., from those of
P.radicatum. Visiting the same spot later, P. radicatum was found with ripened seeds,
while P. macounii was ouly in flower. It was found in abundance later in the season
on other parts of St. Paul Island.
13. Corydalis pauciflora, Pers..
Not uncommon on St. Paul Island, generally in moss. Flowering early it is soon
hidden by grass and the foliage of other plants.
14. Nasturtium palustre DC.
Among Mr. Palmer’s plants from St. Paul Island were specimens of this species.
After carefully looking for it in all localities where it was likely to grow but without
discovering it, I am forced to the conclusion that Mr. Palmer’s specimens were col-
lected elsewhere. As I may be mistaken in this, however, I include it in the list.
15. Draba hirta, L. {
Draba incana, Merriam’s List.
Common on the edges of cliffs and on. sandy slopes, St. Paul Island.
16. Draba wahlenbergii, Hartm.
Rare on exposed hilltops on St. Paul Island.
17. Nesodraba grandis, Greene, Pittonia, Vol. III, p. 253. (Plate LXXXIX.)
Draba grandis, Langsdorff.
Peduncles about twice the length of the central tuft of leaves and 5 to 10 inches
high; pods nearly 3 lines broad and from orbicular to oval, on ascending pedicels of
one-half to three-fourths inch long. ;
Common on dampish rocks and cliffs on both islands.
This is without doubt Cochlearia spathulata DC., collected on St. George and
St. Paul islands by Chamisso and Eschscholtz. Fruiting specimens are in general
appearance much more like a Cochlearia than a Draba.
18. Hutrema edwardsii, R. Br.
Not rare on uplands; generally growing among moss
19. Cochlearia officinalis, L.
Common on both islands.
20. Cardamine bellidifolia, L.
Rare on the most exposed parts of the interior of both islands.
21. Cardamine pratensis, L.
Common by ponds on both islands.
22. Cardamine umbellata, Greene, Pittonia, Vol. III, p. 154. (Plate XC.)
Stems several, 10 to 20 inches high from slender horizontal rootstocks, erect, spar-
ingly leafy to the summit, the herbage glabrous; all the leaves pinnate, the lowest
564 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
with from 3 to 5 rounded or oval, the upper with 5 or 7 more elongated, leaflets, these
all entire or very sparingly toothed; flowers few, small, white, often 3 to 5 only and
from corymbose to subumbellate; stamens 6; pods erect (on pedicels of about one-half
inch), about three-fourths line wide, three-fourths to 1 inch long including the promi-
nent beak; valves not elastic; seeds about 8 or 9 under each valve, rather large.
Species somewhat nearly allied to the Californian C. Brewert.
Very common in damp places on both islands. Collected in a great variety of
forms, according to habitat, but all answering well to Dr. Greene’s description.
23. Cardamine hirsuta, L.
A small perennial plant much resembling the European C. intermedia has been
referred here. It is rare on St. Paul Island.
24. Arabis ambigua, DC.
Not rare on gravelly, rocky, and sandy banks, St. Paul Island.
25. Viola langsdorfii, Fisch.
Common on hillsides and in depressions on both islands.
26. Viola palustris, L.
Rare on damp banks on St. Paul Island.
27. Silene acaulis, L.
Common on exposed hillsides on both islands.
28. Lychnis apetala, L., var. glabra, Regel.
Common on uplands on St. Paul Island. The St. Paul Island plants are widely
different from typical L. apetala and probably constitute a good species.
29. Arenaria macrocarpa, Pursh.
Forming large cushions on the uplands on both islands.
30. Arenaria arctica, Stev.
With the last on St. Paul Island, but much more common.
31. Arenaria peploides, L.
Common on both islands.
32. Stellaria media, Smith.
Common on low grounds near the villages on both islands.
33. Stellaria borealis, Bigel.
S. crassifolia, Merriam’s List.
Rather rare on St. Paul Island.
34. Stellaria borealis, Bigel, var. corallina, Fenzl.
Damp places on St. Paul Island. Common,
35. Stellaria calycantha, Bong.
Rather rare on St. Paul Island.
36. Stellaria longipes, Goldie, var. laeta, T. and G.
A few immature specimens of what I believe to be this variety were collected on
St. Paul Island in 1891. Dr. B. L. Robinson, however, thinks them a form of S.
ruscifolia, Willd.
THE PLANTS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 565
37. Cerastium alpinum, L.
Common on both islands. Very variable, according to habitat. C. arvense, included
in Dr. Merriam’s list ou the authority of Dr. Vasey, could not be found in the United
States National Herbarium at Washington and has been excluded. The specimens
so named were probably a form of C. alpinum.
38. Sagina linnaei, Presl.
Common on earth and rocks on both islands.
39. Sagina nivalis, Fr.
Rare on St. Paul Island.
40. Sagina :
A few specimens of a minute caryophyllateous plant were collected on St. George
Island by Mr. Trevor Kincaid in 1897. Dr. Robinson, to whom the specimens were
submitted, decided that it was different from any caryophyll known to him, but the
material was too poor to base a new species upon. Though thought by Dr. Robinson
to be an Arenaria, I agree with Mr. Holm, who also examined the specimens, that they
should be referred to Sagina.
41. Claytonia sarmentosa, C. A. Meyer.
C. arctica, Merriam’s List.
Common on both islands, generally with Viola langsdor/it.
42. Montia fontana, L.
Common on mud flats and damp rocks on both islands.
43. Geranium erianthum, DC.
On a grassy bank by a pond near the south end of St. Paul Island.
44. Lupinus nootkatensis, Don.
One of the most conspicuous and characteristic plants on the Pribilof Islands.
45. Lathyrus maritimus, Bigel. var. aleuticus, Greene.
On beaches and among sand dunes on both islands.
46. Rubus chamaemorusg, L.
In boggy places on both islands.
47. Rubué stellatus, Smith.
Upland meadows and on sandy soil on both islands.
48. Rubus arcticus, L.
Not so common as the last, but not rare on either island. Specimens easily sep-
arable from either species were collected in 1897, but as they may possibly be the
result of hybridization between RK. arcticus and RK. stellatus uo attempt to describe
them has been made.
49. Geum rossii, Seringe.
Hillsides and uplands on both islands.
50. Sibbaldia procumbens, L.
Rare on exposed banks and in the interior of St. Paul Island.
51. Potentilla anserina, L.
By ponds and marshes on both islands.
566 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
52. Potentilla fragiformis, Willd. f. villosa, Pall.
Common on rocky banks on both islands.
53. Potentilla emarginata, Pursh.
Exposed hillsides on both islands.
54. Comarum palustre, L.
Marshy places and by bogs and ponds on both islands.
55. Saxifraga hieracifolia, Waldst. Kit.
Not uncommon in damp mossy places on both islands.
56. Saxifraga davurica, L.
Rare on exposed slopes on both islands.
57. Saxifraga stellaris, L., var. comosa, Poir.
Rare on high interior of St. George Island.
58. Saxifraga nelsoniana, Don.
A common and variable Saxifrage, generally referred to S. punctata, L., is found
on shores and islands throughout the Bering Sea region, but a comparison of this
plant with Morrison’s figure, to which Linnaeus refers, shows that it is not S. punctata.
59. Saxifraga serpyllifolia, Pursh.
S. chrysantha, Merriam’s list.
Not rare on exposed parts of interior of St. Paul Island.
60. Saxifraga bracteata, Don.
Common on damp rocks on both islands.
61. Saxifraga hirculus, L.
In boggy places, St. Paul Island.
62. Saxifraga hirculus, L., var. alpina, Engler, Mon. Sax., p. 124.
Low, 2 or 3 inches high, densely caespitose, the leaves broader than in the type,
subspatulate, petals larger, deep yellow. With Chrysosplenium beringianum on the
more exposed hillsides in the interior and toward the northwest end of St. Paul
Island. |
63. Chrysosplenium beringianum, Rose, Bot. Gaz., Vol. XXIII, p.275. (Plate CXI.)
“Rootstock 2.5 to 5 cm. long (7), creeping, sending off many long fibrous roots;
radical leaves and stems several, spreading and forming a dense rosette; radical
leaves small; petiole slender, 1.3 to 4.5 cm. long, broader at base, the margins (espe-
cially below) ciliate with long purplish hairs; blade reniform, 6 to 11 mm. broad, 4 to 5-
crenate, crenations sometimes gland-tipped, thickish, pale, and glabrous below, dark
green and glabrous or somewhat pilose above; stem 2.5 to 5 cm. high, naked or
bearing a single leaf below the involucre; involucral leaves several, entire or 3-crenate,
extending beyond the flowers; calyx 5 to 6 mm. broad, 4-lobed, purplish or becoming
so; sepals very broad, nearly orbicular, rounded at apex; disk very prominent, strongly
8-lobed; fruiting calyx turbinate, 1 mm. high; capsule 2-horned, 6 to 10 seeded; seeds
oblong, 0.5 mm. long, shining, delicately reticulated.
This species has been confused with C. alternifolium, trom which it appears to be
abundantly distinct. C. alternifolium differs in its habit in lacking the thickish root-
stocks and possessing only slender stolons and filiform roots; in its larger, usually
THE PLANTS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 567
much larger, leaves more numerous and generally double crenations, the smaller
indentations containing a gland, or when simply. crenate each crenation gland-tipped,
thin, membranaceous in texture, (when dry) paler in color; petioles with margins
usually glabrous but sometimes ciliate with a few white hairs.
Our form, which resembles C. tetrandrum in the size and shape of the leaves, has
8 stamens instead of 4, purple instead of greenish flowers, larger and definite seeds
(6 to 10 instead of 30 to 50), stronger-lobed disk, and apparently differs also in its
habit.”
Abundant on disintegrated scoria in the interior of St. Paul Island.
64. Chrysosplenium alternifolium, L.
A few specimens were collected on St. George Island in 1897 by Mr. Trevor
Kincaid.
65. Parnassia kotzebuei, Cham. and Schl.
Not rare on St. Paul Island.
66. Hippuris vulgaris, L.
Common on St. George Island, rarer on St. Paul Island.
67. Epilobium clavatum, Trelease.
Rather rare with Gentiana tenella on bare spots on low hills. The £. anagallidi-
folium of Dr. Merriam’s list seems to be referable here.
68. Epilobium behringianum, Hausskn.
Not rare in damp, springy places on both islands.
69. Epilobium spicatum, Lam. ;
Not noted until 1897, when plants were found in several places on St. Paul Island.
It is doubtful if it ever matures its seed there, as the only specimen seen in bloom
was collected by Mr. Kincaid September 1, very soon after which date all plants are
frozen.
70. Ligusticum scoticum, L.
Common in upland meadows and on hillsides on both islands.
71. Selinum benthami, Hook.
Common on both islands.
72. Coeloplureum gmelini, Ledeb.
Heracleum lanatum of Merriam’s list. ; :
Very abundant on both islands. The “poochka” of the natives on the Pribilof
Islands, and eaten by them as Heracleum lanatum is eaten elsewhere.
73. Cornus suecica, L.
C. unalaskensis, Merriam’s list.
Not rare on grassy and mossy slopes on either island.
74. Galium trifidum, L.
Wet banks of ponds on St. Paul Island.
75. Valeriana capitata, Pall.
Common in meadows and on damp, grassy slopes on both islands. V. sylvatica,
recorded in Dr. Merriam’s list as haviug been collected on St. Paul Island by Mr,
Townsend, has been excluded.
568 HE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
76. Aster sibiricus, L.
Common in exposed places on St. Paul Island.
77. Achillea millefolium, L.
Common on both islands.
78. Chrysanthemum arcticum, L. ;
Low saline meadows and on damp uplands. Common on both islands.
79, Artemisia globularia, Cham.
Common on barren moors and hilltops on both islands.
80. Artemisia novegica, Fries, var. pacifica, Gray.
Common on both islands.
81. Artemisia richardsoniana, Bess.
Rare on St. Paul Island.
82. Artemisia vulgaris, L., var. tilesii, Ledeb.
Common on hillsides on both islands.
83. Arnica unalaskensis, Less.
A few plants in one locality near the south end of St. Paul Island.
84. Petasites frigida, Fries.
By all ponds and boggy places on both islands.
85. Senecio pseudo-arnica, Less.
Sandy shores and sand dunes on both islands.
86. Taraxacum officinale, Weber, var. lividum, Koch.
Common on grassy slopes and rocky banks on both islands.
87. Campanula uniflora, L.
Common among moss on the lower hills on St. Paul Island. (C. pilosa of Mer-
riam’s list has been excluded, as no specimens could be found in the United States
National Herbarium, and it has been reported by no one else.
88. Campanula lasiocarpa, Cham.
On grassy banks and uplands. Common on both islands and very variable.
Small specimens collected in 1896 in general appearance are widely different from
typical plants, but closer examination shows that except as to size they differ only in
being less pilose on the calyx and less ciliate along the petioles.
89. Pyrola minor, L.
Rare on St. ‘Paul Island.
90. Armeria vulgaris, Willd.
Common on both islands.
91. Primula eximia, Greene, Pittonia, Vol. III, p. 251. (Plate XCII.)
Rootstock simple; scape, 6 to 16 inches high, twice or thrice exceeding the foliage;
spatulate-oblong or oblanceolate leaves thin, glabrous, entire or obscurely crenate or
dentate; upper portion of the scape, and more particularly the pedicels, densely white-
farinose; umbel few-flowered and somewhat one-sided, the flowers inclining one way;
calyx cleft to the middle or a little more, the segments oblong-linear, scarcely acute;
THE PLANTS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 569
corolla very large, rich black purple, its segments entire or somewhat erose, not emar-
ginate. Usually referred to P. nivalis.
Very common on St. Paul Island, flowering a little later than P. macounti, but in
bloom for a much longer period. Rarer on St. George.
92. Primula macounii, Greene, Pittonia, Vol. III, pp. 251 and 260. (Plate XCIII.)
Stouter than the last; the rootstock branched, and the scapes and leaf clusters
thus tufted forming a mass; leaves obovate to oblanceolate, entire, glabrous, the
inflorescence slightly glandular, but without a trace of farinose indument; umbels
many-flowered and perfectly equilateral; calyx cleft well below the middle, its broad
segments oval, or, if narrower, somewhat spatulate-oblong; corolla much as in the
preceding, but of a lighter purple.
More nearly related to P. parryi than to P. nivalis, The foliage in this last is of
much thinner texture, much more conspicuously veiny, even reticulately venulose,
the reticulations showing central glandular dots. The dried leaf is so thin as to be
perfectly translucent, and its margin is finely dentate, as Pallas’s figure shows. But
in P. macounti the leaves are thick, completely opaque when dry, scarcely veiny, not
in the least reticulate or dotted; nor is there any trace of farinose indument.
Very abundant on St. George Island, flowering and maturing earlier than the
last. In living plants the flowers are much lighter in color in P. eximia than in
P. macounii, varying much, however, in dried specimens.
93. Androsace villosa, L.
Common on the slopes of the lower hills on both islands.
94, Trientalis europaea, L., var. arctica, Ledeb.
Never abundant, but found in many places on both islands.
95. Gentiana tenella, Rottb.
Rather rare on St. Paul Island. Found only on a few bare spots on low hills.
Flowers ochroleucous or blue.
96. Gentiana frigida, Haenke.
Common on both islands.
97. Gentiana glauca, Pallas,
Rare on the most exposed places on both islands.
98.-Polemonium caeruleum, L., var. grandiflorum, Ledeb.
Abundant on the slopes of the lower hills on both islands.
99. Polemonium pulchellum, Bunge, var. macranthum, Ledeb.
Often with the last, but also on the more exposed hillsides. White-flowered
plants very common.
100. Eritrichium chamissonis, A. DC.
Common on St. Paul Island.
101. Mertensia maritima, Don.
Not rare along the seashore on both islands.
102. Veronica serpyllifolia, L.
Springy places, St. Paul Island.
570 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
103. Veronica stelleri, Pall.
Grassy banks by a pond near the south end of St. Paul Island.
104. Pedicularis verticillata, L.
Common on both islands.
105. Pedicularis,sudetica, Willd.
Not rare about marshes on St. Paul Island.
106. Pedicularis langsdorfii, Fisch.
Hillsides and uplands on both islands.
107. Pedicularis lanata, Willd.
Common with the last on St. Paul Island.
108. Euphrasia officinalis, L.
One locality on St. Paul Island.
109. Gynandra gmelini, Cham. and Schl.
Rather rare on both islands.
110. Gynandra stelleri, Cham. and Schl.
Rare on St. Paul Island.
111. Koenigia islandica, L.
Rather rare on both islands
112. Polygonum viviparum, L.
Common on both islands.
113. Polygonum macounii, J.K. Small. (Plate XCIV.)
Perennial by a horizontal chaftfy rootstock. -Foliage bright green, glabrous or
nearly so. Stems usually several together, 3 to 4 dm. tall, simple, leafy to the top;
leaves basal and cauline; blades oblong, 5 to 12 cm. long, obtuse, more or less strongly
revolute, sometimes minutely pubescent beneath, marginal nerves prominent; the
basal and lower cauline leaves long petioled, the upper cauline short petioled or
nearly sessile; ochreae very thin, 5 to 8 em. long on the lower part of the stem, 1 to 4
cm. long on the upper parts; raceme 3 to 3.5 em. long, short peduncled, the lower
part producing numerous conic bulblets 5 to 6 mm. long, continuous; pedicels about
1 or 1.5 mm. long; ochreolae very thin, acute; perianth pink, 2 to 2.5 mm. long; seg-
ments oval or rhombic oval, obtuse; filaments strap shaped; ovary oval, 3-angled;
styles 3-parted; achenes not seen. A remarkable species of Polygonum, in habit
like a gigantic P. viviparum. Besides its much more robust habit, the compact raceme,
with its large ocreolae and very small calices, serve as a ready means of distinguishing
between the two species.
In boggy ground near a ditch on St. Paul Island.
Intermediate between P. viviparum, L., and P. bistorta, L.; perhaps a hybrid
between these species or P. viviparum and P. bistortoides, Pursh, though differing
widely from both and of much larger size than either. Mr. Holm’s excellent drawing
is of a small specimen; the average height is from 18 to 30 inches.
114. Polygonum bistorta, L.
By a little brook near Zapadni rookery, St. George Island. Specimens were not
collected and, though recorded under the above name, the specimens seen were
probably LP. bistortoides, Pursh.
THE PLANTS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 571
115. Oxyria reniformis, Hook.
Common in damp ravines or on damp s»ots on hillsides on both islands.
116. Rumex acetosella, L.
On sandy soil on St. Paul Island.
117. Salix arctica, Pall.
The common willow on both islands.
118. Salix arctica, Pall., var. obcordata, Anders.
Rarer than the last.
119. Salix phylicoides, And.
Collected on Bogoslov Hill by Dr. Merriam.
120. Salix reticulata, L.
Common on hillsides and uplands on both islands.
121. Salix diplodictya, Trautv.
Not rare on St. Paul Island. Determined by Mr. P. A. Rydberg.
122. Salix ovalifolia;Trautv.
Rare on St. Paul Island.
123. Salix rotundata, Rydberg MS.
A little willow, very abundant on a hillside near the village on St. Paul, has been
collected there every year since 1891. Mr. M.S. Bebb determined specimens collected
in 1891 and 1892, and wrote that he believed them to be intermediate between 8.
rotundifolia and 8S. ovalifolia. Mr. Theo. Holm, who examined specimens collected in
1897, considered them to be Salix retusa, L., forma, rotundifolia, Trautv., while Mr.
P. A. Rydberg believes them to be new. Lundstrém, to whom specimens were sent,
has at this writing not yet reported on them. This is, I believe, the same plant of
which Mr. Bebb wrote Dr. Merriam “intermediate between 8. arctica and 8. ovali-
folia—may possibly be a hybrid.” Ican not think it a hybrid. Distributed from
the herbarium of ‘the Geological Survey of Canada as No. 16645.
124. Empetrum nigrum, L.
Common on both islands.
125. Streptopus amplexifolius, DC.
In ravines on both islands.
126. Fritillaria kamtschatcensis, Ker.
In wet ground, generally by. rivulets and brooks. Common on St. George Island;
in one locality only (Tolstoi) on St. Paul Island.
127. Lloydia serotina, Reich.
Very abundant on parts of St. Paul Island, but flowering early and soon hidden
by grass.
128. Juncus balticus, Deth., var. haenkii (Mey.), Fr. Buch.
Common in marshy places on both islands.
129. Juncus biglumis, L.
Not rare on either island.
572 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
130. Luzula arcuata, Hook., var. unalaschkensis, Fr. Buch.
Exposed hilltops on both islands.
131. Luzula confusa, Lindb., var. latifolia, Buch.
With the last, but also on lower levels on both islands.
132. Luzula campestris, Desv., var. multiflora, Celakovsky.
L. campestris, var. sudetica, Merriam’s list.
Same distribution as the last, but not quite so abundant.
133. Potamogeton filiformis, Pers.
In a shallow pond on St. Paul Island.
134. Eriophorum polystachyon, L.
In boggy places on St. Paul Island.
135. Eriophorum vaginatum, L.
Bogs on St. George Island.
136. Carex leiocarpa, C. A. Meyer.
On boggy tundra on St. George Island. Notrare. Ona grassy bank near a pond
on St. Paul Island.
137. Carex pyrenaica, Meyer.
Young plants of what I believe to be this species were found growing with the
last on St. Paul Island. My plants answer well enough to Meyer’s description of
0. micropoda, which, according to Boott, is identical with C. pyrenaica. Herb. No.
16611.
138. Carex norvegica, Schk.
Collected on St. Paul Island by Dr. Merriam.
139. Carex lagopina, Wahl.
Common on both islands. The var. gracilescens in bogs.
140. Carex lagopina, Wahl., var. longisquama, Geo. Kukenthal.
Spikes, 4 to 6, more elongate than in typical C. lagopina. Scales a little longer.
than the perigynia, broadly hyaline on the margins. Mossy uplands, St. Paul Island.
Herb. No. 16620.
141. Carex pribylovensis, J. M. Macoun.
Culm, 30 to 40 cm. high; spikes, 3 to 4; ovate, roundish in a dense head; utricu-
lus broadly ovate, very shortly beaked; scales broad and almost obtuse, a little
shorter than the utriculi. Intermediate between C. lagopina and C. glareosa, to the
latter of which species this plant has been referred by Professor Bailey. Herb. No.
16609.
142. Carex gmelini, Hook.
Common on both islands,
y
143. Carex vulgaris, Fries.
An almost typical form of this species is common on low flats where water lies
late in the spring. Specimens nearly approaching the var. turfosa, Fries (Herb. No.
16612), were collected in a marsh on St. Paul Island. These have been identified as
C. vulgaris var. hyperborea by Professor Bailey and C. limula by Mr. Kukenthal. The
rhizome strong; scales black; perigynium nerveless; and in these respects they agree
THE PLANTS OF THE PRIBILOF ISI.ANDS. 573
with 0. limula, Fries, but the leaves are narrower and the short- peduncled spikes
erect.
144. Carex salina, Wahl.
This species, in one or other of its many forms, is common on both islands. The
commonest of these is CO. salina, subsp. cuspidata, Wahl., var. haematolepis, Drej.,
which grows everywhere on grassy uplands. The form thulensis. Th. Fries (Herb.
No. 16618), was collected in a slightly saline marsh. With it grew the var. subspa-
thacea, Wormskj. (Herb. No. 16619). The varietal determinations given above were
made by Mr. Kukenthal.
The Carex rigida bigelovit of Dr. Merriam’s list I believe to be this species, though
I have not seen his specimens.
145. Carex cryptocarpa, C. A. Meyer.
Common on both islands.
146. Carex maorochaeta, C. A. Meyer.
C. podocarpa! R. Br.
Common on both islands; the form gracilior found in one locality only.
147. Carex macrochaeta, C. A. Meyer, var. subrigida, Geo. Kukenthal.
Low, culm and leaves rather broad and very rigid, the leaves longer than the
culm; the lowest spike female at the base; all the spikes longer and much narrower
than in the type, club-shaped, rather 1086: flowered toward the base; scales hardly
or not at all aristate. Herb. No. 16615, ,
Perhaps a hybrid between C. macrochaeta and C. haematolepis, though as these
species belong to two different sections and there is little evidence of hybridization
apart from the general appearance of the plant, I prefer to adopt the name given it
by Mr. Kukenthal.
148. Carex membranopacta, Bailey, Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, Vol. XX, p. 428, 1893.
Very abundant in a large depression around a pond on St. Paul Island. This
carex, at least where found by me, grows in clumps and is decumbent in habit, cover-
ing an area of from 24 to 30 inches in diameter. Dried specimens give no hint that
the plant is not erect in habit; but the fact is that on St. Paul Island, at least, it lies
flat on the ground, even when very young. At maturity the whole plant is frequently
covered by the surrounding ‘herbage. Herb. No. 16608, distributed as C. compacta,
R. Br. The C. saxatilis of Dr. Merriam’s list I take to be this species.
149. Carex rariflora, Smith.
Collected by Mr. Palmer on St. Paul Island.
150. Hierochloa borealis, R. and S.
Not rare on either island.
151. Hierochloa pauciflora, R. Br.
Rare on St. Paul Island.
152, Alopecurus alpinus, Smith.
Common on both islands.
153. Alopecurus howellii, Vasey, var. merriami, Beal.
On bare ground that has been used as hauling grounds by seals. Grows in dense
clumps; decumbent in habit. Not seen elsewhere than on dry, bare ground.
574 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
154. Phleum alpinum, L.
Common on both islands.
155. Phippsia algida, R. Br.
Collected on St. Paul Island by Mr. Palmer in 1891, and a few specimens by myself
on the same island in 1897.
156. Arctogrostis latifolia, Griseb.
Common on both islands.
157. Arctogrostis latifolia, Griseb., var. ‘
Plants referred here were named A. arundinacea (Trin.) by Professor Scribner,
but I can not agree with him that they are that species. In default of sufficient
European material for comparison I prefer to leave my plant without a name for the
present. Herb. No. 16632.
158. Calamagrostis purpurascens, Vasey.
Rare on St. Paul Island. Named C. arctica by Vasey in 1892.
159. Calamagrostis deschampsioides, Trin.
Very abundant where found, but local in its distribution.
160. Deschampsia caespitosa, Beauv., var. arctica, Vasey.
Very abundant on both islands.
161. Trisetum subspicatum, P. B.
Very abundant on both islands.
162. Poa arctica, R. Br.
Variable but common on both islands.
163. Poa caesia, Smith.
A form of this species was collected on St. George Island.
164. Poa glumaris, Trin.
Rare on St. Paul Island.
165. Dupontia psilosantha, Rupr.
Common in marshes on both islands.
166. Arctophila effusa, Lange.
Not rare on either island. The A. fulva of Dr. Merriam’s list differs somewhat
from other specimens collected on the Pribilof Islands, but seems to be this species.
167. Glyceria angustata, I'ries.
Common on both islands, particularly in the vicinity of the seal rookeries and
hauling grounds.
168. Glyceria vilfoidea, (Andn.) Fries.
Abundant on saline mud flats, but no flowering plants found. Not before known
from Alaska. ;
169. Festuca rubra, L. ‘
Common on both islands, but variable, the var. barbata, Hack., being very rare,
and a form near F. richardsoni hardly less so.
170. Festuca ovina, L., var. violacea (Gaud.), Griseb.
Common on sandy soil on St. Paul Island.
THE PLANTS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. ° BIS
171. Hlymus mollis, Trin.
Very common on both islands.
172. Blymus villosissimus, Seribn.
Culms stout, 3 dm. high, from creeping root-stocks; leaves of sterile shoots narrow,
as long as the culm; leaves of the culm comparatively short (6 to 13 em.) and broad
(6 to 10 mm.). Spikes ovate-oblong, 5 to 6 cm. long. Spikelets densely villous, 15 to
20 mm. long, 2 to 3 flowered. Empty glumes narrowly lanceolate, acuminate, 3-nerved,
about as long as the florets, densely silky villous on the back. Third glume, 12 to 15
mm. high, 9-uerved, ovate-lanceolate, acute. Palea about as long as the glume,
2-toothed, hairy on the sides and back, ciliate on the keels, rachilla densely pubescent.
Common in depressions on grassy uplands. Growing with Valeriana capitata,
Viola langsdorfii, Rubus stellatus, and such plants.
173. Hquisetum arvense, L.
Common on both islands.
174. Equisetum scirpoides, Michx.
Common on both islands.
175. Equisetum variegatum, Schleich.
Abundant at the north end of St. Paul Island.
176. Botrychium lunaria, Swartz.
Rare among sand dunes on St. Paul Island.
177. Phegopteris polypodioides, Fée.
Collected on St. George Island by Messrs. True and Prentiss, and on St. Paul by
Mr. Palmer.
178. Asplenium filix-foemina, Bernh.
Not rare in the interior of St. Paul Island.
179. Aspidium spinulosum, Swartz, var. dilatatum, Hook.
Common on both islands.
180. Aspidium filix-mas, Swartz.
Rare on St. George Island.
181. Cystopteris fragilis, Bernh.
Common on both islands.
Two ferns, Polypodium vulgare, L., and Aspidium lonchitis, Swartz, supposed to
have been collected on the Pribilof Islands by Mr. C. H. Townsend, are included in
Dr. Merriam’s list, but as the specimens are not in the United States National Her-
barium and no one else has collected these species on the Pribilof Islands, they have
been excluded from this list. They are both common at Unalaska.
182. Lycopodium selago, L.
Common on both islands.
183. Lycopodium alpinum, L.
Rocky uplands on St. Paul Island.
184. Lycopodium annotinum, L., var. pungens, Spreng.
Barren uplands on St. Paul Island.
576 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
MUSCI.
Sphagnum fimbriatum Wils., var. arcticum, C. Jensen.
This variety and the form fuscescens, Warnst., recorded by Dr. Merriam. No
locality. St. PaulIsland. (J.M.Macoun.)
Sphagnum girgenshonii, Russ.
Boggy spots, St. George Island. (J.M.Macoun.)
Sphagnum lindbergii, Schpr., var. microphyllum, forma brachydasyclada Warnst.
Recorded by Dr. Merriam. No locality. St. Paul Island. (J.M. Macoun.)
Sphagnum riparium, Aongstr.
Bogs, St. George Island. (J.M. Macoun; Dr. Merriam.)
Sphagnum squarrosum, Pers., var. imbricatum, Schp.
Bogs, St. George Island. (J.M.Macoun.) Dr. Merriam records the form brachy-
anoclada Warnst. No locality.
Sphagnum squarrosum, Pers., var. semi-squarrosum Russ.
St. Paul Island. (J. M. Macoun.) St. George Island. (J. M. Macoun; Dr.
Merriam.)
Dicranoweisia crispula, Lindb.
On rocks, St. Paul Island. (J.M.Macoun; Palmer.)
Oncophorus wahlenbergii, Brid.
On the ground, St. George Island. (Dr. Merriam; J. M.Macoun; Palmer.)
Dicranella rufescens, Schimp.
On earth, St. Paul Island. (J. M. Macoun.)
Dicranum molle, Wils.
Crevices of rocks, St. Paul Island. (J.M.Maconn.)
Dicranum strictum, Schleich.
St. Paul Island. (J. M. Macoun.)
Dicranum elongatum, Schleich.
St. Paul Island. (Dr. Merriam.)
Campylopus schimperi, Milde.
On rocks, St. Paul Island. (J. M. Macoun.)
Ceratodon purpureus, Brid.
On earth, St. Paul Island. (Dr. Merriam; J. M. Macoun; Palmer.)
Ceratodon heterophylla, Kindb. Ott. Nat., Vol. V, p. 179.
Agrees with Ceratodon purpureus in the shape of the capsule and the stem leaves,
the not excurrent costa and the revolvable annulus, but the capsule is often more
curved and distinctly strumose; agrees with Ceratodon conicus (Hampe.) in the peristo.
mial teeth having few articulations; differs from both in the blunt perichetial leaves;
is also very peculiar in the short, concave, suboval leaves of the long shoots.
Common on earth, St. Paul Island. (J. M.Macoun.) First collected in 1891.
THE PLANTS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 577
Didymodon baden-powellii, Kindb. Ott. Nat., Vol. V, p. 179.
Differs from Didymodon rubellus in the dioecious inflorescence, the blunt, conic,
very short lid, scarcely one-fifth of the capsule, and the distinctly dentate leaves (as
in Didymodon alpigenus, Vent.). The tufts are compact, about 2 cm. high, the leaves
revolute nearly all around, short-acuminate, the lower pale brown, perichetial ones
longer acuminate or subulate entire. The capsules are (unripe) more or less curved,
the pedicel pale red.
St. Paul Island. (J. M.Macoun.) First collected in 1891
Desmatodon latifolius, Brid.
St. Paul Island. (Palmer.)
Desmatodon systilius, Br. and Sch.
St. Paul Island. (Dr. Merriam.)
I have seen neither Mr. Palmer’s nor Dr. Merriam’s specimens of Desmatodon, but
believe them to be both D. latifolius which D. systilius nearly approaches. D. latifo-
lius is common at Unalaska.
Grimmia apocarpa, Hedw.
On rocks, St. Paul Island. (J. M. Macoun.)
Racomitrium lanuginosum, Brid.
On rocks, St. Paul Island. (Dr. Merriam; Palmer; J. M. Macoun.)
Racomitrium microcarpum, Brid.
St. Paul Island. (Dr. Merriam.) Probably the next.
Racomitrium microcarpum, Brid., var. palmeri, Kindb.; Macoun, Cat. Can. Plants, Vol. VI, p. 267.
Differs in the leaves being long-subulate, hairless, the upper cells longer and
more confluent, the alar ones large and rectangular, the capsule shorter pedicellate.
Differs also from the related Racomitrium sudeticum in the deeply cleft peristomial
teeth, the tiarrow leaf cells, etc. (Palmer; J. M. Macoun.) Tirst collected by Mr.
Palmer in 1890.
Orthotrichum laevigatum, Zelt.
Rocks, St. Paul Island. (Dr. Merriam; J. M. Macoun.)
Orthotrichum microplephare, Schimp.
St. Paul Island. (Dr. Merriam.)
‘Tetraplodon mnioides, Br. and Sch.
Wet banks, St. Paul Island. (Dr. Merriam; J. M. Macoun.)
Splachnum wormskioldii (Horne.), Kindb.
St. George Island. (J. M. Macoun.)
Bartramia ithyphylla, Brid.
Crevices of rocks, St. Paul Island. (Dr. Merriam; J. M. Macoun.)
Bartramia pomiformis, Hedw. ‘i
St. Paul Island. (Palmer.)
Philonotis fontana, Brid. .
St. Paul Island. (Dr. Merriam; J. M. Macoun.)
5947—pr 3—37 .
578 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Webera polymorpha, Schimp. var. brachy carpa, Kindb.
Crevices of damp rocks, St. George Island. (J. M. Macoun.)
‘Webera microcaulon, C. M. and Kindb.
St. George Island.
Webera nutans, Hedw.
On earth, St. Paul Island. (J. M. Macoun; Palmer.)
Webera cucullata, Schimp.
Crevices of rocks, St. Paul Island. (Dr. Merriam; J. M. Macoun.)
‘Webera canaliculata, C. M. and Kindb. var. microcarpa, Kindb.
Separated from the species only by its smaller capsule. St. Paul Island. (J. M.
Macoun.) :
‘Webera cruda, Schimp.
Crevices of rocks, St. Paul Island. (J. M. Macoun; Palmer.)
Webera albicans, Schimp.
On rocks, St. Paul Island. (J. M. Macoun.)
Bryum arcticum, Br. and Sch.
St. Paul Island. (Dr. Merriam.)
Bryum pendulum, Schimp.
On rocks, St. Paul Island. (Dr. Merriam; J. M. Macoun.)
Bryum inclinatum, Br. and Sch.
St. Paul Island. (Dr. Merriam.)
Bryum froudei, Kindb., Ott. Nat., Vol. V, p. 180.
Habit of Webera nutans. Agrees with Bryum inclinatum in the synoecious inflo-
rescence and the symmetric capsule, etc.; differs in the leaves being long-acuminate,
cells long and narrow, the upper sublinear (nearly as in Webera), costa very long-
excurrent, peristomial segments quite free from the teeth, spores smaller, scarcely 0.02
mm.; the cilia are wanting.
Orevices of rocks, St. Paul Island. (J.M.Macoun.) First collected in 1891.
Bryum brachyneuron, Kindb., Ott. Nat., Vol. V, p. 180.
Agrees with Byrwm pendulum in the synoecious inflorescence, the peristomes
orange, the segments adhering to the teeth, the apiculate lid and the large spores
(about 0.04 mm.); differs in the decurrent leaves, short-ovate, the costa broad, abbre-
viate, not excurrent, the sterile shoots bearing globose buds (gemmae), the very much
broader peristomial teeth. Stem red, very short, the pedicel about 1 cm. long or
shorter, often scarcely emerging above the tufts; costa of the lowest leaves red, per-
current only in the leaves of the shoots and the perichetial ones; capsule ventricose,
short-necked constricted below the mouth. Bryum fallax, Milde., resembling it in
habit, is dioecious; the segments are free, the spores smaller. Brywm lacustre differs
in not having decurrent leaves, the capsule not being constricted below the mouth, the
pedicel longer, the peristome pale, ete.
Crevices of rocks, St. Paul Island. (J.M.Macoun.) First collected in 1891.
Bryum argenteum, L.
Common on earth, St. Paul Island. (J. M. Macoun.)
THE PLANTS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 579
Bryum obtusifolium, Lindb.
St. Paul Island. (Palmer.)
Bryum erythrophyllum, Kindb.
St. Paul Island. (Palmer.)
Mnium subglobosum, Br. and Sch.
St. Paul Island. (Dr. Merriam.)
Psilopilum arcticum, Brid.
Common on earth on St. Paul Island. (J. M. Macoun; Palmer.)
Pogonatum dentatum, Brid.
On earth, St. Paul Island. (J. M. Macoun.)
Pogonatum alpinum, Roehl.
On earth and rocks, St. Paul Island. (Dr. Merriam; Palmer; J. M. Macoun.)
Pogonatum alpinum, Roehl. var. septentrionale, Brid.
On rocks, St. Paul and St. George islands. (J. M. Macoun.)
Pogonatum alpinum, Roehl. var. microdontium, Kindb.
Separated from the species by its nearly entire or indistinctly denticulate leaves.
St. Paul Island. (Palmer; J. M. Macoun.)
Polytrichum strictum, Banks.
St. Paul Island. (Dr. Merriam.) Perhaps the next.
Polytrichum boreale, Kindb.
Differing from the nearly allied P. hyperboreum principally in the leaves being
distinctly dentate above; the apex hyaline in the upper part, red in the lower.
St. Paul Island. (J. M. Macoun.)
Brachythecium albicans, Br. and Sch.
St. Paul Island. (Palmer.)
Brachythecium rivulare, Br. and Sch.
St. Paul Island. (Dr. Merriam.)
Burhynchium vaucheri, (Schimp. ).
On rocks, St. George Island. (J. M. Macoun.)
Plagiothecium pulchellum, Br. and Sch.
On other moss. St. Paul Island. (J.M. Macoun.)
Hypnum uncinatum, Hedw.
St. Paul Island. (J. M. Macoun.)
Calliergon cordifolium, Hedw.
St. Paul Island. (J. M. Macoun.)
Hylocomium splendens, Schimp.
St. Paul Island. (Dr. Merriam; Palmer.)
Hylocomium alaskanum, Schimp.
St. Paul Island. (J. M. Macoun.)
-Hylocomium squarrosum, Schimp.
St. Paul Island. (Dr. Merriam; Palmer; J. M. Macoun.)
580 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Hylocomium triquetrum, Schimp.
St. Paul Island. (Dr. Merriam; Palmer.)
HEPATICAE.
Diplophyllum taxifolium, Nees.
St. Paul Island. (Dr. Merriam; J. M. Macoun.)
Herberta adunca, S. I. Gray.
St. Paul Island. (Dr. Merriam.)
Gymnomitrium coralloides, Nees.
St. Paul Island. (Dr. Merriam; J. M. Macoun.)
LICHENS (COLLECTED BY J. M. MACOUN).
Ramalina cuspidata, (Ach.).
On rocks and earth, St. Paul Island. Gracilis; altitudo 4 to 7 cm.; sporae, 10 to
14 mik.
Ramalina polymorpha, Ach.
On rocks, St. Paul Island. Neque haec neque praecedens kalio coloratur,
Cetraria aculeata, (Schreb.), Fr.
On earth, St. Paul Island.
Cetraria arctica, (Hvok.).
On earth, St. Paul Island.
Cetraria islandica, (L.) Ach.
Very common and variable on both islands; the forms gracilis and robusta growing
with the type.
Cetraria islandica var. delisoei, (Bor.).
Common on St. Paul Island. ; ,
Cetraria cucullata, (Bell.), Ach.
On earth, St. Paul Island.
Cetraria nivalis, (L.), Ach.
On earth on both islands.
Cetraria fahlunensis, (L.), Schuer.
On rocks, St. Paul Island.
Cetraria lacunosa, Ach.
On rocks and earth on both islands.
. Alectoria jubata, (L.), var. chalybaeformis, Ach.
On earth on rocks, St. Paul Island.
Alectoria divergens, Wahlenb.
Mixed with the last. JJedula chlorcalcio rubescit.
Alectoria thulensis, Fr. Frics.
Common on earth on both islands.
Theloschistes lychneus, (Nyl.), var. pygmaeus, Ir.
Rare on rocks, St. Paul Island.
THE PLANTS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 581
Parmelia saxatilis, (L.) Fr.
Common on rocks and earth on both islands; frequently found abnormally colored ’
from red-brown to a beautiful violet. An isidiferous form on earth, St. George Island.
” Parmelia saxatilis, (L.), Fr., var. sulcata, Nyl.
On rocks, St. George Island.
Parmelia physodes, Ach., var. vittata, Ach.
On earth, St. Paul Island.
Umbilicaria rugifera, Nyl.
On rocks on both islands, Nos. 27 and 28. Chlorcalcio stratum corticale alterius
speciminis rubescit, alterius non mutatur.
Umbilicaria cylindrica, (L.), Delis., var. delisoei, Despa.
On rocks on both islands.
Umbilicaria erosa, Ach.:
On rocks on both islands.
Umbilicaria proboscidea, (L.), Stenh.
On rocks on both islands.
Sticta linita, Ach.
On damp rocks, St. Paul Island. a
Peltigera apthosa, (L.), Hoffm.
On and in wide crevices of damp rocks on both islands.
Peltigera canina, (L.), Hoffm. *
On moss on both islands.
Peltigera canina, (L.), var. spongiosa, Tuck.
With the last, but not so common.
Peltigera canina, Hoffm., var. spuria, Ach.
In a dense tuft of moss which it divided, St. Paul Island.
Solorina crocea, (L.), Ach.
On earth and rocks, St. Paul Island,
Pannaria brunnea, (Sw.), Mass.
On earth and rocks, St. George Island.
Placodium elegans, (Link.), DC.
Rare on rocks, St. Paul Island.
Lecanora ventosa, (L.), Ach.
On rocks, St. George Island.
Lecanora tartarea, (L.), Ach.
Common and variable on rocks on both islands.
Lecanora tartarea, Ach., var. frigida, (Sw.).
Common on rocks, St. Paul Island.
Lecanora oculata, (Dicks.), Ach.
On rocks, St. Paul Island.
Lecanora oculata, (Dicks.), Ach., var. gonatodes, Ach.
On rocks, St. Paul Island. Crusta Lecanora tartariae, kalio lutescit et chlorcalcio
rubesctt.
582 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Lecanora saxicola, Schaer.
Specimens which may prove to represent a new species have been provisionally
referred here by Mr. Branth.
Pertusaria Sp. (?).
On rocks, St. George Island.
Pertusaria panygra (Ach.) Th. Fr.
On rocks, St. Paul Island. Sporae solitariae 160 to 190 mik. long., 30 to 60 mik. lat.
(Frustulum alterum ita alterum alia crusta.) Thallus e kalio fere immutatus.
Stereocaulon coralloides, Fr.
On rocks, St. Paul Island.
Pilophorus robustus, Tuck,
Under overhanging rocks, St. Paul Island.
Cladonia alcicornis, Floerk.
Under damp overhanging rocks, St. Paul Island.
Cladonia decorticata, Floerk.
On earth and rocks, St. Paul Island.
Cladonia pyxidata, (L.). Fr.
On earth on both islands.
Cladonia degenerans, Tuck.
On earth, St. Paul Island.
Cladonia gracilis, (L.), Nyl. var. elongata, Fr.
Rare on St. Paul Island. The form macroceras, Tuck., is still rarer.
Cladonia furcata, Fuds. var. racemosa, FI.
On earth on both islands.
Cladonia furcata, Huds. var. subulata, FI.
On earth on both islands.
Cladonia rangiferina, Hoffm.
Common on earth on both islands.
Cladonia rangiferina, Hoffm. var. sylvatica, L.
On earth, St. George Island.
Cladonia rangiferina, Hoffm. var. alpestris, L.
Common on earth on both islands.
Cladonia uncinalis, Fr. var. turgescens, Fr.
On earth, St. Paul Island.
Cladonia cornucopioides, (L.), Ir.
Common on earth on both islands.
Cladonia bellidiflora, (Ach.), Schaer. -
Common on earth on both islands.
Sphaerophorum globiferum, DC.
On rocks on both islands. Medulla I. coerulescit.
Sphaerophorum fragile, Pers.
On rocks, mixed with Lecanara tartarea.
THE PLANTS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS 583
Thamnolia vermicularis, Fr.
‘Common on earth on both islands. The form gracilescens is rare on earth on
rocks, St. Paul Island. ce
Normandia laetevirens, Turn. and Borr.
Among tufts of moss, on St. George Island.
Heterothecium sanguinarium, (L.), Flot.
On rocks on both islands.
Lecidea sp. (?).
On rocks, St. George Island.
Lecidea sp. (?).
On rocks, St. George Island.
Buellia geographica, (L.), Tuck.
On rocks, St. George Island.
Buellia alpicola, Wahl.
On rocks, St. George Island.
Bueltia sp. (?).
On rocks, St. George Island.
Verucarria sp. (?).
On rocks, St. George Island.
Notrt.—The chemical reactions, measurements of spores, etc., are by Mr. J. 8S. D.
Branth, of Sneptrup, Denmark..
LICHENS COLLECTED ON ST. PAUL ISLAND IN 1891 BY WILLIAM PALMER AND
DETERMINED BY MR. W. W. CALKINS.
Cladonia furcata, Fr.
Pycnothalia cladinoides, Nyl.
Cladonia rangiferina, Hoffm.
Cladonia papillaria, Hoffm.
Theeloschistes lychneus, Nyl.
Umbilicaria hyporea, Hoffm.
Stereocaulon coralloides, Fr.
Cladonia fimbriata, Fr. F
Lecanora thamnites, Tuck.
FUNGI.
Clitocybe cyathiformis, Fr.
On earth, St. Paul Island.
Clitocybe diatreta, Fr.
On earth, St. Paul Island.
Clitocybe laceata, Scop.
On earth, St. Paul Island.
Russula nigrodisca, Pk. New species.
Pileus thin, convex or nearly plane, viscid when young and moist, black or black-
ish on the disk, purplish-red or dark-red on the even margin; lamellae thin, entire,
subdistant, narrowed toward the stem, whitish; stem nearly equal, white or whitish;
_ spores white, subglobose, 0.00035 to 0.00045 inch long; cystidia 0.002 to 0.0024 inch
long, pointed at the apex.
Pileus 1 to 1.5 inches broad; stem 1 to 1.5 inches long, 2 to 4 lines thick.
584 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
On exposed hillsides among Cladonias and other lichens, St. Paul Island, Septem-
ber 18, 1896. (J.M. Macoun.) ;
This species is apparently related to R. fallax, from which it may be separated by
its darker colored pileus with its even margin and by its larger spores. Its numerous
conical-pointed cystidia project slightly from the edge of the lamellae. Having seen
only dry specimens, it is impossible to say whether the flavor of the fresh plant is mild
or acrid.
Flammula fulvella, Pk. New species.
Pileus thin, convex or nearly plane, glabrous, subtawny, the margin deflexed or
incurved, flesh whitish; lamellae thin, subdistant, adnate or slightly decurrent, some-
what tawny, inclining to ochraceous-tawny; stem equal, solid, fibrillose or fibrillose-
squamulose, colored like the pileus; spores elliptical, 0.0005 inch long, 0.003 broad.
Pileus 6 to 12 lines broad; stem about 1 inch long, 1.5 to 2 lines thick.
Low ground, St. Paul Island, September, 1896. (J. M.Macoun.)
Having seen dried specimens only, it is not possible to give the colors of the fresh
plant nor of the young lamellae. The plants are apparently closely gregarious in
mode of growth. It is possible that the pileus may be slightly viscid when fresh, but
this could not be satisfactorily ascertained, and therefore the tribe to which the species
belongs is uncertain. A
Cortinarius?
On earth, St. Paul Island.
Nalaviea?
On earth, St. Paul Island.
Geographical distribution of the phaenogams and vascular cryptogams known to occur on the Pribilof Islands.
West coast of Bering Sea.
| Arctic America.
Greenland.
Nova Zembla.
Arctic Siberia.
) Iceland.
| Spitzbergen.
| Scandinavia.
| Arctic Russia.
Anemone richardsoni, Hook.........-----------sceceececccecencecncccacncee
Ranunculus tricophyllus, Chaix
Ranunculus pallasii, Sch] .......-. Waseaibrnrcteneartemia sis
Ranunculus hyperboreus, Rottb cage seventeen
Ranunculus pygmaeus, Wahl
Ranunculus reptans, L ...-.
Ranunculus altaicus, Laxm
Ranunculus eschscholtzii, S
Coptis trifolia, Salisb..-.-....
Aconitum delphinifolium, DC
Papaver radicatum, Rottb.....-.
Papaver macounii, Greene. .....
Corydalis pauciflora, Pers....-. errr
Nasturtium palustre, DC.............-..-.--
Nesodraba grandis, Greene...
Draba hirta, L....-........-..
Draba wahlenbergii, Hartm ..
Eutrema edwardsii, R, Br ....
Cochlearia officinalis, L-.-
Cardamine bellidifolia, L .
Cardamine pratensis, L.
Cardamine umbellata, Gree:
Arabis ambigua, DC .......
Viola langsdorfii, Fisch...
Silene acaulis, L..........
Lychnis apetala, L ...........
Arenaria macrocarpa, Pursh
444i 4
++
+
iti ttt:
ee
bth +tt+!
.
.
: +++! ++ | Northeast America.
b+t+it!
i +++!
Pept!
+i+
bititetei ti:
i +4+t444!
pititsei:
Pitti
Seti tttt+4}
1
.
tit:
eek
+4444 4:
bbe eee! FEE EE EHP E HE | East coast of Bering Sea.
+44!
++
pai ate te
Ptttteti tit
i444!
oe
biteei tei tt
t4tt+:
+++!
THE PLANTS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 585
“z
Geographical distribution of the phaenogams aud vascular ‘crypltogams, etc.—Continued.
\ j 3
. oo bo
a eae er
& ke _
4/3 a|3
=| 8 -lalalalals(2
Bi]. glareielela =
ale|s S\EISIB/212/3
Viglals/sl/alS iS /2/8/ 8
Sele /ZlS/EISlE/E/ 3/3
Al ol/e/S)a] SS] a] eo] & e
: 4/42/S)/S/alaldjajy4)/F |e
Arenaria arctica, Stev. Lata I ones [eee Bl steerage +] +
Arenaria peploides, L fe: |) oe he | be +l +
Stellaria media, Smith waaee| ab A ods aoe
Stellaria borealis, Bigel --| +] + tit sil Saree ae
Stellaria humifusa, Rott! es ape Hl Sh +l o+
Stellaria longipes, Goldie, v: + | + |--- al sisteselfoieceie lncacee | oats arene Seas
Cerastium alpinum, L | oe | safe |p of +] +
Sagina linnaei, Pre ea ath wl ake he +) 4
Sagina nivalis, Fr he A + ios
Claytonia sarmento:
Montia fontana, L ..
Geranium erianthum,
Lupinus nootkatensis, Don
Lathyrus maritimus, Bigel
“Rubus-chamaemorus, L
Rubus stellatus, Smith
Rubus areticus, L
Geum rossii, Sering!
Sibbaldia procumbens,
Potentilla anserina, L
Comarum palustre, L.
Potentilla fragiformis,
Potentilla emarginata, Pursh
Saxifraga hieracifolia W alds
Saxifraga davurica, L ..-
Saxifraga stellaris, L. var.
Saxitraga nelsoniana, Don
Saxifraga serpyllifolia, Pu
Saxifraga bracteata, Don
Saxifraga hireulus, L.
Saxifraga hirculus, L. var. , Engl -
Chrysosplenium beringianum, J. N. Rose
+4+
PHASE EE HE! Fete ttt +H4
+44!
+
+
+44!
+++
tit!
+44+444+
.
.
'
’
Chrysosplenium alternifolium, L -. fe
Parnassia kotzebuei, Cham. and Schl | ke
Thppere vulgaris, L ..- ae | ods
Epilobium clavatum, Tre!
Epilobium bebringianum, Hau:
Epilobium spicatum, Lam
He pate scoticum, L
Selinum Benthami, Wat
Coeloplureum gmelini, Li
Cornus suecica, L
Galium trifidum,L..
Valeriana capitata, P.:
Aster sibiricus, L.....
Achillaea millefolium,
Chrysanthemum arcticum,
Artemisia globularia, Cham .............2..--
Artemisia norvegica, Fries var. pacitica, Gray
Artemisia richardsoniana, Hook............
Artemisia vulgaris, L. var. tilesii, Ledeb
Arnica unalaskensis, Less
Petasites frigida, Fries -....
Senecio pseudo-arnica, Less .......--.----.-.-
Taraxacum officinale, Weber var. lividum, Koc
Campanula uniflora, L...-....-..-2.esee-- eens
Campanula lasiocarpa, Cham,
Pyrola minor, L ........--
Armeria vulgaris, Willd
Primula maconnii, Greene
Primula eximia, Greene..
Androsace villosa, L
Trientalis europaea, L. var. arctica, Lede
Gentiana tenella, Rottb ...
Gentiana frigida, Haenke. .
(sentiana glauca, Pallas ..-
Polemonium caeruleun, L. var.-grandiflorum, Ledeb....
Polemonium pulchellum, Bungl., var. macranthum, Ledb
Eritrichium chamissonis, A. DC ...-..--..-----00-022025
Mertensia maritima, Don...-
Veronica serpyllifolia, L.
Veronica stelleri, Pall .. .
Pedicularis verticillata, L.............-
++!
aaee
++
444+
+4+++4+4+!
eee
Pei b +t
+HH44 54445441
at bt
586 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Geographical distribution of the phaenogams and vascular eryptogams, etc.—Continued.
|
a| d
oo | op
& a| a
o mH [*I
“a ®D oO
a] oO F -/Ala
a | A ~|elelaie/ete
eae gi2/¢l/e)/8/e/8
ajelg e/e/2)8/2)/8/2
4tia/e/./8/a/R&/e@/a/s] 48
ofS ial esi sls lolINilol] S18
Sele f= ao). wt | ap
SISle/E(Si/ElE 218] ale
alole|/Sl/a;S/alola]@]a
4/4/S|/S|Hlalalal4]/e la
Fedioulars pudetios, WING »:essescnsnsennns sane cnwerernesacadhadndwitinancy, af | eee] OE eee aleeeeleccel AE ek | aed ey ae
Pedicularis langsdorfii, Fisch................- clearer Setis]aiaie erase bacaleecelteag| spel eel ae
Pedicularis lanata, Willd .-.-..-...--.--....-- + + |- craefeneefeneefenee] to] ep of
Euphrasia officinalis, L........---...--.-2-.-- + + sees + fe. -fe---] Po
Gynandra gmelini, Cham. and Schl .....-....---------------e- scene eee eee ee weeelewee[eee [ee eele ee e/eeee]----| fb fee
Gynandra stelleri, Cham. and Schl.......-.2-022-- 20-22 -e eee ee eee eee eee eee ed ed ee ee
Koeenigta tlandics, Li... +. +. .c=vesessyeesn as eeieae wee eeEerENREETeeetRere ey tli ty +l el] ei td sty st
Polygonum. Viviparui; Lasso c2csc ee scuseecceseseccatecusesemsmeansst tenes tit ft] +] +/+] 4+] 4+] 4
Polygonum macounii, J. K.Small_...-.-----.4------ 22-22 eee ee eee ee eee eee seas[neee[enen|oeaelacesleneslstonlece [oon
Polygonum bistorta, L......-.----.-22-2.0 22 eee ee eee eee ee eee eee eee nee aie wal sews] eer aoce| poleceal ede. |e
Oxyria reniformis, Hook..-..-..---------- +2222 eens eee eee ee eee net eeeeee eens Se ste abe [os | ae de ese ae |
Rumex:acetosella, Di. a. cncseccieeanun teense seiseavessceastacmsaraccmeswnicces ce ce oe a a
Salix arctica, Pall as sie sic cciskiscnseaiscnececeniaeseicccisies se eeaae ce ccnceedic stat + |----[----fe---] BPH] BY] ed t+
Salix phylicoides, And.........22-2.2.02--2---02-06- pees see Bela coal sis lercehecee|! eee
Malis weriewla lay Do a ic. =s-+ sna weadareaceusuiey en munca shnEkaws HeEeReaNsacie She | + 2 a (er cal
Salix-ovalifolia; Trautticncsscc sesiewsascsegeed 35 ssis ac eae seed cwe cn cuicnwicwe eee F ere )See eacelacscfecse] 4b +
EOD ORP URE NUTTIN: Lier crcweanuaindekhinmnaeccmnnhenhaden senna anienemene joes + + +itl] +
Fritillaria kamtschatcensis, Ker--........-.--...- ass seca ele] +
Lloydia serotina, Reich..-....- Br + j----} ] +
Streptopus amplexifolius, DC - + siaeee +] 4+
Juncus balticus, Deth. var. Haen’ 2 alesse eae mane eins
DUNCUS DIS MIsy Lie sissies os svinctieiwswoee oaiain dpsinsia sis be aten,o-sele'eia~ amemigeksmane + + |. +{o+
Luzula arcuata, Hook. var. una. 9), BUCH cccwcsxeensavesenesueyessuue: oe ies] Siowre'|siesere
Luzula confusa, Lindb. var. latifolia, Buch a al arene
Luzula campestris, Desv. var. sudetica, Celak ...-.... ile = Stezigll srecoieoqenal| acre | xteene
Eriophorum polystachyon, L ..-......--..-------2-++- : + ae de | ep Pak |e
Eriophorum vaginatum, L.-....----...2222---0-eeee ee + +f...) ]e] +
Carex leiocarpa, C. A. Meyer...----.....-.---+2--22eneee ears eee reeetes |eneeses| perce oer
Carex novegica, Schic......c0cssageeseesinelacnanncsens alistee + jens acme” fe
Carex lagopina, Wahl ......... + 2] Sf ees | +] o+
Carex omelini, HOOK os ciate oe sucecen ca rennasnenewe nee pieais Aemeslersraclowes|| ay | ob
Carex vulgaris, Fries and vars. .........------se-+------ + + f----) Fb] +] 4
Carex once 0, C. AL Mey ere sc scaxceesescceeccscnes + seac|-eesleses| fo |) SE
Carex salina, Wahl. and vars ...--...----.2eeeeeceen nee “lf peed es aad eae ad I
Carex macrochaeta, C. A. Meyer . we8 Sdet|tecalsa ctlemest HE
Carex membranopacta, Bailey ......---..--..--2----0--+-- = cieeicfseicelweex| eee! AE
Carex rariflora, Smith ......2 22.222. 2222 22 20-- eee eee eee + thei +] el] +
Carex GAXOtiis) Doi 02 oi cin to oeinaine acces anieernnaiienacdapucicis ws + ++ +/+] +
Hierochloa borealis, R. and S...---.--00 2. cee eee cene cece ee ee Bee + let +
Hierochloa paucitlora, R. Br.......-.2--2222s-2220eeeeeee eee sie “| + il SE bescters
Alopecurus alpinus, Smith .20...2500e002 2000s eeinwacnnnene + “| +d. +]o+
Alopecurus howellii, V. var. merriami, Scrib................- si ere Cent
Phieum alpinum, L ......-....-----.-. ae ae +
Arctagrostis latifolia, Grisb..-..--.. re ene +
Calamagrostis purpurascens, V ..... + |. ae ses
Calamagrostis deschampsioides, Trin... bois | + siaualleceis
Deschampsia caespitosa, Beauv. var. arctica, Trin.-....-..--- eee areata even of
Trisetam subspicatum, Beauv + “| + +] +
Phippsia algida, R. Br oie + Se
Poa arctica, R. Br. A+ fe te] ots
Poa caesia, Smith .........-.-... Se ee oa ee a Ba
Poa glumaris, Trin ........-....- Bs Scabsnddtaepilleenaltarstanes| “Se
Arctophita effusa, Lange .... fe]: wh Lecaceed ae [Pabe bade PE lea
Dupontia psilosantha, Rupr .----..2-...2.00202222eeeceeeee eee é 212212) SE evewe| overeat | oe banal de fhe | SE
Glyceria angustata, Vries ...... 22.2.0 .222--.eeeeeeceeeeeeee eee eee ‘ ef ls.2 sll ook | atass lneeeleoadinaests = | OSE
Glyceria vilfoidea (Andr.), Pries......2..2222-00cceece eee eee eee ee 5s SB bese] pe lone] Ee bicelles Said Sunes
Festuca rabra, Lscecccce ccs sous 2euseeneeebiyeg aeansecus aie oes So a a
Festnca ovina, Li... sects cssmeunesecs dee scceteedeoesccnarecnonce é +/+] +p +t] +y}4ei+tee!] 4+
Blymone mollis, TV saceuwsy sax pee cwwacisinmumewawearcemewnadwenieee 3 ii aver | Demet eae (eee! a eo ee
Elymus villosissimus, Seribn .........22002 000200 ceeeceeeee eee ee eee ale sts eatial lone, 2A hies ors [area zoek [arate
Equisetum arvense, L........-... 2.222.222 22 eee eee eee eee eo ee Pe ee
Equisetum scirpoides. Michx ........-...222200002e ee cece cence eee + |.--.] 4- [--.. +)]o4+
Equisetum variegatum, Schleich ...........--..222..2..---------- oo ee iced Nona
Botrychiam lunaria, Swartz. ...0..<-sco0e4c0es pouae dances ooosee.e + | + f.--.f + ales
Phegopteris polypodioides, Fée ... dia tatainn ts ie = id coeeia ss aizistecioavne |e] + fee] a ee
Asplenium filix-foemina, Bernh ... l'sacielsamnallciece oneal Ae doemaleswcloancl ae
Aspidium spinulosum, Swartz. ... ens el ee eae Bes eae ee
Aspidium Filix-Mas.......... ea ee oe ee a cfeial cts "Iiderese
Cystopteris fragilis, Bernh.........-...00.02..20000002ee ec eeeeeeeee eee Bf eee [en pee ey I I Way a
Lycopodium selago, L ...2.......22022 02202 e eee eee eee eee eee ee fete le] ee] + fe | os +
Lycopodium alpinum, L............222022.22222.02-- 22-00 ss a ie de a ee +
Lycopodium annotinum, L............ atte stebinen Siiciclincsa ds stead arcisinna aed decSesuty bess cuses pty t fee eb oh nee ef ae fig | ob
THE PLANTS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 587
AUTHORITIES FOR THE GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF THE PLANTS MENTIONED
IN THE FOREGOING LIST.
BERLIN, AUG.: Kirlviixter insamlade under den svenska expeditionen till Greenland 1883 (Oefversigt
Kgl. Sv. Vet. Akad. Forhdlgr, 1884).
Buiytt, M. N.: Norges Flora. Christiania, 1861-1876.
BuCHENAU, FR. anD Focks, W. O.: Gefiisspflanzen Ostgriénlands, Zweite Deutsche Nordpolfahrt,
Bremen, 1872.
CHamIsso, A. DE: De plantis in expeditione observatis disserere pergitur, Arcticae quae supersunt
(Linnaea, Vol. 6, 1831).
Frizs, Tu. M.: Om Beeren Islands fanerogam-vegetation (Oefversigt Kgl. Sv. Vet. Akad. Forhdlgr,
1884).
GRONLUND, Cur.: Islands Flora, Copenhagen, 1881.
Hartman, C. J.; liandbok i Skandinaviens Flora, Stockholm, 1870. ;
Hartz, N.: Fanerogamer og Karkryptogamer fra Nordést-Griénland og Angmagsalik (Medd. om Grin-
land, vol. 18, Copenhagen, 1895).
Hooker, 5. D.: Outlines of the Distribution of Arctic Plants. (Trans. Linn. Soc., vol. 23, 1862.)
Hooker, J. D.: Flora Boreali.Americana. London, 1840.
Hot, THEO.: Novaia Zemlja’s Vegetation. (Dijmphna-Togtets Zool. Bot. Udbytte. Copenhagen,
1885.)
Hom, THEo.: Beitrige zur Flora Westgrénlands. (Engler’s Botan. Jahrbiicher, Vol. VIII. - Leipzig,
1887.)
KsE Liman, F, R.: Om Kommandirski-Cernes Fanerogamflora. (Vega-Expedit. Vetensk. Iakttag., Vol.
IV. Stockholm, 1855.)
KsELLMAN, F. R.: Fanerogamer fran Novaia Zemlja, Wajgatach och Chabarova. (Vega-Expedit.
Vetensk. Arbeten.)
KgELLMAN, F. R.: Sibiriska Nordkustens Fanerogamflora. (Vega-Expedit. Vetensk. Arbeten.)
KseLiMan, F. R.: Fanerogamfloran paa Novaja Semlja och Wajgatsch. (Vega-Expedit. Vetensk.
Arbeten.) :
KsJELLMAY, F. R.: Asiatiska Beringsunds-kustens Fanerogamflora. (Vega-Expedit. Vetensk. Arbeten.)
Lance, J.: Conspectus Florae Groelandicae. (Medd. om Grénland. Copenhagen, 1880.)
LEDEBOUR, C. F.: Flora Rossica. Stuttgart, 1841-1853.
Macoun, JoHN: Catalogue of Canadian Plants. Montreal, 1883-1890.
MaxiImovicz, CaRL Jou: Primitiae Florae Amurensis. St. Petersburg, 1859.
Merriam, C. Hart: Plants of the Pribilof Islands. Bering Sea. (Proceed. Biol. Soc. Washington,
1892.)
Moar, N.: Forség til en islandsk Naturhistorie. Copenhagen, 1786.
Natuorst, A. G.: Nya Bidrag till Kiinnedomen om Spetsbergens Kirlvixter. (Kgl. Sv. Vetensk.
Akad. Hdlgr., vol. 20. Stockholm, 1883.)
Ruprecat, F. J.: Symbolae ad historiam et geographiam plantarum Rossicarum. St. Petersburg,
1846,
STEJNEGER, LEONHARD: Notes on the Plants of the Commander Islands. (Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., Vol.
VII, 1885.)
SrrOMFett, H. F. G.: Islands Kirlviixter, betraktade fran viixtgeografisk och floristisk synpunkt.
(Efversigt Kgl. Sv. Vet. Akad. Férhdlgr., 1884.)
TRAUTVETTER, E. R.: Incrementa Florae Phaenogamae Rossicae. St. Petersburg, 1882.
TRAUTVETTER, E. R.: Die Pflanzengeographishen Verhiltnisse des Europiischen Russlands. Riga,
1849.
TRAUTVETTER, E. R.: Syllabus plantarum Sibiriae boreale-orientalis a Dre. Alex. Bunge Fil. lectarum.
St. Petersburg, 1888.
TRAUTVETTER, E. R.: Rossiae Arcticae plantas quasdam a peregrinatoribus variis in variis locis
lectas. St. Petersburg, 1880. -
TRAUTVETTER, E. R.: Flora terrae Tschuktschorum. St. Petersburg, 1878.
TRAUTVETTER, E. R.: Plantas Sibiriae borealis ab A. Czekanovski et F. Mueller lectas. St. Peters-
burg, 1877.
TRAUTVETTER, E. R.: Conspectus Florae Insularnm Nowaja Semlja.
TuRNER, L. M.: Contributions to the Natural History of Alaska. Washington, 1886.
WAHLENBERG, G.: Flora Lapponica. Berlin, 1812.
Plate LXXXVII.
AN UPLAND MEADOW OF ST. PAUL.
From a photograph by J. M. Macoun,
PLATE LXXXVIII.
PAPAVER MACOUNII Greene. Natural size,
a, The pistil, stamens, and a petal.
b, The fruit,
Drawn by Theo. Holm.
PLaTE LXXXIX.
FRUITING SPECIMEN OF NESODRABA GRANDIS (Langsd.) Greene. Natural size
Drawn by Theo. Holm.
aguified.
é. Natural
CARDAMINE UMBELLATA Green
v, Petal, magnified.
6, Flower with petals removed, m.
a, Flower, magnified.
Drawn by Theo. Holm.
PLATE XCl.
CHRYSOSPLENIUM BERINGIANUM Rose.
Fig. a, a plant, natural size; fig. b, leaf, enlarged 2 diameters; fig. c, enlarged 2 diameters; fig. d.
flower; fig. e, section of the same; fig. f, the flower as seen from above; fig. g, ovary; d, e, f, and y,
enlarged 5 diameters; fig. h, seed, enlarged 15 diameters. :
Drawn by F. A. Walpole.
ATE XCIl.
PLATE XCIll.
PRIMULA MACOUNI! Greene. Natural
w, Flowering specimen.
c, Vegetative shoot,
Drawn by Theo, Holm,
PLATE XCIV.
NS AS Ssh ee ae
‘4
J
! Uf
NG A356 L4
Yl LLL Z,
POLYGONUM MACOUNII Small.
Drawn by Theo, Holm.
XXIV.—ALGAE OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
By Wiuitam A. SETCHELL, Pu. D.,
Professor of Botany in the University of California.
A very considerable region, containing many characteristic species and distinctly
marked off from adjoining regions, is that extending from Yesso, and the Sea of
Okhotsk, around to the east, through the Bering Sea, the Aleutian Islands, and the
various archipelagoes lying along the northwestern shore of North America to the
Straits of Juan de Fuca and Puget Sound. Remote and little known as this region
is, yet the algae have long been a matter of study. Gmelin, in his Historia Fucorum,
in 1768, described a number of forms from Kamchatka and the adjoining districts. It
was not until 1851, however, that any detailed account of even the algae of the
Okhotsk Sea was published. In that year appeared the work of Ruprecht (1851),
since which nothing has been written about the algae of this region. Ruprecht, how-
ever, does not restrict his enumeration exclusively to the forms of the Okhotsk, but
mentions quite freely localities all over the world, and among them the island of
St. Paul of the Pribilof group. The various Russian expeditions brought back many
seaweeds among their collections. These were studied by Postels and Ruprecht at
St. Petersburg, and the results finally given to the world in a magnificent volume,
the Illustrationes Algarum, in the year 1840. This account deals almost entirely
with the North American coast from Unalaska to Monterey. Ruprecht also published
two other papers on algae from the North Pacific (1848 and 1852)—Merters letters,
published in 1829, give graphic descriptions of a number of the larger and more
curious species of northwestern America. The algae of the Straits of Juan de Fuca
have been enumerated by W. H. Harvey (1862), and, finally, the Bering Sea forms
have received revision and augmentation at the hands of Kjellman (1889), Of all
the literature of the algae of the entire region there remains to be mentioned only two
small papers by Okamura (1891a and 1891b), mentioning certain species from the
Kuril Islands and from Yesso, and a paper by Farlow (1886), crediting two species
to the island of St. Paul. These are all the works dealing with the species of this.
. immediate region as far as they are known to the writer. While they treat in a
general way of the species of the region, they do not, with the exception of the
Okhotsk flora and the paper of Farlow noted above, mention the Pribilof Islands in
particular. Ruprecht, however, as mentioned above, has given a number of species
as occurring at St. Paul, and the writer has attempted to bring together in this
account all these references, in order that a beginning may be made in the work of
exploiting the mariue flora of these islands.
589
590 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
The collections accessible to the writer have been those made by Messrs. Greeley
and Snodgrass, under the direction of President J ordan, which consist of three jars
of seaweeds preserved in formalin. Besides these, there were accessible to the writer
for examination two other small collections, viz, a few species obtained for the late
Prof. D. C. Eaton through the courtesy of the Alaska Commercial Company about
1877, which I have been able to reexamine through the kindness of Dr. A. W. Evans
of Yale University, and a collection by Charles H. Townsend, of the United States
Fish Commission steamer Albatross, in 1895, made at the request of the writer and at
the direction of the United States Commissioner of Fisheries. The Albatross collection
‘has been made available for this account through the permission of Commissioner
Bowers.
The present enumeration, then, includes all that can be determined from these
three collections, as well as information concerning any additional species credited to
the islands but not represented in the collections. In this way the writer has hoped
to bring together all that is reliably known about the marine flora of this group of
islands, for it has been suspected that the shores of Bering Sea are destitute of algae
altogether (cf. Ruprecht, 1851, p. 203, and Merrifield, 1875, p. 56), i. e., north of the
Aleutian Islands, with which, however, Ruprecht reckons the Pribilofs. Dall (1875)
and Kjellman (1889) oppose this view, and Konyam or Penkegnei Bay, St. Lawrence
Bay, and Port Clarence have floras very similar to that of the Okhotsk and the Aleu-
tians, St. Paul, likewise, has a very similar flora, as may be seen from the annexed
list.
CYANOPHYCEAE.
\
No specimens of blue-green algae have been found in the collections, either free or
attached to the others. No members of this group are mentioned either by Ruprecht
(1852) or by Kjellman (1889).
CHLOROPHYCEAE.
‘ 1
Prasiola crispa (Lightf.) Ag.
This species is commonly found covering recently vacated or little-used portions
of the seal rookeries, according to the note attached to a specimen collected at the
Reet’ rookery on St. Paul Island by B. W. Evermann July 20, 1892, and sent from the
United States National Herbarium to the writer.
Chaetomorpha melagonium var. typica Kjellm. Kjellman, Beringshafvets Algflora; 55, 1889.!
Only a few fragments of a Chaetomorpha exist in the collections, but both in those
of the Albatross and of Greeley and Snodgrass. They seem to belong to this species.
(St. Lawrence Island and Port Clarence.’
Cladophora mertensii (Rupr.) De-toni. ?
Conferva mertensti Rupr., Tange Och.; 403, 1851.
There is only one Cladophora present in the collections of Greeley and Snodgrass,
and that, a single specimen too imperfect to determine at all satisfactorily. It was
submitted to Professor Farlow, of Harvard University, who replies that it agrees best
with this species, but is by no means certainly to be referred to it.
1 Only literature to localities in Bering Sea proper is quoted.
* The localities inclosed in parentheses show additional distribution within Bering Sea proper.
ALGAE OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 591
Monostroma splendens (Rupr.) Wittr. Kjellman, Beringshafvets Algflora; 54, 1883.
Ula and Ulvaria splendens Rupr., Tange Och.; 410, 1851.
_ ‘This fine species must be fairly abundant upon the island, as it is represented in
both the collections by a comparatively large number of examples. All the specimens
are of a deep brown color, more like that of an old Punctaria than of a member of
this genus. (Bering Island.)
PHAEOPHYCEAE.
Dictyosiphon hippuroides (Lyngb.) Kiitz. Kjellman, Beringshafvets Algflora; 50, 1889.
A rather slender form of~this species occurs in the material of Messrs. Greely
and Snodgrass. (Konyam Bay and Bering Island.)
Mesogloia ?
A considerable quantity of a sterile plant occurs in the collections of Messrs.
Greely and Snodgrass, but as it is sterile it is impossible to tell with certainty
even the genus. Further, Kjellman does not mention any member of this group as
occurring in the Bering Sea.
Desmarestia aculeata (L.) Lamour. Kjellman, Beringshafvets Algflora; 50, 1889.
This species occurs in rather typical form in the collections of Messrs. Greely
and Snodgrass, but it also approaches at times the broader D. latifrons. A somewhat
more terete form is occasionally found in algae from various parts of Bering Sea, and
may be what Ruprecht has called Spinularia intermedia var. teretifolia in the Okhotsk
flora, and credited by him to St. Paul Island. (St. Lawrence Bay, and St. Lawrence
Island.)
Scytosiphon lomentarius Lyngb. J.G.Ag. Kjellman, Beringshafvets Algflora; 49, 1889.
Abundant in all the collections, and in excellent fruit. (Konyam Bay, Port
Clarence, Bering Island.)
Analipus fusiformis Kjellm. Kjellman, Beringshafvets Algflora; 49, pl. 7, f. 5-12, 1889.
There is a considerable quantity of this species in the collections brought back
by President Jordan. The material is in excellent fruit also, so that there can be no
doubt but that these specimens are of the same species as Kjellman’s. When old
and the tips of the upright fruiting’ portions are worn away, the plant looks very
much like a bunch of short eroded fronds of Scytosiphon lomentarius, but they are, of
course, provided with the characteristic basal layer, such as no Scytosiphon is known
to possess. This, however, is sometimes so inconspicuous that at first sight a
specimen might be passed over, when a thorough examination would reveal its
identity. All the specimens examined possessed fine unilocular sporangia, which is
unknown in Scytosiphon. ;
This locality extends the range of this species to the American side of the Bering
Sea. (Bering Island.)
Laminaria longipes Bory. Ruprecht, Tange Och.; 232,351, 1851. Kjellman, Beringshafvets Algflora,
43,1889. (Plate XCV.)
This species receives its present specific name from J.G. Agardh (1867, pp. 26, 27),
who, while uncertain, feels that it is the best thing to do under the circumstances.
Kjellman has followed him, referring the species back again to the genus Laminaria,
where it most certainly belongs if the plant which the writer has received and which
592 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
agrees thoroughly with the descriptions of Agardh and of Areschoug (1883), especially
with that of the latter, is the same as Kjellman’s. The plant was well known to
Ruprecht (1851, 232 and 351), who has given it two additional names, Laminaria
repens and Lessonia repens, while Agardh has referred it to the genus Arthrothamnus.
Our plant, however, is certainly not a member of this latter genus, for it lacks alto-
gether the characteristic auricles at the base of the blade; and the folds (at the base
of the blade) described. by Agardh may very likely be nothing more than the products
of imperfect drying. The plant has a most striking resemblance to Laminaria
sinclairii in habit, so much so, that it can not be told from certain forms of that
species until an investigation into the character and distribution of the muciferous
canals is made. Then it is seen that there are no canals at all in the stipe, while
those in the blade are large and frequent, as is shown in the figure of the cross
section on the plate attached to this article. The habit is also well represented in
the plate, and the rhizome shows especially well. It is the rhizome that gives it the
particular resemblance to Laminaria sinclairii, and is a characteristic shared with
it only by L. japonica and L. rodriquezii (cf. Bornet, 1888, p. 2), besides the species
mentioned. Bornet mentions (1. ¢., p. 2) also L. bongardiana, but the writer has not
seen any specimens of that species thus provided. Areschoug also includes this
last species among the rhizomatous Laminariae, but only as to the “forma subsessilis.”
LL. longipes was collected by Messrs. Greeley and Snodgrass, but the specimens are all
sterile. (Bering Island.)
Laminaria digitata is credited by Ruprecht to St. Paul, but it is uncertain just
which one of the digitate forms of modern writers he had before him (cf. also Kjell-
man, 1890, p. 170).
Agarum turneri P. and R. Ruprecht, Tange Och.; 244, 1851. Kjellman, Beringshafvets Algflora;
42, 1889.
A portion of a frond is present in the collection received from President Jordan
and Ruprecht mentions it as well from St. Paul Island. (Konyam Bay; St. Lawrence
Bay; St. Lawrence Island.) :
Thalassiophyllum clathrus (Gmel.) P.and R. Kjellman, Beringshafvets Algflora; 42, 1889.
Only two specimens of this magnificent plant are known to me from St. Paul
Island, one of which is in Herb. Eaton at Yale University and the other in Herb.
Farlow at Harvard University. They were both procured for Professor Eaton by the
Alaska Commercial Company in 1877. (Bering Island.)
Nereocystis luetkeana P. and R.
This species is unknown with certainty from the Bering Sea. Kjellmann does not
mention it nor does Ruprecht in the Ochotsk flora, but Dall (1875, p. 166) speaks of
the “ Bull-Head Kelp” at the Pribilof Islands, with the suggestion that it is Nereocystis.
It certainly extends as far north as Unalaska and may very likely range as far up as
the Pribilof group.
Alaria praelonga Kjellm.? Kjellman, Beringshafvets Algflora; 38, Pl. 4, 1889.
A few specimens of an Alaria were collected by Mr. Townsend in 1895, which
seem to belong to this species, although they have also the characters of A. angusta,
A. erispa, and even of A. lanceolata; in fact, it is very difficult for the writer to
determine how these four species differ essentially from one another. Ruprecht also
mentions an Alaria as occurring at St. Paul (1851, p. 360), but without referring the
forms to any now recognizable species. (Bering Island.)
ALGAE OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 593
Fucus platycarpus Thur. ?
A single specimen of Fucus exists in the Jordan collection and seems to the
writer to come nearer to the species noted above than to any other. Yet it does not
seem to be hermaphrodite, while F. platycarpus, usually plainly hermaphrodite, does:
seem at times to be dioecious. It certainly appears to be different from F. evanescens,
the only species known with certainty from Bering Sea.
RHODOPHYCEAE.
Porphyra laciniata, var. umbilicalis Ag.
The specimens referred to_this species are in the collection received from the
Albatross expedition of 1895. There are several of them, but none of them are in
fruit or show reproductive bodies of either kind. The fronds are conspicuously umbili-
cate, dark purple, monostromatic, with cells elongated perpendicularly to the surface
of the frond. In every way they are different from Diploderma variegatum Kjellm.
and agree exactly with the plate of C. Agardh (1828, Taf. 26), especially with figures
a,d, and e; for a zone, just within the margin in our plants, is extremely deliques
cent, and the cells thus loosened reproduce figure d exactly, as well as answer to the
description given in the text. No form like this has been seen on the California coast
by the writer, nor does Kjellman mention other than the species noted above, viz, D.
variegatum, from Bering Sea.
Iridaea laminarioides forma parvula Kjellm. Kjellman, Beringshafvets Algflora; 31, 1889.
A number of specimens of a very dwarf form of this common species of the west
coast of North America were found in the collections received from President Jordan,
and although they were much gelatinized on account of their stay in the formalin,
yet they still retained sufficient of their form and structure to be readily recognizable
as belonging to the particular form described by Kjellman. This form is not found
upon the California coast. Both cystocarpic and tetrasporic specimens are in the col-
lection from St. Paul. (Bering Island.)
Chondrus platynus (Ag.) J. Ag.? Kjellman, Beringshafvets Algflora; 32, 1889.
A considerable number of specimens of a Chondrus were collected by Messrs,
Greeley and Snodgrass and all are in cystocarpic condition. They answer fairly well
the description given for C. platynus in J.G. Agardh’s Species Algarum (1876, p. 178),
It is also the species reported by Kjellman from the northern part of the Bering Sea,
(Konyam Bay and Port Clarence.)
Gymnogongrus fastigiatus, var.crassior Rupr. Ruprecht, Tange Och. ; 326, 1851.
The only information regarding this plant comes from the reference quoted above
and what Schmitz (1893, p. 394) has to say of it in connection with Sterrocolax crassior.
It seems certainly allied to Ahnfeldtia plicata, but is, perhaps, distinct.
Callophyllis variegata (Bory) Kuetz? ‘Ruprecht, Tange Och.; 262, 1851.
Ruprecht says (1. c.) that a Callophyllis occurs at St. Paul Island which is near
to this species.
Rhodophyllis dichotoma (Lepech.) Gobi. Kjellman, Beringshafvets Algflora; 27, 1889.
Ciliaria fusca Rupr,, Tange Och.; 251, 1851.
Known to occur at St. Paul only through Ruprecht’s reference. (Bering Island.)
5947—PT 3——38
594 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS.
Ptilota asplenioides (Turn.) Ag. No. 82. Farlow, Anderson, and Eaton, Alg. Exsicc. Am. Bor., No. 82.
Kjellman, Beringshafvets Algflora; 32, 1889.
Plumaria asplenioides Rupr., Tange Och.; 232, 1851.
This largest, coarsest, and deepest-colored species of all the genus occurs in all
the collectious from St. Paul and is further credited to it by Ruprecht. It must be
abundant along its shores and constitute its most characteristic species. (Bering
Island.)
Ptilota pectinata (Gunn.) Kjellm. Kjellman, Beringshafvets Algflora; 32, 1889.
Specimens of this species occur in the collection made for Prof. D. C. Eaton by the
Alaska Commercial Company in 1877. (St. Lawrence Island.)
Ptilota filicina (Rupr.) J. Ag.
A few specimens of what seems to be this species occur both in the collections of
the Albatross and those received from President Jordan. It is not always easy to
tell this species from P. plumosa or P. serrata.
Odonthalia kamtschatica (Rupr.) J.Ag. Kjellman, Beringshafvets Algflora; 23, 1889.
Atomaria kamtschatica Rupr., Tange Och.; 214, 232, 1851.
Known to occur at St. Paul only through the reference in Ruprecht.
Rhodomela floccosa (Esp.) Ag. Kjellmann, Beringshafvets Algflora; 24, 1889.
The forms referred to this species from St. Paul are by no means near the type of
the species. They are very much more slender than the ordinary Californian form,
resembling FR. lycopodioides in this respect, but approaching R. larix in others, so that
the species as now understood and ranging from San Diego to Bering Island presents
an infinite variety of forms as regards coarseness or fineness and even as regards the
flattening of its branches, the character upon which its claim to specific rank princi-
pally rests. (Bering Island.)
Rhodomela larix (Turn.) Ag. Kjellman, Beringshafvets Algflora; 24, 1889.
Fuscaria lariz Ruprecht, Tange Och.; 219, 1851.
Known from St. Paul only through this reference of Ruprecht’s. (St. Lawrence
Island and Port Clarence.)
Nitophyllum ruprechtianum J. Ag.?
Two more or less imperfect specimens of a large Nitophyllum of the Botryoglossum
section, but provided. with neither cystocarps nor sori, probably belong here. In the
absence of any kind of reproductive bodies, however, it is impossible to tell with
certainty. They were collected by Messrs. Greeley and Snodgrass.
Nitophyllum ruthenicum (P. and R.) Kjellm. Kjellman, Beringshafvets Algflora; 25, Pl. I, f. 11,
12, 1889.
The specimens referred to this species were seen in Herb. Farlow at Harvard
University and were collected at St. Paul Island by Mr. White. They are young and
more or less incomplete plants; consequently they do not show the habit very well.
This is, however, quite variable, judging from Kjellman’s figures (1. ¢.). The speci-
mens of Mr. White are tetrasporie and have microscopic veins, at least at the base.
With the exception of the veins, they resemble very closely N. spectabile D. C. Eaton,
of the Californian coast. (Bering Island.)
Delesseria crassifolia Rupr. Ruprecht, Tange Och.; 232, 1851. Farlow, Proc. Amer. Acad., 21; 473
1886.
D. crassifolia is a large and apparently characteristic species of the Pribilof
ALGAE OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. 595
Islands, available to the writer in all three collections, viz, from the collection sent to
Professor Eaton in 1877 by the Alaska Commercial Company, by the Albatross expe-
dition of 1895, and also by a considerable number of specimens in the collection pro-
cured by President Jordan. It seems to the writer that the chief danger in connec-
tion with this species might possibly be in confusing it with D. middendorjit Rupr., as
the Greely and Snodgrass specimens are generally proliferate from the midrib and
often fasciculately so. The lateral nerves, however, are much more prominent than
seems to be the case in D. middendor fii.
Delesseria spinulosa (Rupr.) J. Ag.
D. beringiana, var. spinulosa Ruprecht, Tange Och.; 244, 1851.
Ruprecht’s reference is all that is known concerning the occurrence of this species
at St. Paul Island. It grows upon the blade of Agarum turneri.
Delesseria complanata Rupr. Ruprecht, Tange Och.; 245, 1851.
Grows on Ptilota asplenioides, at St. Paul Island, according to Ruprecht.
Delesseria juergensii J. Ag. Farlow, Proc. Amer. Acad., 21; 473, 1886.
Farlow says (1. c.) that this species occurs in the collections sent to Professor
. Eaton in 1877.
Constantinea rosa marina (Gmel.) P. and R. ‘Ruprecht, Tange Och.; 232, 1851. Kjellman, Bering-
shafvets Algflora; 30, 1889. ‘
This interesting form occurs from St. Paul Island, in the collection sent to Pro-
fessor Eaton. The specimens do not answer exactly to the description in J. Agardh’s
« Epicrisis,” but they do answer to Gmelin’s figure. (Bering Island.)
Amphiroa cretacea (P. and R.) Aresch. Kjellman, Beringshafvets Algflora; 20, 1889.
Although Dall (1875, p. 166) speaks of a Coralline zone about the islands, the
collections contain only few and imperfect specimens of these forms. Consequently
it has been impossible to give any satisfactory account of the species of this family.
The present determinations must be looked upon as unsatisfactory, but as the best at
present possible. Only two specimens of A. cretacea are available to the writer, and
these are both imperfect and sterile. (Port Clarence; St. Lawrence Island; Bering
Island.)
Arthrocardia frondescens (P. and R.) Aresch. Kjellman, Beringshafvets Algflora; 20, 1889.
Only two or three fragments are available, consequently the exact determination
rust remain in doubt. (Bering Island.)
Lithophyllum
Several specimens of a species of this genus occur on the specimens of Arthro-
cardia mentioned above, but they are all sterile.
Lithothamnion
Several specimens of this genus are predenis in the collection obtained by Presi-
dent Jordan, but they are young and sterile, so that no certain disposition can he made
of them. They grew upon pebbles.
UNIVERSILY OF CALIFORNIA,
Berkeley, Cal., December 9, 1898.
596 THE FUR SEALS OF THE PRIBILOF ISLANDS. .
\
EXPLANATION OF PLATE XCV.
A clump of plants of Laminaria longipes Bory about natural size and a transverse section through
the blade of one of the largest specimens, much magnified. This shows the shape, relative size, and
characteristic position of the large muciferous canals.
LIST OF WORKS REFERRED TO.
AGARDH, C.
1828, Icones Algarum Europearum. (Leipsic.)
AGARDH, J. G.
1867. De Laminarieis symbolis offert. (Lund’s Universitets Arsskrift, vol. 4.)
1876. Species, Genera et Ordines Algarum, vol. 3. Epicrisis Floridearum. (Leipsic. )
ARESCHOUG, J. E.
1883. Observationes Phycologicae. Particula quarta. De Laminariaceis nonnullis. (Acta Regiae
Societatis Upsaliensis, ser. 3, vol. 11.) '
BorneET, E. ‘
1888. Note sur une Nouvelle Esptce de Laminaire de la Méditerranée. (Bulletin de la Société
Botanique de France, vol. 35.)
Datu, W. H.
1875. Arctic Marine Vegetation. (Nature, vol. 12, p. 166.)
FaRLow, W.G.
1886. Notes on Arctic Algae; based principally on collections made at Ungava Bay by Mr. L. M.
Turner. (Proceedings of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences, vol. 21.)
Far.ow, W.G., ANDERSON, C. L., and Eaton, D.C.
1887-1889. Algae Americae-Borealis Exsiccatae, Fasc. 1-5. . (Boston.)
GMELIN, 8. G.
1768. Historia Fucorum. (St. Petersburg.)
Harvey, W.H.
1862. Notice of a Collection of Algae made on the Northwest Coast of North America, chiefly at
Vancouvers Island, by David Lyall. (Journal of the Proceedings of the Linnaean Society,
Botany, vol. 6.) ;
KsELLMAN, F. R.
1883. The Algae of the Arctic Sea. (Kongliga Svenska Vetenskaps-Akademiens Handlingar, vol.
20, No. 5.)
1889. Om Beringshafvets Algflora. (Kongliga Svenska Vetenskaps-Akademiens Handlingar, vol.
23, No. 8.)
1890. Ueber die Beziehungen der Flora des Bering-Meeres zu der des Ochotskischen Meeres.
(Botanisches Centralblatt, 41; 167-170, 198, 199.)
MERRIFIELD, Mary P.
1875. Arctic Marine Vegetation. (Nature, 12; 55-58.)
MERTENS, H.
1829, Ueber verschiedene Fucus Arten; und Ueber ein Excursion auf den Gipfel des Werstovoi bei
Neu-Archangel. (Linnaea, vol. 4.)
OxamuRaA, K.
1891a. Remarks on Some Algae from Hokkaido. (The Botanical Magazine of Tokyo, vol.5; fide
Ref. in La Nuova Notarisia, vol. 4, 1893. ) :
1891b. Algae from the Kuril Islands. (The Botanical Magazine of Tok . 5S i
Nuova Notarisia, Vol. 4, 1893.) E Seer see ners ae
PosTELs and RUPRECHT. =
1840. Illustrationes Algarum. (St. Petersburg.)
RvuPrEcHrT, F. J.
1848. Bemerkungen ueber den Bau und das Wachsthum einiger gros: :
oires de l’Academie de St. Petersburg, 6; 59-70, pl. i) eee or eee ee
1851. eros is Ochotskischen Meeres. (Dr. A. Th. Middendorff’s Sibirische Reise, Band 1,
eil 2.
1852. Neue oder unvolistaendige bekannte Pflanzen aus dem Noerdlichen Theiledes Stillen Oceans
(Mémoires de l’Academie de St. Petersburg, 7; 57-82, pl. 1-8.)
ScamiTz, F.
1893. Die Gattung Actinococcus. (Flora, 77; 367-418, pl. 7.)
PLATE XCV.
la]
en
jalsley
LAMINARIA LONGIPES.
Clump of plants, and cross section through a blade.
.
INDEX.
’ Tage. Page.
Acanthis linaria .........-..-.-- 355, 362, 364, 426 | aggregata, Styela ............-..---------- 514
Acarina of Pribilofs...........-...-....--- 553 | Agnes McDonald, schooner .......-...----. 294
Acanthodoris pilosa......--....-.-.------- 5dd | Agonide....- 0.2.2. 2.-202 ee eee eee eee 470
acaulis, Silene........-.-----------+. 561, 564, 584 | Agonus barkani_..........22.22-02-002 20- 470
accipiter, Podothecus......-..--.---.------ 474 cataphractus....-..-....----------.--- 474
Acerina vulgaris ............-----.-------- 118 ; Ahnfeldtia plicata ...... 2... 222. .2220.022- 593
acetosella, Rumex .........-....-.--.---- 571, 586 | aix, Pallasina ..............2---.--0.---- 472, 504
Achillea millefolium .........-...--..--- 568, 585 | Alaria angusta.............2.22.-----2---- 592
acipenserinus, Podothecus........-..-.---- 473 GPIBPRieissien cid Baas eeeixsageaemens Seo 592
Acmea apicina......--.-...-..----.--2-+-- 542 lanceolata -.......2.--.---------0-- eee 592
cumingi .........-.---.------ Ga sean 542 prelonga ............. Od nea, 592
WIAs sow whe eceiescnwermnemsawsesiss 542 | alascanus, Argyrosomus......-....-- 436, 495, 499
Patina sic. cosscseocecessen seco eemaee 544 Ammodytes ...... Fae Siti. eisareins a sisie Sia, _ 443
patina var. ochracea........----.------ 542 Sebastolobus........-...---.-2-2-----. 445
Delia: ieeenrecceeearssened sas eahemidiencts 54d | Xenochirus. ........--. esosasanaeedte 474
Sy baritiea:. ovcninn wees sewsrwesedeassics 542 | Alaska Commercial Company ...-.----.--. 327
testudinalis sccecsy sexisies sede cleeestese 542 | alaskana, Spisula..-......--...-...-...-.-- 543
Aconitum delphinifolium...........-.--- 562,584 | alaskanum, Hylocomium .................. 579
agrolepis, Macrourus ....-.----------++ 2-0 487 | alaskensis, Nectocrangon ......---.-...--.- 556
Acrybia flava .......---. 0022-02202 cee 542 Pagurus’... - 222. --aeeceed Siewaeed Sade 555
aculeata, Cetrarca ........-.-----.-----+-- 580 | alba, Cylichna .... 2.2.2.2. 0220-222 -eee eee 546
Deamarestias 2.2.0 0c ssc son cewaeswcse 591 | Albatross, steamer .-..--.....--.---....--- 62,
aculeatus, Gasterosteus.......-....--- r---- 444 265, 268, 272, 285, 304, 321, 323, 443, 485, 199, 503
acuticeps, Oxycottus.......-..-----..... 467, 468 | Albatross, short-tailed...........---....... 381
acuto-rostrata, Balenoptera.......-...---- 352 | Albatrossia pectoralis ........... sicrepeaicte hen 487
Admete couthouyi .-.........---...----. 545, 546 | albatrossis, Osmerus .........--.---.2..... 439
adunca, Herberta _......-- Ea tieveeumecaneas 580 | albicans, Brachythecium .................- 579
4Egialites californica.:.......-.--.---.---- 549 Weberd:: 2022-cceccncecce yess Aces 578
Aigialitis semipalmata .......-.. 355, 362, 363, 408 | albigularis, Myodes.................--.:.. 347
Migialitidw 2... 2.22... 2 0. eee eee eee 549 ) Albino seals. .-..-.2. 2-2. .2022. cece eee eee 96
olidia papillosa....-....- fe Seder cei isicicts dl | ALC Bin so cceaidie'es anit sisdeiemietnalamee ean Sree dee 364
esculapius, Alepisaurus ..... yeh asesisenns ase s 442 NOPOA) <2. ceca cece steaceeceeetcamenens 369
Plagyodus .........--0--e--0--- 2-0 eee 442 | alcicornis, Cladonia .........-.....--2.--.. 582
Africa, sealing off west coast ...........-.. BIS: VA TCU Socios -cubs eens <edae weed twase acest 864, 384
Agamodistomum .......-- sees deemed ees ees 117 distribution of in North America...... 369
Agamonema ....--.----- +--+ +----- eee eee 164 | Aleinw.... 2.202220 2. eee eee e eee eee ee 369
DiCOlOL ssaess ve ccs sce ssied ceeede eens 118 | Alectoria divergens .........-..... 2.2.2... 580
Agarum turneri.........-- Fae eee eet 592, 595 jubata, var. chalybeformis............ 580
Age attained by seals .-.....--.------.---- 51 |. thulensis...... 2.22.2. .2.02. 00022. eee 580
Ages of seals taken by the Dora Siewerd.. 306 | Alectrias alectrolophus.................... 482
\ agassizii, Liparis -.....--.-----------+-0--- 476 | alectrolophus, Alectrias ................... 482
Lycodalépis..........-----.------+e--- 50 | Alepisaurus escukapius....-..-.-.......... 442
Agchylostoma ....-------.-----------+---- 164 | aleutensis, Lyconectes..................... 484
duodenale .....,.----..2.----0-- -eeee 164 | aleutianus, Sebastodes .................. 445, 446
598
INDEX.
aleutica, Raja... mer
ct a aaa 435 amplus, Carpodacus....,..----- es
Poi neler Hinata cekGen RacemADees p 544 | ampullacea, Wolatdianpm. a saan eines oe
gr ae ea 363, 364 | Anaconda, schooner, seals taken........--- :
‘a : ee aoe | Aoulipun funtiormtis 00 ees ack
ded se bey oe See eeei ore einneess 461 | Anas bosch .. 355, 362, 363, 3
8 boschas .,-..--...-
pane ie: : ae oe sseteanises 69,61,00, 288 | penelope ceccs ase + ee ot
9 ise on the Dora Siewerd ..---.-.--- 566 | anapdilidifeliam, Bp ‘jobiunt. calico Niast =
exander, schooner.....-..-...-- 226 | Anarhich aa acai ae i
ee 22 rhichadide........-
eh uaacenerts nee ; gai veetouauae ear ASE
Alge of Pribilef lelands oc ascacweneced oes ie: oe nei en See, Le oe oa a
te Phippsia’ -:-.:00022220emexence 574 586 je Se oe atten eo ce
ijos ro Jk, eT COE : 2 Mab poesia cose pases 5
ie a i . Binsec seme, atec eemacer ees haeaeed= 208 | Anplutrdlepla MApHHe.. 2. so-2ce0cnne ae
ae oe MELA BBL | Aunylostorttie.. cc <scnvicnasoas abie anemones on
BIE oa etait 369 | Andr Se eee tbanae
rca een osace Villosa ......---
oe ee 1, 10, 48, 307,499 | Anemone richardsont.... .....<.0000+0<: ie
a unting in Southern Hemi- snyenillenis, Campane... 2c. : aneacans si
ee MWS 2.2504
Free pave eaee eae 307 | angusta, arte Sidean akan anroh ee EE a
i oe pane Sei gata ona csi taiee 369 | angastata, Glyocria ........+-. ssa acca 2 ier
ee 3i9 | angustifolinm, Eritrichiam,........ +... aie:
a ae sane ae dievaromiscne a hsl2 573, 586 | Aniko, schooner eee hititottens
, var. merriami-... 2-2-0220. 573,586 | Anisakie.................... 103, 106, 128, }
ee ced ed Saaiseedeer dali aaa ASS 435 | ae Rigas Coe wiaiaemana
picola, Buellia .....--. " Sherri Neate. Beloonen Tes Or 7
Vice io 393 | Anna Matilda, schooner, log OF -..+ <0... a
ee 565, 585 | Annie Algar, schooner log of eee tees bi
ee a re 575,586 | Annie Moore, snlooter Oe ates Fe
Lae eae ConNa iT 574, 586 | annulus, Borborus..... BN eae eee eee at
icing) init agar ain ania” BO. Wein HAGHE As, -<oeacenancuecen akc Se
7 Uae eninge oneagaca SI | Anoplarchas atropurpureus.. iso, 488
alternidentata, Tellina .--.-- ee ann _ i oe | peas Rieniaeta a - 855,96 32, 369
alternifolium, Chrysosplenium..-..-. -..- 566, 585 aid ee ee ee - - ae
altivelis, Sebastolobus ...........--.- “5 P 4 mee seossessssee setae senses sane coe
Agni ebennenMlemOF suuiycaaeh das. 255 a Jondam oo. sess eeees eee eeeee 511, 524 sa
Alto, edhonne 10g a8 nnn oon wenn 6.958 mutable II a
Winrwtualviotiica st cask cs caeoadanae 2 ; BOOSH woos eeeascecees cote eeeeeeee 8
ee ee 279 | apocarpa,Grimmia..................... pea pes
ee ee 548 | apterus, Tachinus ......................... oe
ee ae 279 | apthosa, Peltigera........................ ca
oe ee 524 | Arabia ambigua..................... 560.5
i aeRO tod, ABB | inaal aM. ees evan olan mae
aH ell j : : Se enta tcgte 511, 524,536 | Archistes ..._. : 4 Le aii a
ce eairaccpraue bass 528 | Archistes plumarius if ee aan eee Pa
IEA anc Rae aE 528,536 | Anser albifrons i: apne
ee ae ‘i Soe 527, 536 anserina, Potentilla ................. avin ps
ee ee 560, 564, 684 | Anthony, A.W....-.-. 0. 966 scence pee
tg ee ; iu Rh ey 542 | Anthus veneilvantions: Darwen et ii se pee 4
Ammodramossaniwihenss, 3, i Clk cer BB, 82, 868
i aes Seg ) Oiifdlee ee LL
Asnatasves WlapOnnitt cece scscveccucnce. ie oe Digehin i --cenipasowees sti ws 561
Hurcanmitewccau ones ital) ae DEED. enene acces serene speens cone eonace 264
Pe es se cir 443,498 | apicina, Acmma ..... < Nee carers: ci
sities, COMGUN wie ccavaue wees couscss. ey pate! vosteae ccna ee cecneetesaee tenes 60
ies ie : RiOMN ak til ee ie me
eelionds EMR tiniG, Nance 557 | arctica, Arenaria ete er oe ae a
Fein ate ret eaalaR anN 5 Calamagrostis .......0000.00000-0. ge
amplexifolius, Streptopus ........ eater 571 a Cetra cee canoe ss eater 580
TERS , 586 Deschampsia exxenitons... Poa
tree ee nee e wee 574, 586
INDEX. 599
Page. | Page.
artica, Claytonia ....-.....-2....222- 02-22. 565 | Arthrocardia frondescens............-.-.-- 595
POs scaccaawss secant cae acuisn sais . 574, 586 Arthrothamnus ...--.....2..222. 222222022 592
Salix ......+---------------+-+-.---- 571, 586 | arundinacea, Arctogrostis .............-..- 574
SaRICAVS. ccccscateswesscesaeuesece ses 546 |! arvense, Cerastium -.-.........222. 222.222. 565
Trientalis europwa.......----..----- 569, 585 Equisetum ....-....... ..222. 022-202 575, 586
arcticum, Bryum.......-...----.---------- 578 | Ascaride --....--....--.2 2222 eee -99, 101, 108
Chrysanthemum ....-...--....-. 560, 568, 585 | Ascaridia -...... 22.2222. -22. 02 e ee eee ee 106
Papaver nudicaule ...........-...----- 562 | Ascari@.csccwnsesenvcienne te secs oneccese ns 99, 103,
Psilopilum.........--...-22. 222-2 eeee 579 106, 107, 116, 117, 122, 124, 125, 161, 164
Sphagnum fimbricata ..............-.. 576 CUB! s joe seemetemeeeiee tole cicaiowcmins 106
arcticus, Ixodes .......-.---.------2--0---- 553 angulivalvis ........ 112, 121, 122, 123, 124, 126
RUDWS coe chccdaneleccsacd cise eeecias 565, 585 SDOUID-. <owasywoe Kaa ee eeN WER bin ood wees 106
‘Arctocephalus australis, rookery on Lobos bicolor ............. 101, 108, 109, 111, 188-142
ISIGNG cd cacetacetaecweienecnseensocs 274 Difdaicic ce oce cee eaged ences aiatie saad 105
philippii ..-... 2.2. 022..22-2.----.-.- 272, 273 bulbosa....... 2.2.2.2... 109, 110, 111, 112. 157
townsendi .............. 266, 269,270, 271,277, capsularia ...... 107, 116, 117, 119, 120, 138, 164
Arctogrostis arundinacea.....-...--------. 574 conocephalus ...........---- 127, 128, 130, 1382
latifolia ......-. 2-2. 22... - eee eee 574, 586 C6CIPIONE: cece sciaicec pase Shee meee Skee ss 100,
Arctophila effusa...-....25.2..2-222-22-- 574, 586 105, 107, 109-120, 138, 139, 144, 154, 157, 158
{UL Vil. Sonu cecceiae ts santeaasaar cane 574 delphing o.s.coccee cw ke eee 108, 120,
Arctoscopus japonicus. ........-.----.----- 479 121, 122, 123, 124, 125, 126, 159, 160, 162-163
Arcturus beringanus ........--..---------- 557 delphini gangetici......--.-...2.-2.... 162
PONE Bie 5 os ashinisle nucle eaiaee ies eeaees 565 GUQOUIS 2 .o2)26 anninies eeenee eesecs cone 147, 149
ARCH OA. oo sateeseeayeeminmecewicaracee 564, 585 Dussumierii ........2... 22222-22222. 103,
interpres ....--.-..---.- 355, 363, 370, 408, 409 | 108, 122, 123, 124, 125, 126, 127, 128, 161-162
macrocarpa ......--.---------+-- 561, 564, 584 Operlani. -..6:6 os seen adereawcecesaues 118
melanocephala .......-...--------. +++. 408 halicoris ......-.......--222-2--. 108, 147-151
MOPIMNC A yeasts gee see cesses see 368, 408, 412 Kiikenthalii ........ 107, 121, 122, 126, 144-146
peploides ..........2..-20226 206 560, 564, 584 lobulata ........-.-- 108, 122, 159-161, 162, 163
Arenariide: .22252 sssces see esses cases sess 408 Jumbricoides ......-.-----.-2224-2--- 1038, 104
arenosa, Lyonsia ......----..-.--.-.----- 543, 546 maritima .....-.-......2.222 22222222. 111
argenteum, Bryum .....,---.---- 02-22. eeee 578 osculata..........---...2-.. ‘100, 105, 106, 108,
Arpontinaied cowsdens aces seeee dese asceleees 440 109, 110, 112, 113, 120, 144, 147, 151-159, 160
Argentinide oc. ccieisiso'< os enix 2 u0is selsleorenews 439 patagonica........-......-2..-.- 107, 148-144
argus, Amaroucium.........--.-.---0+-+--- 524 phos) see seeeencestichcecteceeee- tac eae 105
Argyrocottus zanderi--.....---.---.-----.- 460 phocarum....-...-2... 2.022. .e2. eee 105
Argyrosomus alascanus....-....-.-.. 436, 495, 499 TYUN Bs e2ecetestwassnsicice 100, 108, 163, 164
BPbOd li oacd sede skewer coun teaeeoeieewced i 496 similis .-.use2vestees 108, 109, 110, 144, 146, 147
Ja TTOCER 2. 0c cena etentensaccnvencce 436 Simplex... cecceuean sus tk Ysee ew teenies 107, 111,
WUC DS) ois 2 crete pene cesteenismncnsad 495 | 112, 120-126, 127, 128, 130, 131,132, 134,
POPSONATTS -...-smmiawerteeansiscinne mand sens 499 - 138, 139, 142, 144, 145, 146, 161, 162, 163
pusillus........--.-----..------.---- 436,494 . spiculigera.................- bsie2 ce 112, 160
Armeria vulgaris..........-..-.--.-----. 568, 585 tubiferay. oo seceeescace cess Seer seen 105
Arnica unalaskensis........-...----. 561, 568, 585 . typica .. 102, 108, 116, 125, 126, 127-188, 161, 162
Arrival of bulls.........--.----.-2-.-+---- 43 | Ascidiz Composite ...-...-.-......002.-.. 511
OE COWS ici oi s:crcuaseceradiompemamieinanners 43 | Ascidia Simplices..............222...202.. 511
of 2-year old cows ......-.-..-.------. 44,46 | Ashmead, W.H., Hymenoptera of Pribilofs. 550
Arrivals, summary of...--..-----.--------- 56 | Asio accipitrinus...-........ 355, 362, 363, 364, 419
artedi, Argyrosomus. -...---.-..----------- 496 | Aspasia, corvette ..._...-.2--2 2222.2 ..e2ee. 314
Artediellus pacificus .......---2. 0.222.022. 454 | asper, Hexagrammos -....... 448, 449, 451, 452, 453
Artedius lateralis ........-.----.---------- 456 | aspera, Limanda .......-...-....22.2..222- 491
Artemisia globularia.........--.-.--..-. 561,568 | Asplenium filix-foemina -.._...-......... 575, 586
novegica, var. pacifica -.....-.-...... 568, 585 | asplenoides, Plumaria ..................... 594
richardsoniana...--..-----.----.---- 568, 585 | Aspidium filix-mas ..............2....... 575, 586
vulgaris Jeepers sshntye apa eyed BS eid Gaara ee 568, 585 VOD CHGS aise ascccsactee vx os ves ew ecm cece 575
Arteries, systemic .......---.---- +--+ ------ 14: spinulosum, var. dilatatum ........_. 575, 586
600 INDEX.
Page. Page.
Aspidophoroides bartoni ...........------- 475 | bartoni, Aspidophoroides ...-...-.---..---- 475
gunthert s..004. sssecseesasa was sae oes se 475 | Bartramia ithyphylla .......--.-...------- 577
INGLIS so2secee see ooo SR Seek ase 475 POMMTFOLMIG apoio oie) essa /e wis sca cw 'aiete viele ele 577
asplenioides, Ptilota....-. Bsus ahaa aoe ee 594,595 | bathybius, Histiobranchus ........-..--. 433, 435
Astarte borealis........--.--.--------+---- 546 | Bathyagonus nigripinnis ........-...-.---- 475
semisuleata ......-.---------- eee -eee 543 | Bathylagus borealis.......-....-.--------- 441
Aster sibiricus ........--.------.---- 561, 568, 585 | Bathymasteride ...-......-.-.------------ 479
Astrolytes fenestralis.........-...----.---- 456 | Bathymaster signatus..............------- 479
notospilotus <2 2205 ceases cee ves cee cenes 456 | Bean, Barton, A esos s22s 22 nes seen nesters 59
Astyris rosacea .......----- --.eseseeceeeee 544 | Bean, Dro Ti gcc cccessenames ceececdncces 360
Atheresthes stomias.....-....--...------ 488, 508 Paper DYsase sass waai doases esas es 429
atkana, Litorina..........-..----------+-- 544 | beani, Triglops......---.-.-.-.....-------- 455
Atomaria kamtschatica ....-............-- bO4 || Bear, Polar ice shins eden Seek gee decide. dads 354°
Atopogaster aurantiaca......-.--.---.-2.-.- 523 | Bela simplex 543
Atriplex palmeri ...........-.-----.------- 283 | behringianum, Epilobium ............--- 567, 585
atropurpureus, Anoplarchus..........-.. 482,483 | belliceps, Rocinella .......--..-..-..------ 557
Auklet, Paroquet....--.--..-.-..-...-... 358, 385 | bellidiflora, Cladonia........-..----...--.. 582
Crested iu.c2 conde geicel sedis cheeses tess 385 | bellidifolia, Cardamine.............. 561, 563, 584
Wheastcsasecaaseos Ye see eh emisaeeiess key 387 | Beluga leucas. (See Delphinapterus leucas.)
ATS fe cose stay hycrare civeis oe ac tage Geet oats 291 | benthami, Selinum -.....-.-.-.--..2....--- 567
aurantiaca, Atopogaster...........-...---- 523 | Bering Sea, sealing in........... 223, 224, 233, 308
aurantium, Polyclinum........-..-...-.- - 521) beringanus, Arcturus.......---..---..--.-- 557
aurea, Lampetra ..-...--... -.2.-2+.--+--- 434 | beringianum, Chrysosplenium .-..-.. 561, 566, 585
Australia, sealing off..-...--..-.--.---..-- 316 | beringensis, Margarita .................... 544
australis, Sigillina .........--.----...---.- 523 | beringi, Pleurotoma...........-...---.---- 543
AUMOPRIOR: 0.2 ngecce tkeeeledememndsas cosines 86, 87 | beringi Strombella........-.....22-..... 542, 543
Avifauna of the Pribilof Islands .......... 355 | Beringius frielei .............2.-2....--. 542, 543
avina, Spirontocaris ..........-...---..--- 557 | Berosus maculosus .....-...--.-...---. 200. 549
axillaris, Cottus --.-_.-... 2-22 -2222.--2--- 500.) Beryetd as: . 2.20 cccere cincccsgesdeawenesess 445
Myoxocephalus .-......---.....2---. 466,500 | Betsy, schooner ...._....2.2...202. 22.2222. 309
bachei, Helops ........---..--22.---------- 279 | Bibliography: :
Bachelors, herding ALG SS asia Sratorcaa ed Haaicenciewesieemis de 596
Stomachs of........---..2-2.2.-222-2-. Parasites: pec: ucesisectieeeevaeeden see 171
baden-powellii, Didymodon PUAN) coccawncncn seus eeaperkerecakecc 587
baeri, Buccinum cyaneum MUNA ba) 22 ascecse cece nenns weeds 536
Baird, SoF cccces.oe send secxesdee cee daeees 360, 427 | bicaudata, Perla ...........-2222.2222. 02.5 552
Paper; DY i dese seeaceeswan Sheed ac secs 428 | bicornis, Icelus ....-.......2.222220--. 0200 453
Balena rostrata. (See Balenoptera rostra- bicuspida, Synidotea_........2.. 02.22.02. 557
ta.) bifaria, Nebria ...-...-.... 0.020. .22220 eee 548
Balena sieboldii ........-...---..2-2-2.2-- 353 | bigelovii, Carex rigida ....-......22...2... 573
Balenoptera ..........--2. 22222222222 2-- 107 | biglumis, Juncus....-. 2.222.202. 222.02.. 571, 586
Balenoptera acuto rostrata ..........-..-. 352 | bilineata, Lepidopsetta -................ 491, 508
davidsoni ......-.-. 22222202222. cece eee 352 | bilobus, Histiocottus..............-... 2... 468°
rostrata ......---....-...--- 121, 122, 124,126 | binata, Pinus insignis var................. 283
Sibbaldil ...5 5220. -geis. see Wiehe ceecwees TOY) Bind sis. es cact cok amass cemernlacclaidy Seles 299, 301
VOlIORE: ..2.cccuee sod cece seis adh views 352 Of Guadalupe Island................ 265, 278
Banke, Nathan .......... 2200-00000. -e. 280 Of Pribilof Islands ................. 355,373
Bannister, H. M., paper by...--....-....-.. 428 Additions to North American fauna.... 361
barbata, Festuca rubra ............---..... 574 Annotated list ...-.. 022.200.0020 20222. 373
Pallasina ..-.-.-22-2. 2.2.2 ee eee 471 Breeding of species........--.. 2.2.2... 862
Spirontocaris ........2.2...222.22.2... 556 Check list of........222...0020 2220020. 355
barbatus Syphagonus ........--........... 504 Geographical distribution............. 363
barbulifer, Rhinoliparis.......-........... 478 Migration.........222. 200022022222 222e 369
barkani, Agonus .........-2...-22..-2..2-- 470 Rare specimens -....-...-.....22...... 361
Barren cows ..-.....--2. .e2eee eee eee eee ee 49, 50 Stomach contents ........._. ict ie 360
Barrett-Hamilton .........2..2..22...22-.. 62, 89 SEY POS: oe scavarcccmsm aces carci owas e- 361
INDEX. : 601
Page. Page.
Birds and seals........-...--.. 2-2 e000 eens 295 | Botrychium lunaria..............---...- 575, 586
BUPU oo co evecare ncicucdeneeacicas 43, 47, 55, 56,57 | Botryoglossum..........2...000.---02----- 594
bison, Enophrys .........-.. 2-2. ..00--+4-- 458 | Bowhead, schooner, log of. .......... 255, 256, 257
bispinosus, Gasterosteus ......-.....-.---- 444 | Bowhead whale, ..---....... 22.00. -e00 2-25) 352
bistorta, Polygonum .......-..---.-..--. 570, 586 | brachycarpa, Webera polymorpha......... 578
bistortoides, Polygonum ...-.........-.--. 570 | brachydasyclada, Sphagnam microphyllum
Biting, cause of deaths in pups...-...----- 89 PCH OP G1 ois oe seiaiaien sce miea ciesweeeseaioese 576
plandum, Cardium ..........-.-.0.--2.---- 543 | Brachythecium albicans. .................. 579
Blennicottus globiceps ..--....--..-------- 467 | brachyneuron, Bryum.......---.........+- 578
é BISHRHA RS jscione wines osomucmtad cece eases 479 | Brachyopsis rostratus...-......-..-.---- 470, 471
Blennius dolichogaster ..........-..--..--. 482 segaliensis .... .- Tins aratetaieie is eieomaecs sae aeeiars 471
polyactocephalus..............-2..--.- 479 | Brachyramphus craveri ................-+- 369
BNI Ae wesc cee Loe ede ete 480, 481 hypoleucus 369
Blenniophidium petropauli ......-.....---- 480 MAGGGZI ce cece acces aca tteccecnen 369
Blepharoptera pectinator........-.....---. 552 marmoratus 369
Blepsias cirrhosus.......---..----.----.-++ 468 | Brachythecium rivulare...............---- 579
ventricosts ......---..------------ eee 457 | bracteata, Saxifraga ............---.. 560, 566, 585
Blindness .......---- 02-22 eee eee ee neces 95 | Brain of Callorhinus ursinus .............. 23-27
Blind: PUPS. ccisecedaueoersswisaees bi acarsecieme 87, 95 Comparative tables ..........--..--... 40
Blood, effect on seals ..........---.---. +--+ 71 OF YSN cocniaa new ae satin smdes weenie 37
in Uncinariated pups .-...--......---- 78 Of Monachus tropicalis ............... 35
Blaerbacks ccciac tebe see cece sateseme ses 436 Of Phoea .... 2.0... 22002002 e eee ee eee 38, 39
Blue {OX ssecesweseee esse dec cdeeeceas 339, 340, 348 Of Phoca vitulina..............2...... 27
Breeding’ sesescesceesnessdence sae nnes 342 Of Bea NON. w.c0 ec ccssasecsoteaeeenae 35
Catel: scscss secees ceeaweseecesiecaeces 343 Of Ursus americanus.................- 30, 38
Feeding s-sase02220esseasensececce wae 342 Of Ursus maritimus....-............-- 37
Killing of...--..-----.--- a piernisiereties 341 Of Zalophus californianus........----. 31, 39
Bogoslovius clarki -........-..-----.------ 487 | Branchipus sp ...--..-.2...---2. 0-202. aces 557
firniisquamis -...--.-..-... 0220. ---0-- 488 ||: Brandegee, T.S ....-...---.----- eee eee ee 280
Boltenia elegans .......--.-------------- 511,518 | Branding, experiments in ........... 325, 328, 337
Bombus borealis .....-....---. 0+ ---2 2-200 550 | Instruments used .....,-........ 326, 329, 333
@OOUS: «on ieinciemsesactegue seemmescencs 550 Marks used ....... 2.202. 0220 eee eee 326
Bombylius major........-.---. +--+ --e5-60- 551 Methods swvsvaseerien da ccietccsiecea aces 326
pbongardiana, Laminaria ........-----.---.- 592 PUPS fOr ce eeeweerce ee ciicie ak inc 326, 335, 338
Bor Dovidses scennc saison sd seneneregecseeacies 552 Seals branded........---....--...-0008 338
Borborus annulus ......-.-.-.-------.----- 552 Wounds from .............-------..- 327, 526
boreale, Polytrictum ........---. ..-----+-- 579 | brandtii, Pagurus ....-....--..-........... 555
borealis, Astarte ....-...-.-.-.-2-..--26--- 546 Schizoplax. ......2.....--2..---.-220-. 544
Bathylagus 020. s2800000 sencmaciecees 441 | Branta canadensis minima ...... 355, 362, 363, 381
BOmbu oe aiciccc ceca cists temcrcssisicice cn 550 | Breeding of blue fox..-.....-...-....--0-- 8342
Hierochloa . a Srchdi cn cibpoteibinesh eeraie tonnes tates 573, 586 | Breeding habits of seals................2.- 43
Teams Je ciceccehacacmermngnonamcnses 454 | Brenda, schooner, log of ...-........ sive 259, 308
MALY Buc occas thae titea dane marnmanunae beater 282 | brevipes, Lithodes ...-...... 2.2.0. .2.- 0005 555
Pane slUS .:i52cticceeaemessienceaseasace 557 TY COd 68 a.aicesisieis crerswew oeveeseetecs 484
Stellariass ccc eicecnstcacanseaceamesen 564, 584 | breweri, Cardamine ...-.....--............ 564
POPS Obais, ce ssicieiain easels e out etsiaiersraisomasemeeicras 353 | British Columbia vessels, catch of ......... 261
,~» Venerieardia ...........----- -2---eeee 543 | Brodiaea capitata ...-..........00...--00.. 283
Boreogadus saida ......-.-2..---..0----5 487,506 | Bryostemma polyactocephalum ..._........ 479
Borges, James.....-.-------2200- 022-22 eeee 270 | Bruises, cause of death in pups ............ 86
Bothriocephalide ..........-.-.--------- 100, 167 | brunnea, Maynea.......-....-2.. 202. .00006 485
Bothriocephaling ..........-.-----..------ 167 Pannaria ......-...0222-0..200022220.. 581
Bothriocephalus .........-------- 99, 100, 103, 167 | Bryant, Captain................. Soe Scotts 43,98
TATU Re cisca ue asieeseaiminienecsisinans acess weimicisis 167 | Bryant, W.E...--. eee eee eee ee ee eee 266
BP doe meee esistiancieceens ascieic mee Seteeieiaiete 168 | bryoporus, Spratelloides..........2...2.... 435
Bothrocara mollis. .....--------- +--+ se-ee- 485 | Bryostemma polyactocephalus as fone for
pusilla.... 2... cece nee nee cece ecewee aces 485 MUITCS....-.-...0- Siclmsieiwtsleiewiee ees 391
602 INDEX.
Page. Page.
Bryum arcticum .....-..-.---------.------ 578 | Callorhinus curilensis ....-..-.--.--------- 2
ATFENFOUM 5.050 os6% se cz eeew cece dee es 578 ursinus .--.---.-.------ 2,21, 103, 109, 165, 553
brachyneuron .......---.-----+--------- 578 | Callotaria ursina ....-..------.----.------ 350
erythrophyllum .......----.----..----- 578 | callyodon, Neoliparis ....-....---.-------- 475
fallax coos oe cdees ae eeen taee eee oes 578 | Calamagrostis artica ....-.-.---.-----.---- 574
PONS MewGasen ae lah ee she ieee 578 deschampsoides ......--------------- 574, 584
WClNAUM ssemed var css deere eemwedeies 578 purpurascens ....----.----.---- +--+. 574, 586
IPCUSTTO ee onecwaes = shiaweld wamsscses ss 578 | Calosoma semilwve.....-....---..--------- 279
obtusifolium ....-...---.---.+.-.------ 578 | calurus, Buteo borealis. ..............---.- 278
Pend Ulam hse. soe weseuiivenwe ecco we 578 | calycantha, Stellaria........-...-.-.-.---- 564
Bubonide .........-..-------2-.---------- 419 | Campanula lasiocarpa. -...--.....--- 561, 568, 585
Buceinid @ yee eck pzkicee see ecesedeneea sess 542 UNI MOTA a oes. acti eee se eee ee ees "568, 585
Buce imum asc,sacjeosee see cies ves eee geese ewes 540 | camphorata, Franseria ......---.---.------ 282
Placiale ecco css ose g-cisee eee sees 543 | Camphylopus schimperi ...--..----.-.----- 576
cyaneum y. morchianum ......---.---- 543 | camtschatica, Spirontocaris ..........-..-- 557
cyaneum V. baeri.........--.---.------ 543 | camtschaticus, Entosphenus..----.....---- 434
AisherianuM, «2eciac.022e seco neecienine 542,543 | canaliculatus, Icelus.....-.--..-..-------- 453
plectrum: ¢.-246e2e¢ 2 escee se acueeeewesia 546 | cancellatus, Leptochiton .-......---.------ 544
POlALC cece ig a2 Satsociowienits oe seeoeeneee 545, 546 | Candlefish ...-..-.--.---2--2----ee eee eee 439
TONNE. oa decop saci ome Derbereeeene 543, 545, 546 | canina, Peltigera........--..--.-.----.---- 581
Buddington, Capt. Jas. W ...---- 308, 312, 314, 315 | capitata, Brodiwa..-.-....-.2..-2---.-.---- 283
Buellia alpicola......-....--..-----.-+--+- 583 Valeriana........--..-..-..- 561, 567,575, 585
geographica .....-...--.-------------- 583 | capree, Tridymus........----...---..+---- 550
SDo (2) score os tea tecadumetelemamennads 588). Caps dee: cuicnie.c cere scarsewte-e este ate wtaye oclo lei 552
Bulls, fighting among ......-.---..---..--- AA |) Capatlaria.. wisn: cue 2 occ sees seen a enc seein 103
GUA. cceaenasuenie ware ceesewes eases aes ©) Carabidas: - 20.08 se me as ces ecclesia s 548
violence to cows ..---..----------.--+- 90 | Carabus truncaticollis .-.--............... 548
VWOUNE scscccccresncceccmercs sa tnenityee 45 | carbonaria, Nebria ..........-.------.----. 5418
Burke and Farwell...... « idles cease 270 | Cardamine bellidifolia..-............ 561, 563, 584
Buteo borealis calurus -.........------.--- 278 DEOWOL. acca ceciems-snnisiie a skier SleiereSio 564
Cactus goodrichii ...............-.-.------ 282 DITEOGA s socccm i esumenr veces oes al aelielas 564
cesar, Lucilia.......-----.-------- eeeeetas 280 pratensis ..........-22. 22222. -2222-- 563, 584
CBSA POA). jecdecc ed aane une ete ees esem 574, 586 Umbelaba soe: towe cekacse ieee ateoe she 563, 584
exspitosus, Ranunculus trichophyllus....-. 562 | Cardium blandum....-.............-....-- 543
Cadlina pacifica.........--....--2.+--.---- 544 COCOP MINE opie seid sioew see stig Ramen 546
Calcarius lapponicus alascensis ............ 355, islandicum........ winnie osiaeSigiere oe 543, 545, 546
361, 362, 363, 422, 431 MUG oo oc one eeeee become ave seis 543
Calico:salmon:s «sc eeseceeuens oudeewess some 436 | Careproctus colletti...............-2...--. 478
Calidris arenaria............-...---..----. 370 CClONOS {22 2c520 02 deine e cess teen ls Gents 478
californica, Agialites ...... See peeeey yeeRS 549 gelatinosus ......... 2.22220. 02222222-- 475
AMNATS stals's -wpcice sicels Sasioeerataen areas 279 melanurus ..-. 222-22. 2.0.-02220222 200+ AT
ETN VEO ixia's clas sivieisicree dete bee duecatndes 282 OSLON LUM: 6s isos a cesescacess sens ooiee cele 478
Mat ptusas. sis siete coders ae seca: sues 279 PHASM A). asisis2 ose desde neces secs ate 478
Mitabilis:c seca sisns 2 22 pacew aceon eae s 283 SLMUS) ieee cetac ceca ee seRe ATT
POrityle.cc2secccc ors ssinsers: dete dates 283 spectrum .... 2.2.22. 22. eee eee wee 478
Calliergon cordifolium.........-..-...-..- 579 | Carex cryptocarpa ............-2....---- 573, 586
Calliphora obsceena.......-.-.------------ 551 PMOMMNT -2.2\ 05's ceased wok cokes ene 572, 586
VOMMLOFIAs siscis sce esecaisincccie esisicinn aici s 280 hematolepis ....-......22. 0.222222 e eee 573
Callilepsis insularis.........-22..2-22..2.. 279 Jagopina.......2...... eennibecselsie Save 572, 586
PlUtO acca a cmcetereds yesees gaesy see 279 lagopina, var. longisquama ........... - 572
Callophyllis variegata.......-..-.......--- 593 WeioCar pas ....0.h5.0/ ccc seeicieis cs se caus 572, 586
callorhina, Strombella...........-.-..--- 542, 543 Himiualai sic cisca-cnwe see iment: ats nie sheen 572, 573
callorhini, Hematopinus...-.............. 553 macrochwta...... 2.2222. .222 ee eee eee 573, 586
Therobromus........---..---2.---222-- 440 macrochxta, var.subrigida............ 578
Callorhinus......-....-..222...-2+-- 2, 39, 103, 107 membranopacta...--......-.-..-.--- 578, 586
alascanus ...-...2.. 2. eee eee Sisieie(eis: eio'ete 2,4 micropoda ............ Sisjaicictet sts eiciets tase 572
INDEX. 603
Page. Page.
Carex norvegica .......----....--2+---+- 572, 586 | Charadriidw .-.. 2.2. ..-22. 20 le eee eee eee 407
POdocarpas .. 2.22. kee nee cee eee ene 573 | Charadrius dominicus fulvus ............-. 355,
pribylovensis ......-....---...---.---- 572 361, 363, 370, 407
PYTOMALCH «22:6. ce peicie ares wee Sinietic eis cinco 572 PUVA). s)nicd vs stad ectienamacrnaccce 361-
PAPIGOP A. 5o,2c o:ejsinicss sissies ss eininlc wieiwininin 573, 586 | Chase, George W., seals killed by ........ 269, 270
rigida bigelovii .......---...---.------ 573 | Check list of the birds ............-...--.- 355
salina ........ cmieSamed Meceen cmon 573, 586 | cheiragonus, Telmessus....-...........--.. 555
salina, subsp. cuspidata, var. hamato- Chenopodium murale.....-..-.-....--- ieeew 288
4) AGPIGS.2t vdasss ee neatecssekcstieee st 573 , Chile, sealing off coast of......:......--. 307, 311
Sa RAb isso 220132 2ocerhecen ce oevaeeeses 578, 586 | Chioncecetes opilio ..........-.-.-.-.------ 555
vulgaris ............---2--+ ects 572, 586 | chippewa, Colias...............22..2------ 550
vulgaris var. hyperborea ........-.--.- 572 | Chirolopus japonicus..-..........--...---- 479
Carlotta Cox, schooner ....-.....---.------ 297 | Chiropsis nebulosus................-.----- 448
Caroline, schooner .....-...---.---------+--+ 223 | Chirus hexagrammus..-.....-.--.-.-------- 453
Carpodacus amplus.........--...----.----- 278 OFAN AGUS pci oo is Ss sce Voce sce sesenece 449.
Carroll, Dri Jed wis-nnsg stew eeex oe cere ese 49 trigrammus ......---.----------------- 448
cataphractus, Agonus .....-..--- saeeeeeenn 474 | chirus, Xiphistes.-.............--22--.-.-- 482
Gasterosteus -.....---.-------- »- 443, 444, 498 | Chitonide .---............. Be cite rerb dae oneie neta 542
Catherine, schooner .........---..----.---- 316 | Chlorophycew .......-..-.--2-2-----2------ 590
Catostomide....... oaks od eee ieee ene eee 435 | Chondrus platynus.....-.-.--..----.------ 593
Catostomus catostomus......--..---- s.---. 485 | Chrysanthemum arcticum -.......... 560, 568, 585
caurinus, Sebastodes ...... - ich anne eet 445 | chrysis, Succinea...............222-.-2-20- 542
cavifrons, Hemitripterus -.......-.---.-.-- 453 | Chrysodomus ...-....--.-.2--..-2--.------ 540
C. D. Rand, schooner. ........--.----..---+- 289 for ficatus cxcneesxcccs «ten eoenecenenery 543
Centaurea melitensis .-....--.----.-------- 283 (var.?) communis ..--.. ----.-----.--- 543
Centronotus pictus......-.-- raiceieintnere at erase 481 insularis ..... 2 tiReM ceeeoeeeawewae 542, 548
-céphalus, Paraliparis --..........---.------ 479 liratus....- oh we skbkew sieehmenssoneaes 543
Cepphus columba.......-... 355, 362, 363, 369, 389 | Chrysomela subsulcata.......-..--.-...---- 549
TY lO rccidetageadecusicies Soeeny sane eete 369 | Chrysomelidw ........---..-..---2-+---, 425, 549
Mand bul asjaee chee Gee ed cise eae 364, 369 | Chrysosplenium alternifolium ....... 566,567; 585
Cerastium alpinum.....-..---...-------- 565, 585 beringianum ...........-....-- . 561, 566, 568
ANVONSO sg cacsaiesceiewieeenikeoteneneees 565 tetrandrum .....22 2222-22222 eee eee ee 567
Ceratocottus diceraus...............-.-. 458,459 | Chum salmon ...--..........--...----.---- 43
TU CABL scipioraiecicinleintcig wieisininie siamis staemmatcaare 459 | chrysantha, Saxifraga.........-.-----.---. 566
Ceratodon conicus .-..-.---.---------+---+ 576 | cicutarium, Erodium ......-...-.---..----- 282
_ heterophylla ......-.-------------- +--+ 576 | Ciliaria fusca .......-........----.-------- 593
purpureus ...........-- wee aheoebease 576 | ciliatus, Epinephelus ............--.-.-..-. 446
Cercyon lateralis .........--..-----.---+-- , 549 Sebastodes........- ra piciwretaccnacenimevetnararie 2447
Cerorhinca monocerata .......----.-------- 369 | cinereus, Macrourus.............---.------ 487
Cetraria aculeata ...----.-.--..----+-+--+- 580 | Cingula martyni ----.......--2-..----.---- 542
arctica 580 | circinata, Pleurotoma ....-..-.-.-.-..----- 543
cucullata ...--2. 222.022. eee e ee eee 580 | Circulation ................ 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18
fahlunensis ...-..-..2-..---- iia eiagelsiaiere 580 | cirrhosus, Blepsias ...........----...-.---- 468
ISLA O ICS aviaecccmicnc.creccie nswwaaaecm ce 580 | Cladonia alcicornis......-.--..-2---..----5 582
islandica var. delisoei ..----..-.-..---- 580 bellidiflora...--..--.---.-..220-----2-. 582
Jacunosa ...-.------------------------- 580 cornucopioides .......---.-2---..-2.65- 582
PUM ALIG 55). seco eres ay aniaie be eieinieinie Gee nteraisianaie 580 decorticata ...-...---2. 2.222. 0-2- eee 582
Chetomorpha melagonium var. typica..... 590 degenerans .........-.-22.2225-.-2--.- 582
Chalcidide .......-.------------ +20 eee eee 550 AM DiICAtH:- no ce. sesinda noose eeeenedis 583
chaleogramma, Theragra..-....-..------ -486, 507 furcata ....-..--... Saisie da ssoe thee AeA 583
Chalinura....-..---------- pmimeseee awe cwibiate 487 furcata, var. racemosa .......--.--.-.-- 582
challengeri, Macdonaldia....-..-.---.----- 443 furcata, var. subulatg -...........-.0-- 582
chalybaeformis, Alectoria jubata ......--.. 580 gracilis, var. elongata ...-...-.....-... 581
chamaemorus, Rubus..-.----.-------- 560, 565, 585 papillaria .......-2...000. see e ee eee eee 583
chamissonis, Eritrichius......------- 561, 569, 585 pyXidata...... 020... eee eee eee eee 582
Chauliodontidm.....-----.--0-2- ence ee eeee © A4L rangiferina .....-......0..2.2+ sees. 582, 583
604 INDEX.
Page. Page.
Cladonia rangiferina, var. alpestris ..-..--- 582 | complanata, Delesseria.....----.---------- 595
rangiferina, var. sylvatica ............- 582 | Comsomyia macellaria ...-..--..---------- 280
uncinalis, var. turgescens ...-...------- 582 | concentrica, Lepeta ........-.------------- 542
cladinoides, Pycnothalia..............----- 583 | concolor, Lycodes .......----.----.---- +--+ 484
Cladophora mertensii-..........----.------ 590 | Condition of seals taken by Dora Siewerd.. 304
Clark, George A .. 2, 45, 47, 59, 66, 69, 73, 89, 325, 339 | Conferva mertensii.-.....-....------------ 590
clarki, Bogoslovius ......-----.-----+------- 487 | confervoides, Ranunculus trichophyllus..... 562
Salmo...........- ORE ree 437 | confragossus, Pagurus..--..--.--------+--- 555
clathrus, Thalassiophyllum..............-- 592 | conicus, Ceratodon.....-.-.--.------------ 576
clausa, Natica ..-.-..----..-----.+-+- 542, 544,546 | Conklin, W.A. ....---...------------ eee eee 64
Clava, Styela s225 06 ess0- see seeececcencees 517 | Conocephalidw .............-----+----+-+-- 128
clavatum, Epilobium ........------.----- 567,585 | Conocephalus.......---------------- 102, 103, 128
claviger, Enophrys ...--..--.-...-+-+------ 458 typicus..........-.- 103, 127, 128, 129, 132, 161
Claytonia arctica ........---.------------ . 565 | consobrinus, Pipilo..........--.-.----..--- 278
sarmentosa .......----.--------- 561, 565, 585 | Constantinea rosa marina ........--------- 595
Clitocybe cyathiformis .................---- 583 | constellatus, Hexagrammos...-. Sas ateiaialerane 451
diatreta....-...----...-.- eiladsiidnaeaien 583 | Conulus fulvus:.........-.-..---.----.---- 544
VROC ALB soe -ecee- sere enicine ateeeeeeeteiess 3 583 | Copper Island, deaths of pups on......-... 88
Clap ea eda cicscccjsjsjnis aia veiont oer ye eee see Soee 103 | Coptis trifolia ...........-.-....---- 561, 562, 589
Pallas. ss.icis Aas) se scis wesc wees Sake ecciee 435 | Copulation..-.-..--..-------------------- 55, 189
Clupeid@: «..2- 24 econ secisas Seece we ese sees 435 | Coquillett, D. W., Diptera of Pribilofs...... 550
clupeiformis, Coregonus ....-.-....---- +--+ 436 | corallina, Stellaria borealis .......-...----. 564
Clymenia. (See Prodelphinus. ) coralloides, Gymnomitrium............---. 580
coarctatus, Hyas .....-.----.--22 2-2 - eeee ee 555 Stereocaulon -..-..-..-..2-.----..--- 582, 583
coccineus, Lycodes .......---...-.--.------ 485 | cordifolium, Calliergon ..-......-...+....-- 579
Cocos TSAI icc cciecioe amen eeasirceeecios 268 | Cordyluridse ....--.-. 22-2 2222 oes eee ee eee 551
COCCY BES: ons sole sain cee wisia vie cree erate 419 | Coregonus clupeiformis.................--. 436
Cochlearia officinalis..............-.-.---- 560 Kkennicottl .... 222 scsencceee sees weds 435, 494
spathulata ....--...-.-..-------------- 563 NOON : 2.22. c-- 5402s dee aad aigeemeuaase 494
Coclops frigida........--...-.--.----..---. 552 quadrilateralis .......... 0.2.22. ..2226 436
Codfish 2.ce sires cians: tin. caicciesinsimee tiie epee 62 | coriacea, Velutina...............-....---.- 542
Celoplureum gmelini ....---..-.--...--- 567,585 | Cormorant, Red-faced ........-.......... 359, 373
Celotaxis muricata --...........--..--.-- - 279 | Cornus succica..............-2-2 222 ---- 567, 585
punctulata.....-.. 020.2222 -2 2. eee eee 279 unalaskensis ..............2202---2---- 567
Coinde; J. Peau: cases gece seeerseusweeseneas 360 | cornubica, Lamna..........-2..222-2...... 484
paper by ..-...-.---. icine see kee eemmete 428 | cornucopioides, Cladonia .......-........-. 582
Colaptes rufipileus ..........--..--....---- 278 | Cortinarius .......... 2-00-0222 22 0022 eee eee 584
Colaspidea cuprescens. ..........---.----.- 279 | Corwin, schooner........... 2222-22. 022-05 93, 226
Coleopter tise se ace stk eae cloingictiseanesddessss 547 | Corydalis pauciflora...................-- 563, 584
Colias chippewa.-........--..---.--2..--+-- 650 | Cottidee wicciceee ose ee cies cen sce ecceaccece 453
heela ..---..--..--.----------.----.--. 550 | Cottus aleuticus .... 2.222.222.0200 022 222s 461
paleno 530 PATI sooo 2ia sii elersareancwmaaacnces 500
colletti, Careproctus ........-.-. 22-22-22. 478 decastrensis. ......-..2222. 220222022002 463
Color of fur seals........-....2-2 222.022. 2 MoM eo ioe sa Baas acasaeiwcte xeric 462
of manatee (Rhytina).......... Sse Gree ale 183 | marmoratus, ...-.. 22.22. 022. cece eee 463
changes in seals....-....-.-.---.-.---. 4,5 mertensii .--2... 002.0 c ce eee 463, 466
Colymbus holbeellii ..--. Pere 355, 361, 363, 383 MUNUNGUB) oes tgc ones vaes Mee caine wane ccie 461
Comarum palustre ...........--.22-.-+-- 566, 585 MUU OT sa ereeatSifa sina tie ives nayeneee ieee bs 463
Comer, George ..........-.-..-.. 312, 314, 315, 316 MIVOSUB sewer asic Sc isiccimnsinacuunsccecccs ABI
comosa, Saxifraga stellaris.....-...... 566, 585 platycephalus.....................-... 463
Commander Islands .......-......-...--.-- 545 polyacanthocephalus.................. 462
Commander Islands mollusks.....-.-..-.-- 544 quadricornis ....................---0-e 502
commodus, Piliscus -.....-......---....- .. = «B44 SCOTPiuS .... 222-2. eee eee eee eee ee 462
communis, Chrysodomus ..............--.. 543 teniopterus.........-.......--...... 462, 467
Crangon ..-.-- .----- eee ee nee eee e eee 556 trachurus .......22..22-2. 222. cece eee 457
Phocena.....--.---- 22 ee eee e ee oe 353 | Coues, Dr. Elliott .-......0. 00000... c0c00e 360
INDEX. 605
Page. Page.
Coues, Dr. Elliott, papers by...-....--..- 428,429 | Curlew, Hudsonian.................... 2-6 407
Count of seals ......-.--...--2 2-2. eee eee 43 | cuspidata, Ramalina ...................... 580
Counting of sexes.............-. 0-2-2256 302 | Cyanophycew..............-.-.22-202--.-. 590
couthouyi, Admete ..........---..--..-.- 545, 546 | cyathiformis, Clitocybe................... 583
Cows, average number in harems .......... 53 | Cyclorrhynchus psittaculus -............-. 355,
DBETOM 2 sicisreteakieccre<d etree amicaaiccborcee 45, 50 362, 363, a 381, 385, 431
WERUC Od sae sists seid siageaioe apomsientiiei serie 328, 338 | Cyclopterichthys ° ventricosus. . epee 475
causes of death -...-.-..----..-..----- 91 | Cyclopterida ..-... 2.2.2.2... 22.2.2 eee 475
impregnated Siuiehapardrctticesae Recinuceny Samees 44 | Cyclopteroides gyrinops...............--.. 475
landing of ...-..-...-----.----- 2+ 52, 56,57 | cyclopus, Neoliparis..........-....-------- 476
NUTSING.... 2.2.22... 2.2022 ee ee ---- eee. 69,73 | cyclostigma, Cystallichthys .......-..---- ATT
rough handling of........--.-.--.----- 91 Li parisigcises acaasemaeecesedeesesece 476, 477
summary of arrivals ................-- 56 | Cyclothone microdon..........--..-------- 441
three-year-old......-..--..-22.-2-.---- 47 | Cylichna alba. ........-. 022222. 222 eee eee 546
Cox; Capt. Henry. -... 22 wes. oe eee sees 318 PLOPINGW ..cchdicsie secs eckeeeeseme sae 544
Crabs as food ..-.........-. e205 222-02 eee 63 | Cypressus guadalupensis.........- Seuuineid 283
Crane, Little Brown........--------------- 398 MACTOCATPA ..... 22-2 ween ee ee eee eee 283
Crangon communis......-...---..----.-4-+ 556 | cypselurus, Prognurus...........-...----+- 478
CTANQON co siscce scene cise ices cee oece ees 556 | Cysticercng..ceccsceu scene sscccconss cane LIT
Intermedia. 22.05: sss ceases cece cece 556 | Cystophora 2.2 ces cess cece caneesrcnasecens 107
crassa, Nectocrangon ........-..------.++-- 556 cristata...... spun eee ee bile 109, 110, 152, 155
crassifolia, Delesseria ...-.....-...--.-.--- 594 | Cystopteris fragilis ....-........-....-..-- 575
Stellarianscc ssc wcccceveniese caeacacecans 564: | Daenitis cece scecccisevccceccns caceeceeene 105
crassior, Gymnogongrus fastigiatus ....-... 593 | Dafilaacuta.......--.--. 200 cee eee eee e eee 370
crassus, Hadrotus ........--..-.----------+ 649'| Dall, Wi sscesesnineessoesieswas lace geese 360
Crepidula grandis......... .-...-..-.--- 542, 544 on Commander Islands mollusks...-... 514
cretacea, Amphiroa ..........--.--.---.--- 595 on mollusk fauna of Pribilofs -........ 539
, erispula, Dicranoweisia..........--...-.-:- 576 Papers: DY siekis sos eeead onesie esewacrecier 428, 429
Cristivomer namayoush ....-.-....-..----- 438 | Dallia pectoralis ..........-.-----.-------- 443
crocea, Solorina ......-.-.-.------ wae ueees 581. | ‘dali, Pagurus oi. /sccsces cececseeicinccessiek 555
crotalinus, Lyciscus...-.........---------- 484 TEOPHON 15, -:0)n 0 aie vis a aeing eee epsn ee ineiaes 543
Crowley, Chief Agent J.B..............--. BAY | Dalida: ccsicc cence eet ctenccccngegiccne 448
‘erispa, Alaria ........--...----.----------- 692: || DAM POP aria: tice vrata diac oecrsinig ciniemeie wives 309
PLaSOlA? secon siscwaincwaereweasacesates 590 | dapifer, Pandalus .........-..--..----.--+- 557
eruda, Webera .......--- 2-2-0 e-ee-5 eee 578 | Dasycottus setiger .......-...----..------- 468
Crustacea of Pribilot Islands.............. 555 | dasythrix, Scatophaga....--.....-...----.- 551
Crustaceans.........---.---...---- 59, 63, 291, 300 | davidsoni, Balenoptera ...--..-.-....----- 352
‘Crymophilus fulicarius...... 355, 363, 364, 370, 399 | Davidson’s Lesser Rorqual ..-...-.-..----. 352
Cryptacanthodids ........---.------.----- 484 | davurica, Saxifraga.........-. .....----.- 561,
Cryptochiton stelleri..........-......... 542, 544 566, 585
eryptospira, Velutina ......-.....-..---- 542,544 | Death. (See Mortality.)
Crystallichthys cyclostigma...-..-..--.... 477 Causes of ...-.. 22.2.2. cee eee eee eee 78,
mirabilis. ....--...----..----....-- ..-- 476 79, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94
crystallinum, Mesembryanthemum ........ 282 from fish bone.....,...----.-------- 92
eryptocarpa, Carex.......----.---.------ 573, 586 | decagrammus, Hexagrammos......-.....- _ 449, 451
Cuckoo, Siberian......--..---------.------ 419 | decastrensis, Cottus..........-......-----. 463
Cuculide s...isiseescccssoveses sesiicasie- is 419 | decipiens, Laccophilus .........-.......... 549
cucullata, Cetraria....---..--..--------+-- 580 | decora, Pupilla........---. 2-2-2 ..--2. ese 544
Webera...:.csescnesensnessessemssesses, 578 Pupa ....-.- ras Spa Seen cyasa rete ielaicireidis acd 542
Cuculus canorus telephonus..355, 361, 362, 363, 419 | decoratum, Cardium .........-........-... 546
cumingi, Acmea ......--..-.------+------- 542 | decorticata, Cladonia............---..----- 582
CiUliCid c.....cseacwere we nsiewsiereoes duce cieeeie 551 | deformis, Heliotropis...-....-.....+------- 543
cuprescens, Colaspidea ......-..--.--+----- 279 | degenerans,Cladonia ........---...---+---- 582
curilus, Salmo ........---. -----+ eee eee 438 | Delano, Capt. A....-.-.-.---.--2---. 309, 310, 311
Curlew, bristle-thighed ....-----.---.----- 370 | Delesseria beringiana var. spinulosa...... . 595
Eskimo ....-... --------- 0+ 220s ener eee 407 Complanata ....+ esee cone ee caenne cece 595,
606 INDEX.
Page. Page.
Delesseria juergensii .........-..---------- 595 | Director, schooner, catch of .-..-..-.------- 250
CPASBILON A... sac deh ess cote ee badede hes 594 | Disease .......---.------- ied siaiae Sarees: <i te 94, 95, 96
middendorfii.........-.---.------ ----- 595 | Dissections, summazy of.....--.----.------ 98
SPiNUlOSS sac -sceatusanaesesteceicssi.s 595 | Distomacampula......---..--------------- 102
delisoei, Cetraria islandica .....-....------ 580 | Distribution of Phenogams on the Pribilof
Umbilicaria cylindrica ........-..----- 581 Islands». undo sseduewcnssgeessecstaeeds 561
Delolepis virgatus.....-....-.------.------ 484 | divergens, Alectoria.-....-....-...--..---- 580
Delphinapterus -..-.........------4-----6- 107} Dochmius... 2.2... casesecesiecaewebasesss 164
ISUCAS see maaescidiesee 107, 121, 124, 126, 144 trigonocephalus...-....----.----.----- 164
delphinifolium, Aconitum .......-..----- 562, 584 | dodecaédron, Occa .-...........----- ---- 470, 471
Delphinus: <ncc2 ceascese sees teee AOT; 108, 123,132: |) Dogiish <2. oi2 caer seeieee ndiee Ses Sones 434
amazonicus. (See Inia Geoffroyi.) DOS SAMO «:o:.:4:5/sin nines stein s sae nea sawine eee 436
Gel Pp HIG ncasqreannssased oh ceeeeeee be 127,129 | dolichogaster, Blennius ............--..... 482
LOTSLEPL epsocdon Hace seme wend ae micemeas 125 PHONG: cc tiae dee as Sere cae dw anes we deeds 481
gangeticus. (See Platanista gangetica. ) + DOIpHM, coso-26 ilies ceuiensseeseence tens 127, 161
phoerna. (See Phocena phocena. ) | domestica, Musca........-----.-------+---- BSL
BD wistrinn Sacede neg edadecen anenyees 121, 126, 127 Dora Siewerd, ages of sealstaken by....--. 306
Dendrodoa glandaria........---....--+-- 513, 514 Cate iat ccce se se acpi ose sige Aare 305
subpedunculata...-.....---. 511, 514, 535, 536 Condition of seals taken by...-...----- 304
fu lberonlate ,.cajso-ncdwesvdencace EEG Te ial to ca ee 285-306
dentatum, Pogonatum.......----.---.----- 579 Position of.........-2.-.2. 2-2-2222 -es 305
dentex, Osmerus ....-..---------- 439, 493, 497, 498 | dorsalis, Macrourus........---..2..-------- 487
Dentition, irregularitiesin........-....---. 9,10 | Draba grandis ........-...-2-.-.----.+---- 563
Dermaturus mandtii........-..-----...---- 555 IPG See aga tncsese aid sidceis eis vaeeeciele 560, 563, 584
Dermestes vulpinus ...-....---.---.------- 279 INCA ion ciajsccciewleshreesee cae nies tees 563
Deschampsia ciespitosa, var. arctica ..... 574,586 | wahlenbergii-............-..--.----- 563, 584
deschampsoides, Calamagrostis .......... 574, 584 Drosophila 6p - 2-220. 0cceccete eee aceceees 280
Desmarestia aculeata..-.......-...--..---- 591 Drowning cause of pups’ death......-.. 83, 84, 85
LitHTONS) 45 224 eee tee sea eee oxo iee sed ss 591 dubium,Amaroucium.........--.--.2..--.- 528
Desmatodon latifolius..........-.--..--... 577 Duck, American merganser.......-.....-.- 378
S) StHIUS: a: 25-4 cae vestaceeaseeees ke se ot 577 European widgeon .........-.----.---- 380
diaphana, Sternoptyx -.....-..-..---.----- 442 Green-winged teal. ...-....-..22.--..-- 380
diapterus, Furcimanus ..--...-....--..--.- 484 | Harlequin jrocsee-scriecccdgisis woewe 378, 379
diatreta, Clitocybe .----..-..--.------+-0-- 583 Mallard.sccacse sess ca. seetin cece esennns 380
diceraus, Ceratocottus......-...-------.- 458, 459 Old squaw............-22.-2-2..22.- 357, 378
dichotoma, Rhodophyllis ........-......... 593 —- Pacific eider ............2..22. 02022 380
Dicranella rufescens.-.-.-.-..-------...0--- 576 Pintallce vewces ste Met Geueudiccn seas 370
Dicranoweisia crispula.....-...-.--. 22... 576 | Shovelercess oc seiicdsawecceeielagaccetes 370
Dicranum elongatum.......-..-.-.-.------ 576 | Sheller'sieldereosse tees ccsee tae csans 379
MONO 3.00). ecceGm vee ive weanicnigwciy seis a= Ste 576 | Dudley, W.R., plants of Guadalupe Island. 280
BETICHUMD os oceis Yos eer Hestascindd eee ses 576 | Dugong dugon.............2.2.2220222.. 108, 148
Dictyosiphon hippuroides........-........ 591 | Dupontia psilosantha .....-... 2222.2... 574, 586
Didymodon alpigenus ........--....--.-.-. 577 | dybowskii, Pholidaphus................... 480
baden-powellii......-...-..-.-....---- 577 | Dytiscidar y2c2e ccased cso. ioe Seaenccentens 549
PUDONG co2c.cc eee encsaceis ease cioet sis SOT | Bagle, Clits sae crass cice selaleadgeiedcua neces 418
Digestion: <2. wnaeeearcacesvec case ones sales 65 | Echinophthirius ..........2..22. 22222... 553
digitata, Laminaria .............-.-..-+--. 592 Echinorhynchus ........-....2222222...... 129
digitatus, Lycodes.....-......--.---2-+---- 484 CAPIbAtUB 2 voxeee se wicis ected ae coenwaes 102
dilatatum, Aspidum spinulosum ...-.-... 575, 586 | ectenes, Careproctus .--........ 222222222. 478
diadema, Scatophaga..........-..--...---- 551 | edulis, Erythwa ....-...2222. 0222220002200. 283
DidmMed Cid .ccrccsccoss ones wos see eeeeesas 381 Mytilus sce ceives since tiacsecnneiawenscee
Diomedea albatrus ...-----.-.-.- 355, 362, 363, 381 | edwardsii, Eutrema ................. 561, 563, 584
Diploderma variegatum ..........-.. 222... 593 | effusa, Arctophila -.........-2.....2...2.. 574, 586
diplodictys, Salix ....5. 020. o00¢<-004-ene0- B71 | Eider, Pacific ......... 002... --..----00 22-2 380
Diplophyllum taxifolium--..-... 2... 22... 580 DleMer st: acy G selene eed conan 379
DIPteLasccccn comes sosawcewee dea cess veneenn 550 | Elanura forficata........-...........------ 455
543
INDEX. 607
Page. Page.
elassodon, Hippoglossoides ........-...---- 488 | eschscholtzii, Pelophila -..............---- 548
elegans, Boltenia..........--.2--2...2+-. 511, 518 Ranunculus...............2..2-...-. 562, 584
elegans, Placodium........-....---...----- 681+) Wula@chon i007. .ccpuiclewiecsawseekecnsaeaes 439
Eleginus navaga ........---..--2--2.-.-- 487,507 | Eumetopias...........--..-----. 102, 103, 107, 108
Elephant Seal .........-.....-2..----.++-- 265 stelleri.......... 103, 109, 110, 113, 152, 158, 350
Eliza, Schooner .......---..--.-.---.------ 309 | ‘Eumicrotremus orbis...--..----.--.------- 475
Elliot, D. G., bird discussion by .........--- 430 | Eupeodes volucris --......--...----------- 279
Elliott, Henry W....--..-..------.-------- 43, | Euphrasia officinalis ....-......--..-.--- 570, 586
45, 52, 100, 321, 328, 347, 355, 357, 360, 370 | Eurhynchium vaucheri.......-...---..---- 579
Papers: DY cies ciccnnaciccsamsenaacie 428, 429 | euryops, Icelus ---. .- HS duieutenbitea Seas oescoses 453
elongata, Cladonia gracilis ............---- 582 | Eutrema edwardsii-......-........-.- 561, 563, 584
elongatum, Dicranum ................----- 576 | evanescens, Fucus. ..-.-..--...---.-------- 593
Elymus mollis ...... ..---- ..022+ seeeee eee 560 | Excrement.--........2-2-- 222s e eee eee ee 66
villosissimus ..---....-...----.-.---- 575, 586 | exilis, Vitrina........--.-.-.---2-------- 542, 544
emarginata, Potentilla ....-........-..-- 566, 585 | eximia, Primula. ........--...-.- 561, 568, 569, 585
embryum, Oxycottus .......-..---.-----+-- AGS: | HXOVAUS SP wscccs ccecanenecamonicinca sarees 550
emory, Perityle .......--.-.---...---.-.-55 283 | extensus, Lycodapus .......--.-.---------- 486
empetricola, Pseudocryobius ...-.......-.- 548 | Eye, disease of ........-.-. 0-222 -ee eee ee ee 95
Pterostichus ,......----. 22-22-22 -6-- 548 | fabricii, Lestoteuthis........-......--.-.-- 544
Empetrum nigrum ........-.-....... 561, 571, 586 THM POH: : ccc dcawsesues ae steecomase 483
Enedrias nebulosus ...-...-.----.--.------ 482 | fahlunensis, Cetraria ........-...---..----- 580
Eniconetta stelleri .......... 355, 362, 363, 364, 379 | Falco peregrinus anatum........ 355, 362, 363, 419
Enophrys bison ........-...---.----------- 458 rusticolus gyrfalco.......... 855, 362, 363, 418
ClAVIPOR oe on56 ten soe ans a perbtee eisai 458 BPALVELPIUG 2 50.2.0.2 0500s ocetcwsing nen ences 278
Enterprise, schooner ...--.......---.---- 297,298 | Faleonide .....---..---. --.----- eee ee eee 418
Entosphenus camtachaticus ..........---- 434 | Falkland Islands, catch .......-...-.-..--. 308
tridentatus ._......22---- 222202022002 434 close season. ..---. .----- -- 22 eee wenn ee 308
Epilobium anagallidifolium ...........-... 567 sealing on .........-----..---2--0-e * 807, 308
behringianum...-............----.-- 567,585 | fallax, Bryum....-......--.-..---. dpaneesrs - 5T8
CUAY DUM Since pas.c fesieoeraie ye raialeieiciendiciciess 567, 585 ROSS UID isis mrciestinlncicicieian biciesie Bh basaien 584
BPICAGUMY gc reicis ce .nciarise cteisiemrsninae cd 567, 585 | Falling from cliffs, cause of death in pups - 88
Epinephelus ciliatus ...-....-.---.--..---- 446 | Falling rocks, cause of death in pups...... 88
Eppinger, J., schooner...-....---..-------- 243 | Fanning, Capt. Edward A ......-.....2.... 309
Equisetum arvense.....-..-.---..------- 575, 586 | Fanning, Capt. Edmund ................... 314
scirpoides --....- See MwEe Erm eaeea 575,586 | Fanning’s Voyage......-.--.-.-----. 278, 311, 316
variegatum ....-...--2.-----25---+6- 575, 586 | Farmer, Elmer E., Electrical Experiments
Erysipelas, cause of death................- 89 in branding seals .--..-...- pieces aise 833
Ereunetes pusillus -...--..-...-. 355, 362, 363, 405 | fasciata, Histriophoca. ...............-...- 351
erianthum, Geranium...../.....----- 561, 565, 585 | fasciatus, Pholis..........-......--....22-. 480
Ericarasalmonea...-..-..---.-.----- +--+ ---5 435 | fastigatus crassior, Gymnogongrus ........ 593
Erignathus barbatus...-......---.-------- 109, | Favorite, schooner ....-.---...-...--..--.- 226
110, 111, 144, 146, 152, 158, 154, 155,157 | Feather downs in Anatide .............. 356, 378
Erimacrus isenbeckii.......-.-...-....--.. 555 Calcarius alascensis ..-.............-.. 431
Eriophorum polystachyon...........-.-. 572, 586 Passerina townsendi .............--.. 424, 431
vaginatum..-.-.-------.---.--+----- 572, 586 | Phalacrocorax ...........-.. 356, 374, 375, 431
Eristalis tenax ....--.--.. brid aratildlorstemestnsiecers 279 | Tringa ptilocnemis.......-..-......... 402
Eritrichium angustifolium ........-.....-- 283 TUDINATOS s 2.2265 sepia oe eee eee sce 381
chamissonis...---...---.--..---- 561, 569, 585 UPiai arse baesceceassieeecs simecei 390, 392, 431
Ermani (Acila) Nucula .............--.-... 546 | Feeding of blue fox.... ...--.--2......... 342
Erodium cicutarium.......-..---....-.---- 282 | Feeding, frequency of ...-........-.-...-.. 63
mMoschataM: sra’s 42 ove ceeseecieee seasees 282 PTOUNGS suisse sear eenekeeee cece 65
eros, Um bilicaria. 2-20 s-scsencecesccxess 581 | Pe0tiexs. scs0 sees os ssmncicea seer eecceenemcins 1,2
erosus, Tachyrhynchus ........-.--.--.---- 544 | Females, death rate -.-.....--.....2...20... 51
Erythea edulis .......--..-----2 2-2-2205 283 fertility Of sc0e seeneemeetxcite coleewacete 50
erythropbyllum, Bryum ........-..-------. 579 inches G seep aweae keke nue ccc acosecivesnra 46
Eschshcoltzia ramosa......---.---------+--- 281 interest in young ..-...............--. 74
608 INDEX.
Page.
Females, mature -...-....-22.-2-02--220-+- 48 | Foxes, food. ..----.0-0-0 cece ee en cenees egos 349, 349
» number taken in 1895-96 ..........-.-- 55 taken on Pribilof ..........2..22-.-+++ : 340
BIZC a2 jvecees [pepe rsecse seseee reese eee 4,6 | fragiformis, Potentilla........-.......--- 566, 585
teeth mature in -....-.-...2222..22---- 9 | fragile, Sphaerophorum.........--.-..-.--- 582
young appear .......-.....-...--..---- 46 | fragilis, Cystopteris.........-..----
fenestralis, Astrolytes ........--..-2-.--2-- 456 Strombella Be eed ereee cence sit
Fertility, females. ........-.-..-2-2.-22.-+-- 50 | Franceschi, Dr. F....-.... : pease Bieter be 280
, males stone te eces seceae coos eens see nees 50 | Frankenia grandiflora......-...-..---.---. 281
Festuca ovina violacea.......-..--.----- 574,586 | Franseria camphorata....-........-- 282
Festuca richardsoni............---.------- 574 | Fratercula arctica..-...-....------ eee be 369
ete seees : : . aah daca Mabie cas 574, 586 arctica glacialis............------.---- 369
rubra var. barbata .........------ 574 corniculata........ 55,
Fetus, growth of ........-. 22.22.2222. ---- 48 | Fraterculine................ peaks pa
as measurements OF wanes adcise Gawesarsews 7 | frenatus, Sarritor ... siayaeieceeeaeten ee 474
Filago californica. «1.22 222. 0s20-0e002 seeee 282 | frielei, Beringius ........---.-...- 542, 543
Filaria bicolor Sacsies see sake shee eee eee 118 | frigida, Coelops -...............- aeeers 559
filicina, Ptilota base shekeS eeeeec eee emai 594 Gentiana -.-......2....22.--- 561, 569 585
filiformis, Potamogeton........-.--..------ 572 Lecanora tartarea es. : "581
filix-femina, Asplenium 575, 586 Wine seal erasne gues eho 545
filix-mas, Aspidium........-.--2. .--.---- 575, 586 | Potasites........-.......0.- pecs ted 568 585
fimbricata, Cladonia ...........-......2--- 583 STSIIL as. yices ah saw usocconee ees eee
Finch, Aleutian rosy ........ 0.200000 ---- 496 | Fringillidw . 0-0... se0 cece ceeeeeeeeee, ia
firmisquamis, Bogoslovius ........-...----- 488 | Fritillaria kamtachatcensis.. wee ete 571 586
fischerianum, Buccinum..........-..---- 542, 543 | frondei, Bryum..........-...----..---.-. 578
Fish, Pierre A., the brain of the fur seal. .. 21 frondescens, Arthrocardia ebnacccaty 59
Fishes of Arctic Alaska ...-....-....2--..- 493 | Hemizonia ........ 2200 -... 002200 eeeeee =
D | Hemizonia........222. 20.02.2222. .2222.
a Bering Sea)... 25 s2ccceiessce oye pee eses 433 . fucensis, Theragra -........ 507
Fish bone cause of death -.........---..--- 92 | fulva, Aneto pltilie nu sannnancivaccocoandsaces 574,
Bids a8950d saccesccocs 59, 62, 67, 68, 291, 294, 296 | fulvus, Conulus.......................... 544
re of Guadalupe Aslan Gers. scisine sets sete 277 fangosum, Polyclinum .................... 519
Fisheries not atfected by seals ......-....... 66 | Furcimanus diapterus
Fissures of brain......... fosocie tciisies carers 23, Fucus evanescens ROIS Hien ee
25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 35, 37, 38, 40 | platyesrpue......o0aseceececcese. .0... a
Flammula fulvella ........2 200-0222. 2102. 584 | Fulmar, Rodger’s........-.-.--....-... s
. E Ay FUUU RCL DB. eee ee ee ee eee eee eee ee ad
flava, Acrybia...... 2.22.22. 2.2220 eee eee 542 | Fulmarus glacialis rodgersii..... 355, 362, 363, 382
floccosa, Rhodomela.........-...-.....2--- 594 | fulvella, Flammula on
floribunda, Phacelia ................--.--. Bas Wan enl sascparu eee o
seater Liocyma ....--....222. 22206222. 543 Fur in Kuril Island aenla : iss a laa) ae
' teas schooner....-......-...---.. 289, 293 in Pribilof Island seals ........ ees 3
; ogel, George ..-....-...- yreeibe see seeeneet 312 | in Robben Island seals ................ 3
ontana, Montia tess eeseeese +--+ 560, 562, 565,585 | furcata, Cladonia ......................... 583
PhilonOtis ois6.066 csice cone cece cocecceere B77 | Fusaria....-.......... nica eeepc 103 ak
Food of seals dese eee dekee kis 59, 292, 294, 304. osculata .......... - sen -
pe Sa sebs G2 e's Soadakies ee ean 61 | fusca, Ciliaria........... ee: : ee 593
o Japan coast a8 F2te tee adede qatar 61 | fuscescens, Sphagnum ................ ....
in North Pacific....-.....-...... 62 . foseum, Olopheum......................, ah
fie... 2. eee eens eee fuscum, Olophrum....-. 5
tables of species caten................. 67,68 | Fuscarialarix............................. aa
of young...-....222..02- 59,60 | fusiformis, Analipas............... BBE
Of YOUNG .----..-2eee seen eee eee eee B siformis, :
Ford, Jobn D., log kept by.......---.----.. rote craven iialeicaia incest setaor cases ice
RED IEEE Np ROES oeesauiomnd, | IT BEMIS cauyy amehes (ne ctan she Gln reuesne 4
Acsahebars Saas SERRE ces api’ 543 | Gadus macrocephalus....... 109, 119, 486, 507, si
ie. | ANUTA ...-------.------ eee eee 455 | Gaffney, Capt. F.M-_..........2.. : 270, 273, 312
oe : ed potrel. . 2.222 cic ccensecen eee 383 | gaimardii, Spirontocaris __...... io , "556
ae : POULC wee ioe ae 2459 See eee eal edemean 348 | gavia, Puffinus................-........... 278
a gie meee alaleie a Rae EET ease ewe 342, 348 Galapagos Islands......................... 268
aire giochi eke gees Sete Scapa se oe Catch of seals.........22.0-2--0.-... 213 311
stainless ie vine Meade crepeseee cekectone. “BAB, “GealavdP on. oct eee 5 :
8 Seals Of os: sios cates sce bniaied arte tecws 272, 310
INDEX. 609
Page. | Page.
galeatus, Gymnacanthus ..-......---.--. 460, 504 : Glycymeris kashevaroffi ...............---- 546
Galium trifidum ............--....-.---- 567, 585 patulus . . widdmenu ebb Seema «06
gallica, Silene. ......-...-....--.---+------ 281 Glyptocephalus Pietra actos ce --- 492
Garforth, Cuptain.. Mestwoeeancaiosiger Uebhencis 93 | gmelini, Carex -......2.. 2022-2 cscs eee 572, 58€
Gasterosteidw.........---...---.---- uaeese 443 Coeloplureum......... sceccwsess 567,585
Gasterosteus aculeatus -....-.--...---.---- 444 | Golden Fleece, schooner, log of deena woes 260
Dispinosus wisacic saves evis2 echrs pee ds 444 | Godwit, barred-tailed ..............-..---- 371
cataphractus........--....------ 443, 444, 498 PRONG 20.20: 3e'5 ete < wees see eeeekan sees 405
cataphractus williamsoni..........--.- 444 || GOletccacwaeencisiaee ecliien sine: eeeeeemeenes 438
finviati lige s.' 2s Soci velew ieee eee seeces 118 | gonatodes, Lecanora oculata.-.....-....--. 581
inseulptas sasase cesewes oe see eyed ees ees 498 | Gonatus amoenus ......-....-.....-.---. 119, 544
microcephalus .........--..----------- 444 | goodei, Ptilichthys -....-....---.-..-.2-.-- 484
BOLVAUUS wreicisiels acs v o'v eats weg le Seow erste 498 | goodrichii, Cactus.......-.......----.----- 282
GOV ccsccctironeaiencainis vay sue cere arceam 383 | Goose, American white-fronted ............ 380
Gavia adamsii ...........--.---- 355, 361, 363, 383 CaGLiNG ic scaesceec cnc tees dee Sees 381
ALCOR. 2 ho ceee se sainie nae cns se 345, 361, 364, 383 EM PePOLs sjcciesistsaos ae sh PSs seme 371, 381
Gedney, steamer ...-....----.--------- +--+ 276 | Gorbatch rookery -....-..-.--------. 52, 56, 80, 85
gelatinosus, Careproctus .........-..------ 478 | gorbuscha, Oncorhynchus .........-..--. 436, 497
gelidus, Bombus ...-.........--.-.---.---- 550 | gracilescens, Carex lagopina .....,-...---.. 572
Gentiana frigida ...................- 561, 569, 585 Thamnolia vermicularis ............... 583
PIANGE sce oeesseesemmsenns xan 561, 569, 585 | gracilis, Cetraria islandica ...........-..-. 580
GONG) ic eck.s adomnavnconen Giese 567, 569, 585 OPO SONIA sisson sine boa ne tame meee 555
geographica, Buellina..........----------- 583 | grandis; Crepidula ...............--.--.. 542,544
Geographical distribution of Pribilof birds. 363 Dra basis eo sedocecetedeataemencas 563
Geranium erianthum .........-..---- 561, 565, 585 Kennerlyia ..-.-..------ 2-2-0 -.2-eeee 546
German vessel, seizure of........-....----- 224 Nesodraba ...... sssciessecessesenecss 563, 584
Gestation, period of..........--..---.----- 46 Pseudopythina..-.......--2. 222-2. ---- 545°
Geum rossii.....-...---.-.---------- 561, 565, 585 | grandiflora, Frankenia ...........--...--.- 281
gibba, Spirontocaris ........-.--.--------- 556 | grandiflorum, Polemonium sieciactara --- 569. 585
gibbsi, Hemilepidotus .......-..-..------- ADT || GEay, Mie. ies vercisns aon tene coed tne aweaine» 327
gibbus, Liparis ...-.....--....--.--------- 476 | grayi, Pentyle ........-..-.--.------------ 283
gilberti, Podothecus ..........-...------ 473, 474 | Grebe, Holboell’s............---..--------- 383
Gilbert, Dr. C. H., fish identified by. .-..-.- 277 | grebnitzkii, Hapalogaster ................. 555
Fishes of Bering Sea .-.--..-.--.------ 433 Pholidopus ......-2.. 2.222.222.2222. 480
Gilia multicaulis millefolia...........----- 283 | Greeley, A. W ..-.-. 22-22-0222 eee eee nee 7
ABS WAMAL oe ¢ctow 2isaecc sce Same Sea See 283 | greeleyi, Styela...........-..... “BLL, 516, 517, 535
Gill, Theodore .........--.--------++-+---- 1 | Green, Prof. Charles B ......-.....-. 276, 277, 280
girgenshonii, Sphagnum .........--------- 876 | Greene, Prof. Edward L....-......-.-.---- 280
glabra, Lychnis apetala .......-.-.------ 564, 584 | Gregarious nature of seals ....--......--.. 70, 71
glaciale Buccinum ..........---.---------- 543 | Grimmia apocarpa ......-..-..-2---. 0-224. 577
glacialis, Liopsetta....-..---..-.---. 491, 492,509 | Grinders --_..... 2222-22022. -2ee eee eee ee 1,2
gladiator, Orca ..........-----0---2+---+-- 353 groenlandica, Scala .........-..----. 22-2. 542
glandaria, Dendrodoa ......-----.------- 513, 514 | groenlandicus, Serripes........-...-...-... 543
glauca, Gentiana...........--------- 561, 569,585 | Grus canadensis .......-........ 355, 363, 398, 546
glaucus, Rhachianectes.........-.2.-2.--06 353 | Gryllus guadelupensis.............-....-.. 279
Sebastodes....-.---.---------+ +222 eee 447 | Guadalupe Island ................... 265, 267, 276
Globicephala melas .-.--.--..------.------ 102 Birds of: sos decease wes gent saute ewe 278
Globicephalus svineval. (See Globicephala Fish collected.....--......2.-205..22.. 277
melas. ) Insects and spiders......-....22....... 279
globiceps, Blennicottus’...-.....---.-.-- 467, 468 Plan teeta eee eee oe ee 280
globiferum, Spherophorum waxduteneraseoss 582 Catch of seals. ......--...22-22-22-2. 269-270
globosum, Polyclinum ...........--- 511, 518, 536 Seals se cesta seek ce beetions cece 266, 268
‘globularia, Artemisia - cidhafep uate sisiejayaiars 561, 568, 585 PSE 00) 1 ene 267
glumaris, Poa....-....--+.--+--+-+eeeeee 574, 586 Spiders and insects.............2.. 0224 279
Glyceria augustata......-....----------- 574, 586 | Guadalupe Seal, description of............. 271
VWiLOUIOS saccisinw neces once sce seseszeee 574, 586 | guadalupense, Talinum..........-......... 282
5947—pr 3——39
610 INDEX.
Page. Page.
guadalupensis, Cypressus....-...----.----- 283 | Hemilepidotus ......--.---.----.---------- 456
Gry llWs ves ccdenceds gasses ves skis sien es 279 PIDDBL sccascesecnd saiartunacecacesa ems 457
Salpinctes occu s scce cw ssienee vacwoscexe 278 GOTO ANE soja cies cas waned mec ceces meee cece 457
Guillemot, pigeon ...-....-...--..--------- 389 hemilepidotus ......--..---.....---. 457, 458
Gyrialeons.....-.6s.cc05 5522 vee sees eciceniee es 418 THOS <2 sey cccadnadawd seemeee eee see 457
Gyrinichthys minytremus .......--.-.----. 479 | Heliotropis deformis var. harpa........---- 543
gyrinops, Cyclopteroides ......-...-....--. 475 | Hemoptera....-.-..-.-.-2-------e--- eee eee 552
guttatus, Hexagrammos .......---.--..---- 451 | Hemitripterus cavifrons ...........-..----- 453
Gull, Point Barrow..........------------ 358, 395 | Hemizonia frutescens .......--..----..---- 282
Gunnellus ruberrimus ...--...--..--..---- 481 | He patie co.cc ociconteiisecanin ccisim eae sedis 580
guntheri, Aspidophoroides ........--.----.- 475 | Heracleum lanatum ........---.---..------ 567
Gymnacanthus galeatus .......-....--..- 460, 504 | Herberta adunca......... nedisasaelae ose deals 580
Pistilliger:.......2cus cece se seed eeeecs 460, 503 | Herding of bachelors.......--...---...-- 329, 337
Gymnelis stigma ...-....---.----02-. 20-20 485 Experiments in .....------..---- 325, 329, 336
VWITICIS sc scaeise ence heeds ceewteioeen 485 | herendeenii, Sipho .....-..---.--..---.-.-- 543
Gymnogongrus fastigiatus, var.crassior-... 593 ; Herring, Pacific ....-...---.---..--..-----. 435
Gymnomitrium coralloides...........-..-.. 580 | herschelinus, Liparis -...-.....---..-..---- 504
Gynandra gmelini.......-.--.-.-.-----.- 570, 586 | Hersilia, brig...-.-.-.-...---------.--.---- 313
atellert 2.2420 sac 02 se seeee-teeeee asks 570, 586 | Heteractitis incanus .......---.. 355, 363, 370, 407
Habrocestum n. sp.? ..---..----.-.-------- 279 | Heterocheilus -...-...-----..2.-----2 0-2-5 107
Hadrotus crassus....-.---..----.------+--- 549 PUNICAbUS 0260 sees cave cca cwes caeee seen 107
hematolepis, Carex .......----.----------- 573 | heterophylla, Ceratodon.....-...---..-.-.- 576
hematolepis, Carex salina cuspidata ...... 573 | Heterothecium sanguinarium.........._-.. 583
Hematopinus callorhini..-.....--....----- 553 | hexacornis, Oncocottus....-.--...... 467, 503, 511
henkii, Juncus balticus........... ..-.. 571, 586 ; Hexagrammide .......-.----.-----.-------- 448
Halizetus leucocephalus alascensis ...-.. - 355, | Hexagrammos asper........- 448, 449, 451, 452, 453
362, 363, 418 decagrammus ......-.---------.----- 449, 451
Haliche@rus :..522- 20-6 vesaetesenss sais 107, 108 hexagrammus.........-....--. 222... 448, 451
QTY PUA)... seeeerssceas 109, 111, 115, 152, 155 lagocephalus......--...----...-..--. 450, 452
Halicore cetacea ......-.-----.-------+-++- 149 octogrammus ......--..-..-. 448, 449, 450, 452
INGA) 2.2 se sees vese see wags eee sel seed 151 OLdiNSGUS, sccceniecescceese cece soee ne 449
Halkett, Andrew ...--...------------------ 10, 45 otakii.....-----.--.. 20.2222. 22-222. 451, 458
Haloconcha reflexa............---------- 542, 544 BCADED semiewsiscisce ccsecilomenenicticecseens 453
hamlini, Podothecus.-...--..---.---------- 472 BLOM CL ayes ceiectseec ce nnnes casein tenes 448
Hansen, L. J ......---.---------- +--+ ------ 235 superciliosus --...--..--...ee-0------ 452, 453
Hapalogaster grebnitzii ...---.-..---...-... 555 | hexagrammus, Chirus .............2-...--. 453
Harbor porpoise -....-.--.-------++.--02-. 353 Mabie a seicccaniccne sete caeetans chan 448
Harbor seal. . cscs eceseseeenas caes see axe 351 | Hierochloa borealis..............--2..--. 573, 586
Harelda hyemalis.........--...----- 355, 362, 378 PANCIAORA psec cess eae Goameeenn 573, 586
TSTOMS) = hanebe yee deca santah s 43, 45, 52, 53,90 | hieracifolia, Saxifraga....-....--...2.... 566, 585
average number of cows .....-..-.---- 53 | Hippuris vulgaris ......-................ 567, 585
CONG tON OL. « caccawedadeeesawens cee sca 52 Hippoglossina ...-...-.... 2.222. eee eee eee 490
Haritwen, Capt. Charles. .........-.. 268, 270, 273 | Hippoglossoides elassodon............-.. 488, 489
harpa, Heliotropis deformis................ 543 hamiltoni -..-....... 02... eee eee eee 489
Harting, J. E., paper by ...---.--..------ 428, 429 TODUBEUA ceed see .cccescccceecteeewsecses 489
Taseall Ay Foust cee iioaesscclanses desis. 35 | Hippoglossus hippoglossus ..............-. 508
Hassler, United States CoastSurveysteamer. 265 hypoglossus.......2....2.0.2202- 00-2 488
Hawk; duck: .ececcinetasencciecs sees ose kes 419 | hippuroides, Dictyosiphon ................ 591
Hay ko sesecs dee denver celeee gees ey cave cede 436 | hirculus, Saxifraga .....--2...2..2... 0... 560, 566
Heart of seal cscesecescssccaesseeseey wea 12 Saxifraga, var. alpina.......22.....00.2. 585
of Rytina. -ccceoeceseeer cause sat iGat ve cesenx hirsuta, Cardamine-...--..-......... 564, 566, 585
hecla;:Coliag sc cvcdeceuactess woecateteeexte 550 | hirta, Draba.............. ORI cee ee. 560, 563, 584
helicina, Margarita.........-.. 222-222-2222. 542 | Hirundinide ....---. 2.222.222... 22.022 422
Heliotropis deformis ..............--..---- 543 | Hirundo erythrogastra unalaschkensis. .... 355,
Helops bachel.. 2.25 22.<:.2i0usexs+ se senss 279 362, 363
helveolus, Myodes...........---.--..---+-- 347 | Histiobranchus bathybius.....-......... 485,443
INDEX. 611
Page. Page.
Histiocottus bilobus..........--...-...---. 468 | Ichneumonidae ............-..--.222222---- 550
Histrionicus histrionicus.-...-.. “B55, 363, 364, 379 | Idotea ochotensis .-...-.-..--------------- 557
Histriophoca fasciata .....-.-..........--. 351 | imbricatum, Sphagnum squarrosum ....... 576
Hodgson, Capt. N..-.-.------------------- 226 | incana, Draba..........-.-. 2222. ---2---+-- 563
Holarctic region ........--.---..-----.-- 363, 364 PeritylOcssiwete esnsieccnnceesesseeeene 282
holomelas, Paraliparis ............-.-.--.- 479 | inclinatum, Bryum.........--.--2-2. 0222. 578
Homoptera: «22 ccssccsecce cesses socwie cee: 552 | inconspicua, Macoma..........-.-.---.---. 543
Hooper, Captain C. L.......---...--...--- 328 | Indians as seal hunters............---.-..- 286,
Hordeum murinum..........-.-----.------ 283 287, 288, 289, 290, 291, 296, 298, 305
Hosackia ornithopus .---.-..-...--.. 2-2-2. 282 | Industry, schooner ........----.-----+----- 3815
House Mouse scee.c0cce se weseeeeeseanceeee ce 348 | inermis, Aspidophoroides........--...----. 475
Humpback salmon .........----..--------- 437 | Inflammation of bowels in pups -..--.--.--- 87
humifusa, Stellaria............-..---..---- 560 | Inia geoffroyi....:-...---.-... 222. eee. eee 107
humilis, Cottus .....-.........---2------.- 462 | insculptus, Gasterosteus...............---- 498
Limnea: ose eseenceeeieccewkneescassess 544 | Insects and spiders of Guadalupe Island... 279
Hunt, George M scsiceecies vonresncumeeses 270 | Insects of the Pribilof Islands............. 547
Hunters, Indians.........-.---.-..-.------ 286, | insignis, Amara....-...-....---.------+--- 279
287, 288, 289, 290, 291, 296, 298, 305 Trichotropis....- e002. seccseee senens 542, 544
white.........-- 286, 287, 288, 291, 296, 298, 301 | Instinct, homing...........-...2-.2..2+--. 70
at disadvantage..........-.--2..------ 305 | Instruments in branding............ 326, 329, 333
Hunting in Southern Hemisphere........ 307-320 | insularis, Callilepsis.........--....---.--.. 279
Hyalina radiatula........-.---..--..-2-.-- 544 Chrysodomus .-...-.-..--..--- 222... 542, 543
Hyas coarctatus ......---..---+--.-------- 555 PUNCO sa winnie aeinie see cigs cases seme gadiey 278
Vy rats sccccrnin casciejvierarenuinn iui teuce nts 555 | Intelligence of seals...........-....--- + 69, 72,73
Hydrocorise ....-..-..----.--.-----+- ..-.. 6552 | intermedia, Crangnon .........-.....-..--. 556
Hydrodamalis ...........--....-.--------- 108 | interrupta, Raja.......-...----. 2222222262. 435
PIPED 4 Aaa cocteeinnioscrcnied 108, 149, 151, 163 | Intestine, nematodes in small.............. 76
StON eri cise. coecccaeaininwasweseracesie, 100 | Intestines...--...---- 20-200. 02. eee 11, 191
Hydrophilidw ic. 0ccscacscasesensensce 549 | introniger, Sebastodes..............---.--- 445
Hyena, brain of.........-..--------+-- +++ 37 | irregulare, Synoicum........ 511, 530, 531, 532, 536
Hylocomium alaskanum......-..-.....-.-. 579 | Iridea luminariodes forma parvula........ 593
BPlONAONE «2.20 owen: cewimrcees ews wees 579 | isenbeckii, Erimacrus ..........-..-22-.--- 555
SQUATTOSUM . ---. .--- eee wees eee ee 579 | islandica, Cetraria .......-.-.....--.-.-+-- 580
triquetTUM.........0+ see n2e- cane eneneciae 580 Koenigia...- 2-2: -ccsscsccswtvensaes 570, 586
Hymenoptera ........------------- +--+ +--+ 550 | islandicum, Cardium ................ 543, 545, 546
hyperborea, Amara..-......---------.+---- 548 | ithyphylla, Bartramia..........-.......... 517
Carex vulgaris........----------.----- 572 | Ixodes arcticus.......--...----...----2-2-- 553
hyperboreum, Polytrichum............---- 579 TICINUS - -\-.-- <n cieiereinrninmin pnwivinie de ersisiarsinicie 554
hyperboreus, Limax.....---...-. --------. 544 | Jaeger, Long-tailed .........-....2-2.22-.. 393
Pseudocryobius .....-.--.--.-----.---- 548 PALABITIC: 2-250 212 con scenaueehonesectia 393
Pterostichus ...--...---.--------+--+-- 548 Pomarine ...---.---.---- 22-20. -0-2 eee 393
Ranunculus......----.---------- 560, 562, 584 | James G. Swan, schooner ....-..-.......... 296
Hyperoodon .....---.. ---- es. 222 eee cee eee 107 | Jane Gray, schooner, log of......-.-.-. 2... 258
rostratus ..-......---------- +--+ 2065 121, 124 | jaok, Myoxocephalus......... - 462, 464, 499
Hypnum.......--.--..-------------------. 561 | japonica, Laminaria....... 22.2222. -22..22. 592
Hypnum uncinatum...--...-.-..+---.----- 579 Arctoscopus ..-....-.--...---2 2-24-22. 479
hypoglossus, Hypoglossus...........------ 488 Chirolophus ............-22-2.--..-2.. 479
hyporea, Umbilicaria .....-.-.---.---....- 583 POLIS cisisicc js Seeciedind ete naamnneenaamecs 415
Hypsagonus quadricornis ................. 475 | Johnson, Martin N ......---. 222-000 e eee 59
Hystero-epilepsy .....---...--------------- 96 | Jordan, D.8........-...--.. 2... 2, 89, 325, 336, 339
Icelinus borealis......--..----------------- 454. Blue fox of Pribilof Islands........... 339
Icelus bicornis ....-.-----.---- 0-02 ee ee ee ee 453 | Jordan, D.S%., and Clark, G. A., practical ex-
’ canaliculatus .........-..-.--.-----.+- 453 periment i i branding and herding seals. 325
OUR OPS «asic aldewees Veen’ wiewia edie 453 Species of Callorhinus ...........2.... 2
BPIDI GOL ssaiass csase asesie:s Geretsideinisass Sidie eoeore 453 | Jordan, D. S., and Gilbert, C. H., fishes of
WICIN QUIG's s/2:c. 55s ceciccinieceuledeware nena 453 Bering Sea. oh cdscimen Cian tatatminiate le oe erwlarerd astemal 433
612 INDEX.
. . a . Rags: :
jordani, Aplidiopsis a uedibined See 511, 521, 536 | lagopina, Carex ........------0--0--- eee 572. “386
so “an ee er Seer 457 | lagopus, Vulpes ...-.....----------+--+---- 348
ON GUUS coe tee conacan Reese 479 | Laminaria bongardiana........ -
Judd, Sylvester D..........-..-----------. 360 i ePhata n, Bee peta eee on acate ie
Judge, James dpa nadsistants ao ss RRR eeeR ee 328, 341 Be aii doksi <sdeiee ceaccoercc eases 592
Branding on St. George...-...----.---- 338 ONG PSS vse tscapsscrcosingreacsens 591, 592 596
juergensii, Delesseria...--.-.---.------ 595 repens ......--- —— 592
Junco insularis .---.-.....-.--..-2-+------ 278 rodrignezii .... eae ae aioe 592
Juncus balicus, var. henkii..........---- 571, 586 Stl odpuase stew Aauetcnt iced. 599
biglumis eysispeis indSie pein Ggs|eiaaaters cients een 571, 586 iiuati oeabler a deed eadineatacte tae 434
se ie smelt 439 Lampetra aurea..........--..-..--- 434
MOB smccinsecewss esses ace GSK eee Ape | Tanteta, Pedtoaloniies icc: dcauucceedax BOidE
Kamtchatka salmon trout .......-...------ 437 Sausiinn, Fer rn ae cei =
kamtschatcensis, Fritillaria ........-.--- S7isbee | Yaneaw lta, Mlrdada icy daetecatelentaduubes a
kamtschatica, Atomaria.........-..-..---- 594. | Landing of aS. Sasi ee
a Racca wacRs goin aneeeee Rees 594 | langsdorfii, Pedicularis........ ee Rees 561
shevaroffi, Glycymeris .......-..---.---- 546 Viola 561, 564, 565, 570, 575, 5
eymeris .....-+--+-------. 546 Viola........--. 70, 575, 584.
Kathgard, Captain ..-.-..-..-.---------- 224, 270 | lanuginosum, Racomtirium. 7 2 i ae i oe ‘ ; pa
Kelp.... ans sisiineUeieciies SAee RS EReRER NE weS 286 | lar, Nectocrangon.............--.--+ +--+. 556
Keennierlia Gendt. cose sccmmneamexons RE | langlbw, Phntthjessasdaasoe wabenneeewacancs :
Kennerlyia grandis........---.-----.---+-- 546 Lard AOS GRACE “
kennicotti, Coregonus ......--..--.---.-. 435,494 ©" larix, Pustaritiecs = Bence ic ole oT
Kerguelen Land, sealing on....-.---------- 316 | PHU tne ao: aco ceuensened Gace ate te a
ess Oncorhynchus ....-...--.------------ 436 _ Larus barrovianus .... . ai ney 355, 362, 363 395
OYS so oeemkeces x eens Hedees eeeske setae 21 1 ie ” 362, 363, 39:
Killer whale siscs2sc05s032 ec dee0 seeceecees 353 ot ae, orieaie ee ee
cause of pups’ death .......-..-....-.. 92, 93 oceidentalis........ MATERIA ENT! a
__ presence of... vote teeeee re eccb nee eee sees 288 schistisagus.......... 355, 362, 363 394
kincaidi, Amaroucium.........-.-.-- 511, 524, 536 Bonen sk aude es tae 7
King salmon .....---...- 436 | dadiecorna Canpautila .............. BALE :
‘ing salmon .....---.-+--+-++--2+- 2202 0-+ rpa, Campanula ..........
kisutch, Oncorhynchus .....-....---....-.- 436 | lateralis. decaine co me
Tel teercitee wlll, PatBy ge: ececoweserkeenuc 396 ats eee ee ae
Red-legged .......-. 397 | Lath Windies: co. SHOE os
_ Re aabcatsie(OREel wie Dratererene yrus maritimus...............
Kitovi roo kery’s wesc ox gee cows cass 75, 88, 89,92 | laticeps, Megalocottus............... sasha pa
Pivpa ra tea cage natn 326 | latifolia, Arctagrostis............-....... 574, 586
Kenigia islandica. satehduisclasvsnibargunstwcenins 570, 586 Tugun cONie lel 575 bs
kotzebuei, Parnassia ..-.....---..------- 567,585 | latifolins, Desmatodon...... ............. ie as
Krynitzkia maritima | i ; ee se
(pd disc water ove Neen agin 283 | latifrons, Desmarestia . 5
Krause, Arthur and Aurel, paper by.-.--. -- WEG!| Tisnina seNG One ded onc cease, es
Krasnaja Ryba sietbiahg Smiainers ergata Sling area e's 436 laurette, Areyrosomus phate phen. thee re
kroyeri, Tritonofusus........-.-.-.-.-.-..- BIS | Iaurinn, PMNS eee occ c-:. co, cccac,, a
Krynitzkia ramosissima .. .....--..-....-. 283 | lauta Trimerotropia Sova Re tocar. abate pc
| De BRR ER EUR Dia siepeitcitie: sah ise mahal evens eee
ee Leusccspemmgersekenee S98 Deomnoramglatece. 2 cc c<coccsosemncacca. ay
i AV ElINUS scciciieacee sicerareenecee 438 | oculata, var. gonatodes................
Kuril Islands, seals of...........-.---.-.-- 3) mui igaas Misi tte es cee side
vessels lost..-.... 22-2. 0-2 -eee eee eee 231 | Pat iba ae ec ce a e ee
Labrax hexagrammus ............- coeeee 448, 453 | rare ne fi wie. ce
laccata, Clitocybe.....--.........--2.----- ; 583 Genie ee ne on
Laccophilus decipiens..........--.-22.-.-- 549 eiiiSiea ee ee =
TRACUD AV INC bAiacs cocci eancaersercclociosinetened 544 Lecidea s (2 RU eget iaars rice ee
lacunosa, Cetraria .-.......--..----. 2.22. 580 Leda Ee ee te oe
leetevirens, Normandia...-...----...-...--- 583 | Tat carpA, Gene Dio ae ari ee Nh eee a
levigatum, Orthotrichum ...-.....--..-... 5T7 Lemming: eaiieut Erie a
Lagenorhynchus erapeiste seicieigugiersiensisialae'y 107, 125, 131 | Lemmus ies pee REV irannd a
; BUD IPOSERIS. 4 onisietere Shary Brererm acne eg celine 121, 124 | RWGHRE ie ee oe
agocephalus, Hexagrammos. . 450,452 > L foptine = oa me Va a
ans fedieselece 2 epet:
; | Lepeta concentrica...-.. 0.22... ...0....200. 542
INDEX. 613
Page. Page.
Lepidopsetta bilineata .........-....--.. 491, 508 | Litorina subtenebrosa............-.-.- 542-544
Lepidoptera .......---------see- ee eee eee O00!) Tiver Of Sal ccc oct Cemimessacesenecen eeine 12
NebePOCEP A oh5 coe casemate se doweees 550 | lividum, Taraxacum officinale .........--.. 561
rhopalocera......-.-..-.---.----.----. 550 | Lloydia serotina ...............-..-----. 571, 586
Leptochiton cancellatus.........-..-..---- 544 | Lobos Island, rookery on ....-....--- 274, 308, 313
Leptoclinus maculatus .......----.-------- 483 | Locality, instinct of ...............22-. 2-2. 70
Leptonyx monachus ......-....--.-------- 157 | Log books of pelagic sealers .........--. 251-261
leptorhynchus, Sarritor -.....-.....------ 474 | lonchitis, Aspidium ......-..-..2-2..-.2-.. 575
lepturus, Anarhichas.......-....----.----- 484 | Longipennes............ 022. 022222 eee eee 393
Macrourus .......-.-- pecs Saaissetse ioe 487 | longipes, Laminaria.............---. 591, 592, 596
Lessonia repens ......-......-----+ +--+ ---- 592 Stellarias. i eS tecuagcenasensedioce 564, 585
Lestoteuthis fabricii ..........-.---.------ 544 | longisquama, Carex lagopina ........-..--- 572
Lethotremus muticus ....--....--.---.---- 475 | Longspur, Alaskan.............---..---- 357, 422
leucichthys, Stenodus -.......-.-.--..----- 496 | Loon, black-throated...........-..-...---- 383
leucomenis, Salmo .....-..---.-------0---- 488 yellow-billed ..........-..---------+-- 383
-Salvelinus .....-.....-..------ 20-2 ---- 438 | Lota communis .......-..-...----.-------- 118
Jeucopsarum, Nannobrachium ...........-. 441 MACv1lOSA; . cca wc ve casa cose ees wees cies 486
Leucosticte griseonucha...-..--. 355, 362, 363, 426 | Louis Olsen, schooner ..............-...- 292, 308
Leuroglossus stilbeus -..........---.------ 440 | Love of offspring ...--...-..-...---..----- 72, 74
Libbie, schooner ....-..-..-.---------+-+-- 297 | Lucas, VP. A... 22-22-2220 02-- 1,39, 99, 102, 357, 360
ICHONS)2)3.cecoe else Setcmee cnt See 580 Breeding habits of Pribilof fur seal. . .. 43
coliected on St. Paul Island.....-...--- 583 Causes of mortality among seals ...-.. vi)
Ligusticum scoticum......-..-----.----- 567, 585 Dentition of fur seal ......-.-.....---- 9
linia, Purpura... ..02e0cesseecieceesdercse ses 543 Food of northern fur seals .........2-. 59
Limanda aspera. .....----..-- 222-02 eee 491 Main divisions of Pinnipedia.......... 1
proboscidea........--.. +--+. 0-2 +--+ 491 | Mental traits of Pribilof fur seal ...... 69
limatula, Yoldia.....-....--...--+.-+---- 545, 546 | Sealsfish yo. ics cjeisias'se seca esiereas 2ece 440
Limax (Agriolimax) hyberboreus...-..-.-. 544 | lucasi, Ceratocottus ..-.-....-..---...----- 459
Limicole sie seas ves sceeceeee nace 398 | lucidus, Argyrosomus .......---......----- 495
Limnea humilis ....-..------------2++ +--+ 544 | Lucilia cesar ..... jesennie tbe taincdiodersacines 280
OVata cece exes caked ace ec seme ceenienie’ 544 | Lucina acutilineata..._..-...-.......---- 543
Limnophilus sp ...-...----------- +++. ---- 552 | lucustre, Bryum ........-......-2. 2002 00e- 578
Limosa lapponica .....-..---------------+- 549 | luetkeana, Nereocystis .........---..--..-- 592
lapponica baueri .... -.-. 355, 363, 371, 405 | lugubris, Plectromus............--...----- 445
limula, Carex .......-22.0--5 .-2--2 eee eee 572,573 | Lukanin rookery, cows branded.........-. 326
Lindahl, Capt. Caleb ........-.-----..----- 312 pups branded ...-...-..-..---.--+- 56, 75, 326
lineata, Tonicella ........----------------- 542 | Lumpenus anguillaris .............--....-- 483
Linell, M. L., Coleoptera of Pribilofs..-.... 548 MACK BYT i502 ccs eigacdstemvancnsaacs 483
linita, Sticta ...........----- e222 eee eee eee 581 | medius......-.---.-------+--+--+-++- 483, 484
linnei, Sagina ......-.--- moneentiieas 560, 565, 585 MUDUWNS sos weve techssesctte eee 483
Lioconcha sp: ...-..-..---------------++---- 546 | lunaria, Botrychium .........-........-. 575, 586
Liocyma fluctuosa. ...-..---------------- 543, 546 | Lunatia pallida .......-...--...---.-...- 542, 546
Liopsetta glacialis ....-.-..--------- 491, 492,509 | Lundacirrhata..........-... 355, 362, 363, 369, 384
BEAT no ones been adaiin naam n nme Kaka 492 | Lupinus nootkatensis ........-...-.-.-.- 565, 585
Liparididew .......--..-----.----0e eee eee 475 | Lutz, Lieut. J.B... 22.2222. 2-22-2222 2. 360, 429
Liparis agassizii .........-...----------+-- 476 | Luzula arcuata var. unalaschkensis -.-_-. 572, 586
cyclostigma.........---------------- 476, 477 campestris var. multiflora ........... 572,586
BIDDUSS 5 cee erekndeccemoaicns eee ecole 476 confusa var. latifolia ..........-..-.. 572, 586
herschelinus ....-....----------+--+- 476, 504 | Lycenchelys..-.-.....-.-.---.--2---. 2200. 484.
pulchellus ....-.--..-...-.---------+-- 476 | lychneus, Theloschistes ...............-. 580, 583
tunicata ...-.. SitSad aco nat neces ied Aieiee 476 | Lychnis apetala..._........-.-..----.---.. 561
Ble Srl. csc ce onns ne tewiees Zasceein secs 475 apetala, var. glabra ........--.....-- 564, 584
liratus, Chrysodomus.-......--..-----+----- 543 | Lyciscus crotalinus ............--...2.2... 484
Lithodes brevipes.........---.-----------. 555 | Lycodalepis agassizii-........-..........-- 505
Litorina var. atkana .....-...-----.---+-0- 544 POVETIS 0 cis ac ricincad Bain ve socaaeanence 506
SIPKANAs sess eese ctw sceeaanedamwine 542, 544 tunicatus .....2.2. 002.0222 02 eee ee 505
614 INDEX.
Page. Page.
Lycodalepis turneri...-....----.---- 485, 505,506 | magnus, Nematonurus. ....---..----------- 487
Lycodapodid®.. 2-2 conc, bese ante sees 486 | major, Bombylius ....-.-.-.------------+-- 551
Lycodapus extensus. -....-..-.-.-.-------- 486 | Malacocephalus ..-....---..--.---------++- 487
PAPVICEPSo se se eins daeec tee sees 486 | Malacocottus zonurus ....-...-.-.--------- 468
Lycodes brevipes ..-.-..---. .----- +--+ +--+ 484 | Males, fertility of .......-.--.-----.------- 50
CONCOLOR oii ig cain eainssies cin tv ees aad EES 484 MALT Cree vibe sierra steieia soecudecee vs 45
COCCIDEUS:.. ccs wunises sais asin ox teee eke 485 MUM DOM Of 2 22 cele rede de Neececiee 53
GIP UGALUS sa ,ss.e cee eco ecaperase.s iw eels wi ees 484 BIZO seececsereercneaselnedsenetedeidecee= 3, 4,6
PAlEATIG sic: ssiesidisce dae ateo decades tee 494,485 | Mallard .cccc:eseucavsictesenea ses suaeeae sees 330
Lyconectes aleutensis ......-....-.-.------ 484 | Mallotus villosus.......-.--.---.---- 439, 493, 497
lycopodioides, Rhodomela..........-...--- 594 | malma, Salvelinus ......---..----..----- 438, 497
Lycopodium alpinum..........-.-..----- 575, 586 | Malva borealis ........---...------------- 282
annotinum var. pungens .....--.--.. 575,586 | Mammals of Pribilof Islands.............. 345
BOlACO ici. sca dusts Seeds Sessa eS 575, 586 | Manatee (Rytina) .....---.--..---------- 182-201
WY COSTM Mise qcndstdemeculeas cee eee ame bee 552 | Manatus inunguis:......-.--..---...-.---- 106
Lycosa septentrionalis .......-.......----- 552 | mandtii, Dermaturus......-.-..-.---.-.--- 555
AP) cee ccscie laws Seales sue seus sesame 279 | Maps, report on rookery.....-----.------ 321-324
Lysonia arenosa ......-.-.---.----.----. 543,546 | Margarita albolineata..._.....---..-..---- 544
Dy ratus, Yas oj. ein jsteise cisions onienicrs denen eee 555 beringensis.. 22:3. 22. 2.225. ces2 cash ene k 544
Lyrosoma opacum ...-...----..----.------ 549 Welicina so: y oi oeve terre Gee ae Se Ae 542
Lysianassid@ ...-... 2.22.2 -2-222 eee ee eee 557 8D! dehdeiiei cs wise seer ense Sere csee sees 546
Macartney, Lord ........-.-.---.-------+-- 318 BULIB GOs os cde Gas teegod cine ace ess 516
Macdonaldia challengeri ...-...-...-.----- 443 | marina rosa, Constantinea ......-.-.-..---- 595
macellaria, Comsomyia ...-..-----.-------- 280 | maritima, Krynitzkia ..........-.---.- 2... 283
macilenta, Spriontocaris......-.---.------- 557 Mertensia...-....-.-..----..---- 560, 569, 585
mackayi, Lumpenus..-.....---...--------- 483 | maritimus, Lathyrus .........--..-.- 560, 565, 585
mackenziei, Stenodus.........-..-..-.----- 496 | marmorata, Ulea...........-2.-2---- 22-22. 453
Macoma frigida ........--.-..---.--------- 543 | marmorea, Tonicella..........-...-..2+---- 544
INCONSPiChasessaaee': tei Sees ee 543 | martyni, Cingula............2--.---..----. 542
middendorfii ... 22. 00-04 sieeecevees 543, 546 | marmoratus, Cottus .....-....-...-.--2----- 463
NASW bari. 2 sass sosacistz ev ys eek aieewnisets 543 | Marptusa californica ....-..-..-.---...---- 279
BabulOsa.. 24 p22 rca wets ois ericee pees 545,546 | Mary Ellen, schooner ........--....---..--- 225
Macown, Mt. J, Mieccc. 22 cn nese esceue as 75, 93 | Mascot, schooner, log of -...-........-----.- 259
Plants of Pribilof Islands............. 559 | matzubare, Sebastodes.......-..-....----- 446
macounii, Papaver ......--.--..-.--.. 562, 563, 584 Sebastichthys ..-........---...-.-.- 445, 446
Poly GOnUMN oe) s.55 vicicwie ctinwie smc ease 570,586 | Maud S., schooner ......-..-.. 22-2 -..2---- 289
Primula. .....--....--...-.-....----- 569,585 | maxillaris, Murenoides.........-......--.. 480
macranthum, Polemonium pulchellum ... 569, 585 PROMS! ccenee paces sols gee. ee estacei nd 480
macrocarpa, Arenaria.......---.--------.-- 561 | Maynea brunnea .-......--...-....2...- -- 485
CY PICS US isesns cosy ceeeoneeeeeweees 283 | McDonald, Hon. Marshall...-..--........-. 285
macrocephalus, Gadus.........------ 486, 507, 508 | Measurements of seals..-...-....-......--. 3,4,7
macroceras, Cladonia gracilis....-.....--.- 582 | Meconopsis .-.....-.--..222-. 0002222002222 563
macrocheta, Carex...-...----.--------+- 573, 586 | media, Siliqua ...........2222. 220 .. eeeeee 543
macrodactyla, Oceanodroma leucorhoa .... 278 Stelaria: oo. cessed awe ncices owe decce 564, 584
Macrorhinus angustirostris.......-.- 109, 112,157 | medius, Lumpenus ..................22-- 483, 484
macroschisma, Pododesmus......-....----- 543 | mednius, Myoxocephalus ..._...........--- 465
Macronrida...-...-----.22.2--2. 2-22-22 --- 487 | Megalocottus laticeps .................-. 467, 503
Macrourus acrolepis......-..-...---.------ 487 platycephalus.............2222 22.22... 467
GNCTOUS) oon, cos, Sade heme ieancanecmaces 487 | Megaptera versabilis ..............2222-2.- 353
dorsalis ....-. shanseei eee shee siieceent 487 | melagonium, Chietomorpha.............-.. 590
NSPUNTOS wsosteaactes cidkeowecke ceases 487 | melanoleucus, Micropus ................-.- 278
maculatus, Leptoclinus .......2.2.....---- 483 | melanostictus, Psettichthys................ 490
maculoseriatus, Hexagrammos..--.....--.. 451 | melanurus, Careproctus .........-...2.22.- 478
maculosa, Lota..--....-2-2-2--2.-224-----5 486 | melitensis, Centaurea..............--.----- 283
macnlosus, Berosus.......---...----.------ 549 | Melletis papilio .......22..0000.000 0202202. 455
magnus, Ancistrolepis.................2-.. 543 | membranopacta, Carex .............-..-- 5738, 586
INDEX. 615
Page Page.
Mendenhall, Dr. Thomas C...--- ree 322 | mnioides, Tetraplodon.....-.....--...----- 577
Mental traits of seals..........-..-...----- 69 | Modiolaria vernicosa ................-2 20+. 548
Mentzelia micrantha ........-....----.---. 282 | Modiolus modiolus ..........-.---.-.-..--- 543
Merganser, American..............-...---. 378 | moerchianum, Buccinum cyaneum.......... 543
americanus........--....---- 355, 362, 363, 378 | mosrothica, Spergularia ...........-....-.- 281
Merriam, Dr. C.H -......-.. 59, 62, 64, 271, 360, 366 | molle, Dicranum ..........-.-------.------ 576
merriami, Alopecurus howellii.......---.. 578, 586 | Mollie Adams, schooner........:..--.-.---- 226
Mertensia maritima ...-.........---. 560, 569, 585 | mollis, Bothrocara......-.-....-.---+--.---- 485
mertensii, Cladophora ...........----.----- 590 PED GAT WS ose 5:5 ste ear djassia eres dienraepenate 560, 575, 586
CONPOE Vas 5 /oxcisesies cise doe Bae ea Scenes 590 | Mollusks of Commander Islands ..........- 544
COTTHB a a wicicierniers agsiegs mewsdcimewred eee 463, 466 | Mollusk fauna of Pribilof Islands .....-... 539
Merula migratoria ..........--.- 355, 362, 363, 420 | Monachus albiventer..........-.....-.-. 152, 153
Mesembryanthemum crystallinum ......... 282 tropicalis, brain of ...-...-.-....2.---- 35
Mesogloia ? ...-.--.2. 22-22 ee eee cece eee 591 | Monodon........---.----------2+ eee eee eee 107
Mesogramma sp.......-----------+-----+-- 279 MOMNOCETOS ...... ------ +. eee ee ene 121, 124
Mesoptiles ......--...----- +--+. ---++-- 356, 424,431 | Monodonta..........-.---- ---- 0-2 eee eee 164
Mesopus olidus......---.-----.--------2--5 440 | Monodontus.........--..----.------.------ 164
Oli GOD ON (0.5 esis ence: ace ieee Re 440 semicircularis..-.......--.....-------- 164
\protiosus ....-..---.------. +--+. -6ee- 440 | monopterygius, Pleurogrammus ........... 453
Migkink® s(ci52 2:ccc:ccce 2k 22.2acceeee eter 475 | Monostoma splendens ......-..-..-------.- 590
micrantha, Mentzelia.....-.-..-.-.--.----- 282 | Monoxia consputa..........-...--..------- 279
microcarpa, Webera canaliculata ........-. 578 | monspeliensis, Polypogon......-...-.-.---- 283
microcarpum, Racomitrium............--.- 577 | montagui, Pandalus .......-......---.....- 557
microcaulon, Webera......-------- +--+ ---- 578 | montereyensis, Styela ........-...-...--..- 517
microcephalum, Trifolium..........-...-.- 282 | Montia fontana ........---.----. 560, 562, 565, 585
microcephalus, Gasterosteus ....-.......... 444 | Morchellium .......-..-....----.------ 22-5 524
Somniosus .......--------.. 434 | Morrell’s voyages ........-.. 278, 309, 311, 313, 317
microdon, Cyclothone ...--....--.-.-.---.- 441 ; Morrill, M. M., schooner, seals taken........ 233
microdontium, Pogonatum alpinum........ 579 log Of secsssimaciees ova eee seeeeseesnwemes 259
Microgadus proximus ..........-.---.----- 508 | moschatum, Erodium.................---.- 282
microlepis, Antimora --..------.----------- 487 | Mortality in adults.........-...... ee
microplephare, Orthotrichum.....----.---- 577 biting and mauling
micropoda, Carex .........--.------------- 572 from bruises ........--..-..----.-.----
Micropus melanoleucus..-.....------------- 278 due to blue fox......--....-.-..--.2.-- 342
microstoma, Uranidea ....-..--.----------- 461 causes of, in young. -.-- 78, 79, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86
Microstomatide....-..---.----------++---- 441 ID COWS oc ee parsisinsigis 2 oi 'snore sew eeeeeaess 91
Microstomus pacificus..-.--.-------------. 492 death rate ...--........2--02 222s eee ee 81, 94
middendorfii, Delesseria ......--------.---- 595 from drowning ..........---....---- 83, 84, 85
middendorffii, Macoma .....-....-.-------- 543 from erysipelas.-.-.---..---.--....---- 89
Strombella. .ciccc ncccejesssieseese wancien = 543 falling from cliffs ....-.......2-.....-. 88
Migration of Pribilof birds ...........-... 369 from falling rocks.........-...-2-.---- 88
Migration of seals affected by food .-....-. 67 from full meal ........-..2--..-....02- 80
Comparison of routes ....--...--.----- 234 from jamming........-.--.---.-2...... 88
Milk, sole food of young seals. .--...-.-.-- 189 from the killer............2.2.....--2. 92, 93
millefolium, Achillea ......-.-.---------- 568, 585 in females... 00. one ese nee eee vene 90, 91, 92
millefolia, Gilia multicaulis.....-.-.-----.. 283 specific diseases..........- 0.2222 .2222- 86
Miller, Walter....-.-.-.---.--- -------- e+e 179 from starvation .........-.......... 82, 85, 89
Miller, Jennie Emerson....--.------------- 179 from trampling ...-.....-..2..22.22.-. 85
miniatus, Sebastodes ---...---..-------+--. 446 from Uncinaria .........---.. 78, 79, 80, 81, 89
Minium subglobosum .....---------------- 579 tables of causes ......-.--.-.-.-----... 97, 98
minor, Pyrola ...-..--++-----0--0-200 22) 568,585 | Moser, Jefferson F., Lieut. Commander,
minutus, Cottus ......-...--.-------- 2-2-5 461 rookery maps of Pribilof Islands ........ 321
minytremus, Gyrinichthys......--.-------- 479 | moseri, Verasper ...-...--.-....2-..-+--- 490, 491
Mirabilis californica ........--------.----- 283 | Mosopus olidus ......-......----..--.2-204 497
mirabilis, Crystallichthys ....--.---------- 476 | Motacillide.....--..-....-.. 0022.2 22 eee ee 421
mitra, ACMLA ...... cece ee cere eeeeeeeeeeee- 542 | Mouse, house .-..........--.--.. 20002000. 348
616 INDEX.
Page. Page.
Movement of seal herd .......-..-------+--- 67 | Nectocrangon alaskensis. ..-.--.----------- 556
multiflora, Luzula campestris...-..-----. 572, 586 CTASSA ---- ---- 2-2 eee eee ee eee eee ee 556
murale, Chenopodium. ..-.-..----.-------- 283 0) ee 556
Muraenoides maxillaris ....--.-.-.--.----- 480 | Nelson, E. W....-.---.---.----+----- 360, 370, 427
muricata, Cwlotaxis -.......-----.-------- 279 Papere bys 2.cecsncsseeeerctced caiee eee 428, 429
MiB ooce 2 dennidetenedinnamem Sarccetee rea 35 | nelsoni, Coregonus ....-.--.------------- 436, 494
murinum, Hordeum .....-. ..-.------------ 283 | nelsoniana, Saxifraga ......---..---.--.- 566,585
Murray, Col. Jos.....--.---.------ 81, 93, 325, 326 | Nematoda.........-.--.---+--- 222+ eee eee 101
Experiment in branding and herding Nematoidenm ......-.-----. +--+. --------+-- 164
KOMI s bacon ddeee ake eeeee beled ek 336 salmonis eperlani .........------------ 118
Murre, California......-.---.-------. eee eee 389 | Nematonurus magnus ...-..-.-..--.------- 487
PAIaS'S! o.22)-4 cencceta tates tassceadtite © 390 | Neoliparis callyodon ......-...-..----.---- 475
Murrelet, Ancient ...........---------.--+- 389 CYCIOPUS socess ce eseecsceeece sees eesees 476
Black-throated......-.---.-.-.-------- 389 | Neossoptiles ......-..- seseaseees 365, 356, 424, 431
Mus musculus.....-.------. 2-2-2 2206+ 348 | Nereocystis luetkeana.-.-......-..-------- 592
Musca domestica..........-.-----.-------- 551 | nerka, Oncorhynchus............---------- 436
MuUstid ise oxcaane2 nsniced sedaiecseieeee 551. | Nerves, cranial 2.2 2.2225 ¢2222 veces vez 23
mutabile, Amaraucium ....-.....-.-------- 528 olfactory .s22..c0se eee seeesseecvey tees 23
muticus, Lethotremus ...--.....--.--.----- 475 | Nesodraba grandis ..........-..-.--. 580, 563, 584
Mya (BUN CAba as. a2 gecesi eee eee dee 543 | Nettion carolinense ....-.....-.. 355, 362, 363, 380
Myctophidee ..---. 2.20.2 22. eee eee ee eee 441 | Neuroptera .............---------0---- 00+ 552
WYKISS, SAMO» 00 a. 22 os oe taidiceinsucearcnneeis 487 | nevinii, Galla .— 2... 2-06 ocees% cacens'ee ne 283
Myodes albogularis ..........---.....----- 347 | Neverita saxea..........-.------.--------- 546
helveolus ......-....----.------------- 847 | Nichols, Capt. H. E., U. 8. N.......-...... 265
NIOTIPCS ssc ccsceaen ea De fehGisajatetindeaareiats 346 | nigrum, Empetrum .......-.......-. 561, 571, 586
OD OW SIS iis ee siecespareisie ao sleet; kidisiedsysisensiereie 347 | niger, Cottus ....-...---.-.----------. -5-- 463
trimucronatus ......---..----.---.---- 347 Myoxocephalus ..........-.-.-.------- 465
Myoxocephalus axillaris.........---..... 466,500 | nigripes, Lemmus............-.-.---.----- 346
HAO aioe e es ecaper meee bese acini 449, 462, 464 MYO066 ws 0: 2 2s ee becise Pee ee ree 346
INCOMING espe ciitiediemieceea see ttcicatleeeens 465 | nigripinnis, Bathyagonus ..-.----..-.---.- 475
niger... css Sop ees Sbe tients cee eee cies 465 | Niles, JamesN ..-.-..---..---.-----+--+--- 270
NIVOSUB 225.2 spt nse dees eici tears cea 461 | Nitophyllum ruprechtianum.........-..... 594
polyacanthocephalus ...-.....-.- 463, 464, 499 PUCNENICUM oicie'side.s Hes egeites eens soeeee 594
StOlleLt weey ewesenveaienn ose swed esee 463, 464, 465 | nivalis, Cetraria .....-...-....---.---.---- 580
Verrucosus ..-.. -.....-..--..---- 466, 493, 499 Primula) ccce seul eaiguc ode eheeeseaee 569
Mypomesus.. -.-.- .-2--- 222-02. e eee eee eee 440 Ranunculus.........--.-. 22-222 +22. 562, 584
Mytilus edulis: 2 2.es222 eyes eeecsececa scene, B48 SAPNA 2 occ viscse besce Settee cose 565, 585
Na1aVI CBee seies excue cede wa yeas dss eee seme 584 | nivosus, Cottus .......-....-2-2-2--2-.02-- 461
namaycush, Cristivomer ......-..-.....---- 4138 Myoxocephalus .....2..--2.-..--2----- 461
Nannobrachium leucopsarum -......--.---- 441 | nootkatensis, Lupinus ...............--. 565, 585
NANNOCHIY «4:2 see ec acees etemee es sees 441 | norvegica, Carex..-...---.2..2-2--.2---- 572, 586
Nasturtium palustre._....... - oh eee deed axe 563-584 | Nordenskiéld, A. E., Bering Sea birds . ...- 430
nasuta, Macoma.......-.--.-..-.---.-...-. 548 | Norgaard, Dr....-.......2222....222.----- 95
Natica clausa -..-.......-222.-0--..-- 542, 544,546 | Normandia letevirens...............----.- 583
DUSSA) 22 -e gc wee eoeseeinon yess eiot ed 542, 544 | Northeast Point Rookery............ 80, 86, 89, 90
Nautichthys oculofasciatus..........-.-. 468, 469 | Notacanthide......... 2.22. .2.0.. 022222 eee 443
NOUbISCUB: co. sci aslissnnckeossesues execs vac 469 | notospilotus, Astrolytes ..-:............-.- 456
pribilovius--........-.-..---..-.-..-.. 468 | Noyes, Capt. W.P 2.2. 002. 2.0... eee eee 273, 310
navaga, Eleginus..........-...-...---.-. 487,507 | nubilus, Lumpenns...........2....--.2220- 483
Nearctie subregion..............-.---.---. 363 | Nuenla (Acila) ermani............-2..-.2-. 546
nebulosa, Synidotea .........22..2.2-2..... 557 TOWNS acc ccccssaid neces costae wees a... 546
nebulosus, Chiropsis ............-..-.....- 448 | nugax, Anonyx.......... -...2.22 022 eee ee 557
Enedrias...... ppd aeons asset foes Toes 482 | Number of days of pelagic sealing........ 245-250
Nebria carbonaria..-.......2..22........-- 548 | Numenius borealis ........5....- 355, 362, 363, 407
WHPO TLS: s ines aeccetizt ave medesewes aie ce od 548 FOMOPANIS ii Laaisewew veGicde eeeicee Sees 370
NOOK: os02 vie ceee cee vac bweseeees Sewes cece 1, 2,3 hudsonicus...............6.. 355, 362, 363, 407
IND
Page
NUPSING wcsioc-scncien see see eeceg eee ccynigns 47, 73
Nutans, Webera-so2eii0 cccocuueaveeee cece 578
nuttallii, Cardium...-....--.-.-.-----.--.- 543
Nyctea nyctea .....-..---..-.--- 355, 363, 364, 419
obcordata, Salix arctica ...-.....--.-.----- 571
obensis, Lemmus ........---.------ ------+ 346
My 0d G8' x ceriius cca ee ecisie eee gereensety 347
obscoena, Calliphora.......-..-.--.---.---- 551
obscura, Liopsetta Spisinaipedisiiavintsn ots cies 492
obscurus, Pleuronectes --...-......--- ice OE
Observing seals ........---.--------------- 302
Obtusa, Raja... so. nscccuiciecicny waeriseacneay 435
obtusifolium, Bryum .......-.--.----.----- 579
Occa dodecaédron....-...-.-.-----.----- 470, 471
VOLINCOSA a iniee eee ecesews woes 470, 471
occidentalis, Larus......---..--.---------- 278
Oceanodroma furcata ........... 355, 362, 363, 383
Oceanodroma leucorhoa macrodactyla..... 278
ocellatus, Opisthocentrus......---.-------- 480
ochotensis, Idotea ....-.-... 2-2 --------5-- 557
octogrammus, Hexagrammos ......-. 449, 450, 452
Octopubes « a2scsccccocsncmcwenc coma nce cee 63
oculata, Lecanora ..........-.------..----- 581
oculofasciatus, Nautichthys ......-..--.. 468, 469
OdObCNUS ..22. cose ed cond cacime te eswenen sane 107
rosmarus ....-.-.--- 108, 109, 110, 139, 152, 155
Odonata asc censdcasedenetahecametaecins 552
Odonthalia kamtschatica.......---...----. 594
Odostomia sp ......-. 2-22-0222 -eee eee ee 546
officinale, Taraxacum ....-.--..--------- 568, 585
officinalis, Cochlearia .........-.-..- 560, 563, 584
_| Euphrasia ......-.-.-..------+---+-- 570, 586
olerascens, Sonchus .-.....--....--------+- 283
Olfactory lobes .---.------- 22-2 - eee eee eee 39
MOEVOS) wacsiiraiecnidrcacisdcresaisineeaeseeet 33
olidus, Mesopus..-...-.-.----..---+----- 440, 497
oligodon, Mesopus ...--...---.-.---------- 440
Oligomeris subulata....-..--....-0-.+----+ 281
On anus...) ecceecesasenewsie seeee ein 164
* Olophrum fuscum .......-..-.---------+--- 549
Olor columbianus....-.....-..-. 355, 362, 363, 381
Ommatostrephes ...-...-..------------ eee 544
Oncocottus hexacornis ...---.-.-.-.. 467, 501, 503
QNACTiCOMIG see oueseenceccee seni eecss 502
Oncophorus wahlenbergii ...-....-..-...- - 576
’ Oncorhynchus gorbuscha............-..- 436, 497
Metal caisiscsyarcic strswiagicin asarareadham me nese ei 436
KISNtGh jose cide acsacerceccmcngceeete teins 436
NOP KA ccicac sawwin cma cesses eseetes 436, 497
techawytscha........- 2.22. eeee eens 436, 437
Qn ychotenthis co. s::ccic ganic cercivicie gesaee 542
Onychoteuthis robusta .........----..----- 542
opacum, Lyrosoma ......--.--------s0.-+-- 549
Ophiostoma. .... 2... ----- 2-2 cece eens eee ee 105
opilio, Chioncctes ..........-.----------+- 555
Opilionida ............ wie nine erwin we wees 552
aX. 617
Page.
Opisthocentrus ocellatus.................- 480
quinquemaculatus ..........-.....-2-. 480
HONIG ee cceysrcrtare ae eae 480
Ophthalmia, infectious ..-...........-..--. 95
Opuntia prolifera..-.........2.....---- 282
orbis, Eumicrotremus .................---. 475
Orea gladiator ... 20. -.--0-.esees seeeeeeces 353
ordinatus, Chirus.......-.-22 0202. 02..00-- 449.
Hexagrammos .......-..---..----.---- 449
Hexagrammos octogrammus.......-... 448
Oregonia gracilis........--.2-2----22..020-- 555
oregonense, Tritonium ..-.-......-....... 542, 544
orientalis, Anarhichas ....-........-...-.-- 484
ornatus, Pholis.--....----..2-.2----.-+---+ 481
Ornithological history of the Pribilof Is-
NaHS eccacevececenesiciauiseniunanctemeacewe 360
ornithopus, Hosackia ..........----------- 282
Orthocephalus saltator........---.-22.-22. 552
Orthotrichum laevigatum .........-.-....- 517
microplephare .........-...2..-++22+-- 577
Osborn, A. P., Lieut. Commander. -......... 276
Osborn, H.,on Acarinaof Pribilof Islands... 553
Osmerus albatrossis -.....-...---.--..----- 439
Gentex, cc nccusctentaondese 439, 493, 497, 498
eperlanus ......--.. 222.222.2022 ---0--- 118
thaleichthys ......-......--.---.------ 440
ostentum, Careproctus.........-.----.----- 478
otakii, Hexagrammos......-....----.---- 451, 453
OPAL Ais aise aiibisst ined aaysesinnae nba temaanwiae 107
jubata .-......2.22..2... 107, 121, 125, 143, 152
jubata, brain............-.--2-22-.--.. 35
OURTIOID Bo. cie seereneeceomed dese ze 1
Otter Island, ornithologically considered... 357
ovalifolia, Salix ....-.....2.---.-2..--06- 571, 586
ovata, Limnea.......-.-...----2 0-22-22 eee 544
Owl, short-eared .-.......... 222.0220 -2-0-- 419
SNOWY seese. ie sae eed eccineetesdences 419
Oxycottus ..... ipa can Neeser Gnaikce Seerepane 468
ACULLCODS: seceee veraces. Sica eee ened 767, 468
OMDEYUM Sac ssscax cewisieecicine cigain seine 468
Oxyria reniformis........--..-.-......-- 571, 586
Pacific herring ... 2.502000 ceseeecesens cone 435
pacifica, Artemisia norvegica ............ 568, 585
Cadling 2. seco esc seeesaeaeecicncs 544
pacificus, Artediellus ......... 2 sipiresbieraices eke 454
Thaleichthys ............. Aue See Stare 439
Pagophila alba........--......... 355, 362, 364, 395
Pagurus alaskensis..............-.-.. 0. 5BD
aleuticus 555
brandtii 555
confragosus 555
OU iscsi se cnanccvaaeseeeee cece aaee 555
rath bunt .n os vecscnssierncsmemccee nec 556
splendescensS......--. 02-22. -.2.-.---- 556
trigonocheirus ..........--.. 222.022... 556
UNGOBUS secsscnierscmsaemccnesicd soe encore 256
618 INDEX.
Page. Page.
Pain, insensibility to ..............-.------ 71 | pauper, Patula ruderata...........--..---- 544
palaeno, Colias..-...-.-.-.-.-----------+-- 550 | Pebbles in stomachs...-...----.--...------ 59
Palaearctic subregion. -..........--------- 363 | Pecten islandicus ......-...-.-..---------- 545
palearis, Lycodes .-..-...--------..----- 484, 485 BtTAtO SUS 2 cece sini cee ee aces sees sees 543
pallasi, Clapear...2/:c.<.2edsnieseaue dee scene 435, 494 | pectinator, Blepharoptera .........---.---- 552
pallasii, Amicula ...--....-2-.---.0--------- 542 PHO bai s sisces 2:2 21d eee le tine winter sie icine Seisseue 594
pallasii, Ranunculus .-....-.-.. Saeihe area 562,584 | pectoralis, Albatrossia.....-...-..--..----- 487
Pallasimaaix 25.0. ..cccsscceed eens ose pees 472, 504 | Wali: 52253 ors. 2 enna ly dzeib eae saues weeeares 443
APD AGA ze's sce dacceclenieaueeauediansade 471,504 petropauli, Blenniophidium.......-.-...... 480
pallida, Lunatia......-.....--.-.--2--+--- 542,546 Pedicularis lanata ..............---- 561, 570, 586
Palmer, William, avifauna of the Pribilof langsdorfii ....---...---.-.------ 561, 570, 586
4 TSIAN Sys Sasiss. cueredeoWaensensereod aes 355 | BUCSHICA. a accmeces. neces node eel o 560, 570, 586
palmeri, Atriplex.........---..222---2-0-+5 283 | verticillata .........2..2-2..---- 561, 570, 585
palmeri, Racomitrium microcarpum........ 577 Pelagic sealing............--2.---------- 223, 224
Paludicolw ._.....--...0--- 02020222222 eee 398 | American vessels............02-- 2-5 227, 228
palustre, Conarum .......-..-.-..------- 566, 585 | in American waters .....-.-. 232, 233, 243, 262
Nasturtium ............... sae asee 563, 584 annual catch...........22.-2.0 2202-05. 228
palustris, Viola ......-.-..-.-.-----.------ 564 | authorities quoted -.....--.......--- 263, 264
Pandalus borealis .---..........--...+----- 557 | Canadian fleets.......-....20-2-------- 227
apiier sso. eeiee ce adeee ese ance BBT | catch 2.0... 2220.22 eee 243, 262, 286, 287, 289,
MONAPUL oc. shee Ssibescececes aciees 557 292, 293, 295, 298, 299, 300, 301
Pannaria brunnea..........-.-.---.------- 581 catch, American herd..............---. 262
pannosum, Polychrium .....-.--. 519, 521, 532, 536 catch, Asiatic herd................-.-. 262
Papaver macounii...........-...-... 562, 563, 584 Canadian catch ......-....-2..-----.-- 226
nudicaule var. arcticum .....-....---.- 562 Commander Islands -.......-...-...- 226, 250
radicatum .......-..--..-.-. 561, 562, 563, 584 excess of females in catch.........-.. 235
papillaria, Cladonia ....-.......----.--.--- 583 off Farallones...........2... 2222-22-45 232
papilio, Melletis 22.0.2 s.<ceesceus sees sceysce 455 STOUNIS 2a ci cccwatceeenoeeeereey cus 282
papillosa, Aeolida .........-....-..--2.+--- 544 grounds, relation to fishing banks. .... 234
pardoxus, Psychrolutes......---..---.----- 469 implements used-.............-------- 229
Paraliparis cephalus ......-...22..2--..2-- 479 | log books of fleet.......-2.-22. 2.22. 252-264
holomelas.......-22.--22 2-22 -++- 20200: 479 | lost vessels .....222..2...22.2..2..-... 280
: nae near see es 479 | methods of hunting... 229, 232, 233, 243, 286, 287
arasites of fur seal .-......-.-.-.2-.------ 79 | off Japan coast............. 22)
marine mammals..............-------- 168 pane ion wba Wiaas area aces ‘ ean = a
Pardosa pellita.....-.....-2-.-2---+-222-0-- 552 skins, inspection of.....-........... 235, 237
parkei, Salvelinus malma ..............-.- 438 skins, value of ...........-........---. 251
Parmelia physodes, var. vittata .......-..- 581 BOABON -- 2. ee ee eee cece cece 232
SAXOILB canes Don cnsde oeaeen acess 581 off Vancouver Islands. .............-.. 293
saxatilis, var. suleata.......-.-.....-- 581 vessels employed............ 223, 224, 227, 233 *
parmifera, Raja....... 2... -2..------- 434 wastefulness of ................. ee ” 950
Parnassia kotzebuei...-...--.-..---..--- 567,585 | Peltigera apthosa......................--. 581
parryi, Primula.-..........2.2.--0- 0-22 000- 569 CANIN coho ols che re cccetleeeaein arc eto sree 581
parviceps, Lycodapus ..........--.---..--- 486 canina, var. spongiosa...............-. 581
parvula, Iridaea laminariodes ..........--- 593 | Peltigera canina, var. spuria............... 581
parygra, Pertusaria ........-....-.22.----- 682) Pelvis: ccc sis. gece sche aie vauiseemewue: oe 21
PASSCTES 2.22000 $5 2 ocd de endsemee nee aiaiccne 420 | Pendleton, Captain ....................... 317
Passerina townsendi ......-- 355, 361, 362, 363, 423 | pendulum, Bryum......................... BIB
patina, Acmaea .-----. 0.2... --20 22. 02222. 5d4 | Penelope, schooner, seals taken by...... 2 238
Acmaea ochracea.......-.. --------- 542) penshinensis, Salmo_..._.................. 437
Patrobus septentrionis .......-.........-.. 548 | peploides, Arenaria................. 560, 564, 584.
Patten, Captain........... 0000000000. 315 | Perca fluviatilis..................... "118, 139
Patula ruderata var. pauper..-.....-...... 544 vatiabilis...............-....... : 445
patulus, Glycymeris...... eee te eee eee e eee 546 | Percis japonicus ..............._.. ee 475
paucifiora, Corydalis...--.-...-.......-. 563, 584 | peristethus, Podothecus................... 473
Hierochloa.........-.-2-2.--02--208- 578, 586 | Peritrachelius ..........._.. 103, 107, 128, 131, 138
INDEX. 619
<q
Page. . Page.
Peritrachelius insignis ....--...-.-..--.. 107, 138 | Pholis dolichogaster ...-.............-...- 481
LY PICUS). «6 s)isieacetieseeeecnganeonces 127, 182 WANUIATIS ois Socio eeeeuae eeeeetecious 480
Perityle californica -.-...--.-...-...+----- 283 GTNG GUS: sevcneewascapeawaesasmcecjacieen 481
GIMOTY. crcicisiescscpeisidinictsmith asia eee ecisucie aoee 283 PLCEUS) can cnct ces shaciietcerceretcnstse cnet 481
LAY ce cid iminchiarayarersieitipsd nici sieisuieieie Sisdaimieiors 283 ruberrimus .--......-......2..---..--. 482
ADCO Bhs ioccie ais aperscicced cisinetcneaee ase & eee 282 HONIG cons ceman sea sedge memaase 480
Perla bicaudata.......-.--.-----.--2------ 552 | Phryganeide ..........--.-22. 22-2 --2.---- 552
Pertusaria panygra .......--.---.--------- 582 | Phycodromidwy..-.-.........2-2-22.-------- 552
BPR secre slain accseicnastacidicatiare miatenrds sole aietes 582 | phylicoides, Salix ..-............--..2..- 571, 586
Petasites frigida ...... ....--...----- 560, 568, 585 | Phyllospadix 281
personatus, Ammodytes ..........--.---- 443, 498 WOTPOYD vincicciseacecrecie aan SS crore aston 283
Argyrosomus ......-.-.----.-----0---- 499 | pictus, Centronotus ......-...2.2.22..202.- 481
PQDTOIB 5 o32:6 s,ci¢ ciaercierdisiwieszeunie egies scieadaeeie cieen 291 PHOLIS 2 seca minm aieminmcas eis eaicaaaninisis 481
Petros, [Van <2. cc2ccisuccieceseceeees 2... 339, 340 Urocentrus.---.-..--2.---- 02-222 02-08: 481
Petromyzonide -......-.--.-.----.-------- 434 | Piliscus commodus -........-.--.---.+----- 544
Pezomachus Sp.....--.---- ee. ee ee ee eee 550 | Pilophorus robustus......-....--.---..---- 582
Phacelia floribunda .........-.....--.----- 283 | pilosa, Acanthodoris. .........--..-------- 544
Phaenogams, list of species......-.----.--- 562 | pingeli, Triglops ....-. ..-.....------+.----, 455
Phaeophyceae...---. -.-- +--+ 22-2. eee eee 591 | pinguedineus, Pterostichus ....-.-...-.-.-- 548
Phalacrocoracidae........---..--.--------- 373 | Pinnipedia, main divisions of.............. 1
Phalacrocorax urile..... 355, 362, 363, 373, 430, 431 | Pinus insignis, var. binata.........-....--. 283
Phalarope, northern ........-.-.----.----- 399 | Pipit, American .......-..---.-.----------- 421
POd gasnce ances see se ceeds eee 370, 899 | Pipilo consobrinus ......-----.------------ 278
Phalaropodidae -.....-...----.------------ BO9N | PistGvanl <,<\:2.0,2,2Se cg oneascse oecey loans memece 541
Phalaropus lobatus ....-..-- 355, 362, 363, 364, 399 | pistilliger, Gymnocanthus ..-.......--..- 460, 503
Phalérine® 23)... seen peeekeces sess ck He 364, 369 | Placirphorella stimpsoni .......--.-..----. 544
phasma, Careproctus........---.----.----- 478 | Placodium elegans ...--.....---.---..----- 581
“Pheasant” H.B.M.8 ........---.-------- 93 | Plagiothecium pulchellum -.........-..... 579
Phegopteris polypodioides ......--..---- 575, 586 | Plagyodontide ...........-2.--. 2-2. ------ 442
Philacte canagica.......---- 355, 362, 363, 371, 381 | Plagyodus esculapius ........----.---.---- 442
Philonotis fontana .----......----.-------- 577 | Plantanista cee sone seesax ceeeeus ceey cess 107, 108
Phippsia algida....-....---..-----.-.+-- 574, 586 gangetica. 108, 121, 122,123,125,159,160,162,163
Phleum alpinum ..... Jievem daee selesuou eee 574,586 | Plants of Guadalupe Island..-...-.-..-.. 265, 281
PHOCBoocjeweoerceee wees 34, 35, 38, 103, 105, 107, 108 of the Pribilof Islands .......--....--. 559
barbata. (See Erignathus barbatus.) Platanus........------ Gsesaciesacumse seek 283
DEAD cesiccicecieicesie detec eeew eens 38, 39 | platessa, Pleuronectes .....-.......-.---..- 491
foetida ........------------- 109, 110, 152, 153 | Platichthys stellatus.........-.-......-. 492, 509
groenlandica ... 109, 110, 113, 152, 153, 154, 158 | platycarpus, Fucus ..-......----...-.-.--.. 598
gryphus (See Halichoerus grypus). platynus, Chondrus ......--......--..-...- 593
hispida. (See P. foetida.) platycephalus, Cottus ......-...----..--.-. 463
largha .3-.-....--------+ 103, 109, 110, 113, 351 Megalocottus .--..---...-..---.-----.. 467
monachus. (See Monachus albiventer.) PIAUbG seinciancaacisc tatcca peveecparctoncinte: xegeteieiy 364
pantherina.........22.------ +--+ 152, 153, 157 IMPONDIS: <a. ccceccstateseswavsecce veces 369
UPBING a5. c sce weincais vewiesereanicue inten 2,201, 218 | Plectromus lugubris ....-.....-.-.-------- 445
VEGUIND iocccios cascececmces eeeeneene 105, | plectrum, Buccinum ..........--.----..-++-- 546
109, 110, 113, 152, 153, 154, 156, 157, 265, 351 | Pleurogrammus monopterygius............ 453
vitulina brain ....--...--.---.---.--:. 27 | Pleuronectes obscurus....... patna eelctacuialpigiate 492
PhOGRNA) ho caciecsuiieseeawe cwseseaoweune 107, 123 PIRLESBF sca cctacmeesetawine nem esta were 491
communis. ..----..---.----------6--+-- 353 quadrituberculatus ..........-.. 491, 508, 509
communis (See Phoceena phocena). Pleuronectidw ............- ane are were 488
PHOCRN A. wos viaieaianie cee nen sniciew a eaves 102, | Pleurotoma beringi ...........-...---..... 543
121, 123, 124, 125, 126, 127, 134, 142, 162 CIPCINALD. ong ones sees eecsuewes ‘een “548
Phocoidea .....-----..---.--+--- asieneeiaeaes 1 | plicata, Ahnfeldtia............--2. 222.022. 593
Pholidapus-dybowskii -....-....---.------ 480 | Plumaria asplenioides..................... 594.
grobnitskil .00 2001-26 ees0 ce esos ceneee 480 | plumarius, Archistes ...-... sigs dea eeciret tut 454.
Pholis faciatus........-c2ececces cece nenene 480 | plumosa, Ptilota............ 2-2... scdouiciss 594
620 INDEX.
Page. Page.
pluto, Callilepsis...--.....-...22..-------- 279 Porphyra laciniata var. umpbilicalis.......- 593
POG BEOUIO -woresdndes cept de taddeeuacess 574,586 | Porp0ise..cci0 veces sceces ceeens eisees cee ete 121
CHCS1 ais madiaisivnavenns Weey ae ac cmiaeddeiee 574, 586 | Porpoise, Harbor.-..-..-..-----------+----- 353
GIUMOTIO.g206 corse cee teciteemen eines 574, 586 | Potentilla anserina.....-..-.....---- 560, 565, 585
POUTCIPIDE: svacsiccs carciens cae pce anecce sueies? ~ 383 emarginata ....-.---. +--+ .2-062----- 566, 585
podocarpa, Carex......-.-.---------------- 573 fragiformis ...-....-..-------------- 566, 585
Pododesmus macroschisma ......-----.---- 543 VILLOB 8: sia:ca-nssiserce ceases ee tiewmbeens 561
Podothecns accipiter........---..----.---- 474 ; Potamogeton filiformis .....-....---..-.-.- 572
acipenserinus -..-..--.--.----------- 473, 474 praelonga, Alaria .......--...---.---.----- 592
CUVEL ccccaciocsaveesnecenaanaqead 473, 474 | Prasiola crispa........---------- eee eee ee 590
TAM T wisciavaraainscisisas reece wernelsicieee s 472 | pratensis, Cardamine..........---.---.-- 563, 584
peristethus .....-.-.-------- 22 ------ 473 | pretiosus, Mesopus .....---.--------- saboieiers 440
THOMPSON: sschase aceon fececenisiesaciezed 473 . Prentiss, D. W., jr .-...----. ---- 22-2 eee eee 360
VOCUPIUG. nici e see cee dine dmnenicivieeunterne 474 Pribilof birds, geographical distribution of. 363
Pogonatum alpinum ............---..----- 579 © SO aL: sono uaedseeehasap eee wisbeieceee cess 4
alpinum, var. microdontium....-..-... 579 | Sealing grounds.....-..---...----.---- 234
alpinum, var. septentrionale ........-. 579 pribilofensis, Sorex.........-----.--------- 345
dentatum ....-...---..----2-------- 2+ 579 | pribilovense, Amaroncium...-..-...-.--- 528, 536
POVAE WOOP ssn < naie: areas dawiaiesien ove bresseiee ines. 354 CATOR chaz unac eka eeinide sis yseetes aces 572
polare, Buccinum ......-..-.-.---.------ 545,546 | pribilovius, Nautiscus .........---.------ 468, 561
polaris, Lycodalepis...--..--.-...--------- 506 Primula eximia...--..---.---.------ 568, 569, 585
Spirontocaris ....-...-----.--.-.------ 557 macounii....-.-----. deine aejeeag ENE 569, 585
POLOHIGHI DI 2.5352 2:10 o-cinre arcisieie va sige aihiaie 561 NiVAlIGi = ccccccewcd kos esesacesusGgatess 569
caeruleum, var, grandiflorum ......- 569, 585 PALLYL gaceweicaadecos 2 see oes ace ese 569
pulchellum, var. macrenthum. .-...-. 569,585 Prince Edward Island, sealing off.......- 307-315
Pollachius chalcogrammus. (See Theragra Pristoseelis: sp) sac psceccesiamed coe segsenae8 279
chaleogramma. ) proboscidea, Limanda ........---..--.----- 491
Pollock: ..2 0.0/5.2 200 wantewe 59, 62, 63, 65, 68, 300, 305 , Umbilicaria......--...----. Pecalcaeiereieias 581
Polovina, rookery ...-......-.------ 52,75, 80,81 Procellariide .--........22.2..2-----20025- 382
polyacanthocephalus, Cottus...-......---. 762 | procumbens, Sibbaldia ....-....-.....--. 565, 585
Myoxocephalus ...-...-..----.-- 463, 464,499 | Prodelphinus ...--...-.---.----.---- 108, 127, 130
polyactocephalum, Bryostemma ......-.-..- 479 | profundorum, Zesticelus....-......-.-----. 467
polyactocephalus, Blennius............-.-- 479 ' Prognurus cypselurus .....-.---.--.-..----- 478
Polycarpa. ccsrsceacecessex ve seee ees sees se Bld | prolifera, Opuntia._..........-22.-2-.-..-- 282
Polyclinumn aurantium ..........-.--....-- 521 | propinqua, Cylichna ...-.....-......-.---- 544
fUNGOSuM: « ov eorceeese cys eeekecee cece 519 , Proportion of males to females ........ 51, 54, 318
globosuM «022002 anerex sees ceeeee 511,518,536 Prosper, Schooner ..-.-.....-.-..--------- 273, 310
pannosum ........-.-..----- 519, 521, 532,536 Proteles, brain of...........-...--....-+--- 37
Pol ydel phiG iis ciaiss sweeee avieie nis tewicesne cece 106 | proximus, Microgadus....-...-.....-..---- 508
Polygonum bistorta.........-.. ..-.-.--- 570,586 | Psettichthys melanostictus............---. 490
Distorboldes:...cciec cee esses eee ee sae. 570 | pseudo-arnica, Senecio .-........---.-.-- 568, 585
MACOUD 4.52 2 wa.2c as cada ge skeeees 570, 586 | Pseudocryobius empetricola ..............- 548
VAVIPATUM a cicice gee eee 2 sae yasen ges 570, 586 | hyperboreus: 2. ....sessse.canccdenccecee 548
polymorpha, Ramalina .................-.- 580 pinguedineus ..-...-....--.22.....-.-. 548
Polypogon monspeliensis .......----- eben 283 | quadricollis...-.....2.. 0.222. ..020. 0. 548
polypodioides, Phegopteris.......-...... 575,586 BIMUIG:. caine vaciece cei ced amencesenecade 5d8
Polypodium vulgare ...........-...2....-- 575 Ventricosus ..---2- 2.22 ee cence ceeees 548
polystachyon, Eriophorum ......--....-. 572, 586 Pseudopythina grandis...-........-...-. 545, 546
Polytrichum boreale .............2....---- 579 | Psilopilum arcticum .............-..-...-- 579
hyperboreum .................220222-. 579 | psilosantha, Dupontia..................- 574, 586
BUPLCHMM ioe sci Geis damteiey- suesn's se med ered 579 | psittacea, (Hemithyris) Rynchonella....... 542
pomiformis, Bartramia .........-....2..... 577 Psychrolutes paradoxus.............--.--- 469
Poroclinus rothrocki ......2.............-. 484 1 469
Porocottus quadratus ..........2.--2.---.- 466 Pterostichus empetricola...............2-- 548
QuaGrifilis oo. 2c Hoe. os sea eeesan ssee 466 hyperboreus .....-.-.. 2.222. .0220. cee 548
BOM ALIG fi. 5 ose co scke Reseed eadaeeenees 466 | pinguedineus ..-.-.....22.2.22...020-5 548
INDEX. 621
Page. Page.
Pterostichus quadricollis.........-....- 548 | quadrituberculatus, Pleuronectes... 491, 508, 509
BUMS ois seis crsiclscrsnnceiatoie een cmeuncnnrs 548 | quinquemaculatus, Opisthocentrus ........ 480
VONtTICOSUS ect dae aise so seiseotneemenue 548 | racemosa, Cladonia furcata.............-.. 582
Ptilichthyide .........020. 0... 022. eee eee 484 | Racomitrium ........... 22222. .0200. 02-2. 561
Ptilichthys goodei .............--. 2-22-24 484 | Racomitrium lanuginosum -............... 517
Ptilota asplenioides...........-.-...-- . 593, 595 MICQOCALP UM assis zvapewccebiceccictces 517
AGMA cars casas sasaans scweeweemerae 594 microcarpum, var. palmeri............. 577
POCHNATA «0.5: ccssciew ese egace sansa 594. SUdetICUM 2. a6 1 <jsjn0 seey gene seer cess 577
PLUM OSA cacse see senresase oem eee 594 | radiatula, Hyalina ............222.2.....-- 54d
BOLlatiiccdescdesn eee ccarnasanee woos 594 | radicatum, Papaver ............. 561, 562, 563, 584
Ptychoramphus aleuticus.............-..-. 369 | Rainbow smelt............22-. 222-222-022. 439
Puffin, H6Pned. oc ce cccaseamesciusaesn sac 358 | Raja aleutica -.-....2..-.-...2222. 0222222. 435
PaOfGs occas coscamnscasesceen saeeiem 384 INPOYTUP tian ossicular wee sware eee 435
WfbO0e 2s2 cs. sha aaenormesAoaackrece 384 OD TUBA site remercialwic leavers tet tersieedeetet 435
Puffinus gavia ....-......-2- 222-2. eee eee 278 PAPMILETR. 2.22 ccseseiiccewe dak oeveres 434
pulchellus, Liparis ........--.-.-----+-+--- 476 roseispinis -......--.-.-.-...---. 22222. 435
Pulmonary disease ..-........---..-------- 87 stellulata ........22.0 20.2200 -020 2 eee 435
VOSSOIS sso a5c terse cue eca se eceees AG | ATC oo 5 oe ceisioie a oamrsm ne eeineenin ae settee 434,
punctata, Saxifraga ...............---.---- 566 | Ramalina cuspidata..................-.... 580
punctatus, Sticheus....-..--.--. 22.2222 483 polymorpha... -.-..-----------..222-. . 580
punctulata, Coelotaxis............22.....-- 279 | ramosa, Eschscholtzia ....-....--.......-.- 281
pungens, Lycopodium annotinum.......-.. 575 | ramosissima, Krynitzkia..............2-... 283
pungitius, Pygosteus............-....-.. 444,498 | rangiferina, Cladonia.-_....-...-.....2... 582, 583
Pupa decora .....----..----- 22 eee eee ee 542 Cladonia, var. alpestris ........2...222. 582
Blip ld Sysc2coe sacemetanmaseccendescend cae 541 | Ramanculus altaicus ...-........--.. 561, 562, 580
Pupilla decora .....--...---.-----+-+22 22: 54d eschscholtzii ...-.-....-.....22-. 561, 562, 584
Pups, birth of ........-..-.....--- 43, 47, 55, 56, 57 hyperboreus ..........----...--. 560, 562, 584
branding ..-......--.-.-.------- 326, 335, 338 DIVAS ssc coneredueecstemesease wank. 562
GAG onic. aiaisis. acta a cusisd daniciedeirie 75, TT, 79, 80, 96 PaaS 2 crea cietcuewebessectoeine sone 562, 586
TAM O ooo cpninsoard sinreraies Qaleiwsinieie cite tnicee 59 PY SMBUS... 0200 cern eves ccioees ces 562, 587
relations between ground and number TOPlAIS), 5. Ss cprd coos Se eqeaeeas 560, 562, 584
Of C680 cacceccecccecstecevesiexeeste 76 trichophyllus ..........22. 022. .022.. 562, 584
PaChin gg OF saicccie eee eesceeenae eens 73 | Raptores...... 0.2... 22. ee eee ee eee 418
W GAMO: 6.2.o. Sciararcinsceeraceceenenea See ee ere 61 | rariflora, Carex.........---2.022..020.--. 5738, 586
Puritan; sloop .2.-.....-- s.ssseencesscesses 270 | Rastrinus seutiger -......--.--....2.-2222. 454
Purpura lim? -266 52202cstevescesesescoess 543 | Rathbun, Mary I., on crustacea of Pribilof
purpureus, Ceratodon .........--.--.-..--- 576 ISIAN GS exisiie wnicicairisgnsiactecmnenneaseeare BOS
purp'irascens, Calamagrostis ............ 574,586 rathbuni, Pagurus....-..-..2-.-2-. 2.2.0... 556
purpuratus, Salmo ..........--.---.------- 438: | Redfeh esisncse.sciwe de aes Bee ace cmmmaciee ans 436
pusilla, Bothrocara ....-...-.....------+-- M85 | Red OK creenemen sec sce eisacisieeenene anes 354
pusillus, Argyrosomus -.........-..-.--. 436, 494 | Redpath, J.C ...--2. 22.2 ..222. eee. lee 7
Pycnothalia cladinoides............ s §83: | Redpoll . cc :sncmeswessisewccscewececast cna 426
pygmes, Ranunculus .........--..------ 562, 584 | Reed, Capt. Charles........22....2.2........ 311
PY GOPOeB! nc sess wetsieer ce wacivvgrcvesinces sees 383 | Reef, Rookery .....-..--. 2-22. 000200222 eee 75, 80
Pygosteus pungitius ....-.....-..-....---. 444 reflexa, Haloconcha .-.........-......--. 542, 544
pyrenaica, Carex.........- 2... 2002 22es eee 572 | reniformis, Oxyria...............-2..-... 571, 586
Pyrola: Minor: vsevceceees votes vasecueceen 568, 585 | repens, Laminaria.............2... 2.2.02. 52
pyxidata, Cladonia........---..----.------ 582 Lessonia .-....--.. 222-222-2222. cee eee 592
quadratus, Porocottus..--....--.-----.---- 466 | Reproductive organs, female.............. 19, 189
quadricollis, Pseudocryobius ..---..-.----- 548 MAC rie oases cieininitinidiesnawre ond aeeeiny 18, 45, 189
Pterostichus sese00 ccexaccenesctaeesese 548 | reptans, Ranunculus ............ 2... 560, 562, 584.
quadricornis, Hypsagonus............--... 475 | reticulata, Salix......-.... 2.22202... lL... 571, 586
COIS eo occ sicisiscnenine rene eeeerGieetiese 502 | retusa, Salix -......... 02.2000. eee eee 571
Oncocottus .......-------- 2-20-22 -+-- 502 ; Rhachianectes glaucus .................... 353
quadrifilis, Porocottus .......--------.-.-. 466 | Rhinoliparis barbulifer...............000.. 478
quadrilateralis, Coregonus ..........-..--- 436 | Rhodomela floccosa .......... Mena aeearet sere 504.
622 INDEX.
Page. Page.
Rhodomela larix -......-..--..---.-------- 594 | Rookeries, Zapadni .......---.. 52, 80, 81, 84, 87, 88
lycopodioides ..........-..-2 +22 0+--++ 594 | Rookery surveys -.------------------------ 322
Rhodophycee. ..-..-...-------- 222 eee eee 593 | Rorqual, Davidson’s Lesser .......---...-.- 352
Rhodophyllis dichotoma ........--.---.--- 593 | rosacea, Astyris ------..-....---. 2-2-2. ---- 544
Rhus laurina ....--.-.-..-.-----------+--- 282) 1 ROSE; Did se.cie ste: gas cass acs bcidiewiersecide easianee oe 265
Rhynchias septipinnis -........-..-.-.---- 443 | roseispinis, Raja ........-.---.------..---- 435
Rhytina: rossii, Geum. .-....---. ---2--- 2 eee 561, 565, 585
ANATOMY cassie sk aamiesnaetiaase mepaceencien 190 | rostratus, Brachyopsis......--.-.--...----- 470
external characters ......--..--..----- 183 | rothrocki, Poroclinus.........--.--...----. 484
LOOM ion enecas the Gass Geese yeteiee coer 198 | rotundata, Salix.........-22..22-2--222---- 571
Habits qisossatetecat ah assasieceed 196 | rotundifolia, Salix ....-..-..--..----+2---- 571
measurements. --..-..-..----.---2---+-- 182 | rubelius, Didymodon ...........------.2+-- BIT
Ribbon Seal ....-...--..-------- 2-2 ee eee 351 | ruber, Trachydermon........-.----...--- 542, 544
richardsoniana, Artemisia ..-.....--..--- 568, 585 | ruberrimus, Gunnellus ......-.-.-.--..----. 481
richardsoni, Anemone ..-...----.--.----- 562, 586 PHOS: . 205 est steam te eeenedee cease 482
P@StWG4, wae ccnacn selec ccreninead, tale tes 574 | rubra, Festuca .........-----.------.-2-- 574, 586
SOT6E weceecceseSee sas ctemedeeeieeees 345 | Rubus arcticus..........-.-..------.---- 565, 585
Richmond, C. W.....--...----- -e-2 eee eeee 356 chammorus......-.---.---- +--+ 560, 565, 585
Rictularia .........-.--. -2--0- 2222 eee eee 105 Stellatus .. 02 2s sane e seme cee 565, 575, 585
Ridgway, Robert.........---.--2. 22+. --+-- 356 | rufescens, Dicranella ..........-.-.---..--- 576
Papers DY <i..': d2 cena asgacesene ae 429, 430 | rufipileus, Colaptes...........2---.22-.-+-- 278
riparium, Sphagnum ..........--.--...---. 576 | rugifera, Umbilicaria..............2-...--- 581
Rissa brevirostris ....--..-.- 355, 361, 362, 363, 397 | rugosa, Saxicava ..-.-.........-22. -222-2-- 543
tridactyla pollicaris......... ee 362, 363, 396 | Rumex acetosella .......-.-..-----.----- 571, 586
RissOld Beas gee lectecui ceva seed Seasewe 540 | ruprechtianum, Nitophyllum .............. 594
Ritter, W. E., tuvicata of Pribilof idlynds.. 511 | ruscifolia, Stellaria............2.22...... 1. 564
Robben Tdtand Whiter eee anata anaes 53, 70, 223 | Rush, revenue cutter ......-...--- 45, 295, 297, 298
Seals) Of 2. ccecene ts yedecescenteeasiges 2 3 | russa, Natica........2--. 2222022222 -22--. 542, 544
SGale LCM. . aciccinciecwcincens Recess 268 | Russula fallax ..-....-....2-2.0.2-2202-0-- 584
Roberts, Capt. W.H ._.-...----..--------- 45 | MIGTOdISh 2.2 .cccceeees sete sceeeseeon ees 583
Robin, American.....--.....---.---.------ 420 | ruthenicum, Nitophyllum ................. 594
robusta, Cetraria islandica ...-........--.. 580 | Rynchonella (Hemithyris) psittacea....... 542
Onychoteuthis ..........--..-....22--. 542 | Rytina stelleri. (See Hydrodamalis gigas.)
robustus, Hippoglossoides. ..........-. 2... 489 | saccharina, Tonicella.-.............0...-.. 542
Pilophorus..02: ss2nesixce Syeces See's ss ee 582 | Sagina linnwi-...... 22222 .222 22228. 560, 565, 585
Rocineala belliceps .-.-...--..-....--.---. 557 | nivalis. -....2....-. 2222 .0222.2.22-...--. 565, 585
rodriguezii, Laminaria .-......--.. 22.2.2... 592 | saida, Boreogadus...............--2..--- 487, 506
Ronquilus jordani..-...---.-..-------...--. 479 | salar, Salmo......... 222222222. 2222 ee eee 437
Rookeries...--.....---222+++-- seee 52 | salina, Carex........222. eee cece ee eee 573, 586
first females appear ....-.-.-..... 43 | Salinum guadalupense .............--..... 282
Gorbatch ...2.20.%s0sc0csesee wees 56, 80, 84,85 | Salix arctica........0...222. 02202200200. 571, 586
height of season........----...+--.---- 43, 47 arctica, var. obcordata...............-. : 571
KitOvl tee sek odewcacs: Aecaes 75, 88, 89, 92, 326 diplodictya .........222. 020. 02...0220- 571
Lobos Island.........--..----.-- 274, 308, 313 OVAlILO]IA ccc cexa case enacenserioldg 571, 586
Tuk anin' sq iscccawise cutesy goes aacea-i 56, 75, 326 phylicoides ......-...2..0...00022... 571, 586
MNCS: ATE VG! iecicsceicmecis creed ae ase tives 43 reticulata...... 22.22.0220 e eee ele 571, 586
maps of the Pribilof................-.. 321 POUUBE wlan haceGae Seed seebe ocd eeeoes 571
Northeast Point. ..-.....-.-..-.. 80, 86, 89, 90 rotundata....-... 2.22... 02 cele ee - 571
Polovin ao2s8 So: eaeciae Soe eset 52, 75, 80, 81 rotundifolia Sane eaines Sheets tet Se Ih
ROG fost: Lack soe hihtehcroae tigers nies ee ete 10,80!) S@lM0) u.2252 niece wamenvesneaeezenrnsaces ce 103
South Georgia ..........22.. 222.222. 307, 314 CLAM: sec. caremi ce eevie eat earicine wiccie isis ae 437
Staraya Artel ..-.-.. 2... 0022 222..0020. 2 @UPNUS occ witendederaedeens esate 438
St. George ......-..-.. 76, 78, 81, 88, 89, 93, 326 KON CB CHa. 2. 2 ciraccceeme crete Bove c acted 438
SU PaWlicitie soos ce are wee et oe 76, 81, 89 leucomeenis ..... 0.0.2. .20cee nee e ne cane 438
TOGtOR vase exinecesac ewe ze 5, 75, 78, 80, 82, 84, 90 MYKUGG! osc osisigc ony ee ysiseuene ocawene« 437
Uncinaria on..... 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 83, 85, 89 penshinensis ............ Sdueasee Aon
INDEX. 623
Page. Page.
Salmo purpuratus........-..--....2----05. 438 | Scatophaga squalida .........-..2......... 551
SBIAT fe Heke sacswuindssmcusiadocedanstesccesc - kOe BD ewasSoesten oe en cepascitomat wena 551
GalMON.- .c225ccc ceed, ossicancess 61, 62, 63, 68, 305 | scepticus, Triglops.............../........ 455
HG POAC. 0a ccieeiesereis wine seis ene 437 | schimperi,,Campylopus.-.............--..- 576
Ban es ccsewietncndiemmamaeaiaueeawere 436 | Schizoplax brandtii.............2..20222-- 544
BilVePecccceneue ana neeoniemaamenciemsiece 436 | Schwartz, E.A., insectsfrom PribilofIslands 547
salmonea, Ericara ......--...---+----02000- 435 | scirpoides, Equisetum...........-.-..----. 57D
Salmonide ........-. padneieniih Saban manners 435 | Sclerocrangon sharpi .....-......-...-.-.. 556
Salmon trout...-....-... 22-22-2222 ee eee eee 438 | Sclerostoma.......-..-.. 2-2-2 22-e2.oe- eee 164
Kamchatka ....-....0.------ 2 ee eee eee 437 | Sclerostomine ......-.-....----- 2-2-2. --0- 164
Salpinctes guadeloupensis......:.....----. 278 | Scofield, N. B., fishes of Arctic Alaska...... 493
saltator, Orthocephalus .....-...-----..- 552 | Scolopacidey ........-......-2-2. --2 2 eee 400
Salvelinus kundscha-...--...-........----- 438 | Scorpenide.....-.......-. 0-22-22 eee eee 445
leucomenis .-..-..----------- ----- 438 | scorpius, Cottus.-.......---...-.-2.-.-..--. 462
TAIT Bic. o sc cisieniescura arene cue moet 433, 497 | scoticum, Ligusticum................... 567, 585
malma parkei ..........--..--.- fe lntaials 438 | Scudder, S. H........-----.------.-.---2-. 280
San Benito Island..............----...---- 269 | scutiger, Rastrinus........-.-.---.-.2.---. 454
Sander ling sc oecicduinseacmedemesemecctnisinnae 370 | Scytosiphon lomentarius.........---.-..-.. 591
San Diego, schooner........-------.----- 224, 267 | Sea bear ........---.-------------- 2, 201-208, 218
Sandpiper, Long-toed stint ............-... 405 Clephanty: -nissejacicci cists cae sere-ceincios 267
POCEOTAL asa nencine cei ceed eens see ene 404 | ‘Sea Elephant” beach.................. 267, 277
Pribilof...... 22-2. 02-02-0002 e 357, 358, 400 | Seal ...--. 222-22 2222 cece eee ee eee 109, 147, 152
Sanderling..-....--.------s2-e-- eee 370 | Seal, harbor -.......------.----. 204202 2ee 351
Semipalmated..........-..--..------ 405, 408 PIDDON 2.022 )siecesisiecinae nigicinisie's woes aces 351
Sandwich land, seals on........-...-.-.---- 315 | Seal fish ..-.-.---.---------- +--+ - eee eee ee, 440
sanguinarium, Heterothecum .............. 583 | Sea lion, Stellers -.......-......--.--.----- 350
San Jose, schooner ..-........--. 225, 288, 292, 302 | Sea lions ............. 64, 73, 208-210, 267, 268, 276
private log on........-.- +222. 002-20 254 | Sea otter ....--...-2.--------------- 210-218, 353
Santa Barbara, schooner .............----- 266 | Sealing off west coast Africa ............-- 318
Sapphire, schooner .........-..---.-- 290, 291, 297 off Auckland Islands ---.......--..-... 307
Sarcophaga sp ....-----.---------------++- 280 off Australia.....---..-----.-+-+---- 307, 316
sarmentosa, Claytonia ......-....--- 561, 565, 585 in Bering Sea ............-.. 228, 224, 233, 308
Sarritor frenatus ..-....--...-------.2----- 474 Off Chile s.c2ccescesewseeee cues ots 307, 311
leptorhynchus ......-.....--.--------- 474 off Crozet Island..........-.---..--+ 307, 315
sarsii, Aplidiopsis ...-....-.-..-..--.---- 511, 524 ov Falkland Islands ..-.-....-...--- 307, 308
Saucy Lass, schooner......--.-.- sees keeses 289 on Juan Fernandez..........--...-.. 307, 309
saxatilis, Carex .-----.---------0220-e--- 573, 586 off Kerguelen Land .........-.-..----. 316
Parmeliten<ccsssscecesecisocewe sees cee = 581 off Prince Edward Island ........... 307, 315
saxea, Neverita...-....-----------+--+----- 546 on Mas-4-Fuera ....-.---.------ +2. 307, 309
Saxicava arctica ....-.......-------22.---- 546 on Sandwich Land........-........-.. 315
PULOSE vince sec ese mesemenaceaciiese sy eies 543, Of Bi AMiDTOse 2... ccccevewnnwnnae xeon s 312
saxicola, Lecanora ....---.--..----.----.-- 582 Off Bt. Felix. so. sevircmceseneasexeenes 312
Saxifraga bracteata .............---- 560, 566, 585 off St. Paul and Amsterdam Islands... 318
chrysantha. cscs sscieccieisicine pect ose 566 off South Shetland Islands ............ 313
OAVUTICA sve smiiocccesccviennn nce 561, 566, 585 off Tierra del Fuego. ...............- 307, 312
hieracifolia ........---.------0-2-+6- 566, 585 on Tristan da Cunha........-......... 8315
BiPCUIUG acciatearisietctagigivicig en Soen serene 560, 566 | Seal skins, price of........---.-..-..-----. 307
hirculus, var alpina ...........-..-.- 566, 585 | Seals, age attained ......--....-2-. 22-2222. 51
NEWGONIBNA) :26< seen eed cmasees onesie 566, 585 arrival at islands.........-..-.-.-..-.- 44
PUNClateesreceesneecesceocs cess cesseses 566 bearing upon fisheries................. 66
serpyllifolia .......... .----- ---- 561, 566, 585 experiments in herding and branding.. 325,
stellaris, var. comosa...-...-..-.---- 566, 585 333, 337
scaber, Hexagrammos..-.-...-.-....------ 453 killed on Guadalupe.........-... eee 267
Scala grénlandica.........--..------.--+-- 542 Of UPS vecewa ve cctedins cantSeecaccaaeae 3
Scatophaga dasythrix......-.....---.--..- 551 of Pribilofs ..... 222... 00.. eee eee eee 4
Giadema: ..-....cccodsvevevesenesneaaes 551 not frightened ..............-00.e0ee- 286
624 INDEX.
Page. | Page.
Seals, sleeping --..-..--.---- 285, 287, 292, 298, 301 | Silver salmon ...-......-.----------------- 436
Season for pelagic sealing......-.-.-.-.- 232, 233 | similis, Pseudocryobius...--.-----.-...-..- 548
Seaweed in stomachs....-.-.---.---------- 59 Pterostichus .....-.--.-----------.---- 548
Sebastichthys matzubare -..-.......-,-- 445 | Simorhynchus cristatellus... 355, 362, 363, 369, 386
SObsastodess. . si. a. loos ee teen osieeice beeen 119, 448 | pusillus.........---. 355, 362, 363, 369, 387, 431
Sebastodes aleutianus.............-..--- 445, 446 PYPMACUS< eects ce eews sees: BPH erence 369
HWS So ce.kzeses Socceecesdeeeaee 445 | simus, Careproctus ...-...----------------- 477
CAUPINUS) 2200. de Vee seats ek eeet 445 | simplex}, Bela: secs: ncecs easceecssensceee 543
CLAD: sc.55cssase irsens demarseeeter 447 | sinclairii, Laminaria...........-.....-.--.- 592
PIMC Grace sos ccs ded aisee Seether vee 447 | Siphagonus x30: = osecs2sees2+ sess oee's Sets 470
TNGLOMIB EE \sci2.5is,2 wcse sec tise distance ids aetna 445 Varbatis... 2.2 .ess eax oe ekee geek te kas 504
MAtZUVALE: 25.4229 2 Paice boice sieceis Sens cvars 446.) Silphidte .2 3 os ot coed chewe eee see Gewese 549
PE LT AUG oa oi5 aperecsinre cian aieesvoiaisiels: eieneiseanieets 446 | Sipho herendeenii.--..........-.---------- 543
taczanowskii ...-.-.---------.-------- 447 SHAUPANICe wicvcks te. -yeecce sie Ses seis 543
Sebastolobus alascanus......-.--...------- 445 spitzbergensis ...-.....--.-----..- --- 543
WIPIVELS. ocacven a ett ddjsizicctesteoe st octanbecs 445 | Siphonaria thersites...........-...---..... 544
segaliensis, Brachyopsis .........-.-..----. 471 | Sirenocyamus rhytine...........-.---.---- 163
selago, Lycopodium .....-...-.---------- 575, 586 | Sisson, Fred......-..-.. .----.------ -----e- 270
Selinum benthami ..........--.-.--.---- 567,585 | sitkana, Litorina....-.-..--..--.-..--.---- 544
sellaris, Porocottus........-.....---.------ 466 | Size and color, variations in...-..-...-.-.- 4
semileve, Calosoma .--...-..---.---------- 279 | Skins, inspection of...-..........--....-- 235, 237
semisquarrosum, Sphagnum squarrosum... 576 determination of sex by............--- 235
semisulcata, Astarte .......-...----.------ O48 | SEull 22s cise ees usscec. case seet Seen nee cee 1,2,3
Senecio pseudo-arnica.....--..----..---- 568,585 | Sleeper shark ...........-.. ..---.--------- 434
septentrionale, Pogonatum alpinum........ 519, | Slunin, Dr i022 s2% sees goede ses edawiece tees 46
septentrionalis, Lycosa...-....-...-.-..--- 552 | Smelt, rainbow .........---..22.-----.---- 489
septentrionis, Patrobus ...-..-.-.-...---.. 548 | Smith, Capt. Samuel......--...2---..2--2.- 273
septipinnis, Rhynchias.....--............- 443 | Snodgrass, Robert E..........-... 716, 77, 79, 82, 87
serotina, Lloydia........-...--.--------- 571, 586 Anatomy of fur seal .......2..22..----- 11
serpyllifolia, Saxifraga...........-.. 561, 566,585 ; snodgrassi, Amaroucium..--.-.-.-...---. 527, 536
Veronica 22-2. see se cacdegeranseauss 569,585 | Snow, W. A., Guadalupe Island, insects and
serrata, Ptilota......-----. .e0.0. 2-2-2 -- ee 594 BPIMOrSs2 3 226 chee cee eee she cad emcee Mace 279
serratus, Gasterosteus ...--..---.---..----- 498 Snowflake, Pribilof...................--. 357, 423
Serripes groenlandicus ........-......-.. 543,546 | Socorro Islands ...........---.-22.-22.+--- 268
Setchell, W. A., alge of PribilofIslands.... 589 | Softfish ..........-..222.2-0222.-2-22.----- 475
setiger, Dasycottus ...-......-...---...--.. 468 | Soletellina sp ......-. 2... ..22-2-----24--.- 546
Sex, record of ...226.0sec202 e000 eeeeee vases 305, 306 | Solorina crucea.......-.. 2222-2 --222-2222--- 581
Sexes, manner of counting ............-.-.- 302 | Somateria dresseri ...-....-.......2....--. 368
PLOPOLtlON v2 ci050 05-2 oe es esse cesexavsss 54 Molbiss}Ma wo 2222s ese sess ss asco ce 368
proportion of, in pelagic catch ........ 237 VeMIGTA oo asain ccincinw ee nsis vane 355, 362, 363, 380
shantarica, Siphos -...-.....-.--..---- O49 | SOMKA worst geckea ts cctce'e: sees ge caeeeees 437
Shark, sleepers... .2.220%02e002ee03 secees- 434 | Sommioside -.........2...02.2 2222-2022 22e- 434
sharpi, Sclerocrangon ............---..---. 556 | Somniosus microcephalus...............-.. 434
Shrew, Pribilof..........-.....---.---2---- 345 | Sonchus oleraceus ........--....--2. 2-2-2. 288
Shitte; Dr; Di. .ccxcczeceusectucsecese seis 95 | Sophia Sutherland, schooner, log of ....... 255
Sibbaldia procumbens...........-...--.. 565, 585 | Sorex pribilofensis ............-.....2..-2. 345
sibiricus, Aster..-....-..-..--.-..-.- 561, 568, 585 | richardson... 2.5 css ccc s ces cee ees wastes 345
sieboldii, Balwena........-...-.----..-22--- 353 | South Georgia rookery ..-............... 307, 314
Siewerd, Captain.....-.....--..--.------ 285, 290 CaCO ko eieie cies este cecrcin Says aero 314
Sigillina australis .........---..---..----.. 523 | South Shetland Islands, sealing off ...... 318, 314
signatus, Bathymaster........-..-....22--. 479 | Spark, schooner. ..........2.22...2222..2-- 319
signifer, Thymallus _....-..-.-.-.....2.--. 439. Sparrow, Sandwich ...-.........222..... 370, 422
Silene acaulis .....--.....22..222222.2.5--. 561 Spartan, PU SB ME Sines scessciccwee aceudletcreists 89
Galllitawes scavses econ csecet edeskesnncs 281 | sparverius, Falco.............22.-2.....---- 278
Siliqua.mediia, 223.2922 veeseeebe eee Leek 543 | Spatula clypeata..........222. 02.22.0222... 370
Pata weve: ese eyed See heAnd aes Ques 343 | spathulata, Cochlearia ...............0.... 563
5947—PT 3
INDEX. 625
Page. Page.
Specific diseases, cause of death in pups ... 86 | staminea, Tapes -... ..... 222. sence weno eee 546
spectrum, Careproctus ....----..---.------ 478 | Staphylinida ..........-..2.2-.00-e-e- eee 549
Spergularia moerothica .......---...------ 281 | Staraya Artel rookery...--.-......--.---.- 52
Sphaeralcia ? -........-.------ 2-2 eee eee 282 pups branded .........--.-----.------- 338
Sphaerophoram fragile....-....--.---..--- 582 | Starvation, cause of pups’ death........-.. 82,89
globiferum .....-...--.---.-----+-++--- 582 Cause Of. ...-..------ eee eee e eee eee eee 83
Sphagnum ......----.- 2-2. 20ee eee eee eee 561 | Stealing of cows ...-.....--..------20--6-- 91
fimbriata var. articum .........--.---- 576 | Steganopodes .......-..-.---- eee eee eee 373
girgenshonii ........-.---.---.-------- 576 | steinegeri, Stelgistrum ...............--.-- 456
lindbergii var. microphyllum brachy- Stejneger, Leonhard........-.. 6, 62, 88, 89, 268, 429
eyclada....-....-- ---- eee ee eee eee ee 576 | Stelgistrum .....-..---...---------+--+---- 456
riparium....-. 0.2.26 --- eee eee eee eee 576 steinegeri..........-----------4------- 456
squarrosum var. imbricatum -......... 576 | Stellaria borealis.........-...----- +--+. 564, 584
squarrosum var. semi-squarrosum . --.. 576 borealis var. corallina ....-..-....--- 564, 584
spicatum, Epilobium .....-..-.-..--.---- 567, 585 Calycantha vusciae scicceis seve se en desee ace 564
spiniger, Icelus ..........--.------------+- 453 CRASS LOLA wcies oe vie see esa vices secesiese 564
Spinularia intermedia var. teretifolia...... 591 humifusa .... 22.22.2222. eee ee eee eee 560, 585
spinus, Spirontocaris .....---..------------ 556 longipes s.2<s26 300 <0 sees sescenseueee 564, 585
spinulosa, Delesseria......-.-..-..-..----- 595 | longipes, var. laeta .......-..-------- 564, 585
Spirontocaris avina ---..--...-.----------- 557 MOIS cceveunesis ezeu cies cose eoea sens 564, 584
barbata.........--- ise Stes in aig at 556 PUSCHOlia. sv ocicwareees viciewe ses cies ueeees 564
camtschatica...--..----.----0.-------- 557 | stellatus, Platichthys ....-.........----. 492, 509
PaiMardils.... 2 2c jo 606 ssa eee ts ees 556 RUDUB sce cosewaceeeteens v26 35-8 565, 575, 585
Bib bag ,'-ii28 seine aeiswe ceemee eee ess 556 | Steller, G.W., accountof manatee (rhytina). 182
MAaCHenta...c6cewe sees seeee vase emee 557 sea bear (fur seal) ...........--------- 201
POlALIS,. .. asics ce wes s cess sedeweses 557 Sa LION s secs nesesaueeess eevee see exe 208
SPINS). sasccreecsicnas sess. oes xen skewer 556 Sea OtlOr o5 occa ne iccusseeessgeun ae ss oe 210
Spisula alaskana..........---... 2-0. -0-+-- 543 | stelleri, Cryptochiton.................-.- 542, 544
spitzbergensis, Sipho ......---.-..-...---- 543 Eumetopias .-.--...---.---+-22ee-0-0-- 350
Splachnum wormskioldii ..--......--...--- 577 Gynandra....--.--..---.-...-....--. 570, 586
. splendescens, Lagurns ...........-...----- 556 Hexagrammos .......-.. 2022-2 eecees 448
splendens, Hylocomium ..........-.-.--...+ 579 Li parops sacies os setsiae seaesutemetseaseas 475
Monostoma ...---..-----------+-e5 0-5 590 Myoxocephalus ................. 463, 464, 465
Ulvaria. sccc2 2eccenineceeececsicnss coe 591 Veronica......-----...-2-------- 561, 570, 585
spongiosa, Peltigera canina ............-.- 581 | Steller’s sea lion..........-22....-----.0--- 350
Spratelloides bryoporus .........-..-..---- 435 | stellulata, Raja.......-.-.-.---2..--------- 435
spuria, Peltigera canina.........-....-..-- 581 | Stenodus leucichthys.........-...-......-- 496
squalida, Scatophaga ....-...........-.--- 551 MACKENZIEL . 2 avcicisic cnicienie eicmisiccwuine dees 496
Squalide .........-------- 00. ------ noes 434 | Stenorhynchus .......-....--..-----+-.----- 108
Squalus sucklii ....---.-.----..----+------ 434 Jepton yS iaiscseiccsciccnccn ccnin oo g wees 152, 156
squarrosum, Hylocomium i gesid saledawbe nace 579 | Stereocaulon coralloides.........-....... 582, 583
SQWIG cise some sets tienes 61, 62, 63, 67, 68, 300, 305 | Stercorariidw ............ 2220-22-00 ee eee 393
St. Ambrose, sealing off .........-..-...+-- 312 | Stercorarius longicaudus ........ 355, 361, 364, 393
St. Felix, sealing off . . teteeataeensewes $12 parasiticus..........,......- 355, 361, 364, 393
St. George Island, ornithdlogically consid- pomarinus .........-..-.-... 355, 362, 364, 393
CLO ec cecccerucitiocind tien Seeenee oie ems 359 | Sterna aleutica ............--2..0-...-000. 364
rookeries ..........-..-.-. 76, 78, 81, 88, 89, 93 paradisea .....-..-2....-..- 355, 362, 364, 398
branding on .......-..---.-.---- 326-327, 338 | Sternias xenostethus ............-----..... 455
St. Lawrence, schooner. .-..---.-.----.---- 328 | Sternoptychide........2.2. 22-22-22. .2.. 2205 442
St. Marys, sealing off ......-.--..----.---. 312 | Sternoptyx diaphana............2222...- 442
St. Paul, blue fox on.........--..--- ie seaniais 340 | Stewart, Capt. William R..........--..---. 309
POOKOTICS veic siciisise si yicicicisieipcininisisiors 76, 81, 82,89 | Stichzeus punctatus ...-......-..2..-2--26- 483
branding on ....-.-. 222+ --02---0-+-+ 328, 338 | Sticta linita......... 2.22.22. see. eee ee eee 581
herding on.... ..--..--------+--2-2 000+ 329 | stigma, Gymnelis.........22.2-2020-2.----- 485
St. Paul Island, ornithologically considered. 357 | stilbeus, Leuroglossus............--...--.- 440
St. Paul and Amsterdam islands, sealing off. 318 | Stiles, Dr. C. W., internal parasites ........ %
626 INDEX.
Page. Page.
stimpsoni, Placiphorella ............--...- 544 | Syngnathus...... 2.2... 0-22 eee eee ee eee 470
Stint, long-toéd.........2 i... sec sesiaeee a reseexs 405 | Synidotea bicuspida.......---....--------- 557
Stomachs, bird, examination of............ 360 | Synidotea nebulosa....-...--.-.-----+-.--- 557
Stomach of seal.........---. -.---. +--+ 11, 12,191 | Synoicum incrustatum ..-...-.--.--------- 531
contents, food .......-.---.-...+--- 59, 63, 64 irregulare .....-...-.------- 511, 580-582, 536
290, 291, 292, 293, 295, 296, 297, 298, 299, 300 PUT PONG wistcisietcraic cs'¢ ¢ wie g ats Seite eerie 531
contents, not food .....-...-...-...---- 68 | Synthliboramphus antiquus. 355, 362, 363, 369, 389
examination of...........--.-----.---- 68 | systilius, Desmatodon ..........--.-...---- 577
stomias, Atheresthes -...-.....-..-..---- 488, 508 | Tables:
strategus, Pecten......--....---.------ +--+ 543 Catch of seals on Dora Siewerd ..... 305, 306
Streator, C. P....... 222. eeeee eee ee eeeeee 266 Condition of seals taken at sea........ 54
Streets, Thomas H..... sities Se daetaeee ees 370 Deaths is- 2 czicnias aac axvese cess ae s'ee's 97, 98
Streptopus amplexifolius...........-.-.. 571, 586 Dissections 2c2ss0ceasseseeeveccaw cess 98
striata, Margarita.........-.--..---------- 546 | Distribution of mollusks.......- 542-544, 546
strictum, Dicranum .........-.-.-.--.---.- 576 Distribution of plants .-....---.--.. 584-586
Polytrichum ..-.......-.-----.---.---- 579 Food of seals ..--...-..-.. eee 0 ee ee eee 67, 68
Strom bellain2e. = cae cewhooser re yeds ess 540 Parasites of marine mammals ........- 168
OPW OT sisisssieoecinig 2 Retetie ena eceactee 542, 543 Regions of brain.............--..----- 40
CAN OPIN? o scien mde ace tase eees 542, 543 Seals branded 2: seq. «.2s02-eeee%:seeeee2 338
AACS... chee ices sb ease ees sees 542, 543 Weights and measurements of seals -- . vi
middendorffii . .......--.-.---.-------- 543 | Tachinus apterus..-.......-....----.-.---- 549
Strong yids: sec. s koe cee asess eed eee er 100, 164 | Tachyrhynchuserosus....-...---.----.-.-- 544
Strongylus s.2ceeocses ees eh oe seresees eae 164 | taczanowskii, Sebastodes ....-.-..-.-.--.--- 447
Sbyela: cacecseckeuaiue sess eses is see sees 514 | tenia, Blennius.......-....--.-2.2.-2-4. 480, 481
ae prer ata, 2s26 4 ekeaeide tees ose vee sees 514 PHONMBS 4 scsce- sere ceseed cee veeec ees Sees 480
ClaV ais vesesvey ages over sete veces eeesces 517 | teniopterus, Cottus .........-.-.---.---- 462, 467
PTCCOVT 2.-caosene ress een 511, 516, 517,535 | Tagelus sp........-..--...---. -----2.2-2-- 546
montereyensis ............2. 2-2. -.0--- 517 | Tapes staminea .......-.--.--.--- 2222-222. 546
subaritica, Acmwa ............ ------..---- 544 | Taraxacum officinale............-..----. 568, 585
subglobosum, Minium. .........--......--- 579 officinale var. lividum.........-.-..--- 561
submarmorea, Tonicella .............-... 542,544 | tartarea, Lecanora ..-.......-..----- 222. 581, 582
subpedunculata, Dendrodoa ..... 511, 514, 535, 536 | Tattler, wandering : .<<s4 ixeess ssee cece 370, 407
subrigida, Carex macrochaeta ..........-.. 573 | taxifolium, Doplophyllum ..........-..-... 580
subspathacea, Carex salina ..............-- 573 | Teal, green-winged.-.........22-2.-2--4--- 380
subspicatum, Trisetum................-- 574,586 , Teeth, color... 2 22-5 cose qes% ¢sce seen sence s i
subsulcata, Chrysomela ...-....--....---.- 54y development...-.. 2... ---. 2222.22.26 9
subtenebrosa, Litorina ..............------ 544.) Deleoptilesicccces woes vad nagedoxssscceuicess 424
subulata, Cladonia furcata .............-.- 582 | Tellina alternidentata..............-.... 543, 546
Oligomeris...-.. ...--. 2-222. ---+ 02200 281 | PLT G A tate Gia ie Ge dee Cet ok 546
subulosa, Macoma.......---..---.---+---+- 546 Telmessus cheiragonus.........-..--...... 555
SUCCINOA 2c ccaceeecamecmenaces eee assets 541 | tenax, Eristalis ..... 22.2.2... ........0.-- 279
GHEY SIS sae cee senedanennnaeee ace oon 542 tenella, Gentiana.................--. 567, 569, 585
sucklii, Squalus ..-...........--..---..-... 484 tenue, Buccinum............0....... 543, 545, 546
sudetica, Luzula campestris bees Ose Gals oe 572 tenuis, Nucula ...... 2.2... .22222 e222 eee 546
Pedicularis ..-...2.-..5-2-:2s005 560, 570, 586 opisthocentrus ...-....--2. 2.222.222. 480
sudeticum, Racomstrium ........-....-..-- 5T7 | Tered0 @p'c0. oces252 vecane ae ehee ch eles cacen 546
suecica, Cornus -..-..----2. .-- ee. eee 567, 585 | teretifolia, Spinularia intermedia, ceseeeeee. 591
sulcata, Parmelia saxatilis..............22. 581, Tern, Arctie 2.46 222.0620 ice ese ccc cs csmece 398
superciliosus, Hexagrammos ...........--.- 452 | testudinalis, Acmaea......2.2...2.0220..0. 542
Survey of rookeries .........--...--2..2+.- 322 tetrandrum, Chrysospleniumi .............. 567
Swan, whistling .........22.-22...2..02--. 381 | Tetraplodon mnioides ...........---...20-- 5T7
Swallow, Alaskan ........--.-.2.2-22.-.--. 422 | Thalassiophyllum clathrus ..............-. 592
sybaritica, Acmaea .-.-...---..------..--2. 542 | thaleichthys, Osmerus.................20-. 440
sylvatica, Cladonia rangiferina .........-.. 582 | Thaleichthys pacificus ............ 2-2. ee05 439
Valeriana...00. ce.2c2- tence eee cee eee 567 | Thamnolia vermicularis-............-.--.. 583
Synaphobranchide -.....--.-......-.---- 435,443 | thamnites, Lecanora.....-........-2.0---5 583
INDEX. 627
Page. Page.
‘Theloschistes lychneus........--........ 580, 583 | Tringa damacensis .. .... 355, 358, 361, 362, 363, 405
Theragra chalcogramma .... 109, 119, 120, 486, 507 STACTIIB sys sind aatem sera renee need ctrectd nats 361
fucensis..-...---. 02-0... 02-. eee ee eee 507 maculata ........-2..... 355, 362, 363, 371, 404
Therobromus callorhini ..-........ ---.-.- 440 ptilocnemis......... 355, 361, 362, 363, 400, 436
Therese, schooner, log of .........--.....-. 257 | triquetrum, Hylocomium .................. 580
thersites, Siponaria ......-.....---.---.... 544 | Trisetum subspicatum.-................. 574, 586
Thoburn, Wilbur Wilson, expedition to Tristan da Cunha and Clough Island, seal-
Guadalupe, Island ...........--......... 275 AN ROD Scrat mand oommnetoliecus sdaugaass 315
thompsoni, Podothecus......-....... .-.--- 473 | Tritonium oreconense..-........-....--- 542, 544
‘thulensis, Alectoria ..........-20.022..026- 580 | Tritonofusus rogeri ...-.........222..0.2-. 543
‘thulensis, Carex salina... ......-.....2. 573 | Triumph, schooner ....-............. 266, 289, 290
Thy mallid a sjcccewsowam teats annie eee esa 439 | Trogosita virescens ............-.--....--. 279
Thymallus signifer...... RCN Aisa ini s pesca je 439 | Troglodytide@ ........ 2.2... cee eens eee eee 421
Tierra del Fuego, sealing off .........-.. 307, 312 | Trophon dalli...... 2.2... 22222. 02.-2.00-- 543
CatOR nese wacesiseek tessa dateces eet ee S12) CERN Op PS We 20.5.5. 2.2.05 sane memcnueeeets 64, 325, 329
tilesii, Hemilepidotus ........--.-..-..---- 457 Mammals of Pribilof Islands .......... 345
Tipulide o.scswsxsseceoe eee es ee cas ecnes 551 | truncata, Mya...--. 2.222.222... eee eee 543
tobianus, Ammodytes ....--.--..---...---- 499 | truncaticollis, Carabus 548
Todd, Captainca<2 soe22 sissy esne sees sees 61, 62 | Tsavicha........--2..2-. 222-2 ee eee eee ee 436
Tolstoi rookery ...-..-..--.---- 5, 75, 81, 82, 84,90 | Tschwytscha......-...--..02....222. 00002. 436
Tonicella lineata.....-.--..---...--02. sees 542 | tuberculata, Dendrodoa ......... 511, 512, 516, 585
MALMOLER:: 5.00% secs ee sane ewe cee'e Sees 544 | Tubinares: cece cc.c occ ees ae se escnen aes 381
SacCharina 22s ccccios nee sae neew seme sews 5d) TOmMore werresaes ced cecinccea-Peicintve nace 96
submarmorea ............--.-...--.- 542,544 | tumicata, Liparis.-....-...2... 2.222. 0002.. 476
Topography of the islands ornithologically Tunicata of the Pribilof Islands.......... 511
CONSIMOLOD 4 oraies cistalnis 2 siajeteiejaraisiais, oan’ 357 | Tunicates in stomachs. -........-...---.. oe 59
torreyi, Phyllospadix..............---.---- 283 | tunicatus, Lycodalepis ....--.............. 505
Totanus flavipes........-.--.--- 355, 362, 363, 407 | Turdide ........-. 2-22... 02 eee eee eee 420
Townsend, C. H.......-..-.....----.------ 45, | GUOrtnsa) veces secs vee cetemee ree Leas cece 572
_ 41, 48, 54, 59, 89, 96, 265, 277, 360, 429
on pelagic sealing.
trachurus, Cottus ...........2....2---2-2-- 457
Trachydermon ruber .........-..---.---- 542, 544
Trachyradsia aleutica.............-..----. 544
Trampling, cause of pups’ death ........... 85
Tres Marias Islands -........-..---..----.- 268
Trichechus rosmarus. (See Odobznus ros-
marus.) ‘
TPriGhocera Op s.2: se icintriieeenagcedeeeea's 551
Trichodon trichodon .......-..-..-...-..-- 479
Trichodontide .........-.----.----.--.---- 479
tricbophyllus, Ranunculus ...........-.. 562, 584
Trichotropis insignis...........-...--... 542, 544
tridentatus, Entosphennus...-...--.--...-.- 434
Tridymus capree .........---.-+---.---6-- 550
Trientalis europaea var. artica .......-.. 569, 585
trifidum, Galium ...............22.02---. 567, 585
trifolia; Coptis.icic nico tsencied vous aecaae 561, 562
Trifolium microcephalum ..............-.. 282
Triglops beani .-....-..---.-222.--2-.ee0-+ 455
PINE sone sewserseniseresstessueneey 455
SCOPLICUS seed seccwoeesanesesienvesess 455
trigonocheirus, Pagurus ......-...-..-.-.-. 556
trigrammus, Chirus...........-..--....-+-- 448
Trimerotropis lauta .....-...--------.-s0.- 279
trimucronatus, Myodes ....-...-...------++ 347
turgescens, Cladonia uncinalis..........-.. 582
turgens, Synoicum............-........--. 5381
Tarner, GoM 2. ssepice sectesiecceaccscanecse 360
papers: by -c-.ees sseekestinee scone gas 428, 429
Turner, report on seals collected, voyage of
Challenger so ccs.02 2-00 ces seeee cee eee ne 35, 37
turneri, Agarum.......... 22-2 ..222.22... 592, 595
Lycodalepis........:-...--22-22.-22--. 485
TUTNStODG. seeccesycios sgeiesecs s tekAs sich 505, 506
COMMOD! 25.05 «oe eseuesieceet ey Sipe: 370, 409
TWdGY ses sex cemesmriencdess nese damees 412
Tatein DOTCa ine sue ceedseracece weer ei a ac 353
Tylobranchion ........-.-.....-...-.-...-- 523
Ulca marmorata...........-.---.-----2---- 453
ulochir, Paraliparis............--.......-.. 479
Ulvaria splendens.............-..-2-.2---- 591
umbellata, Cardamine ............... 563, 584
umbilicalis, Porphyra laciniata .......- 593
Umbilicaria cylindrica, var. delisoei ....... 581
CTOS88: se2eedv teewererekieeeeesieea ... 581
ly poredi occas eomeateeesuesancescad 583
proboscidea. ........----2. 22-5 22-02. 581
PUPILS sescseeedee oes daeccl nde ames 581
Unalaska sisc-ceca co2 cers eel. 93, 285, 327, 328
unalaskensis, Arnica ..--............ 561, 568, 585
Cornusia2 asec occ ccc ceckutaGemeaes 567
Luzula areuata...... 2... .-..222.222. 572, 586
628 INDEX.
Page. Page.
Uncinaria .........---- 76, 77, 99, 100, 103, 164, 165 ) ventosa, Lecanora...---.--.--.------------ 581
duodenalisicncoseckns cee ete seeleece cs 165, 167 | ventricosus, Blepsias.......--...---.------ 457
BPisc gives sessed area ccs netas tenes eases 165, 167 Cyclopterichthys ......-..---.---.---. 475
stenocephalus....-...---.--.---------- 165 Pterostichus ........-..----- +--+ ------ 548
WU PIS sae ope cs teases econ es 164, 165, 167 | Venture, schooner...-....-----.----.------ 226
condition of pups affected........----- Ti 12 | Veraspers savesiacsans mesene cesices eece neeee S 490
CGAtHS TOI 12. jecane ns ccinieciscicces 78, 81, 98 WOSEL -: cesses sone cesses dusk eee sees 490, 491
discovery on St. Paul....--.....--.---- 77 variegatus ....-....--. +--+. +20. +--+ 490, 491
duration of plague........-...-.------ 77,78 | vermicularis, Thamnolia ........---..----- 583
effects on blood ..-...----.---.--+- +--+ 78 | vernicosa, Modiolaria ..........-..---.- --- 548
GINDEYOS sccccemencs ceded te eee ece cae 80,81 | Veronica serpyllifolia ...-...-...--.----- 569, 585
on rookeries....-...----.- 76-79, 81, 83, 85, 89, 96 SCOllOD 0s ose tte Sees See 561, 570, 585
symptoms of attack......-..---....--- 79 | verticillata, Pedicularis........-.-.. 561, 570, 585
uncinatum, Hypnum ........-..----------- 579 | Verrill, Prof. A. E .....-..--..------------ 59
Undaunted, schooner....-...---.---------- 223 | verrucosus, Myoxocephalus ......... 466, 493, 499
undosus, Pagurus -.-...---.--------------- 556 | verrucosa, Occa.....-.-...-.----------- 470, 471
uniflora, Campanula ........--.-.--..--- 568, 585 | versabilis, Megaptera .....-......--.---.-. 353
Uninaetlatis 2302 coc ees testes eesases 486 | Verucarria sp. (?).---------0 eee eee eee eee 583
UniOn; brig sc sgcace wae ec og abe ee eke 317 | vestita, Amicula ...-........-----. 222.2... 542
WW Ries, ge iced cate we daaciennt « acme 590 | veturnus, Podothecus .......---..----.---- 474
Ura lOmiva as cs2.5 5 pec hoes eee seme seems 369 | vicinalis, Icelus....--...--...------------- 453
lomvia arra.. 355,359, 362,363,369, 390, 430,431 | vicinus, Ixodes .....--...-----.----.------ 554
$rOM Ose scsesewelen sess ies eS seseeee Yeees 369 | vilfoidea, Glyceria .......-....222...---. 574, 586
troile californica.......-.--..--...--.- 355, | villosa, Androsace.....-......--..------- 569, 585
359, 362, 363, 369, 389, 430 PotentiNa 22 oe ueh el isco tesasd eee 561
Uranidea microstoma...-...------------+-- 461 | villosissimus, Elymus .............-.--.. 575, 586
Urinary organs ..--.....-------+-+------+-- 21 | villosus, Mallotns ...........--....-. 489, 493, 497
Urocentrus pictus. .-...---.---..---------- 481 | vincta, Lacuna.......22222 222-2 eee eee 544
ursina, Callotaria ...---..----------+++--+-- 350 | Viola langsdorfii .........-.. 561, 564, 565, 575, 584
Ursus americanus, brain. ....-.-.---..----- 30, 38 PalUStTidecceceswscesatecuererecees noes 564
maritimus, brain of.......-..---.------ 37 | violacea, Festuca ovina.......... bee trziaria 574, 586
vaginatum, Eriophorum ..........-..--.- 572,586 | Violence of bulls......-.........---.-0eee- 90
Valeriana capitata .........---.- 561, 567, 575,585 | virescens, T'rogosita...-...........---.--..- 279
BY] VU CArvinisiseieiecciecniace cee ebeeeeas 567 | virgatus, Delolepis .............--.2..---.. 484
Vallvatella. .ccsccecccte woes cia skuie cece 544 | viridis, Gymnelis........--..2....0........ 485
Vancouver Island pelagic sealing.......--. 223 UO VAbEIND oeoce easies des xse esosbeseee sees scee 541
Vanderbilt, schooner, log of..-.---.-------- 253 oxilis -...---.. 22-2. eee. eee eee. BAD, 544
variegata, Calliphyllis..-.-....-....-...- .- 593 | vittata, Parmelia physodes................ 581
variegatum, Diploderma.........-..-.-.-.- 593 | vitulina, Phoca...............--. 002. -202-- 851
Equisetum ........-----.---.---.---- 575,586 | viviparum, Polygonum ...............2-. 570, 586
variegatus, Verasper ....-...-.--.------- 490, 491-| volucris, Eupeodes ..............2222.22--.- 279
Variabilis; Perea.cccscaccss nes saeusce ceweas 445 | Volutoharpa ampullacea .................. 543
vaucheri, Eurhynchium .......-......-.--. 579 | Volutopsis .-.. 2.222.222.0002... -e ee eee eee 540
Vein, portal ...222ccescensee seeeee cece ness 18 | vomitoria, Calliphora ...-.....2........... 280
Veins, pulmonary...--..----.-----.---.---- 14 | vulgare, Polypodium ..-.........2.2.....-- 575
spermatic ....-...-.---.---..---------- 18 | vulgaris, Armeria ....-......2.....2.22.- 568, 585
systemic ......---------+--------- tees 16 Artemisia. 2 oe ose. sess ey onto e cone 568, 585
velifera, Baleenoptera......-...---.--.----. 352 WATOX: sieldiew's g Gee secede ice Memeo ates a0 572, 586
Velutina coriacea......---.-.-.---.-------- 542 Hippurise cos csieses sacccecceeeccucee 567, 585
cryptospira .....--..-------- +--+. eee 542,544 | Vulpes lagopus ...... 0.222. 0122-2--- ee eee 348
Vena cava, anterior....-..--.....-.-------- 16 | vulpinus, Dermestes...........2...-222.---. 279
INfCTION scccsnaceasreems s0e ess chee thes 17 | wahlenbergii, Draba .............-...... 563, 584
Venericardia borealis......-. ----.---.---. 543 Oncophorus....-.....2...2-22. 0002 -00- 576
Veniaminof, Bishop Ivan .......--......-.. AB! | Wale? il ocereix ote. sccareic «dares amare save clots 354
account of the sea bear...-...-2.2.-2-. 218 | Walrus Island ornithologically considered. 358
Venning, Mr .....----- ----------- +2205 eee 308 | Walter Earle, schooner ............--..---- 62
. INDEX. 629
Page. Page.
Walter L. Rich, schooner ...-.-...-.------- 288 | Wing, Prof. Rufus L...........-..... 276, 277, 280
WATHOCN Goa asesaaue st wisieisintwaiann Sane o.eseid as & neice 360 | Wood, Dr. T.M...........--.------ e202 eee 96
Weaning of pups....-......-----.-----+--- 61 | wormskioldii, Splachnum ......-......---- 577
Webera albicans.......-...----.-..--.---- 578 | Wounds from branding............--..-... 326
canaliculata var. microcarpa ..-....--. 578 | Wren, Aleutian ...........-...-.--.----- 359, 421
CTUGA..- 22. ee eee eee ene eee ee ee eee 578 | Xema sabinii ...........-...---- 355, 363, 364, 398
CUCM AGH. 2.2222 eemee asiecine s sd amad-2 sid 578 | Xenochirus alascanus ...........--...----- 474
microcaulon .......2.-----0- eee eee eee 578 | xenostethus, Sternias .......-.....-..---.. 455
MUGADS sos ct ne sae ecae ee a sce ad sae 578 | Xiphistes chirus -.........---.---.---.---- 482
polymorpha, var. brachycarpa ........ 578 | Xystrurys ..-....-....--2. 0-22 eee eee - 490
Weddell, Captain ...-........----.------ 313, 314 | Yellowlegs.....-.......-----. -22. eee eee 407
Weight of seals......-...---.---.-------- 5, 7,49 | Yoldia limatula ........-.-.....2-..2---- 545, 546
Wentworth, Capt. George E ......-....---. 270 | Young, playfulness of ..........--.--.----. 74
Whale, bowhead .....-.--...-------------- 352 | zachirus, Glyptocephalus ........-...-..-- 492
Davidson’s finback .........-....------ 352 | Zalophus californianus.......-...-......-. 64,
RINGE: cic cs come tiene gsedsetencemeacesd 353 73. 208-210, 267, 268, 276
large finback .......---..-----.------- 352 Drain OF. ocx sews cswars wees ve ewe cews 31, 39
Wales sence scicicceiside coe teeeizens 297, 299, 301 | zanderi, Argyrocottus .......-...---...---- 460
White, C. G., schooner .....-....-..-------- 226 | Zapadni rookery ...........--- 52, 80, 81, 84, 87, 88
WHO £0. oc sie cia cegts is sie cise acc'bieiepn eeiencinin 348 branding on ......-.---------- 20-0 eee 338
Widgeon, European. .....---.------------- 380 | zebra, Psychrolutes ............--.---.---- 469
Wilder, Prof. B. G...-...---------- 002 ---- 35 | Zesticelus profundorum --.-.-.-...----.---- 467
Willard Ainsworth, schooner ........------ 292 | ZOAPClG ee we osmis: staieiels sosiaeieresl ee sis pyc s acters 484
Williams, C. A .......--.----4------- eee 314 | Zoltoi sands ...-.....--..----------- 70, 84, 90, 92
Wialliawis, Ji: D’ .n2< scenic ccccic ee eceseaeestt B2F | ZOnitid es cece osecins vere vegeesee soee cies 541
williamsoni, Gasterosteus cataphractus.... 444 | zonurus, Malacocottus .....--..-----.----- 468
7&2 AOR d De ' OR kan! Be Cie ¥ . hd oe ae ° 4927, 2 tat oe ot
(Ts,
~~
s
hy
ery
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11